Google
This is a digital copy of a book that was preserved for generations on library shelves before it was carefully scanned by Google as part of a project
to make the world's books discoverable online.
It has survived long enough for the copyright to expire and the book to enter the public domain. A public domain book is one that was never subject
to copyright or whose legal copyright term has expired. Whether a book is in the public domain may vary country to country. Public domain books
are our gateways to the past, representing a wealth of history, culture and knowledge that's often difficult to discover.
Marks, notations and other maiginalia present in the original volume will appear in this file - a reminder of this book's long journey from the
publisher to a library and finally to you.
Usage guidelines
Google is proud to partner with libraries to digitize public domain materials and make them widely accessible. Public domain books belong to the
public and we are merely their custodians. Nevertheless, this work is expensive, so in order to keep providing tliis resource, we liave taken steps to
prevent abuse by commercial parties, including placing technical restrictions on automated querying.
We also ask that you:
+ Make non-commercial use of the files We designed Google Book Search for use by individuals, and we request that you use these files for
personal, non-commercial purposes.
+ Refrain fivm automated querying Do not send automated queries of any sort to Google's system: If you are conducting research on machine
translation, optical character recognition or other areas where access to a large amount of text is helpful, please contact us. We encourage the
use of public domain materials for these purposes and may be able to help.
+ Maintain attributionTht GoogXt "watermark" you see on each file is essential for in forming people about this project and helping them find
additional materials through Google Book Search. Please do not remove it.
+ Keep it legal Whatever your use, remember that you are responsible for ensuring that what you are doing is legal. Do not assume that just
because we believe a book is in the public domain for users in the United States, that the work is also in the public domain for users in other
countries. Whether a book is still in copyright varies from country to country, and we can't offer guidance on whether any specific use of
any specific book is allowed. Please do not assume that a book's appearance in Google Book Search means it can be used in any manner
anywhere in the world. Copyright infringement liabili^ can be quite severe.
About Google Book Search
Google's mission is to organize the world's information and to make it universally accessible and useful. Google Book Search helps readers
discover the world's books while helping authors and publishers reach new audiences. You can search through the full text of this book on the web
at|http: //books .google .com/I
,^) i
n
HARVARD
COLLEGE
LIBRARY
T^vy/^-^'"'-'. ^^ - CHARLES R. LANMAN,
"tl^r £1^^^^£^^^ — ^ CAMBRIDGE,.-, MASS.
i ;
rr/u^' /f^^^c /oirjxC^-^i^^^^ ^^-^^J /^
: ^ ^^^i^/A'y a^.t.^y^ -^rK^a- ^^r-i^^y a-^ ^<?/ I /^
(I I ' ' '
^^
/<
•/2.^ l-^ri..^^ ^iC* /TiC
i*^
/i
/^
y.7^
/e /C
I
!L .
fc>y»*-<^ /Ca-^ie*. ,^^ ^'f>-/'
HARVARD
ORIENTAL SERIES
EDITED
WITH THE COOPERATION OF VARIOUS SCHOLARS
BY
CHARLES ROCKWELL LANMAN
Wales Professor of Sanskrit in Harvard University
Vol. VII
CAMBRIDGE, MASSACHUSETTS
PUBLISHED BY HARVARD UNIVERSITY
1905
THE
HARVARD ORIENTAL SERIES
PaUk'lioa Agcnl ol llamid Uninnilj.
, .Sah FaANCUco Gins ft Coaipujr.
9 Si. Miilin'i Sifcci. Imciio Squai*.
QucrmtiUM 14.
■a'^'olumn VII. and VI tl. an not ••■li) ■rpaiald]'. A co[i)r of the 1*0 (■•lane*, poiira|[*
paid, may Iw oUairicd dirccll]' anjahere within ihc limili of the L'nitciul roilil Uniim. bjr
■ending a I'tnlil (tril«f fui Ihr piicc ai pi'tn below, to T%i PuUKabtm Afft ff lUrx^tJ
Umafittt, CimittJ/:r, MjifukHHlli. UmltJ Sum ef Ainu*.
The piite u( ihi« work (lwin|C (he two volumci VII. ami VIII. tA the lluvatd Oiienul
Scrie*, lake* (os*(hei) ii five doilan (f 5 oo>. According to ibe coniefaion laMn a*cd in the
United Slain inaii«]r.nrdcr *plem ai ihe ba*i« o{ Inlcritational monrjr order*, live dollin
(|joo) = io«hillingi and 7 pence = 10 matki and 91 pfennig* t=ij fr ann m lire am) rj cealinca
= 18 kroner and J9 »ie= tl lloiini and 35 cenli, Nelhcilandith.
/
xATHARVA-VEDA SAMHITA/,
(
Translated
With a Critical and Exegetical Commentary
BY
WILLIAM DWIGHT WHITNEY
Late Professor of Sanskrit in YaU University ^ Knight of the Royal Prussian Order Pour U
Merite^ Corresponding Member of tlie Imperial Russian Academy of Sciences, of the
Institute of France, and of the Royal Prussian Academy of Sciences, Foreign
Member of the Royal Academy dei Lincei of Rome, Honorary Member
of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, of the Royal Asiatic Society of
Great Britain and Ireland^ and of the German Oriental
Society t etc., Editor-in-Chief of The Century
Dictionary, ah Encyclopedic Lexi-
con of the English Language
REVISED AND BROUGHT NEARER TO COMPLETION AND EDITED f^.f^-^Ca^^iyf
BY
CHARLES ROCKWELL LANMAN
FIRST HALF
Introduction. Books I to VII
Pagdi i-clxii and i''470
CAMBRIDGE, MASSACHUSETTS
PUBLISHED BY HARVARD UNIVERSITY
1 90s
HAKVAKD \
UNIVEftSllY
LIBRARY
CorY RIGHT, 1904
By harvard university
The compotition, elect rotyping. prettwork. and iNmlinK of
this work were done b)r Mtatrs. Ginn & Company, at
QTbr fltbrAamm prtff
(AMltKIDGK. MASS. I' S. A
The paper for this work was made by Messrs. S. D.
Warren & Cumpany. of Boston. Mass^ U. S. A-, at
(E^t CnmbcrliU /Rilli
First edition, fiitt issue. 1905. One thousand copies
HARVARD UNIVERSITY
UBRARY
jAN2 2Wf«
COLLEGI • YALENSIS • PRAESIDI • SOCIISQVE
HOS • LIBROS
QVOS • SVA • MANV • SCRIPTOS • RELIQVIT
PROFESSOR • ILLE • YALENSIS
GVILIELMVS • DWIGHT • WHITNEY
A • DISCIPVLO • EIVS
CAROLO • ROCKWELL • LANMAN
ALVMNO • YALENSI
PROFESSORE • IN • COLL • HARV
EDITOS
SVMPTIBVS • ALVMNI • HARV
HENRICI • CLARKE • WARREN
PRELO • SVBIECTOS
FERIIS
A • POST • COLL • YALENSE • CONDITVM
CCCELEBRANDIS
DDLL
PRAESES • SOCIIQVE • COLLEGI • HARVARDIANI
Vll
CONTENTS
fAGB
Plates, one in each volume of this work
Portrait of Whitney, facing page xliii
Facsimile of Kashmirian text, birch-bark leaf 187 a, just before page 471
Prefatory and biographical and related matter xvii-lxi
Paragraphs in lieu of a preface by Whitney xvii-xxi
Announcement of this work ' xvii
Statement of its plan and scope and design xviii
The purpose and limitations and method of the translation xix
Editor's preface xxiii-xlii
Whitney^s labors on the Atharva-Veda xxiii
The edition of the text or the ** First volume " xxiii
Relation of this work to the " First volume " xxiv
And to this Series xxiv
External form of this work xxiv
Its general scope as determined by previous promise and fulfilment . . xxv
Of the critical notes in particular xxvi
Scope of the work as transcending previous promise xxvii
Evolution of the style of the work xxvii
Partial rewriting and revision by Whitney xxvii
Picking up the broken threads xxviii
Relation of the editor's work to that of the author xxviii
Parts for which the author is not responsible xxviii
The General Introduction, Part I. : by the editor xxix
The same, Part II.: elaborated in part from the author's material . . . xxix
The editor's special introductions to the eighteen books, ii.-xix xxx
The special introductions to the hymns : additions by the editor . . . xxx
His bibliography of previous translations and discussions : contained in
The paragraphs beginning with the word " Translated " xxx
Added special introductions to the hymns of book xviii. etc xxxi
Other editorial additions at the beginning and end of hymns .... xxxii
Other additions of considerable extent xxxii
The seven tables appended to the latter volume of this work .... xxxii
Unmarked minor additions and other minor changes xxxiii
The marked minor additions and other minor changes xxxiv
The revision of the author's manuscript. Verification xxxiv
Accentuation of Sanskrit words xxxv
Cross-references xxxv
Orthography of Anglicized proper names xxxv
Editorial short-comings and the chances of error xxxv
ix
X Contents of Prefatory and Related Matter
ft
The biographical and related matter xxxvi
General significance of Whitney's work xxxvii
Need of a systematic commentary on the Rig- Veda xxx%ni
The Century Dictionary of the English Language xxxviit
Acknowledgments xxxviii
Human personality and the progress of science xl
The same in English verse and in Sanskrit verse xli-xlii
Biographical and related natter xliii-lxi
Brief sketch of \Vhitney*s life : by the editor sliii
Estimate of Whitney's character and services: by the editor .... xlvii
Select Ibt of Whitney's writings: by Whitncjr^. Iri
General Introduction, Part I. : by the editor Ixiii-cvii
Gtatral PrtmisM ~ UiH-lxiv
Scope of this Tart of the Introduction Uciii
Scope of the reports of the variant readings Ixiii
The term *' manuscripts ** often used loosely for ** authorities** . . . Ixiv
Which authorities are both manuscripts and oral reciters Uiv
DifBculty of verifying statements as to authorities Uiv
I. Readings of Saroptan manoscriptj of the Vvlgate recension Ixiv-lxv
Reports include mss, collated, some before, and some after publication . Ixtv
Interpretation of the records of the Collation- IU>ok Ixv
1. Readings of Indian mannscriptj of Xh» Vnlgate Ixvi
liy *' Indian mss/' are meant tho;^ used by S. I'. Pandit Ixvi
His re|>ort.% not exhaustive Ixvi
3. Readings of Indian oral reciters of the Vnlgate Ix\'i-lxvii
By ** Indian oral reciters " are meant those employed by S. P. Pandit . Ixvi
Errors of the eye checked by oral reciters Ixvi
4. Readings of the Hindu commentator Ixvii-Ixviii
The critical value and the range of his variant readings Ixvii
Excarsui: Was he identical with Sly an a of the Rig-Veda? Ixviii
5. Readings of the Pada-pitha Ixix-lxx
Reported in Index Verborum, and since published in full Ixix
Illustrations of its deficiencies Ixix
In verb-compounds and various other combinations Ixix-lxx
6. The PrAti^ikhya and its commentary Ixx-lxxi
Character of Whitney's editions of the Pr&ti^lkhyas Ixx
Their bearing upon the orthography and criticism of the text .... Ixx
Utilization of the Atharvan PrAti^lkhya for the present work .... Ixxi
7. The Anukraraanis: «< Old" and •* Major" Izxi-lxxtv
More than one Anukramani extant Ixxi
The raftcapalalikA or " Old Anukr.** or " Quoted Anukr." Ixxi
Manuscripts thereof Ixxii
The Hrhatsarvlnukramani or ** Major Anukr.** Ixxii
Manuscripts thereof Ixxii
Text-critical value of the Anukramanis Ixxiii
The author of the Major Anukr. as a critic of meters Ixxiii
His statements as to the seers of the hymns (quasi -authorship) . . . Ixxiv
janman
et.
January 23i, lv;:^0 lly doar Llisa
^^ For jour moat kind isnd valued letter of
pt mj Eoet hearty thanl^a. I an very sorry t
a bad knee. ^or many ye«aro I have hfid to
ctlons. 2ut Tith no, for Iho most part it h
tea mis^res de l-"- vie, Ahilo with you, I fe
more than that. I did hav'> 7. or. A vverke
atica; several years e.'ro, iut happily, no
l^ut this mornin? I Trrnt you •:nd yoTir ^^1
hare d;. joy in the reeling of the letter from
eil3 tiLout th' ir ;hitncy Llub- '.nd.I ?:ncl03
h I 3ha li>c tc h*i.V': yori rr-turn in du? courb'
r. I.on.-^ mtOre:: nr^dlT^:.. lurthcr conment Af on
T 7;i*oh you v.ov'.ll tell .our ^.-istrr r^t Va
xtrrriaol: sorry I :id not he^ir of ycun*^ *. .T.V
.ore :.?o uiebrf^*). I r^hoiala h^ve li!:':^ i .olv'-r'
-III. .. . K: 1 - •_!. 'i»: -U- ^ U i. Fi «jIi» -Uvi -l r.i.O'iJ.
ris T'-^^jly to ir: invit^ition holot^ ou*^ no pro::]
rf- > i G u e 0 c.r tur 0 :; o r '.no r d— *r o ■>- v^-h i •• »". x" - r^
VtJ^ln^^rSJL: vinit to :;••:. to confer v;ith IlT. J
n;: ri^to i 3hall not Tail to call ':;.on hlm(^;*'
Chi 9 recalls, to my mind ffomethinfr of v.h:
t your father's Veda ?:a3 ouclisht, I har. foui
i, one for your r.other, one for your nunt Va
one for your ncphcv .. illian. In this luut
autifully printed inset vith th" ^ords: ''The
•or to .'iliiMn ^r.vi-?'ht ..hltney. . .^3on of "dvvard
•pha IleTTcorat .ihitnoy , . . .for hi*: ti k^^cp .fr:ilnF
tand the I'i.^nif ic^nce in the iinnalc of Aineric
• *-h^:t ho bears."
I an //onderinrr -whether by r.ohir- foT'Tet'lMl
i£R was then only -ibout «ixL the volumes wer^
5e in l]^?j York, r>o th*it hiy parent,^ 'ml youn:
'h^ tir.e "r;h':n the boy ••ould b" old ^nourh to 1
•itrfcl:: entirely v;i,TLie, VrA2 rni-rht of course
'3tlll a^aitinT thnt tir:.o in :vjrie uI'-.cf: in th-:
^'hnrch Street, I chouli be rno^'t ^r'iteful if
•^.0 ~cun.T m:in.
*t the y.':-r.orial \d"lr^v-ss there verr- (for
' of Pa^' f.niily) all the children isi:-:) i.nd the
ay in all, the tvin ^raadoona bcin-r of cour
dv.uThtor, faith, lirs. I)r. Mine, of 3er>^ley,
I hor vVol-- f-iHiily fro:n C^illfornia, vni it ha
*'' ^e hf}Q ell b^':n together, '.nd -ve first met
ttr -uyrroon, cd not I'^av" the 'i03:)ttal eurll
/ith all Vindost vlnhes for y'::ur r^^llef
iful), ond b'^st renerabrrinces to *^11 of your h
C/icui
'^ •'^*'->T8-^,C,r
Contents of Gefteral Introduction^ Part I.
XI
PAGB
8. The Kaupika-Sutra and the Yiitina-Sutra . Ixxiv-Ixxix
The work of Garbe and Bloorafield and Caland Ixxiv
Bearing of Sutras upon criticism of structure and text of Samhita . . Ixxv
Grouping of mantra-material in Sutra and in Samhita compared . . Ixxv
Many difficulties of the Kauqika yet unsolved Ixxvi
Value of the Sutras for the exegesis of the Samhita Ixxvii
Kaugika no good warrant for dogmatism in the exegesis of SaihhitzL . Ixxvii
Integer vitae as a Christian funeral-hymn Ixxviii
Secondary adaptation of mantras to incongruous ritual uses .... Ixxviii
g. Readings of the Kashmirian or Paippalada recension Ixxix-lxxxix
Its general relations to the Vulgate or ^aunakan recension .... Ixxix
The unique birch-bark manuscript thereof (perhaps about A. D. 1519) . Ixxx
Roth's Kashmirian nagari transcript (Nov. 1874) Ixxxi
Arrival (1876) of the birch-bark original at Tubingen Ixxxi
Roth's Collation (June, 1884) of the Paippalada text Ixxxi
Roth's autograph nagari transcript (Dec. 1884) Ixxxii
The facsimile of the birch-bark original (190 1 ) Ixxxii
Roth's Collation not exhaustive Ixxxiii
Faults of the birch-bark manuscript *s ■. Ixxxiii ^
Collation not controlled by constant reference to the birch-bark ms. . Ixxxiv
Such reference would have ruined the birch-bark ms . Ixxxiv
Care taken in the use of Roth*s Collation. Word-division .... Ixxxv
Kashmirian readings not controlled directly from the facsimile . . . Ixxxv
Provisional means for such control : the Concordance (pages loi 8-1023) Ixxxv
Excursus: The requirements for an edition of the Paippalada: . . . Ixxxvi
1 . A rigorously precise transliteration Ixxxvii
2. Marginal references to the Vulgate parallels Ixxxvii
3. Index of Vulgate verses thus noted on the margin Ixxxvii
4. Accessory material : conjectures, notes, translations Ixxxviii
10. Readings of the parallel texts Ixxxix-xci*
The texts whose readings are reported Ixxxix
The method of reporting aims at the utmost accuracy Ixxxix
Completeness of the reports far from absolute xc
Reports presented in well-digested form xc
11. Whitney's Commentary : further discussion of its critical elements . . xci-xciii
Comprehensiveness of its array of parallels xci
Criticism of specific readings xci
Illustrations of classes of text-errors ' 1 1 1 xcirf-
Auditory errors. Surd and sonant. Twin consonants xcii
Visual errors. Haplography xciii
Metrical faults. Hypermetric glosses, and so forth xciii
Blend-readings xciii
12. Whitney's Translation and the interpretative elements of the Commentary xciv-xcix
The translation : gener«il principles governing the method thereof . ' . xciv
The translation not primarily an interpretation, but a literal version . xciv
A literal version as against a literary one xciv
Interpretative elements: captions of the hymns xcv
f - xc<'
cf. I^t^u-
xii ConUnis of Gctural Iniroduciiou, Pari L
thr,m
IntcrprctAlions by Whitney xcv
Exr|;clic."il notes contribtiicd by Koth xcvi
Thr translAtion Has (or its underlyini; text that of the Ikrlin edition . . xc\i
Thi« is the (art even in cases o( corrigible corruptions xrvi
Ca%c« of flrparturc from the text of the Ikrlin edition xcvii
Whitney's growing skepticism and rorres|>ondin|;ly rigid literalness . xrvii
poetic elexatiun and humor xcxiii
13. AbbreTUtions and sifnt explained .... xcix-cvi
General scope of the li.<it : it includes not only xc ix
The downright or most arbitrary abbreviations, but also xtix
The abbreviated designations of lKx>ks and articles xiix
Explanation of arbitrary signs :
Parentheses; Mpi.ire brackets c
Kll-brackets ( L J ) ; hand (IKiy*) c
Small circle; Italic colon; Clarendon letters, a, b, c, etc c
Alphal>etic list of abbreviations c
14. Tabular Tlew of translations and natiTe oorameot cvi-cvii
Previous tr.inslations. — Native comment cvi
Chronologic sequence of previous translations and discussions .... cvii
General iNTRonucrioN, Part II. . rARtLv from WiiirNEv's material cix-clxi
Gtotral Premises cix
Contents of this Part cix
Authorsliip of this Part cix
I. DMcription of the manaacripts used by Whitney cix-cxvi
The brief designations of his manuscripts (stgia codicum) cix
Synoptic table of the manuscripts used by him ex
Table of the Kerlin manuscripts of the Atharva-Veda ex
Whitney's critical description of his manuscripts:
Manuscripts used bifore publication of the text (li P. M. W. E. \ \\.\ Bp. Bp.') rxi
Manuscripts c(»llated after publication of the text (O. K. T. K. ; Op. D. Kp. ) cxiv
1. Tho stanta faih do derir abhistajre as opening tianxa cxvi-cxvii
As initial stanza of the text in the Kashmirian recension cx\i
As initial st.inza of the N'ulgate text cx\i
3. Whitney's Collation-Book and hia collations cxvii-cxix
Description of the two volum'-s that form the Collation- Ik>ok .... cxvii
Whitney's fundamental transcript of the text cxxii
Collations made l>efore publication of the text cxviii
The Berlin collations cxviii
The Paris and Oxford and London collations cxviii
Collations m.ide after publication (made in 1875 or later) cxviii
Haug. Koth. *r.injore. Decern, and Bikaner mss cxviii
Other contents of the Collation Book cxviii
4« Repeated reisea in the manutaipts cxix-cxx
Abbreviated by pratika with addition of ity ek4 etc cxix
List of repeated verses or verse grouj>s cxix
Further details concerning the pratika and the addition cxix
Contents of General Introduction^ Part II.
• ••
Xlll
fAGB
5. Refrains and the like in the manuscripts cxx-cxxi
Written out in full only in first and last verse of a sequence .... cxx
Treated by the AnukramanT as if unabbreviated cxx
Usage of the editions in respect of such abbreviated passages . . . cxxi
6. Marks of accentuation in the manuscripts cxxi-cxxiii
Berlin edition uses the Rig-Veda method of marking accents ... , cxxi
Dots for lines as accent-marks cxxi
Marks for the independent svarita cxxii
Horizontal stroke for svarita cxxii
Udatta marked by vertical stroke above, as in MaitrayanI .... cxxii
Accent-marks in the Bombay edition cxxii
Use of a circle as avagraha-sign cxxii
7. Orthographic method pursued in the Berlin edition cxxiii-cxxvi
Founded on the usage of the mss., but controlled by the Prati9akhya . cxxiii
That treatise an authority only to a certain point cxxiii
Its failure to discriminate between rules of wholly different value . . cxxiii
Items of conformity to the Pratiqakhya and of departure therefrom . cxxiv
Transition-sounds : as in tan-t-sarvan cxxiv
Final -n before 9- and j- : as in pa^yafl janmani cxxiv
Final -n before c- : as in yan^ ca cxxiv
Final -n before t- : as in tans te cxxiv
Final -t before 9- : as in asmac charavah cxxv
Abbreviation of consonant groups : as in paiikti cxxv
Final -m and -n before 1- : as in kan lokam cxxv
Visarga before st- and the like : as in ripu stenah cxxvi
The kampa-figures i and 3 cxxvi
The method of marking the accent cxxvi
8. Metrical form of the Atharyan Samhitft cxxvi>cxxvii
Predominance of anustubh stanzas cxxvi
Extreme irregularity of the metrical form cxxvii
Apparent wantonness in the alteration of Rig-Veda material . . . cxxvii
To emend this irregularity into regularity is not licit cxxvii
9. Divisions of the text cxxvii-cxl
Summary of the various divisions cxxvii
The first and second and third ** grand divisions" cxxvii
1. The (unimportant) division into prapilthakas or 'lectures' . . . cxxviii
Their number and distribution and extent cxxviii
Their relation to the anuvaka-divisions cxxviii
2. The (fundamental) division into kandas or * books * cxxix
3. The division into anuvakas or * recitations' cxxix
Their number, and distribution over books and grand divisions . . cxxix
Their relation to the hymn-divisions in books xiii.-xviii cxxx
4. The division into suktas or * hymns ' .' cxxxi
The hymn-divisions not everywhere of equal value cxxxi
5. The division into rcas or * vfe^s * cxxxi
6. Subdivisions of f QU^ : avasanas, padas, and so forth .... cxxxii
/ii^^f^
/
xiv Conicnis of Gaural Inirotiuciion^ Part IL
Numeration of successive verses in the mss. csxxU
Grotipings of successive verses into units requiring special mention : . . cxxsii
Dccadsuktas or *decad hymns* cxxxii
Arthasuktas or * sense-hymns* cxxxiii
rarydyasiiktas or * period-hymns' cxxxiii
Differences of the Ikrlin and Ik>mhay numerations in books vii. and xix. . cxxxiv
Differences of hymn-numeration in the paryAya-books cxxxiv
Whitney's criticism of the numl>ering of the llombay edition cxxxvi
Sugj^rstion of a preferable method of numbering and citing cxxxvi
Differences of verse-numeration cxxxvii
Summations of hymns and verses at end of divisions cxxxviii
7'he summations quoted from the PaAcapatahkA cxxxviii
Indication of extent of divisions by reference to an assumed norm . . . cxxxviii
Tables of verse-norms aMumcd by the Pancapataliki cxxxix
The three ** grand divisions *' are recognixed by the raflcapatalik& . . . cxxxix
10. Extent sod structure of the Athsm-Veds SsihhitA cxl-clxi
Limits of the original collection cxI
Ikmks xix. and xx. are later achlitions cxii
The two broadest principles of arrangement of l>ooks i.-xviii. : .... cxiii
I. MiscelUneity or unity of subject and 2. length of hymn cxIii
1 he three grand divisions (1., II., HI.) as based on those principles . . cxIii
The order of the three gr.iiid divisions cxIii
Trincipjes of arrangement of lK>oks within the grand division : cxHi
1. Norm.il length of the hymns for each of the several books cxiiii
2. Ttic amount of text in each l>uok. Table cxiiii
Arrangement of the hymns within any given txx>k cxiiii
Distfibution of hymns according to length in divisions I. and II. and III. cxivi
Tables (I and 2 and 3) for those divisions (see pages cxliv-cxlv) . . . cxIvi
(.Grouping of hymns of tx>ok xix. according to length cxlvi
Talile (numl)cr 4) for l>ook xix cxivii
Summary of the four tables. Table number 5 cxivii
Kxtcnt of AV. SamhitA about one half of that of RV cxivii
First grsod division (l>ooks i.-vii.): short hymns of miscellaneous subjects cxlvti
K\i<icncc of fact as to the existence of the verse-norms cxlviii
Kxprr\s testimony of tx>th Anukramanis as to the verse-norms .... cxlviii
One vervr is the norm for liook vii cxiix
Arrangement of books within the division :
I. With reference to the normal length of the hymns cxlix
Excurfuf: on hymn xix. 23. Homage to parts of the Atharva-Vcda . . cl
Kxccptional character of book vii cli
lkK)k vii. a tMK>k of after gleanings supplementing books i.-vi clii
2 Arrangement of Uwks with reference to amount of text clii
R<5^ullM5 of conclusions as to the arrangement of books i.-vit clii
Dcp.iftiircs from the norms by excess diii
Criti* .il significance of those departures diii
Illustrative examples of critical re<lu( tion to the norm diii
ArT.-ingeincnt of the hymns within any given book of thb division . . div
Contents of the Main Body of this Work xv
rAGB
Second grand division (books viii.-xii.): long hymns of miscellaneous subjects civ
Their hieratic character : mingled prose passages civ
Table of verse-totals foi: the hymns of division II clvi
General make-up of the material of this division clvi
Order of books within the division : negative or insignificant conclusions . . clvii
Order of hymns within any given book of this division clvii
Possil^le reference to this division in hymn xix. 23 clvii
Third grand division (books xiii.-xviii.): books showing unity of subject . . clviii
Division III. represented in PaippaLlda by a single book, book xviii. . . . clix
Names of the books of this division as given by hymn xix. 23 clix
Order of books within the division clix
Table of verse-totals for the hymns of division III clix
Order of hymns within any given book of this division clx
The hymn-divisions of books xiii.-xviii. and their value clx
Cross-references to explanation of abbreviations and so forth clxii
To explanation of abbreviations (pages xcix-cvi) clxii
To explanation of abbreviated titles (pages xcix-cvi) clxii
To explanation of arbitrary signs (page c) clxii
To key to the designations of the manuscripts (pages cix-cx) clxii
To synoptic tables of the manuscripts (pages cx-cxi) clxii
To descriptions of the manuscripts (pages cxi-cxvi) clxii
To table of titles of hymns (volume VII I., pages 1024-1037) clxii
The Atharva-Veda Samhita: Translation and Notes . . . 1-1009
I. First Grand Division. — Books I.- VII 1-470
Seven books of short hymns of miscellaneous subjects
[For table of the titles of the 433 hymns, see p. 1024]
[Volume VII. ends here with book vii.]
[Volume VIII. begins here with book viii.]
a. Second Grand Division. — Books VIII.-XII 471-707
Five books of long hymns of miscellaneous subjects
[For table of the titles of the 45 hymns, see p. 1034]
3. Third Grand Division. — Books XIII.-XVIII 708-894
Six books of long hymns, the books showing unity of subject
[For table of the titles of the 15 hymns, see p. 1035]
Book xiii. : hymns to the Ruddy Sun or Rohita (seer: Brahman) . . 708-737
Book xiv. : wedding verses (seer: SavitrT Siirya) 738-768
Book XV. : the Vratya (seer : — ) 769-79 1
Book xvi. : Parilta (seer : Prajapati .?) 792-804
Book xvii.: prayer to the Sun as Indra and as Vishnu (seer: Brahman) 805-812
Book xviii. : funeral verses (seer: Atharvan) 813-894
4. Supplement — Book XIX 895-1009
After-gleanings, chiefly from the traditional sources of division I.
[For table of the titles of the 72 hymns, see p. 1036]
Paippalada excerpts concerning book xx 1009
xvi Conicnis of Appended Auxiliary Maiicr
Ini»i:\k.s ani> ofiikr Atfxii.iARv MArriiR 1011-1046
I. The oon-metrioil paiMfet of the AthAfTan Samhitl
Tatmlar list
a. Hymns if oored bj the Kiu^iJu-S&tra 101 1-
Tatmlar li^l
3. The two methods of dtioK the Klu^ilcs-S&tra
Tal»ular concordance
4. The discrepant hjmn-numbers of the Berlin and Bombay editions . . .
Tabular concordance
5- Piippalida passafes correspondinf to passafes of the Vulfatt . . . . 1013-
Trimary use of the tahlc, its genesis and character
Incidental uses of the tal»le
Vulgate ^rand division III. and IMippal.lda )>oolc xviit
Conspectus of the contents of TAippalAda lx>ok xviii
KxpUnation of the tahl**
Manner of usiny; the table
Tabular concordance 1017-
6. Whitney's Enflish captions to his hymn-translations 1024-
They form an important element in his interpretation of this Veda
In tabular form, they j;ive a useful conspectus of its subject-matter
Tal>lc of hymn titles of Division I., lMH)ks i.-vit I024-
[ ^^(<^p-K'^|> '- tli<^ division of this woric into two separately bound volumes]
Table of h\inn-titles of Divisitm 1 1, l>ooks viii.-xii
Table of h\mn titles of Division III., l>ooks xiii. -xviii
Table of h\mn-titlcs of the Supplement, bcMik xix 1036-
7. The names of the seers of the hymns 1038-
Whitney's exploitation of the Major Anukramani
Doubtful [>oints
lintire tKx>ks (>f division III. a.scril)ed each to a single seer ....
Value of these ascriptions of rpiasiauthorship
rri»minenre of Atharvan and Brahman as .seers
Hymns of Atharvan and hymns of Augiras: possible contrast . . .
Consistency in the as< riptions
I'alpably f.ibtit .ited ascriptions
AlphalM'tical imlex of seer-names and of p.ossages ascril>cd to them 1040-
8. Brief index of names and thincs and words and places 1042
An elaborate index uncalled for here
AlphalN'tii al list of namrs and things
Alphal)etit al list of Sanskrit %iords
List of AV. passages
Q. Additions and corrections 1044
Omissions and errors not easy to rectify in the electrotype plates . .
on
on
012
012
012
012
013
013
023
013
013
014
015
016
017
023
037
024
024
032
033
034
035
037
041
038
038
038
038
039
039
039
040
041
044
042
042
044
044
046
045
PARAGRAPHS IN LIEU OF A PREFACE
BY WHITNEY
[^Announcement of this work. — The following paragmphs from the pen of Professor
Whitney, under the title, " Announcement as to a second volume of the Roth-Whitney
edition of the Atharva-Veda," appeared about two years before Mr. Whitney's death, in
the Proceedings for April, 1892, appended to the Journal of the American Oriental
Society^ volume xv., pages clxxi-clxxiii. They show the way in which the labor done
by Roth and Whitney upon the Atharva-Veda was divided between those two scholars.
Moreover, tliey state briefly and clearly the main purpose of Whitney's commentary,
which is, to give for the text of this Veda the various readings of both Hindu and
European authorities (living or manuscript), and the variants of the Kashmirian or
Paippalada recension and of the corresponding passages of other Vedic texts, together
with references to, or excerpts from, the ancillary works on meter, ritual, exegesis, etc.
They are significant as showing that in Mr. Whitney's mind the translation was entirely
subordinate to the critical notes. Most significant of all — the last sentence makes a j
clear disclaimer of finality for this work by speaking of it as " material that is to help J
toward the study and final comprehension of this Veda." — C. R. L.J •
When, in i855-6,the text of the Atharva-Veda was published
by Professor Roth and myself, it was styled a "first volume,"
and a second volume, of notes, indexes, etc., was promised. The
promise was made in good faith, and with every intention of
prompt fulfilment; but circumstances have deferred the latter,
even till now. The bulk of the work was to have fallen to Pro-
fessor Roth, not only because the bulk of the work on the first
volume had fallen to me, but also because his superior learning
and ability pointed him out as the one to undertake it It was
his absorption in the great labor of the Petersburg Lexicon that
for a long series of years kept his hands from the Atharva-Veda —
except so far as his working up of its material, and definition of
its vocabulary, was a help of the first order toward the understand-
ing of it, a kind of fragmentary translation. He has also made
important contributions of other kinds to its elucidation: most of
all, by his incitement to inquiry after an Atharva-Veda in Cash-
mere, and the resulting discovery of the so-called Paippalada text,
now well known to all Vedic scholars as one of the most important
finds in Sanskrit literature of the last half-century, and of which
xvii
xviii Paragraphs in lieu of a Preface by Whitney
the credit lx*Iongs in a jxrculiar manner to him. I have also done
something in the same direction, by publisliing in the Society's
Journal in 1862 (Journal, vol. vii.) the Atharva-Vcda Pratiijakhya,
text, translation, notes, etc.; and in 1881 Ljournal, vol. xii.J the
Index Verborum — which latter afforded me the o|>jx)rtunity to
give the /^//^n-readings complete, and to re|K)rt in a general way
the corrections made by us in the text at the time of its first issue.
There may be mentioned also the index of pratikas, which was
published by Weber in his ludische Siudien, vol. iv.. in 1857. from
the slips written by me, although another (Professor Ludwig) had
the tedious labor of preparing them for the press.
I have never lost from view the completion of the plan of pub-
lication as originally formed. In 1875 ' s|)ent the summer in
Germany, chiefly engaged in further collating, at Munich and at
Tubingen, the additional manuscript material which had come to
Euro|)c since our text was printed; and I should probably have
soon taken up the work seriously save for having been engaged
while in Gennany to prepare a Sanskrit grammar, which fully
occupied the leisure of several following years. At last, in 1885-6,
I had fairly started upon the execution of the plan, when failure
of health reduced my working capacity to a minimum, and rendered
ultimate success very c|uestionable. The task, however, has never
been laid wholly aside, and it is now so far advanced that, barring
further loss of power, I may hojK' to finish it in a couple of years
or so; and it is therefore projxrr and desirable that a public
announcement be made of my intention. '^^^^^ '
[Statement of its plan and scope and design. J — My plan includes, in
the first placx\ critical notes u|)on the text, gi\ing the x'arious
readings ol the manuscripts, and not alone of those collated by
myself in HurojK, but also of the apparatus used by Mr. Shankar
Pandurang Pandit in the great edition with commentary (except
certain |Kirts, of which the commentary has not been found)
which he has Ik'cu for years engaged in printing in India. Of
this extremely well-edited and valuable work I have, by the kind-
ness of the editor, long had in my hands the larger half; and doubt-
less the whole will be issued in season for me to av-ail myself of
it throughout. Not only his many manuscripts and (rotriyas
(the living equivalents, and in some respects the superiors, of
Plan and Scope and Design of this Work xix
manuscripts) give valuable aid, but the commentary (which, of
course, claims to be " Sayana's ") also has very numerous various
readings, all worthy to be reported, though seldom offering anything
better than the text of the manuscripts. Second^the readings of the
Paippalada version, in those parts of the Veda (much the larger
half) for which there is a corresponding Paippalada text; these
were furnished me, some years ago, by Professor Roth, in whose
exclusive possession the Paippalada manuscript is held. Further,
notice of the corresponding passages in all the other Vedic texts,
whether Samhita, Brahmana, or Sutra, with report of their various
readings. Further, the data of the Anukramanl respecting author-
ship, divinity, and meter of each verse. Also, references to the
ancillary literature, especially to the Kau9ika and Vaitana Sutras
(both of which have been competently edited, the latter with a
translation added), with account of the use made in th^m of the
hymns and parts of hymns, so far as this appears to cast any light
upon their meaning. Also, extracts from the printed commentary,
wherever this seems worth while, as either really aiding the under-
standing of the text, or showing the absence of any helpful tradi-
tion. Finally, a simple literal translation; this was not originally
promised for the second volume, but is added especially in order
to help "float" the rest of the material. An introduction and
indexes will give such further auxiliary matter as appears to be
called for.
The design of the volume will be to put together as much as
possible of the material that is to help toward the study and final
comprehension of this Veda.
LThe purpose and limitations and method of the translation. — In a critique pub- ^^ ?'-^'/
lished some six years earlier, in 1886, in the American Journal 0/ Philology, vii. 2-4, ^yw*^<^^»^ ^
Whitney discusses several ways of translating the Upanishads. His remarks on the JL^/A^ ^^?»^'
second "way" leave no doubt that, in making his Veda-translation as he has done, he .^ fp^^-'T^S
fully recognized its provisional character and felt that to attempt a definitive one would
be premature. His description of the "third way," mutatis mutandis, is so good a
statement of the principles which have governed him in this work, that, in default of
a better one, it is here reprinted. — C. R. L.J
One way is, to put one's self frankly and fully under the guid-
ance of a native interpreter. . . . Another way would be, to give
a conspectus, made as full as possible, of all accessible native inter-
pretations— in connection with which treatment, one could hardly
XX Paragraphs in lieu of a Preface by Whihtty
avoid taking a position of critical suj)criority, approving and con-
demning, selecting and rejecting, and comparing all with what
appeared to be the simple meaning of the text itself. This would
be a very welcome labor, but also an extremely diflicult one; and
the preparations for it are not yet sufficiently made; it may be
looked forward to as one of the results of future study.
A third way, leading in quite another direction, would be this:
to approach the text only as a philologist, bent uix>n making a
version of it exactly as it stands, representing just what the words
and phrases apjxrar to say, without intrusion of anything that is
not there in recognizable fonn: thus reproducing the scripture
itself in Western guise, as nearly as the nature of the case admits,
as a basis whereon could afterward be built such fabric of philo-
sophic interpretation as should be called for; and also as a touch-
stone to which could be brought for due testing anything that
claimed to be an interpretation. The maker of such a version
would not need to be versed in the subtleties of the later Hindu
philosophical systems; he should even carefully avoid working in
the spirit of any of them. Nor need he pretend to penetrate to
the hidden sense of the dark sayings that pass under his pen. to
comprehend it and set it forth ; for then there would inevitably
mingle itself with his version much that was subjective and doubt-
ful, and that every successor would have to do over again. Work-
ing conscientiously as Sanskrit scholar only, he might hope to
bring out something of jKTmanent and authoritative character,
which should serve both as help and as check to those that came
after him. He would carefully observe all identities and paral-
lelisms of phraseology, since in texts like these the word is to no
small extent more than the thing, the expression dominating the
thought: the more the (|uahtities are unknown, the less will it
answer to change their symbols in working out an equation. Of
all leading and much-used terms, in case the rendering could not
be made uniform, he would maintain the identity by a liberal
quotation of the word itself in jxirenthesis after its translation, so
that the sphere of use of each could be made out in the version
somewhat as in the original, by the comfxirison of parallel pas-
sages; and so that the student should not run the risk of having
a difference of statement which might turn out im|)ortant covered
from his eyes by an ap|)arent identity of phrase — or the contrar\\
Purpose^ Limitations^ and Method of the Translation xxi
Nothing, as a matter of course, would be omitted, save particles
whose effect on the shading of a sentence is too faint to show in
the coarseness of translation into a strange tongue; nor would
anything be put in without exact indication of the intrusion. The
notes would be prevailingly linguistic, references to parallel pas-
sages, with exposition of correspondences and differences. Sen-
tences grammatically difficult or apparently corrupt would be
pointed out, and their knotty points discussed, perhaps with
suggestions of text-amendment. But it is needless to go into
further detail ; every one knows the methods by which a careful
scholar, liberal of his time and labor toward the due accomplish-
ment of a task deemed by him important, will conduct such a
work.
EDITOR'S PREFACE
Whitney's labors on the Atharva-Veda. — As early as March, 185 1, at
Berlin, during Whitney's first semester as a student in Germany, his teacher
Weber was so impressed by his scholarly ability as to suggest to him the
plan of editing an important Vedic text.^ The impression produced upon
Roth in Tubingen by Whitney during the following summer semester
was in no wise different, and resulted in the plan for a joint edition of
the Atharva-Veda.^ Whitney's preliminary labors for the edition began
accordingly upon his return to Berlin for his second winter semester.
His fundamental autograph transcript of the Atharva-Veda Samhita is
contained in his Collation-Book, and appears from the dates of that book^
to have been made in the short interval between October, 1851, and
March, 1852. The second summer in Tubingen (1852) was doubtless
spent partly in studying the text thus copied, partly in planning with
Roth the details of the method of editing, partly in helping to make the
tool, so important for further progress, the index of Rig- Veda pratikas,
and so on; the concordance of the four principal Samhitas, in which, to
be sure, Whitney's part was only "a secondary one," was issued under
the date November, 1852. During the winter of 1852-3 he copied the
Prati^akhya and its commentary contained in the Berlin codex (Weber,
No. 361), as is stated in his edition, p. 334. As noted below (pp. xliv, 1),
the collation of the Paris and Oxford and London manuscripts of the
Atharvan Samhita followed in the spring and early summer of 1853, just
before his return (in August) to America. The copy of the text for the
printer, made with exquisite neatness in nagari letters by Mr. Whitney's
hand, is still preserved.
The Edition of the text or «« First volume." — The first part of the work,
containing books i.-xix. of the text, appeared in Berlin with a provisional
preface dated February, 1855. The provisional preface announces that
the text of book xx. will not be given in full, but only the Kuntapa-hymns,
and, for the rest of it, merely references to the Rig- Veda; and promises,
as the principal contents of the second part, seven of the eight items of
accessory material enumerated below. — This plan, however, was changed,
' See the extract from Weber's letter, below, p. xliv. The text was the Taittiriya Aranyaka.
* See the extract from Roth's letter, below, p. xliv.
• See below, p. cxvii.
xxiii
xxiv Editor s Preface
and the second part api>carcd in fact as a thin Heft of about 70 p3|;es,
giving lK)ok xx. in full, and that only. To it was prefixed a half-sheet
containing the definitive preface and a new title-page. The definitive
preface is dated October, iiS56, and adtls an eighth item, exegetical notes,
to the promises of the provisional preface. The new title-page has the
woids •• I'-rster Hand. Text," thus implicitly promising a second volume,
in which, according to the definitive preface, the accessory material was
to be published.
Relation of this work to the «« First yolume " and to this Series. — Of
the implicit promise of that title-page, the present work is intended to
complete the fulfilment. As most of the In!>or upon the first volume had
fallen to Whitney, so most of the labor ui>on the projected "second " was
to have been done by Roth. In fact, however, it turned out that Roth's
very great services for the criticism and exegesis of this Veda took a
different form, and are embmlicd on the one hand in his contributions
to the St. Petersburg Lexicon, and consist on the other in his brilliant
discovery of the Kashmirian recension of this Vetia and his collation of
the text thereof with that of the Vulgate. Nevertheless, as is clearly
apimrent ({Kigc xvii), Whitney thought and spoke of this work ' as a
"Second volume of the Roth-Whitney edition of the Atharva-Veda," and
called it "our volume" in writing to Roth (cf. p. Ixxxvi) ; and letters
exchanged between the two friends in 1894 discuss the question whether
the •• second volume " ought not to be published by the same house
(F. Dummler's) that issued the first in 1856. It would appear from
Whitney's last letter to Roth (written April 10, 1894, shortly before his
death), that he had determined to have the work published in the
Harvard Series, and Roth's last letter to Whitney (dated April 23)
expresses his great satisfaction at this arrangement. This plan had the
cordial approval of my friend Henry Clarke Warren, and, while still in
relatively fair health, he generously gave to the University the money to
pay for the printing.
External form of this work. — It is on account of the relation just
explained, and also in deference to Whitney's express wishes, that the
size of the printed page of this work and the sire of the paper have been
chosen to match those of the " First volume." The pages have been
numlKred continuously from I to 1009, as if this work were indeed one
volume ; but, since it was cx(>edient to separate the work into two halves
in binding, I have done so, and designated those halves as volumes seven
* In a letter to the editor, dated March 2%, iSSt, speaking of Roth*« preoccupation «ith
Avr«tan studies, Whitnry layn : ** I (car 1 thall )rct tie oMiged to do AV. ii. ak>oe. arKl think
of »cltini; quirtljr atmut it next jrear/* Again, June 17, iSSi. he writes: ** 1 ba%e tjegun wotk
oa %ol u u( the AV , and am resolved to put it straight through.**
General Scope of this Work xxv
and eight of the Harvard Oriental Series.^ The volumes are substan-
tially bound and properly lettered ; the leaves are open at the front ; and
the top is cut without spoiling the margin. The purpose of the inexpen-
sive gilt top is not for ornament, but rather to save the volumes from the
injury by dirt and discoloration which is so common with ragged hand-
cut tops. The work has been electrotyped, and will thus, it is hoped, be
quite free from the blemishes occasioned by the displacement of letters,
the breaking off of accents, and the like.
General scope of this work as determined by previous promise and fulfil-
ment.— Its general scope was determined in large measure by the promise
of the definitive preface of the "First volume.'* The specifications of
that promise were given in eight items as follows :
1. Excerpts from the Prati^akhya; 5. Excerpts from the AnukramanT ;
2. Excerpts from the Pada-patlia ; 6. General introduction ;
3. Concordance of the AV. with other Samhitas ; 7. Exegetical notes ;
4. Excerpts from the ritual (Kauc^ika); 8. Critical notes.
Of the above-mentioned promise, several items had meantime been
more than abundantly fulfilled by Whitney. In 1862 he published the
Prati^akhya (item i), text, translation, notes, indexes, etc. Of this
treatise only excerpts had been promised. In 188 1 followed the (unprom-
ised) Index Verborum,^ in which was given a full report of the pada-
readings (item 2). The Table of Concordances between the several Vedic
Samhitas (1852) and the Index of pratlkas of the Atharva-Veda (1857), —
the first in large measure, the second in largest measure, the work of
Whitney, — went far toward the accomplishment of the next item (item 3).
Pupils of the two editors, moreover, had had a share in its fulfilment.
In 1878 Garbe gave us the Vaitana-Sutra in text and translation; and
that was followed in 1890 by Bloomfield's text of the Kau^ika-Sutra.
The inherent difficulties of the latter text and the excellence of Bloom-
field's performance make us regret the more keenly that he did not give
us a translation also. The material for report upon the ritual uses of the
verses of this Veda (preparative for item 4) was thus at hand.
* For conscience sake I register my protest against the practice of issuing works in gratui-
tously confusing subdivisions, as Bdnde and Hdlften and AbUiluugen and Lieferungen. — In
this connection, I add that the page-numbers of the main body of this work, which are of use
chiefly to the pressman and the binder and are of minimal consequence for purposes of cita-
tion, have been relegated to the inner comer of the page, so that the book and hymn, which are
of prime importance for purposes of finding and citation, may be conspicuously and conven-
iently shown in the outer comers. I hope that such regard for the convenience 9f the users of
technical books may become more and more common with the makers of such books.
^ The published Index gives only the words and references. It is made from a much fuller
manuscript Index, written by Whitney on 1721 quarto pages, which quotes the context in which
the words appear, and which for the present is in my hands.
XX vi Editor s Preface
While making his I^ndon collations in 1853 (sec below, p. Ixxii), Uliit-
ncy made also a transcript of the Major AnukramanI, and subsequently
he adiled a collation of the Herlin ms. thereof (preparative for item 5).
— In the course of his lonj; lal>ors u[X)n Atharvan texts, Whitney had
naturally made many observations suitable for a general introduction
(item 6). Roth had sent him a considerable mass of exegetical notes
(item 7). — I''urthcrmore, during the decades in which Whitney had
concerned himself with this and the related texts, he had noted in his
Collation-Hook, op|K>site each verse of the Atharvan 5^amhita, the places
in the other texts where that verse recurs, in identical or in similar form,
in whole or in part ; thus making a very extensive collection of concord-
ances, with the Atharvan Sariihita as the point of departure, and providing
himself with the means for rc|X)rting upon the variations of the parallel
texts with far greater completeness than was possible by means of the
Table and Index mentioned al)ove under item 3.
The critical notes. — Of all the eif;ht promised items, the one of most
importance, and of most pressing importance, was doubtless the eighth,
the critical notes, in which were to be given the various readings of the
manuscripts. In his Introductory Note to the Atharvan PrSti^akhya
(p. 338 : year 1862), Whitney says :
The condition of the Atharvan n.5 handed down by the tradition w.is such as to
impose upon the editors as a duty what in the case of any of the other Vedas would
have been an almost inexcusable liberty — namely, the emendation of the text-
readings in many places. In ^o treating such a text, it is not easy to hit the pre-
cise mean between too much and too little ; and while most of the alterations made
were palpably and imperatively called for, and while many others would have to
be made in translattnfir, there are nXsn a few coses in which a closer adherence
to the manuscript authorities might have been preferable.
The apparatus for ascertaining in any given passage just what the mss.
read was not published for more than two decades.* Complaints on this
score, however, were surely estopped by the diligence and effectiveness
with which both editors employed that time for the advancement of the
cause of Indie philology. In his Introduction to the Index Verborum
(p. 2 : year 1880), Whitney says:
There will, of course, l)e differences of opinion as to whether this [^course of pro-
cedure J was well-advised — whether they ^the editors J should not have contented
themselves with giving just what the manuscripts gave them, keeping suggested
alterations for their notes ; and, yet more, as to the acceptableness of part of the
alterations made, and the desirableness of others which might with equal reason
have l>cen made. ... It is sought [^in the IndrxJ simply to call attention to all
cases in which a published reading differs from that of the manuscripts, as well
as to those comparatively infrequent ones where the manuscripts are at variance,
and to furnish the means ... for determining in any particular case what the
manuscripts actually read.
Partial Rewriting and Revision by Whitney xxvii
Thus the eighth item of the promise also (as well as the second) was ful-
filled by the Index. — Desirable as such critical notes may be in con-
nection with the Index, a report of the variants of the European mss. of
the Vulgate recension in the sequence of^tjh^gxj; was none the less
called for. The report is accordingly given in this work, and includes
not only the mss. of Berlin, Paris, Oxford, and London, collated before
publishing, but also those of Munich and Tubingen, collated twenty years
after (see below, p. xliv, note 5, p. Ixiv).
Scope of this work as transcending previous promise. — The accessory
material of this work, beyond what was promised by the preface of the
text-edition, is mentioned in the third paragraph of Whitney's "Announce-
ment," p. xviii, and includes the reports of the readings of the Kashmirian
recension and of S. P. Pandit's authorities, extracts from the native com-
mentary, and a translation. For the first, Roth had performed the long
and laborious and difficult task of making a careful collation of the
Paippalada text, and had sent it to Whitney. In his edition published in
Bombay, S. P. Pandit had given for the Vulgate recension the variants
of the authorities (Indian : not also European) accessible to him, and
including not only the variants of manuscripts, but also those of living
reciters of the text. The advance sheets of his edition he had sent in
instalments to Whitney, so that all those portions for which Pandit pub-
lished the comment were in Whitney's hands in time to be utilized by
him, although the printed date of Pandit's publication (1895-8) is sub-
sequent to Whitney's death.
Evolution of the style of the work. — To elaborate all the varied material
described in the foregoing paragraphs into a running commentary on
the nineteen books was accordingly Whitney's task, and he was " fairly
started" upon it in 1885-6. As was natural, his method of treatment
became somewhat fuller as he proceeded with his work. There is in my
hands his prior draft of the first four or five books, which is relatively
meagre in sundry details. It was not until he had advanced well into the
second grand division (books viii.-xii.) that he settled down into the style
of treatment to which he then adhered to the end.
Partial rewriting and revision by Whitney. — Thereupon, in order to carry
out the early books in the same style as the later ones, it became neces-
sary to rewrite or to revise the early ones. He accordingly did rewrite
the first four (cf. p. xcviii below), and to the next three (v., vi., vii.) he
gave a pretty thorough revision without rewriting ; and at this point,
apparently, he was interrupted by the illness which proved fatal. The
discussion of the ritual uses in book viii. (supplied by me) would doubt-
less have been his next task. Not counting a lot of matter for his General
Introduction, Whitney's manuscript of his commentary and translation,
xxviii EdiUyrs Pnjait
as he left it at his death in 1894, consisted of about 25CX) folios. Had
Whitney lived to sec it printed, the editor of this Series would probably
have read one set of proofs, and made suggestions and criticisms freely
I on the margins, which the author would then have accepted or rejected
r* m^^ 1 without discussion ; and the whole matter, in that case a very simple one,
^^^^ I would have been closed by a few lines of kindly acknowledgment from
y^ I the author in his preface.
Picking up the broken threads. — It is, on the other hand, no simple
matter, but rather one of [Hrculiar difTiculty and delicacy, to edit such a
technical work as this for an author who has {>assed away, especially if he
has been the editor's teacher and friend. The difficulty is increased by
the fact that, in the great mass of technical details, there are very many
which have to be learned anew by the editor for himself, and others still,
which, through long years of labor, have grown so familiar to the author
that he has hardly felt any need of making written memoranda of them,
and which the editor has to find out as best he can.
Relation of the editor's work to that of the author. — Although Whit-
ney's manuscript of the main Ixnly of the work was written out to the end,
it was not systematically complete. Thus he had written for book i. (and
for that only) a s|>ecial introduction, showing that he meant to do the like
for the other eighteen. Of the General Introduction as it stands, only a
very few parts were worked out ; for some parts there were only rough
sketches ; and for very many not even that. And in unnumbered details,
major and minor, there was opjwrt unity for long and |)atient toil upon the
task of systematically verifying all references and statements, of revising
where need was, and of bringing the whole nearer to an ideal and unat-
tainable completeness. What these details were, the work itself may
show. lUit besides all this, there was the task of carrying through the
press a work the scientific im|H>rtance of which called for the best typo-
graphical form and for the utmost feasible accuracy in printing.
Parts for which the author is not responsible. — No two men are alike
in the various endowments and attainments that make the scholar ; and, in
particular, the mental attitude of any two towards any given problem is
wont to differ. It is accordingly not possible that there should not be,
among the editorial additions to Whitney's manuscript or changes therein,
many things which he would decidedly have disapproved. They ought
certainly therefore to be marketl in such a way that the reader may easily
recognize them as additions for which the editor and not the author is
res|>onsible ; and for this purjx)se two signs have l>een chosen, L nnd J,
which are like incomplete brackets or brackets without the upper hori-
zontal strokes, and which may be called *' ellbrackets '* and suggest the
Parts for which the Author is not responsible xxix
initial letter of the editor's name (of. p. c). Besides the marked additions,
there are others, like the paragraphs beginning with the word "Trans-
lated," which are not marked. It is therefore proper to give a general
systematic account of the editorial additions and changes.
* The General Introduction. — This consists of two parts : the first, by the
editor ; the second, elaborated in part from material left by the author. —
Part I. — Besides the topics which unquestionably belong to the General
Introduction and are treated in Part II., there are a good many which, I
but for their voluminousness, might properly enough have been put into [.^ — ' j^»tA^
the editor's preface. Such are, for example, the discussions of the vari- '
ous critical elements which form the bulk of Whitney's Commentary.
I have printed them as Part I. of the General Introduction. The form
of presentation is, I trust, such that, with the help of the Table of Con-
tents, the student will be able to find any desired topic very quickly.
The General Introduction : Part II. — Certain general statements con-
cerning the manuscripts and the method of editing, and concerning the
text of the Atharva-Veda Samhita as a whole, must needs be made, and
are most suitably presented in the form of a general introduction prefixed
to the main body of the work. For this Introduction, Whitney left a
considerable amount of material. Parts of that material were so well
worked out as to be nearly or quite usable for printing : namely, the brief
chapter, 8, on the metrical form of the Samhita, and (most fortunately!)
"nearly all of the veryinuDortjjjJ^h^t^^ the description of
his manuscripts. ^Tn^ike is true, as will appear from the absence of ell-
brackets, of considerable portions of chapter lo. on the extent and struc-
ture of the Samhita. — Chapters 2 and ,v (concerning the stanza (dm na
devir abldstaye and the Couation-Book) might have been put in Part I.,
as being from the editor's hand ; but, on the ground of intrinsic fitness,
they have been put immediately after the description of the mss.
For chapters 4 and 5 and 6 (on repeated verses, on refrains, and on
accent-illUl kSj'liU^mTapfc^^on the divisions of the text), Whitney left
sketches, brief and rough, written with a lead-pencil and written (it would
seem) in the days of his weakness as he lay on a couch or bed. I have
made faithful use of these sketches, not only as indicating in detail the
topics that Whitney most desired to treat, but also as giving, or at least
suggesting, the language to be used in their treatment. Nevertheless,
they have been much rewritten in parts, and in such a way that it is hardly
feasible or even worth while to separate the author's part from the editor's.
The final result must pass for our joint work. The sketch for chapter,
(on the orthographic method of the Berlin text) was also a lead-pencil
draft ; but it was one that had evidently been made years before those
last mentioned, and its substance was such as to need only recasting in
XXX Editor i Ptejace
form, and expansion, — a work which I have carried out with free use of
Ihc pertinent matter in Whitney's IVatii^akhyas (cf. p. cxxiii, note).
To revert to chapters q and lo (on the divisions of the text, and on its
extent and striictiirc)^hey are the longest of ail, and, next after chap-
ter 1 (on the mss), perhaps the most im|)ortant, and they contain the
most of what is new. After putting them once into what I thought was
a fmal form, I found that, from the point of view thus gained, I could, by
further study, discover a good many new facts and relations, and attain to
greater certainty on matters already set forth, and, by rewriting freely,
put very many of the results in a clearer light and state them more con-
vincingly. The ellbrackets distinguish in general the editor's part from
the author's. If, in these two chapters, the latter seems relatively small,
one must not forget its large importance and value as a basis for the
editor's further studies.
With the exceptions noted (chapters 2 and 3), it has seemed best, in
elaborating this part of the General Introduction, to restrict it to the
topics indicated by Whitney's material, and not (in an attempt at sys-
tematic completeness) to duplicate the treatise which forms Uloomfield's
part of the Grutuinss. Hloomfield's plan is quite different ; but since a
considerable number of the topics are indeed common to both, it seemed
better that the treatment of them in this work should proceed as far as
jx)ssil)le inde|>endently of the treatment in the Grutidnss,
The editor's special introductions to the eighteen books, ii.-xiz. — Since
Whitney's manu.script contained a brief special introduction to the first
book, it was probably his intention to write one for each of the remaining
eighteen. At all events, certain general statements concerning each
book as a whole are plainly called for, and should pro{xrrly be cast into
the form of a s|)ecial intrcxluction and be prefixed, one to each of the sev-
eral books. These eighteen special introductions have accordingly been
written by the editor, and are, with some trifling exceptions (cf. pages
471-2, 739, 792. 794, 814) entirely from his hand. The //frydf/n-hymns
(cf. p. 471) and the divisions of the /Vt/jrlr^i- material (pages 628, 770, 793)
called for considerable detail of treatment ; similarly the discrepancies
between the two editions as resp>ects hymn-numeration (pages 389, 610)
and the /v?r|'<livi-<livisions (pages 771, 793) ; likewise the subject-matter of
book xviii. (p. 813); while the supplementary book xix., on account of its
peculiar relations to the rest of the text and to the ancillary treatises,
called for the most elal>orate treatment of all (p. 895),
The special introductions to the hymns : editor's bibliography of preTioos
translations and discussions. — These are contained in the paragraphs begin-
ning with the word *• Translated." — In the introduction to each hymn, in
a paragraph immediately following the Anukramanlcxccrpts, and usually
Parts for which tlu Author is not responsible xxxi
between a statement as to where the hymn is " Found in Paipp." or in
other texts, and a statement as to how the hymn is " Used in Kauq.,"
Whitney had given in his manuscript a statement as to where the hymn
had been previously translated by Ludwig or Grill or some other scholar.
For Weber's and Henry's translations of whole books, he had apparently
thought to content himself by referring once and for all at the beginning
of each book to the volume of the Indische Stiidicn or of the Traduction,
By a singular coincidence, a very large amount of translation and explana-
tion of this Veda (by Dcussen, Henry, Griffith, Weber, Bloomficld : see
the table, p. cvii) appeared within three or four years after Whitney's
death. The version of Griffith, and that alone, is complete. As for the
partial translations and discussions, apart from the fact that they are
scattered through different periodicals and independent volumes, their
multiplicity is so confusing that it would be very troublesome in the case
of any given hymn to find for oneself just how many of the translators
had discussed it and where. I have therefore endeavored to give with
all desirable completeness, for every single one of the s88 hymns ^f HnnlfQ
i.-xix. (save ii. 20--23), a bibliography of the translations and discussions
01 mac hymn up to the year 1898 or thereabout. For some hymns the
ot discussion is large : cf. the references for iv. 16 ; v. 22 ; ix. 9;
X. 7; xviii. i; xix. 6. At first blush, some may think it "damnable iter-
ation " that I should, for hymn-translations, make reference to Griffith
some 588 times, to Bloomfield some 214, to Weber some 179, or to Henry
some 167 times ; but I am sure that serious students of the work will find
the references exceedingly convenient. As noted above, they are given
in the paragraphs beginning with the word ** Translated." Although these
paragraphs are almost wholly editorial additions, I have not marked them
as such by enclosing them in ell-brackets.
I have always endeavored to give these references in the chronological
sequence of the works concerned (see the table with dates and explana-
tions at p. cvii). These dates need to be taken into account in judging
Whitney's statements, as when he says ** all the translators " understand
a passage thus and so. Finally, it is sure to happen that a careful com-
parison of the views of the other translators will often reveal a specific
item of interpretation which is to be preferred to Whitney's. Here and
there, I have given a reference to such an item ; but to do so systematic-
ally is a part of the great task which this work leaves unfinished.
Added special introductions to the hymns of book xviii. and to some others.
— The relation of the constituent material of the four so-called ** hymns "
of book xviii. to the Rig-Veda etc. is such that a clear synoptic statement of
the provenience of the different groups of verses or of single verses is in
the highest degree desirable ; and I have therefore endeavored to give such
xxxii lid t tor s Pre/a<e
a statement for each of them, grouping the verses into " Parts ** according
to their provenience or their ritual use or both. An analysis of the
structure of the single hymn of book xvii. also seemed to me to be worth
giving. Moreover, the peculiar contents of the hymn entitled •• Homage
to parts of the Atharva-Vcda " (xix. 23) challenged me to try at least to
identify its intended references; and although I have not succeeded
entirely, I ho|x; I have stated the questionable matters with clearness.
I have ventured to disagree with the author's view of the general signifi-
cance of hymn iii. 26 as expressed in the caption, and have given my
reasons in a couple of paragraphs. The hymn for use with a pearl-shell
amulet (iv. 10) and the hymn to the lunar asterisms (xix. 7) also gave
occasion for additions which I hope may prove not unacceptable.
Other editorial additions at the beginning and end of hymns. — Whitney's
last illness put an end to his revision of his work before he reached the
eighth book, and re|>orts of the ritual uses of the hymns of that book
from his hand are insufTicient or Licking. I have accordingly supplied
these rc|)orts for book viii., and further also for x. 5 and xi. 2 and 6, and
in a form as nearly like that used by Whitney as I could; but for viii. 8
(•*army rites ") and x. 5 (*• water-thunderbolts "), the conditions warranted
greater fulness.* Whitney doubtless intended to give, throughout his
entire work, at the end of antnuikas and books and fra/^}(hakas, certAin
statements, in part summations of hymns and verses and in part quota-
tions from the Old Anukramani. In default of his final revision, these
stop at the end of book vii. (cf. p. 470), and from that point on to the
end I have supplied them (cf. pages 475, 481, 516, 737, and so on).
Other additions of considerable extent. — Of the additions in ell-brackets,
the most numerous are the brief ones ; but the great difficulties of books
xviii. and xix. have tempted me to give, in the last two hundred pages,
occasional excursuses, the considerable length of which will, I hope, prove
warranted by their interest or value. The notes on the following topics
or words or verses may serve as instances : twin consonants, p. 832 ;
afljoydtulis, p. 844; sii-^dnstt, p 853 ; Aittit, p. 860; dt*a ciksipan^ P- 875 ;
the fitnndiulna ("eleven dishes'*), p. 876 ; x^Anyd etc., p. 880; sttmfritya,
p. 886; on xviii. 4. 86-87 ; xix. 7. 4 ; 8. 4 ; 26. 3 ; 44. 7 ; 45. 2 {suhdr
etc.); 47. 8; 55. i, 5.
The seven tables appended to the latter Tolnme of thb work. — The list of
non-metrical passages is taken from the introduction to Whitney's Index
Verborum, p. 5. — The list of hymns ignored by K^u<;ika, p. loil, is
taken from memoranda in Whitney's hand-copy of Kau^ika. — The
' It may hvr« tie noted that, for the vhnrt h>mn« (l>ookB L-vii), (he ritual u%e9 are given in
the |»refiirtl introdactiont ; hut that, for the tuhvequent long hjrmn«, they are utoally and inor*
conveniently given under th« verves concerned.
Parts for which tlie Author is not responsible xxxiii
concordance of the citations of Kau^ika by the two methods, I have
made for those who wish to look up citations as made in the Bombay
edition of the commentary. The same purpose is better served by writ-
ing the number of each adhydya, and of each kandikd as numbered
from the beginning of its own adhydya^ on the upper right-hand corner
of each odd page of Bloomfield's text. — The concordance of discrepant
Berlin and Bombay hymn-numbers I have drawn up to meet a regret-
table need. — The concordance between the Vulgate and Kashmirian
recensions is made from notes in the Collation-Book, as is explained at
p. Ixxxv, and will serve provisionally for finding a Vulgate verse in the fac-
simile of the Kashmirian text. — The table of hymn-titles is of course
a mere copy of Whitney's captions, but gives an extremely useful con-
spectus of the subjects in general. — The index of the names of the seers
is a revised copy of a rough one found among Whitney's papers. To
it I have prefixed a few paragraphs which contain general or critical
observations.
The unmarked minor additions and other minor changes. — These are of
two classes. The first includes the numerous isolated minor changes
about which there was no question, namely the correction of mere slips,
the supplying of occasional omissions, and the omission of an occasional
phrase or sentence. Of the mere slips in Whitney's admirable manu-
script, some (like " thou has " at ii. lo. 6, or the omission of " be brought "
near the end of the note to ii. 13. 5) are such as the care of a good proof-
reader would have set right; but there were many which could be recog-
nized as slips only by constant reference to the original or to the various
books concerned. Such are "cold" instead of "heat" iox ghrahsd at
xiii. I. 52 and 53; "hundred" (life-times) for "thousand" at vi. 78. 3;
"Mercury" for "Mars" at xix. 9. 7 ; "kine" for "bulls" at iii. 9. 2 and
"cow" for "bull" at i. 22. i; vdqdh for ^vd^dh at xviii. 2. 13. At vi.
141. 3 his version read "so let the A^vins make," as if the text were
krnuidm afvind. At the end of the very first hymn, Whitney's statement
was, "The Anukr. ignores the metrical irregularity of the second pada";
here I changed "ignores" to "notes." — He had omitted the words
"the parts of" at iv. 12. 7; "a brother" at xviii. I. 14; "which is very
propitious" at xviii. 2. 31 ; "the Fathers " at xviii. 2. 46. Such changes
as those just instanced could well be left unmarked.
The second class has to do with the paragraphs, few in number, the
recasting or rewriting of which involved so many minor changes that
it was hardly feasible to indicate them by cll-brackets. The note to xviii.
3. 60 is an example. Moreover, many notes in which the changes are
duly marked contain other changes which seemed hardly worth marking,
as at xix. 49. 2 or 55. i : cf. p. 806, ^ 5.
XXX iv Editor s Preface
The marked minor additions and other minor changes. — In a work like
this, involving so great a mass of multifarious details, it was inevitable that
a rigorous revision, such as the author could not give to it, should detect
many statements requiring more or less modification. Thus at xix. 40. 2,
the author, in his copy for the printer, says: "We have rectified the
accent of sttmcMds ; the mss. and STP. have sum/dhds,'* In fact, the
edition also has sumi'dhiU^ and I have changed the statement thus :
•*Lin the edition J we [should havej rectified the accent \%o as to read J
sumedhiisy The changes in the last two books are such that it was
often best to write out considerable parts of the printer's copy afresh :
yet it was desirable, on the one hand, to avoid rewriting ; and, on the
other, to change and add in such a way that the result might not show
the unclearncss of a clumsily tinkered paragraph. To revise and edit
between these two limitations is not easy ; and, as is shown by the
example just given, there is no clear line to be drawn between what
should and what should not be marked. As noted above, it is evident
that all these matters would have been very simple if the author could
^^ have seen the work through the press.
The revision of the author's manuscript. Verification. — The modifica-
tions of the author's manuscript thus far discussed are mostly of the
nature of additions made to carry out the unfinished parts of the author's
design, and are the modifications referred to on the title-page by the
words " brought nearer to com^lctjon^" The work of revision proper
has indiuTct^^arclu^cnncalion of every statement of every kind in the
commentary so far as this was possible, and a careful comparison of the
translation with the original. This means that the citations of the parallel
texts have been actually looked up and that the readings have been com-
pared anew in order to make sure that the reports of their variations from
the Atharvan readings were correct. This task was most time-consuming
and laborious ; as to some of its difTiculties and perplexities, see below,
p. Ixiv. Verification means further that the notes of Whitney's Collation-
lk>ok and of the Ik)mbay edition and of Roth's collation of the Kashmirian
text were regularly consulted to assure the correctness of the author's
re|>orts of variants within the Atharvan school ; further, that the text and
the statements of the Major AnukramanI were carefully studied, and, in
connection therewith, the scansion and pada-division of the verses of the
Samhita ; and that the references to the Kau^ika and Vaitana Sutras
were regularly turnetl up for comparison of the sutras with Whitney's
statements. Many technical details concerning these matters are given on
pages Ixiv ff. of the General Introduction. Since the actual appearance of
Bloomfield and Garbe's magnificent facsimile of the birch-bark manuscript
I
Meaning of ^^ Revised and brotight nearer to Completion " xxxv
of the Kashmirian text antedates that of this work, the reasons why the
facsimile was not used by me should be consulted at p. Ixxxv.
Accentuation of Sanskrit words. — In the reports of the readings of
accented texts, the words are invariably accented. The Kashmirian text is
reckoned as an unaccented one, although it has occasional accented pas-
sages. The author frequently introduces Sanskrit words, in parentheses
or otherwise, into the translation, and usually indicates their accent.
The editor has gone somewhat farther : he has indicated in the transla-
tion the accent of the stems of words which happen to occur in the voca-
tive (so saddnvds^ ii. 14. 5), except in the cases of rare words whose proper
stem-accent is not known (examples in ii. 24) ; and, in cases where only
one member of a compound is given, he has indicated what the accent of
that member would be if used independently (so -ntthd at xviii. 2. 18, as
part of sa/idsranit/ia ; -ksitra at iii. 3. 4, as part of anyaksetrd ; cf. ii. 8. 2).
Cross-references. — Apart from the main purpose of this work, to serve
as the foundation of more nearly definitive ones yet to come, it is likely
to be used rather as one of consultation and reference than for consecu-
tive reading. I have therefore not infrequently added cross-references
from one verse or note to another, doing this even in the case of verses
which were not far apart : cf., for example, my reference from vii. 80. 3
to 79. 4 or from vi. 66, 2 to 65. i.
Orthography of Anglicized proper names. — The translation is the princi-
pal or only part of this work which may be supposed to interest readers
who are without technical knowledge of Sanskrit. In order to make the
proper names therein occurring more easily pronounceable, the author
has disregarded somewhat the strict rules of transliteration which are fol-
lowed in the printing of Sanskrit words as Sanskrit, and has written, for
example, Pushan and Purandhi instead of Pusan and Puramdhi, sometimes
retaining, however, the strange diacritical marks (as in Angiras or Varuna)
where they do not embarrass the layman. To follow the rules strictly
would have been much easier ; but perhaps it was better to do as has been
done, even at the expense of some inconsistencies (cf. Vritra, Vritra,
Vrtra; Savitar).
Editorial short-comings and the chances of error. — Labor and pains have
been ungrudgingly spent upon Whitney's work, to ensure its appearance
in a form worthy of its great scientific importance ; but the work is exten-
sive and is crowded with details of such a nature that unremitting care is
needed to avoid error concerning them. Some striking illustrations of
this statement may be found in the foot-note below.^ Despite trifling
^ Thus in the first line of his note on xix. 50. 3, the author wrote tartyus instead of tirtmay
taking tareyus from the word immediately below tarema in the text. This sense-disturbing
error was overlooked by the author and by Dr. Ryder, and once by me also, although discovered
xxxvi Editor s Pre/cue
inconsistencies of orthography or abbreviation, I trust that a high degree
of accuracy in the real essentials has been attained. I dare not hope that
my colleagues will not discover blemishes and deficiencies in the work ;
but I shall be glad if they do not cavil at them. India has much to teach
the West : much that is of value not only for its scientific interest, but
also for the conduct of our thought and life. It is far better to exploit
the riches of Indian wisdom than to si>end time or strength in belittling
the achievements of one's fellow-workers or of those that are gone.
The biographical and related matter. — The First American Congress of
Thilologists devoted its session of Dec. 28, 1894 to the memory of Whitney.
The Rc|>ort of that session, entitled "The Whitney Memorial Meeting/'
and edited by the editor of this work, was issued as the first half of vol-
ume xix. of the Journal of the American Oriental Society. The edition
was of fifteen hundred copies, and was distributed to the members of the
Oriental Society and of the American Fhilological Association and of the
Modern Language Association of America, to the libraries enrolled on
their lists, and to some other recipients. Hesides the addresses of the
occasion, the Report contains bibliographical notes concerning Whitney's
life and family, and a bibliography of his writings : but since, strictly
speaking, it contains no biography of Whitney, I have thought it well to
give in this volume (p. xliii) a brief sketch of his life ; and in preparing it»
I have made use, not only of the substance, but also, with some freedom*
of the form of statement of the autobiography which Whitney published
in 1885 (see p. Ix). Moreover, since the people into whose hands this
work will come are for the most part not the same as those who received
the Re|x)rt, it has been thought advisable to reprint therefrom the editor's
Memorial Address (p. xlvii) as a general estimate of Whitney's character
and services, and to give, for its intrinsic usefulness, a select list of his
writings (p. Ivi), which is essentially the list prepared by Whitney for the
"Yale Bibliographies" (List, 1893).
at Utt in timr fnr correction. — At xix. 77. 7. I had added sttrpam at the Kashinirian readinf
for the Vul|;ate sArr^tm, timply l>ecau%e Koth't (rollation gave tmryam ; but on looking it up in
the facsimile, laat line of folio 1 j6a, I found, after the pUtei mere made, that the l^irch bark
leaf really hat sdrram and that the tlip was Koth't. — In regard to xix. 34. 6 K, the Fates
teemed to have deirred that error thould prcvaU. Here the manu^criptt read vdfimAm. ITita
\% repnrtetl in the foot-note of the Iteilm edition a^ td/inam (itt error). 'I he cditori intended
to emend the m«. reading to r*ifumtfm, which, hovrever, it misprinted in the text at t^^fJuum
(;d error). [ The ctmjecture tMfanJm, even if rightly prtnte<l. it admitted to tie an untucce«%ful
one ] In the third line of hit comment. Whitney wrott« **The v*i^4mdm of our text ** etc. {yA
error) Thit \ correi'te<l to t\i^,\ttJm^ and addrd. in a note near the end of the paragraph, that
the conjecture vrat ** Mitprtnled wt^duim." My note about the misprint wat righity printed in
the tecond proof; but in the foundry proof, by tome mithap, it ttoo<l ** MUprinted vit^drntim.**
(4th error). The foarth error 1 hope to amend aucceaafuily in the plate.
General Significance of Whitney s Work xxxvii
General significance of Whitney's work. — Its design, says Whitney
(above, p. xix, Announcement), is ** to put together as much as possible of
the material that is to help toward the study and final comprehension of
this Veda." Thus expressly did the author disavow any claim to finality for
his work. As for the translation, on the one hand, the Announcement
shows that he regarded it as wholly subordinate to his commentary ; and
I can give no better statement of the principles which have guided him in
making it, than is found in the extracts from a critical essay by Whitney
which I have reprinted (above, p. xix), and from which moreover we may
infer that he fully recognized the purely provisional character of his trans-
lation. I am sorry that infelicities of expression in the translation, which
are part and parcel of the author's extreme literalness (see p. xciv) and do
not really go below the surface of the work, are (as is said below, p. xcviii)
the very things that are the most striking for the non-technical reader
who examines the book casually.
As for the commentary, on the other hand, it is plain that, taking the
work as a whole, he has done just what he designed to do. Never
before has the material for the critical study of an extensive Vedic text
bce^^TTomprenens^^^a
__.us sources. The commentary will long niaintain for itselt a place ot
first-rate importance as an indispensa15Tc working-tool for the purpcfees
which it is designed to serve. I have put together (below, pages xcii-
xciii) a few examples to illustrate the ways in which the commentary will
prove useful. A variety of special investigations, moreover, will readily
suggest themselves to competent students of the commentary; and the
subsidiary results that are thus to be won. (the "by-products," so to say),
are likely, I am convinced, to be abundant and of large interest and value.
Furthermore, we may confidently believe that Whitney's labors will inci- 1
dentally put the whole discipline of Vedic criticism upon a broader and *
firmer basis.
Need of a systematic commentary on the Rig-Veda. — Finally, Whitney
seems to me to have made it plain that a similar commentary is the indis-
pensable preliminary for the final comprehension of the Rig- Veda. That
commentary should be as much better and as much wider in its scope as it
can be made by the next generation of scholars; for it will certainly not be
the work of any one man alone. It is a multifarious work for which many
elaborate preparations need yet to be made. Thus the parallel passages
from the Rig- Veda and the other texts must be noted with completeness
on the margin of the Rik Samhita opposite the padas concerned ; for this
task Bloomfield's Vedic Concordance is likely to be the most important
single instrument. Thus, again, Brahmana, ^rauta, Grhya, and other
texts appurtenant to the Rig-Veda, together with Epic and later texts,
xxxviii Editors Preface
should all be systematically read by scholars familiar with Vedic themes
and diction, and with an eye open to covert allusion and reference, and
should be completely excerpted with the Kik Samhita in hand and with
constant references made op|>osite the Rik verses to the ancillary or illus-
trative passages which bear u|>on them. It is idle folly to pretend that
this last work would not be immensely facilitated by a large mass of
translations' of the more difTicult texts, accurately made, and provided
with all |>ossiblc ingenious contrivances for finding out cjuickly the rela-
tions between the ancillary texts and the fundamental ones. Thus to
have demonstrated the necessity for so far-reaching an undertaking, may
prove to be not the least of Whitney's services to Vedic scholarship.
The Century Dictionary. — Doubtless much of the best of Whitney's
strength through nearly ten of his closing years was given to the work
devolving on him as editor-in-chief of The Century Dietionary^ an F.neydo-
fedic Lexicon of the lint^iis/t iMuguat^c (see p. Ix, below). Hut for that,
he might perhaps have brought out this commentary himself. Since I,
more than any one else, have personal reasons to regret that he did not do
so, there is perhaps a |>eculiar fitness in my saying that I am glad that he
did not. Whoever has visited for example the printing-offices which make
the metrojwiitan district of Boston one of the great centers of book-
production for America, and has seen the position of authority which is
by them accorded to that admirable work, and has reflected upon the
powerful influence which, through the millions of volumes that are affected
by its authority, it must thus exercise in the shaping of the growth of
our English language, — such an one cannot fail to sec that Whitney was
broad-minded and wise in accepting the op|>ortunity of superintending the
work of its production, even at the risk of not living to see the appear-
ance of the already long-delayed Athar\'a-Veda. Perhaps his most potent
influence upon his day and generation is through his labors upon the
Century Dictionary.
Acknowledgments. — I desire in the first place to make public acknowl-
edgment of my gratitude to the late Ifenry Clarke Warren of Cambridge.
He had been my pupil at lialtimore; and, through almost twenty years
of intimate acquaintance and friendship, we had been assocLited in our
Indian studies. To his enlightened appreciation of their value and poten-
tial usefulness is due the fact that these dignified volumes can now be
issued ; for during his lifetime he gave to Harvard University in sundry
1 Roth writes to Whitney. July 2. 1S9J: Ich befreife nicht. wic ein janger Mann, ttitt nach
wcrtlo«en Dingrn ni grcilen, nicht licbcr tich an die Ueher^tfung nml FrkUrung etne* Stucket
aut Tiittiflya Hrihinaria odcr .MiitriyanI Saihhitl waft; nicht um die minutiae dc« Ritaab t%
Cfforschen. londern um den Stuff, der iwtKhen dic«en Dingen tteckt. ftigangUch m roachen
und xu erUutern Auch in den Medixinlnichetn gab« ei vieU Abachnitte, die veratanden and
bekannt xii wcrden verdiantcn.
Acknowledgnunts xxxix
instalments the funds with which to pay for the printing of Whitney's
commentary. Whitney was professor at Yale ; the editor is an alumnus
of Yale and a teacher at Harvard ; and Warren was an alumnus of
Harvard. That the two Universities should thus join hands is a matter
which the friends of both may look upon with pleasure, and it furnishes the
motif for the dedication of this work. But I am glad to say that learning,
as well as money, was at Mr. Warren's command for the promotion of
science. Before his death there was issued his collection of translations
from the Pali which forms the third volume of this Series and is entitled
" Buddhism in Translations," a useful and much-used book. Moreover,
he has left, in an advanced state of preparation for press, a carefully made
edition and a partial translation of the Pali text of Buddhaghosa's famous
encyclopedic treatise of Buddhism entitled "The Way of Purity" or
Visuddhi-Magga. It is with gladness and hope that I now address myself
to the arduous and happy labor of carrying Mr. Warren's edition through
the press.
Next I desire to express my hearty thanks to my former pupil, Dr.
Arthur W. Ryder, now Instructor in Sanskrit at Harvard University, for
his help in the task of verifying references and statements and of reading
proofs. He came to assist me not long after the close of his studies
with Professor Geldner, when I had got through with a little more than
one third of the main body of Whitney's commentary and translation.
For books i.-vii., I had revised the manuscript and sent it to press, leav-
ing the verification to be done with the proof-reading and from the proof-
sheets. Dr. Ryder's help began with the verification and proof-reading
of the latter half of book vi. ; but from the beginning of book viii., it
seemed better that he should forge ahead and do the verification from
the manuscript itself, and leave me to follow with the revision and the
supplying of the missing portions and so on. His work proved to be so
thoroughly conscientious and accurate that I was glad to trust him, except
of course in cases where a suspicion of error was aroused in one or both
of us. A few times he has offered a suggestion of his own ; that given
at p. 739 is so keen and convincing that greater boldness on his part
would not have been unwelcome. To my thanks I join the hope that
health and other opportunities may long be his for achieving the results
of which his literary sense and scholarly ideals give promise.
Mrs. Whitney, upon turning over to me her husband's manuscript of
this work, together with his other manuscript material therefor, was so
kind as to lend me a considerable number of his printed books, some
of which, in particular his copy of the Kau^ika Sutra, have been a great
convenience by reason of their manuscript annotations. It is a pleasure
to be able to make to Mrs. Whitney this public expression of my thanks.
xl Editor 5 Preface
To my neighbor, Miss Maria Whitney, I am indebted for the loan of'fjl^'*^
the medallion from which the noble portrait of her brother, opposite L^
page xliii, has been made. The medallion is a replica of the one in the
Library of Yale University, and is a truthful likeness.
Of an occasional friendly turn from Professors Theobald Smith, George
F. Moore, and Bloomficld, and from Dr. George A. Grierson, I have already
made note (see pages 242, 756, 983, 243). Professors Bloomfield and
Garl>c allowed me to reprmluce here a s|>ecimen leaf from their beautiful
facsimile of the Kashmirian text. Professors Capi)eller and Hopkins and
Jacobi were so goo<l as to criticize my Sanskrit verse^O ^'^ particular,
I thank my colleague, Professor Morris II. Morgan, for his kindness in
putting the dedication into stately I^tin phrase.
It is with no small satisfaction that I make public mention of the
admirable work of the Athenaeum Press (situated in Cambridge) of Messrs.
Ginn and Company of lk)ston. The Hindus sometimes liken human
effort to one wheel of a cart. Fate, indeed, may be the other ; but our
destiny, they say, is not accomplished without both elements, just as there
is no progress without both wheels. It is so with a book : go<xl copy is
one wheel ; and a good print ing-oflfice is the other. Whitney's long expe-
rience was guarantee for the prior requisite ; and the other I have not
found lacking. The way has been a long one, with plenty of places for
rough jolting and friction ; but the uniform kindness and the alert and
intelligent helpfulness of all with whom I have had to do at the Press
have made our progress smooth, and I am sincerely grateful.
Human personality and the progress of science. — Had Whitney lived to
see this work in print and to write the preface, his chief tribute of grateful
acknowledgment would doubtless have been to his illustrious preceptor
and colleague and friend whose toil had so largely increased its value, to
Rudolph Roth of Tubingen. Whitney, who was my teacher, and Roth,
who was my teacher's teacher and my own teacher, both are passeti
away, and Death has given the work to me to finish, or rather to bring
nearer to an ideal and so unattainable completeness. They are beyond
the reach of human thanks, of praise or blame : but I cannot help feeling
that even in their life-time they understood that Science is concerned
only with results, not with personalities, or (in Hindu phrase) that the
Goddess of Learning, Sarasvatf or Vac, cares not to ask even so much
as the names of her votaries ; and that the unending progress of Science
is indeed like the endless flow of a river.
COlhc*r. I tru<tt. inill not Ix wholly tinplea<^tng to my pundit friend* in India, mho, a« thry
murfind the thouf*ht in part un Indian, mil n<>t. I ho|>r. for|*rt that it «a« primarily and dr*if;n
rdly Cfmc ri%'rd in < k t iilrntal form. Their i;rral mAMer, Dandin, has a kind ward for men in my
CAM at the cloM of tb« firat chapter of hb Poeticm.
Human Personality and tlie Progress of Science xli
Teacher and teacher's teacher long had wrought
Upon these tomes of ancient Hindu lore,
Till Death did give to one whom both had taught
The task to finish, when they were no more.
'Tis finished, — yet unfinished, like the flow
Of water-streams between their banks that glide ;
For Learning's streams, that down the ages go.
Flow on for ever with a swelling tide.
Here plodding labor brings its affluent brook ;
There genius, like a river, pours amain :
While Learning — ageless, deathless — scarce will look
To note which ones have toiled her love to gain.
Alike to her are river, brook, and rill.
That in her stately waters so combine.
If only all who choose may drink their fill.
And slake the thirst to know, the thirst divine.
The Glta's lesson had our Whitney learned —
To do for duty, not for duty's meed.
And, paid or unpaid be the thanks he earned.
The thanks he recked not, recked alone the deed.
Here stands his book, a mighty instrument.
Which those to come may use for large emprise.
Use it, O scholar, ere thy day be spent.
The learner dieth. Learning never dies.
xlii Editors Preface
Wnn^iV VifnTm fPWniT:
Mfk^ wthtPi 5 wry ^i^fH I
f^wiftW fif f,ni ^ vft
v^. K. L«.
CRANrrnRY Isirv Maine,
Summer. i«/04.
MEMORIAL ADDRESS
Delivered by the Editor at the First American Congress of Philologists^ Whitney
Memorial Meetings December^ ^^94
AN ESTIMATE OF WHITNEY'S CHARACTER AND SERVICES
Ladies and Gentlemen, — There are some among us who can remember the time
when " a certain condescension in foreigners " easily gave us pain. There was little
achievement behind us as a people to awaken us to national self-consciousness and to a
realizing sense of our own great possibilities. Time is changing all that The men
have come, and some, alas ! are already gone, of whose achievements we may well be
proud wherever we are. In the battles for the conquests of truth there are no distinc-
tions of race. 1 1 needs no international congress to tell us that we belong to one great
army. But to-night — as the very titles of these gathered societies show — Science has
marshalled us, her fifties and her hundreds, as Americans. We look for the centurion,
for the captain of the fifties ; and he is no more I And we call, as did David, lamenting
for Abner, ** Know ye not that there is a prince and a great man fallen this day in
Israel," yea, and like Jonathan, "in the midst of the battle?"
It is in the spirit of generous laudation that we are assembled to do honor to our
illustrious countryman. And it is well. We may praise him now ; for he is gone.
But I cannot help thinking of a touching legend of the Buddha. Nigh fifty years he
has wandered up and down in Ganges-land, teaching and preaching. And now he is
about to die. flowers fall from the sky and heavenly quires are heard to sing his
praise. *• But not by all this," he answers, — " but not by all this, O Ananda, is the
Teacher honored ; but the disciple who shall fulfil all the greater and lesser duties, —
by him is the Teacher honored." It is fitting, then, that we pause, not merely to praise /• ^
the departed, but also to consider the significance of a noble life, and the duties and ^ • ^' ^
responsibilities which so great an example urges upon us, — in short, the lesson of a life #»• *^ VWt^ -
of service. fa^^^i-rji^^^^f
It would be vain to endeavor, within the narrow limits which the present occasion (IC9»' ^'2199'
imposes, to rehearse or to characterize with any completeness the achievements that ^ ^ ^ fUj
make up this remarkable life. Many accounts^ of it have been given of late in the nOo * ^ • ^
public prints. Permit me rather to lay before you, by way of selection merely, a few •' ' ^
facts concerning Mr. Whitney which may serve to illustrate certain essential features of \i^ J TJ^^fb
his character and fundamental motives of his life.
And indubitably first in importance no less than in natural order is the great fact of
his heredity. William D wight Whitney was born, in 1827, at Northampton, Massachu-
setts, and in his veins flowed the best blood of a typical New England community, of
the Dwights and the Hawleys, — heroes of the heroic age of Hampshire. His stock
was remarkable for sturdy vigor, both of body and of intellect, and wa^ in fact that
genuine aristocracy which, if it be true to its traditions, will remain — as for generations
1 Most notable among them is the one by Professor Thomas Day Seymour of Yale, in the
- American Journal of Philology." vol. . 5. ^^^ QtAA^^-U . ^. fif 2- 1
%1.r^t
xlviii Memorial Address by the Editor
it hnn Wri\ — one of the prime guarantee* of the permanence of democracy in America.
Few places in thi^ lami have prcxhircd a prc»j><>rtionateIy greater numlier of diMinguifthed
|>r<iplr than \\a% Nortltampton. S<x i.il advantages %%ere thus adde<l to those of iMith,
and to all thev in turn tlic advantages of dMclhng in a region of great natural l>eauty.
It v%as in W dham Whitney's early infancy that his father movetl into a dwrlhng built
on the precise site of the Jonathan I.dwaids house. Ihis dwelling y>x% the second in a
row of six neighUiring houses, all of which couhl boast of more or less notable occu-
pants. In the first lived Dr. Seeger. who was etlucated at the same school and time as
S( hiller, at " the Solitude." Heyorwl the Whitneys' was the house in which lived l^wts
S Hopkins, the father of KtUaid \V. Hopkins, the Sanskrit scholar of lUyn Mawr.
I'he fourth was the original homestrad of the I imothy Dwtghts, in which the first Yale
rrcsi<lent of that name, and 'I hctxlore, the Secretary of the Hartford Convention and
foumlcr of the New York *• Daily Advertiser," were l>orn, both grandsons of Jonathan
Edwards. 'I he adjoining place was the home of the elder Sylvester Judd, and of his son
Sylvester, the author of ** Margaret ;" and the sixth house was occupied by the Italian
political exile, (Wierardi, and later by Dr. William Allen, ex- President of llowdoin College.
Whitney was a mere boy of fifteen when he entered Williams College as a sopho-
more. Three years later (in 1845) he had easily outstrtp|)ed all his classmates and
graduated with the highest honors; and with all that, he found ample time to range the
wocxletl hills of lierkshire, collecting birds, which \\r himself set up for the Natural
History Society. The next three or four years were s|>ent by him as clerk In the North-
ampton Hank, with accounts for his work, (Jerman and Swedish for his studies, orni-
thology and lK>tany for his recreations, and music for his delight, — unless one should
rather say that all was his delight. These oft-mentioned studies in natural history I
should not linger over, save that their deep significance has hardly been adverted uj»on in
public. 1 hey mean that, even at this early age, Whitney showed the stuff which dis-
tinguishes the genuine man of science from the joblwrs and peddlers of learning. They
mean that, with him, the gift of independent and accurate ol>servation was inljom, arul
that the habit of unprejudiced reflection u|X)n what he himself saw was easily acquired.
This brings us to a critical period in the determination of his career. In the ency-
clo|Hrdias, W*hitney is catalogued as a famous Indianist, and so indeed he was. Itut it
was not l>ecai»e he was an Indianist that he was famous. Had he devoted his life to
the physical or natural sciences, he would doubtless have attained to equal, if not greater
eminence. Truly, it is not the what, but the h&w f That he did devote himself to
Indoh>gy ap|>ears to l)e due to .srveral facts which were in themselves and in their corv
comitancc accidental. First, his ehlcr brother, Josiah. now the distinguished professor
of geology in Harvard University, on his return from Kurope in 1847, had brought with
him iKKiks in and on many lanijuaijes, and among them a copy of the second edition of
Hopp's Sanskrit (irammar. Second, it chanced that the Kev. George F!. Day, a college-
mate at Yale of Professor Salisbury, was Whitney's pastor. And third, he met with
Kduard Desor.
There is in possession of Professor Whitney of Harvard a well worn volume of his
father's called the Family Fact-book. It is, I am sure, no breach of confidence if I say,
in p.issing. that this book, with its varie<1 entries in all varied moods and by divers
giltetl hands, is the reflex of a most remarkable family Hfc and feeling. In it, among
^ony other things are brief autobiographic annals of the early life of William Whitney,
'and in its pro|>er place the following simple entry: ''In the winter of 184^-49 com-
menced the stufly of Sanskrit, encouraged to it by Kev.(ieorge IC Day. In June, l84<>,
went out with Josiah to Lake Superior as 'assistant sub-agent* on the GeologicaJ
An Estimate of Whitney s Character and Services xlix
Survey." To William Whitney were intrusted the botany, the barometrical observations,
and the accounts. And although the ornithology was not formally intrusted to him,
there is abundant evidence that he was habitually on the look-out for the birds, with
keen eye and with attentive ear. He must, already, in the spring, have made substantial
progress by himself in Sanskrit; for his article (almost the first that he published)
entitled " On the Sanskrit Language," a translation and abridgment of von Bohlen,
appeared in the August number of the " Bibliotheca Sacra" for 1849, and i^ust there-
fore have been finished before he left home. With him, accordingly, he took his
brother's copy of Bopp.
Besides the two brothers, there was a third man-of-power in the little company that
spent the summer among the swamps and mosquitoes of the great copper region.
That man was Eduard Desor, already a young naturalist of distinction, and afterward
famous both in science and in public life in Switzerland. He had come only a short time
before, with Agassiz, and as his friend and intimate associate in scientific undertakings,
from Neufch^tel to Cambridge. He was by nature full of the purest love for science ;
and that love had been quickened to ardent enthusiasm by his own work, and by his
intercourse with other bright minds and eager workers whom he had known in Paris
and Neufch&tel and in the Swiss glacier-camps of Agassiz. Small wonder if the intimate
relations of that summer's camp-life in common gave opportunity for potent influence of
the brilliant young Huguenot upon the brilliant young Puritan. It is to Desor, and to
his words and example, that my Cambridge colleague attributes in large measure his
brother's determination to devote himself to a life of science rather than to business or
to one of the learned professions. That the chosen department was Sanskrit may be
ascril>ed in part to the accident of the books thrown in his way ; in part to the interest
of the language and antiquities of India, intrinsically and as related to our own ; and in
part to the undeniable fascination which the cultivation of the virgin soil of an almost
untrodden field has for a mind of unusual energy, vigor, and originality.
William Whitney has left a full and interesting journal of this summer. Tuesday,
July 24, while waiting for the uncertain propeller to come and rescue them from the
horrible insect pests, he writes from Copper Harbor: " For my part, I intend attacking
Sanskrit grammar to-morrow." And then, on Wednesday : " I have, after all, managed
to get thro the day without having recourse to the Sanskrit, but it has been a narrow
escape." And five weeks later, from Carp River : "Another day of almost inaction,
most intolerable and diflicult to be borne. How often have I longed for that Sanskrit
grammar which I so foolishly sent down before me to the Sault I "
The autumn of 1849, accordingly, found him at New Haven, and in company with
Professor Hadley, studying under Edward Elbridge Salisbury, the Professor of the
Arabic and Sanskrit Languages and Literature. The^ veteran IndoTogist of Berlin, Pro-
fessor Weber, has said tliat he and Professor Roth account it as one of their fairest
honors that they had Whitney as a pupil. To have had both a Whitney and a Hadley
at once is surely an honor that no American teacher in thd'^epartments here represented
this evenmg can match. In a man whose soul was beclouded with tne slightest mist of
false pretension or q\ selfishness, we may well imagine that the progress of such pupils
might easily have occasioned a pang of jealousy. But Mr. Salisbury's judgment upon
them illuminates his own character no less than that of his pupils when he says, *< Their
quickness of perception and unerring exactness of acquisition soon made It evident that
the teacher and the taught must change places."
We have come to the transition period of Whitney's life. He is still a pupil, but
already also an incipient master. << 1850, Sept. 20. Sailed for Germany in the steamer
1
Memorial Address by the Editor
u.^^S>
CXVEi
Washinf^ton. Sp«nt three winters in Ikrlin, studying especially with Dr. Weber, aad
two summers in Tubingen, Wurtemberg, with Professor Roth.** Thus runs the entry in
II j(^f»-4*^ ft^' ^^^ Fact booic. A few lines later we read : *' Leaving Berlin in April, 1S53, stayed six
* weeks in Paris, three in Oxford, and seven in London (collating Sanskrit manuscripts),
and then returned in the steamer Niagara, arriving in ISoston Aug. 5/* Such is the
modest record that covers the three momentous years of the beginning of a splendid
scientific career. For in this brief space he had not only laid broad and deep founda-
tions, by studies in Persian, Arabic, Kgyptian, and Coptic, but had also done a large
part of the preliminary work for the edition of the Atharva-Veda, — as witness the
volumes on the table l>efore you, which contain his Berlin copy of that Veda and his
Paris, Oxford, and London collations.
Meantime, however, at Yale, his honored teacher and faithful friend, I*rofessor Salis-
bury, ** with true and self-forgetting zeal for the prof^ress of Oriental studies '* (these are
Mr. Whitney *s own words), had l)een diligently preparing the way for him; negotiating
with the corporation for the establishment of a chair of Sanskrit, surrendering /r^ tmmt0
his own office, and providing for the endowment of the new cathedra ; leaving, in short,
no stone unturned to insure the fruitful activity of his young colleague. Nor did hope
wait long upon fulfilment ; for in 1856, only a trifle more than two years from his induc-
tion, Whitney had, as joint editor with Professor Roth, achieved a most distinguished
service for science by the issue of the tMtio pritutpt of the Atharva-Veda, and that
before he was thirty. ^
In Septem)>er, 1S69, — that is to say, in the very month in which began the 6rst
college year of President Mliot*s administration, — Whitney was called to Harvard. It
reflects no less credit upon Mr. Kliot*s discernment of character and attainments than
upon Mr. Whitney's surpassing gifts that the youthful president should turn to him,
among the very first, for aid in helping to begin the great work of transforming the
provincial college into a national university. The prospect of losing such a man was
matter of gravest concernment to all Vale College, and in particular to her faithful
benefactor. Professor Salisbury. Within a week the latter had provided for the endow-
ment of Mr. Whitney's chair upon the ampler scale made necessary by the change of
the times ; and the considerations which made against the transplanting of the deeply
rooted tree had, unhappily for Harvard, their chance to prevail, and Whitney remained
at New Haven.
It was during his studies under Mr. Salisbury, in May, 1S50. that he was elected a
mcml>er of the American Oriental Society. Mr. Salisbury was the life and soul of the
Society, and, thanks to his learning, his energy, and his munificence, the organiiation
had already attained to *< standing and credit in the world of scholars.** Like him,
Mr. Whitney was a steadfast believer in the obligation of which the very existence of
these aiisembled societies is an acknowledgment, — the obligation of professional men
to help in ** coo(>erative action in behalf of literary and scientific progress ;** and, more
than that, to do so at real personal sacrifice.
The first meeting at which Mr. Whitney was present was held October 26, 1853.
More than thirty-three years passed, and he wrote from the sick-room : ** It is the first
time in thirty-two years that I have been absent from a meeting of the American Oriental
Society, except when out of the country.** His first communication to the Society was
read by Mr. Salisbury, Octol>er 13, 1852 ; and his last, in March, |8<>4, at the last meet-
ing l>efore his death. Of the seven volumes, vi.-xii., of the Society's Journal, more
than half of the contents are from his pen, to say nothing of his numerous and important
papers in the Proceedings. In 1857, the most onerous office of the Society, that of
An Estimate of Whititeys Character and Services li
Corresponding Secretary, which from the beginning carried with it the duty of editing
the publications, was devolved upon him ; and he bore its burdens for twenty-seven
years. Add to this eighteen years as Librarian and six as President, and we have an
aggregate of fifty-one years of official service. The American Philological Association,
too, is under deep obligation to Whitney. He was one of its founders, and, very fit-
tingly, its first president. For many years he was one of the most constant attendants
at its meetings, a valued counsellor, and one of its most faithful helpers and contributors.
Some might think it a matter of little importance, but it is certainly a significant one,
that, after paying his Oriental Society assessments for about thirty-five years, at last,
and when facing mortal illness, he paid over the considerable sum required to make
himself a life member. A little later, — for the candle still burned, — and with strictest
injunction of secrecy during his lifetime, he sent to the Treasurer his check for a
thousand dollars of his modest savings, to help toward defraying the Society's expenses
of publication, and in the hope that it might serve as a " suggestion and encouragement
to others to do likewise."
Added to all this was his service in keeping up the very high scientific standard of
the Society's publications. The work of judging and selecting required wide knowledge,
and the making of abstracts much labor ; while the revision or recasting of the papers
of tyros unskilled in writing demanded endless painstaking, not always met by gratitude
and docility. All this cost him a lavish bestowal of time, of which hardly any one in
the Society knew, and that for the reason that he took no steps to have them know. So
exemplary was his freedom from self-seeking in all his relations with the Society.
The rehearsal of the titles of Mr. Whitney's books and treatises would give to this
address too much the character of a bibliographical essay ; and, besides, it would
merely tend to impress hearers who are accustomed to count volumes rather than to
weigh them. His distinguishing qualities, as reflected in his work, are everywhere so
palpable that it is not hard to describe them. Perhaps the most striking and pervading
one is that which Professor Lounsbury calls his '* thorough intellectual sanity." In read-
ing his arguments, whether constructive or critical, one can hardly help exclaiming.
How near to first principles are the criteria of the most advanced theories and high-
stepping deliverances ! With him, the impulse to prick the bubble of windy hypothesis
upon the diamond-needle (as the Hindus call it) of hard common-sense was often irre-
sistible, and sometimes irresistibly funny. Witness this passage from his boyish journal:
" On entering the river [the St. Mary's], we found ourselves in an archipelago of small
islands, which stretches from the Sault down to the foot of the Georgian Bay. says
[that] actually visited thirty-six thousand such islands, ... which in my opinion
is a whopper. To have done it, he must have stopped upon ten a day, every day for ten
years." This may seem trivial. In fact, it is typical. It is in essence the same kind
of treatment that he gave in later life to any loose statement or extravagant theory,
although printed in the most dignified journal and propounded by the most redoubtable
authority.
Breadth and thoroughness are ever at war with each other in men, for that men are
finite. The gift of both in large measure and at once, — this marks the man of genius.
That the gift was Whitney's is clear to any one who considers the versatility of his
mind, the variousness of his work, and the quality of his results. As professor of
Sanskrit, technical work in grammar, lexicography, text-criticism, and. the like, lay
nearest to him ; but with all this, he still found strength to illuminate by his insight
many questions of general linguistic theory, the origin of language, phonetics, the
difficult subject of Hindu astronomy and the question of its derivation, the method and
Hi Memorial Addnss by i/u Editor
tcchni(}ue of translation, the science of religion, mythology, linguistic elhiiok)gy, alpha*
betics, ami paleography, and much else. Astonishing is the combination of technical
knowledge in wi<lcly diverse fields wliich appears in his elalioratrly annotated translation
of the famous Sanskrit astronomical treatise called SuryasiddhAnta, and which, again^
he brought to t>ear \i\yoi\ his criticisms of earlier and later attempts to determine the age
of the Veda by its references to s<»lar eclipses, and by its alleged implications respecting
the (»lace of the ef|uinoctial colurcs.
Hut not only in res|>ec t of ctrntents were Whitney's writings of conspicuous merit ; he
had also the sense of form and pro)M>rtion, — that sense for lack of which the writings
of many a scholar of ef|ual learning are almost nugatory. At twentytwo, his English
style had the charms of simplicity, clearness, and vigor, and they held out to the last.
And what could be more admirable than his l>eauti(ul essay, — a veritable classic,-*
**'lhe V'cdic Doctrine of a Future Life**? His subjects, indeed, if treated sertoiisly,
do not lend themselves to the graces of rhetorical or ornate writing ; and his concise
and pregnant |)erio<ls sornctinu-s m<Kk the flippant or listless reader, llut his presenta-
tion, whether of argument or of scientific generalization, is always a mcKlel of lucidity,
of orderly ex|M>ftition, and of due sulnmlination of the parts. This was a matter oa
which he felt deeply ; for his patietue was often sorely tried by papers for whose sloven-
liness in diction, arrangement, and all the externals of which he was a master, the
authors fondly thought that their crufliti<m was fors(M>th an excuse.
Indeed, for the matter of printer's manuscript, more than once has lk>ehtltngk, the
Nestor of Indianists, taxed him home with making it too gcKxl, declaring it a wicked sin
to put time on such things, though playfully admitting the while that he had killed off
with his own des|>erate copy I cannot remember how many luckless type-setters In the
office of the Kassian Academv.
0
Where there was so much of the liest, it is not feasible to go into details about alL
Yet I cannot omit mention of some of his masterpieces. Very notable is his ** Language
and the .Study of Language,** — a work of wide currency, and one which has done more
than any other in this country to promote sound and intelligent views u|x>n the subjects
concerned. It deals with principles, with si>eculative questions, and with broad gener-
alizations, — the very things in which his mastery of material, self restraint, even balance
of mirul, and rigorous logic come admirably into play.
Of a wholly different type, l)ut not one whit inferior withal, are his PrAti^Akhyas.
These are the phonetico grammatical treatises upon the text of the Vetlas, and are of
prime im|>ortance for the establishment of the text. Their distinguishing feature it
minutix, of marvellous exactness, but presented in such a form that no one with aught
less than a tropical Oriental contempt for the value of time can make anything out of
them as they stand. Whitney not only out-IIindus the Hindu for minuti;r, but also —
such is his command of form — actually recasts the whole, so that it liecomes a book of
easy reference.
As for the joint edition of the AtharvaA'eda, it is a most noteworthy fact that it has
held its own now for thirty-eight years as an unsurpassed mo<lel of what a Ve«lic text-
edition ought to l>e. His ** Index \'erl)orum to the AtharvaA'eda,** a work of wonderful
completeness and accuracy, is much more than its name implies, and may not pass with-
out brief mention, inasmuch as its material formed the basis of his contributions to the
Sanskrit-(*erman lexicon publishe<i by the Imperial Academy of Russia. This great
seven volumed quarto, whose steady progress through the press took some three and
twenty years, U the Sanskrit Stephanus. Americans may well be proud of the fact
that to Whitney belongs the distinguished honor of being one of tlie four ** faithful
An Estimate of Whitney s Character and Services liii
collaborators*' who, next to the authors, Boehtlingk and Roth, contributed most to
this monumental work.
Of all his technical works, his " Sanskrit Grammar," with its elaborate supplement,
*' The Roots, Verb-forms, and Primary Derivatives of the Sanskrit Language," forms
the crowning achievement. Here he casts off the bonds of tradition wherever they
might hamper his free scientific procedure, and approaches the phenomena of language
in essentially the same spirit and attitude of mind as that in which Darwin or Hclmholtz
grappled the problems of their sciences. The language is treated historically, and as
the product of life and growth ; and the work is filled with the results of scores of
minute and far-reaching special investigations. The amount of material which is here
subjected to rigorous and original methods of classification and scientific induction is
enormous ; and none but those who were familiar with his writing-table can well realize
the self-restraint that he used in order to bring his results into moderate compass.
In all these technical works there is litde that appeals to the popular imagination,
and absolutely nothing to catch the applause of the groundlings ; but much, on the
other hand, to win the confidence of the judicious. It was therefore natural that
Whitney should be sought as editor-in-chief for what is in every sense by far the
greatest lexicographical achievement of America, "The Century Dictionary." And
despite the ability and size of the editorial staff, we may well believe that this office was
no sinecure ; for the settlement of the principles of procedure demanded the full breadth
of learning, the largeness of view, and the judicial temper of a master mind. Among
the great body of his countrymen, this will be Whitney's best-known monument.
Mr. Whitney was a genuine lover of nature and of the world out of doors no less
than of his books ; and so, with his keen sense of humor and love of fun, he was a
charming companion for the woods and hills. Physical courage, too, abounded, often
with a daring impulse to meet bodily risk and danger, as when he climbed the so-called
Look-off Pine, about one hundred and thirty feet high, a monarch overtopping the
primeval forests of the Ontonagon River, and broke off its top as a trophy ; or as when,
with his brother, he indulged in the youthful escapade of passing the forbidden point of
the spire of Strasburg Cathedral by clambering out and around the point of obstruction
on the outside, and of mounting thence toward the summit as far as there was any
opening within the spire large enough to contain a man's body. He was intensely
American, in the best sense of the word ; and his patriotism, aside from its loftier mani-
festations (of which a moment later), showed itself in some lesser ways not unpleasing
to recall. In describing his passage through the wilds of the Detroit River, he says in
that youthful journal, "There was little difference in the appearance of the two sides;
but I endeavored to persuade myself that the American offered evidence of more active
and successful industry than the British." l^' /hf}f) /' f .
I venture to quote in part the words and in part the substance of a recent letter from /^ ^ s /;^
one of his old pupils. There is no one, said this pupil, whose privilege it was to know
him more intimately, who could not speak of the deep tenderness underlying his ordinary /'pTz - K '^
reserve, of his profound sympathy with difficulty and misfortune, and of his ever-steadfast
loyalties. Of the last a touching illustration is found in his remembrance of the Schaal
family, in whose house auf dem Grabcn he lodged during his Tubingen summers of
1 85 1 and 1852. Nearly forty years later he wrote to this pupil, then in Tubingen,
asking him to seek out the Schaals, and to be the bearer of kindly messages to them.
Fraulein Schaal spoke of the delight her mother and herself had felt at the messages
sent them by the professor who had become so celebrated, but who had not forgotten
them, and showed the visitor Professor Whitney's room, all unchanged, a typical
liv Memorial Address by the Editor
StmiUHtfHtimmer; in the mtcldlc, a long plain tal>le, and by it an uncushioned aim-chair.
That, ^lid !ihc, was Profcv^uir Whitney *s chair, and in it he used to sit for hours at that
table, almoftt without movinfr. When he moved the chair more than a little, I knew
(hat it was time for me to take him his muj; of l>eer, and perchance a bit of bread. Am!,
a^ a very small ^\\\ then, I wondered at the table, which was covered with little bits of
pa)>cr, witich he had arranged in a certain order, and was very particular that no one
shouhl cliMurb. The only adornment which he had in the room was an American fla|^
<lra)>ed over the mitror ; and on the Fourth of July he said he would work an hour lets
than u%u.tl, 7i% it wasi the anniversary of American independence. The flag was the
symbol of a true passion; and in his toils for truth he felt that be wxs working, first for
the welfare, and second for the glory of his country. And as for the latter, how many
an American student in (Germany has l>een proud of the generous recognition of
Whitney's success ! Years ago, continues the letter, I was exchanging a few words with
a famous Orientalist. The llcrr Professor kindly aske<l me from what part of Americm
I came. New Jersey, I told him, and his face grew very blank. 1 know Connecticut,
said he. Anfl he knew Connecticut, as did his colleagues, largely because he knew
Whitney. So much for the letter of a loving and l>eloved pupil.
It sugt^ests withal an inquiry : What was the .secret of Whitney*s great productivity?
In the first instance, — it is almost needless to say, — his native gifts. Ilttt it is far
from true that native gifts are always fruitful. Next to them came his power of dis-
cerning what was the really important thing to do, and his habit — self-imposed, and
enforced with Spartan rigor — of doing something every working-day upon that really
important thing, and, above all, of doing that something first. Such was hb regularity
that even the dire necessity — which arose in 18S2 — of moving from one dwelling-
house into another did not break it. ** Even moving,** he writes, ** 1 expect to find con-
sistent with regular doses of TalavakAra, etc.** The ** art of judicious slighting** was a
household word in his family, a weapon of might ; its importance to the really great It
equalled only by its perilousness in the hands of the unskilful. His plans were formed
with circunvspection, with careful counting of the cost, and then adhered to with the
utmost persistence, so that he left behind him nothing fragmentary. We may change
Goldsmith's epitaph to suit the case, and say that Whitney put his hand to nothing that
he did not carry out, — nihil qttod imepit non ptrfecit.
And what shall I say of the lesser virtues that graced him? As patient as the
earth, say the Hindus. And endless patience was his where patience was in place.
And how beautiful was his gentleness, his kindness to those from whom he looked for
nothing again, his gratitude to those who did him a service! And how especially well
did the calm dignity which was ever his wont become him when he presided at the
meetings of learned societies! How notable the brevity with which he presented his
papers! No lalx>red reading from a manuscript, but rather a simple and facile account
of results. An example, surely! He who had the most to say usetl in proportion the
least time in saying it. And this was indeed of a piece with his most exemplary habit,
as editor of the publications of the Oriental Society, of keeping his own name so far in
the background. For how genuine was his modesty of bearing, of s)>eech, and of
soul !
And in harmony therewith was his reverence for things hallowed.
He counted not himself to have attaine<l.
This doughty toiler on the paths nf truth ;
Ai»d scorned not them who lower heights had reached.
An Estimate of Whitney s Character and Services Iv
As was his attitude toward things sacred, so also was it toward those who went before
him in science. He did not speak sneeringly of what they, with lesser light, had
achieved. And to him Aristotle was none the less a giant because some dwarf on a
giant's shoulders can see farther than the giant himself.
If I may cite my own words used on a former occasion, Whitney's life-work shows
three important lines of activity, — the elaboration of strictly technical works, the
preparation of educational treatises, and the popular exposition of scientific questions.
The last two methods of public service are direct and immediate, and to be gainsaid of
none ; yet even here the less immediate results are doubtless the ones by which he
would have set most store. As for the first, some may incline to think the value of an
edition of the Veda or of a Sanskrit grammar — to say nothing of a Prati^akhya —
extremely remote ; they certainly won for him neither money nor popular applause ; and
yet, again, such are the very works in which we cannot doubt he took the deepest satis-
faction. He realized their fundamental character, knew that they were to play their
part in unlocking the treasures of Indian antiquity, and knew that that antiquity has its
great lessons for us moderns; further, that the history of the languages of India, as it
has indeed already modified, is also yet to modify, and that profoundly, the whole
teaching of classical and Germanic philology, both in method and in contents ; and that
the history of the evolution of religions in India is destined to exert a powerful influence
for good upon the development of religious thought and life among us and our children.
He labored, and other men shall enter into his labors. But it is this *' faith, the
assurance of things hoped for," — irto-ri? iKiriffl^kviav vjroorao-t?, — which is one of the
most vital attributes of the true scholar.
In the autumn of 1886 came the beginning of the end, an alarming disorder of
the heart. Adhering closely to a strictly prescribed physical regimen, he labored on,
according to his wavering strength, heaping, as it were, the already brimming measure
of his life-work. His courage, his patient learning of the art of suffering, his calm
serenity in facing the ever-present possibility of sudden death, — this was heroic. And
through it all forsook him not the two grand informing motives of his life, — the pure
love of truth, and an all-absorbing passion for faithful service.
With this love of truth, this consuming zeal for service, with this public spirit and
broad humanity, this absolute truthfulness and genuineness of character, is not this life
an inspiration and an example more potent by far than years of exhortation ? Is not
this truly one of the lives that make for righteousness?
And what then ? On the tympanum of the theatre at Harvard are inscribed in the
Vulgate version those noble words from the book of Daniel : —
QVIAVTEMDOCTIFVERINT
FVLGEBVNTQVASISPLENDORFIRMAMENTI
ET'QVIAD-IVSTITIAMERVDIVNTMVLTOS
QVASISTELLAEINPERPETVASAETERNITATES
We may say them of him : And they that be wise shall shine as the brightness of the
firmament ; and they that turn many to righteousness, as the stars for ever and ever.
SKLFXT LIST OF WHITNEY'S WRITINGS
This list is reprinted with unimportant modifications from the one com*
piled by Whitney and published at New Haven, 1893, as his part of the
Ihblio^raphies of the Present Ojffuen of )\i/e i'mversity. It consists of
al)out 150 numbers; a much fuller list (of about 360 numbers) is given
in thcMcmoria^\)lumcmei^^ The articles (about
a score) reprinted in his Oneutal and Ltn^uistie Studies (First series, 1873 :
Second series, 1874) are marked by the note "Reprinted in Studies^**
with an added i. or ii.
The abbreviations are for the most part as explained below, pages ci-
cvi ; but for the non-technical reader, several of the most frequently
cited serials may here be noted : Journal of the American Oriental
Society (JAOS); Transactions of the American Philological Association
(ATA.) ; American Journal of rhilolo*;y (AJT.) ; North American Review
(N. Amer. Rev.).
1849 On the Brammaiical Mrurture of the Sanskrit. (Translated and abfidged from von
Hnhlrn.) BtHn*thf€a Sttt^tt, \i. 471-4S6.
1850 A comparison nf the (vrerk and I^ttn \crlM. /^f</, vii. 654-66S.
1851 TAltrllarischr I>arstellunf* drr grf*cnsrtttf;en VerhalinUne der Sanhitis des Rik, Slaun,
weN*rn Yajus iind Atharvan. /ntt. S/u*t , ii. }2i-yfA.
185S (>ti the main rrsults f«f the later Vedic researches in Germany. JAOS. iii. 2S9-33S.
kepnntetl in StuJui^ i.
1854 On fhr hinlorv <»f the Vctii* Icxtf. /A/./, iv. 245- 761.
1855 Bripp's Comparative acrentuation of the (jierk arxl Sanskrit lanf^uages. IhtJ„ y. I95>*|S.
On the Ave^ta. or the sarreil scriptures of the Zoroastrian religion. IhJ., y. 337-^3.
Krprinte<t in StuJift, i.
1856 ('«>ntfil>utions from the Atharva-Veda to the theory of Sanskrit verbal acrent. ihd^
V- 3*^5 419- I'ranslated into (vcrman in Kuhn and Schlekher't Bntfagte t. vtrgt.
1855-56 AtharvaVeiU^^anhita. herau«geget)eii von K. Roth ttnd W. D. Whitney. I, 1S55;
?. |S;C»; rr»y S^ 45.S pp.
1857 AlphalM-ti«chr% Vrr/eiihntss cl«*r Vrrtanfangr der Atharva-Saifchitl. /W. JiW^/., iv. 9-64.
1858 Th«* British in Imha. A'nv En-^Under^ ivi. loo-f |i. Reprinted in Stmdiet, iL
1859 c hina ati'l the Chinese, /hit ^ xvii. 111-14;. Reprinted in Stti,/ui, li.
(»n the V*r<lic d<M trine of a future life. IitNii*tketa Sa^ra^w'x. 40^-^20, Reprinted in
StMtiift, i.
1860 Tr.in>Uti'm of the Surya .^iddhanta. a test lM>ok of I lindo astronomy : «ith m»l<t» And
an ap|w>fiilii JAOS \i. i|i-4>S. [Il')th tran«I.i*ion ami notes are entirely 1>J Tfo-
fr^«or Whitney, though in the work itself this fart is acknowledged only in the words
"a*^i«»lr<l l»v lh»* <*«immiffrr of Pulihcation **]
1861 t'hinji anil the VVr^t AV»* i- n^tanJ^r^ x\x \-\\. Reprinted in StttJiet, ii.
.Miillcr'« History of Vedic literature. Ckrtthan lixamtner^\x%. 2y~zS\. Reprinted M
SfttJift, i.
Ivi
For tlu Years 1 849-1 871 Ivii
1861 On Lepsius*s Standard Alphabet. /A OS. vii. 29^332.
Review of Soule and Wheeler's Manual of English pronunciation and spelling. Nno
Ettglander^ xix. 913-929.
1862 The Atharva-Veda-Prati9akhya, or ^aunakiya CaturidhyiyikS: text, translation, and
notes. JAOS. vii. 333-616.
1863 On the views of Biot and Weber respecting the relations of the Hindu and Chinese
systems of asterisms ; with an addition, on Miiller's views respecting the same subject.
Ibui.t viii. 1-94.
1861-1863 The following articles in AppUton*s New American Cyclopadia^ ist ed. : Persia,
Language and Literature of, xiii. 324-328. — Sanskrit, xiv. 611-616. — Semitic Race
and Languages, xiv. 760-762. — Syriac Language and Literature, xv. 547-549. — Tura-
nian Race and Languages, xvi. 42-43. — Turkish Language and Literature, xvi. 63-66.
— Veda, xvi. 2S0. — Zendavesta, xvi. 810-81 1. — Zoroaster, xvi. 834-835.
1864 Brief abstract of a series of six lectures on the Principles of Linguistic Science, delivered
at the Smithsonian Institution in March, 1864. Smithsonian Reportiox 1864, pp. 95-1 16.
1865 On the jyotisha observation of the place of the colures, and the date derivable from it.
JRAS. L 316-331.
On Miiller's second series of lectures on the Science of Language. N, Amer. Rev.^ c.
565-581. Reprinted in J/W/>j, i.
Is the study of language a physical science ? Ibid.^ ci. 434-474.
1866 On Lepsius's Standard Alphabet: a letter of explanations from Prof. Lepsius, with notes
by W. D. Whitney. JAOS. viii. 335-373.
Reply to the strictures of Prof. Weber upon an essay respecting the asterismal system
of the Hindus, Arabs, and Chinese. Ibid.^ viii. 382-398.
1867 Language and the Study of Language : twelve lectures on the principles of linguistic
science. New York, 12®, xi + 489 pp. Translated into German by Prof. Julius Jolly,
1874, Miinchen (Ackermann), 8°, xxix + 713 pp. ; — into Netherlandish by J. Beckering
Vinckers, 2 vols., 1877-81, Haarlem (Bohn), 8° xvi + 436 pp. and iv + 476 pp.
The value of linguistic science to ethnology. New Englander^ xxvi. 30-52.
Languages and dialects. N. Amer. Rev., civ. 30-64.
On the testimony of language respecting the unity of the human race. Ibid.., cv. 214-241.
Key and Oppert on Indo-European philology. Ibid., cv. 521-554. Reprinted in Studies, i.
The aim and object of the Sheffield Scientific School. Annual Statement for 1S67-8,
pp. 9-21.
1868 The translation of the Veda. N. Amer. Rev., cvi. 515-542. Reprinted in Studies, i.
On A. M. Bell's Visible Speech, /bid., cvii. 347-358. Reprinted in Studies, ii.
1869 On Miiller's Chips from a German Workshop, I., II. /bid., cix. 544-556. Reprinted in
Studies, ii.
A Compendious German Grammar, with supplement of exercises. New York, 1 2°, xvi -f-
252 -f 51 pp.
1870 A German Reader, in prose and verse, with notes and vocabulary. New York, 12^
X + 523 PP-
Miiller on the Science of Religion. Nation, No. 276, Oct. 13.
On comparative grammars. N. Amer. Rev., cxi. 199-208.
1871 On the nature and designation of the accent in Sanskrit. Trans, APA. for 1S69-70,
pp. 20-45.
On the present condition of the question as to the origin of language. Ibid., pp. 84-94.
Reprinted in Studies, i.
On Cox's Mythology of the Aryan Nations. N. Amer. Rev.^ cxii. 218-229. Reprinted
in Studies, ii.
On Miiller's translation of the Rig- Veda. Ibid., cxiii. 174-187. Reprinted in Studies, i.
Language and Education. Ibid., cxiii. 343-374. Reprinted in Studies, i.
On Miiller's lectures on the Science of Language, 6th ed. Ibid., cxiii. 430-441. Reprinted
in Studies, i.
Iviii Sc/i'ci List of Whitney s Writings
1171 I.Kamtnatton of Dr. Ilaug't viewi respecting Sanskrit accentoation. JAOS. i.. pp. Is-ii,
= yViv. for May.
The l&ittifiya rr.^tt^ikhya. with \\% rommentary. the Tribhlshyaratna : teit, trmntUtio««
and notes. JAOS. ii. 1-4611.
1I7S Stetnthal on the Origin of Language. X. Amer. ^rt:, ctiv. 272>3oS. Reprinted la
StttJus, i.
jacoUiot's Bible in India. /nJe^nJrnt, May t.
Stticturen on the views r»f August S4 hieicher re^|>ecting the naturt of languag* and kin-
dred tuhjecls. 7>ri «ti. ATA. for 1A71, pp. 35-64. Reprinted in Studut^ i.
187) Oriental and linguistic Studies: the Veda; the Avetta; the ScierKt of I^nf«aft.
New York, 12^ ix + 417 pp- [First series.]
On material and form in language. Tram, A PA. for 1872. pp. 77-^-
Notes to ColelMooke's Kstay on the Vedas. Tp. 103-132 of vol. 1 of tht aecond cditioA
of Colehrooke't Essays, l^ndon, S^
Intercollegiate emulation. A'atii*n» No. 397, Feb. 20.
On the U. S. Geological Survey of the Territories. Amer. J^mrmmi 0/ S€um€f to^ Dk^
vi. 46]- 466.
Hall's Recent Kxemplifications of False Philology. TAe AVw V^k Ttmft, Ftb. t^
Hall's Mo<lern Knglish. IhJ., Occ 6
The llayden Expedition (letters from (*olorado). The AV» V^rk TW^mm/, extra No. 14,
Dec. 30.
Text lK>oks for the study of Sanskrit. The (Vale) CW///y C^mrmmi, Dec. 13. Reprinted,
with corrections and additions. June 37« 1874.
La question de I'anusvira Sanscrit. Mim^tret dt la S^tM iti Ltmguuitfmt d4 i^aru^
vol. 2 (1875). pp. i«>4 199-
1874 On Darwinism and language. X. Amer. A'rt'., cxix. 61-88.
Oriental atul linguistic Studies. Second series : I'he East and Weat ; Relifiott 9mA
Mythology; Orthography and Phonology; Hindu Astronomy. New York, 12*,
xi + 43» PP
Who shall direct the national surveys.' Nah^m^ No. 464, May 21.
On Peile's Greek and I^ttn Etymology. Tram. Pktifii. .W. 0/ L^mil^m for l87j>4,
pp. 297 327
On the Chinese tin* as constellations. JAOS. x.. pp. Ixxxii-lxxxv, s Prtt. for May.
On rrcent discussions as to the phonetic character of the Sanskrit ammsvdrs, /M.,
pp Ixxxvi-lxxxviit.
On the Sanskrit accent and Dr. Haug. /M., pp. ciii-<v (for Oct.).
1879 The life and Growth of language: an outline of linguistic icience. (Intematiottsl
Scientific Series, vol. 16) New York, 12'*. ix -f 326 pp. Translated into Germaa by
Prof. A. I>eskien, 1876, i2\ xv + 350 pp., I^pxig (Hrockhaes); — into Frcocli, 1876^
8\ vu + 264 pp. Parts (tlaillicre) ; into Italian by Prof. F. d'Ovidto, 1876, 8^ sxi -«•
389 pp, Milan (Dumolard); — into Netherlandish by G. Velderman, 1879, 8^, vl 4*
274 pp.. Arnhem (Ouiiit) ; — into Swedish by G. Stjernstrom, 18S0, tt\ Ttii -f 320 pp.,
Stockholm (Itjorik).
^Wfi or 0^0u~- natural or conventional ? Trams. ATA. for 1874, pp. 95-116.
Are languages institutions > C^fHtemf^rary Kev. (I^ndon). xxv. 713-732.
Strettfragen der heutigen Sprachphilosophie. Deuttehe KHnd$<hau (Rerlin), W. 251^27^
1876 On the classification of the forms of the Sanskrit aortst. JAOS. x., pp. ouW-cssv, s
/V«v for May.
Z«v = i/r<fM/, and other points relatmg to Sanskrit grammar, as presented ia M. MiiBtt't
recent volume of ••('hips.'* IhJ.^ pp. cxxvi-<xxix.
On I>e Rouge's derivation of the Phenician alphabet from the Egyptian cliafactcfs.
Jhtd , pp. cxxxi cxxxii (for Nov ).
The study of English grammar. Xr» Englan J Journal aj EJm€mii0m, Mar. l8, Apr. I},
May 13
For the Years 1871-1885 lix
1876 Muller's Rig- Veda and commentary. New Englandery xxxv. 772-791.
Language. Article \r\ Johnson's New Universal Cyelopadia^ ii. 1633-1641.
The system of the Sanskrit verb. Proe. APA.^ pp. 6-8, in Trans, for 1876.
1877 Essentials of English Grammar, for the use of Schools. Boston, 12°, xi + 260 pp.
A botanico-philological problem. Trans. APA. for 1876, pp. 73-86.
On Cockneyisms. Proe. APA., pp. 26-28, in Trans, for 1877.
On the current explanation of the middle endings in the Indo-European verb. JAOS.
X., pp. cxliii-cxlv, = Proe. for May.
Douse on Grimm's Law. Nation^ No. 631, Aug. 2.
1878 On the relation of surd and sonant. Trans. APA. for 1877, pp. 41-57.
The principle of economy as a phonetic force. Ibid.f pp. 123-134.
On the derivative conjugations of the Sanskrit verb. JAOS. x., pp. clxvili-clxx, = Proe.
for May.
1879 A Sanskrit Grammar, including both the classical language and the older dialects, of
Veda and Brahmana. Leipzig (Breitkopf u. Ilartel), 8°, xxiv + 486 pp. Second ed.,
revised and extended, /VJ/V/., 1889, xxvi + 552 pp. Third ed., ibid.^ 1896. Translated
into German by Prof. IL Zimmer, ibid., 1879, 8®, xxviii + 520 pp.
1880 Collation of a second manuscript of the Atharva-Veda Prati^akhya. JAOS. x. 156-17 1.
Ix>gical consistency in views of language. A/P. i. 327-343.
MUller's Sacred Books of the East. Independent, Nov. 11.
Sayce on the Science of Language. Nation, No. 774, Apr. 29.
On the rules of external combination in Sanskrit. JAOS. xi., pp. xxxii-xxxiv, = Proe.
for May.
On the transliteration of Sanskrit. Ibid., xi., pp. li-liv, = Proe. for Oct.
1881 Index Verborum to the published text of the Atharva-Veda. Ibid., xii. 1-383.
On the so-called Science of Religion. Prineeton Rev., Ivii. 429-452.
On inconsistency in views of language. Trans. APA. for 1880, pp. 92-112.
What is articulation? AJP. ii. 345-350.
On Lepsius's Nubian Grammar. Ibid., ii. 362-372.
1882 On mixture in language. Trans. APA. for 1881, pp. 5-26.
General considerations on the Indo-European case-system. Ibid, for 1882, pp. 88-100.
Eggeling's translation of the (^atapatha-Brahmana. AJP. iii. 391-410.
The cosmogonic hymn. Rig- Veda x. 129. JAOS. xi., pp. cix-cxi, = Proe. for May.
Further words as to surds and sonants, and the law of economy as a phonetic force.
Proe. APA., pp. 1 2-18, in Trans, for 1882.
Le pr^tendu Henoth^isme du Veda. Revue de VHistoire des Religions (Paris), vi. 1 29-1 43.
1888 On the Jaiminlya- or Talavakara-Brahmana. JAOS. xi., pp. cxliv-cxlviii, = Proe. for
May.
Isaac Taylor's The Alphabet. Seienee, Sept. 28.
The various readings of the Sama-Veda. JAOS. xi.,pp. clxxxiv-clxxxv, = Proe. for Oct.
1884 The varieties of predication. Trans. APA. for 1883, pp. 36-41.
The study of Hindu grammar and the study of Sanskrit. AJP. v. 279-297.
On E. Kuhn's Origin and Language of the Transgangetic Peoples. Ibid., v. 88-93.
On the classification of certain aorist-forms in Sanskrit. JAOS. xi., pp. ccxviii-ccxx, =
Proe. for Oct.
On the etymology of the Sanskrit noun vrata. Ibid., pp. ccxxix-ccxxxi.
1885 On combination and adaptation as illustrated by the exchanges of primary and secondary
suffixes. Trans. APA. for 1884, pp. 111-123.
The roots, verb-forms, and primary derivatives of the Sanskrit language. A supplement
to his Sanskrit Grammar, by W. D. W. Leipzig (Breitkopf u. Hartel), 8**, xiv + 250 pp.
Translated into German by Prof. H. Zimmer, ibid., 18S5, 8°, xv -|- 252 pp.
The sis- and j-/x-aorists (6th and 7th aorist forms) in Sanskrit. AJP. vi. 275-284.
Numerical results from indexes of Sanskrit tense- and conjugation-stems. JAOS. xiii.,
pp. xxxii-xxxv, = Proe. for May.
Ix SeUct List of Whitucys Writings
1889 On rrofem%or Ludwig't vietn rctpcctinj; total ecliptea of the tun ms noticed in tbc Rlf*
Veda. IhJ^ itii . pp. Ui \x\\ (for Oct.).
Philology, pt I. — Science ol language in general. Article in the Emffii. Br%t x\vL
765-780.
Lr<liie<l : Forty yean' rerord of the clatt of 18^5, Williamt College. New Haven. 8*.
xvti 4- If/) pp. Pages 175 i8j contain an autobiographical aketch. Although brief,
it i« of importance l>ecauBc it is trustworthy J
1886 Hindu eschalology and the Kafha Upanishad. JAOS. xiii^ pp. ciii-cviii, rs /V«r. for
May
A Practical French (Wammar, with exercises and illustrative sentences from Frenck
authors. New York, 12'', xiii 4- 443 pp.
The roots of the Sanskrit languagr. Trams. APA. for §885, pp. 5-19^
The Upanishads and their latest translation. A/P. vit 1-26.
The following articks in A^^Utt*tt't \ew A merit am Cyth^dta^ id ed. ; Alphabet. 1. J«S-
351. — Africa, Languages of, i. 171. — Aryan Kace and language, i. 799-801.
1887 The method of phonetic change in language. /V«r. APA.^ pp. 3J-3$tin TVams. for 1886.
The Vetlx Crnfitry Afaj;>iztnf^ xxxiii. 912-922.
Notes on part IV. of Schrtnier's edition of the MiitrlyafilSaihhitl. JAOS. xiii. pp.
ccxxvi-ccxxviii. = /V«v. for Oct.
1888 On the second volume of Kggeling's translation of the (^atapathaBrlhmmna. IktJ. ziv.,
pp. vi-xi (for Oct ).
1889 On the r and dr forms of Sanskrit roots. IhtJ. xiv., pp. czlviti-<l (for Oct.).
1890 Hohllingk's Tpanishads. A/P xi 407-439
1891 Translation of the Kaiha I'panishad. T'dnt. APA. for 1890, pp. 88-112.
Open letter to the memtiers of the American Oriental Society. Privately printed. New
Haven, 8^, 8 pp.
1^1889 91 The Century Dictionary. An Encyrlope<lic I^exicon of the Knglish Language.
Preparetl under the sufwrinlendence of William Owight Whitney, Fh. I)., U..I).,
l*rofessor of Comparative Philology and Sanskrit in Vale University. Publbhed by
The Century Co. New York. In six volumes, royal quarto. Pages xviti -f 7046
( ~ 21,138 columns) ♦ 30 J
[^llie preface to the first volume is dated May ist, 18.S9. The tupplementary note to
preface is dated Ortolirr 1st. 1891. The actual work began, of course, long before
the prior date. The "superintendence " of the lexicon naturally involved very far-
reaching thought and planning (p liii, at>ove) ; but. in addition to this, the proofs ol
every one of the 21.13S columns were read by Mr. Whitney himself. See T%e Cemiury
Afaj^tttme^ xxxix. 31 5 J
1891 On IMbruck's Vedic Syntax. A/P. xiii. 271-306-
Max Muller and the science of language : a criticism. New York, 12**, iii 4- 79 pp.
|_ J/r. ll'Mttme/t Utt (Utet ken. The feil awing titlet are aJJed hy the /i/i/^r. J
Announcement as to a second volume of the Roth* Whitney edition of the Atharra^Veda.
JAOS. XV., pp. clxxi-clxiiii. = /V<»r. for April.
On the narrative use of imperfect and perfect in the Brihmanas. Trams. APA. for 189a,
m> 5 34
Review of F. Max Muller's Vedic Hymns, Translated. (Sacred Books of the East. vol. }2.)
The Xew IIW/J (ot June, pp. 349-351.
1898 Select list of Whitrtey's writings. (Kssentially the same as that just given: see above,
P Ki)
The native commentary to the Atharva-Veda Peitgruti am P^k (Stuttgart, Koblh;
tH^f). pp- 89-96.
The Veda in PininL Gtern,tle delU So%tet*i Att.itua itMtama^ vii. 243-254.
For i/i€ Years 1885-1894 Ixi
1893 Simplified spelling. A symposium on the question " Is simplified spelling feasible as
proposed by the English and American I^hilological Societies ? " XI. The Afnerican
A nth ropologisty A pril .
On recent studies in Hindu grammar. AJP. xiv. 171-197.
On recent studies in Hindu grammar. JAOS. xvi., pp. xii-xix, = Proc. for April.
1894 Examples of sporadic and partial phonetic change in English. Brugmann und Streit-
berg's Indogermanische Forschungetty iv. 32-36.
On a recent attempt, by Jacobi and Tilak, to determine on astronomical evidence the
date of the earliest Vedic period as 4000 B.C. JAOS. xvi., pp. Ixxxii-xciv, = Proc. for
March.
On the third volume of Eggeling's translation of the (^atapatha-Brahmana, with remarks
on " soma = the moon." Ibid.^ xvi., pp. xcv-ci.
\_J*osthumously published. \
1905 Atharva-Veda Samhita: translated, with a critical and exegetical commentary. Revised
and brought nearer to completion and edited by C. R. L. Cambridge, Mass., roy. 8°,
clxii + iv + 1046 pp. (Vol's vii. and viii. of the Harvard Oriental Series.)
GENERAL INTRODUCTION, PART I.
BY THE EDITOR
General Premises
Scope of this Part of the Introduction. — As stated above, p. xxix, this
Part contains much that might, but for its voluminousness, have been put
into a preface. The main body of the present work consists of transla-
tion and commentary. Of the latter, the constituent elements are mainly
text-critical, and their sources may be put under ten headings, as follows :
1 . Vulgate. European mss. 6. Vulgate. Prati^sLkhya and its comm.
2. Vulgate. Indian mss. 7. Vulgate. The Anukramanls.
3. Vulgate. Indian reciters. 8. Vulgate. Kau^ika and V§itana.
4. Vulgate. Commentator's readings. 9. Kashmirian recension. Paippalada ms.
5. Vulgate. Pada-readings. 10. Parallel texts.
Of these sources, nine concern the Atharva-Veda, and the tenth concerns
the parallel texts. Of the nine concerning the Atharva-Veda, eight con-
cern the Vulgate or Caunakan recension, and the ninth concerns the
Kashmirian or Paippalada recension. Of the eight concerning the Vul-
gate, the first four concern both the samhitd- and the pada-pafhas} and
the second four concern the ancillary texts.
Partly by way of indicating what may fairly be expected in the case of
each of these elements, and partly by way of forestalling adverse criti-
cism, it will be well to make certain observations upon them seriatim,
under the ten headings. Under an eleventh, I desire to add something
to what was said in the preface, p. xxxvii, about the commentary as a
whole; and, under a twelfth, to add a few necessary remarks concerning
the translation. Under a thirteenth, the explanation of abbreviations etc.
may be put ; and finally, under a fourteenth, a tabular view of previous
translations and comments.
Scope of the reports of variant readings. — By " variant readings** are here
meant departures from the printed Berlin text.^ Absence of report means
^ poubtless the paJa-pStha also is an ancillary text, and these headings are therefore not
quite logical ; but they will serve.
' Here it is to be noted that, by reason of breakage of type, the last part of the "run '* (as
the printers say) is not always like the first ; in other words, that not every copy of the Berlin
edition is like every other (cf. note to i. 18. 4).
Ixiii
Ixiv Gcm-nxl Intrixiuction, Part /. ; by t/u Editor
in pcnrral that the mss. present no true variants, albeit Whitney docs
not rohcMrsc rvery*stu|)i«l blunder of every ignorant scribe. There is of
course no dear line to be drawn between such blunders and true variants ;
and in this matt<T we must to a certain degtee trust the discrimination
of the Irarnrd editors.
The term •« manuscripts'* often used loosely for ''authorities,** that is,
manuscripts and oral reciters. — S. I*. Pandit, in establishing; his text,
relied not only upon the testimony of written books, but also u|>on that
of livin;; reciters of the Veda. Accordinj;ly, it should once for all here
be premised that Whitney in the secpiel has often used the word "manu-
scripts" (or •* mss.*') whfn he meant to include lM>th mss. and reciters and
shouhl have used the less specific word ** authorities." I have often, but
not always,* chan;;rd "mss." to ** authorities," when precise conformity
to the facts required it.
The difficulty of verifying; statements as to the weight of authority for a
given reading may be illustrated by the following case. At iii. lo. I2c
Whitney's first draft says, *• The s of tt tuui/utnta is demanded by IVit.
ii. ()2, but SPP. gives in his text vy tisti/ttvtftt, with the comm., but against
the decided majority of his mss., and the minority of ours (II.O., and per-
haps others : record incomplete)." The second draft reads, "SPP. gives
in his text ij as-t against the decided majority of all the mss." Scruti-
nizing the authorities, written and oral, for the samhttA (since for this vari-
ant/<i</«r mss. do not count), I find that Whitney records II.O., and that
SI*r. records Hh.K.A.Sm.V . as giving /, in all, seven authorities; and
that Whitney records T.M W.K.I.K . and that SPP. records K.D.R., as
giving J, in all, nine authorities. Whitney's record is silent as to R.T. ;
antl SPP's reiM)rt of K. is wrong either one way or else the other. The
peiple.xities of the situation are palpable. I hedged by altering in the
proof the words of the second draft so as to read "against a majority of
the mss. rejK)rted by him."
I. Readings of European Mss. of the Vulgate Recension
The reports include mss. collated, some before publication of the text, and
some thereafter. — To the prior group behmg Hp. H.P.M. W.K.I. H. ; to
the latter, coll.ited some twenty years after publication,' belong O.R.T.K.
Op. I) Kp. Whitney's description of the mss. is given in Part II. of the
Intro<lnetion (p. cxi), and to it are prefi.xed (pp ex- cxi) convenient tabular
' I hii« in the note to iii. 7. ;. *' a couple of .S|*r*t mt« '* meant two men. not l>ook<. Cf. fotct
t«« in ; • *^ . W t
* In .li*« u*%iin; itt • } (y, VVhitttr) »ars in the Prit. (p. 44?). ** Kirrry codex presents JtSmk*';
f»hilc in till* w"fk (lirlnw, p 1 jS) Iif rr|M>rt% O at r'^AilinR Jnlttt Since ••every codei"
r*«rfv (i>i1.-t f.llitf'l ticfutc pul>li< attoii. tla* 1% n> contradiction.
I . Readings of European Mss. of the Vulgate Ixv
views of the mss. The immediate source of these reports is his Collation-
Book : see pages cxvii to cxix. In the Collation-Book, the Berlin and
Paris readings (B.P.) are in black ink; the Bodleian readings (M.W.) are
in red; the London or " E.I.H." readings are in blue; and, excepting the
variants of K.Kp. (which are also in blue), those of the mss. collated after
publication (O.R.T.Op.D.) are in violet. The writing is a clear but small
hand. The indications of agreement with the fundamental transcript are
cither implicit (the absence of any recorded variant), or else made explicit
by the use of very small exclamation-points. The differences of method
in recording are duly explained at the beginning of the Collation-Book, as
are also the meanings of the various colored inks : and Whitney's procedure
throughout the Book conforms rigorously to his prefatory explanations.
The interpretation of a record so highly condensed and not always complete
was sometimes an occasion of error, even for Whitney who made the
record and knew the circumstances of its making ; and, as may well be
imagined, such interpretation was positively difficult and embarrassing for
the editor (who had not this knowledge), especially in cases where, after
the lapse of years, the colors of the inks were somewhat faded. — Thus
Whitney misinterprets his notes of collation at vi. 36. 2, where it is P.I.K. ♦— ^
(and not Bp.M.K., as he wrote it in his copy for the printer) that read ^
vi^odh, — Again, at vi. 83. 3, it is W.O.D. (and not H.O.R., as he wrote /
it for the printer) that read galantds. — Again, in writing out his com- / c^
mentary for the printer so many years after making his collation, he
frequently forgot that there was no Op. for books v.-xvii., and has
accordingly often reported a reading in violet ink as a reading of Op.
when he should have reported it as a reading of D. This slip happened
occasionally through several hundred type-pages and remained unnoticed
even until the electroplates were made ; but I believe I have had all the
instances of this error rectified in the plates. — Likewise, in writing
out tor the printer, the fact seems to have slipped from his mind that
he had made his fundamental transcript of book v. from codex Chambers
109 (= Bp.*) and not, like all the rest of the first nine books, from Cham-
bers 8 (= Bp.). I have accordingly had to change " Bp." into " Bp.',**
or vice versa, some ten times in book v. (at 6. 8 ; 7. 3 ; 8. 3 ; 24. 3, 14 ;
27. 10; 30. 11). — I may add that in (the often critically desperate)
book xix., Whitney seems to use such an expression as "half the mss.**
loosely in the sense of "a considerable part of the mss.** : so at xix. 29. i,
where the record is presumably not complete for Whitney*s authorities,
and where "half** is not true for SPP's. — For my own part, in con-
sulting the Collation-Book for manuscript readings, I have exercised all
reasonable care, using a magnifying glass regularly and referring fre-
quently to the prefatory explanations.
Ixvi General Iniroduciion, Pari /. ; by the Editor
2. Readings of Indian Manuscripts of the Vulgate
By «« Indian mss." are meant those used by S. P. Pandit. — No other
Indian authorities arc intended, in this section and the next, than those
given in S. V. Pandit's edition ; they inchide, as is fully and most inter-
estingly explained in his preface, not merely manuscripts, but also oral
reciters. Whitney had only the advance sheets of the parts with comment
(hooks i.-iv., vi.-viii. 6, xi., and xvii.-xx. 37) ; but, although the remain-
ing parts were accessible to me, I did not attempt for those remaining
IKirts to incor|>orate S. P. Pandit's apparatus criticus into Whitney's work.
I refrained with good reason, for such an attempt would have involved far
too much rewriting of Whitney's copy for the printer.
S. P. Pandit's reports not exhaustive. — It is far from being the case that
S. P. Pandit always rejMKts upon all his authorities. Kor books i.-xvli.
he had 12 sam/tttd and G pada authorities, besides the incomplete comm.;
but at ii. 36.4, note 2. for instance, he reports only 6 out of 13 authori-
ties.' In summarizing SPP's reports, Whitney often says "all of SPFs
mss," "all but one," "the majority," "half," and so on; and it must
therefore here be noted that these expressions refer not to the totality of
SPP's authorities concerned, but rather to the totality of those concerned
and re|K)rtetl u|)on by SPP. in any given instance. Compare Whitney's
notes to iii.4. 5 (line 2 of the note) ; iv. 7. 3 (line 6); iv. 26. 5 and iii. 30. 3;
ii. 36. 4 (line 9), with SPP's critical notes on the same verses.
3. Readings of Indian Oral Reciters of the Vulgate
By «« Indian oral reciters " are meant those employed by S. P. Pandit. — It
'was froni the lips of three living authorities that the Ik>mbay editor took
much of the testimony which he used in the establishment of his text.
II is Vaidikas were Hapuji Jivanriim (cited as Bp), Ke^ava Bha{ bin D2jl
Hhat (K.), and Venkan Hhatjl (\'.), "the most celebrated Athar\'a Viidika
in the Deccan." The last two were authorities for the whole text in
both pachas, samhita and fada. The remarks made in the preface to
the Bombay edition by S. P. Pandit concerning his reciters arc extremely
interesting and suggestive.
Errors of the eye checked by oral reciters. — The student should bear in
mind the esjKrcial weight of the oral testimony in cases where errors of
the eye, as distinguished from errors of the ear, arc probable. Thus the
testimony of the reciters, at ix. 8(13). 20, establishes the reading visalfa*^
as against visalya- of the Berlin text. Save in AV\, the word is otherwise
I At iv. ?d 5. SPP. rep^irtt 8 out of 1 3 sam^t/J aathontiet, Sm. and V being gtrcn <m Iwtli
fttdet, and of coar«e wrongly on one or the other.
3. Readings of tlie Indian Oral Reciters Ixvii
unknown, and, as the ms.-distinction between lya and Ipa in such a case
is worthless, the instance is a typical one to show the value of the
reciters* reading: see W's note to vi. 127. i. The case is somewhat
similar at iii. 12. 3, dsyand-^ as against dspand- (see the note and my addi-
tion) ; so also at viii. 6. 17, spandand, as against syandaiid^ where, although
only V. is cited, his testimony is abundantly confirmed by the sense (see
note). At xix. 66. i (see note), as between those mss. which give paid
and the Vaidikas K. and V., who recited ydhi^ there can be no question
that we ought to follow the latter, although SPP. strangely rejects their
evidence. Cf. the notes on fdyaya, at iv. i8. 4, and samuspald, at vi. 139. 3.
One of the clearest errors of visual or graphical origin is ** Sayana's "
idam, at vi. 37. 2, for hradain or hrdavi of the authorities, including K.
and V. (cf. W's and SPP's notes). If this comm. was the real Sayana,
the blunder does him no credit. At viii. 2. i, gnusti is established (as
against frus(i) by the testimony of all the reciters ; although the case is
less clear at iii. 17. 2 and 30. 7 (sec the notes). Upon their testimony, at
X. 7. 16 (see notes), we ought to accept as the true Atharvan reading,
prapyasds, albeit awa^ X€y6fjL€P0P and of questionable meaning.
4. Readings of the Hindu Commentator
The critical value and the range of his variant readings. — Whitney has
given full and well-reasoned expression to his low opinion of the cxcgeti-
cal value of the commentary and of the range and critical value of its
variant readings, in an article in the Festgruss an Rothy pages 89-96.
To that article, with its abundant lists and details, I call, as in duty bound,
the especial attention of the reader. The commentator does indeed cor-
rect a good many surface-blunders, part of which the Berlin editors had
also corrected ; and his readings are occasionally supported (as against
the two editions) by a parallel text : ^ but his variants " consist almost
exclusively of single words or forms,'* and of real critical insight he
exhibits almost none.
Thusjie fails to recognize the fact that the ordinary usage of the mss.
makes no distinction between double consonants in groups where the
duplication is phonetic, and those in groups where the duplication is ety-
mological (cf. W's Grammar, § 232); and is accordingly so obtuse as to
misunderstand and explain tddydmcti, at iv. 19. 6, as tdd ydm cti, although
the slightest heed for the rules of accent would have shown him that it is
impossible for the combination to mean anything but tdddydm cti. Simi-
larly at iv. 28. 3, again with utter disregard of accent, he makes out of
* Thus at xix. 20. 4 b, vdrmhhar vdrma stiryahy the comm. reads aptir for ahixr^ and is
supported therein by A^S. and A p.
Ixviii Crtural lutrotiHction^ Pari /. : by (he Editor
stui'iinunni (that is stuvtUt nni : cf. Feslgruss^ p. 90-91) an untranslatable
stuviin ftrffti : here, it is true, one of the wildest blunders of the pada-
kara was before him ; but even a modicum of insight should have kept
him out of that pitfall. A^ain, he seems never to have observed that
past passive participles with a pre|H>sition accent the pre|N>sition (cf.
(»rtt9H9Nar, § 1085 a), and accordingly takes saim^as at xviii. 3. 30 as if
it were sdinvrlas. Despite accent and pada-kara, he takes rajasd, p. -sdkp
at xi. 2. 25, as instr. of rdjas ! And so on.
The text uschI by the commentator is nevertheless notably different
from that given by the mss. used for the Ikriin edition, and from that
given by S. \\ Pandit's authorities. In l>ooks i.-iv. Whitney counts over
three hundred peculiarities of the commentator's text, and in the Fest-
gniss he gives several lists of them. He has intended in the present
work to report all variants of the commentator's text throughout, and I
trust that those which may have escaped his notice (or his and mine) will
prove to be few indeed.
Was the commentator of the Atharva-Veda identical with the Sijaya of
the Rig- Veda? — I suggest that it might prove to be an interesting and bjr
no means fruitless task to institute a systematic and critical comparison of
the Mri(lhavlyavedartha-praka<;a (or K\ .-b/hUya) with the bhdsya on the
AV., with special reference to the treatment of the accent in the two
works, and to the bearings of these com|xirisons upon the question of
the identity of the Sayana of the RV. with the "Sayana** of the AV.
The latter ^ does indeed sometimes heed his accents; but the occasions
on which he takes notice of them expressly are of utmost rarity (see W*t
note to xix. 13. 9 and mine to verse 4).
If, by way of comparing the two comments, we take the accusative plural
yamdnijfliis, we find that at RV. x. 16. 9 S«1yana explains it quite rightly
as a possessive compound, yamo rdjd yrsdin, (dn ; while at AV. xviii. 2. 46^
on the other hand, in the half-verse addressed to the dead man, 'by a
safe(?) road, go thou to the Fathers who have Yama as their king/
dpanpiircna falhd ytxmdrdjfiah pttitt gacha^ " Sayana " makes of the very
same form a gen. sing, and renders 'by a safe road belonging to king
Yama (tasya sx^abhutcna mdrgcna) go thou to the Fathers * ! Evidently*
so simple a matter as the famous distinction between {ndra-^atni and the
blas|)hemous tftiim-^ntni (cf. Whitney on TPr. xxiv. 5 ; Weber, Ind, Stmd.
iv. 368) was quite beyond his ken. Such bungling can hardly be the work
of a man who knew his Rig- Veda as the real Siiyana did.
» A rrmark in hit comment on ti 4 1 (Romfujr ed , I. no**), to the effect that the /ri/i^ Is
a kind of tree familiarly known in Itenares, toggetts the tarmite that hU kkdna may haw
written in that city.
^i^, V^ii^ /^J;^ . T, v^ f^^ <^ Ja^U}^^ J.f^ ^.
^ ' 5. Keadings of the Pada-patha Ixix
5. Readings of the Pada-patha
These were reported in the Index, and have since been published in full. —
As elsewhere noted, these have been reported in the Index Vcrborum in
such wise (see Index, p. 4) as to enable us to determine the fada-loxm of
every item of the Atharvan vocabulary. An index, however, is an incon-
venient vehicle for such information, and the complete pada-pailia^ as
published by S. P. Pandit, is accordingly most welcome. Some of his
occasional errors of judgment in the establishment of that text are pointed
out by Whitney in the places concerned ; but the pada-patha has deeper-
seated faults, faults which are doubtless original with its author and not
simple errors of transmission.^ Here again I may make a suggestion,
namely, that a critical and systematic study of the palpable blunders of
tht pada-pat/ia would be an interesting and fruitful task. Even \\\q pada-
text of books i.-xviii. stands on a very different plane from that of the
RV. (cf. Geldner, Ved. Stud., iii. 144). A critical discussion of its char-
acter is not called for here ; but several illustrative examples may be given.
Illustrations of the defects of the Pada-patha. — Verb-compounds give
occasion for several varieties of errors. Thus, first, as respects accentua-
tion, we find, on the one hand, incorrect attribution of accent to the verbal
clement (cf. v. 22. 1 1) ; and, on the other, denials of accent which are quite
intolerable, as at xiv. 2. 73 (j/.- d: agavian instead of aodgaman) and xiv.
I. 9 {ydt : saviid : adaddt : where f akalya resolves aright savitd : ddadat)}
Secondly, as respects details of division, we find gross violation of the
rule. The rule (a very natural one) for compounds with finite verb-forms
is that the preposition, if accented, is treated as an independent word
and has the vertical mark of interpunction (here represented by a colon)
after it; but that, if accentless (proclitic), it is treated, not as an inde-
pendent word, but as making a word-unit with the verb-form, and is
accordingly separated therefrom only by the minor mark of separation
or avagraJia (here represented by a circle). Thus in AV. i. i, we have
ni : raviaya ^r\A parhydnti. Such a division as ni^raviaya ox pari : ydnti
would be wholly erroneous ; and yet we find errors of the first type at
vi. 74. 2 {sdjnojnapaydini), 114. 2 (jipao^ckima), xiii. 3. 17 {vUb/idti), xviii.
2.58 {pdriolfik/taydtdi), 4-53 (viodadhat) }
* The /^ai/rt-text of book xix., which swarms with blunders (cf. p. 895, end, 896, top), is
clearly very different both in character and origin from the pada-iexi of books i.-xviii.
* If Whitney is right in supposing that vi. 1.3 is a spoiled gdyatri the first pada of which
ends with savita^ then I believe that the accenllessness of sdTistit is to be regarded as pointing
to a false resolution and that the /fl</!fi-text should be amended to aosdvisai; but cf. vii. 73. 7 c
and (^akalya*s resolution of its RV. parallel.
'In some of these cases, the rationale of the error is dbcernible: cf. the notes, especially
the note to xiii. 3. 1 7.
el •."nM-**"^.''.'^^*' •
.•,.•. **- : fy ^ ^"J/.'r"5^ / '^ ^^ ^'^^^ '•">':'•
Kx
(ttUiftt/ luiroduiiiou^ l\i9'i /.: dv the liditor
VariiMis comhinntions. - TIk* rnmMn.ititm of c rtx o (final or initial) with
iitlni \.»vvils ^ivrs !!«;«• to rrrois. Thus at viii. 2.21 cd — i. 35.4 ed,
/I'/'j I /. .I'/'/) is icsolvfl l)y lh»! p:iil:i k.'ira as // *i;///, and the comm.
ti'll'»\\s liiin III hnih insi.uu'-s. In mattcis cnncernin;; the combination
«»! .ii,«Mits 1h* is I'sprcially wcik, as when ho resolves 5/1/ Af<r«//i/ into j<j/*/rfi
./.i ;■:; .it iv ;<) ii>(scc n<>tri. I tie eimrs in ({uestion are of considerable
i.iM:;.-. li.Mii thi' venial one of nt>t recc»;;nizin^;, at xiv. I. 56, that dnvar-
::mi' nil. IMS ,in;t : :.f;//.Mi,* tn the (juile inexcusable ones of tellin*; us that
1 I >t.m Is i »! ? /' in the vfise x. 10. 32, ui titiin ridiisr tiiuins^ //etc., or
lli.it »';./j.f st.iiiils foi /';,/ii/'*; as subject iy{ jajfic in viii. 9. 5. Perhaps his
:.\: !.r';.i/;(iv tii <»» .iii»l s:uiah : m-mi (iv. 28. 3), already noticed (p. Ixvii)
111 anolhn ci»iiiu clii»n. in.iy be deemed to bear the palm. Kesidc the
li'Timi we IV. IV |".!t his icsolutii»n- of scmatvam ( = sihntif ivdm)^ at
6. The PrAti<;akhya and its Commentary
Character of Whitnc y*s editions of the Prati^&khyas. — In the preface
!.» i ^ ». ":■.'". : :;:l* lAittiuva S.uiihita. \Vcl»er «ipeaks with satisfaction
.L:el h:i:^ in the t.i'ik i>f editing that Samhita by
I ::: »!i I'l t!ie .ippui ten.int I'lAti'^akhya. Whitney's
-e j-i \\\y\\:'j \ \ iTi«v!c! , but even his earlier edition of
.sir. .1 u.ix buttress-.* .1 by such eiaK>ratc studies of
.'*. : rrn trv.» t 'pics i«t the ri."itit,."ikhva, and bv such
• . :•-::"..• :::tL:c::t c!,is<cs A those facts, that he could
V . • • . •• -! :.::::::•. in c::tici<in of the wav in which the
v.- : : * : I ,: .n •■ \ ••: t: -.' c/rnnient therei^n. has done his work,
. . .■ -A \:^\\\\ : 1^'v.cnt c^ncernin^ the iK'aring of the
' ^. ■■*.:■.• c »-'.n: :t-.;ti T if tiie Atharvan text. .
B<i- -:.£ :: :h-f Arhdrvan Praticakhya upon the orthography and critidsm
i*- :t.i: -■ > : ■ : - : ":!. ^: i:::v. a lii^cussii^n of the importance
: ." ^ ■.:-:-• I'lri^NO is s'perrbaous for anv student
^ • -; ••■• .'.• : !:*.e tre.itt^e ; V\\\ the ortho-graphic method
■ • • -::-.» r"-:!"*. tv\t .t:': \ the rc!iti«»n of that method
•'-•'■'• r- I*.: . i'vi'v I are mi:e the subject of a
• - .••%•' \x •: >,s; w^ the treatise d«-'»es bear upon
, • - " -:•• : ■ ". -• : ;\* I'^a: :: i^rv.vcs the nineteenth book is
■. . ' J : '• '.'•.-.vs -^t c';r:v:l it've evi ienoe respecting the
' •^ ■ . : • ; : •-.: ;" : \\\: >:■*•! :T::er.t.irv character of that
. » «
W
\ x
.\
* ■ • X
Tf
\ .•-•-: •?.•.■! / .' 'it : •••* :••*"::. •■lit. o><'ibcirss OicaaHlf nt^ /^Mm
• ■ I. * '•"•■•■•M 1.* t
: f
'. 'tj
6. Tlu Prdiifdkliya and its Commentary Ixxi
book : see p. 896, line 6. In matters of detail also, the treatise or its
comment is sometimes of critical value : thus the non-inclusion of i4as
pade among the examples of the comment on APr. ii. 72 (sec note)
arouses the suspicion that vi. 63. 4 (see note) was not contained in the
commentator's AV. text.
Utilization of the Atharvan Praticakhya for the present work. — Whit-
ney's edition is provided with three easily usable indexes (not blind
indexes) : one of Atharvan passages, one of Sanskrit words, and a general
index. The first gives in ohdcr some eight or nine hundred Atharvan
passages, and gives nearly twelve hundred references to places in the
Praticakhya or the comment or Whitney's notes, in which those passages
are discussed. Whitney has transferred the rcfefemces of the first index
with very great fulness, if not with absolute completeness, to the pages
of his Collation-Book, entering each one opposite the text of the verse
concerned. Very many or most of them, after they have once been util-
ized in the constitution of the text of the Samhita, are of so little further
moment as hardly to be worth quoting in the present work ; the rest will
be found duly cited in the course of Whitney's commentary, and their
value is obvious.
7. The Anukramanis : <* Old *' and <* Major '*
More than one Anukramani extant. — At the date of the preface to the
Berlin edition, it was probably not clearly understood that there was
more than one such treatise. The well-known one was the Major Anu-
kramani, the text of which was copied by Whitney from the ms. in the
British Museum in 1853, as noticed below, p. Ixxii. In making his fun-
damental transcript of the Atharvan text, certain scraps, looking like
extracts from a similar treatise, were found by Whitney in the colophons
of the several divisions of the mss. which he was transcribing, and were
copied by him in his Collation-Book, probably without recognizing their
source more precisely than is implied in speaking of them as "bits of
extract from an Old Anukramani, as we may call it" (see p. cxxxviii).
The Pancapatalika. — The Critical Notice in the first volume of the
Bombay edition made it clear that the source of those scraps is indeed
an old Anukramani, and that it is still extant, not merely as scattered
fragments, but as an independent treatise, and that its name is Paiica-
patalika. That name is used by " Sayana " when he refers to the treatise
in his comm. to iii. 10. 7. In the main body of this work the treatise is
usually styled the *! quoted Anukr." or the "old Anukr." The word
"old" means old with reference to the Major Anukramani; and since
Ixxii General Introduction^ Part L: by the Editor
the clc|>cndcncc of the latter upon the former is now evident (see p. 770,
^4, end. p. 793, ^ I, end) it ap|)cars that the word ••old" was rightly
used. The excerpts from the treatise, scattered through Whitney's
Collationliook, have been gatheretl together on six sheets by him. I was
templed to print them off together here for convenience; but several
considerations dissuaded me: they are after all only fragments; they are
all given in their pro|)er places in the main boily of this work; and, finally^
the lk)mbay editor (see his Critical Notice, pages 17-24) gives |>erhaps
more copious extracts from the original treatise than do the colophons
of Whitney's mss. For some of the excerpts In their proper sequence
and connection, see below, pages 770-1, 792-3, and cf. ixiges 632, 707,
711^ 814-
Manuscripts of the PaScapatalikA. — Doubtless S. P. Pandit had a com-
plete ms. of the treatise in his hands; and, if its critical value was not
exhausted by his use of it, it may yet be worth while to make a criti-
cal edition of this ancient tract. It is not unlikely that the ms. which
S. P. Pandit used was one of those referred to by Aufrecht, Catahgns
cafaii\i;^iynifn, p. 315, namely, Nos. 178-9 (on p. 61) of Kielhorn's Rcfntrt
on the search for Sanskrit mss. in the Bombay Presidency durinf^ the year
iSSo-Sf. Hoth are now listed in the Catalogue of the collections of mss.
deposited in the Deccan Collet^e (Poona), p. 179. According to Garbe's
Verzeichmss iter Indischen Handschrtften (Tubingen, 1899), p. 90, Roth
made a copy of the treatise from a Uikaner ms., which copy is now in
the Tubingen Library.
The BrhatsarvAnukramanl. — This treatise is usually styled in the
sequel simply ••the Anukr.,** but sometimes ''the Major Anukr." The
excerpts from the treatise which are given at the beginning of the intro-
ductions to the several hymns in this work are taken from Whitney's
nAf^art transcript which he made in London in 1853 on the occasion of
his visit there to make his I^ndon collations (p. xliv). The transcrifH
is bound in a separate volume; and the edited excerpts arc so nearly
exhaustive that relatively little work remains for an editor of the treatise
to do.
Manuscripts of the Brhatsarvftnukramanl. — Whitney made his tran-
script from the Polier ms. in the British Museum which is now numbered
548 by Bcndall in his Catalof^ue of the Sanskrit mss. in the British
Museum of 1902. The ms. forms |>art of Polier's second volume descril>ed
brlow, p. c.xiii, under Co<lex I ; and it is the one from which was made
the ms. transcril>ed for Col. Martin and numbered 235 by Kggcling (sec
again p. cxiii). Whitney afterwards, presumably in 1875. collated his
London transcript with the Berlin ms. described by Weber, Verzeichniss^
vol. ii., p. 79, No. 1487, and added the Berlin readings in violet ink. The
7- Tlie Anukramatiis : ''Old'' and ''Major'' Ixxiii
Berlin ms. bears the copied date sainvat 1767 (a.d. 171 i) : it is characterized
by Weber, Ind, Stud, xvii. 178, as "pretty incorrect"; but my impres-
sion is that it is better than the ms. of the British Museum.
Text-critical value of the Anukramanis. — The most important ancillary
treatise that an editor needs to use in establishing the text of the samhitd^
is the Prati^akhya; but the Anukramanis are also of some importance,
especially for the settlement of questions concerning the subdivisions of
the text (cf., for example, pages 611, 628: or note to iv. 11. 7), as has
been practically shown by S. P. Pandit in his edition, and in his Critical
Notice, pages 16-24. — The pronouncements of the Anukramanis con-
cerning the verse-norms of the earlier books (see p. cxlviii) are also of value
in discussing general questions as to the structure of the samhitd. In
particular questions, also, the statements of the Major Anukr. are some-
times of critical weight. Thus iii. 29, as it stands in our text, is a hymn
of 8 verses ; but our treatise expressly calls it a sadrca^ thus supporting
most acceptably the critical reduction (already sufficiently certain : see
note to vs. 7) of the hymn to one of 6 verses, the norm of the book.
— Here and there are indications that suggest the surmise that the order
of verses (cf. p. 739) or the extent of a hymn (cf. p. 7^^)^ as contemplated
by the Anukr., may be different from that of our text. — Its statements
as to the "deity" of a given hymn are sometimes worth considering in
determining the general drift of that hymn ; and its dicta regarding the
"seers" of the hymns are of interest in certain aspects which are briefly
noticed below, pp. 1038 ff. — Then too, the manuscripts of the Anukr. ^/// // 7 -
may sometimes be taken as testimony for the readings of the cited pratUas ■
(cf. note to iv. 3. 3). And it happens even that the authority of the
Major Anukr. may be pressed into service at x. 5.49 (see the notes) to
determine which pair of verses (whether viii. 3. 12-13 or vii. 61. 1-2) is
meant by the ^dd agfta iti dvi oi the mss. (see below, p. cxx : and cf. the
case at xix. 37. 4).
The author of the Major Anukramani as a critic of meters. — The author
shows no sense for rhythm. His equipment as a critic of meters hardly
goes beyond the rudimentary capacity for counting syllables. Thus he
calls ii. 12. 2 jagati ; but although pada a has 12 syllables, its cadence has
nojagatt character whatever. To illustrate the woodenness of his methods,
we may take ii. 13. i : this he evidently scans as 1 1 4- 1 1 : 10 -f 12 = 44,
and accordingly makes it a simple tristnbh, as if the "extra" syllable in
d could offset the deficiency in c ! For the spoiled c of the Vulgate, the
Ppp. reading pibann amriam (which is supported by MS.) .suggests the
remedy, and if we accept that as the true Atharvan form of the verse, it
is then an example of the mingling (common in one and the same verse)
of acatalecticyVz^^/f padas with catalcctic forms thereof. So far, indeed.
Ixxiv General Introduction, Part /.; by tlu Editor
is he from discerning matters of this sort, that his terminology is quite
lacking in words adequate for their expression.*
If the author of the Major Anukr. showed some real insight into Vedic
meters, his statements might, as can easily be seen, often be of value in
affecting our critical judgment of a reading of the sainhitd or in deter-
mining our choice as between alternative readings. The contrary, rather»
is wont to be the case. Thus at iv. 15. 4, his definition, vihUffurasidd*
br/tatl. implies the division (given also by the /<7</<f-mss.) io + 8:8-f 8*
thus leaving the accentless /i7/7V7///^ stranded at the beginning of a p^dal
An excellent illustration of the way in which he might help us, if we
could trust him, is offered by iv. 32. 3 b, which reads tdpasd yujd vi jahi
^dtruH, Here Tpp. makes an unexceptionable tris{ubh by readingyViAMit,
and the author of the Anukr. says the verse is irisfttbh. His silence
respecting the metrical deficiency in the Vulgate text would be an addi*
tional weighty argument for judging the Tpp. reading to be the true
Atharvan one, if only we could trust him — as we cannot. Cf. end of
\V*s note to iv. 36. 4.
Such as it is, his treatment of the meters is neither even nor equably
careful. Thus he notes the irregularity of vii. 112. 1, while in treating
the repetition of the very same verse at xiv. 2. 45 (see note), he passes
over the bhurtktvam in silence. Throughout most of the present work,
Whitney has devoted considerable space to critical comment upon the
treatment of the meters by the Anukr. Considering the fact, however,
that the principles which underlie the procedure of the Hindu are so
radically different from those of his Occidental critic, no one will be
likely to find fault if the criticisms of the latter prove to be not entirely
exhaustive.
His statements as to the seers of the hymns. — The ascriptions of quasi-
authorship, made by the author of the Major Anukr. and given in the
Kxccrpts, are set forth in tabular form at p. 1040 and are critically dis-
cussed at p. 1038, which see.
8. The Kaufika-Sutra and the Vaitana-Stitra
The work of Garbe and Bloomfield and Caland — As elsewhere mentioned
(p. xxv), the Vaitana has been published in text and translation by Garbe,
and the text of the Kau<,-ika (in 1890) by Bloomfield. Since 1890, a
good deal of further critical work u|>on the Kau<fika has been done by
* For the rvacJcr't convenience it may be noted that verses de6cient by one or two syllsbUs,
rr»pecti\rly. are called by htm n«<r/ and ri^if/ ; and that verses redundant by one or two %tn
called Hmrtj and rt\srj/.
8. Tlu Kdjifika-Suira and t/ie Vditana'Sutra Ixxv
Bloomfield^ and by Caland.^ — The value of these Sutras is primarily as a
help to the understanding of the ritual setting and general purpose of
a given hymn, and so, mediately, to its exegesis. From that aspect they
will be discussed below (p. Ixxvii). Meantime a few words may be said
about their value for the criticism of the structure of the Samhita.
Bearing of the ritual Sutras upon the criticism of the structure and text
of the Sadihit^. — Bloomfield himself discusses this matter in the intro-
duction to his edition of Kau^ika, p. xli. He there points out instances
in which briefer independent hymns have been fused into one longer
composite hymn by the redactors of the Samhita, and shows that the
Sutras recognize the composite character of the whole by prescribing
the employment of the component parts separately. Thus (as is pointed
out also by Whitney), iv. 38 is made up of two independent parts, a
gambling-charm (verses 1-4) and a cattle-charm (verses 5-7). The Sutra
prescribes them separately for these wholly different uses, the former
with other gambling-charms ; and to the latter it gives a special name.
Bloomfield's next illustrations, which concern vii. 74 and 76, have in the
meantime given rise to the critical question whether vii. 74. 1-2 and
76. 1-2 did not form one hymn for Ke^ava.^
The mss. of the Sutras may sometimes be taken as testimony for the
readings of the cited pratikas. The like was said (p. Ixxiii) of the mss. of
the Anukramanls. The mss. of the Kau^ika (cf. Bloomfield*s Introduction,
p. xxxix) are wont to agree with those of the Vulgate, even in obvious
blunders.
Grouping of mantra-material in Sutra and in Saihhita compared. — Many
instances might be adduced from the Kau^ika which may well have a
direct bearing upon our judgment concerning the unitary character of
hymns that appear as units in our text. To cite or discuss them here
would take us too far afield, and I must content myself once more with a
suggestion, namely, that a systematic study of the grouping of the mantra-
material ni the ritual, as compared with its grouping in the Samhita, ought
to be undertaken. At Kau^. 29. 1-14 the verses of AV. v. 13 arc brought
in for use, all of them and in their Vulgate order. The like is true
AV. ix. 5. 1-6 at Kau^. 64. 6-16. Whether it would lead to clear-cut
* See his seven Cofttributions to the interpretation of the Veda (below, p. ci), his Hynuu of
the A V. (SBE. xlii.), and his review of Caland's Zatcbcrritual (Gottingische gelehrte Anzeigen,
1902, no. 7).
* See his Altindisches Zauberritnaly and his eight papers Zur Exegese und Kritik der ritueUcn
Siitras (ZDMG. li.-lvii.). Of the papers, those most important for the Kaa9i|ca are the ones
contained in vol. liii. See also VVZKM. viii. 367.
' See Bloomfield's note, SBE. xlii. 558 ; Whitney's introduction to vii. 74, and the note added
by me at p. 440, top; and Caland's note 5 to page 105 of his Zaubcrritual. Hymn 76 of the
Berlin ed. is in no wise a unity : see the introduction thereto.
u
fol
Ixxvi iiaural Jniroiiuction, Part I. : by the Editor
results is doubtful ; but the relation of the two groupings is a matter no
less ini|M)rtant than it is obscure. The obscuiity is es[Kcially striking in
IxMik xviii., where the natural order of the comi>onent rites of the long
funeial ceremony is wholly disregar<led by the diaskeuasts in the actual
arranj;ement of the verses of the Samhita. Thus xviii. 4. 44, which accom-
panies the taking of the corpse on a cart to the pyre, ought of course to
precede xviii. 2. 4, which accompanies the act of setting fire to the pile.
See my rcmaik, below, page X70, lines 7-9, and my discussion, pages
870 I. of ••Pait III." and •• Pait V.** of xviii. 4. As is noted at xviii.
I. 49 and 2 I, the ritud group of verses that accompany the oblations to
Yam.i in thr cremation-ceremony wholly disregards even so imp<irtant a
division as that between two successive ^i////r#i/vi-hymns. It is [>ointcd
out on p. 848 that verse 60 of xviii. 3 is widely separated from what
appears (most manifestly and from various criteria) to be its fellow, to wit,
verse 6.
Many diflUculties of the KAu<;ika yet unsolved. — It will very likely
appear that Whitney has misunderstocHl the Kau<^ika here and there; as
also, on the other hand, he has in fact here and there corrected! the text
or the interptetation of (larbe or of Hloomfield. At the time of Whit-
ney's death, HloomfiehTs chief contributions (SHK. xlii.) to the interpre-
tation of Kau<;ika had not yet ap|>eared, nor yet those of Calami. As I
have more than once said, no one ought to be so well able to give a trust-
worthy translation ofadimcult text as the man who has made a goou
[on ot it ; and for this reason one must regret that l^loomfield did not
give us -in the natural sequence of the sutras — as good a version as
he was at the time able to make, instead of the detached bits of inter-
pretation which are scattered through the notes of SBK. xlii. Caland
observes, in the introiluction to his Zauberritua!^ p. IV, that in using the
Kau<;ika he sm^n found that, in order to comprehend even a single
passage, it is necessary to work through the whole book. The like is,
of course, equally true of the Prati<jakhya. A commentator upon the
Samhita who wishes (as di<l Whitney) to combine in his comment the
best of all that the subsidiary treatises have to offer, cannot of course
stop to settle, en passant, a multitude of questions any one of which may
re<|uire the investigation of a specialist. Thus Whitney, in his note to
X. 56. said in his ms. for the printer, "The Kau<,'. quotes the common
fratlka of the six verses at 49. 3. in a witchcraft-ceremony, in connection
with the releasing of a bull." If Caland is right (Zanb^rttttial, p. 171),
the hocus |KKUs with the ••water-thunderbolt*;" does not begin until
40 3. and the s:uir<ifn is to be joined to the preceding siitra (ZDMG.
Iiii. 2r I). an<l the letting loose of the bull (49. l) has nothing to do with
the uses of x. 5. This is just the kind of error which we cannot fairly
8. Tlu Kaufika-Sutra and tlie Vdilana-Sutra Ixxvii
blame Whitney for making. Special difficulties of this sort should have
been settled for him by the sutra-specialists, just as he had settled the
special difficulties of the Prati^akhya when he edited that text.
Value of the ritual Sutras for the exegesis of the Sadihita. — Estimates
of the value of these Sutras as casting light upon the original meaning
of the mantras have differed and will perhaps continue to differ. The
opinion has even been held by a most eminent scholar that there is, on
the whole, very little in the Kau^ika which really elucidates the Sariihita,
and that the Kau^ika is in the main a fabrication rather than a collection
of genuine popular practices. The principal question here is, not whether
this opinion is right or wrong, but rather, to what extent is it right or
wrong. It is, for example, hard to suppose that, upon the occasion con-
templated in kandika 79 of the Kau^ika, a young Hindu, still in the hey-
day of the blood, would, at such an approach of a climax of feeling as is
implied in the acts from the ialpdrohana to the actual nidluivana (79. 9)
inclusive, tolerate — whether patiently or impatiently — such an accom- l
paniment of mantras as is prescribed in sutras 4 to 9. Whatever philo-
logical pertinence may be made out for them (cf. Whitney's note to xiv.
2. 64), their natural impertinence to the business in hand seems almost
intolerable.
To this it may be answered that the Sutra often represents an ideal
prescription or ideale Vorsc/trift} compliance with which was not expected
by any one, save on certain ceremonial occasions, the extreme formality
of which was duly ensured by elaborate preparation and the presence of
witnesses.
The data of the Kauqika no sufficient warrant for dogmatism in the
exegesis of the Samhitft. — There is every reason to suppose that the
actual text of the sarhhitas is often a fragmentary and faulty record of
the antecedent (I will not say original) oral tradition ; and that the
stanzas as we find them have often been dislocated and their natural
sequence faulted by the action of the diaskeuasts. It is moreover
palpable that questions of original sequence, so far from being cleared up,
are often complicated all the more by the comparison of the sequences of
the ritual texts (see p. Ixxv). In these days of rapid travel and communi-
cation, it is hard to realize the isolation of the Indian villages {gnhnas)
and country districts {janapadas) in antiquity. That isolation tended to
* I owe this suggestion to Professor DelbrUck of Jena, who was my gtiest while I had this
chapter in hand and was so kind as to criticize it. As a curious parallel to the case above
cited, he told me of the verses prescribed for use in the Briidergemeine of CouQt Zinzendorf :
Mein mir von Gott verliehencs WeibI
Anitzt bcsteig' ich deinen Leib.
Empfange nieinen Samcn
In Gottes Namen. A men.
Ixxviii General Introductton^ Part /. : by tlu Editor
conserve the individuality of the several l(Kalitics in respect of the details,
for example, of their nuptial and funeral customs; so that the local
diversities are sometimes expressly mentioned (tucdvacd jatMf^dadharmJk
g;n\mi%dhanni\^ ca : ACiS. i. 7'). Astonishingly conservative as Indui is
(SCO my icmarks in KarpuramartjarJ, p. 206, ^j 2, p. 231, note 2), it can
nevertheless not be doubtful that her customs have chanj;ed in the time
from the date of the hymns to that of the ritual books. Evidently, there
are divers general considerations which militate strongly against much
dogmatism in the treatment of these matters.'
Integer vitae as a Christian funeral-hymn. — During the last twenty-four
years. I have often been called to the University Cha|>el to pay the last
tribute of respect to one or another departed colleague or friend. On
such occasions, it fre(|ueiitly happens that the chapel choir sings the first
two stanzas of the lioratian oile (i. 22)^ iutet^er vtiar scelc risque furus, to
the solemn and stately music of Fricdrich Ferdinand Flemming. Indeed,
so frequent is the employment of these words and this music, that one
might almost call it a part of the •• Funeral Oflfice after the Harvard Use/'
The original occasion of the ode, and the relation of Horace to Aristius
Fuscus to whom it is addressed, are fairly well known. The lofty moral
sentiment of the first two stanzas, however seriously Horace may have
entertained it, is doubtless uttered in this connection in a tone of mock-
solemnity. Kven this fact nectl not mar for us the tender associations
iS*-^ (Vt • made |K>ssible by the intrinsic appropriateness of these two pre-Christian
stanzas for their employment in a Christian liturgy of the twentieth cen-
tury. Hut suppose for a moment that the choir were to continue singing
on to the end, even to Lalaf:;€H amaho^ duke hquentem ! what palpable,
what monstrous ineptitude! If only the first two stanzas were extant,
and not the remaining four also, we might never even suspect Horace of
any arriere-i>ensee in writing them ; and if we were to interpret them
simply in the light of their mmlern ritual use, how far we should be from
apprehending their original connection ami motive!
Secondary adaptation of mantras to incongruous ritual uses. — Let no
one say that this case is no fair parallel to what may have happened in
India. On the contrary : instances — in no wise doubtful and not a whit
less striking — of secondary adaptation of a mantra to similarly incongru-
ous uses in the ritual may there be found in plenty. This secondary
association of a given mantra with a given practice has often been
* (*aLiml'!i ftkctch of the funeral ritet U a most praiseworthy and intere^ttog one, and kit
d-*crn>tion of ihr practices whiih he there *rt* forth in onlerljr and lotid *e'j«ence tt well wottli
thr while Imt hit dev ri|>tt«)n4 are taken from many source* differing widely in place and time;
and It \% on many groumU improKiMe that the ritual at he there depicts it was ciret carried o«t
in any given place at any gi%cn time.
8. Tlie Kdufika-Sutra and the Vditana'Sutra Ixxix
determined by some most superficial semblance of verbal pertinence in the
mantra, when in fact the mantra had no intrinsic and essential pertinence
to the practice whatsoever. For example, CGS. prescribes the verse
dksan for use when the bride greases the axle of the wedding-car ; here,
I think, there can be no doubt * that the prescription has been suggested
by the surface resemblance of dksan 'they have eaten' to dksatn 'axle.*
Or, again, to take an example which has been interestingly treated by
Bloomfield, the verses xiv. 2. 59-62 doubtless referred originally to the
mourning women, who, with dishevelled hair, wailed and danced at a
funeral ; and they were presumably used originally as an expiation for
such noisy proceedings. Secondarily, they have been adapted for use in
connection with the wedding ceremonies, " in case a wailing arises,** and
doubtless for no better reason than that they contained the word for
"wailing**; and they have accordingly been placed by the diaskeuasts
among the wedding verses, where we now find them. See Bloomfield,
AJP. xi. 341, 338 : and cf. vii. 466.
9. Readings of the Kashmirian or Paippalada Recension of the
Atharva-Veda Saihhita
General relations of this recension to the Vulgate or ^^unakan recension.^
— Just as, on the one hand, the minute differences between two closely
related manuscripts of the same recension (for example, between Whit-
ney's P. and M.) represent upon a very small scale the results of human
fallibility, so, upon the other hand, do the multitudinous and pervading
differences between the general readings of the manuscripts of the Vul-
gate and those of the birch-bark manuscript of the Kashmirian recension
truly represent in like manner the fallibility of human tradition, but on a
very large scale. The ^aunakan or Vulgate recension represents one
result of the selective process by which the Indian diaskeuasts took from
the great mass of mantra-material belonging to the oral tradition of
their school a certain amount, arranging it in a certain order; the Kash-
mirian recension represents another and very different result of a similar
process.
Since the birch-bark manuscript has thus far maintained its character
as a unique, wc shall perhaps never know how truly it represents the best
Kashmirian tradition of this Veda; it is quite possible that that tradition
was vastly superior to the written reflex thereof which we possess in the
^ I had hesitatingly advanced this view, below, in my note to xviii. 4. 61 ; and I am pleased
to see now that Bloomfield had unhesitatingly given it as his own opinion long before, at AJP.
xi. 341.
' Further reference is made to these general relations below, at p. 1013.
Ixxx Getural Introdtution^ Part /. : by iJu Editor
birch-bark manuscript, and which, although excellent in many places, is
extremely incorrect in very many. Systematic search will doubtless
reveal the fact that the Taippalada recension, even in the defective form
in which it has come down to us, often presents as its variant a reading
which is wholly difTcrent, but which, as a sense-equivalent, yields nothing
to the Vulgate in its claim (or genuineness and originality : thus for the
. Vulgate readings itiias (x. 3. 8). iydja (x. 7. 31), yd at (x. 8. 10), ksiprdtm
If) •"/w'^— ^'^"* '• ^5^* ^"^^ ^" ^•^"* ^' ^^^' respectively, the IViipp. presents the sense-
* ^ ^ ^^ ^ equivalents titsmt\t, ja^ihtut, yota^ outm^ ^x\k\ ^rlu $u. Ju ^4^^<^'«^*^a^^
14.1 ''1
j ^^ The material selected by the makers of the two recensions is by no
ft^^ ^ ■" means coincident. The Kashmirian text is mofe rich in Urahmana tias-
"' . ^^ J sages and in charms and incantations than is the Vulgate.* The coinci-
^ * ' ^^ dent material, moreover, is arranged in a very different order in the two
^^ jr.*r recensions (cf. p. 1015); and it will appear in the sequel that even the
•j^^.— coincident material, as between the Kashmirian and the Vulgate forms
iV^^[[/ -^ /]^^r^ thereof, exhibits manifold differences of reading, and that the Kashmirian
readings are much oftcncr pcjorations than survivals of a more intelligent
version.
This, however, is not always the case : thus, of the two recensions, the
Kashmirian has the preferable reading at xii. 2. 30 d. Or again, at v. 2. 8
and xiv. t. 22, the Kashmirian recension agrees with the Rig-Veda, as
against the Vulgate, and, at xi. 2. 7, with the Katha reading. In this
connection it is interesting to note that the conjectures of Roth and
Whitney for the des|>erate nineteenth book are often confirmed in fact
by the Kashmirian readings : instances may be found at xix. 27. 8 ; 32. 4,
5, 8 ; 44. 2 ; 46. 3 (two) ; 53. 5 ; 56. 4.
The unique birch-bark manuscript of the PAippalftda text. — This is
described by (larbe in his Wrzcichmss as No. 14. It consisted of nearly
three hundred leaves, of which two are lost and eight or more arc defec-
tive. They vary in height from 14 to 21 centimeters; and in wi<lth,
from II to 16; and contain from 13 to 23 lines on a page. The ms. is
dated samvat 95, without .statement of the century. If the year 4595 of
the Kashmirian loka kdla is meant, the date would ap|)ear to be not far
from A.u. IS'O- A description of the ms., with a brief characterizatiofi
of some of its peculiarities, was given by Roth at Florence in Sep. 1878,
and is published in the Atii del I \'' Cottf^rcsso intcmazi0nal€ dcgli Onen-
ta/isii, ii. S9 96. Now that the facsimile is published, further details arc
uncalled for. A specimen of the plates of the facsimile is given in the
latter volume of this work. The plate chosen is No. 341 and gives the
obverse of folio 187, a page from which have been taken several of
the illustrative examples in the paragraphs which follow.
> So Koth in the Aitt (p. 95), m cited on thb pag«.
Cf. JfJJ^^f ^^' '^^' ^/^^^^^^"^//^'^y
-y-K^Khrv i i' C^V>- Ja
9. Readings of the Kashmirian or Pdippalada Recension Ixxxi
Roth's Kashmirian nagarl transcript (Nov. 1874). — A nagari copy of
the original birch-bark manuscript was made at ^rinagara in 1873. This
copy is No. 16 of Garbe's Verzeichniss, and we may call it Roth's Kash-
mirian nagari transcript. It came into Roth's hands at the end of
November, 1874. The year of its making appears from Roth's essay,
Der Atharvaveda in Kaschmir, pages 13-14; and the date of its arrival
in Tubingen, from p. 1 1 of the same essay. With great promptness,
Roth gave an account of it in his essay, just mentioned, which was pub-
lished as an appendix to an invitation to the academic celebration of the
birthday (March 6, 1875) of the king.^ — It would appear that Roth's
Kashmirian transcript was not the only one made from the birch-bark
original in India : S. P. Pandit seems also to have had one ; for he cites
the Paippalada in his edition, vol. iv., p. 369. The copy used by him is
doubtless the nagari copy procured by Biihler, and listed as VIII. i of
the collection of 1875-76, on p. 73 of the Catalogue of the Deccan Col-
lege manuscripts. See also Garbe's Verzeicliniss^ under No. 17, for the
■description of another copy (incomplete).
Arrival of the birch-bark original in 1876 at Tiibingen. — The original
seems to have come into Roth's hands in the early summer of 1876.
The approximate date of its arrival appears from Whitney's note to
p. xiii of the pamphlet containing the Proceedings of the Am. Oriental
Society at the meetings of May and Nov., 1875, and May, 1876 (= JAOS.
X., p. cxix) : "As these Proceedings [that is, the pamphlet just mentioned]
are going through the press, it is learned from Professor Roth that the
original of the Devanagarl copy, an old and somewhat damaged ms. in
the Kashmir alphabet, on highly fragile leaves of birch-bark, has reached
him, being loaned by the Government of India, which had obtained
possession of it. It corrects its copy in a host of places, but also has
innumerable errors of its own. It is accented only here and there, in
passages."
Roth's Collation (ended, June, 1884) of the Paippalada text. — This is
written on four-page sheets of note-paper numbered from i to 44 (but
sheet 6 has only two pages) ; the pages measure about 5>^ X 8J^ inches,
and there arc some 9 supplementary pages (see p. Ixxxii, top), sent in
answer to specific inquiries of Whitney. As appears from the colo-
phon added by Roth (see below, p. 1009), this Collation was finished
June 25, 1884. Since Roth's autograph transcript described in the next
paragraph was not made until some months later, I see little chance of
error in my assuming that Roth made his Collation for Whitney from his
Kashmirian nagari transcript, and that he used the birch-bark original to
^ My copy of Roth's essay was given me by my teacher, the author, Feb. 26, 1875.
Ixxxii Getural Introdmtion^ Part I. : by the Editor
•
some extent to control the errors of the copy.^ Occasional suspicions
of error in the Collation were not unnatural, and they led Whitney to
ask Koth to reexamine the manuscript upon certain doubtful points.
Whitney's questions extend over books i. to v., and others were noted,
but never sent. Roth's answers form a valuable supplement to his
Collation, and end in April, 1894.
Roth's autograph nftgarl transcript (Dec. 1884). — The end of the Colla-
tion which Roth made for Whitney was reached, as just stated, June 25,
1884. After the following summer vacation. Roth made a new transcript
from the birch-bark, as appears from his letter to Whitney, dated Jan. 1 1,
1893: "Von IViippaKida habe ich dcvaniigari Abschrift, aber nicht voll-
standig. Uie mit Vulgata glcichlautenden Verse, die nur durch Fehlcr
Eckel erregen, habe ich bios citicrt, z.W. die vielen aus RV., nehme mir
aber doch viellcicht noch die Muhc, sic nachzutragen. Ich habe an der
Abschrift unernuidlich vom 19. Sept. bis 28. Dez. 1884 geschrieben und
diese Lcistung als cine ungewohnliche betrachtet." This transcript is
doubtless far more accurate than the one used for the Collation. The
badness of the latter and the fragility of the birch-bark original were
doubtless the reasons that determined Roth to make his autograph nagari
transcript : see p. Ixxxv, top. \tf^ Sec p. 1045.J
The facsimile of the Tiibingen birch-bark manuscript (1901). — A mag-
nificent facsimile of the birch-bark manuscript has now been published by
the care and enterprise of Hloomfield and Garbc.' The technical perfection
of the work is such as to show with marvellous clearness not only every
stroke of the writing and every correction, but even the most delicate
veinings of the bark itself, with its injuries and patches. Hven if other
thin«;s were equal, the facsimile is much better than the original, inas-
much as a copy of each one of 544 exquisitely clear and beautiful chromo-
photographic plates, all conveniently bound and easy to handle and not
easily injured and accessible in many public and private libraries through-
out the world, is much more serviceable than the unique original^
I In tome t%%t%, fragmentt of the birch t>ark original teem to hare t>ecome lost after Roth's
Ka^hmirtan nlf^rl trantcript wat made, to that the Utter, iik] the two other Indian co|i««*
mentionrd on p. lixxi. have thus become now oor only reliance. Thut for mrrvrtlkmi d the Vvl-
gate at i. ?<> 3 b. Koth repr>rtfl at I'iipp. variant aifkikkr^at, and adds ** nor in der Abschrift
vorhandrn ** Tht^ mutt have ttood on the prior half of line 12 of folio jb of the birch>bark
mt. ;. but a piece of it is there brokm out.
* The Kathmirian Atharva-Ve<la (School of the Piippalidas). Reproduced by ckrooM-
photography from the manutcript in the University library at Tubingen. F.dited vndcr tlM
au«picrt nf the Johns Hopkins I'nivertity in lialtimore and of the Royal Kberhard Karlt-
l'nivci*ity in TubinRrn, \Vuittcml»erj;, by Maurice lUoomfickl, Professor in the Johns Hopkins
Tniveisity. and Richard Garlie, rrofrtsor in the University of Tubingen. Haltimore. Tli«
Johns Hopkins frets. 1901. 1 he technical work by the firm of Martin Romoftel & Co,
Stuttgart.
9. Readings of tlu Kashmirian or Pdippaldda Recension Ixxxiii
written on leaves of birch-bark, fragile with age, easily injured, requiring
the utmost caution in handling, and accordingly practically inaccessible
except to a very few persons : but other things are not equal ; for the
transitory advantage of the brilliantly heightened contrast of color which
is gained by wetting the birch-bark original, and which passes away as
soon as the leaf is dry, is converted into a permanent advantage by the
chromophotographic process, in which the plates are made from the
freshly wetted original. Moreover, the owner of a facsimile is at liberty
to use it at home or wherever he pleases, and to mark it (with pen or
pencil) as much as he pleases. The facsimile may therefore truly be said
to be in many respects preferable to the original.
Roth's Collation not exhaustive. — Now that the superb facsimile is
published, it is possible for a competent critic to test Roth's Collation in
respect i. of its completeness, and 2. of its accuracy. As, first, for its
completeness, it is sufficiently apparent from several expressions used by
Roth,^ that he saw plainly that it would be the height of unwisdom to
give with completeness the Kashmirian variants as incidental to a work
like this one of Whitney's, whose main scope is very much broader. Roth
was a man who had a clear sense of the relative value of things — a sense
of intellectual perspective; and he was right. ^h^XC^fl
Faults of the birch-bark manuscript. — The birch-bark manuscript js'"^ ""
indeed what we may call in Hindu phrase a veritable 'mine of the jewels ^v7-> r
of false readings and blunders,' an apapdth(vskhalita)ratndkara^ a book in ''^^ ^ . '
which the student may find richly-abounding; and most instructive illus- ^ * * '""^
trations of perhaps every class of error discussed by the formal treatises
on text-criticism. Thus it fairly swarms with cases of haplography (the
letters assumed, on the evidence of the Vulgate, to be omitted, are given
in brackets) : tdm tvd fdle sarvavtrds suvtrd [an's/avtrd] abhi sail carcma :
ihdiva dhnivd prati \ti\siha ^dlc, folio 54 b''^ = iii. 12. I c, d, 2 a ; vasa(kdre
yathd ya^ah: [yat/id yafas] somaptthc^ folio i87a'5-»^ = x. 3. 22 b, 21 a;
dditye ca \firca\ksasi^ folio i87a'7 = x. 3. 18 b; apa stedain^ vdsama-
tham gotham uta [ta]skaram, folio 158 b' = xix. 50. 5 a, b. Confusions as
between surd and sonant (cf. p. 749, p. 57) and between aspirate and non-
aspirate and between long and short vowels are so common as hardly to
'^/ be worth reporting : cT. usase nas pari dhchi sarvdn rdtri andkasah, which u ^
' is found at folio 158 b** = xix. 50. 7 a, b, and exemplifies all three cases '
* Such arc : " Verse, die nur durch Fchler Eckel erregen," p. Ixxxii ; *• On y trouve, il est vrai,
de tr^s-bonnes parties, mais d'autres sont tellement d^figurees, qu'on a besoin de conjectures
t
sans nombre pour arriver k un texte lisible/' Ai/i, p. 96; "das Kauderwelsch,** "ganze Zeilen
so unsicher dass man nicht einmal die Worter trennen kann," p. Ixxxvi.
* To judge from stedam for stenam^ we might suppose that the ms. at this point was written
down by a scribe at the dictation of a reciter with a bad cold in his head.
Ixxxiv General Introiiuction^ Part L : by tlu Kditar
(ti/i for //, / for i, / for /:). — Of variety in the character of the Kash*
mirian valiants there is no lack. Thus we see the omission of a needed
twin consonant (cf. p. 832) in ytut [<t]nfuiena, foho 91 b 5 = v. $. 4a ; inter-
esting phonetic S{)cllings in mahlyam of folio 264 b ^ for mahyam ot
iii. 15. I d, and in r tr riitriy aniuhii/uts of folio I $8 a "7 for ye te rdtry
anadviVtas of xix. 50. 2 • ; inversion in the order of words in sa me ksattam
ca rtU(/intm ca of folio 187 a 4 = x. 3. 12 c. Not one of these examples was
rci>ortcd, though probably all were noticed, by Roth. In his Collation
for V. 6, he notes for verses 1 1-14 •* unwcsentliche Differenzen/* without
s|>ecifying them. We may regret his failure to report such an interesting^
reading as yathAltain fatrti/uUany, folio 3 b M, where fatmhd is a correct
equivalent of the ^atruhas of the Vulgate, i. 29. 5 c ; but with such a blun*
der as asi\ni in the very next word, and such grammar as ayaik vacah in
the preceding |)ada, we cannot blame him. In an incomplete collation,
there is no hard and fast line to be drawn between what shall be reported
and what shall not.
Collation not controlled by constant reference to the birch-bark ms. —
Secondly, as for the accuracy of Roth's Collation in the variants which
he does give, — I do not suppose that Roth attempted to control his
Kashmirian mij^iiri transcript (No. 16, Garbe) on which he based his
Collation, by constant reference to the original. Thus far, I have hardly
come U|K>n inaccuracies myself ; but it is not improbable that occasional
slips * on his part may yet come to light. It is proper here, therefore,
partly by way of anticipating ill-considered criticism, to explain the
situation.
Such reference would have ruined the birch-t>ark ms. — As any one can
see from the table, pages 1018 to 1023, the Kashmirian correspondents
of the Vulgate verses are to be found in the birch-bark manuscript in an
entirely different order. Thus, if we take for example the six Vulgate
vervrs iii. 12. 1,6, 8; 13. I ; 14. I ; 15. i, we shall find their Kashmirian
corresiwndents at the following places (leaf, side, line) respectively :
54 b -. 276 b 7, 225 a »^ 50 a «. 32 b *, 264 b 5. From this it is evident that
the mechanical process of referring, as one proceetis verse by verse through
the Vulgate, to the parallel verses of the birch-bark original, for the pur>
posqof checking step by step the transcript used for the Collation, would
have involved an amount of handling of the fragile birch-bark leaves
(nearly yyo in numl>er) which would have ruined them. The leaves are
now alMuit 400 years old, and some idea of their fragility may be gained
from the remarks in the preface to the facsimile, page II. It was doubt-
less this (lifTiculty that impressed u|X)n Roth the necessity of making a
copy which should be at once accurate, and also strong enough to endure
* Such as turymm at p iiivi. foot-note.
9. Readings of the Kashmir ian or Paippaldda Recension Ixxxv
handling without injury. To copy the birch-bark leaves in their proper
order is a process by which they need suffer no harm ; and this is pre-
cisely what Roth did (see p. Ixxxii) as soon as possible after finishing the
pressing task of making the Collation for Whitney. L^"^^ ^^^ P- *°45j
Care taken in the use of Roth's Collation. Word-division. — In carrying
this work through the press, I have constantly and with the most scrupu-
lous pains utilized Roth's original Collation and his supplementary notes
thereto, endeavoring thus to check any errors concerning the Kashmirian
readings that might have crept into Whitney's copy for the printer. Since
Roth's system of transliteration differs considerably from Whitney's, the
chances for mistakes arising through confusion of the two systems were
numerous ; and I have taken due care to avoid them. It may here be
noted that Whitney's system transliterates anusvara before a labial by vt
and not by in\^ but that in printing the Kashmirian readings, I have
followed the Collation in rendering final anusvara by m (or «), save before
vowels. Furthermore, in making use of Roth's Collation, Whitney has
habitually attempted to effect a satisfactory word-division. In many
cases this is hardly practicable ; and in such cases it was probably a
mistake to attempt it. For examples, one may consult the readings at
v. 29. 2, 'syatamo ; vi. 44. 2, saroganain ; 109. lyjivdtavd yati ; 129. 3, vrkse
sdrpitah intending vrkscsv dr-; vii. 70. i, drstd rdjyo^ intending drstad dj-.
The Kashmirian readings have not been verified directly from the fac-
simile by the editor. — As the facsimile appeared in 1901, it is proper for
me to give a reason for my procedure in this matter. In fact, both my
editorial work and the printing were very far advanced^ in 1901, so that
a change of method would in itself have been questionable; but an
entirely sufficient and indeed a compelling reason is to be found in the
fact that it would have been and still is a task requiring very much labor
and time to find the precise place of the Kashmirian parallel of any given
verse of the Vulgate, a task which can no more be done en passant than
can the task of editing a Prati^akhya, — all this apart from the difficulties
of the Carada alphabet.
Provisional means for finding Vulgate verses in the facsimile. — Whitney
noted in pencil in his Collation-Book, opposite each Vulgate passage hav-
ing a Kashmirian parallel, the number of the leaf of the Kashmirian text
on which that parallel is found, adding a or b to indicate the obverse or
the reverse of the leaf. These numbers undoubtedly refer to the leaves
of Roth's Kashmirian nagari transcript (No. 16, Garbe) from which Roth
' I am sorry to observe that the third (posthumous) edition of his Grammar (see pages 51S-9)
misrepresents him upon this point.
* The main part of this book was in type as far as page 614 (xi. I. 12) in Dec. 1901. The
remainder (as far as p. 1009, the end) was in type Dec. 13, 1902.
Ixxxvi General Introduetiou^ Part L : by the Eeliior
made his Collation ; but as there was no prospect of their being of any
use, Whitney has not given them in this work.
One of Koth*s first tasks, after the arrival of the birch-bark original,
was doubtless to find the place therein corres|>onding to the beginning of
each leaf of his Kashmirian nagarl transcript. These places he has indi-
cated by writing over against them on the side margin of the bark leaf
the number of the leaf (with a or b) of that transcript.
This was most fortunate; for the added numbers, in Roth*s familiar
handwriting, although sometimes faint or covered up by a patch used in
re|)airing the edges of the bark leaf, are for the most part entirely legible
in the facsimile : and it has given me much pleasure during the last few
days (today is April 21, 1904) to assure myself of the fact which I had
previously surmised, that these pencilled numbers afford us an exceed-
ingly useful, albeit roundabout, means of finding the place of any Kash-
mirian |>arallel in the facsimile, — useful at least until they are superseded
by the hoped-for edition of an accurate transliteration of the facsimile
with marginal references to the Vulgate. Whitney's pencilletl reference-
numbers were arranged by Dr. Ryder in the form of a table, which I
have recast and given below : see pages 1013 ff.
What ought an <* edition " of the Kashmirian text to be? — This question
was privately discussed by Whitney and Roth in the letters* exchanged
between them in 1893. Whitney hoped that all that was peculiar to the
Kashmirian text might be printed in transliteration in the Kashmirian
order and interspersed with references to the Vulgate parallels of the
remainder, also in the Kashmirian order, the whole to form an appendix
J^jf/|^ ' I'ncler dale of Feb. 14. Whitney stjpgr^i* to Rofh ! ••Why not give \ I'lipp. text, as an
jvX^^ aplicndix to our volume ("our vc»lome " meant the present work], notinf^ in their order the
«*«*^^ parallt I pa%\agcs by reference only, and viriting out in full, inteisperaed with the forroer, the
remainder *'* — Ruth makes answer. March 14: ** Ich will nur wunichen. da»i Ihre Gesond-
hfit to lange St.iml halte. um d.is Werk ru F.nde fu fuhren. Weil dat alter alt ein gluiklkher
Fall t\\ betrarhten i«t, nicht aU ein<* «irheie Voraussicht, to viiintchte ich alle F.rtchw«>ningen,
alto auch cite Frage von einer I'ubhkatton der Taippeil. Kec. gantlich beseittgt to leben.**
— Whitne), June \(\ cxpremtes the h«>|>c that Rolh may reronnider the matter, I. because *•*
text of tu( h primary im|M>rtance mill and mu^t W publt^heil. in »pite of it^ textual condition,**
and 2 because "there t«ill, to far x% I can tee. no other opportunity prrtent ittelf of prodocinf
it %i^ modestly ami unpretendmgly. or in a method adaptetl to its imfictfect ttale : the nccation is
an id«*al one" — Roth answers July s : ** .Mcin liel>er Freund, dat it! keio erfreuUcher Ueiicht,
welchcn Ihr hiirf vom 16. Juni ulwr Ihre Frlebni^te ei^tattet. I'nd i*.h tehe namentlkh
darau«. da^t Sic die C*e<luld tich erwr>r1»en hal>en, die dur<h Vel>ung im Ixidcn kommt. . . .
In einer Au^galie der Tlipp. muttte da« gan/e gedruckt werdcn, von A \n% Z. . . . Wie wird
ti(h dat KaiiderwrUch getlmckt au^nchnicn ^ ganre Zetlen to unticher, data man nicht cimiuU
die Wf*rter trennen kann . . . Daran U^ttern, wat ja dat eintige Verdien^t ware, durfte man
nicht . . . Fur Sie wtrd die ein/ige angemr«tene Sorge in die«em Augcnblick lein, wseder
gerund ru trerden. aUdann die rnrite, dm Atharvan ant I jcht m bringcn.** — Whitney
writer. Aug. 25 ** I gi%e up with reluctance the hope of the further irnlaston of I'iipp^ in oer
edition; but I mill not l>other you further viith remonttrances or suggestions.**
9- Readings of the Kaskmirian or Paippalaxla Recension Ixxxvii
to the present work. Roth's hope was that Whitney's strength might
hold out long enough for him to finish this work without such a burden-
some addition. Neither hope was fulfilled ; and at that time, doubtless,
even the thought of a facsimile reproduction was not seriously enter-
tained. Bloomfield's difficult task of securing the needed funds once
accomplished, the next step, unquestionably, was to issue the facsimile
without any accessory matter. That too is now an accomplished fact;
but the facsimile, apart from its large paleographic interest, is still, in
default of certain accessories, a work of extremely limited usefulness.
As to what should next be done, I have no doubt.
1. A rigorously precise transliteration. — First, the whole text, from A
to izzard (as Roth says), should be printed in a rigorously precise trans-
literation. Conventional marks (other than those of the original), to indi-
cate divisions between verses and padas and words, need not be excluded
from the transliteration, if only the marks are easily recognizable as
insertions of the editor.
As to minor details, I am in doubt. In the prose parts, the translit-
eration might correspond page for page and line for line with the birch-
bark original : the metrical parts might either be made to correspond in
like manner line for line with the original ; or else they might be broken
up so as to show fully the metrical structure (and at the same time, with
a little ingenuity, the Kashmirian vowel-fusions), in which case the begin-
ning of every page and line of the bark leaves should be duly indicated
by a bracketed number in its proper place. In case the transliteration
corresponds with the original line for line throughout, then the obverse
and reverse of each bark leaf might well be given together in pairs, the
obverse above, and the reverse below it, on each page of the translitera-
tion, since this would be especially convenient and would yield a page of
good proportion for an Occidental book.
2. Marginal references to the Vulgate parallels. — Secondly, on the mar-
gin throughout, and opposite every Kashmirian verse that corresponds to
a verse of the Vulgate, should be given the reference to the place in the
Vulgate where the corresponding Vulgate verse is found.
3. Index of Vulgate verses thus noted on the margin. — Thirdly, in an
appendix should be given, in the order of the Vulgate text, an index of
all the Vulgate verses thus noted on the margin, with a reference to the
birch-bark leaf and side (obverse or reverse — a or b) and line where its
Kashmirian correspondent may be found.
These I conceive to be the essential features of a usahJle edition of
the Kashmirian text, and I hold them to be absolutely indispensable.
The text is often so corrupt that one cannot emend it into intel-
ligibility without sacrificing too greatly its distinctive character. All
Ixxxviii Geiural Introduction, Part L : by tlu Editor
conjectures, accordingly, should be relegated to a second and separately
l>ound volume.
4. Accessory material : conjectures, notes, traoslations. — The accessory
material of the second volume should be arranges! in the form of a single
serioH of notes and in the secpicnce of the Kashmirian original, and it
should have such numbers and letters at the outside upper corners in the
headlines, that reference from the original to the notes and from the
notes to the original may be made with the very utmost ease and celerity.
This accessory material should comprehend all conjectures as to the more
original Kashmirian form of manifestly corrupt words or passages, in so
far as they |>oint to readings not identical (compare the next paragraph)
with those of the Vulgate; indications of word-division, especially the
word-division of corrupt phrases and the resolution of the very frequent
double sandhi ; a running comment, proceeding verse by verse, givini^
any needed eluciditory matter, and explaining the rationale of the blun-
ders of the Kashmirian version where feasible (as is often the case), point-
ing out in particular its excellences, and the many items in which it
serves as a useful corrective of the Vulgate or confirms the conjectural
emendations of the latter made in the edition of Roth and Whitney; —
and all this in the light of the digested report of the variants of the
parallel texts given by Whitney in the present work and in the light of
the other parallels soon to l>e made accessible by Bloomfield's Vcdic Con-
cordance. An occasional bit of translation might be added in cases where
the Kashmirian text contains something peculiar to itself or not hitherto
satisfactorily treated.
For the cases (hinted at in the preceding paragraph) where corrupt
Kashmirian readings (K>int simply to readings identical with those of the
Vulgate, a simple reference to the latter will sometimes suffice to show
the tfue rending and sense of what the Kashmirian reciters or scribes
have corrupted into gibl>erish. Thus the Kashmirian form of xii. 3. 36 b,
found at folio 2j6b»3, '\% ydVitntt%h kdmdpi samitAn pnrasthAt. Apart from
the aspiration (overlcwked by Roth) of the prior dental o{ furasttM, each of
these four wouJs by ilsrlf is a gcxnl and intelligible Vedic word ; but taken
together, they yield far less meaning than do the famous Jabberwock
verses of Throuf^li the L 00k nii^-f^ lass} Their presence in the Kashmirian
text is explained by their su|)erficial phonetic resemblance to the Vulgate
pada jtii'tiNfti/i ItUfni/i sdm atlttfas hin, of which they arc a palpable and
wholly unintelligent corrupt ion. It is evident that, with the Vulgate
before us, conjectural emendation of the Kashmirian text in such cases
' For the *.ikc nl fathrr^ to nhom Kn(»li*h h nol vernacular, it may Iw a*!<letl that this
cl4«%tr of Kr^c'i^h and Amrrican nur%crirt U the «<>rk of Charles I.utWHige I>odg%on (** IwC«is
C arroll ") and b a pcnilanl lo AttttU Advtntmrtt tm W^m^ltrUmJ.
9. Readings of tlu Kashmirian or Paippalada Recension Ixxxix
is an entirely gratuitous procedure. And as for such grammar as kcne-
dam bhumir nihatah (a feminine noun, with neuter adjective pronoun and
masculine predicate participle: folio i86a'5 = x. 2. 24*), — to mend that
would be to rob the Kashmirian text of its piquancy ; and why should
we stop with the genders, and not emend also the senseless niha- to the
intelligible vihi- ? Let all this be done, and we have the Vulgate text
pure and simple.
10. Readings of the Parallel Texts
The texts whose readings are reported. — The principal texts included in
these reports are : of the Samhitas, the Rig-Veda, Taittiriya, MaitrayanT,
Vajasaneyi-, Sama-Veda, and Atharva-Veda ; of the Brahmanas, the
Aitareya, Kausltaki, Taittiriya, Catapatha, Paftcavih^a, and Gopatha; of
the Aranyakas, the Aitareya and Taittiriya ; of the Upanishads, the
Kausltaki, Katha, Brhadaranyaka, and Chandogya ; of the ^rauta-Sutras,
the A^valayana, Caiikhayana, Apastamba, Katyayana, and Latyayana ;
of the Grhya-Sutras, the A^valayana, ^aiikhayana, Apastamba, Hiran-
yake^i-, Paraskara, and Gobhila. Other texts are occasionally cited :
so the Kathaka and the Kapisthala Sariihita, and the Jaiminiya Brah-
mana ; and the names of some others may be seen from the List of
Abbreviations, pages ci ff. I have added references to some recently
edited parallel texts, without attempting to incorporate their readings
into the digested report of the variants : such are the Mantra-patha, von
Schroeder's **Kathahandschriften," and Knauer's Manava-Grhya-Sutra.
Von Schroedcr's edition of Kathaka i. came too late. The information
accessible to Whitney concerning the then unpublished Black Yajus texts
was very fragmentary and inadequate; this fact must be borne in mind
in connection with implied references to the Kathaka and Kapisthala (cf.
his notes to iii. 17; 19 ; 20 ; 2 1 ; v. 27 ; vii. 89).
The method of reporting the readings aims at the utmost possible accu-
racy. — Whitney has constantly striven for three things : that his reports
should be characterized, i. and 2., by the utmost attainable accuracy and
completeness ; and, 3., that they should be presented in a thoroughly
well-digested form. First, as to the accuracy, little need be said. It
may be well to remind the reader, however, that Whitney has used the
most methodical precision in this matter, and that, accordingly, if, under
a given AV. verse, he cites a parallel text without mention of variant, his
silence is to be rigorously construed as meaning positively that the
parallel text reads as does the AV. verse in question. As a matter of
fact, I believe that it will be found possible in nearly every case to recon-
struct the parallel texts with precision from the data of Whitney's reports.
o
xc Gtiural InlrodHctwn^ Pari L : by Uu Editor
It needs here to be noted that Whitney, in re|X)rting variants from the
Maitrayani, has disregarded what are (as explained by von Schroeder in
his introduction, |)ages xxviii-xxix) mere orthographical |>eculiarities of
that text. Accordingly, at iii. 14. 3, he treats the nA {=: mu) d ^ata of
MS. as if it were fia d gata. Again, the MS. correspondent of iii. 19. 3
has, in samhita, svdiu and in pada, svdn ; Whitney re|>orts ixvf#i, and quite
projKily, although it is neither the one thing nor the other. So at ii. 34. 3,
he reports ^#//i, although MS. has, in s., /<///, and in p., tdn.
The completeness of the reports far from absolute. — Secondly, as for its
completeness, it may be asked whether Hloomfield's great work, the Vedic
Concordance, will not show Whitney's |Kirallcls to be far from exhaustive.
To this I reply that the primary pur|>ose of lUoomfield's Concordance is
to give the concordances, and to do so with as near an approach to com*
pleteness as possible, even for the less important texts, a task of which
the preliminaries have retjuircd the assiduous labor of years. In Whit-
ney's work, on the other hand, the giving of concordances is only one of
many related tasks involved in his general plan, and is, moreover, only
incidental to the discussion of the variants. I have tested the two works
by comparison of random verses in the proof-sheets, and find (as I
expected) that Hloomficld tloes indeed give very many references which
are not given by Whitney; but that these references (apart from the
Kajhaka) are concerned prevailingly with the numerous subsidiary or
less important texts which fall within the purview of the Concordance.
Whitney had excerpted all the texts, so far as published (see the list,
above), which were of primary im|>ortance for his pur|>ose. The parallels
to which Bloomfield's additional references guide us will have to be
reckoned with in due course by Whitney's successors ; but I surmise that
they are not likely u|X)n the whole greatly to affect the sum of our critical
judgments respecting the Alharvan text.*
The reports are presented in well-digested form. — Thirdly, as to the form
of the rc|>orts. It is one thing to give numerical references to the places
where the pidas and their variants are to be found.' It is another to
rehearse, in full for each text concerned, the readings containing variants ;
and the result of this process is in a high degree space-consuming and
repetitious for the author, and time-consuming and confusing for the user.
It is yet another and a very different thing to compare these readings
carefully, to note the points of agreement, and to state briefly and clearly
the points on which they differ.' The result of this last procedure is a
1 In tpite of \\\ intrinsic importance, ftorh \\ the ca««, I believe, with the (j['B., to wlikii
Whitney makes \ think, rather meagre reference.
* And it is a large achievement to do it on tuch a scale a^ doet the Concordance.
* Whoever doubct it. let him take «o very iimple a ca«e at AV. ii. 19. 3 or iv. 14. 1, wHtt
out the AV. text in fall and then the three parallel Vajutteats lieneath it, compart tliem.
lo. Readings of tlu Parallel Texts xci
well-digested report of the variants which is easily and quickly usable for
the purpose of critical study. I call especial attention to this valuable
feature of Whitney's work, partly because of its practical importance, and
partly because it shows the author's power of masterly condensation and
of self-restraint.
II. Whitney *s Commentary: Further Discussion of its Critical
Elements
Comprehensiveness of its array of parallels. — I have already called
attention (p. xxxvii) to the fact that the Commentary expressly disavows
any claim to finality; and have spoken briefly of its importance as a tool,
and of its comprehensiveness. In respect of the comprehensiveness of
its array of parallels, it answers very perfectly one of the requirements
set by Pischel and Geldner in the Introduction (p. xxx) to the Vedische
Studien : ** Das gcsamte indische Altertum kann und muss der vedischcn
Exegesc dicnstbar gemacht werdcn. In vorderster Linie wollcn auch
wir den Veda aus sich selbst erklaren durch umfassenderes Aufsuchen
der Parallelstellen und Combinieren zusammengehoriger aber in vcrschie-
denen Teilcn des Veda zerstreuter Gedanken." That Whitney's work will
prove to be an instrument of great effectiveness in the future criticism
and exegesis of the Veda I think no one can doubt. It will easily be seen
that often, in the cases where the older attempts have failed, the fault is
to be laid not so much to the learning and ingenuity of the scholars con-
cerned, as to the lack of powerful tools. Such a powerful tool is this ;
such is Bloomfield's Concordance ; and other such helpful tools are sure
to be invented and made in the next few decades. The/m///t^-indexes of
Pertsch, Whitney, Weber, Aufrecht, and von Schroedcr are admirable;
and without them Whitney's work could not have been made. Their
main use is to make feasible the systematic comparison of the texts one
with another. This is what Whitney has done here, with the Atharvan
text as starting-point, and the results of his comparison lie before us in
the conveniently digested reports of the variants.
Criticism of specific readings. — Examples abound showing how the
reports may be used for this purpose. They enable us to recognize the
corruptness of a reading, which, although corrupt, is nevertheless to be
deemed the genuine Atharvan reading, as in the case of ydq cdrati at
underscore in red ink the points of difference, and then state them with brevity and clearness.
Then let him examine Whitney's reports, and I think he will freely admit that- they are indeed
well-digested and are models of masterly condensation. More difficult cases are ii. i. 3; 13. i ;
iii. 10. 4 ; 1 2. 7 ; 19. 8 ; vii. 83. 2 ; 97. i ; xiv. 2. 71. The amount and intricacy of possible varia-
tion is well exemplified by vi. 117. i. Perhaps Whitney has erred in the direction of over-
condensation in his note to vii. 29. 2.
xcii Gmcral Inirodmlioti^ Part /.: by the liditar
iv. 5. 5 over against the yd^ ca cdraii of RV. vii. 55. 6; or, again, to dis-
cover with certainty the true intention (cf. TB. ii. 4. /••) of a lot of waver-
ing variants, as in the case of those tiiat disguise the rtdntt'o mitdh of
xix. 42. I. They show us that the vastly su{>erior tradition of the RV.
con eels that of the AV. in many places (cf. the accentlcss asahanta of
xi. I. 2); but that the AV. occasionally scores a point even against the
RV., as in the case of mttt^hdstt at xiv. i. 13 (RV\ ag/idsu), or as in the
case of fuhi . . . mf// at xviii. i 4 (RV. no . . . fidti). What a pu7zle is
the phrase (xiv. 2. 72) jtiNivdnti tidv tij^rava/j, "The unmarried [plural] of
us two [dual] seek a wife,* by itself, involving, as it does, a breach of the
mathematical axiom that the whole is greater than any of its parts! but
the comparison of RV. vii. 96. 4, with its uii for ndu, teaches us that the
error lies in the ndii, even if it does not show us with certainty how that
error is to be emended. Kven with all the array of variants, we arc (as
Whitney notes at iv. 8. i ; vi. 22. 3 ; 31. 3) at times forced to the conclu-
sion that certain verses were hojK'lessly s{>oiled before ever any of the
,.• various text-makers took them in hand.
i)iJH^^L Illustrations of classes of text errors. — I have already hinted at the
variety of s{>ecial investigations to which the mass of critical material here
assembled invites. The various occasions of probable error in the trans-
mission of Indie texts have not yet Ixren made the object of a systematic
and formal treatise. Mere we have, conveniently presented, the very
material needed for such an advance in the progress of Vedic criticism.
\\y grouping suspected readings into clearly defined classes, it will become
pi>ssible to recognize suspected readings as real errors with a far greater
degree of certainty than ever before. Illustrations of this matter are so
abundant as easily to lead us far afield ; but several may be given. ^
Auditory errors. — A most striking example of a variation occasioned
by the almost complete similarity of sound of two different readings is
presented by the fratUya of AGS. iii. 10. 1 1, as compared with the
pratUali of AV^ vi. 32. 3. Compare dydm of IIGS. i. 15. 3, ^\\\\jyAm of
AV. vi. 42. I. — Confusion of surd and sonant is exemplified in the variant
version of part of the f.uniliar RV. hymn, x. 154, given at AV. xviii.
2. 14, where we have yebhyo mdiilm fradhdv ddhi, 'for whom honey (is J
on the felly.* This may or may not be the genuine Atharvan reading;
but it is certainly an unintelligent corruption of the pradhdvati of the
RV. : and it is very likely that we have the same blunder at vi. 70. 3,
where the occasion for the corruption is palpable.' The simplification of
twin consonants is exemplified at xviii. 3. 3, where the editors of the Ikrrlin
wmmmm^^mi^ » ( >th«*n. taken from the Ka^hminan ir«t. an* given atyove. p l«i«tii. «
• (*onfii*ion* of nurcl ami vmant are tli-^u^^^rd l»y Roth, ZUMCf. x\\\\V toy: cf iK>le to
ii 13 3. l»cW>w. The Ka»hmirian tc&l swarm* with tbem.
II. Whitney s Commentary xciii
text gave, with the support of all the mss. then accessible, the reading
jivdm rt^bhyas : that this is an error for inrt^bhyas is shown beyond all
doubt by the TA. variant virtdya jivdm (cf. the note on p. 832).
Visual errors. — Several classes of errors are chargeable to "mistakes
of the eye." Confusions such as that between pdhi and ydhi are simple
enough, and are sometimes to be controlled by the evidence of oral
reciters (cf. p. Ixvi); but, considering the fragmentariness of our knowl-
edge of Indie paleography, who may guess all the more remote occasions
for error of this kind } — Of errors by haplography, yd dste yd( cdrati
(just mentioned) is a good type : this is undoubtedly the true Atharvan
reading, and it is undoubtedly wrong, as is shown by the meter, and the
comparison of RV., which hdiS ydg ca cdrati: cf. notes to iv. 5. 5 ; vi. 71. i ;
vii. 81. I ; xix. 42. 3; 55. 3. For a most modern case, see note to
xiii. 2. 35.
Metrical faults. Hypermetric glosses and so forth. — Our suspicions of
hypermetric words as glosses are often confirmed by the downright
absence of those words in the parallel texts. Instances are : hdstdbhydm
at AV. iv. 13. 7 (cf. RV. x. 137. 7) ; devS at RV. x. 150. 4^ (cf. RV. iii.
2. 8); asmdbhyam at TS. ii. 6. 122 (cf. nah at RV. x. 15. 4); ividm at
AV. xiv. 2. 40 (cf. RV. X. 85. 43). — On the other hand, the damaged
meter of our text often suggests a suspicion that some brief word has
fallen out or that some briefer or longer or otherwise unsuitable form
has been substituted for an equivalent suitable one ; and the suspicion is
borne out by the reading of the parallel texts. Thus in div6 [7vf] visna
utd vd prthivyd^ mahS \yd\ visna urdr antdriksdt^ the brack etec> va%y miss-
ing at AV. vii. 26. 8, are found in their proper places in the TS. and VS.
parallels. The/^/w and iytis of AV. xviii. 2. 55 quite spoil the cadences
of a and c, which cadences are perfect in their RV. original at x. 17. 4.
Blend-readings. — The blend-readings, as I have called them, stand in
yet another group. A good example is found, at AV. xiv. 2. 18 (see
note), in prajdvati vlrashr dc^trkdmd syond ; its genesis is clear, as is
also the intrusive character of syond, when we compare the Kashmirian
reading prajdvaf I virasftr devrkdmd with that of the RV., vlrashr dcvdkdvid
syond (i I syllables). The like is true of asyd at VS. xii. 73, dganma
tdmasas pdrdm asyd : cf. the oft-recurring dtdrisvia tdinasas pa ram asyd
with the aganma tamasas pdram of the Kathaka, xvi. 12, p. 235\ — The
above-given examples suffice to show how rich is the material gathered
in this work for an illuminating study of the fallibilities of human tradition
in India.
1 Here BoUensen long ago proposed {Oritnt und Occidcnty ii. 485) to athetize abhavat.
xciv General Introduction, Part /. ; by tlu Editor
12. Whitney's Translation and the Interpretative Elements of the
Commentary
The Translation : general principles governing the method thereof. — The
statements concerning the principles involved in the translating of the
Upanishads, as propounded by Whitney in his review of a translation of
those texts, apply — mutatis mutandis — so well to the translation of this
V^cila, that I have reprinted them (above, p. xix : cf. p. xxxvii) ; and to
them I refer the reader.
The translation not primarily an interpretation, but a literal version. —
Whitney expressly states (above, p. xix) that the design of this work is
••to put together as much as possible of the material that is to help
toward the study and final comprehension of this Veda"; accordingly,
wc can hardly deny the legitimacy of his procedure, on the one hand, in
making his version a rigorously literal one, and, on the other, in restrict-
ing the interpretative constituents of the work to narrow limits. He
recognized how large a part the subjective element plays in the business
of interpretation ; and if, as he intimates, his main purpose was to clear
the ground for the interpreters yet to come, his restriction was well
motived. It is, moreover, quite in accord with his scientific skepticism
that he should prefer to err on the side of telling less than he knew, and
not on the side of telling more than he knew : a fact which is well illus-
trated by his remark at viii. 9. 18, where he says, ••The version is as lit-
jIX^ . ^cral as possible; to modify it would imply an understanding of it."
1^^^ A literal version as against a literary one. — Let no one think that
Whitney was not well aware of the differences between such a version as
he has given here, and a version which (like that of Griffith) makes con-
cessions to the demands of literary style and |>opular interest. Whitney's
version of xviii. i. 50, as given below, reads: • Yama first found for us a
track ; that is not a pasture to be borne away; where our former Fathers
went forth, there [go] those l>orn [of them], along their own roads.'
With this compare his version of 1859 (O. and L. S., i., p. $8):
VamA hath found for ns the firM a luifttaxe;
that's no |K>%fic«»ton to l>« taken from ot;
Whither our father^ of old time, departed.
thither their offspring, each his proper pathvray.
ICach version has its own quality; each method has its justification: to
make a complete translation after the second method, one must inevitably
waive the consideration of philological difficulties, a thing by no means licit
for Whitney in such a work as this. The admirable version of Griffith
/
12. Whitney s Translation xcv
illustrates the advantages of the second method, and also its inherent
limitations.^
Interpretative elements: captions of the hymns. — The preponderating
elements of the commentary are of a critical nature, and these have been
discussed by me at length in chapters i to ii of this Part I. of the Gen-
eral Introduction (above, pages Ixiv to xciii).; of the interpretative elements
a few words need yet to be said. And first, it should be expressly stated
that the English titles of the hymns (the captions or headings printed
in Clarendon type throughout, just before the Anukramanl-excerpts) con-
stitute, for the books of short hymns at least, a most important part of
the interpretative element of this work. They have evidently been formu-
lated by Whitney with much care and deliberation, and are intended by
him to give briefly his view of the general purport of each hymn. In a
few cases these captions were lacking, and have been supplied by me
from his first draft (so at i. 35) or otherwise (so at ii. 12; v. 6 ; vii. 109:
cf. books XV., xvi., and xviii., and p. TT2^ end). These captions are given
in tabular form near the end of the work : see volume viii., p. 1024.
Interpretations by Whitney. — Where the text is not in disorder, a rigor-
ously literal version is in many (if not in most) cases fairly intelligible
without added interpretation. The need of such additions Whitney has
occasionally, but perhaps not often, recognized. Thus after rendering the
padas i. 2. 3 ab by the words 'when the kine, embracing the tree, sing the
quivering dexterous reed,' he adds, "that is, apparently, 'when the gut-
string on the wooden bow makes the reed-arrow whistle.' " Similarly at
vi. 125. I. The text speaks at xviii. i. 52 of an offense done purusdtd :
Whitney renders * through humanity,' and adds *' that is, through'-* human
frailty." Cf. note to vii. 33. i.
It may be noted in this place (for lack of a better one) that Whitney,
in reporting the conjectures or interpretations of his predecessors, passes
over some in silence. Sometimes this appears to have been done inten-
tionally and because he disapproved them. Thus at iv. 37. 3, he notes in
his first draft the suggestions of BR. and OB. concerning avacvasdm ;
* It would be idle presumption in me to praise the work of a man whose knowledge of the
literature and customs and spirit of India is so incomparably greater than my own ; but I may
be allowed to repeat the judgment of my revered and beloved friend, M. Auguste liarth, con-
cerning Griflfith's Veda-translations : Elle [the RV. translation] se presente ainsi sans aucun
appareil savant, ce qui, du reste, ne veut pas dire qu*elle n'est pas savante. L*autcur, qui a
longtemps dirige le Benares CoUegCy a une profonde connaissance des langues, des usages, dc
Tesprit dc I'lnde, et, pour maint passage, on aurait tort de ne pas tenir grandement conipte
de cette version en apparencc sans pretentions (Revue de I'histoire des religions, year 1S93, -^^ _^-
xxvii. iSi). Elle [the AV. translation] . . . merite les memes eloges (Ibidfem, year 1899, ^^^^^^^^"^ i*"-^^^
xxxix. 25). '
' l>y a curious coincidence, *' through human frailty " b precisely the rendering given by
Griffith.
xcvi General Iniroduciiou, Pari /. ; by tlu Editor
but ij^norcs them in his second. Similarly, at ii. 14. 3, he omits mention
of a tianslation of the verse given hy Zimmcr at p. 420.
Ezegetical notes contributed by Roth. — It appears from the letters
between Roth and Whitney that the former had written out a German
version of this Veda, and that, although it was complete, its author did
not by any means consider it .is ready for publication. In order to give
Whitney the benefit of his opinion on doubtful |>oints, Roth made a brief
commentary u|)on such selected words or phrases (in their pro|)er sequence)
as seemed to him most likely to present difTiculties to Whitney. Ihc
result is a parcel of notes, consisting of 250 pages in Roth's handwriting,
which is now in my keeping. I'lom these notes Whitney has incorpo-
rated a considerable amount of exegctical matter into his commentary.
It is yet to be considered whether the notes contain enough material
unused by Whitney to warrant their publication, if this should appear
upon other grounds to l>e advisable.
The translation has for its underlying text that of the Berlin edition. —
With certain exceptions, to l>e noted later, the translation is a literal ver-
sion of the Vulgate Atharvan text as given in the Berlin edition. For
the great mass of the text, this is, to be sure, a matter of course. It is
also a matter of course in cases where, in default of helpful variants to
suggest an emendation of a desperate line, we are forced to a purely
mechanical version, as at xii. i. 37 a, 'she who, cleansing one, trembling
I away the serpent,* or at vi. 70. 2 «b. Kvcn in the not infrequent cases
where (in spite of the lack of parallel texts) an emendation is most obvious,
j Whitney sticks to the corrupted text in his translation, and reser^•es the
;, emendation for the notes. Thus, at iv. 12. 4, dsrk te dsthi rohatu mdhsdm
miJhs/ftti ro/uitu, he renders Met thy blood, bone grow,' although the
f , ^ ' change of dsrk to astlnui would make all in order.
'"' l^^ The translation follows the Berlin text even in cases of corrigible cormp-
' tions. — On the other hand, it may seem to some to be not a matter of
course that Whitney should give a bald and mechanically literal version
of the true Atharvan text as presented in the Berlin edition in those very
numerous cases where the parallel texts offer the wholly intelligible read-
ings of which the Atharvan ones are palpable distortions. Granting,
however, that they are, although corrupt, to be accepted as the Atharvan
readings, and considering that this work is primarily a technical one, his
procedure in faithfully reproducing the corruption in Mnglish is entirely
justified.
A few examples may Ik* given. Whitney renders tdin /I'd bltaf^a sdn^a
(i jofttH'hHi (iii. 16. 5) by 'on thee here, Bhaga. do I call entire,' although
RV VS. have y<'//*ii77/, 'on thee does every one call.* At v. 2. 8, thntf
€id :'t(tuttfi anuivat td/^tisvdfi is rendered • may he, quick, rich in fervor.
12. Whitney s Translation xcvii
send(?) all/ although it is a corruption (and a most interesting one) of
the very clear line diiraf ca vifvd avniod dpa svdh. So piiruddmdso
(vii. 73. I), *of many houses,' although the (^rauta-Sutras oiler puruta-
mdso. At RV. vi. 28. 7 the cows are spoken of as 'drinking clear water
and cropping good pasture/ suydvasain r^dnith: the AV. text-makers, at
iv. 21. 7, corrupt the phrase to -se ru^dntihy but only in half-way fashion,
for they leave the RV. accent to betray the character of their work.
Even here Whitney renders by ' shining {ni^anti/i) in good pasture.' The
AV., at xviii. 4. 40, describes the Fathers as dstftdm flrjain upa yd sdcanic ;
Whitney is right in rendering the line by * they who attach themselves unto
a sitting refreshment,' although its original intent is amusingly revealed
by HGS., which has {jusantdvt) vidsi ^mdm^ ftrjam tita yc bhajantCy 'and
they who partake of this nourishment every month.' For other instances,
see the notes to iv. 21. 2a; iii. 3. i ; iv. 16.6 (rn<^anias for ritsdn(as), 8
{vdritno) ; 27. 7 (yiditdm) ; vi. 92. 3 (dhdvatn) ; ii. 35. 4 ; iii. 18. 3 ; iv. 2. 6 ;
15. 5 ; vii. 21. I ; and so on.
Cases of departure from the text of the Berlin edition. — These are always
expressly stated by Whitney. They include, first, cases in which the
Berlin edition does not present the true Atharvan text. An example
may be found at xix. 64. i, where the editors had emended wrongly to
dgre^x\i\. the version implies dgnc. At xix. 6. 13, the editors, following the
suggestion of the parallel texts, had emended to chdnddhsi the ungram-
matical corruption of the AV. chdndo ha {jajflire tdsvidt) ; but since
Whitney held that the latter reading "has the best right to figure as
Atharvan text," his intentionally ungrammatical English 'meter were
born from that' is meant to imply that reading.
Here are included, secondly, cases in which the Berlin reading, although /loZf,5'
it has to be recognized as the true Atharvan reading, is so unmanageable
that Whitney has in despair translated the reading of some parallel text
or an emended reading. Thus at vii. 57. 2 c it is assumed that rMd id
asyo *bhif asya rdjalah is, although corrupt, the true Atharvan reading.
The corruption is indeed phonetically an extremely slight distortion, for
the RV. has nbhd id asyo *bhdyasya rdjatah; and from this the translation
is made. — Other categories might be set up to suit the slightly varying
relations of mss. and edition and version: cf. xix. 30. i ; xviii. 4. Zt\ and
so on.
Whitney's growing skepticism and correspondingly rigid literalness. —
At xiii. 4. 54, Whitney says : *' Our rendering has at least concinnity — '—
unless, indeed, in a text of this character, that be an argument against
its acceptance." The remark is just; but one does not wonder tliat its
author has been called dcr gross e Skcptiker dcr Spraclnvissenschaft, That
^ Perhaps the corruption is yet deeper seated, and covers an original masi-rndsy urjaut.
^
I
xcviii General lutroduciion^ Pari I. : by the lidUor
his skepticism grew with the progress of his work is clear from a com-
parison of the unreviscil with the revised forms (cf. p. xxvii) of the early
books. Thus at vi. 57. 2, as a rendering o(jd/tisii, his manuscript at first
read 'heaKr*; but on the revision he has crossed this out and put the
Vedic word untranslated in its stead. With his skepticism, hb desire for
rigid literahiess seems to have increased. At ii. 33. 5, the first draft trans-
lates ptdf^ada very suitably by 'fore parts of the feet*; but the second
ff^ic^y I renders it by 'front feet.* Similarly, at vi. 42. 3, there is no reasonable
*^/, >>^«^ . doubt thai fdrsnyd prdfHtdcna ca means (I trample] 'with heel and with
h^ 0i'^ toe* (cf. viii. 6. 15 ; vi. 24. 2) ; but again he renders by 'front foot.* At
A'^^f^ iii- 15 7. his prior draft reads 'watch over our life*: 'life* is an unim-
^\ peachabic equivalent of 'vital spirits* or fnhtds; but the author has
changed it to 'breaths* in the second draft.
1 1 is presumable motive, a wish to leave all in the least degree doubtful
interpretation to his successors, we can understand ; but we cannot deny
that he sometimes goes out of his way to make his version wooden. Thus
he renders /'//r, when used of skins or amulets (viii. 6. 1 1 ; 5. 13) by * bear *
instead of 'wear.' At iv. 21. i, he sfHraks of cows as 'milking for Indra
many dawns,* although ' full many a morning yielding milk for Indra '
can hardly be called too free. Cf. his apt version of uitardm-Htiaitlw
sdifidtn at xii. 1. 33, • from one year to another,* with that given at iii. 10. I ;
17.4, 'each further summer.* In a charm to rid the grain of danger,
vi. 50. I d, ' make fearlessness for the grain * is needlessly inept. It is
easy for Sanskritists, but not for others, to sec that 'heroism * (virjd), as
used of an herb at xix. 34. 8, means its 'virtue' (and so he renders it at
xii. 1.2); that 'l>odies* of Agni at xix. 3. 2 are his 'forms* (fitvlj or
j^/iords)\ and so on; but to others, such versions will hardly convey the
intended meaning. The fact that svastibhts^ in the familiar refrain of the
Vasisfhas, is a plural, hardly justifies the infelicity of using such a plural
as 'well-beings* to render it at iii. 16. 7; and some will say the like of
• wcalfulnesses * (iv. 13. 5), 'wealths,* and 'marrows.*
It lies entirely beyond the province of the editor to make alterations
in matters of this kind. It is |>erhaps to be regretted that these infelici-
ties, which do not really go below the surface of the work, are the very
things that are the most striking for |)ersons who examine the book casu-
ally and without technical knowledge; but the book is after all primarily
for technical study.
^ ,. , Poetic elevation and humor. — The places in which the A V. rises to any
/• ^ x-^*"*""""^ elevation of |X)etic thought or diction arc few indeed. Some of the
funeral verses come as near it as any (among them, notably, xviii. 2. 50) ;
and .some of the philosophic verses (especially of x. 8 under Deusscn*s
sympathetic treatment) have an interest which is not mean. The motive
12. Whitney s Translation
xcix
of xix. 47 is an exceptionally coherent and pleasing one. I presume
that the idea of sending the fever as a choice present to one's neighbors
1 1 (v. 22. 14) is intended to be jocose. Witchcraft and healing are serious
businesses. If there is anything else of jocular tone in this extensive /wtt/^-'^
text, I do not remember that any one has recognized and noted it. The ^ f^^^ ''
gravity of Whitney's long labor is hardly relieved by a gleam of humor
save in his introduction to ii. 30 and his notes to vi. 16. 4 and 67. 2 and
x. 8. 27, and the two cited at p. xcvii, line 4 from end, and p. xciv, 1. 23.
ili^'^
13. Abbreviations and Signs explained
General scope of the list. — The following list is intended not only to
explain all the downright or most arbitrary abbreviations used in this
work, but also to explain in the shortest feasible way all such abbreviated
designations of books and articles as are more or less arbitrary. The
former generally consist of a single initial letter or group of such letters ;
the latter, of an author's name or of the abbreviated title of a work.
The downright abbreviations. — These are for the most part identical
with those used by Whitney in his C/vr;;/;//^?;- and given and explained by
him on p. xxvi of that work: thus AA. = Aitareya-Aranyaka. — Whit-
ney's omission of the macron proper to the A in AA., AB., A^S., AGS.,
13AU., and TA. was doubtless motived by a purely mechanical considera-
tion, the extreme fragility of the macron over a capital A; that he has not
omitted it in Apast. or Ap. is a pardonable inconsistency. — The sigla codi-
cum are explained at p. cix, and only such of them are included here as have
more than one meaning : thus, W. = Wilson codex and also = Whitney.
Abbreviated designations of books and articles. — For these the list is
intended to give amply sufficient and clear explanations, without follow-
ing strictly any set of rules of bibliographers. In the choice of the des-
ignations, brevity and unambiguousness have been had chiefly in mind. —
An author's name, without further indication of title, is often used arbi-
trarily to mean his most frequently cited work. Thus ** Weber " means
Weber's Indische Studien, With like arbitrariness are used the names
of Bloomfield, Caland, Florenz, Griffith, Grill, Henry, Ludwig, Muir,
Winternitz, and Zimmer : cf. the list. — Where two coordinate reference-
numbers, separated by a comma, are given (as in the case of Bloomfield,
Grill, and Henry), the first refers to the page of the translation, and the
second to the page of the commentary. Of similar numbers, separated
by "or" (as on p. 286), the first refers to the original pagination, and
the second to the pagination of the reprint.^
^ Here let mc protest against the much worse than useless custom of giving a new pagina-
tion or a double pagination to separate reprints. If an author in citing a reprinted article does
C General Inlroduciion^ Pari L : by iht Editor
Explanation of arbitrary signs. — The followinp^ sif;ns (and letters) arc
used in the hcxiy of this work more or less arbitrarily.
Parentheses are usctl in the translation to enclose the 5>anskrit original
of any given Mnglish word (see above, p. xx), such indications bein;^
often most acceptable to the profcs«;ional student. For numerous
instances, see xii. i, where the added bhRmi ox prthivi (both are added in
vs. 7) shows which of these words is meant by the Knglish earth. They
are also used to enclose an indication of the gender (m. f. n.) or number
(du. pi.) of a V'edic word whose gender or number cannot otherwise be
shown by the version.
Square brackets are employed to enclose some of the words inserted
in the translation for which there is no express equivalent in the
original.
Ell-brackets, or square brackets minus the upper horizontal stroke
(thus : L J )» were devised by the editor to mark as portions of this work
for which Whitney is not res|>onsible such additions or changes as were
made by the editor (cf. p. xxviii, end). These types were devi.sed partly
becau.se the usual parentheses and brackets were already employed for
other pur|)oses, and jKirtly because they readily suggest the letter ell, the
initial of the editor's name.
Hand. — In order to avoiti the expense of alter.itions in the electro-
plates, all considerable additions and corrections have been put together
on pages 1045-46, and reference is made to them in the proper places by
means of a hand i>ointing to the page concerned (thus, at p. 327, line 1 1 :
IH'^'Sce p. 1045).
The small circle (thus : o ) represents the avnf^m/ta or division-mark
of the /fr</<i-tcxts. This use of the circle is common in the mss. (as
explained at p. cxxii) and has been followed in the Iptitex I'erbomm
(see p. 4).
The Italic colon (.*) is employeil as equivalent of the vertical stroke
used in pu't^^^itti to se{>aratc individual words or fadas, lk)th circle and
colon are used in the note to vi. 131. 3. I regard both the circle and the
colon as extremely ill adapted for the uses here explained.
The letters «, b, c, d, e, f, etc., when set, as here, in Clarendon tjpe, are
intended to designate the successive p.ulas of a Vedic stanza or verse.
Alphal>etic list of abbreviations. — The downright abbreviations and the
abbreviated designations of books and articles follow here, all in a single
alphabetically arranged list.
not |>i«>«» (rach rrferenr«* thereto in (luplicate, or if \\\\ rea«lrr dort n«»t hate at hand lx>th th«
original arul the reprint (ami cither of the^c ca«r« \\ rt< rptional>. the meeker of a citation it
•uie til l»e taiHeil in a lar|;;e proportion of the in^tanr^^ concerned. It is amaiing thai anj
author or etlttor can be to hecdleta at to tolerate this c«il |tractKC.
13. Abbreviations and Signs explained
ci
AA. = Aitarcya-Aranyaka- Ed. IJibl. Ind.
1876.
AB. = Aitareya-Brahmana. Ed. Th. Auf-
rccht Bonn. 1879.
Abh.»= Abhandlungen.
AQS. = A^valayana-^rauta- Sutra. Ed.
Bibl. Ind. 1874.
In the cd., the 1 2 adhydyas of the work
are divided into two liexads (saflas), a
Trior and a Latter, and the numbering of
those of the letter begins anew with i.
In Whitney*s citations, the numbers run
from i. to xii. : thus (in his note to iv. 39.9)
A(^S. I[. ii. 14. 4 is cited as viii. 14.4.
AGS. = A^valayana-Grhya-Sutra. Ed. A.
F. Stenzler in Sanskrit and German.
Leipzig. 1864-5. E^- ^^so in Bibl.
Ind. 1869.
AJP. = American Journal of Philology.
Ed. B. L. Gildersleeve. Baltimore.
1 880-.
Ak. = Akademie.
Amer. = American.
Anukr. = Anukramanl or. sometimes the
author of it.
Ap(;S. or Ap. = Apastamba-C^rauta-Sutra.
Ed. R. Garbe in Bibl. Ind. 1882-
1902. 3 vol's.
ApGS. = Apastambiya-Grhya-Sutra. Ed.
M. Winternitz. Vienna. 1887.
Apr. = Atharva-Veda Prati^akhya. Ed.
W. D. Whitney in JAOS. (vii. 333-
615). 1862. Text, translation, and
elaborate notes.
Aufrecht Das XV. Buch des AV. Text,
translation, and notes. Ind. Stud. i.
1 21-140. 1849. See below, p. 769.
AV. = Atharva-Veda. AV. = also Athar-
va-Veda-Samhita. Ed. by R. Roth and
W.D.Whitney. Berlin. 1855-6. Ed.
also by Shankar Pandurang Pandit.
Bombay. 1895-8. 4 vol's,
-av. = -avasana : see explanation following.
In the excerpts from the Anukr., the
Sanskrit eka-^ dvi-^ tri-^ etc., constantly
recurring in composition with avasana and
fkida^ are abbreviated by the Arabic nu-
merals I, 2, 3, etc. Thus, at p. 727, the
excerpt jav. 6p. atyasti may be read as
try-avasdnd saipadd Uyastih.
B. = Brahmana.
BAU. = Brhad-Aranyaka-Upanisad. Ed.
Otto Bohtlingk. Leipzig. 1SS9. Other
ed's : Calc, Bo., Poona.
Baudhayana = B5udhayana-Dharma-Qas-
tra. Ed. E. Hultzsch. Leipzig. 1S84.
Bergaigne : see Rel. V<5d.
Bergaigne-Henry, Manuel = Manuel pour
dtudier le Sanscrit vddique. By A.
Bergaigne and V. Henry. Paris. 1S90.
Bibl. Ind. = Bibliotheca Indica, as desig-
nation of the collection of texts and
translations published by the Asiatic
Society of Bengal in Calcutta.
Bl. = Bloomfield.
Bloomficld (without further designation of
title) = Hymns of the AV., together
with extracts from the ritual books and
the commentaries, translated by Mau-
rice Bloomfield. Oxford. 1S97. This
book is vol. xlii. of SBE.
In this work Bl. sums up a very large
part, if not all, of his former " Contribu-
tions " to the exegesis of this Veda, which
he had published in AJP. (vii., xi., xii.,
xvii.), JAOS. (xiii., xv., xvi. — PAOS.
included), ZDMG. (xlviii.). The " Contri-
butions" are cited by the abbreviated des-
ignations (just given) of the periodicals
concerned.
Bloomfield, Atharvavcda = his part, so en-
titled, of the Grundriss. 1899.
Bo. = Bomb.ny.
BR. = Bohtlingk and Roth's Sanskrit-
Worterbuch. Published by the Impe-
rial Russian Academy of Sciences. St.
Petersburg. 1 852-1 875. Seven vol's.
Often called the (Major) (St.) Peters-
burg Lexicon. Cf. OB.
Caland (without further indication of title)
= Altindisches Zaubcrritual. Probe
einer Uebersetzung dcr wichtigsten
Theile des Kau^ika-Sutra (kandikas 7-
52). By W. Caland. Amsterdam.
1900. From the Verhandelingcn der
Koninklijke Ak. van Wetenschappen
te Amsterdam. Dcel III. No. 2.
Caland, Todtcngebrauche = Die Altindi-
schen Todten- und Bestattungsgebrau-
che. Amsterdam. 1896. Seep. 813.
Cll
Gatcral Iniroduciion^ Pari L : by the Editor
Calami, TotcnvTrchning = Uclxrr Tolcn-
vcrchrunj; bci cinigcn cicr Imlo-Gcr-
mantsclicn Volkcr. Amsterdam. 1JIS8.
Calami, Pitrmc<llia Sutrajt ~ The I'itrmc-
(Ilia SiJtraH of llAudliayana, lliranyakc-
^iii, («.iti(Ama. Ixipji;*. i8<X>.
Calc. = Cal< ulta or CalcuKa edition.
i^W. - (,'at.ipatlia • Hiahmana. Kd. A.
Weber. Iletlin. 1S55.
tV^- - <,'^i"»kl»Ayana- (,'rAuta Sutra. Kd.
A. Ilillrl)r.mdt. Hibl. 1ml. 1888.
^J'CiS. ~ (,'Afikhi\yana-<iihya-.Sulr.i. Ed. H.
01dcnl>crg in Ind. Stud. (xv. i-i6^>).
1878. Ski. and («erman.
ChU. ~ Chi\ndogya • U|iani!ja<l. Ed. ().
Uolitlingk. Lcipfi^. 1S.S9. Skt and
German. Kd. also in Hild. Ind., Uo.,
and Toona^
Collation- llook =- manuscript volumes con-
taining; Whitney's fundamental tran-
script of the AV. text and his collations,
etc. For details, sec p. cxvii.
comm. ~ the commentary on AV. (as-
cribed to .Sdyaiia and published in the
llombay e<l.) ; ot ^ the author thereof.
Da^. Kar. =r l>a^a Karm.lni, a paddhati to
certain parts of the KSuq. See Ill's
intrcMluction. p. xi\'.
Dclbruck. Altindi^che .Synt.ix. llalle.
1888.
Denkschr. — Denksrhriften.
Deussen, <^esc!iirhte ~ Alljjemcine Ge-
schichtedcr Thilosophie niit l>esonderer
Ilermksichtigunf; dcr Reliqionen. Hy
Paul Deu.^cn. Leipzig;. The first vol.
(p.irt I, l8<>4: part 2, 18*79) treats of
the philosophy of the Veda and of the
Upani%.ids.
Deuvien, Tpanishads = Sech/ijj Tpani-
shad's des Veda aus dcm Sanskrit
ijl>ersetxt und mit Einlcitungcn und
Anmerkungen versehen. Leipzig.
1897.
Dhanvantart ~- Dhanvantariya • Nighantu.
Some references are to the Poona eti.;
Roth's references are, I presume, to
his transcript dcscril)ed by Garl)e,
Verfcit Imiss der (Tuliinger) Indischen
llandschriften, ^o, 230.
du. » dual.
etI. -: criition (of) or editor or edited by
or in.
et al. — et alibi.
f. or fern. = feminine.
Festgruss an Itohtlingk = Festgntis an
Otto von lUihilingk xum Uoktor-JulM-
laum, 3. Februar 1888, von seinen
Freunden. Stuttgart. 188S.
Festgruss an Roth = Fcstgruss«an Rudolf
von Roth 2um DoktnrJuUbum, 24.
August 1893, von seinen Freunden und
Schulem. Stuttgart. 1^73.
Florenz = his German translation of AV.
vi. i-$o, with comment, in vol. xii. of
Kezzenberger's Ueitiage. Gottingen.
1887. Sec below, p. 281.
GH. •=• (*opatha-nrAhmana. Kd. Dibl. Ind.
1872.
GeUlner : tee Subemtig Ueddr and V'tJ.
StyJ.
Ges. ~ (fcsellschaft.
(i(iA. = (iottingische Gelehrtc Anzeigen.
GGS. = (fobhilaCirhya-Sutra. Kd. Fried-
rich Knauer. I^eip/ig. 1885. Text,
transl., and comment : in 2 parts.
(Wammar or (.Skt.) C«ram. or (ir. = Whit-
ney's Sanskrit (irammar, 2d cd. Lei|>-
zig and Boston. 1889. There is a 3d
rd. (189^)), which is essentially a re-
print of the 3d.
(*rassmann = Rig- Veda. Ucbcraetzt etc.
Leipzig. 1876-7. 2 vol's.
Griffith = The hymns of the AV., trans-
lated, with a |>opular commentary. \\y
Ralph T. II. (Wiffith. Benares niul Lon-
don. 1895-6. 2 vol's. Cf. p. xcv, above.
(*rill - Hundert Lieder des AV. By Julius
(;rill. 2ded. Stuttgart 1888. Trans-
lation and comment.
Grohmann = Medic inisches aus dcm AV.,
mit besonderem Bezug auf den Takman.
In Ind. Stud. (ix. 3>^i-423). 1865.
Grundriss = Grundriss der Indo-Arischen
Philologie und Altertumskundc. Be-
griindet %on ( jeorg Buhlcr. Fortgesetzt
von F. Kiel horn. Stnuwburg. i8<)6-.
Gurupuj.1kaumu<U ^ Feslg.il>c rum funf-
zigjahiigen Doctorjubitaum, Albrecht
3 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK I. -i. 3
where it, witli i. 19-21 and sundry other hymns, is called s&mgr&mika or * battle-hymn,*
used in rites for putting an enemy to flight; and it (or vs. i) is apparently designated
hy prathamasya (as first of the sdrngrilmika hymns) in 14.12, where the avoidance of
wounds by arrows is aimed at; it is also reckoned (14.7, note) as belonging to the
aparHjita gana ; further, it is used, with ii. 3, in a healing ceremony (25. 6) for assuag-
ing wounds, etc. ; and, after hymn i has been employed in the npukarman^ it and the
other remaining hymns of the anuvdka are to be muttered (139. 11). The comm.
Lp. 16, top J, once more, quotes it from Naksatra |_error, for ^anti, says liloomfieldj
Kalpa 17, 18, as applied in a mahH^Hnti called apardjita.
Translated : Weber, iv. 394 ; Griffith, i. 3 ; Bloomfield, 8, 233. — Discussed : Bloom-
field, AJP. vii. 467 ff. or JAOS. xiii. p. cxiii ; Florenz, Dezzenberger' s Beitrdge^ xiv. 1 78 ff.
1. We know the reed's father, Parjanya the much-nourishing; and
we know well its mother, the earth of many aspects.
Vidmd is quoted in Prat. iii. 16 as the example first occurring in the text of a
lengthened final a.
2. O bow-string, bend about us ; make thyself a stone ; being hard,
put very far away niggards [and] haters.
A bow-string is, by Kau^. 14. 13, one of the articles used in the rite. With b com-
pare ii. 13. 4 b. Pada d is RV. iii. 16. 5 d. * Niggard ' is taken as conventional render-
ing of Ardti, The comm. reads vflus^ RV.-wise.
3. When the kine, embracing the tree, sing the quivering dexterous
(? rbhti) reed, keep away from us, O Indra, the shaft, the missile.
That is, apparently (a, b), * when the gut-string on the wooden bow makes the reed-
arrow whistle * : cf. R V. vi. 67. 1 1 c, d. The comm. explains rbhum as uru bhdsamdnam ( !),
and didyum as dyotamdnam^ which is probably its etymological sense. [^Discussed,
Bergaigne, Rel, v^d, i. 278 n., ii. 182. J
4. As between both heaven and earth stands the bamboo (? t^jana)^ so
let the reed-stalk (imiflja) stand between both the disease and the flux
(asrdvd).
The verse seems unconnected with the rest of the hymn, but to belong rather with
hjTnn 3. The comm. glosses tejana with venu. For dsrdva^ cf. ii. 3 ; vi. 44. 2 ; the
comm. explains it here by tnutrdtfsdra 'difficulty (?) of urinating' or * painful urina-
tion* |_* diabetes,' rather ?J. Bloomfield understands it to mean " diarrhoea," and bases
up6n this questionable interpretation his view of the meaning of the whole hymn, which
he entitles ** formula against diarrhoea."
3. Against obstruction of urine: with a reed.
\^Atharvan, — tmvarcam. parjanyamitrddibahudcvatyam. dmistubham : i-j. pathydpaftktiJ]
Of this hymn, only vss. y-Z are found in Paipp. (in xix.), without the refrain. It is
doubtless intended at Kau^. 25. 10, as used in a rite for regulating the flow of urine ;
vss. 8-9 are specified in 25. 12. The "reed" implies some primitive form of a fistula
urinaria^ the vastiyantra (one of the nddlyantrdni) of the later physicians — who,
however, do not appear to have made frequent use of it.
Translated: Weber, iv. 395 ; Griffith, 1.4; Bloomfield, 10, 235. — Cf. Bergaigne-
Henry, Manuel^ p. 130.
{ii
i. 3 BOOK I. THE ATHy\kV/\-VEDA-SAMHrrA. 4
1. \VV knf»w the rcc<rs father, I*arjanya of hundredfold virility; with
that will I make weal {(tim) for thy body; on the earth [Ik:] thine out-
pouring;, out of thee, with a splash !
The UsX pAcU i!i found also at 'IS. iii. 3. lo* ; M/ ///, af;ain at xviit. 3. 22.
2. We know the reed's father, Mitraof hundredfold virility; with that
will etc. etc.
3. We know the reed's father, Varuna of etc. etc.
4. We know the reed*s father, the moon of etc. etc.
5. We know the reed's father, the sun of etc. etc.
6. What in thine entrails, thy (two) (;roins (? j^^vfni), what in thy
bladder has flowed together — so be thy urine released, out of thcc, with
a splash ! all of it.
The comm. rcadu in b (with iwo or llircr of SrP'ji m*«., which follow him) iam^n-
tarn. He explains the ^tivlnytlu as **t«%o vessels {n*hil) located in the two Mdes,
affording access lo the retepLn Ics of uiinr."
7. I split up thy urinator, like the weir of a tank — so be thy etc. etc.
1 he comm. (with tlie same mss. as aU>ve) has in b variam. Ppp. reads vrfram
X'f^antytl : yantyah. \j \ pierce or <»pen up thy urethra* — with a metallic catheter,
says the comm.J
8. Unfastened [be] thy bladder-orifice, like [that] of a water-holding
sea — so he thy etc. etc.
Ppp. gives, for b, samNtiratyo *t*uihir tva.
9. As the arr(»w flew foith, let loose from the Iww — so be thy etc. etc.
Instead of parAMipatai in a, we should expect parA^piiiai, the equi%*alent of a
I present.
£/|iy It is easy to re<luce this hymn to the sulntance of four verses, the norm of the book,
r* ^' * by striking;; out vss. 2-5, as pLiinly secondary variations of vs. 1, and combining vss. 7->S
(is in I'pp.) into one ver»e, with omission of the sense disturbing refrain*
4. To the waters: for blessings.
[SimifkmJrif<a. — afetMftfitdm, sfimJAJJit>t/Jmi. j^Jyttrdrnt : 4. fmrattd^ihrhsit.']
The hymn is not found in I'.^ipp. It and the two that next follow are reckoned by
K&u^. (()■ 1.4) to iKith {tinii j(,M//iif, majt>r (hrhai) and minor (iaji^hm) ; also (7. 14) to
the apAfk saktAni or water hymns applied in various ceremonies ; and by some (18. 2$,
note) to the s^iila jC'"f4t, which K.'iu<;. l>e|;ins with hymns 5 and 6. The same three are
joined viith others (19. 1 ) in a he.iling rite for sick kine, and (41. 14) in a ceremony for
i;ood fortune. Af;ain (25. 20), this h)mn is used (with vi. 51) in a remedial rite, and
(37. I) in the interpretation of sif^ns. Hymns 4>6 further appear in VAit. (16. lo) as
used in the 4f/<*if «i//r /m lite f>f the it^nisioma sacrifice, and 4. 2 alone with the setting
down of the ittiti/hutpl water in the same sacrifice. The four verses are RV. i.23. |6>I9 ;
for other corres|>ondrn<es, see under the verses.
Translated : Wcbcr. iv. y/O ; GritTith, i. 6.
X
5 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK I. -i. 5
1. The mothers go on their ways, sisters of them that make sacrifice,
mixing milk with honey.
2. They who are yonder at the sun, or together with whom is the sun
— let them further our sacrifice.
The verse is found further, without variant, in VS. (vi. 24 e).
3. The heavenly waters I call on, where our kine drink ; to the rivers
(sindhu) is to be made oblation.
LCf. note to X. 9. 27, below. J
4. Within the waters is ambrosia (ainrta)^ in the waters is remedy;
and by the praises {prdgasti) of the waters ye become vigorous (vajin)
horses, ye become vigorous kine.
The second half-verse is here rendered strictly according to the accent, which for-
bids taking the nouns as vocatives; SPP. reads in c, with all his mss. and the great
majority of ours bhdvatha (our two Bp. give bhav-) ; the accent is to be regarded as
antithetical. RV. gives prdgastaye at end of b, and ends the verse with c, reading dhfd
bhdvata vHjinah, Other texts have tlie verse: VS. (ix. 6 a), TS. (i. 7. 70» ^"d MS.
(i. 1 1. 1) ; all lack a fourth pada, and have at end of \) prd^astisu ; for c, VS. has d^vd
bhdvata vdjinah^ TS. d(ivd bhavatha vdjinah^ and MS. dqvd bhavata vdjinah.
5. To the waters: for blessings.
\Sindhudvipa. — (etc, as 4).]
The first three verses occur, without variants, in Paipp. xix. The whole hymn, with
the first three verses of the one next following, are, also without variants, RV. x. 9. 1-7
(vs. 5 is here put before 4 ; 6, 7 are also RV. i. 23. 20 a, b, c, 21) ; and they likewise
occur in other texts: thus, 5. 1-3 in SV. (ii. 11S7-1189), VS. (xi. 50-52 et al.), TS.
(iv. I. 5» ct al.), MS. (ii. 7. 5 et al.), and TA. (iv. 42. 4ct al.), everywhere with the same
text Lfor other references, see MGS., p. 147 J ; as to 5. 4 and the verses of 6, see under
the verses. Hymns 5 and 6 together are called ^ambhumayob/nl^ Kc^uq. 9. i ; for their
uses in connection with the preceding hymn, see under that hymn. Both appear also in
the house-building ceremony (43. 12), and this one alone in \\\t dar^apftrnamdsa- or
/rtrr/aw-sacrifices (6. 17) ; while the schol. add it (42. 13, note) to the ceremony on the
home-coming of the Vedic student. For the use in Vait. with hymns 4 and 6, see under 4 ;
with 6 (also under the name ^ambhumayobhti) it accompanies in \\it paqubandha (10. 19)
the washing of articles employed ; and with it alone, in the agnicayana (28. 11), is the
lump of earth sprinkled. The comm., finally, quotes the hymn from Naks. Kalpa 1 7,
1 8, as used in a mahd^dnti called ddityd.
Translated : Weber, iv. 397 ; Griffith, i. 7.
1. Since ye are kindly waters, do ye set us unto refreshment (ftrj),
unto sight of great joy.
2. What is your most propitious savor (rdsa), of that make us share
here, like zealous mothers.
3. We would satisfy you in order to that to the possession of which
ye quicken, O waters, and generate us.
i. 5- nooK I. Tin: athakva viida-samiiita. 6
[May not f*tn*h'*tthi}^ like Miiglii^h pri*4fme, here mean •brinp/ ami %o Mgnify aUiut
the »ainr lliini; as ;iit:'*tikti 'J
4. Of the waters, having masti-ry of desirable things, ruling over
human hein;;s (tttrstiNt), I ask a lemedy.
'Ihr vrrsc fnilou<« in KV. our f*, I. It \% found, without variants, in TH. (11.5. A*)
and TA. (iv. 42. 4 ) ; hut MS. (iv. 9. 27) has a corrupt third pikda, with much diftcordaiKC
amoit^ the ms%., and adds a fourtli.
6. To the waters: for blessings.
[SiHjkMMi/''9 {At'ijtxJlfti) — (cU., 4* 4). 4, fatktdf^mktt]
The hymn is not found in Taipp . luit |)rrhaps stoo<l at the lieginnini; of itt teit« on
the lost fimt leaf : see [lUoomticld'H in(ro<l. to the K\\i<^ . p. xxxvii and ref*s, rsp. \Vel>er,
V. 78 anfl xiii. 431 J. Vrises I 3 on ur in KV., as noted under the prece«Iing h)mn. and
1-2 in othrr text% a^ |H)intcd out under the %'i'iM:s. For the use of the h)nm, with its
pretlecessor or it^ two prcdrce*v>r5. in K.iu^. and VAit , see alnwe, under those hymns.
Ver»e I i* aUo (K.iu<;.(). 7) diri<tr<| in |»r it'iK-atrd (tilth the ji^Ayatfl or fjfi/r/ verse)
at the lM-t;innin^ and end of c^/i// rites, and to )>e recited part by part sii times, with
rinsing of the mouth, in the tHiffttmit/totsa-iui ceremony (140.5).
Translated : \Vel»er, iv. 3<>7 ; (irittith, i. 8.
1. He the divine waters weal for us in order to assistance, to drink ;
weal [and] health flow they unto us.
The ver^e occurs further, without variants, in \'S. (xxxvi. I 2), TI*. (i. 2. I ' et al. ). TA.
(iv. 42. 4). and Ap. (v. 4.1); in .SV. (i. 33) is rt'|>eated f<f/Ar Mai (instead of ipas) at
beginning; of b. The lomm. explains tthhi)ti l>y ahhiytijana !
As to the prefixion of this \'erse to the whole text in a part of our mss., see p. cxvL
2. Within the waters. Soma told me, are all remedies, and Agni (fire)
wealful for all.
Found aUo in TH. (ii. 5.8'), without variants, and in MS. (iv. 10. 4), with, for c,
3. () waters, bestow a remaly, protection {itiru/Aa) for my body, and
lonj; to sec the sim.
Onlv KV. has this vrrse.
4. Weal for us the wateis of the plains, and weal be those of the
marshes, weal for us the waters won by di^^ing, and weal what are
brought in a vessel ; propitious to us be tho.se of the rain.
PAdas a d are nearly re|)eali*d in xix. 2. 2.
The ms\ sum up this ttMNjillit [i.J or chapter .is of f> hymns, 29 %'erscs ; and their
quoted Anukr. say* thivaf*fttth*intit rm mtva syur vitiytt : i.e. the verses exceed by 9
the assumed norm of the chapters, whii h is 20. [^Kr^ardin^; viihtlt, see end of notes
to i. I I.J
7 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK I. -i. 7
7. ToAgni: for the discovery of sorcerers.
l^Cdtana. — saptarcam. dnustubham : j. tristubh.']
This hymn and the following occur in Paipp. iv., where the length of this one is
more in place than here among the hymns of four verses. Both, with eight other hymns
(mostly attributed by the Anukr. to Ciitana as author), are called by Kaug. (8. 25)
cdiandni * expellers,' and are used in a few places for exorcism and such purposes.
Translated : Weber, iv. 398 ; Ludwig, p. 523 ; Griffith, i. 9 ; Bloomfield, 64, 237. —
Cf. Bergaigne-Henry, Manuel^ p. 131 ; also Whitney, Festgruss an Roth^ p. 94 f.
1. Bring hither, O Agni, the sorcerer {ydtudhana), the kimidin, speak-
ing out {sin) ; for thou, O god, being revered, hast become slayer of the
barbarian (ddsyii).
Stu is shown by its use also in 8. 1,2 to have here the virtual meaning 'confess'
L' naming, i.e. confessing himself; cf. laudare * praise,' but also * name,* * mention 'J.
The comm. does not see this, but stolidly renders it 'praise,* making the first line mean
"bring the god who praises my oblation or else who is praised by us, and make the
yHtudhana etc. go away ** ! He is never weary, when kimldtn occurs, of repeating
Yaska*s (6. 1 1 ) silly etymology from kim iddnfm * what now ? * Ppp. reads for a stu-
vdnastHnaya^ and, for c, d, tvath hi devdm stu to hantd tasyo *ta babhuvyatha,
2. O most exalted one {parames(/nfi), Jatavedas, self-controller, Agni,
partake of {pra-ag) the sacrificial butter, of the sesame oil (.^) ; make the
sorcerers cry out. J/^^^^^- ^r^ ^^*
The translation * sesame oil* follows our i^xi^ tdi/dsya; but the reading of all the j^y^^Jt- ^^A?-^'
mss., which SPP. follows, is tduldsya^ and Ppp. has tfilasya. The comm. explains
the word as meaning " situated in the sacrificial ladle,'* from tula * balance,* used for
•spoon,* because by the latter the butter is measured out — or, he adds, it si«(nifics /r /a'-V ^
simply avadlyaffiana * cut off * (in the technical sense), since the root //// means uufnane
L* mete out *J. Ppp. further reads in c, d prd^Anath yatudhdnad vildpayah. The
comm. first takes vi Idpaya from root //, and makes it equal vind^aya! but he adds
further a derivation from vi lap L* make 'cm squeal,* as we should say J. At end of a,
the samhitd-mss.^ as usual, are divided between -st/titt and -sthinj S1*P. chooses the
former |_cf. Prat. ii. 1 1 J. Ppp. has va^iin in b.
3. Let the sorcerers cry out {vi-lap), let the devouring kimtdins; then
do you, O Agni together with Indra, welcome this our oblation.
Ppp. combines, as often, -dhdnd Uri-^ in a-b ; and it reads yathd for atha in c, and
at the end haryatdm. SPP. reads everywhere attrin^ the theoretically correct form,
but never found in the mss.
4. Let Agni first take hold ; let Indra, having arms, push forth ; let
everyone that has a demon, coming, say "here am L"
Ydtumant * having a familiar demon {ydtu) ' is the equivalent of ydtudhdna * sor-
cerer,' lit'ly • holding a demon.' Ppp. has for a, b agnis purastdd d yachatn pratha
indro nudadas vdhumd ; and for d, ay am asmdi tcdyd.
5. We would fain see thy heroism (iv/jr?), O Jatavedas ; proclaim to
/ir/^ . -^'^
r^
i. 7 IJOOK I Tin: ATHAkVA-VKDA-SAMIin A. 8
us ihc sorcerers, O men-watcher ; let them all, burnt .'i)K>ut by thee in
front. r(»mc to this place, proclaiming themselves.
rpp. rr.i<U in a ://i«J. in c. A///*/;; in d, jif't/u. The change of mctrr makes
(he vct^r suspif iou% us ori^innl p.iit of the hymn ; but the prcMnce of all the verses in
rpp , in the same order. put% tlx* intrusion, if it t>e one, far hack.
6. Take hoM, () Jatavedas ; thou wast lK)rn for our pur|K)se; becoming
our messenger, () Agni, make the sorcerers cry out.
'I he (omm. thi5 time, utterly rejjanlless of the ohviou^ connection %»ith f/ ittf**tmim
in 2d. and of the general .%cn.\e of tlie hymn, glosses vi lAfaya only with vimt\aya.
I'pp. has a totally different text : il f*thhaiva h9^hmatti\ ji\tttve*io hrdi kAmAym
fttntihttxa : tiuto na ticfttr tit it\th,t %i}/ntf/tt}Mt1n tA*t **ftttya,
J, Do thou, () Agni, l)ring hither the sorcerers boimcl ; then let Incira
with his thunder lM)lt crush in (#///• :n/fr) their heads.
Af*i ffti^r (useil almost always of the head) is prrha|>s more ncaily 'cut open*;
l*pp. reads «r/<i (/r i«t 7-/p<r/i#. In b. /«/<f hatlJhAn would l>c a more acceptable reading.
The PrAt. (ii. 27) (piotes upithttttihAh as the first instance in the text of such treatment
of final An. Our text, by an error of the printer, reads hdjffna for Vxkj- in c.
8. To Agni and other gods: for the discovery of sorcerers.
The hymn, except vs. 4. is found in P.iipp. iv. also next after our hymn 7, tmt in the
veise-ordcr 1. 3, 2. Kor its u>c by K.'iu«;. with 7. see undi*r the latter.
Tran-slatcd : Weber, iv. 401 ; Ludwig. p. 523 ; («rirTith, i. 1 1 ; Itloomfield, ^15, 239. —
Cf. nergaigne-llenry. Manutt^ p. 132 ; Whitney, Fest^fua an /ioth, p. 04 f.
1. I'his oblation shall bring the sorcerers, as a stream does the foam ;
whoever, wcmian [or] man, hath done this, here let that person SfKak out.
rpp. has for c. d nLiam siri pup9tikn kar ya^am b/tnx'a(tlm janah, [^For //*r. tee
i. 7. I, n«»te.J
2. This man hath come, sfKaking out ; this man do ye welcome ; O
Kiihaspati, taking [himj into thy control — O Agni and Soma, do yc (two)
pierce [him) through.
Tpp. has in s, b stutAnA ji^itw,! tram smo *Ai ptati ; in c, d, f<f(/ kriA * ^nU<*mtJtx*
id dhatam. The comm. makes nonsense every time l»y insisting on rendering itm liy
"praise" ; here it \% ynxm^n stuvan.
3. Of the sorcerer, () somadrinker, slay the progeny and conduct
[him hither) ; of him, speaking out, make fall out (nisfnt) the upper eye
and the lower.
The (omm. fills out the ellipsis in b by making it mean "conduct our progeny
to otKain desired result**! and iluvAmttva is hhltvtl tvadx'iinr^m %tulim kurvaUtk,
rpp. ie.ids wi'iii///: .lwiir|-«i. SlT's text as well as ouis gives ni ti^ (p. n(k: sf-) ; the
sawkt/tl mss., as evervwhere, are divided Inrlween that and if//i //• / the latter is author-
# ■
iied by the silence of the Tr^kti*, ikhya [^see p. 4 26 J concerning the combination.
9 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK I. -i. 9
4. Wherever, O Agni, thou knowest the births of them, of the
devourers that are in secret, O Jatavedas, them do thou, increasing
through worship (brdhman) — slay of them, O Agni, with hundredfold
transfixion.
The irregular meter and broken connection of the second half-verse suggest possible
corruption of the text : cf. dsuranilm ^ataiarhatty TS. i. 5. 7*. The meter (11 + 1 1 :
9 -f 9 = 40) is well enough described by the Anukr. if we may take btlrhatagarbha as
meaning dvibHrh- * containing two padas of nine syllables.' LFor -tdrham^ cf. Gram,
5 99S.J
9. For some one's advancement and success.
\^Atharvan. — vasvddindndmantroktadrvatyam, traistubham^
Found also in Paipp. i. Reckoned to the varcasya gana (Kau^. 13. i, note), and
further used in various ceremonies,: by itself, in that of the restoration of a king (16. 27) ;
with i. 35 and v. 28, in two ceremonies for fortune and for power (i 1. 19 ; 52. 20) ; with
seven others, employed by a teacher at the reception of a Vedic student (55. 17). In
Vait. (3. i), vs. 3 accompanies an oblation to Agni in the /<zr7/<z«-sacrificcs. And the
comm. quotes its use in the Naks. Kalpa 17-19, in two mahli^dnti ceremonies called
dirdvati and bdrhaspatl; and in Pari^ista 5. 3, in the pusfidb/iiseka rite.
Translated: Weber, iv. 401 ; Ludwig, p. 456; Zimmer, p. 163; Griffith, i. 12;
Bloomfield, 116,239.
1. In this man let the Vasus maintain good things (vdsu) — Indra,
Pushan, Varuna, Mitra, Agni ; him let the Adityas and also the All-gods
maintain in superior light.
Ppp. substitutes t7fasid for ptlsd in b, and uta me devd for uttarasmin in d. The
Anukr. appcirs to sanction the metrical combination ddityo *ta in c.
2. At his direction {pradif), O gods, be there light, sun, fire, or also
gold ; be his rivals {safdtna) inferior to him ; to the highest firmament
{naka) make this man ascend.
The translation implies in c the obviously called-for emendation of asmdt to asmdi ;
the comm. first explains it as asmadlydt pnrusdt, and then, alternatively, as used for
asmdt by Vcdic shortening of the vowel. Ppp. begins with asmin devdh pradi\d; and
its second half-verse is quite different : uttaretta brahmatid vi bhdhi krnvdno anydn
adhardn sapaindn (d = ii. 29. 3 d).
3. With what highest worship {brd/ivtan), O Jatavedas, thou didst
bring together draughts {pdyas) for Indra, therewith, O Agni, do thou
increase this man here ; set him in supremacy (^rdisthya) over his fellows
(sajdtd).
Ppp. reads uttaretta in b, and its d is rnyas posam ^rdisthyam d dhehy asmdi.
The verse is found also in TS. (iii. 5.4*), MS. (i.4. 3), and K. (v. 6). • Both TS. and
MS. read havtsd for brdhmand in b, and agne tvAm utd (for tvdm agna t'/td) in c;
and MS. has -b/taran in a, vardhayd mam in c, and md for enapn at the end ; and it
inserts mddhye before ^rdtsthye in d.
V
i. 9 nOOK I. THK atharva-vkda-samhita. io
4. I take to mysrlf their sacrifice and splcmior {itintts), their abun-
dance of wealth ami their intents (cittd), O Agni ; l)e his rivals inferior to
him ; to the hi|;hest firmament make this man ascend.
'I hr nrcoiul half vt-r!«r 15 the ft.ime with 2 c. d .lUivr. and the translation makes the
tame emendation .1.% thrre. I>outitlr»s vtttiint * ai ()ui»itionji * should l>e read for aitimi
in b ; the romm. ^lo5«rji with huMihun. The text \s defated in rp|>- ; hut in d can l)C
read uttame Jrvi} jyotisi tihatutttma {J) |_ meaning, presumably, da^fAd/amaj.
ID. For some one's release from Varuna*s wrath.
Found in Tnipp. i. I'.ned in KAu^. (25. 37) to accompany lavation of the head in a
hcalinf; ceremony (for dropsy, comm. and schol.).
Translated : Weber, iv. 403 ; Ludwif;, p. 445 ; (#rifRth, i. 13 ; Hloomfield, 11.241 ;
\Vel)er, Sb. 1897, p. 599, cf. 594 ff. — Cf. Hergaigne- Henry, Manuel^ p. 133.
1. This Asura bears rule over the go<ls ; for the wills (iv/fif) of king
Varuna (come) true ; from him, prevailing by my worship {brtihman)^
from the fury of the formidable one {ugni) do I lead up this man.
* Come true/ i.e. are reali/etl or carried out : the more et)mological tense of smtyd,
Ppp. reads vi^tlya (or vtt^i} Mi. The comm. explains ^il^tit/Jna a* ** exceedingly tharp ;
havini; attained strength by favor of V.iruna, gratified t)y praise etc.** Tatas pmri in C»
as the first example of its kind of combination, is quoted in Vt\X. ii. 66. The Anukr.
ignores the first |)ida as a jiif^ati.
2. Homage be to thy fury. () king Varuna ; for, O formidable one,
thou dost note (tiici) every malice (iirugdiui). A thousand others I impel
(prasft) together; a hundred autumns of thee shall this man live.
The obs<ure third p.'ida is understood by the comm., perhaps correctly, to mean •• I
buy of! this man by furnishing Varuna a thousand othert as sultftitutes.** Two of our
mss. ((). Op.) read ttj^rAm (or ui^ratn) in b; Tpp. is defaced in a, b ; at second half-
verse it reails : f«fAiw sithittrtim ffa stnulmy anyi^t aytim no jlX'Am {arad^ %yap4y€.
Here, to<), pada a is an un.icknoulc«lgr<ly«i|^M//. [_roinm. cites, for c, AH. %*ii. 15. J
3. In that thou hast siM)ken with the tongue untruth* much wrong —
from the king of true ordinances {ti/tdnnan), from Varuna, I release thee.
l^Kead yAt i^iftn H',uUtha tinrtam f \ The comm. has in a the atxiurd readiof
itvaJtfa, treating it as for uiutkt/ttt, ^%hich all the mss. give.
4. I release thee out of the universal, the great flooil {arnavd)\ speak,
O formidable one, unto [thy] fellows here, and reverence our incantation
(b9d/t99tan).
• rniversul' (:•.!/( r«l/Mf if ). i e.. |>erhaps, dangerous to all men; and the dropsy,
Varuna's spct iai inllittion, is probably .s|M)kcn of as • flood '^cf. K\'. vii. 89.J4J. The
(doubtful) lendering of the second half verse takes it as addressied, like the first, to the
patient ; the comm. regards it as said to Varuria, which is not im|Nissil>ie. [^See Oeki-
ner. /|)M(«.lii. 733- J I'pp- reads <iwjv»i<i//f at the beginning, and has a Imtunm in place
of c, d. L Render aftt-ti by • reg.»rd * ?J
II TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK I. -i. II
II. For successful childbirth.
[AiAarvan, — sadrcam. pdusnum. pdfiktam : 2. anustubh ; j. ^-/. umiggarbhd kahimmaty
anustubh ; ^-6. pathydpankti.\
Verses 2-4 occur together in Paipp. i., 5 and 6 in xx., but at difTerent points. In
Kau^. (33. 1) it is quoted at the beginning of a long and intricate ceremony (filling the
whole section) for safe delivery, the first of the strlkarmdni or * women's rites * ; its
details have nothing to do with the text of the hymn, and cast no light upon the latter's
difficulties. The Anukr. add to the author's name : anena mantroktdn aryamddidevdn
ndrfsttkhaprasavdyd ^bhistftye *sfafh ca sarvdbhir aprdrthayat.
Translated : Weber, iv. 404 ; Ludwig, p. 478 ; Griffith, i. 14 and 473 ; Bloomfield,
99,242. — Discussed : Roth, Ueber den Aiharva-veda^ p. 15.
1. At this birth, O Pushan, let Aryaman [as] efficient {vedhds) invoker
utter vdsat for thee ; let the woman, rightly engendered, be relaxed ; let
her joints go apart in order to birth.
The translation of c implies emendation of the text to vl sisrtdm. Roth formerly
preferred slsrtdih nary rtdprajdtah * let a timely child come forth, O woman ' ; Weber
leaves slsratdtn as pi. with indefinite subject, and understands the two following words
as a parenthesis : ** be the woman properly constructed " ; Ludwig renders as if sisrtdm;
Roth now (as in BR.) would emend only sisrtdm^ and understand it of the •flow' of
water preceding birth ; but that would be rather sru^ and sr without a prefix in such a
sense seems very unlikely Lcf., however, sdrann apah, RV. iv. 17. 3J. Rtdprajdtd
might also be possessive, * rightly engendering.' The comm. takes sntdu as from suti
|_not J////, fem., nor j/////, fem. : note accent and gender !J, and meaning the ceremony
at birth; vedhas as = Dhatar * the creator'; rtaprajdtd 7i^ — jlvad-apatyd ; and
sisratdm (to tiie plural form of which he finds no objection) as "may she be relieved
i^tiuihsrtd) of the pangs of birth." The metrically irregular verse (9 + 10 : 10 + 11 =
40) is ?i pankti solely in virtue of the LaggregateJ number of its syllables.
2. Four [are] the directions of the sky, four also of the earth : the
gods sent together the foetus ; let them unclose her in order to birth.
Or * unclose it,' idm^ which SPP. reads in text and comm. (the latter omits the
word itself in the paraphrase) with the minority of his mss., but against all of ours ;
Weber and Roth prefer tdm. The word and its predecessor are quoted in the Prat,
(ii. 30), as the earliest example in tlie text of a combination of n and / without inserted s ;
but the form of the quotation {samdirayaniddlndm) prevents our seeing whether its
authors read iam or idm ; the comm. gives idm. In d, the comm. gives the false form
Urnavantn. The text in Ppp. is confused, but does not appear to intend any variants
from our reading.
3. Let Pushan {}) unclose [her or it] ; we make W\^ ySni go apart ; do
thou, sfisaud, loosen ; do thou, biskald, let go.
The translation implies a very venturesome emendation in a, pusd for susd (all the
authorities have the latter) : Pushan, referred to in vs. i as principal officiating deity,
might well be called on to do in particular what all the gods were begged to do in vs. 2
c, d. LBut see Bloomfield's comment. J The comm. gives three different etymologies
for siisd: root sfi + suffix -sd; root su 4- root san: and su-nsas. Susand and biskald
are possibly names of organs ; for the latter, Ppp. has puskaUy probably an alteration
I
i. II- noOK I. TIIK ATMARVA-VEDA-SAMHII/V. 12
to a niorr f.imili.ir worrl ; (he comm. unflrrsUncU sAtami and biikali (of course, equally
|)0!i5iMc) ; the (ormrr, from \xmA.s sti and saft, i% name of an accourhtnf; gocldesi ; the
latter (for which are ^iven three diverse but er|ually alMurd e(\molo|;ies) it another
deity. 1 he Antikr. apparently intends the verse to l)e read a% 6 f 8 : 7 + 8 r- 29,
instead of admittinf; the obvious resolution tM4m in c. The supply in^ of f^Arhkmm as
omitte<l at the l>eginninf; would make a f^ocxl anm^fmbk,
4. Not as it were stuck (a/tata) in the flesh, not in the fat, not as it
were in the marrows, let the s|x>tted slimy (?) afterbirth come down, for
the cloj^ to cat ; let the afterbirth descend.
SPI*. reads in a plvasi, with the comm. and a small minority of his mst. ; three of
ours (II.O. Op.) have//A#if/. Ppp. has a very different text (preserved in the nAj^art
copy, thouj^li lost in the or if^inal ti-xt) : niii *7'<i sutkvaiu tta fntrfaiu na kithesn (Jtr^rin)
fta nalhtiu ta ; then our c,d, without variant ; then //<!/ *7'<i pause (mtUtsif) ma fivasi
fiili 'i'«i Jt4ts/%'if( vaftil yutam : then our e; and with this ends the hymn as given In
lKH»k i. The comm. rc.icU in a ///<f//f///i/ for rutins/ ft *i, and resorts to various devices
to get fid of the difficulty thus caused ; two of our mss. (O. Hp.), and one or two of
Sl'PX give the same. Some of our ins». arc %*cry awkward alxMJt combining y'tfrifir
and «f//«iir, in part omitting the r, or (1.) reading -yitt-. PCS. (i. 16. 2) has the verse,
but in different order : first our c, d. without variant ; then our •« b, in the form nMi 'f^
tnAnsena pivari na ktiswin^ lanA **\atitm ; then our e. Hut for its sup}>ort of ^H*almm^
we might l>e tempted to emend to Lt^vaUtm ; the comm. has the viorthless explanatkMi
jahisyo * ptiristhita^tUviiitivttt t\ntaf ilvayavA sambadtiham. Further may be compared
1I(«S. ii. 3. I. I^MP., at ii. 11. 19. 20, has the verse with variants. J
5. I .split apart thy urinator. apart the /<>///, apart the [two] groins,
a|)art l><>th the mother and the child, a|)art the boy from the afterbirth ;
let the afterbirth descend.
Ppp. (xx ) has for a, b vi te < rt^mt ttij^arim v yoni I't /^avrnyily ; for d, vi f^arbkatk
€a jari\yujah ; and T.S. (iii. 3. lo') presents a version nearly accordant with this, but
with titkatim, i^avlnyAu^ and (.it the i^wA) jariyu at: neither has our refrain.
6. As the wind, as the mind, as fly the bird.s, so do thou, O ten months'
[chihl], fly alon^ with the afterbirth ; let the afterbirth descend.
Ppp. has tlie version riiM'V vtli0 ytitltil t/ti^Aa yafAJ sttsaiitoyajanta : rfJ U garbAs
ejatu nir tlitu t/tt^timtUyo haktr jafilytttttl saAtt. For • do thou fly ' might be given 'do
thou fall.* the verli having Uith mc.inini:s. LTen (lunar) months : cf. Weber's second
*f4i/-i<i///i essay, p. 313, .1b/t tier IWthner AkaJ„ 1861. J [^Cf. RV. v. 78. 8. J
This ttHuv*yka |^a.J has 5 hymn.s, 25 verses ; and the old Anukramani, as quoted,
sa)s fafiitt ftiff tu (apparently the vttiyHi quoted at the end of am. 1 l)ek>ngs rather
here than there).
12. Against Tarious ailments (as results of lightninc?).
[/*ircx*tN£iras. — jraktmamJfattaJna/Jiam, jd^niam : 4. mnHUmbk-\
Found also in P.iipp. i. It is retkoned ( KAu^. 36. 1, note) as belonging, wHh many
other hymns, to a lakmamA^anti or /<fi'mr<iif-<lestroying gama^ and is used (26.1) to
accompany the drinking of various things in a healing ceremony (comm. sayt, against
13 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK 1. -i. 12
disease arising from hurtful changes of wind, bile, or phlegm), and also (38. i) in one
against bad weather (dttrdina)^ or (Ke^.) for the prevention of rain. The third verse
further is added to the Mrgara hymns in connection with lavation in another healing
rile (27. 34).
Translated: Weber, iv. 405 ; Griffith, 1.15; Bloomfield, JAOS. xiii. p. cxiii ff.
(= PAOS. May 1886) ; AJP. vii.469ff. ; SBE. xlii. 7, 246. — Bloomfield regards it
as addressed to "lightning, conceived as the cause of fever, headache, and cough."
See his elaborate comment. Weber made it relate to fever, puerperal or infantile (on
account oi jardyujd, i a).
1. First born of the afterbirth, the ruddy (tisriya) bull, born of wind
and cloud (.?), goes thundering with rain; may he be merciful to our
body, going straight on, breaking ; he who, one force, hath stridden out
threefold.
The translation implies emendation in b to vdtdbhrajds or -jas^ as suggested by 3 c ;
it is proposed by Weber, and adopted by Bloomfield, being a fairly plausible way of
getting out of a decided difficulty. Weber renders, however, "with glowing wind-
breath " ; R., " with scorching wind " (emending to -bhrajjds). The comm. reads
vHtavrajiis (a couple of SPP's mss., which usually follow him, do the same), and
explains it as " going swiftly like the wind," or, alternatively, " having a collection of
winds." The * bull * is to him the sun, and he forces this interpretation through the
whole hymn. Neither he nor Kau^. nor the latter's scholia see anywhere any intima-
tion of lightning ; yet this is perhaps most plausibly to be suspected in the obscurities
of the expression (so R. also). The first words in a are viewed as signifying 'just
escaped from its foetal envelop (in the cloud).* Ppp. is wholly defaced in the second
half-verse ; in the first it offers no variants, merely combining -jas prath- in a, and read-
ing -bhraja st- in b. Emendation in d to ydsyaC kam would improve both meter and
sense. Tredha in d must be read as three syllables (as in RV.) to make the verse a
full jftgatl. LAt OB. vi. 59 b, vata-dhrajds is suggested — by R. ?J
2. Thee, lurking (fn) in each limb with burning {^ocis)^ we, paying
homage, would worship (yidh) with oblation ; we would worship with
oblation the hooks, the grapples, [him] who, a seizer, hath seized this
man's joints.
Ox yds y at beginning of d, is abbreviation for * when he' or *with which he.' LRen-
der, rather, * hath seized his (accentless) joints.' The patient is in plain sight of the
exorcist. Emphatic pronoun is therefore needless; so ^«tfwvs.3.J Some of our
mss., by a frequent blunder, read in a f'f.O'-' The prolongation of the final of asya in
d is noted by the comment to Prat. iv. 79. Ppp. has a very different (and corrupt)
text : . . . ^i^riydno yo grhUa fiarasya grbhlti : atiko tarn anko havisd yajdmi hrdi
^rito manasd yo jajdna. The definition of this verse and the next 2& tristubh seems
to have been lost from the Anukr., which reads simply dvitlyd before antyd ^niistubh.
3. Release thou him from headache and from cough — whoever hath
entered each joint of him ; the blast (.? fustua) that is cloud-born and that
is wind-born, let it attach itself to forest-trees {vdnasfdti) and nriountains.
Ppp. has srjatdm for sacatdtn in d. The comm. takes kdsds in a as nomtn., explain-
ing it as hrtkanthamadhyavaril prasiddhah qlesmarogaviqesah ; v&tajas to him is
1. 12- BOOK I. THK ATHARVA-VKDA-SAMHITA. 14
JtAMtthvtltf vtlvor utptinnnk. [^For ^friait/t\ fkct Knaucr, /miit\i^frmttmi$tki Fi^ruhnm-
j^fM, An:nji^fr, vii. 225 ; lUixmifirM. AJT. xvii. 416 ; ltohtlinj*k, lUftihte tier latkiinkem
Oft., l.Hf;7, xlix. 50, who takcJi it .i» 'a MifT nr< k with head awry.' J
4. Weal [he] to my upjKT mcnil)cr (;f<//nf), weal be to my lower, weal
to my four limbs ; weal Ik* to my bo<ly.
rp|>. ha!i a (jiiitc fliffcrriii text : in a, t, U Imth times for w/, ami fat Ay a (or av^-
f*}ytt , for c ^itfh te pr%tthh%o mttjjtthhyah nt ; in d. /ifi'<i (or mat/ia : the aildrest to n
fti< oimI prison is clc( iilctlly to l>c preferred. This ia (ouml al>o in the corre«|M>ndinK
vrr!ie in VS. (xxiii. 44) and TS. (v. 2. I2>), with rcadin|;!i in part agreeing further with
thov* o( Tpp. : f/(/« // p*\rfbh\o ^alftbhyah ^Am aitv Avarthkyak : fdm msikdbky0
$najj%\bkyak ^Aifi v astu tativiU (thut : hut TS. has for d {dm a te tanux*4 bkmx*aL
13. Deterrent homage to lightning.
[iiMrf^stng^iras. — t^iJytttam. AnmttHbham : j. 4f. virdJ japaii ; 4. trtstuffmrM krk*Hgmr^k4
fankU.\
The hymn occuni in Taipp. xix., and vs. 1 also in xv. It b used by K3u^. XS^-^.O)
in a charm against lightninf^, with vii. 11 ; and it also appears (139. A), with i. 26 and
vii. 1 1 and several other hymns, in the ceremony o( introduction to Vedic study.
Translated : Weher, iv. 406 ; (friffith, i. 16.
1. Homage be to thy lightning, homage to thy thunder; homage be
to thy bolt (r/fw/f//), with which thou hurlest at the impious one {dAddf).
The version o( this verse in Tpp. xix. is like ours ; in xv., d reads j^/iiJ dArMt prmdi^
jassasi (ppulyaiyasif). The first half-verse is (ound also in VS. (xxxvi. 21 a, b).
The irregular combination diitii^e (p. tftikodtl^e) is noted by Prit. ii. 60. The comm.
re/i^anls Tarjanya as addressed, hut then proceeds to f;ive another interpretation of the
verse, based on the absurd assumption that mamas -= annam, which appears also in
numerous other places. To him, also, d^man is a fnet^handmam. In our edition, an
accentm.irk is omitted over the {ma- of d^mane.
2. Homage to thee, child of the height {pravdt), whence thou gather-
est {safft'fth) heat (tdptis) ; be merciful to ourselves ; do kindness {mdyas)
to our offspring {ioid),
Ppp, has f<fw mas for mAyas in d- The fir^t half -verse forms in VS. (xxxvi. 21 c, d)
one verse with our 1 a, b ; but \'S. has \^iox a mtlwas le hkaj^avamm astm ; and J for b
ytifak j7't\k samtikase * from whence thou strivest after the sky,' which indicates that
our reading is roirupt. (^rischel discusses praxuit (= 'stream*) at length, Ved, Stmd,
ii. 63 -76, see 6S.J
3. ChiM of the height, Ik* homage to thee; homage we pay to thy
missile {Juti) anil heat (ttipus)\ we know thy highest abode (dhdman)
that is in secret ; thou art set as navel within the [cloud-Jocean.
[1he tr in b is su|>erfhious J Tpp. rectifies the meter of a I )y omitting n*m ; its
other pAd.ns are more or less conupl : mamas te kete tipntydi in b (which ends there) ;
l^amdkafvo mAma par- in c ; miktttlta nAhktk at the end. The comm. takes tApms as
adjective. The verse is scanned by the Anukr. as 1 2 4- 1 2 : 11 4- 1 1 = 46 syllables.
IS TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK I. -i. 14
4. Thou whom all the gods did create, the bold one, LP'^^ gods]J
making an arrow for hurling — do thou, bcsung in the council {viddt/ia)^
be merciful to us ; to thee as such be homage, O goddess.
Dhrsnum in b might qualify isum directly. The comm. supplies he aqane * O thun-
derbolt* as addressed. He reads fnrla in c. Ppp. reads for a, \iyam tvd deva ajana-
yanta vi^ves&ih krnvdna a^andya trisvdi; and for d mitrasya varunasya prasrsftlu.
The Anukr. seems to scan as 10 + 11 : 10 + 9 = 40 syllables. [^Read in c tiirdaya
and in d utd tdsydif — For viddtha^ see discussions of Bloomfield, JAOS. xix.^ 17, and
Geldner, ZDMG. lii. 757 ; and the literature cited by Foy, KZ. xxxiv. 226.J
14. Imprecation of spinsterhood on a woman.
\Bhrgvangiras. — vdritnani vo *ia ydmyam vd. anustub/tam : /. kakummatl ; j. 4-p. vtrdj.]
Found in Paipp. i. Used by Kau^. (36. 15-18) in an incantation against a woman ;
the details of it cast no light on those of the hymn ; and the comm. defines its purpose
simply as striydh purusasya vd ddurbhdgyakaranam.
Translated : Weber, iv. 408 ; Ludwig, p. 459 ; Zimmer, p. 314 (these misapprehend
its character) ; Griflith, i. 17 ; Bloomfield, JAOS. xiii. p. cxv = PAOS. May, 1886; or
AJP. vii. 473 ff . ; or SBE. xlii. 107, 252.
1. Ilcr portion (bhdgd)^ splendor have I taken to myself, as from off
a tree a garland ; like a mountain with great base, let her sit long with
the Fathers.
Ppp. has for a ahath te bhagatn d dade; its b is defaced ; in c it gives fnahdvtftldi
^va. The comm. renders bhagam by bhdgyam, here and in the other verse, recognizing
no sexual meaning. Pitrsu he renders " in the later [2 c, d] to be specified houses of
father, mother, etc.," and all the translators understand it in the same way ; but it is
questionable wliether the plural of pitar would ever be used in this sense ; and the
repeated mention of Yama later indicates that there was at least a double meaning in
the expression. Perhaps a girl remaining unmarried was called "bride of Yama,"
i.e. as good as dead, and her stay at home compared to that in the other world. ^Cf.
Antigone, 816, "1 shall be the bride of Acheron," *Ax^/>o»n-i ri;ft0€iJ<rw.J The Anukr.
appears to ratify the abbreviated reading -budhne *va in c ; it counts six syllables in d.
2. Let this girl, O king, be shaken down to thee [as] bride, O Yama ;
be she bound in her mother's house, also in her brother's, also in her
father's.
Ppp. has yat for esd at the beginning. The comm. foolishly interprets rdjan as
indicating Soma, because Soma is first husband of a bride (he quotes RV. x. 85.40 :
cf. AV. xiv. 2. 3 ff.), and takes yama as his epithet, as being her constrainer {niyd-
maJta), For ni-dhil compare iii. 11. 7 ; at TS. v. 2. 53 it is used with pitrsu. [^Does
not ni'dhii covertly suggest nidhuvana^ which, in its obscene sense, may be as old as
the Veda ? J
3. She is thy housekeeper, O king ; we commit her to thee ; she
shall sit long with the Fathers, until the covering in of her head.
The translation of d implies the obvious emendation to samopydi^ which SPP. even
admits into his text, on the authority of the comm., but against every known ms. ; Ppp.,
i. 14- BOOK I. Tin: ATHARVA-VKDA-SAMIIITA. 16
however, civcs tam^pytl. The comm. explains it by samx*apamAi bkikmHu sam^aiam^i^
anti a^ e(|titv.ilctit to inttfutnapafyanitim * till death * ; that this last is the virtual sense
is ettri mcly pioliahle. That v*tp has not the sense * shave * in the comfKiuml (rl. A(, S.
vi. 1*^ 2) in fthown l>y the inappropriatcnc^s of the prefixes utm 4 J to that sense, and
the (rrt|urncy of the combination in the other sense. [^See IMoomfield, 255, i {tftnAk
li\tt//i fy^/J/, * till she shed the hair from her head.* J I'pp. has further iwJm tt fart
tf€tifAtftttft in b. The romni. j;ivcH kttlapA (for •/»!#; our /(i</«i- text kuUvfik) in a. The
resolution {tr sn-ith in d would make the verse a full amtistubh ; the Anukr. counts only
14 syllables in the second half.
4. With the incantation {hnilnuati) of Asita, of Ka^yapa, and of Gaya,
I shut up (iif^i-nalt) thy portion (vulva f), as sisters do what is within a
|_For the names, see Hloomtichl, 255, and AJT. xvii. 403.J lihaj^a perhaps has
here a double meaning;. Throe c»f our mss. (K.I. 1 1.) with one or two of SPI**s, read
in c itntasl'0{thfi, against Pr.it. ii.62, which expressly prrscrilies il. The comm. treats
au/ttA and lit\ttf/i as two indr|)endent words; anitth kt\e would be a not unacceptable
emendation. The Anukr. ap|>ears to sanction the abbreviation tt^am *va.
15. With an oblation: for confluence of wealth.
Found in Paipp. i. (in the verse-otder 1,4,3, 2). Used by K4u^. only in a general
rite for pro»)>erity (19.4), to accompany a douche for |>ersons bringing water from two
navigable streams and partaking of a dish of mixed grain; It is also reckoned (1^ 1,
note) to the pnitika mantras, or hymns bringing pros|>erity.
Translated : \Vel>er. iv. 40*^ ; Ludwig, p. 371 ; (JrifTith, i. 19.
1. Together, together let the rivers flow, together the winds, together
the birds (fatatriu) ; this my sacrifice let them enjoy of old ; I offer with
a confluent {samsmvyih) oblation.
The verse is nearly identical with xix. 1. 1, and in less degree with ii. 26. 3. From
xix. 1.3 c it may be conjectured that we should read pradi^at in c [^ If we do read
fradivat^ why not render it by * continually * ?J Ppp. has not the second half-verse,
but instead of it vs. 3 c, d. For b Tpp. gives saik itl/J divyA »/<i. The comm. accenti
sAfit itim in a. There is |M*rhaps some technical meaning in samirikvy^ * confluent* or
* for conflueix e * whit h we do not .ippreciate, but it is also unknown to the comm., who
explains the word only etyrnologirally. The verse is an Ji/J^it/<fi7/'/i (strictly rfrJ/'.*
8 f 8 : 1 1 4 II =38), and its definition as such is perhaps drop|)ed out of the Anukr.
text (i^hiih read* «l./>iJ dvtlly%\ hhutik etc.).
2. Come straight hither to my call, hither ye confluents also ; increase
this m.in, yo songs ; let every beast (fa^tt) there is come hither; let what
wealth {niyi) there is stay (j///«/) with him.
1 he /«7y<f mss. all give ytik in e. Ppp. has in a, b nfaw AtivyJ upttane *dam, and,
for c tffiit vanih^tyato ray tin. The last p.\da is nearly RV. x. 19.3 d. [^Render
•with this man let * etc. J The omission of rt'd in a would make the verse regular.
17 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK I. -i. l6
3. What fountains of the streams flow together, ever unexhausted,
with all those confluences we make riches (dhdna) flow together for me.
Ppp. has in a, b ye nadfbhyas samsravanty ucchUmas saram akstkd. The comm.
gives the verse twice, each time with a separate explanation.
4. What [fountains] of butter (sarpis) flow together, and of milk, and
of water, with all those confluences we make riches flow together for me.
Ppp. reads samsrdvas for sarpisas in a. The comm. supplies first avayavUs as
omitted subject in the verse, but afterwards utsdsas from vs. 3, which is of course right.
1 6. Against demons : with an amulet of lead.
\Ciitana, — aginndramyVSrunam^ dadhatyam, dmistubham : 4. kakummatl.^
Found in Paipp. i. Kaug. does not include the hymn among the cdtandtti (8. 25),
but a Pari^. (ib., note) reckons it to them (in accordance with the Anukr.). K^u^.
(47. 23) uses it once in a rite of sorcery (for the death of one's enemies : comm.), and
its commentator (47. 13, note) in another.
Translated : Weber, iv. 409 ; Grill, i, 75 ; Griffith, i. 20 ; Bloomfield, 65, 256.
1. What devourers, on the night of new moon, have arisen troop-
wise Q) — the fourth Agni is the demon-slayer ; he shall bless us.
Vrdjam in b is obscure ; *troopwise' is the conjecture of BR. ; the comm. reads
instead bhrdjamy and absurdly explains it as bhrdjamdndm or -nam * shining,* and
qualifying either the night or the "hearty" man whom the demons have risen to injure 1
Ppp. has turyas for turlyas in c ; what is meant by it is not clear ; the comm. gives
three different explanations : fourth after the death of his three brothers and predeces-
sors (quoting for these TS. ii. 6. 6') ; as the house-fire apart from the three sacrificial ;
or as the dngirasa fire, as distinguished from the sacrificial, the household, and that of
battle — thus teaching us nothing but his own ignorance and perplexity. Grill follows
Weber in understanding the word to mean " powerful." For d, Ppp. has san nah pdtu
tebhyah.
2. The lead Varuna blesses; the lead Agni favors; Indra bestowed
on me the lead ; it, surely, is a dispeller of familiar demons.
Ppp. combines indi *ndra p- in c, and has for d amlvdyas tn cdtam (for cdtattam).
The comm. ascribes the mention of Varuna to the fact that river-foam is one of the
articles declared (Kau^. 8. 18) equivalent to lead, and here intended by that name.
[Cf. Bloomfield, JAOS. xv. 158. J
3. This overpowers the viskandha ; this drives off (bddii) the devour-
ers ; with this I overpower all the races {jdid) that are the pifdcf*s.
The first half-verse is nearly repeated below, as ii. 4. 3 a, b. The short a in the
reduplication of sasahe in c, though against the meter and in part against usage, is read
by all the mss., and in the comment to Prat. iii. 13. Ppp. has in a %fisj:audatn (but
compare ii. 4.3, where -dham). The comm. explains the (more or less fully personified)
disorder as a disturbance caused by raksas or pi^dca and obstructing motion (gati-
pratibandhakd) : cf. below ii. 4 and iii. 9.
n
I
L l6- HOOK I. THK ATIIARVA-VKDA-SAMIIITA. i8
4. If our cow thou slaycst, if [our] hoi^c, if [our] man (fiimsa), wc
pierce thee there with lra<l, that thou be no slayer of our heroes.
I*pi». haft Un c shfMtt vuihvJimttt tvtl,
*I he 5 hymnii of tliiii anuftltit |_3 J, as of the next, have juM the norm, 20 vertex,
and the <|iiotation fiom the ohi Atuikr. (civcn at the cntl of h)mn 21) ii vtfi^aJttlv ai0
*myAH, At the cn<l of the prcAcnt hymn is read viii^aijd Jturn, which is |Krhaps the
statement as to the asftinnption of a norm.
The first p9ap%\thaka ends here.
I 17. To stop the vessels of the body.
Found in I'aipp. xix. (in the vcr%c order 3,4, 1, 2). ITscd once by KAu^. (26. 10 :
the cpiotntion np|M-ars to U-lon^ to vihat follows it, not to what precedes), in a remediad
rite, apparently f(»r stopping; the (low (»f bloo<I (the comm. says, as result of a knife
woumi and the like, and also of diftordrrrd menses).
'I'ransl.ited : \Vel>er, iv. 41 1 ; l.iHUt^. p. 508 ; (Jrill, 16, 76; CtrifTith, i. 21 ; Illoom-
fieltl. 22, 2^7. - Cf. Hillehr.indt. I'tJ^t ( Arts/,*mtt/Air, p. 46.
1. Von women {yosit) tliat j;o, veins with red garments, like brother-
less sisters (Jdmi) — let them st(»p (s//m), with their splendor smitten.
rpp. makes /fsi/ns and jtlmttyas chanf^e places, and has sartuU (l>etter) for kirMs
in b. 'I he comm. takes yosiini as gen. »ing., and hence naturally understands rnjexHt-
hananAtiyat to l>e mr.int in the verse ; he renders hifAs hy shds/ and he explains that
hrotherless sisters pttrkule sttthtAntiktU tntine piHtiatiAmAya nt tisikamii. I'he Anukr.
refuses to sanction the contraction tatf *v*t in c
2. Slop, lower one! stop, upper one! do thou too stop, midmost oncf
if the smallest stops, shall stop forsooth the great tube (ti/iatmiHt),
'1 he aecent of ththtttt seems to show <ii to !»e the ei|uivalent of «r/ here.
3. Of the hundred tulK*s, of the thousand veins, have stop|>ed forsooth
these midtn<»st ones; the entls have rested (/viw) together.
In d, emendation to <lif /r«)r 'the eml ones* would lie an impro%'ement ; but l*|»p.
also has ant*}% : sttkttw <rw/<l *mf»ui/ti ; its c is corrupt (astka mik4tJ4iA^mJkx'4) ; and it
inseits // after ^tttasya in a.
4. About you hath gone (Invn) a great gravelly sandl)ank (J/mnA);
stop [andj be (|uiet, I pray {sti Itiw),
The ( omm. sees in tOtanu only the meaning ** liow.** and interprets it ** bent like s
liow ** : n.imrly, a vessel containing the urine ; in stktthlt he sees an allusion to the
menses, or to gravel in the bladder. K.1ti^. (26. 10) S|>eaks of sprinkling on dust SAd
gravel as a means of stanching the flow of bl(HKl ; more prohably, as Welder first tu|;*
gested, a lug tilled vtith sand was used : in neither case can the menses l)e had in view,
rpp. reads iittAmayl hMttt} stkhtt^ ntfasthiJ.tm. The third pilda is identical with
KV. i. K^i.fid : the comm. (as S.\yana to the latter) fails to recognize the root «/; and
he renders it fterayala^ as if root Ir were in question.
19 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK I. -i. l8
1 8. Against unlucky marks.
[^Dravinodas, — vdindyakam, dnusiubham : /. uparistddvirddbrhatl ; 2, nicrjjagati ;
J. virdddstdrapahktitristubh.^
Verses 1-3 are found in Paipp. xx. (but vs. 2 not with the others). Used by Kau^.
(42. 19) in a charm against unlucky signs in a woman.
Translated : Weber, iv. 411 ; Ludwig, p. 498 ; Gcldner, Ved. Stud. i. 314 ; Griffith,
i. 22 ; Bloomfield, 109, 260. — It may be mentioned that Geldner takes the whole hymn
as relating to a domestic cat.
1. Out we drive {iiir-su) the pallid sign, out the niggard; then, what-
ever things are excellent {bhadrd)^ those we lead together {}) for our
progeny.
The translation implies in d the very venturesome emendation of drdtim to sdm ;
the former appears wholly impracticable, and has perhaps stumbled into d from b ;
Geldner conjectures instead tvd, Ppp. is defaced, and gives no help. The comm.
reads laksmam^ and explains laidmyam as accus. sing. masc. : laldme bhavam tila-
kasthdnagaiam ; to ^J/ti in c he supplies r/7/;/^/// |_making c a separate sentence and
supplying bhavantu\. It would also be possible to make the cesura Tiii^v prajdydiy and
read nd^aydmasi (so R.). In our edition, dele the accent-mark under td- of tani in c.
2. Savitar has driven out the trouble (.^ drani) in her feet; out have
Varuna, Mitra, Aryaman [driven] [that] in her hands; out hath Anumati,
bestowing (m) upon us ; the gods have driven this woman forward unto
good fortune.
All the mss. give in a sdvisak^ which SPP. very properly retains, though the comm.
and Ppp. have -sat (see my Skt. Gr.», § 151 a) ; *sdvisak (p. as-) would be an improve-
ment, and may be understood. For c, d, Ppp. \\^s yad dditydfnavatl rardnd prnasuvd
savitd sdtibhagdya. The comm. gives two etymological guesses at aranltn (which is
his reading, instead of -fjim), both worthless, and describes rardfid as accented on the
final. The separation of this verse from the others in Ppp. indicates that it probably
has nothing to do with " marks." It is rather unusual for the Anukr. to take notice of
the occurrence of a tristubh pada in ?ijagatl verse, ^d, no less than c, is tristubh^ pro-
nounce devdsdvi5uh,\
3. Whatever in thy self, in thy body, is frightful, or what in hair or
in mien — all that do we smite away with [our] words ; let god Savitar
advance (snd) thee.
• God Savitar ' or * the heavenly impeller,' everywhere equivalent. Ppp. begins yat
td *^tffian tanvd ghoram^ and has for c, d tat te vidvdn upabddhayesdm pra tvd suvd
saintd sdubhagdya. The metrical description of the verse (ii + u:io+io = 42)
by the Anukr. is unusual and questionable.
4. The antelope-footed, the bull-toothed, the kine-repelling, the out-
blowing, the licked-out, the pallid — these we make disappear from us.
Designations either of the unlucky signs or of the women marked with them —
probably the former. The comm. prefers the latter, except for the two last, which he
blunderingly takes from the stems -d/iya and -////rt, and makes them qualify laksma
i. l8- nOOK I. Tin:- ATHARVA-VEDA-SAMHITA. 20
undcrMoocl. lie fiplains f^^sttihii (\y. ^c^sedhim) as "Roing like a cow/' ami viiUka
as a IcM k •• on llic edge of the forehead, licked as it were the wronjj way " — or what '\%
called a ** cowlick '* |^Skt. ktlkttpaksa \. Iloth editions give at the beginning ri!(^tf/i,
instead of the true reading f^yttp-* which the comm. (with three of Sl'T's mss.) has ;
the mns. I)tingle all the occurrences of this word. In part of our edition the m is broken
off from vfuttiatlm.
19. Against enemies.
The hymn is found also in iMipp. i. With the two that follow it (and others), it is
reckonctl by KAu<;. (147) among the samj^ramiiami or battle-hymns, or likewise (il>.,
note) to the a/^anljifa (' unconquered ') X''^"*' without them, but with vi. 13, it is used
in several of the charms to ward off the effects of |>ortents (104. 3 ; 105.1; I13.3). In
VAit. (9. 21), vs. 3 ap)>ears alone in the iHiHrmAsya or seasonal sacrifice, accompanying
the release of the two puroiiA^a baskets.
Translated : Weber, iv. 413 ; (iriffith, i. 23 ; liloomfield, 1 20, 262. — Cf. Ilergaigne-
Henry, Afamuel^ p. 134.
1. Let not the piercers find tis, nor let the pcnetraters find [us]; far
from us make the volleys (^nntv)^) fly, dispersing, O Indra.
rpp. combines mo 'bhi- in b. The rendering of ^aratyd follows the comm., here
and to vs. 3 {j^arasawhati).
2. Dispersing from us let the shafts fly, those that are hurled and
that are to be hurled ; ye divine arrows of men (mantis/^), pierce my
enemies.
The comm. inserts an ** and *' in c : ** divine and human arrows ** ; this is possible,
but opposed by the accent. Tpp. has f or c, d : dfvd mammsyH T^^y^ 'miirMm ma vi
x»iddha(H ; the comm. also reads vuikyatm.
3. Whether one of our own or whether a stranger, fellow or outsider^
whoso assails (iibhi-diis) us — let Kudra with a volley pierce those my
enemies.
I'pp's version is somewhat different : yas samUno yo 'samdtto'miira ma jighJtikjaii :
rmdm^ (tti'nl t*\m amitrAn vi viddkata. With a, b compare KV. vi. 75. 19 a, b: y^
mak svti *intMo yd^ la mistyo ji^hAnsaii ( = SV. ii. 1 222 «, t, which combines sx*4 'rama) ;
the latter half of this verse is our 4 c, <L Two or three of our mss. (T.M.O.p.m.) fo|.
low KV. in omitting y«f after si'tf. Ap. iv. t6. 1 has yo mah sapatmo yo *rama mtmfia
*bkitiAit%ti dfvAh^ with a wholly ditfcrent second half. The comm. al)surdly explains
mistyiti as Htrgafavlryo nikrstabalah {atruk,
4. Whatever rival {sapdttui), whatever non-rival, and whatever hater
shall curse us, him let all the go<ls damage (dhUn*) \ incantation (brdkmmn)
is my inner defense. Jj.if. 1- -
rpp. has as first half-verse stthandkn^ (A *JdbamdkNf ca yo ma imdrA *tkidJsaii.
The second half-xerv is found, without variant, in KV. (and SV. : see under irs. 3).
Ihe comm. explains sapatna well as ;fiA(irtipak ^atruk. SPI*. follows th« very bad
example of a part of his mss. by reading diisam ik- (instead of -afi or -aik) in b [^cf. 133.2,
it 4. 6, and see TrikL ii. 10, 1 7, and especially 11. — The /a4/4f-text reads dx*isdm^
21 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK I. -1. 20
20. Against enemies and their weapons.
\^A(/iarvaH. — saumyam. dnustubham : i, tristubh.']
The first three verses are found in Paipp. xix., and vs. 4 in ii. : see below. For the
use of the hymn by Kau^. with 19 and 21, see under 19. And vs. i is used alone (so
the comm.) in the /ari//iw-sacrifices (Kaug. 2.39), on viewing the cooked oblation.
Translated : Weber, iv. 413 ; Griffith, i. 24.
1 . Let there be the dddrasrt, O god Soma ; at this sacrifice, O Maruts,
be gracious to us ; let not a portent find us, nor an imprecation ; let not
the wrong that is hateful find us.
The first pada is rendered on the assumption that the siiman of this name, as
described in PB. xv. 3. 7, is intended ; it might be used of the person intended to be
benefited : Met him be one not getting into a split (i.e. hole, or difficulty) * : this is the
sense distinctly taught in PB. ; the comm. says na kaddcid apt svasjlrlsamJpatn prd-
pnotu {madlyah i^atruk) I The verse occurs in TB. (iii. 7. 5»* : and repeated without
change in Ap. ii. 20. 6), with bhavata in a, mrdaia (without the anomalous accent) in b,
and vrjdnd in d. Ppp. begins with addrasur bh-y adds ayam after soma in a, and has
in d the easier reading prd **pad duchund for vidad vrjind. The second half-verse
occurs again as v. 3. 6 c, d. Though connected with vss, 2, 3 in Paipp. also, this verse
does not appear to have anything originally to do with them.
2. What missile {s^nya) weapon of the malignant (aghdyti) shall go up
today, do ye, Mitra-and-Varuna, keep that off from us.
The first half-verse in Ppp. v^yo *dya sdinyo vadho jighdsatn nam updyatfj which is
nearly our vi. 99. 2 a, b. The half-verse occurs also in PB. (1.3. 3 a, b) and A(^S.
(v. 3. 22 A, b), both of which have sdumyas ; PB. elides ^<7 *dya; AQS. gives at the
end -Irati. Aghdyilnam would be the proper accent (and this the comm. has), unless
the word were understood as feminine.
3. Both what [is] from here and what from yonder — keep off, O
Varuna, the deadly weapon ; extend great protection {qdnnan) ; keep very
far off the deadly weapon.
The pada text marks the pada-division in the first half-verse before instead of after
the second ydt, Ppp. reads in b ydvayah. The second half-verse is found again at
the end of the next hymn — which is perhaps an additional indication that this hymn
properly ends here. The Anukr. ignores the metrical irregularity of the verse (9 + 8 :
7 -f 8 = 32). LRead in a itd ydd^ and in cyacha na/t.j
4. Verily a great ruler (fdsd) art thou, ovcrpowerer of enemies, unsub-
dued, whose companion {sdk/ti) is not slain, is not scathed {jyd) at any
time.
This verse is the first in RV. x. 152, of which the remaining verses constitute the
next hymn here ; in I*pp. it occurs with them in ii., far separated from the matter which
in our text precedes it. RV. and Ppp. both read for b amitrakhddd ddbhutah; and
RV. accents in d jtyate kddd. The comm. paraphrases ^dsds by ^dsako niyantdj he
takes y/y<^/^ J^s from rooty/, which is of course equally possible.
i. 21- BOOK I. Tin: ATHARVA-VEDA-SAMHITA. 22
21. Against enemies.
As juM |H>iiitrf| out (umirr 20.4). tlii^ hymn and the la^t venu* of the prece<iin|(
make one hymn in KV. (x. 152) and in TAipp. (ii): the latter has a different ver^e-
Older (3, 2, I, 4). hut no v.iridun readings. For other correspondence*. »ee under the
several vrrsev For the ritual u*e of the hymn with the two jvrecedinj;. see under ig;
it is further rrckonnl (KAu«;. i^. 8. note) to the ahhtiya ('free from fear or dani^rr*)
f^antt. It is the first hymn applied (with vil. 55) in the %vaityt\yan*t or * f or welM>ein|; '
ceremonies (50. I ). and is, act ordinjj to the comm., referred to as sm h in 25. 36. Verse 2
is aUo used, with others, hy V'Ait. (2*). <;). in the af^nuayana or buildini; of the fire-altar.
Translated : \Vel>er, iv. 414 ; («riH'ith, i. 25.
1. (fiver of wcll-hcinj;, lord of the people (:'/f), Vrtra-sKiycr, remover
of seorners, contruUinf;, let the bull Indra go before us, soma-drinker»
pro<hicinj; fearlessness.
The comm. renders 'i*itnt,ihA% l»y vi^eietut tn*%rtihaytU\ ^atrUHdm^ aJthou|(h he
explains fttitiha% in v«is. 2. 3 I)y safhi^pAitttln ; the \%ord is plainly a |»ossessive com-
pound |_.i((ent! no f^enitivej. expressing in form of epithet the action of 2 a and 3 s.
KV. reads in a ;'/(fff /if//f. 'I he verse mcurs further in Til. (iii.7. 1 1*) and TA.(x. t.9);
both have 7'i(ifs, and, in d. ifiHtititis for somapis.
2. Smile away, () Indra, our scorners {9nrdh)\ put {j'aw) ilown them
that rij;hl (prtitur) [us] ; make go to lowest darkness whoso vexes us.
KV. reverses the oidrr of c an«l d, and reads Atiharttm ; and witli it aqree preciselv
SV. (ii. 121.H) and VS. (viii 44 • ••t al ) ; while T.S. (i. 0. 124) and M.S. (iv. 12.3) have
for c at{ha%pa*iAth U\m Im kttihi. \}A. M<iS. ii. 15.6 h ami p. 1 55. J
3. Smite away the demon, away the scorners; break apart Vrtra*s
(two) jaws; away, (> India, Vrtra-slayer, the fury of the vexing enemy.
KV. and SV. (ii. 1217) have the same text ; IS. (i.6. I 21) reads {titrun for rdlsas^
ttHt/ti ioT jtthi, and bhdimti^ for '.tttahan,
4. ( )ff, O Indra, the mind of the hater, off the deadly weapon of him that
would scathe; e.\tend great protection; keep very far off the deadly weapon.
KV. reads mttnyot for mahAl in c, ^\\i\ yttvttyH for i«l7'- in d. TS. (iii. 5.A, only a, b)
supplies in the first half-verse the mivsini; verb, )ahi, putting; it in pl.ice of va*ikAm.
Vu\rss we revdve {>hfftii into three syllables, the afttti/N^k is defective by as)nable.
LAdd HaA after |'«i«/m 'J
The 5 hymns of this ttftajuU-it (^4. J attain have 20 verses, the norm : tee at the coo*
elusion of the precedinf; ann'i'tfJttt (after hymn t(>).
22. Against yellowness (jaundice).
Fouml in IWipp. i. Tsed by Kau<;. (26. 14) in a remedial rite (ag^ainst heart dtteate
and jaundice [Itimtt/u, Ke^. ; Jtdwt/a^ the comm. J).
23 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK I. -l. 23
Translated: Weber, iv. 415; A. Kuhn, KZ. xiii. 113; Griffith, 1.26; Bloomfielcl,
7, 263. — Cf. also Zimmer, p. 388 ;t Bloomfield, A J P. xii. 437 ; Bergaigne-Henry, Manuel^
p. 134. Kuhn adduces analogous old Germanic charms.
1 . Let them (both) go up toward the sun, thy heart -burn {-dyota) and
yellowness ; with the color of the red bull, with that we enclose {pari-d/td)
thee.
Ppp. reads in a udetatnj its c is ^^ rohitasya gor varnas^ which construes better
with d. The abbreviated writing hrdyot- for hrddyot- (see my Skt. Gr. §2328 ^and
Roth, ZDMG. xlviii. 102J) betrays the padaA^xK into dividing hrodyoidh (cf. idd yam^
iv. 19. 6; so even the RV. pada-Xz-xX. has jaratovisam irom jaraddvfsam at v. 8. 2).
SPP. has properly in his text the unabbreviated form hrddyo-. U'doayatam in the
AV. Index Verborum is an erratum for ud ayatam: the comm. takes the form, doubt-
less wrongly, as 3d sing. mid. instead of 3d du. active. Kau^. follows the indication of
c, d, and of 3 a, b, by prescribing the use of products of a red cow, hair and skin etc., in
the healing rite.
2. With red colors we enclose thee, in order to length of life ; that this
man may be free from complaints {-rdpas)^ also may become not yellow.
Ppp. has a different second half-verse : yathd tvatn arapd *so aiho 'hdrito bhava.
The third pada is iv. 13. 4 d (or RV. x. 137. 5 d). The comm. explains rapas as —papa,
3. They that have the red one for divinity, and the kine that are red
— form after form, vigor {ifdyas) after vigor, with them we enclose thee.
The translation implies the easy emendation in a to rdhinldevatyas^ in accordance
with the universal use of devatya elsewhere. The. * red one ' is perhaps the red star (or
lunar astcrism) Rohini, our Aldebaran. Ppp. reads rohinlr devatya^ and in b rohinlr
Ilia; in d it has ieua tvd.
4. In the parrots, in the ropandkds^ we put thy yellowness ; likewise
in the hdridravas we deposit thy yellowness. / '
Not one of our mss. gives at the beginning the true reading fw/v/w, as found in RV.
i. 50. 12 Land Ppp. J (and TB. iii. 7.6»»), but it is presented by the comm., and by three
of SPP*s authorities. RV. and TB. have me for te both times, and accent hdridra-
vi'sH. The names are understood by the comm. as those of birds : ropanSkH — kdstha-
^uka^ apparently a kind of parrot, and hliridrava — gopltanaka^ apparently a yellow
water- wagtail. LPpp. has in h prapafidka^a,\
23. Against leprosy : with a healing herb.
[Atharvan (fvetalaksmavindfandyd ^nettd ^sikmm osadhim astdu/). — vdnaspatyam .
dnustubham.'X
Found in Pfiipp. i., but defaced, so that for the most part comparison is impossible.
Also, with vs. 3 of the next hymn, in TB. (ii.4. 4»-»). Used by Kau^. (26. 22-24), in
company with the next following hymn, in a remedial rite (against white leprosy,
^vetakustha^ schol. and comm.).
Tran.slatcd : Weber, iv. 416 ; Ludwig, p. 506 ; Grill, 19,77 ; Griffith, i. 27 ; Bloom-
field, 16, 266 ; furthermore, vss. i , 2 by Bloomfield, A J P. xi. 325. — Cf. Bergaigne-Henry,
Manuel^ p. 135.
i. 23 HOOK 1. Tin: ATHARVA-VKDA-SAMHITA. 24
1. Ni^hl-born art thou, O herb. O dark, black, [•'^nclj dusky one;
O colorer (mjafii), do thou color this leprous sjwt and what is pale (f^litd),
Arcf>rclinj; to the comin., the herb .i»!<!rf%^€fl i^ thr hattUtH (Cttriftwa /i^nj^tt).
K. writer : ** The rttptnl \s known to the lexirographem, and has later as (vrincipal name
parpatl [an Olclenlanclia clyrin^ red, OH.]. Ma<lana 4^». 47, Dhanvantari (mn.) \. 27. In
HhAvapr. i. l<^ (where, acrordinj* to my «>hl and f;oo<i m^., rafljant \% to he read instead
of Ni}), it i» noted that this remedy \% (ra|;;rant, and comes out of the north. It has a
daik n%{>r(:t. The s|>ecies not to l>e determined, because the later identifications are
entirely untrustworthy.** j^See Dhanvantari, Ananda-fl^rama ed., p. 17 J The causative
stem rajtt/a (the meter calls for raj-) is found only here.
2. The leprous s|>ot, what is pale, do thou cause to disappear from
hence, the speckled; let thine own color enter thee; make white things
{(id' /it) fly away.
^/ /■ "^1^* h*is fi/t (ftaA f) for /tvI and ^^nntAttt for vi^atAm in c, and in d (Vfidmi (or
^ ' ^nklAui. The comm. ^i\ es prthak for piuit in b. and has the usual support of a small
Xl •^> "minority of STH's mss,
3. Dusky is thy hiding-place, dusky thy station (Asthdna)\ dusky art
thou, O herb ; make the s|>cckled disappear from hence.
TH. has the easier reading uiiAyanam in a. The comm. a^ain gives prikak in d;
he holds that the plant here addressed is the indigo {nt/l).
4. Of the bone-lwrn leprous six)t, and of the body-born that is in the
skin, of that made by the sfwiler {^fiisi) — by incantation have I made
the white (pr/d) mark disappear.
Ppp. has in c ifAf}tytK TH. reads instead krtyAytl ; the comm. explaiiu dUn as
{atrutpAtiitii krtytt. Ppp. lias at llic end anena^am.
24. Against leprosy.
[ffrahman. — Jlt»irh'aMiHf*iiidn\ityam. dn»istuhA*tm : j. MtcrtpmlMy4pmmki».'\
Found in IMipp. i., but not in connection with the preceding hymn. For the use of
23 and 24 tof*ethcr by KAu<;., see under liymn 23.
Translated : Welier, iv. 417 ; Ludwi^, p. 509 ; Cirill. 19, 77 ; Griffith, L 28 ; Illoom-
field. 16. zfvS.
1. The eagle {sttftinni) was l>orn first ; of it thou wa.st the gall ; then
the Asura-woman. conquered by fight (rudh)^ took shai>e as forest-trees.
Ppp. reads at the end vanaip*Uth^ whi« h is more in accordance with the usual con-
strue tion of ropithi kr (mid.) and the like. I'pp- h.is :i\%o jit; A*} fist /«1 iot ymikd jtti in C
K. sui:::e5»ts the emendation : tiid t^ittfl {\\\%{r.) jit^hatsitatit rth, * that, attempted to be
eaten l»y the AniirJ, t<»ok on ve|;et.iljlc form ' : i.e. I>ecame a healing plant The comm.
still rr^Ards the indigo as acUlresseil. lie coolly explains ///«! by its opposite, ///ift'tf/f.
All our m&s. have in d the al>surd accent cAirt (emended in the editkm to €atri)\
SPP. rr|>c)rts the same only of two p^niaxxxsi.
2. The Asura- woman first made this remedy for leprous S|K)t, this
25 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK I. -i. 25
effacer of leprous spot ; it has made the leprous spot disappear, has made
the skin uniform (sdrupa).
Ppp. has again (as in 23. 4) anena^at in c ; in d it reads surtipam.
3. Uniform by name is thy mother; uniform by name is thy father;
uniform-making art thou, O herb ; [soj do thou make this uniform.
Found also, as noted above, in TB. (ii. 4. 4»), which has for c sarfipd *sy osadhe,
Ppp. reads throughout surup-. It inserts between this verse and the next : yat tanu-
jam yad agnijam citra kildsa jajhise : tad as in sukrlas tanvo yatas tvd *pi naydmasi,
4. The swarthy, uniform-making one [is] brought up off the earth ;
do thou accomplish this, we pray ; make the forms right again.
All our mss. have at the beginning (dmd, and also very nearly all SPP's ; but the
latter very properly admits fyd- into his text, it being read by the comm. with a couple
of mss. that follow him, and being found in Ppp. also. Ppp. once more has surtlp-j
it corrupts b into prthivydbhyarbhavam^ and gives sddaya at end of c. The phrase
tddm a su is quoted in Prat. iii. 4 and iv. 98, which prescribe the protraction and linguali-
zation, and words of tlie verse are repeatedly cited in the commentary to other rules.
25. Against fever (jakmdn).
[B/irgvangtras. — yaksmafidfandgniddivatam. trdistubham : 2yj. virddgarbhd ;
4, puro 'ftusfttbA,]
Found in Paipp. i. Used by Kau^. in a remedial rite (26. 25) against fever, in con-
nection with heating an ax and dipping it in hot water to make a lotion ; and reckoned
(26. I , note) to the takmand^ana gana.
Translated : Weber, iv. 419 ; Grohmann, Ind, Stud. ix. 384-6, 403, 406 ; Ludwig,
p. 511 ; Zimmer, p. 384 and 381 ; Griffith, i. 29 ; Bloomfield, 3, 270 ; Wtnxy, Journal
Asiatique, 9. x. 512. — Cf. Bergaigne-Henry, Manuel, p. 136.
1. As Agni, entering, burned the waters, where the maintainers of
duty {dhdnna-) paid acts of homage, there they declare to be thy highest
birth-place ; then do thou, O fever (tahndn), complaisant, avoid us.
The comm. explains pada a in accordance with the ceremonial act founded on its
mechanical interpretation ; c Lcf. RV. i. 163. 4 dj shows that it is part of the heavenly
waters that is intended. Samvidvdn (occurring nowhere else) he renders ** fully know-
ing thy cause, the fire (or Agni) " : the translation takes it as equivalent to the not
\xviZovcivc\OTv samviddna. Adahat he quietly turns into a future: "shall burn thee, O
fever " ! Ppp. reads aduhat instead, and in c combines to td **huh. \Qi, Grohmann's
interpretation, I.e., 403, 404. J
2. If thou art flame (arcis) or if heat {(oc/s)y or if thy birth-place seeks
the shavings {?), hriidu by name art thou, O god of the yellow one ; then
do thou, O fever, complaisant, avoid us.
The /^////-reading qakalyaoesi in b is assured by Prat. iii. 52, but the meaning is
extremely obscure. Ppp. has the better reading ^dkalyesu * among the shavings * ;
janitram rather requires a locative. The comm. guesses it as loc. of ^akalyes^ from
^akalya explained as a ** heap of shavings," and root is *seek,' and so an epithet of fire ;
K
i. 25- HOOK I. THK ATHARVA-VKDA-SAMHITA. 26
HK. fonjcctiirc " follow in|; thr »havinf;, i.e. ^limmerini;.** Ppp. rcadx in a tiktimat for
((N /r. 'I he namr at the lir^iiininK of c in of (juitc uncertain form ; the mi. re adinf « are
httiiitt, /ttutOu, htNifit, hutitt^ ftitiu^ hfUtihhu^ hfm*iu^ ptiMtu [^A/««Mi#J ; SPI*. acloptii
in \\\% text the name ((»rm an we, ami, it \s to \ye ho|>ed, on the authority of his oral
reciters, which in such a case must l>e tietter than mss. ; Tpp. has (in l)oth vcrvs)
huiiu^ wht( h is a word (h i urrtn^ also elseuhcre, ami meaning; ** ram ** ; the comm. reads
fthihu, explaining it as fohaka or /*ttf nut^afhf utp*^ti*iLa * prmlucing in the human
ImmIv.*
[^IIfMu>. /<»//rMii/ .f i/<y/iy;//', 9. X. 513, suf^^ests that the problematic word may he
I ^ connected with the Assyrian hura^u and the Hebrew karii{, and so ^o back to a proto-
X^olj ^%^ Semitii- ^AttniJu, '^olfl.* J. llalc^vy, however. I.e., 9. xi. 320 ff., suj^gests that it may l»e
rather a Sanskritt7ation of x^*'^* * j^reenish yellow,' and compares the relations of
T'il/#///r r.f, PrAkrit Tr/«rK*i {rffultya) /)iy^XXi«r. Cf. further, Uarth, Kevtn <// i^htitotre
ties ff/ii^ioM%, xxxix. 2<).J
3. If hcalinj; {\ol'ti) or if scorching {abhi^okd), or If ihou art %ot\ of
kinjj Varutia, hnUiu by name etc. etc.
l*pp. has for b the more sensible version ffttitasytt ptAiio yadi vJtruno{^vJk ^runofyii.
4. Homage to the c(d<l fovc-r, !i<)ma;;c I pay to the fierce (fftni) heat
(C<v/V) ; to the one that befalls on every other day. on both days, to the
third-clay fever be homage.
Ppp. reads in b#////#Jr«i i"/:«> iiiniw //, and in c uhhaytbhya^ la htiias. 1 he cnm-
|KMmd ubhayaiiyut is noticed in PrAt. iv. 21. [^As for rh)thmical fevers — tertian,
c|uartan, etc.. sec Orohmanu. I.e., 3.S7, 38S.J
26. For protection from the wrath of the gods.
Found in Paipp. xix., I>ut vss. 3 4 rl.sewherc than 1-2. The hymn appears to ht
called (so schol. and the conim.) apttnotianiini * thrusters away* in Kftu^. (14. 14). and
quoted and used as such in 25.22 and (with tv. 33) in 42.22 ; it » further applied
^ (with 27 and vi. 3. 76) at the l)eKinning of the svastytiyttna rites, on fifoini; to l>ed and
getting up again (50.4), and (with i. 13 and other hymns) in the rite of entrance oo
Vedic study (139. S).
translated : \Vel>er, iv. 420 ; t'.rilhth. i. 31.
1. Far l>e that from us -may [your] missile (///•//) be, O gods; far
the bolt {tinman) which ye hurl.
The l.ist pada is identical with KV. i. 172. 2 c ; the other two |>.1das (for which I'pp.
has no variants) sound in part like a misunderstcxxl echo of the KV. text : Hr/ si vak
SHt/tUiitr'i* fnilfMtd ffij*it1 {thiih. For c Ppp. has Are mamtAttt (or mafiAm; for marm*
iAm ') tt^in/i/i I he comm. foolishly suppliers an *M) our enemies** in c; 4f^mS he
explains A%\tintfAtiii'tMi9tnttlttth pAtAftttA. I'he Anukr. Ignores the defectiveness of bi
2. He yon Rati (• lilK'rality *) a companion (stilhi) for us; a companion
[be] Intira, Khaga, Savitar of womlious favors.
27 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK I. -l. 2/
^J// seems to be made a personification here, as in iii. 8. 2 and vii. 17. 4 below ; the
comm. makes it equal to Mitra or Surya. Ppp. has a very different text : sakhe *va no
r&tir astu sakhe *ftdras sakhd savitd : sakha bhagas satyadharmd, no *stn ; which is
better as regards both sense and meter. The tripadA of the Anukr. is probably a mis-
reading for dvipaddj the mss. agree with it in using no avasdna-^xgn in the verse, and
SPP. very properly follows them ; the pada-m^. mark a cesura after rdtiti. The
comm. makes citrardd/tds = bahuvidham dhanam yasya.
3. May ye, issue {ftdpdt) of the height, sun-skinned Maruts, yield us
breadthful protection.
The mss. all read at the end saprdthds^ and SPP. retains it in his text ; the comm. has
saprathaSy in accordance with our emendation. |_Cf. Lanman, Noun-Inflection ^ p. 560. J
The comm. further has yacchdta in c.
4. Do ye advance [us], be gracious ; be thou gracious to our selves
(tann), show kindness {mdyas) to our offspring {tokd).
Ppp. fills up the deficiency of a, reading stt ntrdatd susudald mrdd no aghdbhyah
siokdya ianve dd (perhaps defective at the end). The mss., supported by the Anukr.,
make no division of the verse before mdyas^ and SPP. follows them ; the meter, how-
ever, is plainly ^<JKrt/rf. The name given by the Anukr. is not used by it elsewhere ;
it doubtless signifies, as in the VS. Anukr., 7 + 7 4- 7 = 21 syllables, the resolution
•^hi-as being refused in b and c.
27. Against various evils.
\Atharvan (svastyayatiakdmah). — cdndramasam uU * ndrdittddivatam. dmtstubham :
I, pathydpankti.'\
Found in Paipp. xix. For the use of the hymn with its predecessor by Kriu<;., see
under 26 ; it is also reckoned to the svastyayana gana (25. 36, note) ; and vs. 4 appears
by itself near the beginning of the svastyayana ceremonies, in the same rite as hymns
26 and 27.
Translated: Weber, iv. 421 ; Ludwig, p. 517; Griflith, i. 32. — Griffith says the
sloughs are to make the travellers invisible to highway robbers, and cites an old English
analogue.
1. Yonder on the further shore are she-adders, thrice seven, out of
their sloughs {-jardyn) ; with the sloughs of them do we wrap up {dpi vyd)
the (two) eyes of the malignant waylayer.
Jarayu in the sense * cast-off skin of a snake * appears to be quotable only here ;
the comm. regards the word as so applied by a figure : jardyuvat (artrasya vestakds
tvacah. Ppp. reads imds pare in a, and jarjardyuvah in b *, the comm. has instead
nirjard iva^ explaining ?isjardrahita devd iva.
2. Let the cutting one {krt) go asunder, she who bears as it were a
club {pindkd) ; asunder [go] the mind of her that returns to life {ptmar-
6/i/i); unsuccessful [are] the malignant ones.
Ppp. has no variants to cast light on this very obscure verse ; it adds at the end
afie *tas paripanthino *po *ghdynr arsatti. The comm. reads punarbhavd in c ; he
/
I. 27 nOOK I. THE atiiarva-vkda-samhitA. 28
supplirn "the army (irml) at our enemies** a^ the mi<iftin|( noun in the veme, aiifl
explains the epithet as ** reaMembUn^ after clis{x*tsal ** lie paraphrases trmtaii with
€ki9uitttl. LSrr's /.i*/#i read inj^ is punak<J»huv^h, i^ainst /ttJrr Vfrh^rnm, p. 184
(corrctlecl p. 3?^3). »"<! against Stt. Or. J 352 a, which should lie corrected by p. 411
of l.anman's tX^uni nflei tion.^
3. The many have not been able together ; the few have not ventured
on [it] ; like the sprouts (} iitit^a) of a bamboo (»r//w) round about, unstic-
eessful (are) the malignant ones.
The first half-verse in Ppp. is clrfaced, but apparently its text agreed with ours^
except that at the end stands tibhi Jhruiuvam. As the second half ts wanting, these
two pAdas probably form one verse with the two reported above, under vs. 2. The
comm. reads tiittir^tit at end of b. and has hi{^^t^ iva f^tirittu in C, explaining ti*^^*' ^'X'
molof^ically as - (<f/^l. The coninient to Trilt. iii. 13 rpjotcs ti*ktikrsMs^ and that to
ii. 38 gives *tt(i;ils among its examples ; neither atf^a nor Ntft^a appears to be quotable
from elsewhere.
4. Go forward, ye (two) feet ; kick (s/^/mr) forward ; carry to the
houses of the bestower (/^/); let Indratil go first, unscathed, unrobbed,
in front.
Tpp. has jffA^iiw and vahtintu (yet /*<I//J//) in b, and» for d, jihiivA mMktx*d fatkJi.
The comm. reads ajitA in d; he ingeniously quotes from TS. (ii. 2. 8«) *' IndrAni is
deity of the army ** in explanation of her introduction here. |^Cf. liergaigne. Religion
V^dique^ iii. 155 n. J
28. Against sorcerers and witches.
The hymn is not found in PAipp. Though not mentioned as one of the cAtamAmi
by the text of KAu^., it is added to them by the schol. (S. 25, note). It is once used
by itself in a vtitthcraft ceremony {tld/tuArtJtit) for the relief of one frightened, accom-
panying the tying on of an amulet ( 26. 26).
Translated : Weber, iv. 423 ; (friffith, i. 33.
1. Hither hath come forth god Agni, demon-slayer, disease-cxpellcr,
burning away deceivers, sorcerers, limUiins,
In our text. uf»ti is a misprint for I'tf^ti (an accent sign slipped out of place to the
left). The conunrnl i>n Ti.'it. iv. 3 r|iiotes the first three words as exemplifying the dis-
connection of prefixes from a verb.
2. Hum against the sorcerers, against the kimldins^ O god; burn up
the sorceresses that meet thee, () black-tracked one.
In c the ccmim.. %\ith two or three of Sl'T's authorities that follow htm, readt
krtnavttrtmattf (treating it as a vot alive).
3. She that bath cursed with cursing, that hath taken malignity as
her r<H>t {^ m/tnt), that hath seized on [our] young to take its sap — let
her eat (her own] offspring.
29 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK K -4. 5v>
The merse is rqxated belov as hr. 1 7. 3« and has there a panJM wi 1 Y|v The
comm. fiist Ukcs mrir^m as for miimm (as rendered aboYe>» bm add& aft aheffiMtn^
explanatioo as mmrckJLt^rjtm^ adjective to ^^k*Mm : he has «hiU«iir in |4ac« v^l >«^<
Jiidm is metricaDv ao iotnxsioii, but completes the sense.
4. Let the sorceress eat [her own] son, sister, and daughter \^ im//^);
then let the horrid-haired sorceresses mutually destroy (t'l^Jt) one
another ; let the hags (arajri) be shattered asunder.
The comm- explains napti as maptri or f^utrasya (/ar/ntjrr«t *) ^p^ttit»Tiftl jw*^
ia/g. He T^zds jrd/udAdnl (for -Mis) in a, and ^iJka in c
The 7 hymns of this antri'dJta L5.J have 2S verses, as determmeil by the ti\h>teil
Anukr. : paHcame *stdM.
29. For a chief's success: with an amulet.
\Vasistha. — sadrcam. aMhvrtamam'siiJtiam. dMmstmS^AmmA
Found (except vs. 4) in Paipp. i., and (with the same exception, in RV., chiefly x» 1 74
|_: namely, AV. verses i, 2, 3, 6 correspond respectively with RV. verses 1, 2» 3. 5. Sec
Oldenberg, Die Hymnen des RV,^ i. 243 J. Kau^. uses the hymn in the ceremony of
restoration of a king, with preparing and binding on an amulet made of the rim of a
chariot-wheel (16. 29: the comm. says, vss. 1-4); the last two verses arc specitkally
prescribed for the binding on. The comm. quotes the hymn as employed by the
Naksatra Kalpa (19) in a mahdqdnti called mdhendrf.
Translated : Weber, iv. 423 ; Griffith, i. 33.
1. With an over-rolling amulet (jnani), wherewith Indra increased —
therewith, O Brahmanaspati, make us increase unto royalty {nls(ni),
Ad/tt\ literally * on to,' so as to overwhelm. Our version spoils the consistency of
the verse by reading -vAvrdhi and vardhaya in b and d for RV. (x. 174. 1) -X'lU'fU
and vartaya^ which Ppp. also gives (Ppp. vartayak), Ppp. further has imaffi for
asmdn in c. RV, reads havisd for tnanliid in a. Tlie long I of abhlvarta (p. ahhUx^)
is noted by Prat. iii. 1 2.
2. Rolling over our rivals, over them that are niggards to us, do thou
trample on him who fights — on whoever abuses {durasy-) us.
RV. (x. 174.2) has in d irasydti; Ppp., by a not infrequent blunder, reads durat'
yatu. Pada a lacks a syllable, unless we resolve -patndn into three syllables.
3. Thee hath god Savitar, hath Soma made to increase, thee have all
existences {bhutd) [made to increase], that thou mayest be over-rolling.
The connection is again spoiled in our text by the substitution of avfvrdhnt in b for
avhfriai (which is read by RV. x. 174.3); with the former it Is imposftiblc to render
the prefix abhi. This time Ppp, gives abhlbhr^at instead, doubtless a mere corruption.
4. The over-rolling, overcoming, rival-destroying amulet! be bound
upon me unto royalty, unto the perishing {pardbhu)'ol rivals.
The verse is wanting in both RV. and Ppp. Its excision, with the following verse
I. 29- BOOK I. THE ATHARVA-VKDA-SAMHITA. 30
(which, however, Ppp. ha*), would leave the hymn of noimal length, and competed of
four out of the five venes of KV. x. 174 |^, of the fourth of which the excision is called
forj.
5. Up hath gone yon sun, up this s|>cll (viinis)ol mine, that I may be
slayer of foes, without rivals, rival-slayer.
KV. X. 159. I a, b is to l>e comparcfl (b reading Ui/ nydm mAmak6 bhAf^ak) ; Ppp.
ap)>ears to mix the versions of b, giving, ungrammatically, ay am with vacat, [^Cf. also
MP. i. 16. I.J
6. A rival-destroying bull, conquering royalty, overpowering — that I
may bear rule over these heroes and the people {jdna),
KV. (i. 174. 5) has instead of a our 5 d (found also as x. 6. 30 c, and xix.46. 7 b) ;
in c it reads M//Almfw. [Cf. Ml*, i. \U. 5. J
30. For protection: to all the gods.
\Atkarvttn {t§rt0tlt§mak). — lAiftHtJrtttm. trdi$tMhkam : j. fi§Jtt*araj^rMd Vird^/aj^ii.]
Found in PAipp. i., but damaged and only in part legible. The hymn beloogs«
according to the comm.. to the dyusya ('for length of life *) j^n/rtf, although not found
among those mentioned (KAu<;. 54. 11. note) as com|x>sing iU^X j^tina ; it b used in
ceremonies for long life by 52. 18 and 59. 1 ; also, with i. 9 and other hymns, in the
reception of a Vedir student (55 17), and in dismissal from Vedic study (139.1$).
And vss. 3, 4 appear In V.'\it. (4. 4. 15) in connection with different parts of the /art'tf « •
sacrifues. The comm. further quotes it from Naks. Kalpa 17 and 18 in two $nakd^dmii
rites, styled i}tn}vail and i'*}t^vdtii'il, ami from Part<;tsta 5.4, In the pu$f*dbkis(ka
ceremony.
Translated: Weber, iv. 424 ; Ludwig, p. 430 ; Griffith, i. 34.
1. O all ye gotls, ye Vasus, protect this man; likewise ye Adityas,
watch yc over him ; him let not one related {sdnAbhi) nor one unrelated
— him Irt not any deadly wea|>on of men (pdunistyai) reach.
Ppp. has in b the false form jtlt^fttta. The comm. paraphrases -ndbki in c by
garbhtl^aya. |_For the syntax, cf. Caland, KZ. xxxiv. 456.J
2. Whoso of you, O goils, are fathers and who sons, do ye, accordant
{sticf(as), hear this utterance of mine ; to you all I commit this man ;
happily unto old age shall ye carry him.
Ppp. has at the end nttnl/Ait. The comm. reads in b u/jham,
3. Ve, O gods, that are in the heaven, that are on earth, that arc in
the atmosphere, in the herbs, in the cattle, within the waters — do yc
make old age the length of life for this man ; let him avoid the hundred
other deaths. ^/"yir^vV-^/J/v^r/f* J^^a^*^^ f^ ^/ ^ r ,
The intrusion of f*,i{tisH and a/isii in b spoils the meter |^or we may tt^i^y/^midriksm
6saiihl$v itpiii an/dA j ; Ppp., omitting pa^usit and antdr^ makes it good. The Anukr.
re<|uire?i us to scan the p.1da as of 14 s)llables. Pr5t. ii. lot notes the lingualixatk>n ia
forms of tii after tUvi^ and the comment cites this passage (a) as example. The comm.
has in d vrnakta^ and renders it as causative. [^As to tot deaths, see Zimmcr, p. 400. J
31 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK I. -I. 3 1
4. Whose are the fore-offerings and whose the after-offerings ; the
gods that share the oblation and that eat what is not made oblation of ;
you among whom the five directions are shared out — you do I make
sitters at the session (sattrd^ of this man.
Ppp. reads in d idn no *smdi satrasadhah k-. The comm. explains ahutadas as
baliharanddidevds ; in sattra he sees nothing more than simple sadana. Both editions
read satra-^ in accordance with universal manuscript usage.
31. To the divine guardians of the quarters.
\^Brahman. — dfdpdiiyam^ vdstospatyam, dttusiubham : j. virdttristubh ;
4. pardmtstuptristubhl\
Found in Paipp. i. The hymn is called in Kaug. (38. 1 1) dqdpdllyavi^ and is also
reckoned by the schol. (8. 23, note) to the vdsiospatlydni or vdstu gana. It is used
with xii. I in the ceremony (38. 16) for establishing a house, and again, except vs. 3, as
drhhandni < establishers ' in a like rite (38. 11); it appears in one of the j<zT/<7-sacrifices
(64. 1 ) with an offering of four dishes (catuhqar&va)^ and in the portent ceremony
(127.6) against obscuration of the "Seven Sages" (the Dipper, or Charles's Wain) by
a comet. Verse 2 (32. 27, note ; but the comm. says instead vs. i, quoting its pratika)
is reckoned among the anholiiigds^ and applied in rites for healing, security, long life,
etc.; and vs. 4 (50. 11) in one for good fortune in the night. In Vait. (36.20) the
hymn (as d^dpdllyd) accompanies in the a^vamedha the turning loose of the sacrificial
horse. And the comm. quotes it as used in Naks. Kalpa 14 in the adbhuta mahd^Snti,
Translated : Weber, iv. 425 ; Ludwig, p. 372 ; Griffith, i. 35.
1. To the four immortal region-guardians of the regions {dfd), to the
overseers of existence (bhutd), would we now pay worship {vidh) with
oblation.
The verse occurs also in TB. (ii. 5. 33) and A^S. (ii. 10. 18) : in the latter, without
variants ; TB. inserts (vd after a^dndm in a. The comm. paraphrases d^ds by prdcy-
ddidi^as^ which is plainly its meaning here.
2. Ye, O gods, who are the four region -guardians of the regions — do
ye release us from the fetters (pdfa) of perdition (nirrtt), from every dis-
tress (dhhas).
The comm. reads stana for sihaua in b. The Anukr. does not note b as metrically
deficient, doubtless making the harsh resolution ca-tu-a-ro,
3. Unlamed I sacrifice to thee with oblation ; unmaimed I make obla-
tion to thee with ghee ; the god that is fourth region-guardian of the
regions, he shall bring hither to us welfare (subhuid).
At the beginning, dqrdmas is read by half the mss. (including our E. I.O. Op. K. Kp.)
and by the comm.; SIM\ gives dsr- in his text, as we in ours. A^lonas in b in our
edition is an erratum for d^/ofias. Ppp. has for a, b a^ronas te havisd vidhema via^rd-
mas te ghrt-; the comm. also reads a^ronas. Ppp. gives turyas in c : the word perhaps
means simply * [any] one of the four.' The Anukr. appears not to sanction the resolu-
tions to tn-d which would fill out a and b. The pada-mss. mark the division between
C and d after devas^ as the sense, but not the meter, demands.
i. 31- BOOK I. THE ATHARVA-VEDA-SAMHITA. 32
4. Well-being (sviisii) be to our mother and father, well-being to kine,
to creatures {j*ij^*^t), to men (f>iinisa)\ all welfare [and] beneficence
(? stit'it/iifnt) be ours ; long may we see the sun.
Vtyr jttX'tff in b Ppp. has n/a, with manifest advanta|^ to both meter and tenae ;
and it reads p&fHsebhyas (with our ll.s. m.), and in d d9{r%*a. Many of the samMttS-
mss. (including our II. K.) g\\c ho after /i/r/ in a. 1 he comm. gives three different
interpretations (taking it always, however, from vtti and not from </J) for the ambigu-
ous sMviiftitrn. The Anukr. apiKrars to read tto'sfn in c, and jtt^x *"d si-ri-am in d
^rather, y/^j^' and iiryam, so as to make 1 1 + 1 1 : 1 1 + 8 ? J. (^At \o jagat^ tec Zimmer,
p. 1 50. J
32. Cosmogonic.
\Brakman. — tiydxtlfrthtfiyam. dumstHhham : m. kakmmmmAJ\
Found in TAipp. i., next after our hymn 31. Used by Kfto^. in a women's rite
(34- O* •'^gainst t>arrennesft, and again (59. 3) in a ceremony for prosperity, to hearen
and earth ; and the first verse (so the comm.) further (6. 17), as alternate to x. 5. 33.
with conducting water into the joined hands of the sacHficer*s wife, in the /art'tfit-
sacrifices.
Translated : \Vel)er, iv. 426 ; Ludwig. p. 533 ; (Griffith, i. 36.
1. Now, ye jKoplc, take knowledge; he will speak a great mystery
(? btri/iman) ; that is not on earth nor in the sky whereby the plants
breathe.
With a, b is to l>e compared the very simiLir line xx. 127. 1 a, b : id^tk jamS tif^a
^rnta fulrA^afisH t/tti'tsra/f ; which makes it probable that the ungrammatkal vtdAikm
means vidata or veifafha (accent is unmotived). and suggests also vadisyaie^ passive ;
the former seems confounded with the noun vulAtha^ of which viitAthe^ or, as Ppp.
re.ids. vitiAtham, would make f.iirly good srnse : 'will now l^e spoken at {yx to) the
council.* I*pp. reads /rt/*j for//*r<f in d- ^ For /rJfi<f j»/i, see frit Iv. 57. J
2. In the atmosphere is the station of th^m, as of those sitting
wearied; the station of this that exists {bhUtd) : that the pious know —
or they do not.
* Of them * {AsAm, fem.) in a the comm. explains to mean "of the plants,** and then,
alternatively, ** of the waters ** ; doulitless the latter is correct, the waters being that
•* whereby the plants live** (1 d). Ppp. reads in a an/anJt*am, which means virtitally
the same as our text : the reservoir of the waters is the atmosphere or b In It (doC in
heaven nor earth, 1 c). The analogy of vii. 95. 2 suggests g4x*Jlm as wanting at the
beginning of b : the waters are ordinarily as rpiiet as cows that lie resting : a coropmri-
son from the usual Vedtc source. \Vel>er suggeste<l that stkimm be read twice ; and
this R. favors. The Anukr. ignores the deficiency in the pAda. For 4, Ppp. has indm$
krd bhesatoiianak.
3. What the (two) quaking firmaments {r6dasl) — and the earth —
fashioned out, that at present is always wet, like the streams of the
ocean.
In b the translation implies emendation to ti/aJtja/dm, as favored by the Ppf*. r«ail>
tng marit'HtJtstt/tlm; there remains the anomaly of letting the verb agree with r4dmi
33 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK I. -i. 33
(Ppp. has rodhasi) ; perhaps we ought to read bhiimes * out of the earth.* The comni.,
with a disregard of the accent which is habitual with him, takes rddasl and its epithet
as vocatives, and then supplies dyduSy vocative LJAOS. xi. 66J, in b to help make a
dual subject for the verb 1 For d Ppp. has vidtirassevavartasl. \Yox c, cf. (J)B. vi. 6. 3 3. J
4. The one hath covered all ; this rests upon the other ; both to the
heaven and to the all-possessing earth have I paid homage.
The first pada is translated according to the Ppp. version : vi^vatn a/tyd *bhi
vavdra ; which is quite satisfactory ; Weber had suggested abh\ *vd **ra. The pada-
reading is abhiovara^ and the word is quoted under Prat. iii. 12 as an example of a
compound showing protraction of the final vowel of the first member. TB. (iii. 7. io3)
and Ap. (ix. 14. 2) have the verse, and both have anya ^bhivdvrdhd. The comm. gives
abhivdras^ and explains it in three ways, as abhito varanam chddanam^ as abfiivrtam^
and as abhitah sambhajanayuktam. For b, Ppp. has vi^vam anyasydm adhi ^ratam.
For vi^vdvedase in c (Ppp. vii^vavedhase ; TB. Ap. vit^vdkarmane) the comm. also
gives two interpretations, from vid * acquire * and from vid * know.'
33. To the waters : for blessings.
\^Qamtdti. — cdndramasam dpyam tita. trdisiubkafu.'\
Found in Paipp. i., and also in TS. (v. 6. i), MS. (ii. 13. i), and the Mantrapatha
Li. 2. 2-5 J (VVinternitz in Denksch. d, Wicfier Akad, xl. 44). [_See also MGS. i. 2. 1 1
and p. 1 58. J Reckoned by Kaui;. to the apdth suktdni * hymns of the waters' (121. i , and
7. 14, note), also to both the ^d9iii ganas (9. 1,4) ; appears further, with several other
hymns, in a rite for good-fortune (41. 14) ; and in the goddua ceremony to accompany
bathing after the shaving (54. 5), also in the feet-washing of a guest (90. 9), against
the portent of the appearance of water in a waterless place (121. i), and against that of
the causeless breaking of water-jars etc. (136. 8). And the comm. quotes it as employed
by Pariqista v. 2 in the puspdbhiseka rite.
Translated : Weber, iv. 428 ; Winternitz, Hochzeitsrituell^ Wiener Denkschr. xl. 44 ;
CrifTith, i. 37.
1. Of golden color, clean (ffki), purifying, in whom [was] born Savitar,
in whom Agni ; who, of beauteous color, assumed Agni as embryo — let
those waters be weal, pleasant to us.
Lin c, for dad/tir/, better, * conceived * ?J TS. and MS. read in b jd/d/t ka^ydpo
yasv indrah ; and Ppp. agrees with them ; MP. has (igitih instead of indrah. In c
TS. MS. give virupds for suvarnds ; and TS. omits yas^ and hence has dad/tire (un-
accented) ; MS. puts jrtJ" after agnim, MP. offers te for nas in d. LAs to savitr —
ka^apa^ cf. Bloomfield, AJP. xvii. 403.J
2. In the midst of whom goes king Varuna, looking down at the \y^
truth-and-falschood of men ; who, of beauteous color, etc. etc.
The first half-verse is found also in RV. (vii. 49. 3 a, b), without difference of read-
ing ; MP. agrees through the whole verse Lexcept in d, ie for nas\ ; TS. MS. have a
wholly different c. The comment to Prat. ii. 11 gives avapaqyah jandudftf as example
of the general requirement that final // be assimilated to a following initial palatal, and
half or more of our mss. so read ; but SPP., as elsewhere, gives -an j- Lcf. note to
i. 19. 4J.
i. 33- HOOK I. THE ATIIARVA-VEDA-SAMIIITA. 34
3. They of whom the gods in heaven make [their] draught {bhaksd) ;
they that come to be abundantly in the atmosphere ; who, of beauteous
color, etc. etc.
A|;ain TS. MS. have a difTcrent c {yi^ prtktvim fdyasc *mddmti {ukrik). Our ().
has at end of c vhiipAk (as TS. M.S. in 1 c). Ml*, substitutes mMsfJIs lor kkavmnti
in b. The comm. renders hkaksAm liy ttpahkof^yam.
4. With propitious eye behold me, O waters; with propitious bo<Iy
touch my skin ; they that are ghccdripping, clean, |)urifying — let those
waters be weal, pleasant to us.
The first half-verse ap|)ears aj^ain l>elow as zvi. 1.12. It aJone b found in TS. and
M.S. ; hut our c is KV. vii. 49. 3 c. and the two other texts have it after our 2 A, b
\jl\\ readiiif; matiku' tor j^kr/a- j. MP. reads ^h'/na it*^ (AkstisA pa^ynnix* i^k^ and
in b ipr{antH and //. AH. (viii. 6. 10) quotes the whole verse in its TS. and MS. ver-
sion. Our Hp. K. read -^lytttat in c ; Ppp. has -^taias. The Anukr. ignores the redun-
dancy of one syllable (or mure) in b. /^^') rriif fy J^0^/»^^ ^A '^ vy
34. A love-spell : with a sweet herb.
Verses 1, 2, 5 are found in PAipp. ii., vs. 3 in vi., and vs. 4 in part in viii. It is
use<i by Kiku^. in a ceremony for superiority in disputation (38. 17) : the ambitious dis-
putant is to come into the a.%scml)ly from the north-east, chewing the sweet plant ;
again, twice in the nuptial ceremonies, once with tying a wai^uxka amulet on the finger
(76. 8), and once (79. 10) on crushing the amulet at the consummation of the marria|*e.
The comm. further declares it u.5ed at the disputation in the a^vamnika sacrifice ; Init
he quotes no authority for it. All these applications are evidently imposed ufioa the
hymn, not contained in it.
Translated: Welnrr, iv. 429 ; CJrill, 52, 78 ; Griffith, i. 38 ; Hloom field, 99, 274. —
Cf. Ilillebrandt, l'fJa<krestt*mtttktf^ p. 46.
1. This plant is h<)ncy-(///#/</////-)born ; with honey we dig thee ; forth
from honey art thou engendered ; [soj do thou make us possessed of
honey.
The comm. calls the plant madkiika^ and uses that form of the name also in the
quotations from Kilu^. (instead of madugka^ madkngka, etc ; the mss. vary greatly in
their readings).
2. At the tip of my tongue honey, at the root of my tongue honeyed-
ness; maycst thou be altogether in my power (knitn)t mayest thou come
unto my intent (ciiUi),
The second half verse agrees nearly with that of iii. 25. 5 and ¥{.9. 2, in both of
which the yAtkt\^ here unexpressed, hel)>s the construction (though the accent of iIm/
does not altsolutely need it. being capable of l>eing viewed as antithetical). Ppp. has
for 9ijikvilyi\ *^fe me mittikn^ and for c, A yafkA mAm tAminy as0 (our 5 c) yitm t*JlcM
mttim ttm'tulrttsf. The comm. explains Madkti/akam by madkmrarmsakmkmiam /mimmm'
dkikUtavrksapHspAm yatkA ; he understands the plant to be addressed in c, d — wbicli
is plainly wron^.
35 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK I. -i. 35
3. Honeyed {mddhumant) [is] my in-stepping, honeyed my forth-going ;
with my voice I speak what is honeyed ; may I be of honey-aspect.
Vaddni might be a better reading in c. The first half-verse resembles RV. x. 24.6 a, b
{m. m. parayanam ntddhumat punar ayanatn), Ppp. has for second half-verse vacii
madhumad ubhydma akso me madhusamdr^U The comm. takes madhu and samdr^as
in d as two independent words.
4. Than honey am I sweeter {inddhu), than the honey-plant more
honeyed ; of me verily shalt thou be' fond (? van)^ as of a honeyed branch.
The majority of our mss. (not Bp. I. £. D.) read here madhugh^t in b, as do also
the Prat mss. in both places (ii. 5c; iv. 16 c) where the verse is quoted ; but at vi. 102. 3
all read -du-^ SPP. reads -du- (as does our text), and makes no report of discordance
among his authorities ; the comm. has -////-, and derives the word from madhudttgha.
All the mss., and both texts, give the unmotived accent vdttds in c ; the comm. explains
the word by sambhajes. He again regards the plant as addressed in the second
half-verse. Ppp* (in viii.) has a and b, with \jiham for asmi andj madhumdn for
madugh&t,
5. About thee with an encompassing {paritatnn) sugar-cane have I
gone, in order to absence of mutual hatred ; that thou mayest be one lov-
ing me, that thou mayest be one not going away from me.
The second half-verse is found repeatedly later, as ii. 3p. i d, e and vi. 8. 1-3 d, e.
The //7^<z-reading in d is dpaogd^ and the word is quoted under Prat iii. 34 as one of
the cases of irregular hiatus to which the rule refers. Disregarding this, SPP. alters the
pada-texi to dpaogdh, against all our pada-mss, and most of his, for no better reason
than that the comm. seems to read so. Our Bp. (both copies) accents here apaogd^ as
also at vi. 8. i, 3, but not at ii. 30. i. The comm. allows this time that the address is to
a woman. LPpp. has for h-6. yaksanaJtdm avidvise yathd na vidvdvadvi na vibhava
kadd cana. As for the rite, cf. Paraskara's Grhya-sutra, iii. 7», and Stenzler*s note. J
35. For long life etc. : with a gold amulet.
\^Atharvan. — hdiranyam ; dindrdgnam uta vdifvadrvam. jdgatam : 4. anustubgarbhd
4'P. tristubh.^
Not found in Paipp. LOf vss. i and 2, Schroeder gives the Katha version, with
variants, Tiibinger Kat/ia-hss.^ p. 36. J Used by Kau9., with i. 9 and v. 28, in two cere-
monies for fortune and for power (i 1. 19 ; 52. 20) ; and the comm. considers it involved
also at 57.31, in the upanayana. The comm. further quotes it from the ddityd mahd-
^dnti in Naks. Kalpa 19 ; also from Pari9ista 4. i and 13. i.
Translated : Weber, iv. 430 ; Ludwig, p. 457 ; Griffith, i. 39.
I. What gold the descendants of Daksa, well-willing, bound on for
Catanlka, that I bind for thee, in order to life {dyns)y splendor, strength,
to length of life for a hundred autumns.
It would rectify the meter and improve the sense (considering that dfrghdyutvd
follows) to omit ay use in c ; the Anukr. notes the redundancy of the pada (14 syllables).
VS. (xxxiv. 52) has the first half-verse, with a different second half ; and so has a RV.
i. 35 IK)UK I. THE ATHARVA-VKUA-SAMHITA. 36
khila to RV. x. 128 (<>, Aufrecht, p. 685). The KAu^. tpcakt oi ymgmmkrfmmU as xht
amulet : protul'ly a pair of t»cacU of gold like krsnaia berries. The comm. quotes
AD. viii. 21.5 for <,at.inika.
2. Not (lemons, not f^i^iUns overcome him, (or this is the first-born
force of the g<Hls ; whoso bears the gold of the descendants of Daksa,
he makes for himself Ion;; life amoti^; the livinj;.
VS. (xxxiv. 51) has the verse, reading ttUi for fn*tM ami iaranli for sakamU in a.
accenting f*if*hthtt in c, and giving tifv^su iorjti/sit in d ; and it re)>eats d with maHus-
y}sH instead ; and the KV. khila (S, as alM>ve) follows tt very nearly (hut tatamtt in a,
and tfiikttlvtttttl Air- in c). The Anukr. ignores the metrical irregularities of a and b
3. The waters' brilliancy, light, force, and strength, also the heroic
powers (rityti) of the forest trees, do we maintain in him, as in Indra
Indra*s f>owers (iftdfiyd) ; this gold shall he, being capable, bear.
The comm. explains t/tlJtsitmtlfttt in d hy v4tftiMamJl9t»t. Omission of the superfluous
imfriyilfii in c would rectify tlie meter ; t lie /fr^/a text marks the division wrongly t)efore
astttin instead of after it ; [\\\t Anukr. likewise reckons asmim to d and describes tlie
pada as one of 14 MllaldeslJ.
4. With seasons of summers (? stimtl), of months, we [fill] thee, with
the milk of the year I fill [thee]; let Indra-and-Agni, let all the gods,
approve thee, not bearing enmity.
Emendation to hJI *ham at the end of a would rectify both meter and constnKtion.
Iletween c and d the //f#/«f-text wrongly resolves U 'nm into //.* <l/vi# (as again at viii. 3. :i ).
and the /<ff/iimss. put the sign of pAda divbion before instead of after /// apparently
the Anukr. makes the true division |^after //, accentlessj. The comm., too, understands
//. The combination -M/j /ivI is cjuoted as an example under Tdlt. ii. 84.
The concluding anuvAka {t \ has again 7 hymns, with 31 verses ; and the quoted
Anukr. of the mss. sa\s //<h/«/f<r lO *tti:r€ ptifA lyuh.
Some of the mss. sum the whole l)Ook up correctly as 35 hymns, 153 verses.
Here ends also the second /r<// J Mif/"*!.
Book II.
LThe second book is made up mostly of hymns of 5 verses each.
It contains 22 such hymns, but also five hymns (namely, 3, 4, 14,
15, and 32) of 6 verses each, five hymns (namely, 5, 17, 27, 29, and
33) of 7 verses each, and four hymns (namely, 10, 12, 24, and 36)
of 8 verses each. Compare page i. The possibilities of critical
reduction to the norm are well illustrated by hymns 10, 12, 14,
27; see, for example, the critical notes to ii. 10. 2.
The whole book has been translated by Weber in the Mounts-
bcrichtc dcr Kon, Akad. der Wiss. zu Berlin^ June, 1870, pages
462-524. This translation was reprinted, with only slight
changes, in IndiscJie Studicn, vol. xiii. (1873), pages 129-216.
The following references to Weber have to do with the reprint J
I. Mystic.
[ Vena, — brahmdtmaddivatam. trdistubham : j. Jagati,']
Found in Paipp. iL, and parts of it in other texts, as pointed out under the several
verses. LVon Schroeder gives wliat may be called a Katha-recension of nearly all of it
in his Tiibinger Katha-hss.^ pp. ^Z^ 89. J Used by Kau9. (37. 3) in addressing various
articles out of whose behavior afterward signs of success or the contrary, and the like
oracular responses, are to be drawn (the comm. gives them in a more expanded detail).
And Vait. (29. 14) apphes vs. 3 in the upavasaiha rite of the agnicayana.
Translated : Weber, xiii. 1 29 ; Ludwig, p. 393 ; Schcrman, Philosophische Hymnen^
p. 82 ; Deussen, Geschichtey i.» 253 ; Griffith, i. 41.
I. Vena (the longing one }) saw that which is highest in secret, where
everything becomes of one form ; this the spotted one (Prfni) milked
[when] born ; the hcaven-(jz/rfr-)knowing troops {vrd) have shouted at it.
A bit of labored obscurity, h'ke the verses that follow ; books iv. and v. begin simi-
larly ; no attempt will be made here to solve the riddles. The comm. explains at great
length (nine 4to pages), but evidently without any traditional or other understanding ;
he guesses and etymologizes this way and that, giving in part wholly discordant alter-
native interpretations. In this verse he first takes v^na as = Aditya; and then, after a
complete exposition on this basis, he says : yadva : venah parjattydtmd madhyama-
sthdno devahy and gives another ; profit to him is ** the common name of sky and sun."
The translation given implies emendation in c oi jayamdnds to -nd; but the epithet
might belong to vras (so Ludwig and the comm.), or be the second object of aduhat
(so Weber). The variants of the parallel versions of other texts make the impression
(as often in other cases) of rather aimless stumbling over matters not understood.
li. I- HOOK II. THK ATIIARVA-VKDA-SAMIIITA. 38
VS. (xxjtii R) And TA. (jc. 1.3) have the firM half vcr»e : VS. read* in a ^a{YdH ttihitath
f^uhik j«l#/, aiul TA. pS{y*tn vl\vt\ hhuvam\mt x*u1vin ; l>oth \%Avr /Jtantt/am at end oC b.
The pratika \% f|tioti*d in <,<,S. xv 3.8, ^iih the addition t/i pu/ltit, apparently referring
to thi!% h)mn. I'pp. lia.n /<f</<f//i iot ji^u/itl in a, e/tamat/am in b, (f/unttr for f^f^ma in c
(with nt}s at the end), and, for d, svttfvuio'hhYamMktir I'ifilf, The phrase aMjr Jftu-
saia vniJk occurs al?»o in RV. iv. 1. 16 d; I*i»chcl (/>#/. .S/W. ii. 121 ^and 321 J) takes
vris to mean "women**; the comm. etymologi/e.n it as dvrft\tm*\naM ppajtlM. [^CT.
RV. X.I 23. 2. J lt/n\^, ^X f^,^($2, Ha^sjUOa.
2. May the Gandharva, knowing of the immortal, proclaim that high-
est alwHlc that is in secret ; three quarters (paM) of it (arcj deposited in
secret ; whoso knowcth them, he shall be the father's father.
Ppp. l>eKin.5 with f' tiun^ (for put A///), and for atnrtasya has -taik 114, probAldy
intending the ttmittim nii of VS. (xxxii.9) and TA. (x i. 3-4 : TA. reads also vwt").
In !>, TA. ^\\t% fuima (for tf/nlmtt); and for parawtim TA. has niktimm, and VS.
vihhritim^ while V.S. ends with .^'/M#J sAt and TA. with guMdsm. In c, I*pp. and TA.
f^\\e patfti, and Ppp. ui/ntfil ; and TA., thin time with the concurrence of Ppp, ewls the
pAda a^ain with i^ithtliu. In d. TA. has /if#/ for /if/r/, and stu-tftif for i«f pitns^ while
Ppp. j;ives vat for yas at the iK^jjinniiip. PrAt. ii. 73 prescril)es the comt>ination
ptttis p- (in d), and l)oth editions read it, though nearly all our samMiiS'm%%^ and part
of SPP's, read -tiih p- in.stead. To make a good tfisthbh p.ida, we must resolve Pf-Ji
at the l)ej;inninR. [^llillcbrandt, /Vi/. Mytho!. i. 433, discusses the verse. J
3. lie, of US the father, the generator, and he the connection (bdmd/iu).
knowcth the al)odes, the beings all ; who of the gods is the sole nomen-
clator, of him all beings come to inquire.
Here, as usual elsewhere |^if. IJR. iv. 1088, citations from TH., TS., AH. J, -pra^mnm
is of infmitival value. Ppp. begins (piite differently: sa ntf hiimiikur jaHttJ s^ t'i«M«f//J
tihArmaiti vetfa etc. ; its c, d are our 5 C, d, with variants for which see under vs. 5.
VS. (xxxii. 10) and TA. (x 1.4) have a verse m.nde up like that of Ppp., differing
from the latter in the first half only hy having; x't\/AJ/J and iiMim*ini. A corres()onding
verse in RV. (x. 82. 3) reads in a ytis for sA and again for sti titti, accents of course
Wt/a in b, and has nt}nttitih,it in c and attyti for stirvJI in d ; and with it agrees in all
points VS xvii. 27 ; while TS. (iv.6. 2) and MS. (ii 10.3) also follow il closely in A,
C d (MS. vtt/fiaffd in a) hut have a different b: y^ mah sa/A abky i s*IJ jajinm. Our
O. has the RV. readings. v/*ia in b and Ntlmatihis in c : and the latter is given hy the
comm. and by nearly half of SPP's authorities; the lattrr's text, however, agrees with
ours. 1 he verse is no jti^tt/l at all. but, if we make the frequent (RV ) comhinatM>n
i«< Vif in c a |>erfectly regular tuitubh.
4. About hcavcnandcarth at once I went ; I approached {upa-sihJ)
the firstborn of righteousness (rAf), abiding in beings as speech in the
s|KMkcr ; eager (}) is he ; is he not Agni (fire) }
of this verse, only the first p.'^da is found in VS. (xxxii 12 A) and TA. (x. I. 4), VS.
reading //:-.f for Jmw, and TA. having at the end yanti ituiyAh. Ppp. has for first
half pnti vi\v*\ bkHvanttny Ayttm upt\(ttite pfathamaj^ rlaiya^ and for d dkJksra9m
nesatta fvfu* tti^nth The accus. vitam in c suggests emendation to -t/AJm, in apftosi-
tion ^\X\\ p^athamajdm ; but then the comm. agrees with Ppp. in reading instead yJi,
39 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK II. -li. 2
and emendation without any traceable sense to guide us is of no avail. The combina-
tion bhuvanestha (p. -ne^stha) is noted under Prat. ii. 94. In the fadaitxi of b is
noted from our mss. no other reading than lipa : atisthe j but S PP. gives upa: tiotisthe^
and reports no various readings ; as dotisfhc (witiiout any accent) is an impossible form
\_Skt. Gr. § 1083 aj this is perhaps simply a blunder in his text; the comm., with a
minority of SPP's mss., has -tisthet,
5. Around all beings I went, the web (tdntii) of righteousness stretched
out for beholding, where the gods, having attained immortality (amrta)
bestirred themselves Q iraya-) upon the same place of union {ySni).
The proper rendering of d is especially doubtful, but ddhi^ by its independent accent
(which is established by Prat. iv. 5), is clearly only a strengthener of the locative sense
of ydnHu, In b, perhaps better * to behold the web* etc. (the comm. absurdly explains
the particle kAm as sukhHtmakavt brahma). The second half-verse is, as noted above,
found in VS., TA., and Ppp., combined into one verse with our 3 a, b; Ppp. has in it
Una^ana samdne dhdmann addhl **rayantaj VS. reads trdye dhaman for our samdni
ydnilH ; TA., trtiye dhamany abhy dirayania, Ppp. has as vs. 5 something quite
different : for a, pari dydvdprthivl sadyd ^^yam (exchanging 4 a and 5 a : see under 4) ;
for b, our own b ; for c, d devo devatvam abhiraksamdnas sam&nam bandhufii vipa-
ricchad ekah. The first pada requires the harsh resolution vi-^u-d to make it full L^/f-
vdni would be easier J.
2. To Gandharvas and Apsarases.
[Mdtrndman. — gandharvdpsarodnmtyam. trdistubham : /. virddjagati ; 4. j-/>. virdfitidma-
gdyatri ; j. b/iuriganustubhJ]
Found in Paipp. i. (only in the nd^arf copy). Called by KSuq. (8.24), with vi. 11 1
and viii. 6 (and the schol. add iv. 20 : see ib., note), tndtrudmdni * mother-names * (per-
haps from the alleged author) ; they are employed in a remedial rite (26. 29 : ** against
seizure by Gandharvas, Apsarases, demons etc." comm.), and several times (94. 15;
95. 4 ; 96. 4 ; loi. 3 ; 114. 3 ; 136. 9) in charms against various portents (adbhutdni).
And verse i is allowed by Vait. (36. 28) to be used in the a^vamed/ta sacrifice as alter-
native for one given in its text (27). Further, the comm. quotes the mdtrndman hymns
from the Qanti Kalpa (16) as accompanying an offering in the sacrifice to the planets
i^grahayajnd) ; and from the Naks. Kalpa (23) in the tantrabhutd vtahd^dnti.
Translated: Weber, xiii. 133; Griffith, i. 42; verses 3-5 also by Weber, Abh, Btr-
liner Akad.\%^%^ p. 35o(= Omina und Portentd). — Cf. Hillebrandt, Ved, MythoL i.433.
1. The heavenly Gandharva, who is lord of being (bhnvmia), the only
one to receive homage, to be praised {Id) among the clans {yiq) — thee
being such I ban {yu) with incantation, O heavenly god ; homage be to
thee ; in the heaven is thy station.
Ppp. reads in c deva divya. The comm. understands ydumi in c as "join" (sam-
yojtiydmi) LBR. vi. 138, *festhalten ' J : RV. i. 24. 11 a, tdt tvd ydmi brdhmandy sug-
gests emendation. The combination ^^j/- in a is by Prat. ii. 70.
2. Touching the sky, worshipful, sun-skinned, dcprecator of the seizure
{hdras) of the gods — gracious shall be the Gandharva, who is lord of
being, the only one to receive homage, very propitious.
ii. 2- BOOK II. THK ATHAKVA-VEDA-SAMHITA 40
Ppp. Iicf^int with tiiz'a sfrito^ and inverts the order of c and d. 1 he comm. explains
sifyaivac by MwrYttsamAntiX'arna, and karat by Jtnh/Att. The Anukr. does not heed
that c b skjaj^itfi |>Ada
3. lie hath unitcil himself (sam-gam) with those irreproachable
ones (f.) ; in ('///) among the Apsarases was the Gandhai^'a ; in the ocean
is, they tell mc, their seat, whence at once they both come and go.
I*pp. combines ytfjC**'' **AAM in a, and has in b ap%ar*\bhis for rJtsH ; its second half-
verse rea«ls thus: samudtA sam sadanam Ahm talas tadyA upAiaryantt. Weber
takes ia9H ja^me in a as ist sin^. The comm. gives two diverse explanations of the
verse, the first taking the («andliarva as the sun and the Apsarases as his rays.
4. O cloudy one, pleamer {iiidyut), starry one — ye that accompany
{sac) the Gandharva Vi^vavasu, to you there. O divine ones, homage do
I pay.
All those addresse<l are in the feminine c^')<l<^''« i-<^- Apsarases. I*pP- ^^ namMitu
for mama tt in c. The Anukr. |^if we assume that itn name for the meter (as at i. 2. 3 ;
W. 16. 9) means 11 fit -^ 1 > J passes without notice the deficiency of two syllables in a.
5. They that are noisy, dusky, dice-loving, mind confusing — to those
Apsarases, that have the Gandharvas for Sjwuses, have I paid homage.
Ppp. rcafis in a /<}///ij-. antl tuo of our xx\\\ (P .Nf ) give the .same. Ppp. has also
aJtsthfmiis in b Our W.I. rom!»in«* -bAyo aJtitfittft in d The versr is not hMnfij (as
the Anukr. calls it). l»ut a regular anuituhh. On account of the «*pilhet "dice loving '*
in b, Weber calls the whole hymn " Wurfctsegen" (*a blessing for dice*).
\
3. For relief from flux: with a certain remedy.
[/Hfttas. — uti/ftitM. hkJif*tjYdfnrJk*tHZ*tnt*tPtJAn^it,im. dnttjtmhkam : 6jf.tvar44uparti'
iJumakdh'kati ]
This hymn in PAipp. also follows the one that prece<les it here ; but in PSipp. vss. 3
and 6 are wanting, and 4 and 5 are made to change places; and vs. t is defaced KAu^.
employs it only ome (25 6), in a healing rite for various disorders and wounds (/i'tf'
rSiUSrdttmtitramhflxtraHeMM, comm ). with i 2.
Translated : Weber, xiii. 13.S ; Ludwig, p 507 ; (irill. 17. 79 ; Griffith, I 43 ; Bloom-
field, 9. 277.
I. What runs down yonder, aiding (?), off the mountain, that do I
make for thee a remedy, that thou mayest be a good reme<Iy.
At the end, tisati would l>e a very acceptable emendation : • that there may be.'
Avaitd (p. avat-k*im : cpiotrd in the c*»mment to I*r.\t 1103; ii. 3S ; Iv. 25) is
o)>scure. t>ut is here translated as fnim the present participle of root av (like tjaikd^
V. 23. 7 \ji\. af>himAdvatkA, (,'11., vikstfiatkti, VS.J) ; this the comm. favors {xySJkt*
parihArena taksakam^ ; Ppp. has in another passage twice avatakam (but evidently
meant for ax'atk%tm : arafakam mttma hAfutjam avaiakatk pativAcanam), Id A, our
P.M. read uiMivasi.
41 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK II. -n. 3
2. Now then, forsooth ! how then, forsooth ? what hundred remedies
are thine, of them art thou the chief {uttamd), free from flux, free from
disease {drogana).
In b, me * are mine * is an almost necessary emefldation. Yet Ppp. also has ie : adang^q
^aiam yad bhesajani te sahasram vd ca y&ni te; and, in d, arohanam ; cf. also vi. 44. 2.
The obscure first pada is here translated as if uttered exclamatorily, perhaps accompanying
some act or manipulation. AsrUva is rendered by the indefinite term *flux,* its specific
meaning being uncertain ; it is associated with roga also in i. 2. 4 ; the comm. explains
it as atisdrdtimutranddlvranddi. \QL Zimmer, p. 392. J
3. The Asuras dig low down this great wound-healer; that is the
remedy of flux ; that has made the disease {roga) disappear.
The pada-i^xi in b is aruhosranam, and the word is quoted under Pr5t. ii. 40 as an
example of the assimilation of a final h to an initial sibilant ; there can be no question,
therefore, that the proper reading is arussratia or aruhsrana; yet the abbreviated
equivalent (see my Skt. Gram. § 232 a) arusrdna is found in nearly all the mss.,
both here and in vs. 5, and SPP. adopts it in his text. The comm. gives two discord-
ant explanations of the word : vranasya pdkasthdnam vranatnukham L* place where
it gets ripe or comes to a head '?J, and aruh srayati pakvam bhavaty anena. At the
end, the comm. has a^l^amat (as our text in 4 d).
4. The ants {upajtkd) bring up the remedy from out the ocean ; that
is the remedy of flux ; that has quieted (f^w) the disease.
The comm. explains upajikds as valmfkanispddikd vamryah ; Ppp. has instead
upaclkds; elsewhere is found upadikd (see Bloomfield in A J P. vii. 482 ff., where the
word is ably discussed) ; Lcf. also Pali upacikd\. The Ppp. form, upaclkd^ indicates
a possible etymology, from upa + ci ; Ppp. says in book vi. : yasyd bhttmyd upacfkd
(ms. -kdd) gr/iam krftvaid**tmane: tasyds te vi^vadhdyaso visadtlsanam ud bhare.
The earth which ants make their high nests of, and which contains their moisture, has
always been used as having remedial properties. The "ocean" here (cf. udaka in vi.
100. 2), if not merely a big name for the reservoir of water beneath the surface, is a
tank or pool. Ppp. has an independent second half-verse : aruspdnam asy dtharvano
rogasthdnam asy dfharvattam.
5. This is a great wound-healer, brought up from out the earth; that
is the remedy of the flux ; that has made the disease disappear.
Ppp. reads aruspdnam (or -syd-) in a, and in h prthivyd *bhy.
6. Weal be to us the waters, propitious the herbs ; let Indra*s thun-
derbolt smite away the demoniacs {raksds) ; far away let the discharged
arrows of the demoniacs fly.
In a all the mss. read apds, which SPP. rightly retains in his text ; other examples
of the use of this accusative form as nominative occur in the text (see the Index Verbo-
rum) ; the comm. has <f/<ij, as our edition by emendation. We may safely regard this
unmetrical " verse ** as a later addition to the hymn ; so far as regards the number of
syllables (12 : 12 -f 14 = 38), it is correctly described by the Anukr., as the name mahd-
brhatl is elsewhere used in the latter, but apparently by no other similar treatise.
il 4- BOOK I!. THE A THARVA-VI.DA-SAMIIITA. 42
4. Against yarloos eyils: with a JaiEgidi amulet.
Fouml al»o (cxt rpt vn 6 ami pnrU of 1 ami 2) in PAipp. ii. Arrompantrt in Kiu^.
(42 23) tlif l>imlifi|* on of an amulet ** an clciicril>cd in the text ** (i/i W4tmir0kijm),
ai^ain^t vaiious rviln (the romm. tavs, "for thwarting witchcraft, for |>rotecting one'i
telf, for putting; down hindrance").
TranMatcd : WcIht. xiii. 140 ; («rifrith, i. 45; HloomfifW, 37. 2R0; in part aliio by
(«rohni.inn, /////. Stmi. ijc. 41 7 418. — As to the jaUj^itia^ »ee Zimmer, p. 65 ; alio \Vrl>rr
and («rohmann, II. cr.
1. In order to Icnjjth of life, to great joy, wc, taking no harm, all the
time cajKiblc (daks)^ bear \}\^ jaftii^tdii, the i7/>{M«<////fS|K)iling amulet.
Ppp. has I a, b with 2 c, d as its fust verse; very |x>ssibly the two half-verves
between have fallen out in the ms ; it has in b rsyamhko fJtsamdmJ (for rmMs-) /•. 1 he
comm. has raksttMt}n,ls alv) ; it is the l>etter reading. The comm. gives no further
identification of jafi^iJa than that it is ** a kind of tree ** (adding vJr4nasjram ^rssiJ-
dkak^ * familiarly known at Henares*!); he defines vtjJtamdAa in the same manner as
above, to i. 16. 3.
2. From jambhd^ from vi(ard, from vtstnnd/ia, from scorching {abki-
ficana), let the jafij^tdd, the amulet of thousandfold valiance (-x^iryd),
protect us about on every side.
Jambhd is perhaps 'convulsion/ or lockjaw; at Ppp. xi. 2 10 it is mentioned with
hmnngraha : l>elow, at viii. 1. 16. it is called samhanu * jaw-closing * ; the comm. gives
two discordant and worthlessly indefinite explanations. I'i^ard should signify some-
thing crushing or tearing to pieces; Ppp. xi. 2. 3 names it with x*ijrmbha ; the comm.
says {arlfax»i{art\nAt. Ppp. has of this verse (see under vs. t) only the second half,
and combines m*tnis uthasfavtryas fari Mas fi-.
3. This one overpowers the viskandha ; this drives off the devourcrs ;
let this jafi/i'iddt possessing all remedies, protect us from distress.
The first half verse we had al)ove as i. 16. 3 a. b, with I'tfJm for mydm. Ppp. begins
this time also with iiiam^ has sAtt {mtffff) for sakate^ and for b reads aymm nUks0 '/«
hitdkatt; it gives viskandkam with our text.
4. With the amulet given by the go<ls, the kindly jaftgidd, we over-
power in the struggle (vythdtnd) the visknndha [and] all demons.
Ppp. reatis f*>r d iMiJmi/ sAmakf. The comm. explains xyAydmf first !>y samia-
rane^ and then !)y samiituiuttprndf^t.
5. Let lH)th the hemp an<l Xhcjahi^hfd defend me from the viskamdha:
the one brought from the forest, the other from the juices {rdsa) of
plotighing.
Ihat IS. from cultivated ground. I he ** hemp ** is doubtless, as the comm. defines
it, that of the string by which the amulet is )M>und on. Ppp. has at the beginning kkm-
muf Of h'd jtt , and Its second half- verse is corrupted into aranydd abky Abkrtms krsyM
*«/«» fusrbkyak.
43 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK II. -ii. 5
6. Witchcraft-spoiling is this amulet, likewise niggard-spoiling ; like-
wise shall the powerful jau^zdd prolong our life-times.
The absence of this verse in Ppp. indicates that the hymn originally consisted of
five verses, in accordance with the norm of the book. The verse is very nearly xix.
34.4. Emendation to ardtidiisanas (as in xix.) in b would rectify the meter; the
Anukr. takes no notice of its irregularity. At the end, two of our mss. (E.I.) and
three of SPP*s read tdrsat. LFor his sd/iasvdn, see note to i. 19. 4. J
5. Praise and prayer to Indra.
\^B/irgH Athamaiia. — saptarcam. diudram. trdistubham: 1^2. uparistdd brhati (i. tiicrt ;
2. Z'i'rdj); J. virdtpathydbr/iaii ; 4.jagatl pur<rvirdj.'\
Verses i, 3, and 4 are found in Paipp. ii., and 5-7 elsewhere in its text (xiii.).
Verses 1-3 occur also in SV. (ii. 302-4) and ^^^> (ix. 5.2); and the first four verses
form part of a longer hymn in AQS. (vi. 3. i). KB. (xvii. i) quotes by way of pratlka
vs. I a, b (in their SV. and ^^"^^ form), and speaks of the peculiar structure of the
verses, as composed of twenty-five syllables, with nine syllables interpolated (three at
the end of each of the first three five-syllabled padas) : cf. Roth, Ueb, d, A V., 1856,
p. II ff., and Weber, notes to his translation. At TB. ii. 4. 3»o may be found RV. x. •
96. I treated in a somewhat similar way (four syllables prefixed to each y^^^^/Z-pada) ; HClV^t /^^
the first five verses of RV. x. 77 itself are another example; |_yet others are AV. vii. C^lj^^/>/ /H^t ^
14 (1 5). I, 2 ; V. 6. 4 a, c ; RV. i. 70. 1 1 as it appears at A^S. vi. 3. i ; cf. further RV.
X. 21, 24, 25 J. |_I suspect that these interpolations were used as antiphonal responses. J
The hymn is used once in Kauq. (59. 5), among the kdmya rites, or those intended
to secure the attainment of various desires; it is addressed to Indra, by one desiring
strength (baiakdma). In Vait. (16. 11), it (not vs. i only, according to the comni.)
accompanies an oblation to Soma in the agttistotna sacrifice, and again (25. 14) a soda-
^igra/ia. And the comm. quotes it from Naks. Kalpa 17 and 18, in a fna/td^dnti to
Indra. None of these uses has about it anything special or characteristic.
Translated: Weber, xiii. 143; Griffith, i.46. — Verses 5-7 discussed, Lanman*s
Reader^ p. 360-1.
I. O India, enjoy thou — drive on ; — come, O hero — with thy two
bays ; — drink of the pressed [soma] — intoxicated here — loving the
sweet [draught], fair one, unto intoxication.
Ppp. omits the three interpolations (as Weber reports certain Sutra-works to assert
of the Atharvan texts in general), and reads iudra jusasva ydhi fiira pibd stita^ ^a
madho^ cakdua cdrum vtadathah. The second interpolation in A^S. is hail iha^
apparently to be read as harl ^ha^ for which then SV. and (^(^S. give the senseless
hdriha. The third, in all the three other texts, is tnatir nd (*like a wise one'?) ; the
translation above implies the heroic (or desperate) emendation of mai^r ihd to matt A
ihd (to be read tnattd */id) ; Weber conjectures vtdder ha. AQS. and ^'(^^S. have the
older madhvas for inadhos. The comm. has no notion of the peculiar structure of
these verses : as, indeed, he has no phraseology in his vocabulary to suit such a case ;
he explains mates first as inananfyasya^ then as medhdvinas ; and cakdnas as either
tarpayan or stuyamdnas. The Anukr. implies that the second half-verse scans as
8 + 1 1 syllables, instead of 9 -f i o.
fi. 5- BOOK II. THE ATIIARVA-VEDA-SAMHITA. 44
2. O Incira, [thy] belly — like one to be praised — fill thou with the
sweet [(lraii(;hi] — like the heavens — with this soma — like the sky
{suit) — ; unto thee have gone the wellvoiccd intoxications.
1 he omission of this verse in l*pp. is perhaps only an accidental one, due to the
tcril>e. The first interpolation in the other texts is nHiyaw nti ; to get a lense, Weber
botflly ememls to n*Uyam ua * like [the hold] of a vessel*; the comm. explaini by
ntlttttttu {ttnen*\ *\itttt1ti^aya ukiah /), t.ikin^ no heed of the accent — which, however,
requires to l)c changed to ntfiytis, whichever sense l>e given it ; perhaps nadj^ md * like
streams* would l>e most acceptable. In the third inter|>olation« SV. combines rf^r hJ
and A(,"S. WS. ji'J/ »*! ; and the mss. vary between the two; our edition reads the
former, with the majority of our m.ss. ; SVV. has the latter, with the majority of his; one
or t\\o of ours corrupt to svt\r ntd *pa. The three other texts have at the end astkms.
The comin. takes tf/iuh .is i;cn , supplying a mr ft nit to govern it ; and he takes svdr as
of locative value. The Anukr. scans the verse as 84 8:8+ 10 = 34 syllables.
3. Indra, a swiftly-overcoming friend, who slew Vritra — like moving
[streams] — , [who] split Vala — like Hhrgu — , who overpowered his foes
in the intoxication of soma.
The translation follows closely our text, though this, as the other versions show, ts
badly corrupted in a, b, even to the partial effacement of the first interpolation. The
others read accordantly : intiras /NnUiin Mt/rJ mi jag/iina vrtnint ydttr md ; owi ymtir
may possibly l>e meant (or yd ft h 'as he did the Yatis.* The comm. explains /«/// first
as dstifj-itA prajdh^ then as parii'tiljakdh. Ppp. agrees with the other texts, only
omitting the interpolations: tHtitits fttrAuhi jat^hAna vrfram; it then omits the third
pAda, and goes on thus: sasA/id (ttfrtift mamu^ ca : vajrlr matU somasym. AU the
AV. mss. read sasnhf^ unaccented, and .SIT. admits this into his text; our cditkm
makes the necessary emendation to stisa/i/\\v\ some copies (and so the /if«^j I'ft^
rmm) ; in others the accent-mark has slipped to the right J ; the other texts rectify the meter
by reading sasAk/ (our C). agrees with them as regards the <f ). Words of verses 2 and
3 are quoted in the PrAt. comment, but not in a way to cast any light upon the
readings. |_SPP., with most of his authorities and our Op., reads faldm.^ The metrical
definition of the Anukr. is of course senseless; it apparently implies the divtsioo
9-f7:8+ 10:= 34 syllables.
4. Let the pressed [somas] enter thee, O Indra ; fill thy (two) paunches ;
help, O mighty one ! for our prayer (tihi) come to us ; hear [my] call,
enjoy my songs; hither, O Indra, with self-harnessed [steeds] ; revel
here unto great joy.
This veise is really, as AC^^S. plainly shows, made up of two like the preceding three«
of five five syllabled piidas each, but without interpolations. The first hall-verse is
vs. 5 in A(,'S., where it reads thus: d fvtl vt^anfn Jtavir fta sufdsa indrtt txmsfJI mm:
prnmiXHt luksl som0 mJ *r*i*ihifMi ^Ara dhtyd kiydnak. Of the two versions of the last
pSda, that of A^S. is doubtless the original, though ours (the pmda has dhiyi i iki i
mak) is ingenious enough to give a fair sense ; the reading dkiyihi is authenticated by the
PrAt comment, which quotes it more than once (to iii. 38 ; iv. 113-115). The
lation implies the restoration of ax'uUhi^ as the only true reading (^namely, an
imperati\e from av — see Skf urjw.' § 908 J ; the mss. all read vidAdA/, which SPP't
45 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK II. -ii. 6
edition as well as ours properly emends to viddhL ^My copy of the printed text reads
viffhdhi; but Whitney's Index Verborum and his Roots^ Verb-forms, etc. have viddhi,
under vis.\ The comm. reads vrddhi, explaining it by vardhaya! The second half-
verse is rather more altered in its AV. version ; in A(^S. (as vs. 4), with the interpo-
lations, it runs thus : qrudhl havatii na indro na giro jusasva vajrl na : indra sayttg-
bhir didyun na maisvd tnaddya make randya. Ppp. has only this half-verse (without
the interpolations), reading thus : (ru/i hava me kiro jusasya indrasya gubhir maisa
maddya make raiidya. The Anukr. would doubtless have us divide 10 + 13 : 10 + 13
= 46 syllables. LAs to vidhdhi, see notes to Prat. i. 94. Accent of mdtsva. Gram,
§628.J
We may conjecture that the hymn originally ended here, as one of five verses ; the
appended three verses that follow are of a wholly other character. A^S. adds one
more verse, which is RV. i. 70. 11, with similar interpolations after each of its four
five-syllabled padas.
5. Now will I proclaim the heroisms of Indra, which first he of the
thunderbolt {vajrin) did ; he slew the dragon {dhi) ; he penetrated to
the waters; he split [forthj the bellies {vaksdnd) of the mountains.
Verses 5-7 are RV. i. 32. 1-3; and found also in TB. (ii. 5.4'*); vss. 5 and 6
further in MS. iv. 14. 13, and vs. 5 in SV. (i. 613) : in these texts without any variant
from the RV. reading ; they all have in 5 a prd^ and put vfryhni before it. Ppp. also
offers no variants from our text. SPP. reads fira in a, with all the mss. Lexcept our O.J,
and our text should have done the same. The comm. renders dntt in c by tadanan-
tar am, and tatarda by jihiiisa / also vaksdnds in d by nadyas,
6. He slew the dragon that had resorted (pV) to the mountain ; Tvash-
tar fashioned for him the whizzing (.^) thunderbolt ; like lowing kine,
flowing (syand), at once the waters went down to the ocean.
The text is precisely the same as in the other passages. The comm. explains svaryA
as susthu preranlya (from su + root f ), and tataksa as tlksnam cakdra /
7. Acting like a bull, he chose the soma ; he drank of the pressed
[draught] in the trikadrukas ; the bounteous one {viaghdvan) took his
missile thunderbolt ; he slew that first-born of dragons.
RV. (and TB.) combines in a -no 'vrnfia^ and some of the mss. (including our O.)
do the same. The comm. understands the trikadrukas as the three abhiplava days.
[For d, rather, * smote him, the first-born of dragons.' The difference is, to be sure,
only a rhetorical one. J
In the first anuifdka, ending here, are included 5 hymns, of 29 verses; the old
Anukr. says : pailcarcddye (i.e. * in the first division of the 5-versc book ') viii^atch syur
navo **rd/ivam,
6. Praise and prayer to Agni.
[(dunaka {sam/atkdmak). — dgneyam. trdistubham : 4. ^-p. drsi pajikti ;
J. virdtprastdrapankii.'\
Found in Paipp. iii.; also in VS. (xxvii. i, 2, 3, 5, 6), TS. (iv. i. 7), and MS.(ii. 12. 5).
Used by Kaug., with vii. 82, in a kdmya rite for success {sampad, 59. 1 5) ; and also, in
ii. 6- HOOK II. THE AIHARVA-VKDA-SAMIIITA. 46
the rh.iptcr of |)ortrnt^, .nlonr, in one ai^ainM bad ycam (lawtlt). VAit has tt in the
agnuavittttt (crrmony (2H. 4), at the l>r|^nnin^, and a little later (3A. 10) vt. 3 alone, on
dr|M»5itiiis the lump of earth on a lotii^-leaf. The coinm. quotes it from the Nak«. K.
(17 ami |H), in a fntthA^Antt cilled tlt^iryt ; and, from Pari^iMa 7. 3, vs. $ (with vii. 3^).
in a nightly rite. [^Ohscrve (nf>te to vs. 3) that I'pp. agrees with the Y a jut texts and
Kiku<; in As%4HiatinK our vii. 82 with this hymn. J
IransUtcd: Welier, xiii. 146 ; (•riflfith, i. 48.
1. Let the summers (j/iwJ), O Agni» the seasons increase Ihcc, the
years, the srers, what things arc true; shine thou with the heavenly
bright space (tvi'ti9ui)\ illuminate (t^b/u}) all the four directions.
TS. rr.-ifU at the end prthtvyis (for aitaspas). Tpp- has for h tdtrnvattara rtayi*
yA HH sttk/iy*}, .iml in c f;ives i/inwtirtitt for i/ivv/n^t. The comm. glosses samds liy
sawi'tt/Siiftit. I^If the translation implies that rtuattnta is an instr. of accompaniment,
it is Irss .ip|>osite than Nfr. Whitney*s earlier version, * shine together with heavenly
brightness* — which I take to l>e Agni's own (cf. KV. x. 4. 2). His brightness is nil
by day-time. The ••together" were l)elter left out. J
2. Itoth do thou t>ecome kindled, Agni, and do thou increase this
man, and arise unto great good fortune ; let not thine attendants (ufa-
sattdf) be harmed, U Agni ; be thy worshipers (brahmdn) glorious, not
others.
The other texts are in accordance in reading htuihaya (for x'anikaya) in a, and Ppp.
nearly agrees with them, having /f<i/i hodhayt *Ham; for c the others give mi <s risaJ
3. Thee. C) Agni, do these Ikahmans choose ; be propitious to us, O
Agni, in the [f^acrificial] enclosure (? j^wtv/r#r/i<i) ; rival-slayer, Agni«
conqueror of ho.stile plotters, he thou ; watch unremitting over thine own
household.
NfS. has the same text; the two others give a slightly different c: saf^ainaki m^
ahhimAtijii nt. Tpp- has for b f/;v» ^n/ pfdbhrm0 unithi^ and for d tve k%a iihiiky
apuiyuJiitn: it then inserts, l>cfore vs. 4, our vii. 82. 3 ; and it is very noteworthy that
the tliree Yajus texts do the same. I'he comm. renders samvafani bkat*m by viJjrsmA-
fiasyil *// pntw*}*/iity*i sitththAifttnf vttthtsvtt * hide any oversight of ours.* The
Anukr. pa%%rA uithout notice the t^oyif^M// pAd as in the verse.
4. Take hold of thine own dominion (Isa/ni), Agni; with [thy] friend,
Agni, strive (jvr/) in friendly wise; [as one] of midmost station among
(his) fellows (Sit/tt/ti), [as one] to be severally invoked of kings, Agni,
shine thou here.
\'S. IS. rrad i:,Utts for it/mr in a, anfl all the three parallel texts have mitra^kir€
(for •<///./) in t), while Ppp. gives mttfaMteyttw^ and the comm. -HhAt, In c VS. TS.
fill out tiie meter l»y addini; tiihi after -sthA ; MS. has instead sth^yAya^ I*IV« ^ftktks
«r«fi|«). rpp. -dv) has ;<r««rr;«r at end of b. The three other texts accent vikavyJki in 4.
The comm. joins fAjfktkm to what precedes, and sagely points out that UrAhmam art
47 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK II. -ii. 7
Agni's * fellows * because, like him, born from the mouth of Brahman, and hence that
sajdia here means Brahmans. The metrical definition of the verse (ii + ii:8+ii
= 41) is wholly artificial and bad.
5. Over enviers, over delinquents, over the thoughtless, over haters, —
verily all difficult things, O Agni, do thou cross ; then mayest thou give
us wealth accompanied with heroes.
The translation implies emendation of the impossible nihds to niddsj the comm.
shows his usual perverse ingenuity by giving two different etymologies of nihasy from
ni + han and from ni + hd; neither of them is worse than the other. The three
parallel texts all have nfhas, Ppp. nuhas. Both editions read sfdhasy but it is only a
common error of the mss., putting r for ri\ nearly half of SPP's mss. (though none of
ours) have the true reading sridhaSy which is that also of VS. and TS. (MS. sfdhas).
In c, all the fiada-mss. present the absurd reading vt^vdh; and nearly all the mss.
leave tara unaccented, in spite of hty and both printed texts leave it so, although three
of SPP's mss. have correctly iAra^ as also MS.; VS. and TS. give sdhasva for tara
tvatfty and Ppp. has cara tvam. For a, b, Ppp. has ati nuho 'ti ninrtlr aty ariitfr
ati dvisah; for b, VS. TS. *ty dcittim dty drdtim agne^ and MS. dty dcittim dti nirrtim
adyd. The comm. explains sridhas by deha^osakdn rogdn. In the metrical definition
of the verse, firastdra- must be a bad reading for dsidra-,
7. Against curses and cursers: with a plant.
[Atharvaft. — bhdisajydyttrvanaspatidclivatyam. dnustitbham : r. bhurij ; ^.virdii-
uparistndbrhaiJ. ]
Not found in Paipp. Used with other hymns (ii. 25 ; vi. 85, etc.) in a healing rite
• (Kaug. 26.33-35) ^o** various evils, and accompanying especially (ib. 35) the binding
on of an amulet. And the comm. reports the hymn as employed by Naks. Kalpa (17, 19)
in a mahdi^dnti called bhdrgavl.
Translated: Weber, xiii. 148; Ludwig, p. 508; Grill, 24,81 ; Griffith, i. 49; Bloom-
field, 91, 2S5.
1. Hated by mischief, god-born, the curse-efFacing plant hath washed
away from me all curses, as waters do filth.
A p. (vi. 20. 2) has a verse much like this : atharvyustd devajntd vfdu ^apathajam-
hhatifh : dpo malam iva fird *nijann astnat su (^apathdh adhu The comm. explains
-yopanl in c Ldiscussed by Bloom field, A J P. xii.42ij as vimohanl nivdrayitrl. The
comm. states dftrvd (^panicum dactylon) to be the plant intended, and the Anukr. also
says durvdm astdnt. In our edition read in d mdchapd- (an accent-sign slipped out of
place). The Anukr. refuses this time to sanction the not infrequent contraction mdlam
*va in c.
2. Both the curse that is a rival's, and the curse that is a sister's, what
a priest {} brahvidn) from fury may curse — all that [be] underneath
our feet.
Sdpatnd perhaps here * of a fellow wife,' ^nd jdmyas perhaps * of a near female rela-
tive ' ; the comm. explains yj///i as "sister, but connoting one's fellows (sa/tajd/a)."
ii. 7- BOOK II. THE ATHARVA-VEDA-SAMHITA. 48
3. From the sky [is] the root stretched down, from ofF the earth
stretched up; with this, thousand-jointed (kdnda), do thou protect us
about on all sides.
Compare xix. 32. 3, where tiarbhagx^ta^ is the pUnt timtlarly described mud used.
4. Protect me about, my progeny, [and] what riches are ours ; let not
the niggard get the belter (tr) of us; let not hostile plotters get the better
of us.
Our text reads at the beginning ^Irt *mim^ with the majority of our mss. (only P.p.m.
W.K.Kp. are noted as not doing so) ; but pdri mdm, which SFP. gives, and which all
his autliorities, as reported by him, sup(>ort, is doubtless better, and the translation
follows it. Two of our mss. (U.K.), with one of SPP's, give anllir tta m- in c The
irregular meter of the verse (8 + 8 : 7 + 10 = 33) is very ill described by the Anulcr.
I^The avasilna of c is put after tiirtt ; but the accent of Idristis marlis that as the initial
of d. KV. ix. 114. 4 suggests that our c is in disorder. J
5. Let the curse go to the curser ; our [|>art] is along with him that is
friendly (su/ttirj) ; of the eye-conjurer {mdntra), the unfriendly, we crush
in the ribs {frs(i).
Nearly all our mss. (except P.M.K.), and part of SPT's, read in b SMkii ; many
also have in d f^rsfhis^ l)ut the distinction of st and sth is not clearly made in any of
the mss. The comm. takes ittlsHs and manlrasya in c as two independent words.
LSee (iriflith's note, and mine to xix, 45. 2. J
8. Against the disease ksetriyi: with a plant.
4. t'trdj ; J. nnrtf^thyA/^aHktt,\
Verse 1 occurs in PAipp. i. It is reckoned (Kftu^. 26. 1, note) to the iakmanS^nHa
gftnttf Afid is used in a healing ceremony (against kHli}j;atakMSfkakjaya^aksnjrdJir0gJlj,
comm.), accompanying various practices u|)on the diseased person, which aie evidently
rather adapted to the words of the text than represented by them (26.41-27.4), and,
according to the comm., are rather alternative than to be ))erformed successively.
Translated: Weber, xiii. 149; Ludwig, p. 513; Grinfilh, i. 50 ; Bloomfiekl, 13,386.
1. Arisen arc the (two) blessed stars called the Unfasteners {vurt) ; let
them unfasten {rifn/tc) of the ksctriyd the lowest, the highest fetter.
The disease Jtsr/riyi (lit*l> , • c>f the field *) is treated elsewhere, especially in iiL 7
(mentioned also in ii. 10 ; 14. 5 ; iv. 18. 7). The comm. defines it here as kseln farm-
ksetre putrttfH\MtrAdi{arfre likitsyah (quoting for this interpretation rAn. v. 2. 92)
ksti\tittisthAt/itii*uttit}sititpitrtni}tf i}tft\ttrlp i)- tiyavfbhyit At^ntitk ksayakHsfhikpasm^rA-
iiitoi^ith — .ipp.irently an infectious disorder, of various forms, ap|)caring in a whole
family, or fKrrhaps endemic. The name vurtAu • the two unfasteners * is given later to
the two stars in the sting of the Scorpion (X and » Scorpionis: %c^ St^rya-SidUkSmia^
note to viii. o>. and there seems no good reason to doubt that they are the ones here
intended ; the selection of tuo so inconspicuous is not any more strange than the appeal
to st.irs at all; the comm. identifies tliem with Mula, which is the astertsm composed
of the Scorpion's tail. The verse is nearly identical with iii. 7. 4, and its first half Is vt.
49 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK II. -ii. 8
121. 3 a, b. Ppp. has for c, d suksetriyasya muhcatim samgranthya hrdayasya ca,
L" Their [the two stars'] healing virtue would doubtless be connected with the meteoro-
logical conditions of the time at which their heliacal rising takes place." — Surya-
siddhdnta^ I.e., p. 337- J
2. Let this night fade away {apa-vas); let the bewitchers (f., abhikft-
van) fade away ; let the ksetriyd-^^2.QAiig (-fid(ana) plant fade the ksetriyd
away.
The night at time of dawn is meant, says the comm. (doubUess correctly). He
gives two renderings of abhikrtvarls : one, from root kr^ abhito roga^dniith kut-vdnah^
the other from kri * cut,' kartana^Udh piqdcyah. According to Kaug. the hymn accom-
panies a dousing with prepared water outside the house (J bahis) ; with this verse it is
to be done at the end of the night. •
3. With the straw of the brown, whitish-jointed barley for thee, with
the sesame-stalk {} -pif\ji) of sesame, let the ksetriyd-cRdicing etc. etc.
The comm. understands arjuna- in a as a tree so named: "with a splinter of if ;
tilapifijSis to him tilasahitaviahjarl. With this verse " what is mentioned in the text"
is directed by Kau^. (26. 43) to be bound on, and also (so the comm. understands the
connection) a clod of earth and stuff from an ant-hill etc.
4. Homage to thy ploughs (Idhgald)^ homage to thy poles-and-yokes :
let the ksetriyd'^ii^zxng etc. etc.
Comm. makes Idngala = vrsabhayuktaslra : " homage to the specified parts of the
plough or to the divinities of them." With this verse, he says, the sick person is put
underneath an ox-harnessed plough for his dousing (Kau^. ** with his head under a
plough-yoke "). Some allusion to the name of the disease as coming from ** field " is
perhaps intended. The Anukr. strangely forbids the resolution -bhi-as in a and b.
5. Homage to them of constantly falling eyes, homage to them of the
same region ( ? samdcqyd)^ homage to the lord of the field : let the ksctriyd-
effacing etc. etc.
With this verse, according to Kaug. (27. 2-4) the patient is put in an empty house
{^iinya^dld)^ and further in an old hole {jaratkhdtd) that has housegrass {^dldtrnd) in
it, and is there doused and mouth-rinsed. In accordance with this, the comm. declares
sanisrasdksas to signify " empty houses," as having their round windows (gavdksa)
and other openings in a state of dilapidation. He reads in b samde^ebhyas^ making it
mean " old holes " i^jaradgartd)^ because samdiqyante tyajyante tadgatamrddddnena
— which is hardly intelligible ; and both words are of obscure meaning. In a charm
against all sorts of hurtful beings, Ppp. (vi.3.4) reads as follows: abhihastath sari-
srpam bhrastdksam virdvangulim^ and ddsagranihyam sdnisrasam ud ranye dait^d-
rusyath tdm. In this verse again, -bhyas in b is read as one syllable by the Anukr.
LSPP. divides the verse after samde^y^bhyah with most of his mss. ; but three of them
make avasdna after pdtaye. Comm. and all five translators take sani- as a p>ossessive
compound {sanisrasd -f aksdti) : accent, Gram.^ § 1298. b, end. J
ii. 9- BOOK 11. THE ATHARVA-VEDA-SAMHITA. 50
9. Against possession by demons: with an amulet.
Found in I'iktpp. ii. (in the verse order I, 5, 4, 2, 3). Reckoned, like the neit pre-
ceding and the nrxt following; hymn, to the /aJtmand^ana gafta (K4u^. 26.1, note),
and made (27. 5,6) to accompany the binding on of an amulet com|K>ief1 of splinters
(from ten different trees: the comm.), being muttered by ten friends who lay hands on
the patient.
Translated : \Ve)>er, xiii. 153; Ludwig, p. 506 ; Grill, 8, 82 ; Griffith, 1. 51 ; Illoofn-
field, 34, 290. — Cf. Bergaigne- Henry, Mattuil, p. 137.
1. O thou of ten trees, relca.sc this man from the demon, from the
seizure (grd/ti) that hath scizeil him in the joints ; then, O forest tree, eon-
duct him up to the world of the livinfj.
The first half-verse is quite different in Tpp. : tfa^avrkso jam cf 'mam akinsr^ grM-
A/iff fa. The comm. takes pafvan in b as either the /oints of the body or those of
the month, new and full moon. 1 he Anukr. scans the verse as to -f 12 : 8 -f 8 ts 38,
making the first pAdadivision after ratuttas (and the /tf/Zn-mss. so mark it); but it is
rather a regular f^afikti, with the easy resolution muflca imam in a.
2. This man hath come, hath arisen, hath gone unto the troop (vr^/tt)
of the livinj; ; he hath become of sons the father and of men (nr) the
most fortunate.
rpp. has in c abhttftt (for ith/itiJ m)^ and in d MfMtif/t. |_rronounre <f aj^dt/.j
3. lie hath attained (nti/tij^ti) attainments; he hath attained {fldhi-
gaw) the strongholds (ftini) of the living; for a hundred healers arc his,
also a thousand plants.
The * attainments * (at/hfti ), according to the comm^ are the Ve<las aiMl objects
formerly learne<l {aMlia), and now, by restored health, recovere<l to memory. I*pp.
reads instead aiihltttm in •, an<l put A *^*lt in b ; and its c, 4 are {ttiam // *ijra virta^Aa
sakasram Mia bhesajah, Kmendation to bhfsajA in our c would improve both sense and
meter. The comm. here, as in sundry otiirr places, derives x^lrttJk from X'i + rmdk^ 00
the ground that they virHHtikanti vinA{ayanti po^An,
y^^^* 4. The go<ls have found thy gathering (} cUi), the priests {bmhmdm)
)H^^' ^^ '^^^anTTthe plants; all the gmis have found thy gathering upon the earth.
-^ ^7 In a, our Up. has rittm, and Op. <UAm (l>oth tUim in c) ; Tpp. reads lAlam in both
/f / A and c ; either word is elsewhere unknown. 1 he comm. derives €lti either from the
^1
. ^ false root ilv * take, cover,' or from < // • ol>serve.* and falnicates his alternative explaiia-
I ^^ t tions accordingly. If it comes from n\ there is hardly another example of a like forma-
^"^ tion. rpp. has for a (J/am tt <irt*Jt 'x'ltfam ; and, in c, d, tdiam Ubkjra /» m4m mvidsm
5. Whoso made, he shall unmake; he verily is best of healers; he
himself, clean, shall make for thee remedies, with the healer.
The application of the pronouns here is more or less questionable. Ppp. reads sm
51 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK II. -ii. lO
for sa in a, and has a more intelligible second half-verse : sa eva lubhyam bhcsajam
cakdra bhisajdti ca ; our bhisdjd in d is probably to be emended to -jdm \j the clean one
of the healers * ?J. The comm. understands sa at the beginning either as " the great
sage Atharvan " or as the creator of the universe ; and niskarat as grahavikdrasya
^amanam or niskrtim karotu, Weber renders the latter " shall put it to rights."
10. For release from evils, and for welfare.
[Bhrgvafijs^iras. — astarcam, nirrtidydvdprthivyddindnddevatyam. r. iristubh ; 2. 7P'(tsti;
3~S* 7» ^' 7'P' d^Z^^ i ^' 7'P' <»(y«//' {fvd 'ham tvdm iti dvdv dusnihdu pdddu).]
Found in Paipp. ii. (with vs. 8 preceding 6 and 7, and the refrain added only to vs. 8).
The hymn occurs further in TB. (ii. 5.6 '*), and parts of it in HGS. (ii. 3. 10; 4. i).
LAnd its original structure is doubtless clearly reflected by the MP. at ii. 12.6,7,8,9,
10. Cf. note to our verse 2. J It is, like the two next preceding, reckoned (Kau^. 26. i,
note) to the takmand^ana gana^ and it is employed (27. 7) in a healing ceremony, per-
formed at a cross-roads, while chips of kdmpila are bound on the joints of the patient,
and they or he are wetted with bunches of grass. According to the comm., the rite is
intended against kseiriya simply.
Translated : Weber, xiii. 156 ; Ludwig, p. 513 ; Griffith, i. 52 ; Bloomfield, 14, 292.
1. From ksetriydf from perdition, from imprecation of sisters {Jdmi')y
from hatred (dnih) do I release thee, from Varuna's fetter; free from
guilt {'dgas) I make thee by [my] incantation ; be heaven-and-earth both
propitious to thee.
TB. HGS. have for a only ksetriydi tvd nintydi ivdy in c brdhtnane and karomi^
and in d imi instead of stdm, Ppp. has at the end -thivl *ha bhiitdm,
2, Weal to thee be Agni, together with the waters ; weal [be]
Soma, together with the herbs : so from ksetriydi from perdition,
etc. etc.
The repetition (with €vd *ham prefixed) of the whole first verse as refrain for the
following verses is not made by TB. and HGS. except after our vs. 8, and there only to
pa^dt; and in Ppp. it forms (complete) a part only of the same verse 8 (though this
stands before our vs. 6). Its omission from vss. 2-7, and their combination into three
whole 4-pada verses [^and the omission of padas e and f from vs. 8J, would reduce the
hymn to the norm of the second book, and is recommended not only by that circum-
stance, but by the Lwording in vss. 2-3, the construction in vss. 4-5, the concurrent
testimony of TB. and MP., and also of HGS. so far as it goes, and by the J plain
requirements of the sense also. LCf. the analogous state of things in iii. 31 and the
note to iii. 31. i i.J For a, b TB. HGS. substitute ^dm te agnih sahi ^dbhir astu ^dm
dyavdprihivi sahdu ^sadhlbhih ; and Ppp. differs from them by having dhfbhis instead
of adb/iis^ and gdvas for dy . , . vl (also saho ^sa-). The comm. reads tvd for tvdm
in vss. 2-7 at the beginning of the refrain. This refrain is scanned by the Anukr. as
7 + 7 + 11:11 4- II =47; and the addition in vs. 2 of 9 + 8 makes 64 syllables, a true
(tsfi; but the other verses it is not possible to make agree precisely, in an)' natural way,
with the metrical definitions given ; 3-7 are of 69 syllables, 8 of 7 1 . LBy beginning padas
a and b with ^dfh tubhyam^ and pronouncing both sa/td's with hiatus, and combining
2 ab with 3 ab, we get a perfectly regular tris/ub/i.]
ii. lO- nooK II. THE ATHARVA-Vi:i)A-SAMHITA. 52
3. Weal to thcc may the wind In the atmosphere bestow (dhd) vig:or ;
weal to thee be the four directions : so from ksctriyd, etc. etc.
TH. H(iS. liAvc for a {*\m ttfitAnkuim sahA vitfua // ; Ppp. <liffcrii by rcAflinj;
sakitvt^tttm tts/M It : the t%vo form<*r, in b, put hhttiutniu List. The comm. has in a |^ff)r
xuiyo ii/u}t\X\\c l>ettrr rcidinj;; vttytuilttls, but he makes it mean ** sustainer of birds**?
1^* Weal tf» thcr [l>r] the wind in the atmosphere, the vis»or-l)rstower.*J
4. These four heavenly (dcvd) directions, having the wind as lord,
upon which the sun looks out — so from kutriyd^ etc. etc.
TH. H<iS. (4. I) have for « »#f liMvf^ dUaxrah frmif^ak; Ppp- «l»o omitt itnit,
and combines iirvls pta., coml)inin;;; the pAda immediately with our 3 b. HGS. makes
one verse uf our 4 a, b and $ a, b. and puts it in 4, alter all the rest
5. Within them I set thcc in old a;;c ; let the j'rf/'/wtf, let perdition
go forth far away : so from ksttriya^ etc. etc.
I*pp. hns at the Ivef^innini; tt^%v f \i*tth ptrasa J/ TB. IIC#S. ^ive idiJtm ix*4 jmrdsa
4 ; l>oth the latter read in b nhfimt.
6. Thou hast been released from ydlsm,!, from diflficulty (tiitritti), from
reproach (/i;vi*/iv/) ; from the feller of halted and from seizure hast thou
been released : so from Isiiriyd, etc. etc.
Ppp. has IxUh times ttntoii for amukthAs, TB. likewise, and also, in a. b «f ivf rjTi fl/
drnhAk pA^Am ntrrtyM (6 \i am-. IU*.S. has neither this verse nor the oeit; that
Ppp. puts our vs. 8 l>e(ore it w.is noticed al)ove. I'he comm. explains aviufyMi by
jAmyAdyitbhi^ansanaftipiiH nintianAt. |_T1V, in comm. to Calc. cd., ami in I'oona etl-.
has in*<ff/rili J
7. Thou hast left niggardy, hast found what is pleasant ; thou hast
come to be in the excellent world of what is well done : .so from Jtsr/nui,
etc. etc.
Neatly all the stiw/it/Jmss, omit the final visarga of tirn/ttA before syonAm. The
comm. reads ahhui in b; TB. does the same, and, correspondin/^ly, Aviiiat in a. with
dvmrtiM (l»etter \j.i, iv. 34. 3 ; x. 2. 10 J) for ArMim, The comment to Trlt. ii. 46 quotes
mkAs in this verse as not «r^}r, i.e. as from ^1, not hr.
8. The f^rnls, releasing from the seizure of darkness the sun whom it
had befallen, let him loose from sin (Mas) : so from kscinyd, etc. etc.
It was noticed al>ove that the other texts add the refrain (TH. II(*S. I.MP.J otUy to
/«ff«l/) only to this verse, where ah>ne it is in place. Tpp. h.is//fM«l for aifki at end
of a, and the other texts i<//,- b in I'pp. is thvA mMliiam/m atrjttn partlatak ; in the
other texts thvA timttfiainn Aifjan vylnttiah,
I^Kor f/.iw. cf. ftvi, iv.40. 1. Most of .srp*s mss. and our M.I. II. O.K. read
Hir /nattth. For /i»iif, W's first dr.i(t has 'evil,* which is Ixrtter. See I^nman. /ViA
gruts an A*.'M, pp. 187-100. — If, with the other texts, we drop e, f and omit nirttrA$
from c. ^^e get a perfect meter. 12 f 12 : 1 1 4 11. The other texts spoil Che refrain by
l>eginninK ex- Am it A Am imAm.j
The itnrt: Alit \^2 J h.is a|;ain $ hymns, with 2S verses; the quotation is as/a JtttryJj
ifvt/lyr.
S3 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK II. -ii. 12
II. To counteract witchcraft: with an amulet.
[(^tikra. — krtydpratiharanasuktam ; kriyddusamidevatyam, i. 4'p.virddgdyatri ;
2-j. J-/, parosnih (4. pipllikamadhyd fticrf).]
LThe hymn is not metrical.J Not found in Paipp., nor elsewhere. Reckoned as
first of the krtyiipratiharana (* counteraction of witchcraft ') ^<i///i (Kauq. 39. 7 and
note) ; used in a charm for protection against witchcraft (39. i), with binding-on of a
sraktya amulet; and again later (39. 13 ; the comm. says, only vs. i), in a similar rite.
The comm. quotes it further from Naks. K. (17, 19), in a mahd^dnii called bdrhaspail.
Translated: Weber, xiii. 163 ; Griffith, i. 54. — Discussed by Bloomfield, AJP. vii.
477 ff., or JAOS. xiii., p. cxxxii (= PAOS. Oct. 1886).
1. Spoiler's spoiler {dusi) art thou; missile's missile (lieti) art thou;
weapon's weapon {ineni) art thou : attain (ap) the better one, step beyond
the equal (samd).
The body of the verse is addressed to the amulet ; the refrain more probably to its
wearer (so, too, Weber) ; but the comm. assigns the latter also to the amulet, and
quotes to show it TS. ii. 4. i*, which rather supports the contrary opinion. He calls
w<r;// a vajrandman^ deriving it from root vil * damage.* LSee Geldner's discussion of
tneniQ hurt done to another in vengeful anger *), Festgruss an Bohilingk, p. 31, 3 2. J
2. Sraktyct art thou ; re-entrant {pratisard) art thou ; count er-conjur- nulyhf V^.
ing art thou : attain the etc. etc. *- ol/yiCiA/OsT^ • f)^l ^^ '
The comm. says that srakti is the tiiaka-ivtQ^ and sraktya means made from it;
pratisara is something by which sorceries are turned back (upon their performer); it
seems to mean virtually a circular amulet — Lsuch as a bracelet? Y ox re-entrant^ Whit- ^
ney has interlined revertcnt (jic)^ better, perhaps, reverting^ trans, or intrans.J. //^ff* ^ ^''*'^^^*'^ ^**7A^
3. Conjure (abhi-car) against him who hates us, whom we hate : attain
the etc. etc.
4. Patron {suH) art thou ; splendor-bestowing art thou; body-protect-
ing art thou : attain the etc. etc.
The comm., without explaining why, glosses suri with abhijha ♦ knowing.*
5. Bright {fukrd) art thou; shining (b/irdjd) Turt thou; heaven {svAr)
art thou ; light art thou : attain the etc. etc.
The comm. thinks svdr to be jvarddirogotpddanena tdpakah^ or else " the common
name of sky and sun.*'
The Anukr. scans vs. i as 6 + 6 + 6 : 1 2 = 30, and the other verses as 8 + 8 : 1 2 =28,
excepting vs. 4, which is 9 -♦- 6 : 12 = 27 (restoring the a of asi in b).
12. [Against such as would thwart my incantations. J
[B/iaradvdja. — astarcam, ndnddewityam , traistubham : 2. jagatl ; y^ S. anustubh.^
Found in Paipp. ii., but in the verse-order 1,3,2,4-6,8,7. The hymn is called by
Kaug. (47. 12) bharadvdjapravraskatn * Dharadvnja's hewer-off * L or * cleaver * J (from
expressions in the verses), and is to accompany the cutting of a staff for use in rites of
ii. 12- BOOK II. Tin: ATHARVA-VKDA-SAttlllTA. 54
witrhrraft (an at 47. 14, 16, 18 ; 48. 22) ; and its ftcvcral vernct are applied throuith an
extrnttrd incantation (47. 25 57) af^ainst an enemy; the details of it throw no li^ht
U|Nm thrir intrtprrtatiim.
'I ran%latr<l : F. Srhla^^intweit, tite ilotteturthetit <irr Indier (Miinchrn. l86/», Ahh
dfr bayef . /{tad. tier tl'ht ), p. 13 ff.; \Vcl>er, xiii. 164 ; Ludwif^, p. 44$; Zimmer,
p. 1S3; <;rill, 47. 85; (irifTith. i. 55 ; Hloomficld, JAOS. xiii., p. ccxxi f. (s= I'AOS.
(Vt 1S87) or Ajr. xi. 334 5; Snr. xUi. 8f>, 2rM- — The first four intrrprete«i it a%
attompanyini* a firr-orcleal ; but (•rill and lUooinfield have, with Koml reason, taken a
dtffrrcnt view. 'I he native interpreters know nothin|^ of any connection with an ofdeal,
nor in this to l>e read into the text without considerable violence.
1. llcavcn-andcarlh, the wide atmosphere, the mistress of the fiehl,
the wonderful wide-Roinj; one, and the wide windgtiarded atmosphere --
let these be inflamed (A»/.|vi) here while I am inflamed.
All the /<i//«i niss. rca<l at the en<l tapyAmt^nt itt\ as if the word were a dual fern, or
neut. : a nu><it gratuitous blunder ; SlT's /«rf/4iitext emends to -me. Ppp. reads in d
ifSH for iti thti (which is, as in not inftetpient other cases, to \yt contracted to // *A«f /
the Anukr. at least takes no notit r of the irreculaiity here ; hut it also if^norei the j^g^H
value of b). The comm. natut.illy explains the ** wide-f^oer ** as Vbhnu; he does not
attempt to act ount for the mention of **tlie wide atmosphere ** twice in the verse, thouich
sometimes ^ivin^ himself mu< h tioubic to excuse su< h a re|>etiti<>n. The last pilda he
paraphrases by **ju^t as I am endeavoring; to <lestroy the hateful one, so may they also
be injuri-rs of [my] enemy, by not ^i^'i^K '*^'" place and the like**: which is doubtWss
the general meaning.
2. Hear this, C) ye pods that are worshipful (}'(ijfli}'ti) \ Hharadvaja
sings (^niis) hymns {ulf/ni) for me ; let him, lM)und in a feller, be plunged
(fii'j'ttj) in difTicully who injures this our mind.
That is, probably, our design or Intent ; the romm. sa\'S (inappropriately) idam ftir-
Vitr» sattfntUji^,if>ni'rf tf.ttn fn,}ndstiift : i.e. setlufis us tt) evil courses. All the mss.
chance to a^iee tiiis time in omitlini; the visar;;a of yttjIiiyAk liefore J/4«l in a. Hut
Tpp. reads th instead (»f r////r. an<I in b ultytlni {atisttttt^ as it often changes -it to •/»/
but here the im|>erative (or \Ve!»er*s su;»i;ested ^ttttsnt) would improve the sense. [^Tro-
nounce tffi'itt}h and reject sthti; the meter is then in order — I2fi2:i2fiij
3. Hear this, () Indra, soma-drinkcr, as I call loudly to thee with a
burning (f//r) heart ; I hew (rn/fr) him (down], as a tree with an ax, who
injures this our mind.
Or (in b) 'call re|>eate<lly * ; the cimun. sa)'s pumth punak. Ppp. has in c Xf^t^si.
The ci>mm. paraphrases l'N/t(rn*t with vajrasadr^rna pttra^y/til. |^An orderly trufm^k
is Rot by addinf^ tvthn after sont*tp*t.\
4. With thiice eighty j</w/i/i-singers, with the Adityas, the Vasus, the
Angirases — let what is sacrificed-and-bcstowed of the Fathers aid us —
I take yon man with seizure (/idnts) of the gods.
lit^piittAm in c has probably alrraily the later meanin|( of merit obtained by turh
sacred atts; the comm. says t*tdubhayaj*tnttam inkflam. Hatat he calls a kr^ks-
nJImttm. lie understands the * three eighties* of a to be the triplets {iria) tn j^yafri.
55 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK II. -H. 12
usnih, and brhatly eighty of each, spoken of in AA. i. 4. 3 — simply because they are
the only such groups that he finds mentioned elsewhere ; the number is probably taken
indefinitely, as an imposing one.
5. O heaven-and-earth, attend {a-didhl) ye after me ; O all ye gods, take
ye hold (a-rabli) after me ; O Angirases, Fathers, soma-feasting (somj'd),
let the doer of abhorrence (apakdmd) meet with (a-r) evil.
Ppp. reads in a dfdhyatdm ^cf. Bloomfield, AJP. xvii. 417J, and in ^ fiUfiasdrtccheiv
afh. The comm. does not recognize dldhl as different from dldJ^ rendering ddjpte
bhavatatn, \\Ti a, the accent-mark under -vl is missing. J
6. Whoso, O Maruts, thinks himself above us, or whoso shall revile
our incantation (brdhman) that is being performed — for him let his wrong-
doings be burnings (idpns) \ the sky shall concentrate its heat (savt-tap)
upon the brdhinan-Yi^X^x ,
The verse is RV. vi. 52. 2, with sundry variants. At the beginning, RV. has the
better reading dti vdj in b, kriydmdnam ninitsdt ; for d, brahmadidsam abhi tdm
^ocatu dydtih. Fpp. follows RV. in d (but with ^oca for ^ocatu) ; in c it reads vrajandni.
The comm. renders vrjinani falsely by varjakdni bddhakdni,
7. Seven breaths, eight marrows : them I hew [off] for thee with [my]
incantation ; thou shalt go to Yama*s seat, messengered by Agni, made
satisfactory.
The last pada is xviii. 2. i (RV.x. 14. 13) d. All our mss. and about half of SPP's
have in a majfids (for majjflds) ; yet SPP. adopts in his text the reading manyds^
because given by the comm., which explains it artificially as for dhamanyas^ and signi-
fying *• a sort of vessels situated in the throat " ; no such word appears to be known
elsewhere in the language, and some of the mss. have in other passages of the text
manyas for majfids. Our Dp. gives dyd at beginning of c; the word is translated
above as L^V'^^J* subjunctive of i with doubled subjunctive-sign (sec my Skt. Gram.
§ 560 e), or of its secondary root-form ay ; the comm. takes it from yd^ which makes
him no difficulty, since in his view imperfect and imperative are equivalent, and he
declares it used iox ydhi, Ppp. reads for z yamasya gacha sddanam, \\xi many parts
of India today y/J and ny are phonetically equivalent. Cf. SPP*s mss. for ix. 5. 23. J
8. I set thy track in kindled Jatavcdas ; let Agni dispose of Q vis) the
body ; let speech go unto breath Q dsu).
The verse is in part obscure ; the comm. sets it in connection with one of the details
of the Kaug. ceremony : '* I set or throw in the fire the dust from thy track combined
with chopped leaves : i.e. I roast it in the roaster ; let Agni, through this dust entering
thy foot, pervade or burn thy whole body " ; he takes dsu as simply equivalent to prdtia^
and explains : sarvendriyavyavahdra^unyo bhavaiUy become incapable of acting for
the senses: i.e. become mere undifferentiated breath — which is perhaps the true mean-
ing. LQuite otherwise A. Kacgi — citation in Bloomfield, p. 294.J The Anukr. appar-
ently expects us to resolve a at the beginning into a-a, Ppp. has in a ^ daddmiy and
for d imam gachatu te vasu.
The last two verses are so discordant in style and content, as well as in meter, with
ii. 12- BOOK II. THE ATHARVA-VEOA-SAttHITA 5^
the re«t of the hymn that we can hardly consider them as properly belonf^ng to it
Their omission, with that o( the l)orrowed RV. verse (our 6), would reduce the hymn to
the norm of this l>ook.
13. For welfare and long life of an infant.
Ver.^e^ 1,4, 5 arc found in TAipp. xv. Though (as \Vcl>er |K>ints out) plainly having
nothing to do with the goiitlna or tonsure ceremony, its verses are applied by KAu^. to
parts of that rite. Thus, it accompanies the preparations for it (53. 1) and the wetting
of the youth's head (53. 13); vm. 2 and 3, the putting of a new garment on him (54. 7);
\'S. 4, making him stand on .1 stone ($4«^); vs. 5. taking away his old garment (54-9)
And the comm. quotes vss. 2 and 3 from Tari^i^ta 4. 1 as utteretl by a purohita on handing
to a king in the morning the garment he is to put on, and vs. 4 from Ibid. 4, as the same
throws four |)ebbles toward the four directions, and makes the king step upon a fifth.
Translated : WclMrr, xiii. 171 ; Zimmcr, p. 322 ; IfrifTith. i. 57.
1. Giving lifc-tiinc, O A^ni, choosing old age; ghcc-frontcd, ghcc-
backed, O Agni — having drunk the sweet pleasant (olm) ghee of the
cow, do thou afterward defend (ntls) this [lx>y] as a father his sons.
The verse occurs also in various VajurA'etIa texts, as VS. (xxxv. 17). TS. (1.3. 14*
et al). Tl>. (i. 2. 1"), TA. (ii. 5. 1). MS. (iv. 12.4) L*^'** »• 2. 1 J, and in several Sutras,
as A^S. (ii. 10.4), (,*(«.S. (i. 25), and II(«S. (i. 3. 5), with considerable variations. TS.
(with which the tcxt5 of *I H.. TA . and A(,\S- agree throughout) has in ti havisa jmsJI-
frrfj, which is dccide<lly preferable to jatAsitth frmlnAs L, which is apparently a mis-
placed reminiscence of KV. x. 1S.6 or AV. xii. 2. 24 J; at end of h, gkridremir aikt ;
and, in d, /«r/r«lw for pntrin. VS. has for a Ayu$mAn ^f^nt kax'isA tnrHkAmdt^ and
agrees with TS. etc. in b, and also in d. save that it further su)>stitutes imin for imAm.
MS. reads dtvtt for a^ne in a, and pihaint amham for fttvA fnA^ikn of c j^thus making
a good Irislttbk patlaj, and ends d with putrdm jarA%t ma e *mAm, Ppp. agrees through-
out with M.S., except as it emends the lattcr's corrupt reading at the end to jaratt maye
*mam ; and HGS. correspoiuls with Tpp. save by having i^rml;y<f/ in a. \MV. follows
IKiS.J (,'(iS. gives in a havisA vrdhAnas, In b agrees with T.S. etc., and has in d
piii *t'<f putram iha r-. The last p.lda is ja^atf.
I^The Anukr. counts ii + ii:io-fi2=:44: as if io-fi2 were metrically the same
as 1 1 -f 1 1 ! or as if the ** extra ** syllaUe in d could offset the de6ctency In c f The
impossible cadence of c is curable by no less radical means than the adoption of the
Ppp. reading. All this illustrates so well the wondenness of the methods of the Anukr.
and its utter lark of sense of rhythm, th.it attention may well l>e calleti to it J
2. Envelop, put ye him for us with splendor; make ye him one to die
of old age ; [make] long life ; Hrihaspati furnished {prayam) this garment
unto king Soma for enveloping [himself].
The verse is re|>eated l>elow, as xix. 24 4. It is found also in IKfS. (i. 4. 2) |^Mf*.
ii. 2.6J, and a, b in MB. (i. 1.6). IKtS. in a omits imr, and reads x*Msasdi*Hmm for
varcasf *t*t,ifft, and in b it has ^tttAvMutm for jatAmrlynm ; MB. agrees with this, only
making the verse apply to a girl by giving tnAm ami {alAyuslm. There appears to be
a mixture of constructions in a : pAft dhattn vAftasA is right. but<Mtf//«l reqairet rather
vdrfaMf. Emending to krnmtA would enable jdfimriyum to t>c construed wHh im$mm
57 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK II. -ii. 14
in a L; but cf. ii. 28. 2 J. Verses 2 and 3 are .ipparently lost out of Ppp., not originally
wanting.
3. Thou hast put about thee this garment in order to well-being ;
thou hast become protector of the people (?) against imprecation; both
do thou live a hundred numerous autumns, and do thou gather about
thee abundance of wealth.
The translation implies emendation of grstftiam in b to krsUndw, as given by
Ppp. and by PCS. (i. 4. 12) and HGS. (i. 4. 2) irPa corresponding expression to xix.
24.5 below. LMP., ii.2.8, reads dpfnam.] Such blundering exchanges of surd and y»^W^^tf>»
sonant are found here and there ; another is found below, in 14. 6 b Lso our ii. 5. 4, Ppp. J. — ' r
All the mss., and both editions, read here^^rj-, and the comm. explains it by (^rttvlw, and,
with absurd ingenuity, makes it apply to the asserted fear of kine, on seeing a naked
man, that he is going to take from them the skin which formerly belonged to him, but was
given to them instead by the gods ; the legend is first given in the words of the comm.
himself, and then quoted from ^B. iii. 1.2. 13-17. For comparison of the Sutra-texts
in detail, see under xix. 24. 5,6. In c, our O. Op. read y/t/^w. LCf. MGS. i. 9. 27 a
and p. 152, s.\. ffarid/tdsye. With c, d cf. PCS. ii. 6. 20.J The first pada is properly
ja^ail {su-astdye), LB@* See p. 1045. J
4. Come, stand on the stone ; let thy body become a stone ; let all
the gods make thy life-time a hundred autumns.
The second pada is nearly identical with RV\ vi. 75.12 b; with a, b compare also
AGS. i. 7. 7 and MB. i. 2. i, similar lines used in the nuptial ceremonies. ^With a, c, d
compare MGS. i. 22. 12 and p. 149. J Ppp. has for a, b imam aqmUnam d tistha \me
^va tvam sthiro bhava: pra mrnlhi durasyatah sahasva prtanayaiah; which differs
but little from the AGS. verse. The Anukr. apparently expects us to resolve vi-qu-e in c.
5. Thee here, of whom we take the garment to be first worn, let all
the gods favor ; thee here, growing with good growth, let many brothers
be born after, [[after thee,] J as one well born.
This verse makes it pretty evident that in vs. 3 also the garment is the first that is
put on the child after birth. But the comm., ignoring the gerundive -vdsyam, thinks
it a •* formerly worn " garment that is " taken away *' ; and Kau^. misuses it correspond-
ingly. HGS. (i. 7. 17) has a corresponding verse, omitting vdsas in a, combining
T'/f?'^ av- in b, and reading suhrdas for suvrdhd in c. [_ Nearly so, MP. ii. 6. 15. J In
Ppp. the text is defective ; but saviid is read instead of suvrdhd. Some of our sam-
/ii/d-mss. (P.M.W.I.H.) lengthen to -itasyhm before hdrdmas in a. The verse is very
irregular in the first three padas, though it can by violence be brought into tristubh
dimensions ; it has no jagatl quality whatever.
14. Against sadinv&s.
\^Cdtana. — satfrcam. ^dldgnidcvatyam uUi mautroktadcvatdkam. dnustubhatn : 2. hhnrij ;
4. uparistddvirdtfl'r/iati.']
t
All the verses are found in Paipp., vs. 4 in v., the rest (in the verse-order i, 5, 6, 2, 3)
in ii. It is reckoned by Kauq. to the cdtandni (8. 25), and also among the hymns of
the brhachdnti gana (9. i) ; it is used in the women's rites {strlkarmdni) to prevent
ii. 14- BOOK 11. THE ATIIARVA-VEDA-SA«HITA. 58
abortion (34.3); alM> in the rite for eiptation o( barrenness in rattle {%*m{S^smamm ;
44.11): and in the eAtnl>lishmrnt of the bouncer e (72.4), with spnnkHnf of the
entrance, and finally in the funeral cercmonicji (82. 14). with the same action. The
comm. further refers to the use of the i^tana and mAtrtttlmam hymns in Naks. K. 23
and (,i\nti K. 1$. All these uses imply simply the value of the hymn as eiorctsin|( e^il
influeiu es or the lieings that represent them, and do not help us to see agadnst what it
was orif'inally directed: Weber su^gesU rats and worms and such like pests; perhaps,
rather, troublesome inserts: as usual, the indications are so iruleBnite that wide room
(or ronjecluie is left open.
Translated : \Ve))er, xiii. 175 ; I.udwig, p. 522 ; Grill, 1,89; Griffith, i. 58; Dloom-
field, 66, 298. \Jfir See p. 1045. J
1. The cxpcllcr, the bold, the container, the one-toned, the voracious
— all the daughters (#w///) of the wrathful one. the saddnx^s^ we make
to disappear.
Itv the connection, the ol)scure words in the first half- verse should be names of indi-
vidual i<f//rf#fr<li, but dhisAnam (tlie translation implies emendation to -ttAm) is mascu-
line (or neuter), and dhrsnufn (for which Tpp. reacU dhhmyam) not dtstinc timely
feminine. Aiss^ii (STT's text reads, with the saMMit*} n\%%. generally, ff#i(j4- ; p. mtk-
^sAltini) is taken by the letter of the text, as if from nih-sAiay = nthsAfajr; the comm.
gives first this derivation, but spoils it by adding; as alteniati%'e ** orif(inatin|( from the
i<f Ar. a kind of tree." K. sujtgests HihstUnm *' out of the liouse,** adverb. The comm.
shamelessly derives iihisauam from dhrs^ and explains it as ** a setxer with evil, so
named**; he also takes -T'«l«/)'rf as ~ vacana. All our /W^t-mss. commit the f^ross
blunder of dividing Jij^hatcjvt\m, as if the word were a com|x>und ; SIT. lets the
division stand in his//f</<itext. Tpp. reads in c napatiyas.
2. Out of the cow-stall we drive you, out of the axle, out of the
wagon-l>ody (.^) ; out of the houses we expel you, ye daughters (dukitf) of
magiiftdl.
The comm. understands itp^nasil (for which two of our mss., P.M., read mpmm^n^-
,\jf^ sii) to mean " a granary ** — or else ** a wagon full of grain ** ; and Aksm ** a gambling
*V) house.** lie does not venture to clymologixe ma^unJl^ but calls it simply the name of
^mk/*^^ y * certain //fil<-/. The /<i</<f mss. re.vl ma^undy/k^ which SI* I*, properly emends to -dySk,
.^ t^t"^ ^PP- ^^^ ^<*'^ ^ ^^ corrupt Hir yoninnrpAnaca^ |_in c maj^Hndyii^^ and at end of d «il/a-
^•^^ / ydmast. The Anukr. takes notice of the metrical irregularity of c.
3. Yon house that is below — there let the hags be ; there let debility
(sedi) make its home (tii uc), and all the sorceresses.
I*pp. has a different version of ttie first three |>iVdas : atnusminm mdkare grkt $drvJt
iX'AHta 9i\yak : tat fa ptipmi} ni yan/iatn. The comm. renders srdi by mi'rr/i.
LOur arcentnotatitm <l«es not hrre distinguish a ksJIipta c\Mc\xmi\tx (myHcymmtm)
from an enclitic circumflex {trdfr nyuiyantH — as if it were the im|K>ssd>le mi Bt^yantm,
accentless) ; nor do the mss. of STT. : but in his text, he here emplo)'S the stroke, bke
**long y** or the sign of integration, which does distinguish them. J
4. Let the lord of bcinj;s drive out, also Indra, from here the saddm-
xhU, sitting on the bottom of the house ; let Indra subdue them with the
thunderbolt.
59 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK II. -H. 1 5
The omission of this verse, as being not found with the rest in Ppp. ii., would reduce
the hymn to the norm of the second book. Ppp. (in v.) rectifies the meter of dby
omitting indras. The metrical definition of the Anukr. is mechanically correct. The
comm. understands bhutapati to designate Rudra.
5. If ye are of the endemic (} ksetriyd) ones, or if sent by men ; if ye
are born from the barbarians (ddsyn) — disappear from here, O saddnvds.
All the mss., both here and in the next verse, accent at the end sadanvdSy though the
word is plainly a vocative, and is so understood by the comm. (who says nothing of the
accent, and indeed in general pays no heed to it); SPP. retains the manuscript reading.
Ppp. has for 9iyd devd gha ksetriyddy and for zyad asiu da^vibho jdtd,
6. I have gone around the abodes (dhdman) of them as a swift [steed
about] a race-course ; I have won {ji) all your races (aji) ; disappear from
here, O saddnvds.
The translation implies the evidently necessary emendation asaram at end of b ; Ppp.
has it, and also the comm.; both editions give asaran^ with all the mss. But Ppp. agrees
with the mss. in giving just before it the false reading ^^jM^w for ka- (our text emends,
but, by an oversight, gives -f//r instead of -f///i before it); and SPP. retains ga-. The
comm. has instead gldsth&m^ and explains it as '* the further goal, where one stops {sthd)
wearied (^gldna)^
15. Against fear.
\Brahman. — sadrcam. prdnapdndyurdevatyam. iripddgdyatram.'\
Found also in Paipp. vi., but in a much fuller form, with thirteen verses, of which
our six are, in their order, vss. 1,4, 3, 7, 12, 13 ; the others deal with wind and atmos-
phere, cow and ox, Mitra and Varuna, Indra and Indra's might (indriyd)^ hero and
heroism, breath and expiration, and death and immortality {amrtam) ; after bibher is
added in vs. i evd me 'pdna md risayd, and, at the end of the hymn, the same, but
with tisa for risayd. In Kauq. (54. 1 1), the hymn is used, with vi. 41, at the end of the
goddna ceremony, on giving food to the boy. It is also counted by the schol. (ib., note)
to the dyusya gana. The comm. makes no reference to the goddna rite, but declares
the use to be simply by one desiring long life (dyuskdtna).
Translated: Weber, xiii. 1 79 ; Griflfith, i. 59.
1. As both the heaven and the earth do not fear, are not harmed, so,
my brdath, fear not.
LMGS., at i. 2. 13, has evam me prdna md bibha evam me prdtta md risah.\
2. As both the day and the night do not fear etc. etc;
The comm. here applies for the first time the term parydya to these sentences, corre-
spondent but with elements in part different.
3. As both the sun and the moon do not fear etc. etc.
4. As both sacrament {brd/nnan) and dominion {ksaird) do not fear
etc. etc.
That is, the Brahman and Ksatriya castes {brdhmauajdti and ksatriyajdti^ comm.),
as the words might properly enough be translated.
ii. 15- BOOK II. THE ATHARVA-VEDA-SAWHITA. 60
5. As both truth and untruth do not fear etc. etc.
6. As both what is (bhuid) and what is to be (bluiiya) do not fear
etc. etc.
The romm. paraphra^s bhtltAm by saiitlm frAptatk vastHJdIam ; the past wouki
teem to l>c a better example of fixity than the future ; Imt neither it **untnith** (vs. 5)
to l>e commended as an example. |_ Weber would read la rtAm.\
16. For protection.
\Bfitkman. — frJitJ^dMAyttrgln'^tyam. ek^rstt^Mttm ■ 1 t-p. Jliuti tftttukk ; t.i'f.Msuty
utMik ; J. I'P.itUfi IrtitHhk I /. f ^/ tftttrlj^thafri]
[^Not metrical. J Found (exrept vs. 5) in TAipp. ii. (in the verse-order 2.1.3.4).
The h\mn. with the one next following;, is used by KAu<;. (54.12) immediately aftet
hymn 1 5 ; and the comm. .idiU, quoting f«>r it the authority of PAithinast, to accompany
the offering of thirteen different sul>st.')nccs. which he details. Ik>th appear also in
VAlt (4. 20). in the parvan sacrifices, on approaching the *}hax*anl^a fire ; and vts. 2
aod 4 further (8. 7,9) in the t}i;rayana and ciiturmA%ya sacrifices.
Translated: Weber, xiii. 179; (friffith, i. 60.
1. O breath-and-expiration, protect me from death: hail {n*dhiS)\
The first extension of the notion of prAtut * breath,* lit. • forth-breathing,* is by addi-
tion of ttpAtut^ which also is lit. * breathing away,* and so, when distinguished from the
generali<r(l//«y//ri, seems to mean 'expiration.* The comm. here defines the two thus:
/f<fj^ tiitfhiutNttikho 'mitt cest*tttt ili prAnak : ap*l *MitY avtlfltfiukhd^ testata ity 4ip^9tak,
For svtlktl he gives alternative explanations, following YAska. The vene (without
rfUkA) is found also in Ap. xiv. 19.3. '* Iristubk'^ in the Anulcr. is doubtless a miv
reading for pafikit, as the verse has 11 syllables, and I and 3 would have been
defined together if viewed as of the same meter.
2. C) hcavcn-andcarth. protect me by listening (tipa^ntti) : hail!
The /«i#/<imss. rend upa^rutyA (not ;r«J^). and. in the ol>scurily of the prayer, it b
perhaps l>est to follow them |^* by overhearing* the plans of my enemies ?J; otherwise,
*from l>eing overheard * |^by my enemies? J would seem as suitable; and thb is rather
suggested by the Ppp. reading, upti^rute (for -Uhf).
Ppp. h.is after this another verse : ifhanikyik ^yust prajikyAi md p^tatk $x*^kA.
3. () sun, protect me by sij;ht : hail !
Ppp. h.is < iii" J //jA '(protect ni)) two eye.s.' Our O.Op., with some of SI'P's mst.,
read sttryas for -ytt.
4. () Agni Vai^jvanara, protect mc with all the gods: hail!
I*pp. makes, a^ it were, one ver^e out of our 4 and 5, by reading #rx«/ vi^vmmhkmrs
vi^tHtio Mil pilAt frvlAil. The comm. gives several different explanations of fJli^t'Sma^a
'belonging to all men,* one of them as vi^v^nara ^ jamiAn pravistnk /
5. O all-bearing one, protect me with all bearing (i/idms): hail!
The sense is ol>scure ; at xii. i.^» the epithet * all l>earing * is, very properly, applied
to the earth ; but here the word is masculine. The comm. understands Agni to be
meant (and this the Ppp. reading favors); but he relies for this solely on DAU. 1. 4. 7
6l TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK II. -ii. 1 8
(which he quotes); and that is certainly not its meaning there. Weber conjectures
Prajapati. |_The BAU. passage is i. 4. i6 in Bohtlingk's ed. See Whitney's criticism
upon it at A J P. xi. 432. I think nevertheless that fire may be meant — see Deussen's
Sechzig Upanishad's, p. 394. J It does not appear why the last two verses should be
called of two padas.
17. For various gifts.
[Brahman. — saptarcam. prSiidpaiiayHrdevatyam. ek^vasHitam : 1-6. ip. dsuri tn'stub/t ;
7. dsury usnih.'\
I^Not metrical. J Paipp. has a similar set of phrases in ii. For the use of the hymn
by Kauq. and Vait., see under hymn 16. It is also, with 15 and others, reckoned by the
schol. to Kau9. (54. 11, note) to the Hyusya gaita.
Translated: Weber, xiii. 180 ; Griffith, i. 61.
1. Force art thou ; force mayest thou give me : hail !
The Ppp. has no phrase corresponding to this. Some of our mss., as of SPP*s, read
(id instead of ddh before svahdy in this hymn and the next, where they do not abbreviate
the repetition by omitting both words. The comm. regards them both as addressed to
Agni, or else to the article offered (Jiuyamdnadravyani), \Qi. MGS. i. 2. 3, and p. 149
and citations.J
2. Power art thou ; power mayest thou give me : hail !
Ppp. has sahodCi agnes saho me dhU svUha,
3. Strength art thou ; strength mayest thou give me : hail !
Ppp. gives baladd agnir balam me svdhd,
4. Life-time art thou ; life-time mayest thou give me : hail !
The corresponding phrase in Ppp. is : tiytir asyd dyur me dhd svdhd,
5. Hearing art thou ; hearing mayest thou give me : hail !
There are no phrases in Ppp. answering to this and the two following verses ; but
others with varcas and tejas as the gifts sought.
6. Sight art thou ; sight mayest thou give me : hail !
7. Protection {paripdna) art thou ; protection mayest thou give me :
hail !
The anuvaka [^3. J has 7 hymns, with 42 verses ; the Anukr. says : astouath iasmdc
chatdrdham trtlye.
Here ends also the \\\\xA prapdthaka,
18. For relief from demons and foes.
\Cdtafta {sapatuaksayakdmali). — dgneyam. dvdipadam ; idmnlbdrhatam.']
LNot metrical. J Ppp. has some similar phrases in ii. The hymn belongs to the
cdtandni (Kauq. 8. 25 : the comm. regards only the last three verses as cdiaua, because
vs. 3 is the one whose pratika is cited in the Kau^. text ; but it is perhaps more likely
that ardyaksayatiam is an oversight for bhrdirvyaks) ; it is used by itself also in one
of the witchcraft rites {dbhicdrikdni), while adding fuel of reeds to the fire (48. i).
Translated: Weber, xiii. 180; Griffith, i.6i.
ii. 1 8- HOOK II. THK ATHARVA-VKDA-SAttHITA. 62
1. Adversary-destroying art thou; adversary-expulsion mayest thou
give me : hail !
• Advcr!iary * \% lit, • nephew * or • brothrr'n son * (fiAri^frvra). The Ppp. phrases are
after this mo<lel: hhrAirtynkslnttm asi hkftltrvYajambhmnam mti it'JAJ, and concern
sutcrNsivfly thr//(<h«rf, sattynx'At, and bhfAtrvyas. 1 he Anukr. supports the comm.
in re)*Ardiii(; the hymn ns addresst^d to A^ni, and agrees with KAu^ in regard to the
ac('omp.in)in}; action, saying: sapalnaktayaHlh sauiiiiha Adhily^^ ^^ntmpfArtkamlyam
aptAfthityat. {^Instead of •*desiro)ing '* W. has interlined •• deMruclion."J
2. Kival-<lcstroying art thou; rival-expulsion mayest thou give me:
hail!
3. Wizard- {^. aniya-) <Icstroying art thou ; wizard-expulsion mayest thou
give me : hail I
4. /*/ffli-</(lcstroying art thou; //fJr</-cx pulsion mayest thou give me:
hail !
5. .SVi//^///Tvl-dcstroying art thou; j/i/Z^/z/rvl-expulsion mayest thou give
me : hail !
Read in our edition satiAnviUAl .
19. Against enemies: to Agni (fire).
[j4tAitn->tn. — Jj^mevttm. 1-4. MitfJvtutmJ^tUatri ; j. AAmrtj^Mm^t]
[^Not metrical. J This hymn (l>ut not its four successors and counterparts) b found
in Pdipp. ii. ; also in MS. (1. 5 2 : in verse-order 1.4.3,2,5) and Ap. (vi. 21.1 : in
verse-order 3. 4, I, 2, 5) ; further, in K. Its first pratika (but regarded by the schol. ami
by the comtn. as including all the five hymns) is usetl l»y KiVu^. (47. 8^ to accomiuny
the pnftss/ihi Aoffitts in tlie witchcraft rites. The Anukr. has a common description of
the five hymns, if> 23, as /«f/>««f silk/tini palliafttini paflttipaiytltti {}ox -^ataptitr )
tripAd^Aynit Any ekAvatAHAni. j^The mss. blunder ; but p^lkiApaiyAmi b prolably
right; see note to KAu^. 47. 8. J
Translated: Weber, xiii. 181 ; (;riirilh, i. 62.
1. O Agni! with the heat that is thine, be hot against him who hates
us, whom wo hate.
* M.S. leaves (in all the verses) tlie a of asmJm unclided, and both MS. and Ap. insert
ca before VityAm.
2. () A^ni ! with the rage {/uints) that is thine, rage against him who
hates us. whom we hate.
/V.f// Aiira h.is to l>e strained in rendering, to preserve the parallelism of the ejirpres-
sion. I^Or, 'with the seizing-force that is thine, force back him' etc. ?J
3. () Agni! with the gleam (anis) that is thine, gleam against him
who hates us, whom we hate.
4. () Agni! with the burning (\i\is) that is thine, burn against him
who hates us, whom we hale.
63 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK II. -ii. 24
5. O Agni! with the brilliancy if^jas) that is thine, make him unbril-
liant who hates us, whom we hate.
Ppp. \\2iSJyotis for tejas, TmA prati daha for atejasam krnu; for the latter, MS. and
A p. t^tA prati iitigdhi (also K., iityagdhi^.
The meter is alike in the four hymns 19-22 ; the Anukr. restores the a of asman, and
in vss. 1-4 scans 6 + 7 + 10 = 23, and, in vs. 5, 6 + 9 + 10 = 25.
20. The same: to Vayu (wind).
This and the three following hymns are mechanical variations of the one next preced-
ing, differing from it only by the name of the deity addressed, and in hymn 23 by the
pronouns and verbs being adapted to the plural deity. They are wanting in the otlier
texts. The comm. does not deign to explain them in detail, but prefixes a few intro-
ductory words to the text of this one. For the Anukr. descriptions of the meter, and for
the use by Kau^., see under hymn 19. It would be space wasted to write out the trans-
lation in full. LThey should all be regarded as non-metrical. J They are briefly treated
(not translated) by Weber, xiii. 182, and Griffith, i. 62.
I . O Vayu ! with the heat that is thine etc. etc.
2-5. O Vayu ! with etc. etc.
21. The same: to SQrya (sun).
I. O Surya! with the heat that is thine etc. etc.
2-5. O Surya! with etc. etc.
22. The same: to the moon.
I. O moon ! with the heat that is thine etc. etc.
2-5. O moon ! with etc. etc.
23. The same: to water.
I. O waters ! with the heat that is yours etc. etc.
2-5. O waters! with etc. etc.
Here the meter, owing to the plural verbs, is different; the Anukr. calls that of
vss. 1-4 (6 + 8+10 = 24) samavisamd^ tl gdya/rf *ol uneven members,' and vs. 5
(6+ 10 + 10 = 26) the same, with two syllables in excess \_svardd'Visamd^.
24. Against kimldfais, male and female.
[BraAmaH, — astarcam. dyusyam, fdnktam . . . .]
LNot metrical.J Part of the hymn is found in Paipp. ii., but in a very corrupt con-
dition : see under the verses below. Kau^. makes no use of it that is characteristic, or
that casts any light upon its difficulties, but prescribes it simply as to be employed in
a certain ceremony (19.9-13) for prosperity (according to the comm., for removal of
a bad sign), called ** of the sea" {sdmudra: the comm. says, offering in a ^dpetastha
fire, in the midst of the sea) ; it is also reckoned (19. i, note) to the mantras called
pustika • for prosperity.' The words that precede the refrain in each verse are apparently
ii. 24- BOOK If. THE ATHARVA-VEDA-SAICIHITA. 64
the nAmcs of kimUUns. The Anukr. ta3rs that Hrahmain In each verse praised with
vemes the deity mentioned in it ; and gives a lonj^ description of the meters that is
too confused and corrupt to t>e worth quoting in fulL
Translated: \Vel>er, xiii. 1S2 ; (irifTith, i. 62.
1. O ^rrabhaka, ^erabha ! back again let your familiar demons go;
back af;ain your missile, ye kimldins ! whose yc arc, him eat ye ; who
hath sent you forth, him eat ye ; eat your own flesh.
I 'pp. reads : ^atithhaka scnt{ah/ta punar bko yUmti yt\d*%vits punar Maiif ktmlMmak
yaiya siha <iam alta yo vn ffAhl iam utiam mAsJkiksil manyatJI. The comm. in tl»e
last phrase gives iil instead of sttl, ami has much trouble to fabricate an explanation
for it (as ^ tatya, or else for /<) hctik), (^erabkaka he takes as either sukkasym ^rM^mka
or ^ttrahkavai sarveulm ht'Autkit, hut is confident that it designates a •• chief of y^tit-
ifkAm^sy Of the refrain, the first part seems metrical, and the second prose, in three
phrases ; and it may l>e counted as84-8:6-f7 + 5(or7)=34 (or 36) : the prefixed
names add 7 sylLibles (vss. 1, 2), or 5 (vss. 3, 4), or 3 (vss. 6-S), or 2 (vs. 5). [^Bloom-
field comments on tihiitt and the like, ZDMCV xlviii. 577. J
2. O ^cvrdhaka, ^t'vrtVux! back again let your familiar etc. etc.
3. O mrokii, anumtoka ! back again let your familiar etc. etc.
4. O sttrf*ii, anusarpa ! back again let your familiar etc. etc.
5. O Jfinti f back again let your familiar demons go; back again your
missile, yc shckufih/ins ; whose yc are etc. etc.
C. O upnbiii ! back again let your familiar etc. etc.
7. O drjtml ! back again let your familiar etc. etc.
8. O b/tnrfiji ! back again let your familiar etc. etc.
To represent all these verses, we find in l*pp. {tt*rka {evrdh^ s^rfkn sar^a mrnkJm
mro jyitrnyatro jarjftnvtipaprado fuMar vc yanti yAtiaxuik : pumar jiHii kiml^tmak
yatya stha tLtm alUi yo mi pttkhi (am H/nts sil mJiiksAny aitil. It has not seemed
worth while to try to translate the names, though most of them contain intelligible ele*
m«*nts Lsec We!>er, p. 184, 1S6J, and the comm, forces through worthless explanations
for them all. In \'s. 8 he reads bhartUi^ and makes an al>surd derivation from roots hkr
and afic (** going to take away the bo<ly*'). |^In the first draft, W. notes that the four
feminine names of vss. 5-8 might t>e combine<l to one Irislubk piida, which with the
common refrain would give us the normal five ** verses.*'J
25. Against kAnvas: with a plant.
\CAtamti,~-v4ma$ffaiyim. Jmmifmbk.tm : ^. bkury.]
Found in I'.'iipp. iv. Ik>th \Vel«r and («rill regard the hymn as directed against
al>ortion : but no sufficient indications of such value are found in its language, though
some of the native authorities intimate their discovery of such. KAu^. (8. 25) reckons it
to the n}/ii»it hymns ; and it is employed, with ii. 7 and other hymns, in a remedial cere-
mony (2^»-33 3^0 against various evils, S|>ecially accom|)an)ing the smearing of the
designated pLint ^\\h s.icrifi( i.il dregs (sampj/a) u|K)n the patient
Translated: Weber, xiii. 187; (irill, 20,92; («riffith, i. 64 ; Uloomfield, 36*302.
I. Weal for us, woe {ti((tw) for Nirrti ('perdition') hath the divine
6$ TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK II. -ii. 25
spotted-leaf made ; since it is a formidable grinder-up (-jdmb/iafia) of
kdnvas, it, the powerful, have I used {bhaj).
The comm. makes no attempt to identify the fir^nt'parnt as any particular plant, but
simply paraphrases it with cifrafiarny osadhih, R. discusses the word as follows : ** the
pr^nipartif is, i. according to tlie commentary to KQS. xxv. 7. 17, the same with viHisa-
parnfy i.e. Glycine debilis ; 2. according to other schol., the same with laksmauH^ a plant
having upon its leaves red spots, in which the form of a child is claimed to be seen.
Dhavapr., i. 20S, calls it also /w/r^yVz;//", and Rajanigh., vii. 1 14, ////;v7^rt;///J, or pit tradd^
or pnmkattddy indicating a bulbous plant ; it is credited with the power to cure barren-
ness of women ; 3. according to Am. Koq. and the other Nighantus, it is a leguminous
plant, identified by Chund Dutt {AfaL medico) with Uraria lagopodioides Dec, having
hairy leaves without colored spots. The second of these identifications would suit the
hymn." Abhaksi might mean * I have partaken of or drunk ' ; but neither Kau^. nor
the comm. know of such a use of the plant. The strange appearance in this hymn (only)
of kdnva as name of evil beings is passed by the comm. without a word of notice ; he
simply paraphrases the word with pupa. [^But see Bergaigne, Rel. v^d. ii. 465, and Hille-
brandt, Ved. Mythol. i. 207. J Ppp. reads in b nirrtaye karat, and in d ivd Wtarsatn
for abhaksi,
m
2. This spotted-leaf was first born overpowering ; with it do I hew
[off] the head of the ill-named ones, as of a bird {fakiini).
[^^akti- is misprinted ^akf-.^ The reading vrfcdmi, without accent (which is given
in both editions, on the authority of all the mss.) implies that the fourth pada begins
with f /r«j, the preceding three words being (as is easy) resolved into eight syllables ;
and the pada-mss. also mark the pada-division before firas. The Anukr., however,
regards the verse as a simple auustubh, which it plainly is, ^iras belonging to c ; the
accent should therefore be emended to vr^cami. Ppp. reads saddnvdghftf pr- for a,
and, in c, d, iayd kanvasydth ^ira( chinadvii (ak-. The comm. explains the *♦ ill-named "
as dadntvisarpaka^vitrddiknsfharogavi^csds, or varieties of leprosy.
3. The blood-drinking wizard, and whoso wants to take away fatness,
the embryo-eating kdnva do thou make disappear, O spotted-leaf, and
overpower.
One or two of our mss. (W.I.), and several of SPP*s, read in h jihfrisaii\\. has
'frfs-\. Ppp. has at the end sahasvatl,
4. Make them enter the mountain, the life-obstructing {^yopana) kdn-
vas; do thou, O divine spotted-leaf, go burning after them like fire.
|_As to kanvdh, cf. i. 19. 4 n. As to -yopana, see Bloomfield, AJP. xii. 423.J This
verse and the next are too much def.iced in Ppp. to admit comparison in detail ; but its
text differs somewhat from ours. The Anukr. refuses to sanction the common abbre-
viation to agnir *va in d.
5. Thrust them forth to a distance, the life-obstructing /"rf/zt/^j ; where
the darknesses go, there have I made the flesh-eaters go.
II. 26- HOOK II. THK ATHARVA-VEDA-SAttHITA. 66
26. For safety and increase of kine.
[Satif*tr. — /^fatjram, fr$hiitt/>A*tm. j. m^rittd^'trdJhrkati ; 4, jf ammttmSk {4. Mmrt/) ]
Found in Tilipp. ii. \*%ct\ !»y K.\u^. (19. 14). with iii. 14, iv. 21. ami ii. 7 |^not %•§. 1 1.
3 — %te comm. to ix. 7 = 1 2 J. in a ceremony for the proftjierily of cattle.
Tran%Iated: \Ve!>er, xiii. 188; LmUi^. p- 371 ; (irifllith, i. 65; lUoomfiehl, 142,303;
VM. I and 2, also by (trill, ^)4. 92. — Cf. Her j;aif;ne- Henry. Afamur/, p. 138.
1. Hither let the cattle come that went away, whose companionship
{sa/mctfni) Vilyu (the wind) enjoyed, whose form-givings Tvash^r knows ;
In this cow-stall let Savitar make them fast (ni-jram).
Or, * whose forms,* ruptuikeya hciixip^ virtually equivalent to simple r id/ii. Tpp. reads
in b sahattUttm. The **cow-fttair* does not probably imply anything more than an
enclosure. The Anukr. passes without notice \\\t ja^ait pAda d.
2. To this cow-stall lot cattle flow-together [stream togetherj {sam-
sru)\ let Hrihaspati, foreknowing, lead them hither; let Sinivall lead
hither the van (dgra) of them; make them fast when they have come»
O Anumati.
[In the prior draft of 3, Mr. Whitney has ' stream/J I*pp. has at the end yaitkAt :
one of Sl'r*s mss., yaahat. The comm. gives amu/;aU ( = A/ amuj^amamaJtJIrimt ) in d.
The value of //vt in the common epithet prajAndHl (rendered * foreknowing *) ts obscure
and probably minimal. [As to the deities here named, see Zimmer, p. 352, and llilk-
brandt, /Vi/. Mylhcl, i. 422.J
3. Together, together let cattle flow [stream J. together horses, and
together men, together the fatness that is of grain ; I offer with an obla-
tion of confluence.
For the oblation calle<l *of confluence,* to effect the streaming together of good
things, compare i. t$ and xix. 1. The change of meter in this hymn need not damage
its unity, in view of its occurrence as one hymn in I'pp. Tpp. reads in b /M^rrariJi, and
in € s/*kiUthhis (for/d spk-). The metrical definition of the Anukr. seems to reiect the
obvious resolution -vit-na in d.
4. I |)Our together the milk (ksird) of kine, together strength, sap,
with sacrificial butter; poured together are our heroes; fixed arc the
kine in mc \jrathcr, with mej [as] kine-lord.
Tpp. reads vafawi in b, comltincs >/«! *swJlaw in c, and has for d majtt /ilt^c ^^
/;i7^ir/«fw. The redund.int syllable in d (noticed by the Anukr.) would he got rkl of
by changing wifri to the old IcKative m/[; tiut with l>ctter metrical result, by adopting
the rpp. reading J. With the second half-verse is to l>e compared A(JS. iii. 1 1.6: ^risfJI
asnit}kam vlrH mttyi ^tUuth samfm f^ofattlu. The comm. says that gavdm in a means
j^ritlPtAm 'of heifers (h.nving their first calf).'
5. I bting {tiJtr) the milk of kine; I have brought the sap of grain;
brought are our heroes, our wives, to this home (tistala).
(i^ TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK II. -ii. 27
Ppp. has aharsam in b, in c dharisam (for Hhrilis) and vfrdn, and in d ^ patnfm
e *iiam. Our Bp. gives ahdrisam (and H. ahararisani) in b, and ahfitds in c.
The annvdka [^4. J has this time 9 hymns, with 48 verses ; the old Anukr. says dvy-
ilnam [jiaidrdhafh'] turfy ah,
27. For victory in disputation: with a plant.
[ KapiTtjala . — sap fa rca m . vdnaspatyam . dnustubham . ]
Found in Paipp. ii. Kau9. uses the hymn in the rite or charm for overcoming an
adversary in public dispute: one is to come to the assembly from the north-eastern
direction (because of its name apardjita * unconquered *), chewing the root of the plant,
and to have it in his mouth while speaking ; also to bind on an amulet of it, and to wear
a wreath of seven of its leaves (38. 18-21). Verse 6, again, is reckoned (50. 13, note)
to the rdudra gana. The comm. further quotes from the Naks. |_error for QantiJ K.
(17, 19) a prescription of the use of the hymn in a mahd^dnti called apardjitd.
Translated: Weber, xiii. 190; Ludwig, p. 461 ; Grill, ist edition, 18,51 ; Bloomficld,
JAOS. xiii., p. xlii (PAOS.May, 1885), or AJP. vii. 479 ; Grill, 2d edition, 23,93 ; Griffith,
i.66; Bloomfield, SBE. xlii. 137,304. — Bloomfield was the first to point out (on the
authority of Kau^.) the connection of prdq with root prach^ and to give the true inter-
pretation of the hymn. Grill follows him in the second edition.
1. May [my] foe by no means win (yV) the dispute; overpowering,
overcoming art thou ; smite the dispute of [my] counter-disputant ; make
them sapless, O herb.
" Dispute " i^pf^O is literally * questioning.* The comm. renders the word in a by
prastar • questioner,' but in c gives us our choice between that and pra^na * question,*
and in 7 a acknowledges only the latter meaning. Prdtiprdqas is translated here as
genitive ; the comm. takes it secondly as such, but first as accus. pi. ; the Ppp. reading
favors the latter : sd *miin praiiprd^o jaya rasd kr-. With either understanding, the
accent is anomalous ; we ought to have praiipra^as, Arasan also is in favor of the
plural. If we could emend pra^am in c to prd^i * in the disputation,* it would make T-
things much easier. For a Ppp. has ya^ cairiln samjaydi. Nid in a is simply the Cf'/ ^"U '^
emphasized negative.
2. The eagle discovered {ann-vid) thee ; the swine dug thee with his
snout : smite the dispute etc. etc.
Pada b shows that the root is the part of the plant employed. If we struck off the
impertinent refrain from vss. 2-5, and combined the lines into two verses, the hymn
would conform to the norm of the second book (as in more than one case above
Lp- 37J).
3. Indra put {kr) thee on his arm, in order to lay low (sir) the Asuras :
smite the dispute etc. etc.
The comm., both here and in the next verse, understands -bhyaQt) stdrftaife as -bhyas
tiirl-^ though he then explains tarltave by starUum, Pada a is rendered in accordance
with the comm. and with Weber ; Grill, * took thee into his arm.*
4. Indra consumed (t'/-^f) the paid^ in order to lay low the Asuras :
smite the dispute etc. etc.
ii. 27- noOK II. THE ATllARVA-VEDA-SAttHITA. 68
The rnmm. rracis in a ptlfhAm, nnd uvs that form in all his explanations ; ^^ftlm
seems to )»e f;tven in all ttie m«s., and in Ppp-, ami l>oth editions adopt it ; but the mss.
are very little to l>e trusted (or the distinction of / and M. ** The plant is the Liyft^i
hernanJtf otitic \%ho%e liitter ro<>t is much u^rd. It gnms all over India, and is said to
Iht applit<l to ultrrn in the lVnj.il» ami in Sindh (W. DymtKlc, I'f^ittthU mai. mf*i )'*
(K ). I^ln \\'\s note, Koth f;ivr% p^tAm as Tpp. form; but in his collation, he l^ives as
rpp. readini; in a. b f^Ayam tndto^ vytiinAn kanlavt as-. The Anukr. apparently eY| et ts
us to resolve vt A ^n-Ai in a.
5. With it will I overpower the foes, as Indra did the stJ/tfvrltis : smite
the dispute etc. etc.
The translation implies emendation of the inadmissible Silksr to sJIksyt^ than which
nothing is easier (considering; the frequent loss of r after a lingual or palatal sibilant) or
more satisfactory, for l)oth sense and meter ; it is favored, tix>, by the Pftp reading.
sakslye. No other example of lont; <) in a future form of this verb appears to l>e quot-
able ; but the exchant^e of a and J in its inflection and derivation is so common that this
makes no appreciable ditAculty. The comm. accepts stlkse^ renderinj^ it by ahki ^Aat'JImt.
The Anukr. notes no metrical irregularity in the verse. In our text, accent tJlHtxrkdm
(an accent-mark out of place). ^To \Vel>er's note on sA/tli'rJtil, suid Oertel. J AGS.
xix.^ 133 f. Tins allusiim adds to the plausibility of \V*s su^^^estion alx>ut the Yatis,
note to ii. 5. 3. J
6. () Kudra, thou of healing; (?) remedies, of dark (n//a) crests, deed-
doer ! smite the dispute etc. etc.
Tpp. has for cd frsfitm tiuntiyaio jithi y(t smifti abkitiJisati^ which is plainly much
better than the rr|>etiti(m of tlie refrain, aiwl for which the latter has perhaps been sub-
stituted in our text The cumm. draws out to j^reat lenf^th a series of derivations for
rm&ft^ and f«ives two for yi/Aliii, and three different explanations of karmakri. |_liloom-
field discusses yd/- etc. at Icnj^th, AJP. xii. 425 ff.J
7. Do thou smite the dispute of him. O Indra, who vexes us; bless us
with abilities (\'fil/i) ; m.ike me superior in the dispute.
rpp. re.id^ /v»^<"" f'»r f^t'^.ttft iwim in a, .in«l rnd% b with dAtale. The comm. has
pril^am iiistcid of /'«'(' in d and is supinuted in it by two of SI'P's authorities. The
prAt^am in a he explains by vAkyam, an<l that in his d by pfaitHram.
28. For long life for a certain person (child?).
FouHfl in r.'iipp. (v^s. 1 4 in i.; v^ 5 in xv.). I'srd by K.iu^. in thr ci^tiAtta cere-
nxmy ( ; 4. 13). as thr p.irrnts p.ivs tlu* Iniv three timc^ b.ic k and forth lictween tliero and
make him r.it b.ills of ^hee : nn<l thr same is done in the 4 thfA f>r 4 An/a (hair-cuttinj;) cere-
mony ( ;4. 1^. note); the schol. also rc< kon it to the Aytttysi t^ana (54. II, note).
'I ransl.ited \Vel»er, xiii. \*)1 ; Ciidl, 4-^, <>4 ; (frithth, i. O7 ; Uloomtield, 50, 306.
I. For just ther, O old age, let this one grow; let not the other
deaths, tliat ate a hun<lrc<l, haim him ; as a forethoughtful mother in her
lap a son, let Mitra protect him from distress that comes from a friend
r
69 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK II. -ii. 28
Ppp. has in b tvat for (aiarh ye, and combines in d mitre *nam. The omission of cither
imdm or /z/i^/ would rectify the meter of b. The comm. most foolishly takes jariman
first ixomjr *sing,' and explains it as he stuyamdtia agne/ then adding the true ety-
mology and sense. The ^*jagail^^ is quite irregular: 12 + 13 : 1 1 + 12 = 48. LBloom-
field cites an admirable parallel from RV. iv. 55. 5; but in his version he has quite
overlooked the verb-accent. J
2. Let Mitra or helpful (} ri^adds) Varuna in concord make him one
that dies of old age ; so Agni the offerer (JtStar), knowing the ways
(vayiifta), bespeaks all the births of the gods.
All our /<z//4:j-mss. read in a n\add instead of -iidh ; SPP. properly emends to -ddh.
This wholly obscure word is found independently only here in AV.; its rendering above
is intended only to avoid leaving a blank ; the comm. gives the ordinary etymology, as
hiitsakHnam atti; Grill, emending to ariq&das, brings out an ingenious but uncon-
vincing parallelism with Gr. /pcrudT^t; and, as noticed by him, Aufrecht also would under-
stand armadas * very prominent* Ppp. reads for a tnitrag ca ti'd varuuaf ca riulddu,
and has at the end of d -mdni vakti.
3. Thou art master (/f) of earthly cattle, that are born, or also that
are to be born ; let not breath leave this one, nor expiration ; let not
friends slay (vadh) this one, nor enemies.
All the mss., and the comm., read at end of hjanUrdSy which SPP. accordingly retains,
while our text makes the necessary emendation to jdni/vds, which Ppp. also has. Ppp.
Lomits vd in b ;J elides the initial a of apdno and amitrdh after vio; and it puts the verse
after our vs. 4. Pada b lacks a syllable, unnoticed by the Anukr. \x^2i^ jdtasas ? \.
4. Let father heaven, let mother earth, in concord, make thee one that
dies of old age ; that thou mayest live in the lap of Aditi, guarded by
breath and expiration, a hundred winters.
Ppp. reads te for tvd in a, and dlrgham dyuh for sainviddne in b ; also rtyd for adiies
in c. The Anukr. takes no notice of the irregularity of the meter (9 -f- 1 1 : 10 -f- 12
= 42: a poor iri5iubh!)\ the insertion of ca tSx^t prthivt in a, and emendation to
jivdsi in c, would be easy rectifications. Lin order to bring the cesura of a in the right
place, read dydus and tvd each as one syllable and insert a ca also ^Iter pita. Thus all
is orderly, 1 1 + 1 1 : 1 1 + 12. The accent-mark over pr- is gone. ] / /a. •
5. This one, O Agni,^o thou lead for life-time, for splendor, (to^dear
seed, O Varuna, Mitra, king ! like a mother, O Aditi, yield {yam) him
refuge ; O all ye gods, that he be one reaching old age.
All thc/rt^rt-mss. read at end of b mitraordjan, as a compound ; and SPP, so gives
it ; the comm. understands rdjan correctly as an independent word, but perhaps only as
he in general is superior to the restraints of the /rt^/<ti-readings. Ppp. (in xv.) has/r/^t?
for -yam in b. The verse is found also in TS. (ii. 3. io3), TB. (ii. 7. 75), TA. (ii. 5. i),
and MS. (ii. 3.4). All these give krdhi for nay a at end of a ; TA. MS. have tigmdm
djas instead oi priydm r^tas in b ; TS. TB. MS. read soma rdjan at end of b, while TA.
offers instead sdfii gigdd/ii ; all accent jdradastis in d, and MS. leaves asat at the end
unaccented. In QGS. (i. 27), again, is a version of the verse, omitting naya in a, read-
ing (with MS.) tigmatn ojas and soma in b, and having aditih garma yam sat in c.
LVon Schroeder gives the Katha version, TUbinger Katha-hss., p. 7 2-3. J
r^^ff^y
il. 29- liOOK If. THE ATHARVA-VKDA-SAttHITA. 7^
29. For some one's long life and other biettings.
Foun«l in I'Aipp., Init in two widely M^paratrd parts: vsa. l-3in xi<., and %*«•. 4-7
in i. (next following our hymn 2K). V%ct\ in K.iu^. (27.9(1.) in a curious healing; rite
(or one Mm ted with thirst : the patient and a well person arc set hack to back, wrap|>rd
in one garment toj;ether, and the latter is made to drink a certain potion apparently
prepared for the other ; thus the disease will l>e transferred to the well person : a total
perversicm of the pro(>er meaning of the hymn. Af;ain, it is used (54. %^) \n \\\^ gtniJma
and ititft} ceremonies, and, according to the schol. (58. 17, note), in that of name-giving ;
and the schol. (42. 15) further add it in the rite on the return home of a Vedic student.
And vs. 3 accompanies in Vftit. (22. 16) the pouring of the il^lr milk into the clarified
soma in the fUtnbhrt at the a^mistoma sacrifice |^cf. comm. and Hillebrandt, Rituai-
lititfaiHr^ p. I 29 J.
Transdatcd : \Vel)er, xiii. 194 ; Ludwig, p. 493 ; GrifTith, I. 68; llloomfield, 47. 308.
1. In the sap of what is earthly, O gcxls, in the strength of Bhaga's
self (tanh) — length of life to this man may Agni, Surya — splendor may
Brihaspati impart.
Or it might l)e * in the s.ip of earthly portion, in strength of liody ' (a, b); 'what is
earthly * would refer to some characteristic prcwluct of earth applied in the rile ; the
comm. understands the gtnl Hhaga, but his opinion is of no authority. As Welier sug-
gests, the exchange of t\yttsyt\m here in c and tiyus in 2 • would rectify the meter of
both veises: in neither case does the Anukr. note an irregularity. Tpp* ^^^ here Avitr
asmtU, l>ut follows it with Jiff/u* vitna fM<)/J hrh-. Some of our mss., with two or three
of SlT's, accent Ayitsyam. The comm. takes titvAs in a for a nominative.
2. Length of life to him assign thou, O Jatavedas ; progeny, O Tvashtar,
do thou bestow on him ; abundance of wealth, O Savitar (' im)Krller ')» do
thou impel to him ; may he live a hundred autumns of thee.
'I'he ccmstruction of a dative with adhi-ni dht\ in b seems hardly admissible; IlK.
1^111.917 J, in cjuoting the passage, Tcads asmi^ apparently by an intended emendation,
which, however, does not suit the connection ; asmin is the only real help.
3. Our blessing [assign him] refreshment, jMisscssion of excellent
progeny; do ye (two), accordant, assign (him) dexterity, property {dni-
vhtit) ; [let] this man [be] concjuering fields with fwwcr, O Indra, putting
(Xr) othrr rivals beneath him.
The vir^e is difficult, and, as the parallel texts show, badly corruptetl. A{tr mat
(for \vhi« h \Vc!»cr ingeniously suggested tl^frttf) vs supported hy Jf/r mas in MS.
(iv. 123) and *l^ir me in TS. (iii. 2.S*) and K(,*S. (x. 5. 3) ; and all these versions give
it a \(*rli in b, r/.r«M«)//#, instead of the impracticable flual ifkaiiam^ with which our iilr/*
/•riil/i is in the same combination. The alteration of this to the sM*areatamt of TS.
MS., or tlie suittfutsttm of K(,'.S. and Tpp., would indicate that of dkttllam to -t^mt (as
mid<llr). and allow sense to )>e ma<le of the p.Vla. All the other texts, including l*pp •
give in a %H/*t,t;i}iixthn in%tr.i«l of the anomalous and bad sAi$pr.. TS. MS. K^'S.
have i)am for tLkkutm in b. The translation implies emendation ai jAyam \fit\o yJkyam
71 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK II. -n. 29
in accordance with the samjAyan of the other texts; but Ppp. has sam jayat, which
would be even more acceptable — only not with ahdm^ as all the four read for ay dm.
TS. MS., finally, combine anyah ddh- in d; K^S. elides '/ly^/i. In K^S., as in Vail.,
the first word is to be understood as d(ir; the comm. interprets both ways [^as from ^f />
« blessing ' or from di^ir * milk *J. He regards the du of sdupra- in a as simply ** Vcdic,"
and heaven and earth as addressed in b.
4. Given by Indra, instructed by Varuna, sent forth by the Maruts,
hath the formidable one come to us ; let this man, in your lap, O heavcn-
and-earth, not hunger, not thirst.
The ** thirst " of the patient in Kau^. has no more substantial foundation than the
last two words of this verse. The text in Ppp. is defaced, but shows srstas for ^istas in
a, and in c, d, after -thivf^ pari daddmi sa md. The Anukr. would have us scan
1 1 + 1 1 : 8 + 9 = 39, dividing before updsthe ; but the pada-vci'&%, mark the division
correctly, after that word.
5. Assign refreshment to him, ye (two) that are rich in refreshment ;
assign milk to him, ye rich in milk ; refreshment have hcaven-and-earth
assigned to him, [have] all the gods, the Maruts, refreshment [have] the
waters.
* Refreshment * is the conventional rendering selected for the ambiguous word urj and
its varieties. Nearly all our mss. (all save P. M.), and all of SPP's, have the false
accentuation devds in d ; both editions emend to devas^ which the comm. also under-
stands. So also with dyavdprthivi in c, for which the mss. have either dydvdprthivl (so
nearly all of ours and one of SPP's) or dydvdprihivi (so, according to SPP., all his save
one, with our O.D.); only our H. has the true reading, which is given by emendation in
both editions. The verse (10+ 10: 12+ 11 = 43) is far from being a good trisiubh.
6. With propitious things (f.) I gratify thy heart ; mayest thou enjoy
thyself {mud) free from disease, very splendid; let the two that dwell
together {? savds/n) drink this stir-about {man//id), putting on [as] magic
the form of the (two) A^vins.
The second half-verse is said apparently of a married pair, who are by supernatural
means to become as beautiful as the A9vins. Of course, the comm. follows Kau<;. in
understanding it of the sick and well man, and taking savdsin as ** dressed in one gar-
ment." The comm. supplies adbhjs in a, which is plausible (so Weber). Ppp. reads in ^^ J/^^Y *^
a tarpayantti^ in b modamdna^ care ^ha, and in d a^vindu. Several of SPP's mss. j « r^ ^a
give maihdm in c. *^
7. Indra in the beginning, being pierced, created this refreshment,
[this] unaging svadlui ; it is thine here; by it live thou for autumns, very
splendid ; be there no flux of thee ; the healers have made [it] for thee.
In d, a susrot is here rendered as if it involved the idea of dsrdva 'flux*; the d
seems to forbid its being taken to mean " let it not be spilled ** ; the comm., however,
so understands it: pracyuto tnd bhut. Some of our mss. (M.P.W.) read t^niyd at
beginning of C. The comm. has iirjam in b. Ppp. gives, in a, b, vidyo agram ilrjam
svadhdm ajaidtn dam esd.
ii. 30- BOOK II. THE ATHARVA-VIIDA-SAMHITA. 7^
30. To secure a woman*! love.
[/Vif/<f^t/i {Itlminimafiithktmukkikarnnaldmak). — Jfi-imam. Jlmmitu^kmm :
Found in PAipp. ii. (in llic vrrsc orHrr f, 5, 2.4, 3). l^scd hy Kau^. (35. 21 ff.), with
vi. 8 and other hvtnns, in a rite (onccrnin>; women, to );ain control over a certain person :
ind her liody smeared with it — which Is
)' putting salt on its tail.
97; Ludwig, p. 517; C«rill, 52, 97 ; Griflith,
i. 70 ; lUiKmifield, too, 311.
vi. 8 and other hvtnns, in a rite concerninj; wor
I a mess of various substances is prepared, ai
nJ muf h like the provcrl)ial catching of a bird by
* Translated: Weber, v. 218 and xiii. 197;
1. As the wind here shakes the grass off the earth, so do I shake thy
mind, that thou mayest l)e one loving me, that thou mayest be one not
going away from me.
The last halTverse is the same with the concluding pAdas of i. 34. 5 and vi. 8. 1-3 ;
SPI*. again alters the /<f</(i text to ti^a^X'^M (see under i-34. $); Tpp. has here for t
/T'J fttama /vtlyast, Tpp. reads in a, b bhumyi} ^dhi vattt$ ( ! ) /r-. We shoukl expect
in a rather hhitnyulm, and this the comin. reads, Inith in his exposition and in hit quota-
tion of the pratika from K.\u<;. ; but lUoomficld give^ no such variant in his e«lition.
2. May ye, O A^vins, both lead together and bring [her] together
with him who loves her. The fortunes (bhdj^a) of you (two) have come
together, together [your] intents, together [your] courses (vra/tl),
Notwitlistanding the accent of 'tuikutthas^ it does not seem |>fissible to understand
r/</in a as *if * ((»rill, however, so takes it; Wel>er as aUive). since the second half-
verse has no applic ation to the A^vins (we .should like to alter %t}m in C to mJjv). |^IIut
see lUoomfiehl J The translators take kAftiittt} in a as for ktlmimAu * the (two) lovers^*
which it might also well l>c ; the comm. says ktlwtful majrd. He also calls fraia simply
a kartftafuiman, which is very near the truth, as the word certainly comes from root
vrl (see JAOS. xi., p. ccxxix - TAOS. Oct. 1S84). Ppp. reads nestiai in b for vaJtsa-
ihas; and, in c, d, Sttrv*l *iij^tintUr tti^mtt/it saw cnkstinsi saw etc. Iloth here and in
x%. 5 bhtii*a might possibly have its other sense of /^enifalia^ ox imply that by double
meaning ; but the comm., who would l>e likely to spy out any such hidden sense, 9Ay%
simply dAt}t;rtiMt. |^In a, <ifT'i«i(i is mi.Hprinted. — W*s implications are that if x^mksaikas
were toneless it might l>e taken as a case of antithetical constructk>n and that there
would he no need to join it with </r/.J
3. What the eagles [are] wanting to say, the free from disease [are]
wanting to say — there let her come to my call, as the tip to the neck of
the arrow (lulfnatti).
The first half-verse is very obscure, and very differently understood by the transla-
tors; the ren<lering aliove is strictly literal, avoiding the violences which they allow
themselves : the comm. gives no aid : he supplies strhisayam i*aJtvam to r^/, and explains
anamit'tis by aft\i^tHO \irf>ttlh {} SIT. understamls ^rptJkk) kAmifamAh, i'|>p. has an
inde|>endent text : y*is sHfafnA raksAna t'«) na vaksana vA trAiAnpitam mammk : f4t/r#
*t'd n^mlwaitim yatMA — tiM) corrupt to make much of. The Anukr. declines to sanctkxi
the contraction {ah/ *va in d.
73 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK II. -ii. 3 1
4. What [was] within, [be] that without; what [was] without, [be]
that within ; of the maidens of many forms seize thou the mind, O herb.
In the obscure formalism of a, b the comm. thinks mind and speech to be intended.
LVVhy not rctas and (^ipas ?\ * Of all forms/ i.e., as often elsewhere, * of every sort
and kind.* L^'PP* ^^^^ds abdhyam for bdhyam yad bdhyam.\
5. Hither hath this woman come, desiring a husband ; desiring a wife
have I come ; like a loud-neighing (krand) horse, together with fortune
have I come.
That is, perhaps, * I have enjoyed her favors.* None of the mss. fail to accent ^yrfMa
in c.
31. Against worms.
\K(inva. — mahtdcvatyam uta cdndram. dnustubham : 2. uparistddvirddbrhatT ; j. drst
tristubh ; 4. prdguktd brhati ; j. prdguktd tristubh.'\
Found also in Paipp. ii. Used by Kau<;. (27. I4ff.) in an extended healing rite
against worms ; the detail of the ceremonial has nothing to do with that of the hymn,
and does not illustrate the latter.
Translated: Kuhn, KZ. xiii. 135 ff. ; Weber, xiii. 199 ; Ludwig, p. 323 ; Grill, 6,98 ;
Griflith, i. 71 ; Bloomfield, 22, 313. — Cf. Zimmer, pp.98, 393 ; Mannhardt, Dcr Bauin-
kultus der Germancn^ p. I2ff.; K. Miillenhoff, DenkmdUr deutscher Poesie aus dan
8. bis 12. Jahrhundert 3, i. 17, 181 ; and especially the old Germanic analogues adduced
by Kuhn, I.e. Griflith Q\ies Harper^s Magazine^ June, 1893, p. 106, for modern usages
in vogue near Quebec.
1. The great mill-stone that is Indra's, bruiser (tdrhand) of every worm
— with that I mash {pis) together the worms, as ^//^/z/^-grains with a
mill-stone.
Our mss. and those of SPP., as well as Ppp., vary, in this hymn and elsewhere, quite
indiscriminately between krimi and krmi^ so that it is not at all worth while to report
the details; SPP. agrees with us in printing everywhere krimi. Two of our mss.
(O. Op.), with one of SPP's, read dhrsdt in a. Ppp. gives at the end khalvdn iva.
The comm. explains krimfn by (^arirdntargatdn sarvdn ksudrajantun,
2. The seen, the unseen one have I bruised, also the knrflni have I
bruised ; all the algdndus^ the ^alunaSy the worms we grind up with our
spell (vdcas).
The distinction of -/ga- and -/d- in the manuscripts is very imperfect ; I had noted
only one of our mss. as apparently having algAndun^ here and in the next verse ; but SPP.
gives this as found in all his authorities, including oral ones ; and the comm. presents
it, and even also Ppp.; so that it is beyond all question the true reading. The comm.
explains it here as etanndmnah krimivi^esdn^ but in vs. 3 as ^OfiHamdnsadtisakdn jafiiftn
— which last is plainly nothing more than a guess. Instead of kururum in b, he reads
kurlram, with three of SPP's mss., and Ppp.; other mss. differ as to their distribution
of // and n in the syllables of the word, and two of ours (Op. Kp.) give kurnram. Two
of SPP's authorities give vdrcasd in d. Ppp. further has adraham for airham both
times, and ^alftldn in c. The omission of krimln in d would ease both sense and meter.
[As to sarvdn ch-y cf. iii. 11. 5, iv.8. 3, and Prat. ii. 17, note. J
il. ji~ nooK II. Tin: atharva-veda-samhita 74
3. I smite the ttii^dtnius with a Rreal deadly wea|x>n ; burnt [orj
unburnl. they have become sapless; those left [or] not left I draw down
by my s|k'1I (vtU), that no one of the worms be left.
It srcm^ harilly |M>\^il»lr |i» .ivi>ii! ammclin*^ at the end to mMt'tyil/tf/, i»a\%i%'e. I'|>p.
rr.ifis ill b tiuHtktitiun*}^ and it% \.\sX \\A\i-wc\sc is defaced.
4. 1 he one alon^ the entrails, the one in the head, likewise the worm
in the libs, the tivaskaiui, the vyadhvard — the worms we grind up with
our spell {x'tuas).
The romm.. ami twi» of SI'P'h mss., read in h pitiiieyam 'in the heel'; and SIM'.
aflinit^ into his text .Wtrr it kfimni^ at^.iinst the great majority of his \\\\\. and a|*ainst
the ionun.; none of our^ have it, Imt three (<). Op. K|>.) f;i%'e tfimltn, whiih looks like
an alwutive attempt at it. I or '•yttJhvtttam in c, I'pp. has yatatk ; all the mss. have
vyadhvat Am ; unless it in to Ik? emen»le<l to tyndvarAm (t f. vi. 50. 3, note), it must prob.
al»!y !»c derived fr«»m vyoJh 'pierre*; but the /iii/ifieading vi'^*it1hx'afAm |>oints rather
to viiiiihvan ; tiie comm. takes it from tlie latter, ami also, alternatively, from xn and
ittikvatti; avaskitvA is, according to him, avAi^amanawahhAva ; it seems rather to
tome fif>m v'liw Mear.' The expressif>n /^fAi^Nlta 'as heretofore defined* it not used
elsewhere in the Anukr. ; it is used !»y al>l)reviation for uparistAdx'irikti (vs. 2); but why
the two verses were not defmed together, to make re|>etition needless, does not appear.
I^In d. aj^ain. ktimin is a palpable intrusion. J
5. The worms that are in the mountains, in the woods, in the herbs,
in the cattle, within the waters, that have entered our selves (tanu) — that
whole generation (jdnimnn) <d worms I smite.
Two of SPP's mss. agree with the comm. in readint; // (or y/ SLi lieginning of €; and
the comm. has further ianvas for tanvnm. Ppp. inserts// l)efore vam/tM, and //(with
an tfittsAna U'fore it) also Inrfore ouuihlstt ; for second half-verse it f;ives yf*smAkmm
/an»i* {'i.e. tani'o) sihAma ntkrir (i.e. (alfur or iakrue) tudftis /Am Mamtm maAatJ x^sdk'
ftta. rfA^hkiA in the Anukr. apparently re|H'ats this time the superfluous Jkrst of vs. 3.
The anui'Akti [^5. J has 5 hymns and 29 verses, and the extract from the old Anukr.
says talo 'parAtAt or *parAHU,
32. Against worms.
[A'Amtt. — s.tiffiam. AHtty^iHtvatyam . Amutfit^Aam : i. j f^.hkmrtf^gAyatrt ; 6. 4f. fturJmtmik.\
This hymn oi rurs in PAipp. ii. (with vs. 5 put last), next l>cfore the one that here
precedes it. Kau<;. applies it (27. 21 If.) in a healint; reremimy af^ainst worms in cattle
l^'I'he materi.d ap|>ears in Ppp. in the order 1. 2 ab. 4 cdab. 5 ab, 6, 3 abc $ d- The
etpicssion of Kau<;. 27. 22, •* with the words // httlAh (vs. 5 d) at the end of the hymn,**
suiiqests the reduc tion of the hymn to the norm of the iKxik. 5 vss. (see p. 37). Thit
is l>orne otit by I*pp-. where the material amounts to 5 vss and ends with our 5 d.
Put what the intruded portions are it is not easy to say. 1 he parts missing; in Ppp.
are our 2 cd. 3 d. 5 cj
Translated: Kuhn, K/. xiii. 13A; \Vel>er. xiii. 201 : Ludwij;. p. 500; (^rill, 7, loo;
C«rif1'ith, i 72 ; HhMimficld. 23. 317. — C'f. Ilillelvramlt, liiia€kretii*matMtf^\^,^J.
I. I,rl the sun (dtiihti), rising, smite the worms; setting, let him
smito [thrm] with his rays — the worms that are within the cow.
75 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK II. -ii. 32
The change of adityAs to suryas in a would rectify the meter. But Ppp. has adityas;
its b reads sQryo nimrocan raqmibhir hantu; and for c it has ye *nias krimayo
gavf nah.
2. The worm of all forms, the four-eyed, the variegated, the whitish
— I crush (fr) the ribs of it ; I hew at {api-vraqc) what is its head.
The mss., as usual, vary between prsiis and prsthts in c. Ppp. has a different ver-
sion of the first half-verse : yo dvi^lrsd caturaksas krimiq ^drgo arjnnahy with our
4 c, d as second half. The Anukr. expects us to make the unusual resolution a-si-a in c.
3. Like Atri I slay you, O worms, like Kanva, like Jamadagni ; with
the incantation of Agastya I mash together the worms.
Ppp. rectifies the meter of a by reading tvd krtne ; it has agastyam in c, and, for d,
our 5 d. The Anukr. ignores the redundant syllable in our a. Compare TA. iv. 36
(which the comm. quotes, though the editor does not tell from whence): dtrind ivd
krime hanmi kdtivena jamddagnind : vt\vdvasor brdhmand ; also MB. ii. 7. I a, b :
hatas te atrind krimir hatas te jamadagnitid, SPP. writes in a attrivdd, Vss. 3-5
are repeated below as v. 23. 10-12.
4. Slain is the king of the worms, also the chief (sthapdti) of them is
slain ; slain is the worm, having its mother slain, its brother slain, its
sister slain.
«
Ppp. has in b sthapacis^ and in c, d (its 2 c, d) -trdtd for -tftdidy and -mahaid for
bhrdtd, TA* (iv. 36) has again a parallel verse : hatdh krimludth rAjd dpy esdm stha-
pdtir hatdh : dtho mdta ^Ihopitaj cf. also MB. ii. 7. 3 a, b : hatah krimlndth ksudrako
hatd ntatd hatah pita. The comm. explains sthapati by saciva,
5. Slain are its neighbors {? vcfds)^ slain its further neighbors {? pdri-
vc(as)f also those that are petty (ksu/Zakd), as it were — all those worms
are slain. ^^'/ ^^^/^-^ ^^^^"^^ , ^
The translation of d implies the emendation of te to tS; all the mss. have the former,
but SPP. receives the latter into his text on the authority of the comm., who so under- J^.//- /^/
stands the word. Ppp. reads in a, b *sya vcsaso hatdsas p-; our c is wanting in its
text ; our d it puts in place of our 3 d. Our ksullaka is a kind of Prakritization of '^
ksudraka, quoted from MB. under vs. 4 ; TA. (ib.) also has dtho sthura dtho ksudrah.
The comm. explains vei^dsas as " principal houses,'* and pdrive^asas as " neighboring
houses." We might suspect -ves-^ from root vis^ and so * attendants, servants.'
6. I crush up {pra-ft) thy (two) horns, with which thou thrustest ; I
split thy receptacle (.^), which is thy poison-holder.
The decided majority, both of our mss. and of SPP's, give in c kustimbham, which
is accordingly accepted in both editions ; other sporadic readings are kumsiimbham^
kusdbham ^ ka^dbham^ kusiibham, knsdmbham ; and two of SPP's mss. give sukum-
bham^ nearly agreeing with the sukambham of the comm. Our P.M.E. have vinud-
in b. Ppp's version is as follows : pa te ^^r nd mi ^rnge ydbhydy attain vitaddyasi: atho
bhinadmi tarn kumbhaiii yasmin te nihataih visath^ which in c is better, than our text,
and is supported by the MB, (ii. 7. 3) form of c, d : athdi *sdtn bhinnakah kumbho ya
esdm visadhdnakah. The metrical definition of the verse (7 + 7 *. 7+6=27) given
by the Anukr. is only mechanically correct.
ii. 33- BOOK II. THK ATHARVA-VEDA-SAttHITA. 76
33. For expulsion of yiksma from all parts of the body.
nur,iAuuttuhk ; y. fatkyif^anltt )
Fouml in I'Aipp. iv. Corrfn|x>nfl», with im|)ortant variations, to most of RV. x. 163
((oiiikI also in MT., the tnttntta\^x\ to A|)(«S.: see Winternitz, lc.,p.99). |^Namel)%
our vsA. I. 2, 4 ab \»ith 3 cd. and 5 correspond to M I*, i. I 7. I, 2, 3. and 4 : the Ml*, vrrsion
follows mii^t nearl) that of KV.J The hymn is called by Kilu^. (27.27) vihmrkm
(from \v 7 d). and is ptcs(ril>ed in a hcalini; ceremony ; it is also reckoned (54. II, note)
tt> thr <li f/Jirf i^tniii : but llie comm. makes up an anholtfij^a j^afta of it and itt. I f ; \\\ 13 ;
V. 30 ; \x. K, ^hiih is quite different from the one re|)ortcd by lUoomfield from thejftfWtf*
mAli} in note* to K.\u<;. 32. 27 \ot\ pa;;e 89, but a|*rees with the one re)M)rted In ll'i sup-
plcnuMit. pa>;e 334. ex( ept that for i. 10. 4 siiould be put iii. 1 1. 1 J. It (or vs. i) it abo
employed by Vait. (3S. i) in i\\c f>ti9 usawrtihtt.
Translated: by the KV. translators; and Kuhn, KZ. xiii. 66 ff . ; Weber, xiit. 305 ;
(ffiffith. i 74; HI<K>mru*ld, 44, 321. — Oldcnberg compares critically the KV. and AV.
versions, ///«* I/ymtwu Jes Hl'.^ i. p. 243.
1. Forth from thy (two) eyes, (two) nostrils, (two) cars, chin, brainy
tonj;ue, I eject (vivrit) for thee X\\ii ydksma of the head.
'1 hr vciv is KV. x. 163. i, witliout variant. Twi> or three of .SPT's mss., with the
comm., trad in b tubulat ; Ml*, has itbnl*}t \j\\ the Whish ms.J ; I'pp. substitutes for it
//J Ml}/ (i.e. iiivtli), has ///<f for il<//i/, and has for d iahltthi vt vayrmasL
2. Vrmn thy neck (j^rinis), nni>c (usfii/ias), vertebrx (Ulasif), back-
hone, (two) shoulders, (two) forearms, I eject for thee the pilsma of
the arms.
This, aijain, is precisely KV. x. 163.2. Ppp. reads in b antH-yitt, and in d mras/as
(for ^JA/#M I'll w) and vrAilmitti. The \A. ^riiuls for * neck ' designates, accordini; to
the ( omnv. tiie 14 small Inmes found there ; and he quotes i^W, xii. 2. 4. to for authority.
'1 hr ti**f//i,}s he declares to be certain xes^els (/#«!#//); the kikasdt^ to he jaifux*mks0*
t;it/*U//it*tt\ which is (piite indefinite.
3. l**orth from thy heart, hmp; (kliwtdn), hdliksm^ (two) sides, (two)
mdtasnas, spleen, liver, we eject for thee \\\^ ydksma,
Welnr conjectures ** fjall " fi»r halikiutt ( Ppp. hailksma)^ and •* kidney ** for matmsms.
The comm. dcrines khmAn as •• a kind of flesh-ma-ss in the neij»hlKKhoo<l of the heart,**
A>i/UtMit as ittttsttfnjfiakAt ttttutfuKtfuihAn Milfisti^ttti/at't^rstl/, and mtitdsmJkhktMm at
u *'fttty,ip.}HVit \a mf*tt Hiif'tilhhvilfh vf tyAbhvtlf** iiii$iimlf^asthapiilAiikArapAirikhkrMm imI.
F Of a. Tpp. has khmniis U /trdaytUAyiy. Of this verse, only the latter half has a paral*
Irl in K\'., namely x. 1^13. 3 c. d, where d is varied Xo yakuAh ptA^ihkyo X'i vrk4mi U,
The Anukr. fmdi.shly rejects all resolution in b.
4. I''orth fiom thine entrails, puts, rectum, belly, (two) paunches, /Aff/^
n.ivel, I eject ft)r thee the vdlstna,
' mm
The ( funm. explains y^Mttlhhyttt by iintraxtimtpaitkibkyo mttiamiiirapravaktimm*
mAfi;tbh\,th, and pltl^/s h\ htihh(%httOi\it malapMrM; and he quotes (,'11. xii. 9.1. J^
iihere many of the names in the verse occur. KV. (also Ml*.) has the lirtt half-venc.
77 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK II. -ii. 34
as 163. 3 a, b, reading hfdayat for uddrdi. For b, c, [d, J Ppp. substitutes our 6 b, c [d,
but with panyor in c and vrhdmasi at the end J. The Anukr. again rejects all resolu-
tions, which would make the verse a fair anustubh^ and counts 7-1-8 : 7 "♦"2= 29.
5. From thy (two) thighs, knees, heels, front feet, hips, fundament
(? bhdhsas)^ I eject for thee Xh^ ydksma of the rump.
In the translation here is omitted bhasaiiam^ the pure equivalent of bhasadyditty
and hence as superfluous in sense as redundant in meter. [^Is not prdpada *toe'?J
The verse is nearly RV. x. 163.4, which, however, omits bhasadydm^ and reads, after
^rdnibhydm^ bhasaddt^ indicating the whole region of anus and pudenda. Ppp. ends
the verse (like 2 and 4) with vrhdmasi. Several of our mss., with two or three of
SPP*s, carelessly begin with urn-, MP. has in h janghdbhydm for pdrsnibhydm^ and
in d dhvansasas. The verse seems to be scanned by the Anukr. as 8 -♦- 7 : 8 + 11 = 34.
6. From thy bones, marrows, sinews, vessels, (two) hands, fingers,
nails, I eject for thee the ydksma,
Pditl is distinctively * palm,' and might properly be so rendered here. Nearly all our
samhiid-m^s.^ with most of SPP's, omit the visarga before snAvabhyo. Ppp. has a
different a, c, d : hastebhyas te vtdnsebhyas . . . : yaksmam prstibhyo majjabhyo nddydm
virvahdmasi. The Anukr. scans as 7 + 7 : 9-1-8 = 31.
7. What [ydksma is] in thine every limb, every hair, every joint —
the ydksvia of thy skin do we, with Ka^yapa's ejector {ylbarhd) eject
away {visvatic).
The first half-verse corresponds to RV. x. 163.6. a, b, which (as also MP.) reads
thus : dngdd-angdl Idmno-lomno jdtdm pdrvani-parvani; and Ppp. agrees with it,
except in having baddham for jdtain; Ppp. also omits d. In d our P. M., with some
of SPP's mss., read vibar-^ as does also the comm. \juivarhatn ]. In our edition, an
accent-mark has fallen out under -flcatn in e.
34. Accompanying the sacrifice of an animal.
[A/Aarvart. — fd^upatyani ; fafub/uJgakaranam. trdistnbham.'^
Found in Paipp. iii.; and also in the Black- Yajus texts, TS. (iii. i.4»-3), and K.
(xxx. 8, in part). Used by Kau^. (44. 7) in the va^d^atnana ceremony, accompanying
the anointing of the vaqd ; in the same, vs. 5 accompanies (44. 15) the stoppage of the
victim's breath; and the same verse appears in the funeral rites (81.33), w*^^^ verses
from xviii. 2 and 3, in connection with the lighting of the pile. This hymn and the one
next following are further employed among the kdmydni^ with invocation of Indra and
Agni, by one who "desires the world" (59.21: "desires over-lordship of all the
world," comm.). In Vait. (10. 16), the hymn (so the comm.) is said on the release of
the victim from the sacrificial post in the pa^ubandha.
Translated: Weber, xiii. 207 ; Ludwig, p. 433 ; Griffith, i. 75. — See also Roth, Ucber
den A y. p. 1 4.
I. The lord of cattle, who rules over (tf) the cattle, the four-footed,
and who also over the two-footed — let him, bought off, go to [his] sacri-
ficial portion ; let abundances of wealth attach themselves to (snc) the
sacrificer.
ii. 34- BOOK II. Tin: ATHARVA-VKDA-SAMHITA. 7*
In the TS. version, this vcisr come* second (the vcncKwdcr t>«inff 5, f , 3,4. 2). Iloth
TS. and K. have at the lH*;;inninc r/iJ//i, which l*|>p. supports by reading fjJIm, and
which rrt tiries the meter of a : this ^ives (ptite a dtlTerent application to C, and a differ-
ent c.ist to the mcaniuj; of the vcrsr. IS. h.is alv) nt for r«'' in b, ajdw (*jrJm) for sti
in c and it ends (liettcr) with vA/AtmAnitiytt santu. K. (Welier) has for b laiutpAtia
uttt \e *ivif*t\tiah^ and for c itttlrlttlt ie yajtiiyam hhtlx^am yantu ; and Ppp. differs from
it only kh;;htly. addinf; t'<J after uta in b, and ending c with yajfliyA yAnti hkam.
Apparently it is the lord of cattle who is to l>e bril>ed to content himself with hit sacri-
ficial share, in lieu of taking; the whole. The Anukr. does not heed the irrei^ularities of
meter in a, b. ^ The Ppp. form of b seems to be catmspailAm uta vik ye dx^ipadak /J
2. Do yc, releasing; (pra-fptuc) the sccti of being, assign progress
{giUu) to the .sacrificer, O gods; what hath stood brought hither (i//^-
krta), strenuous (^a^amand), let it go ujxjn the dear path of the gods.
TS. (and K. ?) rectifies the meter of a (whose irrejjularity the Anukr. ignores) by read-
ing pramufiitimtlmls ; it also has jtvtim for ffivAm in d. I*pp- Rives ji;**/*! for feUts in •«
and in b makes dhattti and drt'As change places; in d it reads ///. Pfiydm may qualify
the subject in d : • let it, dear [to the gmlsj, go * etc. i'pAkrIa and {a^amikmd have their
usual technical senses, * brought to the sactiftce* and * efficient in the perfonnance of
religious duty*; the latter is explained by the comm. alternatively, as "being put to
death *' or •* leaping up *' (root |4i{ ) • l^fi'^^s is, according to him, Arst " the breaths, sight
etc.,'* then •• the gixls. Agni etc.*' \\\, Sieg discusses pAthas^ GHrupujAkaumrndt^ P- 9^ J
3. They who, giving attention to (ann-d/ii) the one being bound*
looked after [him] with mind and with eye — let the divine Agni at first
(dgrt) release them, he the all-working, in unison with (sam-rd) progeny.
T.S. and MS. (i. 2. 15) have fi,tdAyiiffit1»Js for tffdkytlnJj, and TS. follows it with
abkydiks' ; and in c combines ai;nis tan ; M.S. al!»o has (in, lioth read in d prajipaiit
for vi{vAktttmi\ ; and TS. ends with SAimvidAnAs. Ppp. has in c mumukia dn*As, and,
for d, //«fyi>/i»//; ptajAbhis sttm: idtlntlnt ; it then achls another \ct%e : yrsdm ppJn^
ma badhnantt baddham ^avAm pa^iintlnt uttt pdnrttsilnJIm : t'ndrat film (i.e. tJtt agfe
pra etc.). The < omm. reads in a vadhyamAnam, which is lietter ; he explains tamra-
rilMtts by J(M<r {abdAytttntlnits^ as if from the root ftl *bark*! Comparison with the
next verse seems to show the other animals, comrades of the victim, to l)e aimed at in
the verse. [^Lf. \Vel)er*s notes, p. 209, and esp. his reference to i^W. iii. 7. 49. — MS.
has fJn^ p. tin: .see al>ove, page xr.J
4. The cattle that are of the village, all-formed, being of various
forms, manifoldly of one form — let the divine Vayu at first release
them, Trajripati, in uni.son with progeny.
TS. and K. have tlranyis 'of the forest* in a. (or /^nlwyis, and TS. combines fJ/w/
tin in c. niul ends ag.iin with -'idtinah. TA. (iii. ii) has two versions (vss. 29,32),
of whi( h thr seron«l precisely agrees with TS., while the first has ^ftlmyit^ like our
text (.ind ttji^Hh tin in c). I'pp- i^ »|uitf' different : y*i tJrnnytls pa^ax'O vi(t'4ir^ps m/a
r/ kiimpA/t: . . . mutnukta df.ah ptaji\patt% ptajAbhts satkvtdAnAm.
5. l-tircknowing, let them first ( phna) receive the breath (pnfnd)
coming to [them] forth from the limbs. Go to heaven; stand firm with
thy ImhIIcs ; j;o to paradise (s:tirj;^d) by gtnl-traveled roads.
79 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK II. -ii. 35
Ppp. has devds lor piirve in a, idbhydm for divam in c, and at the end -M/f (^ivebhih,
TS. resids ^/iftan/i in a ; and TS. K. MS. (ii. 5. 10 c, d) invert the order of c and d, and
give the better reading dsadhlsu for divam gacha Lcf. RV. x. 16. 3J; MS. also has
hutds for svargam. The comm. makes piirve mean ** the gods previously stationed in
the atmosphere '* ; perhaps it is * before the demons get hold of it.*
35. To expiate errors in the sacrifice : to Vi^vakarman.
\Angiras. — vdifvakarmauam, trdistubham : j. brhatigarbhd ; ^^^.bhurij^
Found (except vs. 5, and in the verse-order 2, 3, 1,4) in Paipp. i. The same four verses
are found in TS. (Hi. 2. 8'-3 : in the order 2, 4, 3, i), and the first three in MS. (ii. 3. 8 ;
in the order 1,3, 2). The hymn is used by Kau^. (38. 22) in a rite intended, according
to the comm., to prevent faults of vision (drsltdosanivdrandya j Kc^ava says " to pre-
vent rain," vrstinivdrandya ; perhaps his text is corrupt), accompanying the eating of
something in an assembly. Its employment (59.21) with the hymn next preceding was
noticed under the latter. The comm. (differing in his reading and division of the rules
from the edited text of Kau^.) declares it to be used in all the sava sacrifices, to accom-
pany i\\Q purastdd /lomas (59. 23-4 : uttarena savapHrasidddhomdn)\ and vs. 5 is used
(3.16) with a purastdd homa in the parvan sacrifices. In Vait. the hymn appears
(9. 7) in the cdturmdsya sacrifice, with two oblations to Mahendra and Vi^vakarman
respectively ; and again (29. 22) in the agnicayana. In all these applications there is
nothing that suits the real character of the hymn.
Translated: Weber, xiii. 211 ; Ludwig, p. 302 (vss. 1-4); GrifTith, i. 76.
1. They who, partaking [of soma] (bhaks)^ did not prosper {rdh) in
good things, whom the fires of the sacrificial hearth were distressed about
(ami'tapya-) — what was the expiation (avayd) of their ill-sacrificc, may
Vi9vakarman ('the all-worker') make that for us a good sacrifice.
The translation implies emendation of duristis in c to -/^j, and of tan in d to tarn;
tdtn is read by the comm., as well as by TS. and MS., and SPP. even admits it into
his text, though nearly all his mss., as well as ours, read tan. Our P. and M. read
dvrdhus at end of a; TS. has dnrhus^ MS. duaqus. TS. elides the a of anu in b; it
begins c with iydm for j/rt, and ends it with ditristydi^ thus supporting our emendation.
Both TS. and MS. give kriwtu in d, and MS. puts it after vi^vdkarfftd. The pada-
mss. read in c avaoya, but SPP. alters h\s pada-text to ava-yak^ on the authority of the
comm. ; it is a matter of indifference, as the concluding element, in spite of the native
grammarians, is doubtless the root/<f. Ppp. gives duristd svistam in c, d. The various
readings, here and in the following verses, are in good part of the kind which show
that the text-makers were fumbling over matter which they did not understand. The
comm. is no better off. Here,* in a, he is uncertain whether to take nd as * as if * or
* not,' and to make vdsuni object of bhaksdyantas or of dnrdhus ( = vardhttavantas^
which is not b.id). j^The fires, pada b, are personified in like fashion at AGS. iv. i. 2, 3. J
The verse (12-f 12 :9-f 1 1 =44) is much more irregular than the definition of the
Anukr. admits.
2. The seers declare the master {-pdti) of the sacrifice by reason of
sin disportioned, distressed about [his] offspring. What honeyed drops
he offended in {} apa-rddli)^ with them let Vi^vakarman unite (sam-srj) us.
ii. 35- BOOK II. THE ATHARVA-VEDA-SAlGlHITA, 8o
his. hat in t tlie equivalent yAjamilmnm ; its b reads vikiya frnjim mnit^fym-
mAnAh ; while IS. has prajAyh) nirbhaktAi^h) anuUtftAmAnAk^ and Tpp. mirkkJk^atA
hkA^Ad ttHHtapyttmAnA. 'IS. and MS. make the lost drops only two: mmdkaxyAu
stftJtAti . . . iihhyAm^ witli tAti instead of yim^ and hence rarAdka, The translation
implies lorrection to madkavy'^ as read hy lioth the parallel texts and the comm. ;
SI'T's text agrees with nurn in reading tlie matkavy- of all the msA. (except three ol
SPr^s, which follow the comm). All the iamkttA\xi%%. make the alisurd combinatinn
nas Uhhth in d, seemtnj; to have in mind the participle nastd; ST I*, retains nasUkktt
in his text, while ours emends to nas tdbkis^ as f^iven in the comment to l^&L it. }t.
Tpp. h.is our second half-vctse as its 3 cd ; it reads madkavyAm Mti*tAm uf^m yd rmwAdk^
snm tnA tarAis srjad ': t^raJtitPmA. The comm. takes aMM and /«i//* in b as two inde-
pendent words ; he explains tj/^it rarAdha in c l>y antttrttAn krtavAn, which is doabtless
its vtrtu.il meaning. ^W's prior draft reads: "what honeyed drops he failed of" —
that is, * missed. 'J
3. Thinking the soma-drinkcrs to be unworthy of gifts (} adJmjrd)^
[though] knowing of the sacrifice, [he is] not wise (d/ttra) in the conjunc-
ture {snmttyd)\ in that this man is biiund having committed a sin, do
thou, O Vi<;vakarman, release him for his well-being.
The offense here had in view is far from clear. Instead of adAnyd (which occurs
only h(-rr), TS. has the apparently unintellif^ent ananyAm ; MS. reads aymjiktyim yajfli-
yAn wArty- * thinking the unfit for c»ffrrinjj to l>c fit for offering' (or r/*/ vfpsa): both
have ill b />rAftAsytt Un vit/ftAiyti, and i«i ///«!// for -y/, I'pp. gi%'es the second hall-verie
as 2 c. d. and ends it with /f«i mumu^dky enam. TS. M.S. have nojil/ at beginning of
C ; TS. gives ///«i( iakrvim mAhi^ and MS. //i<» mahAi otkrvdn ^, antl TS. rsAm for riJ.
The comm. explains adAttyAn as ajfiiitvApt^pftia dAnAnarkAft^ takes i»<f in b as particle of
comparison, and makes Siimttya e(|ual safht^rAma : ** as if one by confidence in the
stren;:th of his own arm should think the opposing soldiers despicable**! The verse
(I I -i- 1 1 : 10 f 12 =44) has marked irref^ularities which the Anukr. ignores.
4. Terrible [are] the seers ; homage be to them ! what sight [is] theirs,
ami the actuality {stUyd) of their mind. For lUihasfKiti, O bull (fnahtsd),
[\yc] bright (dytitpuint) homage; O Vi<;vakarman, homage to thee! protect
thou w^.
The tr.inslation follows our text, though this is plainly corrupted. TS. makes b less
unintelligiMe by reading iAJtsttstt$ for cAksttr yAi, and samdkAii for satyAm ; Tpp. has
in the h.ilfver\e only minor variants: bktma for f^k^fAs^ *sIh for if»/i», tamdrk for
Sti/ytim. In c, TS. has m,tki sAt for the senseless maktsn^ and the comm. presents the
same : I'pp reads hhtt\f>ate maki%Aya dtif : tutwo vi^:*-. TS. gives for d mfm^ r/'fT^f-
k*t9m»iiu j'f // /il/:' itifntln. In d all the /<r«/<t-mss. ha%^ the strange blunder /^lA«, for
f^Ahi x% re(]uirrd t)y the sense and liy the sit>ttkiiA\tx\\ and STI*. adopts the blunder,
thus gi\ing a /<i4/4i rc.iding tliat is inconvertible into his own samhttA. The comm.
takes f jjKrr in a as *• the breaths, sight etc..** and saiyam in b :k% yatkJrtkadar^i ; and
he founds on this intrrpret.ition the use in K.iu^. 38. 22, " against faults of vision.**
5. The sacrifice's eye. commencement, and face: with voice, hearing,
miml I make oblation. To this sacrifice, extended by Vi^vakarman, let
the g<Hls come, well-willing.
8 1 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK II. -ii. 36
The verse is found in no other text, and is perhaps not a proper part of the hymn ; it
is repeated below as xix. 58. 5. A few of the saMAi/d-mss. (including our O.) ignore
the a at beginning of d. The comm. is not certain whether the three nominatives in a
designate Agni or sacrificial butter ; but he has no scruple about making them objects
iojuhomi.
36. To get a husband for a woman.
[Pativedatta. — astarcam, dg^isomiyam, trdistitbham : i, bhurij ; 2^ j-^, OMUsfudA ;
8. nicrtpurausnih,^
Found (except vss. 6,8) in Paipp. ii. (in the verse-order 1,3, 2, 4, 5, 7). Used by
Kau9. (34. I3ff.) among the women's rites, in a ceremony for obtaining a husband;
vss. 5 and 7 are specially referred to or quoted, with rites adapted to the text. It is
further regarded by the schol. and the comm. as sigmfi^A hy pattvedana (75. 7), at the
beginning of the chapters on nuptial rites, accompanying the sending out of a wooer
or paranymph.
Translated : Weber, v. 219 ; xiii. 214 ; Ludwig, p. 476; Grill, 55, 102 ; Griffith, i. 78 ;
Bloomfield, 94, 322. — Cf. Zimmer, p. 306.
1 . Unto our favor, O Agni, may a wooer come, to this girl, along with
our fortune (bhdga). Enjoyable {jus(d) [is she] to suitors (vard), agree-
able at festivals (sdmana) ; be there quickly good-fortune for her with a
husband.
The text is not improbably corrupt. Ppp. reads in a, b sumatitn skandaloke idam
am kumdrydmdno bAagena; but it combines c and d much better into one sentence by
reading for d osath patyd bAavati {-in f) sub A age yam. The comm. explains sambAa-
las as sambAdsakaA samdddtd vd; or else, he says, it means AihsakaA pftrvam abAild-
savigAdtl kanydm aniccAan purusaA, He quotes ApGS. i. 4 to show that vard also
means paranymph. Justa he quotes Panini to prove accented yV/j/^f. In d he reads
usam^ and declares it to signify sukAakaram, ^Bcrgaigne, 7?^/. t//</. i, 1 59, takes
sdmana as = * marriage.* J
2. Fortune enjoyed by Soma, enjoyed by Brahman, brought together
by Aryaman; with the truth of divine Dhatar, the husband-finder I
perform (kf),
Ppp. has a mutilated first half -verse: somajusto aryamnd sambArio bAaga; and at
the end patirvedanam. The comm. understands in a braAma- to mean the (iandharva,
who and Soma are the first husbands of a bride (xiv. 2. 3, 4). He does not sec in bAaga
anything but kanydrfipam bAdgadAeyamj but the meaning " favors " is not impossible.
LBoth bAagam (" fortune " or " favors ") and pativedanam (the ceremony called
"husband-finder") are objects of krnomi ; which, accordingly, needs to f^e rendered
by *make' or • procure* for the one combination and by 'perform* for the other. It
is hardly a case of zeugma. — Bloomfield notes that sarhbArta contains a conscious
allusion to sambAaia, vs. i.J
3. May this woman, O Agni, find a husband ; for king Soma makcth
her of good-fortune ; giving birth to sons, she shall become chief consort
{mdhisi) ; having gone to a husband, let her, having good-fortune, bear
rule (vi-rdj).
ii. 36- BOOK II. THi: ATHARVA-Vi:i)A-SAttHITA. Si
'llirre ms%. (including our P.O.) read mJri in A. |^For vtWrsfa in A (Crmmmmr*
§ 850 a). J I 'pp. has viiirstM ; at end of b it rcadu /fi«w krnotH ; ami it chanj(t« the
tccond li.ilf-vrr<(c into an addnss by reading hhax'Asi^ and stthhaf^e x*i rAjA. The
comm. explains tnahtfl a.n mahatiiYi} {testhA bhAryA. The f(»urth |)ada is bett •canned
Atjtt^t^ittl, with resolution j^M /wm/ \jn insert si l>efore x*M#i^'«lJ.
4. As, 0 bounteous one (mtii^/tdvaft), this pleasant covert hath been
dear to the well-settled (sNsdti) wild lK*asts, so let this woman be enjoyed
of Hha«;a, mutually dear, not disagreeing with her husband.
The translation here involves emendation of the unmanageable susddA in b to smtd'
dAm, as suggested by iii. 22. 6. SPP. has in his /W<f-text sttuAdAM (as if nom. of
smuidat), and makes no note \x\yot\ the word — probably by an oversight, as of oiw fadm^
mss. only Op. has such a reading ; the comm. understands sttsAdAs, and explains it by
SMkhfna sthAtHfh yoi^Ydh 'comfortable to d\%cll in*; which is not unacceptable. The
comm. aUo has in a fHiii;/t,t:-AH, and in d iibhttAtihayantl ( - abhivaf dkayamit^ or else
puirtipa{vAtiibhih satnrddhA bba'.'ttntl). Ppp- has at the l)eginning yatkd kkatkrmm
mttj^hax'ttfi tArnr rut, and, in c, d. i'<f//> vttyitfh jttstA bAaj^asyA *stn smmpr-. All our
tamftitA mss. .save one (11), and half of SPP*s. give euth /r* in a -b; but the comment
to Prat. ii. 57 (|uotes this passage as illustration of the loss of its final visapj^a by ruis,
KAuq. (34. 14) evidently intends an allusi(m to this verse in one of its direitions: mrj^-
kkttpAd vtdyAm manlfoklAm * the articles mentioned in the text on the tacrtficial
hearth from a wild l>ea.st*s covert,* but the comm. does not explain the meaning. The
Anukr. ignores the redundancy f»f a sv liable in c [^Pronounce jujiA iyam and reject
mltlf — The use of sAtttpriya in dual and plural is natural: its extension to the
singular is rather illogical (<f. TS. iv. 2. 4), unless we assign intensive value to $Mm
(* very dear ').J
5. Ascend thou the boat of Hha^a, full, unfailinp; ; with that eause to
cross over hither a suitor who is according to thy wish.
Or pfiifilAtnyA may i>erhaps mr.in • rcs|>onsive to thy love.' Ppp. has in a J rnkit.
In b aitupaftis-, and for C, d tntyo pfisA httitm y^is pittis paiikAmyith. The comm.
understands upa- in c as an iiulependent word. With this verse, according to the
comm., the giil is made to ascend a properly prepared boat.
6. Shout to [him], C) lord of riches; make a suitor hither-minded;
turn the ri^ht side to every one who is a suitor according to thy wish.
CircumambuLition with the right side toward one is a sign of reverence. A krmmdaya
in a is perhaps a real causative, * m.ike liim call out to us *; the comm. takes it so. Hit
explanation Li>aj»e 3Wj of the ac( onip.in\ing rite is: "offering rite in the night, one
should ni.ike the girl step forward to the right.**
7. Here (is] gold, b<lellium ; here [\s] duksd, likewise fortune; these
have given thee unto husbands, in order to find one according to thy
wish.
AmI-\A {k f. AMlutt^itftd/it\ iv. 37. 3) seems to l>e some fragrant pro«luct of the ox ; or
it may perhaps come from w/'x 'sprinkle,* but not through mksam. The mss. vary here,
as e%'erywhrre else, in an indiscriminate manner 1>etween jC*'.C.C*'*' *"d f^ntfimlu ; here
the majority of ours have -l^^ and tiie gre.it majority of SPP's have XC' • but -p^' ^
83 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK II. -ii. 36
accepted (as elsewhere) in our edition, and -Ig- in the other ; Ppp. reads -Ig,, the comm.
'S.^'' ^'PP* ^^^^ further vayam nkso at ho bhaga ; and, in c-d, adhuhpatik-. The comm.
defines guggu/u as "a well-known kind of article for incense," and for auksa he quotes
from Ke9ava {kHu^ikasiltrabhdsyakaras) the couplet given in Bloomfield's Kau^ika on
p. 335 (but reading surabhln gandh&n kslram). The comm., p. 332, explains that with
this verse is to be performed a binding on and fumigation and anointing of the girl with
ornaments, bdellium, and dttksa respectively. LBR., iv. 947, suggest pratikdntyaya. \
8. Hither let Savitar conduct for thee, conduct a husband that is
according to thy wish ; do thou assign [him] to her, O herb.
The second nayatu is a detriment equally to sense and to meter ; the Anukr. counts
it to a, and \\\e pada-v^ss, mark the division accordingly. Emendation of tvdm in c to
tdm is strongly suggested. The verse hardly belongs to the hymn as originally made
up; there has been no reference elsewhere to an "herb"; nor does Kau^. introduce
such an element.
In the concluding anuvdka L6.J are 5 hymns, 31 verses: the Anukr. says accord-
ingly trin^adekddhiko *fttyah.
This is the end also of the ioMxih prapdt/iaka.
[_One or two mss. sum up the book as 36 hymns and 207 verses.J
Book III.
LThc third lx>ok is made up largely of hymns of 6 verses each.
It contains 13 such hymns, but .ilso six hymns (namely 4« 7,
13, 16, 24, 30) of 7 verses each, six hymns (namely 5, 6, 11, 15.
19, 29) of 8 verses each, two hymns (namely 12, 17) of 9 verses
each, two hymns (namely 20. 21) of 10 verses each, one hymn
(namely 31) of 1 1 verses, and one hymn (namely 10) of 13 verses.
See Weber s introduction to his translation, p. 178. The possi-
bility of critical reduction to the norm is well illustrated by hymn
31 — compare pages i and 37. The whole book has been trans-
lated by Weber, Indisclu SttuiUu, vol. xvii. (1885), pages 1 77-3 14.J
I. Against enemies.
\Athti9^^t*t. — tfnJSm^hanam. h^ihudnatyam. tfJisttthkam : ». viwiJgawkkd kkmrij ;
J, 6. aHMStubh ; J. vird//Mr*tujMik.]
Found in P.Vipp. tii.. next after the one which here follows it. In KAu^. (14.17),
this liytnn and the next are called mohantlni * confounders.* and are used in a rite
(14. I 7- 21 ) fur confounding an enemy's army ; its detaiU have nothing; to do with those
of the hvmns.
Translated: Ludwif^, p. 518; \Vel>er, xvii. iRo; Oifftth. i. 81 ; nioomfteld. 111, 325.
1. Let A^ni, knowing, ^o against our foes, burning against the imprc-
cator, the niggard ; let him confound (mo/ui/a-) the army of our adver-
saries (ftim) ; and may Jalavcdas make them handlcss.
Ppp. makes (it/nht and vti/:,}ft in a chanf^c places. Sl*l*. reports that the text used
by the conmi. reads fftt/i after tii^ntr l><)tli here and in 2. I A. The comm. fignaJifes
the lH*Kinnint; of the IkkjIc hy jjivinij aliMird etymologies of agtti Ai the length of nearly
a page. I'Ada c lacks a syllable, unless we allow ourselves to resolve s/'tta-im,
2, Vc, () Maruts, are formidable for such a plight; go forward upon
[them], kill, overcome! The Vasus have killed [them]; suppliant [arc]
these ; for let Agni, their messenger, go against [their foes], knowing.
'I he srinn.l half-vcfso is rendered literally as it stands. hxiK is certainly badly comipL
Ppp. has aininifjtim vaiavo luMhttchhyo a^nir hy eu\m vitivt\n f^ratjrttm {atrtim, which
is much nunc atte|»tal>le : w.lM wouM l>c 'for [us] who supplicate.' Dtiias seems to
have Mundere<l in here out of 2. t a. !.u<lwi{; emends mXthitis to -iim^ which would
improve c. Imu leave it unconnected with d. In our edition f^niiy ttu is an erratum for
pftityitH, wIikIi all the mss. reail. The comm., with his customary neglect of accent,
S4
^
8$ TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK III. -in. I
takes ugras in a as vocative. He takes fdfi^e as a locative (= apradhrsye samgrdma-
laksane karmani)^ against the testimony of the other passages where the word occurs,
and supplies matsahSyds. In b, he reads (with a couple of SPP's mss. that follow him)
fftrndtas^ and takes it (again against tlie accent) as accus. pi. Amlmrttan in c he renders
as an imperative. The meter of the vers'* (i i -f 1 1 : 12 + 13 = 47) is capable of being
fitted to the description of the Anukr. Lri-fio:i2-fi2=45j by duly managing the
resolutions. ^Aufrecht, KZ. xxvii. 219 (1885), reconstructs the vs., putting vtrddyaia
for titrndta in b and reading c, d thus: dmimrdan vdsavo ndthitaso agnir hi ^atrun
praty^ti vidhyan. Cf. Bloomfield, 326. — Roth gives (in his notes) mrdaia for
mrnata and (in his collation) yesdin for hy esdvt^ as Ppp. readings. J
3. The army of enemies, O bounteous one, playing the foe against
us — do ye (two), O Vrtra-slaying Indra, Agni also, burn against them.
The verse is found also as SV. ii. 121 5, which reads chairuyatim in b, and begins c
with ubhdti tain {Jam is read by the comm., and is called for as an emendation in our
verse); it also has the correct .accent amitrasenam^ which is found in only two of our
mss. (O.Op.) and three of SPP's; both editions read -sindm. In our text, dgnlq in d
is a misprint for agnig. LSPP. combines asman ch-^ badly: cf. i. 19.4, note. J
4. Impelled, O Indra, forwards Q pravdtd) by thy (two) bays — let thy
thunderbolt go forth, slaughtering {pra-inr) the foes ; smite the on-coming,
the following, the fleeing {pdjdnc) ; scatter their actual intent.
The verse is RV. iii. 30. 6 ; which, however, reads at the beginning /;vf sii te (as does
also the comm.), accents in t, pratlcS anucdh (and the comm. claims the same for our
text), and has for d vf^vath satydm krnuhi visiAm astu^ which is even more unintelli-
gible than our text. Weber proposes visvaksatydm as a compound, " turning itself in
every direction " ; this, however, makes nothing out of -satyam, Ludwig translates
** fulfil their design in all [both] directions," which is not very clear. Ppp. reads viqvam
vistam krtiuhi satyam esdm ; also quite obscure. The comm. takes satyam as
*' established, settled," and visvak krnuhi as " scatter, unsettle, make uncertain." One
would like to take visvak- as something like * contrariwise,' with the general sense " turn
their plans against themselves." Ppp. has further nuah for anucas in c.
5. O Indra, confound the army of our enemies; with the blast of fire,
of wind, make them disappear, scattering.
The defective first half-verse is completed by Ppp. in this form : manomohanaiit
krnva (i.e. krnavas f) indrd *mitrebhyas tvam. The second half-verse is also 2. 3 c, d.
The comm. explains dhrdjyd hy dahanavisaye yd vegitd gatis tathdvidhayd vegagatyd
tayor eva vd gatyd,
6. Let Indra confound the army; let the Maruts slay with force; let
Agni take away its eyes ; let it go back conquered.
All the mss. read indra, vocative, at the beginning of the verse ; but SPP's text, as
well as ours, emends to indrah 5-; and this the comm. also has. The comm. further in
c dhattdm instead of dattdm.
iii. 2- BOOK III. Tin: ATHARVA-VEDA-SAttHlTA. 86
2. Against enemies*
[A/Aart'an. — i/nJmpAttftitm. hakuiifftityutm. trtltstuhham: 2^4. mmusitthk.']
Found in iWipp. iii., next )>i*f(>rc the hymn here preceding. Used in KAu^. only with
the latter, as there explained.
Translated : Wel>er, xvii. 183 ; (Griffith, i. 82 ; lUoomfield, 121, 327. — ill, Beq^aigne-
Henry, Afanufl, p. 139.
1. Let Af^ni our messenger, knowinf;, go against [thcm]» burning
against the imprecator, the niggard ; let him confound the intents of our
adversaries; and may Jatavedas make them handless.
All the mM. have in a the false accent praty /tu (ficemingly tmitatrd from 1.2 d,
where A/ requires it), and SIT. retains it ; our edition makes the necessary emendattoa
to firdi/ etu, Tpp. appears to have {atfQn instead of vidvAm at end of a.
2. Agni here hath confounded the intents that arc in your heart; let
him blow {lihatpt) you away from [our] home ; let him blow you forth in
every direction.
rpp. has dhiimMu for -nitttu hoth times. The comm. renders amUmnkat by mokm*
vatu^ in accordance with his diKtrinc that one vcrt>al form is e(|ui%'alent to another.
3. C) Indra! confounding [thcirj intents, move hitherward with [their]
design (ilit't/i); with the blast of fire, of wind, make them disappear,
.scattering.
The second halfvrrsc is identical with 1.5 b, C Pada b apparently means *takc
away their desif^n, make them purposeless * ; the comm., distorting the sense of tfrr-JiV,
makes it si^jnify *'ko a^^ainst [ihcir army], with the dcsif^n [of overwhelming it].'*
i'pp. reads Aktitvi} *<//// (i.e. -/rdr tuiht f). In our edition, restore the lost accent-mark
over the •«//<! of itttita \\\ a.
4. Go asunder, vf designs of them ; also, ye intents, be confoundcti ;
also what is today in their heart, that smite thou out fiom them.
All the m^s. h.ive in b uttani^ as if nnt vmative, and SIT. retains the accent, while
our text emends to it/t*lfn; the (omin. un<lerstands a vocative. The comm. further
takes tytH't't/ttvAtf .is one wntil. expLiinin^ it as cither vh uii,f/ulh %amkatpAh or else
(r|ualif\iM^ tfeiilt understoo*!) as ^.ttmitAw vtvidhAktityttip^dakAh. (^Kor (L fatlier,
*lhat of them smite thou out from [themJ.'J
5. C<»nft)unding the intents of those yonder, seizing their limbs, O
Apv.'i, go away; g«> foith against [them] ; consume [them] in their hearts
with jungs (^i'7«i); pierce the enemies with seizure (^fti/tt)^ the foes
with darkness.
*I he verse is KV. x I'^j. 12. wliich re.ids in t uttAm praiitohhAyamU^ and, for C
aniihrtti} \nitfAs /iiffi,tu} Sit,*tft/,hN ; and SV. (ii. I 21 1) and VS. (xvii. 44) agree with
KV. lloih /tti/<i texts ^ive in b,i;'^>"<f. .is impv. ; but the word is translated al>ove (in
accordaiue with (ir.issmann's suj^Kestion) as aor. pple. fem. jff A«lif*/, l>ecause this coa»-
hines so mti< h better with the follow inj; pJrr *At. A number of the jtfMAi/J-msju
87 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK III. -Hi. 3
(including our P.s.m.E.s.m.I.H.p.m.) make the curious blunder of accenting apvl in b:
the comm. explains it as a pupadevatd^ adding the precious etymology apav^yayati
apagamayati sukham prdnditq ca. |_ Weber, ix. 482, thinks apvd has reference to
impurity (root pit) and to diarrhoea as caused by fear. To Weber*s citation (xvii. 184) C y 1/ *
from the Purana, add the line near the beginning of the Bhlsma book, MBh. vi. i. 18, J^ A^ '' '' ^
fru/vd iu ninadath yodhah ^akrn-mHtram prasusruvuh.\ The Anukr. ignores the j *Aaa^z^^
redundancy in a ; emendation to citta would remove it , /
6. Yonder army of our adversaries, O Maruts, that comes contending / ...
against us with force — pierce ye it with baffling darkness, that one of * '
them may not know another. /
The verse is an addition (as vs. 14) to RV. x. 103 LAufrecht, 2d ed'n, vol. ii. p. 682J,
but forms a proper part of SV. (ii. 1210) and VS. (xvii. 47). RV.VS. read in habhydUi
nas (for asmdn &ity abhi) ; SV. has abhyiti; all have in c giihata for vidhyata;
and with the latter Ppp. intends to agree, but has guhata. For esiim in d, RV. gives
amisdMy SV. eUsdm^ and VS. ami and accordingly at the end j'dndn. It takes violence
to compress our b into a tristubh pada.
3. For the restoration of a king.
\Atharvan. — ndttddevatyam uid ** gueyam. trdistubham : j. ^-/. bhurik patikti ; j, 6. anustubh^
Found in Paipp. ii. (our vs. 5 coming last). Used by Kau^. (16. 30), with the hymn
next following, in a ceremony for the restoration of a king to his former kingdom. In
Vait. (9. 2), vs. I accompanies a morning oblation to Agni anlkavant in the sdkamedha
rite of the cdturmdsya sacrifice ; and again (30. 27), vs. 2 is used at the end of the
sdutrdmant ceremony.
Translated: Ludwig, p. 441 ; Weber, xvii. 1J55 ; Griffith, i. 83 ; Bloomfield, 112, 327.
— Cf. Bcrgaigne- Henry, Manuel^ p. 140.
I. He hath shouted Q kraud) ; may he be protector of his own here;
O Agni, bend apart the two widened firmaments (rodasi) ; let the all-
possessing Maruts harness (yuj) thee ; lead thou hither with homage yon
man of bestowed oblation.
This is a very literal translation of the obscure verse, which is plainly an .adaptation
or corruption, or both, of a RV. verse in a hymn to Agni (vi. 1 1.4 : it is repeated, with-
out variant, in MS. iv. 14. 15) : ddidyutat sv dpdko vibhava *gne ydjasva rddasl urftci:
dyum ltd ydiii ndmasd rdtdhavyd atljdnti sitpraydsam pdfica jdndh; and, what is very
noteworthy, the latter half-verse of RV. is decidedly more closely reflected in the Ppp.
version: amuih naya namasd rdtahavyo ynjanti suprajasam paflcajandh; Ppp. has
also bhavat at end of a. It could not be expected to find concinnity and sense in a
verse so originated ; the address seems to be changed from Agni to Indra, and some
sort of comparison aimed at between the latter and the reinstated king. The /^rt'Iu-text
divides in a svaopSh^ and, as the word may be a part of the adaptation |_of the original
to the purpose of this hymnj, the translation so treats it, instead of substituting, as
Weber and Ludwig do, suoapah; the comm. explains it both ways : n'/tkfydfidm pra-
jdndm pdlakah sukarmd vd. The comm. makes the king subject of dcikradat in a,
apparently takes vy^casita in b as one word (= vydpnuhi)^ ivd in c as designating
Agni (^yuhjantu — prdpnuvantUy tvatsahdyd bhavaniit)^ and avium in d as the king.
iii. 3- HOOK III. THi: A THARVA-VIIIM-SAttHITA. 88
The Anukr. ignore* thr ptn^ittl pA«U (c) \jnf IcUi It offset A counted as io!J. |_The
usual com|w)uiirI \% jvtl/^iis; hut j:'-«i/«/i, thou;*h not {|Uotablr, is c|uite possible. J
2. India, the inspired one, however far away, let the ruddy ones set
in motion hither (fl-nvftviivi) in order to friendship, when the gods ven-
ture (?) for him a i^tiyatfl, a hrhati, a sonj; (arkd)^ with the sdutrdmani
(ceremony).
This vrrsc is nrarly as ohst ure as the prcccdin;;, and probably as hopelessly corrupt
The ••rutldy ones'* in A an*, according; to the comm., priests (f^^'V); Weber under-
stands *'h()isrs/* Ludwi^ '* somas.** The comm. takes iiAdhrtanta in d first from r(x>t
iihr ( ! - atihAfiiyapt)^ then apparently from tihr $ {/ftin'am vistttstt^VttYttvam indram
puHtih itip Vitwtyiti'of^ettifft alurvan^ citing TS. %•. 6. 3«); TpP- ^** dadr^ania ; perha|«
dadfhauttt mi;;ht l)e made to yield the l>est sense; restoration of the augment would fill
out the dc*lkient meter, which tlie Anukr. fails to remark. K. conjectures ** made firm
for him the mighty ^^'ilKii/f/ as l><>lt.** Alniut half the mss. (including our llp.E.l.ll.K.)
accent in b sakhyhya ; the same uncertainty as to this word ap|)eart elsewhere.
3. Vox the waters let kinj; Vaiuna call thee; let Soma call thcc for
the mountains; let Indra call thee for these subjects (vi()\ becoming; a
falcon, fly tmto these subjects.
•• For** may of course l>e ** from '* in a ami b, as prrfrfrefl by (^the four J translators
and comm. l*pp. roads, in a, b varuno juki^va somas lv*k *yitm kxuiyaU ; and again tn
c, tndias ivd *yam hvayati. With the proper resolutions, this %'erse is a decent tftsinhk;
the Anukr. scans it as 11 -f* 10: 10+10 = 41. Ibe verses in our text are wrongly
numl>ered from this one on.
4. Let the falcon lead hither from far (/nifa) the one to be called,
living exiled in others' territory (IsiUra) ; let the (two) A<;vins make the
road for thee easy to ^o ; settle together about this man, ye his fellows.
The translation (allows both prcvinus translators, and the comm. (~ kvAtaxyam)^ in
implyin*; htUyam in a instead of Mtt'ytim * oblation ' ; \rt I'pp. reads Aa7-is, which fu|>-
ports katytifft. The comm., \%ith several of .Sl*l'*t mss., has avarntidkam in h; for
l^the tcchni(alJ«i/<i^i/«/«M</f ntfttu (and txra ji;am, 6 d) compare es|>eci4lly 1*11. xii. 12.6.
5. Let thine op|)onents call thee ; thy friends have chosen [thee] against
[them] (} frdti)\ Indraand-Agni, all the goils, have maintained for thee
security (Is/ma) in the people C'/f).
The comm , and a few of SPP's mss. that follow it, have at the l>eginning vdyamtm
(= st)fft/,t/yffta sfVttnttl'n), Several MwAiAlniss. (including our I'.M.OOp.) read
pfattji\ti*\h : I'pp. has the easier ri-.idini» p*iri%a jauAh^ with hvayamti for -«/*, and, in
b. v%x9uttA for ai9 utia ; also it ends ^%ith tidtdk*t9«tt. As in more than one other rase,
all the mss. act rtit t*' in the set on«I haU-vers<*. and the ^ada Xtxi puts its «loul>le stroke
of |»Aila division l»r(ore the wonl -. am! lM>th eihtions read i/ , but it should plainly l>e U^
as our translation rendets. an>l as the lomm. also esplams it. The comm. combines tn
\i pr»tttfnttfAi, m.ikini; it mean " opiiosini; fiiemls**; the combination of vr 'choose*
with ffatx is sttan^e and obscure
6. Whatever fellow disputes thy call, and whatever outsider — making
89 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK III. -iu. 4
him go away (dpdflc), O Indra, then do thou reinstate {ava-gamaya) this
man here.
The comm. explains sajdtd and nUtya as samabala and nikrstabala (!) Las at i. 19. 3 J,
and ava gamaya as bodhaya. The Anukr. takes no notice of the metrical deficiency
in a; emendation to -vddati would fairly rectify it. LFor ava-gam^ see note to vs. 4. J
4. To establish a king.
\^Atharvan, — saptakam. dindram. trdisUtbham: i.jagatt; 4^ ^.bhurij^
Found in Paipp. iii. Used in Kauq. only with the next preceding hymn (as there
explained), although the two are of essentially different application, this one referring
to a king who has been called or chosen, and has to be inaugurated as such. In
Vait. (13.2), in the agnistoma sacrifice, vs. 7 accompanies, with vii. 28, oblations to
pathyd svasti and other divinities.
Translated : Ludwig, p. 252 ; Zimmer, p. 164 ; Weber, xvii. 190 ; Griffith, i. 84 ; Bloom-
field, 113, 330. — Cf. Bergaigne- Henry, Manuel^ p. 141.
1. Unto thee hath come the kingdom ; with splendor rise forward ; [as]
lord of the people (yiqas)^ sole king, bear thou rule {yi'rdj)\ let all the direc-
tions call thee, O king ; become thou here one for waiting on, for homage.
The translation implies in a agan^ which is very probably the true reading, though
the /rtrtVi-mss. divide tvd :gan. The metrical redundancy in a, b is best removed by
omitting praii (for which Ppp. and the corhm. read prdk)^ which seems (as meaning
also * in the east *) to have been added in order to make yet more distinct the compari-
son with the sun implied in ud ihi; the padaAzxK reckons the word wrongly to b, and
the comm. renders it pftrvam * formerly ' ; he takes vi rdja as ** be resplendent,** which
is of course possible. The verse has but one reaiy^j-^tf/f pada (a). ^With d (= vi. 98. t d),
cf. ndmasopasddyas, used twice in RV.J
2. Thee let the people (v/fas) choose unto kingship (rdjyd), thee
these five divine directions ; rest (fri) at the summit of royalty, at the
pinnacle (kakiid) ; from thence, formidable, share out good things to us.
The verse is found also in TS. (iii. 3-9*) and MS. (ii. 5. 10), with nearly accordant
differences of reading: gaito *vrnata rdjyaya in a; ivam havanta (MS. vard/tntiti)
marutah svarkah forb; ksatrdsya kaktibhi {^A^. kakiibbhik) qiqriydnds inc. TB.,
moreover, has the second half-verse (in ii. 4. 77; the first half is our iv. 22. 2 a, b),
agreeing with AV. except by giving ksatrdsya kakubhis, Ppp. further varies the
word by reading kakudhi; it also has in a vritnidm^ and for d ato vasuni vi bhajdsy
ugrah. A number of the mss. (including our O.Op.) read in a rajydya, as, indeed, they
generally disagree Lin threefold wisej as to the accent of this word. P.M.W. have in a
vrsatdm. The comm. rendors vdrsman by (arfre^ grayasva by dssva.
3. Unto thee let thy fellows come, calling [thee] ; Agni shall go along
as speedy messenger; let the wives, the sons, be well-willing; thou, for-
midable, shalt see arrive {prati-pa^) much tribute.
Ppp. has in a, \i yantu bhuvatiasya jdid ^guir dftto *va jarase dadhdti\ and combines
in cjdydsp-. The comm. finds in b an incomplete simile: "thy messenger, unassail-
able like fire, shall ** etc.
iii. 4- BOOK III. THE ATHARVA-VEDA-SAlGlHITA. gO
4. Let the (two) A^vins thcc first, — let Mitra-and-Varuna both, let all
the gcKis, the Maruts, call thcc ; then put (Jtr) thy mind unto the giving
of good things ; from thence, formidable, share out good things to us.
With c compare RV". i. 54. 9 d, which rcctifiet the meter by readinj( krri*m. The
second h.ilf- verse is quite different in l*pp. : sajAtHmAm mailhyamestki *ka masyd (cf.
it. 6. 4 c ; iii. 8. 2 d) sn kittn savite vi rAja, I'hc third pikda is made bhurij by the
chance of krsva to kmusva.
5. Run forth hither from the furthest distance; propitious to thee be
hcavcn-and-carth l)oth ; king Varuna here saith this thus; he here hath
called thee ; [therefore {sd)\ do thou come to this place.
Tpp. has babhtitdm for ubht stAm at end of b. and ahvat sxtnam eki at end of d.
SIM*, reports all his/<f</<f-mss. as reading; aha instr.id of ilka in c; no such blunder has
been noted in ours. His ms. of the comm. also api>ears to have dkvat in d, trat doubt-
less only by an oversight of the copyist (under the next verse it gives akvai in an iden.
tical phrase of cx|K>sition). M.S. (ii. 2. 1 1 ; p. 24. 3) f;:tves a fratlka reading i friki
paramdsyAk parAvAuih^ while no corresiK>nding verse is found in its text — or else-
where, so far as is known, unless here.
6. Like a human Indra, go thou away ; for thou hast concurred {sam-
jM) in concord with the castes (?) ; he here hath called thee in his own
station ; he shall sacrifice to the gods, and he shall arrange the people
(t'/frtj).
The translation of this obi^ure and difficult verse implies much and venturesome
emendation in the fuNt half: namely, in t, indra iva manusyAk^ and in b \*ArnAtt.
Weber also takes mamu^yas ta meant for a nom. sing., and renders it ** menschenge-
staltet '* ; the other transLitors understand manuiytk v/^as, as does the Pet. Lex. The
l*pp. ver>ion, httint it/am manu^ya pre *ki, suggests -fyak, and is decidedly better In
prehi (to be resolved into pr e hi^ whence perhaps the corruption to pareki)\ the
repeated vocative indra^ndra (^> the /#///#i-text) is not to l)e tolerated. For b^ l*PP-
has sam hi yajfliyAs iv<l vartiNena Sttmi'idAmah, which is tiK> corrupt to give us aid ;
the emendation to nirnAts is a des{>erate and purely tentative one. as there is no evi-
dence that vArna had assumc<l so early the sense of * caste.* Weber suggests that
varmna hrre is equal to vttran$i * elector * ; Zimmcr takes it as virtually for dn*Ats : Iwth
entirely unsatisfactory. Tpp. ends the verse with so ka/payAd di^ah. To the comm.
there is no difTiculty ; the rej>eatc<l vocative is out of reverence (AdarAriham) ; mamm-
fyAs is a Vedic irregularity for -riilw, or else c|ualifics ptajAs understood ; the plural
vart/ftAts is p/nr. M4t;rsfaftit/s for Zitmnena ; ka/payAt, fmally, is rfasvsvydpSrrjm
miyyfiktAfn. The Anukr. passes without notice the yii^^i// |>ida d, it being easy to read
the verse into 44 syllaMcs.
7. The wc.illhy roads, of manifoldly various form, all, a.ssembling,
have made wide room for thcc; let them all in concord call thee; to the
tenth (decade of life] abide hcie formidable, well-willing.
PathyA frxttttt, divinitirs of gi>od roads and welfare, arc explained by the comm. as
paiho *mipetA mAfj^ahtUikAt tnya etatiamjfiA dfvaiAh ; or else paihyAs im p^tki sddk-
avah, and rf tails is Apas, Hoth editions re.id in d %'a^e *hA, l>ut the comm., with
Sl'r*» {potrixas V. and K., read v*ttf *hA, and the translation implies this. Ppp. offers
91 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK 111. -Hi. 5
no variants for the verse. Many of our samMd-mss, (P.M. W.E.I. H.) retain the final
visarga of samviddndh before hif- in c; SPP. does not report any of his as guilty of
such a blunder. [V, and K. recognize va^thd as a variant. J
Ppp. appends another verse : yadi jarena havisd datvd gamaydmasi: atrd ta
ittdras kcvallr vt\o balihrtas karat (cf. RV. x. 1 73. 6 c, d).
5. For prosperity: with a parni-amulet.
\^Atharvan, — astakam. sdumyam. dnustubham : i. puronustup tristubh ; 8.virddurobrhati.\
Found (except vs. 8) in Paipp. iii. Used by Kau9. (19.22), with viii. 5 and x. 3, 6,
to accompany the binding on of an amulet for general prosperity {Jejobaldynrdhanddi-
pustaye^ comm.). And the comm. quotes it from Naks. K. [_comm. should say (,'anti K.
— BloomfieldJ as employed in a mahd^dnti named dfigirasl, \\x\ the prior draft, W.
writes •* For success of a king: with" etc. as title of this hymn. Its place in the
collection, next after iii. 3 and 4, and its second vs., seem to justify that title. J
Translated: Weber, xvii. 194 ; Griffith, i. 86; Bloomfield, 114,331. — Vss. 6 and 7,
Zimmer, p. 184, with comment.
1. Hither hath come this/rzrw^-amulet, strong, by strength slaughter-
ing our rivals ; force of the gods, milk of the herbs, let it quicken me
with splendor unremittingly.
Ppp. has for d mayi rdstram jinvaiv aprayucchan. Apraydvan in d, which is read
by all the mss. (hence by both editions) and the comm., is unquestionably to be emended
(as suggested by BR., v. 1015) to -ydvam \jSkt. Grains § 995 b, root^w ; cf.^i/i://J ; the
word is quoted in the Prat, text (iv. 56), but not in a way to determine its form {apra-
ydvddi'). As the later verses s\\ovi^ parna is to be understood here as the tree of that
name {^Bntea frondosa : comm. pald^avrksa). The comm. raises no objection to tipra-
ydvan^ and explains it as either fudm vihdyd *napaganid san (with irregular exchange
of case-forms), or else apraydtar^ i.e. sarvadd dhdryamdna,
2. In me [maintain] dominion, O /rzm^-amulet, in me maintain wealth;
may I in the sphere of royalty be familiar Q nijd)^ supreme.
Compare the nearly corresponding vi. 54. 2, which suggests emendation of nijds to
yujds L* may I be supreme above [any] ally or fellow-king ' {yuj'ds as abl.) J. Ppp. has
rdstram for ksatram in a, and its d reads yajd bhuydsam uttard, supporting the emen-
dation. Our I5p. reads in c -vargr^^ as some of the mss. do in the other occurrences of
this obscure word : the comm. explains it by dvarjane svddhlnl-karafu * appropriation/
and nija by ananyasahdya. \\\K. give *bestandig* for nija.\
3. The dear amulet which the gods deposited hidden in the forcst-trce
— that let the gods give to us to wear, together with length of life (dyus).
Ppp. has for b vdjim devdh priyam uidhimy and its second half-verse is tarn ma
indras sahd **yusd tnanith daddtn bhartave.
4. The pantd, Soma's formidable power, hath come, given by Indra,
governed {(ds) by Varuna ; may I, shining greatly, wear it in order to
length of life for a hundred autumns.
The translation implies emendation in c of the unmanageable priydsam to b/tn'ydsam,
an obvious improvement, adopted also by Weber, and supported by the reading of Ppp.,
f
UJ^
iii. 5- HOOK III. Tin: ATIIARVA-VEDA-SAMHITA. 92
iam ahitm hihkarnti : tlic comm., loo, thouj^h rending friy^ g!o»c» it wilh hhriyAMm
ti/t.lftivfYam. Ill b, I'pp. has sakhyas (or ^hfas. The cumm. fincU in s^masjra fmr^
nAt ill a allusion tf> the origin of thr f>*t9 naWe^ from a leaf (p*trna) of soma, and
<|Ut>tr!i fi>r it TS. iii. 5. 7*. AAttrnthhts in c he u^es as -iftfi///, qualifying /t§m. The
mrtriial drhnition of thr vrrse is wantini; in the Anukr. mss. ; wc may call it a muri
ifntuh'i. I^Sre \Vel>er*s note on/<i/«il.J
5. The /fi/7///-amiilct hath nscciulcd me, in order to f;reat unharmed-
iR'ss. so that I may be siipeiior to patron (tirvtittttin) and to ally {sawx'iJ).
.Vi///>:7i/ is Iktv taken as rorrcs|>«)n<ling noun to the common mIjccUv e samvidimd
(thr Pel. I.ex., •• |M)sses.si<m " ; Wclwr. "favor"); the comm. makes it samSmajMmSi
or iittft,t/ut/i1/; ami tiryttrttttn, accordini; to him, comes fr(»m aflHyatnayaii, and mcaaa
itifhiktiha/tih put M/ffaJAfi} m. I'pp. comliines Ma/iyJ ^fist- in b, and has for d mammsjrS
atf/ii siifh^ittah (nr Stiwf/ttiftt/i). All tlie mss., ami SI'P's text, read uiiards in c;
our utttiftts is a necessary eniemlation. [_As to arydMJn, cf. Weber's note. J
6. They that are clever chariot-makers, that arc skilful smiths — sub-
jects to me do thou, O /#////</, make all people (jdfia) round about.
I'pp* iKT^ins Iff/ Afi'.Cf} /f ft /<////-, and its second half-verse xssarvdns ivtl * mrma ramtiMsy^
*/iir////> /-/'/;/ meJitiam. The loniin. rcnd<-rs ti/dvtiuds Uy tfAfvatd mJ/jiJtJJk 'fisher-
inrn,' and ^ives the technical ddinition of the caste of rathakAras, Weber (p. 1961!.)
treats with much fulness of these and other caste matters. I'pastln the comm. explainii
nearly enough correctly, by levAftham sum f pi viifyawilnJn ttpJslHJn v*l.
7. They that are kings, king-makers, that arc charioteers and troop-
leailers — subjects to me do thou, O fanui, make all people round about.
Our Up. reails in b c'llw^ivn-J/i. emended to ^nyt\h ; Kp. \\^% ^ramaHyi\k ; Op. and
I>. (and, so far as appears, all SVV\ p.ti/a-mss.) i^ulin^ttiyah ; the word is divided by
the KV. /iii/if text (^*'il ///</-»/ A), as in all reason it should t>e ; and its division seemt
favored, if not requited, by our Prat. iii. 76. Ppp. h.is a quite different text: upatiir
astu T'll/f nf utit (ut/ftM u/tt **'ytih for a. b. with c. d as in its version of vs. 6 (Imt nith
/J// 9 Hit [^intending /J// patn»i 'J instead of /rJ *firtid). Wel>er, on authority o£
{,\\. iii. 4. t.7, pro|>«ises to emend a t(» iV 'ftljtJno; the romm. explains the rijAmss
by iinMtiff^tliihipAh ; ami filjtilrtas by ft};Yf*l*/nstfinintt *ii sti^h'tlh. ^In Sl*l**f C"#r-
ff^itotts (to p. 3<>4)» h** J -I*- ^^^ rcjMirted as dividing^'/iI//i.i.'«V4l/i.J
8. Piifttii art thou, bnily protecting ; a hero, from the same womb
{yotit) with me a hero; with the year's i)rilliancy — therewith I bind
thee on, O amulet.
Watitin;; in I'pp- I l>e mm imd p.'Lda is dani.iged. in meter and in sense, by the
ap{t.i!rnt!y intruded :7f.ff
I he iiuu:,}l,t [i J rnils here, ha\inj; 5 hymns and 33 verses; the old Anukr. says:
i* i*:t^,inn:fHtitAh ii/./Vi*-*:/ (111%%, -i/<ir..) k,}i\i}s ttitah,
6. Against enemies: with afvatthil.
I ound (e\ii|>i \s (1) in I'aipp. in. I'scil by KAii«;. (4^. 3 ff ) in a rite of snrccfy
ai:ain«t ciu inies ; \ss. 7.8 are specially qut>tcd (4S '•. 5), with actions adapted to the
93 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK III. -iii. 6
text The comm. also describes it as employed by the Naks. Lcomm. again errs;
should be ^anti — BloomfieldJ K. (17, 19) in a mahd^dnti called Angirasl,
Translated: A. Kuhn, Herabkunft des Feuers etc., 1859, p. 224, or 2d ed., p. 198;
Weber, xvii. 204 ; Grill, 21, 104; Griffith, i. 87; Bloomfield, 91, 334. ^
1. The male {ptimdns) [is] born oiit of the male — the afvatt/id forth
from the khadird; let it smite my foes, whom I hate and who [hate] me.
A very acceptable emendation would be p&ri jdtds^ since pdri is plainly accessory
to the ablative pumsds^ as Adhi to khadirat in b (cf. dsaias pdri jajhiri^ x. 7. 25).
Ppp. retains the initial a of a^vatthas^ and begins d with j^^/zf cd *hath. The a^vattha
begins as a parasite, usually on the qaml (fem.), this time from the hard khadira (masc).
2. Crush them out, O agvatthd, our violent foes, O expelling one, allied
with Vrtra-slaying Indra, with Mitra, and with Varuna.
The translation implies the reading of vdibddha in b as an independent word ; it is
so regarded by BR., Weber, the later translators, and the comm. ; all the pada-mss.
make it into a compound with dddhatas^ and both editions so write it. Ppp. reads
instead, for b, qatrfin mayi bddha todhata. Some of our mss. (P.M.W.E.) read in a
nl ff- ; one of SPP's has srtilhi. The comm. explains dddhatas as bhrqam kampayitfn;
[but see Ved. Stud. ii. i o J.
Ppp. adds a verse of its own : yathd \vattha nisndmi pQrvdn jdtdn utd *pardn
(cf. X. 3. 13-15) : evd prdanyatas tvam abhi tistha sahasvatd,
3. As thou, O afvaii/idy didst break out [the khadird^ within the great
sea, so do thou break out all these, whom I hate and who [hate] me.
" The sea," doubtless the atmosphere, as explained by the comm. (and Weber). The
comm. reads dbhinas in a, and two or three of SPP's mss. so far agree with him as to
give the (blundering) nirdbhinnas ; this reading exhibits a much less startling and
anomalous crowding-out of the root-final by the personal ending than does -abhanas (see
my Skt. Gr. §555), and so is more acceptable. Some of SPP*s mss. similarly mix up
bhindhi and bhandhi in c ; the comm., of course, has the former. A part of the mss.
(including our Bp.P.M.E.H.) leave mahati in b unaccented (as again at xi. 8. 2, 6).
Ppp. yathd *^vattha vibhinaccham tahaty arttave : evd me fatro cittdni visvag bhidhi
sahasvatd (cf. our vs. 6 c, d).
4. Thou that gocst about overpowering, like a bull that has over-
powered — with thee here, O afvatt/tdt may we overpower our rivals.
Ppp. reads in a carat i^ as does also the comm., followed by two or three of SPP's
mss. Ppp. further combines in b sdsahdndi *va rs-y and ends d with samvislvaht, [_The
saf/i/u'td-mss. all combine tva rs- in b ; see note to Prat iii. 46. J
5. Let perdition bind them, with unreleasable fetters of death — my
foes, O tifvatt/id, whom I hate and who [hate] me.
Ppp. has avimokydis in b, and (as in vs. i) begins d with ydn^ cd *ham. Several of
our mss. (P.M.W.E.) have at the beginning the senseless reading simdtu,
6. As, O a^vatt/idy ascending them of the forest-trees, thou dost put
them beneath thee {dd/tard)^ so the head of my foe do thou split apart
and overcome.
iii. 6- HOOK III. Tin: A THARVA-VKDA-SAttHITA. 94
Ppp. (AS we saw .iIhivc) has tlic scroml half of this %'ersc, with variants, as Its 3 c d.
What the 't'tlHtttftttYti is, as distinj'uishccl from viinas^tUi^ is as otvscure as the similar
rcUtioti of rtu and t}HavA \\\\. 10.9 note J; possibly * they of that sort, they and their
kind*; (»ur translation marks, rather merhanically, the distinction. The comm. saym
that hrrc T'<i//i/t/«i// mrans "the place whrre trees (* row/* and vAnatpatya the treem
thrmsrivrs -- whith is an rxplanatic»n quite aftrr hin kind.
7. I.ct them float forth downward, like a boat severed from its moot •
in<; {biituihana) ; of them, thrust forth by the ex|>eUing one, there is no
returning again.
rpp. reads in c nuthAdha ; our Op. has vtMhiitIhA : pra'^nuttAHiim. Astu in d, for
a\ti^ would be an improvement. The comm. ^ivcs a double explanation of httmJkana^ as
either place or instrument of fastening. |^The vs. recurs at ix. 2. 13, with jtljraJta- for
\u}tb%}*ihti-. — - W's collation of Op. );ivcs//«i\ n«)t//4/j!j
8. I thrust them forth with mind, forth with intent and ineantation ;
forth with branch of tree, of rtftvi//////, we thrust them.
Tpp. has in a //#li *ntln ttutlAmi (which makes the meter easier), and at the end cor-
respon<lin|;ly the active nutfAtn%tsi ; fi>r b it pives pfii {t tvfna hAkmtinA, The tin|;uali-
jation of the first n of enAn is nnte<l in PrAt. iii. 80, and the comment on that rule quotem
the instance in c, but not that in a. A( cording to KAuq. the thinf^ ** mentioned in the text **
(|H*rhaps an effigy of the i>crs(m aimed at, in the ** vitals ** of which something; has Iteen
buried by the preceding rule) [^having been put u|Mm a t>oatJ is with this verse and
ix. 2.4 pushed forth with a branch, and v%ith vs. 7 made to float away.
7. Against the disease \%tXiVjk.
Found in iViipp. iii., with few variants, but with vs. 5 at the end. Use<l by KAq^.
(37. 2()) in a healing ceremony (its text does not s|>ecify the disease): and reckoned
(2f>. I, note) to tlie fakmimA^afta i;;aua. And the comm. quotes it as employed by the
Naks. [(,anli.^J K. (17. 19) in the ///ii//<lcifM/# called kilumArt,
Translated: Welnr. xvii 20S ; (^rill, 8, 105 ; Oriffith, i.8g; lUoomfield, 15, 33^*.
1. On the head of the swift-running gazelle (/taring) is a rcmetly ; he
by his horn hath made the Isrinyti disap|)ear, dis|)ersing.
I'iuititl is divi<led {vhuin*}) in the /.f#/«i text, as if from vi 4 sA 'unfasten* — which
IS, indeffl. in all probability its true deiivation. as design.! tinj; primarily a deciduous
horn, one that is diopprd olf or she<l ; ami in this |>eculiarity. as distinguishe«1 from the
permanent hf»rns of the domestii animals, perhaps lies the reason of its application to
ma;:ical remedial usrs. The verse <H<urs also in Ap<,*S. xiii. 7. 16 I where moat mss.
have fti(^h94\\tttt*\ Kor the l}rffiyti, sec al>ove. ii. 8. Itf^iT* ^^^ p. 104 5- J
2. After thee hath the bull-gazelle stridden with his four feet ; O horn,
d«> thuu unfaslon C'ist}} the ksrtnyti that is compacted {}) in his heart.
I*l»l» \\.\s, a dilferrnt d: ♦./«// liftiit k^et^iviim hfJi. The wor<! play in C l»etmeeil
r/iif".! an«l :•/ «il. is nbvimis; that any w.is intrnderl with vi\ttxin*i in 1 d is verr quca-
tionablc. 'I his vt'ise, aj^ain, is found in .\p<,'S. iti., but with cor\siderable variants : anm
lf^>^'
95 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK III. -iii. 7
ivd harino mrgah padbhi^ caturbhir akramlt : vis&ne vi sydi *iam granthim yad asya
gnlphitam hrdi; here it is a •* knot " tliat is to be untied by means of the horn. One
of our mss. (O.) has in c padbhls^ like Ap^S. The comm., followed by a couple of
SPP's mss., further agrees with ApQS. by reading guiphitam in c, and explains it as
guiphavad grathitatn. The occurrence of the rare and obscure guspita Lmisprinted
gustitam\ in ^B. iii. 2. 2. 20 is also in connection with the use of a deer's horn.
3. What shines down yonder, like a four-sided roof {chadis)^ therewith
we make all the ksetriyd disappear from thy limbs.
In our edition, tdna in c should be tind^ as read by nearly all the safh/u'td-mss,
(all save our P.M.), and by SPP. The sense of a, b is obscure to the comm., as to us ;
he guesses first that it is " the deer-shaped thing extended in the moon's disk," or else , ^
«* a deer's skin stretched on the ground " ; chadis is " the mat of grass with which a f4ti/^^^^
house is covered." Weber takes it as a constellation ; Grill (mistranslating paksa by
«* post "), as the gazelle himself set up on his four legs, with his horns for roof ! If a
constellation, it might be the Arab •• manzil " 7, f, 7;, ir Aquarii, which its shape and name
connect with a tent: see Surya-Siddhdnta^ note to viii. 9 (under 25th asterism); this is
not very far from the stars mentioned in the next verse \\ and v ScorpionisJ.
4. The two blessed stars named Unfasteners (vicri), that are yonder
in the sky — let them unfasten of the ksetriyd the lowest, the highest
fetter.
The verse is nearly identical with ii. 8. i above, which see [^b recurs at vi. 121. 3 b;
v. Schroeder gives the Katha version of a, b, Zwei hss.y p. 1 5, and Tiibinger Katha-hss.^
p. 75 J. Ppp. makes it in part yet more nearly so, by beginning with ud agdtdm bhaga-
vatf^ but reads in c vi ksetriyatii tvd *bhy dna^€ |_cf. our 6 bj ; and its end and part of
vs. 6 (which next follows) are defaced.
5. The waters verily [are] remedial, the waters disease-expelling, the
waters remedial of everything; let them release thee from ksetriyd.
The first three padas are RV. x. 137.6 a, b, 0, save that RV. has sdrvasya in c; but
vi. 91. 3 below represents the same^erse yet more closely.
6. If from the drink (J dsnti) that was being made the ksetriyd hath
come upon (vi-af) thee, I know the remedy of it ; I make the ksetriyd
disappear from thee.
The word dsuti is of doubtful and disputed sense ; Weber says " infusio scminis "
Las immediate cause of tlie ** Erb-iibel," which is Weber's version of ksetriyd \ ; Grill,
"gekochter Zaubertrank " ; the comm., dravfbhutatn annatn * liquidized food.'
7. In the fading-out of the asterisms, in the fading-out of the dawns
also, from us [fade] out all that is of evil nature, fade out {apa-vas) the
ksetriyd,
Ppp. has tato *sasdm at end of b, and in c dmayat for durbhiitam. Emendation of
asmdt in c to asmdt (as suggested by Weber) would notably improve the sense. The
second pada has a syllable too many, unless we make the double combination vdsd
^sdsdm.
iii.8- HOOK 111. Tin: ATHARVA-VEDA-SAttHITA. 96
8. For authority.
VrrsrA 1-4 found in Taipp. i., but (icfaicfl. The hymn ts used by KXvtq. (55. 17-lS;
aUo 55. 1 1 note), with i. 9. 30. etc., in the ceremony of reception of a Ve<Iic student, aiul,
according to the schol. (10. 19. note), in that for the generation of wisdom (the romm.
nays, as brlon^in^ to the iJyuiyit j^atta). Verses 5 and 6 are the same with vi. 94. I, 2,
and it is vi «)4. rather than these verses here, that is used in KAu^. 13.5 (the comm.
bhmdcriuf^ly prrM ri)>es the use under lK>th passages). Verse 4 has tlie same pratika
xs xiv. I. 32 and one or the other of the two verses is taught in VAiL (23. I) at used
'* by K.iu<;ika ** in the ai;ntitopna: but our KAu^. has no such use, and it b doubtless
xiv. 1.32.33 tliat he prescrilKrs (79. I7ff.) in the nuptial ceremonies; but the comm.
reports tiic u>c here, as if it referred to vss. 4 and 5. The comm. further rej^ards the
hymn as imph>yed by the Naks. K. (i-*^), in the Jtnlvaii rite, and by Tari^ista 5.3;
in.lH>th ( ascs .is an fli'//fi'fi hymn.
Translated: Welier, xvii. 21 2 ; (irilfith. i. 90.
1. Let Mitra come, arran^^ing with the seasons, uniting (} sam-vr^ajra-)
the earth with the ruddy ones (fisnytl) ; then to us let Varuna, Viyu,
Apni. assign j;reat royally of union (? Stim:r(r(}).
Tiie verse is very ob.scurc, and probatdy cornipt, thoui;h found almost without vari-
ant (only /#!/ for <i///<i in c) in Tpp. also. The epithet safhx'e{yA (found only here)
srcms fashioned to (orre>|N)nd to the pattiiiple sttrnvt^tlyan in b; but Weber renders
the ppl. by •• uml.ijcei nd " and the epithet by '•ruhs.un"; the comm.. l>y "pervading**
{i'\t)ftnuvan) and "suitable ft»r abidini; in" {tiimv^^tlr/tttm ttvasthi}9tayt\t^Yam). The
conun. t.ik<-s mtfytls as rJ^un, i.e. JLhttfttlt • ravs.' R. ventures heroic emendations:
** Let Mitra conic after ordriin^ of the time, enlivening; {utfh/itl/*ayan or something
ecpiivalent, sinie ' puttini: to test* is no result of the a( tion of .Mitra's ra\s) the earth
with his r.i\s; but let Varuna make wind and fire {•riU'i'tM itt^'n/m), make our great
realm f;f) to rest.** I he first p.ida is redundant, unless we make the double combinatioa
//////if ///#/•/////. Ll'.K. t.ikc itt//^- a.s 'sirh richtend nath.'J
2. Let Dhalar, Rati, Savitar enjoy here {it/tifn); let Indra, Tvashjar,
welcome my words (:v;V<7j) ; I call the divine Aditi, mother of heroes
i^fint), that I may he mi<Un<>^t man of my fellows.
The first pAda is also vii 17. 4 a. and VS. viii. 17 a. The plural verb in b seems to
imply th.it all the dciti*'s mentioned in the line are to l>e regarded as its subjects.
.l/if«//M#y///ri///«f (like ///«i<//ir.»///i/|/, iv.i). 4), probably the one whom the others gather
aUnit as cliirf ; the <oinm. has nothin;; valuable {sttmftitihttktlfnah stin svasamditJIik
sn'itt/i). The comm. takes /.J// ins as ~ Aryaman. l*pp. \\^% ^rhttttntM for karramim
in b. I hr inelrr of d wouhl l»e rcitifu-d by reading JVif//i (or tfs*tm, .is is pcrhapa
asMiin:iMe in this st.i^e of the lanijua^r) for iUJhi. *I he verse as it stands (li -f is:
II ♦12 • 4'») IS ill desiril>ed as ,\ jiij^ut/f.
3. I call, with acts of homa«;e. Soma, Savitar, all the Adityas, in the
contest for preeminence ; m.iy this fire shine for very long, kindled by
[my] fellows who gainsay not.
97 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK III. -iii. 8
The translation implies in b emendation Lcf. iii. 18.4 J to ahamuttaratv^ (against all
the mss. and both editions), as proposed by BR., i. 891 ; the comm. also takes it as
two words, and renders uttaratvi by yajamdnasya ^rdisthye, Ppp. reads devHn for
dditydn in b. The comm. has dJdayai in samhitd; our /rtr/(t?-text has it, and Prat. iii. 22
and iv. 89 deal with its conversion to dlddyai in sathhitd.
4. May yc be just here ; may ye not go away {pards) ; may an active
herdsman {gof>d), lord of prosperity, drive you hither ; do ye, with [your]
desires, [attend] upon (J) his desire ; let all the gods conduct you together
hither.
The translation implies emendation in d of -yaniu to -nayantit^ as called for by both
meter and sense, and also the addition of a verb, sta or //a, at end of c, for a like reason.
If, as seems very probable, the verse is originally addressed to kine, kd minis in c is quite
natural ; if not, we may regard t//frtj as understood : the sense is * be your desires sub-
ject to his.* Ppp. has a different reading: asmdi vas kdmd ufia kdminlr viqve devd
upasatydm iha. The comm. regards kdmitifs as addressed throughout, and explains
it finally as meaning siriyah gdvah (perhaps the text is defective or incorrect ; the
general explanation of the verse implies siriyah). The comm. reads ///rrtj iox paras
in a, and in b divides iryas^ deriving it from root fr, and rendering it mdrgaprerakas
\_pada has iryas]. The Anukr. calls for 1 1 + 1 1 : 9 + 1 1 = 42 syllables, and strictly
requires at the end -i-antu ; but no inference as to a difference of reading is to be
drawn from this. LPpp. combines in b vdjai. — Weber says: *^ asmdi diesem, dem
Hausherrn, kdmdya zu Liebe ; oder gehort asmdi zu kdmdya selbst? *'J
5. We bend together your minds, together your courses (7'raid),
together your designs ; yc yonder who are of discordant courses, we
make you bend [them] together here.
This and the following verse, not found with the others in Ppp., occur again below
as vi. 94. 1, 2 |_cf. also ii. 30. 2 J, and vs. i occurs in Ppp. xix., with the other material of
our sixth book ; they are so far discordant in subject with the preceding verses that we
may fairly call them out of place here. This one exists in MS. (ii. 2. 6), with anamsata
for namdmasiy and sthA for sihdfta. A RV. khiia to x. 191 \i2LS jdnatdm in a for sam
vraidy dkiiiis in b, and, for c, d, asdu yo vimand janas iam samdvartaydmasi. The
first half-verse, further, nearly accords with VS. xii. 58 a, b, TS. iv. 2. 5* a, b, MS. ii. 7.
1 1 a, b (they have vdm for vas^ and, for b, sdm u ciit&ny a *karam). Nearly all our
sam/ti/d-mss. read -id/i before si/idna^ nor is there anything in the Prat, to prescribe
the omission of the visarga in such a situation, while the comment to ii. 40 expressly
quotes the passage as an example of the assimilation of it to a following initial sibilant.
The comm. reads siana instead of sihana. Three of our mss. (P.M.E.) read at the
end -naydmasi,
6. I seize [your] minds with [my] mind ; come ye after my intent
with [your] intents ; I put your hearts in my control ; come with [your]
tracks following my motion (ydid).
The comm. reads ^//// J//// in a, and three or four of SPP*s mss. follow him ; he also
makes in b a compound of anucitiebhis. Quite a number of mss. (including our
P.M.W.H.s.m.I.) very strangely combine at the end -mdnar ita. MB. has a somewhat
similar verse at i. 2. 21. How heedless the Anukr. is of metrical irregularity is well
Vii^V.
iii. 8- BOOK III. THK ATHARVA-VKDA-SAttHITA. 98
illiistratrd by c, where the (lesiral)le alteration of v^^rsm to riff/, ami the abbreviation
of kp'tittyii'ti to the Cf|uiv.ilft)t -ivl (Inith sut^f^ested hy Wetier) would leave a i^ood
tftstubh p.'ida ; there is \\*\ jtt\;%itk c-har.u-ter to any part of the verae. [^The combtnatitm
'f9u\naffitt lo(»ks as if it had hlundcrcd in from the end of b.J
9. Against viskandha and other eyils.
\\'AmaJfX'^. — Jyiix't\f'rtktviy\tm m/j vJit^vadimm , AmHttmbkttm : 4. 4-f.nieriikrksrt;
Found in Taipp. iii. (with V5. 6 at tlie beginning;). Used by Kftu^. (43. 1) in a charm
against <lrm<>ns and the lun<lranccs caused by them.
Translated: \Vel>er, xvit. 215 ; (WiOith, i 91 ; lUoomficld, 67, 339.
1. Of the kar^dpha, of the vi^aphd, heaven [is] father, earth mother:
as, C) Kods, ye have inflicted {ab/tikr), so do ye remove (apa-kr) again.
The whole hymn contains much that is obscure and difficult, and the comm. gives
no real help anywhere, Inking as mu( h reduced to guessing as we are. 1*PP- t>^Kin*
with litfSitfiAtityit visahMvtisYti, which rather favors \Vel)er'a opinion, that the afika of
the two names is a suHix, related with tthka ; probably two varieties of vtsJtamMa are
intende<l, though none such are mentioned in the later medicine. I'he comm. fiiicU
(ti/^/iii • hcM»f ' in Imih : one = /•rf#i(i///i<fn'#i {7'yi}ji;AfihM), the other either vi^a/a-
^aphitsY*t or vtsptt%ta{tiphtisyti. .SIT. reads in h ^iy^\uh /•, which is doubtless prefer-
able to our i/yilih /• ; it is read by the majority of his mss. ami by part of ours (II.l.K.) ;
rpp. aUo ha.s it. I'pp. further omits a/fAt in c, and reads api for <i/<i in d.
2. Without clas|>crs ihcy held fast {ti/ttiniYa)\ that was so done by
Manu ; I make the viskamiha imi>otent, like a castrater of bulls.
I'pp. begins with a{l(uinii\tto \i/i- ; some of the mss. (including our O.) also give
a^Usffhlntts, and it is the reading of the comm.; he gives two different and ef|ually arti-
ficial explanations ; and, what is surprising even in him, three diverse ones of \*d4lkri^
without the Ic.ist reg.ird to the connection ; one of the three is the right one. Ppp. adds
€a after vadhfi in c Weber pl.iusibly conjectures a method of tight tying to be the
subject of the verse ; castration is somctuncs effected in that way.
3. On a reddish string a /'^r^^Ai — that the pious (:r</A^j) bind on;
let the binders (.') make im|K>fcfit the flowing (?), puffing (}) kdbax*d.
All obscure and c}uestionable. I*pp*s versicm is : for a, sAire pi{Miikk€ kkhj^ilatk ; in
b..r<f</for iad; fore, {ravasyam ^uspna ktlhtihttfn (the nAgarf copyist writes kA%*arMsm).
The comm. also has in c ff.fT'iinvi///. and three or four of SPI*'s mss. follow him ; the
translation assumes it to l>e for sttii*-. The comm. explains kkft^aiam by tammtr^mam
•armor,* fpioting KV. ii.39. 4 as authority; ^ravatyam hy thlUrtipam ammam arkati
(sinte f^jfTMr is an ttnntiHtlmttft .' )\ ^uimatn by ^osakam ^sec Hloomfield, ZDMG.
xlviii. ^74 J; kAKiva as a hindrance related with a ktibn, which is a si^eckled {karhira-
vttftta) cruel animal; and />*indAt/ntt is either the amulet lx>und u|M)n us, or it is for
•f .li, " the amulet, staff, etc.. hehl by us."
4. Wherewith, O flowing ones, ye go atioiit (r/?r), like gods with
Asura-inaj;ic (wJ/i/), like the ajK', siK)iler of dogs, and with the binder {?)
of the kdbitui.
99 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK III. -iii. lO
Or (ravasyti is • quick, lively ' (Pet. Lexx.) ; the comm., " seeking either food or
glory." Ppp- reads in c, d dtlsapiam vandhara kabhavasyatn ca. The comm. explains
bandhurd by sambaddhd dhrtd khadgddirfipd hetih. The verse is scanned by the
Anukr. as 9 4- 9 : 9 + 8.= 35 ; the usual abbreviation of iva to V/z would make b and c
good anustubh padas. [^Read ^ravasyd^^ voc, in a?J
5. Since I shall bind thee [on] for spoiling, I shall spoil the kdbavd ;
ye shall go up with curses, like swift chariots.
The translation implies emendation of bhartsyami (our edition) or b/taisyami {SWs
and the comm.) to bhantsyami^ from root bamihy which seems plainly indicated as
called for ; the comm. explains bhats- first as badhtidmi^ and then as dlfinydmi; the
great majority of mss. give bharts-. Ppp. is quite corrupt here : justl tvd kdmcchd *bhi
josayitvd bhavath. The comm. has at the end carisyaiha (two or three of SPP's mss.
agreeing with him), and he combines in c nddqavas into one word, ** harnessed with
speedy horses that have their mouths raised for going."
6. A hundred and one viskandhas [are] distributed over the earth;
thee have they first taken up, of them the viskandha'%^(yCi\v\g amulet.
That is, *an amulet that spoils those viskandhas^ (Weber otherwise). In c, for the
jaharus of all the mss. and of both editions, we ought of course to have jahrus; this
the comm. reads : such expansions of r with preceding or following consonant to a
syllable are not rare in the manuscripts. Ppp. has a different second half-verse : tesdtn
ca sarvesdm idam asti viskandhadusauam. The second pSda is found, in a different
connection, as MH. ii.8. 4b. The comment on Prat. ii. 104, in quoting this verse,
appears to derive viskandha from root skand. The verse is made bhurij only by the
false ioxTCi jaharus. |_For " loi," see note to iii. 1 1. 5.J
10. To the ek^stakt (day of moon's last quarter).
[A/harvan. — trnyodafarcnm. dxtakyam. dmistubham: 4, Jt ^» ^^' tristubh ; y. j-av. 6 p.
virddgarbhdtijagati.'\
Found, except vss. 9 and 13, in Paipp. i., but with a very different order of verses
(1-4,6, 1 1, 10,8, 5, 12, 7). Used by Kau^. in connection with tlie asiakd ceremony, or
celebration of the festival of the moon's last quarter (19. 28, and again, with more ful-
ness, 138. 1 -1 6), or of a particular last quarter, regarded as of special importance.
The details of the Kau9. are expanded and explained by the comm. ; they are not of a
nature to cast light upon the interpretation of the verses. Weber (pp. 219 ff.) discusses
at considerable length the questions connected with the festival. Vait., which does not
concern itself with the astakd^ yet employs vs. 6 (13.6) at the agnistoma sacrifice, in
connection with the somakrayanf cow ; and also vs. 7 c-f (9. 4) in the sdkamcdha rite of
the cdtitrmdsya s.icrifice. The comm. quotes vss. 2, 3, 7 as employed by Pari9ista 6. i.
Translated : Ludwig, p. 189 ; Weber, xvii. 218 ; Griffith, i. 93.
I. She first shone out; she became a milch-cow at Yama's; let her,
rich in milk, yield {dnh) to us each further summer (.? sdmd).
The verse occurs also in several other texts: in TS. (iv. 3.115), MS. (ii. 13. 10),
K. (xxxix. 10), PGS. (iii. 3. 5), and MB. (ii.2. 1 ; 8. i); and its second half is RV. iv.
57. 7 c, d, and MB. i. 8. 8 c, d; ii. 2. 17 c, d, and also found below as 17.4 c, d. The
version of K. agrees (Weber) throughout with ours; TS. has, for Sl, ya ppaihami
iii. lO- HOOK III. TIIK ATHARVA-VEDA-SASHIITA. lOO
vytft'uAtt/, witli «fhutsvtt at cml of c, and PCS. aprcrs with it ; MS. ha« dmke at end of
c; MH. (in all four <K*iurrciicc») ha* «/w//«I w//-, an<l in 8. i also a^Aitfitf /^u/ra Xt\$m ft*
a The comm. takes sAm*}m in d a» an adverhtal accus. (- sarvfsn va/$ttrrstt), as
d.H-s \\V»>rr. let. Ilillchrandt, />*/. Mythol. \ 500.J
2. riu* ni^ht which the ^chIs rejoice to meet, [as] .a milchcow coming
imlo [them], which is the spouse (/ii7/i/) of the year --let her be very
auspicious to us.
The %rr!ie is found also in TtiS. (iii. 2. 2), IKfS. (ii. 17. 2) \}\W (ii. 20 27) and
M<tS. (ii.8.4<')J, and \\% ftC(on<l half in MIt. (ii. 2. t6 c, d) ; the first four have the
!>ettcr rradin);^ jtt*tA\ in a ami /rJ "v*tiim in b ^and M(iS. ha» riU^itnj. Tpp. has in
b ii'unu filtfim ///•, and at the end .oi/*!. lor s*tmvttisttfdsytt P%UhI (cf. vs. 8a«b)
the comiii. (|uote!i TS. vii. 4. 8'.
3. Thou. () nij^ht, whom we worship (upa-tU) as model (pratitttd) of
the year — do thou unite our lonj;Iived pro|;cny with abundance of
wealth.
Or, peihaps better (so the mmm. and \Vi'!>er), 'do thou [Rive] us long lived
progeny ; unite [usj with abundance of wealth.* Tpp. has for b// /;'J rtUrim upjtsaie^
and in c testim for sA ««if. |_M(iS. has the- vs. at ii. 8.4*' (cf. p. 15^). agreeing nearly
with I'pp.J The first half veise is read also in I S. (v. 7. 2'), K. (tl. 2), Im;s. (iii. 2. 2),
and MH. (ii. 2. 18) : T.S gives at end f>f b upiitite, y\\\. yajAmahf ; TCS. h^n fra/imtt
I'd Alw ftitrhft uPi\smtihe. In our edition, restore a lost accent-mark over the $r ol
sr)a in d.
4. This same is she that first shone out ; amonj; these other ones (f.)
she ^<u's about («>//), having entered; ^reat j;reatnesses [arc] within her;
the l>ii<le (vadhu), the new-^oin;; j^eneratri.v, hath concjucrcd.
'1 liis \ciM* is rc]u-.itc(| bvlow as \iii. 9. 11. It occurs, with considerable variants,
in a whole vrics of t»thrr texts: IS. (iv. 3, 1 1 • ). .MS. (ii. 13.10). K. (xxiix. 10).
(,('fS. (iii 12.3). .\\v\ Mli. (ii J 15). I «>r .Ji;- UatAui, TS. and <,<iS. have aniJr
titvilfft; MS. also Ppp • '*^ */^'' •'"/-''. MH., sf \},ttft apsv attttti. All of them, with
rpp . invert thr nrdt-r of c .Hid d; and they have a diffeirnt version of our C: ir*ha
(but l*pp. tfftii) fnAttt tfiit/itm.1ft.t/i Stint ftU (C^'CiS. -w/J///), but Mil. I'lfiy My asttkm
Htit/tiMtlno tiftf.t'i . wliiK'. for jit^\hti in d, TS. and (,'(>s. ^\\c jitj,}tta, and MS. ami
l*pp mt>ti,}\,i, (/<.S. following it with itit'.tttrj ; and MH. reads f*f%ithttm*\ foe *>ur
nav*t\^^t. <,<iS . moitover. Ins in a '.yiiihttt. Tliesr v.iriants st>rak ill for the tradi-
tion. Ihr < rtnim '^'nt-s Imir di\'isr rxpl.uiatioiis of utiVtij^iU: K<>ing in company with
each new or (l.idy risiti'^ sun; perv.vlini; the new oiiv^inating kind of living creatures;
gciini; to a d oK ori'^in.itinij nrw form ; or. tin.illy, j;«»ing to the nine fold divisions of
the d.iy : am! tliv < omnu nt to 'IS. [_re|H»rtcd by Weln-rJ adils a fifth, •* newly married":
if till- l.)st is t'.if iiMMinrig, /,t;,}ft.t is bottrr with it than Jfx*h'ti: ** as sotm as we<ldcd to
t.tc nrw \fMr. slic* i><.irs tlu* d.ivs tii.it follow.** The meter is really redundant by a
s\II.i!.|c in a |_/j.?.'..f J |_Kurtlifr. MIL has in a ritlt *:ui jJ y*l //i/T'«f vy-; and I*pp.
ends d Willi ;,triffl'-: - liK . v. I 538, ^ivr • erst geb.irrmi ' for fUtVttjj^iii J
5. 1 he foicst tree i)iessin;;-st<>ncs have made their sound, making the
ohiatioii <»f the complete year {fttnvtttsafiiia)\ O sole dsf^hJ, may
having ^<muI pio^cny and j;ood heroes, be lords of wealths.
((
lOI TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK III. -Hi. lO
"Stones": i.e. probably, blocks of wood used instead of stones |^sce Hillebrandt,
Ved, MythoL i. 162, i6i J ; or the wooden mortar and pestle (so the comm.). Ppp. reads
for c ekastakayi (= -kdydi) havisd vidhema. Some of the mss. combine havih kr- in
b ; the comment to Prat. ii. 63 requires havis k-^ which both editions accept. Some of
our mss. (P.M.W.Op.) give in c suprajdsas, HGS. (ii. 14. 4) and MB. (ii. 2. 13) have
a corresponding verse: HGS. begins with ulilkhalds, combines havih k- and reads
-rPidm in b, and has suprajd vfravantas in c; MB. gives for a dulukhaldh sampra-
vadatiti grdvdnas^ ends b with -rlndm^ and has for d jyog jlvema balihrio vayam te.
Lit recurs also at MP. ii. 20. 34 and MGS. ii. 8.4b.J The first pada is jagatl^ unnoted
in the Anukr. [^As to astakdy cf. Zimmer, p. 365.J
6. The track {padd) of Ida [is] full of ghee, greatly trickling ; O Jata-
vedas, accept thou the oblations. The cattle of the village that are of all
forms — of those seven let the willing stay {rdntti) be with me.
Versions. are found in AQS. (ii. 2. 17), ApQS. (vi. 5. 7), HGS. (ii. 17. 2), and MB.
(ii. 2. 14), and of the latter half in TA. (iii. 11. 12, vs. 31 a, C). MB. agrees with our
text throughout ; the three others have cardcaram at end of a, and all three havir idaf'n
jusasva (for prati etc.) in b; HGS. begins with iddydi srptam^ and ApQS. combines
iiidydh P'\ then, in d, ApQS., HGS., and TA. read ihd instead of tndyi; and A^S.
pHstis for ramtis; HGS. ends with rathiir astu pustih. The comm. reads ildyds in
a ; he renders sarlsrpam by atyartham sarpat^ ramtis by prliis^ and specifies the
seven village (i.e. domestic) animals as cow, horse, goat, sheep, man, ass, camel ; but
the number seven is doubtless used only as an indefinite sacred one. Pada a is again
jat^atly as in vs. 5. |_Pada c is our ii. 34.4 a; between vi^varupds and tcsdm Ap^S.
inserts virupds (a fragment of our ii. 34. 4 b!). — Prat. ii. 72 requires itfdyds p-.^
7. [Set] thou me in both prosperity and abundance; O night, may we
be in the favor of the gods.
O spoon, fly away full ; fly back hither well-filled ; jointly enjoying all
sacrifices, bring to us food (//), refreshment {flty).
The first two padas, which seem to have nothing to do with the rest of the verse, are
wanting in Ppp. What follows them is a complete anuslnbh, and quoted by its pratika
in Vail, (see above); its first half is found in several other texts: VS. (iii. 49), TS.
(i.8. 4»), MS. (i. 10. 2), K. (ix. 5), AQS. (ii. 18. 13) ; of these, VS. TS. AQS. read darvi
for darvCy as does also the comm., with a few of SPP's mss. Ppp. has sathprficatl
isam in the last half-verse. The comm. understands d sthdpaya in a, as in the transla-
tion ; bhaja would answer an equally good purpose. He explains that the spoon is to
go forth with oblation and to return with the answering blessings. Sambhufijaif he
renders by liavisd samyak pdlayantl prlnayantl. Finally, he points out that, as c is
quoted as a pratika, a and b have a right to the character of a separate verse ; but that T
in the paflcapatalikd the whole is made a verse, with three avasdnas ; the statement, *^ ^ ^^ c '
TunioniT^iUeJappcars to fit our Anukr.; this scans as 8+10:8 + 8:8 + 8 = 50,
needlessly counting only 10 syllables in b. In our ed., read md for m€, [^Cf. iv. 15. 12 n.J
8. Hither hath come the year, thy spouse, O sole dstakd; do thou
unite our long-lived progeny with abundance of wealth.
Instead of repeating the second half-verse of vs. 3, Ppp. gives for c, d tasmdi
juhomi: havisd ghrtena (du ftaf ^arma yacchatn. Against his usual habit, the comm.
explains c, d anew, but quite in accordance with his former explanation.
iii. lO- HOOK III. THE ATHARVA-VKDA-SAWHITA. I02
9. I sncrificc to the seasons, the lords of the seasons, them of the
seasons (drinvd), and the winters (/tdyand), to the summers {sdntd), the
years, the months; for the lord of existence I sacrifice.
The chanf^e of case, from accusative to dative, in d, doubtless intends no change of
construction. I'he verse, as noted alxwe, is wantini; in Tpp. ; it is in part repeated
below, as xi. 6. 1 7. According to the comm., the ** lords of the seasons ** are the ((ods,
Agni etc. ; the ilr/ams |^cf. iii. 6. 6noteJ are ''parts of seasons; other unspecified di\i-
stons of time, sixteenths, ktlsthUs^ etc.** ; and although samA^ samvmisara^ and k4yamm
are synonymous, yet htlyana here signifies ** days and nights,** and samd *' half-months.**
ID. To thee for the seasons, them of the seasons, the months, the
years, the Creator (ti/ttUdr), the Disposer (tfsd/td/dr), the Prospcrcr
(} stttftnih), tiie lord of existence, do I sacrifice.
All the stttithittl'm%%, combine in a -hhyas /7'<l, and SIM*, accepts the reading in his
text ; ours emends to hh\as ivtl ; such treatment of final as is common in Ppp., and
sporadic rx.implcs of it arc found among the AV. mss., but it is hardly to be tolerated
in a text like ours ; and the comment to Triit. iv. 107 quotes the passage as Mjras ffJ.
The comm. |^at xix. 37. 4J deems this verse |^and not v. 28. 13 J to be the one repeated as
xix. 37. 4 ; see under that verse. Tpp. has, for a, b, yajur rti'if^bhya Artax*€bky0 mMbkyas
utmx'atuitt\Ya r«r, which at any rate rids the text of the embaaassing tx^. Here the
comm. declares the iirtavas to be **days and nights, etc.'*; samfdk he explains as
samardhayitre etanndmni dtViiya.
11. We, making oblation with idd — I sacrifice to the gods with what
is rich in ghee; unto houses not disorderly (hilub/tyant), rich in kine,
may we enter together.
Or, it mi^ht l>e, ' may we lie down, go to rest * ; the translation would imply more
naturally sttm upa vi^etna [^the /ftdrx Irr^rtiW lakes f#/<t as an independent ** case-
governing ** prc|>osition J ; the comm. says nfir */ya sam vi^emm sukktma mi fasema; he
comfortably removes the anacoluthon in a, b by declaring yaj€ = yajdmake^ and takes
alubhyatits as either nom. {j^Ardhyam akHrx'An^s) or accus. {j^drdkyarahiidm), Ppp*
reads for d drsadesvpa^omata.
12. The sole ds(akd, paining herself (tapyd) with penance, generated
an embryo, a greatness, Indra; by him the gods overcame their foes;
slayer of the barbarians became the lord of might ({del-).
The verse is found also in TS. (iv. 3. lu). K. (xxxix. 10), I'C^S. (iii. 3. 5), and
MH. (ii. 3. 21); and a is identical with IIGS. ii. 15.9a |^and MP. ii. 30.35 aj: 1*^*
accents tdpya- in a (the comm. does the same), and its c, d read: Una dAtylkm ty
dsakanta dn*i kattiti ^surilndm ahhavac €hd(ibkik^ arul K. PCS. have the same ver-
sion ; l*pp. agrees with them in reading asurAnAm for dihytlmdm^ aiMi MB. has their 4«
but our c except asaA^t/t/a for vy asah-. 1 he / of vy As- is distinctly required by
TrSt. ii. t)2 ; but .SIM*, gives in his text iv fix-, against a majority of the mss. reported by
him. Our l*.M.W. are corrupt at the end, but P.M. show distinctly -/M/A, indicating
the rcadinj; of TS. etc. The comm. gives three different explanations of f^drbkam in bi,
achling j^amnhtttft or j/tt/yaw (from /^r *sing*), and then farbkatikax*ad adr{ymm
(from t;r * sw.ill(>w ' ), to the true meaning. The fktlsiakA he defines to be " eighth day
of the dark h.ilf of MAgha.*' The concluding p4da is jaj^ait.
I03 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK III. -m. II
13. Thou whose son is Indra, whose son is Soma, daughter art thou
of Prajapati ; fulfil thou our desires ; accept our oblation.
Wanting in Ppp., as above noted.
The second anuvaka contains 5 hymns, 40 verses ; and the quotation from the old
Anukr. is simply <ia(^a,
II. For relief from disease, and for long life.
[Brahman and Bhrgvangiras. — astarcam. dindrdgndyusyam^ yaksmand^anadevatyam.
trdistubham: 4. fakvarlgarbhd jagatt ; /, 6. anustuhh ; 7. usnigbrhatigarbhd
pathydpahkti ; 8. j-av, 6-p. br hat tgarbhd jagatt. '\
The first four verses are found in Paipp. i., with the bulk of the 4-vcrse hymns ; they
are also RV. x. 161. 1-4 (RV. adds a fifth verse, which occurs below as viii. 1.20).
The hymn is used by KauQ. (27. 32, 33) in a general healing ceremony (without specifi-
cation of person or occasion ; the schol. and comm. assume to add such), and, in com-
pany with many others (iv. 13. i etc. etc.), in a rite for length of life (58. 11); and it is
reckoned to the takmand^ana gana (26. i, note) and to the dyusya gana (54. 11, note;
but the comm., ignoring these, counts it as one of the aitholifiga ga/ia). In Vait.
(36. 19), vs. 8 accompanies the setting free of the horse at the a^vamedha sacrifice ; and
the hymn (the edition says, i. 10.4; the pratlkas are the same) is employed, with ii. 33
etc., in i\\^ purttsamedha (38. i). — |_See also W's introduction to ii. 33. J
Translated: Weber, xvii. 231 ; Griffith, i. 95 ; Bloomfield, 49, 341. — In p.irt also by
Roth, Zur Litieratur and Geschichte des IVeda^ p. 42.
1. I release thee by oblation, in order to living, from unknown j'^/y;;/rr
and from xo^tA ydksina ; if now seizure {grd/ii) hath seized him, from it,
O Indra-and-Agni, do ye release him.
RV. inserts vn ^iier yddi in c. Ppp. has, in the second hzM-vtrsCj grd/tyd grhUo
yady esa yatas tata ind-. The comm. explains rdjayaksma as either *• king oi yaks mas *'
or else ••the^'. that seized king Soma first," quoting for the latter TS. ii. 5.65 ^see ref-
erences in Bloomfield's comment J. The first pada isjagatl,
2. If of exhausted life-time, or if deceased, if gone down even to the
presence (antikd) of death, him I take from the lap of perdition ; I have
won (spy) him for [life] of a hundred autumns.
The translation implies in d dspdrsam^ which is the reading of our edition, supported
by RV., and also by the comm. (^— prabalarh karoini!^^ and two of SPP's mss. that
follow the latter ; the dspdr^atn of nearly all the mss. (hence read by SPP.), and of Ppp.,
can be nothing but a long-established blunder. Ppp. has at the beginning^tf^ ///r///irJ-
yttr y-, |_At ii. 14. 3 SPP. used the '* longy"" to denote the ksdipra circumflex ; with
equal reason he might use it here for ih^ pra^lisfa of nita = n/-i/a.^
3. With an oblation having a thousand eyes, a hundred heroism.s, a
hundred life-times, have I taken him, in order that Indra may lead him
unto autumns, across to the further shore of all difficulty {dnritd),
RV. has in a qatdqdradena for i^atAvlryetia^ and makes much better sense of c, d by
reading i^atdtn for indras^ and indras for dti (it also has imdm for enam).
4. Live thou increasing a hundred autumns, a hundred winters, and a
iii. II- HOOK III. THE ATHARVA-VKDA-SAWHITA. IO4
lnni(lrc<l springs; a hundred to thcc [may] Indra, Ap^ni, Savitar, Brihas-
pati [give] ; with an oblation of a hundred life-times have I taken him.
Our text, in llie srrc»ncl liAlf-vrrv, inf;rnit)iisly <lrfarrs the l>cttrr meter and sense
given by RV'., which icvis //i*// #!;,'«/ for Ai tntfro ttt^nfh in c, an»! emU with Mavhe
*MiU» /nirttir ifuh. The virse is l.iiily ron et tly fiefinefl l»y the Anukr.. its c having 14
s\ll.il>U-s (pr/'i'fff/), and makin;; the whole numher 47 S)nal»lcs {J*iji;*iff lens 1).
5. Mnler in, C) brcath-and-cxpiralion, as two draft -o.xcn a pen (vrajd);
let the other deaths go away (vi), which they call the remaining hundred.
In this verse, as in the prcc rilini^ and in \s, 7 and elsewhere, SPIV makes tlie inde-
fensible combination ft ch, inMcad of /> (4, as the result of mutual assimilation of m and f
Lcf. note to i. 19. 4 J.
LAs to the "one hundred and one <lraths,'* cf. viii. 2. 27 ; xi. 6.16; i. 30. 3 ;
//'«rf#i/<i in Index; and the numln-rs in the not.ih]c passage, xix. 47. 3ff. ; Kuhn'i most
interesting (Germanic parallels, K/. xiii. 128I1. ; Wuttkc, /Vn/irA/r I'piksahtrgiaMl*^*,
3*^** 335 J Hopkins. Orifntat StuJus . . . pa)H.*rs read l>cfore the OitentaJ Club of
Philadelphia, i8SS-t.S(^4. p. 152; Zimmcr, p. 400. Cf. also the woids of the ftt4tute,
iSKdward I., $4. conrcrning the "line of I^nd.s," ** unless they put in their ciaim
within a year and a <lay.**J
6. He ye just here, () brealh-and-e.xpiration ; go yc not away from
here ; carry his body, his limbs, unto old age again.
At tlie end of b. the < omm. rr.nlsy.i: .r/// (- j/^'^/iiw, akt^U) instead of ynx-Aim^ and
two or three of STT 1 mss., as often, follow him.
7. Unto old age (h) I commit thee ; unto old age do I shake thee down
(///•//////); may old age, excellent, conduct thee; let the other deaths go
away, which they call the remaining "hundred.
The Anukr. .scans the verse as 9 4 S : 7 4 tS + S ='40, not admitting any resolution in C
8. Old age bath curbed {tthhidlui) thee, as it were a cow, an ox, with
a ro|K'; the death that curbed thee, when born, with easy fetter — that
Krihaspati released for thee, with the (two) hands of truth.
The vcrl>-fi>rms represent the noun abhuihinl ' halter, or bridle, or roj>e for confiiiing
and guiding* |_.\ case of ** reflected meaning**: discussed. Lanman, Tf antat: items 0/
ihe Aw. /*At/if/. AsstHtation. vol. xxvi, p. xiii (i?^04)- Cf. note to iv. |S. i.J As in many
other cases, the comm. remlers the aorist <i//</<f (for tttfhtta) as an im|>erative, ba*Mkam
karotu. On account of jAyamAnam in d (virtually * at thy birth*) \Vcl>cr entitles the
hymn "on occision of ditVicult p.irturition,'* which is plainly wrong. Perhaps it is f<ir
the same reason that the comm. regards it as relating to a child, or to a person diseased
from impro|>er copulation. In our text, at the beginning, read ahht (an accent-sign
lost under a ). There is no brhatl element in the verse.
12. Accompanying the building of a house.
[ /**f if 4 Mi.t n ' - ft.tx\%f i.tm. f J/.f f t'l ittt mt . i .hf^'/f^tft^ *f/,f i/iUt >rf.fm . if ^tstfthkam ' I. rirS^/ag^it ;
J f'fkati; 6- ^tilt^fii^afhktljj^iitt ; 7 ti* sr onuttuhk ; 8. hkuftj ; 9. ammttmhk.\
The fust ri^ht %'erRes are found in r.\ipp . hut only i -<;, 7 tr>grther. in iii.. vs. 6 ))eing
in XX., an<l vs. 8 in xvii. |^Morc or less corresftondent \'ss. recur at MP. ii. 15. 3 ff. and
I05 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK 111. -Hi. 12
at MGS. ii. ii.i2fr. (cf. p. 148 i/uiiva),\ The hymn is reckoned by Kauq. (8.23) to
the vHstospatlya hymns, and is used with them in a house-building ceremony (43. 4 ff. ;
the " two ii/iriivas,'' mentioned in 43. 1 1 |_are doubtless the same as the " two dhruvas "
mentioned in J 136. 7 ; |_and the latter J are, according to the comm. to vi. 87, not vss.
I and 2, but hymns vi. 87 and 88) ; vss. 6 and 8 are specially quoted (43.9, 10). Vait.
(16. 1, in the agnisioma sacrifice) gives a* pratika which is nearly that of vs. 8, but
with adhtfaryo for ndri. |_Vs. 9, q. v., occurs in Ppp. with others of our ix. 3. J
Translated: Ludwig, p-463; Zimmer, p. 1 50 ; Weber, xvii. 234 ; Grill, 59,108;
Griffith, i.97; Bloomfield, 140, 343. — Cf. Hillebrandt, Veda-chrestomathie^ p. 44; ^'^d
Bloomficld's references ; also M. Winternitz, Miitheilungen der Anthropohgischen
Gesellschaft in WieUy vol. xvii, p. [38].
1. Just here I fix {ni-ini) [my] dwelling {qdla) firm; may it stand in
security, sprinkling ghee ; unto thee here, O dwelling, may we resort
(sani'Car) with all our heroes, with good heroes, with unharmed heroes.
Ppp. reads abhi instead of upa in d. Padas a, b are found in PGS. iii. 4. 4, with
tisthatu for -J// ; and b in QGS. iii. 3, with tistha for the same ; HGS. (i. 27. 2) has the
whole verse, with tisthati in a, anu (for upa) in d, and suvlras before sarvav- in c.
2. Just here stand thou firm, O dwelling, rich in horses, in kine, in
pleasantness, in refreshment, in ghee, in milk ; erect thyself (itt-qri) in
order to great good-fortune.
Ppp. leaves the a of a^vdvatl in b unelided. PGS. (ibid.) has padas b and d, mak-
ing one verse of them with 3 c, d; padas a, b are also found in ^GS. (ibid.), with con-
siderable variants : sthune for dhruvd^ dhruvd for {CiUy and sUamdvatl for sunr- ; and
HGS. (ibid.) has again the whole verse, with firjasvatl payasd pitivamdna for c.
The comm., with the usual queer perversion of the sense of sunrtd^ renders sunr (Avail
hy ba/iub/n'h priyasatvavdgbhir bdlddlnam vdnlbhir yuktd. Padas b and c ^x^jagatf.
3. A garner {^. dhantui) art thou, O dwelling, of great roof, of cleansed
grain ; to thee may the calf come, may the boy, may the kine, streaming
in at evening.
This translation of the difficult and doubtless corrupt first half-verse implies emenda-
tion of 'Chandas io-chadisy and oi putt- iopftfd which latter is, in f.ict, the Ppp. read-
ing. In d, .SPP. adopts the bad reading dspdndanidnds, claiming to find it in the
majority of his mss. ; but the scribes are so wholly untrustworthy in their distinction of
sy and sp that the requirement of the sense is sufficient to show that they intend sy
here ; the comm. reads -syand-^ and so does (JGS. (iii. 2) in the parallel passage : endtk
^t\uh krandaiy d kumdra d syandantdth dhcnavo niiyavatsdh ; PGS. (ibid.) has d
tvd ^t\ur d krandaiv d gdvo dhenavo vdqyamdndh. [_MGS. ii. ii.i2^ reflects our
vs. 7. J The comm. lets us understand by dharuni either bhogajdtasya dhdrayitrl or
pra^asidi stambhdir upcid; and by brhachandds ft\i\i^v prabhutdchddand or mahadbhi^
chandobhir vcddir upetd; puiidhdnya is *• having corn malodorous from age" — a
sign of stores unexhausted. The Anukr. apparently scans as 7 -f- 8 : 10+ 11 =36: a
very poor sort of brhatl. [Note that of SPP's authorities for dsyand-^ K and V were
men, not mss. ; none of his living authorities gave dspand-. The bluncier is easy for
the eye, not for the ear. J
4. This dwelling let Savitar, Vayu, Indra, Brihaspati fix, foreknowing;
iii. 12- HOOK III. THE ATHARVA-VEDA-SAWHITA. I06
let the Maruts sprinkle it with water, with ghee; let king Bhaga deepen
(ni/afi) our ploughing.
Ppp. reads in a, b lulyttr a/^nis tvaUil hotA ttt, and has somas (which tuiu fJtjJt
better) for bhtiji^,ts in d. In c it t>egins with the true reading uksantm; this is to natu-
rally !(ui;Kcstcd as emendation of the uihAnlH of the mss. that all the translators assume
it (\Vel)er, strangely mistaking the plain statement of the Indrx Vifbcrmm^ accuses us
of having wrongly altered ukuitttu in our edition to tnAAti/H/) ; ttksdttim is also read
hy the comm., and by two or three of SI*P*s mss. that follow him; and SI'l*. very
pro|>erly admits it into his text. SPP. also reads after it mimd^ with the comm^ but
against all his mss. [^except the ^rotriya K J ; there is no instance where mtimi and mdmAs
arc correctly read in any of tliem (here, our Hp.O.Op. have itlni^ T.M. «r/v^, the
rest • tiMMil : our edition gives i/////*f, and Weber has failed to sec that it was ctwrectetl
in the /»*frr I'erbotuM [^under W//J//J). Tlie comm. makes d refer to the pk>ughinf(
of the site of the house : {tllAhhtlmeh kttrsanum mtatCtth karoiti, |^*K.H.D.K.Kp. and
Tpp. have unni; I. has uuA ; VV. has -/// lvti.\ \Yox mhantu^ sec ju 9. 13 n.J
5. O mistress of the buikiing (? vidna)^ as sheltering, pleasant, hast
thcui, a gocliless. !>ecn fixeti by the gods in the beginning; clothing thy-
self in gras.s, maycst thou be well-willing; then mayest thou give us
wealth together with heroes.
I 'pp. has, for c, d, linttam vasanA sumanA ya{as tram rayim no dki suhka^t smvlram,
** (;rass *' in c refers probably to a thatched roof. MAna the comm. gives two explana-
tions for: either "of t)ie reverend (mtJnaMfya) lord of the site (t'llj/iir/tf/f )/* or else
" of the spoiling ( ? mfyamtlna) grain etc." {palui in this case signifying pjklayitri). In
b the comm. reads nirmitA. IK^S. (i. 27.8) has A, b, c (with a wholly different d) in
a c<»fTupt form : mA nah sapattuih {aranah sr<fnA drt'O dn*€bkir vimitA *sy a^e: irnam
vasAnAk sumanA asi tram ; but our d (with X'lnlm r) occurred just before (i. 27. 7).
6. With due order, O beam (vaii^d), ascend the post ; formidable,
bearing rule, force away {(^ptivrj) the foes; let not the attendants (nfa-
saiidt) of thy houses be harmed, () dwelling; may we live a hundred
autumns with all our heroes.
Ppp. reads s/kuuA \/Ai in a, and in c, d has -/J/^y ' ira virAjAm jl\*Am ^arada^
(a/Afti. Hoth meter and sense indicate that /^rhinAm is an intrusion in c; and suvifAs
at the end would rectify the meter of d The first pdda is the beginning of a verse in
AOS. ii.9 ; and ll(*S. (i. 27. 7) has the first halfvcrse, with sthAnAu in a, and Urdkvms
and apa ifdka in b |^rf. MP. ii. i5-^s M(;S. ii. 11. 14 is corrupt J. The comm. reads
afsan for risan in c ; he expl.iins fttna by abAdhytna t Apena saka, and mpasatlMtas by
ttpaiadanakartAt as . The vcr!ve (ii f ii: 14+12 =48) is defined by tlie Anukr. witb
mechanical correctness.
7. To it the tender boy, to it the calf, with moving creatures (jdgat),
to it the jar ot purisntf, with mugs of curd, have come.
rpp h.is /; A for tmAm in a and c, anfl in c paft\rias ; and it ends d with kaia^m^ fs
yA I he mss vary iK-tween /«f//if/#Ajj and -frw/- (our Bp.ll.O.OpKp. have () ; the
comm \\As f, and renders the word by parnfai^na^liasya madkmnak * foaming over
sweet ' The word is quoted in the comment to Pr.it. ii. 106 as an example of / after f
protccte<l from lingualization by a following r. The comm. reads in c kmmkkMs^ and
I07 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK III. -in. 1 3
in d kala^fs; half the mss. (including our Bp.E.I.H.K.) accent kala0{s. The comm.
explains yVf^/i/J lis gamatta^Una gavddindy which is doubtless its true sense. The verse
is found also in AGS. (ii.8. i6), PGS. (iii.4.4)» CGS. (iii.2.9), and HGS. (i. 27. 4) :
the first two and the last have (like Ppp.) tvd, and ^GS. reads etia/n (for i*mam)\ for
jdgatd, PGS. has jagatfdis and AGS. jdyaidm; ^GS. gives bhttvattas, with pari for
sahA; all differ again as to the last word, presenting upa (PGS.), ayan (AGS.), ayann
iva (HGS.) or gaman (^GS.); and (^GS. has further kumbhyds in c, while for pari-
srutas AGS. has pariqritas and HGS. hiranmayas Lsee also MP. ii. 15.4 and MGS.
ii. 1 1. 1 2b J. The epithet drsf, added by the Anukr. to the metrical definition of the
verse, is without meaning as aistinguishing it from vs. 9 ^cf. iii. 14.6, note J.
8. Bring forward, O woman, this full jar, a stream of ghee combined
{sam-b/tr) with ambrosia {amr/a); anoint these drinkers {?) with ambro-
sia; let what is offered-and-bestowed defend it (f. : the dwelling.^).
The well-nigh universal reading of the mss. in c is imam pdtfn^ which SPP. accord-
ingly presents in his text, in spite of its grammatical impossibility (of our mss., E. gives
pdtrin^ -tren being a misreading of -tfn found also more than once elsewhere ; P. has
pdddHy and \^ . pdtrait)\ we emended imam to iman; but perhaps imam pdirfm *this
drinking-vessci,' which the comm. has, would be preferable, as better suited to sdm
ahdhi; and aidm at the end would then refer to it. The comm. has sam indhi instead
of sdm andhi ; he makes endm imply ^didm. The corresponding verse in Ppp. (xvii.)
is quite different, and corrupt; purndth ndbhiri pra hard *bhi kumb/tam apdm ramant
osadhlndn ghrtasya : imdm pdtrer amrtdir a sam agdhi sthird vlrds sumanaso
bhaifantu : this suggests imam patrdir amftasya in c * anoint this [dwelling] with ves-
sels of ambrosia*; but also its separation from the preceding verses makes uncertain its
belonging to the same ceremony with them. In the ceremonial use, it accompanies the
entrance into the new dwelling, the wife first, carrying a water-jar.
9. These waters I bring forward, free from ydksvtay ydksviacHsicing ; I
set forth Q pra-sad) unto {upa) the houses, along with immortal (avirta) fire.
The verse, as already noted, is wanting [^in this connectionj in Ppp., and neither
Kaug. nor the comm. specify anything as to its use. It appears again below as ix. 3. 23
Lwith Ppp. version J. The comm. gives no explanation nor paraphrase of prd slddmi.
L** Prepositions " discussed, Prat. iv. 3, note.J
13. To the waters.
[Bhrgit. — saptarcam. vdrunam uta sindhuddivatam. dmutubham : i. nicrt ;
J. virddjagati ; 6. nicrt tristubh.'\
The first six verses occur in Paipp. iii., and also in TS. (v. 6. i), MS. (ii. 13. i), and
K. (xxxix. 2). The hymn is used by Kaug. in a ceremony for directing water into a
certain course (40. i ff.); the padas of vs. 7 are severally employed in it (see under that
verse); it also appears, with other hymns (i. 4-6, 33, etc. etc.), in a rite for good-fortune
(41. 14). And the comm. describes it as used by one who desires rain. Verse 7 is
further employed, with a number of other verses, by Vait. (29. 13), in the agnicayana^
accompanying the conducting of water, reeds, and a frog over the altar-sile. — LBerlin
ms. of Anukr. reads sindhvabddivatam.\
Translated: Weber, xvii. 240 ; Griffith, i. 99; Bloomfield, 146, 348. — Cf. Bergaigne-
Henry, Manuel^ p. 143.
iii. I J- HOOK III. Tin: ATHARVA-VKDA-SAMHITA. I08
1. Since formerly (? m/ds), going forth together, yc resounded (tiai/)
when the dragon was slain, thenceforth ye are streams (Nrtf/f) by name :
these are your names, () rivers.
The /•!</<? 111^^. all ( ommit tlir vrry f;rntuitouft blunder of writing iJA instead of iJ at
- the lH*f*infiin); of d, 35 if it Inrlon^ctl to itnJhat^tis in!(tc.ul of to hJhuImi ; SI'P. emends
to /if. Ami thr f otnm. m> uiulcrHt.infls the word. The lomm. takrA ttt/tis as Ve<lic substi-
tute for ttff/ut//tin, r|u.inf\inL; <f^l/#. None of the other texts f;ives any various reading
for this vrrse. I'Aila d ^cXn fftrth, as it were, the oftke of the Atst four verses, in finding
puniiin;; rtymoh);:ies for sundry of the names of water.
2. When, sent forth by Varin^a, ye thereuiM>n {t1/) quickly skip|)ed
{Vii/j^) together, then Indra obtained (///) you as ye went ; therefore arc
ye waters (ti/*) afterward.
IS. .ind MS. havr in d ///i/r (noniin.). and this is obviously the true reading, and
assumed in tlio translation: Uith rrlitions follow the mss. (rxrept our Op.) in giving
#!/<?/. M.S. brains the verse with fi/w/'.f. i//AIf , for #// in b MS. has I'll/ and TS. /Jj.
In d, rpP- elides the it of ttntd , TS leaves sthatta unlingualized. The comm. reads
instead s fit tut.
3. As ye were flowing perversely (af'tikafndtfi)^ since Indra verily hin-
dered i'uu) you by his powers, you, ye divine ones, therefore the name
water (:•<//) is assigned you.
Pp|>. has for c htiho tmj iaktttbhtr tUxuUs. TS. combines in d vir nima. The
comm. apparently takes hikam as a sint;le word (the TS. /fi</rr-lext so rrj^ards it), quot-
ing as his authority XiUj^hantukti iii 12 : ami again in d, if the manuscript does not do
him injustii 0, he re.ids htkam for lutam.
>MA^t i^- '^Z 4- ^^^^ ^*"^ *^'*^^ Stood up to you, flowing at [your] will; ••the great
ones have breathed up (W-i///)," said he; therefore water (ttdakd) is [so]
called.
The name here really had in miml must be, it would seem, udan^ but utiitkAm has to
l>e substituti-d for it in the nominative ; none of the other texts olfer a difFerenC form.
IS. improM-s tlie mrtrr of a by omittint^ 7'<i/, and TS. and MS. leave the a of aft
uneliilrd Tpp- differs more seriousl\ : eko tut dnut tif^Attsthai syamiamAnA tiff hah
}'itf/ti}:'>r^iiffi m b miuht l»e * at his wdl,' (»p|)osed to apakAmAm in %'s. 3. The sense of
C is ratlur obsMire ; the (omm un<lerstands : "saying * by this res|)ect on the part of
Indra we ha\e l»e« ome great,' they brratheil freely (or heaved a sigh of relief: ttiikx^'
jtfit:itf\.tt) *' • whi« h is senseless K sui;t:ests '* Indra put himself in their way with
thr |H>iite adflress and inquiry: * their worships have given themselves an airing*; aiul
conducted them on their way ai:ain ** ; VVe)>rr understands them to ligh under the
burden of tlie ginl standing ** upon *' («'/#) them. The comm. declares aft to ha%e tbe
sense of ttJ/ii.
5. The waters [are] excellent; the waters verily were ghee; these
waters verily bear Apni-and-Soma ; may the stronjij (fivni) satisfying
sav«T </.M./) «»f the honey-mixed (-/n ) come to me along with breath,
with splendtir.
I09 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK III. -iii. 14
TS. reads dsus for dsan at end of a, and both TS. and MS., as also the comm., have
gan at the end (MS.p. agan), MS. combines differently the material of our vss. 5
and 6 : first our 6 a, b with 5 c, d, then our 5 a, b with 6 c, d ; and for our 5 a it reads
apo devir ghrtaminva u apas. This last seems also to be intended by Ppp., with its
dpo devlr ghrtam itapahus ; and it has ityd instead of it tds at end of b, and combines
'gamd mil in c-d. The comm. renders madhnprcdm by madhnnd rascna samprktd-
nam; the description in pada c almost makes us fancy some kind of mineral water to
be had in view.
6. Then indeed I see, or also hear ; unto me comes the noise, to me
the voice of them ; I think myself then to have partaken ambrosia
(ainrtd) when, ye gold-colored ones, I have enjoyed (trp) you.
TS. has the inferior readings nas for md at end of b and ydd iox yada in d. MS. is
corrupt in b ; its pada-\&x\ reads vak : nn : dsdm^ but the editor gives in sam/titd-text
var nv dsdm. The comm. combines vag md. Ppp. has at the beginning j'/i^ for dd.
The comm. takes the opportunity of the occurrence of hiranya- in d to bring forward an
etymology of it which he here and there repeats ; it is hita-ramanlya / The verse is
improperly reckoned as nicri. |_In the edition amrtastha is a misprint for 'Sya.\
7. This, O waters, [is] your heart, this your young (vatsd), ye righteous
ones ; come thus hither, ye mighty ones, where I now make you enter.
The preceding verses have been simple laudation of the waters ; this appended one
(which is found neither in Ppp. nor in the other texts) adds a practical application, and
is the sole foundation of the employment of the hymn by Kaug. With the first pada a
piece of gold is buried in the desired channel ; with b a prepared frog is fastened there ;
with c the frog is covered with a water-plant; with d water is conducted in.
14. A blessing on the kine.
[Bra/tman. — ttdnddrvatyam uta gosthadevatdkam, dnustubhani : 6. drsi tristitbh.^
The hymn (except vs. 5) is found in Paipp. ii. (in the verse-order 2, 4, 6, i, 3). It
is used by Kfiu^., with other hymns (ii. 26 etc.), in a ceremony for the prosperity of
cattle (19.14). In V^lit. (21.26), vs. 2 accompanies the driving of kine in the agnt-
stoma. The Vait. use does not appear to be mentioned by the comm., and his report of
the Kau<j. use is mostly lost from the manuscript (but filled in by the editor).
Translated : Ludwig, p. 469 ; Weber, xvii. 244 ; Grill, 64, 112; Griffith, i. loi ; Bloom-
field, I43» 351-
1. With a comfortable {snsdd) stall, with wealth, with well-being, with
that which is the name of the day-born one, do we unite you.
Ppp. reads in b sapustyd for subhutyd. The obscure third pada is found again below
as V. 2S. I2C; it is altogether diversely rendered (conjecturally) by the translators
(Weber, "with the blessing of favorable birth"; Ludwig, "with [all] that which one
calls day-born "; Grill, " with whatever a day of luck brings forth **); R. suggests •* with
all (of good things) that the day brings, or that is under the heaven": none of these
suits the other occurrence.
2. Let Aryaman unite you, let Pushan, let Brihaspati, let Indra, who
is conqueror of riches ; in my possession gain ye what is good.
iu. 14- BOOK III. THi: ATIIARVA Vi:i)A-SAttHITA. I lO
* In my po!i2irft5ton/ lit. • with mc' (bci mir, chci moi). The comm. takes fmsyain
at - /<u<f»<i/if / ami iu> do the transUtoni. unneccMarily and thrrefore inadmiMihly :
or, uc in.iy emend Ko pMsyttlH^ with 't\iiu as subject. •• Unite'* calls for the eipreMion
of with what ; this is not ^iven, hut the verse may l>e ref;arde<l as (eicept d) a continua-
tion of vs. I. The three jK^das a-c are found as a ;fiJr<f/^/verse in MS. (iv. 2 10 : mtth
fou\ for piiii in b). Tpp. h.is iha puiyttti at t>eginning of d.
3. Ilavin^^ come toj;(*thcr, unaffri|;htc(l, rich in manure, in this stall,
boarin;^ the .sweet of soma, come yc hither, free from di.sease.
'I hrre of the pAd.!^ (a. b, d) again form, with considerable valiants, a j^«lr<i/'/ in MS.
(ihid ) immcdiatrly following the one noted al>ove : MS. has Avihfulikt for dhibkymits^
pHti\inii f«ir kttr-^ and, in place of our d, svttvf^i na li gitta. Tpp gives, as not sel-
dom, in part the MS. readings, corrupted: it begins jttmjatstfMJm vthrtAwt^ has Ait r#f
for m*xtihu in c, and, for d, svtXvt^Aia etana. '1 he combination of p. hpa-^iam^i into a.
upHaua is one of those aimed at by VxW. iii. 52, according to the comment on that rule ;
but it wouhl ec|ually well fall under the general rule (iii. 38) as to the order of combina-
tion when «l comes l>etween two vowels {^mpaJ Uama like im^ifd-JtMi etc.). |^Cf. alio
Lanman, JAOS. x. 425. J <;/ ,*/// ^
4. Come ye just here, C) kinc, and flourish here \\\iic ^dkd; also mul-
tiply (praja) just here; let your complaisance be toward mc.
i^Ake *i'ti (p. (.Uil /;*<») in b is very ol)SCure : VVel>er renders ** like dung** (as If
{ilJtJ- ^tUrf); Lutiwig, "with the dung** (as if fdJttt - ^aJbrnt ); CtiM, *• hke plants*'
(implying ^t}kttm izui or ^tlktl /."<i); the comm. says *' multiply innumerably, like flies**
{{aktl -■ fftttJtuJtt})\ this last is, so f.ir as can l>e seen, the purest guesswork, nor is any-
thing brought up in its supfxirt ; and the "dung '* comparisons are as unsuitable as they
arc unsavory. The explanation of the comm. accords with one among those offered by
the commentators on VS. xxiv 32 ( MS. iii. 14 13) and TS. v. 5. |.S«, where f«fiJ also
occurs. I'pp. re.vis stih} ii'it. SPIV re{M)rts his p,it/tt msv as accenting ^^^T'lfil in a, but
emends in his /<i</ii- text io xtyiut/i ; the latter is read by all ours, so far as noted.
5. I. ft your stall be propitious ; flourish ye like ^an^tikil; also mul-
tiply just here; with me we unite you.
There is no Tpp. trxt of this verse to help cast light on the obscure and difficult
(<l/fpK'iJ (}t (<l//'f</i^J7;-•r). *l he comm. (implying -ItU) expLiins the word as meaning
*' kinds of creatures that increase by thousands in a moment,** but offers no etymology or
other support ; the tr.mst.itois supply a variety of ingenious and unsatisfactory conjee*
tures (\Vel»rr. "like \Ar t dung." <J// perhaps a kind of bird; C#rill "[fatten yt>urach-es]
like thr (<Im/<I '* or hootlrd rrf)w ; l.udwig simply puts a question-mark in place of a
transl.itioii). K. offers thr conjecture (<'''^ ( - f<'/'/') f«r/'<f ii'*' * like rice in manure.*
Our IV M I' I. .ncient ^,1m*1Jtf *;a.
|^ItKH>mfirl(| rmrnds to j J// |//^r;vi ( - ttls tvti), * thrive ye like starlings and par-
rots.* Tiu<*. tlicM* birds are habitual companions in literature as in life (sec my trans-
lation of A'<r '////. I ///<f/>/<r//, p. 22(;. note). liH|uacity l>eing their salient characteristic;
but uhat is the tfttium KOtnpatiiHonn between the thriving of cowi and of starliags?J
6. Atlarh y«»nrsflves. O kine, to me ns lord of kine ; this your stall
here [1»«*1 llourisliin;; ; to ytui, becominpj numerous with abundance of
wealth, to you living, may we living; be near {upa-uui).
Ill TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK 111. -uL 1 5
Bkdvanias in c would be a desirable emendation. Upa^nd may be rather * wait
upon * (so Grill), only then we should expect rather sadAma (comm., N/«t|^?4rA/j«r<i),
|_W's implied difference between sadema and sadiima is not clear to me. J Ppp, reads
in a gopatya^ and its b is mayi vo gostka ihn posayUti, [^The epithet drsi seems to be
as meaningless here as at iii. 12. 7 — see note, end. J
15. For success in trade. '
[Atharvan (panyakdmah), — asfarcam, vdifvadfvam tt/di "tidr^g^iff*. trdtffMMam :
7. bhurij ; 4. j-av. 6-p. brhattgarbhd xnrddntyn^ti ; j, vird^JngmH ;
7. anttstubk ; 8. niq^t,]
Four of the verses are found in Paipp. xix. (1, 4, 6, 2, in this order). The hymn Is
used by K§U9. in a rite for good-fortune in trading (50. 12), and again (59. 6) for a simi-
lar purpose ; also (or vs. i) in the indramahotsava ceremony (140. iC); also vss. 7 and
3 in the appeasing of the flesh-eating fire (70. 13, 14). In Vait. (6. 9), vs. 7 is employed
in the ceremony of establishing the sacrificial fire. The usual statement of thc^c various
uses appears to be lacking in the manuscript of the comm., and is supplied, only in part,
by its editor.
Translated: Ludwig, p. 215; Zimmer, p. 258 (except vss. 7, 8); Weber, xvii. 247 ;
Grill (vss. 1-6), 69, 113; Griffith, i. 102; Bloomfield, 148, 352. — Cf. Ilillcbrandt,
Veda-chresiomathie^ P- 3^-
^
I. I stir up (ftid-) the trader Indra; let him come to us, be our fore-
L^^^ \ runner; thrusting KawayV the niggard, the waylaying wild animal, let
him, having the power (if), be giver ol riches to nie.
Or paripanthinam and mrgdvi in c may be independent of one another (so comm., *^ ^ ^t/^^^
and translators except Weber and Zimmer). Ppp. has, for a, b, indram vayam vanijaih
havdmahe sa nas trdtd pura etn prajdnan. The Anukr. notices c as jngatt pAda.
{_" Indra, the trader": cf. Bergaigne, Rel. vid.^ ii. 480. — Many J&taka talcs (e.g. no's
I, 2) give vivid pictures of the life of the trading caravans. J
l^^ 2. The many roads, travelled by the gods, that go about {f/rm-car) \
between heaven-and-earth — let them enjoy me with milk, with ghcc/^ | U'*^^^ l^^'f^f'*^.
that dealing {Arf^ I may get (^-Af) riches.
Ppp's version is very different : i/tdi *vas panihd bahavo devaydndm ana dydvd-
prthivl supranltih : tesdm ahndm varcasy d dadhdmi yathd klUvd dhanam dvahdiii.
The comm. allows us alternatively to understand deva- in a as " by traders*'; he renders
jusantdm in c by sevantdm, as if it were causative. His text has at the beginning yi
te panth-. The emendation, suggested by Weber, of md in'c to tne would help the
sense. The first half-verse is found again below as vi. 55. 1 a, b. To make a regular
tristubh, we must contract to -prthvi in b, and expand to krl-tu-i in d ; the Anukr. per-
haps regards the two irregularities as balancing one another.
3. With fuel, O Agni, with ghee, I, desiring, offer the oblation, in
order to energy^ (/t^r^j), to strength; — revering with worship (brd/iman),
so far as I am able — this divine prayer (^//</), in order to hundred-fold
winning.
The verse is RV. iii. 18. 3, without variant — save that RV. accents of coMxvt juhdmi^
as does our edition by necessary emendation, while SPP. follows all the mss. in giving
/>
Hi. 15- HOOK in. THE ATHARVA-VEDA-SAttlllTA. 112
juhomi (thc/<f</if-tfxt puts a %\^f\ o( pAcU-<li\'iston after tlie word, but also before it).
The vciir ii not at all likrly to have l»een an original part nf our hymn; the word
{atauyAya tn d has lauvd Ws adtlition. The comm. renders lAra$e by vtf^Aya f'c^'tf*
£tiwttnihii, and applies ki/. "if </ /(/ in two ways, to the winning or to the worship|>iDg.
' 4. This offense ^^frrfTfm) of ours maycst thou. O Agni, bear with^
'[ (i4u^ what distant road we have gone. Successful (Y*w*^for tis be bar-
^*^ gain and sale; let return-dealing make me fruitful ; do ye two enjoy nils'
oblation iiTconcord ; successful for us be our going about and rising.
'I ho Arst two pAdtis arc wanting in the Taipp. version of the hymn (though they
occur, in another connection, in I'pp. i-). and they are plainly an intrusion here, due to
the mention of distant travel in b; they form the first half of KV\ i. 31. 16 (but KV.
reads for b i///<f/// titihvtltutm yiffn ti^tlma tituit : I.^-^t in its rc|>rtition of tlie K\'.
verse at iii. 2. 7, .igrees with AV. in preferring tittfttm). The insertion dislocates the
comm's division of the h\mn; he reckons only the first 4 pAdas as vs. 4, then the last
two \%ith the fust two of our ; as vs. 5, and the latter half of our 5 with the focmer half
of our (> as vs, (1, ni.iking a vs. 7 nf only tlie two concluding piid.is of tmr (\ aiMl numlicr-
ing the two remaining verses as S and «). Some of our mss. (P.M.W.F. I.) divide and
num1»er in the .s.ini«' way to the middle of our \s. 6. then making vs. 7 consist of 6 (lAdas
and end where our vs. 7 ends. Ppp. h;is for \\\ verse a different version of our C f :
ftino for \unttm at the l)eginninu (with '.»/// after no), ji^iu/fittni ft'is for f>Jutlin,tm w.I,
and, for our c, sttm^artlntl htivir itLim jitutntAm. The Anukr. seems to sran the verse
as 1 1 f (> : 1 2 + 1 1 : 1 1 4 1 2 - Ui, though c and f are pro|>erly to lie made regulatly
Ittituhh liy elision to *j//#. The lomm. renders ^4tfJnt in a by *' injury ** (iiwj4), and
explains it as either tli.U arising (to Agni) from the intermission of sacred rites in con-
sef|uence of the liousehoUler*s absence from home, or else that to the alysentee from his
long journey as expressed in b — //////// V' l>eing in the first c:i%e ^ tsttmttira, and in
the sccoml = m.trsitr^t or fi/iJtutyit • < .luso us to etulure ' : perhaps the src<md is. after all,
the t>etter. |^For d. rather, * ni.iy barter make me almunding in fruit,* i.e. * may barter
fbiing me its rcvi.ud/J
5. With what riches I practise .(iitfc) bargaining, seeking riches with
'^ • ^* ^ * riches, ye gods — let that become more Tor me, not less ; O Agni, put
\ down (Trfjfi/<<F> with the oblation the gain-slaying gotis.
t>r, p(»SNil>ly, * the gfxls of the gain-slayer * {stltat^hnAs as gen. sing. ; the comm. takes
it as ace us. pi., and Ximmer and Ludwig so translate). The omission of tfn*t1n would
rectify the meter and txtter the sense, and Welter and drill |^and IlillelirandtJ leave
it out. The Anukr. gives a met h.uiic. illy correct definition of the verse as it stands.
J 6. With what riches I practise bargaining, seeking riches with riches,
ye goils -therein let Iiulta assign me pleasure (-^-xu^i), let Prajapati,
Savitai, Soma, Ai;ni.
rpp h.is a U'ttcr veision of a: »vi/ panena fntti/**tnttm atft^uti; and it arranges C
ditieientty : itiMo me t,nmtn f <</.•// iJ ; and reads hr/utt/>atts for ftttjAp- in d. H(«S.
(i. 15. 1) h.is a kindred \er^\ ntth second p.lda nearly identicd i»ith ours, and fmi^tm
\\\ C- [See also .MP. ii. 22 4. J A'//. /. lit. •brightness,* is variously understood by the
tr.inslators /imni«-r. " .ittr:iitive |Miwer"; I.uduig. "pleasure"; \Vel)er, •• understand-
ing "; (trill. " consideration **; the comm. explains it by stirvajanaptltttk dkAmaprmdA-
ntnJt '\iAnfKihAm, [I'pp- seems to omit dhancna in b.J
113 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK III. -iii. l6
*
7. ' Unto thee with homage do we, O priest Vai^vanara ('for all men *),
give praise ; do thou watch over our progeny, our selves, our kine, our
breaths.
Two of our pada-mss, (Bp.Kp. ; also D.p.m. ?) divide vdt^vdnarah : tumah in b ;
P.M.W. give sdm for sd at beginning of c. Tliis verse and the next seem to be addi-
tions to the original hymn. L Under siu^ BR. and Index Verborum join upa with stu;
correct Index under vpa accordingly. J
y 8. Every day may we bring constantly for thee as for a standing
/ horse, O Jatavedas ; rejoicing together with abundance of wealth, with '
food, may we thy neighbors, O Agni, take no harm. ^\ t vy^
The verse nearly accords with xix. 55. i, below; the second half is the same as
there; the first half here is more unlike the parallel verse in other texts (VS. xi. 75 ;
^B. vi. 6. 4. I ; TS. iv. i. io» ; K. xvi. 7 ; MS. ii. 7. 7) than is xix. 55. i ab — see under
xix. 55. 1 ; in the second half they vary only by putting dgne at the beginning of d;
they make a more manageable sentence by furnishing an object, ghdsdm * fodder,' for
bharema. The comm. renders tisthate by svagrhe vartamdndya.
Here, at the end of the third anuvdka^ of 5 hymns and 38 verses, the old Anukr.
says simply astdu (but O.R. give astatrinqat).
The fifth prapdthaka also ends with this hymn.
16. Morning invocation to various gods, especially Bhaga.
\^Atharvan. — sap tar cam. prdtahsiiktam, bdrhaspatyam uta bahudevatyam. trdistubham :
I. drsi j'agati ; 4. bhurikpankti.^
Found in Paipp. iv., with very few variants. It is a RV. hymn (vii. 41), repeated
also in VS. (xxxiv. 34-40) and TB. (ii.8. 979) [^and MP. i. 14. 1-7, in the same order
as here J. It is used by Kau9. Lwith hymns vi. 69 and ix. ij, in the rite for generation
of wisdom (10. 24), to accompany washing the face on arising from sleep ; also in certain
ceremonies for "splendor" {yarcas : 12. 15 ; 13.6), with hymns vi. 69 and ix. i ; and it
is reckoned to the varcasya ganas (12. 10, note; 13. i, note). In V5it. (5. 17), vs. 6
accompanies, in the agnyddheya^ the horse's setting his foot on the boundary ; and its
latter half, an oblation in the cdturmdsya sacrifice LVait. 8. 14 J.
Translated: as RV. hymn, by Grassmann, i. 336, and by Ludwig, no. 92; as AV.
hymn, by Weber, xvii. 251 ; Griffith, i. 104. — Cf. Winternitz, Hochzeiisriitiell^ P- 97»
and notes.
1. Early {frdtdr) do we call Agni, early Indra, early Mitra-and-Varuna,
early the (two) A^vins, early Bhaga, Pushan, Brahmanaspati, early Soma
and Rudra do we call.
The other texts, and Ppp. with them, read at the end of d huvema.
2. The early-conquering formidable Bhaga do we call, the son of Aditi
who is disposer {indhartdr)^ to whom every one that thinks himself weak
[or] strong, [to whom even the kingj says: "apportion [me] a portion."
Bhaksim d might also be ist sing. mid. of the x-aorist, *may I obtain.' (so Weber,
etc.) ; the comm. explains it both ways. Again all the other texts, including Ppp.,
have huvema for havdmahe in a; the Anukr. ignores the metrical irregularity caused
by our reading. LNote the play on the god's name : 'portion' is bhdga.\
iii. l6- BOOK III. Tin: ATHARVA-VEDA-SAttlflTA. II4
3. O Kh.i|!^a, conductor, Kh.if^a, thou of true bestowal, Rhaga, help
upward this prayer (/////). ^ivinf; to us ; O Kha{;a, cause us to multiply
with kinc, with horses, O liha^^a, with men, — rich In men may we be.
In Xh\% vcr^c A\'. and HV. af^rrc throughout; TH. reads atui with unlengtheiKd
final in b, and VS. no witli unlinf;uali/cd nasal in c.
4. lU)th now may wc he fortunate {b/uij^avani). and in the advance
{} pfaftti'd) and in the middle of the days ; and, O bounteous one» at the
up'goin^; of the sun, may we be in the favor of the gods.
A» to the dinficult word //«i///:'il, sec nioomfield, J ADS. xvi. 24 ff. ; •• up^oinf^ " is
prol>ahly heir Mmt jjoinij, disapiKrai.incc * ; the comm. renders /rri/i/:V by sd^Jtkme;
his understanding; of uifiitlti is lost out of the manuscript. The other texts read uJiitk*
\Jrox this vs., s*'c esiK'cially p. 35 en«l, 36 top, of Ill's p.iper.J
5. Let the god lUiaga himself be forttmate ; through him may we be
fortunate ; on thee here, Hhaga, do I call entire ; do thou, O Hhaga, be
our forerunner here.
KV. (with VS. and Til.) leaves the final of i/na unlengthened at Ijefcinnin^ of b;
and KV. and VS. m.ike the sense* f>f c Inrtter hy t e^iWtig j^havUi; all the three have
at the end of a the vck. t/rTifs. LComin. to Til. mAkt%ji»AaviMt=JAt'ayaii/j
6. The dawns submit themselves (? s a 991 91am) to the sacrifice (aMzani),
as Dadhikravan to the bright place; hitherward let them convey for me
Hhaga, actjuirer of gmnl things, as vigorous (jvl/V//) horses a chariot.
All the other texts. in(]u<lin<; I'pp., read iv^rr instead of mf at end of c. 1 he comm.
renders Sifw tiamanttt hy sttm j^a^i/utftf^m, calls d^uihikft^van a horse *s name, and
explains the action of the ohscure p.ida b l>y sa yalhii {iniJ/ulva j^amanil/a saiknaddko
bhavati. The Anukr. ap|>ears to sant tion the abbreviation fdtham *7-if in d.
7. Let excellent dawns, rich in horses, rich in kinc, rich in heroes,
always shine for us, yielding (//////) ghee, on ail sides drunk of: do ye
protect us ever with well-beings.
'\\\. \v:ii\ firAp(nt\s at end of c; Tpp. has instead fravlnds ; the comm. eiplaini by
il^ytlytftls * fillfd up, m.ide tcitnin;;,* %%hith is very possibly to l>e preferred. |^l3ciele
the accent mark under j^;i*///ii/// J
17. For successful agricoltore.
[t'tfiilniif'.i - n-tz>it%,tm n/J./rrifrtft it*tntfuSi.tm ■ / drjt ^4fa/ri; ^, K, ^ frtsfmM ;
J. p*%tky*\^AiHlU ; 7. vtfdi^ur^mtHtk ; S. luri]
Tour \rr%rs of this hymn are found toi;ether in IViipp. ii , in the order 2, I, 5,4 ; vs 5
occurs in I'.'iipp. xix , and there ate verses in I'aipp. xit. and six. resembling our %■%. 6.
Mu( h of it^ material ap|>ears als«) in KV. x. 101, iv. $7, and parts in VS ,TS.,TA., and
MS.: see untlrr the several verse.s. The hymn is used by Kilu^. (20. I f!.) in an extended
cerrmony for su< t ess in plowing* the details of which, however, do not help the inter-
prrt.ition f>f the versrs ; vs. 8 (ib. 10) is s|>ecially (|uoted as accompanying; an oblalioa
to Indra at the further end of a furrow, or of e.ich one of three furrows ; the comm. also
regards it as intended by fMndsirJMi at loO. 8, in the book of portents, in a charm against
115 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK III. -iii. 1/
the portent of mixed-up plows (whatever that may be *) ; vs. 4, again, accompanies the
marking out of the sacrificial hearth at 137. 19, In Vait. (28. 30-32), vss. i, 3, and 2 b
appear in the agnicayana^ in the ceremony of plowing the sacrificial hearth, and vs. 7
(9. 27) at the end of the c&turmasya sacrifice, with an oblation to the (umlsfrd.
♦ L" Wcnn zwei Pfliige sich verstricken beim Ackern,** says Weber, Omina^ p. 368. J
Translated: Weber, xvii. 255; Griffith, i. 106. — Vs. 3 is elaborately discussed by
Roth, Festgruss an Bbhtlingk^ p. 95 ff. See also Weber, Omina und P or tenia y p. 371.
1. The poets (kavi) harness the plows (sira), they extend severally
the yokes — they the wise ones (Mira), with desire of favor (?) toward
the gods.
The verse seems to imply a hidden comparison of the poet's work with the plow-
man's. The other texts (RV. x. 101.4; VS. xii. 67 ; TS. iv. 2. 55; MS. ii. 7. 12;
K. xvi. 1 1 ; Kap. xxv. 3) read suffinayA (but K. has -yuh : Kap. not noted), which the
translation adopts, -y&A seeming an unintelligent corruption of it ; but the comm. gives
a double explanation of -yliu^ one as " desiring a happy-making sacrifice " and qualify-
ing yaja/ndne understood, the other as from sumna-ya {-ya for rooKyd) and qualifying
baifvarddn understood I He makes sir a equivalent with liltlgala^ and takes vi tanvate
as = " put on the oxen's shoulders '* ; vitan as here applied seems imitated from its
use of stringing a bow ; in TB. ii. 5. 8»» we have even vl ianoti siram,
2. Harness ye the plows, extend the yokes ; scatter (vaf) the seed
here in the prepared womb ; may the bunch (?) of virdj be burdened for
us ; may the sickles draw in (a-yn) the ripe [grain] yet closer.
In the first half-vcrsc, RV. (ib. 3) and VS. (ib. 68) have ianndhvam for tanota, the
rest (ibid.) agreeing with our text (but K. h.is krto yonir) ; Ppp. x^^A& ksetre instead of
yonait; ydnctu^ of course, involves a hidden comparison of sowing with impregnation.
In the difficult and obscure second half, the other texts (not Ppp.) give gt'rd ca for the
unintelligible virajas^ and dsai (with accent apparently meant as antithetic) for asat^
which is read in all the mss., but in our edition (not in SPP*s) emended to Asat; the
same texts accent ^rttstis (and our edition was emended to agree with them; SPP.
accents the first syllable, with all the mss.). SPP. reads qnustis^ with the majority of
his authorities (including oral reciters), and with the comm. ; among his mss. are found
also fr//j//j, f///-, jr//-, j////-, and ^niislls. Part of our mss. also (E.I.H.Op.) arc noted
as seeming to intend f«//-, and, as Ppp. supports it by reading sunts/ts sabh-^ the read-
ing f;///j///t is adopted in the translation [^as also atviii. 2. ij. The manuscripts are
not at all to be relied on for distinguishing f;/// and fr// Lcf. iii. 30. 7 and note J. The
comm. explains it hy a^uprdpakah stambah^ Jn\d sifb/tards ?^ phalabhdrasahitas * heavy
with fruit' ; of viraj he makes easy work by identifying it with anna^ on the authority
of TB. iii. 8. io4 : dnnath vdi viraif In d, finally, the chief discordance of the versions
is at the end, where, for a yavan (Ppp. iiyuvafh)^ RV.VS.Kap. read / ^^f/, .and
TS.MS.K. a yat. But TS. has srnya (instead of -/<ij), and some of our mss. (P.M.W.),
with the majority of SPP's, combine ichrnyds or icchrnydsy implying (rnyds. The
Anukr. does not heed that pada d is, as it stands, jagatt, LW., in his own copy and
in Indexy seems to approve the accentless asai. — Comm. has dyavam in d.J
3. Let the plow (Idhgala)^ lance-pointed, well-lying, ' with well-
smoothed handle, turn up [ud-vap) cow, sheep, an on-going chariot-
frame, and a plump wench.
iti. 17- BOOK III. Tin: ATIIARVA-VEDA-SAIfillllTA. 1 16
That iv npparciitly, let all thcuc f^ood things come as the reward o( succcttful a|Cfi-
culturc. 1 ho vcriir, not fouml in KV., t)ut cKcurrini; in \'S. (ib. 71 ; and thence quoted
in the VasiNth;i I)hartna5utra ii. 34 am! explained in ii. 35), as well as in TS.MS.K. (as
a)N)ve), ha^ m.iny (Ittfii ult and fpirxtioiiahlc |)oints. Vox parlrdvai (Tpp. puts it befofe
iMli^ttittm) VS. :ncc\\\% f^tivlntiai, and TS.MS.K. sul>stitutc /<li//r«ii'tfiw/ (or stt^lmam
all have su^fiatn * very propitious*; tlie Tct. Lex. suggests iuxfmam 'having a good
parting* i.r. of furrows, or * cvcn-furrowcd *; and K. refers to MU. i. 5. :, jtmdnam
n,tyi}ffti. rpp. rc.i«I^ jwrr^/iw, whiih prohahly means stt^rvam. The impraiticahle
sowantf sttrM {%<} in /«i//«i -text) is sowapit-sttru in VS., MS.. K.. and Vaststha, and somA^
piiialam in Tpp. ; Vas. rnvlers it " provided with a handle for the drinker of soma/*
inipl\iii«4 the division sotnafti tstttu ; Wclnrr conjectures a noun ttmam 'strap/ and
emrn<U to j(»//'#r ( - ittuma) satsam^ " with strap and handle.** Hut TS. reads smmaif-
f'/Sitm, and thin is adopted in the translation, fttaii l>eini; t.ikcn not as from iwitii iMit
as the woid found in mttitlr and it!i derivatives, and related with malya etc. (Welder
also refcts to this mcanint* and connection.) The comm. explains sM{imitm b)' kartO'
I'itsya sftJt/iiilrttfttfft, without telling how he arrives at such a sense; and s^masats^rm
(disrcg.irdin^ the /</</</ division) as from tsaru^ cither *« a concealed going in the ground**
(r(N)t /iif/', expl.iined l>y Khatima^at^u')^ or else ** a kind of part to be held by tlie plow-
man's hand'*; in either case "a producer of the soma-sacrificc '* (i.e. Jifmasa). For
fitthavihtttta * the frame that ciriies a ciiariot when not in use,* and prmtkAvai^
here virtu.illy * with the ciiatiot on it/ sc».» K. in the Fest^tust an Hi^hilinj^k^ p. 95 fl.;
tlie comm. interprets as tt^vahttllvttf tfthhkam m/AtfrJAitntUttrrtar/Attm. VS. reads at
the lH';;inninij of c Af// tii/ Vti^ti/i, and TS. thf U krutti; Tpp. has thufata trsMiii ;
VS.TS.MS.Ppp. give for t p>tif»hdnyt\M (l*pp. 'jJm) ca fivaftm (^and VS. TS. invert
the order of d ami ej ; the comm. also \\:is firarim ( = sthulAm)\ f*fiiphan't he explains
as pratfuimiiwtyt'ih Jtanyth The first p.\<la is defective unless we resolve Ar-J/}-.
LZimmer, p. 23^*, refers to Sir H. M. Klliot*s ^Memoirs, ii. 341, for a description of the
IVnjab plow. J
4. Let Indra hold down the furrow; let Tushan defend it ; let it, rich
in milk, yield to us each further summer.
This verse is found <tnly in KV. (iv. 57. 7), which reads <f/rjir /ffi-^^/M Un ahki faksatu ;
rpp. has ftuihyath instead of abhi. We had the second half-verse above, as iil 10. I c d.
5. Successfully (fnmint) let the good plowshares thrust apart the
earth ; successfully let the plowmen follow the beasts of <lraft ; O C^una-
slra, do ye (two), dripping {?) with oblation, make the herbs rich in
berries for this man.
VS. (xViJ**)) and MS. (ii. 7. 12) have the whole of this verse; RV. (iv. 57.S) and
TS. (iv. 2. 5'), only the first two p^Vlas. For suph,}iAs in a, VS. (also our 1.) has sti
/>/i,1/Jf^ and KV.TS. naA philAs^ l>oth preferable readings; RV.VS. have krsamtm for
ttuinHtu. In b, TS. gives ahhl for Ann (our T.M. have Abklmm)\ MS. has ktstJl{^
ahhy Um vAhAih ; KV.VS., -fJ ahhi yaHtti t'AhAih, In c, the comm. gives tosamJtmJI^
explaining it by iNsyttft/Att, In d, the mss. vary (as everywhere where the word occors)
Inrtwien pippaiis and piipalAs ; al>out half are lor each ; VS. MS. end the |iAda with
htrtitnA *sfn/. Ppp. has a |>eculiar version: ^Mn*im kfuAi^o am%» dm x*Akam ^ummm
phAh ; tn,ttittttn ayatti bhtlnttm : (MnAsIrA havisA yo yajAlrdi sttpipp«tiA ^s^dk^t^t
tantM tiixtnM. The comm. Lcpioting VAskaJ ilcclares l^unAtlrAm to l>c VAyu and Aditya
(wind and sun); or else, he sa\s, i^una is god of happiness and Slra of the plow.
Ii; TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK III. -Hi. l8
6. Successfully let the draft-animals, succi2ssfully the men, success-
fully let the plow (Idngala) plow ; successfully let the straps be bound ;
successfully do thou brandish the goad.
This is RV. iv. 57.4, without variation; it is also found, with the two following
verses, in TA. (vi. 6. 2, vss. 6-8), which reads naras instead of ndras at end of a. Part
of our mss. (P.M.W.E.) have lisirdm in d. The comm. declares ^una to be addressed
in the last pada. Ppp. has in xii. ^unam vriram ayaccha qunam astrdm ud ingayah
^unam tu iapyatdm phdla^ qnnaj'n vahatu Idngalamj and in xix. the same a, b [^end-
ing 'ya\^ but, for c, d, ^unam vahasya ^uklasyd ^strayd jahi daksinam,
7. O Cunasira, do ye (two) enjoy me here ; what milk ye have made
in heaven, therewith pour ye upon this [furrow].
* Milk,* i.e. nourishing fluid. Weber implies at the end "earth" (instead of "fur-
row"), which is perhaps to be preferred. RV. (iv. 57. 5) reads for a ^lindslrdv imam
vacam JU'\ TA. (as above) the same, except that it strangely omits the verb, and thus
reduces the irisitibh pada to a gdyatrlj both texts mark the principal pada-division
after b. The comm. changes all the three verbs to 3d dual. The Anukr. forbids in a
the resolution -slrd ihd. In our edition the verse is numbered 6, instead of 7.
8. O furrow, we reverence thee; be [turned] hitherward, O fortunate
one, that thou mayest be well-willing to us, that thou mayest become of
good fruit for us.
RV. (iv. 57.6) inverts the order of a and b, and both it and TA. (as above) end
c and d respectively with subhdga *sasi and suphdla *sast. All tlie pada-mss. have the
blundering reading suophalah in d. The Anukr. perversely refuses to make the reso-
lution iU'd in a.
9. With ghee, with honey (inddhu) [is] the furrow all anointed,
approved {amt-inan) by all the gods, by the Maruts ; do thou, O furrow,
turn hither unto us with milk, rich in refreshment, swelling with fulness
of ghee.
The verse is found also in VS. (xii. 70), TS. (iv. 2. 5^), and MS. (ii. 7. 12). VS. MS.
read -ajyatdm for -aktd in a ; all make c and d exchange places, and at the beginning
of c read asmait for sa nas; and VS.TS. put pAyasd in place of ghrtdvat in d, while
MS. gives urjd bhagdm viddhumat pinv-,
18. Against a rival wife : with a plant.
[A//tarv(tft. — vdnaspatyam. Snustubham : 4, ^-/. auustubgarbhS usnih ;
6. usniggarbhd pathyHpankti^
This peculiarly Atharvan hymn has found its way also into the tenth book of the
Rig-Veda (as x. 145, with exchange of place between vss. 3 and 4 ; it is repeated in RV.
order at MP. i. 15. 1-6). Only three verses (our 4, 2, i, in this order) are found in
Paipp. (vii.). Kilu9. uses it, among the women's rites, in a charm (36. 19-21) for getting
the better of a rival ; vs. 6 a and b accompany the putting of leaves under and upon
the (rival's) bed. And the comm. (doubtless wrongly) regards vss. 5 and 6 to be
intended by the pratlka quoted in 38.30, instead of xii. 1.54, which has the same
beginning.
ill l8- BOOK III. TIIK ATHARVA-VICDA-SAttlllTA. Il8
Translntcd : as RV. hymn, I.uclwi^, ii- $$4* f^- 032 ^ C*rasiimann, ti 415; as AV.
hymn, Wchrr, v. 222 ; /immcr, p- 307 ; \\'cl>rr, xvii. 2^14 ; Grtflith, i. 108; llloonifieifl,
• ^7* 354 ; furthrr, by Winlcrnitz, Hinhztitifiluell^ p. «;8.
1. I cli^ this herb, of plants the strongest, with which one drives off
ipihih) her rival ; with which one wins completely {sam-X'td) her husband.
KV. te.uU in b the atrii^ vltutiham. For d, I'pp. j^ivrn krijaU krt'aiam patim.
The comm. (with our Op ) has ouuihUn in a; hr understands throughout the herb in
qurfttinn to l>e the f*i\thA (rf ii. 27. 4), thou|;h KAu^. and the Anukr. speak only of bAnA-
pttrni 'arrow leaf (not identified).
2. () thou of outstretched leaves, fortunate, go<l-<piickened» |>owcrfuU
do thou thrust away my rival, make my husband wholly mine.
* ()utxtrctche<!/ lit. supine; horizontal, with ttie fAce of the leaf upward. KV. has
iihamtt for irWii in c, and the mo<lrrn kufu for krdhi at the end. Tpp- offers only the
first h.-ilf- verse, in this form : utttlntipafitHm iubho^Ath stthamAnAm sahasvatlm ; MI*,
also has stiAa»it}»r instead of tieviijtite.
3. Since he has not named {f^rah) thy name, thou also stayest {rani)
not with him as husband ; unto distant distance make wc my rival go.
This translation of the first half verse follows closely our text. KV. has a very dif*
fercnt version: nahy i\\ytl ttattut ^thhnAmi rtti iitinfn fitwate jtine 'since I name not
her (its 1) name, she (it .') also d<M*s not st.iy uitli (t'lrxl pleasure in) this |>ers(m (|>eo|>le ?).*
Winternitf applauds and accepts his commentator's explanation of b: "nor (tnds sV.c
pleasure in me*' (takin;^ ttyitm Jitttttr in the mm h later sense of ** I "). hut it seems
wholly unsatisfactory. The meter calls for emendation in a Xoj*ti^ni/ta * I have named/
etpiivalfMit to tlic KV. leadini;; and K. makes the ememlation, and retains the jJur o(
KV., ren^leiin^ (as adilrrsscd l>y the wnman usirij; the charm to the plant) ** I have not
named [to hci] thy name ; ami thou stayest (stayrd.st) not with the |M-rson (bci der
Person) " The comm. neaids the rival as addressed, and conveniently makes fitmatf
" ittrttitt'.'tt : "Stay thou not uith this my hushaml." \Vel>er renders fafnaft by
*' kosest." thou tl.dliest not. .No s.itisf.u tory s<ilution of the difficulty is yet foutKl.
4. Su|H:ri<)r [am] I, () superior one; suj>erior, indeed, to them (f.) that
are superior ; below [is] she that is my rival ; lower [isj she than they (f.)
that aie lower.
KV. has tlie Utter rradini; .//'/.I for ttJhAi in c. allowinf; c and d to l>e combined into
one .senti-ni e ; and the comm. ^ives corres|M)ndinf;ly atika, I'pp- is more discordant
And c«>rrupt ' HttatA 'httn t//f,tf,t.*'/ir<* nf/tt^t* fi/ i},/At7nt6/iraA : adhtth sapttttil $Jlm^rthy
0tiha9(t{ atih.\tithh\txh. K. cofijt < tures in a uttaf Ahxyhamullare^ for liitattk *h*\m 4kam'
»//•!/«' \j f. iii. S. ^J I he versr. even if st .mned .ns 7 f 7: ?5 f 7-29, ought to l»e called
thnft;.
5. I am overpower in;; ; likewise art thou very |)owerf ul ; wc both»
iK'comin;; full of |>ower, will overjwwer my rival.
Ihe vrrse xit. 3*. q is a variation on this. KV. reads diMa for Jik^ in bi, and the
older f'hut'^i f«»r bhutvA in c.
6. I have put on {ttb/ti) for thee the overfxiwcring one (f.) ; I have put
119 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK III. -Hi. 19
to {tipa) for thee the very powerful one ; after me let thy mind run forth
as a cow after her calf, run as water on its track.
R V. reads upa for abhi in a, and has for b abhi tvd *dhdth sdhtyasd. The applica-
tion of a and b as made by Kau^. (see above) would suit the prepositions as found in
RV. decidedly better than as in our text; but much more appropriate is the use made
by MP., elements of the root being secretly bound on the arms of the wife, with which
she embraces the husband below and above Lso that one arm is under him and the
other over him J; then in abhy adhdm is further implied (as elsewhere Le.g. iii. 11.8J)
the value of abhidhdnl, the halter or bridle with which a horse is controlled. The
Anukr. does not sanction the resolution ma-am in c.
19. To help friends against enemies.
[Vasist/ia. — astarcam. vdicvadevam uia cdndramasam utdi **n(iram. dnustubham :
I. pathydbrhatl ; j. bhurigbrhati ; 6. jav. 6-p.iristupkakummatigarbhd
^tijagatl ; y. virdddstdrapankti ; 8. pathydpankti.'\
The verses are found in Paipp. iii. (in the verse-order i, 2, 4, 3, 5, 7, 6, 8). The
hymn is applied by Kau^. (14. 22-24) »" a rite for gaining victory over a hostile army,
and reckoned (14. 7» note) to the apardjita gana. The Vait. uses vs. i in the agni-
cayana (28.15) ^" connection with lifting the nkhya fire, and vss. 6-8 in a sattra
sacrifice (34. 16, 17), with mounting a chariot and discharging an arrow.
Translated: John Muir, Original Sanskrit Texts^ i.* 283; Ludwig, p. 234; Weber,
xvii. 269; Griffith, i. 109.
1. Sharpened up is this incantation {} brdhmmi) of mine ; sharpened up
[my] heroism, strength ; sharpened up, victorious, be the unwasting
authority (ksatrd) [of them] of whom I am the household priest {purdhita).
Or brdJunan and ksatrdni may signify respectively the Brahman and Ksatriya quality
or dignity of \\\q purd/iita and his constituency. The verse is found also in VS. (xi. 81),
TS. (iv. I. I03), TA. (ii. 5. 2, vs. 15), MS. (ii. 7. 7), and K. (xvi. 7, Weber). The first
two of these agree in all their readings, omitting iddm in a and ajdram astn in c, and
reading in c, ^jisnti ydsyd *hdm dsmij and TA.MS. differ from them only by adding
me before jisnii; Ppp. h.is ksatram me jisntt^ but agrees with our text in d. The
comm. moreover \\7isjisntty and the translation implies it; jisntis can only be regarded
as a blunder. Ppp. further gives may I *dam for ma idam in a, and mama for balam
in b. Our original c has apparently got itself mixed up with vs. 5 c.
2. Up I sharpen the royalty of them, up their force, heroism, strength ;
I hew [off] the arms of the foes with this oblation.
The translation implies emendation of the sydmi of all the mss. and of both editions
to ^ydmi; it is obviously called for (suggested first by the Pet. Lex.), and the comm.
reads ^ydmi; Ppp. probably intends it by pa^ydmi. The latter half-verse is found
again below as vi.65. 2 c, d ; its text is confused here in Ppp. (vrfcdmi (a/nlndm bdhil
sam aqvdm a^vdn aham). The Anukr. ignores the redundant syllable in a.
3. Downward let them fall, let them become inferior, who shall fight
against (prinny-) our bounteous patron (sun) ; I destroy the enemies by
my incantation ; I lead up our own men.
Ppp. reads adhas pad- at the beginning, and indram for st'irim in b. The second
iii. 19- BOOK III. THK A rHAKVA-Vt.DA-SAMHl TA. I20
halfvrrnr \% fouml in VS. (xi. S2C.d), TS. (iv. i.ioi). and MS. (ii. 7.7). with the
%'ariou^ rcadinf;^ ksinthni and sxuin ; the comm. alv> gives kntuymt. The cnmm. rrnderi
siirim l»y h}ryJh}iytii'i/>/t*}jCtt;fiam. The Anukr. should call tlic verse vtfJf ffai/Jra-
ftinkft, since it properly scans as 1 1 ♦ 1 1 :S ♦ 8-38.
4. Sharper than an ax, also sharper than fire, sharper than Indra's
thunderbolt — [th<'vj of whom I am the household priest.
Kmend.itinn to tnJrazutJnit would rectify the meter of c; hut the Anukr. apparently
accepts the redunflancy there as balancin|; the deficiency in a.
5. The \veajK)ns of them I sharpen up; their royalty having good
herors. I increase; be their authority unwasiin;;, victorious; their intent
let all the gods aid.
I'he tr.inslatton aj^.iin (as in vs. 2) implies emendation of i|'«lwi in A to fftlfni, which
is read hy Tpp. am! t>y the comm. Mi>^t of our mss. (all save O.Op.), as of SPf's,
accent in b j/«;7/</f/f. and Ixith r.titi'ins have adopt m1 the reading;; but it ought, of
course, to l)e ///t'/^iIw/. as always eUewhcrc (atid as the comm. hrre des< ril>es the
word), rpp- has Vitri/Zhiytssvit at end of b. and its d is tij^ram esAm ctliam hahMdhA
t'/(TMr/?/«l. The <lefinition of the verse as trt%tuhh is wanting in the Anukr. (^Lon-
don ms.J. doubtless hy an error of the manuscripts, which are confused at this |x>int
LThe Berlin ms. <h)cs j;ive it. J
6. Let their energies (viijifux) be excited, O bounteous one (mt%i^hiiva9i)\
let the noise of the coiujuering heroes arise ; let the noises, the clear
{ketunuifil) halloos, go up severally ; let the divine Maruts, with Indra as
their chief, go with the army.
With the first two p.Vlas compare KV. x. 103. log, d: tui dhaftaya Mttj^A4t7-attm
ilyudhtlni . . , ud ttitht'tfttlt/t /liyaft^m yttntit i^hAulh. Some of our mss.( P.M.W.t ).< *p.Kp.),
as of Sri**s, reail in c Ni:il,iy,it^ hut InuIi cditi<ms give iul- ; the comm. has uilt$i%tYa%^
and decl.irrs it an imitative word. 1 lit* omission cither of ulnlAyttt or of ktttiwAmtat
would make a Ji't^ttfl p.ida of c. ami th.it (d dti^is wduM do the same for d; ai the
verse stanils. the Anukr. scans it 1 1 f 1 1 :S vS :6 f 8 =: 52. P.ut of our mss. (I.O t>p >
a;;ree witli the comm. in endin*^ this verse with ud Irattlm, and thr«ming the two
remaining p.'idas into vs. 7, to the great detriment of tlic sense, as w *11 as against the
piiiluhle railter form of tlic veise. I'pp. re.uls : ttddiuiruinttim Vt\fiiu\m X'^/tnAhhy ad
i\}it,}n,lfit ;.tr.t/}ni t/u j^/u'fih't: frf/t.t^^j^hoi,} k/tt/ijyttf kftumantit udttattlm , with
t and i as in our text.
7. (io forth. ci>n(|u<T. () men ; formidable be your arms (ha/in) ; having
sharp arrows, slay them of weak bows; having formidable weaiKins, hav-
ing f<»T!i' '!»lf aims (/'«/////), [*il.iy] the weak ones.
1 ' • ♦ half v«*rse is K\'. x. 103. 13 a.c (fouml also in SV. ii. 1212; VS. xvit. 46),
withiHit v.ifMtion; T.S. (iv. (». 4*) has the sani* two p.'i'l.is together, but re.ids iv/^ fr/
*itt tM,it>} r:.tt,t ithni z'.t/t rl**. TpP- ^*'^'* *^*- *""** h**'' verse (with fta yttt»l and I'rff),
ailding as %eronil half i'/«/m» Ti/^ {.t f ntit ytinA.t/y itn,}d/tr t\,f y,j//it} *s,i/tl. The verse
is not T 1/ J/ [_7 4 S : 1 1 ♦ 1 2 J. if the obviously proper resnbitions are made.
8 H- in;; let loose, fly thou aw.iy, O volley, thou that art shar|>cncd up
121 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK III. -in. 20
by incantation ; conquer the enemies ; go forth ; slay of them each best
one ; let no one soever of them yonder be released.
Padas a-c and e are RV. vi. 75. 16, a verse found also in a number of other texts :
SV. ii. 1213; VS. xvii.45; TS. iv.6.44; TI3. iii.7.6^3; Ap^S. iii. 14.3. RV.SV.VS.
agree throughout, ha,v\ng gdc/ia iorjdya at beginning of c, and, for d, md *mistim kAt'n
cand V chisah; the others have this d, except that they put esdm in place of amisdm;
they also give T'/frz for padyasva at end of c, and TS. has the nom. -f/A?, which is
better, at end of b, while TI3. and Ap(JS. alter to dvasrsfah fidrd fata ^ard (for fdro?)
brdhmasatfK^itah. Our d is found again as xi. 10. 21 b ; our e, as viii. 8. 19 d ; xi. 9. 20 d ;
10. I9d. The presence of -sam^ite in this verse gives it a kind of right to stand as
part of the hymn, of which sam-fd is the unifying word ; vss. 6 and 7 are probably
later additions. In Ppp., vss. 6-8, with RV. x. 103. 10, form a piece by themselves;
vs. 8 ends with fira padyasva sii mdisdm kaiii cano V chisah (nearly as RV.). Correct
the accent-mark in d so as to read vdram-varam.
20. To Agni and other gods: for various blessings.
\^Vasistha, — dafarcam. dgneyam uta mantroktadevaiyam, dnustubham: 6, pathydpankti ;
8. virddjagati.'\
Excepting the last verse, the hymn is found in Paipp. iii. (in the verse-order
i-3» 7» 4. 6» 5» ^>9)' It includes (vss. 2-7) a whole RV. hymn (x. 141), with a single
RV. verse (iii. 29. 10) prefixed, and only the last two verses occur nowhere else. It
is used in Kaug. (18. 13) in the nirrtikarman^ with an offering of rice mixed with
pebbles; again (40. 11), in the rite of the removal of the sacrificial fire, with transfer of
it to the fire-sticks or to one's self; again (41.8), with v. 7 ^nd vii. i, in a rite for suc-
cess in winning wealth ; and the comm. directs vs. 4 to be used in the sava sacrifices
{ity anayd bhrgifaui^irovidaq catura drseydn dhvayet). In Vait., vs. I appears in the
agnistoma sacrifice (24. 14), and again in the san^amedha (38. 14) with the same use
as in Kauq. 40. 1 1 ; and also in the agnicayana (28. 25), with the laying of the gdrha-
patya bricks; further, verses 2-4 and 7 and 8 in the agnicayana (29.19); vs. 4a, b
in the agnisioma (15.16), as the adhvaryu follows the fire and soma; vs. 5 in the
same (23.20), with certain offerings; and vs. 6 in the same (19.2), with a graha to
Indra and Vavu.
Translated: Weber, xvii. 272; Griffith, i. in. — See Weber, Berliner Sb.^ 1892,
P- 797.
1. This is thy seasonable womb (j^oni), whence born thou didst shine;
knowing it, O Agni, ascend thou ; then increase our wealth.
The verse is found in numerous other texts: besides RV. (iii. 29. 10), in VS.
(iii.i4etal.), TS. (i. 5. 5* et al.), TB. (i. 2. I'^et al.), MS. (i. 5. i et al.), K. (vi.9etal.),
Kap. (i. i6etal.), JB. (i. 61) : in nearly all occurring repeatedly. VS.TS.TB.JB. differ
from our version only by reading dfhd for ddhd at beginning of d ; Ppp. and the comm.
have aiha; MS.K. substitute idtas; but RV. gives further slda for roha in c, and
gtras for rayiin in d. The comm., in accordance with the ritual uses of the verse,
declares aydm at the beginning to signify either the fire-stick or the sacrificer himself.
2. O Agni, speak unto us here ; be turned toward us with good-will ;
bestow upon us, O lord of the people (f /f) ; giver of riches art thou to us.
RV. X. 141 begins with this verse, and it is found also in VS. (ix. 28), TS. (i. 7. io»).
ill. 20- BOOK III. THK ATHARVA-VEDA-SAttHITA. 122
MS. (i. 11.4), and K. (xiv.2). RV.VS.MS.K. have prd n^ y- in c, and« for vi{Mm
fate, RV.MS.K. read vi^as fate, TS. bhux*as /•. and VS. saJkasrajii; VS. j^oet oa
with ivthn hi dhanatiA Asi for d; V^S.TS. further have prAti for frai/dM in h. I'pp.
combines in d dkanaJti *si.
3. Let Aryaman bestow upon us, let Bhaf^a, let Brihaspati, let the god-
desses ; let the divine Sunrta also assign wealth to me.
Found also in the other texts (KV. x. 141.2; VS. ix. 29; the rest as above; and
Kap. 29. 2). All of these, excepting TS., leave no in a again unlingualixed ; VS.K. sub-
stitute p^si for bhAgas in b, and omit c ; the others have dex»is instead of dn^s; tor d,
KV. gives rdrA devi dadAtu mth, while the others vary from this only by frd vJjt for
rAyAs. By SunrtA (lit 'pleasantness, jollity*) the comm. understands Sarasvati to be
intended.
4. King Soma [and] Agni we call to aid with [our] songs (^r) ; [also]
Aditya, Vishnu, Surya, and the priest (bra/swdps) Krihaspatt.
Found in KV. (x. 141. 3). SV. (i.91), VS. (ix. 26). and TS.MS.K. (as alx>ve). The
only variant in KV. is the prcferal^lc Adiiytim in c ; it is read also by the other texts
except .SV.K. ; hut SV.TS.M.S.K. pive vArunam for Ax'asi in a; and they and VS.
have iiHXf i rabhAmahe fur ^Itbhir havAmahi in b. The comm. takes braAmUlmsm in
d as ** I'rajApati, creator of the gods."
5. Do thou, O Agni, with the fires (agni), increase our worship (brdh-
$nan) and sacrifice ; do thou, O go<l, stir us up to give, unto giving wealth.
The second halfvcrse is of doubtful meaning — perhaps * imfiel to us wealth for giv*
ing* etc. — l>eing evidently corrupted from the better text of KV. (x. 141.6: also SV.
ii.855), which reads in c dtvAiAtaye for deva dAuive^ and in d rAyAs for raytm ; eves
Ppp. h.is devtitAttxyf' The comm. has dAnavi (rendering it ** to the satrificer who has
given oblations **) fur d*Uavf^ also nodaya for (odaya.
6. Indra-and-Vayu, both of them here, we call here with good call, that
to us even every man may be well- willing in intercourse, and may become
desirous of giving to us.
Found also (except the last |>Ada, which even Ppp. repudiates) in KV. (x. 141.4),
VS. (xxxiii. 86), and MS.K. (as al>ovr). For ubhAx* ihA in a. KV. i^^^% brkatfAtim^
and the other texts $uuiMdp\A. For d, VS. has anamix*Ak sam^Amt (or sAtkgmiyAm,
and MS. the same without iifitimlvAt ; TS. has (in iv. 5. 1 *) a nearly corresponding
\\a\{\'cxsc '. vAthA Htxh sArxutm ij jAi^ixd ayttksmAm sumAnA Atat. Ppp. omits a, per-
haps by an ovcrsifi^ht. 'I'he comm. takes smAAx'A in b as for sttAAvAttt which b perhaps
l>ettcr. In our edition^ the word b misprinted susAv-,
7. Do thou stir up Aryaman, Brihaspati, Indra, unto giving; [also]
Vata (wind), Vishnu, Sarasvati. and the vigorous (ivf/'/zf) Savitar.
Found also in KV. (x. 141 5), VS. (ix. 27), and TS.MS.K. (as above). All sare
KV. read tiiiam instead of xul/ttm in c, and so does the comm.; K. puts fJUsm alter
X'hfium l^and for a it has our vs. 4 a J.
8. In the impulse (fpasaui) of vigor (} vAja) now have we come Into
being, and all these beings within. Uoth let him, foreknowing, cause him
123 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK 111. -HI. 21
to give who is unwilling to give, and do thou confirm to us wealth having
all heroes.
The verse seems to have no real connection with what precedes and follows, nor do
its two halves belong togetlier. They are in other texts, VS. (ix. 25 and 24) and TS.
(in i. 7. lo'), parts of two different verses, in a group of three, all beginning with
vajasya followed by prasavd, and all alike of obscure and questionable interpretation,
and belonging to the so-called vdjaprasavlydni^ which form a principal element in the
vdjapeya sacrifice (see Weber's note on tliis verse |_also his essay Ueber tUn V'djap€yay
Berliner Sb.^ 1S92, p. 797 J). Instead of nu in a, TS. and MS.K. (as above), as also
Ppp., have the nearly equivalent iddtn; and all (save Ppp.) read a babhuva instead of
sdfk babhuvima at end of a, and sarvdtas instead of antdr at end of b, omitting the
meter-disturbing utd at beginning of c; VS.K. read in c ddpayati for -tu ; and all save
K. give the preferable ^tf^A^/w at the end (the comm. \i7& yacchdt)\ then VS. gives sd no
raylm in d, and K. has a peculiar d : somo rayim sahavfrafk ni yathsat, Ppp* is defec-
tive in parts of this verse and the next ; it reads at the end of c prajdndm, Pada a is
the only one that has a yVi^<z/f character. ^TS. has sdrvavlrdm.^
9. Let the five directions yield {dnh) to mc, let the wide ones yield
according to their strength ; may I obtain all my designs, with mind and
heart.
All the /W/i-mss. divide and accent /r<f.* dpeyam^ but SPP. emends to prd : dpeyam
Lsee Sansk. Gram. § 8 50 J ; the comm. reads dpeyam. The comm. declares uriffs to
designate heaven and earth, day and night, and waters and herbs.
10. A kine-winning voice may I speak ; with splendor do thou arise
upon me ; let Vayu (wind) enclose {d-rnd/i) on all sides ; let Tvashtar assign
to me abundance.
Several of our mss. (P.M.W.O.Kp.) read rudhdm in c. The comm. explains A
rundhdm by prdtidtmand **vrHOiu,
This fourth anuvdka contains 5 hymns, with 40 verses, and the quotation from the
old Anukr. is simply dai^a.
21. With oblation to the various forms of fire or Agni.
\^Vasistha, — dafarcam. dgneyam. trdistubham : r, puro^nustubh ; 2y^^8. bhurij ; ^. jogafi ;
6. uparistddvirddhrhati ; 7. virddgarbhd ; g^io. anustubk (9. nicr().'\
The whole of the hymn is found in Paipp., vss. 1-9 in iii., vs. 10 in vii. The material is
used by Kau^. in a number of rites : it is reckoned (9. i ; the comm. says, only vss.
1-7) to the brhachduti gatta; it appears in the charm against the evil influence of the
flesh-eating fire (43. 16-21 ; according to the comm., vss. 1-7 are quoted in 16, and the
whole hymn in 20); again, in the establishment of the house-fire (72.13; vss. 1-7,
comm.); again, in the funeral rites (82. 25), on the third day after cremation, with obla-
tion to the relics; once more, in the expiatory ceremony (123. i), when birds or other
creatures have meddled with sacrificial objects. Moreover, vs. 8 (the comm. says,
vss. 8-10), with other passages from xii. 2, in a rite of appeasement in the house-fire
ceremony {^x,^). In Vait, vss. 1-7 are used in the agttistoma (r6. \(\) on occasion
of the soma becoming spilt; and vs. 7 in the sdkamedha part of the cdturmdsya
sacrifice L9. 17 J.
Translated : Weber, xvii. 277 ; Griffith, i. 1 13 ; vss. 1-7 also by Ludwig, p. 325.
iii. 21- BOOK HI. THK ATHARVA-VKDA-SAMHITA. 124
1. The fires that arc within the waters, that arc in Vrtra, that arc in
man, that arc in stones, the one that hath entered the herbs, the forcst-
trecs— - to those fires be this oblation made.
VcTArn I 4 arr found al^to in MS. (ii. 13. 13) and in K. (xl. 3); Imth texts read yAs
for t'/ tlunti^h the first half-vcrsr, ami A^tnami for ti^matu ; MS. bef(ins jrd mfiMX* dmidr
#i^'«//, am! K. fr* *f/*f T' \t;'tir anttir ; K. further \\si% bhuvamtlui vi^rti for ^sadklr jr4
VtlMat/^if/ifit. I'pp. reatla yo <f/iT' an/ttr yiP vripe ttntar yak pufttu yo *\HutHt: y0
viv^{tt flfit', and rombineft in d tthhyo ^^ni-. I*art of t!»e m»v (im luding our P.M. W.I.)
comliiiic f'/T'/f* t^stuih- in c, and ImuIi editions h.ive adopted that reading — doubtless
wron;»ly. .nime thr PrAt. prescribes no such irregularity, nor \s it elsewhere found to
occur with oiadhi. The rumm. explains what diffrrent ** fires** are intende<l : the
r«f//«f7'if etc. in the waters; that in the rioud (by Nir. ii. i^>) or else in the l>ody of the
Asura Vrtra; in man, those of di;{estion ; in stones, those in the siiryakJkmta etc.
(sparkling jewels) ; those that make herl>s etc. ri|H*n their fruits. \Vcl>er regards the
stones that strike 6re as intendrd, which seems more probable. The division of the
vcr.sc by the Anukr., 84 1 1 : 1 1 + 1 1, is not to l>e approved. |_PAdas a and b rather as
II 4 iS ; padas c and d are in order, 12-f 1 1. — In c, correct to Jvtv/fJusaJJiir, as MS.
reads. J
2. [The fire] that is within soma, that is within the kinc, that is
entered into the birds, into the wild beasts (wr^<i), that entered into
bi|K*(Is, into quadru|)eds — to those fires be this oblation made.
M.S. .ind K. l>eKin b with Vtiyilntt yd Jiviv/^a; Ppp. with yo vi%to t*aymsi. The
comm. takes the kinc in a as repicsenting the domestic animals in general, the lire
being that which makes their milk cooked instead of raw, as often alluded to. SPP.
follows the m.ss. in re.iding in b lufytt/isti ; our alteration to the equivalent i*Jyastm
was needless. The verse (10^ 11:13-^ 11=45) is bhuttj^ but also irregular enough.
I^PAdas b ami d are in order, each a trtstubk ; and c, if we throw out the second /«l/,
is a giMjil /,/^M//; A is bad. J
3. lie who, a god, pocs in the same chariot with Indra, he that
belonj;s lo all men {:u}t\:uhtiini) and to all gods (.^), whom, very powerful
in fights, I call loudly on — to those files be this oblation made.
.MS. anil K. have for 1 >•/«/ 'tuinitya fdthatk snmlHihhuviir^ and Ppp. partly agrees
with thrm, rending >y *nJrena santtham sambabkiivtt. In b, the translation ventures
to follow Ppp's re.Hling li^vaAfrxyas instead of -f/Jt^rdr, liecause of its so ob%*ious
preferability in the connection; t/Avyas is cpiite in place in vs. 9, and may perha|i«
have blundered from there into this verse; but M.S. aiul K. have -dtUy*}!: they further
exchange the pKues of our 3 c and 4 c. I'ada b is a very |>oor trittmbh^ though capable
of lK*ing re.id into it syllalde^ [_re.id utA vAf\.
4. He who is the all-eating god, and whom they call Desire {kdma)^
whom they call giver, receiving one, who is wise, mighty, encompassing,
unharinable — to those fires be this oblation made.
M.S. !»rj;ins the verse with vi\\-itiitm a^uim : K., with kutAiiam a^nim ; of b, both
si>oil the meter by re.iding ftttiii^f aftuAfdM ; MS. l>e;;ins c with iikiro y6h ; K*s € is
ccnrupt. Ppp. reads Ah,i for Ahu% in a (not in b also). The comm. simp*y paraphrases
ffattt^fhuAntam hs ptatij^rahliAftxm ; the reference is probably to the offerings whkh
125 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK III. -Hi. 21
Agni receives in order to give them to the various gods. In our edition, an accent-
mark belonging under d of d/tt/s in a has slipped aside to the left.
5. Thou on whom as priest {hdtar) agreed with their mind the thirteen
kinds of beings (bhduvand)^ the five races of men (indnavd) : to the splen-
dor-bestowing, glorious one, rich in pleasantness — to those fires be this
oblation made.
The unusual and obscure number " thirteen " here seduces the comm. into declaring
first that bhduvand signifies •• month," coming from bhuvana *• year " ; and then the
vtdnavas are the seasons ! But he further makes the latter to be the four castes, with
the nisddas as fifth, and the former the thirteen sons, Vi^vakarman etc., of a great sa^c
named bhnvaua (because of vi^vakarman bhduvana in AB. viii. 21.S-1 1). ''pp.
reads bhnvand for bhdtnmnas. The Anukr. docs not heed that the last pada is tn'xfub/t.
6. To him whose food is oxen, whose food is cows, to the .soma-backcd,
the pious: to those of whom the one for all men {vdifvdnard-) is chief —
to those fires be this oblation made.
The first h.ilf-versc is KV. viii.43. 1 1 a, b (also found, without variant, in T.S. i. 3. 147).
MS. (ii. 13. 13) has the whole verse as padas a, b, d, e, interposing as c the pada
{stdmair vidhemd ^gndye) which ends the gdyatrl in RV.TS. The meter (8 + 8 :8 f 1 1 )
is, as brhati^ rather nicrt than virdj.
7. They who move on along the sky, the earth, the atmosphere, along
the lightning ; who are within the quarters, who within the wind — to
those fires be this oblation made.
Our P.M.W. read in b vldyutam^ and P.M. W.I. end the pada with -carati. STP.
regards the exposition of the comm. as implying that the latter takes anu in b as an
independent word: dnu same-. In the definition of the Anukr., virdj aj^ars to \)t,
used as meaning * a pada of 10 syllables ' (i I + 10 : 10+ 1 1 =42). \_Rtzdjr/ ca viu?]
The three remaining verses of the hymn are plainly independent of what precedes,
concerning themselves directly with the appeasement of an ill-omened fire ; but the
combination of the two parts is an old one, being found also in f'pp. The t'y:< X'lon of
the e^ndenlly patched- together vs. 6 would reduce the first part |_vss. i-7j to llie norm
of this book-
8- Gold-handed Savitar, Indra, Brihaspati, Varuna, Mitra, Agni, all the
gods, the Angirascs, do we call ; let them appease (fam) this flesh-eating
fire.
Ppp. inverts the order of a and b- |_MGS. has the vs. at ii. 1. 6. J Tb^ comm, ^ives
a double explanation of '* gold-handed '" : either *- having go]A m hts haiKl to ^fve t/> hts
praisers," or " having a hand of gold ^^ ; he also allows its to take dngirauis eitJ»er a*
accusative or as nominative, " we the Angirascs/' The Amikr, ik4<:s tiiat c iskjagatl.
9. Appeased is the flesh-eating, appeased the Tnen-injaring fire ; so also
the one that is of all conflagrations, him, the flesh-eating, ha%-c I sf/j^ravrd,
Ppp. has atko purusaresinah for b, and tiiis time %'i^vadaxyas in c. The anuttukk
is rather I'iraj than nicrt.
10. The mountains that are soma-backed, the waters that Ik sof/me.
iii. 21- liOOK III. Tin: ATHARVA-VEOA-SAttHITA. IJ6
the wind, Tarjanya, then also Agni — these have appeased the flesh«eating
one.
All our m%%. save one (O). and all STT't save two or three that follow the comm.,
rrad a^l^amam (;«pparcntly by infection from the end of v^ 9) at the end ; both editions
emend to •///<!/#, which is the reading of the comm. |,l'pp. has the vs. in vii. (as noted
alM)\c). and ronibinrA /rrMJ "/rf in s b and parjanyA *'d in c — For "soma-backcd,**
see llillcbrandt, /></. MythoL i. (x>f.J
22. To the gods: for splendor (vircas).
J- J/. ^itn§NMt/»t/' firJJ.i/tjitj^.tti : 4 J •»• • <^/ yajfif// )
Founil aUo (except vs. 6) in I'aipp. iii. Is reckoned to the vanasjra gamm
(Kau^. 12.10, note), ami uvrd in a tliaim for ^pl^ndor (13.1), with binding on an
amuirt of ivory. The comm. cpiotcs the hymn alv> as employed by the Naks. K. in a
Niahtl^Afttt called brAhml^ for attainment of A/<r4^«<f« splendor ; and by l*ari^. iv. I, in
the d.iily mornini; convt ration of an elephant for a king.
Translated: l.udwig, p. 4^11 ; \Vel>cr, xvii. 2.S2 ; (fritt'ith, i. 115.
1. Let elephant-splendor, groat glory, spread itself, which came into
being from Aditi's Ixnly ; that same have all together given to me — all
the g<Hls, Atliti, in unison. • ^-^ ^ij 17 5 « |
A num!»cT of the mss. (inclu<ling our Hp.Op.) read iJityAs [^accent ! J in b, and
several of ours follow it with K<fw instead of K«f/. Tpp. rectifies the meter of d by read-
ing di'vAMtt. I'.mcndation in n to h/tJtfytt^iit would Ik* acceptable. (.'H. (iii- I. 3- 4;
perhaps on the basis of b?) lias a Icgfiul of the pitxluction of the elrphant from some-
thing lM>rn of Aditi (see K. in ///«/ S/tt,/. xiv.3')2). The comm. explains /rifMa/J/vr in
n by /irw/li// p9i\thitam ptakhyMiim hhaxtitu 'be ptoi laimed as l)rlonging to us.* In
our edition, an a< lent mark has dt()pp<*<l out from undrr the ha of hahhuva. An irregular
verse, scanned by the Anukr. as 12 ♦ io:io* 10-42. but convertible into 45 sxllables
by resolving tanu ttf, stifts /, T'/^m r (of >%}iich only the first is unobjritionable). |^lf we
read 4/r:i}t,ts in d, the vs. is in order (12 t 11 : ?4 1 1), except in c (Af</// j«lf :■/ f).j
2. Let both Mitra and Varuna, Indra and Kudra, [each] take notice;
the all-noiirishinj:; K<*^1^ — 1^'^ them anoint me with splendor.
All tlu* mss.* lead tftttius at end of b, and so does Tpp.. and our eilition has it ; but
Sl*r. follows the comm. and substitutes cetattt : SV. i. 154 has s6mah pAui (a ifiainA;
the translation implies < <*/<!///. the other being probably a false form, generated under
stress of the did'u ult tonstiuttion of a singular verb with the preceding ftub)ects.
\Vcl»er takes it as«*7<i/«f. 3d dud perf of ri>ot r#i/ •• frighten into submission.** The
Anukr. taki s no noili e of tlie defi» ienry of a syllable in a. • ^.So \V*s txvo drafts ; but his
collations note T.M.W. as leading iftttt*th (!) and Op. as reading cfttt/H.j
V With wb.it splendor the elephant came into being, with what the
king amcMi^ men {nttififtsyt}), among waters, with what the gods in the
beginning went to godhocMl — with that splendor do thou, O Agni, now
make nie sjilendid.
.f/>.'i. in b. is MX impertinent intrnsiitn as re^^irds Imth sense and meter; it it wanting
in rpp. In c all the mss. give tlyitm {saw A., ilyam); uur edition makes the
127 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK III. -iii. 23
emendation to ayan^ and so does SPP. in his//i//<i-text; but in samhitd (perhaps by an
oversight) he reads dyan^ unaccented ; the comm. has dyan (accent doubtful) : cf.
iv. 14. I c where the mss. again read dyam for dyan in the same phrase. Ppp. has a
very different second half- verse : ^'^/m devd jyotisd dydm uddyan tena md *gfte varcasd
sat'n srje ^ha. The comm. makes apsu in b mean either ** [creatures] in the waters," or
else •* [Yakshas, Gandharvas, etc.] in the atmosphere." The metrical definition of the
Anukr. is mechanically correct L52 — 2 = 5oJ if we count 13 syllables in b Land combine
varca5dgtu\ !
4. What great splendor becomes thine, O Jatavedas, from the offering ;
how great splendor there is of the sun, and of the dsura-V^i^ elephant —
so great splendor let the (two) A^vins, lotus-wreathed, assign unto me.
All the mss. read in b bhavati^ and SPP. accordingly adopts it in his edition ; ours
makes the necessary correction to bhdvati. The comm. reads dhute, vocative, at end
of b; Ppp. has instead dhutam ; and then adds to it, as second half-verse, our 3 d, e
(with abhya for adyd, and krdhi for kriut)^ putting also the whole ^i.e. our 4 a, bH- 3 d,
ej before our vs. 3 ; and then it gives the remainder (C-f ) of our vs. 4 here, with kriiutdm
for a dhaitdmy and in zyavad varcah stir-,
5. As far as the four directions, as far as the eye reaches (savi-af), let
so great force {indriyd) come together, that elephant-splendor, in me.
The comm. reads sam etu in c.
6. Since the elephant has become the superior {atisfhdvant) of the com-
fortable {} S7isdd) wild beasts, with his fortune [and] splendor do I pour
{sic) upon myself.
That is, * I shed it upon me, cover myself with it.* The comm. understands the
somewhat questionable susdd nearly as here translated, " living at their pleasure in the
forest" ; and atisthdvant as possessing superiority either of strength or of position.
Weber entitles the hymn, without good reason, ** taming of a wild elephant."
23. For fecundity.
\^Brahman. — cdndramasam uta yonidevatyam. dnustubham : j". uparistddbhurigbrhati ;
6. skand/iogrivibrhatt.^
Found in Paipp. iii. Used by Kau^. in the chapters of women's rites, in a charm
(35- 3) ^o procure the conception of male offspring, with breaking an arrow over the
mother's head etc.
Translated: Weber, v. 223; Ludwig, p. 477; Zimmer, p. 319; Weber, xvii. 285 ;
Griffith, i. 116; Bloomfield, 97, 356.
1. By what thou hast become barren {vehdt), that we make disappear
from thee ; that now we set down elsewhere, far away from {dpa) thee.
Vchdt is perhaps more strictly 'liable to abort'; the comm. gives the word here
either sense. Ppp- is .defective, giving only the initial words of vss. i and 2.
2. Unto thy womb let a foetus come, a male one, as an arrow to a
quiver; let a hero be born unto thee here, a ten-months' son.
This verse and the two following occur in ^GS. (i. 19. 6), and this one without
iii. 23- HOOK III. Tin: ATHARVA-VEDA-SAMHITA. 128
variant. AIm) this one in M V. [\. 1 2. 9J ( Wintrrnitr, p. 94), and in an appendix to A(fS.
i. I v^ (Strn/lcr. p. 4.H), with vtmim after f^arhkat in a (and ACiS. reads difm)^ and
omitting it/ftt in c; and further in IKiS. (i. 25. I ), like Ml*, in a, but retainin|i; atrs.
3. (live birth to a male, a son ; after him lot a male t>c born; mayest
thou be mother of sons, of those born ami whom thou shait bear.
All the ms^. save one or two (indmliny; our K.) read at the end^'ifw; lx>th editions
make* the nrress.iry en)cni!.ifion to v</m, which the coinm. also ^ivrs. At t>ef;innin|; of
b, rpp. rr.ids /;'<i//f, as do also the comin. and a couple of STT's mss. ; and Tpp. etida
>»itl) y.f//</i J//// <(i. Mil. (i.4.oC. d) h.is the first half-verse, readinf; vimJasva for
jttMiiv,t : and Ml*, (as alHivr) [i. 1 3. 2 J also» with pumAms te fntf^ n.\ri for a. And
(,'(iS. (.IS alnive) has our a. b, \%ith, for c, d, Uu\m mCktd bhavisyast jtliJndtk jammjSmsi
lit |_the end corrupt, as in TpP-J-
4. Anil what excellent seeds the bulls generate, with them do thou
acquire {vitf) a son ; become thou a productive miichcow.
(,'(«S. (as above) has for h fufuu} ja titty ttnii mt/t ; it rectifies the meter of € by read-
ing; tfhht% t for /J/j /■ (and it hasy<i'M/if for viMtfiisva)\ in d, it f^ives snprasikM^ which
is lK'tt«T lli.in our Jif //•. Ml*, (as alwivo) \\. 13. 3 J repeats our vrise very closely, onljr
with n,ix for itt in b, and puttCin in C; an<l it has, just In-fore, the line tAni hhadrdmi
HjAMy 9 %4thht} jitnttvttftiti utUi. A verse in 11 (iS. (as al)Ove) is quite similar : ydmi prm*
bhunt ^'tuilny 9 \af>/nl tdnttvanttt tuth • /t}/r /:;i'ft c,iti*/init bhttv*t sa iAyattkm vifatmmak
sti}tt,}m ; and it offers .1 little later jJ prasur tfheuiiji*it bhavti. Our reading /J/i ivdm
in c is assuied by Piat. ii. S4 ; the resolution tuAm makes the meter correct
5. I pfifoiin for thre the [ceremony] of TrajriiKiti ; let a fa:ttis cume to
thy womb; acquire thou a son, () woman, who shall be weal for thee;
weal also for him do thou become.
I he accent of /'/tthii at the end is anomahms. lUiS. (as almve) has the first half-
vrrsr [.imt .MT., at i. 13. i, ( oncoidantlyj ; it reads Jtarowi at the l>eftinnin||;. and in b
puts III////// .iftrr ;M//'//«if; this l.itter Tpp. does also. The comm. understands prjjj-
p.ffvttffi as :ilH)ve translated; other renderings are |H»sMble ("das 7euKunf*s«ierk/*
Wrber ; •• /euK»nKNfahij;kcit," Zimmer). The metrical definition of the verse
(S ♦ S :S f 5 ♦ S -3;) is not j;«km1 save mechanically.
6. Ihe plants of which heaven has been the father, earth the mother,
ocean thr root — let those herbs of the gods (tftUi'a) favor thcc, in order
to acquisition of a son.
I hr first li.tif verse is found a^.iin Liter, as viii. 7. 2 C, d; in both places, part of the
mss rt-.id if\,}ui p (here <inly our O, with half of SIMM's) ; and that apfiears to lie
rt (piin-d by Tr.it. ii. 74. although the ItMtser relation of the two words fa%*ors in a case
likr tltis tlie riMtiin;^ i/iil/^//, uiiiih Nith editions present. I'pp* has an tiMlependeal
vc'isi«in : r,}ti}/fi pti,\ p.xfjtUt\o bhumir mAtxl babhtiva: with *ievit in C (this the comm.
also rt-.tds) .ind (>i.r7///f in d. I he verse is irregular, and capable of being varioualj
read ; ami Mhat the Anukr. means by its definition is obscure.
129 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK III. -m. 24
24. For abundance of grain.
[JShrgti. — saptarcam. vdnaspatyam uta prdjdpatyam. dnustubham : 2. nicrtpaihydpahkti^
Found (except vs. 7) in Paipp. v. Used by Kau9. (21. i ff.) in rites for the pros-
perity of grain-crops, and reckoned (19. i, note) to the pustika mantras. The comm.
declares it employed also in the piirmedha ceremony (82. 9), but doubdess by an error,
the verse there quoted being xviii. 3. 56 (which has the same pratika).
Translated : Ludwig, p. 268 ; Weber, xvii. 286 ; Griffith, i. 1 1 7.
1. Rich in milk [are] the herbs, rich in milk my utterance i^odcas)\
accordingly, of them that are rich in milk I bring by thousands.
The first half-verse occurs again, a little changed, as xviii. 3. 56 a, b; it is also
KV. X. 17. 14 a, b, etc. : see under xviii. 3. 56. The comm. reads in d bhareyam for
bhare *hain; he understands *♦ be " instead of " are " in a, b. For second half- verse
Ppp. has atho pay asva tarn pay a d hardmi sahasra^ah,
2. I know him that is rich in milk ; he hath made the grain much ; the
god that is ** collector" by name, him do we call, whichever is in the
house of one who sacrifices not.
That is, away from the service of the impious to that of us, the pious. A god ♦• col-
lector " {sa/nit/tftvafi) is not known elsewhere. Ppp. reads for a aham vciia yathli
payaq^ and, in z-^^yo vedas tavam yajdmahe sarvasyd yaq ca no grhe. In our edition,
an accent-mark has slipped from under -da- to under ve- at the beginning. It is the
fourth pada that is nicrt |_read tdm-tam f J.
3. These five directions that there are, the five races {krs({) descended
from Manu (mauavi) — may they bring fatness (sphdH) together here, as
streams [bring] drift when it has rained.
Or nadis might be nom. sing.; the comm. of course takes it as plural; ^dpam he
understands as •' a kind of animals " (^prdnijdtatn). Our O.Op. have at the end
'Vahdm. Ppp. reads for b wdnatulih paTica grsiayah (cf. grsti iox krsti'xxi ii. 13.3);
and, for c, d, sanul^ ^ambhur mayobhuvo vrse ^dpam nadir iva,
4. As a fountain of a hundred streams, of a thousand streams, unex-
hausted, so this grain of ours, in a thousand streams, unexhausted.
The metrical deficiency in a calls for a change of reading, and the usual correlation
of evd in c suggests jff////7y and, as Ppp. reads jtf///J, the translation ventures to adopt
it, as ;// instead is hardly better than unmanageable. Weber supplies aca; Ludwig,
** I open, as it were " ; the comm. s.iys that /// means udbhavati^ and does not trouble
himself about its construction with an accusative ; we may take the verse as a virtual
continuation of vs. 3, and the nouns as governed by samdvahdn. Ppp. makes the verse
easy by reading //?///« rupaq qatadhdras sahasradhdro aksaiah : eva vte astn dhdnyam
sahasradhdram aksatam,
5. O hundred-handed one, bring together; O thousand-handed one, pile
together ; of what is made and of what is to be made do thou convey
together the fatness here.
Ppp. has for bsa/tasrdi *va samgirah, iox cyat/te ^ya sph&tir dyasi^ and for d our c.
iii. 24- BOOK III. Tin: ATHARVA-VEDA-SAttHITA. I30
The comm. reads .utm«}i'ttAiim at the emi, rcnderinf^ it samprdfio *$mi; to the adjec-
tivcA in c he supplies dhaHadht\Hyiktitk. \St\fk kira^ * overwhelm/ i.e. * bestow abuii-
cUiHly.J
6. Three measures of the (iandharvas, four of the house-mistress; of
them whichever is richest in fatness, with that one we touch thee.
rpp. re.ids .It the cml wariAmasi ; the comm. rrf^ards the grain as the object of
address in d, ami the intent to be " increase thou by the act of touching "; Weber under-
stands r.ither the m.ister of the house, or |>erhaps the harvest-wagon. The ** measures**
are doubtless those of grain set apart ; the comm. calls them samrtftikiMfiavak kaUk ;
and he ^ives as altern.itive expl.in.ition of " house-mistress *' the Apsaraset, ft|KHises of
the (i.indharvas !
7. Wringer (upobd) and galheiiT {stimnhd) [are] thy (two) distributors,
O Trajapati ; let them convoy hither fatness, much unexhausted plenty.
Two or three of our mss. (P.s.m.M.W.) re.vl in c vahatiim^ as docs the comm., with
one of Sri' s mss. The comm. explains kuiitirAu by sAraikI abktmatakAfyasmmpM'
dakilH.
25. To command a woman's love.
[^'^.rC {/'iyAldmttM). -rndtt^Jxttrttnam ktlmetuJnyatttkam ca. SmMstithkamJ]
Not found in iTtipp. Used by K.'iu^. (35. 22) in the chapters of women's rites, ia
a charm for bringing a woman under one's control, by pushing her with a finger,
pien in^ the heart of an im.igc of her, etc.
Translated: \Vel»cr, v. 224 ; Muir, OST. v. 407 ; !.u<lwig, p. 516; Zimmcr, p. 307;
\Vel>er, xvii. 290 ; (irill, 53, 1 1 5 ; ((ritlith, i. 1 19 ; Hloomtield, 102, 35H. — Cf. /immer,
p. 300; Uergaignc-Ilenry, Manuel^ p. 144. Muir gives only a part.
1. Let the upthrustcr thrust (/////) thee up; do not abide («///r) in
thine own lair; the arrow of love (kiima) that is terrible, therewith I
pierce thee in the heart.
r.\dA a evidently .^ug^ests ttie fingcrthrust of KAu^. ; what uttmiA really designates
is matter for guessing, and the translators guess differently; the comm. says **a god
so named.** The comm. has the bad reading drtkAt in b.
2. The arrow fe.ithered with longing {ihi/tt), tipped with love, necked
with resolve (} saiftkiiipd-) — having made that well-straightened, let love
pierce thee in the heart.
According to the comm., thfhl means fti,}n,til fUiA : \afyam is htltttlt^fe frciam Jf#-
sam : knimatam is dArn^iihityoh utthi^Usadravynm |_ thing (like a ferrule ^) to fasten
the tip to the shaft J. Our r.M.W. read t^ for tim at beginning of c. PAda € requires
the harsh resolution ta-im.
3. The well .Mraightencd arrow of love which dries the spleen, forward*
winged, consuming {vyhsa) — therewith I pierce thee in the heart.
I he ai rent of w^ut is anom.d(ni\ |^.V/7. iham. $ 1 148 nj. I>eing rather that of a pos>
se^sive « iimiK^und [$ I 305 a J ; [» f. \v 4 J. The comm. appears to take fflhan as signi-
fying ' lung *; the obscure ptAKhtapak^a he makes equivalent to rja^HiJk pak$S ymtySk.
131 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK III. -iii. 26
4. Pierced with consuming pain (f//^), dry-mouthed, do thou come
creeping to me, gentle, with fury allayed, entirely [mine], pleasant-spoken,
submissive.
The great majority of mss. (including our Bp. P.M. W.E.I.) accent vydsa in this verse,
which is preferable ; but both editions give vybsa^ because the mss. are unanimously for
it in vs. 3 c. The comm. renders it by viddhayukta, \\ cannot make out from W*s
collations that M.W. read vydsa. \
5. I goad thee hither with a goad {djani)^ away from mother, likewise
from father, that thou mayest be in my power (krd/u), mayest come unto
my intent.
The second half-verse is identical with vi. 9. 2 c, d, and nearly so with i. 34. 2 c, d.
6. Do ye, O Mitra-and-Varuna, cast out the intents from her heart ;
then, making her powerless, make her [to be] in my own control.
P. M.W. begin c with yd/Zid. Asydi in a is doubtless to be understood as a genitive
(cf. iv. 5. 6), though the comm. says " a dative in genitive sense." LCf. Lanman,
JAOS. X. 359, end.J ^^^.flUu . '}{fV^
The fifth anuvdka has 5 hymns and 35 verses. The quoted Anukr. ssiys pa/ica ca
rcah .
m
26. Homage to the gods of the quarters etc. [snake charms? J.
[Atharvau. — rdudram ; pratyrcam agnyddibahudcvatyam. \jrdistubham .'J i-6. j-/. vi-
paritapddalaksmyd L?J: /. tristubh ; 2^^^6.jagati ; j, ^. bhurij.'\
A prose hymn, found also in Paipp. iii. (except vs. 2, perhaps accidentally omitted,
and vs. 6). A similar invocation occurs further in TS. v. 5. io3-5, not so closely related
that the readings need to be compared in detail. Hymns 26 and 27 are called in Kau^.
digyukte * connected with the quarters/ and are used (14. 25), with vi. 13, in a battle-rite,
for victory over a hostile army; and also (50.13), with vi. i etc., in a ceremony for
good-fortune (and the comm. regards them as signified hy yuktayos in 50. 17, in a charm
against serpents, scorpions, etc.; but this is probably a mistake L? J); yet again, the
comm. adds them in a ceremony (51.3-5) of tribute to the quarters.
L" Serpent-incantation *' (Schlangenzauber) is the tide given to this hymn and the
next by Weber. Roth (in his notes) rejects Weber's view ; but Griflfith accepts it. I
think the two hymns are snake charms for the following reasons. They are employed
by Kau^. (50. 1 7) in connection with vi. 56 and xii. i. 46, which latter are clearly directed
against snakes etc. See also Kegava on Kaug. 50.17,18,19, Bloomfield, p. 354 f,
Kegava shows, I think, that the comm. is not mistaken TCboxkKyuktayos, Weber, in his
valuable notes, observes, p. 292, that the schol. to TS. v. 5. 10 reckons that passage as
belonging to a sarpdhuii. It is likely that the bali-harana (of Kauq. 51.3,4), with
which this hymn is employed (see Keqava), is a sarpabali, — This hymn and the next
are reckoned to the rdudragana (note to Kauq. 50.13); cf. Anukr. Webcr\s note,
p. 297, that these hymns are not used by Kau^., should be deleted. Whitney in his
note to vi. 56 duly reports the connection of iii. 26 and 27 with that snake charm. That
he does not do so here and at xii. 1.46 is, I think, an oversight. J
[With all tills accords Ppp*s colophon, raksamautram. The hymn is virtually 7i partita
— cf. Jataka, ii. p. 34'6. What seems to be a very old snake /^r/V/rt is found in Culla-
vagga, v. 6, and Jataka, ii. p. 145, no. 203, and in the Bower Manuscript, ed. Hoernle,
iii. 26- HOOK III. Tin: ATHARVA-VLDA-SAttim A. 13a
|).ut vi, p. 234. — Note that the seqtience of the quarters in thb hymn and the nest, as
al!w> ill the paraUrU thrrrto i itc<l from AV'.TS.TH.MS., is in /r<r«/<fi(iiisf4f'Orfler. J
TransLitrd : WcIht, xvii. 2*M ; (fritfith, i. 120.
1. Yc ^(mIs that arc in this eastern quattcr, missiles by name — of you
there the arrows are fire : i\o ye be «;raclous to us, do yc bless {aMi-brii)
us ; to you there be hoina«;e, to you there hail !
*l he (oiifiponiUnK uttrranre in *I"S. reaiU : '• missilrn hy name are ye; your hnuv*
there are in fiont (in the rast); fire 15 your arrows, ocean (icr/f/«l)** — and similarly in
what folh>ws. rpp. prffixes ratut (onte rtikutk) at the l>eginninf( of each verse. The
romm. appears to take iifvtis thtdu^hont .1^ a vrMMtive {he tfrvttk)\ he defines it as
nu'aninf; ** < tamlh.irv.i« ** ; the ;uro\%s arc cither fire or rise Af;ni. The Anukr. appar-
ently restores K//i.fy#fw, ami aUf) makes tlie refrain to l>e of it f 10 - 21 syllables; then
the initial ** pada^ '* of I, of 3 and 4. of 5. of 2. and of 6 count res|)cctively as 23, 24. 2$,
2^, ami 27 N)llal)lrs, and tho i ompUtc nuinlKrrs \ary from 44 to 4H syllal>les. |^'l he
Anukr. ought to rail w 2 nt.fi ami vs. 5 vir^lj. Kor "f»o<ls'* as an address to the
ser|>ents, tf. vi. 56. 1, whrre thry are called •• gcxlproplc/'j
2. Ye potis that are in this stiuthern quarter, iin|H:tuous (^ avis}'u) by
name — of you there the arrows are love (itima): do yc be cte. etc.
'I'hr (omm. reads tituttytizai instead of aiiwttTtts. In TS., the name in this quarter
is "smcarers ** {ni/nnptt), and the arrows are •• the Fathers, sea (stigara).**
3. Ye j;<hIs thai are in this western quarter, ViWnfjtis by name — of you
there the arrows are the waters : do ye be etc. etc.
The name in Ppp. is vini/tis. In TS.. the name is •• thunderlKilt-wielders'* {x»mjrim)^
and the arrows are "sleep, thicket {j^Ahxutftt).**
4. Ye gofls that are in this northern quarter, piercing by name — of
you there the arrows are wind : do ye be etc. etc.
In the north, accorcUn^; to IS., the name is ** down-standers (avastAJiutu)/* and the
arrows ** the waters, cxean {sttMtn/rti)."
5. Ye g(Hls that are in this fi.xed quarter, sinearers ($iilif$tf<i) by name
— of you there the airows are the herbs : iXo ye be etc. etc.
Tpp. reads vilimpt\% for ni/-, and makes the arrows to he food («?«««). TS. calls
the quarter ** hrrr (i//ff ),** and puts it after the one *« almve ** (our vs. 6); the name b
*Mteshly, earthly.** and the aiiows (as in Tpp) "food.** The cumm. explains mtiimpSs
as nitattlm hptAh,
ft. Ye ROils that are in this upward quarter, helpful (dvasi*ani) by name
— of yt)u there the arrows are Hiihaspati : do yc be etc. etc.
In this quart'-r {upAft ) atcordin;; to T.S., the name is "overlords,** and the arrowm
" rain, the helpful one.** I 'pp. achls at the end tti raksJImaniram^ and our verse vtii. y t
folhiws. 1'S. adds an imprecation, nearly like that in our hymn 27 : tehhyc x'P mdmmi
/«*' «4» fnuLivata te ydm dvtsmd yA^ €a no tMsti /Am lUfjdmMr dttifAJmi.
133 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK III. -iii. 27
27. The same : with imprecation on enemies.
\^Atharvan. — rdudram ; agnyddibahudevatyam. astikam : 1-6. yp, kakummatigarbhd *sti ;
2. atyasti ; j. bhurij.'\
LA prose liymn.J Found (except vs. 3, apparently omitted by accident) in Paipp. iii.,
after h. 26, but at some distance from it. Compare xii. 3. 55-60, where the quarters
are rehearsed with the same adjuncts. Compare further TS. v. 5. io''» (a passage imme-
diately preceding that parallel with our h. 26 ; a bit of brdhmana between the two
explains that these divinities are to protect the fire-altar when constructed) ; and
MS. ii. 13. 21 : both these omit all mention of arrows. A yet fainter parallelism is to
be noted with T13. iii. 1 1. 5. For the concluding imprecation, compare also VS. xv. 15.
For the use in Kaug. with h. 26, see under that hymn. [_For the general significance
of the hymn, see my addition to the introduction to h. 26.J
Translated : Weber, xvii. 295 ; Griffith, i. 121.
1. Eastern quarter; Agni overlord; black serpent defender; the
Adityas arrows : homage to those overlords ; homage to the defenders ;
homage to the arrows ; homage be to them ; who hates us, whom we
hate, him we put in your jaws {jdmbha),
Ppp. has rsibhyas instead of isubhyas^ and vas instead of ebhyas j and it adds
further to the imprecation tarn n piano jahatu, which our text has in a similar connec-
tion at vii. 31. I ; x. 5. 25-35 » ^^i. 7. 13. The " defender " is in each case a kind of ser-
pent ; and this, which is but an insignificant item in our two hymns, has a more important
bearing on the application of the corresponding TS. and MS. passages. The TS.
passage runs thus : " thou art the eastern quarter, convergent by name ; of thee there
Agni is overlord, the black serpent defender ; both he who is overlord and he who is
guardian, to them (two) be homage ; let them be gracious to us ; whom we hate and
who hates us, him I put in the jaws of you (two) "; and the MS. version differs only in
one or two slight points. The comm. supplies each time to the name of the quarter
asmadanugrahdrthatk vartatdm or something equivalent There seems to be no natural
way of dividing these verses into 5 padas ; the refrain is probably counted by the Anukr.
as 42 syllables, and the addition of the other part brings the number in each verse up
to from 62 to 66 syllables {asti is properly 64).
2. Southern quarter; Indra overlord; cross-lined [serpent] defender;
the Fathers arrows : homage to those etc. etc.
Ppp. makes the Vasus arrows. MS. calls the serpent tira^cinardji ; TS. makes the
adder {prddkit) defender here.
3. Western quarter; Varuna overlord; the adder {piddku) defender;
food the arrows : homage to those etc. etc.
The comm. explains firddkits as kutsitaqabdakdrl : an absurd fancy. TS. and MS.
give here Soma as overlord, and the constrictor as defender.
4. Northern quarter ; Soma overlord ; the constrictor (svajd) defender ;
the thunderbolt {aqdni) arrows : homage to those etc. etc.
The comm. gives for svajd a double explanation, either " self-bom " {sxta-ja) or else
•♦inclined to embrace" (root svaj). Both the other texts assign Varuna as overlord;
iii. ZT" HOOK III. TIIK ATHARVA-VKDA-SAttHITA. 134
for clefnulrr, TS. disignatc^ ihr rroM(-lincd Rcrpenl. MS. the PftiAkn (in the corropt
form sft/tJtu or -''c'' ' ^^^^ editor adopts the latter). I'pp. makes wind (fid/tf) the
arrowii.
5. I'^ixrd quarter; Vishnu overlord; the serpent with blsTck-spottcd
(kalffttlyt) neck defender ; the plants arrows : homage to those etc. etc.
rpp. K'.ids iN/tfttlut- : the roinm. explains the word hy Jtrsmai'armii. TS. calls th«
f|uart(r inhti •this*; in MS. it is ffT-«)r/ 'downward * ; TS. treats of it after the upward
one. ntid m.ikr!i VAm.i the ovrrU>r<l. In our edition, an accent-mark under the -Jtst' of
ftttstiti hail slipped to the fi^ht, under -A).
6. Upward quarter; Hriha.spati overlord ; the white (^-iird) [serpent]
defender ; rain the arrows : hc)niaj;e to those etc. etc.
rpp. h.ift hete the thutiilerlKilt {ti^tifii) for arrows. Part of the mss. (including; our
!-'..( ).K.Kp.) Kivc tittti instead of ^viitti as name of the ser|>ent ; TS. reads (r#/ril, Init
MS. (piohahly by a misreading) <///«f. TS. calls the quarter hrkafi 'great.* TS. (after
the manner of the AV. mss.) leaves out the re|>eated part of the imprecation in the
intermediate vrrsrs (2-5); MS. K'^^'^ '^ *" '^11 every time. (^Reference to this vs. M
made by Hcr|;aiKiic, AV/. t/i/. iii. 12 (cf. Haunack, K/. xxxv. 527), is hardly apt J
28. To avert the ill omen of a twioning animal.
4 ytMXwmaJkyil xndtkakubk ; f. tftttmhh ; 6. vtf^Jj^arhkd frastJfaf^ikJktt ]
Not found in T.^ipp. I'sed by Kau<; . in the chapter of portents, in the ceremonies of
expiation fur the birth of twins from kine, nunrcs or asses, and human lK'in;;s (109. 5;
1 10.4 ; 111$).
Translated: \Ve1»er, xvii. 297 : (iriirith. i 122; nioomricM, 14$. 35a
I. She herself came into heinj; hy a one-by-one creation, where the
being-makers created the kine of all forms; where the twinning [cow]
gives birth, out of season, she destroys the cattle, snarling, angry.
The translation implies emendation of fti^ttil at the end to rusjrati or rivitf// [^rather
futytiti, so as to ^ive a jttn^atl c.idencej — which, considering;^ the not infrequent confu-
sion of the siliilant.s, especially the palatal and linf^ual, in our test and its mss., and the
lo%s of I' after a sibil.tnt, is natur.dly su^^c.Med (_cf. iv. 16. 6^ J. The comm. makes a )et
easier tiling of taking fu^atl from a root f wf * injure,* but we have no such root. Some
of our mss. (IVM.W.K.) read fuim in a, and two (l*.0) have sfstvtl.^ The comm.
undeist.inils if i//t with ful in a. and v\\Aa\\\^ ftititavi} hy fkJlik*txyakt\A. Perhaps we
should ementi to /Iti/'liU*} * one [creature] by one [act of] rrration * |_arMl reject /i^f ?,
as the meter demands J. See WeU^r's notes for the comparison of popular views as to
the birtli of twins, more generally re;:arded as of ^r>od omen. The Anukr. apparently
i ounts 1 1 L I 3 ? J » I 5 : I 2 f I 2 - 50 L 5 2 ? J syllables ; either hhiitakftas or vi^vArifiJtf coukl
well I noii^h be spared out <if b [l»etter the former; but it is bad meter at licstj.
•^.Shown by at tent to l»e a blunder for j/»/kiI, not srstvi.X
2 Sbr (jiiitc destroys the cattle, becoming a flesh-cater, devottrer
i^ v\ th/ittn); also one should give her to a priest (bnt/imdn); so would
she be pleasant, propitious.
135 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK III. -iii. 29
The par/a-iQxt divides vt'oddvarf, evidently taking the word from root rt^'cat*; the
Pet. Lex. suggests emendation to vyAdhvarl^ from vyadh * pierce.* The comni. reads
vyadhvarl^ but he defines it first as coming from adhvan, and meaning ** possessed of
bad roads, that cause unhappiness," or, second, as from adhvara^ and signifying " hav-
ing magical sacrifices, that give obstructed fruit " 1 LSee note to vi. 50. 3, where W.
corrects the text to vyadvard : accent of masc. and fem., Gram. §1171 a, b.J
3. Be thou propitious to men {ptirusa), propitious to kine, to horses,
propitious to all this field (ks^tra) ; be propitious to us here.
* Field * seems taken here in a general sense, and might be rendered * farm.* The
Anukr. takes no notice of the irregularities in c and d, probably because they balance
each other.
4. Here prosperity, here sap — here be thou best winner of a thou-
sand ; make the cattle prosper, O twinning one.
The comni. supplies bhavatu to the first piida. All the mss. agree in giving the false
accent sa/uisrastltamd in b ; it should be sahasrasatamd — or, to rectify the meter,
simply -Jrt. Its/rz//<jz-division, sahdsraosdtama is prescribed by the text of Prat. iv. 45.
Kakubh properly has no need of the adjunct yavamadhyd j it is very seldom used by
our Anukr. as name of a whole verse L8+12 : 8 J.
5. Where the good-hearted [and] well-doing revel, quitting disease of
their own body — into that world hath the twinning one come into
being; let her not injure our men and cattle.
The first half-verse is also that of vi. 1 20. 3 (which occurs further in TA.). Some of
SPP*s mss. write in b tanvhs^ protracting the ^rt////<j-syllable.
6. Where is the world of the good-hearted, of the well-doing, where
of them that offer the fire-offering (agnihotrd-) — into that world hath
the twinning one come into being; let her not injure our men and
cattle.
The omission of the superfluous ydtra in b would rectify the meter. The Anukr.
should say dstdrapahkti instead of prastdra- ; its virdj means here a pada of 10
syllables.
29. With the offering of a white-footed sheep.
\^Udddlaka. — astarcam. ^itipddd* videvatyam : y . kdmadevatyd ; 8, bhdumu dnustubkam :
It J' pathydpahkti ; y. j-av. 6-p. uparistddddivibrhatt kakummatigarbhd virddjagati ;
8. uparistddbrhaii.^
Like the preceding hymn, not found in Paipp. Used (according to the comm.,
vss. 1-5) by Kauq. (64. 2) in the sava sacrifices, in the four-plate {catuh^ardva) sava,
with setting a cake on each quarter of the animal offered, and one on its navel ; and vs. 8
in the va^d sava |_66. 21 J, on acceptance of the cow. Further, vs. 7 (according to
schol. and comm., vss. 7 and 8) appears in a rite (45. 17) at the end of the va^d^amatta^
for expiating any error in acceptance of gifts. In Vait. (3.21), vs. 7 is also used to
accompany the acceptance of a sacrificial gift in the parvan sacrifices. .
|_Thc Anukr. says Udddlako* nena sadrcena ^itipddam avim astdui^ thus supporting
the reduction of the hymn to the norm of six vss. ; see note to vs. 7. From that phrase,
perhaps, comes the blundering reading of the London ras. ^itipddam avidevatyam:
\
iii. 29- HOOK III. Tin: ATllARVA-VEDA-SAttUITA. 136
f mrncl to ^ ittpadavi ticfalyam or cl»c as above ? — Wcbcr entitles the hymn •• Abfindung
mil (loin /oil im Jrnscits.**J
I raii^I.itctl : Ludwi^, p. 37$ ; \Vcl>er. xvii. 302 ; (»rttTith, i. 1 24.
1. What the kings share amoni; themselves — the sixteenth of what
is ofTored-and-hestowed -- yon assessors {sahlu\siiJ) of Yama : from that
the white ftM)leil sheep, j;iven [as] ancestral offering (si'tti/Zitl), releases.
Ily tliix offrriii^. one is rrlciiHcd ffoin the payment othrrwise due to Yama*s councilors
on admivsioii into the other world : the idr.iA are not familiar from other parts of the
mythol«»s:y an<l fitu.1l. j^Hut cf. Ilillehrandt, IV#/. \fvthol. I. 511 ; \Vcl>er, Dn timet Sb.^
''^OS. p ^4?- J The comm. expl.iiim thus: uhhavtivitihtiwa karmanah si^t1it{atamkhylk^
putttl\tift vit/ pAptim ptifixitft^tt vthhaktAtit kiir vanity as if the sixteenth were the
share of demciit to l>e subtinctcd fioin tlie merit, and clcanse«l away (pari-^Oiikar) hy
Vam.i's .isnist.mts, etc. In c he re.ids tniifiKtttii for -it ; ^tttfhhi in 4 he renders fi'/Ztf/M*/.
The List p.'ul.i 1.11 ks a s\ll.il)lc. unlrss we make a hai&h resolution. Our text reads in b
'Pfi9it*isyii ; |_for consistency, delete one /J.
2. All desires (liifftn) it fulfds, arising (ab/iu), coming forth (prabftii)^
becoming (//////) ; [as] fulfiiier of designs, the white-footed sheep, being
given, is not exhausted (itpttJits).
The pretiM; senM: of the tiiree related participles in b is very questionable (\Vel>ef
renders "da seien<l. tuchti;;, tind kr.iftiK "; Ludwi^;, ** komrncnfl. entstehcm!, lebend**);
thetomm. says •• |K.-rnie.itini;, < :ipal»lc |_of rc\%ardin;;J. increasing **
3. He who gives a white-footed sheep commensurate (Siitftmita) with
[his] world, he ascends unto the firmament, where a tax is not paid (tr)
by a weak man for a stronger,
** Commensiif.ite ": i.e., app.irently, "proportioned in value to the place in the
heavenly worhl son;;iit by the ^tver ** (so \Vel>cr also); R. su;;i*csts "analogous (as
rcj^ards the white feet) with the worhl of li|;ht that is aspired to ** ; the lomm., on ht» part,
y;ives two other .inJ diM ord.mt expLin.itions : tiist, iokytttnAftffttt ph*ttena samwak'
pa9tt\hinnitm^ attu^flhaphttlam ; second, ttnfna hhuiokena Sttiir^ttm, bkii/ifkavaf tarvti'
phiiltiptadam : lN)th very bad. For n^ka he )*ives the derivation fttt-akam * non-un-hap*
pincss, whit h he repeats here and there in his ex|M>sitions. The translation implies in c
the re.idint; (w/Zifr. which ( h>n;; ago ctmjectured by Muir, OST. v. 310) is given by
.SIT on the .luthority of all his mss., and also by the comm., and is undoubtedly the
true text. Only one of our mss. (Kp.) has l>een noted as pLiirdy reading it; IhiI the
mss. are so cireless as to the distini tiim of /k and k/ that it may well l>e the intent of
them all. The lomm. p.ir.tphr.ises it .is " a kind of t^x (kttnt') that must l)e given to a
king of sii|M!rior |)ower by another king of defit ient |>ower situated on his frontier." As
|M)inte<l out by Welier, the itern «»f description is very little in place here, where the tac-
rifKC is made preetsely in satisf.irtion of such a tax. |_\V's prior draft reacb ** to a
strtmger.** — .Note that Sri*\s or.d reciters gave ^tt/kils.j
4. The white-footed sheep, accom|>anied with five cakes, commensurate
with I his] world, the giver lives u|H>n, [as] unexhausted in the world of
the Fathers.
That is |_the giver lives u|M»n t!ie sheep J. .is An inexhaustible supply for his needs.
The c<imm explains 4 by vaivAdtf ftp^tm pt AptAm\m $>'**'t»tit*kt}kkff sihJkne,
137 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK III. -Hi. 30
5. The white-footed sheep, accompanied with five cakes, commensurate
with [his] world, the giver lives upon, [as] unexhausted in the sun and moon.
The five cakes are those laid on the victim as prescribed in Kau9. (see above). In
our edition, suryamdsdyor is a misprint for suryam-,
6. Like refreshing drink (/^»), it is not exhausted ; like the ocean, a
great draught {pdyas) ; like the two jointly-dwelling gods, the white-
footed one is not exhausted.
The comparison in c is so little apt that what it refers to is hard to see : the comm.
regards the A^vins as intended, and Weber does the same, understanding savdsin as
*• dressed alike " (the comm. says samdnaih nivasantdti) ; Ludwig thinks of " heaven
and earth "; one might also guess sun and moon. R. suggests the sense to be " he has
gods for neighbors, right and left.'* The Anukr. appears to sanction the contraction
samtidrd *va in b.
7. Who hath given this to whom ^ Love hath given unto love ; love
[is] giver, love acceptor ; love entered into the ocean ; with love I accept
thee ; love, that for thee !
LNot metrical. J This ** verse " and the following appear to have nothing to do with the
preceding part of the hymn, which has 6 vss.* (according to the norm of this book).
This ** verse " is found in a whole series of texts, as a formula for expiating or avoiding
what may be improper in connection with the acceptance of sacrificial gifts. The ver-
sion of TA. (iii. 10. 1-2, 4 : also found, with interspersed explanation, in TIJ. ii. 2. 55, and
repeated in ApQS. xiv. 11. 2) is nearly like ours, but omits the second addt, and reads
kamatii samndrdm a ifi^a ; that of AQ!S. (v. 13. 15) has the latter reading but retains
the addt. That of PB. (i. 8. 1 7) and K. (ix. 9) differs from ours only by having d *7't\at
instead of a viv€(a. MS. (i. 9. 4) omits the phrase kamah samndrdm a vive^a^ and reads
kamdya for the following kamena. And VS. (vii. 48 : with it agree QB.iv. 3.432 and
QQS. iv. 7. 15) has as follows: /v) *ddt kdsmd addt : kamo *ddt kamdyd *ddf: kamo
ddta kamah pratigrahTta kamdi *tdt te. LSce also MGS.i. 8. 9, and p. 149. J Of
course, the comm. cannot refrain from the silliness of taking kds and kdsmdi as signify-
ing ** Prajfipati," and he is able to fortify himself by quoting TH. ii. 2. 55, as he also
quotes 5' for tlie general value of the formula; and even 56 for the identity of kama
with the ocean, although our text, different from that of TB., does not imply any such
relation between them. The Anukr. scans thus: 7 + 6: 11 +9: 9 + 4=46. *LCf. intro-
duction to this hymn. J
8. Let earth accept thee, this great atmosphere ; let me not, having
accepted, be parted with breath, nor with self, nor with progeny.
Addressed to the thing accepted (Jie deya dravya^ comm.). The Anukr. regards
pada c as ending with dimdnd^ and the pada-i^xi divides at the same place.
30. For concord.
[Atkarvan. — saptarcam. cdndramasam^ sdnimanasyam, dnustubham : j. virddjagati ;
6. prastdrapankti ; y. tri5tubh.'\
Found in Paipp. v. Reckoned in Kauq. (12. 5), with various other passages, to the
sdmmanasydniy and used in a rite for concord ; and the comm. regards it as included
under the d^s\gn2ii\on ganakarmdnt in the updkarman (139. 7).
iii. 30- BOOK III. THE ATHARVA-VEDA-SAttHITA. 1 38
Translated: Muir, GST. v. 439 (vs». 1-4); Ludwig, p. 256, and a;;ain p. 516;
Zimmer, p. 316 (vss. 1-4); Weber, xvii. 306; Grill, 30, 116; («riffith, i. 125 ; Uloonv
field, 134,361. — Cf. Ilillebrandt, X'eda (hrestomatkie^ P- 45 » Muir, Mtlrual Trams-
lalions from Sanskrit Writers^ p. 139.
1. Likc-hcartcdncss, likc-mindcdncss, non-hostility do I make (or you ;
do yc show affection {hary) the one toward the other, as the inviolable
[cow] toward her calf ^Chen born.
l*pp. has sikmnasyatn in a, and in c anyo *nyam^ as demanded by the meter. The
comm. also reads the latter, and for the former sdmmanusyam ; and he ends the verse
with a^hnyiU,
2. He the son submissive to the father, like-minded with the mother;
let the wife to the husband speak words {luii) full of honey, wealful.
The translation implies at the end ^afnitvim |_BK. vii. 60J, which SPP. admits
as emendation into his text, it being plainly called for by the sense, and read by the
comm. (and by SPP's oral reciter K, who follows the comm.); this ^not fdfittvdm j is
given also by Ppp. (cf. xii. 1 . 59, where the word occurs again). The comm. further
has in b fad/d (two of SPP*s reciters agreeing with him).
3. Let not brother hate brother, nor sister sister ; becoming accor-
dant (samydflc), of like courses, speak yc words auspiciously (bhadrdyd).
The comm. reads dvisyHt in a. The m.ijority of SPI*'s /^//iimss. give Sihvra/d
(instead of -/d/i) in c The comm. further reads vadaiu in d, explaining it to mean
vatiantu,
4. That incantation in virtue of which the gods do not go apart, nor
hate one another mutually, we perform in your house, concord (or [your]
men {piintsa).
\Vcl>er suggests that ''gods" here perhaps means •• IlrShmans,** but there is no
authority nor occasion for such an understanding; the comm. also says *' Indra etc.**
5. Having superiors {jydyasvant)^ intentful, be yc not divided, accom-
plishing together, moving on with joint labor (sdd/iura) ; come hither
speaking what is agreeable one to another ; I make you united (sad/tri-
ciftn)^ like-minded.
I*pp. reads sudhinls in b, combines anyo *nyasmtii (as does the comm., and as the
meter re<|uires) in c, and inserts samaffrHstha before sadhrUlnUn in d ; the comm.
further h.is J//<i for tta in c (as have our P.E.). JyAyasvani was acutely conjectured
by the Pet. Lex. to signify virtually "duly subordinate,*' and this is supported by the
comm. : JYfsthakanisthabhdvenit para^param anusarantah ; Ludwig renders •* uber-
Icgcn.** SAdhura^ lit. * having the same wagon-pole,' would l)e well represented by our
collo<iui.-il " pulling together.** Cittlnas in a is perhaps rather an adjunct of xd ydmsta
= 'with, i.e. in your intents or plans.* The verse (11 +11 : I2-M2 = 46) is ill defined
by the Anukr., as even the redundant s)II.il)le in d gives no proper ynj^a// character to
the p.^da. ^ Reject vah or else rend sad/triiof thus we get an orderly /ru/udA.j
6. Your drinking (prapd) [be] the same, in common your share of
139 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK III. -HI. 31
food; in the same harness {ydktra) do I join \_yuj\ you together; wor-
ship ye Agni united, like spokes about a nave.
The comm. explains prapS, as " drinking saloon " {pdutya^did). Two of our mss.
(P.M.) read at the beginning samdnim. [To reproduce (as W. usually does) the
radical connection (here between ydktra and yuj)^ we may render *do I harness you.'
The Anukr. seems to scan 12 + 1 1 : 9 + 8=40 ; the vs. is of course 1 1 + 1 1 : 8 + 8. J
7. United, like-minded I make you, of one bunch, all of you, by [my]
conciliation ; [be] like the gods defending immortality {amrta) ; late and
early be well-willing yours.
We had the first pada above as vs. 5 d ; emendation to sadhricas would rectify the
meter; the Anukr. takes no note of the metrical irregularity; it is only by bad scanning
that he makes out any difference between vss. 5 and 7. The translation implies in b
-f«//j//>i, which is read by SPP., with the majority of his mss., and supported by the
comm's eka^nustim (explained by him as ekmndhath vydpanavt ekavidhasyd ^nnasya
bhuktim vd)\ part of our mss. also (Bp.E.H.Op.) read clearly -pi-, while others are ^/ /,,/xv
corrupt, and some have plainly -fr- : cf. the note to 17.2 above.'^ Ppp. has at the end I
susamitir vo *stu.
31. For welfare and long life.
[^Brahman. — ekdda^arcam. fdpmahddevatyam. dinistubham: 4. bhurij ;
J. virdtprastdrapankti.'\
Not found in Paipp. Reckoned, with iv. 33 and vi. 26, to the pdpma {^pdpmahd?)
gana (Kau^. 30. 17, note), and used by Kau^. (58.3), with several others, in a cere-
mony for long life following initiation as a Vedic scholar; and vs. 10 (vss. 10 and 11,
comm.) also in the dgrahdyanl sacrifice (24. 31). In Vait. (13. 10), vs. 10 is uttered
in the agitistoma sacrifice by the sacrificer (the comm. says, by the ^/vi/////<z //-priest)
as he rises to mutter the apratiratha hymn. And the comm. (without quoting any
authority) declares the hymn to be repeated by the brahman-'^x\t.sX. near water in the
pitrmedha rite, after the cremation.
Translated: Weber, xvii. 310; Griffith, i. 127 ; Bloomfield, 51, 364.
1. The gods have turned away from old age; thou, O Agni, away
from the niggard ; I away from all evil [have turned], away from ydksma^
to union (sdm) with life-time.
The acrtan of our text is an error for avrtafi^ which all the mss. (and, of course, SPP.)
read ; vi-vrt is common in the sense * part from.' The comm. gives instead avrtam^
which he takes as 2d dual, rendering it by viyojayatatHy and understanding deva
(p. d^vah) as devdu^ vocative, namely the two Aqvins I and he supplies a yojaydmi
also in the second half-verse, with an imam Lreferring to the Vedic scholarj for it to
govern.
2. The cleansing one [has turned] away from mishap (drti)^ the
mighty one ((^akrd) away from evil-doing; I away from etc. etc.
Pdvamdna in a might signify either soma or the wind ; the comm. understands here
the latter.
3. The animals (pafti) of the village [have turned] away from those
flU<-
iii. 31- BOOK III. THE ATIlARVA-VEDA-SAttHITA. I40
of the forest ; the waters have gone (sr) away from thirst ; I away from
etc. etc.
All the mss. loavc J/hj in b unaccrntc«l. a.n if vocative ; our text makes the neces-
sary correclioii lo rf/«i/, aiul so doci SPT. in his f>tti/a-irxU while in samAif4 he
stran^rly (porhaps by an oversiglil?) retains <l/fij. The comm. paraphrases r/ . • .
astifttft with vii^ttiA bkiwanti^ not venturing; to turn it into a causative as he did xy
ar^fttM. The Anukr. takes no notice of the redundant syllal>le in a.
4. Apart [from one another] go heavcnand-earth here (iw/), away the
roads, to one and another quarter ; I away from etc. etc.
Ittis in a is here undcrsttMnl .is 3d (hi.il of 1. with Welter and with the comm. (= vij^*
i^/nt/it%), since the nicaninfr is thus dccicU*dly more acceptable ; its accent is easdy enough
exphiined as th.it of the vrrb in tlic foinicr of two successive clauses invo]vin|( It
(thou;;h avrftin w.is not accented in vs. 1 a). The redundancy in a is easily corrected
by contiactin;; to •f>nhvl\ the Anukr., however, does not sanction this.
5. Tvashtar harnes.ses (yttj) for his dau;;hter a wedding-car (vaAa/ti);
at the news, all this creation (Mtiiuifui) goes away; I away from
etc. etc.
Ll)isiusse<l at hni;th by lUoomficld. JAOS. xv. |S| ff.J An <kM alteration of RV.
X. I 7. I a, b (our xviii. I. 53, which .see), which reads Irttoti (or y it mi Jt:/i\ and Sitm eti for
t7 xAti : .in<l it is vrrv oddiv thrust in here, where it seems wlioUv out of place; v( \Ati
must be rendered ns al>ovc (differently from its KV. value), to make any connection with
the refrain an<l uitli the precedinj;; veises. \Vel>er*s su^i^estion that it is TvashLir's intent
to marry his own dau;;htcr th.it makes sucii a stir is refuted by the cir< umstance that the
verb used is active. According to the comm., vahatu is the wedding; outfit {iinkitrS
safiii /^rltyil prasihilf^ttntytim vit\inl/itthki}nliit iit(iv\ut>n)^ :ini\ yttnair/t is simply /rtf-
stht^payati. The /<if/<i-tnss., in accordance with the later use of ///, reckon it here to
pilda a.
6. A«;ni puts together the breaths; the moon is put together with
breath : I away from etc. etc.
In this verse and those that follow, the refrain has hardly an ima^^inable relation with
what precedes it ; thouf^h here one may conjecture that analogies are souy;ht for its last
item, j<f/// iiyitstl. According to the comm., A^ni in a is the fire of di|;estion, and the
breatlis arc the .senses, whicli he Tits foi their work by supplying them nourishment; and
thi* moon Is som.i |^( onsidered as food ; for which he quotes a passage quite like to
(,"!». xi. I r,">J.
7. Uy breath did the gorls set in motion {sam-lray) the sun, of uni*
vcrsal heroism : I away from etc. etc.
The (t>mm. tre.its ':i^'r,if,n and Ttryiiw in a as inde|>endent words, and renders
Jitmiiintuin in b by sttp-^uitfa ffPtlX'iiftityitn.
S. Hy the breath of the lonj^-lived, of the life-makers {Hyustrt)^ do
thon live ; do not die : I awav from etc. etc.
In this .iMf! tlie followinjj verse, the <omm. rej;ar«ls the young Vcdic scholar (mJtmm'
valtt) as addressed.
141 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK III. -lii. 31
9. With the breath of the breathing do thou breathe ; be just here ;
do not die : I away from etc. etc.
Our Bp., with two of SPP's//z^<rz-mss. [_s.m. I J, accents dna at end of a. Thecomm.
allows the first part of b to be addressed alternatively to breath.
ID. Up with life-time; together with life-time; up with the sap of the
herbs : I away from etc. etc.
The first half-verse, with the first half of our vs. 11, makes a verse occurring in sev-
eral texts: TS. (i. 2. 8'), TA. (iv. 42, vs. 31 : agrees precisely with TS.), VS. (Kanv.
ii. VII.5), AQS. (i. 3.23), PGS. (Hi. 2. 14). All these read svdyusd instead of sdm
ayusH in a ; and VS. and PGS. lack the second pada. The comm. points out that
asthHtna is to be understood from vs. 11.
II. Hither with Parjanya's rain have we stood up immortal: I away
from etc. etc.
The other texts (see under the preceding verse) all begin with /// instead of a ; for
vrsfya, TS.TA. have ^thmf/ta, VS.A(^S. dhamabhis^ PGS. drstyd; for b, PGS. gives
prthivyHh saptadhdmabhihy all the others nd asthAm amftdit dnu. ^Here the comm.,
in citing the refrain, reads vydham^ which, as implying vy-d-vrf, is equally good. J
As in several cases above, it is obvious that this hymn has been expanded to a length
considerably greater than properly belongs to it by breaking up its verses into two each,
pieced out with a refrain. It would be easy to reduce the whole material to six verses,
the norm of this book, by adding the refrain in vs. i only (or possibly also in vs. 4, with
ejection of the senseless and apparently intruded vs. 5), and then combining the lines
by pairs — as the parallel texts prove that vss. 10 and 11 are rightly to be combined.
LThe critical status of ii. 10 is analogous; see the note to ii. 10. 2. J
The sixth and last anuvdka has 6 hymns, with 44 verses; and the old Anukr. reads:
caturda^il ^ntyah (but further 'fttydnuvdkasa^ L"f^f ^J ^^ sathkhyd vidadhydd adhikdiii-
mittdt^ which is obscure). LB®^ ^^^ P- ^'^^» ^°P*J
Here ends also the s\\i\\ prapdfhaka.
Not one of our mss. adds a summary of hymns and verses for the whole book.
Book IV.
LThc fourth book is made u|) of forty hymns, divided into
ciglit artuva/ra-ir roups of five hymns each. The normal length
of each hymn, as assumed by the AnukramanT, is 7 verses; but
this is in only partial accord with the actual facts. There are
twenty-one hymns of 7 verses each, as against nineteen of more
than 7 verses each. Of these nineteen, ten are of 8 verses each;
three are of 9 and three are of 10; two are of 12 ; and one is of
16 verses. The seven hymns which make the Mrgara group
(hymns 23-29) have 7 verses each. And they are followed by a
group of four Rigveda hymns (30-33). The last two hymns of
the book (39-40) have a decided Hrahmana-tinge. The entire
book has been translated by Weber, Indisclu Siudien^ vol. xviii.
(1898), pages 1-153.J
[^Wcbcr*s statement, that there are twenty-two hymns of 7 verses each and two of 9»
rests on the misprinted numl)er (7, for 9) at the end of hymn 20. J
[^The Anukr. states (at the l>e|;innin;; of its treatment of book ti.) that the normal
numl>cr of verses is 4 for a hymn of book i., and increases by one for each luccesshre
book of the first five lx>oks. That gives us, for
Rf>ok i. ii. iii. W. v.. as normal number d
Verges: 45 678, respectively.
In accord therewith is the statement of the Anukr. (prefixed to its treatment of book iv.)
that the seven-versed hymn is tlie norm for this book : brakma jajhAnam iii k^md^tm^
saptarcam stiiktam prakrtir^ any A vikriir ity avaj^at.het.\
I. Mystic.
[IVffii. — htlthaspaty%im ut%% **JityitJ*Ux'iitam. tttlistithkam : ^,j.Mmnj.^
Found in Taipp. v. (in the vt-rsc orclrr 2. 1. 3, 4 cd 5 ab, 6, 4 ab 5 cd. 7). Reckoned by
Kiiuc;. (9. I ) as one of the hymn^ of the hrhacfiAnti ^ana, and used in varioui ccre-
monies: with i. 4 6 and other hyinn%, for the health and welfare of kine (19. i); for
sucress in slu<!y and victory over opponents in disputation (^S. 23 f.) ; at the consum-
nLition of mariiaKe (7g. 11 ; the cnmm. says, only vs. i); and vs. I on enterin[( apoo
\'e(lic study (139. to). These are all the applications in Kau<;. that our comm. rccof-
ni/en : ill other rases where the pratika of vs. I is quoted, the vs. v. 6. I, which is a
rc|M>titit>n of it. is app.ircntly intciul«>d : see under hymn v. 6. The editor of KAuq.
resj.irils the rest of the anuv^ka, fnun vs. 2 to the end of h. 5, to l>e prescril>ed for
rrcit.ition in I3«). II : Imt this s:'t.-ms in itself hi;;ldy improbable, and the comm. doc*
not sanitii»n it. In V.'iit. (14. 1 ), vss. 1 and 2 arc added to the j^Act r/Mii -hymn given for
142
143 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK IV. -iv. I
iht firavargya rite of the agnisionia; and vs. i appears again in the agnicayana (28. 33)
accompanying the deposition of a plate of gold. And the comm. further quotes
the hymn as employed by the Naks. K. (18) in the brahml mahdqdntiy and by
Pari<j. 1 1 . I in the titlapurusa ceremony. There is nothing at all characteristic or
explanatory in any of these uses. The hymn is quite out of the usual Atharvan style,
and is, as it was doubtless intended to be, very enigmatical ; the comm. does not really
understand it or illuminate its obscurities, but is obliged at numerous points to give
alternative guesses at its meaning ; and the translation offered makes no pretense of
putting sense and connection into its dark sayings.
Translated: Ludwig, p. 393; Deussen, Geschichie, i. 1.255; Griffith, i. 129;
Weber, xviii. 2.
1. The brdhman that was first born of old i^piirdstdt ; in the east .^)
Vena hath unclosed from the well-shining edge (slmatds ; horizon.^); he
unclosed the fundamental nearest shapes (yisthd) of it, the womb {y6ni)
of the existent and of the non-existent.
The verse occurs in a large number of other texts: SV. (i. 321), VS. (xiii. 3), TS.
(iv. 2.8'), TH. (ii.8.88), TA. (x. i, vs. 42), MS. (ii. 7. 15), K. (xvi. 1 5 et al.). Kap.
(25. 5 et al.), (^QS. (v. 9. 5), A(^S. (iv. 6. 3); and its pratika in AB. (i. 19), GB.
(ii. 2. 6) — and, what is very remarkable, everywhere without a variant ; it is also repeated
below as v. 6. i . Vena is, even in the exposition of the verse given by QB. (vii. 4. i. 14),
explained as the sun, and so the comm. regards it, but very implausibly; the moon
would better suit the occurrences of the word. The comm. gives both renderings to
piinistdt in a, and three different explanations of the pada. In b, the translation takes
surucas as qualifying the virtual ablative slmatds Lwhich Weber takes as sfm dias / see
also Whitney's note to Prat. iii. 43 J ; the comm. views it as accus. pi., and so does QB. ;
the latter makes it mean " these worlds," the former either that or " its own shining
brightnesses." Pada c is the most obscure of all ; Q!B. simply declares it to designate
the quarters (di^as) ; the comm. gives alternative interpretations, of no value ; upamas
(p. upaof/tah, as if from root md with upa) he paraphrases with upamlyamdndh pari-
thidyamdndh.
2. Let this queen of the Fathers (} pitrya) go in the beginning (dgre)
for the first birth {janus ; race .^), standing in the creation ; for it (him })
have I sent (///) this well-shining sinuous one (}hvdrd)\ let them mix
(fr/; boil }) the hot drink for the first thirsty one {} dhdsyii).
The connection of the padas is here yet more obscure than their separate interpreta-
tion ; the third pada may perhaps signify the lightning. The verse, with variants, is
found in QQS. (v. 9.6) and A^S. (iv. 6. 3), and its pratika in AB. (i. 19) and GB.
(ii. 2. 6) ; the first three read in a pitre for pitryd and eti for etu^ and AB. inserts vdi
after iyam; and Ppp. also has piire. In b the two Sutra-texts give bhiimanesthdhy
which is perhaps intended by the bhuminastdn of Ppp. ; in d, the same two have
^rUtanti prathamasya dhdseh, and Ppp. -ntu prathatnas svadhdsyuh. The comm.
takes ///;^<l to mean " come from Prajapati "; "the queen " is the divinity of speech —
or else " this earth," pitryd relating to its father Ka^yapa ; dhdsyu is the god desiring
food in the form of oblation, and sttrticam hvdram is susthu rocamdnam kit f Ham
vartatndnam^ qualifying ^//^ir/zm/z/y ahyam is an adjective, tithtr gatt/a7'y am ^ from the
root a/t * go,* or " daily," from a/tan * day *1 and fr/" is either " mix " or ** boil."
iv. I- BOOK IV. Tin: ATHARVA-VEDA-SAICIIIIT/V 144
3. lie who was born forth the knowing relative of it speaks all the
births (jtinhfiafi) of the gods ; he bore up the brd/iwan from the midst
of the brdJnnan; downward, upward, he set forth unto the svadhds,
Tlii.s t.s foiiiul cUcwlirrc only in 'IS. (ii. 3. 14''), which, in A, b, has the leis unman-
af^cahlc ttsyti b^ndhum vi{Vt\ni tifvtS jAm- \ and, in d, nuiti ucci svatihdyA 'M/. Tpp.
sccmA to aim at nearly the name readinf;^ with its bandhum xn^x*Afk drifd jam-^ and
pthtld Uiiil svadhayd *ti. Most of the mss. (includtnf^ our T.M. W.E.I. K.Kp.) read
yajiit' for jitjii/ \\\ a; our O. omits the h of uccAih^ and Op. omits that of svadkik.
The comm. j*ivrx alternative explanations of various of the parts of the verse, trying
//if jti;i>^ lM>th from J*tn ami from jM (the translation takes it from jaa^ as no middle
form from prtt-jfiA occurs elsewhere in the text) ; and svadhis as eitlicr object or subject
q{ pra litsthAu (in the latter case taslhAu l>ein^ for tasthire by the usual equivalence of
all verbal forms), and at any rate si;;nifyin;; some kind of sacrificial food.
4. lM>r ho of the heaven, he of the earth the right-stander, fixed
(sktilf/i) [as his] al)ode (Isnna) the (two) great firmaments (nfJasf) ; the
great one, when born, fixed apart the (two) great ones, the heaven [as]
seat (sdiiman) and the earthly space (nijas).
I'pp., after our vs. 3, makes a verse out of our 4 c, 4 and 5 «, b; and then, after
vs. 6, another verse out of our .| a, b and 5 C, d ; and T.S. (ii. 3. 14'') and A(,*S. (iv. 6. 3)
combine our 4 c, d and 5 0, b in the same way (omittinf; the rest), whde All. (t. 19. 3)
virtually sup|K)rts them, by giving; our c as a pratika. All the three read in c asiahkAyai
(TS. without accent), and A(,\S. intrudes pitA after dyAm in d. In our text we ouyshl
to have not only (with TS.) mkabhAyat in c, but al.so Ask- in b; the accents seem to
have been exchanged by a blunder. The comm. makes the sun the **he** of a: be
renders kshnam in b by avinA^o yathA bhavali ; and vi in c apparently by xyAfya
vartatnAHith. The Anukr. p.is5es unnoticed the deficiency of a syllable (unless we
re.solvc piiArt/i-) \\\ d. |_ln a supplementary note, K. reports Tpp. as reading in a, b #«
Mi V9lhti' (.^) rttsthA nuiyi ksAmam bhrajasi viskabhAyati^ and as giving /f/«r^ for
5 Ad ma in d.J
5. lie from the fundamental birth {Janus) hath attained (^f) unto
(ablii) the summit ; Hrihaspati, the universal ruler, [is] the divinity of
him ; since the bright (ftd-rd) day was born of light, then let the shining
{iiyNfUiint) seers (vipra) fade out (> xn-vas) [shine out .^J.
[Whitney's prior diaft reads "dwell apart." This he has changes! (I»y aslip? cf.
ii. «S. 2) to *' f.nde out," from r-fir * shine.* In this case vi vajantu would lie trref^ular,
for vi ui/taniii ; sec Webtr's note. p. 7. J The other two texts (sec preceding note)
read our a thus : sA bttdhnAd A^ta jiinuiA *bhy At^ram, and TS. has yAsya instead of
tAsya in the next pad.i ; no variants are re|M)rted from Ppp. Some of the AV. msa^ also
(including our T.M.W.l.K.Kp.) give budhnAd ; but all have after it the impossible form
Astra^ which .ST P. ai rordin^ly retains in his text, thoui;h the comm. too gi%'es Ast^ ;
this is read by ememlalion in our text. I'asttntM, of course, might come from ist/
•dwell' or vtts ♦ clothe * [for I'ltstt/Afft f / ]i the comm. apparently takes it from the
former, p.nraphrasinjir the p.ida by d/p/ttnitri/tt rivijah svatzutwApArrsu vivtdkam
ViJi tttntAtn, or, alti'rnativrly. havitbhir dev^ln ptif uaraHlH. There is no reason for
calling the veisc bhurij, [A(,'S. re.ids u^nitm (mis|»rtnt .^) for tf^'/i/jw.J
145 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK IV. -iv. 2
6. Verily doth the kdvyd further (///) that of him — the abode (? dlid-
man) of the great god of old {punyd) ; he was born together with many
thus, sleeping now in the loosened (vi-si) eastern half.
No other text has this verse — save Ppp., which has for ^ piirvddardd avidura^ ca
sahruh. The comm. reads in b pnrvasya^ and two or three mss. (including our P.)
agree with him. Some mss. (including our O.Op.) have at the end sasdth nit ; and the
comm. also so reads, explaining sasa as an annanaman ; the true reading is possibly
sasdnn u (but the //z^a-text divides sasdn : ftu). The comm. explains k&vya ^& yajfla
(from kavi — rivij)y dhdman as tejoriipam mandaidtmakam sthdnam^ esa in c as the
sun, and the " many '* his thousand rays, and visita as viqesena sambaddha. The last
pada lacks a syllable, unless we resolve pu-ru-e,
7. Whoso shall approach (? ava-gam) with homage father Atharvan,
relative of the gods, Brihaspati — in order that thou mayest be generator
of all, poet, god, not to be harmed, self-ruling (? svadhdvant).
The translation implies in d emendation of ddbhdyat to ddbhdya; both editions have
the former, with all the mss. and the comm. (who comfortably explains it by dabhnoii or
hinasti). The comm. also reads in b brhaspaiis ; and this is supported by the Ppp.
version : yathd vd *tharvd pitarath viqvadevam brhaspatir manasd vo datsva : and
so on (c, d defaced). The comm. takes ava gachdt as =jdnlydi^ and svadhdvdn as
'joined with food in the form of oblation."
2. To the unknown god.
\^Ve9m. — astarcam. dtmaddivatam, trdistubham : 6. puro^nustubk ; 8. uparistdjjyotis,'\
Found in Paipp. iv. (in the verse-order 1,2,4,3,5,6,8,7). The hymn is mostly a
version, with considerable variants, of the noted RV. x. 121, found also in other texts, as
TS. (iv. 1.8), MS. (ii. 13.23), and VS. (in sundry places), and K. xl. i. It is used by
Kfiu^. in the va<^d<^amana ceremony (44. i ff.), at the beginning, with the preparation
of consecrated water for it, and (45. i) with the sacrifice of the foetus of the I'/ifJ-cow,
if she be found to be pregnant. In Vait. (8.22), vs. i (or the hymn.^) accompanies an
offering to Prajapati in the cdturmdsya sacrifice ; vs. 7 (28. 34), the setting of a gold
man on the plate of gold deposited with accompaniment of vs. i of the preceding hymn
(in the agnicayand) ; and the whole hymn goes with the avaddna offerings in the same
ceremony (28. 5).
Translated : as a RV. hymn, by Max Muller, Ancient Sanskrit Literature (1859),
p. 569 (cf. p. 433); Muir, OST. iv.'i6; Ludwig, no. 948; Grassmann, ii. 398 ; Max
Muller, Hibbert Lectures (1882), p. 301 ; Henry W. Wallis, Cosmology of the A*K,
p. 50 ; Peter Peterson, Hymns from the RV., no. 32, p. 291, notes, p. 244 ; Max Miiller,
Vedic Hymns y SBE. xxxii. i, with elaborate notes; Deussen, Geschichte, 1. i, 132 ; as
an AV. hymn, by Griffith, i. 131 ; Weber, xviii.8. — See Deussen's elaborate discussion,
I.e., p. 128 ff. ; von Schroeder, Der Rigveda bet den KatJias^ WZKM. xii. 285 ; Oldcnberg,
Die Hymnen des RV., i. 3i4f. ; Lanman, Sanskrit Reader, p. 391-3; and Bloomfield,
JAOS. XV. 184.
I. He who is soul-giving, strength-giving ; of whom all, of whom [even]
the gods, wait upon the instruction ; who is lord (ff ) of these bipeds, who
of quadrupeds — to what god may we pay worship {vidh) with oblation?
iv. 2- BOOK IV. Tin: ATlIARVA-VEDA-SAlClHrrA. I46
In the parAllcl tcxtx. our v!i. 7 stands at the beginning of the hymn. They also com-
l)inc (lilfcr<*ntly the nintcrinl of our vss. 1 ami 2, making one verse of our 1 a, b and
2 c. d, anil anntlirr of our 2 a. b and I C, d ; and in this Tpp. agrees with them. RV.
and VS. (\xiii.3) road in c /<«' asnf. The comm. renders AtmaJJs "who gives their
soul (or srit) to all animals**; of course, with the native authorities everywhere, lie
expl.iinn ktismAi in d as ** to l*r.ijapati.** The Anukr. ignores the ydr^M/Zcharacter of c
LKV.TS.MS.VS. omit the second /ifj of our c. MS. has 1{t yi^ asyi; TS. has /«! 1\t
atyii at iv. r.K, but axyJ at vii. 5. 16. I*itdas a-€ recur at xiii. 3. 24. - In view of the
history of this hymn in Hindu ritual and speculation (cf. SHK. xxxii. 12 ; AU. iii. 21 )»
it might l>e hettcr to phrase the refrain thus : * Who is the god that we are to worship
with oblation? *J
2. lie who by his j^rcatncss became sole king of the breathing, wink-
ing animal creation (j*{i;ttf) ; of whom immortality {tunrtam)^ of whom
death [is] the shadow — to what god may we pay worship with oblation.^
KV.VS. (xxiii. 3) TS. rectify the meter of b by adding U after /kits; VS. has the
bad reading /I /////'.r<//iff. MS. gives a different version: nimisa/ii( ca 9ijA pdiir tYf-
vasYti ji^y^ato b-'y and I'pp. agrees with it, except as sul»stituting vitihartd tor <a rJ/J.
** His shadow^* (in c), the comm. says, as )>eing dc|>endcnt u|)on him, or under his
control. The Anukr. passrs without imtice tlie deficiency in b.
3. lie whom the (two) spheres (krtipuiasf) favor when fixed; whom
the terrified firmaments {nuinst) called upon ; whose is yon road, traverser
of the welkin (rdjas) — to what god may we pay worship with oblation.'
Tlie translation implies in b AhvayetAm^ as read by the comm., and by one of SPP's
mss. that follows him ; all the other mss., and l>oth editions, have ^ethtlm. The first half>
verse is a damagetl rctlex of KV. 6 a, b, with which VS. (xxxii. 7 a, b) and TS. agree :
I'lf/// Jtrifni/ttsf th'itsti (asttihhilft/ tthhy*}il'sfiAfn wthttuti f/j€tt9tAfu; MS. and l*pp. have
yrt another ve^^ioIl : yii imi dyiv*\prihivi tastabhAm/ (TpP* '^^) ddhArayad (Ppp.
dhAred) r*^dti\l (I'pp. avasA) r/jamAnf. Fore, Tpp. gives ^*ijiw/>r« adhi x*itata eii
surah, and MS. the same (save s/im i'/i) ; our c agrees most nearly with RV. 5 c (TS.
and VS. xxxii. 6 the same): yt^ iifttAnl-se pAjaso x'lminah, Ihe comm. apparently
takes At'ttttts as avaiAs - antftAt " by his assistance fixed **; he offen no conjecture as to
what ** road** may be meant in c, but calls it simply dyulokasthah.
4. [Hy the greatness] of whom the wide heaven and the great carth«
[by the greatness] of whom yon wide atmosphere, by the greatness of
whom yon sim [is] extended — to what god may wc pay worship with
oblation?
1 he translation follows the construction as understood by the comm. ; it might be
also "whose [is] the wiile heaven etc. etc., extended by his greatness." ** Kx tended **
applies l>ettrr to earth etc. (a and b) than to sun ; comm. sa)-s vistirtiA jAtA etc. The
verse resembles only distantly KV. 5, with which, on the other hand, Ppp. nearly agrees,
rcidin^ ycna dyAur u\^9A prthi',l nt dr^it (KV.VS. MS. dn/Ad, TS. dfd/i/) yema Sfm
stahhitath ycfut nAkam (the rest -Xi//!) : yo antariksam vimame vaftyah (so MS.; the
others as reported aUn-e, under vs. 3). Our third pada most resembles KV. 6c: ydiri
*dhi sira ndito vihhiti (so also VS. xxxii. 7 ; TS. nditAu vyfii), |^C'f. M(iS. i. li. 14
and p. 154, r/'Ttf dyAur u^'^.j The Anukr. ignores the marked irregularity of b.
147 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK IV. -iv. 2
5. Whose [are] all the snowy mountains by [his] greatness; whose,
verily, they call Rasa in the ocean ; and of whom these directions are
the (two) arms — to what god may we pay worship with oblation?
The comm. extends his construction of vs. 4 through a, b here, and is perhaps right
in so doing ; the translation assimilates them to c. The verse corresponds to RV. 4
(with which VS. xxv. 12 precisely agrees) ; in a, RV.VS.TS. have imi for viqve, and
MS. imi vlqve girdyo m-; for b, all of them rend }^dsya samttdrdfn rasdyd sa/ta ^^hus
(save that MS. puts/^fj/^z after samudrdm ; and Ppp. has the same b as MS.) ; in c,
RV.VS.TS. begin ydsye *mah /r-, while MS., with Ppp., reads d(^o ydsya pradi^ah
(Ppp. -f<ij) pdnca devih. The "ocean" is of course the atmospheric one ; and Rasa,
the heavenly river, can hardly help having been originally the Milky Way; but the
comm. takes it here as simply a river, representative of rivers in general. Padas b and
C are irregular, being defective unless we make harsh and difficult resolutions.
6. The waters in the beginning favored {av) the all, assuming an
embryo, they the immortal, order-knowing ones, over whom, divine ones,
the god was — to what god may we pay worship with oblation.^
Here a, b correspond to RV. 7 a, b, and c to RV. 8 c, all with important variants,
which are in part unintelligent corruptions : RV. reads apo ha ydd brhatir vf^vam
ayan g- d-jandyantfr agnlm; and yd devisv ddhi devd ika asft; VS. (xxvii. 25 a, b, 26 c)
agrees throughout; TS. has mahatir in a, and ddksam (for gdrbham) in b; MS. also
has mahatir y and it lacks c. Ppp- has a text all its own: dpo ha yasya vt\vam dynr
dadhand garbhaiit janayanta mdtard: tatra devditam adhi deva dstha ckasihiine
vimate drdhe ngre. And TA. (i.23.8), with an entirely different second half, nearly
afjrees in a, b with RV., but has gdrbham for v(^7'am* and svayambhnm for agnlm.
All the mss. (except, doubtless by accident, our I.) give in c dslt^ which SPP. accord-
ingly adopts in his text; ours makes the necessary emendation to aslt. The comm.
reads in c devesu^ as a Vedic irregularity for -vlsw, he renders dvan in a by araksan
or npacitam aknrvan; perhaps we should emend to rt vran 'covered.* *L Further,
TA. has ddksam ior gdrbham of RV.J
7. The golden embryo was evolved (sam-vf/t) in the beginning ; it
was, when born, the sole lord of existence (bhutd) ; it maintained earth
and heaven — to what god may we pay worship with oblation.^
As noted above, this is the first verse in the other continuous versions of the hymn
(it is VS. xiii. 4). The others agree in reading at the end of c prihivim dyam ute
*mdm ; and, in addition, PH. (ix. 9. 12) gives bhutandm in b; some of the texts contain
the verse more than once. JJut Ppp. is more original, reading hiranya ulvd **sUiyo
'grc vatso ajdyata: tvam yo dyontrbhra (?) vamiyospa vy apa^yad ftdtir mahlh.
The comm. understands hiranyagarbha as "the embryo of the golden e%%>''^ ^MCS.,
i. 10. 10, cites the hymn as one of 8 vss. and as beginning with hiranyagarbha ; sec
p. 158, s.v. — Kirstc, VVZKM. ix. 164, reviewing Deussen, suggests that the golden
embryo is the yolk of the mundane egg. J The Anukr. makes no account of the
deficiency of a syllable in c.
■
8. The waters, generating a young {vatsd)^ set in motion {sam-ifoy)
in the beginning an embryo; and of that, when born, the foetal envelop
(ulba) was of gold — to what god may we pay worship with oblation.^
iv. 2- BOOK IV. Tin: ATIIARVA-VEDA-SAMIUTA. 14*
Tpp. mnkcA vtitsam and /^arbham chan|;c places, and reads trayan ; it also omits
the refrain, as it has done in vss. 6 and 7. Gil. (i. 1.30) ap|>ears to quote the pratika
with ji^athhtttn^ or in its Tpp. form |^as conjectured by lUoomfield, J AGS. xix.' 1 1 J. The
cotnm. paraphrases ^^«j/M*i//> satn Ahtivttn by f^vtimttt vhrstam vlryam j^arbhJ^ayam
firdptiyaft. The verse (8f 8 : 8 + 84-11 =43) is ill deHned by the Anukr.
3. Against wild beasts and thieves.
[Athanttn. — rjm/nt/n uta vytixkradrfaiyam, dHusiuhkam : t . patkydpamkti ; ^, g4ymiri ;
y. Ltlummati^arbk0 '/aristdJhrkati.\
Found in I'Aipp. ii. (except vs. 5, and in the verse-order 1-3, 7,6, 4). Used by KAu^.
(51. t) in a rite for the prosperity of kine ami their safety from tigers, robliers, and the
like ; also reckoned (50. 13, note) to the rAntira j^'ifrt.
Translated: Ludwi^, p. 4«/; ; (^riU, 33, 118; Griffith, i. 133; Hloomfiekl, 147, 366;
Weber, xviii. 13.
I. Up from here have stritlcicn three — tiger, man (///rwjtf), wolf;
since hey! go the rivers, hey! the divine (orcst-trec, hey! let the foes
bow.
Tpp. reads for a ud tty akt amahs trayo ; in c-d it gives Mrk each time for M&mk^
and for c has hr/^ dfva si'iryat. The conim. understands htrttk to mean ** in secret, out
of sif;lit,** and hlrun tuimantn as aniarhittih santah prahvA hhavantm or antmritSm
kun'afttu. The forcsttrce is doubtless some implement of wckkI used in the rite*
perhaps thrown in to float away with the liver-current; it can hardly l)e the "stake of
khadita** which Kau^;. (51.1) mentions, which is to l>e taken up and buried as one
follows the kine.
/^/OlA. 2. Hy a distant (pdra) road let the wolf go, by a most distant also
the thief ; by a distant one the toothed rope, by a distant one let the
malignant hasten (rs).
The latter half-verse is found a^.iin as xix. 47. 8 a, b. Tpp's version \m f^aramrma
pathit vrkah paretta stcno raruttu : tato vyili^hras paramli. The comm. naturally
explains the ** t(x>thed rope ** as a seq>cnt ; aruttn he simply glosses with giuchaiu.
3. Both thy (two) eyes and thy mouth, O tiger, we grind tip; then
all thy twenty claws (iiiik/iti).
The M< ijofity of mss. (iniluding our Hp.I.O.Op.K.D.) read at the 1>rginning aks^ik^
as do also Ppp. and the comm , but only (as the accent alone suffices to show) by the
oidinarv omission of v after c f>r r; l>oth editions give aksv*tik. Alt the mss. leave
lytl^hta unaccented at the l)eginnin;^ of b, and S1*P. retains this inadmissible reading;
our text rmrnds to vyiij^hnt^ but should have given instead 7yh/^kra (that is, viSgJkrm :
see Whitney's .Skt. Gr. § 314 b). I*pp. reads hanik instead of mukham in a. j^Anukr^
Londtm ms.. has akiyilu.^
4. The tiger first of (creatures] with teeth do wc grind up, tipon that
also the thief, then the snake, the sorcerer, then the wolf.
Tlie roiivt'fsi(»n of sirnAm to ite- after // is an isolated case. The vcne in Tpp. ia
defaced, but appaiently has no valiants.
5. What thief shall come today, he shall go away smashed ; let him
^1,2^0
149 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK IV. -iv. 4
go by the falling-ofF (apadhvahsd) of roads ; let Indra smite him with
the thunderbolt.
The first half-verse is identical with xix. 49.9 a, 10 d. The comm. separates apa
from d/ivansenay and construes it with etu ; dhvaiisa he renders "bad road" (^kasUna
tndrgena),
6. Ruined (tnfirnd) [are] the teeth of the beast (fnrgd) ; crushed in
also [are its] ribs ; disappearing be for thee the godhd; downward go
{ayat) the lurking (} fa(ayn) beast.
The comm. takes miirnds from milrch^ and renders it miidhds ; in b he reads api
0rsnasy the latter being horns and the like, that grow "on the head." The second
half-verse is extremely obscure and doubtful : Ludwig translates " into the depth shall
the crocodile, the game go springing deep down " ; Grill, " with lame sinew go to ruin
the hare-hunting animal.*' Ni-mrnc is used elsewhere only of the * setting * of the sun
etc. ; the comm. renders it here " disappearing from sight '* ; and he takes (a(ayu from
ff * lie * ; godhd is, without further explanation, " the animal of that name." The trans- U> kli ^ xf
lation given follows the comm. ; it does not seem that a " hare-hunting " animal would ^W^t / • ' 't
be worth guarding against. R. conjectures a figure of a bird of prey, struck in flight :
" the sinew be thy destruction ; down fall the hare-hunting bird." Pada a lacks a
syllable. LW. takes murnd from vir * crush'; cf. xii. 5.61 and ///rArr. — In a and b,
supply " be " rather than " are "?J
7. What thou contractest {sam-yam) mayest thou not protract (vi-yam) ;
niayest thou protract what thou dost not contract ; Indra-born, soma-born
art thou, an Atharvan tiger-crusher {-jdmb/iana).
The sense of a, b is obscure ; the comm. takes viyamas and samyamas as two nouns.
I'pp. makes one verse of our 7 a, b and 6 a, b (omitting the other half-verses), and puts
it next after our vs. 3 ; its version of 7 a, b is yat sat'n naso vi yan naso na sam nasa.
The verse is scanned by tiie Anukr. as 8-1-8:6+12 = 34 syllables. |_Read indraji
asi? — For a, b, see Griflith.J
4. For recovery of virility: with a plant.
\Atharx*an, — a star cam. vdnaspatyam, dnustubham: 4. purausnih ; 6, /, dAurij.]
Found in Paipp, iv. (except vs. 7, and in the verse-order 1-3, 5, 8, 4, 6). Used by
Kau^. (40. 14) in a rite for sexual vigor.
Translated : GriOith, i. 134 and 473 ; Bloomfield, 31, 369 ; Weber, xviii. 16.
I. Thee that the Gandharva dug for Varuna whose virility (} -bhrdj) \
was dead, thee here do we dig, a penis-erecting herb. |
The meaning: of bhrdj \cL vii. 90. 2 J has to be inferred from the connection ; the
comm. paraphrases by nastdvlrya. The plant intended he declares to be "that called
kapitthaka " {Feroftia elephant uni). The //ir/<rr-reading of the last word is ^epahohdr-
sanf//ty and Prat. ii. 56 prescril>es the loss of the visarga of ^epah in samhitd ; the com-
ment to Prat. iv. 75 gives the reading thus : qepoharsattfm iti qepahoharsanfm ; and one
of our /rt</<n-mss. presents it in the same form, addinjj kr<t>fnakdle * this is the kftttna-
reading*; and the comm. has ^epoha- '<! but Ppp., ^epaharsinl. As f <^a is as genuine
and old a form as qtpas^ there seems to be no good reason for the peculiar treatment of
the compound.
iv. 4- BOOK IV. THE ATHARVA-VEDA-SAKIHITA. I50
2. Up, the (lawn; up, too, the sun; up, these words {tkicas) of mine;
up 1)0 Prajapati stirring, the bull, with vigorous {vdjin) energy (fiisma).
I*p|>. has a different b, m{' ihuimJ outiihlntlm (compare our vs. 4 a) ; and tt hai at
the end of d vAjiniim; it aUo inMrts l>etween our 1 and 2 this verse : frtias it kkama-
ttlro vrstl iVfl pi%CY ostuihe 7'rstl *si vrsn\ulvtttl I'rsnne ivti khandmasi; and this Is a
verse Kiven in full by Kau^. (40. 14) after the pratika of vs. 1 of our hymn (with the
cofrectioiui vrsitnas and khttni- in a and vrsA tvam asy in b, and the vocative -va/iint).
The e<lit(>r of Kau<;. fails to understand and divide rightly the material, and to does not
rec<>;;nize the quotation of this liymn. Tlie first two pAdas of the added veric are as
it were the reverse of our iv. 6. 8 a. b, which see.
3. As forsooth of thee growing up {? vi-m/i) it breathes as if heated
(> abhittif*) — more full of energy than that let this herb make for Ihcc.
Alto|;cther obscure, and proliahly corrupt. No variant is reported from Ppp^ which,
however, inserts urdhvasrAnim uiath krdhi at the bc);inninf;, before ^<rMJ. The comm.
is unusually curt, attempting no real explanation of the verse : he reads virokii^s instead
of -hat-^ an<l paraphrases by pHtrapAutriktiirupeHa virokanasya nimiiiam prntrnxym-
fkjanam ; ahhtlapiain he glosses by phanyaii^atn^ an<l anati by en fate ; he makes
iitttts mean ** so,** as correlative to yaihik^ supplies pnthvyahjana as object of krn0tm^
and ref;ards the vlryaktlma |>erson as addressed tlirouf^hout. [^liloomfield disciisacs
(tismtt, Z1)M(*. xlviii. 573, and cites it fromTH. i. 6. 2* as refcrrinfi^ to l*rajApati*s sextial
force. — For Tinikit/iis, see HK. vi. 418, and Bloomfield's note. — With d/ta/i, cf. fvasiki^
vi. 101. I.J
4. Up, the energies (^nsffta) of herbs, the essences {sdra) of bulls ;
the virility (vrsftya) of men {ptnhs) do thou put together in him, O Indra,
self-controller.
The corruption of a, b is evidenced by lK>th meter and sense ; prohahly we should
read tic chitsfnA (i.e. -mtls ; Tpp. has this reading; in 2 b) 6uttiklnt\m ui ttlrJ rsahkimdm
(rea<l -fut t}m) ; l)oth editions follow the mss. (p. ^tUmtl and Stlnl), The Prtt. takes no
notice of the passa;;e. The comm. has at heginnini^ of c the unmana|;eal>le reachni;
sampttulm (lU-iiving it from root ///i **ptis/dn**), and at the end fa/tMiHi(am ; and in
each case he is sup|)ortecl hy one or more of Sri'*s mss. lie takes fiismd and sird as
adjectives frm., <pialifyin^ /V<f/// '''utMiis of 3 d. In our text, the accent-mark under the
'Sa- in b has sltppe<l out of pl.icc to the left. The Anukr. scans 12 : 8 f 8 = 28 syllables.
5. Of the waters the first-born sap, likewise of the forest-trees ; also
Soma's brother art thou ; also virility art thou of the stag.
I*pp. has in a rtistlu *sadhlndtn^ and in d drisyam for drfdm : which should have
l>een emended in l>oth editions to the evidently true reading dr^ydm ; it is another case
(as in 7 c) of the h»ss o{ y after f. The connn. evidently reads drsam (the word itself is
lost out of the text of his exposition), and he explains it as ** belonging to the seersi,
An^iras etc.** !
6. Now, Agni ! now, Savitar ! now, goddess Saras vat I ! now, Brahma-
naspati, make his member taut like a bow.
I'pp. reads mt instead of asyit in c. I'he verse is bkurij only if we do not abbreviate
iva to *7'd in d. t^^"** ^ d is nearly vi. 101.2 C d J
151 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK IV. -iv. 5
7. I make thy member taut, like a bowstring on a bow ; mount {i*ram),
as it were a stag a doe, unrelaxingly always (?).
The verse is repeated below as vi. 10 1.3. It is wanting (as noted above) in Ppp.
All our //7^4fz-mss. make in c the absurd division krdma : svdr^aMoiva^ instead of
krdmasva : r^yah^hfa j but SFP. strangely reports no such blunder from his mss. All
the mss. agree in r^a instead of r(^ya |_both editions should read r^ya\ ; the comm. has
again rsa (cf. 5 d), and declares it equivalent to vrsabha ! The Pet. Lex. takes sAtiA at
the end as instr. of sdd " position in coitus^^ and the connection strongly favors this ;
but the accent and the gender oppose it so decidedly that the translation does not venture
to adopt it. The comm. takes sAdd as " always," and reads before it anu valgtiyatd
(for Anavagldya(d)y supplying manasd for it to agree with. The verse is bhurij only
if we refuse to make the common contraction -r^ye *va in c
8. Of the horse, of the mule, of the he-goat and of the ram, also of !
the bull what vigors there are — them do thou put in him, O self-
controller. \
The omission of tan would rectify the meter of d, and also make more suitable the
accentuation asviitt. The great majority of mss. favor in c the reading dtha rs-^ which
SPP. has accordingly adopted (our edition has dtha rs-). The comm. again (as in 4 d)
has at the end tanilva^amj understanding it adverbially (j^arfrasya vaqo yathd bhavati
taihS),
5. An incantation to put to sleep.
\Brahman. — svdpanam^vdrsabham. dnu stub ham : 1. bhurij ; y, furastdjjyotis tristubh.^
Found in Paipp. iv., next after our hymn 4. Part of the verses are RV. vii. 55. 5-8.
Used by Kau^. among the women's rites, in a rite (36. i ff.) for putting to sleep a woman
and her attendants, in order to approach her safely.
Translated : Aufrecht, Ind, Stud. iv. 340 ; Grill, 51, 119; Griffith, i. 135 ; Bloomfield,
'05» 37' J VVcbcr, xviii. 20. — Discussed by Pischcl, Ved. Sind. ii. 55 f . ; see also Lan-
man, Reader^ p. 370, and references; further, the RV. translators; and Zimmer, p. 308.
1. The thousand-horned bull that came up from the ocean — with him,
the powerful one, do we put the people to sleep.
The verse is RV. vii. 55. 7, without variant. Ppp. reads at the beginning hiranya-
^rngas. The comm. takes the •• bull " to be the sun with his thousand rays — but that
is nothing to make people sleep ; the moon is more likely, but even that only as typifying
the night.
2. The wind bloweth not over the earth ; no one soever secth over
[it]; both all the women and the dogs do thou make to sleep, going
with Indra as companion.
Ppp. has in b the preferable reading suryas for kdq cand. Part of our mss.
(P.M.W.E.I.H.K.), with apparently all of .SPP's, read svdpdyas* at end of c, but both
editions accept svdpdya^ which the comm. also has. The comm. understands the wind
to be meant as Indra^s companion in d. The verse is not bhurij ^ if we read vitd*ti
in a. • LAnd so Op. J
3. The women that are lying on a bench, lying on a couch, lying in a
litter ; the women that are of pure odor — all of them we make to sleep.
iv. 5- HOOK IV. Tin: ATUAKVA-VEDA-SAMHITA. I52
For taJpe^ayis in «, Ppp. \\^% pHsti{-^ and KV. (vii. $5.8) ftfi/zf-; both give tdifa-
(ii'iifls ( P|)|>. -//) at cud of b. KV. further mars the meter of c by giving -f^aitJkAs,
4. Whatever stirs have I seized; rye, breath have I seized; all the
limbs have I seized, in the depth (ati^arx^ard) of the nights.
Ppp. riMds in d uta ^arvate : the comm. explains <t//f- by iamohkajrisfkt madkym'
ftltntl-tllf.
5. Whoso sits, whoso goes about, and whoso standing looks out — of
them we put together the eyes, just like this habitation (/tittynrd).
K V. (vii. 55. 6) reitirics the mctrr of « by addin;^ tit l)efure itirati (the Anukr. lakes
no notice of the dcTii icnry of a sylhible in our version) ; its b is jrA^ ca pd{yaii »#
jAntth ; an<l in c it has hannui% for litttihmat^ and (as also l*pp-) alstlni. The comm.
gives no explanation of the obscure comparison in d, nor of the word karmyd^ but
simply says **as this harfnya that we see is depriveil of the facuhy of tight** |^It not
the tertiHPn comparationis simply the closing? We close their eyes as we ckxic this
house. The comm. renders sAth d*uihmtis by nimUitAni kMrmas, — For tlie kMt of rm
before cArati^ cf. iv. 18. 6 a = v. 31. 1 1 a (j«I t)efore {a^ika f), and vi. 91. 2 a Cvm before
vAtif). Other cases (vii. fti. 1 c, etc.) cited by Bloomfield, AjP. xvii. 418.J
6. Let the mother sleep, the father sleep, the dog sleep, the house-
master (vi^pdd) sleep; let the relatives (jMti) of her sleep; let this
folk round about sleep.
For svAptH (5 times) and svApaniu^ KV. (vii. 55. 5) gives sAsiu and sasAtttm ; also,
in c, sArvr * all * for asyAt * of her * — which latter is to us a welcome indication of the
reason for all this putting to sleep, and marks the Atharvan application of the hjmn«
whether that were or were not its original intent. In b, all the mss. have si*d instead of
fT'i/; l>oth editions emend to the latter, whidi is read aJso by the comm. \^Vor asydi\
cf. iii. 25. 6. J
7. O sleep, with the imposition {tibhikarafia) of sleep do thou put to
sleep all the folk; till sun-up make the others sleep, till dawning let me
be awake, like Indra, uninjured, unexhausted.
Several of SPP's mss. have at the t^e^innin;; svAppias. Ppp. reads svapftddkik-^
and so does the romm. (explaining atihik- as adhislkAnam {ayyAdi)\ the latter has in
d Avyusiim ; and Ppp. gives CtinitAt for jAj^tAi. A kkUa to RV. vii. 55 has a corre-
spondinj:: verse, re.idim; for a f:'*ipftA/i svitpnddkikAtaHf (thas rectifying the meter), in
C ii stiryAw^ and for d diyiiulm jAj^t lyAd ahAm. The Anukr. uses the name jy^ii* so
loosely that it is difricult to s.iy precisely how it would have the verse .scanned ; it is really
a bhurij pankti.
The 5 hymns of the first auuvAka contain 37 verses ; and the old Anukr., taking 30
as noim, says simply saput.
6. Against the iK)ison of a poisoned arrow.
f G*irutm*in. — if *f>trtiim. fakMhit/rfatfttm. Aft»ifta$SkamA
Found (except vs. I ) in Taipp. v. Tsed by K^\^^;. (with, as the schol. and the
comm s.iy, the next following h)mn also) in a rite (28. I ff.) of healing for {mison, with
hom.iv:e to laksaka. chief of the ser|>ei)t i;o<l.s ; and the schol. (but not the comm.)
153 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK IV. -iv. 6
declare it to be employed elsewhere (29. i ; 32. 20) in similar rites involving Taksaka.
There is no specific reference in the hymn to serpent poison, but distinctly to vegetable
poison ; and the comm. regards kanda or kandamfila (* tuber ' and * tuber-root ') as the
plant intended.
Translated: Ludwig, p. 512; Griffith, i. 136 ; Bloomficld, 25, 373 ; Weber, xviii. 23.
— Cf. Bergaigne- Henry, Manuel^ p. 145.
1. The Brahman was born first, with ten heads, with ten mouths; he
first drank the soma ; he made the poison sapless.
The absence of this verse in Ppp., and the normal length of the hymn without it,
together with its own senselessness, suggest strongly the suspicion of its unoriginality.
To put meaning into it, the comm. maintains that the serpents have castes, as men have ;
and that their primal Brahman was Taksaka.
2. As great as [are] heaven-and-earth by their width, as much as the
seven rivers spread out {vi-st/id), [so far] have I spoken out from here
these words {vdc)^ spoilers of poison.
Tavailin in d for tarn itAs would be a welcome emendation. The first half-verse
occurs in VS. (xxxviii. 26 a, b : not quoted in ^B.) and TS. (in iii. 2. 6'): VS. omits
varimiia; TS. has instead mahitvi j both rectify the meter of b by adding ca after
yavat (Ppp. adds instead vd) \ and for our rather fantastic vitasthiri (p. vhtasthir^)
V^S. has -tasthiri TiViiX TS. -tasthus. The comm. also reads -sthire\ the lingualization
is one of the cases falling under Prat. ii. 93. The comm. glosses in h siniihavas by
samudrds^ and vitasthire by vydvartante. This irregular prastdra-pankti is over-
looked by the Anukr. in its treatment of the meter.
3. The winged {garutmant) eagle consumed {av) thee first, O poison ;
thou hast not intoxicated {tnad), thou hast not racked (rup) [him] ; and
thou becamcst drink for him.
At beginning of b, visa is read only ^by Ppp. andj by the comm. and by one of
SPP's mss. that follows him ; all the rest have the gross blunder visah (both editions
emend to vfsa). Ppp. gives ddayat in b, and its second half-verse reads nd Wopayo
nd ^mddayo tdsmd bhavan pituh^ thus removing the objectionable confusion of tenses
made by our text. Our arurupas is quoted as counter-example by the comment to
Prat. iv. 86. The first pada might be rendered also * the well-winged Garutmant,*
and the comm. so understands it, adding the epithet vdinateya to show that garuU
//7^/// = GarucIa. He also takes the two aorists and the imperfect in c-d alike as impera-
tives {jid *rurupas = vimildham md kdrsfh). The Anukr. does not note a as irregular.
4. He of five fingers that hurled at thee from some crooked bow —
from the tip {(^alyd) of the apaskambhd have I exorcised {itir-vac) the
poison.
Apaskambhd is very obscure ; the Pet. Lex. suggests " perhaps the fastening of the
arrow-head to the shaft"; Ludwig guesses ** barb," but that we have in vs. 5 — as we
also have qalya^ which seems therefore premature here ; and, in fact, Ppp. reads instead
of it bdhvosj and, as it has elsewhere apaskantasya bdhvoSy we might conjecture apa
skandhasya etc., * from shoulder and arms * : i.e. from wounds in them. Or, for apa-
skambha as a part of the body might be compared Su^ntta i. 349. 20 — unless apastambe
t^
iv. 6- BOOK IV. Tin: ATlIARVA-VEDA-SAIfilHITA. 154
(which at least one f^oml manu^ript reads) is the true text there (^Calcutta ed. reads
a/tastambMtlu^. The comm. has no idea what afiaskambkn means, but makes a couple
of wild cu<^^*'*<^i( •' it is the l>etcl>nut {kramukayxrtt, or it is an arrow (both based on
scnsrli'ss etyinoloj^ies). Ins, I'pp- leads -/^u/i's.
g/f . (7t^^ '*' 5. I'Vofii the lip have I exorcised the i>oison, from the anointing and
yU' from the feather-socket ; from the barb {a/><}s(M), the horn, the neck
have I exorcised the poison.
7^^****^ . 4^rMj^'\ I*pp. reads 7'tuttm instead of itvotatn in s and d, and its b is Afkjanikt parmadktr uta,
J ,jJ^^il^ ' 1*1 At. ii. 95 rvf;ards apttstha as from apasiktl, doubtless correctly ; l>ctween the •• barb '•
, and the '* horn ** there is probably no important difference. To the comm., the apAsika
f>j0,fh^i f^ ** •* IKiisonrcceptacle (apakrsttU'asthtld fiatsamjflthi vistppthitlftttty
L6t^ I ^^ ^' '^•U*l<-'s^» ^^ arrow, is thy tip; likewise thy poison is sapless; also
t-<^7 • thy bow, of a sapless tree, O sapless one, is sapless.
Mjk'f^^ I ^^^^ comm. stranf^cly takes ttnifilntsttm at the end (p. arasa: arasdm) as a rrdupli-
>f^ ' ' j^^t cated word, ••excessively sapless.**
^ ^j^ - 7- They who mashed, who smearc*<l, who hurled, who let loose — they
^i-^ b^^^\ "^^ made impotent ; imi)otent is made the iM>ison-mountain.
y. ^. That is, as the comm. is wise rnoii<;h to see, the mountain from which the poisonous
plant is brought. •* Let Umsc** {avasfj) probably applies to arrows as distinguished
from spe.irs; though *• hiirT* mij;ht be used equally of iNith. Ppp. has in C samim
instc.id of krttix. Acrordinjj to SPIV, the text used by the comm. combines ^^ *pisam;
apiuiH is an anom.ilous form for apiiisan, with which the comm. f;los.scs it.
8. Imjwtent [are] thy di^pjers; impotent art thou, () herb; impotent
[is] that ru<;j;ed (pdrvata) mountain whence was born this [>oison.
.As was prtinted out alnivc (tuidrr iv. 4.2). the first half-verse is a sort of opposite
of omr found in Tpp., and c|uoted by Khu(;. (at 40. 14). |^With pjrt'ti/a j^'ri ct. mrj^J
/ttis/fn, xii. I. 25. J
7. Against poison.
[ Ctru/mttu. — vtlnat/titr.im. tlttustHhkam : 4. JtvrJ/ ]
Found in IWipp., but not all to;;i>lher ; vs. 1 occurs in v., vss. 2-6 in ii., and vs. 7 in
vi. Not U5<'d by Kilu^. uidrss it is properly re^ardeti by the schol. and the comm. (sc«
under h. 6) as included with h. 6 by the citation (2^. I) of the latter's pratika (the
comm. puts it on the ground of the /iif7//V«Ij«l rule^rtftA/fff^/yi tl jl^tikanJt^ KAu(. 8. 31 ).
Iransl.acd: Ludwij;, p. 201; (iiiH, 2S. 121; t^ritVith, i. 138 ; l5loomficid, 26, 376;
WcIkt, xviii. 26.
I. This water (itir) shall ward off (ivf/vir-) ujKin the Varanavati ; an
on i>ouiin'; of ambrosia (ti9nr(ti) is there; with it I ward off thy i)oison.
Tlu- sii;uilir.ince of the vers** li<'s in its punning;; u|>on r-Jr and var; the name tvrrtf-
piAviMtl is not found elscwhrrc, but has surfuient analogies elsewhere: it is formed, as
thr K niuin. |)oints out, fr»mi the tror n.imc vantna [Oatafva fiarhMrghti). Ppp. has in
ba flilforriit pun: viu HUi}*i Abhft^tm; anil for d it reads iac cakdrJk *rasam tt'smm.
The first p.id.i lacks a syllablt*. unless we resolve va-ir. [d, %. 3. I n.J
ISS TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK IV. -iv. 7
2. Sapless is the poison of the east, sapless what is of the north ; also
this that is of the south is exchangeable with gruel (karambhd).
That is, is no stronger or more harmful than gruel. Except our Bp., which has
adharacytim^ all the mss. accent -racyam^ and SFP. follows them; our edition emends
to -rdcyiifn^ to accord with the two adjectives of like formation in a, b. Ppp. puts
arasam after visam in a.
3. Having made gruel of sesame (.^), teeming with fat, steaming (.^),
thou dost not rack, O ill-bodied one, him that has eaten thee merely from
hunger.
The verse is full of difficulties and doubtful points. The translation implies in d
emendation oi jaksivant sd Ko jaksivatisam^ as suggested by BR., s.v. rup (Grill rejects
it, but unwisely) ; Ppp. reads jaksivipyasya. The construction of the augmentless
aorist-fonn rfirupas with nd instead of ma is against all rule and usage ; the easiest
emendation would be to na *n7rupas; Ppp. gives nu rurtipah, SPP. unaccountably
reads rilrupah in pada-icxtj both here and in 5 d and 6 d, against all but one of his
padij-mss. in this verse, and also against Prat. iv. 86, which distinctly requires rurupah ;
and (in all the three cases alike) the /^^/i-mss. add after the word the sign which they
arc accustomed to use when a /<z^fi-reading is to be changed to something else in
samhitd. \\\ c, the //z^^-reading is dustano iti duhotano ; the case is noted under
Prat. ii. 85. Tit y dm in a is rendered as if tilyiim^ from tila (so the Pet. Lex.) ; the
comm. derives it from tiras^ and renders it tirobhavam * vanishing,* which is as sense-
less as it is etymologically absurd ; Ppp. reads instead iurlyam. According to K.ijan.
xvi. 23, a sort of rice (as ripening in three months) is called tiriya {Jirima ?)^ but the
word appears to be only a modern one, and is hardly to be looked for here. \\ cannot
find it in the Poona ed.*J Grill makes the very unsatisfactory conjecture aiiriyam
"running over." In b, all our mss. (as also the comment on Prat. ii. 62) read ptbas-
phdkdm (p. pibahophdkdm^ which the comment just quoted ratifies), as our edition
reads ; SPP., on the other hand, prints plbaspdkdm (comm. pivaspdkam^ explained
as ** fat-cooking ") and declares this to be the unanimous reading of his authorities : this
discordance of testimony is quite unexplainable. The translation implies emendation of
the //i//rt-reading X.o pibah^sphdkdm, Ppp. reads uddhrtam for the problematic uddra-
t/tfm ; but the latter is supported by RV. i. 187. 10 (of whose first two padas, indeed,
our a, b seem to be a reminiscence) : karambhd osadhe bhava ptvo vrkkd nddrathik.
The comm. explains the word as udriktdrtijanakam (Sayana to RV. entirely differently).
Lin a supplementary note, Roth reports : Ppp. has pivassdkam; R. has, p.m., pibaspd-y
corrected to pibasphd- \ T. has plvaspd'.\ LCorrect the verse-number : for 6 read 3. J
•[^Or is nirapa^ at p. 220M, a variant of tiriya f The two are easily confused in
ndgarl.\
4. Away we make thine intoxication fly, like an arrow ((urd), O
intoxicating one (f.) ; we make thee with our spell {vdcas) to stand forth,
like a boiling pot.
The comm. (with a pair of SPP's mss.) reads (arum in b*; it also (alone) has
jesantam {= prayafamdnam) in c; one of our mss. (Op.), with two or tjiree of SPP*s,
give instead pisantam, Ppp. has a peculiar c : pari tvd varmi ve^antam. The verse
is regular if we make the ordinary abbreviation of iva to ^va in b and c *[^The
reciters K and V gave qarikm: comm. renders as if fdrum 'arrow.' UK. render the
iv. 7- BOOK IV. THE ATHARVA-VEDA-SAIMHITA. I56
verb in d by * wc{;stcllen.* When you set the pot aside (take it off the fire), it stops
boiling ; and so the |>otson is to stop worlcing. Uut see also Weber's note. J
5. With a spell wc cause to stand about [thcc] as it were a collected
tnmp {i;^n1ffiit) ; stand thou, like a tree in [its] station ; spade-dug one (f.),
thou rackcst not.
l*hc comm., here and in 6 d, reads ahhrtstltf {-sHU = -/aMAr), which looks like a
result of the common confusion of JtA and j. SI* P. reads in ^aifa-icxX rArupak^ and
this time witiiout any report as to the readings of his/<t«/ei-mss. — doubtless by an o%*er-
si;;ht, as all but one of them give rur- in l>oth 3 d and 6 d. The true scanning of C is
probably vrks^ *vti sthi-mn-i.
6. Tor covers (? paviis(a) they bought thee, also for garments (? dfir^d\
for goat-skins; purchasable {} prakri) art thou, O herb; spade-dug one,
thou rackcst not.
The cnmm. knows nothing of wliat paxuisUi and dttr^a mean, but etymdogites the
former out of pava9ta and asta {^pavanAyA ^stikih sammArjanllrnAik)^ and the other
out of iius and r^ya {tiustai^yasapftbatuihibhih) ! Piakrls he renders by prdkmrsema
krltil.
7. Who of you did what first unattained deeds — let them not harm
our heroes here ; for that purpose I put you forward.
This verse cKCurs again later, as v. 6. 2, and in Tpp. makes a part of that hymn alone.
Its sense is very questionable, and its connection casts no light u|>on it, either here or
there ; and (;rill is justified in omitting it as having apparently nothing to do with the
rest of this hymn. All tlic /<if/<i-mss. save one of SI*r*s read dnaptA (not -/^A) ; and
all save our Hp. read praiham,ih (Hp. -mi ) ; SI*P. gives in his pada-Xtxt -idk and 'mik ;
the translation here given implies -A) and •///</, without intending to imply that the other
readings may not t>e equally good; the comm. takes dmitptdk { = ammmmkildk
|_* unkindly *J) as qualifying fa/ravas understood, and praikami as qualifying kdrmdmi,
8. Accompanying the consecration of a king.
[Atkttrxtiff^iras. — rd;y*1hhisfkvam, ttinJramasam^ JIfyam. JImmihihkam :
/, 7. hkunktriMtuhk ; j. trtstubk ; j. vtrdffrasMrafamkit.]
Found in TAipp. iv. (in the versr-ordcr 1-3, 7, 4-^>). For occurrences in other texts,
see under the verses. Used by Kriu<;. (17. 1 ff.), and also in Vikit (36. 7) in connection
with the nljiWiisrka or rdjastiya ceremony; and VAit. (39. 12) further employs vs. 5 hi
the a/^fiicayana, with |M)uring of water arouml the erected altar.
TransLitetl : Ludwig, p. 4 58 ; Zimmer, p. 213 ; Wcl)er, Ueber dtn RAjasikyn^ Birtintr
Abh.^ 1893* p- 139 (^vith full discussion) ; C^ritruh, i. 139; Bloomfield, ill, 378; Weber,
xviii. 30.
I. The bcin*; (bhuUi) sets milk in beings; he has become the over-
lord of beings; Death attends (car) the royal consecration (rAjastkya) of
him ; let him, as king, approve this royalty.
The meaning is o)>scure. Very poMibly bhiilA is taken here in more than one of its
senses, by a kind of play u|>on the word. \VelH*r renders it the first time by ** powerful **
{krafti^)^ neatly as the comm., whose gloss is tamrddkak ; the latter gives It the same
157 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK IV. -iv. 8
sense the second time, but the third time simply prdnindm. The introduction of
"death" in the second half-verse suggests the interpretation (R.) that the deceased
predecessor of the prince now to be consecrated is besought to g^ve his sanction to the
ceremony from the world of the departed (Mw/<i). The comm. regards death as
brought in in the character of dharmarUja^ as he who requites good and evil deeds.
T13. (in ii. 7. 15*) is the only other text that has this verse, reading in « carati prdvistah
{{ox p Ay a a dadhdti)7ixvA in c mrtydu : the variants are of a character to make us dis-
trust tiie value of the matter as admitting any consistent interpretation. Ppp. reads in
C sa te for tdsya,
2. Go forward unto [it]; do not long (> ven) away, a stern (ugrd)
corrector {ccttdr)^ rival-slayer ; approach (a-sthd)^ O increascr of friends ;
may the gods bless (adhi-brn) thee.
Found, with vs. 3, in TI3. (in ii. 7. 8'), and also, with the remainder of the hymn, in K.
(xxxvii. 9). Lit seems to be a reminiscence of the Indra-verse, RV. v. 31. 2, applied, like
vs. 3 of this hymn, to the king. J TB. reads in a (for ma *pa venas) 7'frdytts7'a, and
Ppp. has vidayasva ; TB. gives, as also the comm., the nom. mitravdrdhanas (a later
repetition of the verse, in ii. 7. i6s presents vrtrahdniamas instead) ; and it ends with
bravan* which is better, and might have been read in our text, as near half the mss.
give it ; but SPP. also accepts bruvan^ with the comm. The comm. takes the ** throne "
as object of- the first verb, and renders ma *pa venas by apakdmam anicchdm md
kdrsih [^cf. vivcn in BR. J. (Weber renders ven by "see.") •[^But the Poona ed.,
p. 716, has bruvan.\
3. Him approaching all waited upon {pari-bhus) ; clothing himself in
fortune, he goes about {car)^ having own brightness ; great is that name of
the virile (vrsan) Asura ; having all forms, he approached immortal things.
This is a RV. verse (iii. 38. 4 : repeated without variant as VS. xxxiii. 22), transferred
from Indra to the king; RV. reads, as does Ppp., frfyas in b. TB. (as above) has
svdrocds at end of b, and asyd for vfsnas in c. At the beginning of c, the comm. has
mahas (but explains it 2& — maha() iad visno^ and a couple of SPP's mss. support
him. He renders pdri abhusan either alamkurvantu or sevantdm: that the form is
imperative is the pK)int he is sure of; and as alternative value of asuriuya he gives
(^atrutidth nirasiiuh I \\% not dsurasya nama a simple periphrasis of tfj//ry<J//i, * the
divinity ' that " doth hedge a king," in which gods are said to clothe themselves at
RV. iii. 38. 7 ? Nama might then be construed with vdsdnas^ or else as above. J
4. A tiger, upon the tiger's [skin], do thou stride out unto the great
quarters ; let all the people (i^i^as) want thee, the waters of heaven, rich
in milk.
That is, let the rains not de.scrt thee (so the comm. also). This verse and the two
following arc found, in the same order, in TB. ii. 7. iS^^* ; it puts ddhi after vdiyydghri
(sf() in a, reads frayasva in b, and has for d ma tvdd rdstrdm ddhi bhra^at (found
below as vi. 87. i d, and in other texts: see under that verse). Ppp. gives yanti \ox
ydnii? \ instead of vafichaniu in c.
5. The waters of heaven that revel with milk, in the atmosphere or
also on the earth — with the splendor of all those waters do I pour upon
{ab/ii-sic) thee.
iv. 8- BOOK IV. THK ATHARVA-VEDA-SAICIHITA. 158
Tlie vcrnion of the first half-vcrsc given by I'H. is quite different : yd iiitytl i^k
filytisil sttml*iihhiivuh : yi aniArikse utA piriktvlr yih ; and l*pp. so far agrees as to
have uttt pArthh'S \tlh ; Tli. also reads fMni for apitn in c. 'I he comm. renders
tnatitinti as if causative : ptAninas tarpayand. 'I he abkiitka process, instead of an
anointing with oil, is a pouring of water u|)on the persf>n to be consecrated. The
verse ( 1 1 + 10 : 8 { S = 37) lai ks three syllables of I)eing complete, rather than two. |^l*ut
another t'ff J at the beginning of b ami the verse is orderly, 1 1 -f- 1 1 : 8 +8. J
[^Perhaps ////ir/ here approaclics its physical meaning, * lioil <cf. (^'H. hi. 4. 3 end, and
my KetuU'f\ p. 211), bubble over, overflow * ; used of the rains that *drip alHindantly
with * pAytis or life-giving moiNture. \V*s prior draft rendered nuui by ** intoxicate ** ;
over this he interlined "revel.** — This, says \Vcl>er, is the verse of the act of conse-
cration pro|>er. 'I'he celebrant transfers to the king the vArtas or glory-giving vigor
of the waters of all three worlds. J
6. The heavenly waters, rich in milk, have poured ui)on thcc with
splendor ; that thou be an increaser of friends, so shall Savitar make thee.
!nstca<l of our auOnift, SIM', gives, as the re.iding of all his authorities, asuam^
which is decidedly preferable, and implied in the transLition (our lip. is doubtful; other
mss. {Missibly overlooked at this |>oint) : TH. has instead a%uam ; \*\*[*. anrl the comm,
airjan. Then, for b, Til. and I'pp g'^'*' lifiyfHti pAymA (l'pp-/'*y-) tttkA ; and in C
Til. has rAs/fii7>Afi/A', which is bettrr, and before it yAthAsA (regarded by itt com-
mentary as vAf/iA : ilstt).
7. Thus, emhracinj; the li^t r, they incite (///) the lion unto great
gootl-f«)rtune ; as the wellbein;; ones (snMn) the ocean that stands, do
they rub thorouj;hly down the leopard amiil the waters.
Found also in TH. (ii. 7 i^>') and MS. (ii. i.<) : brsid'^s K.). In b, MS. has mrjamii
for hinvanii^ and iihAuAya (which rectifies the meter) for sAiihhai^Aytt. For C, MS. has
a much less unmanageable version, ftttthisAm nnh suhMi'Am, and Ppp. supports it by
giving mnhistiM nas luhhavas: thus, in each pada the king is compare<i to a different
|H>werful animal - which is the leading motive of the verse. Hut TH. differs from our
text only by giving suhAvam • for subhuvti%. SubhvAvn^ with a further slight emendation
of sttfuutirAm to-«/// would give a greatly improved sense : ** him who stands comfortable
in the oiean, as it were,*' or Inrars himself well un<ler the water |)oured upon him. The
phra.se samwOAm fiA mbhrAh (Kcurs also at \K\*. i. 53.4 b (and its occurrence here in
such form may be a reminiscent e of that); Sityana there understands i»Mt'<}/ of the
".streams *' that fill the ocean ; nn<l our comm. gives a corres|M)nding interpretation here
(//#!«/// ///J Apti/t); sitmtiiitAin he allows us alternatively to take as -- varmnam. lie
also, moNt unqrammaticilly, l.ikrs tni .it the beginning as etiAt •• those [waters].'* Ppp.
further Ins /.I// mrjyauif for pftiittn- in d. •LPoona ed . p. 750, reads sukuiam,^
9. For protection etc. : with a certain ointment.
Inuiul mostly in I'Aipp. viii. (in the \erM* <uf!i r c), 3, 2, 5, T), S. 10. 4.7). I'sed by KAu^.
( ;S S) with the tiindiii*; on of an <»inlmrnt amulet, in a ceremony for long life of the
Vedii ptipil .ifter his initi.ition. Anr' the i omin. r]ui»tes it from the N.iks. K. (19) |_^
fur <, .iiili, s.i\s \\\ J. .Ts employed in tli«* ma/iA^Anti ( alh'«l AirAiutff,
159 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK IV. -iv. 9
Translated: Ludwig, p. 507; Grill, 35, 123; Griffith, i. 141 ; Bloomfield, 61, 381;
Weber, xviii.32. — As for ointment and ointment-legends, see Bloomfield, AJP. xvii.
404 fl.
1 . Come thou, rescuing the living one ; of the mountain art thou for
the eyes {?), given by all the gods, an enclosure {paridhi) in order to
living.
Jlvdm in a might also be coordinate with trayamUnam ; the comm. understands it
as translated. The meter indicates that the true reading at the end of b is dksyam^ and
this is read by SPP., with the alleged support of all his authorities save one, which
follows the comm. in giving dksam ; our Bp. has dksam^ and our edition accepted that
(our Op. h.is aJtsydf/ij our I. dksydm)\ but aksya is unknown elsewhere, and its meaning
in this connection is quite obscure ; perhaps allusion is intended to a legend reported in
MS. iii.6. 3 (p. 62. 8 ; cf. also TS. vi. I.i5 and QB. iii. 1.3. 12): ** Indra verily slew
Vrtra ; his eye-ball flew away ; it went to Trikakubh ; that ointment of Trikakubh he
spreads on." The ointment of this mountain is most efficacious for the eyes, and hence
also for the other purposes here had in view. The comm. gives caksns as the value of
his aksam. Grill suggests emendation to aksayyam or aksaram. We have to make
the harsh resolution vi-^u-e- in c or leave the pada defective.
2. Protection {paripdna) of men (ptinisa), protection of kine art
thou ; in order to the protection of coursing {drvant) horses hast thou
stood.
The comm. says in c "of horses and of mares (yaifavdndm)^ The resolution
dr-va-ta-dni fills up c quite unsatisfactorily ; the Anukr. refuses all resolution, and counts
the pada as of 6 syllables.
3. Both art thou a protection, grinder-up of familiar demons (yd/ii),
O ointment, and of what is immortal thou knowest ; likewise art thou
gratification {^-bhSjana) of the living, likewise remedy of jaundice
(Iidnta-).
Contrary to rule, the a of asi in d has to be elided after dtho in d ; probably emenda-
tion to dthd *si is called for ; one of our mss. (O.) reads dtho 'si. Ppp. rectifies the
meter of a by giving ftU *vd *st/ for c, d it has n/d ^mrtatvesye **^isa utd *sas piirbho-
janam. The comm. takes amrtasya as the drink of immortality, and -bhojana as
either attisianivartanena pdlaka or bhogasddhana. The last pada hardly belongs with
the rest.
4. Of whomsoever, O ointment, thou creepest over limb after limb,
joint after joint, from thence thou drivest away \\i^ ydksma^ like a formi-
dable mid-1 icr {inadhyama^i).
Found also as RV. x. 97. 12 (repeated, without variant, as VS. xii. 86), which version,
however, begins ^\\X\ ydsydu *sadhfh prasdrfiaiha^ and has in c correspondingly bddha-
dhve. The comm. has in c bddhate^ but regards it as for bddhase, Ppp. reads lasmdt
for tatas. Matihyama^t is of obscure meaning; "arbiter," as conjecturiJd by BR.,
seems very implausible ^BR. express their conjectural meaning by the Latin word
intercessor ; by which, I suspect, they intend, not * mediator,' but rather * adversary ' or
* preventer ' of the disease, which would be plausible enoughj ; more probably " mid-
ir#<V^
iv. 9- noOK IV. THE ATHARVA-VEDA-SAMHITA. l6o
most man/* like madhyaptifsiki or chief (see under iii. 8. 2), and madky^ma^t med
especially of the leader al>out whom his men encamp, for hb greater safety, ia the
ni^hl. )\\. has utadhyama^hutn at ii. 408, but the passage is too corrupt to cast valu-
able li^ht upon the word. To the comm., it is eitlter Vayu, the wind in mid-air, or else
^ the king, viewed as surrounrled first by foes, and further by their foes, his friends (on
ff^yAi ^CSJi^^ |T2> the principle of arir mitram nrer ; mitram^ | miirn-mitram ntah faram etc. I find
thg_ycrse at KAmandaj^ijjiJ>jiti&.U.-i. viiLijl . 1 o judge from the l^ter Syriac Venioo
(Kalilah and T)imnah, Keith-Falconer, p. 114), one would expect to find it in TaAca-
tantra ii., colloiiuy of mous<? and crow, in Kosegarten*s ed., p. 110 or thereabouts. CI.
Manu vii. 158 and the comm. J
5. Curse attains him not, nor witchcraft, nor scorching; x^Ukandha
reaches him not who bearcth thcc, O ointment.
I*pp. reads tarn for enam in a. and niskandkam in c |_It inserts just before our
vs. 7 the vs. given under vi. 76. 4 an<l ending with/rtJ /rJmr btbkarty dfljama.j
6. From wrong spell, from evil dreaming, from evil deed, from pollu-
tion also, from the terrible eye of an enemy — therefrom protect us,
0 ointment.
Tpp. has, for b, ksfttiyAc ckapathAd uta. The Pet. Lexx. understand asammanird
as simply ** untrue s|>eech** (so C^rill, ** Liigenrede**) ; the comm. reads instead -mtryAt^ as
adjective qualifying dusvapnyAt^ and signifying ** produced by base bewitching spells.**
Diirktirdas in c niiglit well be adj., • hostile * (so comm.).
7. Knowing this, O ointment, I shall S|>eak truth, not falsehood; may
1 win {sati) a horse, a cow, thy soul, O man {fiimsit).
The latter half-verse is KV. x. 97. 4 c, d (which is also, without variant, VS. xii. 78 c, d),
where we read vdsas instead of a/uhfi ; Tpp., too, gives t*djas. All the mss. and the
comm. have at tlie end the absurd lotm purusas (nom., but without accent) ; tlie comm.
(whose text, as SIM*. |M>iiits out in more than one place, is uuaccentuated) undcrstanda
*' 1, thy man (retainer).** Koth editions make the necessary emendation to purusa
\s. purusii\. I*pp- gives pAurusa. Sl*l\ makes a note that jfXiv/^-dMr is so accented by
all his authoiities — as if anything else were possible |^does he have in mind sdmeyamt
see Whitney, Roots^ p. 1S3J. The first p^da is defective unless we resolve vi-dm-im \or
dutfljaniij, — I^K 8 supplementary re|>ort of Tpp. readings ends a with A^janms and baa
for d Aiijana tamva pAurusak. As noted above, this vs. stands at the end in Fpp. and
before it is inserted the vs. given under vi. 76. 4. J
8. Three are the slaves {ddsd) of the ointment — fever {takmdn)^ baldsa^
then snake: the highest of mountains, three-peaked (/nkaJtr^d) by name,
[is] thy father.
For the obscure balAsa, the comm. gives the worthless etymology balam atyati^ and
adds iamnipAtAdik 'collision [of humors] or the like*; ** snake** he explains as for
snake-poisoning ; |H*rhaps, if the reading is genuine, it is rather the name of tone
(constricting.') disease.
9. The ointment that is of the three-peaked [mountain], born from
the snowy one (/limdvant) — may it grind up all the familiar demons and
all the sorceresses.
l6l TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK IV. -iv. ID
Pada b is repeated below as v. 4. 2 b. The first half-verse is, without variant, TA.
vi. 10. 2, vs. 9 a, b; and it occurs also in HGS. (i. 11. 5), which reads upari at the end
ioT pari Land so at MP. ii. 8. 1 1 a, bj. The second half is VS. xvi. 5 c, d, and also found
in TS. iv. 5. i 2 and MS. ii. 9. 2 ; all these have dhln instead of yainuy and xt,?A jambhd-
yan (pres. pple.) ; and omx jambhdyat may, of course, be pres. pple. neut. ; some of the
mss. (including our Bp.M.I.) indeed read -yan here, though no masc. subject is implied ;
the comm. paraphrases with tta^ayad vartate. SPP., with his customary defiance of
grammar upon this point, reads sdrvan instead of -an or -dn \Q.i. i. 19.4, note J.
10. If thou art of the three-peaked [mountain], or if thou art called
of the Yamuna — both thy names are excellent; by them protect us, O
ointment.
Te in c might perhaps be emended with advantage to ti. The Yamuna is not else-
where mentioned in AV. Namnt is to be read, of course, as of three syllables, and
there is no reason why the text should not give us uamanu
10. Against evils : with a pearl-shell amulet.
\^Atharvan. — faiikhamanisuktam. (adddivatam. dnustubham : 6. pathydpafikti ;
7' 5~P' Pi^fdnustup faJlrvart.^
Found (except vs. 5) in Paipp. iv. Used by Kau^. (58. 9) in the same ceremony with
the preceding hymn, but with an amulet of mother-of-pearl ; the schol. (not the comm.)
al.so add it in an earlier part of the ceremony (56. 17). The comm. quotes it further
from Naks. K. (19), as employed in a tnahd^dnii named vdruni.
Translated : Ludwig, p. 462 ; Grill, 36, 124 ; Griffith, i. 142 ; Bloomficld, 62, 383 ;
Weber, xviii.36. — Bloomfield cites an article in ZDMG. (xxxvi. 135) by Pischel, who,
in turn, cites a lot of interesting literature about pearl. ^
LAlthough rain-drops are not expressly mentioned in this hymn nor in xix. 30. 5 Jp///c(^^^^^^^
(which see), I think it safe to say that the bit of Hindu folk-lore about the origin of in/i^*^//*' ^^
pearls by transformation of rain-drops falling into the sea {Indische Spriiche^ 344) is as
old as this Vedic text and the one in xix. The references here to sky and sea and
lightning, and in xix. to Parjanya and thunder and sea, all harmonize perfectly with that
belief, which is at least ten centuries old (it occurs in Raja^ekhara, 900 A.D.) and has
lasted till today (Manwaring's Mardihl Proverbs^ no. 1291). See my translation of
Karpura-vtaujarly p. 264 f., and note 5. Pischel, I.e., reports as follows: "According
to Aelian {irtpX f<^wi', x. 13), a pearl forms when the lightning flashes into an open sea-
shell ; according to an Arabic writer, when rain-drops fall into it, or, according to Pliny
(ix. 107), dew." — The persistency of popular beliefs in India is well illustrated by the
curious one concerning female snakes : see my note to Karpura-mafijarl^ p. 231. J
1. Born from the wind out of the atmosphere, out from the light of
hghtning, let this gold-born shell, of pearl, protect us from distress.
Of course, all the four nouns in the first half-verse may be coordinate ablatives.
The beauty and sheen of the material connect it traceably with gold and lightning, but
how even a Hindu rsi can bring it into relation with wind from (or and) the atmosphere
is not easy to see. Kf^aua ought to mean the pearl itself, and is perhaps used in the
hymn apposilively = "which is itself virtually pearl"; the comm. explains it in this
verse as kar^ayiid ^airundth (annkarld. Ppp. has in c hiranyadds.
2. Thou that wast born from the top of the shining spaces (locand)^
iv. lO- HOOK IV. TIIK ATHAKVA-VEDA-SAKIHITA. 162
out of the ocean — by the shell having slain the demons, wc overjwwcr
the (ievoiirers.
rp|». ifunhiiirs in a yi^ \'ni/fl f -. ('frill t.ikc» ttji^ratas as •• firM "; and the comm. as
— itj^ff^ and not c|iialif)inf; jtijfine : "at the top or front of sliinin;; tliin;^s. sueh as start.**
3. Hy the shell [we ovet power] di.sease. misery; by the shell also the
Sixdiinvtis; let the alMi(*:ilin[; shell, of pearl, protect us from distress.
|*pp. has in a avatiyam instead of Atntitim. The comm. takes Amatim from root
man L^ce HK\s note, s.v. 3 Amati \\ •• ii;norance, the root of all mishap (auat/Aa)**;
ami, foi^ettinf; his explanation of only two verses ago, he this time declares tr^aita a
"name of K*)ld."
4. H<irn in the sky. ocean-born, brought hither out of the river, this
goUl-born shell [is] for us a life-prolon^^ing amulet.
rpl>- has stimtitfntfits at cn<l of a. and in c a^ain (as in 1 c) hiranyatiAt, Nearly all
our niss. (cxirpl O.K ), and some of sri*'s, with the comm., read in d Ayuhpr- |_cf. TrAt.
ii. 62 n.J; hut the point is one in rr^aid to whi( h each ms. is wont to follow its own course*
reRardli-ss of luk-, and both editions very properly K*^"<^ Ayttspr-, as rec|uired hy the I'rAt-
5. The amulet born from the ocean, born from Vrtra, making day —
let it protect us on all sides from the missile of gods and Asuras.
The comm. makes Vrtra here signify either the demon Vitra or the cloud ; doululess
the latter is intended; then he explains tiivAkara as the sun, and jAta as "released,**
and renders "as hiilliant .xs th'* sun freed from the ch>ud.s/* which is extremely artificial ;
tiivAkara need mean no nxire than * Hashinf^ with li^ht.* The comm. also fiwlishly
understatuls in d hftyA instead of As (p. hetyah). L/V:'-, ablative l»y attraction, from
gen. — cf. Skt. Cram. S9*^- •'^ J 1 lie first p.ida is deficient tiy a sellable, unless we
resolve Sittnudtit tntolour syllables, fl^ft^^ ^^ ^ J^
6. One of the gidds art thou; out of soma wast thou l>orn ; thou art
conspicuous on the chariot, lustrous {racitmi) on the quiver thou. May it
prolong our lives !
The last pada, which occurs in four other places (ii. 4.6 etc.), looks like a late addi-
tion here; as elsewhere, .some of the mss. (five of SPP's) read tArsai. Kscept ow
Op., all the /fitf/rf-m.ss. blunderingly resolve sAmAlvAm (as it would l>e |>crmissil)ly and
customarily read by abbreviation: see Whitney, Skt. Gr, {232) into sAmA : it-Am
instead of nhnAi : t'-Apn ; the comm. understands sAmAf, and l>oth erlitions give the ftdl
reading. Here one is strongly tempted to transhite j«vvif by "m^mn,** and the comm.
takes it so {anif tdmayAt somttf/tan,fttlAt) ; but I'pp. discourages it by reading sa k^sJUi
(for -wi?*/ ') «!#/// 1. The comm. glovses rot ana by faamAna dipyamAna. Kor c, l*pp.
has fatftfsti da f^ a/aw.
/. The gods* bone became pearl ; that goes abotit within the waters
|M)ssessing soul ; that do I bind on thee in order to life-time, splendor,
stungth. to length of life for a hundred autinnns : let [the amulet] of
pc.ul (K-fend thee.
h'ananA% in e, thmigh read bv all our mss. and nearly all of SPI'*s, is hardW to be
tolerated ; we should have either kf\anas^ as alntve, or kAr^anas, which the comm.
l63 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK IV. -iv. II
offers, with two or three mss. that follow him, and which SPP. accordingly adopts
[^kdr^amisj; our edition gives kar(-\ Ppp. has kdrsinas. Ppp. also has simply ca for
our whole d (after baldya). The comm. reads asti instead of asthi in a. The verse
(i I + 1 1 : 14+ 1 1 +8 = 55) lacks a syllable of being a full ^akvarl. LReject either dyuse
or varcase and the meter is good. — In c, te *for thee* (comm., as gen.), is, I suppose,
virtually = * on thee.' J •
The second anuvdkay ending with this hymn, contains 5 hymns and 39 verses ; the
Anukr. quotation is nava ca,
II. In praise of the draft-ox.
\Bhrgvangiras. — dvSda^arcam. dnadnham. trdisiubham : it4.jagait; 1. bhurij ; y. j-av.
6-p. anustubgarbho ^paristdjjdgatd nicx'cchakvarl ; 8-11, oNUstubA.]
Found in Piiipp. iii. (in the verse-order 1,4, 2, 5, 3, 6, 11, 12, 9, 8, 10, 7). Used by
Kau^. (66.12) in a sava sacrifice, with the draft-ox as sava. The hymn offers an
example of that characteristic Hindu extollation, without any measure or limit, of the
immediate object of reverence, which, when applied to a divinity, has led to the setting
up of the biiseless doctrine of ** henotheism.**
Translated : Muir, OST. v. 399, 361 (about half); Ludwig, pp. 534 and 190 ; Deussen,
GescAic/i/e^ \. 1 . 2^2 'y Griffith, i. 144; Weber, xviii.39. — Cf. Deussen, I.e., p. 230 f.
Weber entitles the hymn " Verschenkung eines Pflugstieres zur Feier der Zwolften (i.e.
nights of the winter solstice — see vs. 1 1)."
1. The draft-ox sustains earth and sky; the draft-ox sustains the
wide atmosphere ; the draft-ox sustains the six wide directions ; the
draft-ox hath entered into all existence.
That is, the ox in his capacity of draft-animal : the comm. says, ^akafavahanasa-
vtartho vrsabhah ; later in the hymn he is treated as female, without change of the name
to a feminine form (the fern, -duht or -dvdhl does not occur before the Brahmana-
period of the language). But the comm. 4IS0 allows us the alternative of regarding
dharma^ in ox-form, as subject of the hymn. The " directions " {pradi^) are, accord-
ing to him, " east etc.*' ; and the " six wide " are *• heaven, earth, day, night, waters, and
plants," for which AQS. i. 2. i is quoted as authority. With the verse compare x. 7. 35,
where nearly the same things are said of skambha, Ppp. reads in a -vim dydm utd
^tntlm. In the second half-verse, two accent-marks have slipped out of place in our
edition: in c, that under sa should stand under dti; and, in d, that under md should
stand under na. The verse is ja^atl hy count, but not by rhythm. LIf, with Weber,
we pronounce ttadvan^ it becomes a regular tristubh.\
2. The draft-ox [is] Indra ; he looks out from (for.^) the cattle; triple
ways the mighty one (fakrd) measures out (traverses.^); yielding (r/////)
the past (Jbhiltd), the future, existing things (d/itivafia), he goes upon
(car) all the courses {vratd) of the gods.
Ppp. reads in a indrasya for indrah sa, and in c it adds sam before bhiitam, and
has bhuvanai'n instead of -ud. The comm. has in b the curious reading stiydn for
trayan, and hence we lose his guess as to what may be meant by the V triple ways."
He takes pa^ubhyas in a first as dative, and then as ablative. He understands bhuvattd
as virtually '* present " ; more probably it has its usual sense of * existences,' and the two
preceding adjectives qualify it distributively, or are in apposition with it: *<all existing
^',i/>-/^
iv. II- BOOK IV. THi: ATHARVA-VKDA-SAttlllTA. 164
tliiiiKi^, lK)th what t% and what is to Itc.** |^If we pronounce a^n matMlm, the %-s. loict
its fi/iNfiJ quality. The cadence of b is bad. J
3. Hum an Indra amon;; human beings (fnanusyd), he goes about (lar)
shining brightly, a heated hot-drtnk (^/tarfnd)\ hc» being one of good
offspring, shall not go in mist {htdtini) who, understanding [it], shall
not partake of {a^) the draft-ox.
The verse is ol>scuret and the translation in vatious points very doubtful. I'lie
second pada is apparently a In-ginning of the identification of the ox with \\\t jj^harma^
a s.i(riri(ial draught of heated milk, which we find further in vss. 5. 6; he is, since his
kind yichl warm milk, as it were an incor|K)ration of that sacrifice. And the McomI
half-vcrsc is then a promise to whoever sh.ill abstain from using the ox as food. I'pp.
reads esa instead of yVlAu in a, and sam^i^tlHas at end of b. In c, d the comm. reads
sam for san^ nd Cire as two word.s, and no * ^nlyHt^ and of course makes very bad work
of its explanation, finding; meteni|>sychosis in sam . . . sarsai (na samsarati pumak
samsAradharffiAn na pfApnoti). Ghat ma he takes first as ** bl axing sun,** and then.
alternatively, in its true sense. There Ls no other occurrence of an j-aorist from $r \
and it is altogether against rule and usage to employ a subjunctive and an optative
(a^nlvil/) in two coordinate clauses |^this seems to me to t>c a slip — sec SJbi, Gram,
S 575 b ; and the clauses are hardly coordinate J ; so that the reading is very tuipickna.
A few of our mss. (P.M.W.IC.) read ml after Mddf/. [^Ludwig conjectures suprmyis
for •jis.\
4. The draftox yields milk (duh) in the world of the well-done ; the
purifying one fdls him up from in front ; Parjanya [is] his streams, the
Maruts his tidder, the sacrifice his milk, the sacrificial gift the milking
of him.
Tpp. ap|>ears to have rrad in b pyAyet^ which would rectify the meter ; in c it com-
bines maruto *\iho. PAvamAna in b might signify the win<l (then purAstAt * f rom the
east *.^) or soma ; the comm. takes it as the latter (pavitrena {iHikyamAH0* mrtnmayak
somah) ; and "the sacrifice" in d as "the sa^'a sacrifice now }>erftHmed.** The verse
is rhythmically a trisiuhh with re<lundant syllables (ii-fi3: I2fii =47). |^On daksimA^
sec lUoomfield, A J I*, xvii. 40K f.J
5. Of whom the h)rd of the sacrifice is not master (If), nor the sacri*
fice; not the giver is master of him, nor the acceptor; who is all-con*
qucring, all-bearing, all-working — tell ye us the hot-drink which [is]
four-footed.
" Which *' in d is vafamA, lit. • which among the many.' The intended answer, of
course, is that this wondrous .sacrificial drink is the ox. I*pp. begins c with /^ vip^i^x
vi^vakfd V', The comm. declares the first half-verse to convey the universal master-
hoot! and not-to)>e-mas(ered-hoo<I of the ox; m ^ j^karma is, according to him, "the
bla/ing sun, which the four-footed one tells us'* {bruia is read, but declared equivalent
to hutf.').
6. Hy whom the gmls ascended to heaven {svar)^ quitting the body^
to the navel of the immortal, by him may we go to the world of the well-
done, desiring glory, by the vow (vratd) of the hot-drink, by penance.
l6s TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK IV. -iv. II
Ppp. appears to have read in a su7fd ruhanta; in b it has dhikma instead of uabhiin;
and it ends d with yaqasd tafiasvyd. The comm. has jesma ( —jayemii) in c [^instead
oi gesma (Ski. Gram. § 894 c)J; gharma is to him once more "the blazing sun.**
LAs to the stock-phrase in c, cf. Bloomfield, AJP. xvii. 419.J The verse (lo-f 11 :
104-13 = 44) is a very poor tristubh.
7. Indra by form, Agni by carrying {vd/ia), Prajapati, Paranicshthin,
Viraj ; in Vi^vanara he strode, in Vai^vanara he strode, in the draft-ox
he strode ; he made firm, he sustained.
This is the obscurest verse of this obscure hymn, and no attempt will be nLide to
solve its riddles. Ppp. has a quite different text : indro baUnd *sya paratfwsthf vra-
tenai *tta gtlus (ena vdi^vadevdh : yo *smdft dvesti yam ca vayam di'tsmas tasya
ftnlNdn asavahes tasya prdndn vi varhah. The two concluding clauses of our text
most obviously belong with vs. 7 rather than vs. 8, and both editions so class them ;
but SP1\ states that all his authorities reckon them to vs. 8, ending vs. 7 with the
third akraniaia (which some of the mss., including our P.M.W.E.O.Op., mutilate to
akramal). He adds that the Anukr. does the same ; but this is evidently an oversight,
our mss. of the Anukr. calling vs. 8 a simple anustubh (madhyam etad anaduha Hi
fahcd *fius/ubltah) and giving of vs. 7 a lengthy definition (see above), implying the
division 9+10 : 8 + 8 + 8 -.12 = 55 (restoring both times the elided initial <x in f ) ; perhaps,
then, SPP. is also mistaken in regard to the unanimity of his "mss. and A'aidikas**;
at any rate, part of our mss. (Bp.I.H.Op.K.) divide with the editions. The comm.,
however, does not ; as, indeed, he is repeatedly at discordance with the Anukr. on such
points. He explains vd/ta in a as "the part that carries (vahaii) the yoke; the
shoulder," and has nothing of any value to say as to the general sense of the verse.
L'lhc identification of the draft-ox with Agni seems to rest on Agni's chief function of
"carrying" ; cf. RV. x. 51. 5 d; 52. i d, 3 d, 4 a.J
8. That is the middle of the draft-ox, where this carrying (vd/ui) is
set; so much of him is in front {prdcina) as he is put all together on
the opposite side.
The virtual meaning of the second half-verse appe.irs plainly to be that the two
parts of the ox, before and behind the point where the pull comes (i.e. where the yoke
rests) arc equal ; but it is strangely expressed, and the reason why the point is insisted
on does not appear. The comm. so understands it : e^'am prdkpratyagbhdgdv ubhdv
api satndndu; he renders vaha this time by bhdra; Ludwig takes it as " the hump.**
|_In this verse, b can hardly mean ** where the pull comes,*' but rather * where the burden
is put,* i.e. the back; cf. Deussen, I.e., p. 231. Nevertheless, see BR. under vaha^ 2 a
and 2 b.J
9. Whoso knows the milkings of the draft -ox, seven, unfailing, both
progeny and world he obtains : so the seven seers know.
Ppp. reads anapadasyaias both here (b) and at 12 d; it also combines sap/ars- in d,
as docs the comm., and a couple of SPP's authorities. For consistency, our text ought
to combine in a-b ddhdnt s- ; SPP. also leaves out here the connecting /. The comm.
explains the seven milkings or yields of milk alternatively as " the seven cultivated plants,
rice etc." or "the seven worlds and oceans'* — not happening, apparently, to think of
any other heptad at the moment. He quotes the names of the seven seers from A^va-
layana. LThe number of this vs. is misprinted.J
^^ to
iv. II- BOOK IV. THK ATllARVA-VKDA-SAttlllTA. l66
/lO. With his feet treading^ clown debility (snU), with his^-Unghs^
{jtiTtg/n}) extracting (ti/-l/tit/) refreshing drink -- with weariness go the
draft-ox and the plowman unto sweet drink {kildia),
I Tlie vrisc srcms rather out of place here. As l>otli n and m final are aftiimilated to
^ an initial palatal, the /tf</<i*tcxt coinntitn the blunder in b of understanding frdtfk to be
for ht}n ; and, as is usual in such cases, a part of our mss. read htlM j- (so P.M. W.K.I ) ;
Srr. very properly emends his /<///<r text to inlm. The comni. reads in d klmA^asya
for -^ii^ t,t (one of sri**s authorities following him : ** with the old accent,** SPI*. remarks,
as if the change of reading; involved a chanf;e of accent), and n\Aken/^aiAa/us a genitive
agreeing with it — against the accent ; but this he regularly ignores. ZrJ/M, it may be
added, he glosses with bhumim !
11. Twelve, indeed, they declare those nights of the vow (x^rdtya) of
Prajapati ; whoso knows the brdhman within them (tdtrd *pa) — that
verily is the vow of the draft-ox.
Or, " those twelve nights they declare to l>e for the vow ** etc. : it is uncertain what it
object and what objective predicate in the sentence. I'pp- reads and combines vrSirM
** hus pt- in b ; for the unusual phr.Lsc iaito *pit in c it f^ives lad t'«l */f / and in d it has
bit lam instead of vratam. For Welier's conjectures as to the twelve nif;hts and the
draft-ox of this hymn, see his Omitta und rorlenia^ p. 388 ; compare also [^Weber's
other references, /////. Stud, xviii. 45, and J Zimmer, p. 3f»*». The comm. i^losftes vratya
by x*ratArhtt^ and (|uotes TS. v. 6. 7' as to the twelve nights of consecration.
12. He milks (//////) at evening, he milks in the morning, he milks
abotit midday; the milkings of him that come together, those unfailing
ones we know.
rpp. has for a, b duhf tv? *9it\ti-,'i\n .\i\\am duhf pnltar dithf divt\^ and at the i-wl
(as alK)vc noted) atittpadasyata^. The romm. supplies to duhf either anadvAham as
object (with the wor.shi|>rr as subject), or anaiivHn as subject (with the performer of
the sara sacrifice as beneficiar)) ; sam yanti he explains h\ phaUna sath^aahante.
12. To heal serious wounds: with an herb.
[ Rhk M. x^nasfatyam . tlnuttuhham : t. jf. x^tiitri ; 6. Jf. ytituimatfkyii hkurt/xdyatf i ;
7. brAa/r]
Found in l*Aipp. iv. (in the verse order 3-5, I, 2, 7, 6). Used by Klu^. (28. 5) in a
healinf^ rite: Ke<;ava and the comm. a^rce in sayin<^, for the prevention of flow of
blocnl caused by a blow from a sword or the like ; lN>iled /i)/r«rwater is to Ite poured on
the wound etc. The S( hoi. tf> K.iuq. 28. 14 also ref^ard the hymn as included among
I ii^^ *^*^ /^ll^ll/l/1^^1s piescrilK-d to Ik: used in that rule,
l/r^l^ * I • '^ Translate<l : Kuhn, KZ. xiij,__^Sa_wjth_Cimiianic parajkla ;
Ludwig, !>. 508; Grill, 18,
125; (iriffitli, ri46 ; Hloom field, 10. 3S4 ; Weber, xviii. 46. — Cf. Ilillebrandt, Pledti-
tAres/offtaf/ttr, p. 4S.
I. Grower art thou, grower ; grower of severed bone; make this g^ow,
O ariiNMii/i.
Atun*f/t,it1, lit • non-obstructing.* appears to lie the name of a climbing plant having
healing pro|>erties ; it is mentioned more than once elsewhere, and in v. 5 (vss 5 and o)
along with Dly,} (vs. 7) • l.ic ' : and the comm. to the present hymn re |>eated!y declares
l67 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK IV. -iv. 12
iilksd to be tlie healing substance referred to in it; probably it is a product of the
arundhatf. Ppp. has every time rohinl instead of rohanl^ and so the comm. also reads ;
the manuscripts of Kaug., too, give rohinl in the pratika, as does the schol. under 28. 14.
There is evident punning upon the name and the causative rohaya- * make grow ' ; perhaps
the true reading of a is rdhany asi rohini * thou art a grower, O red one,' bringing in the
color of the lac as part of the word-play ; the comm. assumes rohini^ voc., at end of a
{he lohiiavarne Idkse). I*pp. further reads 0rnasya instead of chintiAsya ; and has,
in place of our c, rohinydm arha dtli *si rohinyd *sy osadhe, making the verse an
anusiubh. The comm. gives asnas for asthnas in b.
2. What of thee is torn (r/f), what of thee is inflamed (^, dyut)^ is
crushed (> fi(fs(ra) in thyself — may Dhatar excellently put that together
again, joint with joint.
Ppp. reads in a ffrffam for ristam; it reads td ^^tmanah in b ; and in c, d it has tat
sarvam kalpaydt sam dadat. The comm. (with one of SPP's mss.) reads prestham
{^■=^ priyatamam) for the obscure pistratn in b (found elsewhere only in vi. 37. 3 below,
where the comm. has pestatn) ; the conjecture '* bone " of the Pet. Lex. .seems alto-
gether unsatisfactory ; it is rendered above as if from pis. The comm. paraphrases
dytittdm by dyotitam^ vedanayd prajvalitam iva^ which seems acceptable.
/ 3. Let thy marrow come together with marrow, and thy joint together M^^j^^ZlI^
with joint ; together let what of thy flesh has fallen apart, together let ^t^*^^^^^
thy bone grow over. ^^ f^
Ppp. rectifies the meter of a by omitting /^•, and has for d L^^U samstrdvam asu
parva te, A few of the mss. (including our H.O.Op.) give vi^rastam in c. The comm.
reads f/i/// instead of sam in every pada. A couple of SPP's mss., by a substitution
found also elsewhere [see ii. 12.7, note J, have manya for majjiii in a. The Anukr.
ignores the redundant syllable in the first pada.
4. Let marrow be put together with marrow ; let skin (cdrwan) grow
(;-////) with skin; let thy blood, bone grow; let flesh grow with flesh.
The third pada is translated as it stands |_cf. vs. 5 cj, but we can hardly avoid
emending dsrk to asthna^ or else dsthi to astiiy to agree with the others ; the comm.
I^as an altcrnativej fills it out to two parallel expressions, for both blood and bone.
Ppp. has, for b-d : asthtid *sthi vi rohatu sndva te sam dadhmas sndvnd carmand
car ma rohatu.
5. Fit thou together hair with hair; fit together skin (tvdc) with skin;
let thy blood, bone grow ; put together what is severed, O herb.
The prolongation of the fmal vowel of a pada is so anomalous that we can hardly
help regarding kalpayd in a as wrong, perhaps imitated from b; Ppp. avoids the diffi-
culty by reading in a sam dhfyatdm. \Vox c, compare vs. 4. J Ppp, also has for d
our 4 d.
6. Do thou here stand up, go forth, run forth, a chariot well-whcclcd,
wcll-tircd, wcll-naved ; stand firm upright.
Ppp. is very different : /// tistha pre *hisamudhd hi te paruh: sam te dJidtd dadhdtu
tan HO viristam rathasya cakra py upavaryathdir yathdi *ti sukhasya ndbhis prati
tistha evam. The Anukr. scans the verse as 9+ 1 1 15 = 25 syllables.
iv. 12- nooK IV. Tin: athakva-vkda-samhitA. i68
7. If, falling into a pit, he hath been crushed (sttm-fr), or if a stone
hurled (fra/if) hath smitten [him] — as a Rbhu the parts of a chariot*
may it put t();;ether joint with joint.
A niimlxT of tlu* n\%%. (iniluiliiif; our T.M.O.Op.) rend JtHr/um for kart4m \n a;
the romm. explains kartam as meaning kafUtkam thfdtikam tkymiham^ and makes it
ftuhjrct of sam\tM{9/ --• utmhinasti : lie Ukes thhus as one of tlie three Khhus (quotini;
KV. i. 1 1 1 . I ), not ^ivini; the word any general sense. Ppp. a|;ain has an independent
text : I'ifi// vtijto ^'/i/sftl s//nlmktl jAtu paliltH yatii I'J ta rislam : vfksAd vA yadi tJ
vibhyasi ^ttsa fhhur iti sa evath lam iihtlmi U pafuh. The verse w a brkatl only l»jr
numl>rr of .syllal>lcs (10 -I 10 :S t «^' 3^>). [^Ihe comin. makes the **Alharvanic spell'*
the subject in d.J
13. For healing.
Found in Paipp. v. (in the vcrsrcmlcr 1, 5, 2 -4, 6, 7). Vss. 1-5. 7 are in RV. x. 137,
and vs. 6 occurs elsewhere in KV. x. Only vss. 1 3 have representatives in Vajur-
Veda texts. The hymn is called {amttinya in K.1u<;. (g. 4), in the list of the laji;hm{Jlmii
gitna hymns; and our comm. to h4 (ounts it alM> to the hrhathAmti /^ana (readini; in
Kftu<;. 9. I uia tfmls lox the ttui tra of the edited text), hut he makes no mention of it
here ; he fuithcr dechircs it to Inrlon^ among the aiihoUrt^^i (for whi« h see KAu^. 32. 27,
note); the schol., on the other hand, put it in the Hyiixyak^tina (54. 1 1, note). It is
used (5<^. 3, II) in the cctrmonits for loni: life that follow the initiation of a Vedic
student. In Vait. (3S. 1) it ap)>ears, with' ii. 33 and iii. ii etc., in a healin|; crretaony
for a saciificcr [_see comm. J who falls ill.
Tran.slaled: hy the KV. translators; and Aufiecht. Zl)M(f. xxiv. 203 ; Griffith,
i. 147 ; Weber, xviii. 48. — Sec Lanman*s Rftuiet\ p. 390.
1. Hoth, () ye f^ods, him that is put down, O ye gods, yc lead up
again, and him that hath done evil {Agtxs)^ O ye gods, O ye gods, ye make
to live again.
Found without variant as KV. x. 137. 1, and also in MS. (iv. 14.2.) Hut l*pp. reads
udtihantttl for tUt ftayathtl in b, and its second half- verse is htto manMsyam iafk dn-A
devAs krtiHttt jlva.^e. The romm. explains avahtiam as dhtirvtafiutye jAvad^A/tam,
apt'tiftiiittatn^ or alternatively, ara\thApitam ; supplying!: to it kufula^ and making; of b
an inde|>endent sentence, with double interpretation ; and he says somethinj; in excuse
of the four-fold repetition of the vocative.
2. These two winds blow from the river as far as the distance; let
the one blow hither dexterity for thee; let the other blow away what
complaint (itipas) [thou hast].
Besides KV. (vs. 2). '\\\. (ii.4. i') and TA. (iv. 42. i, vs.^») have this verse. Iloth
accent in c Ai.lfti, as d(M*s Sl'P's tf\t, and as ours ought to do, since all the mss. so
read, and tlie a<< rnt is fully ju^tifird as an antithetical one : our text was altered to a|i;ree
with the ii vAtti of KV.. which is hss observant of the antithetic.1l accent than AV., as
lH>th alike are far less observant of it than the llr.^hmanas. All the three other tests
have /il/vl for tY at lie^inninjj of d; and Tli.TA. pivc me instead of // in c. The
secoml p.'ida is translated in attempted adaptation to the thiid and fourth ; of course*
169
TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK IV.
-IV. 14
the two ablatives with a ivnight properly be rendered co6rdinately, and either * hither
from * or * hence as far'tw ; the comm. takes both in the latter sense.
3. Hither, O wind, blow healing; away, O wind, blow what complaint
[there is] ; for thou, all-healing one, goest [as] messenger of the gods.
Tli.TA. (as above) put this verse before the one that precedes it here and in RV.
All the three read inc vt'fjM/tcsajaSy and Ppp. intends to agree with them {^bhcjnjo dc-).
The comm. offers an alternative explanation of devd,ttiim in which it is understood as
= ittdnyiltidm • the senses.' LVon Schroeder gives a, b, Tiibiiiger Katha-hss.^ p. 1 15. J
4. Let the gods rescue this man, let the troops of Maruts rescue, let
all beings rescue, that this man may be free from complaints.
In RV., this verse and the following one change places. In a, RV. reads ihd for
imdnty and in b the sing, trayatdm . . . ganAh. Ppp. ends b with maruto ganHihy and
d with agado *sati. The first pada is defective unless we make a harsh resolution of a
l9ng a. We had d above as i. 22. 2 c.
5. I have cpme unto thee with wealfulnesses, likewise with uninjured-
ncsses; I have brought for thee formidable dexterity; I drive (su) away
for thee the ydksma.
The RV. text has in c ie bhadrdm i ^bhdrsam; both editions give the false form
A ^b/idrisaffty because this time all the mss. (except our E.p.m.) chance to read it ; in
such cases they are usually divided between the two forms, and we need not have
scrupled to emend here ; the comm. has -rsam, Ppp. reads in c te bhadram tlrisam^
and, for d, pard suvdmy dnuyat.
6. This is my fortunate hand, this my more fortunate one, this my
all-healing one; this is of propitious touch.
This is, without variant, R V. x. 60. 12; it takes in our hymn the place of R V. x. 1 37. 6.
7. With (two) ten-branched hands — the tongue [is] forerunner of
voice — with (two) disease-removing hands: with them do we touch
thee.
RV. (vs. 7) has fore, d andmayitnubhydtn ivd tabhydth tv6 ^fa spr^dmasi. The
Anukr. takes no notice of the redundancy in our c.
14. With the sacrifice of a goat.
\Bhrgit. — navarcam, djyam, dgneyam. trdistubham : 2^ 4. anustubh ; j. prastdrapankti ;
7^9'J^S^^^» S.yp.ati^akimri^
Verses 1-6 are found also in Paipp. iii. (in the verse-order i, 2, 5, 4, 6, 3), and in
various Yajur-Veda texts (vss. i and 6 not in company with the rest) ; vss. 7-9, in
Paipp. xvi. The hymn is used in Kau^. (64.23(1.) in the sava sacrifices, with goat
or goat-rice-mcss {ajdudana) as sava: vss. 2-4, at 68.24-27 (and also, the comm.
says, in recitation in all sava sacrifices) ; vs. 5, at 63. 9 (the comm. says, with oblation
in all); vs. 6, at 64. 17; vs. 7 (vss. 7 and 8, according to the comm.), at 64. 18-20
(with setting up the goat); vs. 9, at 64. 22 (with offering the skin having head and feet
left attichcd to it). In Vait, vs. i is used (29. 3) in the agtticayana, with building in
a goat's head ; vss. 2-5 (29. 1 7), in the same ceremony as the priests mount the altar ;
1
a
,^T/^i-
/x/rt
iv. 14- noOK IV. THi; ATllARVA-VEDA-SAttHITA. I70
\'%. 5 (8. 17), in the f*an*am sncrificcs, with transfer of the fires, and again, in the
aji^Hixtofna (15. 9), ^hcii the fire \% hroj^j^ht to the uttaravtdi ; and the comm. regards
vs. 3 a* (|u<>tc(l at 27. ^>, in the vAjttf^na lilr.
'translated : (•rilTilh. i. 149; \Vel>cr, xviii. 51 (elalxirate comment).
1. Since the goat ha.s been l>orn from the heat of Agni (the fire),
it saw [its] generator in the beginning; by it the gcxls in the beginning
attained (/) [their] godhead; by (with.') it tlie sacrificial ones (m/dhya)
ascended the ascents (/v7//i).
Fou'kI alxo in VS. (xiii. 51 ), M.S. (ii. 7. 17 ; like V.S. throughout), ami TS. (iv. 2. lo«).
VS. ami MS. Iiavc in c, d //itvI/iIw tlj^raffi tlyitf'ts tt'ntt tt^ham Ayiiun lipn M/tih-. TS. has
at the l>('^ift^inj; ajii^ ami, corrcsptimlin^ly, .f«f (^ith tv!/ addefl) in b. and Air J in c and
d; it also reverse.^ the order of c and d, agieeinf( otherwise with VS. MS. in d. but having
4C'^* 1^^^ AV., in c ; it also replaces fff/-<)/ hy j^ilfM<l/ in a. We have a again below as
ix. 5. 13 a; and c is nearly ei|uivalent to iii. 22. 3 c: moreover the /tf/Z^ctmss.. here as
there, misinterpret tlyan 1>e(<>rc /<->/<# as tlraw, which STI*. properly corrects to Jlwam
in his /fii/ii- text ; all our sanihittl mss. read tiyaii. The comm. declares ki in a to be
intended to intimate tliat the same statement was made in another text also; and he
quotes TS. ii. 1. M; niha he expl.iins by svargAiiiloka ; t^ma he takes lx>th times as
designating the means. The Anukr. takes no miiice of the deficiency of a syllabic in bi
[^As to ajA^ see Weber, Her lint r Sh.^ 1895, p. 847 n.J
2. Stri<lc ye with the fire to the firmament (mika), bearing in your
hands vessel-[fires] (iikhya) ; having gone to the back of the sky, to the
heaven (Jivir), sit ye mingled with the gods.
The other texts (\'.S. xxii.^)^; T.S. iv. 6. 5'; MS. ii. 10. 6) differ but slif^htly from
ours: all have the sin^. ukhyam at l)CKinninf^ of b, and T.S.MS, combine JivAk p-
\\\ c. I*1>P- reads a^iuibhis in a, anrl fku\fh for tikkvAn in b; for the latter, the comm.
(with one of Srl'*s mss.) f;ives aliAPt, which he defines as ak$avai f^rakd^akSm mmm-
sIhitAn yajfiAn, As usual, the mss. vary at the end lietweeu the equivalent Adk\*am
and Addhvam; our text reads the latter, .SPT's tlie former.
3. From the back of earth I have ascended to the atmosphere ; from
the atmosphere I have ascended to the sky ; from the back of the sky,
of the firmament (fuika), I have gone to heaven (Jivi/), to light.
'I'he other three texts (VS. xvii. 67 ; TS. and MS. as alK>%'e) a^ree in omittini^
frsthAl in a and addin;; ud after ahAni before aHiAnksam. In this verse, the comm.
takes jT'ilr as the sun (in vs. 2. as ll»e si'itrcii hk*t). It is too irrc'f;ul.ir (1449 :7 + 8 = 3K)
to l>e so simply defined as it is by the Amikr. [_If we omit the first aMAm, and combine
tHvifuhtim in b and resolve nAi sitar in cd. we i;et an ordeily /^i#^<ii/J«/Ar^tf//.J
4. Going to heaven (wvi/) they look not away; they ascend to the
sky, the two firmaments {nu/<tsi) — they who, well-knowing, have
extended the everywhere-streaming sacrifice.
Tlie otlirr l«'xts (VS. xvii. TnS ; 'IS and M.S. as a1>ove) have no variants; but Tpp.
ends b with tofhivtu »Adhauth. Thrtomm. a)*ain takes svar as siar^a ; am! rf(i'a/#-
dhApiitti as cither safiaio d/tAfttliim or else Stinttfo 'vukhinnaphaiapfApiyuf^JkyM
171 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK IV. -iv. 14
5. O Agni, go forth first of the divinities, eye of gods and of human
beings {vtdfuisa) — pressing on (? iyaksa-) in unison with the Bhrgus,
let the sacrificcrs go to heaven (svcir), to well-being.
The other texts (VS.xvii. 69 ; TS. and MS. as above) all read mdrtydndm at end of
b; and for devdidndm in a VS.TS. have devayatam^ MS. devdyatim ; and Ppp. also
reads inartydndtn and devayatdm j in c, MS. has sahd for sajdsds. The comm. para-
phrases cakstis by caksurindriyavat priyah^ and iyaksatndnds hy y as turn icchantah,
6. With milk, with ghee, I anoint the goat, the heavenly eagle, milky,
great ; by it may we go to the world of the well-done, ascending the
heaven {S7'dr), unto the highest firmament {udka).
TS. (iv.7. 13) and MS. (ii. 12.3) have a parallel verse, with which Ppp. also corre-
sponds in the first half: agnim (Ppp. -nfm) yunajmi fdvasd ghrUna dhydm sttfiar-
ndm (Ppp. samtidram') vdyasd (MS. vayasdm; but Ppp. payasam) brhdittam (Ppp.
ruhanfam) ; as second half, they read : t^fta vaydm patema bradhndsya vistdpath
su7fo (MS. svb) ruhdiid ddhi naka utiami^ while Ppp. differs from our text only by
having at beginning of d saruhdnd adhi. The second half-verse is repeated below as
xi. I. 37 C, d. The comm. reads in b payasam^ but regards it as vayasam with Vedic
substitution of p for v ; svdr this time is either svarga or sikrydttnakam paramam
jyotih. The tristubh is irregular in its last two padas. LPronounce gd-isma in c (? in
spite of Gram. § 894 c, end). Pada d is simply acatalcctic. Ought we perhaps to read
siidrdh'y i.e. suar rdh- (root ruh without <I, as at x. 2. 8 ; xii. 3. 42 ; xix. 6. 2)? J
7. Accompanied by five rice-messes (^odand)^ by the five fingers, with
the spoon, take thou up five-fold that rice-mess. In the eastern quarter
set thou the head of the goat ; in the southern (ddksina) quarter set his
right (ddksina) side.
Verses 7-9 arc not found in other texts, not even in Ppp.* The comm. (against the
accent) explains pdflcdudanam as paflcadhd vibhakiam odanam; uddhara as " take
out of the kettle {sthdll) and .set on the barhis " ; and, both here and in the following
verse, he substitutes for the actual part of the animal the cooked meat taken from
such part, with the share of rice-mess that goes with it. The verse is ^ jagatl ovXy by
number of syllables (11 + 13:11 + 13=48; each pada Lsave bj has trochaic close).
L Reject di^l in d and scan as 11 + 12:11 + 11. J •LIna supplementary note, Roth says
that they do occur (as noted above) in Ppp. xvi.J
8. In the western quarter set his rump {bhasdd) ; in the northern
{iUtara) quarter set his other (tUfara) side; in the upward quarter set
the goat's back-bone; in the fixed quarter set his belly {1 pdjasyd) ; mid-
way in the atmosphere his middle.
The comm. qx^\^\t\s pdjasydfn thus: pdja iti balandma: taira hiiam udaragatam
nvadhyam ; and dhehi in connection with it as meaning ni khana — which looks quite
improbable. It is only by violence that this verse can be extended to 60 syllable.s, as
the Anukr. requires. [^Reject difi in b and c, as in vs. 7, and combine bhasdddsya^ and
we get five good tristubh padas. J Our edition inserts after pdjasydtn an avasdna-
mark which is wanting in the mss. and in SPP's text
9. Do thou envelop with cooked skin the cooked goat, brought
iv. 14- IJOOK IV. Tin: ATHARVA-VKIM-SAWHITA. 172
t()|;cthcr with all his liinhs, all-formccl. Do thou rise up from here unto
the highest fiirnaincnt (tttila); with thy four feet stand firm in the
quaitcis.
One would expect in A rAthrr ti^rttivil, as the hide ran hardly have l)een cooke<l ;
the comin. reads instead {nt/Attyil, explaining: it as Tt\asttnrna vihhaklayA ; Init no
siif h word as ^ratha appears to l>c found elsewhere, and lN)th it and its interpret at ioa
are very iniplausihle. To tviuH he athls "having the feet, tail, and head on." 71te
verses read as if the goat himself, afti-r c<M>king whole, were set up in |M)sition, the head
to the e.ist. The Anukr. doi*s not heed that the second and fourth padas are trUiubk,
LPpp. has ^ruttim ekatn frwAij'irJ
15. For abundant rain.
4. x-ifti/fu9ttttihihM,iti; 7, \S.] tj, [/^. ] atHstuhM ; i^.^atkytifankti ; to. hkurtj ;
12 Ji i*"- ** "" !(" ^.i,''**^^«f f'kn* 1/ ; ij^ fantumatf a HustHhk . ]
Found (except vss. 2 and 15) in iVtipp. v. (in the veise-order 1, 3, 6, 5, 4, 7, r>, lo, 8,
11-14, i<>). Tiiis hymn and vii. iS appear to l>e calleil tntltHttlni \n K.lu^. (26.24: tee
note to this rule) ; they are specified as used tor^ither in a rite for procuring rain (41. 1 ff.) ;
also in expiation of the pftrtent of tt/^it/il/tUilt * inundations* (103. 3); further, vss. 10
and II, with ohlatioiis res{K*ctively to Agni and Tiajapati, in expiation of the |>oitent of
ol>s( uration of the st-ven seers (127.S, ij). In Vail. (8.9) vs. 6 ap|>rais in the prepara-
tions of the ttiturmilivtt sactiiito. And tlie comni. ({uotes vs. 1 1 as emph>yed by the
Naks. K. (iS) in a ////i//J( J//// called //il/iJ/*!//.
Translated: Huiiler, (>/iV/;/ unii Onuient^ 1.2 if); (JrifTith, 1.150: \Vel>er, x%'iii. 58.
— Sec also WelK'r's lefcrences to Ludwig and /immer. Cf. intrcxluction to iiL 13.
1. Let the directions, full of mist {ndbhasvant)^ fly up together;
let clouds, wind-hurried, come toj^ethcr ; let the lowini:; [cows] of the
resoundinj; misty groat l)u]l, the waters, gratify the earth.
Ppp. comhines in d 't\fii **/'i/// tl»e comm., in c, mahars- \jx% the meter rcquirenj;
this happens to he a case where all the niss. agree in makars-. The meaning in a
prohaldy is the confusion of the directions hy reason of the mists ; the comm. renders
mihhas: atls in a by Piabhtiivattl tulvMPu} yukU\h^ and nahhasvatas in c by vAyupreri-
/ttu'ti tttti^hiitva ututhtititihinyah. |_ The second half-verse recurs at 5, below ; tee note. J
2. Let the mighty (tavisa), liberal {smiiinu) ones cause to behold
together; let the juices (nLui) of the waters attach themselves (sac) to
the heil)s; let gushes (stirtr,i) of rain gladden (wrf//<ir-) the earth; let
herbs of all foinis be born here and there (fH/tak).
The " niigiity ones** in a are doubtless the ^faruts ; Ikuty- is perhaps an error which
has blundered in from the next verse, for ukuty- (though no causative of uks occurs else-
where in AV.) ; the comm. supplies fur it ^'rsttni as object; the translation implies
vmu'thing like •*atti.Kt evrry one*s attrniion." It would l>e easy to rectify the meter
of d by leading oxitM/ir :'ift'tf*t\h ; a is the (tnly real j*fx*i/i pada ; and even l>y count the
verse is only «/. f/ ( I 2 M I : 1 1 -t 13=47).
3. Do thou make the singeis (^^hv///) to behold together the mists;
173 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK IV. -iv. 15
let rushes (vi^^a) of waters rush (vij) up here and there ; let gushes of
rain gladden the earth ; let plants of all forms be born here and there.
Ppp. has for a samiksad vi^vag vHto napdiisy ; at end of b, fatatttu for TtjatitSm j
in d, osadhayas (as in 2 d Lof the editions J). The comm. regards a as addressed to
the Maruts (Jte marudgand)^ and "the singing ones" as ** us who are praising"; and
vega as ** swift stream." The Anukr. ignores the extra syllable in d |_rectify as in 2 d,
virupds /J.
4. Let the troops of Maruts sing unto thee, O Parjanya, noisy here
and there ; let gushes of raining rain rain along the earth.
Prthaky lit. * severally, separately,' Is used in these verses rather in the sense of • all
about, everywhere.* Ppp. has in d srjantu for varsantu. The Anukr. makes the
pada-division after fnirntdSy and the pada-mss. mark it accordingly, thus leaving
parjanya without excuse for its accentlessness ; but all the mss. read so, and both
editions follow them. Doubtless cither tnarutds or parjanya is an intrusion ; so the
meter indicates. The comm. gives in c varsantas.
5. Send up, O Maruts, from the ocean; brilliant [is] the song; ye
make the mist fly up ; let the lowing [cows] of the resounding misty
great bull, the waters, gratify the earth.
We had the second half-verse as i c, d ; but Ppp. gives an original half-verse instead :
pra varsayanti tamisd sudilnavo *pam raslr osadhl sacantdm. The first half is trans-
lated literally as it stands ; but it is pretty certainly corrupt. Ppp. reads Irayatiia^ tvesil
*rkii, ptltayantu* ; and the true reading is perhaps tvesa arki ndbha itt pdtayaniu * let
our brilliant songs make ' etc. The comm. finds no difficulty, since his ideas of grammar
allow him to make tvesds and arkds qualify ndbhas (Jveso diptitnad arko ^rcanasddha^
nam udakath tadyuktaih nabhah), TS. (in ii. 4. 8*) and MS. (in ii.4.7) have a first
pada nearly agreeing with our a (TS. irayathd^ MS. -yaid), the rest of the verse being
wholly different. A couple of our mss. (O.Op.), with two or three of SPP*s, read
samudrajds at end of a. ♦LRoth, in his collation, g\vt% pdiayanfa; in his notes, -/w. J
6. Roar on, thunder, excite (ard) the water-holder ; anoint the earth,
O Parjanya, with milk; by thee poured out, let abundant rain come; let
him of lean kinc, seeking refuge, go home.
That is, let the herdsman whose animals have been thinned by the drought, now be
even driven to shelter by the abundance of rain. Ppp. makes srstam and varsam
change places, and is defaced at the end. The first three words arc those of RV. v. 83. 7.
The comm. (with two or three of SPP*s mss. that follow him) reads in d dsdrdisf^ and
renders it •' seeking concurrence of streams " ; our O.Op. have -rdi^t. The comm.
makes kr^agus signify " the sun, with his rays made slender"! and, of course, he is to
'* set " {astam / ), or be made invisible by the clouds. The Anukr. makes no account
of the fact that a is jagatL [For d^dra^ see Lanman, Trans, American Philological
Association, xv. (1884), P- vii.J
7. Let the liberal ones favor {sain-av) you, also the fountains, great
serpents {ajagard)\ let the clouds, started forward by the Maruts, rain
along the earth.
Ppp. omits vas in a, and combines suddnavo *tsd ^jagard; and its second half -verse
iv. 15- HOOK IV. Tin: ATIIARVA-VKDA-SAMIIITA. I74
is ^'i}/*} vtiPUMsya varsatus pravahantH frthivlm atiu. The comin. renders avamiu hy
iarpttyaulu ; ttjaj^aftls here by aja^attMrnam^ vitafkyamilnAh^ and under y». 9 by
ajttjiatttutmAnAktlrAh : i.e. "that l<M>k hkc Rrcat .serpents as they wind sinuously
along ** ; he t.ikes smiAnavas in a nUernalivily as vocative, notwithstanding its accent
iS. Let it lij;htcn tt) every region (//jvi) ; let the winds blow to (from ?)
every cjiiarter; let the eloiids, started forward by the Maruts, come
together along the earth.
Ppp. has in d varsaniUy as our text in the preceding verse. The comm. also points
out the |M)ssil>ility of taking «/i((Ij as cither accus. pi. or aid. sing. The Anukr. some-
how omits to define the metrical thara(tcr of this verse and of vs. 14.
9. Waters, lightning, cloml, rain — let the liberal ones favor you, also
the fotintains, great serpents ; let the clouds, started forward by the
Mariits, show favor {pra-av) along the earth.
rpp. lx*gins with 7'fl/ir.r inslfad of «7//rj. and omits (as in 7 a) vas in b; and, for the
last two p.'idas, it reads //<! pvihtuvtt pra pitrsva sam bhikmim fiayaid srja. The
comm. again t.ikes staMna:uts as vocative, and makes the elements mentioned in a
9ul>jects of satn ttraft/M; in d he ic:n\% p/ili'an/tt but regards It as for /r J ^vamim
|_paralU'l \\\k\\ paUyaU elr. (Ws Gram. § 1087 c), for which he cites Tanini viil. a. 19J.
10. Agni, who, in unison with the waters' selves (/tifiA), hath become
overlord of the herbs — let him, Jatavedas, win {vafi) for us rain, breath
for [our] piogeny, afnria out of the sky.
'I'he comm. paraphrases atnrtam with amrtatvapriipitkam. The Anukr. duly notes
the redundant syllable in d.
1 1. May Prajapali from the sea, the ocean, sending waters, excite the
water-holder; let the seed of the stallion (rhan dfva) be filled up; come
hithcrward with that thunder, —
To this verse really belongs the first pada of our vs. 1 2, as the sense plainly shows,
as well as its assoiiation in KV. (v. 83. 6 b, c, d) \^ilh the two closing pAdas here. |^C'f.
Lanman, /iV/r«//'r, p. 370 ; misdivision as iK^tween hymns. J Itut the mss., the Anukr^
the comm.. an<I l>oth editions, end vs. 1 1 with / V/i. KV. reads in our t pinvaia for
pyAyatAm^ and tihitAs for ft'tas, I*pp- cond>ines in b /I/* Ifityann, and l)egins c with
/^ J /)'- The ctmun. gives vtsnt^s instead of vrsutts in c, and explains both it and
saliLhiiw a l>y vyApanti^i/ti^ whiili is one of his standing glosses for obscure words ;
aniityt'tti he paraphrases with f\%\nnbhtr AdAnena piMtvatu^ and Uihuihim simply by
jtilatihitn. This verse is as mm h hhu*ij as vs. 10, unless we combine Apt *^rAymn ia
b. [_lor -nuHt-ni^ sec I'rat. iii. 3.S, note. J
12. routing tlown wateis, our Asura father.
Let the gurgles of the watrrs f>nff. () Varuna ; let down the descending
waters; let the speekleil-armetl frogs croak {vad) along the water-courses
(//•/;/,/).
What is left of the vrise after tr.insferring its first tristubh prida to vs. II, where it
l»eh>ngs. is (l»ut fnr t'le intnnleil word :tipnti,j, which is wanting in Ppp.) a regular
antts/tt//t, h.uiit^ its «/:./t,}/M di\isii)n after irja ; and this is the division actually made
175 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK IV. ~iv. 15
in all the mss., and in SPP*s text. Ppp. combines ^argard *pdm. The comm. declares
gargara an imitative word (Idrgdhvaniyuktdh pravdhdJi)^ and the translation so renders
it ; as second pada of the anustubh he reads avanlclr {avanim aflcanti^ i.e. bhfitnim
gacchanti f) apa srja ; his first account of asura is as from as 'throw' {tneghdndm
kseptd), L Discussed and translated, apropos of irina^ by Pischel, Ved, Stud, ii. 223. J
13. Having lain for a year, [like] Brahmans performing a vow, the
frogs have spoken forth a voice quickened by Parjanya.
The mss. (except one of SPP's, which follows the comm.) absurdly read vitatn at
beginning of c ; both editions emend to vacant^ which the comm. gives, and which is
also read in the corresponding RV. verse, vii. 103. i. Ppp. has mdndukd in d. In our
edition, correct two printer's errors, reading samvatsardm and brdhmana, [^Dloomficld
discusses this vs. and the following, JAOS. xvii. 174, 179.J
14. Speak forth unto [it], O she-frog; speak to the rain, O tadurl;
swim in the midst of the pool, spreading thy four feet.
Many of our mss. (P. M.E.I. U.K.) accent lipa |_cf. Prat. iv. 3J at the beginning. Ppp.
reads vtdndiiki in a, and tdmdhuri In b. The comm. defines tddurl as ** she-offspring
of the tadura^^ but ^'ives no explanation of tadura. The verse is also found in a khila
to RV. vii. 103, reading in a upapldvada^ and in c plavAsva. \Jtox 14, 15, see Weber,
Berlitter Sb.y 1896, p. 257. As to metrical definition of 14, sec vs. 8 n.J
15. O khaitvakhd! O khdimakhd! in the middle, O taduri! win ye
rain, O Fathers ; seek the favor (vtdnas) of the Maruts.
The verse (as already noted) is unfortunately wanting in Ppp. The first pada is
misprinted as regards accentuation in our edition, being marked as if the final syllables
were kanipa^ instead of mere protractions. LThat is, the horizontal under the first
syllable kha- should be deleted ; and the signs above and below the two j's should also
be deleted. They are printed aright, khdnvaka^i khdhnakhiji^ in ndgari^ by Whitney,
Prat. p. 392, footnote, and on p. 400, and by SPP.J Prat. i. 105 quotes the words
(with the two that follow) in its list of words showing protraction ; and i. 96 points out
that the final / in each is grave. The comm. says that the three vocatives (he quotes
the stems as khattvakhd sdimakhd tadurl) are special names for kinds of she-frogs —
which seems likely enough ; the two former appear to involve imitations of croaking
(but in L<^S. iv.3.18 the householder's female slaves are to call out hdimahdj^ as
they circumambulate the mdrjdlfya^ filling new water-holders). SPP. (p. 598, note)
asks why, if the words are vocatives, they are not accented simply khdnvakhdji khdl
f/takhdji — being apparently ignorant of the fact that a protracted final syllable is regu-
larly and usually accented, without regard to any other accent the word may have (sec
Whitney, Skt. Gr. § 78 a). Several of our mss. (E.I.H.O.Op.), and a couple of SPP's,
leave the first syllable of each word unaccented. It would much help both meter and
sense to supply hraddsya (or else piavasva) after mddhye in b ; the comm. cither sup-
plies hradasya or reads it in his text. All our mss., and our printed text, have at the
end ichatah ; SPP. follows the comm. and about a third of his manuscript authorities in
reading ichata^ which is doubtless the true text, and implied as such in the translation
above. The comm. explains pitaras 2A pdlayitdro mandiikdh / SPP. regards him as
reading mdrutam in d, but this appears doubtful. LThe Anukr. scans 8 + 5 : 8 +8. J
16. The great vessel (Ico^d) do thou draw up {ud-^ic); pour on; let
iv. 15- IJOOK IV. THE ATHARVA-VEDA-SAMHITA. 176
there be lightninp^s ; let the wind blow ; let them extend the sacrifice,
beini; manifoldly let loose; let the herbs become full of delight.
I'pp. ic.kIs mahanlam at licginning of a, and visrsiUm at end of C The first pftda
\% nearly RV. v. S3. 8 a, wliich, however, reads fiif aiJ ni siiica. Our P.M.W. read
/ttn:'thi/i}fn in c The couiin.. douhtle^s correctly, understands the waters as the
** them ** of c; t'n/ aia he explains .is sttmutfnh/ adakapArnam mdtihara ; he supplies
antaftksam to savufyutitm ; the expression is better understood as an impersonal one.
[With b, d. cf. KV. V.S3. 4 A. b.J
Merc ends the third ttntn'tUii, having 5 hymns and 51 verses; the quoted Anukr.
says ekaviii^atih,
16. The power of the gods.
\lirahmapt. — muutrnim. StiiYilftft*1nfHf,ni.itf$ltttm. v*1rtfn>tm. frtlistukham : t. anHstuhk ;
J. hhuftj ; J. /tigiiti : S.J/'. mahtihMati ; g. virthiMdmatrt/Jt/j^Jj-n/ri]
rive vcrscx of this hymn (in the verse-order 3, 2, 5, 8, 7) are found together in
TAipp. v., and part.^ of vsx. 4 .ind ft elsewhere in the same book. It is used by
Kau^. (48. 7) in a rite of son cry .igaiiist an enemy who ** comes cursing**; and vs. 3
also in the portent-ceremony of the seven seers (127. 3), with praise to Varuna.
Ity reason of the exceptional character of this hymn as expression of the unrestricted
presence and influence of siiprrhuman |K)wers, it has l>een a favorite sutiject of trans-
lation and discussion. 'I r.inslatcd : Roth, Vfbtr den A\\^ p. 29; Max Muller, Ckift
from a C$efmiin \\'otkshop/\. \\ (1867); Muir, OST. v. 63 ; I.udwig, p. 388 ; Muir,
Me/titdt TtiitiilalionSy p. 163 ; K.-icKi, /Vr Kij^veda^^ p 89 f. (or p. 65 f. of R. Arrow-
smith's translation of Kae^i), with abundant parallels from the Old Testament;
Grill, 32, \zU\ (Griffith, i. 1 53 ; Hloomliehl, 88.389; Weber, xviii.66. Some of the
above do not cover the entire h\mn. — See also Ilillcbrandt, l'eda-<hmtomatku^
p. 38; Hergaigne- Henry, Manuft^ p. 146; further, (^rohmann, ind. Stud, ix. 406;
Hermann Hrunnhofer, Iritn uiui Turan (1889), p. 188-196; Wel>er, litrlimer Sb.^ ■S94*
p. 782 f.
L\Vcl>er entitles the hymn •' Helhcuerung der Unschuld, Kidesleistung**; see hi»
instructive note, /////. Stud, xviii. fi6, note 2. ** Comes cursing** liardly takes account
of the voice of {ttpyamAnttm as used by Kilu^. 48. 7. J
I. The great siipcrinlendcnt of them sees, as it were, from close by;
whoever thinks to be going on in secret, all this the gods know.
The verse is altr>gether wanting in Tpp. All the mvs. read in s-b -/i ant- (p. -ti :
ant'), with irregular absence of combination across the cesura ; the case might be one
of those contemplated by Prat. iii. 34, .ilthough not quoted in the comment on that rule;
Srr. rends with the mss., and our edition might perhaps liettcr have done the same
(it is emended to tti 'ttt ). Hut SI'l*. also tckIs in cyJs tthult, instead of /«f (i.e.^ilA)
sttlviit*, while nearly all his pttd»t mss. (with all of outs) require the latter; his wliolly
insutVi( ient reason seems to be th.it the comni. .i(h>pts ttlyiit; the comm. also has. as
part of the same version, tnntt, and views the two words as contrasted, "itaWe"
{sAfhtat\enit vti9 ftt mil unfit sthhavasftt) and ** transient ** (itfi^^fmif //#f 'at ma(i>aram r^r
Vtistu), whith is absurd : *• he is >;reat, becau.ve he knows (nhtfij-tstf=jtiMJti.') all varieties
of l>cin};.'* The comm. understands ruti/i as mcinin;; "of our evil-minded enemies,**
and ket ps up the ini]>li( ation throu;;h(tut. slwiwin^ no manner of comprehension of the
meaning; of the hymn. 'LSee l*r.it. ii. 40, note. p. 426 near end. J
177 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK IV. -iv. i6
2. Whoso stands, goes about, and whoso goes crookedly (vafic), whoso
goes about hiddenly, who defiantly (ipratdnkain) — what two, sitting
down together, talk, king Varuna, as third, knows that.
Ppp. reads in a manasH instead of carati^ and in b fraldyam instead of pratankain ;
and for c it has dvHu yad avadatas samnisadya. The pada-va^^, give in b nhlayan^
as if the assimilated final nasal before c were n instead of m ; and SPP. unwisely
leaves this uncorrected in his fiada-iexif although the comm. correctly understands
-yaf/t. The comm. regards a and b as specifying the "enemies" of vs. i a ; vaficad
he paraphrases by kdutilyena praidrayatiy and pratankam by prakarseua krcchra-
jlvauatn pmpya; nilayam * he derives either from nis+t or from «/ + It, The true sense
of pratankam is very obscure; the translation seeks in it a contrast to nilayam; the
translators mostly prefer a parallel "gliding, creeping," or the like. The Anukr.
apparently balances the redundant a with the deficient c. *LNote that W's version
connects it with ni-llna of vs. 3 ; cf. Gram. § 995 a, and my Reader^ p. 394. J
3. Both this earth is king Varuna's, and yonder great sky with dis-
tant margins {-dnta) ; also the two oceans are Varuna's paunches ; also
in this petty water is he hidden.
Ppp. has, for a, b, uU yam asya prthivl samfcf dydur brhatlr antariksam ; and,
at end of d, udakena maktsh. The comm. declares that the epithets in b belong to
«' earth " as well as to " sky " ; kuksl he paraphrases by daksinoitarapHr^vabhedend
* vast kite dve udare.
4. Also whoso should creep far off beyond the sky, he should not
be released from king Varuna ; from the sky his spies go forth hither ;
thousand-eyed, they look over the earth.
Only the second and third padas are found in Ppp. (and, as noted above, not in ^^/'"•*'^ a--*^*^
company with the main part of the hymn), which gives iha for divas and i9ne *sya for /V|^^»^'»*^ /*'• ^
idam asya (both in c). The samhitd-xxyss.y as usual, vary between divdh and di^'d before
j/-. The comm. \\2ls purastdi in a. ) f4t4.p*i]Ci/tP*^ ^cs-rt^- ^</**r/^ ft^ t^^pr^*- /^^^r^r- k^ J(c*
5. All this king Varuna beholds (vt-cais) — what is between the two
firmaments (rodasi), what beyond ; numbered of him are the winkings
of people; as a gambler the dice, [so] does he fix (im-mi) these things, /l^t./^-x.o
Ppp. reads for d aksdn fta jvqghftl bhnvand mamfte^ which gives a rather more ^-^ J^r^'^I Q i
manageable sense; our text is prfeSably corrupt (vi cinod f) ; the comm. explains fti ^ ^ j? -—-
minoii by ni ksipaii ; and to the obscure idtti (not relating to anything specified in the (£_ CnT^
verse) he supplies pdpindm ^iksdkarmdni. He has again (as in 4 ti) purastdt in b;
and in c he understands samkhydid (not -tdK)^ as '^numerator,** and nimisas as gejn.
with asya. lie also reads in d svaghnl^ and quotes and expands Yaska^s derivation of
the word from s7*a + han. The verse is bhurij if we insist on reading iva instead of
*va in d. LRead 't'/z, or aksah ^vaghniva^ or with Ppp. ?J
6. What fetters {pdqa) of thine, O Varuna, seven by seven, stand H^Ti/l^A*^* '*
triply relaxed (vt-st), shining — let them all bind him that speaks /^ CiTt^ ^ *d
untruth; whoso is truth-speaking, let them let him go. ft.a'^^^'
Our siftdntti, at beginning of c, is our 'emendation, obviously necessary ; a few mss,
(including our Bp.E.H.) have fi//rf/////, and the rest chin- (our P.M. dkin-^ doubtless
iv. 1 6
HOOK IV. THi: ATHARVA-VKDA-SAWmrA.
l7fS^
h
rfT if
\0^'
meant for (hht), wliich STT. arconlinf:ly retains; the comm. has (hinnttn^ rxplainini^
it nx for ihntiiautH. TpP^ VfrAioii of the verse is found with that of the half of vs. 4 ; it
rencU </////i/</r«f .- it also has saptamptatls \\\ a, ami ntsaid rusantah at end of b; antl
its d is ytt% nii'hyar*\i; ati tarn itjAmi. '1 he comm. also reads in b tuuintai^ which is, ^y*y
as at iii. jK.Tfnn arceptahit* sulistitiite for the inept ru{-\ in b he apparently h;is viul^s^
and takes it as tatftt ttttta htnUhAs, wliile the true sense ohviously is ** laid o|>en ready for
u^e " ; the ** triply ** he re;;ards as alluding to the three kinds of fetter s|»ecifird in vii. Sj^
7. With ;i hiiiuircd fetters, O Varun.i, do thou bridle {ttbhi-dhd) him ;
let not the speaker of untruth escajw thee, O men-watcher; let the
villain sit lettinp^ his belly fall [apart], like a hoopless vessel, being cut
round about.
The two editions rend in c ^tan^ayttvA^ with the majority of the mss. ; but nearly half
(ini hiding our r.M.W.N.np.) have {tanuiy^ and two of ours (K.Kp.) sran^ay all
of them misreadin;;s for iraustiy,, which the comm. gi^'es {^ jatodat aro^ena stastam
Irfvt}). L'lhe dise.ise called •• water-lwrlly,** to which c and d refer, is dropsy, \ aruna s
punishment for sin. J In d, .STP. n-ads afuifuihAs with the comm., but against all his
mss. and the majoritv oLours (1* p m.M.W.CJ.Op. have 'i/Aaj)^ which have -tf/trdsi
htttuihra (i.e. bamidhta^ fiom baudh \ tta) is so tegular a formation thai we have no
ri^ht to reject it, even if it dois not occur elsewhere. I'pp. puts vatuna in a before
afi/ti, omitting enam, thus recti fyin;; the meter (wliich mi^ht also be done by omittinj;
the su|)erlluous vamna) ; and it omits the n of -vilil \\\ b. There is not ^jagail yAdx
it) the verse, and d becomes regularly trtstubh by combining kt\i *t'J-.
8. The Varuna that is lenf;thwise (samamya)^ that is crosswise (tj-
amyi\)\ the Varinjia that is of the same region {safhi/fp-ii), that is of a
different region {viJiQ'ti) ; the Varutia that is of the gods, and that is
of men —
If the word Tvf/w////f, thiice repeated, were left out, there would remain a regular
j^'ih'it/ri; and the meaning would he greatly improved also; if we retain it, we must
either emend to varttna^ vocative, «)r to vtlrmith 'of Vdruna,* i.e. • his fetter,* or else we
must understand I'Aruftas as heie .strangely used in the sense of VilrnnJs : the comm.
makes no difTiculty of doing the last. |_l'pp- reads in a, ytts stltnilnyo ; in b,^r<ff {yatk-
tfr^yo (or nuio'/-) ; in c^yo «it}r*yo 'itfuno ya^ la fHtlnmsassa ; and adds tVilns tv ttAni
ftati mufikiimy atta.\ For the fii>t two epitliets compare xviii. 4. 70; the next two are
variouslv undeisttMMl by the tran.sl.itors ; thev are rendered here in accordance with the
comm. Though so differently dt tuicil by the Anukr. \j:i. ii. 3.6n.J. the verse as it
stands is the same with vs. 9, namely 11 x 3~33 .s\llal)les.
9. With all those fetters I fasten {abhi-sd) thee, (> so-and-so, of such-
and-such a family, son of .such-aiul-such a mother ; and all of them I
successively ap[><>int for thee.
If the verse is iri^nrded as metrical, with three p.Vl.is (and it scans very fairly as
sui h)t wr ouijht to ar ( ent if*J// |_vih-. of /riif/zj at l)rginning c»f b. Thr comm. perha[««
undeistamls <f'/;/ in c as inr1ep**n'lent, Anu (SPP. so holds). The last two verses are, as
it ucfe, the practical appli< ation of vss. 6 And 7, and probatily added later. [^As to the
naming u{ the names, see WehcTs note, p. 73. J
179 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK IV. -iv. 17
17. Against various evils: with a plant.
[QtAra. — caturviiifarcam tray am suktdndm, apdmdrgavanaspatidevatyam . dnusUtbham^
Verses 1-6 are found as a hymn in Paipp. v., and hymns 18 and 19 follow it there,
with some mixture of the verses. Vs. 8 is found separately in ii. Hymns 17-19 are
called by the comm. dvafiafttya * of strewing.' They are used together by K^u^. (397),
with ii. II and iv. 40 and others, in the preparation of consecrated water to counteract
hostile sorcery ; and vs. 17. 5 is reckoned by the schol. (46.9, note) to the duhsvapna-
nd^ana gatta.
Translated: Zimmer, p. 66; Grill, 37, 130; Griffith, i. 155 ; Bloomficld, 69, 393;
Weber, xviii. 73.
1. Thee, the mistress of remedies, O conquering one {ujjcsd), we take
hold of; I have made thee a thing of thousand-fold energy {-vityd) for
every one, O herb.
Ppp. reads for b nijesd **grnlmahc. We should expect in c -vlrydm^ and three of
SPP's mss. (none of ours) so read ; but he has not ventured to admit it into his text;
the comm. gives -yam^ but explains as if -ydm {aparimitasdmarthyayuktdvt). The
comm. regards the plant sahadevl (name of various plants, including Sida cordifolia
and rhombifolia^ OH.) as addressed. He takes ujjese in b as dative, = ujjetutn.
2. The truly-conquering, the curse-repelling, the overcoming, the
reverted one {punalisard) — all the herbs have I called together, saying
" may they (}) save us from this."
The last p.lda is translated in accordance with the better reading of Ppp. : ato tnd
pdraydn iti. In b, Ppp. gives puita^card ; Sl'P. presents /«///i^j-, in closer accord-
ance with the niss. than our pttnass-. The comm. does not recognize the meaning
* reverted ' (i.e. * having reverted leaves or fruit *) as belonging X.Q punahsardy but renders
it as •* repeatedly applied " {dbhlksnyena bahuiaravyddhinivrHaye sarati). He reads in
a {apathayopanlm^ and in c abhi (for ahvi) : and one or two of SPP's mss. support him
each time ; our O.Op. give addhi^ by a recent copyist's blunder ; the comm. supplies
gacchanti for his sam-abhi to belong to. The Anukr. takes no notice of the excess of
two syllables in a.
3. She that hath cursed with cursing, that hath taken malignity as her
root, that hath seized on [our] young to take [its] sap — let her eat [her
own] offspring.
The verse is a repetition of i. 28. 3, and the comm. again, as there, reads ddade at
end of b. He notes that a full explanation has been already given, but yet allows him-
self to repeat it in brief ; this time he gives only mftrchdpradam as the sense of mftram.
Ppp. (which has no version of i. 28) gives here, for c, d,^<I vd rathasya prdsdre hy ato
*gham It tvasah. As i. 28. 3, the verse was properly called xnrdtpathydbrhatl, LCor-'
rect the verse-number from 6 to 3 in the edition.J
4. What [witchcraft] they have made for thee in the raw vessel
{pdtra), what they have made in the blue-red one, in raw flesh what
witchcraft they have made — with that do thou smite the witchcraft-
makers.
fv. 17- 1500K IV. THK ATHARVA-VEDA-SAttHITA. 180
The vcrsc \s nearly accordant with v. 31. 1 ))elow. Ppp. reads in b r<I s^/rn tti/-.
A raw vc5!H*l is one of unl)urnt chiy {apakve mrtpAtre^ comm.). The comm. deftnct
•* the bhie-rcfl one " an fire, blue with smoke, red with flame* ; and the *'raw flesh " as
that of a c(K*k or other animal used for tlie purposes of the charm. The kriyM appears
to l>c a concrete olijcct into which an evil inHucnce is conveyed by sorcery, and whkh
then, by depositing or burying, l>ccomcs a source of harm to those against whom the
sorcery is directed (mantrSuuuihAdibhih ^atroh puiAkarlm^ comm. to iv. 18. 2). The
comm. reads tvayd in d, and first pronounces it used by substitution for ivmm, then
retains it in iL5 proper sense and makes y/f^r mean haniav/i^s: both are examples of
his ordinary grammatiral principles. The Anukr. ignores the metrical irregularity of
C [^reject j'«f //I /J. * |_IU(>omrirld, on the basis of KAuq., interprets It as a thread of blue
and red; and this is confirmed by the Ppp. st//ff.j
5. Kvil-drcaming, cvil-Iiving, demon, monster {ai/nui), hags, all the
ill-named ( f .), ill-voiced — them we make disappear from us.
Ppp. has in a ifitssvnpnam t/urjlvatttm^ and, for c, d, JuriUJcas jaivam dmfhkQimm
iam ito uti^', A couple of our mss. ( I.I 1. p.m.) read abh&tn in b. The comm. gives
'jlvatyam in a (with two of SPP's mss.), and (with our P.M.W.K.) asmln instead of
asmAn in d. lie first defines abhvam simply as ** great,** and then as a special kind
of demon or demoniac (quoting KV. i. 1A5. 2); and the durttflmmis as fi^Jtcts having
various bad appellations, such as chrdikii and bhrdtkA. The verse is repeated as
vii. 23. I.
6. Death by hunger, death by thirst, kinelcssncss, childlessness —
through thee, O off-wiper (apamargd), we wi|>c off all that.
The translation implies the obvious emendation of anapadydlAm (p, amapaodytiiam)
in b to -apaiyA-^ which is read by the comm. and by three of SPP*s mss. which follow
him; SPP. very properly admit<i apafyA- into his text (but forgets to emend his fada-
text thoroughly, and leaves in it the a1>surd division a^'^ipti-^tyAtAm.) |^ Weber, however,
discussing avadya^ Derliner Sb., 1896, p. 272, defends the reading apadya-,\ The
comm. says nothing of the sudden change here from sahadevf to apAmArga^ which
ought to lie another plant (Achyranikes asprra: a weed found all over India, having
very long spikes of retroflccted flowers), but may possibly ht used here as a synonym
or ap})cll.ition of the other. In his introduction, he speaks of darbka^ apAmAr^a^ and
sakadfvl as infused in the con.secr.itcd water.
7. Death by thirst, death by hunger, likewise defeat at dice — through
thee, O off-wij)er, we wipe off all that.
Ppp. omits this vari.ition on vs. ^».
8. The off-wiper is indeed of all herbs the sole controller (ivif/it);
with it we wipe [off] what has befallen (Asthiia) thee; then do thou go
about free from disease.
Ppp. (in l>ook ii.) has for b :'t(7AtA//t rkti it patik^ combines in c mrjmtA **sikitam^
and reads at the end otrak. Astkitam (alsovi. 14. 1 aiMl VS. vi. 15) has perhaps a
more speci.il smsc tlinn we arc able to a&sign to it; the comm. paraphrases by kriyMdi-
bkir Apatitam to^Adikam.
l8l TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK IV. -iv. l8
i8. Against witchcraft: with a plant.
[^uJkra. — (etc. : see under hymn 17). 6. brhatigarbhd.']
Found in Paipp. v. (vs. 6 before 5). Used by Kaug. only in company with h. 17, as
there explained.
Translated: Grill, 25, 131 ; Griffith, i. 156; Bloomfield, 70, 396; Weber, xviii. 77.
1. The same light with the sun — night possesses the same with the
day; I make what is effective (satyd) for aid; sapless be the makers (f.)
[of witchcraft],
Kftvarfs at the end borrows a special sense from its relationship with krtyA |_a case
of ** reflected meaning " — see note to iii. 1 1 . 8 J. The construction in the first half-verse
(if here rightly understood) is peculiarly intricate : samdmjydtis is, as it were, coordinate
with the samd of samavatl^ as if it were samajygtismatl : i.e. <* night has its light as
good as the sun's or the day's." Or else jydtis (R.) is to be taken outright as "moon-
light " (= later jr/^/j// J). Ppp. begins with samd bhiimis stl-, and has in c sabhya for
satyam. One of our pada-TCi%%, (Op.), like one of SPP's, divides in b samoivatlj the
comm. defines the word by ** of equal length " {samdndydmH) ; and krtvarU by kartana-
^fltls (taking it from krt *cut*). In our text, the r-sign has dropped out from under
the >6-sign in this word.
2. Whoso, O gods, having made witchcraft, shall take it to the house
of one unknowing — let it, like a sucking (dhdru) calf to its mother, go
back unto him.
The comm., with one or two of SPP's mss., reads drdt instead of hdrdt in b ; dhdnis
he defines by stanapdnath kurvan. There is a redundant syllable in c unless we
abbreviate iva to *va,
3. Whoso, having made evil at home, desires to slay another with it —
numerous stones make a loud crash when it (f.) is burned.
Ppp. is partly defaced in this verse ; and it gives us no aid in solving the difficulties
of the second half. The discordance between the masculines yds and pdpminam in
a, b and the feminine tdsydm is perhaps best removed by supposing krtyd to have
been mentally substituted lor pdpman (the comm. supplies krtydydm to tasydm) ; Grill
violently emends ami in a to dmaydm (sc. pdtryam •), and thinks that this raw vessel
bursts noisily in pieces when burnt ; R. conjectures that thick stones crack when the
krtyd is burnt, perhaps so as to wake the intended victim. The comm. paraphrases
amd by anukfda iva saha sthitah^ i.e. an assistant or confederate, and reads in c
dugdhdydm «* drained " or made ineffective ; the stones are produced by the counter-
magic, and are called on to do {karikrati = punah-puttah kurvantu: a convenient
substitution of the imperative !) damage (^phat—hiiisanam') to the krtyd-krt. The trans-
lation given above implies a threat of the destruction of the krtyd by burning and by
stones tumbling crash ! {phat iox phasf) upon it. The harsh resolution krtu-i makes
the verse a full anustubh, LBp. also has dngdhaydm.\ ^^Oxytone, not perispome.J
4. O thou of a thousand abodes (} 'dhdmmi)^ do thou make them lie {})
crestless, neckless ; take back the witchcraft to him that made it, like a
sweet-heart (priyd) to a lover {priydvant).
For vi^ikhdn in a, Ppp. reads visdkhdm (our P.M.W.E. have viqfsdn^ our Bp.I.H.
Iv. l8- BOOK IV. THK ATIIARV/V-VKDA-SAttHITA. I«2
v/(tstl/t). In b, Srr. reports all h\% authorities as readinfi>: fflrtrJ (p. -/n); no such
innn has l>ccii noted amon^ our mss. |_hut Ppp. has ftlyd if am; Benares ms. R., tf-Aj-
yt\\ul; and 'V.^thaYaYtl\\ in most niss. j^ and/ are but im|>erfectly distini^uished, and»
as some of SPP's authorities arc oral, he is to l>e prrsume<l ri|^ht; and the translation
implies ^tlyava |_for the tathtihi^ Trdt. ii. 17 J. The comm. reads instead ksAymym^ from
/.(/ (-r- ksayatn frikpayn). lie rehearses the series of diverse senses given by Yflska to
tlhAtnan^ and declares them all intended by the word in a. The verse he regards as
addiesscd to the sahadei't.
5. I, with this herb, have sfwilcd all witchcrafts — what one they have
made in the field, what in the kine, or what in thy men (puritsa).
Tpp. reads in c and d the datives gohhyas and purHsebkyas ; the comm. explains
purtisesu as ** in a place frrc|uented by them ** ; for vA te he reads vUte * in the wind.*
A few of our mss. (P.M.W.) have atiaJHsan in b. The Anukr. takes no notice of
the deficiency of a syllable in d.
6. He who hath made hath not been able to make; he hath crushed
(fr) a foot, a fini^er ; he hath made what is excellent for us, but for him-
self a burning (ttiftifia).
The verse is re|)catc'd l>clow as v. 31 . 1 1, but with a different last pAda, which reads :
ad/ta^ti bhAj^tMVtuihhyah. I'pp's version of A-b is yAm cakdra nm ^a^dkkm i^ire
fthftttn an^ulim ((unittin;; hiftutn) ; ydtn |_»c. krtyim f\ is a preferable readinf^. Jbe
comm. also has aiij^itlim : our •///// is authenticated by the comment to Pr&L i. 66.
Ppp*s d reads as docs our v. 31. 1 1 d, but with nblut^A for -^d. The verse is metrically
defined in the same way as here at v. 31. 1 1 |_the Anukr. seems to scan it as 8-f 9: 8 + S
(cf., for example, iii. 8. 4) J ; but kArlum is evidently |_as the accent of fffr/ shows J to be
reckoiiefl to a, and the /i/r///inss. so divide. |_The suspicion is natural that a s4 has
l>een lost lietween nA and {ti^aka So m has l>ecn lost at iv. 5. 5 a (cf. RV. vii. 55.6 a).
If we are ri^ht in restoring sA^ and if we pronounce ftt(r/ (as the Tpp. reading; su^ests),
we shoultl then scin 1 1 +8: 8 fS. — The accent of ^a^ilkti can hardly be more than a
blunder. — The comment to this verse seems to have failed of thorouj^li revision at
W's hands. J
7. Let the off-wiper wipe off the kutriyd and whatever curse [there
is] ; [wipe] off, forsooth, the sorceresses, off all the hags.
Tpp. ro.ids ill c -lihAnyas^ rcctifyint; the meter. The comm. here defines ksHriym
as hereditary disease {^ksrtnttn ptiAtApitr^arlrafk iaisakA^dt).
8. Having wiped off the .sorcerers, off all the hags, O off-wiper, with
thee do we wipe off all that.
Ppp. is defaced in this verse. The comm. first explains apamfjya in a into an
im|>erativc, apamnfJhi; but then, as an alternative, he allows it its own proper
19. Against enemies: with a plant.
[(^uita. -- (etc. : see hymn 17). j. /•ifAyd/^amk/i.]
Foun<l also, in connection with the two next preceding hymns, in PAipp. v. Used by
K.1u^. only in company with hymns 17 and 18, as descril>ed under h. 17. |_Ilut vs. 2 it
reckoned tn the iibbttvit ji^ttftii, employed as battle-charms; see KAu^. 16.8, note. J
TransLited: Ciiill, 34, 132 ; (^riflith, i. 157; liloomfield, 71, 397; Weber, sviii.Sl.
l83 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK IV. -iv. 19
1. Both art thou not relative-making, and now art thou kin-making;
also do thou* cut off {} d-chid) the progeny of the witchcraft-maker, like
a reed of the rainy season {vdrsika).
Or, perhaps, *a last year's reed' (but comm., varsHsu bhavam). The first half-
verse is very obscure, and the translation follows the text as closely as possible (Ppp.
differs only by beginning ute *va *sy)f understanding a-bandhukrty and not abandhu-
krt (which would be accented on -kft) ; possibly the sense is •* thou niakest common
cause with some and not with others." The comm. takes -krt both times from krt
*cut' (which is not impossible) : = /-^r/tfyt^i or chedaka; and he cites RV. iv. 4. 5
•• slaughter thou our foes, the related and the unrelated." NadAm he explains as
etatsamjliam succhedam trnavi^esam. The Anukr. seems to sanction abbreviation
to Vtf in d.
2. Thou art bespoken (.?) by a Brahman, by Kanva son of Nrshad ;
thou goest like a brilliant army (.?) ; there is no fear {phayd) there where
thou arrivest {pra-dp), O herb.
Ppp. has in a pariyukto 'si, and this is very probably the true form of the word
here used ; the difficulty is that neither yuj nor vac Is anywhere else found used with
pari; prayukta |_* employed 'J is what we should expect. We have ** Kanva's plant"
mentioned at vi. 52. 3. The imperfect meter of b (which the Anukr. fails to notice, as
it docs also the like deficiency in d) gives a degree of plausibility to Griirs suggestion
that the p»ida is intruded on an original anustubh. The pada-mss. waver between
nilrsad<fna and mlrs- (our Hp. emends / to s \ Op. is altered obscurely; D.K. have j),
but s is certainly the true reading, as required by Prat iv. 83; SPP. has wrongly
chosen s for his pada-itxi. The comm., witli a couple of SPP's authorities that
follow him, reads ttfistmate in c (our P.M.W.E. have tvisimatt.) The mss., without
any statable reason, accent dsti in d, and our edition follows them; SPP. strangely
gives dsti in samhitd-, but asii in pada-iQxt, |_Are not pdryuktd and pariyuktd
alike awkward phonetic renderings oi prd-yuktd f Cf. Ppp. (a(ir^ (= (a^r-/), iv. 18. 6 ;
and dadhire i^— dadhre. Roth, ZDMG. xlviii. 116). J
3. Thou gocst to the head (dgrd) of the herbs, causing to shine (dtp)
upon [us] as it were with light ; also rescuer art thou of the simple
(pdka), likewise slayer art thou of the demoniac.
Ppp. puts pdkasya before irdtil in c; the comm. paraphrases it yi'wh paktavya-
prajfiasya L'one whose wisdom (^prajfid) is yet to be matured 'J durbalasya.
4. When yonder, in the beginning, the gods by thee removed (fiis-kf)
the Asuras, from thence, O herb, wast thou born, an off-wiper.
Ppp. has in b the older form akrnvata, and for c reads tasmdd dhi tvavt osadhe ap-.
The comm. takes adhi in c as meaning upari vartamdnah or ^resthah san,
5. Splitting apart {vi-bhid), hundred-branched — "splitting apart*' by
name is thy father; in return {pratydk)^ do thou split apart him who
assails us.
Ppp. has sundry corruptions: vivindatf in a, vibinda in b, tarn tvd at end of c.
The comm. omits vi in c. Pada c needs some such emendation as to idfii tu-dm,
6. The non-existent came into leing (sam-bhfi) from the earth ; that
iv. 19- BOOK IV. TMi: ATHARVA-VKDA-SAttHITA. 184
goes to the sky, the great expanse (vydcas) ; let that, verily, fuming
abroad, come back thence on the maker.
'I'lie tr.in5l;iti(>n implies thr obvif)us rmrndation, mafic in our text, of t4d ifydm for
/,ft/ ytim, wliif h is rcid by all the mss. and by the comm., and retained in SIM'*8 text,
though in a note he approves our alteration ; it is only another example of mistaking an
ahhrt'vi.Urd fitr a full rending («/k for its grammatical equivalent iftfy : compare |_i. 22. I.
and Koth. /I)M(t. xlviii. 104 J). Tpp. reads in b ^r/taf vtuas; and it has (or t mJ tt
vtico ','Yati/iufniiyai, The comm. gives hhiimyAm for -yAs in a, and tvai for tai at begin-
ning of b. lie renders asal l>y asalkalpatk krtyAruf*a9n^ or, allernattvely, by tf<#^Aii-
nam kri\u\rttpam. The accent -dhiipAyat is contrary to all rule, and doubtless false ;
MS. (i. 10. 20 ; p. i^>o. I) has -/Jj'tf/, which is correct. The general sense of the verse
is obscure ; but it appears to par.illcl the return of the charm u|>on its producer with the
action of water in exhaling from the earth and coming back as rain.
7. Since thou hast come into being reverted (pratydhc)^ having
reverted fruit, do thou repel 0'//) from me all curses, [repel] very far
the deadly weapon.
The verse is nearly repeated as vii. 65. 1 . Ppp. has for c, A pratUkrtyA ammm krtyA-
krtam jahi. The comm. reads in b -pha/a, vocative ; regarding, of course, the afdm^rgm
plant as addressed.
8. Protect me around with a hundred ; defend me with a thousand ;
may the forceful (ugrd) Indra, O lord of the plants, assign force (ojmdk)
unto thee.
rpp. h.'ui for d bhadro *jmt}nam J tfatfhuh. It can hardly be that the writer does
not use here ttt^rd and tfjMtin as words felt to be related ; but the comm. gives for the
former his standing and always re|)eatcd uti^tlr nabaia^ and paraphrases the other with
ojasvitvtt.
20. To discover sorcerers: with an herb.
[A/tifrtttlmtiH. — ninvmtm. mJff MJmat/Jtraiam. JInustubkam : t.n^arAj; ^ bAmrtj.]
Found in Taipp. viii. (in the verse-order 1-4. 7, 6, K, 9, 5). Reckoned by K&u^.
(8. 25) to the itl/iintlftt ; and by the schol. (8. 34, note) added to the matrnJImAmi : with
good reason, if we may trust the Anukr. (which adds to what is given above: amrmm
Mil/r MtlwtlN *siii//iif/t evtl *sit}ut ) ; but the comm. says nothing about it. The hymn is
used by itself (28. 7) to accompany the binding on of an amulet of sadampuspM 'ever-
flowering * (or, ns tlie comm. and .vhol. say, trisandftyJ) in a healing ceremony (the
comm. .^ays, against brahma^raha and the like).
Transl.itcd: Ludwig, p. 5::5 ; (iiill, 2, 133; (friflfith, i-i5'>; Hloomfield, 68, 398;
Weber, x\iii.84.- See also llillebrandt, Veiht-ihrtstotnalhif^ p. 48.
I. He (.') looks on, he looks toward, he looks away, he looks: the sky,
the atm<>spbcrc, then the earth — all that, O divine one (f.), he looks at.
Tpp. h.ts the 2d sin^. pti^yasi all tlie fix-e times, and it is an easier reading (adopted
bv (if ill in his tr.inslation). especially in d, unh ss we mav emend dfi-t to dtvi ; accord-
ing t(t the comm., the .stibjett thtou;;hoiit is the wearer of the amulet, and the divine one,
as is alvi indicated by Kauq., is the j«r//«i //////// J plant, a plant evidently lia%'ing some*
thing altoiit it th.it resembles or suggests eyes. Tpp. reads «l for tit in c |_Kead ppJi
lor pp,i/t in a.' Tronouncc diztintap- in cj
I8S TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK IV. -iv. 20
2. Three skies, three earths, and these six directions severally — by
thee let me see all beings, O divine herb.
Ppp. has mahl (for -Ik) instead of prthak in b, and in the second half-verse, tathd.
*ham sarvd yiltfna pa^ydmL Some of our mss. (P.M.) give pdsydnt in d. Pada a
is redundant by a syllable, unless we pronounce prihvts, |_For the triplicity, comm.
cites RV. ii. 27.8 and AB. ii. 17 end. J
3. Of that heavenly eagle art thou the eye-pupil ; thou here hast
ascended the earth as a wearied bride {vadhtl) a litter.
Ppp. puts divyasya after suparnasya. The ground of the comparisons made in the
verse is altogether obscure, and the comm. casts no light upon them. [^Hloomfield
discusses this vs., AJP. xvii. 402.J
4. May the thousand-eyed god set it in my right hand ; with it do I
see every one, both who is Cudra and [who] Aryan.
Ppp. has hasC Ckdadat at end of b, and, for second half- verse, tato 'ham sarvath
pa^ydmi adbhutam (sic) yac ca bhavyain. Pa^y&ni would be an acceptable emendation
in c. The comm. (with one of SPP's mss.) reads ivayd in c ; he regards the "god'*
in a as Indra.
5. Make manifest [thy] forms ; do not hide thyself away ; then mayest
thou, O thousand-eyed one, look upon the kimidins.
Literally (in d) * meet with thy look.* Ppp. begins c with evd instead of at/io^ and
ends d \\\i\\ pa^yamy dyata. The abbreviation in c of the stem -caksus to -caksn is
one of those noted in the Prat, rules ii. 59 and iv. 100. },jTKc^ ^ Y- • ' ^^* ^-^^^ ^*-'/ ^^i M\ ^fo/ni •
6. Show me the sorcerers ; show the sorceresses ; show all \\i^ pi^acds:
with this intent I take hold of (a-rabh) thee, O herb. H^l'^i ^P'^Trf^OPf
For second half- verse, Ppp. has dpasprg eva tisthantam dar^aya mdm kimldinam, V / 2-y
7. The eye of Kagyapa art thou, and of the four-eyed bitch ; conceal -»/
thou not the pifdcdy like the sun gliding {srp) in the clear sky (vfd/ird). P*="A f^ ^^ t
That is, allow him to be no more concealed than the sun etc. Both editions read >^^>*^
-^iksyas at end of b, but it is against the authority of the mss., all of which (save two
of SPP's which follow the comm. in giving the true reading) omit, as in numerous
other cases, the^' after the sibilant. The comm. regards Saram& as referred to; and,
in futile attempt at explaining her possession of four eyes, says etend ^pradhrsyatvam C4fUlj^^^^'^^^^
uktam. \Qi. Weber, Deri. Sb., 1895, p. 849, n. 3. J He explains the reference to eyes
by the resemblance of the flowers of the plant in question ; but this looks rather like
a plausible guess than like a statement on any authority. Ppp. has for first half-verse
ka^yapasya caiuraksas syahiyd^ caturaksd. The comm. derives vfdhra from vi-idh^
and glosses it with aniariksa. The Anukr. appears to approve the abbreviation to
suryam *va in c. LBloomficld thinks that ka^yapa punningly suggests pa^aka *sccr,'
and cites TA. i. 8. 8, ka^yapah pa^yako bhavati yat sarvam paripa^yati,\
8. I have seized {ud-grabh) out of his shelter {paripdna) the sorcerer,
\the kimidin; with it do I see every one, both ^udra and Aryan.
' Ppp. has in a, b -pdnam ydtudhdndt kimidinah. The comm. makes tena refer here
\.o ydtudhdnam^ and supplies ^<i/m//f to sarvam — evidently without reason.
.^ ^r
iv. 20 noOK IV. Tin: ArnARVA-VllDA-SAttHITA. 186
9. Whichever flics throu|;h the atmosphere, and whichever creeps
across the sky; whichever thinks the earth a refuge (m\thd) — that
fii^iUii ^o thou show forth.
I 'pp. has for b hhoml{ n* */#rj<j//<i//, ami in c tfivam for hhikmim ; and its d is tvatk
^*^<^^ pi^tUttfit dr^e kuru. The comm. (with a couple of Sl*l**s mss.) has atlki- instead of n/f*
in b; he f^losses nilthttM with s:u}>fihtaw. The verse is not bkurij if we combine
yb^ntAr- in a. LCorrcct the misprinted versenuml>er.J
liens at the rnd of the fourth anuvAka^ with 5 hymns and 42 verses, the okl Anukr.
says aiha kuryHd dvittia^a.
Ilcfc ends also the sc\cni\\ pnt^tl/kaka.
21. Praise of the kine.
; ,y. /-7 Ih'xfi hymn is not found in IViipp.. hut it occurs in the Rig-Veda (vi. 28. 1-7; vs. 8,
in a different meter, is perhaps a latrr .iddition), and also in TH. (ii. 8, 8» ••••). It is
used by Kau<;. (19. 1), with i. 4 Y> and otlirrs in a rite for ailing; kine, and also (21.8 ff.)
in one for the prosperity of kinr, vs. 7 l>rinf; specific ally mentioned as repeated when
they f^o forth to p.istuic ; vs. 7 appears further to l>e tpioted at 19. 14, in a rite for the
cow-stall; but the lomm. declares two verses to l>e intended, and, if so, they must be
vii. 75. I, 2, since tiiere is here no following; verse. In \'ait. (21. 24), in the agntstoma^
the cows intended as sacrifu iai \(\i\s are i^rreted with this h) run. The .vchol. ( KAu^. 1 6. 8)
reckons vs. 4 to the abhayit i^ttmt. The comiu. |_and Ke<fava*s S(holion to Kau^. 27. 34 J
dedare h\rnns 21 -30 to Ih.* ;///(,'i7/«r hymns (Kauq. 27.34; 9. 1), but the name would
seem pro|M'rly to belong only to hymns 23-29, which form a related ^roup, and are by
the Anukr. a.scril>ed to Mr^^lla as autlior.
Translated: by KV. tr.inNLiturs ; and (jrifTith, i. 161 ; \Vel>er, xviii. 87*
I. The kine have come, ami have done what is excellent; let them
stay (stui) in the stall (j;^i'}fjiii) ; let them take pleasure with us; may they
be rich in projjcny here, niany-foinied, milking for Indra many dawns.
The other texts have no v.iriants for this verse. The comm., after his wont, turns
the two aoiists in A into ini|H:r.itivcs ; he renders r/j/ffir/i'i/fi alternatively by ramayamtm
and mmttfifilffi ; and he takes ** dawns ** as equivalent to **t\2y%" (i/huisAtt). |_* Full
^^ many a morning \ioldinf; milk for Indra.* J
flit
2. To the .sacrificcr and sin[;cr, to the helpful one {?), Indra verily
gives further, steals not what is his ; increasing more and more the
wealth of him, he sets the godly man (t/n'itrii) in an undivided domain
The otlier trxts have in A the decideilly better reading /rz/tf// tii ftkut/i of which ours
is sinipty a loiiuption; the conun , liecdlcss of the accent, takes our {fksate as a verb
( (,*.?// />f.fytt. , fitt/t ) In d they have the l»etler accent lihkinnf : and TH. reads
k*it»\\' : must of <iur niss. coiiM Ik» Intter undrrsl«MMl as kki//>/ than ^%kkify/; the ctmim.
ih'lini's k*n/it .is ijf*ftihtjt>i»*t .t//i.l'f,tfft, and k/tt/ytj as ititrahhavtt ; R. conjectures "Stone-
wall *' fnr k/tt/y^t. .All our in^s . and p. lit o( SPT's, read mukhthati in b.
3. They shall not be lost ; no thief shall harm [them] ; no hostile
1 87 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK IV. -iv. 21
[person] shall dare attack their track (?) ; with whom he both sacrifices
to the gods and gives, long verily with them does the kine-lord go in
company.
IJoth the other texts* accent vydthis in b, as docs one of our niss. (O.), and one of
SPT's. Before this word TB. has w<J/ V/J amitrd. The comm. explains vyathis as
vyathdjanakam Hyudham, The pada is very obscure as it stands. |_An earlier draft
of the translator's ms. reads: ^^ Na^anit\ by its association, and its difference from
tia^yantiy must be meant as subjunctive (aor.), notwithstanding its ending." I am
tempted to suggest nA ta naqan; ta (ace. pi. fem.) nA dabhdii idskaras. — DR., vi. 1438,
take vyAthis as * unbemerkt von,' with genitive, dsdtn. But see Geldner's discussion
of the combinations of vydthis with d-dhrs^ Ved. Stud. ii. 29. — Note that TB's dmitrd
(both ed's read so in the text and both have d- in the comm.) is neither amitro nor
dmitrd,] * [^In TB., the pratlkas of vss. 3 and 4 stand in RV. order at ii. 8. 8»« ; but
the vss. are given in full at ii. 4. 69. J
4. No dust-raising horseman Qdi-van) reaches them; not unto the
slaughter-house {}) do they go; those kine of that sacrificing mortal
roam over wide-going fearlessness.
RV. differs only by retaining the a of a^nute in a, as do one or two of our mss.
(O.K.) and half of SPP's; and its pada-iQxi divides samskrtaotra in b, while the AV.
pada-mss. (except our Op.) leave the word undivided (by an oversight, the AV. Index
Verborum gives the RV. form). The comm. explains arvd by hihsako ttydghrddih^
and -kakdta by udbhedaka; also samskrtatra by mdiisapdcaka (because xnt^asitam
trdyate pdiayati)^ quoting from an unknown .source the line samskrtah sydd vi^asitah
samskrtatftt^ ca pdcakah. The comment to Prat. ^iv. 58 J makes the word come from
the root kr, TB. Lalso retains the a of a^nute and itj has in d mdrtyasya. In our
printed text, the upper accent-mark in renukakdto is over the wrong k.
5. The kine [are] Bhaga ; Indra has seemed to me the kine; the kine
[are] the draught of first soma; these kine — that, O people, [is] Indra;
with whatever heart [and] mind I seek Indra.
The translation implies in a the RV. reading achdn^ of which our ichdt seems
merely an unintelligent and unintelligible corruption ; TB. has instead acchdt, and our
O.K. give the same. Both the other texts add id after ichami in d. The comm.
translates in a •' may Indra desire that there be kine for me." LThe latter part of C is
of course the well-known refrain of RV. ii. 12. J
6. Ye, O kine, fatten whoever is lean; the unlovely (afnrd) one ye
make of good aspect ; ye make the house excellent, O ye of excellent
voice ; great is your vigor (vdyas) called in the assemblies {sabhd).
The RV. version agrees at all points with ours ; TB. accents kf^am in a and has
a^lilam in b (its krniithdt is a misprint, as its commentary shows). The comm. reads
krnuta in c; sab/tdsn in d he paraphrases yi\i\i janasamilhesti.
7. Rich in progeny, shining in good pasture, drinking clear waters at
a good watering-place — let not the thief master you, nor the evil-
plotter; let Rudra's weapon avoid you.
I
IV. 21- HOOK IV. TIIL ATHARVA-VEDA-SAttlllTA. I
^ ^ ,1^J ft The translation of a follows our text, though the false accent ry^dntls (TB. has the ./ .
same reading;) sliows that the word is only a corruption of the KV. reading ri{ttmtU> ' / .,
•cropping;, gra/in;;.* The comm., tliough reading /Mfa/fZ/i, renders it trnam bhakfa'\ , ' V//
yatttls, |_'l he TH. comm. in l>oth ed's reads fi{antli.\ Hoth the other texts have in a
stiyAvasam^ and at tlie end heli riuUAsya vrjyAh (TH. vrfljyJi). With our C, d com-
pare als<i TS. i. I . I (differing only in the order of words in d [jrmdrdsym ketik pAri
V0 vrftal/N, which is metrically much Inrtter than our AV. order, allKit the RV. order
is as poiMl as that of TS. if we pronounce rtnir-Asya \). The comm. supplies to agkm-
^anxat in c lyJt^'Anh/ir tiustamr^ak, ^For ff<i/tf, see Ski. Cram. { 615. J
22. For the success and prosperity of a king.
[ I 'asistha ( ? Atka? fan / ). — JiM4/r*im, triutHhkam. ]
Found in Paipp. iii. (with vs. 3 before vs. 2), and most of it also in TH. (ii. 4. 7'*').
I'sed hy Kau^. (14. 24) in a rite for victory in battle (the e<litor of KAu^. regards the
next hymn aUo as included, but evidently by an error), and also in the ceremony of
consecration of a kin;; (17. 28) [^ Weber, Ktljastiya, p. 142J; and the comm. mbtakenlj
regards it as quoted at 72. 7, Ki^'i'^R ^^^^ pratika as imam indra^ instead of imam
i/tiirtim^ as K.1u<;. really reads (xii. 2.47, evidently the verse Intended). The Anukr.
spreads itself at very unusual lenf;th over the cliaracter of the hymn: imam imdra
vanfhayf *ii vasisiha Aindram trilistubham so 'iharvA ksatriyAya rAj^t €amdramas4
prathatttAbhih paficahhir niramttflkaraptamukhyeue *ntiram apfiktihayad grAmm*
gttvU^vtltii sanuit/i rAjyopakaranam ca latah parAbhyiim antyAbhyiim imdrartipimm
svayatn rtut l.uitfiyath rHjAnam mndfamasatti il^isJ prAtiudad ili, Probably t'mjisfka
is the intended r/i-name, and si> '//tarvA (one nis. sAttth.) a misreading for soroelhiog else.
Translated: Ludwi;;, p. 457 ; /inimer, 165 ; Orill, 67, 135; Griffith, L 162; ISloom-
field, 115, 404 ; Wcl>er, xviii. 91. — Cf. llillebrandt, I'tdachrestomathie^ p. 43.
1. Increase, () Iiuira, this Kshatriya for mc ; make thou this man sole
chief of the clans (I'/f) ; unman (ftis-aks) all his enemies ; make them
subject to him in the contests for preeminence.
The comm. (with one of .Sl*I'*s mss.) has in b the strange reading \*rsAm for vi^Am;
and it treats aham and uttaresu in d as two separate words. He takes tfi'/«r«rilf as
from aks * attain' {^aksa vyAp/AN), and .so explains it {nirgatavyApiikAm kurtt), \Stt
Delbriick's discussion, GurupujAkAiimudl^ p. 48-9.J TB. combines a of this verae
(reading kuitriyAnAm for -ynm mt) with b, c, d of our vs. 3. In our edition, aa
anusi'Ani is substituted for an accent m.uk over the syllable -Mra- in d-
2. Portion thou this man in village, in horses, in kine ; unportion that
man who is his enemy ; let this king be the summit of authorities (tsatrd) ;
O Incira, make every foe subject to him.
Ppp. elides th** <r of atnitras in b. and in c has the lietter readinf* x*arsmam *at the
summit,* which is also offered by the comm.. and bv three of STT's mss. TB. has
I'lirsfrntft, but as first word of a very different half-verse, our iii. 4. 2 cd, which It adds
to our first half verse here to make a complete verse; in a it has itnAm i instead of
/ *mAin, ami in b nir amuin insteail of /r/r tAm, thus rectifying the meter (the Anukr.
takes no notice of the metrical itrrt;iil.irity of our b) ; and it leaves asya without accent
at the end. Nearly half the mss. (iinlmliiv^ our P.M. W.I. K.) have in ^ {Atrikik^ and
the comm. seems to understand {attun. [TH. combines /^ ^mttro^ against the meter. J
fo T^^o:sdr:»:iv *jic: >u^rT;?. iccK. :^' ->- ^^
TTT7t^:* utni lis ix.
-*^ lutEL lUHVTi. T3. rmnnms :tie ssfc ".tiriyg .?»<£^ ^v :ttt*^ -"tyT^r Twin jmt * t
Iki r»': -mitnT iure r:r«ir ]:-j*iJL£ tin^ luc-^-itn^c ^tur^ma^^ . imv tfiis^ v*it^
I'm. rnnniims Ritfits '-:*£ it ^ imt ros hhit'th n ; ma a: :iit; *»nt t scris^rs^ ^^in
TT2. n "^rating 7^ T'^tt 3ir f*a.7lrtiZn. 73. i^irtinsr V*» i2T«« » % ant ^f*^** ^'•r
£i^:tiiji n 1 nic «55 ?*riLL ..5*1* . xm£ C jryi;mg» jtttm lot tw^Af*Uim, !?*tic*n^v t tt
III* USE lii :ii;ii: pr^x ir jc feme rcnnr ttiisc casvs m/i»dfm^m :ir -stsaiu a bt fit* ns«Si^
■^ — ■^. '^ -.h
-ry^^ iTicuz-ifir. xr* ••:C ccc'ri^ri'i : '»*rc s^ull 3rai^ tiXx* $eiir onct >^
::-:--errf, brtnz tioa in the en;oYi3&C3::s .hh/tj:mji^ ct :St!Coat tij^: ^*iix
*> ■*■
t- L:e cells' 2iil£ ci w'zjch oar irAt his »?t!u3^ vvcrrs^'mifoi^ ; j^ i^ ^N>s^ *\*t^c^ ^ ^»«
fkM"rii:. Th* cocEi3i_ takes /rx/r irisd I'xrrxriw tat ^ .xs twv* «&i|itf»it>Qikl<«( >iivt\j^; >if
7. Of lion-aspect, do thou Je\»ur ^.yJ> out the cUns v^^^ ^ ^^ *^^v^«-
a5::e::, cd thou beat down the foes; sole chief, hxvmc Invtrx xs v\^\
panion. ha\-ing conquered, seize thou on {J-^iinO the enK^yo!ient:ii k>([
them that play the foe.
Fpp. has onlj the second half-rrrsc, ami n^avis lor d |%*/>ilra*M«t «*^^ir ^>\*Jvl v/v^iUnAt
(tjt viL 73. 10 etc. : sec under that verse). The vh<4e retse b waatti^ in Tlv VHe
corr.Tn., ^.ih one of SPP's mss., reads «f/*f for 4r^ in b. He i^mj^hrjfcses M^i \^>fcKkK
is a frequent expression for the action of a ruler upon his subjects) xxtv |M\>|X^K by
thuntria; and a khida^ less acceptably, br JUxkinJAi^
iv. 23- nooK IV. Tilt: AT!iARVA-vi:uA-sAWniTA. 190
23. Praise and prayer to Agni.
Found,* with the six hymnx that follow, all to);cther (hut in the order 23, 25, 27, 26,
2S. 20. 2 0, ill I'aipp. iv. The 5cvcii arc kno^n hy K.1u<;. (9. I) as the mrj^JIrm hymni
(also |iy thi* schol., as by the Atiuki. ; that the cnniin. to h. 21 ^ives the name to 21-30
was there remarked ; here he s|>eaks of ** a heptad of hymns ** as intended in 9. I) ; tKejr
are reckoned (9.1) to the hhaihJuti^ana^ and also (32.27. note) to the anhnliNga
j^itNti ; and thry are emph)yril in a healing rite (27.34). In V.iit. the hymn aicom-
panjfs the kindlin;; of the fire in the parvan sacrifues (2. II), and vs. 4 is similarly
used (5.15) in tlw! ai^uyAdheya. It was noted under the preceding hymn that the
editor of Kaui;. mistaken'^ rr^ards this one as included in Kaui;. 14. 24. The firit and
last verses ^of each J of the ttir^Ara hymns are piven also l>y TS. (iv. 7. 1 5), MS.
(iii. ifi. 5), and K. (xxii. 15) ; only the hymn to Hhava and Qarva (our 2K) is omitted,
and, on the other hand, those texts have similar invocations to the yX^vins and to all
the Rods. And the comm. to our h. 24 (piotes also TS. vii. 5. 22, where a mrgJIresti
with ten olil,ition% to the divinities worshi|)ed with the verses in qurstton, is prescribed.
(_See further, as to this litany, Weber's note, p. 95 f. — The wr^-Jrii-versei occur in
TS. and M.S. at the very end of the lulfii/as (iv. and iii ) concerned. J •^In the verse-
order 1,4, 2,3. 5,6. 7. J
Translated: (fiiHith, i. K>3 ; \Vel)er, xviii.94.
1. I reverence (mnun) fust the forethoughtful (prdcetas) Agni, him
of the five peoples, whom men kindle in many places; we pray to him
who hath entered {pt'^vi^) into clans after clans (i/f ) : let him free us
from distress.
Ppp. has in h /»dHcfij- ; the ronun . piifiiaytijnti^yn^ for whirh he gives three different
interpretations, the last one makin;; -yit/fiiisyti ecpiivatent to -janaxytt. Afdni»e he para-
phrases by y«};/«l///*. In a, MS. has ttmfU^nAtn (or fiftii f/tt sat ; for b, 'I S.MS. j;^\\t jrdm
fiiflntjitttyam hahthuih samintihikte : and, fore, vf{va\yt\th 't'i\i ftavtvi^n'Smsam
imahe. |_The ** absence of reduplication '* (.S77. Of ant. § 803 a) is dout>tless due to
the oftie|>eatcd syllable 77 or vi\. I he pratika is cited, M(«S. i- 5- 5 — cf. p. I45.J
The Anukr., at the end of the drsi riptions of the seven hymns, says that all the verses
contain — i.e. rnd with — an itttu\hihh p.ida. Its definitions of the meters in detail are
too inaccurate to be worthy of attention tliroughout.
2. As thou earliest the oblation, (.) Jatavedas ; as, foreknowing, thou
adaptest the sacrifice - so do th«)u convey to us favor from the gods:
let him free us from distress.
I'pp. offers no variants in vss. 2 4, but puts 4 next after I. 1 he comm. takes dnt'
bhya\ in c first as dative and tiien as ablative.
3. Put to service at every course (ytlntofi), best carrier, sh.irer {tiHiaga)
at every lile, Apni I prais<\ demon-sIay<T, sacrifice-increaser, ofTcrctl to
with ;;hee : let him free us from distress.
.'Ml tlie m^s. (and .ST P. with them) make the division of the verse, with obvions
impiopii' (y, l»efore instead of after ai^nittt Uic, Inrin^ apparently led into the IJunder by
igi TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK IV. -iv. 24
remembering the two words as beginning the Rig- Veda. The comm. gives the right
division, as does also our edition by emendation. Nearly all the mss. (not our I.K.)
read bdhisthafn at end of a ; both editions give vdh-, with the comm. The comm. para-
phrases abhaf^ain by dbhaktavyam Ssevyam evathgunaviqistam. |_Thc vs. scans as
1 1 4- 1 1 : 1 2 + 8 = 42. Even with the misdi vision (i 1 +7 : 8+8+8), it is no purastajjyo-
iismail (44). J
4. The well-born Jatavedas, the mighty (vibhu) Agni belonging to all
men (I'dififdftard), the carrier of oblations, we call on : let him free us
from distress.
The verse, as already noticed, comes second in the Ppp. version of the hymn. The
comm. explains vibhu as " pervading '* (^vy&pakd).
5. With whom as ally the seers made [their] strength shine out; with
whom they repelled the wiles of the Asuras ; with whom, Agni, Indra
conquered the Panis — let him free us from distress.
Ppp. makes in a the combination yena rs-^ and reads in b idyotayan j for the latter,
the comm. (with two or three of SPP's mss.) gives uddyotayan ; a few of the mss.
(including our Bp.K.) have -tayam.
6. By whom the gods discovered the immortal ; by whom they made
the herbs rich in honey ; by whom the gods brought the heaven (svdr)
— let him free us from distress.
The comm. takes amrta in a as meaning the drink of immortality ; more probably it
signifies immortality itself.
7. In whose direction [is] whatever shines forth {vi-mc) here, what is
born and to be born, all of it — I praise Agni, [as a] suppliant I call
loudly on [him] — let him free us from distress.
TS. and MS. have a quite different first half-verse : yAsye *ddm prdndn nimisdd ydd
ijati ydsya jdtdm jdnamdnath ca kivalatn. The comm. renders ndthitas first by
ndihamdnah^ phalath kdmayamdnah^ and then by ndthah svUml sathjdto *sya,
24. Praise and prayer to Indra.
[^Afrgdra. — (see h. 23). /. fakvar^^rbhd purahfakvari.^
P'ound in P5ipp. iv., with the other tnrgdra hymns, and used by Kau^. only as one
of the group (see under h. 23) ; its first and last verses occur in the same Black Yajur-
Vcda texts (do.).
Translated : Griffith, i. 165 ; Weber, xviii. 100.
I. We reverence Indra; constantly do we reverence him; these
praise-hymns {stSma) of the Vrtra-slayer have come unto me; he who
goes to the call of the worshiper (da^dhs\ of the well-doer — let him
free us from distress.
Ppp. has in a ittdrasya manve {a^vad yasya manvire^ which is better, in both sense
and meter. TS. and MS. (agreeing throughout) read indrasya manve prathamdsya
prdcetasah in a ; in b, itpa mim upA *guh; and, in c, hdvam upa gdntA, The verse
iv. 24- nooK IV. THi: ATIIARVA-VEDA-SAMHITA. 192
is pro|>crly enough ffmrah^akvarl^ hut there is no reason why it should be called in
addition ^t^kvaffj^afbhil.
2. He who, having formidable arms, is rcpcllcr (.Vtf/w) of the for-
midable ones (f.); who battered the strength of the Danavas ; by whom
are concjuered the rivers, by whom the kine — let him free us from
distress.
I'pp. has in blvo 'j^ntmlm and omiis yaj'tis; and at end of b it reads UsasAtia. I'he
first p.ida is full of (|uestiunablc points, and probably corrupt ; the comm. explains
yttyux (though SIM*, says in a note that his text reads i'#i^'wj), and hs yAx^ayitA prthak^
karttl ; to u^rlniim h«* supplies \itiritifntl9ulffi.
3. lie who is fdler of people (carsdPii), bull, heaven-finder (Jiwrj'/r/) ;
for whom the pressing-stones proclaim [his] manliness ; whose is the
sacrifice with seven priests, most intoxicating — let him free us from
distress.
Ppp. has cttrstffti instead of vruihkas in s, and, for c, yasyA *iih\*aryus saptakHA
mutUtyut. The comm. renders carutni- by tnanusya-.
4. Whose are cows (xv/j</), bulls, oxen ; for whom, the heaven-finder*
sacrificial posts (svtiru) are set up; for whom the bright ((liJtni) [soma]
purifies itself, adorned with sacred words (brd/t99ta-) — let him free us
from distress.
Tpp. has in cyttstniti ^ukras pravartate. The comm. explains va^A in a as *• bairrn
cow'* {7'fJMti7tVi} ji^iltt/i)^ and snifu as ytipAi'ataksttntt^akaltt^ used Un ytipa. \Ci.
RV. vi. 16. 4 7. J
5. lie whoso enjoyment (jiis(i) the offerers of soma desire; whom*
pos.sessed of arrows, men call on in the cattle-raid (gdins(t)\ on
whom depends song (}artii), on whom force — let him free us from
distress.
rpp. reads in b isuTtttt/itrft. Pr.'it. ii. 23 tcaihes the form o[ ^avisti. The comm.
explains arkas as tmanttuhihatttihhtito manirah siMttt{ttstrihfiIaksitnah.
6. He who was born first for the doing of deeds ; of whom first the
heroism was noted ; by whom brandished (nd-yafn) the thunderbolt
went at Utb/iii) the dragon — let him fiee us from distress.
As in «)ne or two other r.i.ses,* the mss. have in sj-<///V instead oijajfl/ ; but one or
two of .Srr*s follow llic (omm.. \\!u) rea»ls jttjfi^^ as does also I'pp. ; and lioth of the
editi'Uis ^ive this. In b the comm., with three of SIT's authorities, f;ives Jif ftAiV//<M4j«t .■
in c he derives tlyitta fnmi r(K>t t#iw, and renders it by ahtnilt ; we mif;ht emend to
ahhyiiyatii *htm and Kct a form from lh.it root, whiih would yield a preferable sense.
|_For the use of af^hii uith vajnt as subject and with ace, Whitney has noteil the
excellent p.ualhl, KV. i. So. 12. J '[So x. 10. 18. J
7. lie who, controlling, leads together hosts (j#iw^r<rlw</) for fighting;
who mingles (stini-sr/) the possessions (ptis(ti) of the two parties — I
193 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK IV. -iv. 2$
praise Indra, [as a] suppliant I call loudly on [him] : let him free us from
distress.
Ppp. has in b pustyil nas. TS. and MS. read in a (as does also the comm.) the
sing. sathgrilmAm, and they \i\x\yudhi after va(t ; at end of b they give trayatti instead
of dvayani. The comm. thinks dvaydni to be stripumsHtmakdni miihundni,
25. Praise and prayer to Vflyu and Savitar.
[Mrgdra. — (see h. 23). j. aii^akvarlgarbhd jagatt ; y,pathydbrhaii.'\
Found in Paipp. iv. (in the verse-order 1-3, 6, 5, 4, 7, and after our hymn 23). The
Black Yajur-Veda texts (see under hymn 23) put their passages corresponding to our
hymn 29 (to Mitra and Varuna) between tho.se corresponding to our 24 and 25. For
the use of the hymn as one of the tnrgiira hymns in Kau^., see under hymn 23 ; the
comm. further quotes it as employed by Naks. K. 18, in a ^ilnti ceremony named
vdyaxyd. The metrical irregularities are not worth the trouble of detailing.
Translated: Griffith, i. 166; Weber, xviii. 102.
1. Of Vayu, of Savitar we reverence the counsels {viddtha) : ye who
enter and who defend what has life (atmauvdnt) ; ye who have become
cncompassers of the all — do ye free us from distress.
TS. and MS. read bibhrids (for viqdthas) and rdksatas in b, and TS. babhuvdtus in
c; and both have agasas in the refrain. MS. further combines ^^ dt- in b, and has ti.
no m- in the refrain. The comm. is uncertain as to the sense of viddtha. |_Geldner
renders, '* Wir gedenken dcs Bundes zwischen V. und S.," ZDMG. lii. 746 : cf. Foy,
KZ. xxxiv. 226. J Doubtless it is a metrical consideration that causes the change from
3d to 2d person in the refrain of hymns 25, 26, and 28. |_Grammar and meter favor
restoration of the older and longer form paribhuvd in c — see Lanman, JAOS. x. 413.J
2. Of whom are numbered the widths of the earth ; by whom the
welkin (rdjas) is made fast (j///) in the atmosphere ; whose progress no
one soever has reached (anu-af) -^ do ye free us from distress.
Ppp. has in a varimdni pdrthivd^ which improves the meter ; also gusthitdm for
yupitam in b, and pray dm ior prdyam inc. Yupitdm (perhaps 'smoothed out, spread
uniformly* ^cf. Bloomfield AJP. xii. 418, 419J) the comm. explains by mUrchitam sad
dhdryaie. The pada-KKTiX, divides in c praodydm^ for which SPP., on the authority of
only one of his mss., unaccountably substitutes praoaydm (a number of our mss. give
instead -yd ft) [ci. BR. v. 163 5 J.
3. In [conformity with] thy course {vratd) people (jdna) go to rest;
when thou art risen, they go forth, O thou of beauteous luster ; ye, O
Vayu and Savitar, defend beings — do ye free us from distress.
Ppp. has yachatas for raksathas at end of c ; the comm., with a couple of SPP's
mss., reads raksaias; and he paraphrases it, without a word of remark, vixih pdlayathas.
4. Away from here, O Vayu and Savitar, drive {sidh) ye what is ill-
done, away the demons and Cimida ; for ye unite (sam-sr/) [men] with
refreshment {fifjd), with strength — do ye free us from distress.
Nearly all the mss. read in c srjdtha (instead of -thai). The comm., with two
iv. 25 - BOOK IV. TIIK ATIIARVA-VEDA-SAMIIITA. 194
or three of SPT^s m%%., rcAcls samiiftim' (lor ^imiddm) in his text in b, but explaint
samuihAm (by samiiiptAth krtyiim nt)\ itih in a he takeii from root /, and paraphrases
hy ji^amayttthtis / KmendAlion in a to tiuskitam^ * evildoer/ would l>e acceptable; the
comm. takes it as accented (-= asfttadlyam pupam).
5. Let Savitar and Vayu engender {A-su) in my body {tanb) wealthy
prosperity, very propitious dexterity ; do ye put here freedom from
ydksma^ greatness; do ye free us from distress.
Tanfi in b is tranMateil as a locative because so regarded by the PrAt. (under i. 74),
as it is also by the comm. ( •=■ tanviJm, asntadtye ^arlrt) ; it might be nom. dual ; or, yet
better, it might l>e emended to tanudaksdm, Tpp. reads avtyaksmatdtk $mkaim4t%m
dhattam for c The comm. paraphrases i sni'atAm with prerayatAm prmyauMaMm.
6. O Savitar, Vayu, [give] forth favor in order to aid ; yc cause to
revel in the intoxicating jovial [soma] ; hitherward from the height
(pravdt) confirm ye of what is pleasant (nhttd) ; do yc free us from
distress.
The strtmg ellipses in the first half-verse are filled by the comm. in accordance with
the translation. Tpp. reads in b mAdayeiAm^ anfl in c prnvalA ni yackatas. The
comm. makes /fvi7'<f/(f J (-= pralarsavatas) coordinate with vdwihya, qualifying dMmma-
sya understood. [^Tischel, I'ed. S/ud. ii. 74, takes it as ace. pi. with vtlmasya^ 'streams
of lulf/ia^* and compares nlyJ dAilnl, vAsvo tirnaiul, etc. — Render the subjunctive
in b by • cause ye ' etc. ?J
7. The best blessings (d^ts) have come unto us in the domain (Mdman)
of the two gods ; I praise god Savitar and Vayu : do ye free us from
distress.
Tpp. combines to ml '\iJo in A. MS. reads A^fras for il^has ; for dkAman in b it
has dhtir/mls, and TS. dhArme; for c, lK)th give sidnmi vAyum saxfitiratk nAikitS
jokitvttni ; and, as in vs. i, MS. In^gins d with Af, and both end it with i^asa$.
The fifth anuvAka ends here in the middle of the mrgAra group; it has 5 hymns
and 35 verses; and the old Anukr. says aparAh pafkca,
26. Praise and prayer to heaven and earth.
[^^frgAra. — (*ce h. 2^. t. fttr^^ * stir JapMti ; 7. fAktstrafar^kJ£imadkyf//H9i-]
Found in Taipp. iv. (in a .vuncwhat different verse-order •), after our hymn 27. The
other texts (.vre under hymn 23) h.ive but one verse that represents the hymn, made up
of parts of our vs.s. i and 7. As ti> the use of the f/rr^^lnv hymns by KAu^., see under
h. 23. In VAit. (1 5. 13), tliis hymn (or vs. 1 ) accompanies the offering to the tidMmkmrm
twig in the ai^nistomn. •|_()rder, 1, 2, 4, 6. 3, 5, 7. J
Translated : (tiilfith, i. 167 ; Welnrr, xviii. ioC>. •
I. I reverence you, O heaven-and-earth, yc well-nourishing ones (sh-
hho/as), who, like-minded (sdrr/as) did spread out unmeasured intervals
(j'i^j\ifi4f) ; since ye became foundations (pratistjid) of good things, do yc
free us from distress.
rpp. omits the intrusive and mcter-<listurbing sAif/tttAu (which, on account of its
195 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK IV. -iv. 26
accent, is reckoned to b in the translation, as it is also by the pada-icxt) ; and, against
rule, it combines in b j^f 'pra/A-, The comm., with one of SPP's mss., reads aprathe-
tilni ; and TS.MS. have the same, followed by Amitebhir djobhir yi pratisthi dbhavatiifh
TiisfinSm : they have of the verse only these two padas, used as part of a closing verse.
The first half-verse is found also in the Naigeya-/'<I;/(/(fi of SV. (i. 623 a, b) : this reads
fndnye for manvi^ accents subhdjasdu^ omits (like Ppp.) sdcetasdu^ and ends with
dmitam abht ydjanam ; its second half-verse is our 2 c, d.
2. Since ye became foundations of good things, ye much increased,
divine, fortunate, wide-extended ones, O heaven-and-earth, be pleasant
to me : do ye free us from distress.
Ppp. has in a babhftvathus (for dbhavatam). The comm., with a couple of SPP*s
mss., reads praviddhe (= stliravat sarvajagadanupraviddhe) in b. As noted under vs.
I, SV. has (omitting me in c) the second half-verse, here carried on as refrain through
vss. 3-6. Line, scan -prthvl . . . 5ioni.\
3. I call upon the not-distressing, of excellent penance, wide, profound,
to be reverenced by poets : O heaven- etc. etc.
Possibly an antithesis is intended between the first two (doubtfully translated) epi-
thets, both founded on tap *■ heat.* Ppp. has the better reading vdm for aham at end
of a.
4. Ye who bear the immortal (amrtd), who the oblations ; who bear
the streams (srotyd), who human beings {vtanusyd) : O heaven- etc. etc.
Ppp. puts b before a.
5. Ye who bear the ruddy [kine], who the forest-trees; ye within
whom [are] all beings : O heaven- etc. etc.
One or two of our mss. (H.I.), as the majority of SPP's, make at the beginning the
false combination ^rf usr-. The comm. declares usriya ^ gondman,
6. Ye who gratify with sweet drink (ktldla)^ who with ghee ; without
whom [men] can [do] nothing whatever : O heaven- etc. etc.
All the pada-x^^^. make in b the absurd division ^aknuovdnti, as if the word were a
neut. pi. from the stem qaknuvdnt. Ppp. has in a klidldis. The comm. interprets
kfldla simply as anna.
7. This that scorches {abhi-fuc) me, or by whomsoever done, from
what is human, not divine — I praise heaven-and-earth, [as] a suppliant
I call loudly on [them] : do ye free us from distress.
The verse looks as if broken off in the middle, to allow addition of the regular close.
Ppp. has at end of b the more manageable residing pdurusey am na ddivyam, TS.MS.
have the second half-verse added to our i b, c ; but they have also our 7 a, b (in the
form ydd iddm rnd ^b/ti\dcati pduruseyena ddivyena) as first half of a similar verse to
" all the ^ods.'* The comm. understands pdpdt as to be supplied in b, and takes na as
the particle of comparison.
iv. 27- nooK IV. THE atharva-veda-samhitA. 196
27. Praise and prayer to the Marots.
[s^frc^ra. — (we h. 23).]
Found, with very slight variations in Tnipp. iv. ; and its first and last verses are rep*
resented in T.S., MS., and K. (%ce under h. 23): they follow a similar passage to the
A^vins which follows our h. 25. The use by K.lu^. is the same with that of the other
mrt^tlnt hymns (see under h. 23). The first p.^da of vs. 4 nearly ^f^ten with the second
pAda of a verse (the la^t) given in KAuq. 3. 3 ; and vs. 4 is directed hy Vftit (1 2. 12) to
be used in the aj^ni stoma when one is rained on ; further, vs. 7 (9. 2), in the cAtmrmAsfS
sacrifice, with an evening libation to the Nfaruts. And the comm. quotes the hymn as
used by Naks. K. (18) in a f/7////ritc named tuiirudj^anf.
Translated: (iriflith, i. i(>$; Wel>er, xviii. 109.
1. The Marut.s I reverence; let them bless nic ; let them favor this
steed (? vtijd) in the race (? rdjasata) ; I have called on them for aid^ like
easily-controlled swift [horses) : let them free us from distress.
Ppp. combines -jJA7 *vaniu at end of b. Some of our mss. (l*.M.\V.E.O.) read
silyAiuitH in c The comm. has ait^uit instead of H^iin in c, and explains it as either
"reins" or "horses." X'Aja and vijaulta he makes either "food" and the "winning
of footi," or "Strength " ami " combat." The version of the other texts is quite differ-
ent; they have tta\ for tne in a; for h^ fir/ 'ttttim xuicath X'i^vtlm ax'attiu vf^ve ; for Ct
a^iti have suyiimtln iitAye ; and at the end /nasas.
2. Who always open {I'iar) an unexhausted fountain ; who pour in
sap into the herbs — I put forward the Maruts, sons of the spotted one:
let them free us from distress.
With a compare xviii. 4. 3^1. Some of our mss. (P.M.W.I.O.) read in c -///#l/f/. The
comm. explains lUsam by mf^hatn^ vyacanti by antankse vistArayauti^ and Pf^ni as
the mAdhyatfiikA vAk.
3. Ye, O poets, that send the milk of the kinc, the sap of the herbs,
the speed of the coursers — let the helpful {} qagmd) Maruts be pleasant
to us ; let them free us from distress.
Ppp. reads invan at end of b; the comm. renders invaiha by vyikpayatha ; he also
takes kavayas as ntmiinativc, and (\iith one of SPP's mss.) reads at beginning of c
(aJtwils, explaining it as — sarvakAfyttsamaf thAs. All our jaMAi/tl-ms*. save one (K.)
LR. not noted J combine «<i syon- in c.
4. Waters from the ocean to the sky they carry up, they who pour
[them] from the sky u|)on the earth — the Maruts who go about lording
it with the waters : let them free us from distress.
The al>sence of accent of vahanii forl)i(Is us to make the l)ctter construction of it
with J'/ — which, however, the comm. does not scruple to adopt.
5. They who p;ratify with sweet drink, who with ghee; or who com-
bine (siVfi'SrJ) vigor (vdyas) with fatness; the Maruts who, lording it
with the waters, cause to rain : let them free us from distress.
Ppp. reads in a (as in 26.6*) Jtf/tl/tlis ; and it rectifies the meter of c by
197 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK IV. -iv. 28
adbhis. The comm. takes vdyas first as " bird " (paksijdtafn), then as qariraparitt&ma'
vi^esas.
•
6. If now indeed, O Maruts, by what relates to the Maruts — if,
O gods, by what relates to the gods, I have fallen into such a plight :
ye, O Vasus, are masters (/f) of the removal of that : let them free us
from distress.
That is (a, b), apparently, ** by reason of what offense " {aparddhena^ comm.) ; per- .
haps ** if such a [mishap] hath befallen [us] *' (so the comm.) ; but MS. iii. 8. / Idrg u C/ *•
sd arisyati^ supports the translation as given, and also indicates that ira is he/e d-ira ; '
but the padaK^xX. gives ara simply. LSee also Weber*s citation from PB. xiii. 3. 12. J
Several mss. (including our Op.) have fqadhve inc, as the comm. reads. Manuseiia for
maruUna in a would be an acceptable emendation. -|.flQj^ See p. 1045. J —
7. A sharp front, known [as] powerful, [is] the troop {fdrd/ias) of
Maruts, formidable in fights ; I praise the Maruts, [as] a suppliant I call
loudly on [them] : let them free us from distress.
The other texts have in a vldiidm^ for which our vidiidm is a pretty evident corrup-
tion ; they also have ayudham for dnlkam^ in b divydtn for miruiam and jisnu for
ugrdm; and in c they insert devan before vtarutas^ also ending the verse (as well as
vs. I) with inasas,
28. Praise and prayer to Bhava and Qarva.
[Afrgdra. — (see h. 23). /. dvyatijdgatagarbhd bhurij.'\
Found in Paipp. iv. (next after our h. 26), but having nothing correspondent to it in
the Yajur-Veda texts. Having the same beginning {bhavd^arvdu) as xi. 2. i, one can-
not tell in many cases which of the two hymns is intended by a quotation in Kau^. ;
but according to the comm. (also to Ke^ava ; Darila appears to think otherwise) this
one is employed in a healing ceremony at 28. 8 ; it is also reckoned (26. i, note) to the
iakmand^ana gana.
Translated: Muir,OST.iv.»332; Griffith, i. 169; Bloomfield, 158,406; Weber, xviii. 1 1 1 .
1. O Bhava-and-^arva, I reverence you, know ye that ; ye in whose
direction is all that shines out {^i-riic) here, who lord it over these bipeds
[and] quadrupeds : do ye free us from distress.
Ppp. has, ior h^ yayor vdfh yad idam vitisthate; our vdm makes this pada redun-
dant. Inc, some of the /«///?-mss. (including our Bp.) have asya (but asyd^ correctly,
in 6 c). The expression in b corresponds with that in 23. 7 and vii. 25. 2. According
to the comm., the name Bhava signifies bhavaty. astndt sarvath jagad; and <^arva,
^rtidti hinasti sarvavt antakdU,
2. Ye whose is whatever is on the way and afar; who are known as
best shooters among arrow-bearers ; who lord it etc. etc.
Ppp. has vitaidu for viditdu (perhaps vfditduf) in b, and its c reads bhavd^an>du
bhavatatpi me syondu^ which then continues to be (as in 26.2-6) part of the refrain
through vs. 6, taking the place of our c The comm., with a couple of SPP's mss., has
isubhfidu for -tdm in b. He explains abhyadhve by samfpadece. Perhaps a means
rather *on whose way [is] even whatever is afar.*
/O^
iv. 28- BOOK IV. THE ATHARVA-VKDA-SAttlllTA. 198
3. I call on the (two) thoiisand-cycd Vrtra-slaycrs ; I go praising the
(two) formidable ones, having pastures afar : who lord it etc. etc.
One oi the oddest /^at/a-icxi blunders of the whole work is made in b: stMX*4mm€mi
is resolved into siuvtin: nemi instead of stuvAn: €mi; and then one or two of the
mss. (including our Op.) corrupt further to stux'dt, and the comm. to mtmt (manu-
facturing; for it two different, but equally absurd, explanations after his manner |^cf. Fesi»
grujs an Ao/A, p. 91 J). Tpp. has in a, b Aki'f lul tiiireheit sunemf mgrdtt, |^Add
avasiina-nx^iV after Mj^wIw.J
4. Vc who have taken hold {ihrab/i) of much together in the beginning,
if ye have let loose (f*rti-srj) the portent {abhibhd) among the people
(jdna) : who lord it etc. etc.
The sense of the verse is very obscure. All the mss. without exception have in b
the absurd reading dsnUtram, which our edition emends to -iam^ but which SPP.
retains, though the comm. ;;ives -fitm. Tpp. has the better reading mji^rdM for tf/rr in a.
The comm. treats daAii stlJttfm, in spite of accents, as one word, ^ janasatkgkam.
5. I'Vom whose deadly weapon no one Sf)evcr escapes (afa-fad)^
among gods and among men {fttdnnsa) ; who lord it etc. etc.
Ppp. reads in a, b kirn cand *ft/,tr tfevesu uta.
6. Whoso is witchcraft-maker, root-cutter (.^), sorcerer, down on him
put [yourj thunderbolt, O formidable ones ; who lord it etc. etc.
Ppp. is defaced in this vcr.%e, and omits Mtilakrt. The comm. takes 'kfi in a both
times as from krt *cut,* and mtila- .is ** offsprinf^, the root of increase of a family**;
the Pet. I.CX. conjectures ** preparing r(K>ts for purposes of witchcraft ** |^see Hloomfield*i
note, p. 407 J ; one might also guess murakrt |^see \Veber*s comment, p. 1 14 J. Most of
our mss. (all save 1 1. p.m. K.I).), and the majority of SPP*s, have the false reading
dkaiiiim in b ; l)Oth editions give -iam.
7. Hless us in fight.s, O formidable ones ; visit {sam-sfj) with [your]
thunderbolt whoever is a kimidin: I praise Bhava-and-^ar\'a ; [as] a
suppliant I call loudly on [them]; do ye free us from distress.
Ppp. re.ids me for ttas in a, and leaves -su u^rtltt uncombinetl. |_Its closing half-
verse is as in the \'ulgate (as may be inferred from the note to vs. 2). J
29. Praise and prayer to Mitra and Varooa.
[J/r^J/ii. — (m'c h. 2j). 7. (akfarij^ar^AdJaj^/f]
Found in Taipp. iv. (with vs. 5 put l)eforc vs. 4). The first and last verses also in
the Yajus texts (sec undci h. 23), In-tween those of our hymns 24 and 25. For the use
by Kau^. as mr^ilra hymn, see under h. 23.
Transl.Ued : Koth, /Cur Liitertitur und GtichUhte tfrs ll'et/at 1 846, p. 43; Liid-
**K« P- *.^r. ^>di an cl.'il>oratc discussion of the j)ro|>rr names; iiriflith, i. 170;
Welnrr, xviii. 1 14.
I. I reverence you, O Mitra-an(I-V\iruna, incrcasers of right; who,
accordant, thrust [away] the malicious (iinWivan)\ [who] favor the truth-
ful one in conflicts (b/uifa): do ye free us from distress.
199 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK IV. -iv. 29
Ppp. has for b satyojaslin drhydnl yo nirete (cf. its version of 2 •) ; in c, yHu for
fra^ and havesu (belter) for bharesu {^— samgrdmesu, comm.). TS.MS. read in a
-rutin tiisya vittam (as in our 28. 1 a; and MS. accents -tdtti) ; then, in b, sdtytlujasil
(MS. safydii-) drnhand (MS. durhrnd) ydtit nudithe; their c is wholly different: ya
nijdftam (MS. -nd) sardthaih ydthd (MS. -td) ttgrd; and they end the refrain with
ngasas.* MS. further accents fftitravdruftd in a ; the comm. reads -rund rtd7*rdhd,
Satydvan in c is perhaps rather a proper name (so the Pet. Lex.) ; the comm. takes
it as appellative (^— satyayuktam furusam). In our edition, the e of 9nanvi at the
beginning is broken off. ♦ LBoth reading ta for tdH.\
2. Ye who, accordant, thrust [away] the malicious ; [who] favor the
truthful one in conflicts ; who, men-watching, go unto the brown soma
— do ye free us from distress.
The translation implies emendation in c of babhrtnid (our P.M. have babhrund*)
to babhrttm a; the comm. understands ** with your brown chariot " ; Ludwig takes the
word as proper name : '• pressed by Babhru.'* Ppp. has for a satyojasdu drhvanl yo
niredhe [_cf. its version of i bj, and again havesu for bharesu. The comm. (with one
or two mss., including our Op.) x^tAs gacchatas in c. ♦ LAnd W. has babhrtlftd.\
3. Ye who favor Angiras, who Agasti, Jamadagni, Atri, O Mitra-and-
Varuna, who favor Ka^yapa, who Vasishtha — do ye free us from distress.
The comm. reads in a agasiyam. He amuses himself with worthless etymologies of
the various names through the hymn.
4. Ye who favor Qyava^va, Vadhrya^va, Purumldha, Atri, O Mitra-
and-Varuna, who favor Vimada, Saptavadhri — do ye free us from
distress.
Ppp. substitutes gavisthiram for vadhryaqvam in a.
5. Ye who favor Bharadvaja, who Gavishthira, Vi^vamitra, Kutsa, O
Varuna [and] Mitra; who favor Kakshlvant, also Kanva — do ye free us
from distress.
This time, Ppp. puts vadhrya^vam in place oi gavisthiram in a.
6. Ye who favor Medhatithi, who Tri^oka, who U;anas Kavya, O
M it ra-and- Varuna; who favor Gotama, also Mudgala — do ye free us
from distress.
Ppp. reads ufanam in b, and its c is ydu mudgalam avatho gdutamam ca (our
O.Op. also have gdutamam ^comm. to Prat. iv. 16 cites it zsgdtamaj).
7. Whose chariot, of true track, of straight reins, goes spoiling against
him who behaves (car) falsely — I praise M it ra-and- Varuna ; [as] a sup-
pliant I call loudly on [them] : do ye free us from distress.
TS.MS. have yd vdm rdtha rjitraqmih satyddharmA mtthn^ cdrantam (MS.
mithucdr-) upayati dtlsdyan; then TS. reads -rund in c, and MS. ta 'at beginning
of d; and both end (as in vs. i) with igasas,
LHcre end the Mrgara hymns. J
}*
iv. 30- BOOK IV. Tim ATHARVA-VLDA-SAttHITA. 200
30. Self-laodation of Speech (?).
Not found in IViipp., but is, with .1 few insignificant variant^ KV. x. 125 (hut in the
verse-order i* 3. 5, 4, (>* 2, 7, •^)» a hymn ascril>ed by the tradition to VAc Ambhrni, or
• Speech, dauf^htcr of Amblirna ' ; but thetc is an utter absence in the details of anything
distinctly pointing; to S|>eech, and we can only believe that the attribution is an old
conjecture, a suj^^ested solution of a liddle, which "space," or "faith," or "right"
(rAf) would have etiually satisfied. Hut the explanation is universally accepted among
Hindu authorities, old and new, and hardly questioned by Kuro|>ean scholars. The
hymn is used by Kau^. in the ceremony (10. 16-9) for generation of wisdom (medkMja-
ftaftii), being said over a child 1>eforc taking of the breast, and also at its first use of
8|>eech ; also in the same ceremony as forming part of the uffanayafta (57-31) |^90
the comm. and Ke^ava: but the hymn is not included in the t^ytjra ganay^ and again
in the dismissal [tttsarjamt^ says the comm. J from Vedic study (139. I $). |^\Vith regard
to the intention of Kau^. 139. 15 the reader may consult Whitney's notes to the passages
there cited by //vi//^#i. J
Translated : by Colebrooke, A static k Kfsearches, vol. viii, Calcutta, 1805, or Mistet-
laneoMS Essays, i.* p. 28 (Whitney, in his notes to this essay. I.e., p. 1 13, gives a "closer
l/IAt h 1 version," •• in the original metre," and with an intrcKluction) ; translated, further, by
'-'• ll^ff^ the RV. translators; and also by Webrr, in his article. l\U nnii XA>««. /mti. Simd. ix.
^, |t- r^ (1865) 473 ; Deussen, GeschichU, i. i. I46f. ; (iriHith, i. 171 ; Weber, xviii. 117. Here
Wel>er gives references to discu.<Lsions by himself, by (•arl)e, and by Max Muller, of
\,^^^^ the {wssible connection of the Ne(v Platonic XA>of.idea with Indie thought.
1. I go about with the Kiidras, the Vasus, I with the Adityas and
the All-pods; I bear Mitra-and-Varuna both, I Indra-and-Agni, I both
A<;vins.
There is in this verse no variant from the KV. text. The comm. says that " I " is
the daughter, Speech by name, of the great sage Ambhrna, and that she by her own
nature knew the supreme brahman.
2. I am (jueen, gatherer of good things, the first that has unclerstoofl
the matters of sacrifice ; me here the gods distributed manifoldly, making
me of many staticms enter into many.
RV. (v.s. 3) differs only by reading at the end Ave^Ayanifm. The comm. makes
yajfkiyAnAm in b depend upon f^fathami, cikttusf being a separate epithet: this is,
of course, ec^ually |>ossible.
3. I my own self say this, [whieh is] enjoyable of gods and of men;
whomsoever I desire, him I make formidable, him priest {bra/tmdn), him
seer, him very wise.
KV. (vs. 5) has in b the equivalent tirt't'hhis and minustbhis. The comm. al«urdly
explains hrahtnituim by srastAtam, or the gtni Brahman.
4. By me doth he eat food who looks abroad, who breathes, who
indeed hears what is sjwken ; unknowing (} amantu) they dwell upon me;
hear thou, heardof one ; I sav to thee what is to be credited.
20I TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK IV. -iv. 31
RV. leaves the a of dnnam in a unelided (making the p&da a regular jat^a/f: our
Anukr. takes no notice of it as such, but it would be an extremely bad tris(ubh)^ has
(as has also the comm.) the regular firiniti in b, and reads ^raddhivdm for ^rad-
dhiyam in d. One of our mss. (Op.) accents ^ruid. The comm. understands a, b to
mean *• it is by me that any one eats, sees," etc., and takes fm as = idam; amantavas
as ajSndnd madvisayajfidnarahitdh ; and upa ksiyanti as samsdrena nihftid bhavanti
— as if ksiyanti came from ksi * destroy ' I
5. I stretch the bow for Rudra, for his shaft to slay the brdhvian-
hater ; I make strife (savidd) for the people (jdna) ; into heaven-and-
earth have I entered.
RV. (vs. 6) has no variant. The comm. foolishly regards Rudra's affair with
Tripura as the subject of the first half-verse.
6. I bear the heady {} dhands) soma, I Tvashtar, also Pushan, Bhaga;
I assign property to the giver of oblations, to the very zealous (?), the
sacrificer, the presser of soma.
RV. (vs. 2) has in c the sing, drdvinam^ and in d the dative suprdvyi (which is
implied in the translation given) ; in both points the comm. agrees with RV., and one
of SPP's authorities supports him. But the Prat. (iv. 11) establishes suprdvyh as the
true Atharvan reading. The comm. gives a double explanation of dhanasam in a : as
abhisotavyam and as ^atnlftdm dhantdram. The Anukr. docs not heed that the first
7. I quicken (give birth to.^) the father in its (his.^) head; my womb
{y6ni) is within the waters, the ocean ; thence I extend myself {vi-sthd)
to all beings ; even yon sky I touch with my summit.
RV. reads in c bhtivani *ftu for -ndni. The comm., followed by one of SPP*s
authorities, has the odd blunder caste for tisthe in c. He further takes asya in a as
meaning dr^yamdnasya prapaficasya^ and pitaram as prapaficasya janakufn.
8. I myself blow forth like the wind, taking hold upon all beings ;
beyond the sky, beyond the earth here — : such have I become by
greatness.
RV. has mahina instead of mahimna in d Lcf. Bloomfield, JAOS. xvi.p. clvi = PAOS.
Dec. 1 894 J. In our edition, divd in c is a misprint for divi, \Efti is hardly for enayd
(Weber): cf. JAOS. X.333.J
With this hymn ends the sixth anuvdka^ of 5 hymns and 36 verses ; the Anukr.
extract, sat^ is given by only one ms. (D.).
Here, too, by a rather strange division, ends the eighth prapdthaka.
31. Praise and prayer to fury (manyii).
\Drahmdskanda. — manyuddivatam, trdistubham: 2^4. bhurij ; J-y- j*igotiJ\
This hymn and the one following are RV. hymns (x.84 and 83), with few variants,
and no change in the order of verses. Both are found also in Plipp. iv., but not
together. Very few of the verses occur in any other Vedic text. The two are used
together in Kau^. (14. 26ff.), in the ceremonies for success in battle and for determin-
ing which of the two opposing armies will conquer ; they are also (14. 7, note) reckoned
iv. 31- nooK IV. Tin: atiiarva-vkda-samhita. 202
to the a^atAjiia j^ana. And the comm. quotes them as employed by the ^'ftnti K. (15)
in i\\c j^pahayttj^tt.
'l'r.insl.itcd : by the KV. translators; and GriHith, i. 173; Wel>er, xviii. 125.
1. In alliance (snfdt/uim) with thcc, O fury, battering, feeling excite-
ment, excited, O companion of the Maruts, having keen arrows, sharpen-
ing ii|> their wca|X)ns, let [our] men go forward unto [the foe], having
forms of fire.
This verse is found further in TH. (in 11.4. 1 •<>). KV. and TB. read for b kArssmd-
Ntlst* iihrsiiti • nutruivah ; at l)rRinninjij of d, RV. has the decidedly preferable abki for
upa; '\\\. f;ivi*s in d >'tf////, and this is also the reading; of Ppp. — which moreo%'er
separates tiksnJI is- in c, and combines -^Aho */<i in c-d. Three of our mst. (O.Op.K.)
so far afH'ec with KV. as to read dhrsitiisas in b; the comm. has instead rusiidsas.
The comm. explains tnanyus as krodhAbhifnAnl dri'ak * wrath personified at a god.*
•[^In Iwth ed*s. TIJ. has the adverb dkrsati,\
2. Like fire, O fury, do thou, made brilliant, overpower; invoked, O
powerful one, do thou be our army-leader ; having slain the foes, share
out their possession (tMas) ; making (wd) force, thrust away the
scorners (mhi/i).
Many of our mss. (P.M.W.K.I.H.p.m.K.), with some of SIM**s, accent sdhssvs in a;
and in b some mss. (including our P.Nf.W.) read -nir nak. Ppp. has jiivikya for k^-
ivAya in c The abl>reviation of iva to *va in a would remove the bkurij character of
the verse. The comm. explains tvisiia in a by pradlfiia,
3. Overpower for us (?), O fury, the hostile plotter; go forward
breaking, killing, slaughtering the foes; thy formidable rush (} fdjas)
surely they have not impeded ; thou, controlling, shalt bring them under
control, O sole-born one.
I'he translation given follows in a the KV. reading asm/, which was also received by
emendation into our text ; all the mss. and the comm. have instead asmAi^ which SPP.
retains. LI*pp. has abkimAtitn asmake ; our mss. K.T., asmAi.\ Our P.M.W. give
in c rarudhre (or the equivalent -ddkre, which is assumed under VxhX. i-<>4); and SPP.
asserts that .ill his authorities have it, and therefore receives it into his text, in spite of
its evidently blundering character ; the comm. reads rttr-. Several of our mss.
(P.M.W.K.If.) read in d va^iin ; for ntjy<lstli\ after it, RV. has nayase. The comm.
explains pijas in c by balam.
4. Thou art the one praised (}) of many, O fury; sharpen up clan on
clan (vt\) unto fighting ; with thee as ally (^tij), O thou of undivided
brightness (?), we make a clear noise unto victory.
KV. Ii.is at the end trntnahf, as h.is also I'pp- The translation follows in a the RV.
readinfi: ////ifr, ^iven also by the comm., and by one of Sn**s authorities that folk>ws
him ; tditi would have to l>e something; like * inciter, persuader to the conflict* R V.
further reads vudkiiye for yuddhiya in b, and in a combines manyav //• ; otir mamr^
id- is quoted in the romment to Prat. i. Ai as the AV. reading. The obscure dkr/tarmk
in c is explained by the comm. as aukinnadipti. Ilesides being bkurij^ the verse
(i24ii:io4i2=45)is quite irregular.
203 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK IV. -iv. 32
5. Victory-making, like Indra, not to be talked down, do thou, O fury,
be our over-lord here ; thy dear name we sing, O powerful one ; we know
that fount whence thou camest (a-bhti).
The comm. explains anavabravd as "speaking things — i.e. means of victory — that
are not new {a-ttava)y The verses 5-7 are not iwWjagatls,
6. Born together with efficacy ( } db/tfiti), O missile {sdyaka) thunder-
bolt, thou bearest superior power, O associate ; be thou allied {medin)
with our energy (krdtu)^ O fury, much-invoked one, in the mingling
{samsrj) of great riches.
RV. has in b abhibhfite instead of the difficult sahabhikte ; and Ppp. {ebhibhfita uit-)
supports RV. The comm. explains kraivd in c by karmand. One is tempted to
emend in a (also in 32. i a) to vajrasdyaka * whose missile is the thunderbolt*
7. The mingled riches of both sides, put together, let Varuna and fury
assign to us ; conceiving fears in their hearts, let the foes, conquered,
vanish away.
Instead of dhattdtn^ RV. and the comm. have in b dattdm ; Ppp. reads dattam
varuna^ ca manyo ; RV. gives bhiyam in c; Ppp. has a peculiar d: pardjitd yantu
paramdm pardvatam, Certaii> of our mss. (Bp.E.I.) accent at the end Idyantdm,
32. Praise and prayer to fury (manyti).
[Brahmdskafida. — manyuddivatam . trdistubham: i.jagati.']
This hymn ^which is RV. x. 83 J goes in all respects with hymn 31, which see.
Translated : by the RV. translators ; and Griffith, i. 174 ; Weber, xviii. 129.
1. He who hath worshiped thee, O fury, missile thunderbolt, gains
{pus) power, force, everything, in succession ; may we, with thee as
ally, that art made of power, overpower the barbarian, the Aryan, with
powerful power.
Ppp. has sadyo for manyo in a, and sahlyasd at the end. All the mss. accent ptisy a /i
in b, and SPP. very properly so reads ; our text was altered to conform with RV., which
in general is distinctly less apt to give accent to a verb in such a position \^Sk/. Gram,
§ 597 ^j' RV- aJso omits the redundant and meter-disturbing (the Anukr. takes no
notice of this) vaydm in c. Several of our mss. (P.M.W.E.) give vidadhat instead of
*vidhat in a. Sdhyama (p. sahyamd) is expressly prescribed by Pr5t. iii. 1 5, iv. 88 ;
the comm. appears to read sahy-. The comm. renders dnusak by anusaktam samtatam,
LFor vajra sdyaka^ see note to iv. 31. 6 ; and iox pusyati^ note to iv. 13, 2. J
2. Fury [was] Indra, fury indeed was a god ; fury [was] priest {JiStar)^
Varuna, Jatavedas ; the clans (z//f) which are descended from Manu
(mdnusd) praise fury ; protect us, O fury, in accord with fervor (tdpas).
The translation assumes in c the reading manyihn (instead of -yus)^ which is given
by RV., the comm. (with one of SPP*s mss.), and TB. (ii. 4. i»») and MS. (iv. 12. 3) j
the nomin. here appears to be a plain corruption, though Ppp. also has it. TB. gives in
a bhdgas for indras^ and devaydntls for manuslr yah in c, and ^rdmena ior sajdsds at
iv. 32- HOOK IV. THK ATIIARV A-VEDA-SAMHITA. 204
the end ; MS. \\m th'il f<ir /J^/ at iHrginning of d; Imth have vi{v4v€iids at end of b.
Tpp. rca<ls_iwiJ for pt/' before /<I^/.
3. Allaek, O fury, bciiiK nuKhticr than a mighty ono; with fervor as
ally smite apart the foes ; slayer of enemies, slayer of Vrtra, and slayer of
barbarians, do thou bring to us all [their] good things.
I'pp. rci'tifies the meter of b (the Anukr. does not notice its deficiency) by intertinK
///«i In-fore ^tf/fthi. |_See aU>ve, p. Ixxiv. J
4. Since thou, O fury, art of overcoming force, self-existent, terrible.
overpowering hostile plotters, belonging to all men {-carsufii), powerful,
very powerful — do thou put in us force in fights.
KV. has Siihtli'tlfi for stihiyiln in c MS. (iv. 12.3) Rives svaynmjAs in b, and
stfAilvtlft in c ; and for d it has Sii ktivtUtnlno amfiiiya f^aihat.
5. Heing portionless, I am gone far away, by the action {} krdtu) of
thee that art mighty, C) forethoughtful one; so at thee, O fury, I, action-
less, was wrathful ; come to us, thine own self (tanik^^ giving strength.
KV. has at the end haltu/tWilya //// 7// (p. mil : it : iki ). In c it reads jikUiA *kAm^
and both the editions foUow it (Ppp- and the comin. have the same), although the AV.
samhitil readin;; is unciuestionably yM///- ; the samhtM inss. have this almost without
exception (all ours save <).), the /^i/«/</-mss. put after the word their sii:n which sliows a
differ<*n( c between f>tt4/a and samhitA reading;, and jfk- is twice distinctly prescrilied liy
the I'rat. (iii. 14 ; iv. 87). The comm. understands the obscure first p.\da of going away
from battle; alcfatu he paraphrases by tX'tiUosakaralutfMtn-arjtia.
6. Here I am for thee; come hitherward unto us, meeting {fraticimi)
[us], O i>owerfuI, all-giving one ; O thunderbolt-bearing fury, turn hither
to us ; let us (two) slay the barbarians ; and do thou know thy partner
(J//).
KV. keeps better consistency by readini; mJ for nas in a, and mim for mas in c: at
the end of b it has vi^vadhAyas. In a Tpp. has wJ, like KV. ; in c it reads «/« nas^
combining to nil **vav-. The comm. supplies fa/ f tin as object of ^raiUtmas^ and
paraphrases the end of the verse with a/>i at bandkubkntatn mikm butihyaix*a,
7. (10 thou forth against [them] ; be on our right hand; then will we
(two) smite and slay many Vrtras ; I offer to thee the sustaining top of
the sweet (miidhu)\ let us both drink first the initial draught {} updn^n),
Ppp has at tiie end pthfvtt. KV. has me instead of nas at end of a, and combines
ubha w/ in d. "I he romin begins b with atha. Compare also KV. viii. too (J^'i). 2. of
whi( h the present verse seems a \ariation ; its a, ddiihUmi ti mddkun^^ bkakuim dgte, ii
mm I) miire intellii;ible than our < orres|M)n<ling c. |_In t), is not vrirAni (neuter !) rather
• ad\ers.uies,* as in v.fi. 4 ?— In his prior draft, \V. renders, *• let us l>olh drink first in
silenie ( .M" *' Initial drau'^ht *' .seems to overlook the gender of nr/Jw^iJ J
205 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK IV. -IV. 33
33. To Agni: for release from evil.
[Brahman. — astarcam, pdpmanyam ; dgneyam. gHyatram!\
Found in Paipp. iv. Is RV. i. 97, without a variant except in the last verse ; occurs
also in TA. (vi. 11. i). Reckoned by Kau^. (9.2) to the brhachUnti gaita^ and also
(30. 17, note) to i\\t pafima gnna ; used, under the name of apagha^ in a ceremony of
expiation for seeing ill-omened sights (42. 22), in. a women*s ceremony for preventing
undesirable love and the like (36. 22), and in the after funeral ceremonies (82. 4).
Translated: by the RV. translators; and Griffith, i. 175 ; Weber, xviii. 134. — Cf.
also Lanman, Skt, Reader^ p. 363.
1. Gleaming (f//r) away our evil {aghd)^ O Agni, gleam thou wealth
unto [us] : gleaming away our evil.
This first verse is found a second time in TA. (vi. 10. i). The refrain is a mechanical
repetition of i a, having no connection of meaning with any of the verses. The comm.
explains dpa qdi^ucat by na^yaiu^ and A qu^ugdhi by samrddham kuru. LTA. reads
^uqudhya in both places in both editions.J
2. With desire of pleasant fields, of welfare, of good things, we sacri-
fice— gleaming away our evil —
3. In order that the most excellent of them, and in order that our
patrons {suri) — gleaming away our evil —
4. In order that thy patrons, O Agni ; in order [namely] that wc may
be propagated for thee with progeny — gleaming away our evil —
5. As of the powerful Agni the lusters (6/idmi) go forth in every
direction — gleaming away our evil.
These four verses are (rejecting the intrusive refrain) one connected sentence : the
prd's in vss. 3 and 4 repeat by anticipation >\\^ jayemahi prd of vs. 4 b; " we" are, in
fact, Agni's surVs^ since we depute him to sacrifice for us, just as our stlri^s procure us,
the priests ; and our progeny is to increase and spread like the brightness of the fire.
TA. spoils the connection by putting vs. 5 before vs. 4 ; and the sense, by reading
surdyas for bhdndvas in 5 b. Ppp. \i?A jdyemahe in 4 b. One of our/a^-mss. (Op.)
agrees with the R V. /tf///i-text in dividing j/z^^/r/o;/^ in 2 a (the rest read suogiituya),
6. For, O thou that facest in every direction, thou art [our] encom-
passer on all sides : gleaming away our evil.
7. Our haters, O thou that facest in every direction, do thou make us
pass over as with a boat : gleaming away our evil.
8. Do thou pass us over unto well-being, as [over] a river with a boat :
gleaming away our evil.
Ppp. agrees with RV. Land TA.J in reading ndvdyd (which implies \ind/ium Vtf)
instead of ndvd at end of a ; and our O. has the same.
iv. 34- BOOK IV. THE atharva-veda-saKihitA. 206
34. Extolling a certain rice-mess offering.
[AfAitfftin. -ttjfitfotm. hraMm4iyJ»tJ,Mniim. trdtsiuhkam : 4. ^hurtj ; ji;.j-ar. 7-/. krti I f> S t-
Found in TAipp. vi. Used in Kau^. (66. 6), in tlir sara sacrifices, with the hrskmS'
syattdana sava^ to accompany the making of |x)ol8 and channels in the rice-mess, filling
them with juices (rasa)^ and setting on the ground, with surd and water, knob-bearing
plants as specified in the text. Doubtless it is on account of this treatment that the rice-
mess in question is called vistdrin * out-strewn, expanded.*
Translated: Muir, OST. v. 307 (vss. 2-4); Ludwig, p. 437 ; Griffith, i. 1 76 ; Weber,
xviii. 136.
1. The hrdhman [is] its head, the brhdt its back, the x^dmadtvyd \\i^
belly of the rice-mess ; the meters [are] the (two) sides (wings?), truth its
mouth; the vis^Arin [is] a sacrifice born out of fervor {tdpas),
Tpp. reads {iras in s, and its d is X'istik yajfkas iafiaso *dhi jdtak. The comm.
explains brahman as signifying here the fathaniara sdmaft, and also satyam in C as
**the stlman so called; or else the highest brahman*'; instdrin he makes to mean
visitryatndnAvaya va,
2. Koneless, purified, cleansed with the purifier, bright (frfW), they go
to a bright world ; J«itavedas burns not away their virile member ; in the
heavenly {svar^^d) world much women-folk is theirs.
rpp. makes //7/<lj and {ttddhii^ exchange places in a; and there is confusion in its
text. I'he comm. explains anasthAs by nn vidyaie asthyupalaksitnm iAtkAu^ik^m
{nrfram esiktn^ and strAinatn by itrlnlkm samuha bhof^Hrtham ; the " they " are the per-
formers of the sava sacrifiie. Tlie Anukr. does not notice the redundancy of a
syllable in c. |^Theie should l>c a space between prd and dahaii. — Regarding sensual
pleasures in heaven, see Muir's note, I.e.; Zimmer, p. 413; I^nman, Skt, Reader,
p. 379 end, 3S0 ; and Weber's note ; cf. also AB. i. 22* ♦.J
3. Whoso cook the visfdrin rice-mess, ruin (tivarti) fastens not on them
at any time; [such a one] stays {as) with Yama, goes to the gods, revels
with the soma-drinking (sofnyd) Gandharvas.
Ppp. has Jtutas for kadtl in b, and sAumydii in d. The pada-X^xX writes dx^artih
without division, yet the comment to I*rAt. iii. 46 quotes the word as exemplifying the
combination of final a and initi.1I r ; the comm. understands and explains it as a-variii f
somya he paraphrases with somHrha. The metrical irregularities (Ii4i2: lo+ll =44)
are ignored by the Anukr.
4. Whoso cook the vis(dHu rice-mess, them Yama robs not of their
seed ; becoming; chariot-owner, [such a one] goes about upon a chariot*
road ; becoming winged, he goes all across the skies.
I'pp. h.is in c rathAyiin lyate. [In the metrical defmttion, the Anukr. seems confined
here; but vs. 4 appears to l)e intended. J
5. This, extended, is of sacrifices the best carrier; having cooked the
vis/drif/, one has entered the sky; the bulbl>earing lotus spreads
(saffi f(tfi), the disa, fd/tiltt, (dp/utln, tftu/dH : let all these streams (dhdrjt)
20J TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK IV. -iv. 34
come unto thee, swelling honeyedly in the heavenly (svargd) world ; let
complete (sdmanta) lotus-ponds approach thee.
The mss. (with the exception, doubtless accidental, of our P.K.) all read bdhisthas at
end of a, and this SPP. retains, while our text makes the obviously called-for emenda-
tion to vdh' ; the comm. has vah-. The things mentioned in c, d appear to be edible
parts of water-lilies : the bulbous roots, leaf-stems, and radical fibres, which in some
species, as the Nymphaea escuUnta^ are savory, and which are eaten somewhat like aspar-
agus. That they should be viewed as special gifts to the pious indicates quite primi-
tive conditions, and suggests a region abounding in standing waters. Either the pools and
channels of Kau^. are founded on these specifications, or they are original and intended
to be emblematic of such products. The kumuda is the N, escuUnta (kdirava^ comm.);
and the comm. explains bisa (he reads visa) as the root-bulb of the fiadma {^Nelum-
bium speciosum) ^cf. Lanman, JAOS. xix. 2d half, p. 151 f.J, qilluka as that of utpala
(a Nymphaea), ^aphaka as a hoof(frt////?)-shapcd water-plant, and muldlf as = mrndll,
(^aphaka occurs also at ApQS. ix. 14. 14, where it seems to signify an edible plant or
fruit, perhaps a water-nut. Ppp. differs widely from our text: it begins esa yajfio
vitato bahistJw visidra pakvo div- ; it omits c and d ; for c and f it has our 7 •, b |_with
variants : sec under 7 J ; then follow our e and f (g, upa . . . samantdh^ is wanting), with
variants : etas tvd kulyd upa yanti vi^vahd^ and svadhayA for madJiumat, Hut our c
and d arc found further on as parts of vs. 7, with pundarfkam for dndfkam^ and
^dlftkham and ^apakhas. It is doubtless by an oversight that SPP. has in b, in both
samhitd and pada, the false accent divAin (but our O. also gives it). The verse lacks
one syllable of being a full krti (80 syllables). The comm. ends vs. 5 with muldliy and
begins vs. 6 with the following refrain.
6. Having pools of ghee, having slopes of honey, having strong drink
(j;/m) for water, filled with milk (kstrd), with water, with curds — let all
these etc. etc.
Ppp. agrees in a, b with our text (we should expect rather madhukulyds) ; but for
the refrain it has eids tvdth talpd upa yanti viqvatas svarge loke svad/tayd mdda-
yantfh (the remaining pilda again wanting, as in vs. 5). The refrain appears much
more in place with this verse than in vs. 5^ The comm., as already indicated, makes its
vs. 6 of our 6 a, b, preceded by the refrain of vs. 5 ; the refrain of our vs. 6 it omits
altogether. The siird seems* most probably to have been a kind of beer or ale \j&o
Roth : not distilled liquor, as Zimmer, p. 280, suggests J. A full ati^akvarl (60) calls
for two more syllables.
7. Four vessels (knmbhd)^ four-fold, I give, filled with milk, with water,
with curds — let all these etc. etc.
Ppp. had the first two padas, as noted above, in its vs. 5, reading for a catuskuvibhydm
caturdhd daiidti ; its vs. 7 is our 5 c, d (with the variants already given) together with
the last two padas of the refrain, reading svadhayd for madhumat in the former pada,
and md for tvd in the latter. The comm. (with one or two of SPP*s mss. that follow
him) has dadhdmi in a.
•
8. This rice-mess I deposit in the Brahmans, the visfdHttf world-con-
quering, heaven-going {svargd) ; let it not be destroyed (ksi) for me,
swelling with svadhd ; be it a cow of all forms, milking my desire.
Iv. 34- BOOK IV. Tin: ATHARVA-VtDA-SAMHITA. 208
Several of our m%s. (T.Nf .W.K.) combine in d dhtniis kAm-, Ppp. has (or a imam
cdanam ptuasi mi^radtihadhilno ; in b, hkajiiiyafk svarf^am (the comm. also has the
better rcaclinf;^ svar^'afn)\ in c, ksexta sadasisyamAnA ; for d, vi^x*artkpj kAmadugkA
dhenur asiu me. The verse is irregular in meter : 1 2 + 1 1 : 1 2 4 1 3 = 4A.
35. Extolling a rice-mess offering.
yPrajAf'ati. — dttmaftyam.* trAistuhkam : j. bkurij ; 4'J4piff.]
Not found in Tiiipp. Used by Kftu^. (66. 1 1) in the sai'a sacrifices, with a sava for
escaping death (aiimriyM) ; and, according to the comm., also in the ceremony of expia-
tion for the birth of twin calves (109. 1 ; he reads yam odanam itt\ instead of yamiim
jafutyati^ which tlic edition lias). * |^The Herlin Anukr. reads iltimdrcyam.\
Translated: Ludwig, p. 438 ; (•riffith, i. 177; Weber, xviii. 139.
1. The ricc-mcss which Prajapati, first-born of righteousness, cooked
with fervor (Jdfas) for Brahman ; which, separator of the worlds, shall not
harm (?) — by that rice-mess let me overpass death.
Kor the obscure and questionable mi *bhir/sJi in c (no tense-stem r/sa occurs else-
where in A\'.) the comm. reads tti\bhir fkA; Ludwig, ignoring accent an<l fatia-XitxX.
{hA: ab/tt'or^sili), understands nAhhirfuV "breach of the navel**; two of our niss.
((^.Op.) read nihhir^sHm j^and We!)cr conjectured ttibhir esAm ^ The refrain is found
also as concluding pAda of a verse in Ap.C^S. iv. 1 1. 3. The Anukr. df>es not note that
b is jat^att.
2. That by which the being-makers overpassed death ; which they dis-
covered by fervor, by toil (f//f///*7); whicli the bniliman of old cooked for
Hrahman — by that rice-mess let me overpass death.
The comm. explains bhutakftax as prAnittAm kattAro dtvAh^ but rsaygu is alwajrm
the noun used with it.
3. That wl)ich sustained the all-nourishing earth ; which filled the
atmosphere with sap ; which, uplifted, established the sky with might —
by that rice-mess let me overpass death.
The romm. explains vi\vtibhiyasatn by krtsnasya prAnijAUtsya bhoj^yabhiiiAm,
4. That out of which were fashioned the thirty-spoked months; out of
which was fashioned the tvvclvespoked year ; that which circling days-
andnights did not attain — by that rice-mess let mc overpass death.
SIM*, ^ivfs in c the /.;</.f n.uiin;^ iihotAffiifi^ as rec]uire«l by the participle/tfriVil«/ifr/
all the padttmss, have hi ; the (omm. h.is paryantas^ but explains it 2M paryAvarim-
mAftAt, and says nothing .ibout tin* abnormal form. The verse (Ii-l'i3:tt + ll =46) is
in no nvspcct ayi;;,**;/// the ejection uiyAimAi in b would make it regular.
5. That which became breath-giving, possessing breath-givingoncs(?) ;
for which worlds rich in ghee flow ; whose are all the light-filled directions
— by that rice-mess let me overpass death.
The /i/#/f/-tcxt does not diviilc pfAitadAh, and it makes the division prAmadA^vAn^
which the translation follows \ uur text (either by a misprint or by an unsocccsslol
209 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK IV. -h". ^
attempt at emendation) reads -divSm ; -divdy as Dom. of -divmrn^ mi^t be an tmprctre^
ment ; the comm. reads -daifdm, viewing it as gen. pL of fnimm-dii, from <& *" burs.* and
he explains it as ^moribund'* (mumirsm : primdir ji^^amism^kxM f^itritjpjutmtt)*,
6. From which, when cooked, the immortal {amrta) came into being ;
which was the over-lord of Xhc gdjairi ; in which are deposited the Vedas
of all forms — by that rice-mess let me overpass death.
Or amrta is to be taken as the drink of inunortalitr ; the comm. ( vho simphr adds
djulokastham) apparently so understands it
7. I beat down the hater, the god-insulter ; what rivals arc mine, let
them be [driven] away ; I cook the all-conquering ^n£A«f4i«-rice-mess ; let
the gods hear me who am full of faith.
The comm. reads in a dn*apiyun ; brakmUmdandm he explains as krikmamt^Atif
deyam odanam.
The seventh anuvdka, of 5 hymns and 37 verses, ends here; the oki Anukr. says
sapia cd *pi bodhydh.
36. Against demons and other enemies.
\Cdtana. — satydujasam .^ dgntyam, dnuUmbkam : <^ hkmry.\
Not found in Paipp. Not used individually by Kau^., but only as one of the cdttt-
ndni (8. 25). Our mss. of the Anukr. do not contain the expected definition of the
hymn as one of ten stanzas (da^arcam), ♦LThc Berlin Anukr. reads sdtrdnjasam.^
Translated: Ludwig, p. 526; Grill, 3, 136; Griffilh, i. 179; Bloomfield, 35, 407;
Weber, xviii. 141.
1. Them let him of real force burn forth — Agni Vai^x'anara. the bull ;
whoso shall abuse and seek to harm us, likewise whoso shall play the
niggard toward us.
The comm. paraphrases durasydt with dustdn tvd ** caret: asmdrv avidyamdnam
dosam udbhilvayet. The Prat. (iii. 18) allows both 1 and / in denominatives like arJ/zV-,
and its comment quotes this word as example of the former.
2. Whoso shall seek to harm us not seeking to harm, and whoso seeks
to harm us seeking to harm — in the two tusks of Agni Vai^v'anara do I
set him.
All the mss. read in a dipsaty which is accordingly retained by SPP. ; our edition
emends to dipsdt to agree with vs. i c; the comm. also has dipsdt ; and it is favored by
the ^dpdt of the parallel expression in vi. 37.3. With the second half-verse compare
xvi. 7.3.
3. They who hunt in assent Q dgard), in counter-clamor {? fratiJtfVftf),
on new-moon [clay], the flesh-eating ones, seeking to harm others — all
those I overpower with power.
The obscure words dgard and pratikro^d are here translated mechanically, accord-
ing to their surface etymology. The comm. gets the former from gr or g^ir ♦ swallow,*
and defines it as yuddharangay because samantdd bhajyate mdnsa^onitddikam atra;
the latter is pratikiildih ^atrubhih krta dkro^e ; while mr gay ante means ••desire to
iv 3O IJOOK IV. IIIK ATHARVA-VLDA-SASIHITA. 2JO
Iftyitf ij«." an'l am4i'Aijrf *' at midnight of a day of new moon " ; he has 00 soBptcioa d
»t,y /onrtf-r iiori with the doin^^t at an eclipse, as half sugi;estrd by (Jrill. 'I be line is quite
ijriiiitrili;Mlil' . .iri'l vry ]frrfh.ilf]y of corrupt text. Mo%t of the /'r«/if nisv have the false
a" f-rit /ffit/t Iff'^/ 'I hr romm. r«:ads in c dipiantt for -/dx.
4. I ovrrjiowrr \\\ti pi^aaii with jKiwcr ; I take to myself their property ;
I f.l.iy all tlir ;ihijs'T» ; l';t my <lesi;^n be successful.
Alt thr* fii\% rrad ifi s b iAhnn\t\Am^ p. lAhasA : rstlm^ instead of the obviously cor-
trr t f1Aitt4lfitff», p ftl/iiitti li : rttlm \jf[. notc to iii. M- 3J • i^ >* C''^^ ^^ the OMMt stiik*
hiK lihindrr* rif tli«- traditional trit. 'I he comm. uitdcrstaiuls the true reading, and it is
rfiilor<-d liy niirndatiori in our edition; ST I*, abides by the mss. In d, the comm. has
f/im mtt for $am me. '1 he Aniikr . by noting no irregularity of meter, seems to imply
A etiiw in b. but Wi% dc%( tiptiom are mj httle exact that the evidence is really of no value.
5. The ^<nh that hasten (/fds) with him — they measure speed with
the suii with those cattle (//rf//) that arc in the streams, in the moun*
tains, I am in coihokI.
Doiibtlrsn ( ortiipi in tr«t, anrl incapable of )irhling sense. Grill regards the verse as
Intrrpol.itf'd. I An for A^t, see Keigaigne, AV/. /^7r/. i. 200 n.J The comm. guesses two
wholly dinforrbini ;ind e^pially woithlrsn rxpLinationn ; in the first he takes dtvis as
((loiii f///' • pl.iy ') ** pi^iltai nnrl the likr,'* and hAtante as for Ail f«n'4r/f/i 'cause to laugh * ;
in the KIM Olid, hi* iinilerM^iniN tifvt\% as vorntivc, and hiltttnle as for jthAmnte [_|irint«-d
jihtttyttHte I ' firrk to Iravc.* Onr is teinptcfl to find sUfttiM instead of UhiI \\\ a. The
di't'h irm y (unnotit rd by the Anukr.) of a syllable in d is an indication of a corrupt text
Ck I am a vexrr (ttif^ttnn) of the fi^ihds, as a tiper of them that have
kinc* ; likt* dd^s on seeing a lit>n, they do not find a hidin|;-placc {nydilcana).
The (onmi. rraiU anu instcid <if na in d. The mi'tcr rcf|uirrs *jw/ in a.
7. I cannot [beaij with f^t^tUtis, nor with thieves, nor with savages
(} vnpttui^ii)', the //^i/i ill disappear from that village which I enter.
Out r.M.W. read r'/rrpf for -I'/f/at the end. The comm. has nti^jraniu in c He
paiaphiasrs m//) ^.ttnt^mt by uith^tikto 'nupravuto hhavtlntit or by sathgato bkavAmi ;
antl titu.t't^tt by X'itft*i^%}mtn.
8. Wb.itever vill.»j;e this foimidable |>ower of mine enters, from that
the //j,/. .i.v disappear ; (theie] they devise not evil.
The ht\t p.iil.1 laiks a 5\llablr, unless we resolve gri- into two syllaldes |^or read
» J«'/ 111"/ I
1). "Mu'v who anj;er me, making a noise, as flies an elephant — them
I think ill oil. like mites (') on a man (;<i/m).
I lie «on\n) ^lollowrd by a couple of SPT's authotitirs) has /f/z/Ji (^ up^M^dk^k
i.fi ^ >. I i.. '.!•'.) at end id a; the /.r./.r mvv read hftti, whiih STT. in his /tf«/<f test
enu*iuU 1,1 /,f * . but. as the paitttiple in /.r from sm h a root can hardly have an active
si'nv\ ,',}*:,• t x^oiiM ilotibtlrxs l>e a Nttor alteration; the redundancy of a syllable, to
be \nii*. wiHiM siii:i:(-st dee{H*r (han|i;rs. . f ./.r| .1 1 j» t in d, literally * |>etty liers,* is coo-
iiil(iia!l\ ii*ni!ote(l. in a^ v oiilani e \« :tli tlic i Muin. ( /.r'/wr^T^A* *</j^JiJA |4rrit«rArt«-
.» ♦.!:.» 4 ..!••/,. J.. I *».!••. .5 1 */.'.} 4 V srr. fiads ,:\f \i:.\n ; ^instead of -/Jit or -/J* ^
211 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK IV. "Jv. 37
note to i. i9-4j)i against the great majority of his mss. as well as all of ours ; instead
of it the comm. has durhatdn.
10. Let perdition halter him, as a horse with a horse-halter {-ab/n-
dhdni) \ the fool (ptalvd) that is angry at me, he is not loosed from the
fetter.
The comm. (with one of SPP's mss.) has at the end mucyase, but explains it as a 3d
sing. impv. : mukto na bhavatu ; an imperative would be welcome, if honestly come by.
Malva he glosses with ^atru. LAs to abhi-dhcl^ cf. iii. 1 1. 8 and note. J
37. Against various superhuman foes: with an herb.
[Bddardyatti. — dvddnfarcam. aja^rngyapsarodrvatyam. » dnustubham : j. J-av. 6-f. tn'stubh ;
^. prastdrapahkti ; y. parosnih ; 1 1 . 6-p . jagatl ; I2,nicrt.\
Found (except vs. 9) in Paipp. xiii. (in the verse-order 1-4, 7,6, 5, 12, 8, 10, 1 1), but
in a much defaced condition. Used by Kau^. with the preceding hymn, as one of the
cdtandni (8. 25) ; but also independently (28. 9) in a remedial rite against po.ssession
by evil spirits. And the comm. quotes it from Naks. K. 21 ^error for (^anti K., says
Bloomficldj, as employed in a mahdqdnti called gdndharvl. |^As to Badarayani, see
introduction to hymn 40.J
Translated: Kuhn, KZ. xiii. 118 (interesting Germanic parallels); Ludwig, p. 352 ;
Griffith, i. 180 ; Bloomfield, 33, 408 ; Weber, xviii. 144.
1 . By thee of old the Atharvans slew the demons, O herb ; by thee
did Ka^yapa slay ; by thee Kanva, Agastya.
The comm. explains that one or other of the specified plants, the sahamdud etc., is
here addressed.
2. By thee do we expel {cat) the Apsarases, the Gandharvas ; O goat-
horned one, drive the demon ; make all disappear by [thy] smell.
* Drive * {(ijn) in c is a play upon the name goat {ajn-) in * goat-horned.* The comm.
declares the epithet to be equivalent to visdnin {Odina pinnatd)^ and to be given on
account of the shape of the fruit. [^Uhanvantari, p. 23, Poona ed., gives fnesa^rngt
and visdnikd as synonyms of <yVifr/7^. J Ppp. has in b cdtaydmasi instead of -make.
3. Let the Apsarases go to the stream, to the loud (?) down-blowing of
the waters : Guggulu, Pila, NaladI, Auksagandhi, Pramandanl : so go
away, ye Apsarases*; ye have been recognized.
LSee Weber's note and reference to Rumpelstilzchen.J Tdrd in b is rendered "cross-
ing''; but as this sense is found nowhere else, it seems safer to take the word as the
adjective, common later ; the comm. glosses it with tdrayitdram^ a worthless etymo-
logical guess. After it, instead of aiukvasamy the comm. reads iva svasam {^ — susthn
ndupreranaku^alam yathd)^ and, strangely enough, Ppp. has the same. As cver)*wherc
else where the word occurs, the mss. vary between g^ilguiit and g^tggulu^ and SPP.
reads the former and our edition the latter ; here the decided majority, with Ppp. and
the comm., give gulg- (our Bp.H.K. havc^;gf-). Padas c and d appear lo be made up
of names of Apsarases, all formed upon odor-names : guggtdi is fern, to guggulu
* bdellium,' and naladi to ndlada *nard'; pramandanl is related with pramattda *a
certain fragrant plant ' ; and duksdgandhi means something like * ox-smell * ; but the
iv. 37 ■ II«)OK IV. Tin; ATMAKVA VKDA-SAMHITA.
f nmm. t\vi I.iirs lln-m to 1»c fttnut /lowtiiha-'Vilni * fivr ar(irli'<i df filiLitinn ' : I'pp- r
pfiifxinJttnii in d. Must of niir iiis*i. a( ( rut ii/r.rrifurr in e. l>iit SI'I*. rp|K»rtx only
of his :is (IftiiiL; sn : lintli cilitinns riMtl fi/jii'iid/i. 'I lie cdnwn. in.ikfs a tiitlr
(iivisinn fif till* ni.itf'ii.il, irtkdiiini: \\v* iffi.iiii (niir e. f ) .1^ ;i vcr%r witli niir 4 a. b.
iiniittiii:^ tlir rrli.iin in .| (nuich .is it tnMti-'l 34 5 7 aliini*); SIT. fnllnu^ t)u* An
tiwnii'^hiiut ( sr<' iiiiilri t!n* nrxt vi-is«). 'I hi- 1 oinni. ii'.uls in f ^».; /;.'■.!. /i//-.)! . p\
iiitfiitti} i/V;;//,/;/!/ is fixind also as l\\'. i. P;! . 5 d. I'pP- •'^'^'^^ lif*tui-i*n f»iir d ai
\,i/f*} t'liipfv ii/>\7' tni/,i/i : \tttttjitift /uf utntifl /nr:.i^i f>unifa9lla (ni»l fiiiiowcil !i
1;: •71.M.'.; sii:n> llii* .Xnuki. di-tinition of llu* vi'isr oiicht to \v\\i\ jitji^ati instcii
t*i\fn'tt. [ In till- |iiinr di.ift, W. m-l'S tlir snm^i-siions c fwu irninp //rif^Tii liii// j;!\ri
\\\\. i. .pi I .mil OH. i. \ 2h ami ini|>I\in'^ tn-tt ■■ *a\%ay*: hut iijrits tlicni.J
4. WhtTt* [air) the rt^itiftuiis^ tht: tiyni^roii/tns, j;rcal Invs, with crc:
ihithiT |;i» away, y«* Aps.ir;iscs ; yc h.ivc bt-rii irt n^iii/ffj.
'I'lio ilivision .mil nnnihi lin:^ in oiir '-ilitinn of this Vfr*«tr ami thr two nrxt follow ii
f.mlty, ow ini; to thr urn lr.iin>-ss of ihi* niss. t'nsi lis* '1 ; the roirfit (li\ i«>ion. aqrr
with till* Anuki., is ;^iviii lty Nl'I'.. .ir.<l oiii tr.msl.ition folhiwft it [aiifl niaki s dear 1
it is J: vss. 3 ; ail rnil with tiw i< ti.iin /.f/ f*iit^ */i}- * U ., ami this, with tlir numlM
fifi'ds to 1»t* aihii ri in our t'-\t altir ^il*i*i»t,itnti/i. In I'l'i^ , thi* pl-i* i* of this \r\
t.ikiMi liv thf aiMition ii'iiorti'l .il«>\'-, iimli-r \s. \. 'Ih'*(ornni. t.ik''S ^ilannifii
inr.inin-^ •■ |ir.ii m ks " ; hf (piotrs IS. iii .!.■**« to tin* rl|ii i th.it <rrt.iin tn rs. inc lu
ti^z'.t/ttid .luiI //I'l/i. ' I './/'. f, aii* thi' housi s of <iamlharvas ami Aps.ir.iS'S
5. WiuTi* [ari'l yi>iir swiii^*;, ^rccn ami whitish; wIkti" cynilKils [n
lull s ^uiiihI tn;;i'iluT lliillicT j;«» aw;iy, y«.* Apsarasfs ; yo have b
rfCn;;ili/.C(l.
I i"h.ini;i* tlir iiuMilii'i .) t«» 5 .il tMf «-nil of thr hist lim* t^f p. 71 of ihi* nlitinn.]
ai I i*;it k,it l*it \th as iioni. pliii. is f.ilsr. and must he I'Muiidid to -MiM. as rra«
SI'P. with lialf of his niss., .uid a part ((.).( ){•. I ).) of f>urs (oin I'.M.W. L;ivr l;ifk*i\
Ai:.\in Ml .Illy .dl our niss., with S'mir of Spr'*>. .1 i 1 iit iz/iiz/ifif/r in tin' ifiiain ]
is <[uit'* lOTMipt" iiJ/'.i Ti*^/;r.7 /:.ir :/,n ;uttii i;/i.l/.}f Kti'iiff tt >.t'f'.': ,i,:.tn/i. "I he
h.ilf\rrsi' ( I 3 ? I I : S • S) is iir»i;nl.ir.
^». llitluT halh come iIun mi^iity (nu* {rh\t)iattt) ot llic l»i.'i)>s. nl
jdaiils; hi tin* ^'lat-lioi in ij 1//. //</{/, ihc siiarji ln»iiu.'l, piisli out.
|_rul .1 siniplf .;. .i\.'in.i ni.uk in pl.it i- of t!ir nunihi r 5 J .tt.if.iii \* cms to !>r
h' If .IS •.!.« I ir'.i ii.nnr nf l!:'- h«r!» in ipH stuMi ; liiit thf • onini t.iki s it .is rpithrt. d
in-4 it li"i'.i •: ».i ■ iwiii imv i:i; ' with .1 i!fii\ .ili-. r fioni ,Tt ' t;n.' .m-I ni'Miiinij Aint*i
u. .,i/tn.rf: ' Tpi' -^dds tvM> moK' p nits <i/'^ V** V." '/ii/^./f » ^'./MiZ/iI^ : #/ r.:/»<i :■<* i*»
7. ( 't ijii" liillni ihiiuiiiL;, rir-^iril Ci.iii'.lh.ir va, A|»*».it.is hip!, I splii
lt»-liili^. I Miiil f.ist I ') tin- iintulnr.
.MI t!." IMS-. H .1 ! in c ''/'t 1.;".'/. 'aI. *h SI' P. aiioi'hi :;1\ rftains ; mmi cnirndati^
1/1 ;••;/ is -.M s.itisi.ii tii:\. 1 ■■''.'! .is !■ u-'.rds tin* si nsi* and Im-i auM* #7'«; is not «'i^c»hcrr 1
with .;.'■;( -i it'p I is 1 .M . I'i.f Usii^iit .iIm» t:ui *>'» ^7/ •'./ i ./".'i " attai k " ; t!ji- 1 omm rxpl
It '-v .//;.■.•.';": n:' rt, :'.:':. tf: l.t* ,••'::. w' ■ )i is WMrtlii'-*'^ 'I Ip- 1 onwr K'^'^ " pr.n n
.In .iM .i!ti *:. ili". • 1 1 j'liv.iM-nt of j ."^ /;..•».• ;';»/ wi!)i an irMplir.l 1 ••■nparisun " dam i"i; h
pi-.i' •■ h " I'j ;i l'i-.:ii-.s with ri.;"; ; ;» v .'.il\ [If t!ic di I'lnition of t!i»* .\r
( ^ i *^ I .' 1 i' I !i;!.!. J .i'!a c !ai ks .1 s\ ii.iMr J
213 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK IV. -iv. 37
8. Terrible are Indra's missiles {/teti), a hundred spears of iron ; with
them let him push out the oblation-eating, dvakd-^TiXAWg Gandharvas.
Half our mss., and the large majority of SPP's, read at the end of this verse rsata;
both editions give rsatu^ as in the next verse. Avakd is defined as a certain grass-like
marsh-plant, Dlyxa octandra^ the same with ^divaia or ^divdia; the comm. defines it
as jaioparisihdh qdivdlavii^esdh^ but attempts no explanation of why the Gandharvas
should be supposed to eat it. He reads in b {^ataprstU (one feels tempted to emend
rather to ^aidbhrstls)^ and in c abhihraddn (for haviraddti). The Anukr. takes no
notice of the redundant syllable in c (also in 9 c).
9. Terrible are Indra's missiles, a hundred spears of gold ; with them
let him push out the oblation-eating, ^z/^/'^f -eating Gandharvas.
This very slightly varied repetition of vs. 8 is wanting in Ppp. All the mss. have
rsatu at the end here.
10. The dvakd'^7iX\xi% ones, scorching, making light {}) in the waters
— all the fifdcds, O herb, do thou slaughter and overpower.
All our pada-mss. read in b jyotaya^mdmakan as a compound, and it seems very
strange that SPP. gives in both forms of \^x\. jyotaya mdmakifiy as two independent
words, and reports nothing different as found in any of his authorities; it is perhaps an
oversight on his part. Either reading being plainly untranslatable, the rendering given
implies emendation to jyotayamdnakan^ as the simplest and most probable alteration ;
several cases of such expansions of a participle in tndna by an added -ka occur \^Skt,
Gram, § 1222 g, f ; cf. Bloomfield's note J, one of them {pravartatndftakd) even in RV.
Ppp. reads as follows : avakd^am abht\dco bicchi dydtayamdnakdm : gandharvdn
sarvdn osadhe krnu tasvapardyanah ; this supports the proposed reading in its most
essential feature, -mdua- for -mdma-^ and further favors the version of the comm., dyot-
iox jyot-. R., in the Festgruss an Bbhtlingk (p. 97), had ingeniously conjectured the
word as a name for the will-o'-the-wisp, deriving it irom j'yotaya mdm *give me light,*
by an added suffix -aka. The comm. paraphrases by viatsambandhino gandharvdn
udakestt prakd^aya, [_Cf. Whitney, Festgruss an Roth^ p. 91 ; also note to ii. 3. i.J
1 1. One as it were a dog, one as it were an ape, a boy all hairy — having
become as it were dear to see, the Gandharva fastens upon (sac) women ;
him we make disappear from here by [our] mighty (virydvant) incantation
{brd/tvian).
In our edition, striyam at the end of d is a misprint for striyas^ which all the mss.
have, with no avasdua-m^ixV following, though distinctly called for by the sense, and
therefore supplied by us ; Ppp., however, reads striyam, with sajate before it ; and it
omits the last pada, f : which omission would furnish an excuse for the absence of inter-
punction after striyas,
12. Your wives, verily, are the Apsarascs ; O Gandharvas, ye are
[their] husbands ; run away, O immortal ones ; fasten not on mortals.
All the padamss. commit in c the palpable error of dividing dhdvaidmartyd{h) into
dhdvata: martydh, as if the d which follows dhdvat- were one of the common pro-
longations of a final vowel in samhitd ; the comm., however, understands amartydh,
and SPP. admits this by emendation into his pada-\tx\„ Ppp. has for c apakrdmat
purusdd amartyd, which supports amartyds in our text
^
iv. 38- BOOK IV. THE ATIIARVA-VEDA-SAWIIITA. 314
38. For luck in gambling: by aid of an Apsaras.
[/fJi/^trJy.ini. — dviJnHXtyam. AnustHhham : j. 6-f.jax\ ;aj^gi ; j. bhmrigatyatit ; 6. tnsfaM ;
7. jiit'-j"-/. auustuh^titbhd puraufarttttljjyoittmatl jagati.\
'\\\\% ami tlic two following hymns are not found in T&ipp. Kftu^. uses it (doubtless
only the first four verses) in a ceremony (41.13) for success in gambling. Verses 5-7
are called karkiprax'ddtls and used (21. 1 1) in a rite for the prosperity of kine, and siso
(66. 13) in the uiva sacrifices, with a karkl as sava ; and they are reckoned (19. 1, note)
to the pustika pnantras. The coinm. attempts no explanation of the mutual relation of
the two appaicntly unconnected parts of the hymn ; [^but Weber, in his note to verse 7,
su};i;ests a connection J. [^As to HAdarAyani, see intrr>d. to h. 40. J
Translated: Muir, OST. v. 430 (vss. 1-4); I.udwif;, p. 454; Grill, 71 (vss. 1-4)*
140; (Jriffith, i. 183; Hloomfield, 149, 412; Weber, xviii. 147.
fS ^ " I. The up-shooting, all-conqucrinpj, successfully-playing Apsaras, that
^ /jfit^//'^7 wins (/•/') the winnings in the pool (?^/rf///i) — that Apsaras I call on here.
^^"^"^^ The form apsttrd, instead of apsards^ is used throughout this hymn; the comm.
^,j^ ^ regards it as a specialized name for the A|)saras in this character or office : dyiktakriyM'
iihititvatAfn apsarojtltfyHm. Uiibhimiatlm is paraphrased hy pamnhamdkena dkanmsym
\fbhedanam kunutitm, as if it were the causative participle. The technical terms of
the j;ame arc only doubtfully translated, our knowledge of its method being insufficient;
glAha is taken as the receptacle, of whatever kind, in which the stakes are deposited ; the
comm. explains it thus: ^fkyaU panabandhena kalpyata Hi dytitaknydjtyo (mss.
-jityo) 'rtho ^lahak.
2. The distributing (vid), on-strewing (i^-kir), successfully-playing
Apsaras, that seizes (gra/t) the winnings in the pool — that Apsaras I call
on here.
The comm. explains the first two epithets respectively by ** collectini; ** (taking tt' as
intensive) and "scattering.**
3. She who (lances about with the dice (} dya), taking to herself the
winning from the pool — let her, trying to gain (}) for us the winnings,
obtain the stake {^ pra/ui) by magic (fudyd) ; let her come to us rich in
milk ; let them not conquer from us this riches.
The wholly anomalous stsati in c is here translated, in accord.inrr with the currcat
understandin;; of it, as somehow coming; from the root san or sd [^i.e., as if it were for
the normal s/stls tt/f : consideiin;; that the consonant of the root sd happens to coincide
with the sibiLint which is c haiac teristic of the desiderative, we might l>e tempted to put
shdn/ : stl: : sikutui : sah (SI/, Oram. § 1030 a), but for the acxentj; the comm. reads
instead ^ffitnfl {-- ai'tt^fsiivttfifi). The comm. further has in b ddadhdnas (explained
as -=. HdadhtinA : so Sl'T's K. rcids), and in d prahdn ('=: prahantavyAn akjdm: a
f.Usc* etyniolo;;y and worthless interpretation). He explains ayds as tkthfayak pmtUm^
samkhyAntd aksavi^eiiih. Me divides our vss. 3-5 into four verses of four pAdas each.
without any rc^-ird to the connection of sense, thus pvinj; the hymn eight verses; among
our mss also (SI* P. reftorts nothing of the kind from his) there is more or less discord-
anc(* in rc|;ard to the verse-division, and some of them agree with the comm. |^Oar
slSiiii appears in \V*s Index Wrborum^ p. 382, at the very end of the "unclassified
residuum*' of AV. material. J
215 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK IV. -iv. 38
4. She who delights (pra-tnud) in the dice {aksd), bringing {b/tr) pain
and anger — the rejoicing, the delighting one : that Apsaras I call on here.
The translation implies retention of bibhratl at end of b, read by all the mss. and by
the comm., and retained by SPP., and the emendation instead in a io yd * kshu pramd-
date^ which is metrically better, makes better connection, and has the support of the
comm., with one \ox twoj of SPP's authorities. SPP's note to bibhratl^ ** so read
except by K. who follows Sayana," is unintelligible, since the latter has also bibhratl.
L Delete the accent-mark under huve.\
5. They who (f.) go about (j^w-^^r) after the rays of the sun, or who
go about after [its] beams (mdrlct) ; of whom the mighty {} vdjinivant)
bull from afar moves around {pari-i) at once all the worlds, defending —
let him come unto us, enjoying this libation, together with the atmos-
phere, he the mighty one.
According to the comm., the " they who '* and " of whom " in a and c are the Apsa-
rases, this being apparently to him the tie of connection between the two divisions of
the hymn ; and vdjinl is the dawn, and vdjinlvant the sun : all of which is very ques-
tionable, at least. SPP. reads in ^paryaitiy with, as he states, the majority of his mss.,
but with only two of ours ; the comm. has paryeti^ and it is also thus quoted by the
comment to Prat. iv. 81. SPP. further leaves the final n of sdrvdn unassimilated before
lokatty fcir the wholly insufficient reason that nearly all his mss. so read ; the point is one
that requires to be regulated by the prescriptions of general grammar and of the Prat.,
without heed to the carelessness of scribes. The passage is even one of those quoted
under Prat. ii. 35 as an example of assimilation. The metrical definition of the Anukr.
is inaccurate, and perhaps corrupt; the verse (12 + 11 : 12 + 11 : 11 + 11=68) should be
specified as of 6 padas and 3 avasdnas^ like vs. 3 ; it is not bhurijj and for atyasti the
L London, not the Berlin ms.J x^tlAs jagaiyasii. [_One is tempted to suspect the syllable
sam- in a. VxonoMX\Qt yasarsabhd in C.J
6. Together with the atmosphere, O mighty one; defend thou here
the karki calf, O vigorous one {vdj{n) ; here are abundant drops {stokd)
for thee ; come hitherward ; this is thy karki ; here be thy mind.
The comm. reads in a vdjinlvdtty as in 5 f ; in b he has karkln vatsdn (and one of
SPP's mss. gives karkin) ; and, in d, namas instead of manaSy and SPP. i*ports three
of his four /^ ///z-mss. as also having ndmas. The comm. explains karki as karkavartta
or fubhra. The minor Pet. Lex. suggests the emendation of vaisim to va(dm in this
verse and the next. Three of SPP's mss. and one of ours (O.) separate karki ihd in
samhitd in d. The Anukr. ignores the deficiency of a syllable in b.
7. Together with the atmosphere, O mighty one ; defend thou here the
karki calf, O vigorous one ; this is fodder; this is the pen ; here we bind
(ni'bandh) the calf ; according to name we master you : hail !
The comm., with one of SPP*s oral authorities, has again vatsdn in b, and also
vatsdn in d (this time, with our P.M.W.E.). Kau^. (21. 11) quotes c and d, with the
direction to do " as directed in the text "; the comm. LKe^avaJ explains that a rope is to be
prepared with twelve ties (ddman) ; and that with c fodder is to be offered to the kine,
and with d the calves are to be tied to the rope. If this is correct, the reading would
seem to be properly vatsdn in all cases, and perhaps karkyh(k) vatsdn in 6 b and 7 b
iv. 38- HOOK IV. THE ATlIARVA-VKDA-SAttlllTA. 2l6
(thus fillini; out tlie meter). I'he mss. add (as directed by the Anukr.) a second avasdita-
sign after hiuihultfuih^ and SIM*, retains it. The verse (11 + 10: 8 + A: 10=47) falls
short of a full jt'Xti/f Ity the amount of the deficiency in b. [^I tliink JtarJt/hs, 9% a
genitive sinf^. fern., ou;;ht to l>c oxytone (JAOS. x. 3^5) ; but Jtaffy^s, pronounced
kttrkio^ mi^ht be better. J
39. For various blessings.
[Anjcirai.* — i/,ifarfam. /Jwwii/riiiw . nilmdJef^ttynm. fdnktam : /, j, 5, 7. j-f. mmkdhrk^it ;
2^ 4, 6^ S. sjmjtJpa/amlii ; 9, /<*. trittmhk.^
This prose-hymn (the two conchidinp; verses metrical) is, as already notcfi, wanting
in TAipp. A similar pnssaf^c is found in TS. (vii. 5.23). The hymn u used by KAuq.
in the/<ir7'frM sacrifices (5.8) with the samnati offerings, and vss. 9 aiul 10 earlier in
the same ceremonies with two so-called puraslHiiiiihotnas (3. 16) ; also the hymn again
in the rites (59. 16) for satisfaction of desires. \'erse 9 appears in Vfttt (8. 11) in the
cAlurmAsYii rites, with an offering by the adhvaryn. * [^The Anukr. gives Urahman as
the rsi of 9 and 10. J
Translated: (frifTith, i. 184; \Vcl>er, xviii. 150.
1. On the earth they paid reverence (samnam) to Agni ; he throve
(rtih) \ as on earth ihey paid reverence to Agni, so let the revercncers pay
reverence to me.
The TS. version reads thus : as^nAye sdm ana mat prthivyAl sdm anamad ydikd
*j^nfh prthivyA ( ! ) samAnamad evAm mAhyam bhadrik sAninainytik sAm mammmtm.
The comm. explains sAm antiman by sttrvAfti bhuttlni sttthmttAni upasammdni bkatHimiu
and safftnAmas by abhilautaphttiasya sathnatayah satnprAptayah. The metrical
definitions of the Anukr. for vss. 1 8 are of no value ; the o<ld verses vary from 34 to 37
syllables, and the even from 38 to 40. [^ We might have expected the epithet tryax*asdma
{j-av.) to l)c applied to the even. J
2. ICarth [is] milch-cow; of her Agni [is] calf; let her, with Agni as
calf, milk for me food {is), refreshment, [my] desire, life-time first,
progeny, prosjKTity, wealth : hail !
There is in TS. nothing to corrcs|)ond to our vss. 2, 4, 6, 8. Our edition combines
iyits pr„ because required by Trfit ii. 75 ; but the mss., except one of Sl'P's, have
iytih pr-, which SIM*, retains.
3. In the atmosphere they paid reverence to Vayii ; he throve; as in
the atmosphere they paid reverence to Vayu, so let the rcverenccrs pay
reverence to me.
TS. has a « curfsponding pnssai^r, in the form as given alN)vc.
4. The atmosphere is milch-cow; of her N'ayti is calf; let herewith
Vayu as calf, milk for me etc. etc.
The romm. has ttiyvtt * of it (i.e. the atmosphere),* instead of iasyAs.
5. In the sky they paid reverence to Adilya; he thiove; as in the sky
they paid n-vfience to Atlitya, so let the revercncers pay reverence tome.
The coires|»«>n<lini; T.S. pas.sai:e h.is surya insti-ad of ildityn.
217 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK IV. -iv. 39
6. The sky is milch-cow; of her Aditya is calf; let her, with Aditya
as calf, milk for mc etc. etc.
Lin the edition, sd is misprinted for j^.J
7. In the quarters they paid reverence to the moon (candrd) ; it throve ;
as in the quarters they paid reverence to the moon, so let the reverencers
pay reverence to me.
In TS., the asterisms (ndksa/ra) are here connected with the moon ; and there
follow similar passages respecting Varuna with the waters, and several other divinities.
8. The quarters are milch-cows ; of them the moon is calf; let them,
with the moon as calf, milk for me etc. etc.
Both editions read duhdtn in this verse, as in vss. 2, 4, 6, following the authority of
nearly all the mss. ; only our H.D. have the true reading, duhrdm^ which ought to have
been adopted in our text.
9. Agni moves (^^r), qntered into the fire, son of the seers, protector
against imprecation ; with homage-paying,' with homage, I make offering
to thee ; let us not make falsely the share of the gods.
That is (a), * Agni is continually to be found in the fire.* Three of SPP's authorities
read viAtiasd in c, thus ridding the verse of an objectionable repetition ; but both editions
give ndmasiiy which the comni. also has. In d our edition has karmabhUgdvi^ following
our /<2<y<n-mss. (which read karmaobhdgdm) ; but SPP. has correctly, with his mss. and
the comm. (^ = ;/id kdrsma), karma bhdgdm. More or less of the verse is found in
several other texts: thus, in VS. (v. 4) only a, b, ending b with abhi^asiipAvd ; in MS.
(i. 2. 7), with adhirdjd esdh at end of b, a wholly different c, and, for d, ma devaudtit
yuyupdma bhdgadh^yam j in MB. (ii. 2. 12), only a, b, with b ending as in MS.; in TS.
(*• 3- 7')» t^^c whole verse, b ending like MS., c beginning with svdhdkrtya brdhmand^
and d ending with mithuya kar bhdgadh^yam ; in TB. (ii. 7. 15*), the whole, beginning
with vydghrb 'ydm agndii car-^ and ending b with -fii aydm^ its c and d agreeing
throughout with ours ; in A^S. (viii. 14.4), tlie whole, but ending b* like MS. and TS.,
and having for c, d tasmdi juhomi havisd ghrtena md dtvdndm momuhad bhdgadhe-
yam ; \\v\ Ppp., the whole verse, just as in AQS., except that a ends vtxih pravistd and
that d has yiiyavad for momuhad and (unless mdm is a slip of Roth's pen) mdm for
md\. LSee Bloomfield*s discussion of mithuyA kr^ ZDMG. xlviii. 556.J The meter
(lo-fii : i2-fii =44) is irregular, but the Anukr. takes no notice of it. * [^The Calcutta
ed. has avirdja esahy misprint for adhi-.\
10. Purified with the heart, with the mind, O Jatavedas — knowing all
the ways (vayihia), O god ; seven mpuths are thine, O Jatavedas ; to them
I make offering — do thou enjoy the oblation.
Pilidm in a can only qualify havyd9n in d : compare RV. iv. 58. 6 b, anidr hrdA
mdnasd pCtydmdndh, The /<i//<?-text makes one of its frequent blunders by resolving
in c saptisydni into sapid: asydni instead of into saptd: dsytini, tlie designation of the
accent in saf'nhitd being the same in both cases, according to its usual method. SPP.
accepts the blunder, reading Asydni.
It is impossible to see why these two concluding verses should have been added to
the hymn.
iv. 40- BOOK IV. THE ATHARVA-VEDA-SAMHITA. 2I8
40. Against enemies from the different quarters.
[QuJkrm, — * krtyd^rmtiAmranam, hahndtvuixam, trAi$tuhk«m : 2,8. jaguti {8. ^r^HfmkrmH
Mdajtaj).]
Not found in I'ilipp. Somewhat similar formulas are met with in TB. (ill 11. 5)
and Ap(^S. (vi. 18.3). Used in K«^u<;m with ii. 11 etc., in the preparation of holy water
for the counteraction of witchcraft (39. 7), and reckoned to the krtyApratiharana gana
(ib., note). * [^The Berlin ms. of titc Anukr. adds the expected astanam. — Weber, in
a footnote, p. 152, says that the remarks of the Anukr. on vs. 8 su|i:fi^est that the author
of the Anukr. was a Vedantist. Hence his attribution of hymns 37 and 38 to
BAdarAyani.J
Translated : Griflith, i. 185 ; \Ve1)er, xviii. 152.
1. They who make ofTcring from in front, O Jalavedas, [who] from
the eastern quarter vex us — having come upon (r) Agni, let them stagger
(vyath) away; I smite them back with the reverter (pratisard).
Praiis^ra, the comm. says, means pratimukham Mtvartata Abhicdrikatk karmd
*ti€fia ; 2iiiA juhvaii means homend *'smdn abhicatanti. The an.ilugous formula in the
other texts reads thus : pnlc! di^ ajittfr devdtd : n^ftim sd di^im drt'dm drvdi^9iSm
rcckaim yd mdi *tdsydi di{b *bhidiisati (so TB. ; ApC^'S. omits di^im dtvdfk dtvdidndm).
The verses have slight metrical irregularities which are ignored by the Anukr.
2. They who make offering from the right, O Jatavcdas, [who] from
the southern quarter vex us — having come uiK)n Yama, let them etc. etc.
The other texts make Indra the god of the southern quarter. |^Sce Weber*s note,
P- 1 53. J
3. They who make offering from behind, O Jatavcdas, [who] from the
western quarter vex us — having come upon Varuna, let them etc. etc.
The other texts say Soma instead of Varuna.
4. They who make offering from above, O Jiitavedas, [who] from the
northern quarter vex us — having come upon Soma, let them etc. etc.
Nearly all tl)e mss. (all ours save O.Op. ; ail but three of SPP's) strangely accent
somdm in this verse; Ix)th editions emend to sdmam. In the other texts, Mitra and
Varuna are the divinities invoked for the northern quarter.
5. They who make offering from below, O Jatavcdas, [who] from the
fixed quarter vex us — having come upon ICarth, let them etc. etc.
Here, again, p.irt of our m.vs. (K.l.ll.), and nearly all SlT's. gi**e the false accent
bkHtnlttt ; both editions read bhutnim. 1 he other texts associate Aditi with **thit
quarter," or •• the (jiiarter here," as they style it.
6. They who make offering from the atmosphere, O Jatavcdas, [who]
from the midway {vyadhvd) (|uartcr vex us — having come U[x>n Vayu,
let them etc. etc.
The comm. understands vyadhva as ••trackless*' {Tij;ti/d adkvdna yasydm). The
other texts take no notice of sucli a ({uartcr.
219 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK IV. -iv. 40
7. They who make offering from aloft, O Jatavedas, [who] from the
upward quarter vex us — having come upon Surya, let them etc. etc.
The other texts associate Brhaspati with this quarter.
8. They who make offering from the intermediate directions of the
quarters, O Jatavedas, [who] from all the quarters vex us — having come
upon the brdhinan^ let them etc. etc.
Several of our mss. accent digbhyd ^bhidis-. The other texts have nothing that cor-
responds to this verse.
This, the eighth and concluding anuvUka of the book, has 5 hymns and 47 verses ;
the quotation from the old Anukr. is sapiadaqA *ntyah^ to which is added sadarcavac ca.
Here ends also the xi\}\>\i prapdthaka.
One of our mss. (I.) sums up the content of the book as 323 verses; the true
number is 324. LObserve that the last vs. of hymn 20 is numbered 7 when it should
be 9.J
Book V.
LThc fifth book is made up of thirty-one hymns, divided into
six /7;///iw/'^-groups, with five hymns in each group save the
fourth, which has six hymns. The Old Anukramani appears
to take 60 verses as the norm of an auuvaka. The number
of verses in each hymn ranges from 8 to 18. The Major
Anukramani assumes 8 verses as the normal length of a hymn
of this book (see p. 142); but there are only two such hymns
("hymns" 9 and 10, both prose!). In fact,
There arc in i\\\% liook, 2
Containing respectively 8
The entire book has been translated by Weber, Indische StudUn^
vol. xviii. (1898). pages 154-288. This is the first book to which
the native commentary is missing.J
4
2
6
5
3
3
3
2
1
hymnt.
9
10
II
12
«3
14
»5
«7
iS
vcraci.
I. Mystic.
[/7r^i/i/i//?«i /t/Aitnttn. — Mav*ik*im, xdrututm. trthrtnf'httm : j. {*) j^ardhrJkati trighthA :
7. t**Aj i t). J .jr. /*»/. at\*\}ti.\
Found also in iTilpp. vi. Mu<h .md variously usrd by Kau^.. ))Ut in situations that
have nothing to do with the mc.inini; nf the h\inn, and cast no li^ht upon its diflicultics:
thus, it is employed with the followini; hymn in a battle -rite (15. I), for victory; and
the two hymns to^etiuT a^ain in a ceremony (22. I) for welfare, while hymns 1 to 3
(and V, 1.3 scpar.itrly) are reckoned \\*) I. notrj to the pustika mantfas; vs. I alone
(with vi. 17 and another) appears in a ceremony (35. 12) against abortion; vss. 2-9. in
one (35. 13 ff.) f«ir the benefit of a person seized by jttmbha ; vs. 3 is further applied
in a ch.iim (*i.i2) for ^ood fortune in rr^ard to clothing, vs. 4, in a women's rite
(34.20) for winning a husb.iml ; vs. 5 (willi iii.30, vi.64, etc.) in a rite (12. 5) for
harmony; vs. 6. in tlie nuptial < rremonifs (76. 21), on maikinf; seven lines to the north
of t)»e rtn*. .uid a;;.iin (71). i ). with an otfrrinc ^^ t^^c bej»inninK of the fourth-day ol»erv-
ancrs : vs. 7, in a rrmrdial litf (2^ 12) for one in misery (#iw/i//), |;ivin); him a portion,
and ai:ain, in thf «frrmony .tj ilnst f.iKe accusation {\(^, i). with vii.43; vs. 8 in a rite
for prospnity (21. 15). on on .isi.m of the divisicm of an inheritance ; and vs. 9, later
(21. 17) in ihr List nicntionrd < rn-monv.
The h\mn is intiMition.dly and m«>st successfully obscure, and the translation |Ei%'en b
in K'*"'"** P-*»* mr< h.iiiic.d. not prof.ssini; any rral undrrstandini; of the sense. It is *-ery
|)rol)abIr th.it tlie ti'xt is c onsidt-r.dily «i>fruplr«l: and onr cannot avoi<l the impression
also that tlx* hues air mtur or less disi Mnnect<*d, and artlfi* ially combined.
Translated : I.udwi^. p. 31)4 ; (rriOith, i 1^7 ; Weber, xviii. 157.
230
221 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK V. -v. I
1. He who came to (a-bhu) the womb i^ydni) with a special sacred text
(> rd/iatlvtanira), of immortal spirit (-dsu), increasing, of good birth, of
unharmed spirit, shining like the days — Trita the maintainer main-
tained three (/;/, neuter).
The Pet. Lexx. render fdhanmanira by *• lacking speech " ; Ludwig, by " of distin-
guished meditation." Ahe *va (p. dhdoiva) is perhaps rather to be understood as
Ahahoiva, Ppp. puts sujanmd in b before vardhamUnas , As elsewhere, part of our
mss. (Hp.p.m.P.M.W.) read trtds in d. The last pada is two syllables short, the Anukr.
taking no notice of the deficiency.
2. He who first attained to {a-sad) the ordinances {dhdrtnan) makes
thence many wondrous forms; eager (} dhdsyu) he first entered the 'T y^^
womb {yoni), he who understood (acit) speech unspoken. '' '. '^'' ■ \ ^< ^
In b the translation follows Ppp., which reads krnute for -use\ Ppp. also has a differ- 7'^ r^x- ht
ent Cj/^f ca yonith prathamd **vive^a; and it ends d with anucitHfh jigdya. /-'' /^* ^
3. He who left {nc) [his] body to thy heat (fif^a), flows the gold ; his
[men] are bright (fiict) after; there they (two) assume (d/id) immortal
names ; let the clans {v/() send garments for us.
The first pada might equally mean **he who left thy body (self) to the heat" In b,
ksdrai might equally be pres. pple. qualifying hiranyam. In d the translation assumes
the reading asmi instead of asmdi ; nearly all the mss. have the former (p. asmi iti ;
P.M.W. have asmdi^ but doubtless only by the not infrequent error of substituting di
for ^), and our understanding of the sense is too defective to justify emendations ; Ppp.,
however, has asmi. In c, Ppp. reads atra dadhrse 'mrt-. The Kau^. use of the verse
appears to be derived only from the occurrence of vdsitdni in d.
4. When these formerly went further forth, approaching each unfading
seat — the poet of the dry (? fffsd), the two licking mothers — do ye (two)
send for the sister (jdmi) a capable (dhiiryd) spouse.
The translation is, of course, simple nonsense. None of Lour J mss. accent gus in a ;
P.M. acccnt//7r7jJ/// before it; one (T.) combines -nto 'jurydm in b.
5. This great homage, verily, to thee, O broad-going one, do I a poet
make with poesy {kdvyd) ; when the two (m.), going united (saviydflc)
against the earth {ksd)y [then] increase here the (two) great bank-wheeled
{} rodhacakrd) ones (f.).
•* Hank-wheeled," i.e. rolling on between their banks. Tdt in our text (beginning of c)
is a misprint (or yd/. Prat. iii. 4 determines tl ; ii.97 determines stiy vdvrdhiU (p. vav-)
is by iii. 13. The Kau9. use of the verse seems suggested simply by samydfkcdu. The
irregular verse (9+11 : 11 + 12=43) is very imperfectly defined by the Anukr. ^The
London nis. of the Anukr. is here in disorder : and perhaps we ought to xt?A puro-brhatl
ior /fard-.j
6. Seven bourns {viaryddd) did the poets fashion ; unto one of these
verily went one distressed ; in the nest of the nearest {upatnd) community
(^ dyji) stood the pillar (skamb/id)^ at the release {visargd) of the roads, in
the supports (dharund).
V. I- nOOK V. THK ATHARVA-VKDA-SAMHITA. 222
The vcrsr is a RV. one, from a mystic ami olmcure liymn (x. 5.6) ; RV. puts /«/ after
/6J/// in b, and in c accents upamAsya nUU^ which alone is acceptable; all our mss.
give upamasyoy which our edition follows; and all save one (I).) read mUU without
accent, which we emended to ///•//. Tpp. f^ivcs in b tAsAm anekUm^ and omits, probably
by an ovrr5if;ht, the second half-verse. *' The life of mankiml is comparcfl to a race-
track, on which the };ods have marked many (seven) stations ; eac h generation {yugm)
reaches only one such goal, getting as far as the place where the next l>egins; there its
road terminates.** R.
7. Also, of immortal spirit, vowed {} vrdta), I go jKrrforming ; spirit,
soul, of the body then (^^ tdi) with kine (} sufmiii^n) \ and cither the
mighty one {ftilpti) assigns treasure, or as the oblat ion-giver pursues
{} sac) with refreshment.
This verse nnd vs. 5 |_4 .^J are the most utterly ho|>eless of the hymn ; even the conjec-
tures of the conim. respecting them would be welcome. Ludwig renders SMmdiigm Xvy
"erfreut gegangrn." Kor b, Ppp. reads asuttlt fiitas svaiihtnyA sammif^H ; in C iJ
jyestho ratfttl. I'd in c in our text is a misprint for 7'J. I'he verse lacks only one
syllable of being a full ///V/i/M, and that deficiency mij^ht t>e made up by reading either
^aJtftfs or rdtnatfi as trisyllabic. |^A barytone vnita is unknown elsewhere. J
8. Also son prays (} hi) father for dominion ; they called for well-being
him of the chief bourn (})\ may they see now, O Varuna, those that arc
thy shapes {iis(/ni) ; mayest thou make wondrous forms of the one much
rolling hither.
The translation implies emcn<lation in b to the comj>ound/v^jMifw*iyT^//4jjw,* i.e. 'him
who has received the best domain.* In d our ilvtirvrtatas is for the 'rvrai- of all the
m.s.s. ; it can hardly be that the text of this pada is not further corrupt. The vcrlM in
C d are au!:;nK'ntIt*ss form.s. and may, of course, l>e rendered indicatively. 1*PP* begins
the verse with putro nJ yaf pit-, and ends b with svasti. The Kau^. use of this verse
and the next is apparently founded on the occurrence in them of ** Mm *' and " father "•
and "half.'* The second pada is proper lyy*/^'<i//. •LNo ms. has m/<Iwi,J
9. Half with half milk thou mi.xest (?//*<*); with half, O Asura (.^), thou
increasest [thy] vehemence (?). We have increased the helpful (f<'^w//rt)
companion, Varuna, lively (isini) son of Aditi ; poct-praiscd wondrous
forms have we si>oken for him — the (two) firmaments {n^dasi) of true
speech.
This translation implies .srver.d emendations (or. at least, alterations) : in b, (usmam^
which Tp]). has. instead of tlie vocative (tuffnt, and a sunt, again with Ppp. (|>erhapt
Inrtler am tint • * not foolish ' ? i f. 1 1 . 5, Ik-Iow) ; in c, lU'h'rJhtiMa, which also Ppp- gives,
while »»nf or two of our n»ss. offer J : 7 ^r ■///// J //m (D.) and arifttihi^ma (Kp.). In f
ought to be arcrnifd iir(\tltfia ; the pttiftirwss., as elsewhere in suih cases, mark the
pAd.vdi vision aft-r tlic word, thus r<*( koninj; it to e, which is obviously wrong. Some of
our mss. (O.I).K ) accent in a prmiksi, which is the l>etter readini;, the case being one
of antithi'tical accent Tpp. fuitlirr lias p;7viiJ tor pttyastl in a, vafJkayase *SHrm in K
a.fitfr in d. and -:<)ii?w at tite end. The verse (11 ♦ II : li \ li : to (<> ?) 4- 1 1 =^»5 ("64 ?])
i^ tnnro nearly an d}ti than an u/}itifi. • [_This is given by s<mie of SPP's authorities J
223 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK V. -v. 2
2. Mystic.
\^BrhadJiva Athafvan. — navakam, vdruttam. trdistubham : g. bhurik parStijdgatd.^
Found also in Paipp. v. It is a RV. hymn (x. i2o) ; and the first three verses occur
in other texts. For the use of the hymn with its predecessor in Kau^. 15. i and 22. i
and 19. 1, note, see above, under h. i ; it is further applied, with vii. i, in a kdmya rite
(59. 17), with worship of Indra and Agni. The various verses appear also as follows:
vs. 3, in a rite for prosperity (21.21); vs. 4, with vi. 13 in a battle-rite (15.6) ; vs. 5 in
a similar rite (i 5. 8) ; vs. 6, in another (i 5. 9), and yet again, with vi. 1 25, and vii. 3 etc.,
as the king and his charioteer mount a new chariot (15. 11); vs. 7, next after vs. 3
(21. 23), with the holding of a light on the summit of an ant-hill; and vs. 8 in a
women's rite L34. 21J, next after v. 1.4 — all artificial uses, having no relation to the
texts quoted in them.
Translated: by the RV. translators; and Griffith, i. 189; Weber, xviii. 164.
1. That verily was the chief among beings whence was born the
formidable one, of bright manliness ; as soon as born, he dissolves [his]
foes, when all [his] aids (flmd) revel after him.
RV. reads in d dun ydm vl^ve mddattty timdh^ and all the other texts (SV. ii. 833;
VS. xxxiii. 80 ; AA. i. 3.4) agree with it The Anukr. ignores the considerable metrical
irregularities.
2. Increasing with might (fdvas), he of much force, a foe, assigns (Md)
fear to the barbarian, winning (n.) both what breathes not out and what
breathes out ; brought forward (n.), they resound together for thee in the
revelings.
Sense and connection are extremely obscure ; but all the texts (S V. ii. 834 ; A A. as
above) agree throughout. Ptdb/trid, of course, might be loc. sing, of -//*. Sdsni in c
is (with Grassmann) rendered as if it were sdsnis,
3. In thee they mingle skill abundantly, when they twice, thrice
become [thine] aids ; unite thou with sweet (svddti) what is sweeter than
sweet ; maycst thou fight against yonder honey with honey (mdd/iu),
RV. differs only by reading vrfijanti viqve at end of a; and SV. (ii. 835) and AA.
(as above) agree with it throughout; as does also Ppp. ; TS. (iii. 5.10*) begins d with
dta f? /;/, and ends it \s\^ yodhi^ which looks like a more original reading. \Qi, Gcldner,
Ved. Stud. ii. 10. J
4. If now after thee that conquerest riches in contest after contest
(rdna) the devout ones {vipra) revel, more forcible, O vehement one,
extend thou what is stanch; let not the ill-conditioned Ka^okas damage
thee.
RV. begins a with /// cid dhi ivd^ and b with rndde-made ; in c it reads (with Ppp.)
dhrsfto for {usmin^ and at the end of the verse ydiudhind durivAh ; Ppp. has instead
durevd ydtudhdndh. '
5. By thee do we prevail in the contests, looking forward to many
V. 2- BOOK V. TIIK ATHARVA-VEDA-SAKIHITA. 334
things to he foii<;ht [for]; I stir up thy wcaix)ns with s[>clls (I'ii^as); I
sharj»cn iij) tl)y powers {I'dyas) with incantation (dniAwnN).
KV. anil I'pp. have no variants.
6. Thou diilst sot that down in the lower and the higher, in what
abode (liurond) thou didst aid with aid ; cause ye to stand there the
moving mother; from it send ye many exploits.
KV. ami P|)p. put the verse after our 7. Tpp. has no variants; KV. reads in a
47*anifti pArath ai, and, for c, d, d mAitird sthnpayase ji^atni dia inou JtdrfarJt
fHruni: a quite different, Init little less obscure version of the text : ** Indra checks the
revolution of the sky, in order to f;ain time for his deeds.** K.
7. Praise thou fully, C) summit, the many-tracked, skilful (.^/Mftfw),
most active {ind) Aptya of the Aptya.s ; may he look on with might, he
of much force ; may he over|)ower the counterpart of the earth.
Th<* KV. version is different throuj^hout : sttis/yyam purux'drpa^am fbhvam indimmam
dptydm €iptytin,ltn : d iiarsaif (tii'ttsd saptd dAnun pt d %t\ksat€ praiimAmdni bkAri ; and
with this I 'pp. aj^rees. The transl.ition follows our text servilely, as it may ht calird,
save in the obviously unavoidable emendation of dptdm to dptydm in b ; (). is our only ms.
that reads Aptydm, The verse is far too irrej;ular to be let pass as merely a irisimhk.
8. These incantations (brdhmaft) may Hrihaddiva, foremost heaven-
winner, make, a strain ((tisd) for Indra; he rules, an autocrat, over the
great stall (ji^o(rd)\ may ho, quick {? /tini), rich in fervor, send (?) all.
I'he fourth pada is attemptrcl to be rendered literally from our text, althouj^h this is
plainly a f^ross corruption of the KV. text : diirit( ca T'/fr'il art nod dpa st*Ak. KV. has
also before it svariipts, and in a vivakfi for krttavat. Ppp. aj^rees with RV. through-
out. Svaruis (p. sva/f'-'sdh) is prescril>e<l by Pr;U. ii. 4').
9. So hath the groat Hrihaddiva Atharvan spoken of his own self
{iiifiti) [as of] Indra; the two blameless, mother-growing sisters — [men]
both impel them with might (fdvas) and increase them.
The secomt half verse .seems a^ain a corrupticm of the KV. version, which has plurals
instead of duals in c, and omits the meter-di.sturbtng ene (p. ene (ii) in d. Ppp- again
agrees with KV. ; but in b it h.is tiinum for tanvam. Our text should Rive, with the
others, tttAtat ibhvar- in c; all the mss. have it. I^Tlie vs. is svardj rather than bkmrij J^
3. To various gods: for protection and blessings.
iithit^rtlrthttn*tm ; 6,t), to fiF/f T-ii./r?-/ ; 7. sifHmi ; S,if. dtnJrf. itdistuhkam : M. bkmrtj ;
10. I'lrJt/htj^'i/i ]
Found aKi> in P.iipp v. (in tlic virsi'-or<ler i-d, 8, 9, 11, 7. 10). It is a RV. hymn,
X. 12S (whiih has the virse order I, 3, 5, 4, 6, 2. 9. 8, 10), with its nine verses changed
to clevrii by the expansion of vs. 5 int<} two, and by the addition at the end of a verse
which is fouufl also in the KV. mss.. but not as an acknowlrd^ed part of the text. The
KV. verses, iiu hiding; this l.i.sl, are found in their KV. order, and with unimportant vari-
ants, in TS. iv. 7. 14 '-4.
225 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK V. -v. 3
The hymn is variously employed by KSlu^. : in the pan^an sacrifices (i- 33), at enter-
ing on the vow; in rites (12.10) for glory; in one for prosperity (22. 14; and it is
reckoned to i\\^ fiusfika mantras, 19. i, note) ; in one for avoidance of quarrels (38. 26 :
so Kc^.), with tying on an amulet of a kind of rope ; and in a witchcraft process (49. 1 5)
against an enemy; further, vs. 11, with vii. 86 and 91, in the indramahotsava (140.6).
In Vfiit., in the fiarvan sacrifices, it (or vs. i) accompanies the addition of fuel to the
three sacrificial fires (i. 12) ; and vss. 1-4 the propitiation of the gods on commencing
sacrifice (i. 14).
Translated : by the RV. translators ; and Griffith, i. 192 ; Weber, xviii. 172.
1. Be splendor mine, O Agni, in rival invocations {yihavd)\ may we,
kindling thee, adorn ourselves ; let the four directions bow to me ; with
thee as overseer may we conquer the fighters.
The other texts (with MS. i. 4. i) have no variants in this verse. Ppp. appears to
read /rrt///r///rt iox pusema in b.
2. O Agni, pushing back the fury of our adversaries, do thou, our
keeper {gopd), protect us about on all sides; let our abusers (durasyu)
go away downwards; among themselves (avid) let the intent of them
awaking be lost.
RV's version of b, c reads thus : ddabdho gopAh pAri pnhi nas tvdtn : praiyAfico
yaniu niguiah punas ti ; and TS. has the same. But TS. also reads agnls at the
beginning, purAs/at for pAresdm in a, and prabudhd in d. Ppp. has prabudhd for
nivAUl in c, and, for d, tnamlsam ciitatii bahtidhA I'i na^yatu. The verse is properly
svarAj^ b as well as c \i€\vi^jagatl. \Qqxx^q\. gApih ^o gopah.\
3. Let all the gods be at my separate call — the Maruts with Indra,
Vishnu, Agni ; let the broad-spaced atmosphere be mine ; let the wind
blow (/;?) for me unto this desire.
K V. reads at the end kame asmitt^ and Ppp. agrees with it, also TS. TS. has further
indravatttas in b, and in c, strangely enough, urn gopAtn^ as two separate words.
4. Let what sacrifices I make make sacrifice for me ; let my mind's
design be realized (satyd) ; let me not fall into {ni-gd) any sin soever ; let
all the gods defend me here.
RV. and TS. read yajantu and havya (for isti) in a, and, for d, vi^ve devUso Adhi
vocatn nah (but TS. tne), Ppp. agrees with our text except for ending with ///J/// iha.
5. On me let the gods bestow {d-yaj) property; with me be blessing
(^ff/j), with me divine invocation ; may the divine invokers ijidtar) win that
for us ; may we be unharmed with our self {tantl)^ rich in heroes.
RV. has for c daivya hdt&ro vanusanta pUnn ; and TS. the same, except hdtArd
and vatiisanta. One or two of our mss. (Bp.H.) read sanisam in c. Ppp. begins a
with mahyatfiy and has mama for mayi both times in b.
ff
6. Ye six divine wide ones, make wide [space] for us ; all ye gods,
revel here ; let not a portent find us, nor an imprecation ; let not the
wrong that is hateful find us.
V. 3- BOOK V. THK ATHARVA-VKDA-SAttlllTA. 226
Only the first lialf-vcrsc is KV. matctial, forminj; its vs. 5 with our 7 C. d ; the lattrr
haU'Vcisc wc liave had already as i. 20. I c, d. KV. and IS. licgin with «//7'l/, and end
b with I'havttii/iT'am ; and TS. cxhlly combines .uttittrvti as a com|K>tind word; KV.
reads m<//i after it, and TS. fiah ; our mss. are divided lH*tween the two, liut with a ^rcat
pre)KHidcrance for 9iah (only K.I. 1 1, have /fff/i), so that it is more probalily to lie
reR.udrci as the AV. reading, rpp. f;ives uru ttas karAiha ; it has the second half-
verse of the other texts. Some of our mss. accent urvis in a (Hp.l'.M.K.), and some
accent t/^rdsas in b (I'.M).
7. Yc llircc goddesses, grant {yt^fft) us great protection, what is pros-
perous (/*tts(i1) for our progeny and for our.selves (fanA); let us not be
deserted {/tti) by progeny nor selves ; let us not be made subject to the
hater, O king Soma.
All the mss. accent at the hcpinnin;^ /isnis ; our tfxt emends to tl\ras. The second
half-vrrse, as alnive noted, k*^^'* ^'^^^ "^"' ^^ *• l> t*^ make one verse in KV. and TS. ; and
also in Tpp-, which has the vaii.mt lihanena for tanubhis in c For the present verse,
l*pp- agrees in the first half witii our text, only reading tne for nas ; for second half it
has: w/iJ/// visas sammana^o jusattttim pitfyam kittttafii ptta jAnAtv as$nAt. The
Anukr. ignores the extra syllable in a.
8. Let the bull (mahisa) (»f wide expanse grant us protection, having
much food (Ji'sti), [he] the much-invoked in this invocation; do thou be
gracious unto our progeny, O thou of the bay horses ; C) Indra, harm us
not, do not abandon us.
KV. and TS. read i'fr//i.r//</ at rn<l of a, and fnt,Uiytt at end of c (also our O.) ; at end
of b, KV. ami Ppp. have -ksuh^ >%hile T.S. a^rres with our text. In d the /«//<!• text has
ririuih^ by Pr.'it. iv. 8(i. 'I he Anukr. t.ikes no notice of the two redundant syllables in ft.
9. The Creator (iihatdt ), the disposer {^vidhatdr), he who is lord of being,
god Savitar, ovrrpowerer of hostile plotters, the Adityas, the Kudras, both
the A<;vins — let the gods protect the sacrificcr from perdition {ftirrtlui),
KV. and TS. read tihAttuim for vitihtVA in a, and tixarthit at the end, and have
for c imAm yajfiAm a^vino *bhi bfha%pAtir ; in b, K\'. has devAm trAtiram, and TS. 1/.
sari/dfitw, followed by iibhiniAttuifttim [^KV. -kAmj. I*pp. has vitikarM in a, savitA
devo*bhim- in b, and brhit\ptttir tmin\i;ni a^vifwbkA for C- The com))tnation /*!/ /M//r
in a is by Tr.it. n 70. The ///././-text n-ads abhimAti sahAh In b. The verse (12-f II ;
9 f 1 1 ■ .13) is much too i!ri-;;ul.ir to be p.issetl simj»ly as a trittubh.
10. They that are our rivals - away b«* they; with Indra and Agni
do we heat {fuiti/t) them down; the Adityas, the Kudras, sky-reaching
(} tipiinspt\), have made our over-king a stern corrector.
Tin* oiIht texts h.ivr tan for enAn at en<l of b. and akfttn at end of d, and, for C
7'<fi«i;v fUiiftt Ai/t/iti upati\p9\tim mA, which makes l>etter sense; they also accent
iHtAtam \\\ d And VS. whiih also has tlie verse (xxxiv. 4^1), af*rres with them
throughout. l*pp- presents instead a vrrse whirh is mostly found at TM. ii. 4.3*,nrit
before the vrise lorri-spondin^ to our 11 : ihA *tvAIinim ati k-.awt imiram jAitfAym
jetitrf : tt\mAkam a\tu vat nam yata.} kptu>tu 1 try am (instead of C« d. Til. has one
227 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK V. -v. 4
pada : asmakam asiu k^valah), \Omt 10 occurs at the end of the hymn in Ppp., which
reads in Aye fta( qapanty upa te^ in b apa bUdhUma yonim^ in c mdm for nahy and ends
with akran.\
II. Hitherward do we call Indra from yonder, who is kine-conqucring,
riches-conquering, who is horse-conquering; let him hear this sacrifice of
ours at our separate call ; of us, O thou of the bay horses, hast thou been
the ally (incdin).
The verse is found in TS., and in TB. (as above), and is the first of a long addition
to RV. X. 128. All these read alike in c, d: vihavi jusasvH *syd kurmo (RV. kulmo)
harivo medinam tvd; Ppp. nearly agrees, reading instead v.j\ *sfftdkam krnvo //. ///.
(va. The Anukr. apparently balances the redundancy of a against the deficiency of b.
4. To the plant kiistha: against takmfin [fever J.
[^Bhrgvangiras. — dafakam, yaksmandfanakiisihadrvatyam. dnustubham : j. bhurij ;
6. gdyatri ; to. usniggarthd nicrt.'\
All the verses except 4 are found also in Paipp., but in two books: vss. 1-3, 5-7 in
xix. (and not all together) ; vss. 8-10 in ii. It is not expressly quoted by Kau^., but
the schol. (26.1, note) regard it as included in the takmandqana gana^ and (28. 13,
note) also in the kusthalingds^ and so employed in a healing rite against rdjayaksma ;
vs. 10 is separately added (26. i, note) at the end of ^\^ gana.
Translated : Grohmann, Indische Studien^ ix. 421 (vss. i, 3-6) ; Zimmer, p. 64 (parts);
Grill, 9, 141 ; Griffith, i. 193 ; Bloomfield, 4, 414 ; Weber, xviii. 178.
1. Thou that wast born on the mountains, strongest of plants, come,
O kustlia^ effacer (-mifafta) of takmdn, effacing the fever {taktndn) from
here.
The kustha is identified as Costus speciosus or arabicus, The//i^<i-text reads in c
kustha : a : ihi ; and the passage is quoted as an example under Prat iii. 38, which
teaches the combination.
2. On an eagle-bearing (-stivana) mountain, born from the snowy one
{himdvant) ; they go to [it] with riches, having heard [of it], for they
know the effacer of fever.
* From the snowy one/ i.e. * from the Himalaya * ; we had the pada above as iv. 9. 9 b.
Ppp. begins with sttvarnasavane^ and has for c, d dhandir abhi^ruiam hakti kusthed
u (akmand^anah.
3. The afvatthdt seat of the gods, in the third heaven from here ; there
the gods won the kiist/ia, the sight {cdksana) of immortality {amfta).
Or, perhaps, an image or likeness of the amfta (drink). This verse and the next are
repeated below as vi.95. i, 2, and again, with slight variations, as xix. 39.6, 7. The
second pada occurs elsewhere in sundry places, as ChU. viii. 5. 3, HGS. ii. 7. 2. With c
compare RV. i. 13. 5 ; 170.4.
4. A golden ship, of golden tackle {-bdnd/tana), moved about in the
sky ; there the gods won the kustha, the flower of immortality.
V. 4- nooK V. Tin: atharva-vkda-samhita. 228
Mo^t of tlie iriM. api>e.ir to rcid avarat in a, but doubtless only owin|( to the imper-
fect distinction of ta .ind va in must Sanskrit writing;. So also, for the same reason, in
C they could l>c read for the moxt part as either /^//jrj'<i//i qt fuspatn (M. has/lari^ilMr) ;
the former was adopted in our edition as iK'ing favored by the meter.
5. Golden were the roads, the oars golden, the ships were golden by
which they brought out the kus{ha,
rpp. reads hifantnay, and omits c (doubtless by an oversight). All the mss. agree
in accentinf; liiitftiNt; but this should doubtless be emended to arit-. In a we may
emend to pdnthUs or combine pAnthAnA **san.
6. This man of mine, O ktist/ta — him bring, him relieve {mis-kf)^ him
also make free from disease for me.
With c compare the nearly identical vi. 95. 3 d. K.ll. read nfh Jtuttt.
7. I'Vom the gods art thou born ; (»f Soma art thou set as companion ;
do thou be gracious to my breath, out-breathing, sight here.
K.ll. accent yiJ/<^ 'si in a (p. jti/ti/i : <t%i). r|)p. reads ap^mU-a for vydm- in Ct and at
the end *sya tnrtia^ which is easier. LCf. Ilillebrandt, Mythologies i-^^S-J
8. liorn in the north from the snowy [mountain], thou art conductctl
to people (jiina) in the eastern [quarter] ; there have they shared out the
highest names of the kustha.
" The highest names " : i.e. the chief sorts or kinds [^bramls. as we moderns say J. The
reading tUian in a is assured by <iuotation under Trat. iii. 27. I'pp- reads // J^ro^r in b.
9. Highest by name, O kustha, art thou ; highest by name thy father ;
both do thou efface all j'J/.v //;</, and do thou make the fever sapless.
Ppj). has a wholly different second half \ yatas ktixf/ta pfajAyase tad thy nristatAt^ye.
10. Head-disease, attack (} tipahatyd), evil of the eyes, of the hotly —
all that may kustha relieve, verily a divine virility (visuya).
The reading //// karat in c falls under Prat. it. ^13. All the mss. i^ive aksM^ but the
pto}M-r readinf^ is plainly akxyos^ as the meter shows; the same error is found also in
other passages. The Anukr. implies akuh, as ahsytij (.u'-iij) would make the verse a
re;:ular anttxtubh. The Pet. I.exx. take upahatyim as governing; aksyM^ and so render
it * blinding.' |_l*pp- has for a {h^ahatyAm upahatya, and for c kustho mo vi^faias fAJ^
5. To a healing plant, lAksA.
Found also in iViipp. vi. (in the vcrsc-or<ler i, 2, 4. 5. 3, 7, 6. R, 9). Not tritnaHr
quotetl by KTuk;., but doubtless intended, as pointed out by the schol., in the /Jkid/tHj^JM
of 28. 14, as employed in a healing rite for flesh-wounds.
Transl.ai'd : /immcr, p. 67: (;rill. 10. 142; c;r:«»h i. 195 ; Bloomfield, 20, 419:
Webi-r, xviii. I Si
I. Ni^;bt [is tliy) motbiT, cloud (fuibhas) [ihy] father, Aryaman thy
grandfatluT ; siiact, verily, by name art thou ; thou art sister of the gods.
229 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK V. -v. 5
Ppp. has for c ^ilddf ndma vd *si. The last p^da is found also below as vi. 100. 3 b ;
and cf. vii. 46. i b.
2. He who drinketh thee liveth ; thou rescuest a man {pumsa) ; for
thou art a sustainer {bhartri) of all, and a hiding-place {} nydi\cani) of
people.
* Of all/ qaqvatdm^ lit. * of constant ones/ i.e. of as many as constantly come to thee.
Ppp. reads dhartrl ca for bhartri hi in c, and, for d, ^a^vatdm bhyatvamcant.
3. Tree after tree thou climbest, like a lustful girl ; conquering, stand-
ing by (} pratyd-siha)^ winner (spdrani) verily by name art thou.
Ppp. reads, for d, samjayS ndma vd *st\
4. If {yd() by a staff, if by an arrow, or if by flame {? hdras) a sore is
made, of that thou art relief ; relieve thou this man.
The two examples of nis before k are quoted under Prat. ii. 65. Ppp. reads in c, d :
asi bhisajl niskrtir ndma vd 'si: cf. 6 d below.
5. Out of the excellent plaksd thou arisest, out of the a^atthd, the
kliadird, the dhavd, the excellent banyan {nyagrod/ia), the panid ; do thou
come to us, O ariindhatt.
Tliesc are names of various trees. Ppp. combines ne *hi in d.
6. Thou gold-colored, fortunate, sun-colored one, of most wondrous
forms; maycst thou go to the hurt {? m/d), O relief; relief, verily, by
name art thou.
Vapustame (p. vapuJi-tame) is quoted as an example under Prat. ii. 83. In c, P.
reads rutuitn^ and H. (and Hp. ?) rtdm ; it might be from root ru *cry out': *come to
our call.' Ppp. reads at the beginning hiranyabdhu^ and, for d, se 'tnam niskrdhi pdu-
rusam (tlius exchanging 4 d and 6 d).
7. Thou gold-colored, fortunate, vehement {? (tismd), hairy-bellied one
— sister of the waters art thou, O Idksd ; the wind was thy soul.
Ldksd is not elsewhere met with as name or epithet of a plant : the Anukr. takes it
as the principal name : purvena \suktena\ Idksdm astdut, Ppp. reads yuvate for
subhage in a. [Cf. Pischel, Ved. Stud. i. 178; Bloomfield, ZDMG. xlviii. 574.J
8. Sildd by name — thy father, O goat-brown one, is a maid's son;
Yama's horse that is dark brown {^ydvd) — with its mouth (.^ blood .^) art
thou sprinkled.
Tlic first line is translated in accordance with the text as it stands; Grill emends
to kd/tff/d *jdbabhruh Laccent, Gram, §1268: djababhru could only be vocative J.
The pada-i(txi reads dsfta in d [^SPP. asna\^ but asndh in 9 a; the translation implies
dS' in both; Grill understands as- both times. Ppp. has for a, h ghrtdcf ndma kdnino
*ta babhru fiitd tava,
9. Fallen from the horse's mouth, she invaded the trees ; having
become a winged brook {? sard), do thou come to us, O arundliati.
V. 5 - HOOK V. THK ATIIAKVA-VLDA-SAXIIIITA. 230
IlK. I^iv. 405J take a to mean * coaf^ulated from the horse's blood,* understandini;
asfifh^ with the /////rflext. With c ioinpare RV. x. f)7. 9 (VS. xii.83) slrdA paiaiHmik
sthana (TS. iv. 2. (»' an<l MS. h. 7. 13 read sntih insteafi). The word sisrade <p.
si%yade) comc.% tiiuicr Tiat. ii.91, 103; iv. 82. 124. In the printed text. sApatitd is a
misprint for sAtttp-, [^I'pp. has for b si\ par nam ahhii^u^yatah and combines mt *Af in d. J
The fust anu7uH'a, 5 hymns and 4.S verges ends here. The ({uoted Anukr. sa)*s
dvisatibhir thfyah (i.e. twice six short of 60 verses).
6. ? [Disconnected verses. J
\^Atkart'4tH. — fitturdtffntttm. snmdrtn/fnuiftt : /. htikmthfttvttm {'tttAut) ; 9. karmAm ; j, /.
f Mj/riix'iimf w ; j 7. jomihttt/nlu ; S. iayor rrw ptdfihitnam ; 9. ktttm ; iO-/j larfj'
Itfutk.im nii/fitm. tttitituf'hnvt : I. tinustuhh ; j, ^.jagati {4. anMsttthutmk'
sttthk ; JO. pra s /thitp*i ti kit ; it- 14. f*\ fi ktt {14. st-ar dj) . ]
[Verses 0 14 arc prose ; and so is verse 4. in part. J
Found also (except vss. 6, 7) in I'aipp. vi. The first four verses and the eleventh
occur to);ether in K. xxxviii. 14. As tliis hymn has tlie same first verse with iv. 1. the
quotation of the ptatika in Kau(;. (U)cs not at all show which of the two hymns is
intcndcfl ; but the schol. determine the cpiestion by adding the pratika of vs. 2 also, and
even, in a case or two. that of vs. 3 ; and the coinm. to iv. i af^rees with them. On this
evidence, v. 6 ap|>cars in a battleiite (15. 12) to show whetlicr one is f;oin|||; to come
out alive ; in the (ilrtlkarman (18. 25), with i. 5 and ^1 etc. ; on occasion of Roinj; away
on a journey (18.27); >" a healint: rite (28.15) for the iH-nefit of a child-l>earin|;
woman or of an epileptic [sec |). xlv. of Jiloomfield's IntrmluitionJ ; and in a ceremony
for welfare (51- 7)« with xi. 2 ; it is also reckoned (50. 13, note) to the ftlMtira j^ama.
Translate<l : (irinith, i. i«/i; Weber, xviii. 185. — I he " hymn " is entitJcd by Wel>cr
" Averiuncatio beim Kintritt in den Schaltmonat.'*
1. The bnihvian that wa.s first born of oM,Vcn.i hath unclosed from
the well-shining edge; he unclosed the fundamental nearest positions of
it, the womb of the existent ami of the non-existent.
The verse occurred alH)vc, as iv, i. i [where rnfhas is rendered * shapes* J.
2. Who of you did what fir.st unattained deeds — let them not harm
our heroes here ; for that inir|)ose I put you forward.
This verse too has occurred already, as iv. 7. 7. Ppp. combines :•/ *tai in d.
3. In the thou.sand-.strcamcil one they resounded {svar) together, in the
firmament (fitllui) of the sky, they the honey-tonguetl, unhindered. I lis zeal-
ous (Mfinii) spies wink not ; in every place are they with fetters for tying.
The veise is KV. ix. 73. 4. and is of mystic and ob5« ure meaninj;. RV. reads -dhAti
'va Lp. -ff «frif J (for -tf/ttlnlh nut ^) in a, tftya at beginning of C, and s/iavas at end
of d. I*pp. l>e;;ins with sa has ram af'/ti tf sam.
4. Round about do thou run forward in order to the winning of booty,
round about overpowrring advors.irios (i-r/ni, n ) ; then thou goest over
haters l)y the sea (nrfhi'd). Weakling (samsrasd) by name art thou, the
thirteenth month, Indra's house.
231 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK V. -V. 6
The first three padas of the verse are RV. ix. i lo. i (repeated, with frase for lyase at
the end, as SV. i. 428 ; ii. 714), which reads in a dhanva (without lengthening of the
final), and has for c dvisAs tarddhyil rnaya na lyase ; of this our text appears to be a
simple corruption. [^In the RV. version, //vf dhanva (cf. ix. 109. i a) and rnayA nah
seem to be insertions like those in AV. ii. 5. J Ppp. reads sahasraqas instead of satii-
srasas in d, and in c divas tadj which comes nearer to making sense. The verse, with
its prose ending, is most naturally divided as 12 + 8 : 12 + 7 + 11=50; but iht pada-mss,
put the piida division strangely after trayoda^ds.
5. Now (not }) hast thou succeeded {rdd/i) by that, thou yonder (asdii) :
hail ! having sharp weapons, having sharp missiles, very propitious, O
Soma and Rudra, do ye be very gracious to us here.
For asdu • thou yonder * is doubtless to be used the name of the person addressed in
practice : = O so-and-so. Ppp. reads for the first division of the verse vlUndvditeudwdi-
tena rdtsthlrar asdu svdhd^ which seems intended virtually to contain vss. 5-7 ; it has
in b, c iigvid- and su^evd *gnlsomdv iha ; and it puts the verse after our vs. 8. The
Pet. Lex. makes the pertinent suggestion Ls.v. anu + rddh\ th-t nii at the beginning is for
dftu ; nii is nowhere in AV. found at the beginning of a pada or clause — nor in RV.
except as prolonged to //;/. Unhappily we get no help on the subject from the sense.
LWliitney's "(not?)" is not clear to me, unless it is meant to suggest emendation to
ndit^na = nd ethta. If we read <f////, we must render, * Thou hast succeeded by that.'
But does not the Ppp. reading suggest rather vi eUna ardisls f\
6. Thou hast failed {ava-rddh) by that, thou yonder : hail ! having
sharp etc. etc.
7. Thou hast offended (apa-rddh) by that, thou yonder : hail ! having
sharp etc. etc.
These two variations on vs. 5 are not given by Ppp. save so far as they may be inti-
mated in its beginning of 5.
8. Do ye (two) release us from difficulty, from reproach (avadyd) ;
enjoy ye the offering ; put in us immortality {amrtd).
Some of the mss. (Bp.*0.) read asmat instead of asmatt, Ppp. has asntdt^ and
after \\. grbhlthdt,
9. O missile ijictl) of sight, missile of mind, missile of incantation
(brd/unan), and missile of penance ! weapon's weapon {mcni) art thou ;
weaponless be they who show malice against us.
With this verse and the next is to be compared TB. ii. 4. 2» : c. h, ///. //. I'ico hete
brdhmano hete : yd md *ghdyur abhidAsati idm agne wenyi ^menlth krnu^ etc. ^Cf.
Gcldner, Festgruss an Ddhtlingk^ p. 32.J The Anukr. omits any metrical definition
of the verse. |_It seems rather to regard it as included under the general definition
'' (rdistnbham:'\
10. Whoever with sight, with mind, with intention, and whoever with
design, malicious, shall attack us — do thou, O Agni, with weapon make
them weaponless : hail !
V. 6- BOOK V. THE ATHARVA-VEDA-SAKIIHTA. 232
Til. (an al)Ove) reads: yd Mtl ctitsusH yd mdnnsA yd vAkA brAkwanA *gkAynr
nbhiJtisnti : tAyA '/^nf tvAm menyi *9nttm amentm krnu, i*pp. has in the last clause
iviim ^i^nf ivam fftettyA ^menim k-. The metrical dclinition of this prose ** verse ** is
unaccountably wronj;.
11. Indra's house art thou; to thcc there I go forth; thcc there I
enter, with all my kine, with all my men, with all my soul, with all my
body, with that which is mine.
Tpp. reads sarvitpAuruuih.
12. Indra*s refuge art thou ; to thee etc. etc.
13. Indra's defense art thou ; to thee etc. etc.
14. Indra's guard {viifiK/iti) art thou ; to thcc etc. etc.
The accent-mark which belongs under /7vl in 12 and 13 Ls omitted in our teit, and in
14 it has slipped out of place and stands under tarn. The metrical definition is worth-
less, though each of the four vciscs contains not far from 40 S)ll.iblcs.
7. Against niggardliness and its effects.
[Atktirtiin {T). — da^ahtm. f^t^Hi/iiwt/yifm {f-j^ 6- /o. ttrdiiyAt ; 4, j;. sAran-atvAit). AmttttU'
hham j. x-irAtfji^arhhA fritttdntfafikti ; 4. faikyAbf kati ; 6- fTaMtArapankh.\
Not found in Taipp. Used by Kauq. in the 9nrrtikarman (18. 14), with an offering
of rice-grains ; and, with iii. 20 and \ii. 1. in a rite for f^ood- fortune (41.8); while the
schol. also adds it to vi. 7 (4^1.4, note), in rcmovini; obstacles to sacrifice; of sepa-
rate verses, vs. 5 (schol., vss. 5-10) appears, with vii. 57, in a ceremony (46.6) for the
success of requests. Vait. has the hymn (or vs. i ) in tiie a^ftiiayana (28. 19), with
the vanlvAluina rite ; further, vs. 6 in the parvan sacrifices (3. 2), with an oblation to
Indra and Agni; and vs. 7 at the aj^nistoma (12. 10) in expiation of a forbidden utter-
ance. The hymn in ^enrral seems to be a euphemistic offering of reverence to the
spirit of avarice or stin>;iness.
Translated : I.udwijj, p. 305 ; drill. 39, 145 ; Griflith. i. 19S ; Hloomfield, 172, 423 ;
Weber, xviii. 190.
1. liring to us, stand not about, O niggard ; do not prevent (? raks) our
sacrificial gift as led [away]; homage be to baflling (x'irtsd), to ill-success;
homage be to the niggard.
P.M.W. omit ffti in a. One sees, without approving, the ground of the metrical defi-
nition of the Anukr.
2. What wheedling (} /*arirt}/*in) man thou puttest forward, O niggard*
to him of thine we pay homage : do not thou disturb my winning (rant).
The third p.ida can be read as full only by violence, ^See Cram. § 1 048. J
3. Lrl our g<»<l-made winning progress (fnil'ff) by day and by night;
we go forth after the niggard ; homage be to the niggard.
Up." rr.vU r</f for /mj in a ; in c I'p.-I* M.K. rrail ttfAthn, and II. F. I. ArAtim : our
text shouitl doubtless have adopted AtAttm. The third pada is redundant by a syllabic.
233 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK V. -V. 8
4. Sarasvati, Anumati, Bhaga, we going call on ; pleasant {jus(d)
honeyed speech have I spoken in the god-invocations of the gods.
5. Whomever I solicit {ydc) with speech, with Sarasvati, mind-yoked,
him may faith find today, given by the brown soma.
* Faith given,' i.e. 'confidence awakened.' With b compare 10.8, below. LSec
Bloomfield, AJP. xvii.412 ; Oldenberg, ZDMG. 1. 448.J
6. Do not thou baffle our winning nor speech. Let Indra and Agni
both bring good things to us. Do ye all, willing today to give to us,
welcome the niggard.
That is, probably (if the reading is correct), give a pleasant reception that may win
favor. The mss. vary between v)r(sls and vir- ; theoretically, the former is decidedly
to be preferred, for, if /+ i make /, then a fortiori /+ /: see note to Prat. iii. 56. In c,
H.E.O.K. read no after sdrve. The first half-verse is very irregular.
7. Go thou far away, O ill-success ; we conduct away thy missile ; I
know thee, O niggard, as one putting {? mlv) down, thrusting down.
The fourth pada lacks a syllable.
8. Likewise, greatly making thyself naked, thou fastenest on {sac) a per-
son in dreams, O niggard, baffling the plan and design of a man {piimsa).
It seems as if nagnd bobhuvatl were the equivalent of mahdnagnl bhavantl * becom-
ing a wanton,* the intensive element being shifted from the adjective to the verb. The
pada-\AxX reads svapna-ya^ by Prat. iv. 30.
9. She that, being great, of great height (-unmana), permeated all
regions — to her, the golden-haired, to perdition have I paid homage.
10. Gold-colored, fortunate, gold-cushioned, great — to her, the golden-
mantled, to the niggard have I paid homage.
The tenth prapilthaka^ the first of the three very unequal ones into which this book
is divided, ends here.
8. Against enemies: to Indra and other gods.
\^Atkan'au {J). — navakam. ndnddevatyam : /, 2. dgntye ; j. vdifvadevi ; ^-g. dindryas. dnustu-
bham : 2. j-<w.6-p.jagatt ; j, 4. bhurikpathydpankti ; 6. prastdrapaiikti ; 7. dvyusniggarbhd
pathydpankti ; g.j-av.6-p. dxyusniggarbhd jagatl.'\
Found also (except vs. 7) in Paipp. vii. Not quoted in Vait., and in Kau9. only
once, in a witchcraft ceremony (48.8), after iv. 16, with the direction "do as specified
in the text."
Translated: Ludwig, p. 439; Griffith, i.200; Weber, xviii. 194.
I. With fuel of vlkahkata do thou carry the sacrificial butter to the
gods; O Agni, make them revel here; let all come to my call.
The vikahkata is identified as Flacourtia sapida^ a thorny plant. Ppp. reads sfidaya,
which is better, in c, and combines sarvd **yantu in d.
V. 8- BOOK V. THK ATHAKVA-VKDA-SAttlllTA. 234
2. () Inrlra, come to my call; this will I do; that hear thou; let
these ovcr-ninners {? a/isurd) of Indra's brinp^ to pass (sam^Mtft) my
design ; by them may we be e(|ual to (f<//) heroism, O Jatavedas,
self-controller.
The o!isturc tttiMitf\i is rrmlercd ctymolo;;iraliy, iKriiii; fcmnd nowhere else; the Tel-
Lex, ronjcctu res •*st.irt, effort.** Vox it/tim karisyilNti in b is proliably sulMtituted in
practical use a statL'inrnt of the act performed. The Anukr. takes no notice of the
redundant syllal>le in the p.'iila.
3. What he there yonder, O god.s, being godless, desires to do — let
not Agni carry his oblation ; let not the gods go to his call ; come ye only
(i'vd) unto my call.
Some of the mss. (np'.p.m.Ilp.I.D.) read cikhiiati in b. We may make the con-
traction tifvil *HM in d, though the Anukr. docs nut sanction it.
4. Overrun {nti-d/ttiv), ye over-runners; slay by Indra's spell (fxf^/ii) ;
shake (ffiath) ye as a wolf [shakes] a sheep ; let him not be released from
you alive; shut up his breath.
The end of the verse is diffcrrnt, hut without scn.se, in I'pp* An accent-mark has
dropped out under the ta of mathnlta in our text [^and under hata there is one which
should l>e deleted J. The Anukr. apparently forbids us to make the familiar contraction
vrke *va in c, and then overlooks the deficiency of a syllable in d. [_Cf. Uergaignr,
Rel. v/if. iii.7-8.J
5. What brahmdn they yonder have put forward for failure {dpabhfiti)^
[be] he beneath thy feet, O Indra ; him I cast unto death.
lirahmAn : probably |)erformcr of an incantation. i*pp. reads abhibkuMyi in b.
6. If they have gone forward to the gods* strongholds (///m), have
made incantation {hrdhman) their defenses — if (^jd/) making a body-
protection, a complete protection, they have encouraged themselves (///<f-
vac) : all that do thou make .sapless.
The verse is found a^ain below, as xi. 10. 17,* but without commentary. JirJAmam
may have here one of its higher sen.scs ; possibly f#/<t-t'#ii' is to l>e understood as
= tipa-vad " ri'proach, imputf.' Kor IfNT't^ml viid tifft\if/, '*rp' fcads simply taktin,
with patip^ttilni before it. The vrrse is plainly a pathyt^pankti^ but the pada-waA,
support the misronrcptifm of thr Anukr. by putting the pAda-division after krnvlknit.
The Anukr. ou^^ht to say 4}\ti}tiif'ttiHti, but it not very rarely makes this confusion.
•[Vol. iii. p. 195. of SlTs cd.J
7. What over-rimners he yonder has made, and what he shall make,
do thou, 0 India, Vitra-slayer, turn (d-kr) them back again, that they
may shatter (////) yon person (Jdna).
Wanting (as nntrd aUtvc) in Tpp LK«»r ttnA/ttln^ .see Gfttm §<»87.J
8. As Indra, taking Udvficana, put [him] underneath his feet, so do I
put down them yonder, through everlasting ((d(Viif) years (sdmd).
23S TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK V. -v. 9
Udvacana is heard of nowhere else, and the name looks so improbable that the Pet.
Lexx. conjecture udviif\cana ; Ppp. has instead udvdtana ; it puts this verse at the end
of the hymn. The redundancy of d is passed without notice by the Anukr.
9. Here, O Indra, Vrtra-slayer, do thou, formidable, pierce them in
the vitals ; just here do thou trample upon them ; O Indra, thine ally am
I ; we take hold on thee, O Indra ; may we be in thy favor.
Some of the mss. (H.I. O.K.) read atrai *nan in a ; and some (P.M.W.O.) reckon
the last two padas as a tenth \ox separatej verse. MdrmSni in b in our text is a
misprint for mdrmani. The Anukr. appears to count, without good reason, only 7
syllables in d as well as in b.
9. For protection: to various gods.
\B rah man. — aslnkam. vdstospaiyam. /, j". ddivt hrhait ; 2^ 6. ddivt trisiubh ; J, 4. dUivJ Jat^ati ;
7. viradusuighrhatigarbhd ^'p. jagati ; 8. pnraskrtitristubbrhatJgarbhd 4-p.j-av. jagati.\
LTIiis piece is prose. J Neither this piece nor the next is found in Paipp. This one
is quoted in Kau9. (28.17) *" * remedial ceremony, together with vi. 91 ; and it is
reckoned (8. 23, note) to the vdstu gana and (26. i, note) the iakmand^ana gana.
Translated : Griffith, i. 201 ; Weber, xviii. 197.
1. To heaven hail I
2. To earth hail !
3. To atmosphere hail I
4. To atmosphere hail I
5. To heaven hail !
6. To earth hail !
LThe invocations of vss. 4-6 are those of 1-3 with changed order. J
7. The sun my eye, wind my breath, atmosphere my soul (d/mdn),
earth my body ; unquelled (astrtd) by name am I here ; [as] such I deposit
myself for heaven and earth to guard {gopu/id),
8. Up life-time, up strength, up act {krtd), up action (krtyd), up skill
(jnaulsd), up sense {indriyd) ; O life- {dyus-) maker, O ye (two) mistresses
of life, rich in svad/ui\jn,]t be ye my guardians, guard me ; be my soul-
sitters ; do not harm me.
The nouns with * up * are accusatives, but what verb should be supplied for the con-
struction it is not easy to see. Perhaps ayuskrt (p. aytth-krt) should be -krtd, as dual ;
at any rate, all that follows it is dual. Apparently the Anukr. would divide vs. 7 as
9+12 : 10 + 7 + 10 = 48 ; and vs. 8 as 9+1 1 : 20: 11 =51 ; but the descriptions are blind
and inaccurate. LWeber discusses the peculiarities of gender.J
A passage corresponding to this hymn is found in K. xxxvii. 15.
V. lO- BOOK V. THE ATIIARVA-VEDA-SAttHITA. 236
10. For defense from all quarters.
l^rhiii piece \% |)rnse.J This pirrc, like the preceding, is wAntiny; in TAipp. Tarts
of vss. 1-7 arc apparently used liy Kauq. in a ma^ic rite (49. 7-9); ami certainly those
verses are <pioti*(l in a (cremony (51. 14) for the welfare of tlic hutise with bur^'lni; L^^'^J
stones in its corneis \j\\\i\ middle and puttini;*; a &ixth al)ove itj; and the h)nnn is
reckoned (.^. 23, note) to the vAstu ^atta ; while vs. 8 appears, with vi. 53 and vii. 67, in
the savtiYtijntts (f/). 2). In Vait. (29. 11) the verses arc addressed to the stones of
ench)sure in the /;(;;//< if )'<i//«i.
Translateil : (fiilhth, i. 202 ; Weber, xviii. 200.
1. My stoiic-dcfcnse art ihou ; whoever from the eastern qtiartcr,
malicious, shall assail me, this may he come uik)ii (n//).
2. My stonc-dcfeiise art thou ; whoever from the southern qtiartcr
etc. etc.
3. My stone-defense art thou ; whoever from the western quarter etc. etc.
4. My stone-defense art thou ; whoever from the northern quarter
etc. etc.
5. My stone-defense art thou ; whoever from the fixed quarter etc. etc.
6. My slone-dcfcnse ait tliou ; whoever from the upward qtiartcr
etc. etc.
It is i>ossil)le to reat! these verses as 7 -I- i 2 (or 13 \jm 14J) : 5-24 (or 25 ^or 26, vs. 2 J).
7. My stonc-dcfcnsc art thou ; whoever from the intermediate quarters
of the quarters etc. etc.
0. is the only ms. that fdls out the paraj^raphs !>etween 1 and 7; and it leaves
aghtiytir unelided in all the vetsts. In para;:raph 7 of our edition the accent-mark has
drop|)ed out under the va of a^mararmti. The Anukr. reads 7 f 16 : 5 = 28 syllables.
8. Hy the great one (i>r/uit) I call unto mind ; by Matari^^van, unto breath
and expiration; from the sun [I call] sight, from the atmosphere hearing,
from the earth body ; by Sarasvati, mind-yoked, we call unto speech.
The vi*rse divides most naturally as 9 K9: 16: 16-50; the metrical definition of the
Anukr. fits it very ill. [For c if. v 7. > J
The second anwrMLit ends hrre. aiul contains 5 hymns and 49 verses ; the old Anukr.
says thhM fara el'thia^tthlnaxajti/i.
II. [Dialogue l>etweenj Varuna and Atharvan.
Found also in Paipp. viii. It i^ used by Kau^. only once, and in a connection which
ra^ts rn» li-ht iipun it. namely at xi. i. in a lite for prnrral wrlfue (one eats a dish of
milk-ritf* conketl on a t'lre of tr,}./,}n.ii'.t stit ks). It is not quoted at all by V4it. The
intrrpr(.-tatii>n in detail is ditlit ult ami far fiom certain.
237 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK V. -v. 1 1
Translated: Muir, OST. i.»396; Griflith, i. 203 ; Weber, xviii. 201. — Treated by
Roth, Ueber den A K, p. 9 ; also by R. Garbe, Wissenschaftliche Monatsblatter^ Konigs-
berg, 1879, no. i. — A note in lead-pencil shows that Whitney meant to rewrite his ms.
of this hymn.* But the reader may consult the recent detailed comment of Weber. —
Wcbcr assigns vss. 1-3, 6, 8, and 10 b, C, d to Varuna; and 4, 5, 7, 9, and 10 a to
Atharvan. Varuna has a mind to take back the cow which he gave to Atharvan, but
gives up his intention at the request of Atharvan. Further reference to this legend
seems to be made at vii. 104. i. • LPossibly the copy from which this is set is a second
draft.J
1. How unto the great Asura didst thou speak here.? how, with shin-
ing manliness, unto the yellow (lidri) father ? having given, O Varuna, a
spotted [cow] as sacrificial fee, thou hast with the mind intended (i cikiis)
re-bestowal (.?).
The second half-verse is probably meant as what was " spoken." The translation of
d implies Aufrechl's acute emendation (in Muir) of the reading to punarmaghatvdm .
The sense oi punarmagha is very doubtful : Roth "greedy" ; Muir (Aufrecht) ** to take
her back," and ** revoking" ; neither seems to belong properly to the word, which ought
to mean something like * bountiful in return * : i.e. Varuna is expected to give back to
Atharvan the cow the latter has presented to him (or another and better one). One
might conjecture in c vdrutte * to Varuna,* and understand cikiis as • impute ' or * expect.'
Roth regards the verse as spoken by Varuna ; Muir, by Atharvan; the former is more
acceptable. Ppp. begins kathd diva asurilya bravdtnah kathdy and reads pr^nih in c.
LR. takes hdri as * wrathful. 'J
2. Not at pleasure am I a re-bestower; for examination (.?) do I drive
home this spotted [cow] ; by what poesy (kdvya) now, O Atharvan, [art]
thou [poct].^ by what that is produced {jdld) art thou jd/dvcdas f
The rendering of b implies the necessary and obvious emendation of sdw cakse
(P.M.W. -ksve) to safftciiksfy infinitive. Kamena seems taken adverbially, = /"Jwrlyr/,
kdmam^ kdtndt; the god is not to be moved to counter-liberality by the mere desire of his
worshiper, but challenges the latter's claim on him* Jdiavedas^ lit. 'having for posses-
sion whatever is produced (or born),* * all- possessor.' B.P.M. accent dtharvan in c;
one might emend to dtharvd : * in virtue of what poetic merit art thou Atharvan ? ' The
verse belongs of course to Varuna. Ppp. reads in b samprcchi and updjet.
3. I verily am profound by poesy; verily by what is produced I am
jdtdvcdas ; not barbarian {ddsd), not Aryan, by his might, damageth (jni)
the course which I shall maintain.
Muir ascribes the verse to Atharvan; Roth, better, to Varuna; the god asserts that
it is he himself to whom wisdom and possession belong; his worshiper is comparatively
nothing. Ppp. begins with satvasam and reads tnahitvam in c, and hanisya at the end.
The Prat. (iv. 96) establishes the long I of mlmdya as a /<z^-reading. The Anukr.
absurdly calls the verse Vipanktiy although it is an evident tristubh^ not less regular than
a great proportion of the verses so called. LThc tne in c is easier rendered in German
than in English. J
4. None else than thou is more poet, nor by wisdom {mcd/td) more
V. II- HOOK V. Tilt: ATIIARVA-Vi:iM-SAttHnA. 238
wise (#/////'</), O Vanina, self-ruling one (svnd/nivani) \ thou knowcst all
these heiiif^s ; even that wily man (jdfin) now is afraid of thee.
rpp. r<'.i(Is in a veiihA ann (for medluiytl), aiitl Iiaa at end of b tlic more antique
form svatiht^vas ; as siTond Imlf-vnsc it j;ivcs : tvam tinj^a Tt^vA pinmAni \titka
ftuttam na tuj jano nit} tit btbhtlyah.
5. Since thou verily, O self-ruling Varuna, knowcst all births, O well-
conducting one — is there anything else beyond the welkin {nijas)i is
there anything below what is beyond, O unerring one (?^w//frf)?
The version ^ivcn implies that /-//// is interro;;;. particle in c, d, as l>est suits tlie
answer in the next verse : else, * what other is beyond * etc. Awura in b is understood
as amtfftt, as reqiiirrd by the mrter: rf. v. 1.9. Ppp. af^ain reads svaiikJtvas in a;
and, in b and further, jannu^ ^rtttfti/tatiattl le kirn mf»u\ ftijttsat faro 'sit kim axHiremm
avtiftim tui'tnt. The m.ijoiity of mss. (li.l'.M.II.s.m.O. etc.; only K.I.il.p.m.K. have
as/t) accent tis/i at en<I of c. [^Kor the combination enA patAs = * beyond,* in 3d pAda,
sec UK. iv. 494. I su^r^est for d, * Is there {kitn) (anything; l>chind, dvaram, i e.)
anything beyond that (rw'f, substantive pronoun) which is !>cyond {fi*^'^^^)^*}
6. There is one other thing beyond the welkin ; there is something,
hard to attain, hitherward from what is beyond : this I Varuna, knowing
it, proclaim to thee. Ik* the panics of degraded speech; let the barba-
rians creep (jr//) downward to the earth.
The tiansl.ition implies emend.ition of varuna to vArunnh in c, which seems neces-
sary, as the verse evidently belongs in Varuna*s mouth ; both Roth and Muir to under-
stand it. In d is implied titf/ii'Tuiittitts^ which all the mss. reail ; alteration Ko "Varfasas
mi^ht l»e welcome, but is hardly called for. Ppp- is considerably different; it reads:
V*f fktim euti rajitstis piuo'sti pttrf *keHtt tfutfilhytim tyajan yat : tat tve acKhovacasas
dAsA y*\ >*pa safpiiHtu riptA. The meter of a would l>e rectified by omitting the super-
fluous enA ; that of b, by a like omission (which the I*aipp. text also favors), or, so far
as the meaning is concoined, better by reading tni pAretui dur- etc. The description
of the verse by the Anukr. as an ati^akvarf (though it still lacks one syllable of sixty)
helps to authenticate the text as the mss. present it.
|_ Whitney, on the revision, would doubtless have made clear his views as to b. Ik>th
sense and mi:ter indicate that the end in a and the tnA in b are intrusions; they have
blundered in fiom 5 C Omittini; them, I lender : * There is one other thing beyond the
welkin ; [and.] l>eyond [that] one thing, [is] something hard to get at (durnA^am fit)
[if you stait] (mm this si<le [of thrm] ' | \^l underst.ind Ai/ /rr airhovarastts to mean
merely th:tt Tpp. rrnds /;r for tf and an fwraiiiuts [or adhtKdi a sak — not that It omits
the rest fiom tf to nhAh.^
7. Since thou verily, () Varuna, speakest many reproachful things
among (.is to ?) re-bcstowcrs, do not tbnu, I pray, belong to (abhi-bka)
such pouis ; Id not people call thee ungenerous {anhi/ids).
The ri ndrring implii-s emend.itiim of hhut to bhtis at end of c, which is made also by
Kotii and Muir. The p.id.i is corrupt in I'.iipp.
8. Let not people call me ungenerous ; I give thee back the spotted
239 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK V. -v. 12
[cow], O singer ; come thou mightily {fdclbhis) to every song of praise
{s(otrd) of mine, among all human regions (rf/f).
Roth's suggested emendation of diksii at the end to viksu * settlers, tribes,' accepted
by Muir, is unquestionably an improvement of the text ; Ppp. has unfortunately a different
reading : d yiihi janestt antar devesu indnusesu riprd, Diksu is read in Prat. iv. 34 c.
9. Let uplifted {ud-yavi) songs of praise of thee come, among all human
regions. Give now to me what thou hast not given me ; thou art my
suitable comrade of seven steps ; —
That is, apparently, ready to go seven steps (or any indefinite distance) with me.
Roth suggests as an improved reading adattas * hast taken from me * in c, and Muir so
renders. Hoth words are alike, and equally, wrong grammatically, using the passive
pple in the sense of an active ; ddattam dsti would be correct, and at this Ppp. perhaps
points : dchi tain mahyam yadi tatvam asti yadyo nas saptapadah sakhil *sah. Ppp.
also begins with^/J t€ stotrdni bandhandni yUni^ and apparently has diksu in b.
10. Of US two, O Varuna, [there is] the same connection, the same
birth (yrf).
I know that which is of us two this same birth ; I give that which I
have not given thee ; I am thy suitable comrade of seven steps ; —
It seems necessary to divide this verse between the two speakers, and doubtless
Roth's assignment of only the first pada to Atharvan is better than Muir's of the first
half-verse. With Roth's division the ndu is called for in a as in b, and Roth's emenda-
tion to samilnd bAndhus^ though it is read by Ppp. (whose testimony on such a point is
of little value), is hardly acceptable ; better samd ndu, Ppp. reads also, for b, vada
vdiiad vadam samd jdh ; and, for c, daddmi tubhyam yadi tatvam asti ; and it
omits d. [^The translation implies ddattam dsti as in 9.J
I r . A god, bcstower of vigor on a singing god ; a sage {vipra)^ of good
wisdom for a praising sage.
Since thou, O self-ruling Varuna, hast generated father Atharvan, con-
nection of the gods, for him do thou make well-extolled generosity ; our
comrade art thou, and highest connection.
The first line is here (with Muir, and Zimmer, p. 205) taken as belonging to
Varuna's reply given in the preceding verse. We must emend at the end either to
paramA^ ca or to bdndhu. All the mss. leave stuvate in b unaccented, as if it were
a verb-form. Ppp. reads svadhdvam in c, vi^vadevam at end of d, urttdyus krnuhi
pra^' in e, and, for f, sahhd no *sti varuna^ ca bandhuh. The Anukr. makes no
account of the extra syllable in e. In b, the vertical over su- is gone. ^PSdas c-f arc
not part of the dialogue.J
12. Aprl-hymn: to various divinities.
\Angiras. — ekdda^arcam, trdistiibham, jdtavedasam. j,paMkti.'\*
This is a RV. hymn (x. no), and found also in VS. (xxix. 25-6, 28-36), MS.
(j^'- 13- 3» 5)» ^"d TB. (iii. 6. 3), with almost no variants from the RV. text. Paipp.
does not contain it. Kau9. applies it (45. 8 : but the pratika, simply samiddhas, might
V. 12- nooK V. THE atiiarva-vkda-samiiitA. 240
desif;nnte any one of several other verses in the text) in the va{Jlf*tma>ia ceremony, to
accom|)any the offerinf^ of the omentum ; and in iUt farvan sacrifices (2. 36) occurs a
pAda roscmblin;; 2 b. In Vait. (10. 11 : the pratika is unambiguous) it goes with the
praytljti ofTerin^s in i\\t pa^ultaniiha.
Translated: hy the KV. translators; and (irifTith, i. 205 ; \Vc)>cr, iviii. 207. — Sec
Wcber*s general remarks ; and compare hymn 27, below.
1. Kindled this day in the home of man (ffninus), thou» a god» O Jata-
vcdas, (lost sacrifice to the gods ; and do thou bring [them], understand-
ing it, O thou of friendly might ; thou art a forethoughtful messenger,
poet.
The only variant in this verse is that MS. omits the i>eculiar and problematic accent
of viiha in c.
2. O Tanunapat (son of thyself?), do thou, anointing with honey
(mdti/iN) the roads that go to righteousness (r/#j), sweeten them, O wcU-
tongued one; prospering (/<///) with prayers (d/ii) the devotions (ntdn-
ffuiti) and the sacrifice, put (/;) thou also among the gods our service
(adhvard).
The mss. accent, without assignable reason, svadtivH in b, but the edition emends to
si'at/a^'tl, in agreement with the other textv
The three Yajus-tcxts insert between this verse and the next an alternative invocation
to Naraqai'Lsa (KV. vii. 2. 2).
3. Making oblation do thou, O Agni, to be praised and to be greeted,
come in accord with the X'asus. Thou art invokcr (/i<V;) of the gods, O
youthful one {?ja//vti); do thou, sent forth, skilled sacrificer (ydjiydns)^
sacrifice to them.
Ajuhvtina in a is perhaps to lie under.stood as passive (•= Ahuia)^ 'receiving obla-
tion.* There are no variants. The Anukr. al>surdly calls this verse ^ faUkti^ because,
by omitting resolutions of semivowels etc., it is capable of being lead as 40 syllables.
The y\nukr's of KV. and VS. Iwth reckon it as tristubh.
4. The forward bar/its^ through the fore-region of the earth, is wreathed
on this dawn (luistti), at the beginning (dj^fit) of the days ; it spreads out
abroad more widely, plea.sant to the g«Kls, to Aditi.
• Forward' and • fore-region, * i.e. ' ca.stward * and 'east.* All our mss. read ^fjfose
in b. but tiie edition makes the nc( essary emendation to -//, in acconlance with the four
other texts, and the translation given implies -U.
5. l^xpansive let thom open (ri-^fi) widely, like wives adorned for
their husbands ; ye great, divine, all-furthering doors, be ye favorable to
the advance <»f the gods.
Our /ii./.r Ipxt <lividfs the l.ist word as snf^rAyiin.ih, while the RV. fttdtt has smfirm'
ayanah ; ihc meter a|>peais to indicate that suf^ftiyl'itih is the true original reading.
6. Let Dawn and Night, dripping (} stisvay), worshipful, close, sit
241 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK V. -v. 12
down here in the lair {ySnt) — the two heavenly, great, well-shining
women, putting on beauty {i^ri) with bright adornment.
The other texts differ from ours only by accenting lifidke, [^The comment to Prat,
ii. 91 cites susvay as a case of reduplication; and BR. vii. 1142 connect it with su
* impel.' But see Weber. — He renders a by * Heran.'J
7. The (two) invokers of the gods, first, well-voiced, shaping (ma) the
sacrifice for man (tiidnus) to sacrifice, urging forward at the councils
(yiddthd) the (two) singers (I'dni), pointing out forward light through
the fore-region.
There are no variants. [^Griilith, after Mahldhara, takes the " light ** as the H/ia-
vanlya fire.J
8. Unto our sacrifice let BharatI come quickly, let Ida, taking note
here in human fashion ; let the three goddesses, well-working, sit upon
this pleasant barhis — [also] Sarasvatl.
The translation implies in d the reading sdrasvatl^ given by RV.VS.MS. ; TB.
I^both ed*s, Bibl. Ind. and PoonaJ supports AV. in reading -/M, which, however, can
hardly be anything but a blunder. The four other texts have at the end sadantu. All
our mss. have vianusyAt in b |_and so have all SPP*s authorities J, and this form is
authenticated by Prat. iv. 65, the comment explaining how it is derived from tnanus-
yavat. As being, therefore, the indubitable AV. reading, it should not have been
altered in our edition to -svdt, to conform with the four other texts, even though
doubtless a corruption of -svdt. [^SPP. also alters it. J ^In c, correct davir to
d€vir.\
9. To him, god Tvashtar, who adorned, (//f) with forms these two
generatresses, heaven-and-earth, [and] all existences, do thou today,
O invoker, sent forth, skilled sacrificer, sacrifice here, understanding it.
There are no variants.
10. In thy way {Umdnyd) anointing them, pour thou down upon (upa-
ava-sty) the track of the gods the oblations in due season ; let the forest-
tree, the queller (famitdr), god Agni, relish (svad) the oblation with
honey, with ghee.
* Forest-tree,' doubtless a big name for the sacrificial post That the * queller* is a
separate personage is shown by the plural number of the following verb. !_£. Sicg
discusses /rf///<zj, Gurupujakaumudi, 97 ff. ; later, Oldenberg, ZDMG. liv. 602.J
11. At once, when born, he determined {vi-md) the sacrifice; Agni
became foremost of the gods ; at the direction of this invoker, at the
voice of righteousness (rid), let the gods eat the oblation made with
"hail!"
The other texts read in c the nearly equivalent /rtf<//fi.
V. 13-
UOOK V. THE ATHARVA-Vi:DA-SAttHITA.
242
lO
V
I3. Against snakes* poison.
[(/iffitf/OTifff. -- flthftifttrttim. fitJtsitJtttt/rrtifyttm. j^f^iUam : 2. tUttl^af'tinkh ; 4, 7, 8. mntt$tm$k ;
J. tn^tubk ; 6. ftttkyiif'ttHltt ; ^. hhuftj; 10, a. ntrrtf j^'Jrjfpi]
Found (except vs. 1) also in riiipp. viii. (in the vcrsc-ordcr 3. 2, 4, 6, 5, 7-11). It
is not f|itotr(l in Vait. ; but in Kau^. 29. 1-14 nil the verses are hfought in in their
order, in connection with a ceremony for healing; |>ois<>n- wounds ; verse 1 (or the hymn)
is also usi'd at 48.9, in a witchcraft rite. l^'I'he London Anukr., in 6 places and for 7
poison-hymns, f;ives (Jarn/mtl (not -wJir) as rj/.J
Translated : (triflfith, i.208 ; lUcwmfield, 27, 425 ; \V'el>cr, xviii. 211.
1. Since Varunn, poet of heaven, hath given [them] to me, with for-
midable spells (vdcas) do I dissolve thy poison ; what is dug, undug, and
attached {saktd) have I seized; like drink (//vf) on a waste hath thy
poison been wasted (ni-jus).
The epithets in c are of ol>scure application : probably buried in the flesh by the
bite, or unburied but clinging.
2. What waterless poison is thine, that of thine have I seized in
these; I seize thy midmost, thine upmost juice (nisa); also may thy
lowest then disappear for fright.
* These * in b is fern, {etdsu) ; doubtless * waters ' is to l)e supplied. Ppp. reads in a
padakam (for apod-)^ and in b tat tAhhir, YAt ta in a in our edition is a misprint for
yiit te, Kau<;. (29. 2) calls the vtitsc j^raAanf. |_Kor nr^at, see SJtt. Gram. § 847 end.
and §854 b.J
3. A bull [is] my cry, like thunder through the cloud (ndb/Ms) ; with
thy formidable spell do I then drive it off (hndh) for thee; I have
seized that juice of his with men|_?J; like light out of darkness let the
sun arise.
One is tempted to emend tiAbhttsA in a to -sas or -iJw, * the thunder of the clouds.*
Ppp. reads tarn (which is l)cttcr) I'tinisil bAdhAitn te in b, f^tabhis for the stranj^e
nrbhis (_ Weber, • kraftijj'J in c» and jyotist 'tvi tamaso *dnyaiu sAr\iih in d. The I of
iva is uncounted in the meter of d. Kauq. calls the ytr^c prasarjanf.
4. With sight I smite thy sight ; with poison I smite thy |K>ison; die.
O snake, do not live ; let thy poison go back against thee.
All the mss. [^im luding SPI* sj read Ahrs at brKinniiig of c. but our edition makes
^ ^1^ the necessary emendation to A/u. I*pp- has for a baiena te balam hanmi ; its b is
\ y^ wholly corrupt; for c rt»\ it rc.vU r^xina hanmi te vidam ahe nuifi\tA niA jtvt praty
anvettt T'iI t'iuitit, |_As for d — the l.itrr Hindus thought that snake poison did not
hurt a snakf ; if. Itniisifte SpfUthe, 3001. Hut see the interesting experiments of Sir
Joseph K.i\rrr. in his rhanatophidui of India,* I^ndon, 1S74, p. 74-5. My colleaj^ue.
Dr. Tlu'oli.dil Smith, Piofrssor of Comparative Tathology, h.is most kmdly examined
for me the rcrrnt litrrature cniKTrnirii; the auto tnxir artion of snake-venoms. The evi-
dence is not ronrlusive as yet. but points to tlie immunity of snakes to snake-poison. —
Cf. vii. S8, be low. J
243 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK V. -v. 13
5. O Kiratan, O spotted one, O grass-haunter (?), O brown one! listen
ye to mc, O black serpents, offensive ones ! stand ye not upon the track
ijstdvtdn) of my comrade ; calling out {a-^rdvay), rest quiet in poison.
It is hardly possible to avoid emending siamiftam in c to sthimUnam |_* station* J
or srHmdiiam L* course,' from sr * run * — but not quotable J ; Ppp. is very corrupt in c,
d, but seems to intend no variants. It reads upatarni babhrav in a; our babhra is by
Prat. i. 81, and this passage is quoted in the comment on that rule. It further mutilates
to asitalfka in b. The accents in our text ^and SPP*sJ on dsitHs and dllk&s are against
all rule, and doubtless to be regarded as misreadings; the translation implies their
absence. In c correct to sdkhyuh (accent-sign lost over 1/). A number of Lour J mss.
(P.M.H.I.O.) Land five of SPP'sJ re.id misi for visi in d (and ;//>///>^ * at a wink '
would be an acceptable emendation) ; M.W. end with rabhadhvain. LGriffith identifies
kHirUta with karat t^ the Hindustani name (now well known in the Occident) of an
awfully venomous little serpent. This would be most interesting, if certain ; but friend
Gricrson writes me that it is improbable on phonetic grounds. We should expect in
Hind, kerd.^
6. Of the Timatan (.?) black serpent, of the brown, and of the water-
less, of the altogethcrjpowerful (.M. I relax the fury, as the bow-string of (^(Sji*^*s.^ ^ •
a bow ; I release as it were chariots.
The translation is as if the reading at end of c were manyum* The/flrd'ii-rcading
in c is sdtrdsa/idsya, according to Prat. iii. 23. Ppp. has tayimdtasya in a, and in c ^>y>ir?rt A** J/J
upodakasya * water-haunting,* which is better. L^^hitney would doubtless have revised /^r^^ *^ 4/«^'
this carefully. The divergences of the translators reflect the uncertainties of the
exegesis. * I sLicken as it were the cars of the wrath of * etc. — Griffith. * I release
(thcc) from liie fury of etc. — Uloomfield. * Des Asita . . . des Manyu Streitwagen
glcichsani spanne L^^l^J "^i^ ^b' or *die Streitwagen des Grimmes des Asita* etc. —
Weber. For d, * as the string from off {dva) the bow.* J • L^PP* ""^^^ds mafiynm.j
7. Both d/igi and vUigi^ both father and mother — we know your con-
nection (bdndhu) completely ; sapless ones, what will ye do }
The wholly obscure avords in a (p. a-ligf^ vl-ligf) might also be nom. m. of stems
in -/';/ ; but their accent is against it. Ppp. reads, for a, b, dlakd ca vyaca luptvd yas
te maid. The Anukr. makes no account in b of the two syllables that are lacking to
make an auustiibh pada.
8. Daughter of the broad-knobbed one (?), born of the black barba-
rian (f.) — of all them (f.) that have pierced defiantly (,?) the poison [is]
sapless.
The translation conjectures in a a relationship oi-giila \o gttda zndgo/a, and implies
for b emendation to ddsyd dsiknyd/i — since something had to be done to make the
line translatable. L^"^ ^f SPP*s authorities has dstknydk.j Ppp. begins with udaktl-
idyd * of the water-bank * ; the rest of its version is " without meaning.** The first word
is quoted by the commentary to Prat. iii. 72 in the form uril-gtlldydh (so the ms.)
L//r/7. ?J. [y^'s version * pierced* implies reference to root dr (not drd *nin,* as in
Index). Tor pratdnkafftf both here and at iv. 16. 2, he first wrote * rapidly,* and then
interlined * defiantly.* Why? BR. take it as gerund, *of all that have run gliding*:
i.e., I suppose, *that dart along on their bellies *?J
V. 13 HOOK V. Till-: ATHARVA-VKDA-SAttHITA. 244
9. The cared hcdgchoi;; said this, coming down from the mountain :
whichsoever of these ( f .) are produced by digging, of them the poison is
most sapless.
Tiiis verse, which \% rather out of place here, seems like a variation of KV. i. 191. 16:
f kHSUwhhttktis (tUi tibra7*lit gir^h pntvarttinttkNiiktih : 7'i{€ikitsy*^ *rastitn visdm. Ppp.
* /^•***T^7*^**"*****- begins with kanvti. [Vajx the diminutive, cf. iv. 37. 10 and xiv. 2. 63. J
'' 10. 7\}/'th't7, not tabuvti ; verily thou art not dibiiia ; by (tibtiiHt [is]
the poison sapless.
Ppp. has instead ttlvuitifh na tAvMcntitn tthrr tisikftiw itlx'ucfntl *rasam visam.
With this verse, accordinj; to Kau<;. (29. 13). one sips water from a gourd.
1 1 . lasfrivii, not tastui'it ; verily ihou art not ttisitiia ; by tasttiiHt [is]
the poison sapless.
Ppp. h.is for a, b, ta^tuvam lui hariiiktam tti\iuvam. Hut for the |_unlinf;ualixedj
n of ttwti'tvt'tui^ tilt' wor<l in our inss. mii;ht l>c r«|u.iUy read tasruva |_SrP. reports
this re.nliii;:J. Willi tiiis veise. at rordin;; to K.'iut;. (2'). 14), one ** binds the navel."
|_Wcl>er, Sl>. iS(/>, p. f>Si (sec also p. 873), f^ives an elalK>rate discussion of these two
verses. He deems ti\buva a mispMil t*lthuv<t (root stu r-. sthtl)^ * stopping, bannend.*
Hut see IJaith, Revuf tie rhistoire tfts frlij^tom^ xxxix. 26.J
14. Against witchcraft: with a plant.
[(Iwiffi. — iraytuinfnktim. rtinatfatyitm. kttytipriUiharanam. dttHttuhham : ^^^^ t9.
bhurtj ; Sjf.ririij: io. fiufU fp h.tti ; ii.jf'.idmmtfutubh; //. ifMFily ]
Impart of verse 8 is prose. J Found also (fxrrpt vss. 3. 5, whit h are wanting, and
9, 13, which otcur in ii.) in T.iipp. vii. (in the t»rtltT i, 2. S. 12.4. 10. 1 1, 7, 6). Quoted
in Kau<;. (39.7) with ii. 11 ami several other hymns, in a ceiemtmy ag.iinst witchcraft;
vs. 9 also st*parately in 39. 1 1. Not ntitiietl in Vait.
Translateil : /immer. p. 3*/0 ; (Iiill, 2''». 147; (sritTith, i. 210; IUi>omrieId, 77,429;
Wcbcr, xviii. 216.
1. An eagle {supanui) discovered thee ; a hog dug thee with his snout ;
seek thou to injure, O herb, hini that seeks to injure; smite down the
witchcraft-maker.
We havt* had the first half-verse alreaily, as ii. 27. 2 a, b. Tpp. has, for d, /'«ff/i
krfvilkrto iUtha.
2. Smile down the sorcerers, smite down the witchcraft-maker; then,
whoever seeks to injure us, him do thou smite. () herb.
Ppp. tmiits, prohaMy by ovrr,si;;ht, the fust half-verse.
3. Ilavin*; cut an)un(l out (»f (his) skin a strip (//ir/pfj*/), as it were
of a sta*:, fasten, () gods, upon the witchcrafl-inaker the witchcraft, like
a neckl'ue.
Th.il is, app.irrntly, with a thc»ng cut nut of his own ^kin. like a buck skin thonc-
As usu.d. thr mss. \aiy in a bttwetn /< 1 • and ft^y-^ II. even reailing f/jr-, but the
245 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK V. -v. 14
majority have rfj'-, which is undoubtedly the true text, and should be restored in our
edition. Three times, in this hymn (vss. 3, 5, 12), the Anukr. insists on regarding iva
as dissyllabic, and therefore reckons the verses as bhurij,
4. Lead thou away the witchcraft back to the witchcraft-maker, grasp-
ing its hand ; set it straight before i^saviaksdvi) him, that it may smite
the witchcraft-maker.
Ppp. has, for b. pratiharanam na /tardmasi (our 8 c) ; but in book ii. it has the
whole half-verse just as it stands here.
5. Be the witchcrafts for the witchcraft-maker, the curse for him that
curses ; like an easy chariot let the witchcraft roll back to the witchcraft-
maker.
6. If woman, or if man, hath made witchcraft in order to evil, it we
conduct unto him, like a horse by a horse-halter.
The Anukr. doubtless scans d as d^vam ivd ^^vdbhtdhinyS^ instead of dfvam *vd
^^vdbhidhanidy as it should be.
7. If either thou art god-made, or if made by man, thee, being such,
do we lead back, with Indra as ally.
Ppp. has a very different version of this verse: yd krtye devakrtd yd vd manusyajd
*st : /dm /vd pra/yah prahinmasi pra/lcl nayana brahmand. The n in pthtar nayd-
mast is prescribed by Prat. iii. 81. 7\im at beginning of c is a misprint for /iim,
8. O Agni, overpowerer of fighters, overpower the fighters ; we take
the witchcraft back to the witchcraft-maker by a returner.
Ppp. reads in b prati instead of punar^ thus making a better correspondence with
pra/iharana in c. The Anukr's definition of the " verse " is purely artificial ; the first
pada is distinctly unmctrical, and the third hardly metrical.
9. O practiced piercer (.?), pierce him; whoever made [it], him do ' /
thou smite ; we do not sharpen thee up to slay {yadhd)^\vci who has not
made [it].
This verse is found in Ppp. in book ii., much corrupted, with, for d, vadhdya ^atitsa-
vtfmahe. Kr/avyadhanl may possibly be the proper name of the herb addressed :
cf. kr/avedhana or -dhaka^ " name of a sort of fennel or anise " (Pet. Lex.).
10. Go as a son to a father; like a constrictor trampled on, bite; go,
O witchcraft, back to the witchcraft-maker, as it were treading down
[thy] bond.
That is, apparently, escaping and treading on what has restrained thee. Ppp. com-
bines in b svajdhta^ and reads for c, d, tan/ur ivdxyayamnide kr/ye krtydkrtam krtdh.
Though the verse is a perfectly good anusiubhy the Anukr., reading iva three times as
dissyllabic, turns it into a defective brhatl*
11. Up, like a she-antelope {eni)^ a she-elephant (?vdrafii), with leap-
ing on, like a hind, let the witchcraft go to its maker.
h
V. 14- KOOK V. THE ATHARVA-VEDA-SAKIIHTA. 246
A verse of (1oul>tful interpretation ; but it is altogether probable that the animal-
names arc cfKirdinate in construction with krt^i in c; and tlicy aie feminine doubclesft
t>ecausc this is feminine ; the krtytl is to overtake its prr|>etratur with their swiftness
and f<»rce. Hut tlie Tet. Lex. t.ikrs vtlfttni as •sliy. wild,* (}u.ihfyin); rnl. Tpp. com-
bines fUtU *vtt and mrji^tii 'vttt and reads I'tlrunf, and 'krantitiM (or -skandam ; -kfantUim
seems ratlier picfcrablo. The unaltered s of abhisk- in b falls under I'rat. ii. 104. and
the example is (piote<l there. TIkiukIi the verse is a fuiily regular j^'cIm'/''^ the Anukr.
stupidly accounts it a stlmnl tristubh^ as if it were prose, and contained only 22 syllables.
12. Slraighlcr than an arrow let it fly, O hcavcn-ancl-carth, to meet
him ; let it, the witchcraft, seize again him, the witchcraft-maker, like
a (leer.
l*pp. reads, ftir c, d, sA tttfh mrj^tim hut viiitit krtyCi krtytlkrtam krU\.
13. Let it go like fire up-stream, like water down-stream ; like an easy
chariot let the witchcraft roll back to the witchcraft-maker.
' lJ|vstream,* i.e. contrary to the natural direction (praiikuhim\ or upward. Tpp. has
the verse in lx)ok ii., and reads at the end of d (cf. its ver.siim of 12 4) tAh (for kriA),
The meter is svarAj o\\\'^ by twice refusing to abbieviate ix'a to *va,
15. For exorcism : to a plant.
[ \\Vi\mitra. — ekddtt^aktxm . x\\nafp%Uy\tm. intntuhham : 4. ftiraiMdhrkiUi ; j, 7, ^. q. hkmrtj )
Found also in Tfiipp. viii. I'scd by K.'iuq. (ig. i), with .several other hymns, for the
healinf; of distempered cattle; aitd its verses and those (if hymn 16 are referred to as
madhulH-i'rsiilin^tih again in 2<). 1 5, fullowin^ the use of hymn 13.
Translated: (JiiOith, i. 211 ; Welwr, xviii. 220.
1. Hoth one of me and ten of me [are] the exorcisers [apavaktdr)^
O berb; thou born of right (rUi)^ thou rich in right, mayest thou,
honeyed (madliulii), make honey for me.
I*pp. omits throu;;li()Ut the scmnd tnr in A, and reads for 4 madhu tx'A madkulA
karat. The Anukr. savs madhulAm osadhim ast*lut.
2. Hoth two of me and twenty of me [are] etc. etc.
3. Holh three of me and thirty of me [are] etc. etc.
4. Both four of me and foily of mc [«'ire] etc. etc.
5. Holh five of me an<l fifty of me [are] etc. etc.
().!>. accent fiJfita / the rest, against the usual way. /<f>7t<f, and our edition follows
the latter.
6. Holh six of mc and sixty of me [are] etc. etc.
This vtrse ou;;ht tf> be rci koned by the Anukr. as nitric not less than 5 etc. as hkutij,
7. H(»th seven of me and seventy of me [arc] etc. etc.
8. Holh eight of me and eighty of me [ar«'] etc. etc.
The ret konin;; of this verse as bhuftj implies the (inipro|>er) restoration of the elided
a of a\H(s.
247 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK V. -v. 17
9. Both nine of me and ninety of me [are] etc. etc.
ID. Both ten of me and a hundred of me [are] etc. etc.
II. Both a hundred of me and a thousand [are] the exorcisers,
O herb ; etc. etc.
Without any regard to the connection between this hymn and the next, the third
atiHV&ka is made to end here, containing 5 hymns and 57 verses; the quoted Anukr.
says accordingly tisrbhis trtlyah.
Here ends also the eleventh prapdthaka,
16. Exorcism.
[yifvdmi/ra, — ekdiiafakam. ekat*rsadrvatyam. \jekdvasdnam.\ dvSipadam : 1^ ^^ ^^•^-io.
idmny usnih ; .?, j, 6. dsury anusUtbh ; 11. dsurt gdyatri.']
|_Not metrical. J Found also in Paipp. viii. Referred to only in Kau^. 29.15, in
company with the preceding hymn, as above reported.
Translated: Griffith, i. 212 ; Weber, xviii. 222.
1. If thou art sole chief, let go ; sapless art thou.
We have ekavrsd^ lit. *one bull,* in other passages (iv. 22 ; vi. 86), but dvivrsd etc.
only here, and they are plainly nothing but schematic variations of it, not admitting of
real translation. Perhaps the hymn is directed against insect pests, through their
leaders, whether few or many. The definition of the Anukr. implies fourteen syllables :
perhaps 7s.% yddi ekavrsS dsi srjd arasd 'si (or srjd *rasd asi), Ppp. h^s yas ior yadi in
all the verses. [^Sce Weber's note. J
2. If thou art twice chief etc. etc.
Or perhaps ratiicr * double chief,' * triple chief,' etc., or *one of two,' * one of three,' etc.
3. If thou art thrice chief etc. etc.
4. If thou art four times chief etc. etc.
5. If thou art five times chief etc. etc.
6. If thou art six times chief etc. etc.
7. If thou art seven times chief etc. etc.
8. If thou art eight times chief etc. etc.
9. If thou art nine times chief etc. etc.
10. If thou art ten times chief etc. etc.
11. If thou art eleven-fold, then thou art waterless.
All the elided a's must be restored in this verse to make out the fifteen syllables
called for by the Anukr. Ppp. \\?a ytipodako * si srjd *raso *si.
17. The Brahman's wife.
[Afayobhu. — astddafakam. brahmajdyddevatyam. dnustubham : i-^. tristubh.'\
Found in part (vss. 1-7, 9- 11 in ix., also 18, in another part of ix.) in Paipp. The
hymn contains (in vss. 1-3, 6, 5, 10, ii) thc^ seven verses of Ry^x.j09,.none of which
occur elsewhere than in these two texts. V^it. takes no notice of it, but it is used in
Kau^. (48. 1 1), next after hymn 13, in a witchcraft ceremony ; while vs. 4 is quoted also
in 1 26. 9, on occasion of the fall of a meteor.
V. 17- nooK V. THK ATHARVA-Vi:i)A-SAWHITA. 248
Translated : Muir, i.* 280 ; I.uilwif^, p. 446 (part) ; Zimmer, p. 197 ; firiffith, i. 212:
Wcbcr, xviii. 222; also, in part, a« KV. hymn, by Muir, i*. 256; Luclwig, no. I020 ;
(trasAmann, ii. 495. — Cf. also UUlonbcrg, Die Hyinntn iU's Rl'.^ i. 244.
1. These spoke first at tlic offense against the Brahman {brdfnnan-)'.
the boundless sea, Matari^van, he of stout ra^e {/uiras), furmidable
fervor, the kindly one, the heavenly waters, first-born of right (r/rf).
K\'. rca<ls nt^nft in c, and rt^na at the end. Tpp. reads -hit fat antl -bhux'as in c, And
17/iij in d. The first p.ida is propcilyyi/^'^//, though the Anukr. takes no notice of the fact.
2. King Soma first gave (//w-j'/iw) back the Brahman's wife, not
bearing enmity; he who went after [her] was Varuna, Mitra; Agni,
^^ invoker, conducted [her] hither, seizing her hand.
Q*^ '^ i7, Tpp. reads mitro tl- in c. Ajn'UftiMr [Gratn. §233 a J is doubtful; perhaps •one
Ci 0 I'C^^ who disputes possession*: rf. MS. iii. 7.3 (p. 78. 1).
J /^i'^^^*^^ 3. To be seized by the hand indeed is the pledge {}d(i/ii) of her, if one
has said *' [she is] the Brahman's wife "; she stood not to be sent forth for
a messenger : so is made safe (guf^itd) the kingdom of the Kshatrtya.
The sense of a and c is obscure ; i>erhaps we ou^ht to rcarl htistf (or -ienn) n/li *vd
in a, * nothing of hers is to be merhlled with, when once she it declared the Urahinan*s.*
The mss. vary l)etween ^rilhytis (H.). j^nihyas (K), and /^nJ/tydt (the rest). RV. reads
d7»o<an in b, and adds iyiim before ///, by omitting which our text damages the meter
(but the Anukr. docs not notice it). KV. also has in c prahy) for frah/yd; the
two readin|;s arc of virtually identical meaning ; emendation to tiutyhya is desirable.
Tpp. reads Adir in a.
4. The misfortune, descending (iivapad) ujwn the village, of which
they say "this is a star with disheveled hair" — as such, the Brahman's
wife burns up the kingdom, where hath gone forth a hare (?fcif<i) accom-
panied with meteors {ulknsi-).
That is, su( h apparent fmrtcnts ate really the woman, that has been misused. A
very awkwaidly < i'listructed verse. Tpp. rea<ls in a /tlraJttlM vt'Jt-, and, in c, timciu lot
dunoti. It is, of course, the reference to meteoric portents tliat causes the verse to Im
quoted in Kau^;. 126.
5. The Vedic stu<lcnt {hrahmacdnH) goes about serving (xns) much
service; he becomes one limb of the gods; by him Brihaspati discovered
the wife, conducted by Soma, like the sacrificial s|>oon, O gods.
In d KV. has the d<)ui)tlrss Inrttirr reading dntir, * as the ROfls [disroveretl] the sacri-
ficial spoon.' K«»r «/Ai/// TpP- r<?*'^ds nihatilfn. Tho:ij;h called a (ftstubh^ the verse has
two Jilt; ti/i pad as.
6. The gods of old vetily spoke about her, the seven seers who sat
down with penance {tdf*as) ; fearful [isj the wife of the Brahman when
led away; she makes (d/ta) discomfort {durdhd) in the highest firmament
249 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK V. -v. \^
Our mss. (except P.M.W., which often agree in a misreading) give dpanltd (instead
of ///>-) in c, and this is to be regarded as the proper AV. text, and is implied in the
translation ; our edition reads ;///i;i-, with RV. RV. differs also in having tdpase^ an
easier reading, in b ; and it has no vdi in a, the intrusion of which defaces the meter,
though unnoticed by the Anukr. Ppp. has ajayanta (for avad-) in a, combines saptars-
in b, and gives brtihmanasyd ^pinihitS. in c.
7. What embryos are aborted {ava-pad), what living creatures (J^gat)
are torn away (apa-ltip)^ what heroes are mutually shattered — them the
Brahman's wife injures.
IJ. reads urtydnte in c, P.M. trhydte^ D. nuhyanie. That is, all this mischief is the
consequence of her ill-treatment. Ppp. combines garbhd *vap- in a, and reads abhilu-
Pyate in b, and hanyante in c.
8. And if [there were] ten former husbands of a woman, not Brahmans
— provided a Brahman has seized her hand, he is alone her husband.
This verse is wanting in Ppp.
9. A Brahman [is] indeed her husband, not a noble {rdjanya)^ not a
Vai^ya : this the sun goes proclaiming to the five races of men (indnavd),
Tlie Anukr. does not notice the deficient syllable in a (unless we arc to syllabize
br-dh., which is very harsh). Ppp. combines brdhmane *va in a, and puts the verse at
the end of the hymn.
10. The gods verily gave back; men (inannsyd) gave back; kings,
apprehending {grah) truth, gave back the Brahman's wife.
RV. has uid instead of the repeated adadus in b ; and it gives the better reading
krnvdttas in c. And in both points Ppp. agrees with it |_but with -no for -«<|jj.
11. Having given back the Brahman's wife, having brought about
{kr) freedom of offense with the gods, sharing {b/uij) the refreshment
(/7;y) of the earth, they occupy (jipa-ds) broad space (umgdyd).
RV. has the more antique forms Jtrivi and bhaktvaya in b and c. P.M.W. read
nakiib' in b.
12. Not on his couch lies a beautiful hundred-bringing (-vd/it) wife, in
whose kingdom the Brahman's wife is obstructed through ignorance.
Literally, • in what kingdom'; * obstructed,' i.e. * kept from him.* * Hundred,* i.e., prob-
ably, • a rich dowry * (so the Pet Lex.). The mss. have, as is usual in such cases, da/yd.
13. A wide-eared, broad-headed [ox.^] is not born in that dwelling, in
whose etc. etc.
Muir understands a "son** of such description.
14. A distributer {ksattdr) with necklaced neck goes not at the head
of his crates (?sund) [of food], in whose etc. etc.
The meaning is not undisputed: Muir renders "charioteer** and "hosts** (emending
to st^fid) ; Ludwig, ^^ ksattar^^ and ."slaughter-bench.**
V. 17 HOOK V. Till-: ATHARVA-VKDA-SAMHITA. 250
15. A while, black-cared [horse] does not make a show (mahi^)^
harnessed to his [chariot] pole, in whose etc. etc.
16. Not in his field [is] a lotus-i>ond, the bulb (}bisa) of the bulb-
bear in;; lotus is not produced ijtitt), in whose etc. etc.
0>in|i.-iie iv. 34. 5, and note ; tlfiifika ami bha aic (Hrrhaps rather to lie rendered inde-
pendently.
17. Not for him do they who attend to (uf^a-as) her milking milk out
the spotted [cow], in whose etc. etc.
In b, r. l)eji;in.s >v> 'j»'J, \.\\. y/*SYtl.
1 8. Not his [is] a beautiful milch-cow, [his] draft -ox endures not the
pole, where a Drahman stays a night miserably (/J/^z/c/) without a wife
I 'pp. rearU for a ft a tat 9*1 tf/unur dohtna. [_.Sce liK. vi. 1023. J
18. The Brahman's cow.
[.I/iM'i'Mm. — pahfaJ%i^*ik-im. btahwiia^nvUn'tUyttm. dnuttuhham ' 4,^*9*0* ij irtstmbk
U t-ftf'tj)]
FoiukI also in Taipp. ix. (except vs. 7; in the order 1. 2, 4, 13, 5. 6, 14, 3, 15, 9, 8,
10-12). Not noticed in N'jit.. hut ({uoted in Kaii^. 4^.13 witli the next hymn (at
the "two Ilrahni.m cow '* h\nins), just after hymn 17. in a witchcraft rile.
Translated: Miiir, i<. 2S4 ; I.tidwi^. p. 447 ; /inmi'-i, p. i«^'); Grill. 41. 14S ; (Jriffith.
i. 215 ; nioonificld, \(^u 430 ; Wi-Ih-i. xviii. 22i>.
1. Her the pods did not give thee for thee to eat, O lord of men
{ftr/*(itt); do not thou, i) noble, desire to devour {g/uis) the cow of the
Drahman, that is not to be eaten.
An accent-mark under the tivtt of ftirafivti in c h.is hecn lost.
2. A noble hated of the dice, evil, self-ruined (-/ri/vf/VAf) — he may
cat the cow of the Drahman : "let me live today, not tomorrow."
I.e., if sui h is his wish. I*pp. reads, for b, /J/J/w.j/// itpafUjitah. [_Cf. Uaiah
xxii. 13 ; I Cor. xv. 3 2. J
3. Like an ill-poison«)us adiler enveloped with [cow-] hide, this cow
of the Hrahman, O noble, is harsh, not to be eaten.
That is (a. b) a poi^otums s«*!pi'iii in «lis;;uisi;. At hfj;inning of c, mi in our text \\
an en or for si.
4. Verily it conducts away his authoiity, smites his splendor; like fire
taken hold of it burns up all ; he who thinks the Hrahman to be food, he
drinks of Timatan poison.
Or 's!ir* (ihf ci>\v). fir • hr ' (the nr.ihm.m). instead of 'it,' in A. b. Ppp. reaiU in b
tlLtbiifitih f*f txitnu^ta fi}it,iffi, .ind has a ulmllv dittrrcnt srcoml half-vrrse, nearly af^ree-
inv: \\\V\ <»uf 13 c, d; i«' ^».?';".M'.'.f"> titiiibttudhuHi htttastt tttivtt pitfnAm aft wtm
251 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK V. -V. 1 8
lokam. The Anukr. reckons the verse unnecessarily as bhurij\ since iva in b is to be
shortened to *va.
5. Whatever insulter of the gods, desirous of riches, not from knowl-
edge, slays him, thinking him gentle, in his heart Indra kindles a fire ;
both the firmaments {ndb/ias) hate him as he goes about.
Ppp. has in a endm^ which is better. The pada-i^xi absurdly reads _^/ instead oiydh
at the beginning. The Anukr. seems to combine ubhii^nam in d, as the meter demands,
although ubhi is even ^ pragrhya j part of the mss. (M.W.I. H.O.) read ubhd e-,
6. The Brahman is not to be injured, like fire, by one who holds him-
self dear; for Soma is his heir, Indra his protector against imprecation.
The Pet. Lex. suggests the (acceptable, but unnecessary) emendation of b to agn^h
priya tanur iva; this, however, is favored by the reading of Ppp., agnes priyatamA
tanuh. The expression seems to be incomplete : ** as fire [is not to be touched] by one "
etc. Ppp. also combines indro *sya in d. It is strange that the pada-itxi does not
divide dtlydddh [^BR. ddyd-\'dda] as a compound word.
7. He swallows down what ( f.) has a hundred barbs ; he is not able
to tear it out — the fool who thinks of the food of Brahmans '* I am
eating what is sweet.'*
The verse is wanting in Ppp. (as noticed above). The mss. read nihkhidan at end
of b ; our edition has made the necessary emendation to -dam. The cow, of course, is
meant in a, b. Many mss. (D.M.E.I.H.D.K.) accent malvdh in c
8. His tongue becomes a bow-string, his voice an [arrow-] neck, his
teeth [become] shafts (iiadtkd) smeared with penance ; with these the
Ikahman {brahvidn) pierces the insulters of the gods, with bows having
force from the heart [and] speeded by the gods.
Pada d lacks a syllable, though the Anukr. takes no notice of it. Hrdbaidis is a
questionable formation ; Ppp. has instead nirjaldis^ which may contain hidden a better
reading LR. tiirjydis * without bow-string '? J.
9. The Brahmans have sharp arrows, have missiles ; what volley
(famzfyh) they hurl, it is not in vain; pursuing (anu-Ad) with fervor and
with fury, they split him down even from afar.
Ppp. has /t tayd at the end, instead of enam, [^Pada b is of course yVx^tf/f. J
10. They that ruled, a thousand, and were ten hundreds, those Vaita-
havyas, having devoured the cow of the Brahman, perished {pard-b/iu).
Sahdsram is taken as in apposition with yi^ since rdj properly governs a genitive.
Ppp. has a different c, tebhyah prabravfmi tvd. A syllable is lacking in a, unnoted by
the Anukr.
1 1 . The cow herself, being slain, pulled down those Vaitahavyas, who
cooked the last she-goat of Kesaraprabandha (>).
The second half-verse is totally defaced in Ppp. The pada-XtxX reads in d caramao^
djdmj the accent is anomalous, and the sense unacceptable; Ludwig*s translation.
V. IS- HOOK V. THK ATHARVA-VKDA-SAMHITA. 2$!
•• Icl/tKrl)orcn," implying; cmonrlation to canttnajtifn^ siic:;rst.n a wrlcome improvement
of the text. K/utra^/if il/mmi/iilvtls li.is its long J of -/f J- in f*aiia\cxK noted in PriL
iv. </). I'pp. rt'a<ls /:'<! \ttrti/ in b.
12. Those hundred and one fellows (^jmnitd) whom the earth shook
off, having injured the progeny of the Drahtnans, perished irretrievably.
lip. accents prop-rly vt'ntlti/iunuta in b, hut all the samhitti msft. f^ive vyAtih'^ and D.
has coircsi>undingly vhaJk- : cf. 19. 1 1. Tpp- reads ff}/ ior /Jx in a, and hhiimir jrd in b.
13. The in.sulter of the gods goes about among mortals; he beeomcs
one who has swallowed poison, [becomes] mainly composed of bones;
he who injures the Hrahman, the connection of the gods, he goes not to
the world to which the Fathers go.
Gtutij^frnti is an anomalous compound, hut its meaning; is hardly doubtful; it is so
interpreted by the comm. to A(,'S. \x. 5. 1 ; AsthibhuyAn, virtually • reduced to a skeleton.*
rpp. exchanji^es our 4 C, d and 13 c. d. giving the former here without a variant.
1.^. Agni verily our guide, Soma is called [our] heir, Indra slayer of
imprecation (?) : so know the devout that.
Ppp. reads, for second half-vrrsc,y«mi/<I *bhi\a\tii imUas tat satyam iievasamhitam.
IMda c plainly calls for cortrction {/*tida has n/'/it'^iisft}) ; /immer proposes ahkf^asiam,
the Tel. l.ex. [\W. 1 51 5 J ahhi^asiim ; itb/tt^asfytls, gen., or even abki^astipis (cf. vs. 6),
might be suggested as yet more probable.
15. Like an arrow smeared [with poison], O lord of men, like an
adder, O lord of cattle — that arrow of the Brahman is terrible; with it
he pierces the insulting.
Ppp. reads dijitihA instead o{ %ihotA in c. I'he Anukr. does not call the verse hhurij^
although the full pronunciation of the iva in a would make it so. In the first lialf-versc
doubtless the two lower castes are addressed.
19. The Brahman's cow.
[ Mayohh u. — f'iiMttitij^.tktim. hahm .j/^avUn a ty*tm . inustuhhtt m : j. virJItfmrmt^Jbrkmti ;
A part of the versos of this hymn are found also in IViipp. ix. (namely, and in the
order, 1. 2. 3, 7. 4, 10. S, 12 : also 15 in another place). Vait. docs not refer to it, but
it is noted at Kfun;. 48. 13 with the preceding hymn (as there mentioned).
'IransLitcd : Muir, i'. 2S0 ; I.U'bug. p. 451; /immer. p. 201; Grill, 43, 150; (triffith.
i. 21R ; MhKMnliehl, 171. 433 ; Wcbcr, xviii. 237. — Cf. Ilillebrandt, I'etia^MmtemaiMit^
p. 42.
I. They grew excessively; ihey did not quite (hui) touch up to the
sky; having injured Hhrigu, the Srirtjayas. Vaitahavyas, perished.
I'pp. riMds, in c, d. 'nrji^ti htnsit''*} brahmtm asambhavyam paf-. rf. 18. 12 C, 4.
The vcise i«i found also in ]\\. i. 152. witli -i'itJ for W in b. and wu\henik atatkkeymm
(for srii 7t}t/) in c. d : a nun h corrupted text. The /Ww-tevt strangely divide*
srfnfttyt't/t (th«' w<»rd is U'ft undividdl in tlic TS fadAi, vi.6. 2) [flriffith cites Mllh.
xiii. 30. I ( ". i<MO) ff. fi»r the story of tlie Vait.ihavyas. See \Vi -.ers notes. J
253 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK V. -v. 19
2. The people who delivered up {iatpay-) the Brahman Brihatsaman,
descendant of Angiras — a he-goat with two rows of teeth, a sheep,
consumed (av) their offspriftg (iokd).
The translation implies emendation in c to ubhayicUinn (nom. of -dant), as suggested
in the Index Verborufn^ and, indeed, assumed also by Zimmer and Muir. Ppp. is so
mutilated that nothing is to be learned from it. The definition of the verse given by the
Anukr. corresponds with its present form ; but a invites emendation.
3. They who spat upon a Brahman, or who sent [their] mucus at him
— they sit in the midst of a stream of blood, devouring hair.
Ppp. reads asmdi in b, and combines -ntd ^^sate in d. Read in our text Isiri at the
end (an accent-sign Jost under si),
4. The Brahman's cow, being cooked, as far as she penetrates (.^),
smites out the brightness (t^jas) of a kingdom; no virile (vrsan) hero
is born [there].
Jdngahe is doubtful in meaning, alth()ugh it cannot well be referred to any root but
gdh; derivation from a root janh^ proposed in the major Pet. Lex., is apparently with-
drawn in the minor. Ppp. reads pumdn in d. The separate accent of abhl in b is a
case falling under Pr^t. iv.4, and the passage is quoted in the commentary to that rule.
5. Cruel is the cutting up of her; harsh to eat (.?) is her prepared
flesh {piqitdm) ; in that the milk (ksird) of her is drunk, that verily is
an offense against the Fathers.
The translation implies emendation of asyate in b to aqyate^ as suggested by Zimmer ;
Ppp. unfortunately lacks the verse.
6. A king who thinks himself formidable,. [and] who desires to devour a
Brahman — that kingdom is poured away, where a Brahman is scathed {jyd).
Ydj jlghatsati in b is an error for yd j-, * Pour away,' doubtless a figure from the
pouring off onto the ground of worthless liquid. With a, b compare RV. ii. 23. 1 2.
7. Bccom ing eight-footed, four-eyed, four-eared, four-jawed, two-mouthed,
two-tongued, she shakes down the kingdom of the Brahman-scather.
Ppp. reads, in c, dvijihvd dviprdnd bhtltvd^ and omits brahmajydsya at the end.
8. It leaks verily into that kingdom, as water into a split boat {ndu)\
where they injure a Brahman, that kingdom misfortune smites.
Ppp. puts bhififidm before ndvam in b, and has for c brdhmano yatra jfyate (like
our 6 d). Zimmer and Muir prefer to understand in a a subject, coordinate with udakam
in b : '* ruin flows into that kingdom.*' [^W. doubtless means to imply that it is not
competent lo base upon the phrase in b an argument about shipwreck and ocean com-
merce. But cf. Hopkins, AJP. xix. 1 39. J
9. Him the trees drive away, saying "do not come unto our shadow,"
who, O Narada, plots against that which is the riches of the Brahman.
Or, * against the real {sd() riches' etc. ; emendation of sdi to tdt (BR. v. 515) seems
uncalled for. The verse reads as if taken from a collection of adages.
V. 19- HOOK V. THK A TIIARVA-VKDA-SAMIIITA. 254
10. King Variina called that a god-made |X)ison ; no one soever, hav-
ing devoured the cow of the Brahman, keeps watch in the kingdom.
That in, ^ti.irds succ c^sfully III* riMliii : jilt^tlra, a» sucli passagM as xiii. i. 9, x\x. 24.
2 ; 4S. 5 plainly show, IhtIoii^s to j^r (jt\i;r) • wake/ and not to jr 'waste away, grow
old,* U.S claimed in the minor Pet. Lex. I'pp. \\^s j*}garat and tin^tikvA in C
11. Those same nine nineties whom the earth shook ofF* having
injured tlie progeny of the Brahman, perished irretrievably.
This vrrsc is nearly the same with 18. 12 al>ovc ; and the various accentuatioos of
vyAdhunuta are precisely the same here as there.
12. The kudi which they tie on after a dead man, as cffaccr (?) of
the track, that verily, O Brahman-scather, did the gods call thy couch
{tipastdranti).
Kudi, whiih occurs several times in the KAuq. (see nioomfield's edition, p. xliv
[where tend Kruiq. 21.2.13], '"^"'^ AjP. xi. 3(15). is identified hy the scholiasts with
hadttrf * jiijul)c.* I- or the habit of tyiii;; a bunch (»f twin's to a cor|)se, see Koth in the
Festjiruss an liohtlin^k, p. 98 [_and Hloomrichl, A J I*, xii. 4i^iJ.
13. The tears of one weeping (/•//), which rolled [down] when he was
scathed, these verily, O Brnhman-.scather, did the gods maintain as thy
I>ortion of water.
Vtkrrtus (p. ravrti'th) is (piotod as example under Priil. iii. 13; iv. S4. P.MAV.
rcady/.'Jvr^j in b.
14. With what they bathe a dead man, with what they wet {ud)
beards, that verily, O Brahman-scather, did the gods maintain as thy
portion of water.
15. The rain of Mitra-and-Varuna does not rain upon the Brahman-
scather ; the assembly (sdmiti) does not suit (fclp) him ; he wins (ni) no
friend to his control.
rpp. reads in b -jyHm. With c compare vi. 8S. 3 d.
20. To the war-drum.
{//*; -ii ;///(} 7 1/(1 }-ih'(f I if dtttuiuhhtm attAut). tpJistuhhiim : l.j*i^afi]
Found also in I'.'iipp. ix. (in tlie verse-order 1, 2, 4, 3, 5, S, f\ 7, 0-12). This hymn
and vi. 12^ are quoted toirethrr by K.iu<;. i^». I and \'ait. 34. 1 1 : by the former, in a
battlerit'*, f<>i infusing terror into a hostile army : by the latter, with beating of a drum
in a ji////«f sanitue.
Tr.iusl.iteil : I.utbvi^, p. 4''»o ; <irill, 68, 153 ; (triffith, i. 220 ; Bloomfield, 130, 436;
Weber, .\\ iii. 2.\ \.
I. rb(' loud-noised drum, warrior-like, of forest-tree, brought together
(sdmfiiff.i) with the ruddy [kine], whetting the voice, dominating our
rivals ; thunder thou loudly a,L;ainst [them] like a lion, about to conquer.
255 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK V. -v. 20
That is (b), made of wood and bound and headed with cowhide. The mss. make
awkward work of writing ksnuvdnds ; nearly all have ksunn-^onXy Hp.* Xt////!/-, and
K. ksHv-] but there cannot well be any question as to the true reading. In d, also,
most of the mss. have the obviously wrong jyesydtty only H.E. jes-. The Anukr.
strangely reckons the verse (though it is a perfectly regular tristubh) as ?i jai^atf^ appar-
ently only on account of the unnecessary full reading iva (for *va) in d : or can it
perhaps count also ksunuvano as four syllables ? Ppp. has khanvdno; in d it reads
sirhha iva dvesamn (= hresann ?) abhi tanstanayati,
2. Like a lion hath thundered the wooden one, stretched (vi-bandh),
like a bull roaring at a longing cow ; virile {vrsan) [art] thou, impotent
thy rivals ; Indra-like [is] thy vehemence ((tisma), overpowering hostile
plotters.
The translation implies emendation to vdfitim in b, as made in our edition ; the mss.
vdsi/dm. All the sam/tifd-mss. (after their usual custom : see my Sk/. Gr. § 232)
abbreviate in a to -nldrtiV'^ and many of them (P.M.W.E.H.O.) have the misreading
'UJdhruv-. The padaA^xX does not divide druvdyah^ but the case is quoted in the
comment to Prat. iv. 18 as an exceptional one, vaya being regarded as a suflfix added
to dm. Ppp. reads at the beginning sinhdivdddnfdruvayo^ and combines (usmo ^bhi-
in d. The Anukr. notes no irregularity in the verse — as if it abbreviated iva to \>a
in both a and b.
3. Found i^nddnd) suddenly (sdhasct) like a bull in a herd, do thou,
seeking kine, bellow (;?/) at [them], winning booty ; pierce thou with
pain the heart of our adversaries; let our foes, leaving their villages,
go urged forth {pra-cyu).
Ppp. reads in aytli/tath saha sa-y and in c viddhi. The Anukr. notes no irregularity
in the verse, although d is clearly 7i jagatl-^'SATiy and to resolve vidhia in c is contrary
to all analogy.
4. Wholly conquering the fighters, shrill-crying, do thou, seizing those
that arc to be seized, look abroad on many sides ; respond Qd'giir)^ O drum,
devout, to the voice of the gods ; bring the possession of our foes.
Vedhis is as superfluous to the sense in c as it is redundant in meter. The Anukr.
takes no notice of the irregularity, nor of the deficiency in %, {tlrdhua- being very harsh,
and not found in RV.). The /^ </tf-text i^z^s gfhydh in h\pftands is apparently to be
understood with it. The voice of the gods (or of heaven, ddivl) is apparently the
thunder.
5. Hearing the uttered {pra-yam) voice of the drum speaking, let the
woman, suppliant, noise-wakened, run to her son, seizing his hand —
our enemy, frightened in the conflict of deadly weapons.
One might conjecture in a prayatam * of [us] advancing.* Thb verse and 6 and 9
are really the only regular tristubhs of the hymn.
6. Mayest thou first {pflfva), O drum, speak forth thy voice ; on the back
of earth speak thou, shining {mc) ; opening wide the jaws (Jabh) on the
army of our enemies, speak thou clearly, O drum, pleasantly (sfoiHavat),
V. 20- HOOK V. TlIK ATHAKVA-VKOA-SAttHITA. 256
'I h.it is, * what is pliMsant to us/ appnrrntly. PAn*a in a mif^ht also mean ' In (font.
in our van.' I'pp. rcvls in A. b viuthatva ^airiin: ntiin httkit roiamAnah ; ami it
makf!% llu' si'conil lialfvrrsc rxLhaii^c places i*ith 8 c, d.
7. Let Ihcrc be noise between these two firmaments (ndbhas)\ sever-
ally let thy sounds (tihvani) j;w swiftly; roar at [them], thunder, trucu-
lent (?), resounding; {^lokakrt) unto the victory of our friends, a good
parti/an.
Mitra in mttntiinyti has to l>c taken as subjective instead of objective genitive. It is
only with (liltii ully {^ianft* ') tliat b tan l>c made metiically complete [unless we read Alitf
for /^-J. rpp. riMils at tlie end (/<f././///. [^lUoomfu-ld discusses W///J//<f, AJI*. xii. 441. J
8. Maile by devices (<////;, niay it speak forth its voice; excite thou
the weapons of the warriors; allied with Indra, call in the warriors; by
frien<ls smite mij;htily down the enemies.
* r»y (levici'S* : i.e., apparently, with art. Kmendation of vatiJIti to va4iJsi in a is
veiy desirable ; Tpp. has the 2<1 pris. fi/tttratTti instead ; and, as noted above, it substi-
tutes our r> c, d for the smind half vet so. Theie is a s)lUlilc Lit king in A.
9. A vociferating; herald (^fravadd), with bold army, making proclaim
in many places, soundin;; tluou;;h the villaj;es, winning advantage, know-
ing the ways, do thou distribute {vi-Ar) fame to many in the [battle] of
two kinjjs.
The veisc seems to relate to the proclamation of victory and of the desert of those
to whom it is due: see Koth, /•if/;v//ff tin li'^hflttrj^k, p. if). I'pp. xe^t\% prairavfn0
for//<f7'</./i^ in A, and b/mjit for //.//ii in d. [Tor 7;ntini2, rischel, />*/. S/uti. I. 297. J
10. Aiming at advantaj;^'. conquering good things, very powerftd,
con(|uering a host, thou art sharpened by brd/iman; as the pressing-
stone on the [soma-] stalks in the press, do thou, O drum, dance on
[their] possession, seeking booty {^i^vjuin).
The tianslation implies cmendatitm ot ^arviim (read by all our mss.) in d Xoj^avr*it,
as made in our edited text; l»ut^j;ir;T<r/// vtdai mi^ht perhaps mean * their |¥>ssession in
kine.* Tr.'it. ii. ^)2 prrscriU's i^tfyahkftas (not -yask ), Up. alone reads 4dhftk in c
whitli Pet. l.exx. prefer; tidfii is. to be sure. 5U|M*it1uous l>esiile/^ff7'J, and ran hardly
Ik.* translated. Ppp. has, for b, mitt am dadhAnas tvi)iio vi/*a{iU ; and it reads 4idhi
(not *f//'/) in d- The fii.st pada is defet tivr. uidrss we make the violent resolution \r-4-
at the bei^inninj; ; in the third we have to re.id '; if [_i>r 'dtth\.
11. Overpowering foes, overpowering and putting down, overpower-
ing hostile p!<»ttcis. seeking kine, overpowering, up-shooting, bring forth
thy voice as a sp«;»ker {Viii^viti) his discourse (mdutta) \ si>eak up force
(.^/>) here in order to the coiujueiing of the host.
•^•'"'.V'""" '" '"" ^''^^ '*• •* "*i'*pf J»t for j./wj^rjw.. I'pp- offers no variants. The
words pi//// f.// and ttf\at (l"»th tint hansjr»l in /.ir/«i tixt) fall under I'rAt. ii. 82 ; iii. 1 ;
iv. 70. (i,t:'t'itin4t (p. i;«>/i,f/;.//0 is by Pr'it ii 23. The second pada is defective liv
ono s\I!al>lc.
257 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK V. -v. 2 1
12. Stirring {cyu) the unstirred, going oftenest into contests, con-
quering scorners, going in front, unsubduable, made safe by Indra,
noting counsels (ividdtha)^ burning the hearts of our adversaries, go
thou quickly.
The abbreviated combination hrdyo- for hrddyo- has led here, as at i. 22. i, to the
padax^7L{^\xig /irodydfanah in d. The defective meter of a (which is not to be honestly
removed by resolving cy into r/) makes the reading suspicious (perhaps j<x///^//<2//^ ^).
Ppp. )\2iS prtanasdi iox puraetil in b, and kiptas ior guptas in c. Viddthd in c, perhaps
* the gatherings of our enemies * ; Lsee Geldner, ZDMG. lii. 746 J.
21. To the war-drum.
\Drahman. — dvUda^akam. vdnaspatyam dundubhidrvatyam (10-12. ddityddin devSn aprdrtha-
yaf).* dnustttbham : j^ 4^^. fathydpankti ; b.jagati; Jt. brhattgarbhd tristubh ;
12. j-p.yavamadhyd ^dya/ri.]
|_Padas 1 1 c, d and 12 a, b appear to be prose. J Not found in Paipp. Not noticed
in Vait. ; quoted by Kau^. (16.2), in a battle-rite (next after the preceding hymn).
♦LCf. extracts from Anulcr. under h. 20. J
Translated : Ludwig, p. 374 ; Griffith, i. 222 ; Bloomfield, 131, 439 ; Weber, xviii. 249.
1. Division of hearts, division of minds speak thou among our ene-
mies, O drum ; mutual hate, confusion, fear, we put into our enemies :
smite them down, O drum.
Pfula a might also be understood as * heartlcssness, mindlessness.* Kd^tna^a (in c)
occurs here only, and is very possibly only a misreading for ka^mala^ as equivalent to
which it is here translated.
2. Quaking with mind, with sight, and with heart, let our enemies
run fearing with alarm (fratrasd) when the sacrificial butter is offered.
The padam^'s,. unaccountably read utovipamdnd (instead of -ndh) in a.
3. Made of forest-tree, brought together with the ruddy [kine], belong-
ing to all the families {-gotrd-)^ speak thou alarm for our enemies, being
smeared with sacrificial butter.
The metrical structure is very irregular, though the right number of syllables can be
forced out, if the divisions of padas be overridden ; the Anukr. takes no heed. The first
three words constituted 20. i b. LThe usual sign of pada-di vision to be expected after
sdtnbhrta is lacking in Bp. In c, we may pronounce /r/i/rJj^/////-. J
4. As the wild beasts of the forest are all in a tremble at man, so do
thou, O drum, rOar at [and] alarm our enemies, then confound their
intents.
Read in c ^mitrdn in our text (an accent-sign lost over /rJ).
5. As the goats-and-sheep run greatly fearing the wolf, so do thou,
O drum etc. etc.
Or * run from the wolf, greatly fearing.* A sign of punctuation is omitted in our text
after blbhyatfh.
V. 21- noOK V. Tllli: ATIIARVA-VEDA-SAMHITA. 25*
6. As Ihc birds (paUitrin) arc all in a tremble at the falcon, day by
day ; as at the thundering of the lion, so do thou, O drum etc. etc.
Pad.! c [as the 5cnse shows J seems to li.ivc droppcl in here hy accident out of vs. 5
(or |)ossil>Iy 4), wlu-re alone it fits the connection. Aknrdivi occurs again in TAipfi.
V. 3->t3: indtAi^nl tasm^t tvAi ^ttauih pari pAtt\m ahardtvi. The Anukr. calU the
verse niinply jtii^dtl (on account of its 48 syllables), but piobably by an accideotal
omission of the epithet safptufl^ * of six padas/ wliich it usually adds in such a
7. Away have all the go<Is alarmed our enemies by the drum and the
skin of the i;azellc — [the pods] who are masters of the host.
8. With what foot-noises Indra plays together with shadow, by those
let our enemies be alarmed who go yonder in troops (itftikafds).
The playful tactics of Indra here arc not very clear.
9. Let the drums, with bowstring noises, yell toward all (yds) the
quarters — the armies of our enemies going conquered in troops.
Or jvtii*hostis (as indicated by its accent) is independent noun, *the noises of the
bow-sliin;;s.* The verse seems rather out of order.
10. O Aditya, take [away their] sight; ye beams, run after; let them
that have foot-fastenings fasten on, the arm-power (-77n'rf) being gone
away.
We should expect a passive verb in c, \i pa/saMji^/nis, as serms necessary, refers bacic
to %/fitls in 9 c It is apparently the enemy who are to l>e hampered in going, alter
losing their power of arm.
1 1. Do yc [who arc] formidable, O Maruts, sons of the six)ttcd mother,
with Indra as ally, slaughter our foes.
King Soma, king Varuna, the great god, also Death, Indra —
The first half-verse is repeated l>elow as xiii. 1.3 A. b. The verse is translated by
Muir (iv'. 333). The Anukr. correctly reckons c as a firAa/i-pAdA, hut takes no notice
of the redundant syllabic in a, or of the deficient one in d, perhaps reckoning them as
balancing one another. The second half verse would be better treated as constituting
one par.i;;rapli (unmctrical) with our vs. 12.
12. Lrt these armies of the gods, sun-bannered, accordant, conquer
our enemies : hail !
This bit of prosr, since it counts 24 syllal)lr*s (fi + o: o), is called by the Anukr. a
f^iU'^iff, ami ill (lescrilicd as jtjTiitnttd/ivtl, althouj^h its p.idas b ami c are equal. It is
enumriati'd in the j[,'(/f/«f ///f}/J (sec Hloimificld's note to Kau^. 14.7) as belonging to the
aptiftl/i/it X''^***-
This fourth tinu-.-Ma has U hymns, with 83 versrs, and the quotation (found only in
Up. and I).) is fl-atnuisiis trya^ltih^ of which the (itst part is obscure.
259 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK V. -V. 22
22. Against fever (takm&n).
[B/irgvangiras. — caturda^akam. takmanH^anadevatyam {takmdpabadhdyd * nena devdn aprdr-
thayat takmaud^anam astdui). dnustubham : /, 2. trisiubh (/. bkurij)\ j. virdt
pathydbrhatl!\
Found also (except vss. 2, it) in Paipp. Most of it is in xiii., in the order i, 3, 4,
S» Si 6* 7 cd, 10; then (beginning a new hymn), 12, 14, 8 cd, 9; but vs. 13 is in i.
Used by Kau^. (29. 18) among various other hymns, in a healing ceremony; reckoned
in \\\t gafiamdld as belonging in the takmand^ana gatia (26. i, note).
Translated: Roth, Ztir Litteratur und Geschichte des Weda^ 1846, p. 37 (about
half); Grohmann, Ind, Stud. ix. 381-423, especially 411 f., as text of an elaborate
medical disquisition on takmdn (nearly all); Muir, iis. 351 (part); Ludwig, p. 510;
Grill, 12, 154; Griffith, i. 224; Bloomfield, I, 441 (elaborate comment of almost 12
pages) ; Weber, xviii. 252. — See also Hillebrandl, Veda-c/irestomatht'e^ P'49 » ^' W. Fay,
Trans. American Philological Ass" n^ xxv. (1894), p. viii, who compares it with the
Song of the Arval Brothers. — As to Bdlhika and Miijavant, see Weber, Berliner Sb,
1892, p. 985-995 ; and as to Mujavant, also Hillebrandt, Ved, MythoL^ i.62 fl.
1 . Let Agni drive (bddh) the fever away from here ; [let] Soma, the
pressing-stone, Varuna of purified dexterity, the sacrificial hearth, the
bar/iiSf the brightly gleaming {fuc) fuel ; be hatreds away yonder.
Amuya * yonder ' has always an implication of disgust or contempt. In our text apa
and badhatam should have been separated in a. Ppp. reads in b marutas putadaksdt^
in c sam^i^dno^ and in d raksdnsi. (^d^ucands may mean ' causing great pain,* and it
may qualify all the persons and things mentioned.
2. Thou here that makcst all [men] yellow, heating {ftic) up like fire,
consuming; now then, O fever — for mayest thou become sapless —
now go away inward or downward. '
Or nyan * inward * is another * downward.* The mss. mostly omit to double the il of
ny^dy and several (P.M.W.H.) read nyaftg; P.M.W. have adharag, Ppp. has our
vi. 20. 3 instead of this verse.
3. The fever that is spotted, speckled, ruddy like a sprinkling, do
thou, O thou of power {-virya) in every direction, impel away downward.
The last half-verse occurs again as xix. 39. 10 c, d. * Rough, rugged' would be more
etymological renderings of parttsd and fdruseyd : cf. vdji vdjineyds^ RV. vi. 26. 2.
Pada b, virtually * as if sprinkled with red.* The address is probably to some remedy.
Suva at the end is a misprint for suva. In place of this verse, Ppp. has takmam sdkti-
nam ichasva va^f san mrdaydsi nah (our 9 b) : yathe *hy atra te grhdn yai purtesu
damyatu. |_Thcn, as its vs. 4, Ppp. has our vs. 3. J
4. I send [him] forth downward, having paid homage to the fever ;
let the fist-slayer of the dung-bearer {)) go back to the Mahavrishas.
Ludwig (and Grill after him) takes the obscure qakambhard in c as a proper name.
We may conjecture that the Mahavrsas are a neighboring tribe, looked down upon as
gatherers of dung for fuel, on account of the lack of wood in their territory. Ppp. makes
the meter of b easier by reading krtvdya.
V. 22- HOOK V. Tin: ATHARVA-VEIM-SAttlllTA. 260
5. Its home (oi-as) is the Mujavants, its home is the Mahavrishas; at
lonj; as horn, C) fever, so long art thou at home among the Halhikas.
The Trfit. rule i. 46 applii'S, if wo may trust the cf>mmcnt, to the name in d, and pro%-es
it to he fiti/AiJttt, and not M/i/tJta [_cf. WcImt, as citrd alcove J ; the mss. %'ary between
the two, the majority Kiviiii^ -//i- ; hut the ti'Mimoriy of no ms. is of any authority on this
particular jMMnt ; Tpp. appears to have -M/-. Some of our mss. (l.ll.O.D.) accent
tdkmtin in c*; its omission wouhl rectify the meter of c; the Anukr. civcs a correct
(mof hanical) definition of the verse as it stands. We shouM expect either vdi'dm or
iilviif, '[Sodo II of SPT's.J
6. O fever, trickish one, speak out (?); O limbless one, keep much
away (?); seek the fugitive (?) barbarian woman; make her meet a
thunderbolt.
Various points in tliis verse are very doul)tfuI ; in a, a vocative vfjcadit seems much
more prohalile, if only a suitable meaning could lie found for it ; and, if 10, one may
suspect tlie same character in hhufivtlvayn (prrhaps bhtlryikvaya * painful,' connectetl
with <l;7) ; the translation is mechanical, and follows the traditional text, since emenda-
tion yields so little satisfaction. I'pP- ^^^^^ vakatia for vi j^ada. In niitdkxHirim is
doubtless to be seen a word-]>lay on ttikman, but the .sense is only conjectural ; the word
is quote<i as an example under I'rat. ii. 85.
7. O fever, go to the Mujavants, or to the Halhikas, further ofT; seek
the wanton (^'I'ulra woman ; her, (.) fever, do thou shake up a bit (Kvr).
Some of our mss. (O.K.K.) read ttiits in d, as if the word were tin instead of tSm.
I*pp. \\ASf;ififhf^tinhii j^tt ijil *si ttiutfttii fftth'uxr ^r/ulh ; tit} tint ttyuctha frttphartyAm
ttlns takman nl *-'a lihunuhi.
S. Going away, eat thou thy connection {fuindhu), the Mahavrishas
[and] Mrijavants; those [fields] we announce to the fever; others* fields
verily [are] these.
• Thy connection/ i.e. • lliose with whom thou hast a rij;ht to meddle*; •6e!ds,'i.e.
• territories': d, " these ti-rriiories here behmg to some one else.*' I'ada b is corrupt in
rpp. ; for d, it reads */Mv/>i':f^//f'/f/ VilyaM^m^ and it has further on this verse: fiAtka'
vifttfAfh MtlfX't'tft^/tlm nttifiyafh r:'ii/rikil:'ii/hfi : prtijt\ ni takmant hn'ttftt^'nvtiksftrJImi
7ul y»wt1f». At IVP' ^'-5- I* 2 we find: tiiktnann imam U ksetntthtli^itm af»*lhka/am
frthivyilh ptit-i't ardhe,
9. In another's field thou rest est (/vi///) not ; being in control, roaycst
thou be gracious to us; the fever hath become ready (.'); it will go to
the Halhikas.
The /./#/// rradinj; in c is //«/ *hthtth ; prtiar- would better suit the meanini; Kiven,
* rraily to set out/ lit. 'having an objeet in front* (eomm. to VW.xuxJy^prakarsfmm
ivtn/i i^tiit/httf *fi pfi^ttho *Mti,/:;lft .'). iVula b is identical with vi. 26. I b; I*PP* ^**
insttad ui/tittftTk<t* *fn,tffyitfi ; in d it reads hi h It kit m.
10. In th.it thou, being cold, then hot (n'tnl), didst cause trembling,
togrtluT with cough — fearful are thy missiles, O fever; with them do
thou avoi«l us.
26l TRANSLATION AND NOTES, BOOK V. -v. 23
Ppp. begins with yas for yat^ and leaves atho unelided in a. Most of our mss. have
tdbhi 5 ma in d.
11. Do not thou make them thy companions — the baldsa^ the cough,
the udytigd (?) ; come not back hitherward from there : for that, O fever,
I appeal to thee.
Ziminer (who translates vss. 10-12, at pp. 3S1-5) understands udyugd in b as *sich
anschliessend * ; Ludwig as * angestrengt,* qualifying kdsdm as adjective ; perhaps it
means * hiccough ' ; baldsa may be * expectoration.' In c the/tf^a-text has a : dfh (Bp. d :
///), accent on the verb-form being false. LSPP's mss. have ^ with <f///, J/7/, ///, and r//.J
12. O fever, together with thy brother the baldsa [and] thy sister the
cough, together with thy cousin the scab {pdvtdn), go to yon foreign people.
Ppp. begins with this verse a new hymn, and has, for c, d, apdrit bhrdtrdtrvyena
fta{ye *io marayathm abhi. Read in our text at end of b sahd (an accent-sign slipped
out of place). LWithout note of variants, SPP. gives papma in both texts instead of our
pdmna^ and our H. reads pdpmdni. In spite of the possibility of taking pdpmi as
instrumental (cf. drdghmAy ra^ma^ JAGS. x. 533), we must detm pdf/ind the true read-
ing ?ii\([ pap ma a blunder, due perhaps to the frequent collocation /J//»<l/f bhratr7'yay
AB. etc.J
13. The fever of the third day, of two days out of three, the constant,
and the autumnal, the cold, the hot, that of the hot season, that of the
rainy season, do thou cause to disappear.
In a the intermittent phases of the disease, of course, are referred to. The pada-
text divides sadamodim in b, perhaps lit. * ever-binding.' Pada c lacks a syllabic ; the
Anukr. takes no notice of it ; we might add ca at the end. Ppp. has in b hdyanam
instead of ^dradam ; and in c v^va^dradam instead of ^Uam rilram,
14. To the Gandharis, the Mujavants, the Angas, the Magadhas, like
one sending a person a treasure, do we commit the fever.
The translation implies in c the easy emendation to prisyan {pradsyan) ; the
accent and /^/7//rt-reading {praocsydn) view the word as future from prad; the translators
assume -sydm^ and reach no acceptable sense. The comm. to Pr§t. ii. 1 1 correctly
quotes the case as one of the assimilation of final n to initial y. The Anukr. this time
takes no notice of the extra syllable in c if we should read iva instead of *va. Ppp.
reads gdndhdribhyo mdujamadbhyas kd^ibhyo mayebhyah : jdne priyam iva fev-,
|_As to the proper names, cf. JRAS. 1890, p. 47 7. J
23. Against, worms.
[A'dftva. — traycdafalam. dindram (krimijambhandya devdn aprdrihayat), dnustubham :
ij. virdj.']
Found, except vss. 10-12, in Paipp. vii. (vs. 9 coming before vs. 6). Used by K^u<;.
(29. 20) in a healing ceremony against worms; part of the last verse (13 c) is specially
quoted (29. 24) with the direction "do as prescribed in the text." LCf. hyjnns 31 and
32 of book ii.J
Translated : Kuhn, KZ. xiii. 140 ; Ludwig, p. 501 ; Griffith, i. 226 ; Bloomfield, 23, 452 ;
Weber, xviii. 257. — See Bergaigne- Henry, Manuel^ p. 148.
V /
!•/
V. 23- BOOK V. THK ATIIARVA-VKDA-SAttlllTA. ZOl
1. Worked in (<^//i) for mc [arc] hcavcn-and-carth ; worked in [isj
divine Saiasvati; worked in for mc [arc] l)oth Indra and Agni : to the
effect 'Met tliem (dual) grind up the worm."
Here, as cvrrywlicrc else, the inss. vary with the utmost diversity between Jtrimi And
krtni ; no attempt will l)c madr to n'i>oit their variations. The first three pAdas of the
verse are lepeatcd below as vi. 94. 3 a, b, c The pple. ^/*i (p. i^nia) |_* woven on, worked
in ' (rl f- 7vl) J seems to mean * hrou^^ht in for my aid * ; a root i# is insuflficiently supported
\%cc Whitney, ICtwts etc. J. For its forms Tpp. reads in a osaU^ in b oJ^a/d, in C pk4it0 ;
rpp. also has at the end imam for iti.
2. O Indra, lord of riches, smite thou the worms of this boy; smitten
arc all the niggards by my formidable spell {vdcas),
]*pp. reads in b kf mim^ and in Ct d vi^vA ^riilayo *^fena 2'dcasd wimd.
3. What one creeps about his eyes, what one creeps about his nostrils,
what one goes to the midst of his teeth — that worm do we grind up.
Read in c, d in our text i^tithtiti dim (an accent-.si^n 8lippe<I out of place). K*pp. hat
in A, b *ksdu and ttdsdu |_and in c apparently ^^'/it hast ^
4. Of like form two, of various form two, black two, red two; both
the brown and the brown-eared, the vulture and the cuckoo (l'6ka) —
they are slain.
In d, the mss. arc divide<I hetwecn te (H.I.II.s.m.T.PK.) and // (P.M.W.H.p.m.O.R.),
and either readinjc; is acceptaMe cnoiif;h. Our text f^ives tr ; the translation above
implies //. I'pp- makes sarupdu and viru/tdu exchange places, and has in d ki»kds,
5. The worms that are white-sided, that are black with white arms»
and whatever ones are of all forms — those worms we grind up.
The Anukr. does not notice the deficient .syllable of c. Tpp. reads in a siimx*aksds^
and in b sitabdhavas,
6. Up in the east goes the sun. seen of all, slayer of the unseen, slay-
ing both those seen and those unseen, and slaughtering all worms.
The first half verse is KV. i. 191. 8 a. b, without variant. Tpp. reads for a ttii msdm
jurvi* iti;dt/, and in b athn/id |_the ft is wtitten with the anundstka-H^w or candrabimdu
inveitedj.
7. The ytvdshas, the kiishkasJuxs, the stirrers, the ^ipax'itnukds — both
let the seen woim be slain, and let the unseen be slain.
The /i/i/i/ text <iivides fjiif-kih, hut not ^ipavitnukik^ l)oth according to Prit. \\. 25.
[_For fjat k.i, if. ttr,!/ kJ, ii. 3. i ixnd note; also fi/ttnfta-ka, note to ii. 32. 6, ami the
frecpient P.ili forms like tti pattftaka, J.itaka, ii. p. 7''*.J I*pp* has, for a. b, yai'djrat^
khdsaykaski {ydmo dhukiAma^ la pat tif kftavah : and, for d, adrs/a^ co *ia hamyatdtm,
8. Slain is the Yt'vnsfid of the worms, slain also the nadanimdm:
I have put them all down, smash (?f/ttJs»ntsd)] like X'/i<//;*a -grains with
a nnilstone.
263 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK V. -v. 24
Nadanimdn might possibly mean something like * a buzzing/ coming from a nadana^
root nad. The last pada is identical with ii. 31. i d. Ppp* has instead: hato yavUkho
hata^ ca fiavir hato sath ganavHn uta : hatd vt\vd *rdtaya anena vacasd mama
(cf. 2 c, d).
9. The thrce-heacled, the three-humped {-kaktid)^ the variegated, the
whitish worm — I crush the ribs of it ; I hew at what is its head.
The last three padas arc identical with ii. 32. 2b-d, above. Some of the mss.
(P.M.W.H.p.m.) read in a trdikak-. Ppp. has for a, \i yo dviqlrsa^ caturaksas kritni^
carngo arjunah (cf. the Ppp. version of ii. 32. 2), and in d apa for api. The deficiency
of a syllable (unless we read asia) in c is noticed by the Anukr. neither there nor here.
The three following verses are tlie same with ii. 32. 3-5.
10. Like Atri I slay you, O worms, like Kanva, like Jamadagni; with
the incantation of Agastya I mash together the worms.
11. Slain is the king of the worms, also the chief of them is slain;
slain is the worm, having its mother slain, its brother slain, its sister
slain.
12. Slain are its neighbors, slain its further neighbors, also those that
are petty, as it were — all those worms are slain.
13. Both of all worms and of all she-worms I split the head with a
stone, I burn the mouth with fire... ^o£^ y^** ^^ ^ i^J^riyy^ " HC^^^ 1 i i -^ . ^ 1 ^ t ^^
Ppp. reads a^mind in c
24. To various gods as overlords.
[Aiharvan. — saftadafakam. brahmakarmdtmadevatyam, atifdkvaram : i-iy. 4-p, atifakz'ari ;
II. fakvari ; ^J-i7'S-P' (/J* 16, bhurig aiijagati ; 77. virdf fakvari).]
LNot metrical. J In Paipp. xv. is found a corresponding piece, but one differing con-
siderably in detail; it contains counterparts to our vss. I, 2,4, 7-12, 14, 15, 17, but
not at all in the same order, and interspersed with nine otlier verses of similar tenor
(i. mitrah prihhtydh ; 6. vasus samvatsarasya ; 7. samvatsara rttlndm ; 11. visttuh
parvatdndm ; 12. tvastd rupdndm ; 15. samudro nadlndm; xd. parjanya osadhfndm ;
17. brhaspatir devdndm ; \%. prajdpatih prajdndm). Similar passages occur also in
other texts: thus, in TS. iii. 4. 5 (and the part corresponding to our 15-17 is repeated
again, with slight variations, at iv. 3. 3* ; and the same part, with variations, is found
five times as a refrain in MS. ii. 7. 20), in PCS. i. 5. 10 (which closely follows TS. iii.
4. 5), and in ^QS. iv. 10. i, 3 (with nothing corresponding to vss. 15-17). The hymn is
used by Kau^. in a royal coronation (17.30), in the nuptial ceremonies (78. 11), and in
the djyatantra (137.42). And many of the verses appear also in Vait., with oblations
to the various divinities mentioned, in different ceremonies: thus, in the dgrayana, vs. 7
(8. 7) ; in the cdfitrrndsydni^ vss. 1-3, 6, 7 (8. 13), 4 (8. 22), 9 (9. 27); in the agnisfotna^
vss. 8 (19.2), 5 (19.3), II (19.11).
Translated: GrifTith, i. 228; Weber, xviii. 260. — Cf. Weber's RSjasuya, Berliner
Abh., 1893, p. 142.
I . Savitar (' the impeller ') is overlord of impulses ; let him favor {av)
me, in this worship (prdhman)^ in this rite (kdrmatt), in this representation
V. 24- BOOK V. TIIK ATHARVA-VKOA-SAttHITA. 264
(purodhd), in this firm-standing, in this intent, in this design, in this
benediction (ti^is), in this invocation of the gods: hail!
This is the tenth item in Tpp. ; TS. (with P(jS.) and (,\'S. have the same. The Ppp.
order of Action5( is <lifferent, and inrlud*'S (ewer members: brahman^ karman^ purodhA^
dn'a/tiitt\ tlJtit/i\ d\is {tl^isas \%o\ t wire J jt'<I/i<}); TS. and PCtS. ^ive hdkmam^ ktaird^
d{(s^pnfOiihA^ kdrman^ dfvAhuti ; MS.« hrAhfttan^ putodhA^ kAtman^ d^ts^devdkAti;
^\*S., brahman^ ksatra^ karman, tl^ir, pratisthA^ devahuti. The Anukr. text is in part
confused and douhtful, and the inaccuracies of its metrical definitions of the parts of the
hynm are not worth tracing; out an<1 noting;. In our edition, the accent mark under the
first syllable of akutyAm is a misprint, and to be removed.
2. Agni is ovcrlonl of forest-trees ; let him favor etc. etc.
Tins is the eighth item in Tpp. In TS. and r(fS., Agni is made lord of beings
{jbhutA)\ in (,*<,*S., of the earth.
3. Heaven-and-earth are overlords of givers; let them favor etc. etc.
Literally, 'are overla<lics' (AMtiptttnf). Neither Tpp. nor the other texts have any-
thin;; cnrrcspondinfr to tliis versf. As in a number of othei similar cases, the mss.
make very awkward work of writin;; the /f of </<}//'// J///, the m.ijority (Hp.l'.M.W.lI.E.T.)
giving; instead /r/, onr (I.) ///■, one (K.) ///% and a few (U.D.R.) correctly tF; the
edited text has wrongly (ftl.
4. Varuna is overlord of the waters ; let him favor etc. etc.
This item stan<ls second in Ppp. ; TS. h.as it also; but in (,'V^-* V.iruna is addressed
as overlord of ordinances {tihat ma).
5. Mitra-and-Varuna are overlords of rain ; let them favor etc. etc.
This item is wantin«; in all the other texts. The mss. .ill read vrstyS *dhip»
(p. vrstya : Ad/np), the error doubtless originating in a double samdhU such as is
extremely frecpient in I*pp.
6. The Marnls are overlords of Ibc mountains ; let them favor etc. etc.
According to Ppp. (i 1 ) and TS., Vishnu is overlord of the mountains; TS. sets the
Maruts ovi-r the troops (^m//«i). and VV^* gives them no place.
7. Soma is overlord of plants ; let him favor etc. etc.
In I*pp. (14) Scmia is overlord of milks (pttyasAw) ; in TS. and (.\*S.. of herbs.
cS. Vfiyu is overlord of the atino-!;pherc ; let him favor etc. etc.
Here Ppp. (3) and the otlu-r texts give the same overlordship.
9. The sun {sftrytT) is overlord of sights (or eyes : cdtsus) ; let him
favor etc. etc.
In Ppp. (4). the sun is ralliv} nverlnrtl of heaven («/r:') ; and so also in TS.; but
(,'(,'S. sets him t>ver the asti-risms.
10. The moon is overlord «»f aster isms ; let him favor etc. etc.
1 his itiin comes fifili in Ppp : TS. has it also: in Q'f/S. the moon is not mentioned,
while the aster isms, as n<iteil aUivo. are put under the sun.
26$ TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK V. -v. 25
1 1. Indra is overlord of heaven ; let him favor etc. etc.
In Ppp. (9) Indra is overlord of acts or rites {kdrman) ; in TS. and QQS., of chiefs
12. The father of the Maruts is overlord of cattle; let him favor
etc. etc.
In Ppp. (13) and in TS., this overlordship is ascribed, equivalenlly, to Kudra ; it is
wanting in ^QS.
13. Death is overlord of creatures {prajd) ; let him favor etc. etc.
In Ppp. (18) it is Prajapati instead of death ; and so also in (^(^S. ; TS. has nothing
corresponding.
14. Yama is overlord of the Fathers ; let him etc. etc.
This item is number 19 in Ppp.; but in (^(^S. it is wanting; and in TS. Yama
is set over the earth. Here, again, the reading pitrenAm is found in one ms. (Bp.).
Additional items in TS. are bfhaspdtir brdhmatiah^ mitrdh satyAndm (Q^S. the same),
samudrdh sro/yiindm^ dnnafh satnrdjydndtn^ tvdstd rtip&ndm (^QS. tv, samidhdth
rtipdnSm) ; C?S. has only those already given.
15. The upper {pdra) Fathers — let them favor etc. etc.
16. The lower {dvara) Fathers {tatd) — let them favor etc. etc.
17. The Fathers (tafd), the grandfathers {tatdmahd) — let them favor
etc. etc.
The translation implies emendation to taias at the beginning of vs. 17, as the sense
seems to require, and as the other texts suggest. Ppp. combines vss. 15-17, reading
pitaras pare 'varas tatas taddmahas te md etc.; TS. (iii.4. 5: and PCS.), pftarah
pitdmahdh pare *vare tdtds tatdmahd ihd md etc.; TS. \w,y^*y pitdrah pitdmahah
pdr^'vare ti ttah etc., with which MS. agrees. Two of our mss. (O.D.) begin vs. 17
with tatds tat- ; the rest have tdtas^ and our printed text follows them.
25. For successful conception.
[Brahman. — trayoda^akam. yonigarbhadcvatyam, dnustubham : ij. virdt/urastddbrAati.]
Found (except vs. 2, and some end-repetitions) also in P^ipp. xiii. (in the verse-order
'» 5» 3» 4» 7> io» 8, 6, 9). The hymn is quoted in Kau^. (35. 5) in the ceremony for
male conception i^puthsavand) ; and vs. 7 (unless it be rather vi. 95. 3, which the comm.
to vi. 95 holds) in Vait. 28. 20.
Translated: Weber, Ind, Stud, y. 227 \ Ludwig, p. 478 ; Griffith, i. 229; Weber,
xviii. 264.
I. Brought together from the cloud (ipdrvata), from the womb {yoni)
of the sky, from every member, let the virile organ, seed-placer of the
embryo, set {a-dha) [it] like the feather on the shaft.
Or * from the sky [as] womb.* That which is * brought together ' is the thing (seed)
to be 'deposited.* The translation of d implies emendation to fdrdu; Weber conjec-
tures tsardti. The insertion of the feather in the arrow-shaft is elsewhere also the
subject of comparison as a work of effective skill; cf. RV. x. 18. 14 b. The verse is
V. 25- BOOK V. Tin: ATHAKVA-VKlM-SAttlllTA. 266
citfd in P pp. with it^ pratika ami ity ekA added. aH if it had occurred earlier in the text :
but it h;is tuit l>crn disc ovcrvd anywhere. The resolution of -UU to -taAt in a is neces-
sary to fill cHit the mrtrr.
2. As this groat earth receives the embryo of existences, so do I set
thine embryo; I call thee to its aid.
Tlie first half-vcrs'.' (kcufk a^ain lielow a.^ vi. 17. I a. b. and also in the second %'erse
of the a(hti(ion to !<V. x. 1K4, but with the rcadini; utttinti for bhutinAm (the RV. verse
is alsf) fouml in an achlition to A(fS. i. 14.3 : sec Stt-nzk-r's translation, p. 36), and in
Mr. (|_i. 1 2. 4 J Wintcinit/, p. 93) with ththantl for the same. \yi. also MGS. ii. 18.
4 b and p. 1 54. J
3. Place the embryo, O Sinivali ; place the embryo, O Sarasvatl; let
both the A<^'vins, garlanded with blue lotus, set thine embryo.
The verse is KV. x. 184. 2 and MH. i. 4. 7 and MI*. |^i. 12. 2J, where however is reail
in c a^x'inAu dfvav. TpP- reads Ixith times (in a and b) <Uhi, (^IS. (xiv. 9.4**) follows
KV. (but with prthustukt at end of b, and pu^kafasrAjAu in d). llCiS. (i. 25. I) differs
from our text only by having a^vinAf uliav A. ill. also llCfS. i. 6. 4; MU.i. 5.9.
[^Cf. M(JS. ii. iS. 2 k and p. 150. J «
4. Thine embryo let Mitra-and-Varuna. [thine] embryo lei god Ilriha-
spati, thine embryo let both Indra and Agni, thine embryo let Dhatar
place.
I 'pp. reads rAjA varutw for mUrAvarunAu in a.
5. Let Vishnu prepare the womb (y6ni)\ let Tvashtar adorn the
forms ; let Prajapati pour on ; let Dhatar place thine embryo.
The verse is also found, without variant, as KV. x. 184. 1 and in QH. xiv. 9. 4"*, IIGS.
i.25. 1, MIJ. i. 4.0, and Ml*. |_i. 12. 1 J |_Cf. MGS. ii. 18. 2.1 and p. 1 5^*. J
6. What kinp; Varuna, or what divine Sarasvati knows, what Indra
the Viitra-slayer knows, that embryo-maker do thou drink.
One or two of our mss. (IWV.) read -hhantkAr- in d. Tpp* has for b vetia </rr#
brkaxpatih^ and in C puts^'/i^/ after intitas. |^See von Schroedcr, Tuhin^er Kathm-kis,^
p. 36. J
7. ICmbryo art thou of herbs, embryo of forest-trees, embryo of every
existence; maycst thcni, () A^ni, set an eml>ryo here.
Comp.ire \i.<)5.3, witli whi< li thi' vcr<;r is in consider a! 'l*- part identical. It is found
also as VS. xii. 37, an«l in 'IS. iv. 2. 3'. MS. ii. 7. 10. in all with a diffrrrnt d: A^ne
j^iUhho tt^iUtt ti\i ; M.S. (uithri loinbinrs in a j^th/'/io'sy : and in tliis last point I'pp.
, acrcos with it. • ^-^ *. •
I V '. . . 8. Mount thou ; play the hero ; set an cml)ryo in the womb ; virile (vrftin)
^■^ ' art thou, that h.ist virility; for pro;;cny do we conduct thee hither.
I I'PI^ ^^-^^ kf.ifi./it (fnr sliinth) in a, ami. f«»r c, •i'rttlfttifh I'f sttYAvttmttim, The verse
ot'( iits .iKi> in (,'< tS. (i. \n. ^0. wiiit li u.ids kf*iuii.t viuiy*ts''tt in a, sAtik*iytt {iov jr^fmrAm^
in b. ''t ^.l'i,ith -.t Stiff n A tihtUt ftu c. .wul h.t'.'AmAhe at thr cnfl. Our (). \\^% skAnHka
T7./.rv- in a. I lie iitcntion t»f the dent.d s of skttntiti is by I'rat. ii. 104.
26; TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK V. -v. 26
9. Go apart, O Barhatsama ; let an embryo lie unto thy womb {yiUii) ;
the gods, soma-clrinkcrs, have given thee a son partaking of both.
Ludwig understands the last epithet as meaning * belonging to us both,' which is not
impossible; Weber, * dcr doppelt schafft'; it is literally 'possessing what is of both.*
Ppp. has for c dadan te putram dcvd. Bdrhatsdme (p. -/la/osd-) is an anomalous for-
mation : a stem -Md is against all analogy as fem. of a vrddhi-derivativc, while -//// (which
Ludwig assumes) is equally wrong as a feminine ; Ppp. has the same form ; it doubtless
means 'daughter of Brhatsaman/ To make c of full meter is impossible without
harshness.
10. O Dhatar, with best form, in the two groins of this woman do
thou set a male {ptividhs) son, to be born in the tenth month.
This verse also (like 2, above) occurs in the additions to RV. x. 1S4 and to AGS.
i. 14.3 Lp- 37, transl.J and in MP. \\. 12. 6 J, with the variants: visnoh^ for dhatah in a,
and asyam nary dm gavlnyam (MP. -nyhm |_in mss. E. and W., -nyam in the Oxford
textj) for b; ACiS. \\7{.^ putrdn and MP. gArbham in c. Ppp. begins here a new hymn
reading savitu(i\ ^resthena \ ; ^resthetia 2; visnok ^resthena: tvastuh ^resthena 3.
The other texts omit any such variants of vs. 10. LCf. also MGS. ii. 18. 4 c and p. 156,
s.v. visuoh.\ ♦LOxford text, v{sno.\ \ \0x else bhaga or bhagah. Roth sent W. three
notes on this vs. and they do not seem to agree. In b Ppp. has ndbhd for ndryd.\
11. O Tvashtar, with best etc. etc.
12. O Savitar (* impeller *), with best etc. etc,
13. O Prajapati, with best etc. etc.
The Anukr., though taking no notice of the extra syllable in 12 a, feels that it cannot
pass over the two in 13 a, and defines accordingly, with mechanical correctness.
26. Accompanying a sacrifice.
[BraAmtift. — dvtfdafakam. vdstospatyam uta mantroktabahudtvatyam. r^ ^. 2-p, drey usnih ;
2^ 4^ 6, 7, 8y 10 1 II. 2'P. prdjdpatyd brhatt; J.J-/, virdd gdyatrt ; g. j-p, pipUikamadhyd
purausuih : i-ii. ekdvasdna ; 12. pardtifakvari 4'p'jogatu\
LPartly unmetrical.J Found also in Paipp. ix. (in verse-order 1-3, 5, 4, 6-8, if, 10,
9, 12). Quoted in Kau^. 23. i, in a ceremony of consecration of a new house, and given
in \\\^ paddhati (see note to Kau^. 19. i) among the pustika mantras. Used in Vait.
16. 6 in counteracting an enemy's soma-offering {agnisiomn)\ and vs. 12 a, b in 19. 4,
also in the agnistoma^ with a cup for the A^vins. Neither treatise teaches us anything
whatever as to the real meaning of the hymn. The matter is in considerable part
metrical, though in part also too irregular to be so called.
Translated: Ludwig, p. 27 ; Griffith, i. 231 ; Weber, xviii. 267.
I. The sacrificial formulas {ydjns) at the sacrifice, the fuel, hail! let
Agni, foreknowing, here join for you.
Or *join {yuj) you.* *Join* is probably used in the sense of 'duly use or apply'
(Ludwig, ** anwenden *'). The verse is plainly composed of two trisiubh p^das, but the
Anukr. refuses to resolve sudhd^ and so reckons only 21 syllables.
V. 26- BOOK V. THE ATIIARVA-VEDA-SAttHITA. 268
2. Let the heavenly impeller {savs'/dr), the bull (ma/n'sif), foreknowing.
join [them] at this sacrifice : hail !
Ppp. ic.itls, :ifXvT /»ni/iJfHi»y j'tijfie sayujas svtiha. '1 he Anukr., in this and many of
tlic folluwiiif; verses, simply counts 20 syllables {/^nlj- brhaii)^ without heeding the fact
that each contains a tfhtubh p.'ula.
3. Let Indra, foreknowing, at this sacrifice join songs and revels
{jikthamadti)^ the well-joined ones (?) : hail!
]*pp. roads and cond)ines sayujas sv-. The mechanical definition of the Anukr.
hiipliv5 a division into 7-f 7 t 8 syllaldes. Thrre is some hlunderinf; of the mss. over
ulthi}mti€/tint\ W. appearing to read ukytt-M-^ and T.W. ukttlm-. Suyujas, here and in
V5S. 7-1 1, may l>e ijcnitive 'of the well- joined one*; it does not agree in gender with
the nouns that pieccde j^aside ftom if^/saj.
4. The directions (f»n}isti) at the sacrifice, the notices {nivfJ): hail!
taught by the wives, carry ye here, joined.
I*pp. reads //<?/>/! niritiJ pHyo yajtinsi ^is/tVt etc.
5. The meters (chdti(fas) at the sncrifice, O Maruts : hail ! as a mother
her son, fill ye here, joined.
The nirter ami its treatment )>v the Anukr. are the same as in the case of vs. I.
6. Here hath come Aditi, with bar/iis^ with sprinkling [waters],
extending; the sacrifice : hail !
A peifcctiy j;i><kI pair of tti\tubh padas.
7. Let Vishnu join variously the fervors ijiipas) at this sacrifice, the
well-joined ones : hail !
rpp. aj^.iin jiives sayujas sv-.
8. Let Tvashtar now join variously the forms at this sacrifice, the
well-joined ones : hail !
All th«' sttfh/:tfi} niss. read fttf^a ann/ft, as in our text, the //irt^*i- text having rtlfih '
I*pp., »)n till* othiT h.mil. ^ivt's lui/ittif/tt} 'rtfiifti} ^sinin. rrt)bal)ly it is a case of anoma-
lous Mithiihi (with hiatus), which should iMve l>een included in Trit. iii. 34 (sec the
note to that lule); hut one may .ilso conjecture that the true reading is bakudki
^nutuptlit.
9. Let Hhaga join now for him the blessings («?f/j) ; at this sacrifice
let him. foreknowing;, join the well-joined ones: hail!
rpp- (otiiMiu-s fiiWi! Vf////';/. and rrads sayujat, as alM)ve. I'he Anukr. evidenUy
reckons tlui-r p.idas, of 1 1 ♦ 7 ♦ K s\lla))K*s.
10. Let Soma join variously the milks (/«nv/J), at this sacrifice, the
well joim'd oiu-s : hail !
11. Let Indra join variously the heroisms, at this sacrifice, the well-
joine«l ones : hail !
269 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK V. -v. 2/
12. O A^vins, come ye hitherward with worship (brdhman)^ with
t^^f ^/-utterance increasing the sacrifice. O Brihaspati, come hitherward
with worship; this sacrifice [is] heaven {svdr) here for the sacrificer:
hail !
Ppp. has instead, for d, yajfiath vayam svaritam yajamdnHya dhehi svahd. The
Anukr. would have us read the last pacia as 15 syllables, and calls the verse ^jagatl
because amounting to 48 syllables, though the first three padas are regularly tristubh.
With this hymn ends the fifth anuvdka^ of 5 hymns and 69 verses ; the Anukr. cita-
tion is navd ^parahj and Bp.D. add further apard saste navd *parah (Bp. -r^i/// ca cd
* nuvdkah).
27. Apri-hymn : to various divinities.
\Brahman. — dvdda^akam. dgneyam. /. brhattgarbhd tristubh ; 2. 2-p. sdtnndm bhuriganu-
stubh ; J. 2-p, drci brhatl ; 4. 2-p, sdmnl bhurigbrhatl ; j. 2'p. sdmni tristubh ; 6, 2-p.
virdn ftdma gdyatrl ; 7. 2p. sdmnl brhatl (iftid [2-y /] ekdvasdndh) ; 8. samstd-
rapankti ; 9. 6-/. anustubgarbhd pardtijagatl ; JO-t2. purausnih,'\
This peculiar and half-metrical dprl-\\yxMi occurs also in several Yajur-Veda texts :
namely, in VS. (xxvii. 1 1-22), in TS. (iv. 1.8), and in MS. (ii. 12.6); further, in K.
(xviii. 17), and (ace. to Schroeder*s note) in Kap.S. The versions in VS. and TS. agree
very closely throughout, in readings and in division ; there is in all the verses a more or
less imperfect metrical structure, of three tris/tibAAike padas to a verse. MS. also in
general agrees with these, but has an inserted passage in its vs. 5 which dislocates the
division of vss. 2-4. Ppp. has the same hymn in ix., and follows pretty closely the
Yajus-version. In our text the proper division is thrown into great confusion, and there
are many readings which are obviously mere corruptions. The Anukr. supports our
mss. at all points. The division of VS. and TS., as being necessary to any understand-
ing of the hymn, is noted in brackets in the translation below.
The hymn is not used as an dprf-hymn in the liturgical literature, but is quoted in
Kau9. (23. 7) in the ceremony of consecration of a new house, and again (45.8), in the
Ttjfd^iimana rite, to accompany (with the kindred hymn v. 12) an offering of the omen-
tum of a cow; while (19. I, note) the patfdhati reckons it among ihe pustika mantras,
Vss. I and 2 (with the division as in our text) are used by Vait. (10. 13, 12) in the
pa^ubattdha ceremony.
Translated: Ludwig, p. 434 ; Griffith, i. 232. — Weber, xviii. 269, gives a general
introductory comment to the hymn, but leaves it, on account of ** the numerous mis-
divisions and corruptions of this, its Atharvan version," untranslated. Cf. hymn 12 of
this book.
I. Uplifted becomes his fuel, uplifted the bright burnings of Agni,
most brilliant ; of beautiful aspect, with his son, — [2.] son of himself
(tdnundpdt)y dsjira, many-handed, —
All the Yajur-Vcda texts agree in ending the verse with the third pada, and in read-
ing at the end suprdtfkasya sundh; of this our text is a palpable corruption, and appar-
ently made after tlic addition to this verse of the following pada, in order to help their
connection. ri)p. also has -kasya sunos^ and at the end of a bhavantti; it and the
Vajus-texts read vi^inivedds instead of bhliripdnis. The description of tlie verse by
the Anukr. |_if we pronounce urdhuA in a J is correct, counting the second pada as of 9
syllables.
V. 27- HOOK V. THK yXTMAKVyX-Vr.DA^SAKiniTA. 27O
2 [2 b]. A f^od nmon^ g'^ls, the god anoints the roads with honey
(WiiMti), wilh glicc.
Tlic I'lid of tluK vctsr is titr proper cml of vs. 2 ; MS., however, adds to it the fint
p.'irla (if our 3; and it rrafls for a //**T'#f de^'t'hhyo devayanikn. In t), VS. MS. hare
anaktu : TS., // ^nakti ; aiul VS.TS. set the /j-wj/i/ii/inark next ixlort fa/Adj.
3. With honey he attains the sacrifice, pleased, the praised of men
(f/thtiftifistj), Aj;ni the well-doing, the heavenly impeller {sai^itdr)^ having
all choice things.
All tlic other texts, imludinj^ Tpp., rend in ^ frfnilmh, of which our /r4/iv- is doubt-
less to he regarded as a hlunderin;; corruption. \'S.TS. have before it makimMg ; and,
in b, iii^ne^ with intcipumtion after it; Tpp. omits a^ne (or a^nih)\ MS. adds as third
p.lda the first pfida of our and tlic other texts* vs. 4. Our fada-VtxX rightly divides the
verse into three pfidas |_io : 8 : 9 J, though the Anukr. acknowledges only two.
4. Here he cometh with might (fiiiuis) unto the various ghees, prais-
ing, he the carrier, with homage, —
It needs the first part of the next verse to end off this, and the other texts so divide.
They liave also the nuuh easier reading f^hrtena Un j;/tr/d cH ; Tpp. %\yt% gkrtrmm tdt
Tiihtiith fitiffttt.ul *^9thft sruro etc. (adding 5 a). VS.'r.S. have a single interpunctioB
after »t*ifnttsil ; MS. makes its verse out of our 4 b and 5 a, b, with interpunction alter
5 A. L VS. T.S.MS, accent /«/J ///»'. J
5 [.\ c). Agni, unto the .spoons, at the sacrifices {atf/tviird)^ the proffer-
ings {/*'tn'tf/)' [S] ^''0' '^^ sacrifice his greatness, Agni's, —
The Va jus- texts have at the lirginning ttji^n/m (a)s<i I 'pp. : see under vs. 4), and later
fntviifstt (which tlie T.S. /i/</ii text divides puiyAhiu; ours gives //'<T'^<fi'j«). MS*8
verse is made of ours with our 4 b prefixed.
6 [5 b]. [Ml'] crossing (?) among pleasant profTerings ; both the V'asus
stood and the greater hcslowcr of good (ivij//).
Tliis wht>It' vciso in our text is coriiipt. and tlie transl.ition, of course, only a mcchan-
iral oniv Thr V.iins-ifxts h.i\t' i.f //;/ (TS. /) maruita suptayAstih (TS. mandrisu
frtty,f\ti/i : tliis v.iri.iti'ui s!i«i\\s hi>w urn ii tain the tradition was as to the sense of the
p.iss.it;<') : am! M.S. in.ikrs hcr.r tin* iiiNcriinn .spoken of aliove, reading juprayiiS
sf,if tfftiift : /i/z/'A.* t/nifAtti.tfiiiii ; all tlirn fniish the vcise willi 7'iisii( t*'iiitha X'asudki"
tiima^ ill. I'l'l*' '** sj»'iih'!. liut apj" .irs ti> rcacl at the beginning svfnttmindrasH, The
m.ikcis of i>i;r t<-\ts p>ili.i|is ui) Ii'istnod -*//uit,tfd^ as phiral of -tihAtr ; the /tf«/it-
divisir>n -.x^u^ih.tt.nax is sj f.i i.iUv pnsi iiln'd hy i'l.'it. iv. 45. The metrical definition
(on< cms only tiio nu'iilf 1 nf svll.iiil-.-s : S i 12- 20. 1^1 'PP* <-'"ds with -Jhiittima^ ca.\
7 ['•]. The luMvrnlv <In.>iN .ill (k-fend always after his course (vnifd) —
I liis \i-iM' is ili.'i'.tli Ns tiiifij't ill i!s s«'i nnl h.df : the Yains texts, and also Ppp.,
ri .1-1 iusi- .nl :tiifi ti.iJirf^ ''.''•'*' ' ' li'- V"''f'')« •^'"1 ^'^- ^'-^^ l»cfore it 7'/|;«l, and
rpp. :;,:#-./. T!.i' AtnjJ.T. i'^nmis tin* tvichnt tn^tubh chara(ter of a.
S !')C!. l.Mnliii.; it wilh .\_;ni"s <!i)m.iin nf wide expansion. [7.] dripping,
wmsliiplul, di)s(*, K*L (lawn aiul ni:;]it f.ivor tliis our inviolable (? tidAi-ard)
s.u lifu c.
271 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. DOOK V. -V. 2/
The other texts (including Ppp.) read -vyacasas, omit agnis and read pdtyam&nds in
a; and they have an entirely different b, namely ti asya ydsane divyi nd ydtt^u ; what
our text substitutes was found as v. 1 2. 6 a above. The Anukr. name for the meter,
safftstarapankti^ is wholly misapplied, since it has to be read as 12-I-1 1 : 8-I-7.
9 [8]. O heavenly invokers, sing ye unto our uplifted sacrifice (adhvard)
with Agni's tongue ; sing in order to our successful offering. [9.] Let
the three goddesses sit upon this bar/Us, Ida, SarasvatI, BharatI, the
great, besung.
We have here two complete verses combined into one ; but the division goes on after
this correspondingly in all the texts. The three Yajus-texts, and Ppp., begin with ddivyd
hotdrA (the accent hdtdras in our version is against all rule), and MS. inserts imAtn
after ilrd/tvdm in a ; for b, C they read ^g9iir jihvam abhi{^\i\. }AS,jihva *bhi) grttftam :
krnutdfk nah svhiim (MS. 'taiti)\ further on they have sadantu for -tdm (but MS.
instead syondm) ; near the end, VS.TS. put maht after bharatf ; MS. has a sign of
interpunction after mahi ; Ppp. reads mahdbhdratL The pada tisrd devir etc. is the
same with R V. iii. 4. 8 d (which reads sadantu). The definition of the Anukr. fits the
meter very badly ; the pada-i^xi notes only 5 padas, nor is a division into 6 well possi-
ble ; they would count 1 1 +9 + 8 : 1 1 -I- 14 = 53, mechanically a bhurig atijagatl,
10. That wonderful seminal fluid (turipani) of ours, abounding in food,
O god Tvashtar, abundance of wealth, release thou the navel of it.
The other texts (including Ppp.) omit dtva and read ivdstH (but MS. ivdstar)^ add-
ing after it suviryam *y all also have at the end aj//// instead of the senseless asyd^ and
all but MS. have syatti for sya ; their mark of interpunction is set after suviryam (or
before nlyds). Compare also RV. ii. 40. 4 ; iii. 4. 9. Our Bp.» reads in a, by an over-
sight, ddbhum (emended in Bp. to ddbhutatti) ; but D.K. have dtobhutam as pada-
text. This and the two following verses have small right to be c2A\^d purausnih ; this
one counts 11 : 8-1-7 = 26 syllables. Read at the end in our text asyd (an accent-sign
slipped out of place). *|_But TS. suviram.j
11. O forest-tree, let thou loose, bestowing ; let Agni [as] queller
willingly sweeten the oblation for the gods.
Ppp. reads sumatid for tmatid ; also, at the end, sUdaydti, with the Yajus-texts.
The latter also have (except MS.) devisu for devibhyas^ and after it they all put their
mark of interpunction. The Yajus and Ppp. version of the last pSda is identical with
RV. iii. 4. 10 b Lsave that RV. has Iiavls\, This ^^ purausnih^^ counts 11 : 9-1-7 = 27
syllables.
12. O Agni, hail! make thou, O Jatavedas, the sacrifice for Indra;
let all the gods enjoy this oblation.
The Yajus-texts put the pause in its proper place before v/fv^. Tor yajfidm, TS.VS.
read havydm^ and MS. has devibhyas ; Ppp. has bhdgam. This ^^purausnih^^ counts
(if we divide the last two padas as indicated in the /^/^d-text) 11 : 9+7 = 27 syllables.
V. 28- HOOK V. THE ATllARVA-VEDA-SAlfilHITA. 272
28. With an amulet of three metals: for safety etc.
[AtAantin. — ftiturJa^itrcam. tt n*rtidn*atynm {ttgrnydMn mantrfiktAm Jetnim tamfrSrtkjtm trtrr-
tarn asfJnf). trdistuhkam : 6. J/. aiifitJtftiri ; 7, 9, 10, u. Aaktimmatyammstahk ; ij. /mmattmA-]
I^Tlie second half of 1 is prosc.J Found also (except vs. 2 and vst. 12-14) in
I'Alpp. ii. Used by KAit^. twice, in company uith i.9 and i.35, in a ceremony (11. 19)
for ohtaininf; one*s desires and in one (52. 20) for winning splendor; and vss. 1, 12-14
in one (s^. 10, 11) for gaining; length of life.
Translated : Ludwig, p. 387 ; Oriflith, i. 234 ; Weber, xviii. 271.
1. Nine breaths with nine he combines (? safpi-md), in order to length
of life for a hundred autumns; in the yellow (/uirita), three; in silver,
three; in iron {hiyas), three — enveloped with fervor.
'Yellow/ doubtless 'gold.* Ppp. re.ids rajasA for tafasA in 4. The second half-
verse can hardly l>e called anything but prose, though the Anukr. takes it as good trisfuhk
meter. It apiKMrs doubtful whether this verse l)elongs with the rest, and whether the
nine prAnaj^rahas^ or the nine verses of the trivri sloma^ are not rather intended in it.
2. ' Fire, sun, moon, earth, waters, sky, atmosphere, directions, and
quarters, they of the seasons in concord with the seasons — let them
rescue (piiray) me by this triple one.
The verse, as was noted al>ove, is wanting in Ppp. One and another ms., here as
later, reads trvfi. To fill out the meter of c we have to make the harsh and unusual
resolution of the first A of ArtavAs.
3. Let three abundances {posa) resort to the triple one; let Pushan
anoint it with milk, with ghee ; aflluence of food, afllucnce of man
{ptimsa), aflluence of cattle — let these resort hither.
Ppp. reads in a ifivrta^ ; in c anyasya, and bkAumA both times (Mtf- in d). We need
in a to resolve trayah.
4. O Adityas, sprinkle this man well with good {;cdsu)\ O Agni, do
thou, thyself increasing:, increase him ; unite him, O Indra, with heroism ;
let the prosi>enng triple one resort to him.
Ppp. has, for c, d, yasmin Irivrc {helAm pusayisnur imam etc. (our c). Our mts.
vary at the end lK*twrrn posayisnu and -nuh^ the majority having -nuh (only B.O.I, -frrf) :
our text should 1)e emended to -nuh. \\\\\K SPf\ reads -nu and notes no variants. J
The Anukr., as usu.nl. docs not n«>te th.it a is ^ jat^all pAda.
5. Let earth, the all-bearing, protect thee with the yellow one; let
Aj;ni rescue [ibce] in acconl with the iron ; let the silver one (drjnna)^ in
concord with the plants, bestow (<///</) on thee dexterity, with favoring
mind.
rpp. reads in c vhudbhis te arjuno sam-. The meter is like that of verse 4.
6. Triply born by birth [is] this gold: one was Agni*s dearest ; one
fell away of Soma when injured ; one they call the seed of devout waters ;
let that tiiple [;old be thine in order to life-time.
273 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK V. -V. 28
Instead of vedhdsHm in d, a much easier reading would be vedMsas nom. (as tacitly
emended by Ludwig) ; and this is favored by I'pp-i which has vedaso reid **ftus; it
further gives in e (rivrtdstu te. With bed compare TB. i. 1.3*. The name aiiqakvarl
given to the verse by the Anukr. demands 60 syllables, but only 57(11 + 11 + 12:11 + 12)
can be fairly counted.
7. Triple life-time of Jamadagni, Ka^yapa's triple life-time, sight of
the immortal (avirta) triply, three life-times have I made for thee.
Ppp. reads triyQyusam ; and, at the end, nas krdhi for ie*karam, JUB. iv.3. i
has this version : triydyusam kaqyapasya jamadagnes iriydyusam : trfny amrtasya
puspdni trln dyunsi me *krnoh; and several of the Grhya-Sutras (QGS. i. 28 ; HGS.
i.9. 6 ; LMP. ii. 7.2 ; MGS. i. i. 24 (cf. p. 150) J; MB. i. 6.8) give the first half-verse,
with a different ending; |_also VS. iii. 62. GGS. ii. 9. 2l,gives the //vi//>t<2.J There
is no reason for calling the meter kakummail.
8. When the three eagles (snparnd) went with the triple one, becom-
ing, mighty ones {fakrd)^ a single syllable, they bore back death along
with (sdkdm) the immortal, warding off (antar-dliOL) all difficulties.
• Warding off,' literally * interposing [something between] themselves [and] ' ; * along
with,' doubtless = * by means of * (cf. vii. 53. i : xii. 2. 29). * Single syllable,* or * the one
indissoluble * : probably the syllable om is intended.
9. r^rom the sky let the yellow one protect thee ; from the midst let
the silver one protect thee ; from the earth let that made of iron protect
[thee] ; this [man] hath gone forward to strongholds of the gods.
Ppp. combines at the end -purd *yam. This verse also is called kakummatf by the
Anukr. without any reason.
10. These [are] three strongholds of the gods; let them defend thee
on all sides ; bearing these, do thou, possessing splendor, become superior
to them that hate thee.
It needs only the usual resolution tu-dm in c to make this verse a regular anustubh,
11. The stronghold of the gods, deathless (amrta) gold, what god
first bound on in the beginning, to him I pay homage, [my] ten extended
[fingers] ; let him approve my binding-on the triple one.
Ppp. has at the end trivrtd vadhena. The translation implies in d the reading
viauyatdm^ which is given in our edition, tliough against part of the mss., that read
manyantdm. |_* Let him (or it) assent to my binding-on,' dative infinitive. J
12. Let Aryaman fasten {crt) thee on, let Pushan, let Brihaspati;
what is the name of the day-born one, therewith we fasten thee over.
For the obscure third pada compare iii. 14. i. The verse is a regular amts/ttbh, if b
is properly read, as a posa a bfhaspdtih (so the //i//<i-text). This and the two follow-
ing verses, which are not found in Ppp., seem to be independent of what precedes.
13. Thee with the seasons, with them of the seasons; thee unto life-
time, unto splendor; with the brilliancy of the year — with that we make
[thee] of closed jaw (> sdm/tann).
V. 28- HOOK V. TIIK ATIIARVA-VEDA-SAMHITA. 274
The vcise is rr|>ratc(l as xix. 37. 4 |^in our ed. ; but SPr*s rc|>eats iii. to. to instead J.
It is found also in IKiS. i. 1 1. 2, ^ith /77I omitted at the end of b, and, f or c, d, itfwrtf-
tsarasya tifulyasH tena sann anu f^rhnAsi! this gives us no help toward understanding
the ol>si.iirc last pful.i ; the transhition implies emendation to sdmkanum^ and under-
stands the verse as dircrtcil against iiivuluntaiy o)M:ning uf the jaws (divtkrkmtie
maxiliae injeriotis) : cf. viii. 1.16. The Anukr. foolishly calls the verse ^ fmramsmtk.
14. Snatched (////) out of Rhcc, anointed over with honey, fixing the
earth, unmoved, rescuing, splitting [our] rivals, and putting them down»
do thou ascend mc in order to great good-fortune.
The viTsc a;^ri>es nearly with xix. 33. 2. I'he mss. rend bhindAnt (p. hhimddm) for
bhinddt in c. A rorrrs|><)ndin|; verse is found in a KV. khila to x. 1 28 : f^kriAd milmf-'
lam mtidhHutat suvtiftuim dkanamjayam dkarunam dkArayisnu : rnak sapatmdm
adkarAfi^ m kt n'rad A roka tnAm makatf sAubka^Aya, |^(«ivcn also hy von Schroeder,
Tubin^er KaUuvkis.^ p. 36. J
29. To Agni: against demons.
[CA/ana. — ^tiftra*/ti(tfr(am. JAtaveti*tsam uta matttrpktaJrfaiAkam. trditlmbkcm : j. j-p, virSm
ndma gAyalfi ; j. fMrcttjaf^*iti X'lrth/j.tf^ati ; u /j. amyjfubk {u. bkurij ;
14. 4P f'afdhhati k%ikummaii').\
Found also (except vss. 10, 11) in Paipp. xiii. No notice u taken in Viit. of any
part of the hymn; but in KAu^. 8.25 it is reckoned among the lAtana hymns, or as
1>elonKinfi: in the (Atana j^nna, and two or three of its verses (2-4) are separately
quoted, as will be |)ointed out Im:Iow.
Translated: Ludwig, p. 526; Grinfith, i. 236 ; \Vcl)er, xviii. 277.
1. Joined in front, carry thou, O Jatavcdas ; know this, O Agni, as
[it is] being done ; thou art a physician (bhisdj), a maker of remedy
(bhcsajd) ; by thee may we gain cow, horse, man {piinisa).
That is (b), take notice of this rite performed in thine h«»nor. The verse is found
also in IKtS. i. 2. 18, which in a puts (as does V\i\i.) fiurnstAt at the end, inserts in %
kartna after viddki^ and reads in ^ j^A a^vAn purusAn. Kftu^. (3. 16) quotes the verse*
in company with several others, at a certain libation in the parvan ceremonies.
2. So, O Agni, Jatavedas, do thou do this, in concord with all the
gods : he who hath played [against] us, whosoever hath devoured {^Aas)
us, th:it this enclosure of his may fall.
The sense of c appears to l)e * whoever hath pillajred us in or l)y play.' The sense
of the imptecation in d is obscure. Ppp. reads as follows : fiam for /a/ in a; f or b, C
'nfna vidrAn kiifisA yavistkak : pi^Aa* *iyatamo^ dideva : *sya in d ; and, as e (or as
3 a), jv * SYti itid evti yatatno jtii^hAxi. Kau<;. 47. g quotes the verse (the scholiast says,
vss. 2, 3) as a( rompanvinf^ the offrrinj; of portions of sacrificial butter in witchcraft
ceremonies. The I'rAt., in ii. 77, prescrilwrs the combination -dkis pAi- in d. 'LHaplog-
raphy for * sya yatamo : cf. 4 c.J
3. That this enclosure of his may fall, so, O Agni, Jatavedas, do thou
do that, in concord with all the gods.
rpp. reads v«iM«T soma^ya paridhis p^tAtik tatkd tX'am agni.
275 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK V. -v. 29
4. Pierce thou into his eyes, pierce into his heart, bore into his tongue,
destroy (pra-mr) his teeth ; whatsoever pi^dcd hath devoured of him,
that one, O Agni, youngest [god], do thou crush back.
Ppp. reads for a moksHu na viddhi hrdayam na viddhi and fii^Hco syatamo in c, and
yavisthas in d. Kau9. (25.24) quotes the verse in a remedial ceremony.
5. What of him is taken [or] taken apart, what is borne away, what-
soever of himself is devoured by the pi^dcds^ that, O Agni, do thou,
knowing, bring again ; into his body we send flesh [and] spirit (dsu).
Ppp. reads for d qarlre prdnam asum erayfl sath srjema. The Anukr. defmes the
meter correctly, according to its methods.
6. In raw, in well-cooked, in mixed (? (add/a), in ripe, what//f//rrf hath
injured {dambh) me in the partaking — that let the piqdcds atone for
{} vi-ydtay) with self [and] progeny; be this man free from disease.
Ppp. has for a our 8 a (reading tvH for ////?), and for 8 a yiime sap. qavaU vip.;
further, iox\iodane tnanthe diva ota lehe ; and here and in the verses that follow, it
varies between dadambha and didambha,
7. In milk (kslrd)^ in stirabout whoever hath injured me, who in
grain growing uncultivated — in the partaking [thereof] — that let the
pi^dcds etc. etc.
Ppp. reads in a ksfre h'H mHiise^ and in b -pdcye.
8. In the drinking of waters whatever flesh-eater hath injured me
lying (f/) in the lair (fdyafia) of the familiar demons (yd/ti) — that let
the pi^dcds etc. etc.
We arc templed to emend (with Ludwig) ^dydnam to ^dydttas at end of b. Ppp. reads
here, in a, b, nearly our 6 a, b, a with the three variants given above, and b with imam
for yo ffiil^ and with *^ane; and it adds our 10 c, d instead of the refrain.
9. By day, by night, whatever flesh-eater hath injured me lying in the
lair of the familiar demons — that let iho pifdcds etc. etc.
Ppp. reads tvd for md in a, and in b skravydd ydtu^ qayate pi^dcah : ud ague dvdn
prthak: ^rtiVty apy enatii dehi nirrter upasthe. In c of the refrain of all these verses
is a syllable lacking, unless we make a harsh and unusual resolution.
10. The flesh-eating, bloody {rnd/tird)^ mind-slaying piqdcd do thou
slay, O Agni, Jatavedas ; let the vigorous Indra slay him with the
thunderbolt ; let bold Soma cut [off] his head.
The Anukr. takes no notice of the lacking .syllables in b and c, the latter of which,
indeed, is easily made up for by resolving vd-jr-e-ita,
11. From of old, O Agni, thou killcst the sorcerers; the demons
have not conquered thee in fights ; burn up the flesh-eaters together with
their dupes {})\ let them not be freed from thy heavenly missile.
This verse is repeated below as viii. 3. 18, in the midst of the RV. hymn of which it
forms a part : see the note upon it there.
V. 29- noOK V. THE ATIIARVA-VKDA-SAMHITA. 276
12. Brintc toj^cthcr, O Jatavcdas, what is taken, what borne away;
let his members (ji^tl/nr) increase ; let this man fill up like a soma-stalk.
Ppp. brains with stitfulhhant, and h^sja^tihnfn for hrtam in b. Thr Anukr. rcfusrt
to snuLtion the abbreviation *va in d.
13. Like a stalk of soma, () Jatavedas, let this man fill up; make him,
O A;;ni, exuberant, sacrificial (w«'«///r<i), free {xkmw ydksvia ; let him live.
Tpp. i» iltr;^ible in the last half of the preceding; verse and the first of thii ; it reads
at the cud jlftne. Our mss. are uncertain alwut virap^tnam^ H.K.II. having; -/i^-i
I. .///«/-, (). -f//.
14. These, O Aj;ni, are ihy //V''^''"K*"'"*^"^K pieces of fuel; them do
thou enjoy, and accept them, () Jalavedas.
The irri'^ular and <h'frrtive nirtcr of this verse is very inarcurately desciil>cd by the
Anukr.; it counts as 8 i6: 5 + 11 syllaMes, having; tlius a /"ii I- jvM element (b), but no
brhatL
15. The pieces of fuel of tarst/^^hd^ O A{;ni, do thou accept with flame
{tiriis) ; let the flesh-eater who wants to take this man's flesh {tfttinsd)
quit his form.
Or *of frs/ilji^/ttt* (a); this name, however, seems nut to l>e met with anywhere; the
/fi«/if-text leads ti}f sftt^tit^hih.
30. To lengthen out some one*8 life.
Found also in Paipp. ix. Used twite by Kauq. (s^. 3, II), with a number of other
hymns, in a ceremony fur length of life ; and reckoned (54. ii, note) as bclonf^in^ to an
Jiv/rv«f L'ltftit.
Translatf'd : Muir, v.441; I.udwi;;;. p. 4<)4 ; (itiri'ith, i. 23S ; Pihxmitield. 59. 4$5:
Weber, xviii. 2S1 ; in part also !»y <irohmann, ///i/. StuJ. (iS^»5) ix. 3*70, 410-411.
1. Thy nearnesses [are] nearnesses, thy distances nearnesses; be just
here; j;o not now; go not after the former Fathers; thy life (tUu) I bind
fast.
The first tuo padas are oliscure: the two nouns in each can also be l>nth or either
al)lativrs (so .Muii) or ^eriitivcs sini;. TpP- reads /ifff}: «//tix instead of the Mcond
J:'ii/f/r, thus ii'tiifyint: the nirtrr of A : as it si.uuls, wc nied to reviKe ii't\x'*itat \px read
Uivti fi»r /I'J. iVl'- 'd**" h.is (,M/.?// {\^\ p;tTn in d.
2. In that nun have brwiic bed thee, one of thine own i>eopIe [or] a
slran;;*' pcis«»ii - drliverance and release, both I speak for thee with
my voice.
Thr ti.i:'.si.U)<Mi iriiplirs nnciid.itioti tn/z/'WfiJf in A : all the ?nss. have sat. I SPI'*!
texts h.i\f* »i/* \\tth«Mit note of \ari.i;it. We inav (onstrur it with tlie sri t»nd iii/. • If
they (siitijrct indif ) h.ive lu-^^iti h«*il tht f\ if a in.ui f>f thim* own* etr. • > suppiv
277 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. DOOK V. -V. 30
3. In that thou hast shown malice (druh)^ hast cursed at woman [or]
at man through thoughtlessness, deliverance and etc. etc.
4. In that thou art prostrate (f/) from sin that is mother-committed
and that is father-committed, deliverance and etc. etc.
Grolimann and Zimmer (p. 395) understand here <sin committed against mother or
father * : doubtless wrong.
5. What thy mother, what thy father, sister ijdmi)^ and brother shall
infuse (} sdrjatas) — heed (sev) thou the opposing remedy; I make thee
one who reaches old age.
Sdrjatas is a puzzle, as regards both form and sense; *give* (Ludwig) and * offer'
(Muir) are wholly unsatisfactory; * weave witchcraft ' (Fet Lex.) is quite too pregnant.
Ppp. gives no help ; it reads in c chevasya after pratyak. The translation takes the
word as a root-aorist subj. from srj,
6. Be thou here, O man, together with thy whole mind ; go not after
Yama's (two) messengers ; go unto the strongholds of the living.
The Anukr. takes no notice of the defective first p^da; the addition of evd (cf. i c)
after ihd would be an easy and natural filling-out. Ppp. has for a ehi ehi funar eht\
and reads ///' for //// in d.
7. Being called after, come thou again, knowing the up-going of the
road, the ascent, the climb {akrdmana), the course {dyana) of every living
man.
8. Be not afraid; thou shalt not die; I make thee one who reaches
old age ; I have exorcised {nir-vac) the ydksma, the waster of limbs, from
thy limbs.
Ppp. reads for hjaradasiir bhavisyasi,
9. The splitter of limbs, the waster of limbs, and the heart-ache that
is thine, the ydksma hath flown forth like, a falcon, forced {sah) very far
away by [my] voice.
The form sUdhd is noted in Prat. iii. 7. Ppp. has for a 0rsarogam aHgarogam,
combines ^yendi *va in c, and reads nuttas for sUtihas in d Land vdcdt\. The Anukr.
ignores the abbreviation of iva to *va in c.
10. The two seers, Wakeful-and-Vigilant, sleepless and he that is watch-
ful— let them, the guardians of thy breath, watch by day and by night.
Ppp. reads, for c, d, te te prdnasya goptaro divd svapnath ca jdgratu. Pada-i^xi
bodhaopratlbodhaUy by Prat. iv. 96. LCf. viii. I. 13; MGS. ii. 15. 1 and p. 153, s.v. bodha.\
11. This Agni [is] to be waited on; here let the sun arise for thee;
come up out of death's profound black darkness.
In c, udehi is a mis-reading for udihi^ which is found in all the mss. except Bp.*
12. Homage to Yama, homage be to Death; homage to the Fathers,
and [to them] who conduct [away] ; that Agni who understands {yid)
V. 30- BOOK V. TIIK ATIIAKVA-Vi:i)A-SAttniTA. 278
deliverance {utf^tiratja) do I put forward (///AV-^/i/f), in order to this man's
being unharmed.
With b compare viii. I. 8 b. which appcirs to f^ivr the clew to the meanini; ; utpdranit
\% the at tion noun to utptlnty (viii. 1. 17-19; 2.9). The verse, though by number of
syllaMcs a I'inlJ jitt^tiil (46 syll.), has plainly five prulas |^t2>ii:S-f7-f8;ind, read
UUh-tt%m for lAm as at iv. 30. 3?J. Ppp. omits the List p.i<la.
13. Let breath come, let mind come, let sight come, then strength;
let his body assemble {} samvid)\ let that stand Arm with its (two) feet.
I^In «, b, the offlcr (if the items of the return to life is (if inverte<i) in noteworthy
accord with that of the items of the process of death, l)oth in fact and also as act forth
in the l^panishads — e.g. ChU. vi. 15. J
14. With breath, O Agni, with sight unite him; associate (sam-iray)
him with body, with strength ; thou understandest immortality (amrta) :
let him not now go ; let him not now become one housing in the earth.
Most of our mss. (not B.I.T.K.) appear to read tu instead of nA in d. Instead of mm
gdt in c, I*pp« gives mrta^ and it has mo su for ///J nu in d : both arc better readings.
15. Let not thy breath give out, nor let thine expiration be shut up;
let the sun, the over-lord, hold thee up out of death by his rays.
Ppp. reads mtl *pAno in b, and -yaihati in d.
16. This much-quivering tongue, bound, speaks within; by it I have
exorcised \\\c yiiksma and the hundred pangs of the fever.
I*pp. reads for b, C ui^fttji/nu} pani^pattl tttytl ti^nntm nir aytistth : . i )ur edition reads
ivtiytt^ with all the mss., at the lM*f;innin}^ of c. but it must of course Ive emended to
tiM^ as translated. The Anukr. takes no notice of the lackini; syllable in a, which no
resolution can supply. /\i///t/(i</(l in b is presirihed by Piat. iv. 96.
17. This [is] the dearest world of the gods, unconquered. Unto what
death appointed, O man, thou wast born here, we and it call after thee:
do not die before old age.
Hy one of thi* most absuril of th(? ir.iny blumlcrs of the /4fi/«i text, we find /mrmja»
j'aj/iis/ in d trr.ited by it as a rom|M)uijd. Ppp. reads, for c-€. tttswili ivam tha jajikiit
adrstas fiufusii mrtvave : tasmAi tvA nt hvavAmasi,
31. Against witchcraft.
Not fouml (exrrpt vs. 12) in iTiipp. .Not noticed in Vait. The hymn is reckoned
as beloni^in^ in the I't tytl j^afia or I'f tx'tpratihttrana j^itnti (see note to KAu^. 3«)* 7)t snd
it is (|uotrd witii s1-viT.1l other h\mns in K.'uk;. 39. 7, in a ceremony for counteracting
ma^ir.
'I'r.insl.it«'d : (Witlith. i. 241 : IMtKMiifiehl, 76. 456 ; \Vel>er, xviii. 25^4.
279 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK V. -v. 3 1
1 . What [witchcraft] they have made for thee in a raw vessel, what
they have made in one of mixed grains ; in raw flesh what witchcraft
they have made — I take that back again.
That is, doubtless, * back to its maker': cf. iv. 18. 4; and, for the whole verse,
iv. 1 7. 4. The Anukr. makes no account of the redundant syllable in c.
2. What [witchcraft] they have made for thee in a cock, or what in a
kurira-v/QRving goat ; in a ewe what witchcraft they have made — I take
that back again.
Geldner discusses kurira *horn,* Ved, Siud, i. 130.
3. What [witchcraft] they have made for thee in the one-hoofed, in
the one with teeth in both jaws, among cattle; in a donkey what witch-
craft they have made — I take that back again.
4. What [witchcraft] they have made for thee in a rootless [plant], or
[what] secret spell {} vaiagd) in a nardct ; in thy field what witchcraft
they have made — I take that back again.
The fiada-i^xi does not divide valagdm,
5. What [witchcraft] they have made for thee in the householder's
fire, also, malevolent (dufcU), in the eastern fire ; in the dwelling what
witchcraft they have made — I take that back again.
6. What [witchcraft] they have made for thee in the assembly {sab/id)^
what they have made at the gambling-board ; in the dice what witchcraft
they have made — I take that back again.
7. What [witchcraft] they have made for thee in the army {s/nd), what
they have made in arrow-and-weapon ; in the drum what witchcraft they
have made — I take that back again.
To make the meter complete in the two preceding verses, we need lo make the
unusual resolution -jfa-am at end of a.
8. What witchcraft they have put down for thee in the well, or have
dug in at the cemetery ; in the seat (sddman) what witchcraft they have
made — I take that back again.
The indefinite 'seat* may be used for * dwelling,* or for 'place of sacrifice.* The
Anukr. takes no notice of the metrical irregularities in a, b.
9. What [witchcraft] they have made for thee in the human-bone, and
what in the destroying (} sdmkasuka) fire, [what] dimming, out-burning,
flesh-eating one — I take that back again.
' Human-bone * (if not a corrupt reading) is perhaps an epithet of the funeral fire =
* the fire which leaves of the human body nothing but fragments of bone.'
V. 31 HOOK V. THK AIlIARVA-VhlJA-SAMllITA. 280
10. lie hath broii;;ht it by what was not the road; wc send it forth
from here by the road ; lie iinwiso, () men, hath brought [itj together,
out of thoughtlessness, for the wise (</////vi).
Tlic tr.iiiKl.itioii iinplii'S the rcailin^ mafyAh: tihifebhyah: in c, instead of mary%\->
ilhirebhyiih^ a^ ^ivcn l>y the piiiiaxwss, ; tlic cmrndatioii is ftuf;;{c'stc(l by HK. v. ifrf»8 :
hut rf. ttttirythi/hfffytt (///iiM'i/[//J tih.'Mfyti f) in MS. 1.4.8 (p. 5^. I. iS). The linf'ual
H in nitlw at cud of a is ^ivcn hy all the j#r////ri/fl-mss., thmiKli the Trat does not pre*
scHIh: it. Kvcn the /ii</<i -text has /linmasi (as htnfnah) aftci //if, here as elsewhere.
11. lie who hath made hath not been able to make; he hath crushed
a foot, a fln^er ; he. fortuneless, hath made what is excellent for us [who
arc] fortunate ones.
The fust thrci* pfidas arc i<!rnti< al with iv. 18.6 a c, and our d here is read by l*pp-
in that liymn |^hut with tifi/iift^tl for C'^ J. Tlic Anukr. gives the same false definition of
meter in hoth placrs. ^Sce notes to iv. 18. 6. J
12. The witchcraft-maker, spellhidcr, root-j>osscssor, worthy of curs-
ing— let Indra smite him with his great deadly weapon ; let Agni pierce
him with a hurled [arrow).
This vrrsc is found in Ppp. i , where, for c, d, is read : int/nts in sar^ulns tAA kamtm
saiivaji^hnfNa AA<7:'i)w hut.
The last or sixth dnuvtlka contains 5 hymns and 70 verses; the old Anukr. sa}-t :
sastht tu nai'tli *kil iti pat A tu uixthe. One or two of the mss. sum up the Ilook cor-
rectly as 31 hymns, and 376 verses.
With the Hook ends also the twelfth //<r/J//ifjX-if.
Book VI.
[The sixth book consists mainly of hymns of 3 verses. It is
divided into thirteen anuvdi^a-groups, which have ten hymns
each, except the third, seventh, eleventh, and twelfth groups,
which have eleven hymns each, and the thirteenth, which has
eighteen. It thus contains one hundred and forty-two hymns:
and of these, one hundred and twenty-two have 3 verses each ;
twelve have 4 verses each ; and eight have 5 verses each. On
account of the intrinsic interest, the variety, and the convenient
length of the hymns of this book, they have been favorite sub-
jects of translation and comment. Over half of them (79) have
been translated by Ludwig in his Dcr Rigveda^ vol. iii. i^Dic
Maiitra'liiicrat2ir)\ over half of them (74) also by Bloomfield
in Sacred Books of tlic East, vol. xlii. ; over a third (1-50) by
Dr. Carl A. Florenz in Bezzenberger's Beitrdge zur Kunde dcr
Indogermaiiischen Sprac/ieti, vol. xii. 249-314; and nearly a quar-
ter (34) by Grill in his Hundert Licdcr,\
LThc hymns of 4 verses are hymns 16, 17, 38, 63, ^(), 83, 84, 107, iii, 121, 128, and
130. The hymns of 5 verses are hymns 34, 108, 122, 123, 132, 133, 138, and 139.
At the beginning of its treatment of this book, the Anukramani calls it the V book of
hymns of 3 verses " or trcasilktak^nda, and adds that " that number is the norm " :
tatra trcaprakrtir Hard vikrtir iti. The possibilities of critical reduction to this
" norm '* are frequently illustrated among the twenty hymns just cited. Thus the
reduction may be effected by omission of some of the refrains and combination of the
remainders, as in hymns 38, 107, 130 (this the commentator actually so reduces).
Again, the intrusions are sometimes indicated by the meter, as in hymns 11 1, 123. Or,
again, they are indicated by their absence in other versions: thus hymns 16, 17, 34,
^3) S3i 108, and 128 consist in fact of only 3 verses in the Paippalada text. — For
the sequence of the books with reference to the normal lengths of their hymns, see the
table on p. cxlviii. See p. clii, end.J
I. Praise to Savitar.
\Atkan'att. — sdvitram. dusttiham : 1. ^-p. pipUikamadhyd sdmnijagafi ; 2^ ^. piptlikamadhyd
purausnih^
Found also in Paipp. xix. ; and in A(^S. viii. i. 18 ; the first verse, too, is SV. i. 177.
Used by Kriu<;. first (23. 2) in a rite for good fortune on building a house, with offering
a second oblation ; then (50. 13) for success in traffic, with vi. 3-7, 59, 93, 107, 128, and
281
vi. I HOOK VI. THK ArnARVA-VKOA-SAMiHTA. 28a
l^xi. 2 -so oimm. nnd Ke^avaJ with offering thirteen difFcrcnt artirlet; and again
(5<). 25), in .1 rite for iinivcrxal (himinion (romm.), wnrshipinj; Atharv.in ; further (note
to 42. II). .1 .V hoi. adds it to vii.20. fi, to win wealth hy V'edic knowledge. VAit has
it in the tii^niyfofftti (1 7. 2), rr))c.itcd l)y the adhvaryu^ as he looks at the Uii^Aiar.
None of the K.itii;. uses 5c('m$ at all c1i.-iracttTistic.
Translated : Khircn/, 249 or 1 ; (irifTith, i. 245.
1. Sing at evening; sing greatly; put clearly, O son of Atharvan ;
praise god Savitar.
All the inss. — and ST P., following; them — put the avaMiiHa-xw^xV after dkiki^ thus
falsely ilividin^ the irre;:;ular ji;<h'4i// / into two pfulas |_ 1 2 : 1 2 J; henre, of course, they accent
Athar^uitui ; and most of thr///</«f-mss. (nil save our Mp ) read -fr«i^ (as if the combination
'fta St' were made by the common and allowable h>ss of the final k before j/: but many
of our j(f////;//<l-niss. also have -fjtih st- ; SPP. makes no such report as to his). iSoCh
the other texts make the proper division, after ili/uir^'afiti ; and so does Ppp.. reading
also i;r7ni for the obscure tihehi. Both SV. and A<,'S. have i *^'<}«/ (nhich is Ivetter) for
the first (;f7r<i / and SV. ^ives dvi'nmiti tollman for dyumAd dhehi. The comm. ex|4ains
dos<* \\ e. dosi (instr.) jvJ by ftltttli' /?//, understands brhai as the sdmam of that name,
and supplies dhanam to dyumat in b. In our edition, tlic accent-mark over the itf of
savitAratn in c is lost.
2. IVaise Ibou biin wbo is within the river, son of truth (satyd)^ [him]
the young, of unhateful speech, very propitious.
A^ain all the mss. siH)il the structure of the verse by putting; the division-mark after
sunu/t. In lM)th verses, .Spp\s text follows the mss.. while ours emeiifls in accor 'irKe
with t!»e true sense — whi^h is now further supported by the other text, and by Ppp-
An easirr reading is offrrcd by A(,'.S , namely /<//// // .</;/// r tinlithiindhutk sttmum
Sittynsya yttviinnttt : adn^-, Indra is rallr<l "son of truth " in KV. viii. 5S (fW)). 4 ; the
descriptions of the verse suit Savitar ill. The comm. understands * the river {sindAu)* as
** the ocean (liif/tttdm), in the midst of which the sun is seen rising;/* and fixdishly gives
as alternative sense oi ytnutn " repeller ( rw) of darkness.'* The Anukr. apparently
scans II : 6 + 8 = 25.
3. May he, indeed, god Savitar, impel (sn) for us many amr/as, both
the good praises, unto welfare.
The division of the mss. is this time that also of our text ; but the meter is pretty
hopeless {h/tiiri ami tA would rectify b), and c apparently corrupt. Ppp. has, for bb
stiviutd -ttsttf^itfir viiMini (niakin;; a, b nearly e<|ual KV. vii 45. 3 a, b), and A^*S. the
.same with omission of :*7w/«/. In c, Ppp- ends with sui;t\tum (perhaps • to sing well
|K)th i^ood praises'); A<,".S. reads ///•//*' sutiitl sudhAtuh. The Pel. I.ex. |_vii. I04$J
sui;^esis. for c, uhhf \futl su ^.}f,t-,f: cf. KV. ix. 7S. 2 ; the varieties of rraiiinfr show
that the p.ida was virtually unintelli^itilc to the text-makers. The comm. takes smstttti
first as the if/i,it anrl fatfuititaui sAmatn^ and then, alternatively, as the i/Jv/«f and
^astftt. < )f toufsr. if the verse is to I>e taken (as .seems necessary) as a s|ioiled j^Jjrtf/rl,
we ou;;!it to learl j./tmij/, with accent. The Anukr. seems to scan 1 1 +(> : 9 = 26. ^See
p. Uix. not»* 2. J
283 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK VI. -vi. 3
2. Praise and prayer to Indra.
[AtAarvan. — vdnaspatyam sdumyam. dusniham : i-j. /arosnift.]
Found also in Paipp. xix. (in the order i, 3, 2). The second verse is used by K^xiq.
(29. 27) in a remedial rite against demons, while partaking of a rice-mess boiled over
birds' nests. Vait. (16. 13) has the hymn in the agnisfomaf when the soma is turned
into the large wooden vessel.
Translated : Florenz, 251 or 3 ; GrifTith, i. 245 ; Bloomfield, 66, 458.
1. For Indra, O priests, press the soma, and add the water; [Indra]
who shall hear the praiser's words and my call.
Or, * the words and call of me the praiser.' With b compare KV. vii. 32. 6 d. Ppp.
has, for b, C, ^rnotattd tu dhdvaia : stotriyam havam ^rnavad dhava9h in nah.
The comm. regards a dhdvata as referring to the process called ddhdvana, performed
for the adabhya graha, and refers to ApQS. xii. 8. 2 : or, alternatively, to the general
purification of the soma. The concluding four syllables of each verse seem like
secondary appendages.
2. Unto whom enter the drops of soma-plant {dndhas) as birds a tree;
thou exuberant one, drive away the demon-possessed scorners.
Ppp. reads tvd for yam in a. The comm. takes andhasas as nom. pi., explaining it
by annabhut&s,
3. Press ye the soma for the soma-drinker, for the thunderbolt-bearing
Indra ; young, conqueror, lord [is] he, greatly praised.
The first two padas are RV. vii. 32.8a, b; SV. i. 285 a, b. Ppp. reads in tL-fiSt^afte,
humoring the meter.
3. To various divinities: for protection.
[Atharvan (svasiyayanakdmah). — fidndifdwatam, jdgatam : /, fathyabrhati!]
Found also in Paipp. xix. In KHu^. (50. 13) hymns 3-7 (pdiam na iti pahca;
the comm. says it means * with five verses *) are directed to be used with vi. i etc. for
success in traffic (see under h. i). Hymn 3 is connected with i. 26, 27 and vi. 76 at the
beginning of the welfare-rites (50. 4), and it is reckoned (note to 25. 36) to the svastyaya-
na gana. By Vait. (16.9), hymns 3-6 are muttered in the agnistoma by the hotar after
the prdiaranuvdka.
Translated : Florenz, 251 or 3 ; Griffith, i. 246.
1. Protect us, O Indra-and-Pushan ; let Aditi, let the Maruts protect;
O child of the waters, ye seven rivers, protect ; let Vishnu protect us,
also the heaven.
The accent of c is in part against all rule and analogy, and doubtless corrupt ; we
ought to read sindhavah sapta pdidna,
2. Let heaven-and-earth protect us in order to assistance {ad/i/s{i);
let the pressing-stone protect, let Soma protect us from distress; let
the fortunate goddess Sarasvati protect us; let Agni protect us — the
propitious protections that are his.
vi. 3- BOOK VI. ATHARVA-VKDA-SAMIIITA. 284
Ppp. has %uha7'tl instead of sufiAa/^t} in c The comm. explains abhistayt by dhkyt*
sti fitly it ((.ikin^ it fioin nK)t ts) or abhimataphalapt Aptayf. In c. dn*^ in our edition is
a niispiiiit for devi.
3. Let ihc divine A<;vins, lords of beauty, protect us; let dawn*and-
ni|;ht also make broad for us ; O child of the waters, in case of any
detiinu'nt to [our] household; O divine Tvashtar, increase [us] in order
to our completeness.
Tpp. h.is, in a, suJansasA for {ubhas pail ; and in c, d it reads vikvril kayasyd cui
devo * sftvandadhite ^arma yacha nah. The comm. partly af;recft with it in readinj^
abhihvftl .in<l kaya^va (cxplainini^ it as for kasya)\ it also has at the bej;inninf; /M/d m,
and takers the nf>uns that follow as vocatives. It understands dbhikTrtt (p. •// iti) as a
locative {"^-hvrtilH or -hvarnttf^, as is done in our translation Lff. J ACS. X- 3^J.
The accent re(|uires amendment, to abhlhrutf. Klorenz suj^gests the substitution of
abkihrutaSy which would be an easier reading.
4. To various divinities: for protection.
\Atht\ft'an. — nAmhiiUx'aUtm. /. PiUhyilhrhati ; 2. samstJra/'tinktt ; J. J-f- tnrSJ giyatHJ\
Foum! also in Paipp. xix. Used by Kauq. (23.0) in a rite for prosperity in connec-
tion with the division of inherited property; and twi( c (124. 6; 135. 10) in the chapter
of portents, when two crowns appear on some one's head and when the house-lieam
breaks; and it is reckoned to the pustika mantras (note to 19. 1) and to the svattya-
yana t^ana \j\o\t to 25. 36 J. Tor its employment with vi. 1, 3 etc., see under vi. I ; and
in Vail, with vi. 3 etc., .^ee under vi. 3.
Translated : Kloren/, 252 or 4 ; (;rinith, i. 246.
1. Tva.sht:ir [protect] my address {rdcas) to the gods, [also] Parjanya,
Brahmanaspati ; with sons, with brothers, let Aditt now protect our hard
to surpass [and] saving power.
The verse is found also in SV. (i. 20(>), which has no for mr in a, and, at the end,
trimanath i-tfutA^ thus rrrtifxin;; the meter of the last p.'itla. I'pp. ends with trdmami
(ai'il. The form tnunanam seems to be a bastard neut., corresponding to the masc.
trimilnam |_rf. JAOS. x. 522. 530: there .seem to be no w«/« stems usrd as adjectives
in the neutfr |. and to have been avoi<led in A\'. bv the substitution of ttavamt^naM : of
the resulting metrical disturbance the Anukr. takes no notice.
2. Let An<;a, Hbaga, Varuna, Mitia, Aryaman, Adili — let the Maruts
protect |us] ; may the haired of that injurer pass away; rei>cl the foe
from ne;ir bv.
The a* tent nf /.////// (if mrrefi) slmws that only /'M/.**/i»r is frit to l)C its subject ;
but rpp. ri'.uls instr.id aditth p.'itv ,tn/iastih. In c, the t«>mm. has abhihvrtas. The
last p.'id.i is nlisi \\\%\ .md at le.tst in p.ut corrupt. The want of accent of yJkX'ayat is
wrnni:. .III'! its t<>im is unnniiivtMl ; emendation to ytlvtiya or -yan can hardly l»e avoided.
A n/ifttnt {U\x \\\\\i \\ rpp' giv«'N anthitam) is re.id by all the mss.. and orcum a|;ain at
viii. <;. II, Ml that it must l>i' le^aided as the real AV. reading. It is emended in our
edition to .//;/; /.//// , .ind the 1 onwn. .iIsd >(> understands it Klam exa ^xttfum amfikJt).
It is tiar»«il.iteil as if cmendfil t<> ,i*:!if.t< ; f»r tfr/t/.if/t inii;ht be an anom.ihMjs et^uivalcnt
of i///.';/.?*'.'. 'I he veise ( I 2 » S : I 2 • S - 4') is not properly a saff'i s/Jrapa^kti,
28s TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK VI. -vi. 5
3. Unto knowledge {? Mt), O A^vins, do ye aid us; make wide for us,
O wide-goer, unremitting; O heaven, father, repel whatever misfortune.
The beginning of the verse is probably corrupt, but Ppp. gives no various reading,
merely prefixing deva tvasfar (apparently out of 3. 3): compare RV. i. 1 17. 23 b, vi^vd
dh(yo a^vinn pravatam me. In c, the great majority of mss., which SPP. follows, have
the true accent dyaiis (i.e. di-dus^ the word requiring to be pronounced as two syllables :
see my Skt, Gram, 314 b); exceptions among our mss. are only Bp. and I. Several of
our samhUd-mss, have h before piiar {y'ti, P.M.E.H.). The meter lacks a syllable in a.
L Correct the ed. to dydi\s.\
5. For some one's exaltation.
[Atharvan. — dindrdgnam. dnttstubkam : 2, bhurij.l
Found also in Paipp. xix., and in VS. (xvii. 50-52) TS. (iv. 6. 3"), MS. (ii. 10.4).
Used in Kau^. (4. 9) in i\\^parvan sacrifice, with an oblation to Agni ; and again (59. 7),
with vi.6 and vii. 91, by one desiring a village; and for success in traffic, see under
vi. I. In Vait. (29. 15) the hymn accompanies the laying on of fuel in the agnicayana^
and vs. 2, in the parvan sacrifice (2. 14 ; 3. 3), two offerings to Indra; for the use in
Vait. 16.9, see under vi. 3. The comm. further points out vs. 2 as addressed to Indra
in the Naks. K. 14.
Translated : Ludwig, p. 43 1 ; Florenz, 254 or 6 ; Griffith, i. 247.
1. Lead him up higher, O Agni, [thou] to whom oblations of ghee are
made ; unite him with splendor, and make him abundant with progeny.
VS.TS. have in a the later form uttarim. In b, ghrtina presents the rare case of an
instrumental dependent on a vocative, and ought, like a genitive in the like construction,
to be unaccented ; it is so in all the three Yajus texts. Ppp. reads ghrtebhir dhutah,
VS.TS. exchange i c and 2 c; and TS. has dhdnena ca for bahtim krdhi at the end.
Ppp. has, for d, devdndm bhdgadhd asat (of. TS. 2 d). This first verse occurs also in
Ap. vi. 24. 8, which has, for a, ud asmdn uttardn naya^ agrees with VS. and TS. in c,
and reads baliun in d.
2. O Indra, put this man far forward ; may he be controler of his
fellows ; unite him with abundance of wealth ; conduct him unto life
(Jlvdtu), unto old age.
In a, VS.TS. have again prataram ; VS. MS. have naya for krdhi; for c (as
already noted), VS.TS. have our 1 c; for d, MS. has devibhyo bhdgadi asat^ VS. and
TS. nearly the same, VS. substituting devandm^ and TS. -dhi; Ppp. has, for d, our 1 d.
The meter of d might be rectified by abbreviating jlvitavt to -tvdi (a form found in
MS.^B. and Ap.), or by emending it io jlvaium,
3. In whose house we make oblation, him, O Agni, do thou increase ;
him may Soma bless, and tbis Brahmanaspati.
The three Yajus texts have, in a, kurmds for krnmds, and VS.MS. (with Ppp.) put
half is ziicr grh^. In c, all three have devd ddhi bravan (but MS. bruvah). The last
half-verse occurs below, as 87. 3 c, d (corresponding to RV. x. 173. 3 etc.).
vi. 6- BOOK VI. THE ATIIARVA-VEDA-SAMHITA. aM6
6. Against enemies.
Found also in I'.iipp. xix. For tlic use of the hymn by KAu^. 59. 7, see under the
preceding hymn ; hy Kau^. 50. 13, see under vi. t ; hy Vait. 16. <;, sec under vi. 3.
Translated : Ludwi|;, )>. 430; Florcnz, 255 or 7 ; (iriflith, i. 247.
1. Whatever godless one, O Hrahmanaspati, plots against us — every
such one may est thou make subject to me the sacrificcr, the soma-prcsscr.
Tpp. has ahhiiiiltttti at end of b.
2. Whatever ill famed one, O Soma» shall aim at us of good fame,
smite upon his face with the thunderbolt ; may he go away crushed
Notwithstanding the dirrrt antithesis with duh^tifita, all the mss. in a read tmsam^i-
nas ; Initli editions emend to su^iifisinax^ which is also read by l*pP-« ^^^d by the com-
mentary. I^Cnless I misunderstand K*s note, Tpp. again reads tf^Ai//Jj4f/i at end of b.
In d, SPP's liyati is a misprint for ayati.^
3. Whoever, O Soma, shall assail us, of the same kindred and also a
stranger — draw (//) away his strength, like the great sky, even now (?).
Fpp. reads, in •, .»r tia somtl ^fi/n'i/tlut/tt/i. The verse is RV. x. 133. 5, which reads
tftt/nt for stf//iti in a, <f rvi for <//</ in c, and Ji//itt fi/uintl at the end. For this last, the
vatf/tti/ffitifttl (not divided in the /ii«/(/ text) of all the AV. mss. seems merely an unin-
telligent corruption (altered in our text to vtiifha imtintl). The comm., however,
naturally makes no difficulty of understanding it as ^ vtuUuUmanA (explaining it hj
a^iiniriipetia) and as qualifying Ayudhena umlerstood. The emendation mahim *tw
would give a l>etter sense : * as the sky [subjects] the earth.* |^To my thinktni^, it is
licit, without emendation, to interpret mahiiia as a correct graphic representation of
mahim iva with ** elision and cr.isis '* (see references under this head in my Xoun^in/Ut'
iion^ JAOS. X. 5(/9, and p. 331 top), as in KV. iv. 1.3, fdihyeva = rdtkiam iva.\
7. For blessings.
\AthatVKin. — sJumy.tm . j. rJt^ra./ni. /^Jyiitram ; /. finrf.]
Found also in IMipp. xix. The hymn appears in Kauq. (4^>. 4) as a help in remoring
obstacles to sacriiice, or nn expiation for sacrificing for an improfter person; and it is
reckoned (note to 25 y\) to the svtj^ty*tyituti /^aua ; for its use by 50. 13, see under vi 1.
Translated : Floren^, 25'! or 8 ; (irilMth, i. 24S.
1. \\\ what road, O Soma, Aditi or friends go, not hostile, by that do
thou come to us with aid.
The (omm. understands mitt As 'friends* to mean *• Aditi*s twelve sons, Mttra etc.";
i.e. as tSe eipiivalent of Adityas^ which is not impossible. [^The description as nicrt
belongs i.itlier to S. i.J
2. \\\' what, () Soma, ov(M|)owerin;; one, thou shalt make the Asuras
subject to us, by that do ye bless us.
28/ TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK VI. -vi. 9
Ppp. has, for a, yebhis soma sahantya^ and, for c, tend no 'vitil Lthat is, avt/dj
Shtnfah^ thus relieving the embarrassing change of number \\Ti the verbj from a, b to c;
emendation to vocaidt in our c would accomplish the same result
3. By what, O gods, ye did repel {vr) the mights of the Asuras, by
that do ye yield refuge unto us.
Ppp. begins with^J///, and has correspondingly tebhis for tena in c. This facilitates
the rendering of avrnldhvam by its natural meaning * did choose * ; there is no other
known example of a «^-form from vr * repel.* The comm. renders it iatah prthakkrtya
yilyam sambhaktavantah. LPpp. has for c tebhir na adhi vocata.\
8. To win a woman's love.
\Jamadagni. — kdmdimaddivatam. pathydpankti,'\
Not found in Paipp. Used by Kau9. (35.21), in the rites concerning women, with
vi. 9 and 102 and ii. 30, for bringing a woman under one*s control.
Translated: Weber, Ind, Stud, (1862) v. 261 ; Florenz, 257 or 9; Grill, 54, 158;
Griffith, i. 24S ; Bloomfield, 100, 459.
1. As the creeper (libuja) has completely embraced the tree, so do
thou embrace me — that thou mayest be one loving me, that thou mayest
be one not going away from me.
The refrain of the hymn is found twice above, at the end of i. 34. 5 ; ii. 30. i. SPP.
here again, in opposition to his mss., gives the /tf/Z^-reading dpa^gdh in e. The Anukr.
takes no notice of the metrical deficiency of a [^but see note to 7. i J.
2. As the eagle, flying forth, beats down his wings upon the earth, so
do I beat down thy mind — that thou etc. etc.
The comparison here is a strikingly ineffective one, and the attempts of the trans-
lators to give it aptness are to no purpose.
3. As the sun goeth at once about heaven-and-earth here, so do I go
about thy mind — that thou etc. etc.
Part of SPP's mss. read fiaryditi in b. The comm. gives ^Ighram 'swiftly' as the
meaning of sadyas,
9. To win a woman's love.
[ Jamadagni. — kdm dtmaddivatam . dn ustubham .]
Found also in Paipp., but in ii. (not in xix., like the hymns that precede and follow).
Used by Kauq. (35. 21) with the preceding hymn, for the same purpose.
Translated: Weber, Ind, Stud. v. 264 ; Florenz, 258 or 10; Griffith, i. 249; Bloom-
field, loi, 459.
I. Want {vdfic/i) thou the body of me, the feet ; want the eyes ; want the . ^y , ^ ^
thighs ; let the eyes, the hair of thee, lusting after me, dry up with love. /Jn^^'T* ^j/^ ' ' ^
Ppp. puts tanvdm (not -am) after pdddu in a, reads vdccha in b, begin^ c with akso^
adds osthdn after ke^ds^ and ends with dsyatdm. Read aksydk in c in our text (an
accent-sign omitted over the dtt), LDclbriick, Vergltichtndt Syntax^ i.386, joins mim
YfiXh kdmena : so Gr^goire, KZ. XXXV.83.J Ct /ijU'/b^ Cf. A a7X ^h ^^ /C
(nf. zkixK^
vi. 9- noOK VI. THE ATIIARVA-VEIM-SAMHITA. 288
2. I make thee cling to my arm, cling to my heart ; that thou mayest
be in my power, mayest come unto my intrnl.
'I he st'toiul li.ilf-vi'ise IS the same with iii. 2v 5 C. d. and nearly so with i 34. 2 c. 4
Lcf. vi.42. 3, note J. rpj). reails, for a, b, wih' ii'tl tftntiMhttrji^am trttotni krdaya'
sfff^tjnt ; and begins C with mame *ti *j/*ti kr-.
3. They whose navel is a licking, in [whose] heart is made concilia-
tion — let the kine, mothers of ghee, conciliate her yonder to me.
The t'onim. reads timtis in d, and m) is al>le to understand ,f«^j<li/i at the beginning as
relating to " wt>mrn ** understiMMl, and not tft i^ivai ; and he explains dr/kamam \\y
t}s''i}ifiiufyttfti • somettnnj;; to he enjoyed liy tastin*;.* 'I he obscure and diflficult first
pAda is pel haps loirupt.
10. Greeting to divinities etc. of the three spheres.
trhttti, 7. ttlmmi hf h,tti.\
This prose hymn is not found in Taipp. In Kauq. ((>. 3, 5), it is quoted after each
fj//// j^MWd, to accompany a pouring otit of water thice times {iti Ifih prat\Asifkit\tt ;
the I'omm. does not notice (his use); and a;4ain (12. 3), it is piescril>ed in all ritei for
suciess : heinp fuitlier (note t<» S. 23) reckoned to the vikstu )*ana.
Translated: Kloren/, 25S or 10 ; (iiiflith, i. 249.
1. To earth, to hearing, to the forest-trees — to Agni [their] overlord,
hail!
It is not easy to read 22 s\llal>les in the verse.
2. To breath, to the atmosphere, to the birds — to Viiyu [their] over-
lord, hail !
It is stiani^e that in this verse the .sphere is placed after the human faculty.
V To the sky, to sight, to the asterisms — to Surya [their] overlord*
hail !
The iitst anuvtika^ of 10 tiymiis and 30 verses, ends here. The c|uotation is limply
puxthiiniii (or nuiy, see under tiie next iinHvCika.
II. For birth of sons.
The hymn is found also in Pfiipp. xix. .Accompanies in Kauq. (3$. R) a rite fif
concept it)M of a male ( hild ( /;/'//*</: i//»ii); fire is ;jcnerated between ftfw/ and a^vaitAa.
and is v.iiinusly applied to tlie wotn.in.
Transhitetl : WelK-r, v. 2^4 ; I.udwi^. p. 477; Zimmer. p. 319; Klorcnz, 260 or 13;
(tiillith, i. 250: lihiomlirld, (y;. 4^k>.
I. The i^vatthii [has] mounted upon the ^amt ; there is made the
generation of a male; that verily is the obtainment of a son; that wc
bring into women.
289 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK VI. -vi. 12
Some of SPP's mss. read, with the comm., fiumsdvanam in b. Ppp. combines
a^vatthd ^*ril' in a, and for c, d has tad eva tasya bhesajam yai strlsv dharanti tam^
* that is the remedy of this — namely, that they put this into women.*
2. In the male, indeed, grows (bhn) the seed; that is poured along
into the woman ; that verily is the obtainment of a son ; that Prajapati
said.
Several of our mss. (Bp.P.M.VV.E.H.) read pfithsi at the beginning. (^GS. has
(i. 19) a nearly corresponding verse : fiumsi vdi puruse retas tat striySm anu sificatu :
tat/td tad abravUi dhdtd tat prajdfatir abravlt.
3. Prajjipati, Anumati, Sinlvall hath shaped; may he put elsewhere
woman-birth ; but may he put here a male.
Ppp. has in c trisuyam * triple birth ' (or for strfsiiyam f). Two of the Prat, rules
(ii. 88, iv. 83) mention strdtsilyam (p. strdisuyam). (JGS. has for this verse also a
correspondent (i. 19): prajdpatir vy adadhdt saintd vy akatpayat : strtsuyam attydnt
S7' {anydsv?) d dadhat pttmdfisam d dadhdd iha.
12. Against the poison of snakes.
[ Garutman. — taksakaddivatam . dnustubham.']
Found also in Paipp. xix. Used by Kauq. (29. 28) in a remedial rite against the
poison of serpents.
Translated: Ludwig, p. 501 ; Florenz, 262 or 14; Griffith, i. 250; Bloomficld, 28,
461. — See Bcrgaigne- Henry, Manuel^ p. 149. •
1. I have gone about the race of snakes, as the sun about the sky, as
night about living creatures other than the swan (Jiaitsd)\ thereby do I
ward off thy poison.
It would appear from this that the hansa is regarded as exempt from the dominion
of night, doubtless as remaining awake : cf. Pliny, yViz/. Hist, x. 23. But l*pp. reads^
in c, d, rdtrdu jagad ivdth ni dhvansdd avddir imam visam. The comm. reads and >^y^
i-^f^ explains yVz/f/V// dgamam in b ; and in c derives hansa from root han^ and makes it mean ^iA^*f^^ IJ'tl^ni^
^^ A* the soul {dtman), to which alone poison docs not penetrate 1 The Anukr. does not
' ^ heed the redundant syllable in c. LPpp. combines ahlndm^ without elision. J
2. What was known of old by priests {bra/ividu), what by seers, what
by gods; what is (bhutd), is to be, that has a mouth — therewith do I
ward off thy poison.
Ppp. has uditam for viditam in b, and dsunvat at end of c The comm. explains
dsanvat to mean dsyayuktam : teno * ccdryatndnamantrasahitam,
3. With honey I mix {pre) the streams; the rugged {) pdrvata) moun-
tains [are] honey ; honey is the Pdntsni, the Cipdld; weal be to thy
mouth, weal to thy heart.
The comm. reads at the beginning madhv d prfkce ; he takes the streams for the
Ganges etc., the mountains {pdrvata) for the Himalaya etc., and the hills Cgirt) for
their foot-hills ; ihc parusfi I for the great river of that name, and ftpdtd as adj., *rich in
vi. 12- IJOOK VI. Till-: ATMARVA-VHnA-SAMlIITA. 29O
watcr-Rrass ' (f J/7'«)/ii): nil llirsc arc to pour on (J siH^anitt") poison rr moving honry.
The Ppp. tcxl is f|uilc diffcn-nl : abhi ml ffkut nadvas /ianuittli *va ^hityo matfAm :
mtt^fhu f*f ^fi {t/>t}li} sawt}%tr *»/m fiiw hrtitiya. Tcihaps p,j9u\nf signifies here an
* rdtiviiit;* brook, and f//i}«'fi .1 {mmiI * rit h in water-plants.* |_C'onsi<hriii;; that the effect
of snakr-ltitr upon hrart and Mood must have bren wi-ll known to even the mo«|
unlrttrrcd Hindu. I am tempted to suy^gest emendation of ii\nf to <;jm/.J [_ln K. and
\V*s ed. torre< t «</«/»«\j to Wi/#/»ii//iJ •'* ,,.j^ ^. T ^.'> <•
•J ' ..••7 •^••"
13. To the instruments and ministers of death.
Found also in Paipp. xix. The hymn is vaiiously miployed hy Kau^. : in a rile for
victory (14.2^). with iii. 2<t, 27 : and a^ain (I5.^>)« simil.iih, in favor of a VAi^ya ; in
the prcpaiation of the liousc-fire (72.13). with an offciinj^; four times in the chapter
of portents : out e (104.3) ^hrn Hrahmans fpiamd : a^ain (105.1) when images play
pranks; y<-t a;;ain (113.3) when a low suckles an ox (tliese thrrc in company with
i. It)); oti( I' mole ( i 23. I ). when ani:n:ils tout h saired things ; and it is furtlier reckoned
(note to 2$.3'») to tin* svastyttyana )^a*ui,
Tiansl.itf'd : l-'lorenr, 2^4 or \U \ (frifi'ith, i. 251.
1. Ilnnia^c to the \vi'np«»ns {vadlui) of llic k«k1s ; hom.iRC to the
weapons of kinj;s ; likewise tlic weapons that arc of the Vai<^yas — to
them of thine, () death, he h«Mna;;e.
]*))p. has 77|7'(}//(tw in C.
2. IInrna;;e t<> thy heneiliclion ; hctniai^e ti» thy malediction; homaf;c
to thy favor, () death ; this hi»maj;e to thy disfavor.
]*pp. omits the first halfvi-i.ti', douhtless hy aicidnit. The (omm. takes the datives
in a and b as ;/.»//// wii nj^fnth.
3. llomaj^e to thy sorcerers ; homage \n thy lemedies; homage to thy
roots, C) death ; this homa«;e t(; the I hah mans.
14. Against the balasa.
()<Turs also in iMipp. xix. !*»iid l»y K.un;. (2'). 3*^) in a remedial lile a{;ainst catarrh
((/^j///iiw). with vniiiMisly administiiinij pnpaird watrr to thr p.itient.
Ti.insl.ttrd : Mmi n/. 2f><; ot 17: (lijrt'iih. i i>z\ IthHiiniirlil. 8. 4^*3: vn. I also hv
(^rohmann. Inii .^/utf. i\. 3>i7, with an I'xiuisus on the fiti/usti.
I. The l)one-<liss<dvinL;. joint -di^ssolvinj^, settled tilsf/it/it) heart disease,
all the /'ii/tisii, cause thou i<i disappear, that is seated in the limbs and in
llie joints.
Srr. .jdiij'ts in a •!>•' f.;". '. ;/./ if.ilii.j; ^^.m wr^iMMifw/ (p. ^.;r////-if «i»/i.fw). w iiJi nearly
all liis inss . anil with t)i«> « tiinin. I In* m.ijiwity also of our mss. I not }•'. O.J omit ihr k
hut tlu I'r.it aiithnti.*(s no s-.u li aMire\ iation, ami tlie point is one in rr^ard to which
the us.i'^r iif ill- inss . ]iii\\i-\er .Nfi'iuin^ly aitoidant. is not to he trustctl. I'pp read».
291 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK VI. -vi. 1 5
in c, fits krdhi for na^aya. The comm. takes the two words in a as names of disorders,
which is perhaps preferable, and regards them as occasioned by phlegm (^le5man)\
biiltlsa he defmes as kdsa^vdsdttnal'a ^lesmaroga. \Jtov isthita^ sec note to I v. 17. 8. J
L Delete the accent-sign over -sath in c. J
2. The baldsa of him that has baldsa I destroy like a vitiskard; I cut
its bond like the root of a gourd.
The accent urvdrvas is noted in the commentary to Prat. iii. 60 ; Ppp. reads ulvUlvo
yathd. The comm. defines uri'drti as * the fruit of the karkatf^ {Cucumis ntHissimus)
and explains the comparison to be with the stem of this fruit, wiiich becomes loosened
of itself when ripe : cf. xiv. i. 17. Ppp. and the comm. x^^A puskaram in b. Ppp. also
has krnomi instead of ksinomi^ a preferable reading (BR. pronounce ksinomi " false";
but /i//-forms of this root occur in Brahmana and Sutra; aksnomi^ however, would be
better in place). |_See BR. v. 1348 and 838. J
3. Fly out forth from here, O baldsa, like a young dfumgd ; then, like
the [last] year's bulrush, scud away, innocuous to heroes.
Ppp. has, for b, supartto vasaier iva [_cf. RV. i. 25. 4 J • like a bird from its nest ' : a
much easier reading. The comm. explains d^uthga as an ordinary adjective, * swift-
going,' and, instead of fi\uka, reads (U(uka " a wild animal so called." For c, d, Ppp.
has (i(//ie */a ivd */iano 'padrdhy avdiraha. The comm. reads itas [_that is itds\^ pple
of root I, for itas in c The Anukr. appears to sanction the contraction ite *va in c
15. For superiority.
[ Udddlaka. — vdnaspatyam. dnusfuMamJ]
Found also in Paipp. xix. Kauq. applies (19.26) in a rite for prosperity, with
vi. 142. 3, using an amulet of barley. It is also reckoned (note to 19. i) to iht pus/ika
mantras. " ' *
Translated: Florenz, 267 or 19; Griffith, i. 252.
1. Thou art the highest of herbs; of thee the trees are subjects
{upasti)\ let him be our subject who assails us.
The verse is RV. x. 97. 23 (with which VS. xii. loi precisely agrees), which has, for
a, ivdm uitatna *sy osadhe, and accents itpastayas upastis. Ppp. elides the a of asi in
a, and in c, d has upastir asmdkam bhiiydd yo 'smdn. The comm. regards the paldqa
tree as addressed.
2. Whoever, both kindred and not of kin, assails us, of them may I be
highest, as this one of treqs.
The Ppp. version of i. 19. 4 a, b is (as pointed out at that place) nearly our a, b here.
In this verse Ppp. reads satnlh and asamb-, and its c is sambandhun sarvdns tin tx>d,
3. As of herbs soma is made highest of oblations, as the tald^d of
trees, [so] may I be highest.
Ppp. reads, for b, C, iittatnam havir ucyaU (which is better) : yav\ tvam diva vrksd-
ftdm. The comm. has/^/Jf/i in c. If tala^d is a good reading, it may mean the same
as /J//fJ {J^lacourtia cataphractd).
r di
vi. |6- JJOUK VI. TlIK ATHAKVA-VKDA-SAMIIITA. 292
16. To various plants (?).
[^'ihtitttiij {titiftui htttahuin timt ntftln/). — mantrcktiit/rt-atyam u/.i affti/ramatam. dmmttmUkmm.
IoiiihI :iIs'i in r.'ii|)|). xix. Appi-ars in K.'iui;. (30. t ), in n hcAlinj;; rile, explained as
intc'iitliil fi>r tlisc.tsc of tin* ryes, \%ith vnriDus use of nuist.ud plant. Verse 4 is quolefl
ntonc l.itrr (51. 15), in a ri(t* cxpl.iincd l>y Kc^. simply ns ntie ff^r urlfarr. liy the conim.
as for wi-lf.ire in < onnn tion witli food {ttfintisi'tiitviiynttit): and the comin. reads in
Kaut;. tinnti- (not #//</ ) bhesixjixm ; the lUrve {a/tlfijtl/tlt^ftlnt of 51.16 the comm. explains
as Sii\yti7'ii///\.
'I'hi' wtiole hymn is totally o1>srure: tliat it rrl.itrs to a disease of the eyes, as
assumed by the native comnu-nt. there appears no jjcmk! reason to lK*lieve.
'1 r.tnslatrd : Fhiri-nz, 268 or 20 ; (iiifhth, i. 253 (see his notes): lUoomficM, 30, 4^14.
1. 0 i'l/'ttyf/, nout't/'tn/i / Ihy juice is sharp {Ni^ni), O ttdaja / unto thy
broth do \vc cat.
Thr h\nin is unintrlliKihh-. and the translation only mrrhaniral. Ppp. and the
comm. rt;ul <I7'-. tinili'- in a. b (I'pP- comhinini; «C''' **^'*)« ^^^^ ^^^ comm. deri%'es the
words fittin the verbal stem tlTttvti, with suftix //, anfl renders 'lieinj; eaten* («fi/r<r-
ptiilftti), 'not lu-in^ eaten* {tib/tal'}ytifnrintj), undeistandini; *must.ird* {safsapa) to lie
addiessed. I*pp- has, for C.,Vi} U kat mam tt^imahi |^and, in a, elides ^nAvayo^
2. I'ihdlhiX by name is thy father, vtadavati (' into.xicatcd ') by name
is thy mother ; for thnu art he, not thyself, thou that didst consume
thyself.
.SIT. reads in a rihMtlii\. The translation fd the second half verse implies the
altered division and accentuation of c that is made in our rditinn : ttie mss. read sA Aina
(not divided in /t/i/ii-text) /7'tim tisi : and Sl'l*. follows them. I 'pp. has for c ^riai
iTtim fiii (its d is like ours), hut it omits a, b. atid. on the otlier hand, adds at the end
htjhhfu^ tit htif'/n ttkitt tiii^ i.t uiii)Ji.iiii^i}lA\it''its /*ii^ti}. The comm. reads vtA/th/tt fi>r
vihalhti (whiih is suppnited hy the < otnmentary to I'lat i. 4^>) in a, and regards hi n^x
as two womIs in c. The verse as it stands (8 f o : ^» ♦ 8 - 31 ) is very imprtt|>erly passed
as a simple aiiustiibh. |_An A\i hetween hi ami uA wouhl menrl the meter of c if such
stutf wvie u<iitl) mendin^.J
3. () tt'iHviltka^ quiet down; this racket hath ({uieted down; both the
brown and the biown-eared one: ^o away, () nirdLi !
It {"i perhaps hy a misprint that Sl'l*. rcarls Ava : llaya (for ;/-) in the /ii«/ir-trit of
a (tlKMiuh our I>. h;is ako // ). '1 o the comm., tAurihkA is the name of a //(iM that
produces disr.ist* ; Ctua!\\^ a kind of discasf of tlic eyes; hibhfu and hahhfukiifma^
r.iusf s (if dise.isi' : a:id n/»,'i.',t, aNo a disease. The translation implies the emenflaiion
of fiff i}/,t to fi:rl/ii* rpp has a peruliar text: fAuiike 'if *l»i\A *vA imAtI»tx-AiiAi :
I'/iM /■.?/// i}»'tuffh !u\,'ino //;«fM./i.l f:'.f//il ; hut part of this l>rloncs |>erhaps to the
follow it)^ pii . e L ^ ■'' Anukr. si .uis .is S rQ : .*^ f f). J '^C omm. reads nttAia ; R. has
/;// I? J. ;.'.:. ai.d T. Ii.is ntlA^ALi (dm in. has further apAthi * ^
4 A.\iy,}/ii ait thou first; stldrijtilii art th«>u after; nUiti^ahsiilil.
This viis'- is w. lilting; in T-'iipp. (s.ue so far ns its last wor<l is found in that version
t>f vs .M. I ho t oniMi. uridi ist.inds the titree ohs^ure words it contains to t)C names of
293 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK VI. -vi. 1 8
grain-crcepcrs {sasyavalll)'^ he gives the second the slightly different form {alunjiild.
The comment to Prat iv. 107 quotes alasdid *st as instancing the indispensableness oi \ . . j m\^
i\\Q pada-XtxX to a student; but what good it does him in this instance is quite unclear. / ^- P* ^ '^ y^
Our lip. elves the third pada thus : nlldgalasiU *//' nllUgalasAld, The verse is capable ' /
Our lip. gives the third pada thus : nlldgalasAU *//' ufldgaiasild. The verse is capable
of being read as 8 + 7 : 6.
17. Against premature birth.
\^Atharvan. — caturrcam. garbhadrnhanadevatyam. dnustubham.'\
<^/.f.c/i\f. ... ^
Found/except vs. i (in the order 4, 2, 3), in Paipp. xix. Used by Kauq. (35.12) in *
the rite for securing the foetus against abortion.
Translated : Ludwig, p. 477 j Florenz, 269 or 21 ; Griffith, i. 254 ; Bloomficld, 98, 467.
1. As this great earth receives the embryo of existences, so let thine
embryo be maintained, in order to birth after pregnancy.
The comm. reads anustUram for dnu sutum. The first half-verse has already
occurred, as v. 25. 2 a, b [_ where the note gives the parallel passages J. The comment
to Prat. ii. 103 notes the non-lingualization of the s of sittim zlttr dnu — which is wholly
superfluous unless it read dnusiitum,
2. As this great earth maintains these forest-trees, so let thine etc.
etc.
Ppp. begins ^rt///^ yam urvl firihivfy and reads, in c, d, garb/ia anu and suvitave.
3. As this great earth maintains the rugged {pdrvata) mountains, so
let thine etc. etc.
4. As this great earth maintains the various {visfhita) living beings,
so let thine etc. etc.
18. Against jealousy.
\^AtharvaH (f). — irsydvind^anadtvalyam, dnustubham^
Found also in Paipp. xix. Used by Kau^. (36. 25), with vii. 45 and 74. 3, in a rite
against jealousy.
Translated: Weber, Ind, Stud. v. 235 ; Ludwig, p. 514 ; Florenz, 270 or 22 ; Grill,
28, 159; Griffith, 1.254; Bioomfield, 106,467.
1. The first blast of jealousy, and the one after the first, the fire, the
heat of the heart — this we extinguish for thee.
Ppp. has readings in part better : for b, madhyamdm adhamdm uta; for agnim in c,
saiyam ; at end, nir maniraydmahe. The comm. explains dhrdjipn by vegayuktdm
gatim.
2. As the earth [is] dead-minded, more dead-minded than a dead man,
and as [is] the mind of one who has died, so of the jealous nian the mind
[be] dead.
«• Feeling " would be in this verse an acceptable equivalent for manas « mind.*
I
vi. 1 8- HOOK VI. THE ATHARVA-VKUA-SAMIIITA. 294
3. Tliat fluttorinj; mind (mantiskd) thai has found place in (^rifd)
Ihy heart -from it I set free thy jealousy, like the hot vapor from a
bag of skin.
'1 lie tiAiisIntiiin implies at thr riwl the cnuMirI.iti<in (fust pro|M)Scd in BK.) of Ihr
A|)|>.irtMnly sense If 'ss u'ftfs into if/irs^ whit li ttio cDiniii. rr.vi^. aiitl which Sl*l'. has
arciinlin;;])- adniitti'il into his text ; the rt-sult of fermentatif»n. rsiapinf; when the
vessrl is (iprnrd, is apparently intended. I'pp* htm ever, has ntUs, although it y^wr^
sundiy vatimiK readings (in part mere corruptions): Inr n^yutt/ ^an me hrtit sruJtam ,
in b, // /f //mi/ «/////*'!/// ,' in c, A/w // pisvtlmi tnu-. The comm. divides b into mmnas
kant Pa t ay i^ nil kam.
19. For ceremonial purification.
Fountl also in I'aipp. xix. jltanftUted hy^l:ild«ijj'*(p. 431 )| Quite various use is
made of this hymn in the stUfax. In Kriu<;. it is inchided (9. 2) in the hrkaekJInti
j^afut; it is associated (as aio vi. 23, 24, 51, 57, v>, ^»i. ''12) with i. 4-^1 etr. in a rite for
good foitune (41. 14); it appears in the ji/T'imi/ftilr (6^*. i^»), with the /<i:7/rtf jutfi;
and the* fomin. declares it and vi. 51, fi2 to l>e intenderl hy /ir:'///J/j at 61. 5, al%n in
the Sij-.tiya/Ha < liapter. In Vait. it acLompanies a purifying; rite (11. 10) in the ii^''/f-
stoma, and (\%ith vi.(V) etc.) the pouiinr^ out of the ti/^J in the silntfiituiiui ceremony
L3"' '3 )• •*'"' vs. 2 in the tii;fn'tii//tnti {d. 1 1 ), witli an offi-rinjj to A;;ni /<r:'irw<lM«i.
Translated : Ludwi^, j). 431 ; Ihiienz, 272 or 24 ; (frittith. i. 255.
1. Let the j^od-folk purify me; let men (/////////) purify me with prayer
(*////); let all l)ein;;s purify ine ; let the purifyini; one purify me.
Ppp. reatis at the end ///<////. The verse is found in .sundry other trxLs. with con*
siderahle vaiieties of reading: the tiist p.'ida is the same in all (only KV. has mdm); in
the second, K\'. (ix. ^7. 27) has 7'iisti7'tit for w«//r<7;'<ri, while \'S. (xix. 39) reads
tniintt\4} tf/i/vtif, ami T\\. (i. 4. S') and MS. (iii. 11. 10) a^ree with AV. ; in the third,
VS. a^iees with A\'.. and MS. <li!i'ers only l»y Kivin;^ h/iut*i wt}, while 'I IJ. has TY(frt
<l)'lf;vl/^ and K\'. T'/^rr *ie7ulh puuUt\ mil: the fourth is omitted in TH.. and KV.\'S.
have y«//./:r«/./// punlhi tml^ wliile M.S. differs c»nly l»y /«wii/;/. 'I he readings of K.
(xxxviii. 2) I have not. 'I In* < mnin. explains if/iritl in a l>y /uf/i/Z/ril katmand T'J, a:iil
/fiTvr/A'if/z.ir in d as eitlier wind or Sfwna.
2. Let the puiifyiu^ one purify mc, in order to activity, dexterity, life,
likewise unharniedness.
Ppp. airanv;rs a as punMu mtl paviiwilfiah. It pivrs, [or t^ jyrk ta stiryitm i/rj/
(cf. our i. fi 3 and xii. 2. iS), and this is also the reading of MS. (ih.). which alone of
all the other tr*xts has a corn-spondetit to this verse.
3. With hnih, 0 divine impeller (r/ir/ViiV), with purifier and with
impid*i<*, do th(»u purify us in order to seeinpj.
This vjiscis fiMiinl in all tlir texts that liave vs 1. RV. {xx.f*"^. 25) VS. (xix. 43)
have, fur c. //.'i//// fuuiht vi\'\it>\ff, .»nd Nf^. (as aho\r) tlie same save pu9u\hi ; Til.
(i. 4. S' ) l:i^^ s instead tJA»n t»*ihttui puntmahe.
295 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK VI. -vi. 21
20. Against fever (takmdn).
[BAr^'an^iras. — yaksfnandfanaddivaiam. /. atijagati ; 2. kakummati prastdrapahktih ;
J. satah/>anktih.'\
Only the last verse is found in Paipp., in book xiii. Appears in Kauq. (30. 7) in a
remedial rite for bilious fever, and is reckoned (note to 26. i) to the takmand^ana gana.
Translated: Grolimann, Ind. Stud. ix. 384, 393; Ludwig, p. 511 ; Zimmer, p. 380;
Florenz, 273 or 25 ; Griffith, i. 255 ; Bloomfield, 3, 468.
1. Of him as of burning fire gocth the vehemence (?); likewise, as it
were, shall he crying out go away from me; some other one than us let
the ill-behaved one seek ; homage be to the heat-weaponed fever.
The translation given implies the easy emendation of qusminas to ^usmas^ which
eases the meter,* and helps the sense out of a notable difficulty. The comm. and the trans-
lators understand (perhaps preferably) mattds in b as pple of mad, instead of quasi-
ablative of the pronoun ;//«, as here rendered (*• he flees, crying like a madman,^* R.).
The comm. takes a7fraias as intended for an accusative, -tarn. The verse is really a
Ja^^atl \\\i\\ one redundant syllable in a. ♦LThc metrical difficulty is in the prior part
of a ; the cadence of a is equally good with (usm/nas or with fi/r///<ij.J
2. Homage to Rudra, homage be to the fever, homage to king
Varuna, the brilliant {tvisittmnt), homage to the sky, homage to the
earth, homage to the herbs.
The Anukr. scans the verse as 12 -f 12 : 9 + 6 = 39 syllables.
3. Thou here who, scorching greatly, dost make all forms yellow — to
thee here, the ruddy, the brown, the woody takmdn^ do I pay homage.
Ppp. reads, in a, ruras iox yas ; its c, d are arundya babhrave tapurmafrhavdya
namo 'sttt takmane. The comm. understands vdnydya in d as gerundive of root van =
samsevydya: perhaps 'of the forest,' i.e., having no business in the village. The verse
(9+ 1 1 : 9+12) is too irregular for the metrical definition given \ci, viii. 2. 21 J.
The second anuvdka ends here, having 10 hymns and 32 verses, and the quotation
from the old Anukr. is simply dviilydu^ which ought to combine with iht praihama of
the first anuvaka — only one does not see how, as the two are not equal in number
of verses.
21. To healing plants.
[ Qamtdti. — cdftdramnsam . dnuUubham .]
Found also in Paipp. i. Used by Kiu^. (30. 8) in a remedial rite for growth of hair.
Translated : Florenz^ 275 or 27 ; Grill, 50, 160 ; Griffith, i. 256 ; Bloomfield, 30, 470. —
See also Bergaigne-Henry, Manuel^ p. 150.
I. These three earths {prthivt) that there are — of them earth {b/iAfni)
is the highest ; from off their skin have I seized a remedy. •
Ppp. elides the initial a of aharn in c, and its d is sam u jagrabha bkesajam, [See
Griffith's note. J
vi. JI- HOOK VI. TJU: ATHARVA-VKDA-SAMIIITA. 296
2. Thou art the most excellent of remedies, the best of plants ; as Soma,
1.11(1 ( ? /'///f :;</) in the nij;ht-\vatches ( iv/w/i), like Variina anion^; the gods.
'I lie tninin. takes rJwf/ in tlit* srnsc licrc f;iv(.*n {iiJit*ft}tftihht\i^^su stiJhyfsu), and
Snni.i .ts '1111)1111, ' uhirli is (Iniil»tl<ss triir ; tnit he ri'iiitcis hhtiiias liy'anil the sun.*
l*p|). rx« h.iiii;fs thr jilaic of * it-innlios * nntl * plants/ and reads yajfias for somas in C
'I'lie Anukr. appeals to authoii/c Httit^v *vti in c.
3. 0 ye wealthy {fr:'<ifif) ones, doinj; no violence, desirous to bestow
yc desire to bestow ; both are ye hair-fasteners, and also hair-increasers.
rpp. rxrhan^rs the plai e fif tit fihiinfs and -I'titdhanls^ and rrads the er|ui%'alrnl
siulxantii for u'\i}ftt7uit. .-tftiltf/iryyiif in a would set-m a better reading. The Anukr.
overh>oks the dcliciency in a: inscitiun of s//tJ after revatis would rectify it.
22. To the Maruts.
Found also in Taipp. xix. I'sed liy K.uk;. ( ^o. 1 1 ) in a remedial rite againM protu-
berant l>t'Ily etc. Ket;. an<l tlie minni. lead further in the rule the prtitlta sasrusli of
hymn 2^, and fh-tail a .second len;:thy pitieess in the same lite as |K*ifonne«l with the tun.
Myiniis iz-:.\ art* also e\pl.un<'d as an)i>nt^ the apt'ttii suktani {y. 14 and note). In
Vait. ('). 5) tliis hymn appears in the t,}/:trw,lfyit s.ii.rifiee as addressrd to the playing
{kut/iu) Maruts.
Translated : I.udwi^, p. 4''3 |_vss. 1 -2 J; rionm/, 276 or 28; (•ri:iith, i. 256.
1. lM.uk the down-traik, the yellow eaj;les, clothin<; themselves in
waters, fly up to the sky ; they have come hither from the seat of right-
eousness (r/ti); then, fors«M)lli, with j;hee they ilelu;;e«l the earth.
The verse romrs from tlie iii\stii.- and ottst ure hymn K\'. i. 1^4 (vs 47), and is found
again twirc heloiv (i\. 10. 22. \vhi< h see; xiii. V'>)- It is also fouii<l in several of the
niack Vajus texts: VS. (iii. I. 1 1*)' M^- ('^' * -• 5 )• 1^- ("«».o. 13). K\" MS. end with
Pf//ii:'i 7'y utfvtitr : TS. has tUittt^ui* utii (for If .pnhh $tt\*tnitnt) in a. wikds (for
<i/.f » ) in b. uiifttut'ini If /7,i in C. and, for d. ttt/ // /»////:•/ i,7///il/* tt iiJvate. I'pp- ai»rrrs
with KV.MS. at the end uf the \eise, ami it combines, in its frei|uriit way. j/y/firwj '/<*.
2. ^'e make lh<* waters liJi in milk, the herbs propitious, when yc
bestir yourselves, O p»lilfn-barked Maruts; do ye lavish (pinv) lioth sus*
tenanci" and j;oo(I will there, where, <) manly Maruts, ye pour honey.
The first, third, and fftuilh p.'idas arc fntirnl as b. C. d of a \erse in 1 .S. iii. i. 1 1* ;
TS. reads It tiuta (as diii*s alsn I'pp ), and if omits (/.".m .• it also has, with the comm.,
/.*//.",i//;,/ in c ( vvhii h is bettir). I 'pp. further re.it Is ti///;<}j fi>r \tvtli^ and ejati for -tkA ;
|_and »;/"., i/i7 for 7'i.Jj.
3. W.itcr-swimmiii^ [•^^*'l ^^^'* Maruts; send ye that rain which shall
fill all the ht)IIows ; the (;^// /'/;</ shall bestir itself, like a j;irl that is thrust.
thrtistini; the /'r//. like wifi» with husband.
Tlie text of t'lis vrrse is hi»p«-hNsIv c nrrnpt. am! nil aitfmpts to make ronnected »rni»e
of the s«( fMid liilf must ap]virrM!l\ \ r f iikr t!>.it of Pisrhrl in I'r.f Sftii i. S| ff > ff^rred
and UMsui 1 1 Nstul [r..iiitiai k. !w' xwv ;>;, may also be <«insult«'d | The version of
f<J. fV^'^t'
/ul*t'~ tf- 7
*.-' • «.4Ao ^ t» t^
-• / j€.-%
/'
/<'
• 4>.#
297
TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK VI.
-vL 23
it presented in TS. (iii. 1. 1 1^) rather sets off its dtfRculties than gives any help in solv-
ing thcni. It makes marutas vocative in a, and the comm. also understands the word
as vocative, not heeding its accent; the preferable reading would be udapruto marulas^
both vocative. The comm. then takes tan together with udaprutas as qualifying
fficghiin 'clouds* understoo<l. I'pp-, with the majority of SPP's authorities and some
of ours (P.M.), reads udapitUas, Then tan {fiada-i^xX tan) is read by all the authori-
ties in both texts, although the sense necessarily requires (as in our translation is
assumed) tdnt^ as antecedent to ya. But here, again, all the /W<i-texts have yah^
which completes their confusion. TS. has, for b, the wholly different and doubtless
secondary phrase 7*rstim yd vi^ve viaruto junAnti^ making of the line *0 Maruts, send
those water-swimming ones who, [namely] all the Maruts, hasten the rain.* The comm.
understands ya^ but then also vi^va^ as neut. pi. {ttrfhiyavUdisasyAni)^ while all our
pada-XQxis have correctly vlqvdh ; the comm. then is obliged to supply a ca * and ' after
nivAtas. In c, d, TS. reads krd^ti for /jAti, gArdA for glAhA^ pirum for irum^ and
tuTijana for tunddna (some of the mss., including our O. D. R., have tudHnA)\ the
comm. also has tufijAttd^ but gahid (so printed ; but it should doubtless be galhdy
since he derives it from xooK garh * chide * : one of our mss. (W.) and three of SPP's
have gA/Inl) instead of glAhd or gArdd; he translates it * thunder.* These changes on
glAhd and /r//, at least, are plainly no real variations of reading, but blind blunders over
an unintelligible text. Ppp. is corrupt and hardly legible : perhaps j^^ yVi// J// ktahnd
kanye *va dunnonam dunndmd palye *vajdydm. R. suggests that the line c-d belongs
to a gambling hymn, and that we are to read glahas and Urum, a comparison being
made between the shaking of the dice-holder and the agitatio of a female at the coitus.
23. To the waters: for blessings.
\(^amiati {J). — abdevatyam, dnustubham : 2. jp.gdyatri; j.parffsniA.]
Found also in Paipp. xix. Reckoned by KJluq. (9. 2) to the brhachdnti gana^ and
also (note to 7. 14) to the apdm siiktdni ; and again (41. 14), with vi. 19 etc., used in a
rile for good fortune : as to its combination (30. 11) with the preceding hymn, see that
hymn. In Vait. (4. 14) it accompanies in the pnrvan sacrifices the pouring out of water.
Translated : Ludwig, p. 431 ; Florenz, 278 or 30 ; Griffith, i. 257.
1. Flowing on, devoted to it; by day and by night flowing on ; I, of
desirable activity, call upon the heavenly waters.
The verse is found as a khiia or appendix to RV. x. 9, as vs. 10 of that hymn.
It reads there, in a, tAdapasas, which is an obvious and called-for emendation of our
text, and assumed in our translation ; in c, -kratftSy which is also an improvement (our
P. has it, but apparently only by an accident); and, for d, i devtr Avase hnve, Ppp. has,
for d, ahiipo dcvlr up a bruve. The first pada lacks a syllable, unless we resolve
sa-sr-u-.
2. Let them release here the worked-in waters of the ceremony for
conducting forward ; let them at once make [them] to go.
The translation implies emendation of ipas in a to npdsj or else the use of the former
as accusative, as in more than one other passage. O'fds, lit. * woven in ! : i.e. brought
in as part of the ceremony. But the comm. reads i7AIj, and explains it as = samtatds or
avicchedena pravahantyah, \\ii a, b, the reading of Ppp. appears to be like ours ; but
in c it has bhavantu etav€,\ \ZL v. 23. 1 for 6tiks,\
vi. 23 HOOK VI. THE ATHARVA-V EOA-SAMMITA. 2gS
3. In the impulse ^stti'ii) of the divine impeller (savitdr) let men do
their [sacred] work; weal to us be the waters, the herbs propitious.
Ppp. rends Irnvafiti in b. Here, to preserve the balance of forms, afids has to be
understood as nominative.
24. To the waters: for blessings.
[ ^ 'tithttitt (/). — ntniriMiyam . tUttt ttuhkam . ]
Found also in IViipp. xix. Reckoned in KAu^. (9.2) to the brhackilmii gama^ ^nd,
(note to 7.14) to the apAm suktAni ; used in a rite for pHKl-loitune (41.14) with
vi. 19 etc.: sec under 19: and also (jo. 13) in a healing ceremony for heart-burn,
dropsy, etc.
Translated : Klorcnz. 279 or 31 ; Cirill, 13, 161 ; (irifTith, i. 258; Hloomficld, 12, 471.
1. They ilow forth from the snowy (mountain); in the Indus some-
where [is their] gathering; may the heavenly waters give to mc that
remedy for heart-burn.
Ppp. reads, for a, b, himavatah pftntiiviitas ttls simihufn upaj^achaiah. In 4, the
true re.iding is of course htiUyo,, and Si'T. so reads, tlitnif;h doubtless a^^ainst his mss^
as certainly against all ours ; it is a vrry rare thing to find the full form written in such
a case (and hence the /<i</(rf- text blunder ^r-(/>'c>//i in i. 22. I).
2. Whatever hath burnt {adyut) in my eyes, and what in my heels,
my front feet; may the waters remove all that — they of physicians the
most excellent physicians.
The collcK'ntion of suffrring parts in a. b is vrry o<Id : I*pp< seems to read for a,
yad aksibhyAm «!</-, ant!, for b. pArsnibhyAm hrdayena m ; for 4, ivasi%l risiam n-d
^nasah. One or two of our mss. (IMI.) agree with some of STT's in reading karat at
end of C ; and two of his have nlh l>eforc it. The /ifi/^i-di vision subkisak*^ama is
taught in I'rat. iv.46.
3. Ye whose spouse is the Indus, whose king is the Indus, all yc
streams that are — give us the remedy for this ; for that would wc enjoy
you.
Ppp. exchanges the place of the two epithets in a. The comm. reads siama at end
of b. Mefore sthAna most of our mss. retain the fmal ft^ as usual ; SI'I*. does not note
anything as to his authoiities.
25. For relief from pains (?) in neck and shoulders.
Found .iNn in P.iipp. xix. I'sed in K.'iik;. (30. 14) in a healing lite against jfaw^if-
mil/ili, \\\\\\ kimllin'^ fifty five ptint^n ((im)m . fii) leaves by rhijis.
Transl.iteil : Kiihn, K/. xiii. 130 (with Cform.inir parallels); Florenz. 280 or 33;
(Iritfith, i.^jS; r.looinfield, H). 472 ((f. AJP. xi. 323).
I. Hiith thr five ami tlu* fifty lh.it ^.itlicr against those of the nape —
let thc'in all disappear from hcic, like the noises (} idkti) of the apaciis.
299 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK VI. -vi. 27
Mdnyns etc. may of course as well be nom., and the comm. so understands them,
supplying jf^n;/(/(r7///rI//f J 'pimples, swellings' for them to agree with ; <iM/ would then be
left without object, or with indefinite object, * one,* understood. The comm. renders
vdkas by vacanlyd dos&hy and takes apacUdm as accus. fem. pple : ** as blameworthy
faults leave an honored woman"! Under VS. xvii. 57, the comm. renders vakishy
vdkydni.
2. Both the seven and the seventy that gather against those of the
neck — let them all etc. etc.
Part of the mss. (includinq; our D.R.) accent saptd at the beginning, and SPT. with
good reason adopts that in his text.
3. Both the nine and the ninety that gather against those of the
shoulders — let them all etc. etc.
Ppp., in these verses, exchanges the numbers of i and 3, omits yds every time in A,
and combines manyd *bhiy grdivyd *bhi^ skandd *bhi,
26. Against evil.
[Brahman. — pdpmadtvatdkam, dnustubham^
Found also in Paipp. xix. Used in Kau9. (30.17) in a healing rite against all
diseases ; and reckoned (note to 26. i) to the iakmand^ana j^ana. The comm. finds it
quoted also in the Naks. K. (15), in a ceremony against ///rr//.
Translated: Florcnz, 282 or 34; GritTith, i. 259; Bloomfield, 163, 473.
1. Let me go, O evil {pdpmdn)\ being in control, mayest thou be
gracious to us; set me uninjured in the world of the excellent, O evil.
All the mss. leave pdpman unaccented at beginning of d, and SPP. follows them.
The second pada occurred above as v. 22. 9 b. Ppp. rectifies the defective meter of c,
by reading d t/td bhadresu dhdmas7» at^'t d/i-. The comm. gives sam instead of san
in b. The Anukr. overlooks the deficiency of two syllables.
2. Thou who, O evil, dost not leave us, thee here do we leave ; along
at the turning apart of the ways, let evil go after another.
«
The comm. understands anuvydvartane as one word in c Ppp- exchanges the place
of 2 c, d and 3 a, b, reading, for the former, patho vya vydvariane nis pdpmd tvam
SHvdmasi ; |_and it has md for nah in aj.
3. Elsewhere than [with] us let the thousand-eyed immortal one make
its home; whomsoever we may hate, him let it come upon {rch)\ and
whom we hate, just him do thou smite.
Ppp., as above noted, has the first half of this verse as its 2 c, d, reading corruptly nyucya
for fty ucyatit; its version of c, d \& yo no dvesii tarn gacka yam dvismas tarn jahi.
The comm. renders ny ucyaiu by nitardm gacchatu,
27. Against birds of ill omen.
\Dhrgu. — ydmyam yta ndirrtdm. jdgatam : 2. fristttbk.]
Found also in Paipp. xix. With 28. 1 and 29. i, it constitutes RV. x. 165. LMGS.
ii. 17. 1 a-e is made up of our vi. 27, parts of 29. 1 and 28.3, and 28. i : see also the
vi. 27- HOOK VI. TlIK ATHARVA-VKDA-SAttlllTA.
pratfkai in Kn.-iurr's Index. J Hymns 27, 2.S, and 2') arc employed tOf;ether ir
(46. 7) against hirds of ill omen (tlie comni. to AV. \^a,A^ patatt ibhyas lor.pati
of the e<Iiti()n of K.iut;.).
Translated: Htmii/, 2.S2 <»r 34 : CirifTith, i. 250: lUoomfield, 166, 474.
1. Sot'kin;; what, () ^nds. the sent dove, mcsscnfjor <»f ]>crditior
come hillR'i, to it will wc sin;; piaiscs, make removal ; weal be [il]
bipeds, weal to our qiiadriiiu'ds.
KV. lias pierisf'ly the same tfxt in this verse. I'pp. l>e);ins with tievas t-. 5
the mss. (inrhidin^ otir IVMAV T.) rrad nlhkrtim in c. The verse lAcks two s
of hi'in;; a iuW jiiji^a/f.
2. IVopitious to us be the sent dove, harmless, O gods, the
(^ttkufiti) [sent] to our house; for let the inspired {rfpra) Agni cnj
oblation, let the wini;ed missile avoid us.
rpp. ai;rers with l\\'. in tl»»» lirltrr rra<lini; .C'^'**.'" (^**'' j^'.'^*fw «''^) ** *"
^Ono siispi'( Is til. It •' hawk " may l»c too specific. J
3. May the winded missile not harm us; it maketh its track i
hearth, in the fire-holder; ptopilious be it unto our kine and me
not the flove. O j^ods, injure us here.
T!»e form •?.»/'/ (p. ^l^t^i (ft) is qtifitfil under I'l.'it i. 74 as an e.xample of a I
in / (/'i'.s "•'.*•')• '^^ • h'*** tl»»* Irss piiinitive form <ff/M/i//:; thr conim. explair
7Ti///ihif/// titanyilnyilm. For c. d, K V. lias a sli;;htly ditferrnt text \%if»t HOj^^b
pu* usthh\ii\ <il *stM nitt nif htu\iti :iiA ift-.'tjtt kitpotah. The A\'. vcibion sjh
nn'ter (»f c, hut the Anukr. dors not heed this.
28. Against birds of ill omen etc.
All the vrrsi's found aNo in P.iipp., hut not t<n;pthrr ; I. orrurs nfter the pr
hvmn in xix. : ^. at a latrr pi>int in xix.; 2. in x. : and there is n«i internal con
perteptll'h' annMiij thrni. I'snl liy K.iur , with the prrcedinc: and the following
a;;ainst liitds of ill omen (4'>.7): and vs. 2 is es|i< 1 i.dly fpioted as accompany
Ir.idinij of .1 con [.in«lj lire tljn-i* tinn-s around the house. |_Vss. I and 3 o
M(;S. ii. 17. I sre undi-r h. 27. J
Ttatisl.itrd : KlonMi/, 2.^5 t)r 37 : < if iftilh. i. 2'>«r.
I. With the praise-verse (/r) drive ye the dove forth {pratto
revelini; in food {is) we lead a cow about, breaking; up tracks hard
in ; le.ivin;; us (our }) sustenance shall it Hy forth, swift-flying.
/''i/'.'.^.'"/"/. lit ' wiili foith diiviii^,* a rpia^i ^erundial ro^jnate accusative
(X. M>; ;) li.is /.'i/; if. //;;.?"/ at end <if b. a lu'ttrr irailinj;. In I'pp.. b. C are c
For c. K\*. !>.»'< jri;";i I '/.f »./'//.' */.7 ///.///.•" ' :\';} In d. \**m\\ I\\'. ami Tpp (a
« i»min ) nul \\\\\\ /'.J /./A// pAtt)th,ih^ nl \\\'v h our ri'.idinij can onlv be a ri»rri
p i!'.:*ft:ith (p p.f//j/*:/i,i/i) indiialfs a (iHituviim witli ptt/At iMif ^the non-^hvisi
.u<eiit al"*'! pMJMi iii pj/:if/iit/i as true iiMdini;J. LrpP- 1**** ^//:"«*w for hitvi ma
30I TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK VI. -vi. 29
2. These have taken fire about ; these have led the cow about ; they
have gained themselves fame {(rdvas) among the gods — who shall
venture to attack them ?
Tlif Iv\'. Ii.iM iln' ftiiiiir M'ifu' nl X. 15^5 (iiImm \'Il., xxxv. iM, |»mm Im ly lli«' •>.inii' U \\
with RV.), reading, for a, b, /<irf *m^ gam ancsata pdry agnim ahrsata. Tpp. trans-
poses a and b and rcids/ziry agnim aharsata (a false form). The arsata of our text
is plainly nothing but a corruption ; and part of the mss. (including our P.M.W.l.) have
instead arisata [_or arfsata ; K. risatu\.
3. He who first attained {d-sad) the slope [of heaven], spying out the
road for many, who is master of these bipeds, who of the quadrupeds —
to that Yama, to death, be homage.
With the former half-verse is to be compared RV. x. 14. 1 a, b: pareyiviAsam
prai'dio ma/iir dnu b. p. anupaspa^Cindm (which is AV. xviii. 1.49 a, b); d is the last
pada also of RV. x. 165.4 (of which a, b are found here in 29. i); c is nearly equal to
RV. X. 1 21 . 3 c (our iv. 2.1c; xiii. 3. 24 c). Ppp. follows RV. in c in putting ff^ before
asya (reading l^ay asya). Our paiia-i^xi accents asyd : Ifey in RV. also asyd is
accented. The verse lacks two syllables of being a full jaga/f. [^Pischel discusses
the verse, y^if. S/ttif. ii. 73 : cf. 66. J LPpp. \\2iS pravatdsasdda, \
29. Against birds of ill omen.
^Bhrf^u. — yamyam uta ttJirrtam. bdrhatam : /, 2. virdnudmagdyatrl ; J. J-tft'. 7-/. virdt/ttffi.]
Not found in Taipp. Used by Kau^. (46. 7) with the two preceding hymns.
Translated : Florenz, 287 or 39 ; Griffith, i. 260 ; liloomfield, 166, 475.
1. Them yonder let the winged missile come upon; what the owl
utters, [be] that to no purpose, or that the dove makes its track (padd)
at the fire.
The second and third pfidas are RV. x. 165. 4 a, b (we had d in the last verse of the
preceding hymn); RV. omits vd in c; its addition damages the meter of the pada» but
the Anukr. overlooks this. LPadas b, c also occur at MCS. ii. 1 7. i d — cf. under h. 27. J
2. Thy two messengers, O perdition, that come hither, not sent forth
or sent forth, to our house — for the dove and owl be this no place.
The comm. reads etdu for eids in a ; he renders dpadam by andqrayabhutam,
3. May it fly hither in order to non-destruction of heroes ; may it
settle {a-sad) here in order to abundance of heroes ; turned away, do
thou speak away, toward a distant stretch {} samvdt)\ so that in Yama's
house they may look upon thee [as] sapless, may look upon [thee as]
empty (dbhhka).
Tlie sense would favor the accent dvdirahatya in a ; and avfrahatydydi\ which the
comm. reads, would be a further improvement. The comm. also \i7A papadyAt at end of
a, and, for c, pardm cim pardvatam. He explains dbhAkam by dgatavantam. At the
end of e, grhi ought, of course, to be grhl ; but most of the mss. (all of ours that arc
noted) have^r^/, and SPP. also has admitted it into his text. LAs to Yama's house,
cf. Hillebrnndt, Ved. Afythol.^ i. 512. For dka^dfty sec Gram, § 1008 b.J
vi. 30 HOOK VI. TIIK ATIIARVA-VKDA-SAWIIITA. 302
30. To the ;amf plant: for benefit to the hair.
FouikI also ill iViipp. xix. Vcisc 1 \s wluilty unronnrcted in mraning with the others,
nor do tlu'Sf* dcaily l)cloii;; to;;ctluT. I'sril l>y K.'iii^. (M). 15) in the savayajtkaM, at a
sitvti i7i\\vi\ /*tluftiih\i/a (/f7//#i(f r//'«r, comm.): ami vx. 2(2 and 3, comm.) in a remedial
rite (31. I).
Translated: I.udwi^, p. 512; Flf>rcn/. 2RR or 40; (irifTitli, i. 261. — See also Iler-
gai«;nc-IIcniy. Manuel^ p. 151.
1. This barley, combined with honey, the j;ods plowed nuich on the
S.irasvatt, in behalf of Mann (?); Indra, of a hundred abilities, was
furrow-master; the liberal (} sudtinu) Maruts were the plowmen.
I*pp. ha.s this verso only liy ritntion of its ftattka^ as if it had occurred earlier ; but
it has not brcn found elsewhere in the text. It oiturs also in Til. (ii. 4. 87; exactly
repeated in Ap(,'S. vi. 30. 20 ; IM'.S. iii. i.r»). Ml J. ii. 1. 16, and K. (xiii. 15). The TH
version 1>e};ins with etam u tvAm nuUih (so MU. also), and it ^ives in b sJrast*a/ydi
and fftiimii': cf. fnttrtiv tiii/u\ K\'. viii. 61.2; ix. 63. 8 ; 65.16; and the translation
follows this readin<; ; MH. has vttfttlra cafkttihi. The comm., too, though he reads
mauAu^ explains it hy mattusyttj^tAu. In a. he has santjitam (for lamymiamy,
lie explains anjflf w/.r l>v kr tit^-antax^ as if it came from r(M>t lr\ \ SIM*, reads mamJti.
without note of variant.J
2. The intoxication that is thine, with loosened hair, with disheveled
hair, wherewith thou makest a man to be lau^^hed at — far from thee do
I wrench |'>ut] other woods; do thou, O (itmi, grow up with a hundred
twigs.
Kven the lines of tliis verse seem tmrclated. I*pp. has, in A, //m//i> vikr^^ yo X'ike{fi»:
and its c,d are entiiely diltcrcnt : bhrttnti^hno vtirh'titfti janitvatii ttttya ie prajaiai
suvtlffti I'l'^itm. srr. roads \ttttivtn\i'l in d, with a part of the niss. (including our
r.M.K.Kp). I'hc comm. explains I'fl'sihy 7'f^niffrt; hut its connection and form, in
the oliMuiily of the verse, are doubtful. (^W. Koy disi usses riHJt Tr/\ KZ. xxxiv. 341 ff .
and this vs. at p. 244. J K. i^iites: *• I he fruit f>f the f«r////, the |kkI €>r kerneK is
ref;aided (Caiaka, p. 1S2, I. 6) as injuiious to the hair; and from the desif^naiinn
l'r^ttm,tthiint in K.ijan. 8. 33 is to he inferrerl that it makes the hair fall out. Hut nolh-
in;^ is said of an iiitoxitatiti^ eti'ei t. To the two trees usually identified with {ami,
Prosopi% ^H^ii^ffti and Mtn:o\a suwtt, belnn^s n«"itlier the <»ne nor the other effect.
Nor is either 'of ^reat leaves."* |^'I he Phanvantariya Ni^haiitu. p. iSS of the I'oona
ed., also speaks of ^tfni as ke^afiantft and of its fiuit as kf\tifuy\iina,\
3. () tiiou of great leaves, blessed one, rain-increa.scd, righteous! as a
mother to hi-r sons, be tlmu •;racinus to the hair, () fiiw/.
It is possiMi- ti» lead .si\t<en s\llali|i's out *>f the second half verse (accenting then
///fi/.f ). Iiiit tlie first riptlon of tlir Anukr. implies S ♦ .S : 8 * 6-30 s\llaMrs \jXk docs also
the pf>sition «»f the i/:',/f<}/.M mark, wliich i»i put after mfJa\. Tpp. eases the situation by
insertin;^ //.u l>efi»i»' 5.;/';/ in d: it als»> read> iifJhwiM'apne (for ittf savrJJkt) in b.
303 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK VI. -vi. 31
31. At rising of the sun (or moon).
\^Uparibabhrava. — gavyam. gdyatram.'\
Found also in Paipp. xix., as in RV. (x. 189. 1-3), SV. (ii. 726-8),* VS. (iii. 6-8),
TS. (1.5.3'), K. (vii. 13), MS. (i. 6. i). Used by K^u^. (66.14) '** ^^^ savayajliasy
with a spotted cow as sava. And by Vait. in the agnyddheya ceremony (6.3), as the
sacrificer approaches the ahavanlya fire ; and again in the sattra (33. 28), spoken by
the I5rahman-priest to the hotar^ after the mUnasastotra, * LAIso in i. 631-3 = Naigeya-
^akha v. 46-8. J
Translated: as RV. hymn, by Max MUller, ZDMG. ix. (1855), p. XI; Geldner,
Siebenzig Lieder des A*K, 1875, p. 57; Ludwig, number 160; Grassmann, ii.433; and
as AV. hymn, by Florenz, 289 or 41 ; Griffith, i. 262.
1. Hither hath stridden this spotted steer, hath sat upon his mother
in the east, and going forward to his father, the heaven (sif^r).
All the texts agree in this verse, except that TS. has Asanat ^w^ fiunah in b, while
Ppp. \\?is prayat in c. It seems to be a description of the rising of a heavenly body, —
the comm. and the translators say, the sun ; but the epithet " spotted,*' and the number
thirty in the third verse point rather to the moon. The " mother " is of course the
earth, upon which it seems to rest a moment.
2. He moves between the shining spaces, from the breath of this
outbreathing [universe]; the bull (inahisd) hath looked forth unto the
heaven {svar).
RV. (with which, through the whole hymn, SV. and VS. entirely agree) reads (as
docs TS.) apHnati (p. apaoanati) at end of b ; in c, it reads divam for svdh, TS. inverts
the order of a and b, and has the same c as our text ; on the other hand, MS. has our b,
but arnavi (for rocana) in a, and a wholly peculiar c: prdti vdm suro dhabhih,
Ppp. has (nearly as TS.), for a, b^yasya pr&nad a/>tlftafy an/a( cara/i rocanah; and
dh'am (with RV.) at the end. The sense of the verse is very obscure, made so by the
unintelligible second pada ; Roth suggests apdnati\jx?, 3d singular J, with rocantl •* stars '*
as subject : "They die at his breath": but this teems with difficulties. \\\\ Geldner*s
note, anafi was taken as 3d plural. J Our P.M.I.R.T.K., and all SPP*s authorities,
separate rocana asyd in samhitil (the /rt</<n-tcxt reading -«rf), and SPP. has accordingly,
properly enough, adopted it in his text: see the note to Prat, iii.34. LPpp. also has
iiyakhyan.\
3. Thirty domains (dhdman) he rules over; voice, the bird, hath set
up, to meet the day with the lights of morning.
This translation is one of despair, and of no value, like the others that arc given of
the verse. Taken by itself, the first pada is well enough, and seems most naturally (as
noted above) to refer to the thirty d.iys of the moon^s synodical revolution, or spaces
of the sky traversed by it in them ; to understand it of the thirty divisions of the day
{mtt/turta) looks like an anachronism ; and thirty gods (Ludwig) is wholly senseless.
LKoth observes: Ushas, in returning to her point of departure, traverses i\\\viy yojaiias .
(RV. i. 123. 8): the path of the light around the world thus appears to.be divided into
thirty stages.J The variety of reading of the texts indicates, as in many other like
cases, the perplexity of the text-makers. RV. (with S V.VS.) has, for b, vik patamgiya
dlilyatc J TS. and MS. \\^\^ patamgaya^ but TS. follows it with ^i^riye^ and MS. with
vi. 31 - nooK VI. Tin: atiiakva-vkda-saxiimtA. 304
/itn-ti/i-. I'pp ro.tfU -.o'.rfj srt ^uyitt. In c, KV. (etc.) rracU iMir, p.irtirle. for tihiti,
.mil til" ( oiniii. iltics thr' same ; 'IS. ):ivr5. (or the whole p.iil.i. prtity (ifi<r Vtiha iiyikhhth ,
wliilc MS siiNstittitrs (nir 2 c. in its KV. viTsion. havint; ^ivni its u holly iiulr|>cnclrnt vrr-
5ion (if tills as i c (svc alMivc): I'pp. has at i-iitl Mvi. In a, MS. rcaclii tfin^tUMhAtnt},
as ( oniiNMiinl ; thr othiT trxts (and tlurc of srr*s aullmritiox) have inn^tui iiAAma
(tho /i/f/</>rra<iiii'^ is t/Aitt/tii). Itoih '1 .S. and MS., it may lie added, put vs. 3 ticfore 2
Willi tliis liMiiii ends the tliinl it/;//r-<i/</. of 11 hvnins and 33 verses; the extracted
item of Anukr. is simply /f/ivii (see end of the next antn^fJttt),
32. Against demons.
'I he iiist two vcises fniind also in r.iipp. xix.* KTiik;. has the hymn (or vss. I, 2) in
a remetlial rite ai;.iiiist demons (31-3): the t'irc is (.ircumamluilatc<l three times, and a
rake is nl'feicd ; and it is uxknred (note to S. 25) t») the ftltdnn j^aua. Verse 3 is
hy its« If lei kiuied (noti* tit \(>.^) to the tti*/utya X'"J''* '^"^^ ^^^^ (note to 35.36) to the
s-'tt\t\,iy,tn.t i:'t'hi. *[,l'pp- ^''^''* '*-^^ '^ thiid \ei.se. whose A= vi. 40. I A, and whose b is
coiiiipt. Rntir.s n«>te semis imoiiiphte.J
'I lanslateil : llnien/. 2«;i or .\\ ; (iitliith, i. 2fi2 ; Illo«mitield« 36, 475.
!. Williin the llaiiu*. prav, in-tki* vr tliis scirrcrcr-dcst roving libation
willi j;luv ; fnun afar, O Ai;ni, do ihoii burn against the demons; maycst
thou not be hot towaid our houses.
Our mss. (so far as mtted) ami m-atly all SPT's. accent y/<///</if in A; hut his text, as
well as ouis, emends to fti/tuftl. I he tumm. undei stands at the iK^inninji; amiar tiAve
as two srpai.ite wiuds ; an I th.it is a pteferai>le, and prohahly the true, rcadiof^. The jgen.
in d is pei iiliar ; we shmilil e.xpci t with it ///'//.///, in impels, sense: * may there he no
sicknrss iH-fallint; (Hir houses.* I'i'P- reads ^^'/v /<///'; tuth at end uf b; and, for d. «rJ
*sm,}ktnit ','in:i '/«/ titif^auth^y. The veisc (lof 10: 12 + 11 =4;$) is ill-dvfinefl as a
mere it istuhh.
2. Riuha hath crushed ((■;) your nerks. f) fi^thds ; let him crush in
(tf/*i'\f) your iil)s. () sorcerers; the plant of universal jM^wcr hath made
you j;o to Vaina.
A few of srr's aiitliiuities (also the .Anukr, in citin*.; the verse) r^-ad rrf«rr// in a.
Some of our mss. nrrent //^ifn/Zi at end <»f a ( l*..Nf .I.p.m ), :ii\i\ y.ltuJhilnih (IVMI.):
all tlie f*.tff\i mss. al>sunlly have :'i\:'iitifh ''trytl/t at end of C. I*PP- '*•**• '<"" •• b* f»t'T'«*
Vt* lyi.'.ty it^.trh f*ii^iin} 7v» */i/ { r//iJ/r ,'.;nt/t ; and lit d it (jivcs 9nrf\UHt\ for yamtfUM.
[_ riic " veflial f« Mills with ^uspu ii>us 1)/ ** in tlie A\'. (j«/^vJ/f cte., ttttiftitryHit : cf. Oram.
$$ ;;; '. i»"J h. !■ ''S a) have Imtii treated hy lUo<»mt"ield, /I).M(t. xUiii. 574 ff., ami
linliiliii-k. il'i-h m, liv. 51 J It. rfj alio r^^le^Uf^HrVj^^fs^J 1*4.4^.2.. Kli *?,<%'
3. l'\'.ultssiu'ss, () Miir.i -and-Vaiun:i, be ours here; drive yc back-
wajd the devourers with ynur ^jliMin ; let them not find a knowcr, nor a
fninidation ( /^ni/ts/Zui); mutually destroy in j; one another let them go
unti) dr.ilh.
'1 l.f \. rsi- Ml « uiN alsii in A< is. (iii i'^ in. whi« h has, in A. b, -//*f w.r'/r«fw ttst'- tir^isJi
j.f//.'/; ..•*//■.;/./'■; f'f^tr.'\,t , in C. : ifi,i\inttt : in d. h*inttL}ft,}\. 'I he latt'T h.ilf-vrrse is
iou:)'! .iL^.t.n as \i>i '> 2\ c. d. I'.idaA has a redundant s\ liable unheeded l>v the .\nukr.
305 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK VI. ~vi. 33
33. Praise to Indra.
[^Jdiikdyana. — indraddivatam. gdyatram : 2, anustubh.^
Found also in Paipp. xix., and in AA. (v. 2. 1) and (J^QS. (xviii. 3. 2); and the first
verse, in the Naigeya supplement to SV. i. (i. 3 ; or SV. i. 588). Kau^. quotes, in the
section relating to house-building, marking cattle, etc., with the simple direction ity
(iyojandndm apyayah (23. 1 7); the schol. and the comm. declare it to relate to the rite
for success in plowing {krsikarman)\ the details of the process described by them
have nothing to do with the expressions of the Atharvan text. Again, it appears in a
kdmya ceremony (59. 18), with vii. 2, 6, etc. (by a sarvaphalakdma^ comm.); and the
comm. holds it to be intended (106. 1,8) in the portent-rite for the collision of plows.
It is further reckoned (note to 19. i) to iht pusfika mantras.
Translated : Florenz, 293 or 45 ; Griffith, i. 263.
1. Of whom the welkin {rdjas) here [is] the allies, [who] thrusts (i)
people, the wood, the heaven — great [is] Indra*s gladness.
This is a mechanical version, not pretending to sense ; the verse appears to be too
corrupt for anything else. The other texts bring plenty of variants, but no real improve-
ments of reading.- All agree in c ; also in ydsye ^ddm at the beginning of a ; between,
SV. has tlrdjo yuj'as ttiji jdne vdnam svdh; AA. has drdjas tujo yitjo vdnam sdhah;
^\'S. has oja druj'as tujo yujo batam sahah, Ppp. reads ttite janam svah,^ and, for
tlic rest of I and 2, indrasya ndgnike^avah vrsdftam dhrsada^ favas purd yathd
diustinah indra^ ca rantyam mahat. The comm. explains tujd by tojandya ^atnlndm
hill sandy ay takes a yujas as a verb = saihnaddham karoti^ vdnam as vananfyam^
S7'(ir as susthu prdptai'yam^ etc.: all the purest nonsense.
2. [He is] not to be dared against; [his] might, dared, dares daring
against [others] ; as, of old, his fame [was] unwavering, Indra's might
[is] not to be dared against.
Tlie (provisional) translation given implies emendation of text, in a, d, to ddhrse^ in
b, to dhrsdiidm dhrsitdm^ and, in c, to ^vyathl, AA*s version of the whole is na *\i/irsa
a dadharsa ddd/trsdndm dhrsitdm 0vah: purA ydd fm dtivydthir indrasya dhrsitam
sdhah. \Qi. iv. 21. 3 and note, and Geldner, Ved. Stud. ii.29.J (^QS. has nothing cor-
resjjonding to the second half-line ; for the first, it reads anddhrstam vipanyayd nd
*\ihrsa ddadharsayd: dhrsdnam dhrsitam ^avah. The reading of Ppp. was given
under vs. i. The comm. has vyathi in c.
3. Let him give us that wide wealth, of reddish {pifdnga-) aspect;
Indra [is] most powerful lord among the people.
Ppp., also the comm., and one of our MSS. (H.) read dadhdtu in a, and AA. and
(^\\S. and the comm. have tdm for tam; Ppp. gives no instead; instead of urum in b,
(^'(,"S. has///r//, and A A. repeats rayim. In c, both A A. and C<J^S. read tavastamas;
the comm., tuvittamas. Our tuvistamas is vouched for by two rules of the PrSti-
(jfikhya, iii. 96 and iv. 59. Further, the comm. in b reads -sadr^am. That 4he verse is
usnih and not gdyatrl appears not to be noted in the Anukr. LQ^S. omits d at the end. J
vL 34 HOOK VI. IJU: yMMAKVA VKDA-SAMIIIT/V JOS
34. Praise and prayer to Agni.
Only vss. 1, 3. .\ fmind in TAipp. xix. It is nUo j. KV. hymn, x. 1S7 (with exchange
of pl.Uf lirtvMM'n vss. 2 ami 3): in (ithcr texts t% fmind only the I.1M verse. As in the
(-.ISC of rt-rtain previous hymns with a refrain, one may (-onjrcture that, with omis&iun
of the r«frain. and inmliinatinn of the romainiii!; parts of versrs, it was made into cr
vit'wt'd .IS thri't' vcisrs; Imt t!i<' 1 ase is a murli less pnilialile on** than those we have
hail a]M»vc. ^if. * )hlcnlKT;;, J>ir Hymnen tits A*/'., i. 245.J 'the hymn is emptoyr«|
l*y K:ui<;. (31.4), with vii. 114.2. in a remeilial rite against ilt-nions : and it is added
(note to «S. 25) to the i,}tit/tit x'ti»it.
Translatc'fl : by thi* KV. tianslators; and Klnrcnz, 2(>4 or 46; tirifTith, 1.2^3.
1. Send tliou forth the voice for Af;ni, hull of people {Ist/i): may he
pass us over our haters.
2. lie who hums down the demons, Agni, with sharp heat (fM-fj):
may he etc. etc.
K\'. has T'/.fif ^nJtrt'ttit at hrtjinninj; of b.
3. lie who from distant <iistance shines over across the wastes: may
he etc. etc.
Tpp. reads, for c, tiro 77(7'il \ihifO€atf,
4. Who looks fortli upon and beholds together all beings : may he
etc. etc.
rpp. reads Hipa\y*iti in a.
5. Who, tlie bright Agni. was born on the further shore of this
firmament {nijas): may he etc. etc.
Nearly all our mss. (all save O.D.K.). and the ^rrat majority of STP's. read #r/<lrfr/«f.
without arrent, at end of b; both editions <;ive if/-. KV. has «rr»'''. unacirnled. in a.
The versr is also found in T.S. (iv. 2. 5'). 'Mi. (iii. 7. S* ). and MS. (ii. 7. 12*). all lK>i;ifi-
nini; a with^-if/ and c with /if/, and havini;. insteail of ^t4lni ttj^n/r, ^ukrtim jyHir (hut
M.S. f//iiA,f^ tt/fJm fy^ttf)\ all atirnt ti;*}yatii^ ami I'H.MS. accent tfrrii with our text.
•[_Also at iii. 2.4, with the same iraflin;;, save /t/z/Jii*/. J
35. Prayer to Agni VAicvflnara.
[ A •:.'<) 1/ /■ :/,■./'! tt.i./.h::i/.itri. xtJy.iftAfn j
I'fMiml alsr> in I'/iipp. xix. ami in the (,'iautaSutias of .\<;val.t\ana (viii II 4) am!
(,\niklM\aua (x. <) 17); the hist vrrsr. further, in VS. and M.S. This h)mn and the
Olio (olltiwin;; .ire ( alh'd liy K.iur. (^i. ^) 7 ,}r^7.}ft,tf/yii, and us'-d in a c^neral remedial
litr; and mim* 3>. 2 is ret konrd (not** to ;^2. 27) to the /r »///'»// »7v'#i j^itnj In V.iit .
hymn ^; apprirs alone in t)i'* iT^;rt,iiyttn,t (2«) 5), with i. 21 and vii. 84. acrompan\inK
tlir « ovriiit; 'd t'tir first • «'i:isi s nf liii( ks
1 r insl.jt- ! : I linrn.'. 7';> or 47; <iiinilh. i 2^4.
307 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK VI. -vi. 36
1. Let Vai^vanara, for our aid, come forth hither from the distance
— Agni, unto our good praises.
A^S. has this verse precisely as in our text, and so has VS. at xviii. 72 Land QCS.
has the /r/7///'rt, aj, but VS. xxvi. 8 has again the first two p&das, with agnir nkthina
vdhasd (see under the next verse) for third; and MS. iii. 16.4 has the latter version,
with the further variant of tttya prd (i.e., doubtless, tltyi i P'd) at the end of a.
Ppp. has the bad reading iHdyd fira; it further exchanges the third padas of i and 2,
and reads as 2 c ftpe *mdm sustutith mama,
2. Vai^vanara, our ally (sa/Rs), hath come unto this our offering —
Agni, at our songs, in our distresses.
The two Sutras have for c agnir ukthena vdhasd (found in VS. MS. in combination
with I a, b); Ppp.f as also noticed above, has for c our i c. The translation given
implies that dnhasu (which is read by all the mss. without exception, and is quoted so
in the commentary to Prilt iv. 32) is the same with the usual dnhahsu; no stem dnhan
is found anywhere else ; the comm. foolishly explains it by abhigantavyesn^ adj. to
ukihesH. The translation, moreover, represents the pada-X^xX reading of agamat in a
as a : agamat; but it seems altogether likely that the true meaning is i : gamat * may
he come.*
3. May Vai^vanara shape the praise and song of the Angirases ; may
he extend to them brightness (dyumfid) [and] heaven (si^dr).
Of tlie two Sutras, QQS. supports our cdkipat (comm. cakrpaf) in sense by reading
jfjanat ; AQS. has the better reading cdkanat *take pleasure in.' AQS. also has
afigirobhyas in a (both preserve the a of ang-) ; Ppp. has fw angirobhis. In b, Ppp.
and Q(^S. have^/i/>7/iw for ukthatn; A(^S. has stoma for -mam^ and in c omits d (if it
is not a misprint); i^pp. has pra instead of di *su,
36. In praise of Agni.
[Atharvan (svastyayanakdmah). — dgneyam. gdyatram.'\
Found also, imperfect, in Paipp. xix., and in other texts, as SV. (ii. 1058-60), etc.,
mentioned under the several verses. For the use of the hymn with its predecessor by
Kau^. (31.5), see under the latter.
Translated : Fiorcnz, 296 or 48 ; Griffith, i. 264.
1 . To Vai^vanara, the righteous, lord of right, of light, we pray for
unfailing heat (gharvtci).
The Saman version, as also that in VS. (xxvi. 6), in MS. (iv. ii.i), and AQS.
(viii. 10. 3), is precisely accordant with ours ; that in (^^S. (iii. 3. 5) liasMJM///// instead
of gharmdm inc.
2. He shaped himself unto all things; he, the controlling one, sends
out the seasons, drawing out the vigor (vdyas) of the sacrifice.
The verse is corrupt in Ppp., but the second and third p.'ldas in it exchange places,
as they do in the SV. version. SV. also reads, for ^yd iddm pratipapnathi^ and has
svar for vdyas in c ; it and all the other versions read rtin; our rt&iir is quoted in
IVat. ii. 29, and in the comment to i. 68. The comm. reads in a vi^vdh and cakrpe^ and
some of our authorities (P.I.K.), with the great majority of SPP*8, also have vt^vdh;
vi. 36- nooK VI. THK ATHARVA-VKDA-SAttlll TA. iOS
but SIT. ^ivcK vf{7'i1 in hi^ text, as wc have done. A<y*S. (viii. 9. 7) and (^(^S. (i. 1 1. o)
rciul ifLsl«".ul ;'/^ :'i////, niifl ityklf^iit. '\\\. (ii. 4. iv-i") inaktrs an anustubM verse of our
3 bi C aiwl ^ a. b ; it rrnd.s, for our 2 a. s%i ttitim prdtt paptathe,
3. A^iii, in distant domains, the desire of what is and is to be, bears
rule as the one universal ruler.
Or, it in.iy he (so Klorm/), * .\;;ni, as Kama, rulrs over what has licen and is to be,*
etc. ; thi' (omin. rxplaiiis lulmtts as /■J///f/i'i/<l ktltfuipfiuio lul. SV. (also VS. xii. 1 1 7)
reads ///i/fw U>t piirrsu in a: A(,*S. (vlii. 10.3) h,is instcid /r«i/«rf«. ^.'^S (iii. 5.A)
has our text without variant; also TH. (see al)ove), in b, c. [^Cf. iii. 21.4 and Muir,
V.403J
37. Against curses.
Found also in Taipp. xx. nuoted liy K.iur. (4S. 23) in a witchcraft ceremony
(a;;ainst the effri t of an opponent's sorcery, oMnni.). witli f^ivint; a pale lump {pimittm
pit Hi/urn : the romm. explains it as a lump of white Hiit) to a dof* ; and vs. 3 is, doubt-
less <oirt>(tly, ri*i:ardrfl l>y the c<nnm. as intended at 4S. 37 {\\\t pratlka would Cf|ually
desi^nati' vii. |;<)). with the layini; on of fiifl fmm a trrr strur k by lij^htninf;. The hymn
is fuither m konnl (note to 25. 3*1) to tlie s-iuntviiytinii ^ttihi.
Transl.ited : lloren/, 2i;7 or 4'k <rrill. 25, 161 ; (triffith. i. 264 ; lUoomfield. 93.475.
1. Hither h.ith come forth, liavin^ harnessed his chariot, the thousand-
eyed curse, seeking after my cursor, as a wolf the house of a sheep-
owner.
rpp. has, in a. nhtii (whif h is brtti^r) for «/*ir / in c, Vil/i for WtHfttt; and. in d. it
com I lines :■//'.// *:-/; - wiiii ii ronli.iction the Anukr. appears to ratify. VuttViiytt
wcuild fill owl b more acceptably.
2. Avoid US, () curse, as a burning; fire a pond ; smite our curser here,
as the bnlt from heaven a tree.
The distincticm of //rand /tnt in manuscripts is so sli;:ht that some of our mss. micht
l>c viewed as le.niin!; hrJAm in b. and SIM*, estimates most of h«s authorities as cuing
it (and the romm. liltm), tlioiii^ii he also .v 1 rpts hfiiiiAm in his text. Tpp. reads r:*if
in b. .uid tvxim lor //irr in c, and t/rrvti for tiivds in d.
3. Whoever shall curse us not cursinj;, and whoever shall curse us
cursing, bim, withered (?), I » ;isl fnith f<»r death, as a bone {?}) for a d«»j;.
Tlir* tii.st h.df verse is rcp'Mted bidnw. as vii. 5>). I a. b. with a different second half ;
it is also fitund, witli still aimther emlin*;, in TH. (iii. 7. ft' i), T.\. (ii. 5. 2"). ami
.Ap. (iv I ;. n: t!i"S'' tliree put j f/.:/./r in b next brfnie |if/J/. Mie meaning; of Iwlh
p,'\f»,tm (I'll ulii»)j if. iv. \:..i) and A:;tl:ul*nxt*n in c is extrmielv di*.ibtful. and the
trans). itioii «if the lini- must be r<'i:.wded as only tentative. |_ It lot mi tie Id takes <f:'«r/iil-
w/if'// as '«|n\\M up»»n tlir i:nnmiP: on the s* nrc of fitrm and acrcnl {(Intm. $ 1313 I*.
1310). tills is adMiis«iible ; l»nt I can h.irdly cite an example of •/;%! thus u.se<!, eirept
I'.'iniiii's ..•:.; /■///iM//. J T!ie mmm. rea-ls pt^tanu explaining; it \^\ ptxtamtiyam kkJk-
thti»t ; 1/: .//-irf'/iifi/ is i:liissid nitli ^t: .i.f.ti^iihitm. I'pP- K'*'*^"' the verse the same
second li.ilt .is our \ii. ;•}. I. The .Anuki. appears to ratify the I'mtraction -tram *:-.r
in c. |_ r.i'la d v. S. 5 d. (."••mpare alsn iv. 31 ». 2 a. b J
309 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK VI. ~vi. 39
38. For brilliance.
[A//iarz'an (varcaskdmah). — caturrcam. brhaspatidevatyam uta txnsidevatyam. trdistubham,'\
Found also in Paipp. ii. (in the order i, 2, 4, 3); and in TB. ii. 7. 7»-» (in the order
1,4, 2, 3) and K. xxxvi. 15 (in the order 3, 2, i, 4). This hymn and its successor are
employed together by Kau^. (13. 3-6) in a rite for glory, with the navel-hairs of sundry
creatures ^cf. Weber, RHjasiiya^ P- S)9» ^' 3j» ^^^ splinters of ten kinds of trees; and
they are reckoned to both varcasya ganas (notes to 12.10 and 13. i). They are
further included L139. 15J with several others (i. 30; iv. 30, etc.) in a rite (called
utsarjana^ comm.) in the ceremony of entering on Vedic study.
Translated : Ludwig, p. 240 ; Florenz, 297 or 49 ; Griffith, i. 265 ; Bloomfield, 1 16, 477.
1. What brilliancy (tvlsi) is in lion, in tiger, and what in adder, in
fire, in the Brahman, what in the sun : the fortunate goddess that gave
birth to Indra — let her come to us, in union with splendor.
Ppp. reads vavardha for jajdna in c, and sd & ndi *iu in d. TB. has in the refrain
a *gnn (or a gan) for df *iu.
2. What brilliancy is in elephant, in leopard, what in gold, in waters,
in kine, what in men (^ptimsa) : the fortunate goddess etc. etc.
Ppp. and TB. agree in reading d^vesu ptirusesn gdsu in b.
3. In chariot, in dice, in the bull's strength (vdja), in wind, in rain-
god, in Varuna*s vehemence (ftiswa): the fortunate goddess etc. etc.
Ppp. inverts the order of vdu and parjdnye in b ; TB. Land comm. J read vrsabhdsya
in a.
4. In a noble (rdjauj'd), in the drum, in the drawn [arrow], in the
horse's vigor, in man's roar (.^): the fortunate goddess etc. etc.
Ppp. and TB. agree in prefixing yd at the beginning of the verse, and TB. has
knifuiye for vaj£ in b, while Ppp. has, for b, itn'sir afz/i mdydth sta$iayitna gosu yd.
Afdytt is not properly used of purusa * man,* and the expression is obscure and doubtful.
The comm. takes ayatdydm as — dtddyamdndydm and qualifying dundubhdu ! ^For
the meaning here assigned to it, see note to vi. 65. i.J In this hymn, again, it appears
as if the equivalence to three verses were recognized, the refrain of vss. 2, 3 being left
out of account. But the Anukr. acknowledges four vetses, and each of the four has its
refrain in TB.
39. For glory.
\Atharvan {varcaj/tdmaA). — brhasf^atidevatyam. l.Jagatf ; 2. iristtM ; j. anustubh.^
Found also in Pilipp. xix. Used by Kau^. always in connection with hymn 3$ : see
under that hymn.
Translated : Ludwig, p. 240 ; Florenz, 299 or 51 ; Griffith, i. 265 ; Bloomfield, 1 1 7, 478.
I. [As] glory (ydfas) let [my] oblation increase, quickened by Indra,
of thousand-fold might, well-brought, made with power; me,' proceeding
mightily onward unto long sight, [me] with my oblation, do thou increase
unto chicfhood.
vi. 39- HOOK VI. TIIK AT1IAR\ A-VKIM-SAMHITA. JIO
I'pp. lias, for b, sahasratrstis sukftam sahasvat ; in t^jivase (which is belter) for
ntl'Ui\e ; ill d, it omits mJ, which improves the meter. 'I he romm. has sttvriam in h.
The ''jtij^iUi " ( 1 1 + 1 2 : 1 2 ♦- 1 3 = 4S) is an irregular one. [ill, KV. v. 44. 3, where we
have the intrusive of sr with ttftu put.^
2. Unto our glorious Iiuirn, rich in glory, would wc, rendering homage^
with glories [Kiy worship; do thou bestow on us royalty quickened by
Indra; in thy bestowal here may wc be glorious.
This verse is foiincl in Tpp. in a iliiTerent connection, further on in the same bonk,
and with quite different readiiif^s: 7'itvttw for ptas in a; for b. ,V(ififf'/ff<y Aavisdi *tMm
vui/teffiti ; in c, daiihtui ft)r fHiva ; Un d, tayvit ftitrt a tin h •tike syt}wa,
3. Glorious was Indra, glorious was Agni, glorious was Soma bom ;
glorious, of all existence am I most glorious.
rpp. combines ^'ri^il *^nir in a. This verse is ic|>catcd below, as 58. 3.
40. For freedom from fear.
J. thut/f f. anu^fubh ]
The first two verses are foun^l also in IMipp. i , much altrrcd. Used, accordin|c to
KTuk;. (5«;. 2(»), by <>ne wlio desires a1)St.Mice of «!.ini;rr, with vi. 4.S, with wnrsliip or offer.
inf; to the seven seers in .is many directions ; and Keqava and the comm. regard it as
furthrr intended by i'>. S. in a lite for cour.i};c in an at my : vss. I, 2 are reckoned (note to
16.8) to the ^MiM-.r (,'/j///i, .ind vs. 3 (nf)te to 2;.3^) to thr j;-i/r/r«n-«///<f j^dfrii / the
comm. miles its applit ation arcordin;; to 139. 7 in ttie rite for one bf^^inninf; Vetlic stud\.
Transl.itrcl : I.udwi;;, p. 373. .list) 242; Moren/, 300 or 52; <friltith, i. 266.
1. Let fearlessness, O braven-and earth, be here for us; let Soma,
Savitar, make us fearlessness ; be the wide atmosphere fearlessness for
us; an<l by the ol)l.ition of the seven seers be there fearlessness for us.
In d. uiptarsiiitlm is re. id by one or two mss. lYp. has only the fust pada of this
verse. Neither as. i nor vs. 2 is a ^oud jaj^titi ; easy emendations would make tMHh
goo<l itntuhh.
2. I'or this village [let] the four directions — let Savitar make for us
sustenance, well-being, welfare; let Indra make for us free<lom from foes,
feailessness ; let the fury of kings f.ill on {tib/ii-vti) elsewhere.
I*pp. mtififs tlie irdund.inry of b by rradin;; suhkutam stwitik dtuihtUu ; in C. it
rc.ids tti^titf um and omits ftits ; for d. it has mtuihye ca visAm sukrte sy*kmn. The
(omm. r»Mds it^,itfu\ in c.
3. I'reedoni fmni enemies for us below, freedom from enemies for us
above; O Indra, make fieedom from enemies for us behind, freedom
fiom ein-mies in front.
K )i. thrsf fiMir dirr< tinns admit of beinj; undi-rstnofl (so the comm.) as from the louth.
from tli«' nnrtli. frum the west, in tho r.i«»t. I lie verse is fouml als#» in the Kanva ver-
■
sion nf thr V.ijasan<'\ i Saiiiiiit '1 (iii. II.f>). with //:/ aJhitriic in A. Htitik krdhi in K and
pa^^An me inc: further, in K. (x\xvii. 10).
311 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK VI. -Vl. 42
41. To various divinities.
[Brahman, — bahudiiivatam uta cdndramasam, dtiustubham : 1. bhurij ; j. fn'jfubA.]
Not found in Paipp., nor, so far as observed, in any other text. Used by Kau9.
(54. II), with ii. 15, in {he j^of/dna ceremony, as the youth is made to eat a properly
cooked dish of big rice {fna/td7/rf/ti).
Translated : Florenz, 301 or 53 ; Griffith, i.266.
1. To mind, to thought, to device (d/ii), to design, and to intention,
to opinion {vtaU), to instruction {(nUd), to sight, would we pay worship
with oblation.
The meter in b would be rectified by reading akutyAi. [In his note to i. 1. 1, W. took
f r///n here as * sense of hearing.* J
2. To expiration, to perspiration (vydnd), to breath the much nour-
ishing, to Sarasvati the wide extending, would we pay worship with
oblation.
3. Let not the seers who are of the gods leave us, who are self {tanii)-
protecting, self-born of our self ; O immortal ones, attach yourselves to
us mortals ; grant life-time (dyus) in order to our further living.
With the first line is to be compared AB. ii.27. 7: rsayo ddivydsas tantipdvdnas
tanvas tapojdh (Florenz). Tanil (lit. *body*) 'self* apparently refers throughout to
ourselves. This verse is translated by Muir, OST. v. 296. \Mi hdsisur fsayo ddh*id
nah would make good meter. J
The fourth anuvdka ends here, having 10 hymns and 33 verses; and the old Anukr.
says of it and its predecessor together trtfyacaturthdu trayastrin^akdu {trtfya- given
above, not here).
42. To remove wrath.
\^Bhrgr*angiras (parasparamcittdiktkaranaK). — manyudrvatyam. dHMStubkam : it^.bkurij.']
Found also, with considerable variation, in Paipp. xix. Used by Kau^. (36. 28-30),
in the section of rites concerning women, for the appeasement of anger: with vs. i, one
takes a stone on .seeing the angry person ; with vs. 2 one sets it down toward the same ;
with vs. 3 one spits upon it {abhinisihivaii : the text would suggest rather abhitisthati).
The hymn is reckoned also (note to 26. i) to the takmandqana gana. In Vait (12. 13)
it is employed in the agnistoma in case of an outbreak of anger.
Translated: Ludwig, p. 515; Florenz, 302 or 54; Grill, 29, 162; Griffith, i. 267 ;
Bloomfield, 136, 479.
I. As the String from the bow, do I relax {ava-tan) fury from thy
heart, that, becoming like-minded, we (two) may hold together (sac) like
friends.
The Ppp. version is in many points different : ava jydm iva dhanvina^ {usmam
tanomi U hrdah : adhd sammanasdu bhtUvd sakhikt *va sacdvahe. The first half-
verse occurs [at MP. ii. 22. 3, with hrdas transferred to the beginning, of b;J also in
lies. (i. 1 5.3)* with dhanvinas (like Ppp.), and with hrilas transferred (^as in MP. J,
and with dydm for jydm. In this verse and the next, the Anukr. does not allow the
abbreviation *va after sdkhdydu.
\\,.\2- Iit>()K VI. THK ATIIAKVA-VIinA-SAMmTA. 312
2. \Vc (two) will hold toRclhcr like friends; I relax thy fury; wc cast
in thy fury under a stone thai is heavy.
I*crhaj>s hritcr * thy fuiy ll»nl is Ijc:i\ y ' ; but tlic vrrsinn of Tpp. |_willi the comni J
flccidi'illy .supports the trniishition as j^ivcn: tt{»:ttfti} 9n,iHYNm t^urunH *// ni tiaJhman.
rpp s vrf.snm of A. b is tliis : vi te ttutnyum fittytifftasi \j:i. MT. ii. 22. 2j MttkAikt 'i'<f
jiii«l;-ii//f//.
3. I trample upon {tiMi-s/Z/ii) tliy fury, with heel and with fnmt fool,
thai thou niayest speak not uncontrolled, mayest come unto my intent.
[_I do not svv uhy prApiiJa lu.iy iu)t hrrr !»•• irndcrfd hy * t»H*.*J Tpp. reads, for b.
pArsiubhyt'nn prtif*iititihh\'t'\m : ami, for c. d, /«//«? te Ja\tyi'\m Vttiiham parii m»\nyum
suvilmi if, l^'Ihc secomi half-xcr.so rcciiis at the end of the next hymn. TAda d is a
stock-phrase : see i. 34. 2 ; iii. 25.5; vi. 9. 2 ; 43. 3. J
43. To assuage wrath.
[(.\s .J? ) -- m-ittytiytM,triit./rr-t/iiJt,if*t. tlnttstuhhitm ]
Found also in I'aipp. xix. In K;'iu«;. (3^^32), the hymn appears, next after hymn
42, in a rite for appeasement of an^er, datbhti hcin^ treated as an amulet {} osatikit'at\.
Tran.slAtcd : KJorcnz, 303 or 55 ; (irill, 30, 1O2 ; (triffith, i. 2^7; Hhwrnriehl, 137. 4Se.
1. Tliis darbhd [is] fury-removing, both for one's own man and for a
stranger ; and this is called a fury-removinj; fury-appeaser of fury.
The tran.sl.Uion implies the cmrndation of T7W////r///'iMi-i/ in c to -i</( (*«f (as prnpose<l
hy (irill. and virtually by Moirnr). I'pp. supports the chan^;*.', readinf^ vimanyakc
mitnyu^xtiiuino *itu me ; it h.is vinninyakxis also in A.
2. 'Ihis that is many-rooted, [that] reaches down (avastha) to the sea,
the darbhd^ arisen out of the earth, is called a fury-appeaser.
I*pp. reads, in \i, prthi-.yt^m •in the eartli.' instead of utmuMk\tn Mo the sea'; end
of c, and d, nnthittis s,i le *s(u I'tnutnyaltih. The Anukr. takes no notice of the
delicieuiv of a s\ liable in A.
m m
3. We conduct away the offense (?^vf/«////) of thy jaws, away that of
thy mouth, that thou mayest not speak u neon tr< died, m.iycst cumc unto
my intent.
The l.ist half-verse is a rcprtition of vi. 42. 3 c, d [^whirh see J : it is wantini; in
rp|v. p«*rhaps as rrsult of a I.k un.i Most of the mss. have tlic false reading mtikkytlm
in b. but sri'. also nnniils to -ilw. bfini^ supporti'd by the comm. The latter explains
{,tfiittiift by htf'tiiihi tuf'hut.t'fi lrt*./»i}'f)i:yiin;il,iifi fitt,int*imm.
44. For cessation of a disease.
[Partly piosi* -vs. 3. J The vrisrs 1. 2. an* foun«l also in P.'iipp., I a. b in iii.:
I C. d am) 2 in xix. l*si-<l in Kriu<;. (31.'') in a reme<{ial rite ai^ainst sl.inder {tipa7uhf»i ,
but the Xv\X I f r. lUooinlirM, p. xlv.J re.icls iipintlfil). \iith help of a self-shed coirhorn
piopeilv pri-j'.itt't!.
313 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK VI. -vi- 45
Translated: Ludwig, p. 509; Florenz, 304 or 56; Griffith, 1.268; Bloomfield, 10,
481. — Cf. IJergaigne-Henry, Matiuely p. 151 ; Zimmer, p. 390.
1. The heaven hath stood; the earth hath stood; all this living world
hath stood ; the trees have stood, sleeping erect ; may this disease of
thine stand.
The peculiar epithet urdhnasvaptia was applied by Ppp. to a tree also in its version
of 30. 3, above. L" Stand," i.e. * come to a standstill.'J
2. What hundred remedies are thine, and [what] thousand, assembled
— [with them thou art] the most excellent remedy for flux, the best
cffaccr of disease.
Tpp. has yat for yd in a, and sambhrtAni (for -gaidni) in b ; instead of c, it reads
tesdm asi tvam uttamam andsrdva saroganatn* (^='\\.'^.2 c, d); in d, -stha. The
i'pp. reading, and ii. 3. 2, suggest supplying rather 'of them' than *with them' between
the half-vcrses. The comm. understands a, b as addressed to the patient {vyddhita).
♦Llntcnding, presumably, andsrdvam aroganam,\
3. Rudra's urine art thou, the navel of the immortal {amrtd) ; visdnakd
('horny') by name art thou, arisen from the root of the Fathers, an
effacer of the vdtikrfa,
m
This prose-stanza is reckoned by the Anukr. as if metrical. Vdtlkria^ like vdtlkdrd,
is too doubtful to render ; its derivation from vdia * wind ' is extremely unsatisfactory,
and Zimmcr*s connection of vdfa with our '* wound " etc. is also questionable ; the
conim. understands 7'dtf krtand^anl {vdfl — dsrdvasya rogasya {osayitri). The name
visdnakd points to some use of a horn, such as is indicated in the K&u^ika {sva-
yamsrasta go^rnga * a self-shed cow-horn '). LNote that the epithet " deciduous "
(svayamsrastd) corroborates the etymology of visind as set forth by W. at iii. 7. i,
note. J The verse (j-\-(i\ 8 -♦- 8-1-7) does not at all agree with the description of the
Anukr.
45. In atonement of offenses.
\^Ahgi)as (pracetds) Varna f ca. — duhsvafnandfanadfvatyam. t , ^thydpankti ; 2. bhurik
tristtibh ; j. anusfubk.]
Found also in Pilipp. xix. This hymn and the one next following are used together
by K.au^. (46.9) in a rite against bad dreams; and they are both reckoned (note, ib.)
to the iiuhsvrtpftiifid^ana gafta.
Translated : Ludwig, p. 443 ; Florenz, 305 or 57 ; Griffith, i. 269 ; Bloomfield, 163, 483.
I . Go far away, O mind-evil ! why utterest ((ans) thou things unuttered }
Go away ; I desire thee not ; do thou frequent (sam-cara) trees, woods ;
in houses, in kine [is] my mind.
The combination manaspdpa is expressly prescribed by Prat ii. 79, and the anoma-
lous conversion of the final of vrksin to anusvdra by Prait. ii. 28. Ppp. has, for a, ape
*/ti mauasas pate (which RV. has at the beginning of x. 164. i), and omits c. The
comm. regards manas and pdpa as two independent words in a, and reads ^aiUati in
b, and I'rksavandni in d.
VI. 45- BOOK VI. THE ATIIARVA-VKDA-SAKIIIITA. 3>4
2. If (jv//) by (lown-uttcrancc, out -utterance, forlh-utlcrancc wc have
offended (ff/'fi-r), wakinp; or (jv//) sleeping, let Agni put far away from us
all disagreeable ilUleeds.
The vcisc ((irrrspoiicLs to KV. x. 1^14. 3, wliirli rcaiN in a f'rff/fTftffr<l nih^Astl *hMi^dtJI ;
of thcst* words tiic fust aiwl thin I h.ivt* usa/^r clsrwhcrc, and a dctrrnitnable mranini;.
'wish* ur * cxptM tatitMi * ami * impicration.' The Atharvan sulistitutvs ociur only hrrr,
and the root c<f//.r is not nu't with comliincd with either ava^ nis (except in the doubtful
iiniA(its/ii, KV. oiur)< <*r /''"'•' ^*^ diat it has been necessary to render the wordi
mechanically al>ove. Til. (iii. 7. I2«) has a only, with M/fiOil (instead of nih^ihJt),
which is erpially iiusupportc<I.* The comin. ref^.irds all the words as containing the
root f«ir •ml,* paraphrasin;2[ it by ///wr * injure*; upHfima he renders by upArtAk puiitd
bhavtma^ turning tlie ai live into a passive. |_ I'ada b recurs at vi. 96. 3. J • |_TU. \k2A yAd
tJftisil »i\iht1 ytU /tiinl^tifil, blending KV. and A\'. readings. J
3. If (pif), () Indra, O Hrahmanaspati, we also procceil falsely, let
the Angirasa, forethougbtfuu protect us from difficulty, from distress.
The vrrs»* is KV. x. i^.|. 4, which, however, has the better readings ahhitfrohtlm for Apt
fftisd in b, and ti visa tarn for tiuntat in d. Ppp. reads, for d. dviuiUis fAtu Ubkymk.
It is probably only on account of the occurrence in it of the word sx'apamtas (3 b)
that this hymn is in our text put in connecti<in with the one that follows.
46. Against evil dreams.
[.•f/i;'//.!/. ~- putz'oktiuiex'tityam i#/ii svii/'thim. /. l>ikumm>Ui vtxtJriifankiih ; j. jttv. fakriari-
gat ihii j; /. jttj^'tH ; j. anus/ubA.]
The first and third verses an* found also iit Taipp. xix .• l>ut not in connection iiii!h
the hymn which here precedes. The lirsi two ••verses" are pure prose, and their
description as metric.il ^ives the Anukr. much tiouble, with unsatisfactory result. The
hymn is used by KTuk;. (.t^». n) with thr precedini;: see under the latter; further, in the
same ceremonies a;;ainst bad dreams app(>.irs (4'^). 1 3) a f>fatika which mi^ht si;;nify
either vs. 2 or xvi. 5. 1 : tiie ( (tinin. holds that the former is intended (as includini;
vss. 2 and 3). •|_Koth reports xix. ;7. i ( - vs 3 here) as <iccurrinj; in l*aipp. ii.J
Translated: Ludwig, p. 4<>S ; Moren/, 306 or 5K ; (Jriinth, i. 3O9; lUoomtield, 1^7.
4S5.
I. Tbou wbo art not alive, not dea«l, immortal-embryo of the gods art
thou, () slecj) ; Varunani is tliy mother, Yama thy father; Araru by
name art tliou.
Tpp. rrads i.rw.rr f*itA. The mss. arc miwh at vari.-ince as to two |H)ints in this
verse: win tlier «/*/ or A\i after -i^tiff'hAf, and wh.'ther Antrut or afAms. As rrf^ards
the form-'r, tlx'V .ire nr.iily v^\\\ dly divided : both printed trxts give r/fr, wliich is doubt-
less prrfer.i!i!«-. In thr othrr casr, i)ir* great majority of authorities have Afatut^ which
is ai cordiiigly .nlopi-- I in both tt-xs (nir llp.r..T.K. ri-ad ttpAms); but "I'H. (iii. 3.7*)
and MS. (iv. i. 10). whiih have .1 b'gi-nd alwiut an y\sura of this name, act ent cfJ'M,
anti this w.is proliably to h.ive Imtm prefrrri'd.
J. Wc kn«uv thy [dut* of biith ( /.//////"rM. <) sleep; thou art son of
the go Is' sislcrs ( .•,/»///). .i-iMit of V.imm ; enl-m.iker art thou; death art
315 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK VI. -vi. 47
thou ; so, O sleep, do we comprehend thee here ; do thou, O sleep,
protect us from evil-dreaming.
Tliis verse is repeated below as xvi. 5. 6. The comm. renders -jUmi by -strf.
3. As a sixteenth, as an eighth, as a [whole] debt they bring together,
so do we bring together all evil-dreaming for him who hates us.
* Bring together,* i.e. * pay off, discharge.* This verse is RV. viii. 47. 1 7 a-d, where,
however, is read sam-ndydmasi also at end of b (instead of -yanti)^ and dfityi for
dvisati in d ; it is also found again below, with slight differences, as xix. 57. i. ' Eighth*
is literally • hoof* (ffl'///^), from the eight hoofs of cattle etc. The sixteenth or eighth
is possibly the interest. All the authorities, for once, agree in reading ydtha rndm
(instead oiydiha rndfft)^ and it is accordingly received in both published texts.
47. For blessings : at the three daily libations.
[Angiras (?)» — dgneyam ; 2. vdifvadrvi ; j. jdudhanvand, trdistiiMam.]
Found also in P^ipp. xix. and in TS. (iii. 1.9'-*), and K^S. Not used by KSu^. ;
appears in V&it. (21.7) in the agnisto9nu^ with vi. 48 and ix. 1. 1 1-13, at the savauas.
Translated : Ludwig, p. 429 ; Florenz, 308 or 60 ; Griflith, i. 270.
1. Let Agni at the morning libation (sdvana) protect us, he that
belongs to all men {vdtfvdnard), all-maker, all-wealful; let him, the
purifier, set us in property {drdvina); may we be long-lived, provided
with draughts.
Ppp. ends b mih pathikrd vi^vakrsiih^ and TS. has mahini^ KQS. (ix. 3. 21) tnahl-
ndniy and M.S. (i.3.36) vifvafrts, for vi^vakft ; all \i2yt drdvinam (for -ne) in c; and
MS. reads prdtdh sdvandt in a. |_As to the morning invocation of Agni, see Dloomfield,
J AOS. xvi. 10. J The comm. explains sahdbhaksds by samdnasomapdndh putrapdutrd-
dibhih sahabhojand vd,
2. May all the gods, the Maruts, Indra, not leave us at this second
libation ; long-lived, speaking what is dear to them, may we be in the
favor of the gods.
Neither Ppp. nor TS. nor K(JS. (ix. 14. 17) have any variant in this verse.
3. This third libation [is] of the poets (kavi)^ who rightfully (r//na)
sent out the bowl ; let those Saudhanvanas, who have attained heaven,
conduct our happy-offering unto what is better.
That is (a), of the Kibhus, one of whose merits, leading to the conferral of immortal-
ity upon them, was their service to the ceremonial in connection with the libational
bowl, which they made four. [^For this the comm. gives ample citations, e.g. RV.
i. 161. 2. J Ppp. combines, in c, sdudhanvand *mrtd **na^dnds, and ends the verse with
naydtha, TS. has the insignificant variants of suvar in c, and vAslyas in d ; K(^S.
(x. 3. 21) reads trtlya-savaitam in a, and no *bhi vaslyo «• in d.
vi. 4cS noOK VI. TIIK ATIIARVA-VIIDA-SAMlin A. 3l6
48. To the deities of the three daily libations.
[L'J ■ ntiin/tiyi/.jt jt,/ft;j/y,im. liujinAjm.]
LNot inctrir.ll. J Not found in IViipp.. hut occurs in (,'IJ. (xii. 3. 4i-<), TS. iii. 3 l\
r P.. 1.3.8 ami 5. I?, I 5. (tH. (i. ; 1 2-14). (,'rs. (vi. S. 10- 12), nnd K<, S. (xiti. i.ii).
V%rt\ liy KAu^*. (5^>. 4). in the upanaytjua ccrrnuMiy, .is the tf.'.i< her ^ivrs .mrl the pupil
airi'pts .1 staff; and AKain (0.26) in the kAntyui rites, with vi. 40 : see the latter;
hJ iO^h ^ Land at*ain ( ;o. 27), ahmr, with di-liveiin^ a staff to one ron^rrratnl or to a Vedic itu-
^'(f ' dent ;J and Ki\. |_s< hoi. to 16. 8 J regards the hymn as Roing with hymn 40 in the battle
r.ig^ d^ incant;itions. In \'.iit. it is employed with the |)reredin^ hymn (see the latter), and also
^^ / (17. 10) at an earlier part of the ttt^tth/owtt, with the xitvanat |_in the verse-order I, 3. jj.
1,^ Translated: I'lorcnz, 30') or f)! ; (iritiith, i. 271. — Treated at length hy lllimmfieid.
^0U/*^^ •; JAOS. xvi. 3 If.. 23 ; or I'ts/i^russ tin /\oth, p. 140 tf. Cf. also JAOS. xix., 2fl half, p. 11.
f^ I. A falcon art tlinn, with /^tUii/ni for meter; I take hold after ihec ;
carry ine ahuif^ to welfare at the close {utiir) of this offerin;;: hail!
All the other texts read sAm />tlmya for fifw tw/m. and f,'n.T.S.rinWl.K(^'S. end
tlieic ; <,'<,*S. adils otir further refrain, hut with uthtttnt (for -<i), and ornittinj; jfj^il ;
<,'(," S. .ilsi) adrls ftatvtl after axi at the l»ej;;inninu, in all the three veisfs. 'I he romm
re^aids tin- s.urilue itself as ailtiiessed in ea* li vetse. He says of mirii: nttamil
*vttst\ftti'riirtinv rr ttifrk. Tlie nietrit al definitions of the Anukr. are so far correct that
the veises can he read as 2S svIlaMes.
2. A Rihlm art thou, withy//.;''/// for meter; I take hold etc. etc.
All the other texts put this veise last, .is it properly IntIouks. (,Ti.TS.(ill. end all
three Vfises in tlie same way ; ^,"<,'S. omits the refrain after the first versr, hut states
that it is the same in the others; K<,'S. ends also uitli ihaMifAt in the second and third
verses. Instead of thhiir axi^ T.S. h.is fif^7//J *si (Amljtij^ti/ti/iatuftli), (ill. and V\\. ha*e
svttro \\i i^iivo *»/. and (,"<,'.S. has SttlAtI 'st /»it /',;}.
3. A hull ait thou, with fr/sf/t/f/i for meter; I take hold etc. etc.
At till- l»e'^innin;j of this verse the authorities vary ^r^atly : ','n.T.S.K<,'S. have
jf//i/* // ' Vi/; *,<,S. the same, with /i;/;il a<lded (as in th" other vefses) ; PH. zrsji:^
'si ; (fit. .i.ifftn}</ tisi. 'I lie coinm. itlentities tlie '* hull " with ln<lia.
40. To Agni etc.
Fouml also in r.'iipp. xix. I'urther. in K. (xxxv. 14 15). and the fust two verses in
Ap<,.S. xiv. 2«) 3. the 111 St in 1 A. (vi. lo. i) an-! J M. (ii. 21*^*). tlw List in K\*. lX-94. 5);
thev s«-em to l»e lhii'<* unroiinei ti<l vrrses. Tln-ir \eiv nlis( ure and ouestioiialile content
is explain! d l»y the (umiu as ai • o:npan\ int; and referrin;^ to the firi- that con^umck a
deie.ised tt .k h'-r ; tlie hymn is to he spoken l>y a pupil: this the K.iui^ika prrScrilK>ii
(4''. I )) Iti .\p', S . th«.* two vifsrs an- twi> iMit of six wii'i whii h a c (insiM ratetl prrsnn
is tit .1 it|>.i!i\ six nM.itioiis ii!tfii'>l in c.i*:c he spilN his seed. Parts of the h\mn
reiati* In tiw* .i< t;<»n nf thr pirssin^ stiMics in (rushiiii: the stalks of the somaplant.
Iranslatid: luilwi^:. p. 432; I Iimn/, 310 m ^2 ; (iiitlith. i. 272.
317 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK VI. -vi. 50
1 . Surely no mortal, O Agni, hath attained the cruelty of thy self {(anfi).
The ape gnaws (b/ias) the shaft {t^jana), as a cow her own after-birth.
That is, perhaps (a) hath succeeded in inflicting a wound on thee. Ppp. differs only
in reading marfyam at end of a. For tanvas in a, TA.Ap. have the equivalent tanit-
7ulij' for (Iftii/'i^a \\\ b, TA. cakara^ Ap. dptd^a ; for sifdm in c, T A, fiiinar. The comm.
has bibhasti in c (also 2 d Lwhich seej).
2. Like a ram, thou art bent both together and wide apart, when in
the upper wood [the upper] and the lower stone devour ; exciting {ard)
head with head, breast (dpsas) with breast, he gnaws the soma-stalks
{aiipi) with green mouths.
In a, *rain' {mesd) perhaps means something made of ram's wool or skin; or the
action of the stones' is compared to that of a ram, butting and drawing back. K. (of
which I happen to have the readings in this verse) gives mesa iva yad upa ca vi ca
carTa/iy and Ap. the same, except the blundering carvari for cari'ati. The comm. has
utvase for acyase. Ppp's a is tvesili ^va sifica itaror varnyate. In b, which is the most
hopeless part of the verse, K. VQ^x^syad apsaradnlruparasya khddaii^ and Ap. doubtless
intends the same, but is corrupted in part to apsarartiparasya. The comm. has aparas
for uparas. In c, K. has vaksasa vaksa ejayann^ Ap. the same, and also, blunderingly,
i^i'rau for f//v7. Ppp. has apsard ^pso. In d, K. begins with anqum ; Ap. has the same
anil also gabliasti; the comm. again bibhasti. The comm. has two different conjectures,
both worthless, for uttaradrAu. LPischel discusses dpsas, Ved, Siud, i. 308 ff., and
tliis vs. at p. 312. Aufrecht discusses the roots bhas, KZ. xxxiv. 458. Hillebrandt
discusses this vs., / 'ed, MythoL i. 1 54. J
3. The eagles have uttered (Icr) their voice close in the sky; in the
lair (akhard) the black lively ones have danced ; when they come down
to the removal of the lower [stone], they have assumed much seed, they
that resort to the sun.
In c, KV. has nydh (p. nydk) nl yanti, for which our reading is evidently a corrup-
tion — as is probably also niskrtim for RV. niskrtdm^ and silryaqrttas for RV. -f^'itas
at the end. The comm. has divi instead of dyavi in a. Ppp. has a very original d :
puro vdco dadhire suryasya. There is no reason for reckoning this j'a^a/l as virdj,
50. Against petty destroyers of grain.
\^Atharvan {abhayakHmak), — dfvt'nam. t.virdd jagati ; 2^ j. fitihyd/^iikti.']
Only the .second verse is found in Paipp., in book xix. ; and no occurrence of any part
of the hymn has been noted elsewhere. Its intent is obvious. In Kau^. (51. 17) the
hymn is applied in a rite for ridding the fields of danger from mice and other pests ; one
goes about the field scratching lead with iron (.^the comm. reads ayahslsam gharsan)\
and it is reckoned (note to 16. 8) to the abhaya gana.
Translated: Ludwig, p. 499; Florenz, 312 or 64 ; Griffith, I. 272 ; Dloomfield, 142,
485.
I. Smite, O A^vins, the borer, the samahkd^ the rat ; split their head ;
crush in their ribs ; lest they eat the barley, shut up their mouth ; then
make fearlessness for the grain.
vi. 50- HOOK VI. TMK ATIIAKVA-VKDA-SAMIHTA. 318
All the inss. nrcrnt ti^'ri/ttl^ ns if the wonl bc^.in the second pAiIa instead of cndini;
thr tiist, nn<l SPT. follows them; our text i-nicnds to ti{7': In b. SI'T. reads, with mn»t
of tilt* HISS , ihinti\m^ wliicli is Ix'ttiT, hein^ piosrrilird liy Prat. ii. 2o. The comm. reads
at the iH'^iiinin^ of ^yuvt^w titti ittitlf. Tttftftt perhaps deimtrs a special kind of Atkm
or rat. The (oniiii. regards Sii^nttfikti as adj. to Akhum '<x\\i\ — samafitannm bilam
sanipfit-'i^ytt .«,"'" hantam,
2. Ill')*, hoirr! hey, locust! hey, f^rindcr, ttfiikrasa! as a priest {braA-
fftfht) an unfinished oblation, not eating this barley, ^u up away, doing
no haim.
l'pp*s viTsioii is fpiite corrupt : /itn/,i hent ftafttHj^ii hfm jahhyA upakvasak anad*tntM
itiath liki'tny,! htnuinto ^piuiita. 'I he comm. re.uls opakvtiuix in b (explaininf* il l»jr
4ttitii^if/it}/i stifi/it/i), and /ifti/iff/ti (instead of bnikntil) in c, ami anuttanttts at l>eKinfiinK
of d. The fust t\M» padas arc deficit-nt liy a s\tlaMe each. |_l think Uolh intended ki
twi« e, not //*•///. J
3. () lord of borers, lord of vtix;/i(Vs! with arid jaws do ye (pi.) listen
to mc : what dcvourcrs (Wiitiiafd) there are of the forest, and whatever
devout ers ye are, all them do we ^rind up.
In 7;r«f*/."i//»;f, .some of «uir mss. Mimder tin* </?• into «/«//j or ti/n\ even iiJhv ; but
most (tf thi'm. with all SPT's atitht>iities savr one, have lytti/iitftii, wliith is accord-
inqlv, doiiltth'ss with rr.ison, admitted liv SIT. into his text as thf true leadinf^, and our
T;r«f«///;' is to he rorrr* ted arcoidin^ly. |^I'of T;r #i./:v7/if, 7y'th/?uif I, see n'»le to
iii. 2S. 2. Hnt at II(i.S. ii. id 5 wr have riiitf/iriifii with N:,i^iikir ; < f. note to ii. 31 4 J
Some mss. appear In read itttyt'ipate in a. I»ut SI* P. ^ives ^uii^fitt- as su|)]>orted by all his
anthoiitif's, and the comm. also h.is ii, t^ivini; it a tiititiotis etymo|ot;y from artthttH , he
explains it h\ pattirtt^thii. I'Ad.i b is redundant, unless we cuntrai t -fhi ^^(rno/a.
51. For various blessings.
I <. .1 n'i fii/t. - 1 / / »'. I «/ ; ,* r , J ' // //. jf fa ft. /f,1it tit f- '1 >tt't i. r,h'ff' i : ? . ;< i Cti// 1
Founcl aNo in IViipp. xi\ . in the verse oriler I. 3. 2. The h\mn is reckoned by
Kau(; (<)■ 2) to the f*f fiiiihtintt i;.in*i ; it is used (25. 20) in healin;; rites af^ainst varioui
disi*as««.. and (25 21) es|>eci.illy ni;ainst disorders arisini; from soma drinkinj; : and
(41. in, ^^ilh h)mn i<) and others, in a cerrmony for ^oihI fortune; it is further (note
to 7. i.|) iiMf of the tip.Jih xtHi'nti. \'7\\\. (30.7) has it in the stlrtfrdfuitnf ceremony
with l!ie pri-p. nation of Mnt't for one disordered by sonta. |_Ke^ava (to ^il . 5) counts
this In mil (iii»t ;;) to a /./:■;// 1/ ^i,M';*/. |
I'ranslati-d : (Irillilh, i ?" \.
I. Purifit'd with X'riyu's |>urifier, Soma [hath] run over opposite
{priify,in\, India's suitable companion.
I h" Ir.insl.itii»n implirs. :ii t^i* rnd <'f b, Ati i/futtis (or atiif'utiis, as tlie comm.
ai'pi-.iis t'> rr.i'i). whi( !i SI'T h.is riL:htIy \\\ his tfxt. In most mss. thu and hfn are
li.udK (iiNjiik'^uisii.iMe (.ti.d \\*>\ r.isll\ distint;iiish.dil(' from </.7 and /:m). and Am was
uif«'rtiri.\!' I\ adiipt'd in our ti-\t. l»riause thr first niss. (onsnltid favored that reading.
I'l'p h.is instr.nl ./,//;;\ »/// ///. I lif \ ri s" is fmnirl t;\ i« r • in VS (s. 31 d ; xix. 3 a), twice
in 11'.. {it '» I- ': t\M» innni'Ii.itfly sm • rssive vifsinns). and tliriic in MS. (ii- 3 ^\
319 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK VI. -vi. 52
and iii. 1 1. 7 two immediately successive versions), and, what is unusual, with differences
of reading in the different versions. VS. differs from our text ^sec note •J in b, having
in X. litisrutas^ and in xix. diidrutas, Ti3. has l>oth times v^yus at the beginning,
but in b the first time prank and the ^^zon^ praiyAnky both times dtidrutas, MS. has
in ii. vayos (doubtless a misprint for vfiyds) and dtisrutas ; in iii., the first time vdytU^
prak^ and dtidrutas^ the second lime vdyds^ pratydky and diisruins. The Atharvan
reading, according to the Prat, phonetic rule ii. 9, ought to h^ prntydflk before a follow-
ing s ; but (as explained in the note to that rule) the mss. read simple /7, and both
printed texts adopt it. \QL Weber, Rdjasttya, p. loi, n. 7. J •LShould be *• thrice":
W. overlooked that at xix. 3 also there are two immediately successive versions, the first
with pratydnk . . . dtidrutah^ the second with prank . . . dtidrutah. Moreover, VS. has
in X. (like Ti3.) vdyuh.\
2. Let the mother waters further (sud) us ; let the ghee-purifying ones
purify us with ghee ; since the heavenly ones carry forth all evil (riprd)^
forth from them, indeed, I come clean, purified.
The verse is found also as RV. x. 17. 10, with the single variant ^undhayantu at end
of a; the comm. gives to sild- the same meaning {ksdlayantu psparahitlin ^uddkdn
kurvantu), VS. (iv. 2) also has it, precisely in the RV. version ; and MS. (i. 2. 1), with
md for asman and nas in a and b, and with -vdhantn in c Ppp* has -vahantu like-
wise, and at the end it reads putay emi^ which, curiously enough, Schrdder notes as
read by two of his mss. and by the Kapisthala text. Ppp. has further the phonetic
L? graphic J variant ghrtapuvas in b.
3. Whatever, O Varuna, that is hateful to the people of the gods
human beings practise here, if without intention we have obstructed thine
ordinances (dhdnnati)^ do not, O god, harm us for that sin.
The verse is RV. vii. 89. 5, which, however, reads at end of b cdrdmasi, and at begin-
ning of c dciitlydt tdva etc. TS. (iii. 4. 1 1 ^) and MS. (iv. 1 2. 6) agree precisely with RV.
The fifth anuvdka^ 10 hymns with 30 verses, ends here; the Anukr. quotation, //7A-
cama, has to be combined with that to the next anuvdka.
Here ends also the thirteenth prapdthaka.
52. For deliverance from unseen pests.
IBAd^a/i. — mantroktabakiidtvatyam. dnustubham.^
Also found in Paipp. xix. (in the verse-order i, 3, 2). The first two verses are RV.
i. 191. 9, 4. Used by Kau^. (31*8) in a remedial rite against demons.
Translated : Griffith, i. 273. — Sec also Henry, if//wi. Sec. Ung,, ix. 241 top, and 239.
I. The sun goes up from the sky, burning down in front the demons;
he, the Aditya, from the mountains, seen of all, slayer of the unseen.
All the mss. read -jurvat at end of b, but both editions make the nearly unavoidable
emendation to -van^ which the comm. also reads. The first half-verse in RV. is very
different: ud apaptad asdu suryah puru vi^vdni jurvan (should be vi^vd nijurvan t
[^rather, vi^vdni nijurvan /J). Ppp. has vi^vdni j&rvan^ and, for c, ddityas pan'ntdtk
abhi. The •• unseen " in d are, according to the comm., the demons and pi^dcas and the
like. LWhitncy's M. reads -Jurvan.j
vi. 52- HOOK VI. TMK ATIIARVA-VKDA-SAMHITA. 320
2. The kinc have sat down in the stall ; the wild beasts have gone to
rest (;// :/(■): thr waves of the streams, the unseen ones, have disappeared
I-'or c. KV. lias nf Ar/ih'tf /.//iJ/Mw. and ajjain Tpp. aijrccs with it. The comm.
takes aitpuita as impf. of the dcsidciativi: of ruDt labh {niftifilfh labtihum Atnkan)\
3. The life(r/i7/j)-giving, inspire<l (vipa^cit)^ famous plant of Kanva,
the allhcaling one, have I brought ; may it quench this man's unseen
ones.
Ppp. I)c)i;in5 a with iiyurviJam^ and c witii aharsttfn. STT. has, in C. i *khtUijam^
If / s ^ I i ahhoiif^h it is hoth unj^ramniatical aiul iinm«-tiii.il, l»t*iausc ncnily all hts auilibriiicft
-'^'^'^ read so (the lomin. f;ivfs 'tsiiiN)^ as do part of ours (II.D.K.) [^As to Kanva's plonl,
cf. iv. 19. 2. J
53. For protection : to various gods.
[ /irhiu h u Ira . — nilntUitli :\jf,irn. (> tiistuhham : t . jag*tti ]
Kotiiid also in I'aipp. xix., and in other texts as noted under the several verses.
Kau^. uses the hymn (31.9) in a remedial rite against boils etc.; also, in the kJim%a
rites (5«>. 28), with worship of heaven and earth, when valuables are Inst; and in the
savavtijfitif (6/1. 2), with v. 10, vii.67, in a response; and, according to Ihc comm. (the
prattka tnii^ht also designate xii. 1. 53). in the metilu\uint%na \\o. 20 J, with vi. lo^. to
ncroMip.iiiy the partaking of some dish (inilk-rico. comm.) and wrirsliiping the sun.
And vs. 1 01 (Ills in tlu* j^otiAna icrcmony (54.2), with vii. 67, with wiping (the rainr.
comm.) thrice : and vs. 3 in the upaniiyiiua (55. 20), witli vii.c>7. 2. on releasing a row.
In \';ut., vs. 2 is emph>yed in die at^nhfotnti (11. 15). near the l»eci"ninc of the cere-
mony: and vs. 3 twice in the p*i9Vt\n s.icrilicc (4 S. 17). once with the patntsamyAja
offerings, and once as the saiiilkcr strokes tiis face with hi!» wctteil hands.
'I raiisl.itcd : Ludwi^;, p. 50^; (iritt'ith, i. 274.
1. Let both the sky now and the earth, forethoughtful — let the
bright {(filni) great one, by the sacriricial gift, rescue (//) me; let the
svttti'ul favor uniu ti) [nic, let] Soma, Agni ; let Vayu piotect us, [let]
Savilar and Hhaga.
For the end»arr.issini» w.i iiitim in a. I'pl*- '^-'^ds simply w#?. whii h \s Iwtler. Tli.. in
its \LMsinii (if the vciso (namely of a, b. C. ii. 7-^'. i^>' : eat h has a different d) has ttJI
instead, and inserts it a^ain h\UiT\i pipitfiii : it also reads pnUfttiul at end of a. ami
h h*Ui t/.U\tf/>l in b. " 'I h«.' t»ri>:ht one'* is dotilitless jiv/m ; the comm. expLiins it as
jr/f I'll, and to i/.ilitft.ii*} supplies 1/;^ J. |^< f. riliximfield's remark on b at AJI* xvii. 400 J
The c oiiil.in.itifin ,i'!Ut/\ ilsewhire unknown, nnist l»e llie r'piivah-nt of anu-jfi,} or
ituu nt.tf/ (the ((Mum . tinti','inrtfu). Three of the padas are tft^tubk. Inil a has 13 syl-
lal'li s imle'^N we (oiiti.n t mc \i%iin.
2. A'^.iin let breath, aj^ain let soul Uttfunn) come unto us; again let
sight. aL;ain let sjMrit (k//) com** unto us; let Vaitjv.'maia, our unharmed
body -pmtrt tnr, stand bit wren [us and] all ditViculties.
('omp.ue r.\ ii ;•:. MS. i. 2 3. Ap. x. iS 3. all (»f which have a dil'frrent (and TA
a nun h Ii^rst,'!-! ) er-.timeration in a. b. with tljc vrrS «f *i,'il/ • hath come* In C, MS. and
321 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK VI. -vi. 54
Ap. omit nasy TA. reads instead mi; in d, for antds tisfhlkti^ TA. and Ap. have Ava
baiihatam^ MS. dpa b-. Ppp. agrees nearly with MS. by reading in a punar tnanah
punar Hyur na md *\f^an ; in c it has adbhutas for adabdhas ; its d is anias tisthUsi
duritdd avadyHt ; [^and it combines taniipHntas \. \Qi. also MGS. i. 3. 2 and p. 152, s.v.
punar me ; and MB. i. 6. 34. J
3. Wc have become united with splendor, with fatness {pdyas)^ with
bodies {taufl), with propitious mind; let Tvashtar make for us here wider
room ; let him smooth down what of our body is torn apart.
This verse is found also in many other texts, its first half generally without varia-
tion ; only PB. (i. 3.9: this half-verse alone) has tapobhis for taniibhis at end of a.
VS. (ii. 24 et al.) has for c, d: tvdstd sudAtro vi dadh&tu riyd *nu vtarstu tanvb yAd
7'ilistam^ and the rest follow this rather than our text; only TA. (ii. 4. i) has no Atra in
C, and TS. (i.4. 44) no Atra vArivah krnotu ; MS. (i. 3.38 et al.) and C^QS. (iv. 11. 6)
add nas (like AV.) after Ann in d, and MS. ends with vtristam (TS., of course, has
ianuvas), Ppp. has, in c, sudairo varh'as kr-^ differing from all. The comm. renders
ami mArstu by hastena ^odhayaiu. |_Cf. von Schroeder*s TUbinger Katha-hss.y p. 72. J
54. To secure and increase some one's superiority.
[Brah man. — dgnisom tyam . dnustubkam .]
Found also in Paipp. xix. Used by KAu^. (48. 27), in a sorcery, with vii. 70, with
the direction ity ahitAgnim pratinirvapati; vs. 2 appears also in the panuin sacrifice
(4. 19), with an offering to Agni and Soma. And vs. 2 appears in Vait. (3.4), in the
parvan sacrifice, with a silent offering to the same gods.
Translated : Griffith, i. 275. — He entitles it " Benediction on a newly elected King."
I. Now do I adorn this man as superior to his fellow, for attainment
of Indra ; do thou increase his authority, his great fortune, as the rain
the grass.
The first half-verse is very obscure, and the rendering given only tentative ; it
implies the emendation of (At in a to (Am^ or else of idAtn to imAm (as antecedent to
asyA in c), and the understanding oiyujA as iox yujAs^ instead olyitj^^ which the/ri*//f-
text gives for it both here and in 2d; to read further indrn (voc.) in b would much
li(;hten the difficulty here, and also furnish a subject for the appeal in the next line. A
dative with uttara is a construction perhaps unknown elsewhere. The comm. com-
fortably cx])lains yuje as a verb ** — yojaydmi,*^ i'PP- reads ynjam (probably a mere
error of the transcriljer) ; and, for b, the corrupt yene *ndram ^nmbkd ni* isiaye;
in c it \\7<s> yasya for asya. The Anukr. seems to allow the contraction vrstir *va in d.
L Roth's collation gives ///j^rt//r in a, and ynga in 2 d; but it may be a mere omission of
the accent by which he distinguishes the palatal sonant {g'—oyixj) from the guttural
sonant (^)J LPlate 453 •' reads j'/z^/iw.J
2 For him, O Agni-and-Soma, maintain ye dominion, for him wealth ;
in the sphere of royalty make ye him superior to his fellow.
Two or three of our mss. have in b the bad reading dhArayatAm; and, Jn c, even the
majority of them give -I'argre (as Bp. at iii.5. 2, and B. Kp at xt. 2.4: but SPP.
reports nothing of the sort in his authorities). Ppp. has yasya for the first asMAt\ and
asya for the second, and vardhayatas for dhArayatam in b ; also aho for imam in c
vi. 54- HOOK VI. THi: ATHARVA-VKOA-SAtt IIITA.
3. Whoever, both related and unrelated, assails us — every such one
maycst thou make subject to me, the sacrificer, the soma-presser.
The fust half-vcrsL* \% also 15.2 a. b, .itH)ve ; tl.f* la^t lialf-vcrAC 15 also 6. 1 c. d.
I'pp. has, fur b. tv /<r/<» iwrf at nnfynh; it fuithcr \m\% d before c, in ihr form jarfa»t
55. For various blessings.
Not found in IMipp., but in TS. (v. 7. 2»-4) etc. as noted Ik:Iow. I'setl by KAuq.
(52. I ) in a rite for welfare, on ^oin^ away: ami vs. 2 \% rerkonrd (note to $0. 13) to
the ftlut/ntji^ttna. With vs. 2, arronlinj; to Vail. 2. i^», are olfm-d the ptayAjat in Ibc
farvan s.u ritice ; and with vs. 3 (S. 5). the initial and final homas in the t^grayana.
Translated: I.udwtf;, p. 21S; (^ritlith, i. 275. —As to rydcs of lunar yearii, see
/immer, p. 370.
1. riic many paths, tiavelrd by the Rods, that ro between heavcn-and-
earth — whichrvcr of them shall carry [one] to unseat hedness, to thai
one, ( ) ^;<m1s, do ye all here j^ive me over.
The first half vrfse is also iii. 1 ^. 2 a, b. TS. brgins f/r«7/;vf/«j^ pathAyo^ and enils b
with '.'ivtUiti (ini-tiii ally brttcr); its c is tt'uirh yA Ajyanim AjUim AvAhAt ; and in d it
has niia for //iJ, and dattti for J)ujtia. PttS. (iii. 1. 2) agrees Miili TS. except in this
last point, and in (oinbinin^ yo '^yiinim in C; Nfl>. (ii. I to) |_also agrees with TS.
save th.it it J has ajijim for ajitim. 'I he conini. has Jatiii^ like 'I'.S., and it is the belter
ri'adin;;. Hoth this vcisc ami vs. 3 aic iiKompU'te as yi/j^'*///.
2. Hot season, winter, cool season, sprinpj. autumn, rains — do yc set
us in welfare (svitd)\ )>orti()n ye us in kine, in progeny; may wc verily
be in your windless shelter.
T.S. ami MM. (ii. I. 11) read wAf //•/! fur (faints in a. end b with savifAfh ne asfn,
and have, for c, d. /t'ultft ftufnifh ^tttti^tltiitfAtiAth nnuJtA rtAni Ahhttye ixAma. I See
also .Md.S. ii. S. o a. and p. I 5X. s.v. fufnanto. P(IS. (iii. 2. 2) follows TS except that
it ends with ViWfina and has for b ^ivA 7'ttr.r,} tt/*/itiyA {>nan //#/A.J
3. Unto the /V/r/-year, the /r///year, the j#/w year, pay ye f^rcat hom-
a{;e ; may we be in the favor of these wor.shipful ones, likewise in their
auspicious wellwillinj;.
TS. lir^ins with thi» iJ: it ft tint or ii/yrar (in tin* form iiiu'rat-)^ and hxv f*»r 4,
j\i\^ A/tfA .f/i,t/.}A i\i}frt,i: MM. (ii. 1.12) diffeis fiom it only in the form ith-at- 1
PdS. (iii 2 2) also ajjrers c\< rpt in i:ivinL: in a the \\hoh» series of five year names
of tin* « y( h* : sit'hi- , p,jf h'-, /./«>:•. id : iif\,nA\tt, an<l ^ti/fttnhti. i )ui latter half-vrrv*
CM I IMS trpf .itiMJIy in I\\'. (I'lj. iii. i 21 c. d*), ami onrr mf>ri* in A\'. (wiii. 1. 58 c. d).
I*pp. wii 'vis Muirner.itos in s»n • » ssiori /Airv/r. Afttt: Ai. anfl /"«/.?, tiftu-, p,tri-. ami ittm-
T-f//i.rf ./v. Thi* (onim. cpiittrs tuMii an unknown smiri e the follnwirif; vrrsr ; tJtuirJkmAm
p^.t^'i.r: Ad.'ftiifft p,n'r.4rit' p.n'it.tl'i' \ tti^r : s.t tn pa ri'iiA'u''- /**/• itvfitti %h*if*Jt,fpnr\-Ai tm
t iitidt,'i\. '[^ Willi sIiL:ht thani:«s; ami xeibalim at x. i.$.6.J
323 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK VI. -vi. 57
56. For protection from serpents.
[Qtm/tW. — /. vdifvadcvJf usniggarbhd pathyilpankti ; 2, j. rdudryiu : 1, anustubh ; j. nicrf.]
Found also in Paipp. xix. (in the verse-order i, 3, 2). Used by Kaug. (50. 1 7), in a rite
for welfare, with iii. 26, 27 and xii. i . 46, against serpents, scorpions, etc. ; and again
(139.8), with various other verses and hymns, in the ceremony for commencing Vedic
study. In Vait. (29. 10), in the agnicayatta^ it and other passages accompany oblations
to Rudra.
Translated: Aufrecht, ZDMG. xxv. 235 (1871); Ludwig, p. 502; Grill, 5, 162;
Griffith, i. 276; Bloomtield, 151, 487. — See also the introduction to iii. 26.
«
1. Let not the snake, O gods, slay us with our offspring, with our
men {purnsa)\ what is shut together may it not unclose; what is open
may it not shut together : homage to the god-people.
Padas c and d are found again below as x. 4. 8 a, b. (^Read sdmyatam ydn nd vi
5 parade viattam ydn nd etc.? J Ppp- reads in b sahapHurusdn^ and omits the con-
cluding pada. The comm. has vi sphurat in c; he understands the 'open* and *shut'
of the snake's mouth, doubtless correctly. MI5. (ii. i. 5) has a parallel phrase : samha-
tarn md vivadhlr vihatam md ^bhisamvadhlh.
2. Homage be to the black [snake], homage to the cross-lined, homage
to the brown constrictor ; homage to the god-people.
Ppp. reads haye for astu in a. The comm. explains svaja • constrictor ' as " self-
born*' Land Aufrecht as the "natural" color, that is, "green "J.
3. I smite thy teeth together with tooth, thy (two) jaws together with
jaw, thy tongue together with tongue, thy mouth, O snake, together
with mouth.
Ppp. reads at the beginning sam (e daddmi dadbhir datas^ omits %i in b, and ends
with dsndhasyam. The comm. understands " thy lower teeth with thine upper tooth/*
and so in the other cases: but this is very unacceptable; and more probably the tooth,
jaw, etc. are said of some object or instrument used in the incantation.
57. With a certain remedy against disease.
[fVfiw/J//. — /, 2, rdudrydu ; anustubh ; j. \jt] ; paikydbrhaff,']
Found also in Paipp. xix. Used by Kauq. (31. 11) in a healing rite, while treating
a bruise [J aksaia : cf. Bloomfield, Introd. p. xliiij with foam of urine; and vs. 3 is
reckoned (9. 2) to the brhachdnti gana^ and employed, with vi. 19 etc. (41. 14), in a rite
for welfare.
Translated : Griffith, i. 276; Bloomfield, 19, 488.
I. This verily is a remedy; this is Rudra's remedy; wherewith one
may spell away (apa-bru) the one-shafted {-t^jana)^ hundred-tipped arrow.
The comm. has at the end upabruvat. He regards the remedy as used against the
vrafiaroga^ and the arrow of c, d as that of Mahadeva, used tripurasatkhrtisamayi.
vi. 57 noOK VI. IIIK AinARVA-VKDA-SAMIIITA. 324
2 . Toil r y c o n with the jalnsii ; pou r in with the jtiitisii ; the jn/thui is
a formidable remedy; with it do thou be gracious to us, unto life {jivtis).
i*|»|>. Ii.is. for sc(<)n(l \\;\\{-\vts\\ ji't/,i\f hhaiimm hhrsiij,im t%i\\o no iiehi jtvau, mint )i
is tifttcr. I'lic roinm. rcidsy/r/- in ;ill tlircc lasi-s; .tml it lias the KV. foim mr(a in d ;
it uni1«-rst.tiids ttii: foam of luus* uiim: to be intfiulvd l>y yi7/«i.wi \sKft IUoi>mrielci, A J P.
xii. 4 .'5 J.
3. [He there) both weal for us and kindness {uniuis) for us, and let
nothing; wli.itever ail Otfu) us; down with [our] complaint {ni/^as)\ be
every remedy ours ; be all remedy ours.
I'.'iila b an<I tlie t'list two wmils of our c 01 < tir at KV. x. 59. R e. d. f) f. e. 10 f. e. wlicrr,
however, \%c have ///i* w/ U iiiNteafl of w<i ni ttitt, and tiyHuh f'f thh-ihtioit kxittni fA/^at,
making a complrtt' p;Vl.i. ^Cf. also KV. viii. 20. 2^». J The romm. rx|ilain5 /tsa Wtf liy
kulutir uf*a\nmo bluiv*itn. Our b «" luis als«» rlsewhi-n* (as A\'. x, 5.23 C ami KV.
ix. IJ4. 4 d l^tliis time with mo ni ;/(/f J). 'I he first |i.'ula lacks a syllabic |_uiihccdcfl 1*y
thc Aniikr. : read f*f/// «i/.i/// no * \. |_'riic Anukr. si an*i as 7 * S : 12 4 S : liul perhaps ihc
" i2s\ll.iMe(l p.'ida ** contains, as the KV. hints, the dama^rd icmnauts of two (8 f S).J
LI'pp. omits our last p.'ula, sAtram eti J
58. For glory.
f ttnuttuhh ]
I-'ourwl also, fxci-pt vs. 3. in I'.tipp. xix. '1 he liymn is rn konrd (note to Kau<; 13. 1 >
to thi* :.7fii/i)ir j-iFWif. ami is eniiifovi'd (n'j. «;) amnn" thi* li'nnvii icrrn»oni#*s liv one
desiiiiiL; ^Idiy ; also ( 131;. i 5). in tiie introiUn tion ti> X'edic s\\m\\ {utitttftimakiMrmtjr.i,
coinm). it .ippr.iis with various ollirr hymns (\i 3.S, 31;, eti.). with an f»Ii]ation to A^ni.
'ri.insl.iti-il ; I.uiiwi;;, p. 24.1; <iiillit;j, i. 277.
1. (iloiious let the bounteous Indra make me ; ^'^ri'^tis both heaven-
and-earth here; glorious let j;od Savitar make mc ; may I be dear here
to the j;iver of the .sacrificial ^ift.
I'pp. le.ifls ft:r httfro /'.'f/j,'/'#/;'iJ in a: for b. if/^.ffif"/ lonto Vtifuno ^ .}\ rtr ii^-vi/i. and
ends with n-'n>i «i'/'// tthttn:. The 1 omm. lias J/iAtur instead of i/J in d. A% yii^M//.
the vi-ise is Imth iiuxul.ir and delicient.
2. As Iiirlra is j^ossesscd of ;;lory in henvenandearth, as the waters
are po»iS(ss<*d of ;;lory in the heil)s, so among all the j;ods may we, amonj;
all. he ;;Ii»i i«»us.
rpp. iiinifs ri;^.if;-ij//r in b. ami has, for c. d. ii/Mi? TTV:rJ« /iVrr/:* f.A liereyu r^t\€-
sah 11.;///./. I hi- vi'fsi' (II • I 2 : «S t 1 I ) is M-iv ill defined 1»\ the Anukr.
; (iloiiinis w.is Indra. ;;]r)rious was A;;ni. glorious was Soma born;
glniiiiMs. <it .ill r.vistence am I most glorious.
l ills \iiM- is a iipetitii>n of y) 3 above.
32$ TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK VI. -vL Co
59. For protection to cattle.
[Atharvatt L?J. — rdudram uta mantroktadevatyam, inustubham!\
Found also in P.iipp. xix. Reckoned by Kau^. (9. 2) to the brhachtlnti ganay and
used (41. 14), with vi. 19, 23, 24, etc., for good fortune; and also (50. 13), with vi. 1,3,
etc., in a similar rite.
Translated: Grill, 65, 163; Griflith, i. 277; Bloomfield, 144, 490.
1. To the draft-oxen Ldo thou J first, to the milch kine [do thou J, O
arundhati, to the non-milch cow, in order to vigor {^dyas)^ to four-footed
creatures do thou yield protection.
For the arutufhati cf . iv. 1 2 and v. 5 ; the comm. identifies it with the sahaiUvI,
Instead of tvam in a, Ppp. reads nas^ which is better. The sense of c is very doubtful ;
(irill conjectures avayase^ to fill out the meter as well as ease the translation ; the
comm. explains vayase as a cow or horse or the like under five years old; perhaps the
corruption of the reading is a deeper one. A'dhenu may signify young kinc, not yet
yielding milk. I5oth this verse and vs. 3 are defective by a syllable.
2. Let the herb, the annidliatU allied with the gods (.^), yield protec-
tion ; may it make the cow-stall rich in milk, and the men (piUusa) free
from disease {ydksina).
The translation implies the emendation of sahd dnds in b to sahAdevf ; this the
comm. gives (it is conjectured also by Grill); it may be here simply the name of the
plant, but yet probably with pregnant implication of its etymological sense. Ppp-, in d,
reads -mam and pdurusAm,
3. I appeal to the all-formed, well-portioned, vivifying one; let it con-
duct the hurled missile of Rudra far away from our kine.
The comm. understands, in b, achli vaddmi^ and explains jivaltVn as jfvanam Itlti
daddii.
60. For winning a spouse.
\^Atharvan (f). — iryamatmm. dnus/udAam.]
Found also in Paipp. xix. Used by Kau^. (34. 22), in a women's rite, for obtaining
a husband, with an oblation to Aryaman (it is added, /f/rJ kdkasampdUUy which the
comm. explains by kdkasamcSrdt ptirvam).
Translated : Weber, Ind, Stud, v. 236 ; Zimmer, p. 306 ; Grill, 56, 1 64 ; Griffith,
i. 278 ; liloomfield, 95, 491.
I. Here cometh Aryaman, with locks [-j/w/rfj loosened in front,
seeking a husband for this spinster, and a wife for a wifeless one.
Ppp. reads in b visatastugah (i.e. visitastukah). Our edition has -srupah, the
manuscript distinction of sru and stu being always doubtful, and the majority of the
authorities here giving as plainly sru as it is possible to give it. The comm. explains
visita- .IS vi^esena silo baddhah^ and as used of the ** rays " {siupa-) of .the sun (arya^
man) in the east (^purastdt), Aryaman is perhaps properly rendered here by * suitor,
match-maker^ (* Brautwcrber,* Weber, Grill); but doubtless at any rate the address
implies an identification of such a functionary with the god Aryaman. The pada-
vi. ro HOOK VI. TIIK ATIIARVA-VI.UA-SAMMITA. 326
rcidini: in b. vf^itastupah^ i-s quotrfl under V\\\K. iv. 77. In c, asyti uhAn is tlie rliov n
rK.iniptc in tin* Piat. f oninicnt.iry (nndrr ii. 21 ct al.) of the samdhi it illuMratCJS
aItliou;;!i tlu* inrtrr shows tliat the irrr^uLir com t)i nation asye \kan requires to t>e made,
and the Aniikr. apparently uinks at it. I'pp. has the corrupt leading sa fJi €hAya*i
'V' L'ntfndinj; .ui Tiii \heti .^ \. ^Collect the e«l. to -siuftih.^
2. This woman, () Ary.iman, halh toiled, j^oinj; to other women's
:isscml)ly ; now, () Aryaman, shall another woman come to her assembly.
rpp. r(*ads in c //:' tiiyi ^fvttfftan. The comm. has ^ttmitmtm in b and d, and antg
for nu in c. Me makes no dittw uhy in taking tiyttfi (p. d^fyafi) as a 3d pi., which it i%
not; wc ouf^ht to have cither tlytm (<>'((i «/;/), or ttnytt instea<l of anyik: the translation
implies the latter. The proper ftiiifii ri-adiiii; uould l>e i: ttyati. |_For sAmamam
■wedding asseniMy.' see Her;»ai;;ne, AV/. /'/#/. i. 159, n. 3. Comm. renders nfij^d l»y A//
Hloomfiehl, •' without f.iil."J
3. The creator (diuittir) sustains the earth ; the creator [sustains] the
sky and the sim ; let the creator assi<;n (dha) to this spinster a husband
that is according to her wish.
l*pp. combines a\yA \^ruviU in c, and reads titttiAtu in d.
61. Prayer and boasts.
Found also in r.iipp. xix., and in K. xl.^. KrtkiMud l»y KAm<;. (*). 2) to x\\t hrka-
rAAtt/i i^iiftii, and used (41. 14), with vi. K), 2\, 24. eti-.« in a rite for ko<mI foitune; in the
I'tJfrtyti ( ereninnies ( 5*). 10). for splendor*: also, in the chapter of ]Nutents (133. 3), on
occasion nf one's house liumin^ (hiwn ; it is further (noti: to 50 I3)include<l in the
f'iliti/r,! j^iifi<i. Ill \'.iit. (2. I7)vn. 3 af I iimpanies, in the/r/':</M saiiil'ice, two otferinf;%
of Initter to Ai^ni and Som.i. *\_l'tnott: so tlie comm.; hut HltMimfield reads :yttnts,
which ar« ortls l>ett«r with 1 d of tlw tixt J
Transl.iteil : (irilVith. i. 27S.
1. To ine let the waters semi what has sweetness; to me the sun
brought [it I in order to lif;ht ; to me the j^orN, and all those born of
penance - to me let f;o(l Savilar assijjn expansion [^lytiitts].
rpp. Ii.is, for b, fuahytifh suryo hb,i*tif jyotixH jC'"". and. In C. f«fWi'M for iap^jA
K. has, in c, /'/./'/i for m%ih\ain^ ami .I'/.v for .vAr, anil ends with hhiM ( ?)• Af*hi\rat in
b cannot well lie roTrert : we mii;lit ( onjec tute instead bhavaiit. The Anukr. disrei^arils
the detii ii IK v of .\ s\llalit" in d.
2. I e.xpmded (?) eailh and heaven. I j;enerated the seasons, seven
together; I sjK-ak true wh.it is untrue; I encompass {f*tin) divine speech
anil jx'ople {:':\tis).
Vox t!»i' jliMihtfiil 7 nyiti in a. I* pp. has //*?.///.? 'ii. and K. afftihhtt»ltn. Some of the
ms^. read if.tu.fv.m in b (also in 3 b): K. has ,iftniam (if the n ailing is corrett): I'pp
snltstitut' s \ 1 1:. /*':.'! It %iHf /^ ( foi f/r't/n .t.t ) The s«'f i>nrt lialf V''i'«»' in K. is ipiite ditTer-
eiit : ff '?./".• - h,ttn p.rn .tttf r-tJifi r.i'/::i:.r \.t tn tp.h^ttl it%ti»ir''i titkA.lviln (the last patla
is par.dU'l willi «»tir ^ d). '1 li-- s.-ns" of c 1* olis( un«. arpl the renderinu civen tmly tenta-
tive : it iinp]ie> 7iji/i);/// instead of :if./.i"//.- p'*rhaps, •( de<.lare what [is] true [and
327 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK VI. -vi. 62
what] untrue/ The comm. reads vt\am for vi^as at the end. He understands vivaa
in a as ' winnow, separate ' {^parasparavivikte asatnklrnariipe krtavCin as mi).
3. I generated earth and heaven ; I generated the seasons, the seven
rivers; I speak true what is untrue (?): [I] who enjoyed Agni-and-Soma
as companions.
Ppp. reads, from b on,* as follows : aham vdcaspniis sarvd *bhi sifica : ahaih vinejmi
prthivfm uta dyiim aham rtun srje sapta slikam : aham vHcam pari sarvdm babhtl7*a
yo 'gttisomd ^tiduse sakh&yuh, K. has, iox jajdna . . . ajanayam (a, b), dyiivAprthivl
d babhuva aham in^vil osadhls ; and, for c, d, mahyath vi^as sam anamanta ddivlr
aham uf^ras smatahavyo babhilva, •L Perhaps this is an error of Roth for 2d. If so,
3 a would begin with aham vinejmi,\ L^®** See p. 1045. J
62. To Vfli9vflnara etc.: for purification.
\Atharx*an (/). — rdudram uta mantroktadevatyam, trdistubham.]
Found also in Paipp. xix. (but the first verse is given only by its pra/fka^ and has
not been found elsewhere), and its first two verses in other texts, as noted below. Agrees
in use with the preceding hymn as regards ihc jr/jfias to which it is reckoned (Kauq. 9. 2,
and note to 50. 13 ; Kc^. ^to 61. 5 J and the comm. f^page 37 cndj further have it, with
vi. 19 and 51, in a pavitra gana)^ and (41. 14) in the rite for good fortune; and it
appears (41. 15) in another simihir rite, with worship of the rising sun; and is added
(note to 41. 13) in one for luck in gambling.
Translated : Griffith, i. 279.
1. Let Vai^vanara (Agni) by his rays purify us, the wind, lively
with mists {} udbhas)^ by his breath; let heaven-and-earth, rich in milk,
righteous, worshipful, purify us by milk.
The verse is found also in TB. (i. 4. 8-') and MS. (iii. i f . 10). They read md for nas
in a and d, mayobhfis (which is decidedly better) for nAbhobhis at end of b, and pdyo-
bhis ior pdyasvati in c. P.ida c xsjagatf,
2. Take ye hold upon the pleasantness of Vai^vanara, of which the
regions are the smooth-backed bodies ; with that, singing in joint revel-
ings, may we be lords of wealth (pi.).
The sense, especially of b, is obscure, and the version mechanical ; b is perhaps a
reminiscence of RV. i. 162. 7 b. Found, considerably altered in a, b, in VS. (xix. 44),
and T13.MS. (as above). They read for a, b vdi^i'adtvl prtnaft dny 4 *gdd ydsydm
( TH. ydsydi^ MS. ydsyds) ima (T13.MS. omit) bahvy^s (TB. bahvis) tatn'b (TB.
tattuvd) vitdprsthdh ; all have mddantas iox grndntas in c, and TB.MS. -madycsu —
this last an alteration plainly called for by the meter; and the Anukr. does not describe
the verse as nicri. Ppp. has at the beginning vdi^vadevyatk^ for b a wholly different
text, ^uddhd bhaifanta ^ucayas pdxfakdh (our 3 b), and in c, corruptly, -nta sasada
ddayema. The variants indicate, as often elsewhere, the hopelessness of a rendering.
3. Take ye hold upon that (f.) of Vai^vanara in order to splendor,
becoming cleansed, clear, purifying ; here, reveling in joint reveling with
Ida, may we long see the sun going up.
I,v
vL 62- BOOK VI. TIIK ATIIAKVA VI.I).\-SAMI!ITA. 358
Tlir first half- verse is nearly idrntit al with xii. 2. 3^ a. b. Dtirga to iNir. vi. 12 (f'al-
cutt.i nl'n, iii. i'^7) fiuotcs -'t\i\7'itttt'7'iw sutittilm A ftihfititih\am, sliowinf* that sUmrtJi
is iniMiit iii'ir alsn. as if) \s. ?. I'l'l'- '<■•>«''* i" A «''J't "'''««' '.i'"". < ""»l»i»»'s •■'"«*|J«' "fii^A-;
I has fr>t b fuir 2 b, < (iinluiiinj^ iifivii *V* 'J '^'^^^ bii^iiis c x\it]i /•/#' '//ii tiiJ/i-.
63. For some one*s release from perdition (iiirrti;.
[ / '/ « 4 r . F //. I ( / ) . « I ;/// ttntm. iiiltt tf.tm ^. li^f/^ii. /•/ ;'. 1/./ w / . • »/.■/. hm/.\'.j thkti; 4 if nustutk . ]
Koiiiiil also (rxcf'ptini; vs. 3) in iTiipp. xix., the fotiitli vrrsc not in crmipany with
till* otlu-is. I''or other corrosponilcnri's. sit iindrr tho verses, t-srd liy Kaiii;. (46. i<))
in an expiatory litc for im f>ritineni e. fastenini; on a lope of iLtthhit : an<l in ritrs for
welfare ( \z. 3). with vi. S | and I .m . to .in i»inp.in\ ai ts of reN asc : \s. 4. further {\U. 2:).
in an expi.itoty litr fur a spf>iit.inei»tisly kiinlled liie. \'.iit. has tiie vss. 1. 2, and 4
singly in the dK^niniytina (iS.^^, ?'i; 2«;. S), with the l.ijini; of l»iiiLs eon mi rated to
nitrti eti .
'ri.ins1.itMt; I.uflwii:. p. 433; (itiiritii. i. 27<).
1. The tic that tlu' divinr Nirrti (|>cnliti()n) l)oiin<l upon ihy neck,
[and] that was iinirhr.isahlr, that ih* I inilic for ihcc, in (nd«T to lonfj lifr
(f/i7/.v), splcniloi, stii'n;;th ; do thou, ((uickcncd (/;<i-j//), cat uninjiiiinus (')
food.
I*pp. le.ids ill b fr.'/i //Iff /. ninits ith,4i\r, whiili is metrieally redimtl.int anr| pr«>f>
ahly iiitiu<ler|. in c. and h.is. fm d. iift.ii'::: ttt'n pittun tti/J/;i /»9tistitti/i, thns ijetting ml
of the extienirlv nl»sMire ittfomiitLim (in.uir inuir nlisi ure l>y thf cn-( iiiiem r f»f aiiofttt'
iihiS in viii. *. |S). The inniin. taki s ttJ.*t/:,t,i,ini :is t'.\n iinhpeiident wtuds. aiwl renders
it ' profhiiini; plcasuio fnr a pn»h>iii:i-d tiuH-.' '1 hi- ti.insl.itir»n i;ivrn is that •>! the I'elrrs-
Inirjj Lexitnns. A < i>rrespondini; viisc is fminil in \'S <xii.fi;). 'IS. (iv 2 ;M. and
MS. ii. 7. 12. \'S. and MS. havf, in a. b. itf'// . . . //ji/w/." \"S. eii-!^ b with ii: /. f /itlffi.
TS.MS. witli tt:iiii/ /vthit (all mnittini: icfV). In c. f'»r /li/ /r. \*S.MS. haic /Ji/t tt. and
TS. itiihii te t'U : \'S. IS. end it willi ii\u\t^ //.i mAJhy.'ii, MS. witli ii* nii niJ,tii\f.
I'lir d. TS.MS. li.ivf ,U'\.} fr-i'ff'i f*tf'ti'! tttiift':: pftxmuktan^ \'.S «///'•(// *t.hi: ftttuftt iitidht
f*ti\\ut*lh. I \\r \e|sr has Mn :*ti^.lti i ll.ll.U ti I.
2. Ilnma^o W to lhi'«\ () Niiiti. tlioii of kern keenness; unf.isten the
bond-felteis of iron. Y.un.i veiily ;;iveth lliee back to me; to that Varna,
to death, he honiai;e.
The •• ihii- " nf t'le s-i nn-l I. ill" \ 1 isi- is i!i)ui«tless tlie |Mison on whuse hetialf llie S|>ell
is titt't'd I he I'list li.iir \(i^e Is f<Mi:id ioni!>inrd with (nir 3 C. d into one versr in \'S.
(xii.^l) .iMiJ 'IS. M.S. (.IS ahove). 'I lie\ all HMd f// Inr a\t:t in a. an-l for tt^*m*tifuis
'IS. has : /^ : .f/.v.Af- ( I'pp J'*^ : .'j : 1/: i///*) ; tin ir b is ti\a\9tuiyatii v( ^9 ti\ hintthtimt
et\\ift . r|']» li.iN 1./'/ /'.; "///"." V :,'.//./ /^.jj.f/; for b. .md. loi c. d. our 3 c, d. Tlic %iliule
\eise is n- lily np- aii«l ! rlow. .»s >\ \. < M»l\ the l.isl p.nla \> /.rs^tt/t.
3. Tlwni wast iMHiniJ ])er«* to .111 iron post {tirufiititi), bridled with
de.iths thit aie a thousand I )«» th«m. in coneoid with Vani.i, with the
I''ath<'!s, make this m.m ascriicl to tin- hi^h'st fuTnnment.
We h.Uf I'l' s irni' ( !i.>:«.l;i' of .ii! Ir-ss ht-f as i'l tlie pri-ei'diir.* versr, anil it pfn\fs
that ill*- !! L' '!• "I i! •■!!■..;!• 1 1 il .;n ;^;\ ;•. ^-v tin* N .i'';s 1 xts is niMte oii;:inal and (.orrett.
K /yj^
329 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK VI. -vi. 64
They read, in c, ^yamina ivAfk yamyA (TS.MS. -yh) samviddnd *ttatni (TS. -mdm^
nake (TS. -kam) Adhi rohaydi *nam (TS. -ye ^rnAtn), Ppp., as noticed above, has c, d
of this verse as 2 c, d, reading -d&no Uiame niike (like VS. MS.). The last pada is
found also as that of i. 9. 2, 4; xi. 1.4. With the contraction bedhise */ia^ the verse
would be a good tristttbh, ^The vs. recurs at vi. 84. 4. J
4. Thou collectest together for thyself, O Agni, bull, all things from
the foe (.^); thou art kindled in the track of sacrifice {id)\ do thou bring
to us good things.
This is a RV. verse, found at x. 191. i (vss. 2-4 are our next hymn), and is also to
be met with at VS. xv. 30, TS. ii.6. 11 4, and MS. ii. 13. 7 — in all its occurrences offer-
ing precisely the same text. It was noticed above that it occurs in Ppp., but not in
connection with the three preceding verses of this hymn — with which, indeed, it has
nothing to do as regards sense. It was pointed out in the note to Prat. ii. 72 that the
prescription in that rule of J as the final of only idtlyds before /a^/i seems a strong indi- ^. £/$fr^
cation that this verse was not a part of the AV. text as recognized by the Prat. The '
comm. explains idas by iddyd bhtlpnydh, |_For consistency, sdm sam ought to be
printed sAfh-5am,\
64. For concord.
\^Atharvait. — sdmmanasyam. vdifZ'adcvam. dnustubkam: [2. tristnbh\']
The first two verses are found in Paipp. xix. The whole hymn is RV. x. 191. 2, 3, 4,
and is also read in TB. ii. 4. 44-5, and (with the order of the verses inverted) in MS.
ii. 2. 6. In neither of these texts does the first verse of the RV. hymn (our 63. 4) stand
in connection with the other verses ; and as the situation of the RV. hymn is one that
calls for three verses only, it is pretty evident that the first verse (which also has noth-
ing to do with the others in point of sense) is a later addition, and has also, by an
extremely curious process, not paralleled elsewhere in our text, been added at the end
of our 63, in order to stand in its RV. relation to the other verses. See Oldenberg,
Die Hyinnen des RV., i. 244. The hymn is used by Kau^. (1 2. 5) in a rite for harmony,
with iii. 30, V. I, etc.
Translated: by the RV. translators; and, as an AV. hymn, by Ludwig, p. 372;
Grill, 31, 164; Griffith, i.280; Bloomfield, 136, 492.
1. Do yc concur; be ye closely combined; let your minds be concur-
rent, as the gods of old sat concurrent about their portion.
The other texts begin sAm gachadhvam sAth vadadhvam (but W?i. jdnfdhvam)\
at the end, TU. reads (if it be not a misprint) upisata; the pirve gives, at any rate, a
past meaning to -ie. [^Poona ed. has -tf/^i.J
2. [Be] their counsel {mdntra) the same, their gathering the same, their
course (yratd) the same, their intent alike (sa/id); I offer for you with the
same oblation ; do ye enter together into the same thought (aftas).
The other texts differ from ours in the first half-v«rse only in this, that RV.TB. read
f/iAitas instead of vratAm in b ; but our c is their d (TB.^ having satkjfl&Hena for samd-
udfta)^ and their c agrees nearest with our d, TB. reading s, kite abhi sdm, rabkadhvmm^
RV. s. tfiAntram abhi mantraye vah^ and MS. /. krAtum abki mantrayadhvam,
Ppp. has, for b, samdnam cittam saka vo mandiksi, and omits d. The Anukr. omits
to describe the verse as a tristubh. •LTB. has 2\so yajdmas torjuko9Hi.\
vi. 6.1- HOOK VI. TMK ATIIAKVA-VKDA-SAttMITA. 33O
3. He your drsiRii the same, your hearts the same, your mind the
same, that it may l)c well for you tofjother.
T'f7 (i.e. 7v/f) til'iitiifti. 'I he Luiiim. n|>(>cars to umlrrBtand
stt stt/i,i as two indi-jx-iwlnit wonis in d. |_Scc MdS. i. 8. 10 and p. I 56, $.v. jtfJvMivJ.J
|_]';ti).i a l.u ks a .syll.ihle, cisily sii|>|ilii.-(l. J
65. For success against enemies.
Kotiinl also (vss. I, 2) in rriipp xix. t'srd \\y Kain;. (1 4. 7), with i. 2, l'>-2l.
vi. </i. (r;, 07-9*;. in a liU* for virtory ovrr enemies; hclonf;s (note to 14. 7) to the
itf*ttftljifit jjiiftti.
'I'ransl.itt'd : I-inlwi;:;, p. 372 ; (iriHTith, i. 2.S1.
1. Down (//iVi) [lie) the fury, down the drawn [arrow], down the two
mind-yoked arms. () deiUfdisher {/*ant^,ini), dr) thou vex (<i/</) away the
vehemence {(/iufttt) of them ; then get us wealth.
One can hardly hi:lp einenilini; f/tti/ii'ih in a to tfhAnus ' l)ow.* For dvatd used
pri'j»nantly of an arrow rca»!y to lu' laiiiii-!i<-rl, < f. vi. 3*^. 4 and xi 2. I ami vi. W». 2. 1 he
ronihinril idi-a of crusliin;; aiul rrniovin:; in /i//i7(i/rff cannot l>e lirirfly rendered: the
romm. rr;;artls it as aw <*pithot of Imli.i. For ttif/u} m.ii in e, I'pp* reads belter arvAik.
(Vf//r, as antithesis in ^tirt}f>nim ; tiu* ronini. lias <i///fi instead of atika.
2. The handlt*ss shaft, () f;ods, which ye cast at the handless ones —
I hew [off] the arms of the foes with this oblation.
Apparently the oMation itself is the "shaft," r.illed 'handles*' {HiltrAtttfJ) l»erAu«e
it makes ' handless ' (//////iir/i/): st> the roinm. I'pp- ^^'^^ f**!* ^C' '^nd half- verse our 3 C d
Our second half-veisc is identical witli iii. 19. 2 c, d, al>«)vc.
3. Indra made the handless on(* first for the Asuras. Let my war-
riors con(|uer by means of stanch Indra as ally {wt'iiin).
The last half-verse, as noted aliovr. is found in Tpp- as 2 C. d.
66. For success against enemies.
Found also in I'pp. xi.\. |_luit < i>rifiisrd with h. ''1? J. I 'sed l>y Kau^ (14. 7) in a battle
rite witli the preeedinij h\ini». whii h see ; anf! reckoned to the af^attyiia f^ana.
TraiisLitecl ; l.udwi;;. p 372 ; <iiilVith, i. 281.
1. IIan<lless be the assailini; foe — they who come with armies to fight
us; make them, O In»ha. collide with the j;reat weainm ; let their evil-
doer ( .\/(^'//,i////;«f ) lun ('//*#), pierced thT«)U;;h.
'I he loMirn to SV rxpl.iins it iihitti.tr it \*\ aiif>ftityax\t9a ; ours, by marttnaialsa-
2. Ye Nvh») run ((///«/ r) stiin;;in^ [the bow], drawing [the arrow] {tij'tiw)^
huf liiiL; - handless are ye, O foes ; India hath now demolished you.
331 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK VI. -vi. 6j
\Yox H-yam, cf. vi.65. i.J Our text reads at the end -^ardit, on the authority of
Bp.E.I.R.T. and O.; all SPP's authorities Lsave his B., which has -^arfn] give -farl/,
which he has accordingly rightly adopted, as the better supported as well as the regular
form Lcf. vi. 75. 1 J. I*pp. has/<?rJ \arf. LWith regard to these ^/-forms, see the note
to vi. 32. 2. J SrP., contrary to his usual practice, retains the A of (a/raim/i before s/A-,
The comm. has s/ana in c. \J* Demolished " stands in rapport with ** demolislicr " of
65. I.J
3. I landless be the foes; their limbs we make to relax {mli})\ then
will we, O Indra, share among us their possessions hundred-fold.
AH our mss. but one ( D. ), and nearly all SPP*s, read ^airavas, vocative, in a ; both
texts emend to fr//-.
67. For success against enemies.
[Atharvaft (T). — cdndram utdi**ndram. dnnstubkam.'\
Not found in Paipp. Used by Kau^. (14. 7) in a battle rite with the two preceding
hymns (and reckoned with them to the afardjiia gnfta) : see under 65 ; also (16.4) in
another rite of the same cl.oss, for terrifying enemies, with vi. 98, with tlie direction
*• the king goes thrice about the army."
Translated: Ludwig, p. 518; Griffith, i. 282.
1. Everywhere about the routes Indra and Pushan have gone; let
yonder armies of our enemies today be confounded further away.
That is (a), to prevent access to our villages. The comm. takes farastardm as
simply = ati^ayena.
2. Go about confounded, ye enemies, like headless snakes; of you
there, confounded by Agni, let Indra slay each best man (vdra).
This verse is SV. ii. 1221, and one of the supplementary verses to a RV. hymn
(RV^ X. 103. 15). SV. has, for a, b, andhi amitrd bhavatd *^frsiin6*haya iva^ and, in
c, agninuinidfidm. The RV. version (sec Aufrecht*s 2d edition, ii.682) accents amitrd,
reads -sdiia dh- in b, and, in c, agnidagdhdndm agnimillhdnAm, The translation implies
the emendation amitrds instead of amitrds^ which latter is given by all the authorities,
and hence accepted in SPP*s text. The comm. understands amitnlSy voc. ; and he /
explains b to mean as snakes with their heads cut off can merely move about, but not / OK^
do anything in particular. ^
3. Fasten thou, as bull, the skin upon them; make the fear of the
fallow-deer; let the enemy hasten {cs) away; let the cow hasten hither
to us.
Tiie sense of a is very obscure. One is tempted to combine itrsdjinam into one
word. The comm. makes harinasya (= krsnamrgasya) depend on ajinam^ which
cannot well be riglit, though it may be questioned whether, as dependent on bhiyam^ it
is subjective or objective genitive.* He explains the "skin" as used for somamanive-
s/ana; and the *• cow " (d) as the enemy's wealth, in cows and the like. .The combina-
tion of upa esatti into upesatn falls under Pr^t. iii. 52, and the case is quoted in the
commentary to that rule. [^Correct nahyd to nakya (accent-mark slipped out of place). J
•[^In a marginal note, W. compares miira-iirya^ v. 20. 7. J
vi, 68- HOOK VI. THI-: ATIIARVA-VEDA-SAttHITA. 332
68. To accompany the act of shaving.
J. tttijiii^iitif^itrlthii l9istuhh.\
Found also in ITiipp. xix. (in the vcrseonlrr I, 3. 2). ami in part in variotu («ilua-
Sutr.is, ns notc<l un«ltT the »l'Vit.iI vrrses. [^Kiirthrr, in MP. ii. 1 . 1-3 : and M(*S i z\ 2.
3. 14. <> (if- alsr) Knaiirr's Inflcx. p. 14S, s.v. usfn'titt^ p 14^1, and p. I 54) J The h)mn
is used l>y K.'iiii;., as was to hr rxpci ted, in \\\v t^otitlna i ercmony (53. 17-20), vs. I l)ein|;
a(hhi*ssfd to the vrssel of water usrd, vs. 2 arcompanyini; thr wettifi;^ of the youth, and
vs. 3 the parting; and rutting of the hair. Furtlicr, in the tt/>ttutiyantt, at the l>r|;inning
of the whole ceremony (55. 2)» with the diicrtions "do as directed in the lexl " etc.
Tiansl.itrd : l.udwi^, p. 430 ; (iriflith, i. 2S2.
1. Savitar hrrc hath come with razor; coiuc. () Vayu, with hot water;
let the Adityas, the Kiulias, the Vasus, wet [him] in accordance; do yc,
foreth(>ii<;htfiil, shave (the head] of kin*; Soma.
• Wet/ roirespondin;; to our * l.ithei.* ])i;^nity is sought to he piven to the o]>rration
hy identifying the partiri])Ants in it with various divinitirs. The set ond pada is |;i\rn.
without vati.ition, in A(iS. i. 17.6 atwl IT.S. ii. 1.6; tlw fust and s«*ronil are found in
(;<;S. ii. (;. 10, II, Mil. i. ^. I. 2. witli '/•,•'/ in a, and -Jtrftilt 'if/ti in b. i'pP- has,
in b, T'lMi/." Ut/ttkfUtt t/it\ and fMuits tit:thtn/N in C- The ( onil>in.ition 7 ihir //«/- is r|ur>trfi
undrr I'l.it. ii. 21, 24 ; iii. 35 ; lini** */tt, under iii. 3-^,M». |^!lillehiandl« />«/. .l/iM««/.
i.472. ni.iy he consulted. J
2. Let Aditi shave the heanl ; let the waters wet (it] with splendor;
let Trajrip-Ui nurse (tikifs) [it], in order to len;;th of life, to sigiil.
rpp's vrision of c, d is tihtntiytttu pttxjtiptitth f'ttihih pttHnh Muiutf^ia^ f. AtiS.
(i. 17. 7) h.is a, b. itMilini; l'i'\*tn for ^r//,t^ru, ainl X'lifunr for -st) : I'tiS. (ii. 1.6) lias
atfiU ki\tin Tti/^ii, p.itailel to our a.
3. With what ra/.or the knowing S.ivilar shavcil [the head] uf kinj;
Soma, of Varuna, theiewith. ye prie.sts (inti/tnitifi), shave [it| now of this
man ; be he rid) in kine, in horses, in pr<tj;eny.
rpp. iea«ls. for d. #f(r J ///!»«// 1' //'*•/ I'll/'/ «if/// rftiift. A<'fS. (i. 17. lO) and I'flS. (ii. 1. \t\
have out a. b. C without v.iri.mt, hut add as d. ityusffhlfi f.tftttf.tutr \athA *j.r/.
Til. (ii. 7. 17') .ds(» h.is the versr, ditfeiin;^ only in d: Ufj/*N:Art: f*i\\*i ',tifnit,\ sJm
jf;ii//{.i: ami with tliis I h iS. < ii. <». 1 ) a;;nes tlirtiU'^liout. 'I lie (,"< iS. version |i 2**!
flitfiis tliiou^liout : i/z/fi 'iit/^tf .\,t::f.t {i/.-it^f:- tij^tf lyufftt.t r<7;f)it •: ,if rtfitisnt ;'/</: J «
vm.i ift'iit/i} // /'ij i/.//:f tn,{t,7\vti . ,t ';■,;/./.- iltnah : tfua htahtn*}fto vapatf Viiwf ii./i#l
*\vuyn,}n i/tf-^f'i.U.wr in.tw .m/.'# rtf.t/i ( .ii^rerjjii; at the mil with l'|»I*)- ^"*- ('■'' T*
his a Mill f»t!irr t« \t : v.n.t /••«.? h '..:*/,tft'r t,?i.'; hiJutwa t.I ':tip,t/: Uftit /^tii/il/.i
<^»i//; ";.//;.? rt: ,}fit: ^ ;:r\itt.iyii i/n i^/tiU r/ff: i}\;i TiifnHt- Thrvi'rSi*(!0 »II:II-*I2-44I
< ont.iins n«> it/i:.ii;.i/I t'lenient. ^rpp fond'inf-s iitul *j \ttfni.\ti\ur ; and R. notes thai c. d
appr.iis in rpp- ii J
6g. For glory etc.
Vrrsrs lil^e t!ir fir^t two are fouml in r."iipp.. in two rlitTrrent U»«»ks ( i in ii . ; in xix ).
hut prill ij's ( nrii-<ipon>l rathiT tt) ihf nearly eipiivalent v^rvs ix I. |.S, 19. || i%
333 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK VI. -vi. 70
employed by Kau^. (10. 24) at the end of the medhnjanana ceremony, with iii. 16 and
ix. I, on rising and wiping the face ; also twice (12. 15 and 13*6) in varcasya rites, with
the same two hymns (and is reckoned to both varcasya ganas : notes to 12. 10 and
13. I); further, in the ceremony on beginning Vedic study, with vi. 38, 39, 58 and others
(139. 15); .ind vs. 3 in the savayajfias (68. 7), as expiation for an error in the ceremo-
nial. In Vait., in the sHuirdmanl (30. 13), the hymn accompanies, with vi. 19 and
ix. I. 18, the pouring out of the suril.
Translated : Ludwig, p. 240 ; GrifTith, i. 283.
1. What glory [is] in the mountain, in the aragdrdfas, in gold, in kinc,
in strong-drink when poured out, [what] honey in sweet-drink, [be] that
in me.
The verse corresponds nearly to ix. i. 18, below; but the latter has a quite different
first half, and with it Ppp. precisely agrees. What our aragarAia^s are is wholly
obscure, and the word is most probably a corruption. The comm. explains it in two
alternative ways: as kings that *go' (aia) in * spoke(/ir/j)-«wallowcrs(j^<?ra),' i.e.
chariots ; or, as * shouts * (rilia) of soldiers that * go * (ga) at the * enemy ' (ara = art) I
2. O ye A9vins, lords of beauty ! anoint me with the honey of bees,
that I may speak brilliant words among the people.
The verse is found below as ix. i. 19, with the difference of a single word {vdrcasva-
tfm for b/idrgasif-). The comm. reads dvaddmi in d. LSPP. gives the fuller spelling
anktam: cf. Gram, §231 a. J
3. In me [be] splendor, also glory, also the fatness {pdyas) that belongs to
the offering ; let Prajapati fix (driilC) that in me, as the heaven in the sky.
The verse corresponds to iii. i in the N§igeya supplement to the Silma-Veda (or
SV. i. 603), which, however, rectifies the meter of c by reading />/ir/f///^j//// for Uiti mdyi,
"Heaven" and "sky" in d are the same word; the comm, renders the latter by
•• atmosphere." The Anukr. does not note the deficiency in c.
70. To attach a cow to her calf.
[ A'dfikdyana, — dgh nya m . jJIgaiam . ]
Not found in PSipp. Used by Kau^. (41. 18) in a rite for producing mutual attach-
ment between cow and calf.
Translated: Grill, 65, 165; Griffith, i. 283 ; Bloomfield, 144,493.
1. As flesh, as strong-drink, as dice on the gambling-board; as of a
lustful man the mind is fastened {ni-han) on a woman — so let thy mind,
O inviolable one (aghnyd), be fastened on thy calf.
The verses are six-padayVi^/i/f (6x8 = 48). [^Thc stanza is wrongly numbered. J
2. As the elephant strains foot with foot of the she-elephant ; as of a
lustful man etc. etc.
The obscure first line is with intention rendered obscurely ; the Petersburg Lexicon
conjectures * hastens after, step with step,* which then Grill follows. The comm. takes
udyiijt! as = unnamayati^ •* bends up, for love (^premnX)^ her foot with his foot.**
vi. JO IIOOK VI. Tin: ATIIAKVA-VKDA-SAMIIITA. 334
3. As the felly (pviulhi), as the rim (iif*aiHii), as the nave upon the
felly ; as of a lustful man etc. etc. [^Scr p. ini J
'I III' first line is n^.un oltsrurr, )K)th in its intrrn.1l relatione and in its rrlalion \n tlir
rcfr.iin (in this rrsrmMinj; 1 a. b). HK. rlriinr itf^Aiihi .is 'the part of the wheel
brtwrrn tli<* filly anil navf.* Imt this nti;;ht to !>»■ <7>i>f * llir s|MtkfS*: tlicr ( omni. rxplains
it as '111'- « in 1«', hmiiul tnj;cth«T liy thr felly, that is the hinili-r tn^rthrr of llic S]K>kei *
(w^w/ III //;/'«/ #/i /////// tiftlfitlfh sambantlhako valayah^ — i.e. a s»>il of rim inside the f^Ih.
rrolultly a soliil whrrl. without s|>iikcs. is had in view. \Vr should i'X|>ect some other
pri'positi'in than adhi 'on * to express the relation of the nave to the felly.
71. Against harm from improper food.
I'lUHul also in iTiipi). ii. (in the vcrse-nnler I. 3. 2), and vs. I a second time in xi.
|_ror Vajus versions €)f vss. 1 and 3, see v. SchiiM-der's /frcr/ /Af., p. 1^1. and J'uhttj^er
A'tt//nt-Ass.^ p. 77. J l-sed l»y Kiiti^. (.15. 17), with iii. 21), vii.67, el*"., in a rite (follntitni^
the T'(r(</(r////ii//rr), e.xpl.iincd as for ohviatin;; ill effects from accept.ince of );ifts and the
like; alsi» (57. 2<;), in the u/^iiftiivtintt, arconipanyin^^ an utferin^ by the pupil from the
food o})tained hy l>eKf:in^. And Vait. (.). id) has it in the pafvan sacrifice, as the priest
eats his poi tion.
Tianslati-d : I.utlwiK. p. 43^ ; (iiill. (^\ 165 ; (iriH'ith. i. 2S4 ; lUoomtirld, 196, 494.--
See also ner^ai^ne-Menry, Manttrl^ p. 152.
1. What food of various form I eat oftentimes {bahudlui) — RoliI,
liorse, also cow, she-pjoat, sheep, just \vhat5?oev<T I have accepted — let
Af^ni the offerer (hoUir) make that well-offered.
Tpi*. has. in c, kim lit^ and for d, at. vi\Vtlii ti\^t\ti,im k. TA. (ii.^i. 2«») ha« p.'tdas
a, b. C a.s a, b. d of a veise of five p.id.is : in b it inserts vA%as (Tpp- 7'''"^'') l*rfoff kiwan-
yam and omits (not TpP ) «'('''"' •iftcr it: after b it inserts !'</</«//' r-i/'/ii/iff tJksNtr Jjc^
thii ; in c it 1 ontiai ts /ai^ni/ti} '/itif/i into -jtii^rii/tthfi .- and it ends with an^nir mrJ tiismJtJ
anrmifft kfnotu. The loniin. (unless it is a niis|>tiiit) n-ails yiij^v J/r<i in C< The last
p;ida is x. «;. ^'1 d. Thf first two vss. ate mixed yi/^;ii// and //n/wM.
2. Whatever, olfcred [or] unoffered, hath come to me, piven by the
Fathers, assented to hy human l»einj;s {nninnsyth, what my mind is as it
were excitt'd at - li-t Ai;iii the (»fferer make that well-offered.
Till' ( nmni. iiMiIs ;.>'.//;/.'/ in c, l^it explains it .is an indicative. The mss. arc di%i<le«l
hetwern ;/;i/»/.'/m .//// (\\hi«h l'<ith eilitioiis j;ive) ami -i^iM at the end of b (our Hp.I'.M.
M.I .K. ha\e the l.ittei ). Ppp. insnts vtif aftrr hutam in a. ^W. has here over-
looked a )Mit i>f K's iinti\ whiih (if I ntidiistand him) means that our vs. 2 continues
in rpp dins: (b) i,m/v./i/ afm.t t;.-,iti,f\,t \//i/;<r//////, (c, a crtrruption of TA*s C given
under \s i a1'o\r) j «/i/ i/i- .■.//.•,;//; ,.tl\n\,';k,f^iti,t. (d) \i^*iis etc. J
3. Wli.il fnoil I cat uiui;;htri>usly, ( > f;ods, and ptomise, intending; to
^ive \n\] not inli'iidinLC to t;ivf hy the j;reatness of the j;ieat Vai^'vanara
h't [it) hi' |iinj)iiii)iis huiiryrd frMuj fur ine.
I A lii '• -") Ills ''i.- liist h.ilt \i'is«*. adiIitiLj ih** same three p.idas as aUne (v«
under \s n. I'lit the ilmilitful »•< ".-.,/ /;.///// it reails : li ktifisyAm^ and I'pp. has the
335 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK VI. -vi. 73
same, also omitting (perhaps by accident) dddsyan. The second p§da is nearly
repeated as 119. i b, below. The comm. renders samgrndmi hy fraiijtlnHmi. The
Da^. Kar. cites (to KSug. 57.29: see the note to that rule) the three verses in full, but
substitutes for 3 c, d our 53. 2 c, d, vdi^vdnaro no ad-, etc.
72. For virile power.
[Atharvdn^iras. — f^fo *rkadcvatyam. dnustubham : i.jagati ; j. bhtwij.^
Found also in Paipp. xx. Used by KIIU9. (40. 16, 17) in a rite for sexual vigor, with
an amulet. The nr/'^-thread spoken of in 16 may find its explanation in the peculiarity
reported by Roxburgh {Flora Indica^ "•30' "^ ^"^ ^^^ ^^ ^'^^y ^^^ *s ^^ some parts
prepared from the bark of the young shoots."
Translated: Griffith, i. 474. — Cf. iv.4; vi.ioi.
1. As the black snake spreads himself at pleasure, making wondrous
forms {vdpus), by the Asura's magic {fftdyd), so let this arkd suddenly make
thy member altogether correspondent {} sdmsamaka)^ limb with limb.
The comm. reads sitas instead of asitds in «, and explains it as < a man that is bound.*
He takes arka as 'an amulet of arka-irtt^ {Cahtropis giga^iea^ of which various
medicinal use is made). In d he reads sam samagam and paraphrases the latter with
* of like going * {samUfiagamana). The Petersburg Lexicon conjectures for sdmsamaka
'joined to one another.* The verse is mixed iristubh ?iX\d jagatT.
2. As the member of the tayddara is made big by the wind — as great
as is the member of the pdrasvant^ so great let thy member grow.
What creature i\Mt parasvani is is unknown (Pet. Lex. "perhaps the wild ass*'); the
tayddara is yet more obscure, being mentioned only here. The comm. reads idyodaramy
atul (lefiii'^s the tayodara as *a kind of animal '; the bha of sthillabha he takes as rcpre-
scntiiipj a vcibal root: sthAulyena bhdsamdnam.
3. As much of a limb as is that of the pdrasvant, that of the elephant,
and that of the ass — as great as of the vigorous {vdjOi) horse, so great
let thy member grow.
The comm. reads and explains ydvad angfnam at the beginning as two independent
words ; the metrical irregularity, as well as the anomalousness of the word as a derivative
and compound, suggest emendation to yivad dtlgam (angam = pasas), \Ci. Pischel,
Ved. Siud.y i. 83. with reference to the ass.J
Tlie seventh anuvaka^ having 11 hymns and 34 verses, ends here; and the mss.
quote the old Anukr. to this effect : catasrbhir adhikas tu saptamah sydi,
73. To assure supremacy.
[Atharvan. — sdmmanasyam. mantroktandnddrvatyam, trdistubham : /,j. bAurtj.]
Found also in Paipp. xix. (with the verse-order i, 3, 2). This hymn with iii. 12, vi. 93,
xii. I, is reckoned by Kau^. to the vdstospatydni (8. 23) or the vdsiu gana; and it
and the following hymn, with others (12. 5), to the sdmmanasydni; also, by the schol.
(note to 19. I), to the pustika mantras; and vs. 3 Lso comm.: not \ii. 60.7J by itself
(23. 6) in the ceremony of entering a new house.
Translated: Grifilith, i. 284 ; Bloomfield, 135, 494.
vi. 7} nouK VI. Tin-: ATiiARVA-vi:nA-SAMmTA. 336
1. Let Variinn come here, Soma. Agni ; let Hrihaspati with the Vasus
come here ; come ye to;^elher, [his] fellows, all of you, like-minJcd. unto
the f«)rliine of this stein corrector {fij;^ni i't'//r).
I'pp. rr;i<ls <//'///• iiistr.id of u/'tt in c. and li.is at tlir end sujtif*}s. The cnniin.
explains i<7// as "one \vlif> pniprrly understands the distini tion of wliat is to l»e dcme
and what is not to Ik* done**; in tins woid t// seems to take the value uf li or i*ty
•one who notes ami visits or rcipiiti'S.*
2. The vehemence ((/tpNtf) that is within your hearts, the design that
has entered into your mind — that I frustrate with the oblation, the ghcc ;
in me, O [niy| fellows, h*; your satisfaction (nipudit).
Iiitrndrd to irstr.iin inti-iidini; eniii^rants, apparently; as also vs. 3. All tlir m^s .
and lioth eijitions with tln-ni. n-ad /#/// at the hi-^innin;; of c. althoui;h it is um|ucstii*n-
al'ly an error for A////, irfrtrin^ to akuttm^ as the ronini. corie< tly reads and uvuicr-
stands. Oidy one nis. (inir li|i.') has sf l:\i\Affti, all the rest </>:'. or its phnnrtic
prodiK t, i/tn7'-\ hilt SIT. (piitc nnarronntaldy (a<jainst the sense. an<l against ihr u^e
of \^\i:\ whii ii h:is no causative ( onjti^ation rpintahle l>efore the Lalita-Vistara) aHoptft
j/?'iM'f///// fioni the ronnn. ( f>,ittiKfttiftt^,iinhttiitifn}n Ittntrni): I'pp. lias frrT'ififlmr.
and in d (as in 1 d) stt/iifiii. The Anukr. shf)iihl have noted the verse as nnf/, |_Ke.i<!
vo ;■!' Vi// in a ?J
3. 1)1' ye just here; ;;o not aw;iy fiom us; let Tushan make [it] path-
less for you in the tlist;ince ; let the lord of the dwellinf; {Vtisttt) call
aIou<l after you; in me, (> (my] fellows, he your satisfaction.
I'pp- has. in a. ** *//•/ Vilftt i//«? *^.;. at lh«» l»i'»;inninu ; it re< tifies the mrtcr nf b \\
oniittin;.; Twr; in c, it reads Vi//// afi-mu for fohii''itu ; in d, it a^ain has sujAtxU.
74. For harmony.
[.If 'if T .t ft. — (.i«i a!m\i' ) f?/;i/'/;i/';ijwj . j ftffu:'t, ///ri.fi»r.7jVT>r/|.7 ]
r«»nnd also in r.ii|'p. .\i\. (in tlie veise-onh-r 2, I, 3). Keckoned Ity K.iu^. (12. 5 k.
with tlie pii-i I'dini; li\nni arid i>tiiei^, to the fi///.''/;ii//i/iif/^*f.
I lansl.ited : (JiitTith, i. 28$ ; lUiHMntieM. 135. p;.;
I. ri»j;elher let your IvmHcs he mi.\e<l (/;«), together your minds.
to'^ether yuir courses ; t(»^ether hath this Hrahmatiaspati, tojjcther hath
H1iml;.i made you t nme.
I'pp !j.i-. fi»f d. f.vi/ f// i,M'> i//»,.M.//,y '/;./'/;. The rc'inim, rrmleis siim/^f\vttmi»^m h\
J. ('«miinunie nf the niin«l for you. also concurrence of the heart,
;ils'» wli.it nf Mh il;.i is we.tii»I (^/;//;/,m therewith I make you concur
rpi' h.t»i. i'l d. i/"> //'..•/■•■..?// •/.■.//#/. It is niie nf tlie most peculiar and uiiaccount.
al'l ' «»f I'm* h- I .l»»iiiii.d p»i til:iiitits nf tlie f^.j.il text l!i.it in d it leads ttfnt jfiafa%Jmi,
I ••nil;Mi'i-: ihf pi. pi»sifiiin with t'«' vi-r1». tI»on;;h tlie Inrnvr has the accent. Ol all the
njvs. n-t'-d. ••id\ ii:n* **i .SI'I'\ h.is tin* us'ial readini; • t^'ftltifjfrr in C serms an impo«-
mMi- i..ii::ij. liut •viii rpp i:i\cs nothin-.: cNf. The comm. explains il as ■ loil<boni
337 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. HOOK VI. -vi. 75
])cnancc * (j^ramajatiitam tapah). Emendation to ^liniam * tranquillized,* i.e. tranquil-
lity, would be very easy, and tolerably satisfactory. ♦LWhitney's collation certainly
notes also D.Kp. as reading sAm -.jfiapayUmi ; probably his eye rested on the snmojfid'
panam of b (which in his collation-book stands just above the siimojfiaptivilmi of d),
when lie wrote the above statement. I suspect that the mmgraha of sdmojnapaydmi
has blundered in from the samojfiApanam of a and b by a similar mistake of the scril)es. J
[_Cf. \\\^ pada reading upa^ekima at vi. 114. 2. J
3. As the Adityas, severe (iigrd)^ not bearing enmity, united with the
Vasus, with the Maruts, so, O three-named one, not bearing enmity, do
thou make these people here like-minded.
Ppp. reads, in a, vasavas instead of vasubhis^ and, in c, d, -yamdHam imam jand
sammanasam krnn tvam^ which is better in so far as it makes ahrn- adjunct of the
object rather than of the subject in the sentence ; our text desiderates Ahrftlyamdndn,
The verse is found also in TS. (ii. 1. 1 13), which has, in b, marudbhl rudrAh (our read-
ing seems a corruption of this) satndjdnaUl *bhl ; and, in c, d, -yamdnd vi^ve tievAh
sAtnanaso bhavantu. A god irindman appears to be met with only in this verse ; the
one meant is probably Agni, as conjectured by BR,, and also explained by the comm.
75. To eject a rival.
\Kabandha (snf>atnaksayakdmah). — mantroktadevatyam ; dindram. dnustubham : j. b-p.jagati^
Found also in Paipp. xix. (with the verse-order i, 3, 2); and in TB. (iii. 3. 1 13-4) and
Ap. (iii. 14.2). LTH. and Ap. agree with Paipp. in the verse-order and several other
points.J Used by Kau<;. (47. 10) in a rite of sorcery; and again similarly (48. 29-31),
with strewing of darbha grass.
Translated: Ludwig, p. 373 ; Grill, 22, 165 ; GrifTith, i. 285 ; Bloomfield, 92, 495.
1. I thrust yon man out of home, the rival who fights [us], with the
oblation of ejectment ; Indra hath demolished him.
One of our mss. (O.) reads at the end also here (cf. 66. 2, above Land note to 32. 2J)
-^ardit. I'pp., also TB.Ap., have nirb- at the beginning of c; and TB.Ap. have enam
in d (the two agree in every point through the hymn). L^pp. pard^arl^ as at 66. 2. J
2. Let Indra, Vritra-slayer, thrust him to the most distant distance,
whence he shall not come back, through constant years (sdvtS). f-*-^
Ppp.TlJ.Ap. read tvd for tdm in a, and TB.Ap. nayatu for nudatu in b, while Ppp.
has, for b, indro devo acikipat; all three have -yasi at end of c.
3. Let him go [beyond] three distances; let him go beyond the five
peoples; let him go beyond the three shining spaces, whence he shall
not conic back, through constant years, so long as the sun shall be in
the sky.
Instead of ////, TB.Ap. have three times ////, and they omit padas d, e; RV. (viii. 32.
22 a, b) agrees with them in pfldas a, b. Ppp. reads anu for ati at end of b, and has, for
c, the corrupt iha ca tvd tu rocand ; it omits d, e, like the other texts. The //irtVi-text
reads roc an A (not -ftd/t)^ maintaining the usual and proper gender of the word, although,
being qualified by iisrds^ it is apparently taken here as feminine, and should be rocandh.
vi. 75 HOOK VI. Tin: ATHARVA-VKnA-SAMllITA. 338
The mark of punctuation added after d in our edition is not in the mss.; it was heed-
lessly intKHluced in goin|; throu;;h the press; and the accent of ^afvattM/mi b mis-
printed.
76. For a ksatriya's security from death.
Found also in ]':iipp. xix. I'scd l)y K;'iu<;. (S*^. 4). with \. 2(\ 27 and vi. 3, t>y one
desirous of smrrss in ( on(|m'st. and for othrr like putposcs.
Translated: l.udwij;, p. 45«i; CliifTith, i, 2S6.
1. They who sit about him, who pile on [fuelj in order to bcholdinf^
[him] — let Agni, fully kindled, with his tonf;ues arise out of [their]
heait.
The sense is somewhat ohsrure. In b. ftikut^e prol>ably * that he may beiome con-
spicuous*; the comm. very strangely renders it 'for injury* {himsAyAi) and re|sards the
'* they '* as demons and the like. I'pp. hv^\n% jrfnt *tiam pnr-^ and elides the a of iVjC*"'
in c.
2. Of the healing {} sihhttipami) Agni I take hold of the track (} fadd)^
in order to length of life (tiyus) — out of whose mouth the soothsayer
{inhihad) sees the smoke arising.
rpp. reads, for c. d, ifhtltur ytisya /*ii^y*itti mafftit tiyaniit^ ^fi'/tiA, corrupt. The comm.
explains /if r/r/ as either 'place' (tf/itlntt) or * soun<l * ((<i/'</ii).
3. lie who knoweth the fud of him, piled on by the kstiiriya — he
setteth not the foot (f*atid) in detriment unto death.
Tpp. elides the initial a of tt^ya in a, and lie^ins c Wil 7'thvate. To the comm..
abhihi'i'itiX is 'a roundabout ( rooke<l cause of nieetinf; death.*
4. They that go aboiit (paryayiu) do not slay him, he goes not down
to the dead (} samui) the ksatnya who, knowing, takes the name of
Agni imto length of life.
Tpp. has, in b. fvtim for^/rvr/ and. in c, vi^Vxl for :'iti:'t}pi. The comm. understands
StiNHiln as '(the eneniies) even when in his neif;hhor)iOi>«l *: LuilMi^. *die [im Hinter-
haltr] K*'I'*i;'*'ten ': if. TU. ii.4. 7'' \,ti:n.in ma *i'ti \^Ata
I A Mip|»!r:ni'Tit.wv not«» fioin Kotli s-us ili.it I*p|». has, inserted just before iv. Q. 7 of
the X'uli^.itf. thi" foljjiwini;: uAi *n.nit ^^hnttitfn /•iifVihitrfl nil manvtlm iva gauAati :
jatie ffttiftit f*tiimiyate ya\ tvam btbhafty Ahjafui (cf. iv. 9. 5 d).J
77. For recovery and retention of what is lost.
[ A": '■?»».;". 1 ;.7i'.i?y./.iM»i. i\ftu*tt4hh»tm \
Fouii*! a!si) in P.'iip|). xix. 1 he ( (iinm. re^a^ds tliis hymn, and not vi. 44 (which ha«
tlie sanv /'.f//^./), as intnideil in K.iu*;. j6. 5, in n file comerninf^ women (the preven-
tion of a wotn.ni's <'si ape. etr . (tmiin ).
TiansLited : l.udwi:;. p 4'iS ; (iiiiiith, i. ^SO : IHoonHicld, io<>, 4'A
339 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK VL -vi. 78
1. The heaven hath stood; the earth hath stood; all this living world
hath stood ; on their base (dst/uina) the mountains have stood ; I have
made the horses stand in their station.
The first half-verse is 44. i a, b, above ; the second Is nearly vii. 96. i c, d, below.
Hut Tpp. is different in c, d, and partly illegible ; iistha . . . iine stJulmann a(7u1 *ransata
can be read. The comm. inserts * thee, O woman * in d, and regards afvdn as an
incomplete comparison: * as they bind vicious horses with ropes*! Prat iv. 96 pre-
scribes the unchanged /^//n-reading atisthipam. ^Most of SPP's authorities have
as t huh in samhitd.\
2. He who hath attained the going away, he who hath attained the coming
in, the turning hither, the turning in — he who is herdsman, on him I call.
The first half-verse is nearly RV. x. 19. 5 a, b, and the second exactly ib. 4 c, d.
RV. reads vydyanam for parayanam in a, and fiarayanam for nyiyanam in b. The
comm. appears to read nyayanam.
3. O Jatavedas, cause to turn in ; be thy turners hither a hundred,
thy turners this way a thousand ; with them get for us again.
Ppp. has, for d, tUbhir enatn ni vartaya^ thus defining the object of all this recover-
ing action to be some male person or thing. The comm. interprets it all through as a
woman who has escaped or wants to escape. RV. x. 19 is aimed at kine. Padas b *ind
c are found in VS. xii.8, which also ends with pintar no nastdm A krdhi ptinar no
rayim a krdhi. Santi would be a better reading in b.
78. For matrimonial happiness.
\^Athanfan. — /, 2. cdndramasydu ; j. ti'dstn. t-j. aftuxtithh.']
Found also in IMipp. xix. \j\i\d at MP. i. 8.6, 7, loj. Employed by Kiiuq. twice
(78. 10, 14) in the marriage ceremonies, with other passages, with anointing the heads
of the married pair, making them eat together, etc.
Transhited : Weber, Ind. ^/////. v. 238 ; Ludwig, p. 371; Grill, 57, 166; CirifTith,
i. 28 7 ; IJloomficId, 96, 498 ; also, as part of the MP. hymn, by Wintcrnitz, Hochzeits-
rituell^ J). 73.
1. By this actual (1 bhutd) oblation let this man be filled up again;
the wife that they have brought to him, let him grow superior (ablii-vnih)
to her by essence (rdsa),
Ppp. has bhiitasya for bhiltena in a, and inverts the order of words in b. Grill
acutely sujjgcsls bhutyena in a, *for prosperity {bhiiti)^^ and the comm. paraphrases it
with samrddhikarena * prosperity-making.' Abhi in d, and in 2 a, b, seems to have a
meaning like that which it has in abhi-bhtl. The comm. makes no difficulty of render-
ing the neuter vardhatdm as if it were causative. Ppp. takes away the difficulty of the
expression in this verse by the very different reading jdydm ydm asmd *vidaih sd
tiisend *bhi vardhatdm,
2. Let him grow superior to [her] by fatness (pdyas), let him grow
superior to [her] by royalty; by wealth of thousand-fold splendor let
these two be unexhausted.
vi. 7S- HOOK VI. THE ATIIARVA-VKDA-SAMIIITA. 340
Tpp. has, in a, prajayH instead oi fayasA. The accent stAm is read by all but one
(().) of our mss. and l>y all Imt ono |^(>r t\v<ij of Sri**s.
3. Tvashtar jjcneralcd ihc wife, Tvashtar [Kcncralcd] thcc as hiisbami
for hcT ; let Tvashtar make for you two a thousand life-times (dyns)^ .1
long lifetime.
I^Ppp. adrls titi*i/h}i4 after patim in b, which is t>ctter ; has, in c, sahasra Ay-x anil,
in d, ///<}/// for 7'J///.J
79. For abundance at home.
[ Ath atx-tift. — Sit tit ty* h iJ n.uii ; i// i-i j w/ . ^tU'*ttra m : J ■ J /• / ' tlji^f'ntyd y*'^<>/i J
L*'\'crsi*" 3 is proso.J round also in r;'ii|H). xix.; and in TS. iii. 3.8»i. KAu^.
uses the l)ymii in a rite L21.7J for prosperity (for fatness in ^rain« comm.), and it is
rcrkoned (note to i'>. 1) to \\\r pusfU'ii inantfas. \'ait. (31-4) has it in the sattta^ on
the fkt'\)iak'ti day, with olTeiin^s to the two deities mentioned.
Tr.inslati'd : (fiiihth. i. 2S.S ; nioomfkdd, I4I,4<>9.
1. Let llie lord of the cloud (imbhas) here, the fattcncr, protect us,
[j;r;uil I iine(|iialli'dncss (?) in our houses.
Tor tlie oltsiure Auintiiti in c, the minor I'et. I.ex. ronjrrtures Asamnrti * unharmed-
ncss,' whii h TS. has in the roi respond in:; pad a, makini; an anustuhh of tli** verse, with
f^r/tttn*}m tUitmnf fytli ^tt/tih'o no i^f/ttt n\itn for sti oml half; the romni. explains it
as •.disriicf of division { ptt/ in /ttuf.r)* of the j^rain l\in^ in our stondiouM-s*; I'pp. is
defaeed, hut appe.iis to liave le.ul somrthin^ diifrrent. TS. fuither lias ntffi/raufpnrJt
for -t./t/i///r in a. Mi»sl of our \tt////it/,l mss. (rxrept li.ll.smU.) lead na^ after
^r/ii'su : Sri*. re|tf)rts nothin*; of the kind from his authoiities. 'I he lomin. r**cards
y\K"i as intended I»y the •* fattener." ^^I think tl»e conun. intends rather • afisence of
determinatii>n or imasuie*: i.e. •* may the jjiain he aliuntlant hr\on*! measuie."J
2. Do thou, () lord of the cloud, maintain for us sustenance (Arf) in
our ht»uscs ; let prosperity, let j^Dod (viisu) come.
T.S. prefixes sa at tlie l>«'i;iiminji, and lias, for b, urjtim no tihr*.* hhinifAyA^ then riin-
ninjj olf into an entirely diifeient close. The lomm. re^jards Vayu as addressed.
3. ( ) divine fattrncr, thou art master of thousandfold prosperity ; bestow
upon us t)f that ; assif;n to us of that ; of that from thee may wc be sharers.
In thr fiist I lausr, Ppp. f orru|>ts to stihasrapi^isf : it omits Ani'ii no r«frT-/i. and has
bhaky.ntithi foi hfittltt'rtlnsit/i \\,lntti. TS. has .tit/i4nr,tp-, antl, after the division -mark,
sif no /#ii:ii \/ytint>n etc. (.in entiiely different closf). The last |)art of the verse is
found in K. v.4. which reads at the eml I'httktix'Ano bhuy*\\ma ; and Tit. iii. 7.$? has
(he l.ist phi ase with |^/,f uiH ie \h!u\k}i','tiu*iii syiima : a curious set <»f variants, all irre|;ular
or anoinalnus. 1 he vrise, ai uttdin^ to the < omm., is aiMressed to the sun.
80. The heavenly dog and the k&lakAiijis.
[.//! 7'T.j*t ,.:'t,i'.:f:.;itt'i. tlnu'tuf-httm : /. f-hunf , J ^'J/fAfa^aRlti ]
Fttuiul also in Taipp. xix. (with th<* verse ordrr t. 3. 2). The u.se of the hymn in
K.iu«;. an<l \'.iit. is o1)Siure and indt'titiitc : thf* fi>rmer applies it only (31. 18) in a heal-
ini; lite f<>r one who is pti^ui/i.tl^t ('woundi-d in tlie side * .^ [_1U. su^f^ests hemipla(;ia
341 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK VI. -vi. 8 1
or paralysis. J The comm. reads in the Kau^. text angam mantroktamrttikayd for man-
iroktafk cankratnayd of BPs cd.) ; the latter has vs. 3 In the agnisfoma sacrifice, accom-
panying (23. 20) the avabhrtha isti etc.
Translated : Ludwig, p. 373 ; Bloomfield, JAOS. xv. 163, with detailed discussion and
comment; GriflTith, i. 288; Bloomfield, again, SBE. xlii. 13, 500. — Bloomfield identifies
the two •* heavenly dogs'* spoken of in various places with the dogs of Sarama and of
Yama, and ultimately with the sun and moon.
1. lie flies through the atmosphere, looking down upon all existences;
what the greatness is of the heavenly dog, with that oblation would we
pay worship to thee.
The first half-verse is RV. x. 136.4 a, b, which differs only by reading rupi instead
of bhftta in b ; it is part of the hymn that extols the powers of the muni, Ppp- has a
very different version of b, C, d: svar bhtUH vyac&calat : sa no divyasy&i ^dath viahas
tasmd etena havisii juhomi.
2. The three kdlakdfljds that are set (fri/d) in the sky like gods — fd^(^^ (-
all them I called ofTfor aid, for this man's unharmedness. /'-^ '^ ^
In explaining this verse, the comm. quotes from TB. (i. 1.24-6) the legend of the
A suras named kUlakdfijd^ whose efforts to reach heaven Indra thwarted by a trick,
except in the case of two of them, who became the heavenly dogs ; a corresponding
legend is found in MS. i.6. 9 (p. loi, 1. 1 ff.). The different numbers in our hymn, as
regards both dog and kdlakdfljas^ are important, and suggest naturally the dog of our
sky (Can is major or Sirius : so Zimmer, p. 353) and the three stars of Orion's belt,
pointing directly toward it. The Anukr. does not notice the deficiency of a syllable in a.
3. In the waters [is] thy birth, in heaven thy station, within the ocean
thy greatness, on the earth ; what the greatness is of the heavenly dog,
with that oblation would we pay worship to thee.
l*pp. substitutes Lfor c, dj again its own refrain, sa no divy- etc., as in vs. i.
The comm. regards the verse as addressed to Agni.
81. For successful pregnancy: with an amulet.
[Tvastar. — mantroktadevatyam utd **dHyam. dnustubham.'\
Found also in Paipp. xix. Applied by Kau^. (35. 11) in a rite for conception of a
ni.ilc, with the direction /// mantroktam badhndti ; and the schol. (note to 35. 26) quotes
il also in a women's rite.
Translated : Weber, Ind, Stud. v. 239 ; Ludwig, p. 477 ; Griffith, i. 289 ; Bloomfield,
96, 501. — Cf. Be rgaignc- Henry, Manuel^ p. 153.
I. Thou art a holder, thou holdcst {yam) the two hands, thou drivcst
away the demons. Seizing {grah) progeny and riches, this hath become
a hand-clasp (pari/iasid).
In Ppp., the a of abhilt in d is elided. The comm. reads krnvdnas in c; he under-
stands Agni to be addressed in a, b.
vi. 8i- BOOK VI. THK ATIIAKVA-VKI)A-SAMHn A. 34^
2. () h.ind-clasp, hoKl apart the womb, in order to placing of the
embryo; () thou si^n {} tfttindt/d), put in a son; liim do thou make to
conic, thou c<)mor (} tij^tttnt}).
*I lie nlisniro \vj»f<ls mtuytiifi} ami i}^'<r///il arc .ipparently r|iithct« of ihc f^arikasta •
tlip (itiuin. tiniti'ist.iiifis the [_riistj of ilic woman: fntt9yihiil~>f.'ii9yit-¥tkJd * tALcn
|Missrssiiiit of Ity men* ; |_aiul lie t.ikrs tJi^ttmf a.s - Ji^utWiifu xitti * wlirn sexual approach
takfs plat (■/ wlii( h wfiiild lie an cptalilc if it did not mIioIIv disrr^ard the accent J. One
nii;;ht ronjff tuic maty.nitls '^iver of a male.' I'pp* has at end -^iitNtth,
3. The haml-clasp that Adili wore [when] desirinfj a son — may
Tvashlar bind lliat on for her, sayin;; ''llial she may give birth to a son."
I'pp. reads suzuli in d. Tor Afliti desiring a son, (ompare xi. 1. i.
82. To obtain a wife.
(/?A«Vii ( ;Ji'i/-iJwiiA). — ,1in.t'titm. ihtttf/ti^Aiim.]
Found also in Taipp. xix. \'^c<\ by Kaii^. (5^) I r ), in a Jtilmya rite, by one desirinf^
a wife; anfl af^ain, in the nuptial incmoniex (7S. 10), uith vi. 7K etc.
Translatril : \Vel)rr, ///«/. S/m/. v. 23*;; hudwi;^. p. 470; (iiill, 57, 167; (jiiflith,
i. 2S(;; ntiwrnricid, (;5, $02.
1. I take the name of the arrivinfj, the arrived, the cominp one; Indra
the Viitra-shiyer I win (rvr;/), him of tlie Vasus, of a hundred-fold power.
The construrtion of 7'it» wit)) a f^cnitivc is apparently elsewhere unknown, ami is
of doubtful sense. I'pp. has instead fiJ/fio * of the kin;:/ whit h makes the correctness
of 7'if//TY very <lou))tfuI. I*pl*- '"^'^^ riirnbines tlj^tiihttttl "(;#iAijr/i in a. The comni reads
at the enti ^af,tkrafty^ voeative: he ap|t.ir« ntly takes ilyit/Js in b as tlyit/iit, fmni iiiv/i
{^fiivato'hfjtti') |_or, alli-rnativelv, wiih /«i/f«ifj7f J.
2. Hy wliat road I lie A covins car r let I Sury'i, dauj;hltr of Savitar, by
that, Hhaj;:i .s.iid to m(\ dt) thou biin;; a wife.
In b. Iff :■/'/!» "//i////f is jirflinps b«tt' r tt» be t.iken apart tti ti^ifrtt} : 1} ti/tiffui^ but ihe
/^ir</<r text has nt) f7. |_("f. lhM;;aiL;ne, AVA /'/•/., ii. 4S6 7. J
3. The '^ood-i^ivini;. creat. *^t»Men hook that is thine. O Indra — with
that, () lt>ril of mi;;ht (fi/*/-). assii^n lht)u a wife to mr wh«> seek a wife.
Tpp. ft. I ins tin* it tif tinli/^itf, ami has, for d, ti'tith dhehi {tital-titti*. The ci'mm.
reatjs, in n, 7:r\n,//:itt;itt.
The ei;;litli «f »;;/;•.)<■.?, t iirif.iiniri'^ 10 liymns ami 31 verses, entls with this hymn; ihe
oM Anukr. s.us : r/i//////ji/^.;;'/ f/i/i///;i7//> t-./i/.i;///.
83. To remove apacits.
//.' I^P.ut (v*i. .0 prosi'. I roiiuil alst) in iTiipp. i. (but without the aclcled vs. 4). KAu^.
(31. I'l) employs it in .1 lie.din'^ iit<\ with vii. 7<i (against t^tirti/itmil/i}, siliol.. comm.);
v^s. 3 c.d an! 4 a!t» »;;>■•( ih-i! in \}\r s'*hm' 1 of thr ritr (xi.T'^, 21); the comm. treats
vs. 4 as b'l^inniii;; tif hymn 84; it is ap|»Iicd by K.'ui<; in tlie treatment uf a sore of
Ul1km>^^;l »»ii:;iii (ir.'/T'.J/./i ;/f ; 1. ////«/. ?*/(,■.!//..''•/. t onnn ).
i' 'i
343 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK VI. -vi. 84
Tr.inslated : Ludwig, p. 500; Rloomficld, JAOS. xiii., p. ccxviii (= PAOS., Oct.
1887), or Ajr. xi. 324 ; Griffith, i. 290; Bloomfield, again, SHE. xlii. 17, 503.
1. O apacits^ fly forth, like a bird {supanid) from its nest ; let the sun
make remedy ; let the moon shine you away.
It was lUoomfield (in the article referred to above) who first maintained that the
apacit is a pustule or sore. The comm. directly identifies the apacits with the gtiftt/a-
maldSy '* scrofulous swellings of the glands of the neck'* (BR.), and explains all the
processes implied in the hymn as referring to such. His etymology of the word under
this ver.sc is 'gathered offward by reason of defect* (dosaiiaqHd apuk clyamlinHh)^ and
he describes them as * beginning from the throat [and] proceeding downward * (traidd
Arabhya adhastdt prasrtnk). The accent of krndtu in c is the usual antithetical one;
SrP. makes a wholly unnecessary and very venturesome suggestion to explain it.
2. One [is] spotted, one whitish ((y/fti), one black, two red ; of all
have I taken the name; go ye away, not slaying [our] men.
The comm. explains eni as Ssadraktami^ra^veia,
3. Barren shall the apacit^ daughter of the black one, fly forth; the
boil {gidti) shall fly forth from here; it shall disappear from the neck
{} gainntds).
The translation here given of galuntds is the purest conjecture, as if the word were
a corruption of some form oi gala (our W.O.D. read gaianids)^ with ablative-sufTix tas.
It might contain ^rt(/« 'excrescence on the throat*; indeed, the comm. etymologizes it
7is g{it//?/i + y/ tas ! He understands na ^isyati as two independent words. l*pp. has
sakalam Una ^udhyati (or ^usyati)^ perhaps * thereby it dries wholly up.* For rdittH-
yanl^ compare vii. 74. i.
4. Partake (in) of [thine] own oblation, enjoying with the mind ; hail !
as now I make oblation with the mind.
I'his verse, which breaks the uniformity of the book, is evidently an intrusion, and
has no apparent connection with the rest of the hymn, although it is acknowledged by
botli Anukr. and comm. The Litter curiously mixes it up with vs. i of the next hymn,
reckoning it with 84. I a, b as one verse, and reckoning 84. i c, d and 2 as the following
verse, thus [^making 83 a irca and 84 a caturrca\, LAn drey anusiubh would seem
to be 24 syllables.J
84. For release from perdition.
\Angiras. — caturrcam. ndirrtam. i . bhurig jagaii ; 1. j-f.drci brhafi ; j^ ^.jagaff ;
4. bhurik tristubh^
This hymn is not found in Paipp. KSug. applies it (52. 3), with vi. 63 and 121, in a
rite for welfare. The comm. takes no notice of this, but regards the hymn as implied
in 31. 21 : see under the preceding hymn. In Vait. (38. 1) it is found used in a healing
rite in \\\^ purusamedha: this also the comm. overlooks.
Translated: Ludwig, p. 444 ; GrifYith, i. 291.
I . Thou in whose terrible mouth I make oblation, in 'order to the
release of these bound ones; people think of thee as "earth**; I know
thee completely as '* perdition '* {nirrti).
vi. 84- noOK VI. TIIK ATirARVA-VKDA-SAXIIIITA. 344
The verse is fouml also in VS. (xii. 64), TS. (iv. 2. 51), and MS. (ii. 2. I). In A, for
tlitint jr/iiir/, VS. MS. have (;//f»/i/ iMif//, aiul TS. I'riirA iistf/t; before it, T.S. inserts asrJj,
while MS. lK'};iiis j'<ff/ /ii/n/ A*, in b. all (als«) our (dniin.) read fitint/AtlnJm, wliich i%
brltrr ; M.S. U.xs after it f^ftttnthttUiUn, and .ill omit khn ; ff»r C, d, VS. M.S. ha%*c^«/"/
tvtl Jtino h/imntr iti pramtltuiaii' nftrti'h tiul */itim pAfi veda fi^vAtiih, while TS. a|;rm«
ncaily with our trxt, thnu^h havint; .simply yJ/M vitlitr for ahhipf%\miiH\'aU jdnAk^ and
at the mil vi{vAttih, The chief result for our text is the demonstrntian of manx'aU a*
probably a corruption of matniaie. It was noted at the end of the prerrdinj^ h\-mn
that the comm. mixes up the end and bef^innin;; of the two hymns. The metrical
definition of the Anukr. is very poor.
2. O farlb (})^ be ihoii rich in oblations ; ibis is thy share which is in
us ; free these [an<l] those from sin : hail !
'the translation follows I.uilwi^'s su^^^ested emendation of bhuU at the bc|;innin|; to
bh&nte.
3. So. () j)tT(liii')n. do thou, free from envy, kindly unfasten from us
the bond-fetteis of iron. Varna verily giveth thee back to me; to that
Yama, to death, be homage.
All of this vers** rxi rpt tlie first /^i7«/./ is a n-pi-titinn of ftv 3 b, c. d, abo%-e. 1 he
comm. explains ttufha l-y itUiihiiufr i. I he fourtli is the ou\y jtit;<i/i p.'ula.
4. Thou wast bounrl here to an iron post, bridled with deaths that
arc a thousand; do thou, in concord with Varna, with the Kathers, make
this man ascend to the highest firmament.
This verse is a repetition of f*}. 3, aU^ve.
85. For relief from ydksma.
l-'ound al.so in I*aip|». xix. I'.srd by K.itii;. (2ft. 3.V-37) in a healing rite, with vi. I-V).
127 an<l otix'is : in 37 with the direction manttoktttm hatihnAti : and rrckoneil (note
to 2f>. I ) to the takmauil^iiua iiiitut. Ami tlie fust half of vs. 2 is p.irt of a verse K*^'^"
entile in (>. 1 7.
Tianslated : (iiithtii. i. 2';l : lilnomfieKl. 3(), 505.
1. The 'wraihi, this divine f«irest-trcc, shall ward off (iwr/ir-); the
ydhsma th.it bis entered into ibis man - -that have the gods warded uff.
Tlir vrrsf is r' pr.UrMl .is X. V >. .An amulet made t)f T-.Mii//.f is usi-d. as th<r comm
pninls out. [ Siiiiil.ir \v«)ril pl.iv .it iv. 7. i -- see nole.J The di:fKieney uf a »\ liable in
a is not notiinl 1>\ tiie Aiitikr.
2. With tin* wnid (:v/.-,7.r) df India, of Mitra, and of Vaiuna, with the
v«»icf <:./ ) ''f all tb<* «;o«i'i, «!<» we ward of! tliv Vii^'situi.
3. As X'litf.i st'ij.p,..! (r'./;///7) these waleis [whi*n] gtuni: in all direc-
tions. S'». bv me.uis of Ai;iu X'.iirv.m ui. do I waul off thv xdlsma.
Tor : 7^ : /./'•;./ wt/ft, m b. t'le i n.nrn. n a Is : t^r .t./f'i>U,ift/s. Tpp- combine*, in A,
345 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK VI. -vi. 87
86. For supremacy.
\^A//tan'att {vrsaidmaA) . — ekat'Tsadevatyam . dnustub/tani . ]
Found also in Paipp. xix. Employed by Kau^. (59. 1 2), in a kdtiiya rite, by one
who is vrsakflma {^raisfhyakdma^ comm.); and the schol. (note to 140. C) adds it to
V. 3. II and vii. 86, 91 as used in the iiuiramahotsava.
Translated: Ludwig, p. 241 ; Griffith, i. 292.
1. Chief f^in'san) of Indra, chief of heaven, chief of earth is this man,
chief of all existence ; do thou be sole chief.
" Chief," lit'ly * bull * : foremost, as the bull is of the herd. Jndrasya in a can hardly
stand ; rather dindrasya^ or, we may conjecture, Idhrasya (cf. fdhriya^ vld/tra),
2. The ocean is master of the streams; Agni is controler of the earth ;
the moon is master of the asterisms ; do thou be sole chief.
Ppp. has, in c, stlryas instead of candramds ; the latter makes a redundant pfida,
unnoticed by the Anukr.
3. Universal ruler art thou of Asuras, summit of human beings; part-
sharer of the gods art thou ; do thou be sole chief.
The comm. understands 'part-sharer* to mean "having a share equal to that of all
the other gods together," and applies it to Indra.
87. To establish some one in sovereignty.
\^Atharvan. — dhrntnyam, Anustubham.'\
Found also in Paipp. xix. [^This hymn and verses i and 2 of the next, form one
continuous passage in the RV. (x. 173. 1-5): see Oldenberg, Die Hytnnen des Rl'.^
i. 248-9 ; and cf. introduction to our iii. 12. J It is further found in TH. (ii. 4. 2'*-9) and
K. (xxxv. 7). This hymn and the one next following are used together by Kilu<;. : in a
kdinya rite (59. 13), by one desiring fixity {dhrdtnya or sthdifyd)\ in a rite of expiation
for earth(|uakes (98.3), with xii. i ; and the comm. regards them (and not iii. 12. i, 2)
as intended by dhruvdu at 136. 7 (and the same .should doubtless be said of 43. 11), in
the rite against the portent of broken sacred vessels ; further, they appear in the indra-
ma/ioisa7'a (140. S), ^7. I c being curiously specified in addition. In Vait. (28. iC), this
hymn alone (or vs. i ) appears in the agnicayana^ at the raising of the ukhydgni.
Translated : by the RV. translators, and Zimmer, p. 163 ; and, as AV. hymn, by
Ludwig, p. 373 ; GrifTith, i. 292. •
I . I have taken thee ; thou hast become within ; stand thou fixed, not
unsteady ; let all the people {v/(as) want thee ; let not the kingdom fall
away from thee.
The RV. version has, in a, ed/ii for abhiis; and RV.TB. (also VS. xii. 11) have
•cdcalis at end of b ; and so has TS. (iv. 2. i -«), though it reads \\v\ d asm in for f/ii ii'tit
and ^fiiya for bhta{at\\ while MS. (ii. T ^^) agrees with our text in a, b, C but gives for
d asmi nlstnini dhdraya. The comm. explains antar abhiis by asnfdkam madkye
\ihipatir abhavahy which reminds us of madhyamesthd and madhyama^ [^sce note to
iv. 9. 4 J. [Our c is the c of iv. 8. 4 (sec the note thereon), of which the TB. version has
our d here as its d.J
vi. S7 nooK VI. Tin: AriiARVA-vicDA-sAttiin A. 346
2. He tliou just here; be not moved away; like a mountain* not
unsteady; O liulra, stand thou fixed just here; here do thou mainlain
royalty.
KV.'rii. h.ivo nj;;ain -t tit it /it nt rnd nf b, nml TH. lias vyathislhAi for A/m urostkJki
ilia. The nu'tiical contrat timi patvate *va is imi o|i|)(i.sfil l»y tlic Anukr. At Iwgin-
niiif; of c, KV.'in.Ap. have the In-'ttcr tc.idin^ ////// <f ive 'Atl (to l>c rcail in*i9t *vt
*ht\: wlirncc, il(»iilitk*ss, the A\'. vcisii)ii); niid. as the (oinni. gives the same. STI*. hju
adopted it in liis text, against all his authorities as well as ours. The AV. vermi<»ii
(fouiul also in Tpp) '^ '^^'^ ^^ ^^^ rrjetted as imiMissililc ; the |)cn(on is himself acklrrsacvi
in it as Indra : i e.. as < hiif. Tpp has //i for u in d. Ap(,'S. (xiv. 27. 7) has the K V.
version, except yajfiam for fi\\hitm in d. In our text an accent sign has dropped out
unch'r the sthe of sthe V/if in c d.
3. Indra hath maintained this man fixed by a fixe<l oblation; him may
Soma bless, and Hiahmanaspati here.
KV. Iiej:ins iniAm (tuifo </•/, and has, in d, lA\mtl u for ayAm ta. "XW (also Ap<,*S
xiv. 27. 7, which agrees \%il!i it throuj^tiout |[ex(.ept bruvtin for bfiii-an^ has /««?«« («»r
eti\m in a. and UUnuM tifvA iUihi hfavan f<ir C- |_nur c, d occurred alnive, 5- 3 Ct d J
88. To establish a sovereign.
\Ath*t*Vttu. t/^tirn:-\.tf*i tUiu*ttt/-^t.im ■ jf trt'fu/'/t.]
'\'\\r hymn does not on ur in I'.iipp., luit its first two vrr.ses are I\\'. x. 173. 4. 5 (con-
tinuation nf those i oirespoiidin!; to our S7). For its use !»y K.un;. with the prrcnling
hvrnn, see uniK-r tlic Litter.
Transl.itt-d : l»y the 1\\'. tr.mslatois and by /iinnier (p. l^>3). in part: and Lud«i|*,
p. 255 : <iiitt'iih. i. zn}.
1. I'ixed [is] the sky. fixed the earth, fixed all this world of living
bein.£;«« i/\ri^ii/), fixed these mountains; fixed [is] this king of the people
KV. \:irirs from litis oidy in thr orfler of p.'idas. uhith is a. C. b, d. TH. (ii 4 2*)
and .\p*,'S. (xiv. 27. 7) follow our or»Irr, hut have «///r«:'ii /m for tifiritz'igas in c:
Mlt. (i 3. 7) h.is our a. b. C
2. I""ixcd f<»r I lire lot kin:; \';uMn.», fixed let divine Hrihaspati, fixed for
thee K't both Iiiilia and A;;ni niainl.iin royalty fixed.
I he \\\' . \erM' diUers in no rrspert from this.
3 I'ix'il, nnninved, do lliou sl.iUL^htcr lhef<»rs; make them that plav
the for fall l»rh»\v [llu^e]; [hv] all the rpiaiters {i{t\) like-minded, cnn-
ror.l.iiit i.\iiti''.'fi,ir/, )\ \r[ the t;alh«*i in;; {stiniift) here suit (///*) thee [\*ho
art I t'iM'd.
W'llh d I imip.ire \. I'l 1; c 1 he (omrn. re.ids ^.J/.ri/rrr-ir at end of b The last
p.id.i is r.ii'.i!:. Ihi" » nnnn. r'luitrs l.tif^iif,}ni \\\ \timitfthi\ bhtWtttH.
347 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK VI. -vi. 90
89. To win affection.
[Atharvan. — maniroktaddivatam.* dnustubham.']
This hymn also, like the preceding, is wanting in Paipp. Kau9. (36. lo-i 1) applies
it in a womcn^s rite, for winning affection, addressing the head and ear, or wearing the
hair, of the person to be affected. ♦LThe Anukr. text is confused here ; but the Herlin
ms. seems to add fnanyut'iftd^anafft. \
Translated : Weber, Ind, S(ud, v. 242 ; Griffith, i. 293.
1. This head that is love's (iffrenl), virility given by Soma — by what
is engendered out of that, do we pain {focaya) thy heart.
Preni is as obscure to the comm. as to us ; hr paraphrases it hy ffremaprdpaka *that
obtains (or causes to obtain) affection.* He takes vrsnya as adj., \xt,zX& pari prajdUna
in c as one word, and supplies to it snehaviqesena. [^Whitney*s O. combines idias pdri.\
2. We pain thy heart; we pain thy mind; as smoke the wind, close
upon it {sadhrydflc), so let thy mind go after me.
The sign in our text denoting kampa in sadhrydil should have been, for consistency*^
sake, I (as in SPP*s text) and not 3 ; the mss., as usual, vary between 1 and 3 and
nothing. The comm. reads sadhrim,
3. Unto me let Mitra-and-Varuna, unto me divine SarasvatI, unto me
let the middle of the earth, let both [its] ends fling (sam-as) thee.
The comm. renders samasyaidm by samyojayatdm,
90. For safety from Rudra's arrow.
\Atharvan, — rdudram. /, 2. anustnbh ; j. drn bhurig utnih^
Found also in Paipp. xix. (in the verse-order 2, i, 3). Used by KSuq. (31. 7) in a
healing rite against sharp pain (ftl/a); also reckoned (note to 50. 13) to the rdudra gatia.
Translated: Grill, 14, 168; Griffith, i. 294 ; Bloomfield, 11, 506.
1 . The arrow that Rudra hurled at thee, at thy limbs and heart, that
do we now thus eject asunder from thee.
Ppp. has, for c, imdfh tvdm adya ie vayam. The comm. understands the infliction
to be the {tUaroga (colic ?). Line, iddm^ • thus * or * herewith * i.e. • with this spell ' ?J
2. The hundred tubes that are thine, distributed along thy limbs, of
all these of thine do we call out the poisons.
Ppp. reads hirds for qatatn in a, and sdkam for vayam in c. The comm. takes
nirvisdni as a single word in d (^ visarahitdni), \Qi, i. 17.3.J
3. Homage to thee, O Rudra, when hurling; homage to [thine arrow]
when aimed {prdtihiia) ; homage to it when let fly ; homage to it when
having hit.
Ppp. has, in b, pi atihitdbhyas ; in c, d, visrjyamandbkyo namas trayatdbhyah (but
in i., where tiie verse is also found, nipaiUdbhyah), The verse is ttsnik only by number
of syllables.
vi, 91- nouK VI. TIIK ATIIARVA-VKDA-SAKIHITA. 34*
91. For remedy from disease.
[ /■* 4r^-7 tifiji^iPtii. — ma fitrokttiytiksmaritl^ttnaJn'tttyam. tlmuituhAam . ]
Kound Also in IMipp. xix. l-scd l>y K.iiK;. (28. 17-20} in a healing; rite against all
disc.iscs (in 17 witli v. 9 ; in 3o alone)* with binding on of a barley amulet; also
rerkoned to tlic /tilmttPtif^tiHa ji^itfiti (note to 26. 1).
Translated: (irill, 14, 168; (irilVilh, i. 2<^5 ; Hl(K>mrieId, 40, 507.
1. This barley they plowed iiiif;htily with yokes of eight, with yokes
of six; therewith I unwraj) away the comphiint {niftts) at thy body.
'I'lic last half- verse is def-iri'd in I'pp. ; it appeals to end fini/hifta apahi*ayatA.
2. Downward blows the wind; downward burns the sun; downward
the inviolable [eowj milks ; downward be thy complaint.
I'his vrrse is KV. x. 60. 11 ; the latter rcriit'irs the meter of a by introducin|c iffi'tf
('7'<i) before vAti |_or rathrr, by not bein^ K^^h)' ^^ ^hc haploj;raphy which spoils our
AV. text: cf. note to iv. 5. 5 J. The Anukr. i«;nores the detieiency of our text.
3. 'I'he waters verily are remedial ; the waters arc disease-expelling;
the waters are remedial of everylhin*;; let them make remedy for thee.
The tiist three padas arc tlie same with those of iii. 7. 5, alnive ; and the whole verse
roirespMMfls wiih K\'. x. 137. 6, whidi dilfers only by reading jff/t'«rfi«i for vf^iHtsra in c.
Tpp. has a wlidlly oiiginal second half-verse: J/iM iamutif Art/itlyatiM parA vahantn it
fit pah.
92. For success of a horse.
[ .'/ M ii f T 1 » '/ . -7 J.'in.im. /' lit I ttif-fuim : t . f.ii^ati. ]
Koiind also in I'/iipp. xix. Applied by K.iu^. (41.21) in a rite for the success of a
horse; and by \'.iil. (30. iS) in the a\\ti9neJhti^ as the sacrilicial hi>rsc is tied.
Transl.itL-il : I.udwig, p. 45'; ; iiiiltith, i. 2r;5 ; Hloomficld, 145, 507.
I. He thiui, () steed (Vti/in)^ of winrl-swiftness, bcinp harncssctl (j'tij):
go in India's impulse, with mind-(|uickncss ; let the all-possessing Maruts
harness thee ; let Tvasbt.ir put (juickncss in thy feet.
'Ihe veisi* is als»» \'S.ix. S. whrrr, fi»r b. is rea<l itti/ntsyr^vti tftiktinah {fiyJH*Mi.
I'pp. puts />Att7,i aftrr ;-ii//'/ in a. ami rr.ids lAitryittni Inr I't^vavftiastts in c The
conini. j^ivrs an altrin.itive f'xpl.iii.ilinn of r/^ : if ;'/*•/./ 1, as oft«*n of its near equivalrni
Jt}ftt: ftf,n : -.i^:;t.i*':itff,i/t .fi/' :./;,- 'it/ 'ir/z/J'/f' Tif. The Anukr., as nftrn, takes no nt»le
«»f thr tn^fubh p.id.i d
::. The <juii kiu'*;s, (> rottrstM, that is j)ut in thee in secret, also that
went about enmmitt«'»l to the hawk» to the wind ■ -with that strength do
tliDU. <) sterd, bi'in;4 stron;^, win the rare, rescuing in the conflict.
■|liis\risr .iKii is fti:i:i'l in \" ^ ( ix. 'i .1 ), with ■ or.sidrrable variants : at the l»eginnin|;.
/.j:i» I i\ te :'i/.'/»i . ftir b. \\f>i*' p-htsf.* ,f,itf,u' tit vite; in c. nas for tvAm ; for 4.
T.f/iJ'.'. i.f //;.».-./ iiini-ttif (.1 p'tr. l'p|i. rrspniMi-s tliis in b: ^vf'tf tiira/i %a{ tit T«l/r.
Il.dj .^t'i's .luihiM ill' s I M>1 \M\\\ -t r'.i \ I !i.i\e nol'd no such ri'.iding among our mss
349 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK VI. -vi. 93
Tlie Anukr. ignores the irregularity of this verse and of vs. 3. LThe vs. is discussed
by Hloomfield, JAOS. xvi. 17, or Festgruss an Roth^ p. 154. For d, see Pischcl, V'ed.
Stud.^ \\. 314, and liaunack, KZ. xxxv. 5 16. J
3. Let thy body, O steed, conducting a body, run plcasance (ivf;;/^)
for us, protection for thyself; uninjured, great, a god for maintaining,
may he set up his own light in the sky, as it were.
This is translated literally according to the AV. text, although comparison with the
corresponding RV. verse (x. 56. 2) shows that its readings are in part pure corruptions.
So, in b, RV. makes ^the meter good and J the sense easy by giving dhatu for dhavalu ;
in c it has devan for devils (the comm. gives instead divas); and, in d, mitftfyds
{a ffiimfy(li= dgacchatu, comm.). Ppp. has, for a, asU vHjiil tantrnth vahaniti : in c,
avihvrtas ; in d, svardnaslvdm. The verse is probably originally addressed to Agni,
and added here only because of the occurrence of vdjin at its beginning. The comm.
understands tanvdm in a of a rider : drildhasya sddinah ^arfram.
The ninth annvdka^ of 10 hymns and 32 verses, ends here; the old Anukr. is thus
quoted : dvyadhikdv apacit.
93. For protection: to many gods.
[Qifiitdti. — rdudram : j. bahudevatyd, trdistubham.'\
Found also in Taipp. xix. Reckoned by Kau^. (8. 23) to the vdstospatydnt\ and
also (9. 2) to the brhachdnti gaita; used (50. 13), with vi. I, 3, 59, and others, in a rite
for welfare; further added (note to 25.36) to the svastyayana gatia.
Translated : Muir, iv». 333 ; Ludwig, p. 322 ; Griffith, i. 296.
1. Yama, death, the evil-killer, the destroyer, the brown farva, the
blue-locked archer, the god-folk that have arisen with their army — let
them avoid our heroes.
All the authorities read Astrd in b; both editions make the necessary emendation to
Astd, which is also read by the comm. and by Ppp. Ppp. further, in b, has bhava
instead of babhrus^ and ends with -k/tandl\ in c it has vrfkjanti (its exchange of -//
and -/// is common).
2. With mind, with libations, with flame {f /tdras), with ghee, unto the
archer (^arva and unto king Bhava — to them (pi.), who are deserving of
homage, I pay homage ; let them conduct those of evil poison away from us.
The /^r/rt-tcxt, in d, reads aghd-visdh^ doubtless accus. pi. fcm., and belonging to
isfts * arrows' understood; but the comm. supplies instead krtyds, \Jtox c, * to the
homage-deserving ones, — homage to th'm I pay.'J
3. Save ye us from them of evil poison, from the deadly weapon,
O all ye gods, ye all-possessing Maruts ; Agni-and-Soma, Varuna of
purified skill ; may we be in the favor of Vata-and-Parjanya.
The third pada in our text is made up of nominatives, coordinated neither with the
vocatives of b nor with the genitive of d. Ppp. has, for b, C, agnisomd marutah puta-
daksdh: vi^ve dcvd maruto vdt\vadevds^ which may all be vocatives. The Anukr.
takes no notice of the metrical irregularities of the verse.
vi. 94- HOOK VI. THi: A IHARVA-VKDA-SAMHITA. 35O
94. For harmony.
[^U^iifTif fix hits. stitaKtityam. dnuitui'htim. 2. vtf JJ Jti/^ati.\
The fust vrisc ( - iii. K. 5 ; the four prcfcdirif; verses of iii. 8 occurred ebevihere) is
found in IViipp. xix. The foniin. ref;arrls it as inti-iulcrl l)y Kau<;. 12. 5, in a rite for
hnrnifmy, .is. in almost identical ti-rms, he had al>ove (under iii. R) declared iii. 8. 5, 6 to
be inteiiiliMl.
Translated: I.udwit;, p. 514; (Iriirilh. i. 296 ; ltlfK>mricld, 13.S, 50S.
1. \Vc hciul loj^cthcr your minds, lojjcthcr your courses, together
your designs ; yc yonder who arc of discordant courses, we make you
bend [llicm] I n^ ether here.
I*pp in d apparently sam jfixipavt^ma^i.
2. I sri/e [your] minds with [my] mind; come after my intent with
[your] intents ; I j>ul your heaits in my control ; come with [your] tracks
fo!lo\vin;r mv motion.
ThiM* two vi-rsis nri" a repetition oi iii. R 5, <*!. In mir text, -rr/f at the end of b t»
a mispiiiit for f /•/./. |_As to the meliT. src note t<» iii. R.^.J
3. Worked in for me [are] he.iven-and-earth ; worked in [is] divine
Sarasvati ; worked in for me [are] both Indra and Aj;ni; may we be
successful here, () Sarasvati.
Save till* l.ist p.ida, this veisi' is a repi'tition of v. 23. I. The comm. paraphrases
<»//! by dbhimukhxftiii xatittxtta wi /*tifa\/*Kifa9tt safithtit/tih*!.
95. For relief from disease : with ktistha.
[ /•'^.'.;'' •'".%'' ' '' '■ ■■'''•' '/''O •"" •' Wii///' cltvin .ifv.im. ,hiu •tuf-hnim ]
The hymn is not found in r.iijip. As in the case of the preceding hymn, the first
two \risi*s have alirady oduiieil in the AV. ti-xt: namely, as v. 4. 3. 4. The comm.
re^aids tiiis h\mn ;is iiw hided in the It/^f/nt/tfij^'lt of Kau<;. 2R. 13 ; and vs. 3 (instead of
V. 2v 7> .IS iiittrnli'd in \';iit. 2^. ^o. in the iii^nu*iytjfhi.
Transl.iteil : (•litVith. i. 21)7.
1. The (i(^:atf/i(i, seat of the ^ods. in the third heaven from here;
theie till* ;;n(ls wnn the kn.\(tit7, the si^ht of immortality.
2. A ^MJiKn ship, of golden tackle, movetl about in the sky; there the
[;oils won the //o///,i, the llnwrr of immortality.
Srr. II ads in c /".'m/^.///;, \%it!i. .«s In* t l.iinis. all his autliorilii-s save one ; as the ver»e
is irpi .)!■ (] fioni .1 l»ii>k to which the > urnm. Ii.is not been found, we do not know how
\\f \r.\\\ [See W's nf)le to v. .J. .j T.ut a note in his ctipy of the printed le«t here
Sfenis t'> |ii"f«T y^;/ »/i/"/. J
^ Ilii'ii ail the ymni; (.■;.; //■';,/) i»f herl)s ; the yoimj; also of the
smuvy I'lmninl.iins], llie youn- of all existence; make thou this man free
fmiii ilis'-.i^c lor me.
351 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK VI. -vi. 97
The comm. understands the third verse as addressed to Agni ; but much more proba-
!)ly the kusiha is intended. From garbho in c tlie superfluous accent-mark al)ove the
line is to be deleted. LOur a, b, c are nearly v. 25. 7 a, b, c ; and d is nearly v. 4. 6 cj
96. For relief from sin and distress.
\Bhrgvahgiras. — vdnasfaiyam : j. sdumyd. dnustttbham : j. j-p. virdft ndma gdyatrl.'\
Found also in Paipp. xix. (for other correspondences, see under the verses). Employed
by Kau^. (31. 22) in a remedial rite against reviling by a Drahman, against dropsy, etc.
(the direction in the text is simply /// tuantroktasydu ^sadhlbhir dhiipayati)^ making
incense with herbs ; and it is regarded (note to 32. 27) as included among the anholifigds.
Translated: Ludwig, p. 506; Grill, 38, 168; Griffith, i. 297; Bloomfield, 44, 509.
1. The herbs whose king is Soma, numerous, of hundred-fold aspect
{} vicaksana), impelled by Brihaspati — let them free us from distress.
The first half-verse is RV. x. 97. 18 a, b (with dsadhu Lwhich makes better meter J for
-d/iayns) and VS. xii. 92 a, b (like RV.); TS. iv. 2.64 agrees only in a (with -dhayas).
The second half-verse is RV. x. 97. 15 C, d and VS. xii. 89 c, d, and TS. in iv. 2.6* c, d,
and MS. in ii. 7. 13 (p. 94. 12) c, d — all without variation. The comm. explains f/i/tf-
7'icaksaftds by qatavidhadar^andh^ tidndvidhajfidnopeidh, [^MB. ii. 8. 3 a, b follows
the RV. version of our a, b.J
2. Let them free me from that which comes from a curse, then also
from that which is of Varuna, then from Yama's fetter, from all offense
against the gods.
The verse is repeated below, as vli. 112. 2. It is RV. x. 97. 16, VS. xii. 90, which
have sArvasmdt in d; and Ppp. reads the same; and L(^S. ii. 2. 11, ApC^S. vii. 21.6
are to be compared. Whether padbf^dt or padvfqdt should be read is here, as else-
where, a matter of question ; our edited text gives -^, but most of our mss. read -?'-, as
also the great majority of SPP's authorities, and he prints (rightly enough) -v- ; VS. has
-T'-, RV. 'b- ; the comm. has -b-.
3. If {ydt) with eye, with mind, and if with speech we have offended
{upa-f) waking, if sleeping, let Soma purify those things for us with
svadhd.
Compare vi. 45. 2, of which the second pada agrees with ours. Ppp. inserts another
yat before manasd in a, and has, for c, d, somo md tasmdd enasah svadhayd pundti
vidvdn,
97. For victory.
\Atharvan, — mditrdvarunam. trdistubham : i.ja^ii; j. bhurij.']
Found also in Paipp. xix. The three hymns 97-99 arc used together in a battle rite,
for victory, with vi. 65-67 and others, by Kauq. (14.7); and they are reckoned to the
apardjita gana (note to 14. 7), and noted by the comm. as therefore intended at 139. 7 ;
they are again specifically prescribed in the indratnakotsava (140. 10): a full homa is
offered, with the king joining in the act.
Translated: Ludwig, p. 460; Griffith, i. 298; Bloomfield, 122, 510.
vi. 97 IJOOK VI. Tilt: ATHARVA Vi:iM-SAttH!TA. 35^
I. An ovcrcnmcr (alf/iib/iR) [is] ihc sacrifice, an ovcrcomcr Af;ni, an
ovcrcoinor Soma, an ovcrcomcr Indra; that I may overcome (aMiias) all
fij;htiTS, so woiiKI we, A j;ni -offerers, pay worship witlj this oblation.
The c<»inin. ti.ir.iplirascs tii^ni/io/ti'tt hv iirtnlu juhvatah, | The Anukr. halanrm the
'^'^^'"** flvlif iriuirs of a, b l»y the rcduiKl.inrirs of c. dj i'jJ/% /v. .•i^*^/-'^. (^J..)j^- /vV '/ C
•^ ^ '' ' - ' 2. He there .v;vir///«/, () Milra-and-Varuna, inspired ones; fatten {/^inz)
ye here with honey our dominion, rich in pro;;cny ; drive off perdition far
away; put away from us any committed sin.
rpp. h;i5, in A. b. //if//l/^/f//r for vip.fttij. ; tii c, tfvfsat for ditram ; and, for d,asm*}i
Jtstt/fttrfi 7'iiiil tiiuittitm ofiih. The sn <iiifl h.iir-vriso i^ 1\\'. i. 24.9Cd, alsci found in
TS. (i. 4.4^') and MS. (i. 3.3(0*1 ^^^ li.ivc Mi/htHTii nnd mumMf^dhi^ 2d ftinK : fi>r
(iitfAm in G, KV. h.i5 <//^//, 'IS. (like l*pp ) ''''''7<fr, .inrl MS. omits it, prefixing instead
<l/-/ to hlii/taxi'it. 'V\\r c'omni. takes sviiti/ttl in a as havirlakuinam annam. Only the
first half-verse \sj\tt;it/l.
3. ])e ye excited after tliis formidable hero ; take hold, O com|Kintons
after In(ha, the troop-coiKpieror, kine-conqueior, thunderbolt-armcil, con-
quering in the course (tijmaft)^ slaughtering with f(»rce.
This verse appears a^ain as \i\. I3.^». in the midst of the hymn to which it belonc*,
and which is fmiml also in various othrr texts. The vers?- corrrsponiU to RV. i. 103. ^i,
SV'. ii. I 204. VS. XV ii. 38, an«l one in TS. iv. (^. 4», MS. ii. 10. 4. Thry all reverse the order
of the two half verses, he^in onr c witli ;"'>// </A///i/i//// i;or(ti,iNi^ and have, instead of nur
a, I'wifff't sti/t'i/i} thttt vhtiyatihvntn ; TS. dilfrrs from thr rest by re.idin(; 'mm for amm in
our b. Tiu' comm. explains f/////<i hy tipinti^i/am kstf*t2fta^tittm (it/ritda/am. |^The
word " in " were beltrr omitled from the Iranslatiun uf d. J
98. To Indra : for victory.
round also in Pfiipp. xi.x. Pn'sidrs the us«-s in K*iu<;. of hymns 07 <io, a« stated
under ()7i hymn <>S is further applied, with \i.^i7, in anotlirr battle rite (i'>.4); and the
sihol. a(hl it to \ii. 86, gi, dr.. in the //:«// i7///(7//i7»<f:-<i (ni»te to 140.6). Vait. also
(34. 13) has it in the j<//////. when the kin;; is armer!.
'I'r.msl.ited : <itiltilh, i. r(><).
1. May India i'on(|U«'r. may he not he coufpicre*! ; may he king it as
over-king among king*;; he lliou here one to l)e famed, to be praised, to
be greeted, to he waited on, and to he reverene«'d.
Tin* Vfise is f«»:iin! aisn in TS. (ii. 4. 14') am! MS. (iv. 12. ;). K'.il with a very diffrr-
ent S'M niwl half: C, TS. 'r/^i'tl hi bhuyfxh pit anil ahhistlr^ MS. T'/jrvI abkislih pftamil
fit\'tfy ; d. i'oili N/,tK.f f\ o fttim.KVi^ \Jfhit \x>tf. In the first half, at en* I of 1. MS, jayaU .
at end 'if b. I "v fA^nAti, MS. -Viitf, The last pfula <vrurs aijain as lii. 4. 1 d. The comm
re^i^rds l!i.' Uimk .is i'l' ntilii-d wit!» Indra tlirout;1i the hymn. |_MS. \\:i^ j'li vait (or j\ttJtt J
2. ThdM, 0 Indra, art ovrr-kini;, ambitious ((mvasyti). thou art the
ovcrcnmor (»f |h*oj»Ic ; dfi lh<m rule ovt»r these folk («7f*ij) of the gmis ;
Ion<; livcrl. unf.idin^ (njdni) dominion be thine.
353 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK VI. -vl. 99
The verse is mutilated in Ppp. MS. (in iv. 12. 2) has a corresponding verse: iiuim
indra *sy adhiriijAs tvdfn bhavi *dhipatir jdndndm: dd(vfr vi^as tvAtn uta vi rtljtlti
^jasvat ksatrAw ajdram te astu. The metrical defmition of the Anukr. is not very
successful.
3. Of the eastern quarter thou, O Indra, art king; also of the northern
quarter art thou, O Vritra-slayer, slayer of foes ; where the streams go,
that is thy conquest ; in the south, as bull, thou goest worthy of invoca-
tion.
The verse is found in TS. (ii. 4. 14') and MS. (iv. 12. 2). Both begin Yi\\\\ pracydrfi
di^f^ and have tidfcydm (without Lthe meter-disturbing J ^/f<M) in b, ending with vrtrahA
*si; in d, TS. has (better) edhi for esi^ and MS. the same, with hdvyas before it. l*pp. is
mutilated, but has evidently prdcydm diqi. The third pada evidently describes the
west ; that does not suit the basin of central India.
99. For safety: to Indra.
\^Atharvan. — dindram : j. sdumyd sdvitri ca, dnustubkam : j. bhurij^ brbn/t.]
L Partly prose, " vs." 3. J Found also in Paipp. xix. No use of the hymn is made by
Kauij. except in connection with its two predecessors, as explained under hymn 97.
But Vait. has it in the agtiisioma^ as whispered slotra (18. 16).
Translated: Grill, 18, 1O8; Griffith, i. 299 ; Bloomfield, 123, 510.
1. Unto thee, O Indra, on account of width, thee against {fiurd) dis-
tress I call ; I call on the stern corrector, the many-named, sole-born.
In spite of its wrong accent (cf. animatds^ sthavimatds^) vdrimatas is probably an
adverb in tas. The comm. interprets it, doubtless correctly, ** for the sake of width **
(^urtiii'dd d/teto/t)'. i.e., of free space, opposed to distress or narrowness. LThe deriva-
tives of an ft and um are in frequent antithesis, as, e.g., at RV. v. 24. 4. J * Sole-born,'
i.e. * unique.' Ppp. ends b with ahhtlranebhyah, • [^MS. iii. 10. 4, p. 135, I. 4. J
2. The hostile {} sinyd) weapon that goes up today, desiring to slay
us — in that case we put completely about us Indra's two arms.
Ppp. reads at the beginning yo *dya^ and at the end pari dadmahe^ which rectifies
the meter of d. 'Wk^ pada mss. strangely i^?A jighdnsam in b; both editions make the
necessary emendation to -san^ which the comm. also has. The comm. further has the
better reading dadhmas^ as have three of our mss. (Bp.M.T.) ; and this ^which, in con-
nection with the Ppp. reading, suggests the emendation dadh9nahe\ is adopted in our
text, thouj^h not in SPP's. The metrical irregularity of the verse should not have been
overlooked by the Anukr. LCf. i. 20. 2 a, b.J
3. We put completely about the two arms of Indra the savior; let him
save us. God Savitar ! king Soma ! make thou me well-willing, in order
to well-being.
In this verse, only our Bp.M. read dadhfuaSy but it is adopted in our text. The
comm. again gives it Ppp> has dadmdn; and in d it reads, for krfiUy krnutam^ which
is preferable for sense, though it makes the verse still less metrical. The verse is
brhatf only by count.
vi. lOO- BOOK VI. Till-: ATlIAkVA-VKDA-SAMIIITA. 354
100. Against poison.
[(iiint/miifi. — T'tiniii^titytim. tUiustHl-ham.^
rniiiirl nlsn in IViipp. xix. I'snl by Kntiq. (31. 2^>) in a rnnrdtal ritr af^ainst varif^us
poisons, with ai«! of earth from an ant-hill rlr.; and the coinni. I^consiclcit thi« (Jn<1
not xviii. 4. 2) to he intvndcrl at Si. ioJ when the satritiual cake is laid on the lirrati
of a (IrriMSfd s.urificcr on the fumral pile.
'I'lanslatcd : Ludwii;, p. 511 ; CfritTith, i. 300; ritrNimfielil, 27. ^ii. — See aUo Her-
gaJKni- Ilrnry. JA///;/#7, p. 153 ; Illoomfirlrl, A J I*, vii. 4S2. (iriflith r|uotrs an intcresiini^
paiaf;iaph ahuiit the moisture of the white-ants.
1. The goils have given, llic sun has given, the sky has given, the
oaith has given, the three Sarasvatis have given, accordant, the poison-
sptnlcr.
rpp. i(im)'irii-s r//*."(f *f///// in a. and h.is r^/TiTr in^tearl of tisfitt in C- The comm.
lendi'is lh«* Inst veil) (oircctly, !)y tititt*txtintiii, hut tlie otliiTS as ini)»cratives.
2. The water which tlic gods jv^ured for yon, C) upajtkAs^ on the
waste, witli that, which is impelled by the gods, siK»il ye this |>oison.
.Ml the aiith(»iitieK* lead upajik^s, vocative, whi* h was, wilhrmt j;i»oil reaMin. altered
t>» ttf*tt/'l'i}\ in our edition. 1 he lonini., luiwrver, with his ordinary disregard of accerl.
undrist.nwls tinuis as vot ative, and u/^itjllilt as nominative. II •* rpiolis from TA. v 1 4
thr p.iss.i;ie whith drs<iil»es tin* upatiiki^s (so t alle<l then") as * {K'netratin^ to watrr.
whcrevrr thry di^ * ; they are a kind of ant: rf. note to ti. 3. 4. I'pp- xrXi\% wftUtkJk^
and comliines kA **si!i{an; also, in b. dhanvtinn. ^\\\m\ SIT's IU1. has upajtkit ! \
V Thou art (laughterof the Asuras ; thou, the same, art sister of the go«N;
arisen from the sky, from I lie earth, thou hast made the |>oison sapless.
rpp. omits Tf? in b. and reads y'lr//?//^ instead of ntftibkut*} in c. The second pAda \\
found also as v. 5. I d. The romm. has, in d, Cttkttrsa instead of niktiPtha; he regards
earth from the ant hill {vaimtkiitnf ttiki\) as adilresserl in the verse.
loi. For virile power.
Not found in Taipp. Useil by Kau<;. (40. |S) in a rite for sexual vi|>or, after vi. 72
'1 lanslatefl : (irilhth. i. 474. — Cf, iv. 4 ; vi. 72.
1. riay thou the hull. Mow, increase anrl spread; let thy member
increase 11 ml) hv limh; with it smile the woman.
'\ ln' I omtn. t.ikes i<j//'.7 and i/'7.'///// in c as two separate words, and manv of SIT's
t,it/:/;rf,} MISS. .If rr-nt nf//i,} 'ni^iftft. Ar(oidini; t») the r onim . th»" amulet of arka'mrm^\
is tin- ri'fiii'ilv hrre \ised. |<f. also tlie /I'l'wrr ^f,Tntfu ft/*/, rt\. n<H*rnIe. Part I , p 5.
<;lt>k.» ♦• ■. and p. 17. whtTi' p'Hnri;r.inat«* rind an 1 nnistan! oil t.ikr th»" place of tirht J
2. \Vh«*rc'witli they invi^^orate on<' who is lean, wherewith they incite
(/'/) <Mie wh«) is ill with thai, () Hrahmana'ipati, make thou his member
t.iut like a 1m)w.
355 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK VI. -vi. I02
Our Hp. reads vlijaydnH in a. The second Iialf-vcrse is nearly a rei)clition of
iv. 4. 6 c, d. The comm. reads va^am for kr^am in a.
3. I make thy member taut, like a bowstring on a bow; mount, as it
were a stag a doe, unrelaxingly always.
This verse is a repetition of iv. 4. 7. The Anukr. passes unnoticed the abbreviated
/Vtf both here and in vs. 2.
102. To win a woman.
\Jamadagni {abhisammanaskdmaH). — dfirinam, dftustubham.^
Found also in Paipp. xix. Used by Kauq. (35.21) in a rite concerning women,
with vi. 8, 9, etc., for reducing to one's will. Verse 3 is also reckoned (19. i, note) to
the pustika mantras.
Translated: Weber, Ind. S/ud. v. 243; Orill, 54, 169; Griffith, i. 301 ; Bloomfield,
loi, 512.
1. As this draft-horse (ydhd), O A^vins, comes together and moves
together [with his mate], so unto me let thy mind come together and
move together.
The comm. paraphrases vdhas with su^iksito *{vah^ *a well-trained horse,' but
regards the driver (^vdhaka) as the unexpressed object [_? or adjunct J of the verbs —
which is also possible.
2. I drag along (a-khid) thy mind, as a king-horse a side-mare (.^);
like grass cut by a whirlwind, let thy mind twine itself to me.
Some of SPP's authorities give prsihyam in b; but in general the mss. cannot be
relied on to distinguish sty and sihy. The Pet. Lex. understands the word with ///, but
the minor Pet. Lex. with /, in the sense here given, which Grill (following Roth) accepts.
LCf. W's note to xviii. 4. 10. J The comm. explains the word as ^afikubaddhdm *[a
marc] tied to a stake (to the pole of the chariot?)*, riljd^va as a^va^resfha^ and d
khiddmi as t/iadab/iimukham utkhandmy unmfilaydmy dvarjaydmi. The reading
ifnma in c, which our edition wrongly accepts, is that of only two of our mss. (Bp.I5p.»).
LRead therefore tfnam.\ The comm. explains resman as resako vdiydtmako vdyuh,
Ppp. ends b with prstydmayah.
3. Of ointment, of madugha^ of kiis(/ia, and of nard, by the hands of
Bhaga, I bring up quick a means of subjection.
The construction of the genitives in the first lialf-vcrsc is obscure. The comm.
makes them depend on anurodhanam, and so also Grill. They arc perhaps rather the
means by which the anurodhana (= anuUpana^ comm.) or gaining to one*s purposes
of the desired person is to be brought about, and so are codrdinate with Dhagasya^ the
lattcr's • hands ' taking the place of the • means ' or * aid * which would have better suited
them. Turds in c is possibly genitive, *of quick ' (or powerful) Dhaga (so the comm. :
= h'aramdNasya). Ppp. reads (as in other places) madhugasya in a ; the comm.
madhu^hasya. Ppp. has also d for 1/^/ in d. Several of our mss. (P.M.I.O.T.) accent
Ann rddh'y [^and so do six of J SPP's authorities.
The tenth anuvdka^ of 10 hymns and 30 verses, ends here; the quoted Anukr. says
simply da^ama.
Here ends also the fourteenth /rrt/JMtfita.
vi. 103- IJOOK VI. Till-: ATIIAKVA-VKDA-SAMIIITA. 356
103. To tie up enemies.
FiiiiinI .ilsr) in rriipji. xix , in irvrrsffl hmUt «»f vt-rsrs. I'st-cl by KAu^. (I^i f») in
rfuiiicf tidii wilii tlir fulittwin)' liMnn, in .1 li.ittlr rito for virtr^rv o\i-r i*ni*niic<( : fctlrrs. .i\
till* ('(inini. rxpl.iins, .11 c thiown <1n\\n in pl.u rs whcfc the litistilo at my will pxvv
'i r.insl;itc(I : l.uilwi^, p. 51S; (iiifTitli, i. 301.
1. Tyinj;-tnj;clhcr may Hrihaspati, lyinK-l'>;;tlhcr may S.ivitar make
for you ; lyinp-lof^clhcr may Mitra, Aryaman, tyiiij; tOKClhcr may Khagn.
the Arvins [make].
InstiMfl of 9/titfo ttfvtiffiil, rpi^- ^^^^* '" c, ////// i/f til *f^tt\ lit.
2. I tit* t()<;olhcr llio hi;;hcst, lo^rlluT the lowest, also together the
middle ones; India hath encompassed them with a tie; do thou, Agni,
tie I hem lo;;elher.
'Die ifininv ir.ids /ifi////!)///, ii:;ii/fi}»i. and Nuiti/iytXffulffi in a, b, supplying {aiFMsraJnt
in f.K )) r.isf I ! lie / ftf tj/ti}^ is picsiriltcd hy I'lAt. ii.4^i.J
3. Thfy yontler who come lo fij;hl, having made their ensigns, in
troops Indra hatli encompassed them with a tie; do thou, Agni, tie
them together.
'Mil* Cfinini. flosses autkti^tts willi Siifwt^/itt^tts.
104. Against enemies.
Kotincl aNo in Paipp. xix, in irvt-isi'il imlrr of vcrsrs. I'srd l»y K.'iu^ (16 ^» ) in
Cnnni'i'tion with the pi rrcdinL; l)\Min, wliiili wc.
Translated: l.iiflwii;, p. 51S: (tiitiilli, i 302.
1. Will] lyin;;-iip, will] lyin;;-together, we tie up the enemies; the
expirations and bieaths of them, lives with life {tisft) have I cut off.
'I'lw ti.ins!.i!!iiM in^plirs //i . ///././"/ at l)i»* imuI, instead of -t/itn, wliirli all tlir aiithi^n-
ties (and Ii' me I'olli editions) ii-.nl, save tlic fonim., whirli lias i/iiw. I'pp ha* in c.
d. A wr/// pfAti^'tn \,itti,'i\un iituiitit^i\u(,ttn (loirupt). Uiir nii;;]it lionjccturc annJ Ui€
f/r //;/.{ in d
2. This tyinj;-iip hiwc I made, sharpened up with fervor by Indra; <»ur
enemies th.it aie h<*re ■ - th<:m. O A;;ni, do thou lie up.
rpp. if.hl-^ i*i./i t\t'n,t ^ttti\itt!nt in b, anil. foi d. mftttn ilt/tin «/:-;fiiA» mttwit
3.%!.rt Indr:i-and-A^ni tie thi-m u]\ and king Soma, allied; let Indra
with tlie M.iiuts make tyin;;-iip for otir enemies.
rpp. li.is fur b ilie l»i!!ir Misiiin pf};':,! x,'frtr9tit ///'"i/.'/iiI (tlir rrinstrnrtinn of »'»-t
n:,\i:::t Ini:ti^ aiioni.il«»u»» ); also n.v for ff./f at tlir i-ml. Sonii' of the ^t.ia tcil%
(in« luilirji^ o;ir I).Kp.) ii-.i-l ft'ttn* \\\ a. niwl the ittnihitA inss. ijf'nrr.illv enA*n in^tr^'f -^f
ff:,}'i . tip* ii'T'nn i^im ^ f*:.:*t. 1 he « oinni. expl.tins /t.'fJitttin Im^IIv I»v fnftfjt: tmJz'
357 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK VI. -vi. lo6
105. To get rid of cough.
[ Unmocana. — kdsddcvatyam. dnustubham^
Not found in Paipp. except 2 a, b in xix. Employed by Kauq. (31. 27) in a remedial
rite against cough and catarrh.
Trniislatcd: Ludwig, p. 510; Zimmer, p. 385 ; Griffith, i.302; Bloomfield, 8, 513. —
Cf. Hillebrandt, Veda-chrestomathie^ p. 50.
1. As the mind with mind-aims flies away swiftly, so do thou, O cough,
fly forth, after the forth-driving (.^) of the mind.
'Die comm. paraphrases fftanaskeMs with maptasd buddhivrtiyd kelyatndndir
j fitly amdndir durasthilir visaydih; and the obscure pravdyyam with fira^aniaiyam
avadhim.
2. As the well-sharpened arrow flies away swiftly, so do thou, O cough,
fly forth, after the stretch (}) of the earth.
The comm. explains samvat by samhataprade^a^ which at least shows his perplexity.
3. As the sun's rays fly away swiftly, so do thou, O cough, fly forth,
after the outflow of the ocean.
In all these verses, all the authorities anomalously accent the vocative, kise ; our
edition makes the called-for emendation to kdse; SPP. reads kise,
106. Against fire in the house.
\Pramocana. — durvd^dlddrfatyam. dmtstubkam^
Found also in Paipp. xix. (with the verse-order 2, i, 3). KAu<;. employs the hymn
(52. 5) in a rite for welfare, to prevent conflagration of the house: a hole is made inside,
and water conducted into it, etc. And vss. 3, 2 appear in VSit (29. 13), with others, in
the aj^fticayafta^ in the rite of drawing a frog, water-plant, and reed over the site of the
fire-altar. ^
Translated: Ludwig, /?^r ^/^7/^//<r7, iv. 422 ; Grill, 63, 1 70 ; Bloomfield, AJP. xi. 347, qJ i^YflflfiMiA
or JAGS. XV. p. xlii (= PAOS., Oct 1890) ; Griffith, i. 303 ; and again, Bloomflekl, SBE. pM^0
1. In thy course hither, [thy] course away, let the flowery dhrca grow;
cither let a fountain spring up there, or a pond rich in lotuses. ^It^T^'^^f^^'^
The verse corresponds to RV. x. 142^^ where, however, the words in b are all ^.
plural, and c, d read thus: hradaq ca puttddrlkdni samudrdsya grhi imL SPP., . t^U^^^^^'tl^^
acjainst the majority of his authorities, strangely adopts in his text the KV. version * /C^ i^ ha
of b; it is read also by the con\m., and apparently by Ppp. ; wc have noted only one of
our mss. as having pusplnfh (O.s.m.). The comm. says : anend ^gnikrlabddhasyd <— • i
^tyaittdbhdvah prdrihitah.
2. This is the down-course of the waters, the abode {mWfana) of the
ocean ; in the midst of a pool are our houses : turn thy faces away.
The first half- verse is RV. x. 142.7 a, b (also VS. xvii. 7 a, b; TS. iv.6. u ; MS.
ii. 10. i), without variation. The last'pdda is by the comm. regarded as addressed to
vi. lo6- HOOK VI. TIIK A TIIARVA-VKDA-SAMIIITA. 358
thir till' (niH* of wlinsr I'Dmnion rpitlirls is i'i\7u2ti*rfttithti * h.iviiif; fares in evrrj* dirrr-
tioii*); prill. i|is i.ithcr * (Ik* points of thine arrows*: rf. \'S. xvi. 53.
3. Willi a fetal envelop of snow, O house, do wc envelop thcc ; fur
may est Ihoii be for lis having: a cool pond ; let Afjni make a remedy.
Tit*' \\\*-\ two p.'icj.is (Of rrvpoiwl ti) vs. xvii. 5 a, b (.i1m> in TS. iv. 6. M, MS. ii. lo. I ),
which, i)owrviT, ha»i t^i^'tr iii^lfad of \,1/r : a KV. l/it/.t to x 142 diifriH only l*y dtidAtn
for kt nt*tu ill d. l*pp- has, in c, /ntitftlvit for hftitiil hi^ and. ind. aUo titttiAtu for krHoin
None of our niss., and very few of Sl*l'*s authorities, read t^j^nis k' in d, th<iu|;h it
appears to Iil* railed for 1>y Pint ii. ^5, anil Uuh e<litions arrrpt it. 1 he t'omm. explains
the cnvfliip to 1»c avaki'lfupftui jiJ;;'«i.V//i/. |_l'pp. condiinrs bhuvo^j^nir.^
107. For protection : to various divinities.
Found al.M) in r.iipp. \i\. Kt-i konrd I>y Kaui;. {t}.2) to tUc br/nii A Jn/i j^itma; and
used {y). 13), with vi. 1,37, cir., in a rilr for wrlfair. 'Iht* MK*(iii.d di'tinition of the
Annkr. is forrnl anfl bad; althou^^li tho nunihrr of s\llalilt-s is earli time not far from
3- (>•» ^O.
Tr.insl.iti'd : Cttiffith, i. 303.
1. () :dl-con(pieror (r/Yrv////), commit mo to resetter; C) rescuer, pro-
tect both all our bipeds, and whatever <piadrti[i«'ds are oins.
I*pp. luteins tf.}vtifui}nf .i,;; :v/:7</r* Nitltft : it ofnilN n*ts lufoic fiilsii in the ri'fiain
AH tilt' lirin^s ailihrssnl :ui: doiihtlrss female; tin* < oniin. has nothing to »ay in
expl.in.itiitn of tln'tn other \%ise than that they aie divinities so nanud
2. () rescuer, commit mc to all-concpieror ; O all-C(»nfpieror, protect
both all etc. etc.
Ppp. has 3i/; :■«/: ■/*/€• instiMtl of t'/^ .■•i/////. I he romm. prrt'ixi-s 7 /(:••//// at the !»rj»inninu
3. () all-con<pieior, commit mc to beauty; O beauty, piotcct both all
etc. etc.
rpp. h.is .!#// r'l/r Vi/ T'/j :*«/77"</ iiiste.id »»f 7'i\:'it;i/ at the lie^jjniijnij,
4. () beauty, cnmmit me to alljM>ssessor ; () all-possess*>r, protect lv)th
all etc. etc.
rpj». leads f9 It vitfff,} /.:}}.} I iiistr.iil of .ii// :•,/;/.//, and rtikuitit instead of mo waks»t.
»S'«i/;«/r/i/ niiijlit, t»f ronrse, me. in • all kiiower.*
108. For wisdom.
;. f4if*'n,ih f'i.tfi ]
mI •' r.iipp. \i\. has vs*«. I, z, 5, thus ir<Iiii im; the h\nin to the norm of this Iniok. Found
used ill K.iiii;. (i*^. 2=<), \%ith \i. ^\ [so the toiiim. : hut Parila unih-istand% xii I. sj as
inti'iiilril |. ill the n:t',r'/)./;ttrtii»tit « < ri-imnn ; and also ( ^7. 2^) in the uf^antixatta^ Mith wtir-
ship «>f ,\^iii.
1 i.invlai««l. Muir, i*. ;;?: < triMiih. i. ^' .|
359 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK VI. -vi. 1 09
1. Do thou, O wisdom {med/id), come first to us, with kine, with
horses, thou with the sun's rays ; thou art worshipful to us.
The comm. explains medhd, as qruiadhdranasdfnarthyartipittl dtx'l^ and finds in c an
elliptical comparison {luptopavtii)'. "as the rays of the sun quickly pervade the whole
world, so come to us with own capacities able to pervade all subjects."
2. I call first, unto the aid of the gods, wisdom filled with bfif/imau^
quickened by brahman, praised by seers, drunk of (.^) by Vedic students.
Ppp. omits brahmajiitAin in b, without rectifying tlie meter, which can only 1>e saved
by leaving out the superfluous /r/i///tf//itf//i in a. It avoids, in c, the doubtful //vz///^///
by reading instead //'rt///7///J//i / and it has avasd (for avast d f) tfrtif in d. PtApUdm
should perhaps be understood as coming from pra-pi or pra-pyd; the comm. takes it
alternatively ♦ lK)th ways, paraphrasing it with either sevitdm or pravardhitdm. The
Anukr. reckons brahmanvatlm to b (so do the pada-vc\?&.)^ and passes without notice
the deficiency of a syllable in a ; in fact, prathamim is intruded, and tlie verse other-
wise a good anusiubh. ♦LThat is, he refers it io pibati by scintdm and Xo pi ox pyd by
pra va rdhitdm .J
3. The wisdom that the Ribhus know, the wisdom that the Asuras
know, the excellent wisdom that the seers know — that do we cause to
enter into me.
It is the intrusion of bhadrdtn in c that spoils the anusiubh^ but does not make a
regular brhatL
4. The wisdom that the being-making .seers, po.sscssed of wisdom,
know — with that wisdom do thou make me today, O Agni, possessed
of wisdom.
Many of the mss. (including our P.M.H.I.K.O.) leave vidus unaccented at the end
of b. The second half- verse is VS. xxxii. 14 c, d (which has knru for krnu) ; Lso also
RV. khila to x. 151 J.
5. Wisdom at evening, wisdom in the morning, wisdom about noon,
wisdom by the sun's rays, by the spell (vdcas), do we make enter into us.
Ppp. is corrupt in c, d : medhdm stlryefio *dyato dhfrdnd uta stvama.
109. For healing: with pippalf.
\^Athii rva n . — mantroktapippalidevatyam ; bkdisajyam . dnttstubkam . ]
Found also in Paipp. xix. Employed in Kftu^. once (26.33) with vi. 85, 127, and
other hymn.s, and once (26. 38) alone, in a remedial rite against various wounds.
Translated: Ludwig, p. 509; Zimmer, p. 389; Griffith, 1.305; Bloomfield, 21, 516.
See Bergaignc- Henry, Manuel^ p. 154.
I. The berry {pippali), remedy for what is bruised {} ksipid), and
remedy for what is pierced — that did the gods prepare (satH'kalp(iy-)\
that is sufficient for life.
As elsewhere, the mss. waver between pippall tlxxH pispall {out Bp.E.O.R.p.m. read
the latter). All the pada-mss. stupidly give jixnta : vdl as two independent words.
vi. it^ HOOK V!. Tin: ATlIAKVA-VKDA-SAMinrA. 3^^
rpp. h:is, ill a, ksupttt' fnr ksipttt'\ and, for b, uUt iti vi^vahh'\ (iirllicr, for d, «f/«f««
jiviltiivA yati * In tlio kampa iK'twccii a and b. Sl'i*. un.u:r(iiiiiulily rcatU wj/<f in^tc^i
of ////./.- (h«.' f.irt ihat his tnss. iLippi'ii in tliis rast* all to ai;ri'c in K'^i^fl Ajt*'* i^ ^'f
no ai'cniiiit wli.itrvt'r. siiiri* tlii-v arc wiMlv im onsistcnt in tliis whoU' c\ass f>f ra^r^ :
aniont; our niss. air found //;, iit^ and u^. 'I'lii* i nnim. f^ivrs two alicrrnative^ \^\X\\
foi kiipf,i and inr it/i:'nftf/iii- : for tin* foinicr ///</» /-/A/ (i>f ntlier ri.Mucdivs) and TJ/if-
fi\i;tt:'t{i:utt and m> t)n. *|_ Intending iartn t/t 'j
2. The borrics talked toprrihcr, coming from thrir birth : whomever
wc shall reach living, that man shall not be harmed.
'I lu* sfcond lialf vetse is tlio same, \>i(hout valiant, as KV. x. (^7. I 7 c« d (fiMuvi al^^
as VS. .\ii. y}\ c, d, and in 'IS. iv. 2 (*^ an<l MS. ii. 7 1 ^ : th«' latti-r rcailinfr tntjhe in C).
while the tiisl half is a mm I of paiotly of the ffuirs|»imdin«; part of ihr ^ainc vrr^r
avapiUiintir ttvatittn tititi osiiti/iiiytit pth t ; our -rttJittit,! *'ri///f is [»n»l»alily a rf»iriipli»in
<»f '7'ittiijnn t\y-. Tlu-ir is ;i^;iin, in a. a disaurrriniiit ainnn;; llie ni*s. as ti» pippahAt,
our Itp. M.I.O., with a nuinluT of SI'P's authoiities. y^iviiit; P^^p ■ T hr romm. rxplairi^
the word !»y htt\tipippaly*'\tiih'^ttbhftLibhtnn.}h \itn'x\h pippiily*th ; and their "birth"
to have \wv\\ conleinporaneous with the (huiiiin^ of \\\c tiwr /ti. j^Tpp- ends with
pj/iP tf.ul/t.j
3. The A suras dii^ ihee in ; the ^ods rasl thee up a(;ain, a rcinrdy
for the 7'<i/i/,r/ti, likewise a rnneily for what is bruised.
'rheciunm. undeistands ft'tttl'9 fii as -tltiifon^tl^'fsfti^ttf Int. |^(."f. vi. 44. 3. J I In Tpp ,
d is wantin;;, peihaps hy a« lidi-nt.J ,
1 10. For a child born at an unlucky time.
I .•f/'l.f»7ii»/. - i/^-'/f'tiif»i. tittitfuf^hAm / /.if/4/f ]
This hynin is not found in I'aipp. K.hk;. (4f>. 25) applies it f<ir the benefit of a
rhild !>oin undei an in.iuspii iii'i^ .isi« lism.
Transl.iti-d : I.udwii;, p 131 ; /inunti.p 321 : ('•lifnih. i. 305: r>liMi?nt'ii-ld, 100. 517. —
With refnenie to the astrrisin^, see note t»» ii. S. i ; /iiii!nei,p 35'i: JaroI»i in /■>!/
yrufs tin A\*//i, p. 70.
1. Sine*', an aneient one, to be piais«'d at the sacrifiees, thou sit test
as //('/tir bidh of old and irirnl--do thtni, () A,:;ni, both gratify thine
own self, and bestnw (tiyit/) ^nnd fnrtune on us.
Ihr \ri«»«* is U\'. viii. II I -^ { .d^n TA, x. I' ») Om tfxt Ins si'veral I»ad rradinf*«,
whi« h .III- I III III t« d in tin- oiIh r \t 1 ^imi /(.///; in a "^houiii In- if.;//;, fi//i| should he fif/ri,
and p;pf .n.i*: .r •'li'«'.ilil In- /'M { I A. Ims, in a, /^'. ///;•■ 1/. whii h it'* iiunm. explains I»y
?-/i/./fi;i .'i/ ') tills I.inI th'- f'l'ipn. .d^ii rf.iiJN, Irit irndt-rs it i}'%;}i/:ti /: :t.} pumrti 1\%e
\er*^r is [)nt .it .ill Ap.nil/;, .ilrin ni^li ■ .ip.iMf of iM-ini; nail as 40 sxll.diles.
2. Hnin \\\ iy, <f/i'.iii',n!, in \'.iinrs two L'nfaslen«TS iiiiii) — i\o thou
proirrt him fioin tin* Tpro'dcr (w//Ai/«/;/m/m) ; may he conduct him
aiios*; all diliii tiltics unto inni; life, nf a bundled autumns.
'1 hi- • fiMsr. ■;ti\iiii-ss iif till- \i I %i" K Vf i\ di f« I li\r. in.isuiui'h as * Inimi * ( /JA/i, rHirn )
in a < .tn h.tr>!l\ In- \\\\A% [s'.itn.l ntlirr wi^e (li.in •>! (h<* rhiM, wh:lf A;;ni is aildres%rd in b.
36 1 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK VI. -vi. Ill
and spoken of in third person in c, d. Three asterisms are here ^and in 1 12J ircferretl
to, all in our constellation Scorpio: Antares or Cor Scorpionis (either alone or with #, r) ^Oy .^ j
is usually called jyesthd ' oldest/ but also (more anciently?), as an asterism of ill omen, ^ f ^*^<rr>
jyesthaghnl ' she that slays the oldest * * ; f/nl/a * root,' also in the same manner wtJ/a- . lyAfff S* ^
bar/iaftf \ot -fia\, lit. * root-wrenchcr,** is the tail, or in the tail, of which the terminal ^ .
star-pair, *>r the sting (X, v), has the specific name vicrtdu. ^Sec note to ii. 8. i.J The ^i ^^/ '
comm. lakes yamasya as belonging to miilabarhan&t. By a misprint, our text begins /**/ -JA^v. U.
withjr>^/- (readjr>^-). •[See TB. i. 5. 2«.J /f^^t^C /or ^^-^
3. On the tiger day hath been born the hero, astcrism-born, being ^^K^
born rich in heroes; let him not, increasing, slay his father; let him not '^'^•^*^^^* -
harm his mother that gave him birth. *''/[ ^ ^ '^ aI
We should expect at the beginning vydghryi or vHiydghre; the comm. paraphrases
the word with vydghravat kriire. [^In d, read sd tni mdidramf — As to minlt^ see
Gram. § 7 26. J
III. For relief from insanity.
[Atharvan. — ca/urrcam. dgneyam. dnuftubkam : i. fardnufhtf triftubhJ\
This hymn, like the preceding, is wanting in PSipp. KSu^. (8. 24) reckons it as one
of the miVrndmdni (with ii. 2 and viii. 6) ; and thfc comm. quotes a remedial rite against
demons (26. 29-32) as an example of their use.
Translated: Ludwig, p. 5 1 2 ; Zimmer, p. 393 ; Grill, 21, 170 ; Griflith, i. 306 ; Bloom-
field, 32, 518. — Cf. Hillebrandt, Veda-chrestomathie^ p. 50.
1. Free thou this man for me, O Agni, who here bound, well-restrained,
cries loudly ; thenceforth shall he make for thee a portion, when he shall
be uncrazcd.
Nearly all our mss., and the great majority of SPP's, have the fahe accent aids at
beginning of c; both editions give dtas. The comm. reads ^aM^ ior yadd in d. The
comm. paraphrases suyatas by susthu niyamiio niruddhaprasarah san, Pada b has a
redundant syllable.
2. Let Agni quiet [it] down for thee, if thy mind is excited {ud-yu) ;
I, knowing, make a remedy, that thou mayest be uncrazed.
The comm. reads udyatam (^ — grahainkdreno ^dbhrdntam) instead of udyutam in b.
3. Crazed from sin against the gods, crazed from a demon — I, know-
ing, make a remedy, when he shall be uncrazed.
A few of the authorities (including our O.) 2SXJtVi\, yddA in d ; ydthd would be a pref-
erable reading. LBloomfield, "sin of the gods," AJP. xvii. 433, JAOS., etc.J
4. May the Apsarases give thee again, may Indra again, may Bhaga
again ; may all the gods give thee again, that thou mayest be uncrazed.
The sap'nhUd reading in a and c would, of course, equally admit of tvd : aduh * have
given thee,* and this would be an equally acceptable meaning ; the comm^ so understands
and interprets. In our text, xtzAp^mas at beginning of c (the sign for u dropped out).
The difference of meter tends to point out vs. 1 as an alien addition by which this
hymn has been increased beyond the norm of tlie book.
vi. 112- BOOK VI. THK ATllARVA-VlinA-SAMlUTA. 362
1 12. For expiation of overslaughing.
Koiiiid also ill I'aipp. xix. (\s. 3 in i). I'scd hy Kau<;. (4''i. 2<»). with vi. 113, in a
s|>i-]| (0 vxpi.ilc till- ciifciistr of ptiftvttti * nvi isl.iu;:liiiij;/ or tlio iiiAiiia/;e of a younger
l)oftirc ill! I'Mrr lnollicr [_si'r /iinnicr, p. 31 5 J.
'I i.iiisl.itril : I.MflwIi:. p. 4fM>; <;riH. 15. 171 : (niO'itli, i 306; rilfM)niriclil, AJI* s\ii.
437 (rl.ilinr.ilf iliMussioii. p. 430 ff.). or JAOS. xxi.p.cxxii (- TAOS.. March, i!^94);
SltlC. xlii. 1/14. 521.
1. Let not this one. O A<jni. slay the oldest of them; protect him
from uprooting; ; do thou, foreknowing;, unfasten the bonds of the seizure
(ffrii'ii)\ let all the gods assent to thee.
I'lip allusions in tliis vcrsr to tlic s.imc trio of asterisms tli.it vrrre mentioned in 110. 2
are very cvi»!<Mit. Arfordinj; tf» tijc conim.. "this one" in a is the /«iriT'i//<f j^vihuh
he takes «|iiite wroni^h as the ovcisiaiit;hcr — see comm to vs. 3 aj. I'pP- reads /rjyj
nas nt end of c, and has, for d. pitiiputfAu nu\tafam mufiia jttriuln (our 2 d).
2. Do thou, C) Agni, Iriosen up the bonds of them, the three with
which tliey three were tied np; do thou, foreknowing, unfasten Ihc
bonds of the seizure; free all — father, son, mother.
The rcMnm. rrads i///////Jr fi>r ufsiftlx in b; the word is. 5tranf;vly. not divided into
uhsi/t)/i in the /«f«/#f-trxt. wldch [n< mi division | wfnild he propi-r treatment for utfhii,}t,
and part of tlic mss. (including oiti ll.I.t >.) reafl titthtt>)s. 'i he second half-verse ii
wantin;^ in I'pp (save as d is fiiiind in it as id: see alK)ve).
3. With wh.it bonds the overslau;;hed one is l)ound apart, applied and
tied uj> on e.u h 11 mi) - let them be released, for they are releasers ; wijx:
off difTKullies, () Pfishan, c»n the embryo-slayer.
The I nnini. ai^.iin inininits the violitice of iindrrstandiM*; /ifM':'///fir in a as if it were
/ri'i:r/A/ ' tlie oveislau Letter.' I lie p. 11 lii ipUs in b are no in. .••in:;. ni.Lsc, applying; to the
liouml pi ist>n. 'I lie (omni. a;:ain r'-a<!s /////'/A/f, .i^ain snp|Mtited hy a few inss. (includ-
ini; our Ml), ami the /i7.r/-te\t .ii:.iin has f//i//.///. undi\idcd. All our mss. save one
(K). ami all luit i»ii»* of .Sl'P^, hmcI ff (without aitenl) in C: the translation ;;i%rn
implies till* ennnd.ition ti» /#'. \*!ii'h is ina«le in Sl'P's text, also on the authority of the
(oinni. After it. .Sl'I*. ri-ads //;.■/. 1./// /J///, witli, as he il.iiuw, .dl hut one of his authori-
ti-s ; f>f «ni»s, onlv I).Kp.'r. hive it. .lud K. //;//. ri/Z./w. all llie rot ///«/}. if #r/il' 7, as in
our ti \t. In I'i'P • *''•'* viiM' is finmd in i , in t'lis U*\\w : *■'■«'.;.■ fil^iiir mttdu^Jkm f*Ui9
fnKxii.ih'th Pii9i*p,tttn pity^ '"''.:.»' •"■X'' ' ' ^*' ' '/> ■'"/«'"' 7i*r/t'i"t hi sttfiti ctr. (d as in our
text).
113. For release from seizure igrjihi).
In I'.'iipp [i J is fiMiiil o:iIv the liist Ii.df viT*»e. inii' h cnrrtipted. It is emplovefl Itv
K.iut,. ( !'• J'l) i!» iiiin|».in\ wit'i \\\r pii-i edmi: h\nin. whirh see. V« rsp 2 C. d is sprti-
lifd in the (kuis'* of tlie lite. a> .n t uinp.iiiv inv; tlie dc-positin;; of the " iijtper fetters** in
lixrr fit.uM
363 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK VI. -vi. I 14
Translated: Ludwig, p. 444 ; Grill, 15, 171; E. Hardy, Die Vedisch-brahmanische
P^riotfg tic.f p. 210; Gnffilh, i. 307 ; Bloomfield, AJP. xvii. 437 (elaborate discussion,
p. 430 fl.) or JAOS. xvi. p. cxxii (= PAOS., March, 1894); SHE. xlii. 165, 527. —
See IJergaigne-Henry, Afanuel^ p. 1 54.
1. On Trita the gods wiped off that sin; Trita wiped it off on human
beings ; if from that the seizure hath reached thee, let the gods make it
disappear for thee by the incantation {brdhman).
SPP. properly emends the name, here and in vs. 3, to /r/VJ, though all his authori-
ties, like ours, read irtd; he also, with equal reason, emends enam to eitai (eftaft) in b.
TB. has (in iii. 7. I25) what corresponds to the first three p§das, reading both /n'/ti and
tfta/t *; for c it has idto mdyddi kiin cid lina^i. The comm. reads trita and etat. He
also quotes from TB. iii. 2. 89-»», some pass.iges from the story, as there told, of Ekata,
Dvita, and Trita, and of the transference of guilt by the gods to them and by them to
other beings. A similar story is found in MS. iv. 1.9 (where read krurdiit tnikrks-y
twice). The TB. verse relating to this is in our text adapted to another puri)ose. The
comm. holds the "sin" to be still that of overslaughing, as in the preceding hymn.
The Anukr. disregards the irregularities of meter. 'LAnd mAmrje.\
2. Enter thou after the beams, the smokes, O evil; go unto the mists
or also the fogs ; disappear along those foams of the rivers : wipe off
difficulties, O Pushan, on the embryo-slayer.
The Inst pfida is a repetition of 112.3d, and discordant with the rest of the verse.
Some of SPP's authorities read naqyan at end of c. The comm. has instead viksva.
The comm. explains inariclr by aptisury&diprabhdvi^esdft^ uddrdn by iird/tvam gatdn
mcj^htVmand parinatdiis tdn {(ihiimdn)^ and nlhdrdn by tajjanydn ava^dydn,
3. Twelvefold is deposited what was wiped off by Trita — sins of
human beings ; if from that the seizure hath reached thee, let the gods
make it disappear for thee by the incantation.
» Twelvefold * : i.e., apparently, in twelve different places, or classes, or individuals.
TB. (I.e.) specifies eight offenders to whom the transference was successively made;
and the ** twelve " is made up, according to the commentator, of the gods, Trita and
his two brothers, and these eight. ^The vs. is no /««/•//. J
This hymn is the last of the 11, with 37 verses, that constitute the eleventh anuvdka;
the Anukr. says : prdk tasmdt saptatriA^ah,
114. Against disability in sacrifice.
\^Brahman. — vdi^vadrvam, dnustubham .]
Found also in Paipp. xvi. Kau<;. (67. 19), in the savayajfia chapter, uses hymns 114,
1 15, and 1 17, with the offering of a "full oblation,*' the giver of the sava taking part
behind the priest ; and, according to the schol. and the comm., the whole aptuvdka
(hymns 1 14-124) is called devahednna, and used in the introduction to the savayajftas
(60.7), and in the expiatory rite for the death of a teacher (46. 30); and the comm.
quotes it as applied in Naksatra Kalpa 18, in the mahd^dnti z^XtA ydmydy in the funeral
ceremony. And hymns 114 and 115 (not verses 114. 1,2) are recited with an oblation
by the adhvaryu in the agnistoma^ according to Vait. (22. 15); and again in the same
vi. 114- nooK VI. Tin: atiiarva-vkdasaxiiiita. 364
ccrrmonv {2} 12) in nn expiatory ritr: also 114 alone (30. 32), in thr sAfttftltftanI «ar-
rilHT. with wash i UK of tlir tf.'ttsiitit vrssi-I.
I laiisl.iti'd: Luclwii;. p. 443; < Irill, 4;. 172: r.rirtjth. i 308; ItlnomfirM, 1^*4, 52S.
1. () ^(xls I whatever cause of the wrath of ihe j;ocl.s we, O go*l5,
have cciiniuitted — from that do ye, () Adityas, release us by right of
ii;;lu (/A/).
'\\\v whnlr h\nin is fiuind in 'I'll, (in ii. 4.4**'). uiili f"*^ for /;«ir in c as the only vari-
ant in tills vcisr. Tlii-n tliis vi-isr omiiis a;;ain with a sninrwh.it diffrrrnt version of
C. d in I r>. ii. ^. f>', witi) wliiih a vcisinn in MS. iii. II. 10 prrr isily a^riTK ; an<l yrl
a^^.iin. inttfo sli«;ht!y (lilfrrcnt. in I'M. iii. 7. 12', witli uhitli ni*arly n;;rre ver&ion.% in
TA. ii. 3. I ami MS. \\\ 14. 17, In 'I'M. ii. (». ^' (and MS.), the second half-vetse rrad«
thns : tt:i^fiff ffi't fihff.'ti.ft'ffiiM* :/^7,}f/ mufittitr tU't/ittutti ; in 11'. iii. 7. 12', it \% ilifi/tJr
/if »///<?// /*:,} ///////ii;/if fttiwii ftt'»t,t t'utnt utA ( I'A. //.i fi»r ///li [_i f. v. Sihmcdrr, TuhiK^fw
K*ithit /'M.. p. 'iSj; MS. limits f/ii'i in c. aiwl ha.s, for d. ffj\\ti /r rftu»i A ^nttittfrt, «iih
valiants fm tin* last two woids). VS. x\. 14 has uwr a. b. \tit1iout valiant |_and adds t'.ic
C. d of I li. ii. '1 'ij [In b, MS. iv 14 17 has i-.f«/ T'i/t«/ *////•;/// i'r/////ii (accent ! KaihA
//»/////if ). J
2. \\\ ii.L;lil of ii;;ht, () Adilyas, worshipful ones, release ye us here,
in that, O ye carriins tif the sanifire. we, desiious of accomplishing fpf^)
the sariilict', have not aci omplished it.
Iiotli flitjoiis trail at the cnil, as is iir* iss.ii v. it'l'/f-ui, althoiii'h oidv tMO* of our niss.
( I.F). ). ami .1 stnall minoiit) nl SI'T's .iut1iniitit.s, ai c rnt tlx* i/ (tli<*/i/</ii ms.s. alisuidly
roailini; .*//.; ^t/./-/:it). I'pP- ''■*** inst«ad. I'm d, \/i\ti///u u/*i1ttfr,i '{ W has wil ff>r n»ti
at nid of b. ii/*'".?/i :,;v f«ir v.t/nhh \Af in c. aiwl. for d. ii\il\iint>^ Kii ^fl-t'fttt, wlii< !i \\
hcttti. J '.f,*'/i/ 7 '#///./>#; I wmilil Im> Itittcr .is nominative. 'I hi: i'oinni. explainn f/ifjirf/.vi
hy 9ti)f^.i»Li\tt:tm ti i i'i,tt:t'i '>. L 1 01 tlir /*<ii/,i Miimh'r, rf. vi 74. 2. J " [ Whitnc) 's c«illa-
ticMis Slim ihaily to i;ivi* lip 'p.m I.1LI>. as icatlin;* ■^fl':t/;A.\
3. SaciiticinL; with what is rich in fat, makinj; (d)lations of sacrifiri.il
hutler {litwD with the s|>non, without desiic, to yoii, () all gods, desirotis
of acconiplishini; we have not been ahle to accomplish.
I'ait of thr mss (imludin;; our I'.M.l.) accent ' i\:f inc. and the dc( idvd majofiiv
(not our lip M.U'.K.s m 1 ) .u 1 i-nl \r/i:/!ia at thi* rnci (liy a contrary Munder to that in
2d), uliiili Sir, a< ( •iiiiini:ly. \\ii»n^l\ admits into his t<-xt. '\\\. has (also Tpp )
tifxttti \\\ b ; a!.s«) It iv.i'ls 7 <> :-;^ if ,/f :■.//; in c, ami. of Louise, \fktma at the end ; I'pp.
115. For relief from sin.
Inuud .\\^i^ in r.iipp. \\i. I "or tl:*- \i^v nf tliis !»\mii !»y Kaur.. and in part !»v Vail .
x\itli th" pr- ' '-fls'i'^. srr Mu.|i-i lli it h\?nii ; \'ail lias fMis one aN'* .ilojir in the Ji'ftfi- •?'/.!
/'.'/ (^ •■ ). w.fli ii. Ml. 2 ami v. 2 17; ajid \s. 3 appeals (3'^. ^3) in tht* t.lnfrilr/utnf, nevt
.ift-i li\u u I I 4
I f.i'v! .'. <! ■ I u-l'-xi-. p. n3 :/'>'":"<'. I' I>^2(vss 2. 3> : < iiill. 4''. i 72 : CirifTilh, i 3?^ ;
lU 'ii'u!:- ; 1. ifj. ;.").
365 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK VI. -vi. I 16
1. If knowing, if unknowing, we have committed sins, do ye free us
from that, O all gods, accordant.
The reading snjdsasas at the end in our text is, though evidently preferable, hardly
more than an emendation, since it is read only by our l^.M.T. ; SPl*. gives sajosasas ;
the comm. takes the word as a nominative. With the verse may be compared VS.
viii. 13 f (prose). The redundant syllable in a is ignored by the Anukr.
2. If waking, if sleeping, I sinful have committed sin, let what is and
what is to be free me from that, as from a post {dntpadd).
The verse nearly corresponds with one in TB. ii.4.49, which reads in a r. ''Vt/J v.
ndktam^ dkarat at end of b, and muflcatuh (-/// i*) at end of d. With a, b is to be com-
pared VS. XX. 1 6 a, b, which has svdpne for svapdn^ and, for b, inHitsi cakrrna vaydm.
Our svapdn in a is an emendation for svdpan^ which all the authorities read, and which
SPP. accepts in his text. The pada mss. mostly accent enasydh in c (our D. has -dh^
tlie true reading), and SPP. wrongly admits it in his pada text. The comm. explains
drupada^ doubtless correcdy, by pudabandhanHrtho drutnah.
3. Being freed as if from a post, as one that has sweated from filth on
bathing, like sacrificial butter purified by a purifier — let all cleanse
(f//;;//;//) me of sin.
This verse is found in several Yajus texts : in VS. (xx. 20), TB. (ii. 4. 49), K. (xxxviii. 5),
and MS. (iii. 1 1. 10). TB.MS. add id after iva in a; in b, for sniltvdy VS. gives s/td/ds,
and MS. sndhn; in d, TB.MS. read murtcantu for ^umbhantUy while VS. reads (better)
{uttdhanttt and before \Kapas instead of v(^ve ; Ppp. reads vi^7fdtt muhcantu ; and it
further has sindhu for svinnas in b. This time the comm. gives kdsthamaydt pdda-
bandhaudt as equivalent of drupaddt. The Anukr. passes without notice the excess of
syllables in a. |_The vs. occurs also TB. ii. 6. 63, with id again, and with d as in VS.
And the Calc. ed. of TB. prints both times svinnd sndtvd.\ [^As to ^umbh^ see BR.
vii. 261 top.J
116. For relief from guilt.
[/dtikHyana. — vdivasvatadevatyam. jdgatam: a. tristuhh.'\
Found also in Paipp. xvi. The hymn is used by Kau<;. in the chapter of portents
(132. I), in a rite for expiation of the spilling of sacrificial liquids. As to the whole
anuvdkij^ see under hymn 114.
Translated : Ludwig, p. 443 ; Griffith, i. 309.
I. What that was Yama's the Karshlvanas made, digging down in the
beginning, food-acquiring, not with knowledge, that I make an oblation
unto the king, Vivasvant's son ; so let our food be sacrificial (j<t/V7/j'^),
rich in sweet.
Perhaps better emend at beginning to yddy dmdm [^Bloomiield makes the same sug-
gestion, AJ I*, xvii. 428, SBE. xlii. 457J ; the comm. explains hy yatnasamband/ti kruram.
The kdrslvanas are doubtless the plowmen, they of the kindred of krslvan (= krsfvala)
* the plower * : whatever offense, leading to death or to Varna's realm, they committed in
wounding the earth. The comm. calls the krsfvanas Qudras, and their workmen the
kdrslvanas ; in b, he reads na vidas for annavidas. The metrical irregularities arc
ignored by the Anukr.
vi. 116- noOK VI. TMK ATMARVA-X 'KDA-SAMIIITA. 366
2. Vivasvant's son shall make [us] an apportionment ; having a portion
of swccl, he sliall unilc [us] with swccl — whatever sin of [our] mother's,
sent forth, hath come to us, or what [our] father, wronj;e«l,* hath done
in wratli.
Km M.7(^',ri///o<r/// in a, I'pp- rca<ls hhfsttjiini. 'i he two iKiK-vrrsicft hardly IicIobk
toKi'tliri. '\\\v (niniii. rxpLiiiis «//if/i}f/i//r#i.r l»y ttsN:afl'f ttipttr UMirtta vimMtkak tam
*|_Iii his ins. Whitney wrote **);uilty " (which serm^ much liettt-r) and then changed il
to •' \vro!i_i;c*fl."J
3. If from [our] mother or if from our father, forth from brother.
from son, from thoupjht (a'tas), this sin haih come to [us] — as many
Fathers as have fastened on (sac) us, of them all be the fury propitious
[to us].
In most of the /r7//<fmss. a^an at end of b is wrongly resolved into A : aji^afi, inMea<l
of J ifi^itn (our Kp. has f/M(,'<///). CV/tisas the comm. understands lo mean *our own
miml*; we shuuhl 1>c kI.k! to f^ct rid of the word; its reduction toni, ur the omiuion
of bhratur or putttit^ wouhl rectify the redundant meter, which the Anukr. |iaMcs
unnoticcci. Tlie comm. paraphrases /</// in b apparently by auyasmdd api fartjanAi '
117. For relief from guilt or debt.
Found aNo in P.upp. xvi. The hxmn [_not 1 cd, 2 cdj occurs in TH. (iii. 70*'^), and
parts (»f it clsewlieir, see under tlje verses. |_I' or I an<i 3. see also v. Schrocdrr, TubiN^tw
Katha Jns ^ p. 70 and di.J Hymns 117 119 are used in Kau<;. (133. i) in the rite in
expiation of tlic prntfut of the luiinin;; of one's house : ami Ke<;. (to K.'iug. 4<'i. 3^1) cjuoles
them as ai (om|>aiiyini; tlie s:itist.i< tion of a deht aftiT the cleaih <if a creditor, liy pay-
ment to his son or otherwise; t'lr 1 omm. ^ives (.is p.iit of the K.uit;. text) the/rtj/i/-«
of 117. [_l-'or tlu* wliolc itnu'^kii, st-e utidrr li. 1 1 4. J In \'ait {Z\. 15), in the aj^m-
stotfiti^ h. 117 j^ors witli tlie buiniii); fif tijc tri//'.
Transl.ited : Ludwi;;. p. 4(4 ; (iriltiti), i. 309.
I. What I eat (}) that is borrowed, that is not fjiven back ; with what
tribute of Varna I j;o about - - now, () Apjni, I bec<»me guiltless (anritd)
as to that ; thou knowest h(»w to unfasten all fetters.
'\'\\v tr. iiisl.it ion iniplirs enieiul.iti«'?i f»f tfxrnt In if./rr.'i in a : this is sui:i»rstcd hy jtij^kdt,!
in vs. 2. and is :iilo|itrd liy l.udwiL; .dso ; Imt ]iossiMy apratittiim astni mi^ht l)e Imrne
as a soit ot < .in l«^s \ul:;.u e\pirs^i<iii for ** I am f;uilty of non payment.** More or less
of the v<iN* i^ fnund in m-mi.iI other tevts, uitli c onsidcr.dile variations nf readinc :
thus IS. (iii \. .^' ■■). r.\ (ii. ^ I M. and MS. (iv. 14. 17) liave p.id.is a. b, C (as a. b, d
in r^^ ). in n. .lil \\\\\\ \iit l:'i\:,i.i*'t for apMnttv^xin and uitliout a%mi, and 'I' A. MS.
\\\K\\ ^f'^.tta I':, .in-l I .S. rmlinii witli w.fi / ( for r,f/). and TA.MS. with wJrf *AJ , in
b. all ]*u\ I'"'/. I iM-inif r,;";.f cr./. .i:id T.A MS. Iiave nttf/:fft,l for /'ij//*fil. while MS. ends
with i.f».i:,ji. in c (d in *1 S ). .ill rr.id f/if,' f«ir it/.ffn, ami MS. accent* Jnrnat (c in
T.S \s :/: ti *:.f i.m/ //,'»■/.- ././.m i* /.f/. c f. otjr 2 a) ; d in TA. is jlitiHn ewi ffAti iAt te
li.i.iniitri. with wl-.iih MS nr.nly .i-.:!«is. l.nt is «oirupt at the end: J f P- A^n/tlnruJmi.
"III. (iii - 'j") f oiic sjiiiuils nr.ly in t'l-* Inst li.dfvise (with it prc( isriy agrees A |»<J'S.
in X i i i . 2 2 . 5 ) : 1 1 i u s . 1 . j *; i t7/'.t'-:'f:i':ry ,ipt.: /://./ ny d^rii \ «i /t:^%y^l la ,'t ft J iJrJmi,- ils
367 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK VI. -vi. I18
oilier half- verse corresponds with our 2 a, b. MB. (ii. 3. 20) hsLsya/ kusfdap/t apradat-
tam tnaye */ta yena yamasya nidhinU car&ni : idath tad agne anrno bha^'dmi jlvann
eva pratiiiatte daddni, ^This suggests bhavdni as an improvement in our c.J Finally
GH. (ii. 4. 8) quotes the pratlka in this form: yat kusldam apamityam apratUam.
Ppp. reads for a, b apamrtyum apratltam yad asminnasyena^ etc., and, for d, jlvanna
ena prati daddmi sarvam (nearly as TA. d, above). The comm. takes balind as =
balavaili,
2. Being just here we give it back ; living, we pay it in {iii-hr) for the
living; what grain I have devoured having borrowed [it], now, O Agni,
I become guiltless as to that.
With the first half-verse nearly agrees TB. (as above ; also Ap(JS., as above), which
reads, however, tdd yilfayHmas for dadma enat. The comm. has dadhmas for dadmas
in a ; he explains ni hardmas by nitardtn niyamena vd *pdkunnah. Ppp. has etai at
end of a ; in c, apamrtyu again, also (c, d) jaghdsd agnir tnd tasmdd anrnam krnoiu,
Apamityam in this verse also would be a more manageable form, as meaning * what is
to be measured (or exchanged) off,* i.e. in repayment. JagJiisa in our text is a mis-
print for -ghds-,
3. Guiltless in this [world], guiltless in the higher, guiltless in the
third world may we be; the worlds traversed by the gods and traversed
by the Fathers — all the roads may we abide in guiltless.
The verse is found in TB. (iii. 7. 9*-9), TA. (ii. 15^), and Ap^S. (xiii. 22. 5), with
-mifts tr- at junction of a and b (except in TB. as printed), with utA inserted before
pitryatids and ca lokas omitted after it (thus rectifying the meter, of which the Anukr.
ignores the irregularity), and with kslyema (bad) at the end. Anrnd means also * free
from debt or obligation ' ; there is no English word which (like German schuldlos)
covers its whole sense. The comm. points out that it has here both a sacred and a pro-
fane meaning, applying to what one owes to his fellow-men, and what duties to the
gods. Ppp. combines anrnd *smin in a, and has the readings of TB. etc. in c, and
a dim a for d ksiyema at the end.
118. For relief from guilt.
\K3u^ika {anrnakdmah). — dgneyam. trdistubkam^
Found also in Paipp. xvi. ^The Katha-version of vss. i and 2 is given by v. Schrocdcr,
Tiibinger Katha-hss.^ p. 70 f.J Is not used by Vait., nor by K&ug. otherwise than with
Llhe whole anuvdka and J hymn 117: ^see under hymns 114 and 117 J.
Translated : Ludwig, p. 455 ; Griffith, i. 310.
I. If {ydt) with our hands we have done offenses, desiring to take up
the course (}) of the dice, let the two Apsarases, fierce-(//g'nf-)seeing,
ficrcc-conqucring, forgive today that guilt (rnd) of ours.
Our mss., like SPP's, waver in b between gainiim ^ndgait^m ox gantum^ but it is a
mere indistinctness of writing, and ^^//rii/rf (which not even Bdhtlingk*s Ifist supplement
gives) is doubtless the genuine reading, as given by SPP. ; our gandm is an unsuccessful
conjecture. The comm. paraphrases the word vr'iih gnnfavyam fabdasparfddivisayam,
and upalipS' with anubhavitum icchantah : 'desiring to sense the sound, feeling, etc.* ;
vi. Il8- IJOOK VI. Tin: atiiarva-vkda-sakihita. 368
our knn\vlc(1j;c of the ancient Hindu fi;ainc of dice is not sufTicient to rnahle tis to tran»-
late tlu' iMcl.i iiitrlliKcntly. The verse is found also in several Yajus texts, TH. (iii. 7.
121), 'i A. (ii. 4. 1), and MS. (iv. 14. 17): all n-ad laktint in a. and I'lt^num (MS. t-<Ij^
mum) Inr t;ii/fitim in b. and TH-TA. end b with uff,if(t^hnafnt}ntt/t (while MS. has the
corrupt leading lU-ajif'hram ipah)\ in c. d, *l H-TA. have thr x'-rsion t1t}rfpa{yi (TA.
ui^tamptt^yii) ttt ptlstrahhii dt iiny apsafAiAv Anu tUtttilm rnt1»t\ and MS., very cor-
ruptly, tij^'Ptfm pa^ydi nt ptisttafihii ni tiny ap\ijfti\t\m ihiu titifti 'utn.}nt. The comm..
hccflU'ss of the accent, takes the first two words in c as vocativi-s. I'pp. reads, in a, b,
kih'isam aksam aktam avihpuxmUntkh.
2. O fiercc-scoing one! realm-bearing one! [our] ofTcnscs, what hap-
pened at the dice — forgive ye that to us ; may there not come in
Yama's world one having a rope on, desiring to win from us debt (ry/^)
from debt.
Two ni the other trxts (TA..M.S., as al>ovr) have this verse also, and with unimpor-
tant vari.itions in tlie first half: TA. simply omits mtj in b. thus rectifying the meter;
MS. docs the same, l)iit it is also cnrtupt at the In'^inninf;. n-arlinf^ uj^Pifm pa^y^d
rUstrabht t k . l*pp. rends ;/. iA\(rahhrttit ktlviutm v. *f. i/. tiatUin vas ttti. But in
the difTif ult and dr)uhtful .set ond half, thr readings are so diverse as to show themselves
meie nurupt i^iirssrs : tluis, TA. //I'/i ttit man nuira it uimAno v. /. a. ava ; MS. m/mma
(p. nt't : fiti/t) rntin rnifiuJn tpxttn:i}no y. I. nidhtr AjafHtxa; I* pp. (C) uf nx'ikno nrm\-A
yaJ ttvitn/iitnttlno. The rnmm. rxpl.iiiis ftuin {nah) as eillur for rnin or for ftt'1/.
the piti/ir ivxX j^ives the l.ittri. of t<»uise. The /i/i/*/ text di>rs not divide ///i-. as it
doubtless sliotild, into «)V//.r-. in c: the comm. rcafis instead rii/ittnulnat (— t ntim gfa-
hUuni tibhitii rV<^<r;f)and ex]iiains ittf/iini//us liy iinnituiji^rahttntlyti /^1{tihaitak. 1 he
//-^wi. f*^^ * other texts, it will have be<n notic rtl, mentioned rAshahhrt instead of u^rajit as second
/ I' S^ • Apsaras in the first verse. Tlie irreRularilies of mrtrr are passed un noticed by the
• 1^ ''■***' Anukr. |_IlohtlinKk, ZI)M(f. Iii 250. dismssrs the vs. at lenf;th. Me sugf^ests for c«
• «*' ' I : ft^t*!^^ mikTHA no nA rnAm /rtstxmAno^ «ir perhaps n^d rnAm. \
r ■*• • •••
(."«' 4--/''^ 3. T<> whom [I owe] debt, whose wife I approach, to whom I go beg-
,.,••/ ** ' 1^^ V ging {Viii), O gods -- let tlu'm not speak words supeiior to mc; )x (two)
1^'"^ Apsarases, wives of gods, take notice !
rpp. has a liilff-rrnt vrrsi<in (mostly lornipt) of b, C, d : yam yAjttmtlmJH nbhyemahe :
vAte lAjtn -Ajtbhit »no *ttaftint n:,tJ »ft-: apiitnl ttpsitmsApitt/ittiw. The comm. reads
dbhvt'nti in b. Mv analogy with ttb/ivAt'fnt, the /f/i/</-text umlrr stands upAfnti as ttpti-
A/mi m a. Our /i7f/<i mss. also Ir.ive mA un.vrcntrd in c. The comm. paraphrases
ati/if * tit ft with mttii: iJiiApaniim littf 'ratihAniyiitam.
119. For relief from guilt or obligation.
[A'if/f(f/«f {ti'tfu.iliimtih). — Aj^nryam. trJttiubA.im ]
found al-^o in r.iipp xvi (in tin* veisivoider I, 3. :). All the verses occur, but not
to^rthei, ill TA. |_,See also v. Srhroeder. Ztrri //rj.. p. 15. fi>r vss. 2 and 3: and
7'ttb/ni^t'f A*«i.//m / w.. pp. 70. 7;. for 1. 2, and 3. J Is not used by V.iit.. nor by KAu^.
otheiwi*^!' th.in x\itli |^the whole an:t:Ak,t and withj hymns 1 17 and liS: see under
l^hvmns 1 14 and 1 17 J.
li.iiislalcil : l.udwij:. p. 442 ; (IriMith. i. 310.
3^9 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK VI. -vi. I20
1. If {ydt)^ not playing, I make debt, also, O Agni, promise {sam-gt)
not intending to give, may Vai^vanara, our best over-ruler, verily lead us
up to the world of the well-done.
Ppp. puts aham before rnain in a, and reads urum for ud it in d. The first half-
verse lias correspondents in TB. (iii. 7. I23) and TA. (ii. 4. i »). In a, TB. reads cakira
and TA. babhuva for krndmi and TB. puts ^/f/ after rnAtn ; for b, TB. reads j'^^/7'rf
\/dsyafit samjaj^ard jdfteb/tyah, and TA. dditsan vd sathjagdra j. [_For b, cf. vi. 71.3 b.J
2. I make it known to Vai^viinara, if [there is on my part] promise of
debt to the deities ; he knows how to unfasten all these bonds ; so may
wc be united with what is cooked i^pakvd).
The first three padas have correspondents in TA. (ii.6. 1 '), which reads, in a, b, veda-
yilnto yddl nrndrn^ and, in Cy pa^dn pramiican (i.e. -cam) prd veda; Ppp. also has /rtf
vedii instead of veda sdrvdn. Our d, which seems quite out of place here, occurs again
at the end of xii. 3. 55-60, which see (TA. has instead sd no muficdtu duritad avadyat).
The conim. explains pakvena here as panpakvena svargddiphaUna^ or the ripened
fruit of our good works. The Anukr. seems to allow the contraction sdi *(dn in c.
3. I.ct Vai^vanara the purifier purify me, if {ydt) I run against a
promise, an expectation {did), not acknowledging, begging with my mind ;
what sin is therein, that I impel away.
The whole verse, this time, has its correspondent in TA. (ii.6. i*), which, however,
reads for a v. pdvaydn ttah paviirdir {y\i^. means the same, but substitutes pdvayd
fills) ; and has, in d, d/ra for td/ra and dva for dpa. Ppp. has samgahun near beginning
of b. The comm. reads -dhdvdni in b, and explains by dbhimukhyena prdpnavdni ; the
minor Pet. Lex. suggests emendation to ati-dhdv- * transgress.* Ludwig emends d^am
to dsdm (referring to de7>a/dsu in 2 b) ; the reading and pada division do^im are vouched
for by Prat. iv. 72, to which rule the word is the counter-example ; the comm. explains it
by dcvddindm abhildsam, [^Bergaignc comments on root sU, Rel, Vid, iii. 44. J
120. To reach heaven.
[ Kdu^ika . — mantrokiadtvatyam . /. jagati ; 2. pankti ; j. tristuhh . ]
Found also in Paipp. xvi. ^Von Schrocder*s ^wes //ss,^ p. 16, and Titbhtgrr
Kathahss.y p. 76, may also be consulted for all three vss.J Not used by Kauq. other-
wise than with the whole anuvdka : see under hymn 114.
Tran.slated : Ludwig, p. 442; Grill, 72, 173; Griiruh, i. 311 ; Bloomfield, 165, 529.
I. If {ydt) atmosphere, earth, and sky, if father or mother we have
injured {/liiis), may this householder's-fire lead us up from that to the
world of the well-done.
The first half-verse is found, without variation, in a number of other texts : in TS.
(i.8.53), TB. (iii.7. 124), TA. (ii.6. 28), MS. (i.10.3), AgS. (ii.7.11); they do not
nq^rec entirely in the second half which they put in place of ours. Ppp. agrees with some
of them, reading agntr md tasmdd enaso gdrhapatyah pramuficatn. Only b is really
jagaif.
vi. I20 noOK VI. THK ATIiARVA-VMUA-SAMlHTA. 37^
2. May mother earth, Ailiti our birtl)place, brother atmosphcrCt [save]
us from imprecation ; may our father heaven be weal to us from paternal
[^uiltj; liavii)^ gone to my relatives (jtiffti), let me not fall down from
[their ?J world.
Tlie verse is fnuncl also in TA. (ii. 6. 2')« wliicli rentU at end of a «fM/ffi(Af inak ;
and, in c, d, hhavAu jtimi titttvi (jUtnitn itvA /) mA vtvitsi lokin . the variants arc of
tlic kincl that M-cm to sitow tliat tlic text \v;is uiiiiitrlli^ililc- to llie trxt makers, and that «c
arc i'Xf'(is:iMfr in finding it cxtrfimly ol)S( iirr. I'pp- I'tiiii^s no he*!]!.* Our translatif»n
implii'S ill b abhi{tj\iyik\^ luit tlur f^titfa rcatiiiij; \% ahhf'^asfvtl^ as if iiistr. ; the rcmiir.
understands •/p'J. Our ptttia inss. also leave /'/<! iin.it rented in d. I.udwi|; and <irill
supply iol-tit [o /*//»};}/ .- " from tite patern.il woild." 1 lie tonim. dividei altrrnati%cly
jtlmi tfirtrtl .mil j,intim ftx-t\. Tin* veise is a ^ood (fistubh^ thun;;li capalile of '*in|;
contracted to 40 syll.i1il«'s. *[f tiill repnits a i'pp. rearlin^ //<}/<! fur hhfiix\, althnu(;>i
I do not lintl it in Ixotli's ( oll.itions. Mit;i)t it represent a tnttz* »iN/thilittw ^J
3. Where the well-hearled, the welldoing revel, having abandoncil
disease of their own selves, not lame with their limbs, imdamagcd in
heaven (.TT<//;i;ri) -- there may we see [onr] parents and sons.
|_Tlie first li.ilf wr had at iii. zR. 5. J '1 he veisc 1 mrrsponcls to TA. ii. 6. 2"», Hhkh
reads mJtfttnff at end of a, tativaih .nuivilm at end c»f b. a^t.ttfirti^Mr (so I'pp. also) in
C (alsr) if/tf/,lr, litit this is fhnihtic'ss a misprint [_tlie rtNina ed. rrails in fart «f^rir/«fr J),
and pttAtam m putt Am at the end. Tlic coinm. leads tttnxulf in b. wilii part of llie mss
(imludin;; our I'.M.I.O.), and tt^rofiJi in c. LKor the sulistance of the vs., cf. Welwr,
.V*. lKf>.|, p. 7 7 5. J
121. For release from evil.
Found ;d- n in Paipp. x\ i. [For v.ss. 3. 4. f f . v. St l»r«»eder, /fr/r/ //ff., p. I 5. Tuhtmj^er
Kitt/tti /i\t., |». 75. J I'sed hy K.'mk;. (52. 3) with vi. /»3 and .*^4, in a litc for release finm
vaiitins ImiihIs ; L^md with tlic whole titturnla — sec uniler Ii. I14J.
'I lansl.iti'il : Ludwii^. p. 442; /innm-i, p. 1S2 <3 v>s. ) : (•lillith. i.311.
I. An iintier, do thou untie olf us the fetters that are hi;;hest, lowest,
that are \'aruna's ; remove {fiissti) from us evil-dreaming [.md] difficulty;
then may we go to the woild of the well -r Ion*'.
J'/sAfr,} (p. 7'/ iiiwi?) is dnul»tless 'antler* here, as at iii. 7. I. 2 |_whi< h M^J (t1iouj;li
neither K.'iu>;. nor the s( Iml. nur fturminni. make nvntinn nf su' h an aitiile ai usrtl
hei«-); I'lit it was net fssary lo r«'ndei it etynio|i»;;^ii .illy, to l-riii;; out the «ord plav
lietwet-n it .nnl 7/ u •; ; the rnmni. Iie.its it .is .1 p.iili ij-le ( : ;w;/r, ,1/; ). di«rrs;-')rf1ir|«.
as usu.d. t!i'* :i' I <-:it (tr.illy :-/ %,i f </'/.! |_>^/'/. iham. ^ 1150CJ). i he »r(ond ySalx is
the s.iMii' w iili \ ii. S3. 4 b. I he pinp'-r Te.»di:ii,'s in c .iri* ( see n««ti' t»i I't.'it. ii. S'») tintsz J-
pnwim M\'\ «'ii:./. whi* h the niss .ilriDst wilhuut e\i 'ptin'i • .i!:irc\ i.it" to niuw .\p ard
n/\:it, JMsi .»s tiity .liilwei i.ite ifiiti:*} to tf.tti}, nr. in \ s. 2 a, fi//;:-.}w to f»lj7t}m (irr
my M/ ii'f. i .*;.M SIT. here u'vis in his s,i/:/'.. /text /;/ j;iI. with all his authori
ties; Mill ti-\t Ills ;;.'/; 1.-1/, witli only cine <if ouis (O ): d<uil)tli'ss the true m«'trical form
is «/t .iu:.i *\n:At. [( I. Knth. /I).M(1. xKiii. iiw. note. J I'pp. I.w.ks our fccond half'
veise, !i.iv:mv: inste.id 2 a. b. *| 1 h.il is. it we t.ike l!ie onuriein es of the wonts ai a
whole in ,W ]
371 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK VI. -vi. 122
2. If (j'tit) thou art bound in wood, and if in a rope; if thou art bound
in the earth, and if by a spell (vdc) — may this householder*s-fire lead us
up from that to the world of the well-done.
The second half-verse here is the same with 120. i c, d, and seems unconnected with /•
the first half. Pg£. reads, in a, iidrund and rajvSy and omits the second half-A'erae^ (//^ t//*'-
thus reducing tlie hymn to three verses, the norm of the book.
3. Arisen arc the two blessed stars named the Unfasteners; let them
bestow here of immortality {avifta) ; let the releaser of the bound .idvance.
The first half-verse is the same with ii. 8. i a, b; compare also 111.7.4 a, b. The
verse corresponds to TA. ii. 6. U, which has, for a, ami [^AV. iii. 7.4, amH\yi subhAge
(iivi^ and, in d, etdd iov firdi V//.
4. Go thou apart ; make room ; mayest thou free the bound one from the
bond ; like a young fallen out of the womb, do thou dwell along all roads.
A corresponding verse is found in TA. (ii. 6. i <), which has, for a, vi jihJrsva lokan
krtf/iiy* and, at the end, dttu sva (also fiathds after sdrvdn). Ppp. reads at the end artu
gacha^ and this is what tlie comm. gives as paraphrase of dttu ksiya. The Anukr. seems
to authorize the contraction ^<?//y^ *va in c. ^^In z^ydnes iox ydnyds.\
122. With an offering for offspring.
\Bhrgn. — fiaucarcam. vdifvakartnafiam. trdistubham : 4tS-J*'g*'ff']
Verses 2, 3 arc found in Paipp. xvi. LFor vss. 1-3, cf. v. Schrocdcr, Z7('i'i //ss.,
p. 15, Tiihinger Kathahss.y pp. 75-76. J It appears in K«iu^., with the hymn next fol-
lowing,* in the savayajfias (63. 29), accompanying the offering of safhsthitahotnas ; and
th'' comm. regards vs. 5 (instead of xi. i. 27, which has the sslitiq ^ra/fka) as intended at
63. 4, in the same ceremonies, with distribution of water for washing the priests* hands.
Vail. (22. 23) has both hymns in the agm'stot/taj with vii. 4 1 . 2, as recited by the sacrificer.
[For the whole anuvdka^ see under h. 114. J •LAnd with x. 9. 26.J
Tr.inslated : Ludwig, p. 432 ; Griffith, i. 312.
1. This portion I, knowing, make over [to thee], O Vi^vakarman, first-
born of right; by us [is it] given, beyond old age; along an unbroken
line may wc pass (tr) together.
The connection in this verse is obscure ; prathamajis ♦ first-born ' in b can only
qualify *» I " grammatically ; douhtlcss it should be vocative, belonging to Vi^vakarman.
Tlie comm. connects dattam directly with bhdgatjiy which he explains hy fiakvam annam
haTirbhdgam vd. The second half-verse corresponds to TA. ii. 6. I5 c, d (in immediate
connection with the two preceding verses of our text also), which differs only by reading
at the end carema ; and this the comm. also reads. The first half-verse in TA. is as
follows : sd prajdndn firdtigrbhnffa vidvan prajipatih prathamajA rtdsya; and Ppp.
apparently intends a similar reading ; it has tath prajdnan ity ekd^ as if the verse had
occurred earlier in the text ; but it has not been found.
2. Some pass along the extended line, of whom what is the Fathers'
[was] given in course Cidyancua) ; some, without relatives, giving, bestow-
ing — if they be able to give, that is very heaven.
vi. 122- HOOK VI. THE ATIIARVA VKDA-SAMIilTA. 372
The TA. (ii.6. 3'-) lia.% this vrrsr also, with variants: dnM stimiaranii for tarmmii
(licsiiU-s tlir pKTfdin;; if//w) in a. iyntutvat at end of b, ytitchtlt at end of C (i'pp* has
'Ytn httti), \til-nu''t\f)stts^ Un {U\\t}n :iiid rw)/// for et'ti in d. I'oth romm's understand
rtttifn 'dcl>t* with pit*yam^ ami abatttihi't (whi* h appears to be used adverl)ially) as
e(|uivaK-iit to abatulhiivtis: thmi^h uilliout ticsc rnciants, thry too reach heaven as
rewaid of titeir K'^^^* ^'l*P- ^^^^ *^'^** ^' '<^'' '^^ '" ^- *|_'I he Calc. cd. seems to have
^tU'fithilfiAil/i j;'-. Docs it intend ^ttl-Hiivtin (ur ^ttl'ft*h'iltt — see if ram. § 701 ) jJ i?*- ?J
3. T:ikc yc (both) hohi after, take hold lotjethcr after; to this world
they that have faith attach themselves (sftc)\ what cooked [offering] of
yours is served up in the fire, combine yc. O husband and wife, in order
to the ;;uar(lin«; of it.
The vrrs" is frMind in TA. (ii.^. 2'), with ^reat (iitfcrrnccs of text: auit- is omitted
at tiic lK*;;iiuiin'4 ; //////, si'cond time in a, is adcntrtl, ii»M ; b is santtlHtitn fAnthdm
avttttiti i^/if tt'fttt : pu»tt\m fi»r pak",\\m is rr.ui (also l)y I 'pp.), and yiUi inserted before
at^Miffi, in c*: d is tii\tftt}i t^o/tt\vr ^/i*i jtixtlptit! itUh ftibhethiipn. 'Ihe readinf; /Iri/Zilm is
against onr uudi-rst.iniliii}; pak'u\f>t of the liody prepared by fire for tlie other iiorM.
The ccMuin. explains p*\rh'i)tatft Vs prixksiptttm, tlie TA. comm. \\\ partprAptiam, Imtli
app.it ently taking it finni lodt 77('. The vetM? is fuund repeated, with a different be^in*
nini^, as .xii. 3.7. It is too irre;;i]l.ir to l)e tailed a .simple tfi}tubh. *|_Thus rectifying;
its meter. J
4. Tlie «;reat sacrifice, as it j;ncs, with mind. I ascend after, with fervor
(} tiipas), of like oii«;in ; bcin*; called upon, O Agni, may we, beyond old
aj;e, revel in joint reveling in the third firmament.
The (.f>nne< tion of mStiiwA^ in a. is proliahly with anvarohHtni : that of U\pas%k is pos-
sibly w'itli iAyontK ; liut the ccunin. uiHlerstan<Is ** conrp'r ted with the sarrifice in virtue
of )>cnanre *'; he ^ues.ses two <Iil*ferent interpretations of the half- verse. Some of our mss.
(I'.M.II.p.m.O.) make in c the combination iiptihutH *^rtf which the metrr demands.
Neither tiiis verse nor the next [save its a J has anything of Tijtijratl character.
5. These cleansed, purified, worshipful maidens I seat in separate suc-
cession in the hands of the priests {In-a/ifftan) ; with what desire I now
pour you on, let Indra here with the Maruts i;iant mc that.
The verse orrurs a^ain, with a slii;lit variation at the end, as xi. 1. 27, and, with much
more important dilferenres. as x.(). 27. In the latter verse, insteail of the figuratii'C
appellation "maidens,** we have " tlie di\lne waters (fern.)** themselves addressed.
123. For the success of an offering.
I^Tarilv prose. 3 an- 1 4. J Tliis liymn and the one following are not found in FAipp.
Its uM's li\ K.n:i; .iiid \'.iit. witli hvnin 122 arc explaine<l under that h\mn. And %sv
3 > appe.ir -iNii \\\ \'.»ii. \2. 1;). at tlie p,tf-:\trt saiiilke, in the ceremony of /r«ffr'«rairtf.
LI'»»r tlie wlinl-: .f.'u: ,'ti.i. sec under h. I 14. J
I raiislitt d . .Muit. \. 2')3 (\ss. 2, 4. 5): l.mlwi;;. p. 3^2 ; (iiilfith. i. J13.
373 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK VI. -vi. 1 24
1. This one, O ye associates {} sadhdstha)^ I deliver to you, whom
Jiitavedas shall carry [as] a treasure ; the sacrificer follows after well-
being ; him do ye recognize in the highest firmament.
The verse is found also in VS. (xviii. 59) and K. (xl. 13). VS. reads, in a, sadhastha
and te (for vas)\ in b, it puts f^vad/tim ?Sitv ilvdhilt; in c, it x^?i<\s a. yajndpatir vo dtra.
The comm. explains sad/tasthds as meaning * the gods' (^saJia tisf/tanfy eka/ra ri'arge
loke sf/tdne yajamdnena saha nivasanti).
2. Recognize ye him in the highest firmament ; ye divine associates,
ye know [his] world there ; the sacrificer follows after well-being ; make
yc what he has offered and bestowed plain for him.
This verse is found with the preceding in VS. (xviii. 60) and K. (xl. 13), and also in
TH. (iii. 7. 13^-^), but with considerable variants : at the beginning, efdm jdnCitha (TB.
jdulhlf) par- \ in b, TB. vfkds for divds^ both VS. and TB. sadh- unaccented, which
is better, but VS. vida^ which is bad, and both nipdm asya (for lokdm d/ra), which
gives a better sense ; for c, \iO>\\ ydd Hgdchdi pathibhir devayindis ; in d, both istdpurt^^
and VS. krnavdtha^ but TB. krnutdL both without sma.
3. O gods ! O Fathers ! O Fathers' ! O gods ! who I am, he am I.
The comm., with his usual carelessness of accent, takes the vocatives here for nomi-
natives. Some of SPP*s authorities (also our O.s.m.) omit the accent of the first asmi.
4. He do I cook, he do I give, he do I offer; [as] he, let me not be
parted from what is given.
That is, from my gifts, or their reward. The comm. counts and explains these two
quasi-verses, 3 and 4, as one. But the Anukr. reckons this hymn (as it reckoned the
preceding one) as one of five verses (paficarca), and SPP's edition as well as ours so
divides. |_' As that one, I cook * etc. would be an equally accurate translation, and the
English of it is not so harsh. J
5. In the firmament, O king, stand firm ; there let this stand firm ;
know of what we have bestowed, O king ; do thou, O god, be well-willing.
The comm. understands the addresses of this verse as made to Soma, which is very
questionable ; and the ** this " of b to be the istdpurtdm^ which (or dattdm^ vs. 4) is
right. It must be by a corruption of the text that the Anukr. does not define the verse
as an anustubh.
124. Against evil influence of a sky-drop.
\Atharvan (nirrtyapasaranakdmak). — mantroktadevatyam uta divydpyam, trdisiubham^
This hymn, like the preceding, is not found in Paipp. It is employed by Kau^.
(46. 41 ) in an expiatory rite for tlie portent of drops of rain from a clear sky. In VSit
(12.7) it is used in the agnistoma when one has spoken in sleep; and vs. 3 separately
( 1 1. 9), in the same ceremony, when the man who is being consecrated is anointed. [^For
the whole anuvdka^ see under h. 1 14. J
Translated : Ludwig, p. 498 ; Griffith, i. 314.
I. From the sky now, from the great atmosphere, a drop of water
hath fallen upon me with essence {rdsa) \ with Indra's power, with milk.
vi. 124- HOOK VI. Tin: atharva-vkda-sammita. 374
O A^ni, [may] I [be joined], with the meters, with ofFcrings, with the
deed of the well-dr)ing.
The vrrsr is fiuind also in IKiS. i. |6.6, with siinrlry variants: mJ for mdm in •:
apatac ihtvCiya at ciul of b; in c, d. tHiUuiu} *ham <I *o7/// brahmand gufitak smJtrfJ
krtena ; these arc in some rcspn ts inipruviMnciits, especially in relicvin|; the embaras'
sin^ lack of a veih in uur m'kwuI half-verse. The conirn. paraphrases antankiAi l>y
AkHf^an ntttnfj^hat, \\\\\\ supplies sttmi^ttuhfya (as in the tianslation). It is a little
Mran<;e th.it the fall of watiT out of the air upon one is s«> uncanny and must Im atoncci
for {aki\\odtikapldvantuivui^Anti).
2. If from a tree it hath fallen ii))nn [me], that is fruit; if from the
atmosj)h('re, that is merely Vayu ; on whatever part of my body, and what
part of my garment, it hath touched, let the waters thrust perdition away.
This verse also is found with the prereilini; in UCiS. ; which in a reads 7'rkul^rJii atkra-
patttt and omits A//.* and in b n-ads r<if/ t-i7 for ytuii auf! tat for ut ; for c, it has yatrd
vrksas t^tnuvAi vatut vAs,th^ and in d htitihantAm instead of nHtiantu. The comm.
• ft m ■ '
par a pii rases tlie end of b thus : vAyvHtmaka eva ;/J *swdkafh tiosAya. The third pAda
is really y#/i,M/ A
3. A fragrant ointment, a success is that ; gold, splendor, just purify-
ing is that. All puriTiers [are] stretched out from us; let not perdition
pass that, nor the niggard.
That is. the uncanny drop is all these fine things. The comm. renders /w/riz/Mw in b
by ^utftfhikttttifti ; antl </#//// in c l>y '• above." The sect»nil p.ida is redundant by a syiiable.
With this ends the twelfth ttniivAkti^ of ii hymns and 38 verses; the old Anukr.
s.iys as/titftti^if tiiuhia^ah .
125. To the war-chariot: for its success.
Found also in IViipp. xv. (in the vrrse order 2, 3, j ). This hymn and the next are
six successive verses of KV. (vi. 47. 2^ -31 ), and also of VS. (xxix. 52-57), TS. (iv. 6. 6«').
and MS. (iii. 16.3). In Kaiiq. (15. 1 1 ) it |_and nut xii. 3. 33J is used in a kiattlc-rite,
with \ii. 3, 110, and otitir p.is.sai;vs, as the kinj^; mounts a new chariot (at KAu^. to. 34
and 13. f> it is ix. 1. 1 that is intendeil [so SIT's ed. of the comm ti» iii. i^tj. not vs. 2 of
this hymn). In \'.iit. ('>. S). vss. 3 a:id 1 are rpif)tf'd in the aj^9i\AJiifya^ accompan\in|(
the .sarritii i.d i;ift nf a chariot : and the IiMnn (t>r vs. I ). ia tlic snttra (3). 1 5), as the kin|[
mounts a ch.wiot.
Transl.itrd : l)y the \\\' . tr.inslatDrs : and, as A\'. hymn, by Ludwiy; af*ain. p. 459;
(irilt'itl), i. 31. J. .Srr also Ih'rKai;jnc- Henry, . !/«/«//*•/, p. 155.
I. O forest tree! stout-limbed verily mayest thou become, our com-
j)anion, fuitbeier. rich in heroes; thou art fastened together with kinc ; be
thou stout ; let bini who mounts thee con<|uer things con(pierable.
Then- is no ditfeTiMn »• of ir.idjtT^ am»>ni; all tlic versions of this veise. (iH. (i. 2. 21 )
ipiotes iiN ptiitiKa I .ind so d«ws M(iS. at i n 5; c f . p. i^;J; Mil. (i. 7. l^) has the
wliiile VI I SI*. •' Kin*'.'* as oftrn elsewhere, means thf ]iiofluc'ts of cattle, here the stri|>s of
cuw hide ; and '* Irn* " tlie ihisi;; maile <»f its \vo«»d \y{. i. 2. 3, note J.
375 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK VI. -vi. 1 26
2. Forth from heaven, from earth [is its] force brought up; forth from
forest-trees [is its] power brought hither; to the force of the waters,
brought forth hither by the kine, to Indra's thunderbolt, the chariot, do
thou sacrifice with oblation.
Or all the nouns (" force " and " power " in a, b as well) are to be taken as accusatives
with yaja * sacrifice to.' Ppp. reads dbhrtam at end of a, and parisambhrtam in b. All
the other versions have the better reading ivrtam at end of c; and so has the comm.,
followed by three of SPP's mss.; and it is accordingly adopted in SPP*s text. MS.
reads avrtam also in b, and antdrikslit instead of dja udbhrtam in a. TS.\'S. have
divdh /- at the beginning. The comm. refers to TS. vi. 1.34 as authority for identifying
the chariot with Indra's thunderbolt.
3. Indra's force, the Maruts* front {dfilka), Mitra's embryo, Varuna's
navel — do thou, enjoying this oblation-giving of ours, O divine chariot,
accept the oblations.
All the other versions have vdjras for djas in a, and Ppp. agrees with them. AH, too
(not Ppp.), combine si *mam at beginning of c, against the requirement of the meter.
The GIJ. quotes (i.2. 21) the pratfka of this verse in its form as given by our text.
LPpp. has dharunasya for vdr- in b.J
126. To the drum: for success against the foe.
\Atharvan. — vdnasfatyadundubhidevatyam, bhuriktrdistubham : j. purobrhaii virddgarbkd
tristubA.]
Found also in Paipp. xv. * (but i c, d and 2 a, b are wanting, probably by an error of
the copyist), and in the same other texts as the preceding hymn (RV.VS.TS.MS. : in
MS. the three verses are not in consecution with those of 125). Applied by Kiiug.
(16. 1 ) in a battle rite, with v. 20, as the drums and other musical instruments of war,'
duly prepared, are sounded thrice and handed to those who are to play them. Vdit.
(34. 1 1 ) has it (also with v. 20) in the same ceremony as the preceding hymn, as the
drum-heads are drawn on. ^^Seems to be an error for P&ipp. vii.J
Translated: by the RV. translators; and Griffith, i. 315. — See also Bcrgaigne-Hcnry,
Afanueij p. 156.
1. Blast thou unto heaven and earth ; in many places let them win for
thee the scattered living creatures {jdgat) ; do thou, O drum, allied with
Indra [and] the gods, drive away our foes further than far.
The second pada is translated according to the reading of our text, whose vanvatiim^
however, can hardly be otherwise than a corruption of the manHidm of tlie other texts ;
i'pp. has instead sunutdm^ which is yet worse ; the comm. has vanutdm, MS. has, in
d, drat for durat.
2. Resound thou at [them] ; mayest thou assign strength [and] force
to us; thunder against [them], forcing off difficulties; drive, O drum,
misfortune away from here ; Indra's fist art thou ; be stout'.
The other texts have, in b, n(k sianiki for abht stana^ and, in c, protha for sedha^
and the plural duchunds (save TS., which gives -ndn^ m padaAtxX, -ndn).
\''\.126 IIUOK VI. TIIK ATIIARVA-Vi:i)A-SAMnnA. 376
3. Coii(|iaT thou those yoivlcr ; let these here conquer ; let the drum
spiMk loud L:«/:'<7i/-J [mu\] cIlmt ; let our horse-win^^ed heroes fly to<;ethcr ;
let our ih.iriot-incii, C) Indr.i, i-oiu|Ucr.
All tin* «itln'r l»\ts li.iir, fni a, i1 *m/ir 11/1I />fit/yt1:'irf/iivr *tfhih^ an«! 7'tf7'iti/ifi at rnt\
of b; in c, f<»i /«//<//////, 11/ '«///// (lull MS. (thtifitu)\ while I'pp. rc.uls pttiayttnti. AmAw
iK'furc ;ti\a (iimlitlcsft nuMiis titniitt, and is .so translated ahnvr ; l>ut thr /fi(/«itrxt uriflrr-
stands it as amiim^ and the com in. supplies ^atfnsenAm. '1 he Antikr. contrails the firM
pada into 9 syllables.
127. Against various diseases: with a wooden amulet.
\lihr;^j\th^n\i%. — i'tfn>tff>ityt7tn n/it pilsmtin^ffttniu/niityttnt. tiHustithh»im : J J-^-^f-MJC*^* ]
This hymn is not found in I'aipp. Kauq. apj>lics it (2^1. 33 30). with ii. 7, 25 ; vi ^5,
109; viii. 7, in a licalin^ rite against vatious disrases (with this liyinn S}»ecially the
person treatcfl is to lie smeared Iiy means of a splinter of /fi/ff(<i. ih. 34; and the head
of one seized hy Varuna is to l>e anointed, ih. 39;; aiitl it is reckoned (note to 26. I) to
the tttlnttjMtl^tifiii ji^*tfj*t-
Translated : /immer, p. 3Sh (with runiinrnt on the diseases) ; (■ritfilh. i- 31$ '• liloom-
field, 40, 530. -See also (irohinann, ///i/. .s///</. ix. 3<i'i ff.
1. Of the vidradliti, of the red baUiui, () forrsl-lrec, of the visdlfaka^
O herb, <Io lh<)u not leave even a bit {} f*i^itd).
Or lt^hifii%vti may l>e a separate* disease (so rcnderrd liy /imnier : the romm. takr9 it
as either •* retl " or " [a disease «»f ] the MimmI **). 'I he form viitUfiiita is (;ivrn here on
the streni^th of SI'P's anthoiities (amoiii; wliirh livini; icpeatersnf the text arc inrluded).
'*'M ^ and of the comm., whirh derives it (unn r«>ot srf* {vntMutm uifpati)^ with sul>stitutinn
•1 K^- ' "^ of / f or r ; no manuscript is to be trusted to distinj^uish //*i and tya^ ami, as the word is
unknown save in this hymn and in ix. K and xix. 44, there w.is nothing tit show which was
, \\\ »^ the true reach n:;. 'I' he ct)mm. takes ciitiif\tu^utapal*l{ti''fkut to be the tree aildre^srd,
and vitfttt'ihii as '.'itittranti^th vfn»ttn'i{f.uih ; also //(lAi as nttfJn>t^/tiifttm ituttam mJn-
Stiffi : ari'l /'ii/i}fii as hiut^rtJuhft. \_ihiT P.M.K.I.O K.K. cimdiine Ti%tiifntlatr*'»ttt*ihe
in n.tfhnif.} in C; ami lliis .SIM*, adopts in his text, ami re|Kirts nothing to the cnntrarr
from his autlioritics. J
2. The two ii'stii'les th.it are thine, C) biildsii, laid away in thine arm-
pit ('i kiilrsii) -I know the rcmtMJy for that, thr nftulni, a lookin^upon.
Mv a hlunderini; ronfusion of <' and { in transrription. in our text and in the Indtt
I'ffbotum foiinrleil upon it. the fttim ^ipitdfu instrail of i/-has l»ren adopted for thn
vrrsc. The « nnim. r<'a«ls cff'iiJfu. and calls it •• a kiml of trrr having this name": per
liaps ,if*u.t:t is thi* tme fmni. We slintiM have experinl rather ///./■ or ^// than dfa-
(p /'/.}:/ in b ( ii/'.ii'' i/it"t i?j»//.fw.- and kaksf - hilhtttniiU^ comm). (_■• Testicles" :
perhaj>s swillin^js of the axillary "Jjlands/'J
3. TIk' xisdif^alii that i.s of the liinbs, that is of the ears, that is in the
eyes -\vc i-j»it the risd.y.iltt, the vidnid/id, the heart-disease; wc impel
awav downward lint unknown \dLsfUii.
\
377 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK VI. -vi. 128
128. For auspicious time: with dung-smoke.
[A/AarT'dii^tras (ftaksnlrardjdttam candramasam astdut). — caturrcam. sdumyam ; ^akadhii-
madevatyam. dnustuhham^
.*)/
Except the third verse, this hymn occurs also in PSipp. xix. Besides the ceremony (/ /^ ^ ' ^'
reported under vs. i, Kilug. has the hymn (50. 13) in a general rite for good fortune, / /
with vi. 1,3-7, 59, etc. etc.; and also, in the chapter of portents (100. 3), in an expia-
tory ceremony on occasion of an eclipse of the moon {somagrahana^ comm.) ; vs. 3,
too, is specially quoted in the asiakd ceremony (138.8), as accompanying a nineteenth
[oblation ?].
Translated: Weber, Omina und Portenta (1858), p. 363; Zimmer, p. 353 ; Griffith,
i. 316 ; Bloomfield, 160,532. — Bloomfield had already treated it at length, AJP.vii. 484 fT.,
and JAOS. xiii. p. cxxxiii (= PAOS., Oct. 1886). A pencilled note on Whitney's ms.
shows that he considered the propriety of rewriting the translation and comment for
vi. 128.
1. When the asterisms made the qakadhflma their king, they bestowed
on him auspicious {b/iadrd-) day, saying '* This shall be [his] royalty."
(^akadhuma (with irregular but not unparalleled accent: sec my Skt, Gr. § 1267 b)
means primarily * dung-smoke,* i.e. smoke arising from burning dung (or else the vapor
from fresh dung). According to the comm., it signifies here the fire from which such
smoke arises, and then, ** on account of inseparability from that, a Brahman " *, and he
quotes TS. v. 2.8'-»: "a Brahman is indeed this Agni Vaigvanara." The Kauqika-
Sutra, in a passage (50. 15, 16) also quoted by the comm., says that, with this hymn,
* having laid balls of dung on the joints of a Brahman friend, one asks dung-smoke,
"what sort of day today?" He (of course, the Brahman*) answers "propitious, very
favorable." * Prof. Bloomfield takes ^akadhtlma to be out-and-out the title of a Brah-
man, "weather-prophet*'; but this seems not to follow from the Sutra, also not from
the Anukr., and least of all from the hymn. The P&ipp. version differs considerably
from ours (but nearly aj^^rees with one in an appendix to the Naksatra-kalpa : see Bloom-
field, A J P. vii.485) : it xtTi^s yad rdjdnam ^akadhiimam naksairdny akrnuta : bhadrd-
ham asmdi prd ^yachan tato rdstram ajdyata. The accent of dsdt in d is not explained
by any known rule. 'LSo Ke^ava to Kauq. 50. 16. J
2. Auspicious day ours at noon, auspicious day be ours at evening,
auspicious day ours in the morning of the days ; be night auspicious day
for us.
That is, may each of these times be free from omens and influences of ilMuck. The
Ppp. version runs thus : bh, astu nas sdyam bh. prdtar astu nah : bh. asmabhyam tvam
{akadhuma sadd krnu (as in the appendix to the Naksatra-kalpa just cited).
3. From day-and-night, from the asterisms, from sun-and-moon, do
thou, O king (akad/iftma, make auspicious day for us.
This verse, as already noted, is wanting in Ppp., but its second half nearly agrees
with that of the Ppp. version of vs. 2. The accent in b should be emended to sHrydcan-
dramasabhydm^ as is read below |_sec W's note J in xi. 3.34. The first half- verse is
metrically irregular.
vi. 128- BOOK VI. THE ATHARVA-VEDA-SAMIIITA. 37*
4. Thou who hast made auspicious clay for us at evening, by night,
also l)y (lay - to thcc as such, O ^akadhhma^ king of the asterisms. [be]
always homaj^c.
I 'pp. rr.ids iik^uat at rnrl of a, ami pnltar for nalttim in b. All the mso. leave
akttms iinarcrntcd, ami STP. artoidin^Iy f^ivcs akaras in his text; ours emends to
Our may ccmjfi tiinr that it is \\\c Milky Way. wliii h is not unlike a thin line of
smnkt* drawn arross tlic sky. that is the r<*al kiii^ of the astrrisms, and that its initta>
tioa'hy a lolumn of the heavy smoke of Imrninf; dunj; is what was rcHcd on to counter-
art any evil intluenccs fioin the asterisms ; r)r tlic i>chavior of suih smoke, as rising
upward or hanging low, may have been really a weathcr-siji^n.
129. For good- fortune : with a ciAcApfl amulet.
Found also in Paipp. xix. (in the verse order 1. 3. 2). I'sed hy K.luq (36. 12), with
vi. I 3() anil vii. 3S, in a rite rel.itin^ to wr>men, for f^otiil fortune : one h\T\i\% sJlyvarcaia
on the head aftrr tlie f.ishion of an heih (aniidet? Ke<;. and the lomm. explain as the
root i>r llower of the fi7/7/7;i/^«i/^//w) and enters the villaf^e.
'I'ranslated : (irilt'itii, i. 317. - - The assotiatioii of tins hymn with \y} seems to imply
something more spet itir than ** ^ooil fortune/* namely. luck in love for a man, as Ke^ava's
yitsvti (not r#irrilr) sAttb/nli^yam it/utii indicates.
1. Mo with a portion {/f//((i^tf} of (ifi((i/*ti, together with Indra [as] ally,
I make inysidf portioiu'i) ; lot the niggards run away.
Tlie mss. M under over the word (<f//f<//////7. .SPP. r** ports only f J//(#r/^/ifii as variant
(read hy two of liis) : ours liave that, and also (tlMStiv/fiti and itifi^.ir/na ; our text
reads wrfm;:ly {ilfi(iiyt'ftii [^1 nrrei t to {iln\tif*/tttt y Tl»e romni. j»ives ui^h^itpkema^ and
etymo1«>i;i/es it ari orilini;ly as fiiw ♦ {itpfut ! Ppp. has sUn^a/^fnti. The {in^a/^d is
the PitiWfiiiit u'iif, a tiec distinguished for hcif^ht and heauty. The rnrnm. understands
hftni^tt tl)rou;;Iiout the hymn as the jjorl lUia^a. (^Tlic refrain recurs at xtv. 2. 1 1 J
The Anukr. ovei looks the la( k of a svllat)le in C
2. With what portion lliou didst (jvcrcomc the trees, together with
splendor, lluTcwilh make nie portioned ; let the niggards run away.
Ppp. ii'arjs «piite differently : tj/h,} ://•;,?/; ,ttf\ iHtai'tii stlLifft htiffffut medtnA : ezJ
ffil el« .
3. The poitidu that is hiind, that is reverted (futuihstird)^ set in the
trees therewith make me poitioned; let the niggards run away.
rxlmnely ol's« me. There lUMst Im- s«»me spet iai ronnrclion, unclear to us, l^tween
//s.ti^tt and ^if!^.t/>,}. The imnin. understands the j;o*l Ithaca, and explains the epithet
• Miml ■ i:i this \iis.' l»y rifmini: ti> Niiirkta xii. 14, ami 'reverted' as rrlatini; to his
(onseipniit in.dnht) tit ^o f^nrw.iid: he le.uU tl/itt/itf in b for tl/:i/*rs. and pictures the
Mind r.'i.ii^a .\s lunniii:; a;;.iinst the ines a!uTi;j his way! The sense is, |>crhn|>s, the
foitiiiie o! lif.Mi(\ t!>.it lies iruisii.lr .md witlidiawn in the trees. Ppp. enils b with x-rtte
^.7 »/;/./''■. a:;rl !j.is. f«»r c. ''^'■'.s,*'' '" '•'•'.•/• *'/."' ^,ift^i:/*f.
379 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK VI. -VI. 131
/; rr
130. To win a man's love. o • -
I ■
f ^/f: u?7
' /
[Atharvdngiras. — caturrcam. smaradevatdkam, dnu stub ham : i . virdtpurastddbrhati!\
Hymns 130-132 are not found in Paipp. Hymn 130 and the next two arc used by
Kaug. (36. 13-14) in a women's rite (dusfastrfva0karanakarmant\ comm. and Kcq.),
with strewing of beans (comm. and Ke^. read mdsdn^ not mdsasmardn)^ burning of
arrow-tips, and |_comm. and Keq.J piercing of an effigy.
Translated: Weber, Ind. Stud, v. 244; Ludwig, p. 515; Grill, 58, 174; Griffith,
i. 317; Bloomfield, 104, 534.
U
1. Of the Apsarases, chariot-conquering, belonging to the chariot- ;<'•' '
conquering, [is] this the love (smard) : ye gods, send forth love; let yon ., • (/^'^
[man] burn for (anu-ftic) me. /
Our fiada-mss, (and three of SPP's) make in a the absurd division rdthaojite : '
yiftdm^ for which the comm. reads rathajite dhlndm (= rathena jeiavye mdsdkhyt , ^r, fT^fTx r
osadhi; and dhydnajananlndfn). The two terms (of which one is an evident deriva-
tive of the other) have so little applicability to the Apsarases that Grill resorts to the s* /'* ' '*'"'""
violent and unacceptable measure of substituting arthajitdm drthajitindm. Perhaps ^.^...,
nothing more is meant than to mark strongly the all-conquering power postulated for
the Apsarases in this spell. Ludwig renders smara by *< love-charm." The comm., in
spite oi priyas in 2 b and amusya in 3 b, thinks it a woman whose love is sought.
2. Let yon [man] love (smr) mc ; being dear, let him love mc : yc
gods, send etc. etc.
At the end of padas a and b is added ///', not translated; it appears to indicate an
expression of the purpose for which the gods are to despatch love. The comm. com-
bines vss. 2 and 3 into one verse, thus restoring the norm of the book ; but the Anukr.
calls the hymn one of four verses, and that is plainly its value in the present state of the
text. [^11 ere the comm., alternatively, allows that it may be a man whose love is sought. J
3. That yon [man] may love me, not I him at any time, ye gods, send
etc. etc.
SPP's //ir/rt-text, probably by an oversight, leaves amusya unaccented; the comm.
undauntedly explains it by amftm siriyam,
4. Craze {iin-maday') [him], O Maruts ; O atmosphere, craze [him] ;
O Agni, do thou craze [him] ; let yon [man] burn for me.
131. To win a man's love.
\Atharvdngiras. — smaradeiHitdkam . dnustubham . ]
Not found in Paipp. (like the preceding and the following hymn). Used by Kau9.
only with the preceding and the following hymn (see under the former).
Translated: Weber, Ind. Stud. v. 244 ; Grill, 58, 175; Griffith, 1.318; Rloomfield,
104, 535.
I. Down from the head, down from the feet, thy longings (dd/it) I
draw down. Yc gods, send forth love ; let yon [man] burn for me.
Again the comm. stupidly (see vs. 3) understands a woman to be addressed.
vi. 131 HOOK VI. TIIK ATIIAKVA-Vi:i)A-SAMHITA. 3*>
2. () Anumati, assent to (tinNmnu) this; O design (titftii), m.iycst
thcui constrain (sam-nntu) this. Yc j;<h1s, scn<l etc. etc.
* I )f*si:;n ' {tiknfi) is fviili-iitlv lii-if .1 jH-fsnrjiric.iiinn y^iimkittf^Abhimitninl i/(r:.//.l.
coinin.), as is oftrii Afiiint,ttt * assriii.' Nn ins. hmMn »itf/nif, witimut anent, an'l SIT.
.!( ' ordiii;;!)- piiiits »,if//iij in liis text: ours emends to uttmitx ; tlic* conirn. takrs tUc «'^«l
as a n'MHi ; ii/,iw in a lie explains I>y f/ziii/ii/'/u/ttu/ttw. 'llic Anukr. liccfU not thai t?ir
fust p.ida is i}i)tulth.
3. If (.iv/V) thou riinncst three leaj:;ues, five leai;ues, a horseman's day's
journey, thence shalt tiiou come back ; thou shalt he father of our sons.
The pioprr division of A\a\i in c is doubtless a : tiyttM\ v^ldih is, however, read only
hy one of srr's /^f/i/ii niss. : the others ^ive tl ifi/if/ (( f. 4} Ayafi at vi. (k>. 2) or *t>ai%ittt,
and this last is adopted by SIM'.-- quite unaci oinitahly, .since such accent ami such
division ilo not properly f:o toj^ethrr in any piufti-iQxK.
132. To compel a man's love.
I, ike the two preccdinj; hymns, not found in I'.iipp. t'scd by Kau^. only with its
two predecessors (sec under 130). Tlie metrical drfiuitions of the Anukr. are artificial
and wcuthless.
Translated: Weher. /«</. StuJ. v. 245 : (fiiO'itli, i. 3I'); llhHjmficM. 104, 535.
1. Tlie love that the gods j>ourrd within the waters, greatly burning;.
together with h)nging that I heat for thee by Varuna's ordinance
{ti/itinntitt).
2. The b)ve that all the gofis poured etc. etc.
3. The love that Indrani j>ouied etc. etc.
4. The love that Indraand-Agni poured etc. etc.
5. The love that Milra-andA'aruna poured etc. etc.
133. To a girdle: for long life etc.
4 /'V''/' J
Totinil ^W^ in I'.iipp. v. Isrd liy K.iu*;. (.17. 14 i;) in a rilr of sort rry, with the
fiillowin'^ hvniM. toi dtie pirpaiatiou i»f t:iicllt' and st.itf ; vs. 3 aNo alone in the same
litr (ir I u. ^^ith l.i\ini; lu<-] of hi,ih,\kt\ on the file; and vss. 4 and 5 twice in the
///^i/'.'./i.//;./ M-ii-mniiy ( ;(•. 1 : ^7. 1), with tyinj; on a ^iidle.
I laiisl.itt d : I.iidwi:^, p .\\i\ 1 itittith. i. 311).
I. Thi* god that bound (Mi this girdle, that fastened [it] together {sam-
ttUh), aU'I th.it j«»iiu'd ( i .7/ ) |it] for us, the god by whose instruction wc
move n).iy he seek the fuilli«*r shore, and may he release us.
rpp. has i:i c the siriijul.ir i..'»,f'/;/. • I'u[tli<*r shore' is a familiar expression for the
end of A dii::i u!l or dans^vrous ait i>r pt«uess {^p^at ipnta^ytt karmAntik lamApUam^
38l TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK VI. -vi. 134
comm.). Tdsya at beginning of C in our text is a misprint lor ydsya. |_The Anukr.
refuses to sanction the contraction^/ *////l//f.J
2. Oflcrcd to art thou, offered unto ; thou art the weapon of the seers
{rsi)\ partaking {pra-af) first of the vow (vratd), be thou a hero-slayer,
O girdle.
For the first pada Ppp. has only the single word dhuta (perhaps by accidental omis-
sion) ; in d it reads avTraghnf. The comm. explains vrata as cither *vow* or, by the
usual secondary application, * milk etc.* (kslrddikam) ; to abhihutii in a it prefixes an
expl.matory sampata-,
3. Since I am death's student (brahmacdrin)^ soliciting from existence
(} bhutd) a man {pdntsa) for Yama, him do I, by incantation (brd/tman),
by fervor, by toil, tic with this girdle.
It is the duty of a Vedic student to beg provision for his teacher. Ppp. begins b
with bhfitdu niryacan. The comm. reads nirydcam^ explaining it as first person sing.
(^ — y(ice)\ The result he takes to be "by this binding on of a girdle I impede the
progress of my enemy." Pada c has a redundant syllable.
4. Daughter of faith, born out of fervor, sister of the being-making
seers was she ; do thou, O girdle, assign to us thought {matl)^ wisdom ;
also assign to us fervor and Indra's power.
All the mss. (and both editions) accent babhuva at end of b, as if a relative were
expressed or implied in the line somewhere. The verse is really mixed tristubh and
jai^atf J |_a v&jagail only by count ; noxnt looks like an intrusion J. ^As to the combi-
nation -sa rs-f see note to Prat. iii. 46. J
5. Thou whom the ancient being-making seers bound about, do thou
embrace me, in order to length of life, O girdle.
134. To crush an enemy with a thunderbolt.
\^Quknt. — mantroktavajradevatyam, dnustubham : t. par Snnsiup tristubh ; \2,\^ bhurik
jp, gdyatrt.]
Found also in Paipp. v. Used by K5u^. (47. 14) in a rite of sorcery with the preced-
ing hymn (which see); and also later in the same rite (47. 18), with smiting down the
staff tiiree times. • |_The Anukr. text is here confused and defective. Its reading (with
tlie probable omission supplied in brackets) is, antyd bhurik \anustub^ dvitlyd bhurik'\
trip add gdyatrT.\
Translated : Ludwig, p. 448 ; Griffith, i. 320.
I. Let this thunderbolt gratify itself with right (frtdsya), let it smite
down his kingdom, away his life ; let it crush [his] neck, crush up his
nape, as Cachipati of Vritra.
Ppp. reads vratena instead of rtasya in a, meaning perhaps mrteMa^ which would be
a welcome improvement, suggesting emendation of our text to -tdm mrtdsya * on the
dead man/ anticipating the result of the action imprecated in the next pSda. Ludwig
translates as if it were amrtasya^ which is to be rejected. The comm. renders it simply
vi. 134 HOOK VI. Tin: ATHARVA Vi:i)A-.SA«MITA. 382
* trutli, or s.irrifirc/ Aiul rcf^nrds a staff {ifhtlrvamiino tfantfttk) as intended by vajrm ; in
b lir appainitly nverlnok.s and omits ara. The /«"/</• reading at end cif c is usmiMS, as if
for •ht'ttt, dii.d : t!u* tfunin. rcids -/h'lh, wiiitli is doulitlcss the ri>;ht form. l*pp- Icavra
citf tlu' last pad a, Imt whrtht-r it riids c with usnihtih I am not informed. I*p|>* >l*o bas
jlvtitn {i\x jiritiitn in b, and sktittdhA for f^flvAi in C- |_Thc Anukr. ignore! \\itjagaH
rh}thm of a and c.J
2. nrncalli, beneath tlicin that arc above, hiddrn, may he not creep
out nf the cartli ; let him lie smitten down by tlie thunderbolt.
|_Th(.' niatk whiih .shouhl dividt* a from b \% not notcil in Wii collation- lxx>k. J
3. Whoever scathes, him seek tlioii after; whoever scathes, him
smite; the crown of the scather, O thuiulerlxdt, do thou cause to fall
followinpf after.
The l.ist |Mda is very ol)S(iiif; it is rrndt-ird as if it meant an invobinf; of the
<iffen(h*r's crown (.(////«;/; A; .- ~ f/Viiwi tttaii/iytttft\<t, comm.) in the fall of the thunderliolt
(litit the comm. explains iin^'ttfittim hy anttiomam /), Tpp- reads st\YakaM for ti'atm
in c. The Trat. f:ivrs an obi ft' r t/t\ //#/// (iii 43) on the d<'rivaiion of siwiin/a (or limdm/).
The nuiiiial ddinition [^M////|,' ttnu^fnp^ seems to be omitted in the Anukr.
135. To crush an enemy.
[ (^ul f.t. — M.I ft ft i'lftit.tjfttiffx iify,tf*i. dnujfubh.tm J
Found also in Taipp. v. I'sed liy K.iur. (47.20) in the same rite of sorcery as the
two prccrdin;; liymns. with tlie diieition "do as stated in the text.**
Translatril : <;[iiriih. i.32t.
I. Wiien (Yiit) I eat, 1 make strength; thus do I take the thunder-
bolt, cutting to pieces (p?/) the shoidilers of him yonder, as Cachipati of
ri( //i'"-/'"*' Viitra.
I* '
Sliifiif/iJ 'shoulder* is always plural | in AV.J, .and .so is not precisely er|uivalent to
^lu^^ » *1"^ wtml usrd to iiiuhi it. I'pp. lias for b, Tiiy/ii/// anuftilfttyafi. Pada b is deficient
1^ .J4^^ unless wi' rrad :'«/.•>*////.
,.# -'^ _^^ 2. W hrn I drink, I drink un, an up-drinker like the ocean ; drinkine
^^- Ji'*^ , * . . » t»
^»/' ' .11*4/ ^M> the buMth of him yoniler. we drink him up.
.b^^. 1*|*P- cii'idiinrs siitfiiniftii *;i7 in b. and reads, in c. d, Ji/w//i'i7//> sampirAmy sJk^m
3. Whrn I swallow, I swallow up, a swallowcr-up like the ocean ; swal-
low in l; up tlu* bicMth nf him yonder, we swallow him up.
Pjip r« .ids, fni c. d. //i?/:i7"/ i/w//'!.? tiiw>i^/f 1///; Utimt^iftinty ahiith ^ifam. The accent
j^i^^tfii ill Mt'i \o\\ isd(Mi1>tlrss wroni: (I'-.id i.';'.jf//i ), hut it is read by all the authorities,
and ai ( f>iihnv:iy is adopteil in Ixitli editinns
383 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK VI. -vi. 137
136. To fasten and increase the hair.
[AfAarvan (kffavardhatiakdma/i [vtfaAavynAj). — X'iinaspatyam, dnustubham : s.i-av.J'/'.
sdmni brhatiJ\
Not found in Paipp. Used by Kauq. (31. 28), with the following hymn, in a remedial
rite for the growth of the hair.
Translated: Zimmer, p. 68; Grill, 50, 176; Griffith, 1.321 ; Bloomfield, 31, 536.
1. Thou art born divine on the divine one, [namely] the earth, O herb ;
thee here, O down-stretcher, we dig in order to fix the hair.
The comm. explains the plant addressed to be the kdcamdcl etc. ; niiatnfis apparently
not the name, but an epithet, ** sending its roots far down " (jtyakprasaratta^fld, comm.).
2. Fix thou the old ones, generate those unborn, and make longer
those born.
The comm. strangely divides vss. 2 and 3 differently, adding 3 a, b to 2, and leaving
3 c, d to form by themselves a verse. |_Thc Anukr. scans as 9+9. The •* verse " seems
to be prose. J
3. What hair of thine falls down, and what one is hewn off with its
root, upon it I now pour with the all-healing plant.
The comm., as well as all the mss. (and both editions), has the false form vr^cdU
(for vri^cydte).
137. To fasten and increase the hair.
\Atharvan {^ke^avardhanakdmah\vltahavyah), — vdnaspatyam, dnustuhham,^
Of this hymn only the second verse is found in Paipp. (i.). It is used by Kilu^. only
with the preceding hymn, as there explained.
Translated: Ludwig, p. 512; Zimmer, p. 68; Grill, 50, 176; Griffith, 1.321 ; Bloom-
field, 31, 537.
1. [The herb] which Jamadagni dug for his daughter, [as] hair-
incrcaser, that one Vltahavya brought from Asita's houses.
Or vftahavya may be understood (with the Anukr.) as an epithet, • after the gods had
enjoyed his oblations.' The comm. takes it as a proper name, as also dsitasya (^krsna-
ke^asydi Uatsathjfiasya munek),
2. To be measured with a rein were they, to be after-measured with a
fathom : let the black hairs grow out of thy head like reeds.
Tlie Ppp. version, though corrupt, suggests no different reading. The comm., startled
at tlic exaggeration implied in abhl^u^ declares it to mean ** finger.'* In d, asitis is read
by all the mss., and consequently by both editions ; it apparently calls for emendation
to dsitds^ and is so translated {krsnavarndh^ comm.). The Anukr. seems to admit the
contraction nade *va in 2 c, 3 C
3. Fix thou the root, stretch the end, make the middle stretch out,
O herb ; let the black hairs grow out of thy head like reeds.
Vdmaya, in b, \syamaya in pada-X^xi^ by Prat iv. 93.
vi. 138- HOOK VI. Till-: AlIIARVA-VKnA-SAKlHIT/V 3*4
138. To make a certain man impotent.
[Ath.ifs.ifi (llih.iliirfuliiiMiih) - /iir'iniri.im. x\inttsfaty.tm. dnustuhktim : J. j^tkyd/mn^ta \
rmind (I'xrrpt vs. $) nlsn ill r.ii{)p.i. I'scd l>y KTiik;. (-I'^. 32) in a rite of 9orrrr\.
witii \%t.i|i|iiii!;. rnisinni;. and lniuin^ urine and (.im 1*5.
'rr.insl.ilril : \Vi1.»t, /i:,f. Stu,L v. 24^; I.iidwi^. |>. 470; firldnrr, I'fif. SiuJ. i. 13I
(in pait anil with (onuni-nt); <*iihitii, i. 322, 474 ; ISlntinilicltl. 108, 537.
1. Thoti art listened to, C> herb, as the most best of plants; make
thou now tliis man for mc impotent {klilui), r>/rtp/-\vcarinj;.
The o/*ii(A is some In-ad ornament worn distinrtively l>y women (comm. itf txya^ja-
nam). (tcMntT holds tliat ofttt^tt^ kutlfa (vs. 2), ami kuptiha (\s. 3) all mean alike
* horn.* i'pP' rcacis /i}//;;/tii/// In c. '1 he comm. docs not attempt tu identify the plant
addrc'ssi'd.
2. Do thou make him impotent, <>/r7(-f/- wearing, likewise make him
/'///-//'iz-wearin^ ; then let Indra with the (two) pressing-stones split both
his testielcs.
rpp. f^ivrs kfti'il for krMii \\\ a (romhinin^ trfvo */-). ^nd reads throu^linul Jt/ii a
and i^/*ii{t/ ; in c. d it has uhhi\hh\i'im asya ^r. ttubo hhimtttv «l. The rnmm. explains
kiiflftt as - /'/'(i/. ami ipiotcs from TS. iv. 1.51 tiie phrase sini^'iiif iMkaftirtii imkmriwS
s7'Jt//*>i\i1 : and also, fri»m an unknown source, itaniikf^a-'iitl .\tfl rvrl/ toMii^ah putuiak
3. Impotent one, I have made thoe imj>otent ; eunuch l:tit//in), I have
made thee eunuch; sapless one, I have made thee sapless; the tufim
anil the kintiiui we set down upi»n his head.
Till" rr»mm. explains lutltit line as *a n»*t of hair' {kt^tffAh) and Jtum^a as 'it*
ornan>rnt * (/i/*/i/ '•//<// i7/ii7w), and he fpiotes from Ap(,'S.x.'). 5 thr sentcme rf/rrf /*/
9ti\htt\i ku'nKiK'Ufif,itn aJhy ti':,ttt\ Holli wurds plainly sit;nify stime dislincli%-rlr
Wdinanish hrad-drrss or oinann nt. I'pP- '*''*<l^ t*^' Also our I'.s.m ) kuMhham in e;
and, fi»r c, ttfttr,/f/r /t'iI *k,iftim ttfttul 'puxo'si.
4. The two goflmade tubes that [are] thine, in which stands thy virility.
those I s])Iit for thee with a pe^;, on yon woman's loins {wnsi'ti).
rpp. « omMnrs i7w/#M'i/ '<//// in d (Imt perhaps the true uimkit*} reading?). ^I'pp. ha«
a ;;.i{> in tiu' piaie win-rc our \.tm\»tyt} stands.!
5. As wi»men split reetis with a stone for a cushion, so do I split thy
member, on yon woman's loin.s.
In lliis and the j)riMr lin:; vrrsr, the comm. strangely connects ntiitktUt^s «ith the
precrilin;; noun {n.t./iilit, 0'/''0 '^'^d supplies ^iitU'ils with awu^Vils.
r
130- To compel a woman's love.
TIji' liyrnn is wantiriv; in I'lipp K."iur.(3^>. 12) uses it in a women's rite, with vt I ro
and vii. 3S : >■ e under llic furnirr.
385 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK VI. -VI. 140
Translated : Weber, Jnd. Stud, v. 247 ; Ludwig, p. 515 ; Griflith, i. 323 ; Bloomfidd,
102, 539.
1. Nyastikd hast thou grown up, my good-fortune maker; a hundred
[arc] thy forth-stretchers, three and thirty thy down-stretchers. With
this thousand-lcafcd [herb] I make dry thy heart.
The great majority of mss. (including of ours all but Bp.D.R.Kp.) read sublidt^athk-
in b, and tliis appears to be probably the true j<i///////J-reading, with -bhag- for pada-
reading, although neither the Prat, nor its commentary notes the case; SPP's edition,
like ours, reads -bhag-. The comm. explains nyastikd as nitarUm asyantl * casting
downward* (namely, any omen of ill-fortune). OH. takes it as a fern, of nyasta-ka
* stuck in*; perhaps rather diminutive of nyasta^ as if 'something thrown down, cast
away, insignificant.' The comm. understands the plant intended to be the ^ankha-
puspika {Andropogon aciculatus : "creeping; grows on barren moist pasture-ground.
Of very coarse nature. I never found it touched by cattle." Roxburgh). The comm.
ends vs. i with the fourth pada, adding the other two to vs. 2.
2. Let thy heart dry up on me, then let [thy] mouth dry up; then dry
thou up by loving me; then go thou about dry-mouthed.
Read perhaps rather rndtn-kdmina. Two padas count an extra syllable each.
3. A conciliator, a love-awakener (.^), do thou, O brown, beauteous one,
push together ; push together both yon woman and me ; make [our] heart
the same.
The mss. hardly distinguish sy and j/, but ouns, in gener.1l, seem, as distinctly as the
case admits, to read samusyala in a; yet SFl*. has -uspa- (noting one ms. as re.iding
-usya-), and, as he has living scholars among his authorities, the probability is that hfy^l^
he is right. Save here and at xiv. 1.60 (usyalAni or usfia-)^ the word appears to be
unknown. The comm. gives a worthless mechanical etymology, samyak uptaphalU
satl. |_ls samubjala (root nbj) intended, as a marginal note of Mr. Whitney's sug-
gests ?J Our P.M.I, read amum at beginning of c.
4. As the mouth of one who has not drunk water dries away, so dry
thou up by loving me, then go thou about dry-mouthed.
The third pada has a redundant syllable.
5. As a mongoos, having cut apart, puts together again a snake, so,
O powerful [herb], put together the divided of love.
This capacity of the mongoos is unknown to naturalists, nor have any references to
it been noted elsewhere^^.^^^^^ X^H^. ^ «/^^ £. fitS'^ /. f99t/^ , ^.4l^.<AeOkrtXJU,
140. With the first two upper teeth of a child.
\Athaf^*an, — hrdhmatiaspatyam uta mantroktadanta(fevatyam. dnustubham : /. ttrobrhati ;
2. uparistdjjyotismatl tristubh ; j. dstdrapankti.^
Found also in Paipp. xix. Used by Kauq. (46. 43-46) in an expiatory rite when the
two up))cr teeth of a child appear first; it "is made to bite the things mentioned in the
text ; and both it and its parents are made to eat of the grain so mentioned after it has
been boiled in consecrated water.**
Translated: Zimmer, p. 321 ; Grill, 49, 176; Griffith, 1. 323 ; Bloomfield, no, 540.
vi. 140 HOOK VI. TMK ATHARVA-VKDA-SAKIMITA. 3*6
1. The (two) tipcrs ihat, having grown clown, desire lo devour father
and mother -- those (two) teeth, () Hrahmanaspati, make thou propitious.
O Jatavcdas.
Our r.M.W. read Irnu/ti in d. I*I>p., instead of d, i^ivts the refrain of 2, 3 : w.'J
Aims- vie.
2. ICat ye (two) rice; eat ye barley; then beans, then sesame; this is
your deposited (//////Ar) portion for treasuring, ye (two) teeth ; do nut
injure father and mother.
Inst'Md of ti//itf ffiiisam in b, I'pP- has utiLulm atttini : it hr^in!! c with ta for ^f<f.
and rrnds -dhryam in d. '1 he comm. |iara])liiasrs raintftiftfYilvn by ramaniyapkaiJk^ a .
The verse (.S^8:.S^7•♦ 11-42) is but ill-drtine«i 1)y the Anukr. j^It b really an
anustubh \%itli d ratalcitic, and with a tti\tuhh refrain. J
3. Invoked [are] the two conjoint, pleasant, very propitious teeth ; let
>vhat is terrible of y<Mir selves (A/////) go away elsewhere, ye teeth ; Mo m»t
injure father and mother.
I'|>p. reads tJi^ho9\\u x,ij-u/ii sti>if:iifiint}n^ and adds at th<r end tinyat^tt v*}m tarn: ..•
ji^hontm ttstti. The comm. re.ids /iirrT'Jf in c. 'I lie definition of t!ir Anukr. fits ihr
veisr (7 f <*< : n M I ) very ill. LWhilnry's notes show that he liad su%|icctCf1 MrM/.l*
to l)(* a misreading for t/#r///f>//. and thr latter is the f<ifni a< ttialiy j^iven by the /««/«' jr
/ V/ /'I •////// ,- but fuillu-r noti's slwtw that Ifp. and the Anukr. read wi-. With Ihexn
aj;rfc SPl*. and llie coinni. ami Tpp* Corrett the Ituiex nriurdingly.J
141. With marking of cattle's ears.
[ / '/, T f I «i 1// 1 f . ■ — «/j r ifta m. J u u 'ftt f" 'la m . ]
Found also in Paipp. xix. (in the verse order I, 3. 2). t'sed by Kati^. (23. 1 3- 1^1) in
a ceremony ff)r welfare called ttfttil-tnmtin: after due prepaiation ami cercmonv, the
ears aie cut ^%ith vs. 2. ami the liloorl is wiper) <»|f and eaten (hy the creature, ccimm )
with vs. 3. The hymn is leikoneil (note to I'l. i) to the pustika w%inttas. The Khul.
also uses \s. 2 in tlie ceremony of Irttinj^ loose a bull (noli* to 24. 19).
Translated: I.udwii;, p. 4'm); /inimcr, p. 234; CfrilVith. i. 324.
1. May Vayii collect them; let Tvashtar stay fast in order to [their]
prosperity; may Indra bless them; let Kudra take care ft)r [their-
numbers.
SamAk.it at (p. j/zw -I //•!»*.;/) niii^ht. of « oursr, also lie indirativr {utm A %%kaf%tt^.
rpp., ill C. C(mit>ines inJttI "f'/tytt, and reads bfuiat, \\\ d. it has *7-ir j',uhiUu for titit-
Stitn. 1 lir I oiiim. lenileis tihuxtidi'fi by tf/ti}nt\titii^ and d by pJtii}s\iAtiifogaparihJtrrma
bit/i; f/t liirotu.
2. With tin* led knife {srdti/ii'ii), make thou a pair (mit/tHPiii) on
(theii] two eais; the A<jVins have made tlie maik; be that numerous by
pin;;eny.
Tlio (oinm. exj^lains »/.•///;?#».•/•/.■ as stf lf'un*t'\i*nai\jtit (ihniiftt, and re;*arrls it aft
api'lieil to the (alt's eats [If tlie 1 onim. is ion ret on tliis point, as is aItof«ethcr likelv.
3^7 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK VI. -vi. 142
til is marking the cattle's ears with marks resembling the genitals is a bit of symbolism
most interesting to the student of folk-lore. J The * red ' knife is doubtless of copper
Lso also the comm.J. TpP- reads laksmi in c (but laksma in vs. 3). MB. (i. 8. 7) has
the first half -verse, with krtam for krdhi,
3. As the gods and Asuras made [it], as human beings also, so, O
A^vins, make ye the mark, in order to thousand-fold prosperity.
142. For increase of barley.
[ Vifvdmttra. — vdyavyam. Snustubham.\
Not found in Paipp. Used by KILuq. (24. i) in a rite of preparation for sowing
seed, and reckoned (19. i, note) among i)\t pusttka mantras; vs. 3 also appears (19. 27)
in a rite for prosperity, with binding on an amulet of barley.
Translated: Ludwig, p. 463 ; Zimmer, p. 237 ; Grill, 66, 177 ; GrifHth, i. 324 ; Bloom-
field, 141, 541. — See also Bergaigne-Henry, Manuel^ p. 156.
1. Rise up {ti/'fri), become abundant {ba/ui) with thine own greatness,
O barley ; ruin (mr) all receptacles ; let not the bolt from heaven smite
thee.
Instead of mrnlhi in c, the comm. reads vrnlhi^ which he says is, * by letter-substi-
tution,* for prnlhi * fill* I Prnlhi would be an easier reading, and was conjectured by
Ludwig, and before him by Aufrccht (KZ. xxvii. 218). |_Griffith and Bl., *fill them till
they burst.*J
2. Where we appeal unto thee, the divine barley that listens, there
(tdt) rise up, like the sky ; be unexhausted, like the ocean.
The comm., in b, reads tatra and achavad-,
3. Unexhausted be thine attendants (iupasdd), unexhausted thy heaps ;
thy bcstowers be unexhausted ; thy eaters be unexhausted.
The comm. explains upasadas as here rendered {^upagantdrah karmakariih) ; the
translators conjecture * piles,* a meaning which cannot properly be found in the word.
By a strangely unequal division, the thirteenth and last anuvdka is made to consist
of 18 hymns and 64 verses ; the quoted Anukr. %^ysyah parak sa catuhsastih.
The fifteenth prapHthaka ends with the book.
Some of the mss. sum up the book correctly as containing 142 hymns and 454 verses.
r,()ok VII.
Lllu* seventh hook is made uj) in(i>tly of hymns of one verso
or of two ver.ses. No other one of the books i.-xviii. contains
such hviniis. IJook vii. is thus (hstini^uishecl from all the othtM>
of the three ujiiind (h visions (to wit, ho<)ks i.-vii., b(K)ks viii.-.\ii..
and books xiii.-xviii.) of the .Atharvan C(»lle('tion, and constitutes
the close of the first of those divisions. If we (.(»nsider the fa< ts
set forth in the i>araL;ra|>hs introductory to tiie forenoinj; book>
(see l^.iijes i, 37. Sj, 142, 220, 2S1, and especially 142), it appears
that this division is made up of those seven books in which the
number — normal or prevalent — of verses to a hymn runs from
one to ei^ht. Or, in tabuhir form, division one consists of
VciM'iioiin: "-* — '
I ni 2
\l.
I.
4
II.
5
III.
6
IV.
v., ha\inf! for
S, ir^jirtti^rly.
10
1 1
J
4
3
3
1
1
li\mn«.
.1
■i
*
>
(i
7
8
•J
II
\»-f*^*
In the Herlin edition, the book contains one hundred and
eighteen hvnins: of these, fiftv-six are of i verse each, and
twentv-six are of 2 verses each; while i»f the remaininu: thirlv-six
'riii-r'* .lit* ill iliis liifk
C'l'iitaiti'iTij; i«»'jii ctivly
The I I -versed hymn is 73; the 9-versed is 50; the S-versed arc
2(), ^(k 07: the 7-versed are 53. 60, io<): the 0-versed are 20. 76.
Si,.S2. The whole book has been translated bv \'i« tor Ilcnrv.
A<" //:■;•«• I'll dc lAtluxria-l'ida inxduit it commiUii\ Paris, itSga.j
^As llu" Major Anukiain.iiii .spr.iks f>f Ijook vi. :\s the trxa-sukta Jtt}n,ftt, /r. iiy^fii^r /.•.
so It *«j>' iks ol Iwiok vii. ;is tin* t'Lt-fai ^itltit ki}n*iti. I'ri-stininMy. thcn-forr, wr arc lo
rc^.iri! the- i-vcim-iI Iwinii as llu* ••noun " of tlic l)«M»k. ah)iou;:h the 2-vcr%ed h\inn i%
uiirli tii.iMy •■ I'lcv.ilrtil "I I Srr p. c\ii\ I
L I hr liiMik is «liv ii'.iil into t« ii i//;;#7 i7/*ir-K'""P^- 1 li*"**'. wiili ilic luinilier of h\tn:i«
in e.ii 1i ):ioi]{i .mil tiu* iiuinl>i'r of vi-ims in i\u h ;;ioii]). art* heii' );i\t.'n :
A;iin.ik.i
llNTiin- :
V» i-i-^
I
'J
3
>3
5
.s
i:
;i
lo
r> 7 s
w y .'5 1- ;» •« -• j^
Inl.il. ."" \rrs«s. "I hr < >M Anukuru.ini si'i-ins t»» t.»k»' 20 vitm-s as the norm of tSe
#i»;r«r .; ! .' I l.<* T.ii is i n«!» \. I' . in tins Imnk hutnlurs llie verses thrni:i;h c\t\\ anuz-^tj
\\i!'w.il s* ji.ii t!.Tiv; i!m' liwiiJiN I! ):nin«Kt.ilnr <livii|rs the iintt: Ikit inlu Inmr-*
(!;i>:i) tAii t«t liiMT in iMi li iinu: ,ti.i). wiiit \\ " h\inMs," hi>\%r-\rr. .ire notiii:i;; more than
inri !i.iii:> .i] di ■ .i !s of \risi s witli an ov<r{>l>is nr slioitai^e in ttic ia%t "tin ail'* «!ten the
389 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK VII. -vii. I
total is not a multiple of ten: thus, anuvdka i has three hymns, of 10 + 10+8 = 28 verses ;
2 has two hymns, of 10+13 = 23 verses; 3 has three hymns, of 9+10+ 1 1 =30 verses ;
4 has three hymns, of 10+10+10=30 verses ; and so on. His anuvdka endings coin-
cide throughout with those of the Berlin edition, save that vii. 23 is reckoned by him
(and P.) to anuvdka 2 instead of 3, thus making for 2 and 3 his verse-totals 23 and 30
instead of 22 and 31 (as the Old Anukramani gives them) and spoiling the count of his
first •• decad " in 3. (Note that vii. 23 is ?i galita-vtrst.) His " decad "-divisions cut in
two our hymns 26, 45, 54, 68, 72, 76, 79, 97, and 109. J
\\i should here be mentioned that the Bombay edition, following the Major Anukra-
mani, counts hymns 6, 45, 68, 72, and 76 each as two hymns. From vii. 6. 3 to the end
of the book, accordingly, Whitney gives a double numeration of the hymns : first the
numeration of the Berlin edition, and then, in parenthesis, the numeration of the Bombay
edition. As against the former, the latter involves a plus of one from vii. 6. 3 to vii. 45.1;
a plus of two from vii. 45. 2 to vii. 6S, 2 ; a plus of three from vii. 68. 3 to vii. 72. 2 ; a
plus of four from vii. 72. 3 to vii. 76. 4 ; and a plus of five from vii. 76. 5 to the end.
Finally it may be noted that vii. 54. 2 is reckoned (forwards) to vii. 55, but that this
does not affect the hymn-numbers save for the verse concerned. J [^Respecting book vii.
in general, see pages cli, clii.J
I. Mystic.
[Afharz'aft (brahmavarcasakdmah). — dvyrcam. dtmadevatyam. trdistubham : 2. virdtfjagatt.^
Found also in Paipp. xx. Used by Kau^. (41.8), with iii. 20 and v. 7, in a rite for
success in gaining wealth; and again (59. 17), with v. 2, in one of the ceremonies for
obtaining various objects of desire (kdmydni)^ with worship of Indra and Agni.
Translated: Henry, 1,47; Griffith, i. 327.
1. They cither who by meditation led the beginning (dgra) of speech,
or who by mind spoke righteous things {rtd) — they, increasing with the
third incantation (brdhman)^ perceived (fnan) with the fourth the name of
the milch cow.
The book, like some of those preceding, begins with mystic, obscure, and un-Athar-
vanic material. The comm. has no idea what it means, and sets forth his ignorance at
immense length, giving about five quarto pages of exposition to this first hymn, with
wholly discordant alternative explanations. The verse occurs also in tCi^S. (xv. 3. 7),
with samviddnds for vdvrdhdnds in c, and manvaia in d. For 'vadann in b Ppp. has
vadeyann^ and turyena at beginning of d. For pada a cf. RV. x. 71. i ; for d, RV. iv.
I. 16 and v. 40. 6. The commentary to Prat. i. 74 quotes dhltl as an f-fonn with non-
pragrhya final, because not locative ; and the /<i<//i-text docs not treat it z^pragrhya.
2. He, [as a] son, knows his father, he his mother ; he is {bhuvat) a son
{silfui), he is one of generous returns {} punannagha) ; he enveloped the
sky, the atmosphere, he the heaven {svdi) ; he became this all ; he came
to be here (a-b/iu).
This verse is found also in TS. (ii. 2. ii*) and TB. (iii. 5. 7>), with difference of read-
ing only in the second half, where they have durnod antdriksam sd suvah sd v/fj'd bhiv0
abh-. Ppp. so far agrees with them as to have, for d, vi^vdm bhuvo *bkavai svdbhuvat.
The comm., in b, i^kts punarmaghas first as two separate words {fnagha=dhana) and
vii. I JJOOK VII. TIIK ATMARVA-VKDA-SAMIIITA. 39O
then a% a cnmpnund, ** with wealth repeatedly incrcaseil in spite of j^iving of much wealth
to his pi.iisci.s." 'I he romment to 'IS. s^\% /fMntiA /^ttntir ya/awdtidjra dAiax^ya^m
dhanam yasya, 'I'iic verse lacks two syllables nf l>«>inf|[ a fullyci^'ti//.
2. Of Atharvan.
[,'//4iir7'<iw (as al>uve). — litm.u/rx-itty.tm. ttitstuhham ]
Found also in Taipp. xx. I'scd l>y Kau(;. (59. 18: the comm. says, hymns 2-5) in a
kdmya ritr, lik(? the preceding hymn, with vi. 33, and vii. 6. 7, 16; and, accordini; b>
the schol. (note to 30. 1 1 ), with hymn 3, in a healing; ceremony.
Translated: Henry, 1.4S; (".liiriih, i. 32H.
I. Tat her Alharvan, ^od-rolativo, innlhcr's ftutus, fcithcr's spirit {dsN)^
yoiinj;, who uniUrslaiuls {cit) with the mind this sacrifice — him maycst
thou j)roclaim to us here, here mayest thou speak.
r])p. has a rpiitr dilfe-imt vfisimi, re.idini; T'/f7't/<jV<"i/"/ instead of devahandku»n in
a, and, fore, d, ttytim tilt- fit *f//r/.nyti i//i.r//:it m/\ii\\ti fiytis p%i9idhlr tifi,i^yat. The
second h.df-vrrsi* is tin' s.inie with 5. 5 c. d Ix-hiw. '1 he aiterit of the se< ond ikti serm«
to rccpiiie th.it thr senttiii'e he diviijrd hetwecn the two. |_ The comm., to l>c sure. rea«i&
the sci ond ///</ as accciillrss. Cf. ihttm. § i 2^1-3 c.J
3. Mystic.
Koiint! alsi) in P.M[ip. x\., .iml in n wliole series of otiier texts: TS. (i 7. I?'). MS
(i. 10.3), A(,S. (ii. 19.32), KrS. (XXV. 6. 10). <,(,S. (iii. 17 i ). KTum;. (15. 11 ) prr-
scrihcs tin* usr, witli vi. 125 and vii. iio an«l a coupU* t)f single veises from elsrwhere
(the coMnn. iiu hnles also vii. 4), in the hattle incantations, while the kinj; and his
charioteer mount a new < li.iiiot ; as tn its mcdiral employment with \ii. 2. sec under the
Litter. \'.nl. (•). 15) usrs the verM- in t!»e j.7^-«/w//-i///.r ccicmony. on leaving the aacrifi-
cial litit.
Translated: llenrv, 2, .iS ; (;iiniih, i. «2S.
I. Wy this shape (vist/iti) j;eneratiiif; exploits {Idrvara), he verily,
fiery, a wide way for space (?:v/;/i); he went up to meet the sustaining
lop (r;>;v/) of the sweet ; with his own self {ftinfi) he sent foith (intvit}
a self.
*I he ti.insKition j;iven is jtuuly m-chanii al. Willi c compare iv. 32. 7 c The comm..
after a ni\sti(- expl.in.ition, ^ives as altirnative annthei, a^i itidanl witii the use in Kiu^ .
m.iKini^ tht' \riM* iidate t«> a kinv; who ilrsirrs virtorv and mounts a new chariot, lie
uridi'tsl.inds 7 m//:./ as i/i ; mil f>tiif,i U'\l hmjIs 77 r///,/ |^.is durs STT'sJ. The other
t<-\ts .ill .v^irr with nuis ill A. b(!>Mt IS. undrrst.iiids ii^ttuis, MS. •:tt//iu); in C (if iv.
3.'. 70, .ill* !i.i\«' ir'.'.tf lirn. IS ill I t r.ts />ni/t. ;ind M.S. r«'.nls /»,i/)-,f// <!)il//, for d.
*1 S-K^.'S !'. \v»' f:'./i,7'v y.i/ t.tuthi'tih ttifium t}ii>t\tit>i^ and M. S. A*,' S. <,'(,". S. s: im |,f/
f.ifi.tfi /.it::^fft i}/fti\,ttij. pniilith^s iJtfiivtt/ti is thr* rearlinjj \t\ Iw qiven at tlie end of
thr vns-' in nur tfxt ; it is ai ripti-d I'V SI' I' . lu-iny favt»red hy th^* considerable majority*
of Ins autliniitit-s. .»n it is n( mus ( Mp.W. I" K p m. ii/; K. has yttn/tt). I'pp. hj»
d't,it:ft.'r in c * L At,'S.r</S. in f.i- t li.ivr i/w; J [K', S. has Ai«:,?v; J
391 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK VII. -vii. 5
4. To the wind-god with his steeds.
[AfJiarvan (as above). — vJyavyam. trdistubham.^
Found also in Paipp. xx., and in a series of other texts: VS. (xxvii. 33), ^'H.
(iv.4. i«5), MS. (iv.6. 2), TA. (i. ii.8»«), AgS. (v. 18. 5), g^S. (viii. 3. 10). Kau^.
(41. 26) teaches the repetition of the verse three times at the end of a rite for the benefit
of a horse ; and Vait. (9. 27 : misunderstood by the editor) applies it with an oblation
to Vayu at the cUturrndsya sacrifice.
Translated : Henry, 2, 49 ; Griffith, i. 328.
I. Both with one and with ten, O easily-invoked one (masc.) ; with
two and with twenty, for [our] wish; both with three and with thirty
separately yoked ones drivest thou, O Vayu — those do thou here release.
All the otlicr texts read svabhute at end of a, and niyudbhis at beginning of d (the
Pet. Lex. proposes the latter by emendation here) ; VS.(JB.QQS. have viit^ad for viit-
^atya in b, and (as also A^S.) combine vdyav ihd in d. SPP. strangely reads suhute
in a, against the meter, and against the great majority of his authorities, but with the
comm. (who, however, explains it as if it were suhilte). The comm. explains fsidye by
ydf^dya^ then again by icchdydi ; Henry translates " for conquest.** Ppp. has, corruptly,
cd M//// (probably intending the reading of the other texts); in d it gives viyudbhir
vdyuv iha td vi ///-. The second pada is only by violence iristuhh, |_" One,'* ** three,**
and '• those ** .ire fern.: the comm. supplies ** mares.**J (_ Perhaps the force of the accent
of vAhase is, ** If thou drivest with 1 1 or 22 or 33 (no matter how many), — here release
thou them.*' See Gram. § 595 d. J
5. Mystic: on the offering or sacrifice.
\^Atharvan (as above). — fahcarcam. dtmadevatdkam : trdistubham : j. pankti ; 4.amistnbh.'\
P'ound (the first two verses only) also in P5ipp. xx., and (the same verses) also in
other texts, as noted below. Kau^. takes no notice of the hymn ; but it is prescribed
by Vait. (13. 13), in the agnistoma ceremony, in connection with the entertainment
(dtithyd) of Soma.
Translated : Henry, 2, 49 ; Griffith, i. 329.
I. By the sacrifice the gods sacrificed to the sacrifice; those were the
first ordinances {dhdnnan) \ those greatnesses attach themselves to {sac)
the firmament, where are the ancient i^pilrva) perfectible (sddhyd) gods.
The verse is RV. i. 164. 50,* found alsoinVS. (xxxi. i6),TS. (iii. 5. i is), TA.(iii. 12. 7),
MS. (iv. 10.3), (^IJ. (x. 2. 2», with comment) ; \Katha'hss.y p. 83 ;J the only variant is
sacante for sacania in TS.TA. " This passage and vii. 79. 2 cast light upon the idea of
sdd/iya ; there are two kinds of gods : those with Indra at their head and the sddhya
* they who are to be won * {sddhya * what is to be brought into order, under control, or
into comprehension *). They are thus the unknown, conceived as preceding the known.
Later they are worked into the ordinary classification of Vasus, Rudras, etc. ; and what
was formerly a serious religious problem, a hierarchy conceived as possible before the
now-accepted gods (something like the pre-Olympians with tlic Greeks), has become an
empty name.** R. * [Also RV. x. 90. 16. J
vii. 5 HOOK Vn. TMI-: ATMARVA-VKDA-SAMlllTA. 392
2. The sacrifice came to be; it came to be here; it was pr<»papilctl;
it incicascd a^aiii ; it became overlord of the gods ; let it assign wealth
to lis.
I liis vnsc is fouml also in 'IS. (i. ^. O'-* cl al.) am! (,'<,'S. (iv. 12. 15); TS. oinit« m
ami pu9tah in b, ami Ixilli liavir, for d, stS a\man iUihtpatm lafofu ((,\S. Jt^ffto/at), IS
additi;; (iiitlur luiVihii xyt'tma pAtuyo ftiytuifn. r|i|i. loinbinrs sil "habhiiva in A. and
iiisrrts afu-r it ii/j /////#; ti/ titihipatir luthhtiva : omitting l.iU-r the \uv\^ sa drt-AnAtm
a h. : it f units ;/ licfori- vtivr^iht^ ami ( nnil>iiics so *smt\^u in IIk* last pada. The Anukr.
overlooks tilt* iiK'triial dclKifm v <»( a.
3. As the ^ods sacrificed to the gods with oblation, to immortals, with
immortal mind - may we rcvcd there in the hij^hest firmament; may wc
see that at the rising of the sun.
Tlir vriNc is mi/ii/7/'//, l)Ut a j;«m>iI ttistubh.
4. When, with man (purusa) for oblation, the gods extended the sacri-
fice-even than that is it of more force that they sacrificed with the
vihiivyii.
Nir.iily all tin* inss. r«*ail 4r/ir//:w/i/, without ai rmt, in b (our Up. ami O. have A-^ xn*\
both rditiniis ^ivr it) ; in c thry liavr i\s(hi instcw) ol if 1//, Vk\\\\ \\ laltiT \s read in lw>th
nlitiuiiN, Srr. liaxini^ the rnnnn. an<I oik; of his many authoritirs in its favor. 'I he
first h.iir vtisi* is l\\'. x. ')o. f>a, b (also VS. xwi. i.( : TA iii. 12 3. and our \\x. U 10 i
'Ilu* < nnini. explains Tt/t,i:'\tt as nu'anin;^ an otft.'ii.-.;; without oltlation, an (ifterin^ of
kuowlril^f ( /r:ini.t\ii;iiii) : :uiA this is priha|)S a<.( t ptaMc ; or the hall-\trsr is prrha|-4
to lie undnstoiHl .is a fjui-sMnn.
5. 'lliL* ;;o(ls, confouiuled, both sacrificed with a ilog and sacrificed
variously with limbs of a cow; he who knnweth with the mind this sacri-
fice - him mayest thnii pioclaim In iis here, here may«'st thou speak.
'! hf si-i'»n«l h.ilf viis«' is tin* saim* willj :!. 1 c. d al»ov«'. 7i//// (rrmlcrcd * him *) in
d niii^ht iclt'i i:ianitn.iti( .illy to tin' olh-iini; itsi If. insl'Mil of to him who know\ it. AH
tlu" /i/i/./ niss. fi a»l at tin- l»rv:innin;^ //;//(,'i//m inNt-atl oi ■«///. 1//. as uhith latter the mr»ri!
must lie undcistnoil, and is traiisl.itrd. SI'l'. admitx ifAtl/i In his ^rfi/ri lc\t. Ilenr\
emends ti» nmtdhux't \j^{. also Mnn. Si\. Liftii. \\. 24SJ.
6 (6, 71. Praise of Aditi.
f .//•;. i»r..'»f (.i»i aln»v«"). ■ i/;i >.,;»•.■ |_.':/;.7 /.i» tr*i \ ti./tfu'rT.ify.im : /*tfif/uf-kam ■ 9 hkmnt ,
J, ^ : i'thr.it^.i/i ]
fonnd ( t«»^etluT Willi 7. I ) aKii in r"ii|ij». \x (ii» tlie \ersc order ^i. I : 7 I ; (• 4, 2, 3>.
for i»ilier 1 i«ii»N|Mindi-ni rs, mt uij'!«'i t!ie sexeial Mf^es. The ntm-Tfin;j of ihr mvk. <^n
wlijili our i-«!iiinii i«i fmni'lfil i^ i nuftisnl and inw har ifi tli' sr vi'rsrs : hut the Anukr
diNtiiK iK d:\iil' s our In inn '■ \r.\>i t-.v>t, of two versus e.n h. and this f!i\ision, doufitIr%%
til rnit nni'. is fullnwd |i\ M'l*. !'.<'l!i nurn!iriinj;s will ai • i>rdMii;l\ !'e K'^'^'^ httr,
frufji i»rii f ■ \ MM. 'I he »«ixth \\\ n«:> ( I'mI i*«. ''ur '•. 1 , 2 : vt nieiriv its first \rfskr ) is j^re-
s. Ti""-d liv K.fi';. ( ;i). i>") i-nK' in < i«:uii-i lion wit!i Ininn 2 i-t». ; see aliiixe, unilrr r
l'.:t its si-inii i M'ise is <|uiit>d al ;^. I :, in a ri!" fi^r welfare (f : iii/ii/i<<>/iX .- in Cfossin^
393 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK VII. -vii. 6
water, comm.) with the direction iii taranUny Alambhayati ; and again, at 79. 3, in the
marriage ceremonies of the fourth day, with the direction /// taipam alambhayali,
Furtlicr, tlie second verse is associated with the third and fourth (properly a separate
hymn, 7) at 71. 23, in the rites for preparing the house-fire, and at 86. 26, in the ////«/-
dhana ceremony, in each case in connection with embarking on a boat (and both times
our second verse is quoted after the otliers). In Vait. (6. 1 1), the first verse (or first
and second?) is quoted as used, with other verses, at the end of tlie agnyHdheya cere-
mony, and verse 3 (i i.ii), or properly hymn 7, in the agnistoma^ when the sacrificer is
made to sit down on the black-antelope skin ; and further (29. 20), verse 4 in the agtti-
cayana^ with tlie offering of oblations called, from the first words of the verse, the
vajap rasa vlyahornas.
Translated: Ludwig, p. 533; Henry, 3, 51; Griffith, i. 330. — Cf. also Bloomfield,
ZUMG. xlviii. 552.
1. Aditi [is] heaven, Aditi atmosphere, Aditi mother, she father, she
son ; all the gods [are] Aditi, the five races (Jdna) ; Aditi [is] what is
born, Aditi what is to be born.
This verse is, without variation, RV. i. 89. 10 (also VS. xxv. 23 ; TA. i. 13. 2 ; MS.
iv. 14. 4) ; only RV. (in F. M. Muller's editions : but probably by an error) divides the
last word jdni-/vam in tht pada-texi, while AV., more correctly, leaves it undivided.
2. Wc call for aid verily on the great mother of them of good courses,
the spouse of righteousness (r/d), on her of mighty authority, not grow-
ing old, wide-spreading, on the well-sheltering, well-conducting Aditi.
The verse is also VS. xxi. 5, and is found further in TS. (i. 5. 11 5), M^. (iv. 10. i),
K. (xxx. 4, 5), (^QS. (ii. 2. 14), their only variant being (in all) huvcma for havdmahe
at end of b ; and Ppp. has the same.
3 (7.1). The well-preserving earth, the unenvious sky, the well-shel-
tering, well-conducting Aditi, the well-Oared ship of the gods, unleaking,
may we, guiltless, embark on in order to well-being.
This verse is also RV. x. 63. 10 (and VS. xxi. 6 ; TS. i. 5. 1 1 5 ; MS. iv. 10. i ; K. ii. 3
[cf. MGS. i. 13. 16, and p. 157 J), which (as also the others) reads dndgasam at end
of c. It and the preceding verse are associated in VS.TS.MS., and are so closely
kindred in application and expression that, numbered as tliey are as successive verses
in Hp., and lacking the usual sign of the end of a hymn after vs. 2, we naturally enough
regarded them as belonging to one continuous hymn. The verse lacks but one syllable
of a full jagaif. Lin c, Ppp. has suviiiairUm (a faulty reminiscence of sv-aritrUm)
andgasam.j
4 (7.2). Now, in the impulse of might (vdja), will wc commemorate
(> kamma/ic) with utterance {vdcas) the great mother, Aditi by name,
whose lap is the broad atmosphere ; may she confirm to us thrice-
dcfcnding protection.
The first half-verse is found also in VS. (ix. 5 b), TS. (i. 7. 7«)i MS..(i. 11. i), with-
out variant ; the second half-verse, common to them all, is totally different from ours.
A whole series of VS. verses begin with vAjasya prasava- (ix. 23-25 etc.) : Weber
{ITtJapeya^ p. 796 ff.) renders " Zeuger der Kraft." All the pada-mss, read in c updo
vii. 6 noOK VII. TIIK ATHAUVA-Vi:i)A-SAttHITA. 394
stfttt/i, liiit Srr. slraii^cly picfrrs to sulistiliite -si he on the authority of the romm. Tlie
roiiiin. ^U>sscs kauitnahe with kurmahfy hut then explains it by stHmas ; the true trst
is pi'rh.ips 1 tiniMi "kiir- * would we ^ain * ( Henry translates " puisnionft-nnus la f^af^ner *').
TS. has C ill iii. 3. I i 4 C, ami its /«/«/f/ text rrads u/>ii xthah. |_rpp. has for C the C of VS.
etc., and for d Jrl no dfvi su/ia-tU) fiif//tityan/itifii.j
7 (8;. Praise of the Adityas.
I'ound also in T/iipp. xx. I'^cd liy K.'hk;. ($n iS) with 2, as explained under that
hymn. * |_'rhc Anukr., drfinin^ as trtln/ub/ulni the ** first ei^ht li\!uns,*' included thi«
amon^ them : l>y inadvcrtcncf, it would seem, since he here calls it Jrsl ja/^aii. j
'I'ranslati'fl: Henry, 3. 52; <iiitt'itl], i. 331.
I. Of iJiti's sons, of Aditi's, I have commemorated the aid, of the
f;rcat inviolalde gods ; for their domain (ti/uiman) is deep in the sea ; no
one soever is beyond them by homage.
This tianslatinn is in part rnrc hanif .d, undnstandin^ also ih'as at be^inninj^ of b
(which - \\\' . X. 36. I i b : ( f . also <t^. 3 a), rr^ardinj^ anaffntintlnj as — ana^i^JfiJin (%o
K\'.), and givinfj i^tihhiyil' (p. (,m/' ///"», U') the sens** tonj«M tiircrl for it by IlK.,iihich i«
also that of the conini. {i^amh/tiram). The variants of Ppp. ami of MS. (i. 3 »>) indi-
cate that our text is without iiuiih aut]ir)rity : MS. has tf.f*. a. ttktltisafn MrM^armanJm
f>f h a tti //"/ TV/;// /// ///«? w ; yc\ «7 m nam a n i 1 ih ita » i dha w a ^ 1 \^ tttttlir y iiy.i //// thui 'a »? *l 1 •!
jlTtUe ; I * p I > . ( a f 1 1 -1 a), nfii/i,'i\tit ni.intfrn nnt/ht/tlfn iit/f mntlm : /: 'fStij ti tiht} wi j^j^Atutf
Sii nntt/ftt f/t ntt hi stlnt yt tipasa} pam *sti kith iiin.i. \Atntiiil is perhaps corrupted
from ntihiiisti |^f f. iv. 31). <) n. ] and /*//i7/i fiiun rnit. The j^rrat majority of our mss. (all
save D.K.) itr.nl al\'nsiifn at end of a: STI'. reports tlw ^reat majority of his as civing
rtkiifiuim^ wliii h lie a((ordini;]y adopts in his text. iVp- '^-^^ lii'tirsitni^ MS. ak*}9ttam.
Our Itp. has ^//ip// in d. Tiie testimony of thr Aiiukr. as to akiifsant or -nsam is of
no valur.
8(9). For some one's success.
Found also in rnip|). xx. Kfun;. {.\2. i) presrribes its use uhen settinf; out upon a
business jitnrncy : and tlu> roinni ({uoti-s it fnun r.'mti Kalpa 15, as accompanying
various rcrrinr>nirs for Itrhasp.iti.
Transl.iti-d: l.udwivj, p. .131 : H'-nry, .\. 5:; Orilnth, i. 331.
I. (io thou forth fr»>m wh.it is excellent to what is better; be Bri-
hiisp.iti thy forerunner. Then do thoit make this man, on the width of
this eaith. iem«>te from foes, with all his heroes.
I.iti-t.dlv (d) *li.i\in^ his fitts .it a dist.int i\ h.ixinL; his heroi's whole.* The x^ne
on urs .il',.i in IS (i 2. V). ','<.'S. (\ ^. ;). .ind A'.S. (iv. 4. 2). with <iM/ for JJAi
in a. a'l'l. :is c, d. if.'^'v *'/// ifr-ii yvii - .hit li pflhrryA iir/ ^tifrtin krnuhi sArt'avlrak ,
anil its pi.iiika (with it/'i:i) in K\\. (\ii. 10), and Ap (x. 10 S): and compare MB.
ii I. 13. llii' ii»;nfn t.iki's i//f- .md ^ifrutt: as two inflr])cnfhvit words. I* pP- shows
no v.iii.ints. Tile hist p.iil.i lai ks thue syllaMrs of brinj; ttistubh.
395 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK VII. -vii. lO
9 (lo). Praise and prayer to PQshan.
\^Uparibabhrava. — caturrcam. pdusnam. trdistubham : j. j-f. drsi gdyatri ; 4. aftustnbh.^
Of this hymn only vs. 4 is found in Paipp. (xx.). For other correspondences see under
the several verses. Kaug. (52. 12), among the rites for welfare (svastyayana)^ uses
the hymn in one for the recovery of lost articles of property ; and verse 2 is reckoned
(on account of abhayatamena in b) to the abhaya gana (note to 16. 8). Vait. (8. 13)
makes it accompany a libation to Pushan in the cdturmdsya ceremony.
Translated : Henry, 4, 52 ; Griffith, i. 332 ; Bloomfield, 159, 542.
1 . On the forward road of the roads hath Pushan been born, on the
forward road of heaven, on the forward road of the earth ; unto both the
dearest stations, both hither and yon, goeth he, foreknowing.
The verse is, without variation, RV. x. 17. 6 (also TB. ii. 8. 53, and MS. iv. 14. 16,
the latter with djanista accented).
2. Pushan knows throughout all these places ; he shall conduct us by
that which is most free from fear ; giving well-being, glowing, preserving
heroes, let him go before unremitting, foreknowing.
This verse is again, without variation, RV. x. 17.5 (also MS. iv. 14. 16, with mesat
for tifsat ; TB. ii. 4. I5 and TA. vi. i. i^, with dghrni inc; but TA. has further pravi-
(ivan at end).
3. O Pushan, in thy sphere (vrafd) may we at no time soever be
harmed ; thy praisers are we here.
RV. vi. 54. 9 differs from this verse only by the accent Jbddd in b; VS. (xxxiv. 41)
is the same with RV. ; TB. (ii. 5. 5s) has kada^ and combines at the beginning /i^/ii/ix
ith'a. SPP. reports three of his authorities as reading ni at beginning of b.
4. Let Pushan place about his right hand in front ; let him drive back
to us what is lost ; may we be united with what is lost.
The first three padas of the verse are RV. vi. 54. 10, which differs only by reading
pardsidt instead oi pur-. SPP., having the comm. and three of his (thirteen) authori-
ties to support it, wrongly receives pardstdt into his text |_Pada a is catalectic.J
I^Ppp^s c is unintelligible ; its d is punar no nastam d krdhi,\
10(11). To SarasvaU.
[^dunaka, — sdrasvatam, trdhtMbkamJ]
This hymn and the one next following are not found in PSipp. This verse is
RV. i. 164. 49 (which has the pada-order a, C, b, d), also occurring in VS. (xxxviii. 5),
TA. (iv. 8. 2), MS. (iv. 14. 3), and QB. (xiv. 9. 4. 28). LSee also Katha-hss.^ p. 1.04. J
Kau^. (32. I), in the chapter of remedies, has it accompany the suckling of a child
seized by the demon Jambha (suffering from dentition ?).
Translated ; Henry, 4, 53 ; Griffith, i. 332.
r. The breast of thine that is unfailing (.>), that is kindly, that is
favorable, easy of invocation, that is very liberal, with which thou gainest
vii. lO- noOK VII. TIIK ATMAKVA-X r.DA-SAMHITA. 396
(?///.r) all ilesirablc things — O Sarasvali, maycst thou cause [us] to suck
that here.
KV. riMtls ill a (i7fff|'i/i .- .md in b (its C) fatfuitihii •t-iUtt: /i/(for suffiHiiiiiA suAJzv).
TA.MS. iv^iov ill all rcsprcts with K\'..* s.ivr lli.ii VA lias absiiidly i/jrilA in c (iN b)
VS. ami (,'M. Iiavi* tlu* KV. icadiiiL;**,* Iml "in onlrr of llu* {Mflas. Tlic coinm. rracU
(/(iivf/s ilia, rxplaiiiiii^j it as ritlirr •lausiii^ tin* prosprrity of [its] voting (f'f*)' ***
* hiddi'ii {nt'i^tttfttti)* |_lii d, llrnry iiinliTNtaiids llif •• c liild '* ralhtrr than " uv^J
• [_\S.(,'n. TA. have /7i('<//', comhiiicd {t//ttt/it: r) 'liiA ; \n\i the (ixnin. to CAih of thr««
texts tt'iidt'is it l»y /'/////.J
II (12). Against injury to the grain by lightning.
[(^'liufi.tlti. — ui 9,1 17.1 f.tm. tit]/:fttftA.ifM.]
l.iko the prrrcditi^ hymn, not found in Taipp ; also not in any othrr knonn text
Kaiu;. uses it (V*^'*^), with i. 13. in a (rirniiiii) aicaiiist thr clfiTl of ]ii;htnin;; ; and alv>
(I3<). S), with till* same ami otlw r h\nins. in tlw ritis of entrance u{Mm \'ei)ic stu'lv
(n/<f/(-i;/ ///i///, c<unni.). And the comm. tpiotus it :is applied in (,'aiiti-Kalpa 15 miili
obsei vann-s to /v///.
'liaiwlatrd: I.udwi;^. p. 4<»3 ; Ciiill, (td, I 7S ; Henry, 5, 54; ('frifTith. I. 333 ; lUoom-
field, l.|2, 543.
I. Thy Im<»:uI tliiindiTiii;;, which, exalted, a si^n of the ^jods, spreads
over (?i?/'////.v) this all do not, () f;od, smite our j^raiii with the lighl-
nin;;, and d«> not smili* |it| with the sun's rays.
.Siiniliv of ih'" insN. ( imlipliii:^' oai {'p.'!' M.l" <).) n m«I »;r;ifj in a (I* M _•«! l>rforc
it) ; the coniin. has #//fr'iir. Thi' l.ittrr rxplains J h/n'iuiti as - tytipnoti. Some m^*.,
as usual, letain the // \\{ prthiih hrinre stan-.
12(13). For success in the assembly.
it.t.i,-: !.'\.i .! 1: II .'It ■■ •'. .1 "I / . f 'tit' li' !' t f :ur h . I
1 he tnsi txvi> vnsi-s aie fouml in Paipp. \x K.iii*;. (3^.-7) uses it, with v 3 and
othei h\ inns, in a ceieniony fur ^ainin^ the vi< tory in d«*!iatr, or in tlir df*Iil>cratii*n« of
an asM'inltiy (ihe Minini. desnilM-N ii r«-pealeilly as •♦ nf five verses," apparently includ-
inj» in iN usts 13. 1 ). • [_'! Iw Lnndim ms. leails */:7#/«';ii/iil///ii ///m.J ,■ the Itrrtin m» ,
•tyaittatf tt»\ii. j
'Iianslalid: Muii. v. 4^): \"-^. 1.3,4. lailwi*.:. p. 2;^; vss. z $, /immrr, p 173;
<;riil. 7- . I-" H«iii\. 5. ;;: «;iitnih. i 333: rdoMmheld. 13R. 543. -(_f. Ilillchrandt,
/ Vi/.f . ''.'I ..'.•w/i//''.;i-, p. 4 ;.
I . I. el l»MtIi .is^enihly (>.?/•/.«/ ) aii«l j^.itln^rin;; {SiUfti/i), the two (Iauf;htcrs
of I'l.ij.ip.iti, air'»r<Lint, fav<»r lue ; with whom I shall come to;;cther, may
h'* doiu- tn :iu\ I ?///,/ ^ :•{.«) me; may I speak what is pleasant amcing
th'»sf wli'i h.ivi' ("me l«i;;«-tlK-i, O I'atheis.
rpp's \M«.ii.ii 1.; c. d In \ir\ drMi ri'ht If'.'.; : i. /.?»// rr/fii t/til tit fistful *nt*ir v%uf»\mi
r.f,rj\t- ■:.•;■•;/•; llu- mis.- is .dsn j.-rji,.! i;j |'<;s. liii 13.31. uidi niii«h variatif<i :
/rV;.' t>>i .?• .;/..'•'.• in a, i.i. »■.'./* .^7 t'l'i M'^' ://'/'.' r* in b: and. fore, d, if» w.'J na m/^Jj
397 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK VII. -vii. 1 3
upa md sa tisthet sacetano bhavatu ^ansathe janah. The comm. explains upa ^iksiit
as either upetya ^iksayatu : samlcfnam viidayatu or mdth vaktuth ^aktam samartham
icchatu. He reads vaddini in d. Henry renders upa-^ikf by " pay homage/' and
emends pitaras to nrsu. The meter is irregular.
2. We know thy name, O assembly ; verily sport (tuiHsta) by name
art thou ; whoever are thine assembly-sitters, let them be of like speech
with me.
Ppp. reads very differently: veda vHi sahhe te nUma subhadrd *si sarasvati : atho ye
te sabhdsadah suvdcasah. Our Bp. also reads sthfUcasas, The comm. takes naristd
as naristd * not injured.' The Anukr. ignores the deficiency of a, as the redundancy
of 3 a.
3. Of these that sit together I take to myself the splendor, the
discernment {vijfldna) ; of this whole gathering {samsdd) make me,
O Indra, possessor of the fortune (bhagln),
4. Your mind that is gone away, that is bound either here or here —
that of you we cause to turn hither ; in me let your mind rest.
This verse does not appear to have anything to do with the rest of the hymn.
13(14). Against one's foes.
^Athari'an {dviso varcohartukdmah). — dvyrcam, sduryam, dnustubham.'\
Verse i found also in Piiipp. xix.* In Kiiug. (48. 35, 36) the hymn is used in a rite of
sorcery, against enemies ; with the second verse the user goes and looks at them. The
mention of \\\it prailka in the edition of Kau^. as contained in 58. 1 1 appears to l)e an
error. On the other hand, the comm. regards this hymn as intended in Kau<;. 39. 26
(not X. I. 32, as in the edition), in a rite against sorcery. The comm. further quotes the
pratlka from the Naksatra Lerror for Qanti, Bl.J Kalpa 15, in a rite against nirrti.
*\\i I understand Roth's note, Ppp. has vs. 1 without variant, and for vs. 2 what is
reported below. J
Translated : Ludwig, p. 241 ; Grill, 23, 179; Henry, 5, 56; GrifTith, i. 334; Bloom-
ficld, 93, 544.
1. As the sun rising takes to itself the brilliancies {t/j(is) of the aster-
isms, so of both women and men that hate me I take to myself the
splendor.
2. Ye, as many of my rivals as look upon me coming — as the rising
sun that of sleepers, do I take to myself the splendor of them that hate
mc.
[_Ppp. reads varcditsi yavater iva : evd sapatndndm akam rtarca indriyam d dadhe.\
Praiipa(^yatha, literally * that meet mc with your looks' as I come. The comm. reads
•pa^yaia. The Anukr. appears to allow the contraction sHrye *va in c
The first atjuvdka ends with this hymn; it contains 13 (14) hymns ^d 28 verses;
the quoted Anukr. says asfdv ddye; and another quotation, given in many mss.
(Bp.P.M.W.D.T.), says prathame trayoda^a silktdh^ thus approving the division made
in our edition.
vii. 14 noOK VII. Till: ATIIAKVA.Vi:nA-SAttHITA. 39*
14 (i5)- Prayer and praise to Savitar.
[.////.!» :•;//. i,ttutr%tim. iJi'titam. tiuustu.'hafn : j tftTtMhh;4.fA^ati.\
Till' third nncl fourtli vi-isrs nir fDtiiid in f\'ii|>|). xx. '1 he first and second form
tfj^i'thir OIK' Iiirij; versr in SV. (i. 464), \'S. (iv. 25), MS. (i. 2. 5), and Al^'S. (iv. 6 3),
niul two. as in niir tivxt. hi V^-*^- (^'-V- ' ' )■ ''^ K.iik;. (24. 3) the hymn a|}|irars onir in
a^i-nri.il rite ff>r prospfrity ; in artoiil.inrc with uhirh. it is im hide<l (note to 19 1)
amoMK till' pushKti nuinttas. W'lit. (137) uses it in a more s|>eiiric oAice, to acrom
pany thir winnuwin;; of tht* som.i. in tin* nj^niUomit ceremony.
Tr.msl.iti-il : Ilcniy. <'i. 5(1; (irittith. i- 334.
1. I'nto this ^o(! S.ivilar, of ports* skill (kratu)^ of true impulse,
Ircasurc-hcslowinj;, unto the dear one, I, in the two otji's, sing (t^rc) [my]
prayer.
VS\"(,'S.ArS. adfl at thr end ktivhn, and MS. h.is siitytisavasatn (for •lavam)
'I'wo or thrit* of tiu* inss. (including; our O) rcail sti/vifsaTdm, as if agreeing villi
matini. 'Ihr cmnrn. explains ouyi^s as • heaven and earth, the two favorers (avitr) of
rver\thini:/ and makrs wi/// at the rnd njasr.. - xtifiulir m^tntavyxtm. The construrtif>n
of tin.* vnsc is intriiate and dfniiitrnl. The mciiif .d drt'inition hy the Aniikr. of the first
two M'rsi'S as /!//;/< ////■// is l»ail : ihry arr rrally f«)ur ;.i^m// p.'nias, to each of which are
arldrd f'liir sxllaldcs that rni uni)>rr thi* srnsr. [^I-'roni a Liitical |H.>int of view, these
additions socni to me ( tnnparalde with those in ii. 5 ; see introduction to ii. 5. J
2. lie whose lofty llj;hl (//;//////), ^leam, shone hri^htly in his impel-
ling— he, gold handed, of good insi;;ht, fashioned the heaven with
beaut V.
The translation assumes at tlir i-nd the cnu-ndeil ri-.idin;; A^'A'* which is that of all
the otiier texts and of the iiMnni. ami is ai.so ^iveii liy one or two of the AV m^t
^ (including our <).•) ; SIM'. ail«»jits lf/*ttt. (,"<,*S A<,'S. curiously read at the end kr^
1(1 .y. J rV^^I J:vrf ///«J svitr iti 7i7. l.ikin;; as il wtir a valiant into thr text. All the /fi</<i'mM have
^,0-^*^ * utiihvih at llie lH'i;iiinin«j, in> trail of -r*/, as the srnsc di- mauds ; STI' . rniend^ to -iJ in
his /«///./ tr\t. 'I he riiium. jiaiaphrascs «////i///j i)y tiWttttti^iL} :y,}/>iintt^i/tl. *[^ML<^take
for P.M. ? - Note to Tiat. i ^5 may Ik- (innpaird.J
3. l''or tlum didst impel, () god, for the first father — height for him,
width f<M- iiiin ; then unto tis, () Savitar (impeller), do thou day by day
impel desirahle tliini^s, ahiiiiil.uice (»f c;ittl<'.
I hr vrrse is fonnd aKo in I !•. (ii. 7. i ;'). A(,'S. (iv. 10. I), and (,"(,'S. (v. I4. S); all
nail, in c. d. \j:t/it/: %,if riffit/i) tf/:tt//:it ti ; and in a i l*. h.is ptasaiuiya instead of
ptA(hxXtr,A\xi. Willi (1 i(»ni]>aii' also l\\'. iii. 5^. 0 (<pioted here hy the loinm.) I*pp.
sliows nil \ aiiants
4. May the lumsehold god, the desirable Savitar, assign to the Fathers
tic.iMiT'', lir.xti'TJty. lifetimes; may he diink the soma; may [it] exhila-
rate him at the s.uiifice; any wan-lrrcr walks {Inim) in his ordinance.
rpp d:!':' IS «i::|y l»y (iimliinini; /.'/'/'//ii? "»;f//f/ in b: hut A(,'S. (v iS. 2) and CC^
(\iii 34: .M' ill. 2>) 4 ipi'iti's tiu* /•.:/;^./ oni\ ) have im|>ortant and in part preferable
399 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK VII. -vii. IJ
variants, especially in the second line, where they read amadann enam is/ayah^ and
ramate for kramate. In b, both give daksa and ilyuni^ and A(JS. ratnd. |_'i'he verse
Juis one tristubh p5da (c) ; and b is a very poor jaga/f.j
15(16). Prayer to Savitar.
[ B/rrgu. — sdvitram . trdistubham .]
P'ound also in P.lipp. xx. ; and in VS. (xvii. 74), TS. (iv. 6. 54), MS. (ii. 10.6), and
(^H. (ix. 2. 3. 38). This hymn, like the preceding, is used by KSug. (24. 7) in a general
rite for prosperity, with the binding on of a heifer-rope as amulet. In V^it. (29. 18), it
accompanies the laying on of fuel in the agnicayana ceremony.
Translated: Henry, 6, 58 ; Griflith, i. 335.
I. This favor, O Savitar, of true impulse, very wondrous, having all
choice things, do I choose for myself ; which of him, full-fed, thousand-
streamed, Kanva the bull (mahisd) milked for Bhaga.
Or (at the end) * for a portion,* as the comm. understands it {phAgytiya\ The read-
ing (alike in all) of the other texts is very different : for a, iifii savitur vdrenyasya
citram ; in b, I'i^vdjanydm at end ; in d (for mah- etc.) fidyasd fftahifh gim. This gives
a decidedly more intelligible meaning. Ppp. is still different: in a, satyasavasya cifnlmj
for b, vayam devasya prasave ttianiltnahe j and, in c<, f>rapfndm.
16(17). Prayer to Savitar (or Brihaspati).
[BArgu. — sdvitram . trdistubham .]
Not found in Paipp., but occurs as VS. xxvii. 8, and in TS. (iv. I. 73) and MS. (ii.12. 5).
Used by Kau^. (59. 18) in a kdmya rite with hymn 2 etc. : see hymn 2 ; but to it alone
seems to belong (so also comm.) the added direction ** wakens a Vedic student |_ found
asleep after sunrise (abhyudita)y^ \ since in Vait. (5.9)1 in the agnyddheya ceremony,
one awakens with it priests who may have fallen asleep. Both applications seem to
imply (as Henry suggests) the reading bod/iaya in a.
Translated: Henry, 7, 58 ; Griffith, i. 335.
I. O Brihaspati, Savitar, increase thou him; enlighten him unto great
good-fortune ; however sharpened, sharpen him further ; let all the gods
revel after him.
The other texts make b and c exchange places ; in a, they read sainiar without accent
(as docs also the comm. ; it suits better with the singular verbs that follow), and
bodhdya for vardhdya; in (our) b, they give vardhdya iox jyotdya (the comm. dyotayd) ;
in (our) c, VS.TS. read saihtaram ; in d, MS. inserts ca after vi^vi,
17(18). Prayer to DhAtar for blessings.
[Bbrgn. — catttrrcam, sdvitram uta bahudei*atyam, dnustHbham : i.j-f.drsJgdyatri;
J, 4. tristubh.']
The first verse is found in Paipp. i., the other verses in Psiipp. xx. For further cor-
respondences, see under the several verses. In Kau9. (59* '9)* i*^ ^^^ kdmya section,
hymns 17, 19, 20, 24-26, 29, 42, 46, 5 1, 79, 80, 82, and 103 of this book arc addressed to
vii. 17- HOOK VII. THL ATIIARVA-VKDA-SAMHITA. 4OO
rraj.ipati l>y one desiring all kinds of licncfits (s/tfvaJttlfnit). Further, apparrntty («o
Kf(;.'i\A Aw\ the I'omm. : tlie trxt of Kau<;. is m»t wholly clear), in a women'i rite
(35. Ui), to pioi uic the liiith of a male rhilil : the h\mn offi-is little to suci^eat this lavc
the m iiiiiMK e of tlic phiasr tf/t,r/ti titiJhiltu ; the verse v. 25. 10 would lie much mure
to the point.
'I'laiislatod : lU'nry, 7, 5';; (iiinitii, i- 335.
1. Let Dhatar assign (d/td) to us wealth, [he] bcin^; master (if), lord of
the moving creation ; let hitn yield to us with fulness.
IJtorally (at the end) ' with full,' to which the conini. supplies iihtxfittta, Tpp. ftIto««
no valiants. 'IS. (ii. 4 5' ct al.) has dathitu in a, and vii^'anat tor viuAa/it at the end
M.S. [iv. 12. Cij has rinly a (with titiif/uUu)^ comi lining it with our 2 b-d.
2. Let Dhatar a.ssi^n to his worshiper an unexhausted further life ;
may we obtain the favor of the all • best owinp f;od.
IS. (iii.3. III). MS. (iv. 12.6). A(;S (vi. 14. ir.)». rrs. (ix. 2R. 3). and (;CS. (i 22).
have the same verse, with sundiy dilfcimrrs : all f read </<ii/J/« in a, and TS.MS. ha«e
fto fiiyim for t/,i^u^r (thus .substilulin;; our 1 a) ; in b, <, <, S. and (,'(tS. have aJtttftm at
end; in d. ft»r v:\''Ar,l,f/itt5ii5^ 'IS. has stityAnltihaias, MS.(,'(7S.(,*(i.S. uttydiiMawmanat,
anil A^'.S. \*ljinti'a/ii\. I'pp. is drfertivc in this verse. Init presents no variants. The
ciMnni. exiilains dhmuihi oni e hv tihiitayftfia ami once bv ti/tvi\vemti. *| So also A(tS
(tiansl). p. 3*», note, as in A<,'S J f LSave MS. J
3. Let Dhatar assign all desirable things unto the i)roj;eny-wi5hinj:
worshiper in his home ; for him let the gods wraj) up immortality
(afftttii) — all the gods, Aditi, in unison.
This veise or< urs only in 'IS. (iii.3. '' M ^'^d M.S. (iv. 12.^). t>oth reading; alike: (or
a, f ///•//'' tiiii/i}tu tfti^use I'tisttni ; ntit/Aiirr {(or 4/i't{Nrf) in b; tiwf/tlA sihh vyttyantJm
inc. ami tifViistis in d. I*IM*' K'^'*'**i ^**'* 9^^ tihiittl rvVr-iIwi ^whirh rrctities the meter J
litlt^nsf litttitlfu ; for c, tauil prajt\m amrtas .uimrayantu ; and. in d, tifx\\sas (rer!if\in|f
the mriri ) [and < ontirnihi;: my c-onjrcture ma<le at the former occurrence of thin pida
at iii. 11. \ dj.
4. Let Dhatar, Rati, Savitar enjoy this, let IVajapati, Agni our
treasure-lord; let TvaslUar, Vishnu, sharing (/v/) together with progeny,
assign wealth to the .saciificer.
The lM*i:inniiii; of this coirespomls with that of iii. 8. 2. alwnr. The verse is found
without variant • in TS. (i. 4.44' ) : \'S. (\iii. I 7) and MS. (i. 3. 3R) have different read-
in;;s : in b, aftrr /'jr/.//*i//i/. \*.S. 9ii,f/:tf*ii tinA tit^nfA. MS. 7'if#w/?«» r/n'frif aj^mfA ; inc.
MS. lii-::i!:s :'t\ftus t:Asft}, \'.S. rmis -/i//t7/;ii f ; in d. \'S. ends ii.itfh*lta. Ppp.. in d. hai
/;/•./ !:iNt--.»«l of ::\/!:tf. |_ M T. has c at i. 7. 1 2. J '[^Saxe nixihipAhs for nidhifatit.
if (/■».;/•; 5 I 2' '7 a J
18 (iQ). For rain, etc.
l-Miiiiil .lUo in r.iipp. XX. I- or thi* u^e of ihis hymn l»y K.iut;. (41. i : 103. 3 : ?^». 24,
not'') ill \.iiiiii:s liti^, in conjuni lion uiiii iv. 15. sre innler the latter. Verse 2 ap|iear«
40I TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK VII. -vii. 19
in Vfiit. (4. 8), in the pan^an ceremonies, accompanying, with other verses, the offering
of the patnlsamyUja oblations.
Translated : Henry, 7, 59; Griffith, i. 336.
1. Burst forth, O earth; split this cloud of heaven; untie for us, O
Dhatar, that art master, the skin-bag of the water of heaven.
Ppp. reads, for a, un nattibhaya prthivfm^ which is better ; it reads bilam for driim
at the end ; also udhno at beginning of c ; not a single ms. has the right reading of
this word, either here or in the other places |_cf. iii. 12. 4, n.J where it occurs; here they
vary between utnd (the great majority, including all SPP's//i^a-mss.), unnd^ unid^ utvd;
tl'.n comm. reads correctly udnas^ and SPP. receives it into his text; our tldhnd was a
mistaken emendation. Our Dp. leaves bhindhi unaccented, putting after it the mark of
pada division, and several of the mss. (including our P.s.m.E.p.m.I.) accent in sath-
hitd accordingly. The verse is found also in TS. (ii. 4. 8») and MS. (i. 3. 26) ; both
have a like Ppp. ; MS. has adds for iddm in b; both read udnd in c, and TS. has dehi
for dhatar ; and, in d, TS. has srjd for syll. The comm. gives three independent
explanations o( pra nabhasva : either praJtars^fta samgatd ucchvasitd bhava^ or vrsiyd
Q mss. krstyHy pf'sfyd) prakarsena bddhitd mrditd bhava^ or \nabhtisva = nahyasva\
samnaddhd bhava. For dhdtar^ in c, he reads dh&ta " = dhehiy The verse is really
auustubh (resolving at the beginning pr-d). |_Play of words between nabhasva and
nab/tas : cf. iv. 7. I. J |_ Correct udhnd to udnd.\
2. Not heat burned, not cold smote; let the earth, of quick drops,
burst forth ; waters verily flow ghee for him ; where Soma is, there is it
ever excellent.
In b, Ppp. reads sadasyate for nabhatdm ; in c, sadam for ghrtam. With c com-
pare RV^ i. 125. 5 c.
19 (20). For progeny, etc.
[BraAman. — mantroktadrvatyam. jdgatam.']
Found also in Paipp. xix. Kaug. (35. 17) uses it in a women's rite, with an oblation
in the lap of a woman desirous of offspring; and further (59. 19), with hymn 17 etc. :
see under the latter.
Translated: Ilenr)', 8, 60 ; Griffith, i. 337.
I. Prajapati generates these offspring {prajds)\ let Dhatar, with
favoring mind, bestow (dha) [them] ; harmonious, like-minded, of like
origin ; let the lord of prosperity put (dha) prosperity in me.
The verse is to be compared with one in MS. (ii. 13. 23) and Ap(^S. (xiv. 28. 4), of
wiiich the second pada precisely agrees* with ours, and the fourth nearly (but reading
pitsiiin pusfipatir) ; while for a both have a fiah prajam janayatu prajapaiih^ and,
iox t,^ samvatsard rit'tbhih samviddndh (ApQS. r/f/bAif cdkuptltiah ^) \ and d is MB.
ii. 4- 7 c. t Our c, nom. plur. words, is left without any construction (but emendation to
sayoftfs would make them accus., helping both the construction and the meter) ; Ppp.
has the same c as MS., and also gives janayatu (for -//) in a, as docs the comm. ; it is
doubtless the better re«iding. Two of the pildas are tristubh, *|_But Ap. has daddtu.\
t L Intending ca a-kupdnah, as an isolated root-aorist pplc? sec Gram, § 840 b.J tLBut
with pus tint pustipatir^ like MS. Ap. J
vii. 20- nooK VII. Tin: atiiarva-vi:da-saxihitA. 402
20(21). Praise and prayer to Anumati.
[/•Vi/*w/,iM. — r.u/ri-ftm. tlttumiitiYiim. Auujttibhtim : jf^ L^J. trtsiuhM ; 4. hkurtj ; Jt6./^mii :
rounit also in rriipp. xx. (in tlu* vriM-onlrr i, 2, 3, 5, ^t, 4). L'.scd by Kau(. (59. 19)
witli ]i\iiiii 17 clc. : src iiniU'i 17 : ami vs. 1 a apju-ais also (.15. i^i) a% fii^t p.i(la of a
j^tlm/pt viisc acrDinpanyiii;; an oblation at the viul of the i'ti\<}^dwiana crrcmon\.
\'i'ise () is also untlcistfKxl l>y tht> srhol. as intended f>y tinuMtati, fwrurring in the rule
tluumttttm ittturthhn \\\ tiircc differrnt ritrs, hfitiso-luiildini; (»3-4)i arr]iiisition of
Vcdir knowledge (42.11), and va^il^amana (45.10). In Vait. (I. 15), the h)mn is
qunted in the parvan (vifmonics on the d.iy i>f full mo4»n.
TiansIatL'd : Ileniy. S, 60: Cirili'ith, i. 337.
1. Let Anumati (*appiovar) approve \jinH'man\ today our sacrifice
among the k'^^'-*^! ^"^' '^'^ ^rS^'^ ^^^ oblal ion-carrier of me worshiping.
pop's only vaiiant is \aihiit*}fn for ntdnvtitilfn at end nf b. The verM \% found in
vaiioiis other texts: VS. (xxxiv. o), 'IS. (iii. 3. in), MS. (iii. i^». 4), A<,'S. (iv. 12. 3)«
and (,'rS. (ix. 27. 2). In a, MS.r(,'S. preserve the a after no; the others put mo before
«rf/)'if (Vn/): in d, nil save 'IS. chanf^e hhtivtitt}fn to -/</"/, and all have mAyak for
tnAmti. MM. (ii. 2. i<)) aKo has tiui\ti%^ but in a ivam f«tr tuiva, and in d Jtf mo *dAj
«//}(-. The translation f^iven implies emendation in d to tfil^tiun ; the rnmm. rep^ardft it
as a case of substitution of ilative for genitive. 'I he comm. takes h/uh'aMm a.% 3d «ine.
midille; but it may peihaps bett'-r be viewed (like the -//fw of the other teiiL%) aft dual
arlive, with anumati and #/;•/// tt>*;ethrr as subj»Tt ; the rotruptjtm f>f mJrat to mAm^
has rather spoiled the uli-iie c (»nstru« tion. The ronim. explains Anumati as intrndinc
heie also, as elsewhere, the K'^bb'-^'S of the <lay of full moon : there is iiothinf; in the
hymn tli.it demand.N or implies th.it eharai ter.
2. Maycst iboti, indeed, () Antimati, approve, and do lhf)U make weal
f<»r ns ; enjoy Ihou tbc offered oblation ; ^rant us proj^eny, O goddess.
liie liist half-veise, witli a whi>llv diiterent .second half, is found in the same texts
m
that have vs. I (V.S. xwiv. S ; tiie otheis as ipiote<I above: also K. xiii. l^): ail read
fiia/iv.'iM// iiisteail of nuhna^t', .uid TS. combines nah kfiHii. Tpp- h.is, (or c, d. liJJ
ti*la\a t:o liatihat pra na ayufisi ti'ifisat, of whii'li the last p.ida a::rees* >%ith the other
texts (ilii-y have, for c. ktatve tiM:)x\ya 910 himt). The tomin. reads manii}f fur -late,
both Iw-ie .md in U d. Our last h.df-verse is also '18. 1 c. d, and nearly 4^). I C d. *[^l(ut
\'S. rS.(j,S. have /J//>./r. J
3. \a'\ liini, approvin^^, approve wealth rich in progeny, not being
exhaustrd ; K-t us not eonic to he within his wrath ; may we be in his
very ;;raeioiis favor.
'I III* fust tiu«-t' p.ulas (f>Me««pMnil to ili.it pait of a \eise in IS. iii. 3. IM (to which
tlif ii:n.. b;« a'l .ilinnst isnl.iti rl pioi ei'din;;, refers, uit!i notice of the ditfrrrncrs of
KMiliiiL:) \\!ii< !i pr«-s'i\i*s the ((insistent y of tlie hymn by rcatlin;* the frinininc.s, -mJmJ
at end •■!' n. .ui>l f,i.y,ii in c; IVi** apparently intends the same with •in*\nt}s ami /aitJ,
and it tMTlhfT :iL;ti-es with T.S. i*! ;^i\inL;. for d. .«•) //<' i//*;'/ i«Ait;'rf {afma jr^kmtm.
'I lie i !i.in::i* I'f <iiir text to mast, i-.liurs s< ems a mere cortuptiiin. Our d is nearly KV.
\iii. 4*^. \ z d.
y(jU4/fftJi/i t> ^ -d-P^-«V-
f^^'^^^y^ , ^fii /9i^<^, a
403 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK VII. -vii. 22
4. The easily-invoked, approved, generous {suddnu) name that is /m^
thine, O well-conducting Anumati — therewith fill our sacrifice, O thou
of all choice things ; assign us, O fortunate one, wealth rich in heroes.
Ppp. reads suddvas at end of b, and has a wholly different second half-verse: iena
tvam sumatim dtiry asma isafh pinva vi^vavAraih suvfram. The last half-verse is
repeated below as 79. i c, d. |_In c, n^ is superfluous. J
5. Anumati hath come unto this well-born offering, in order to [our]
abounding in fields and in heroes ; for her forethought {prdtnati) hath
been excellent ; let her, god-shepherded, aid this offering.
Ppp. has a different first half : d no devy anumatir jagamydt suksatnl vfratd yd
sujdid ; |_its d appears to be sa imam yajhath bhavatu ntvajustd^ intending perhaps
avatu devajustam : Roth's collation is not quite consistent with his note. J Neither this
verse nor the next has any yVi^/i/f character. |_F'or b, the Ppp. \'ersion suggests that the
original reading may have been suksetrd suvlrdidydi siijdtd : cf. Roth, Ueber geivisse
Kih'zungen im Wortende im Veda^ P*^gc 6. J
6. Anumati hath become all this — what stands, moves, and all that
stirs; may we be in the favor \snmati\ of thee as such, O goddess;
O Anumati, for mayest thou approve us.
Ppp. has, for a, anumatir vi^vam idam jajdna ; |_in b (omitting // and 7'i^vam)^ it
xQ:i(\s y ad tjati carat i yac ca tisthati, thus rectifying the meter J.
21 (22). In praise of the sun. ;(j ^J^^^^tf- -/^tJn^^ pi /9^, ^
[BraAmau. — fnantroktdtmadevatyam. ^akvartvirddgarbhd jagati.'\ ^^^^ ^ <4^ <•-* *^
Found also in Paipp. xx., .ind in SV. (i. 372). According to Kaug. (86. 16), the verse
is used in \\Mt pitrnidhdua division of the funeral ceremony accompanying the applica-
tion of the dhfuvanas (sic) ; ^see xviii. 3. 10, 17.J
Translated: Henry, 9, 61 ; Griffith, i. 338.
I . Come ye together all with address {vdcas) to the lord of the sky ;
[he is] the one mighty {xnb/ifi) guest of people; may he, ancient, concili-
ate the present one ; him, being one, the track hath much turned after.
The verse is here literally rendered according to the AV. version, but comparison
with SV. and Ppp. shows plainly that its readings are very corrupt SV. reads, in a,
J. vi^vtl djasil; it has at beginning of hyd dka id bhur; in c, djigtsam; in d, vartati*n\
and ^ka it at the end (omitting puru), Ppp's version is this : a, b, sam ditu 7'ifvd
oham d pati divo esa ita bhiir aditir jandndm ; in d, vivrte *kam it paruh. LHcnry
sugfjests some emendations. J The meter (12 + 10 : 1 1 + 14=47) is not accurately defmcd
by the Anukr.
22 (23). To the sun(?).
[Bra/ifftan. — dvyrcam. liugoktadevatyam. j, z-p. i-ax'. virdtfgdyatri ; 1. j'P,anustMbh.\
Found also in Paipp. xx. Both verses form a single long verse in SV. (i. 458).
Appears in Kau<;. (66. 14), in the savayajfias^ with vi. 31, on giving a spotted cow.
In Vait. (13. 8) it follows, in the ag/tistomat next after hymn 14.
Translated : Henry, 9, 61 ; Griffith, i. 338.
/
vii. 2J- HOOK Vn. THE ATIIARVA-VKDA-SAWHITA. 4<H
1. This one [is] «i thoiisaiul for our seeing, thought of the poets« light
in extent.
Th(? translation is only mechanical, tlic real scrue !)t.'inK wholly ol»curc. SV. read*
iHiti't* tff'^ii/} (for i $to tff'(i^) ; l'l»!*'« '' "'' r^'^ ' ^"<J titff/ir for $natir. SV. ends mith
vitihivma. The romui. (livi(k*5 the verses differently, ending the first with sam Atrajram,
Af^ainst the niss., the Anukr., tlie SV., ami the eviilent ronncction |_hiit apparently with
I'pp.J. The metrical (lefinitions of the Anukr. arc bad ; each verse is 12-f 8, the Bccond
havin^r an addeil pada of 1 1 syllables.
2. The ruddy one sent together the collected dawns, faultless, like-
:y^^r^ ■/''"' minded, most-furious, in the gathered stall of the cow.
^j. 1*1^^ f Kven to make a mechanical vcision it has heen necessary to reatl Airayat^ ^ith SV..
// J ^' - which has further, at the end. f/tit/iyuffttin/a( ci'/d /;M y I'pp. gives irara, and titajt^
//^' The second anNviika, ending here, has 9 hymns and 22 verses; the Anukr. quota-
tion savs //rr Jvitivf tu vidvt^t.
1^1 n the liead lineof p. 150 of the Iteilin edition, correct the misprinted itilirf/tf-nunilicr
6 to 7. J
23 (24). Against ill conditions and beings.
The hymn is merely a repetition of iv. 1 7. 5 alM>ve, and is not found in Tilipp. other-
wise than as part of the latter hymn. It is used nritlier by K.iu^. nor hy V.Ait. |^As to
its insertion in the second anttviilti, see p. 389, near top. J
Translated : Henry, 9, 62 ; (iiitfith, i. 338.
I . ICvil-dreaming, evil-living, demon, monster, hags, all the ill-named (f .)«
ill- voiced — them we make disappear from us.
24 (25). To various gods.
[ /irtih //I ii /I. — jiF: ih .1 w : // tlistub ham.\
Not found in Taipp. I'sed l>y Kfiu*;. (5»r 10) only with 17 etc.: sec under hymn 17.
Translated : Henry, 10. di ; (iriffith, i. 330.
I. What Indra dug for us, what Agni, all the gods, what the well-
singing Manits — that may .Savitar of true ordinances, may IVajapati.
may Aniini;iti confirm to us.
The « ointn. reads irii////r/ ( tuf,n/.'it) in a. and so do our Hp.I. (I**, nsamat P-bl).
aIthoii;;h SI* I*. iep«)rts no su«.h variant anioiii; his authorities.
25(26). Praise to Vishnu and Varuna.
I .t/ir. /'■!.;. '//•'. r ,i: \r,.int. 1 Jt'rr,ti*im. ttthstttt*k*imA
'I !i<* h\inn is found also in r.ii|ip. xx. I'sed by Kaui;. (59. lo) only with hrmn 17
etr. ( v\)iirJi ».ri').
Tr.iM'^l.Hi «| I.-.hlwii:. p. 42'j: Henry, \ ?, /•3 ; (iiilVith. i. 339.
40S TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK VII. -vii. 26
1. By whose L^u.J force were established the spaces (rdjas), who by
heroisms are most heroic, most mighty, who by their powers lord it
unopposed — to Vishnu, to Varuna hath gone the first invocation.
The verse is found also in a number of other texts: VS. (viii. 59), TIJ. (ii. 8. 45),
MS. (iv. 14. 6), SH. (i. 5), A(^S. (v. 20. 6), Q<iS. (iii. 20. 4) ; all of Ihcni agree nearly in
their variations from our text : thus, -niryibhir (but MS. vlribhir) for our yHu vlryiiW
in b ; ^'i and dpratitH (but TB. -ilftil) in c ; and visnil^ vdruttii^ and ptlrvd/it'ttiitt (but
MS. -/////) in d; TB. further ^Acisthd in b. Ppp. has stabhitd in a, and ^acfbhih (for
^avisthH) in b.
2. In whose (sing.) direction is whatever shines out here, [whatever]
both breathes forth and looks abroad mightily (fdctb/iis)^ of old, by the
god*s ordinance, with powers (sd/ias) — to Vishnu, to Varuna hath gone
the first invocation.
The first pada is found above as iv. 23. 7 a, and nearly as iv. 28. i b; also in TS.
iii. 3. 114. ppp. reads, for c, inaho* rtasya dharviand yuvdnH^ and begins with yayos,
Tiic comm., in b, seems to give prd *niii ca. The first pada is x^^tx jagatl, *|_So
Roth's collation : his notes give inixhll.\
26 (27). Praise and prayer to Vishnu.
\Medhdtithi. — astarcam. vdisfiavam. trdistubham : 2. j-p. virddgdyatri ; j. j-AV.d-p,
virdifakvari : 4-y. gdyatrl ; 8. irisfubA.]
Only vss. 1-3, and those not complete, are found in Ppp. (xx.). Most of the material
of the hymn is found in RV. |_i. 1 54 and 22J and elsewhere : sec under the different verses.
Tlie hymn is found in Kau^. (59. 19) only in connection with hymn 17 etc. (sec 17).
But in Vait. the different verses appear many times. Verse i is used (13.14) in the
entertainment of Vishnu, in the agnistoma (next after hymn 5, above), and later in the
same ceremony (15. 12), with setting up the support of the havirdhdnas. Verse 3, in
the parvan ceremonies, accompanie.i (4. 20) the sacrificer's approach to the dhavanlya
fire; and again, in the agnistoma (13.5), his exit from the sacrificial hut; while its
second part (c-f) goes with the offering of an oblation to Vishnu at the beginning of
\\\^ pa^ubandha (10. i). Verses 4 and 5 accompany (15. 10) offerings to the two wheel-
tracks of the //rt7Vr///iJ/m-carts in the agnistoma. With verse 6, in the agnicayana
(29. 2), mortar and pestle are set down ; and with 6 and 7, in \\it pa^ubattd/ia (10. 10),
the sacrificial post is set upright ; and the comm. regards vs. 4 as intended by the ** verse
to Vishnu " in 2. 3 and 23. 14. The comm., moreover, quotes the hymn as used by the
Naksatra Kalpa (18) in a tnahd^dnti ceremony named vdisnaTl; and vs. 3 c-f by the
same (14) with an offering to Vishnu in the adbhuta^dnti ; and vs. 4 by the same (19),
in the rite called tvdstrly with tying on of a triple amulet.
Translated: Muir, iv». 68, 63 (nearly all); Henry, 10, 63; Griffith, i. 339.
I. Of Vishnu now I would speak forth the heroisms, who traversed
{vi-ma) the spaces of the earth, who established the upper station, strid-
ing out triply, he the wide-going one.
The verse is RV. i. 154. i (also VS. v. 18 ; TS. i. 2. 133 ; MS. i. 2. 9, all precisely like
RV^), which reads at end of a, in different order, vfryhni prd t*ocam, Prd in our text
vii. 26. IJOOK VII. Tin: ATHARVA-VKDA-SAMIMTA. 406
is a misprinl for //it, whitli all our .!/?//> A ///I -mss. c*vc. |_The vs. sccm^ lo l« su|(|;rMri|
l»y KV. i. 32. I.J
2. So Vishnu praises foitli his heroisms, like a fearful wild beast,
waiulcriiij;, nitmnlain-stayinj;, —
From distant tlistance may he come hither. -
'Mil* III .si two jMil.is of this vris<\ \\\\\\ tlir fust two of niir \s. 3, form one vci»c in
the otlnT texts : UV. i. I 54. 2 ; TH. ii. .). 3* ; MS. i. 2. >>: Ap. %i.o-i: a;ii! also in l'|«p .
wliich liiis it alone, Ix'sidrs our vs. 1. I\\'.MS. rend -•ifyhiti, whiili is lirticr. in a.
TH.Ap. 77/ I'lVcf instiMiJ. < )iir second p.ld.t forms. to^etluT with our (intruded) ihirti
jud.i, a liist half vcisc in several other texts: KV. x. iSo. 2; .SV. ii. 1223; VS. x\tii. 71 ;
TS. i.^». I2<; MS. iv. 12. 3: in.ste.id of jttt^.ztttvtit is re.id jtf^itnthii l»\ all exirpl Ir* .
whirh has jiij^t'ifful ; the whole (KV. eti . ) viise is our vii. S4. 3 IkIow. 1 he con;m
unites to this verse tlie first two p.'id.is of the one fullowin^. mhit li errtaiidy Im-Ii'Dji*
miK.Ii more propeily with it: Ixit the mss. and the .\nukr. leqiiire the division as macle
in our text: and SIM*, also follows tliem.
3. Upon whose three \vi<le (»iit-stridinj;s dwell all beings.
Widely, O Vishnu, stiide out ; widely make us to dwell ; drink the ghcc,
O tiiou [;hee-woml)ed one; prnlun;; the master <»f the sacrifice on and on.
Maile tip of the set Olid half of a !\\'. ete. tuy/ul/i veiso (.see al»iive; no text shi<i«4
in this h.ilf anv various ie;idii);:s) and a whide atiu\tuhh verse, uhiili also \s fmiiifi in
a nuinl>er of other texts (\S. v. v^ : I ■'^- i-.V4': ^'•*^■ i. 2. 13; A^.'.S. v. |.*. 3; l^<, S.
viii. 4. 3 ). and almost without valiants (only 'IS. eoinliines tttih ktdhi in b, and MS.
reads j^hrtarant in C). LI'pP- ends with b (:7f7'«i).J
4. Here Vishnu strode out; thrice he set down liis slrps; [it is] ccd-
lected in his dust.
This ami tlie three fnihiwiii;; vi-isi-s form one t'onnrc led passai^r also in KV.
(i.22. 17 20) ami S\'. (ii. ioi<) zz), i)iit not in the other texts in wliii h Ihry are. in
p.iit or ail, loiiiid. In this vi-ise. I\\'.S\'. read /i/i/ifw at eml of b.* and S\'. tias/^Jjv-
f«/r' at eml of c. t>f ihi' oth<r texts. V.S. (v. 15) and IS. (i. 2. 13') .v.:ree iiith k\'.;
.MS. (i. .V •) rt al. ) h.is /i/i/ii. like fuir text. 'I h^* meaniii'^ of c is ol»si uie and di!^| uie«l:
the « omm. \v:\\\ expl.iins thus: it^aoh . . . /'iifiM/t/t.tfi pt'i%if loltit'tinini . . . sttnnnas-
///.7///.I/// ii/Wi/ ■'/</.//// Til. Ileniy lendeis " fnr him it is reduced to a du^l-heap '*
•[SV. ;ds.i .11 i. 222. J
5. Three steps Vishiiu strode out, the unharmablc shepherd, ordain-
ing (</■'/■) heie (i/tis) [his] ordinances.
K\'.SV. le.nl i/.'.M at ln;:innini; (»f c, an«l \'S. (xx\iv.43) .i^jrecs with them: TII^
(ii.4.''') ii.is in«it' .1 1 /.//M. It s*'« ins liaidiv pt>ssilile to );ive i/Jt its distinetive mean-
in:^ 'fiDMi liei'"'; i'lit II' my « omMnes it with :/ tahtime: "fioni here." 'I lie comm.
h.is ,;.'.; 1.
6. MehoM y«' th'* drcils of \'ishnu. frrtni where he beholds [vour]
CMurse-: (:/i7i'./). (he| India's suitald*; companion.
< >i i.'.'.T v.\ b m IV mi-.ui simpiv * .is.' Ni»l i»rdy KV SV.. Imt also tli** o!her texts ron-
t.iinin^ iljis viisr (\*S. \i. \ *\ al ; I S. i. ; '.' : MS i .v I O, have t'.r s.ime rradin:;%
with o'lis. 1 l>e < nniin. exj-lains /./i^^./j/- as t/^p^,/// f',T.iV:n.}fi t-iI .'
407 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK VII. -vii. 28
The comm. strangely * closes the hymn here, and treats its last two verses as (^belonging
to the next : see p. 389 J. •L Because he has got to the end of his " s|)oiled decad " ?J
7. That highest step of Vishnu the patrons (stlri) ever behold, like an
eye stretched on the sky.
In all the texts, this verse is given in connection with the preceding one. RV.SV.,
and also VS. (vi. 5), have precisely our text ; TS. (i. 3. 6» et al.) diflers only by accent-
ing, according to its usage, divi *va *y MS. (i. 2. 14) reads ^dcyd for sddd in b. • \Jjram,
§ I 28 ; Prat iii. 56.J
8. From the sky, O Vishnu, or also from the earth ; from the great
wide atmosphere, O Vishnu, fill thy hands abundantly with good things;
reach forth hither from the right, hither also from the left.
The verse is found also in VS. (v. 19), TS. (i.2. 13*), and MS. (1.2. 9). VS.TS.
insert vd after divih in a and mahds in b, and TS. reads utd vd lor urds in b, while
MS. has, for b, urdr vd vis/to brhatd antdriksdt ; TS. combines both times visnav u- :
VS. has, for c, ubha hi hdstd vdsuitd prndsva; TS.MS. accent vasm/ydls, which is
decidedly more regular (but SV. i. 298 has vasdifye) ; and all three accent a prd y-^
which is also more in accordance with usage {omx pada-K<tii\. doprdyacha). The first two
padas are of 10 syllables each ; Lbut the vd'^s of VS.TS. make them good tristubh^
27 (28). Prayer and praise to Idfl.
[Afedhdtithi (f). — mantrokteddddivatam. trdistuhham,']
Not found in Paipp., but occurs in ApQS. iv. 13. 4. Kau^. makes no use of the
vcr.sc ; but in Vait. (3. 15) it accompanies a libation to Idi in iht parvan ceremonies.
Translated : Ludwig, p. 433 ; Henry, 1 1, 64 ; Griffith, i. 341.
I. Let Ida herself dress us with the vow {vratd), [she] in whose place
{padd) the pious purify themselves ; ghee-footed, able, soma-backed, she,
belonging to all the gods, hath approached the offering.
Or vratd in a may mean the vraia-vcvi^ (comm. simply karmati), ApQS. omits e7*a
and reads ghrteua for vratena in a, and has for c, vdi^vdtiarl {akvarl vdvrdhdnd.
The comm. reads upd ^ stria in d.
28 (29). Of the instruments of o£Fering.
[Afedhdtithi (f). — vedadevaidkam* trdisfubkam.]
Fcmd also in Paipp. xx. To this hymn, as to the preceding, Kdu^. pays no attention ;
but it is used twice by Vait. : once in the pari'an ceremony (4. 12), as the hoiar unties
the vcdti-h\ix\QS\ ; and once in the agnisioma (13.2), in connection with the prdyanlya
isti.
Translated: Ludwig, p. 19; Henry, 11,65; Griffith, i. 341.
I . The vcdd [is] well-being, the tree-smiter well-being ; the rib [is]
sacrificial hearth {vM), the ax our well-being; oblation-making, worship-
ful, lovers of the offering, let those gods enjoy this offering.'
The first half-verse corresponds to the initial clauses of TS. iii. 2. 4> : sphydh rvastir
vighandh svasiih pdr^ur vidih para^iir nak svasHh. By the vedd is doubtless here
vii. 28- HOOK VII. Till-: ATHARVA-VKDA-SAttHITA. 40*
meant tlie hunch of sacred f^rass sn callcfl, used in the ceremonies of offerin[|^ {dgr§Aa»
/;/«.f//, comni.). The w of driii^haiitis {\i. t/ru->i;/iitfia/i) is prrscribcd by I'rftl. iti. 76.
*Ihr « omiii. rxpl.iins it I»v /i/T'/// !/•/;//, hcraiisc tfntf t/ruwo h^tftyaU 'netia. Half of
SlM**.s author it irs arcnit /if/v7f'i/r the t'list timr, and nf ours all but one ( D. ), and we
accordin;:!)- adnpti-d that reading in our text, as it srcmi-d very unlikely that it would t*c
so distini'uislird fif>m para^us in the same pada without leason — and the rcxv>n in fact
seems to l)e that it stands for /if/^r/j (TS.) [_ which pronunciation the meter deridcdiy
f. Ivors for the jm/i// at the end of b must scan as 3 syllables J. SIT. accents/artf^ir/
lN)th times. The romm. apparently understands /i//f/(//r. as he explains it 3l% far^uA
ftlrf : M Tuifilns [^/t fnlifi\i/ttri/itfti j, but 1 1 1 c sc< ' o nd />iinifiis 1 ly 7 -r Istin htdanasAdhama .
lie takes away tlic stran^^c inconsistenty in the use of svasti by reading (like TS )
svastih at end of b. |_ Discussions of tft tii;/uiita : (jeldner, I'tti. Sfutt ii. 3 ; von liradke,
/l).M(i. xlvi. 4^2 ; lUocmifield. ib. xlviii. 546; Franko, WZKM. viii. 342.J \\n b, Ppp.
reads /ii/*/^ i/r vfdis pitra^u tuis svasti^ and, in d, havir iJam i\yx yajfiam I'mam.j
2900). To Agni and Vishnu.
[Afft/AJ/i/Ai (^). — tix-yvs:am. maHtrcktdJ*livatam. /rJii/tiSkiim.']
Found also in IViipp. xx. (in inverse order of verses); and. as connected passage,
further in TS. (i. R. 22") and ^^'S. (ii. 4. 3). L^sed by K.iu^. (32. 3), with hymns 43. 46,
7R, 112. in a remedial rite for vaiious diseases, with binding of grass on the joints; and
also (5'). 1 1 )) with 17 etr. : sec 17. In Vait. (8. i ), it acrompanies an offering* to A^ni and
Vishnu at the be}; inning; of the pat van ceremony. [^Whitney .seems to doubt whether
the Anukr. does not mean to a.scribe this hymn (and 27, 2.S) to /M/j^'T-ii/7^'/><fi.J
Translatcfl : l.udwi;;, p. 374 ; lienry, 12, 65 ; (^rifl'ith. i- 341.
1. (.) A*;ni-an(l-Visbnii, ^rcat [is] that f;rcatncss of yours; yc drink
of the j;hce that is callc<l secret, a.ssumin^ seven treasures in each house;
may your tonj^iie move 011 to meet the j;hee.
TS. has, in b. the imperative 7'//if///, and (,\'S. pafatn, and Iwith jf//A»'iI«/, which make«
of utitna an acf us. pi : at the end, '1 S. has t.i'anir/, and <,'<,'S. -riyai; and both tfJMJmJ
at end of c: WS. further exchan«;rs I c and 2 c, and has ///<i for ptaii at Iteginninf^
of d. MS. mixis up tlie matciial of tin- two verses still more, putting; our I b.C after our
2 a in iv. 1'^. I, and our 2 b. c after our 1 a in iv. 11.2 (in iv. 10. t it reads jci#Ar J#rf and
iftUhtJit,}, !ik«r the other t\\o ti'xts, but pt\thA$^ like ours) ; in d (iv. 11. 2). it has Ahu (the
text wriMii;ly //.v) ihstiMcl of ptAti, and at the end nyat. KIl. (vii. 2) has two pidas
rcst'mbliii^ d (on«.' witli upa and one with ptati at the bef^inninj;, and l>oth ending; with
ta'ttf/iii/) \Vit!i b « nnip.ire furihrr l\\'. iv. ^S. i c. and with c KV. v. i.5|^cand vi.
74 I cj. rpp- exrh.in^es t)w' pl.no of 1 b and 2 b. and reads in the former (like f^\'S.)
p^tam MwX iiuh\x\ni [si-e my addition to note to vs. 2 J.
2. () A;;iiian'l-\'isbn!i, j;rt\'\t [is] your dear domain (Mtlwiin) ; yc par-
take of f:/) the i;brf', enj'»\in;; srtu-t thini;«;, increasin;; by j;ood praise in
e.ich bouse; m;iy your ton<;iie move up to meet the pbec.
For ihi- rxrhan:;«"s of p.Vl.is in th-.' »>ther tfxts. see umler tin* preceding verse; for this
vrrsc: \\r h.ivr Ih re fuith'T At,*S. (ii. S. ^>. witliotit such exrhancr. In the material <nf-
rtspnii,i:ui^ to iiiir 2, all the ot'nr texts rr.id ;//<i}fta at end of b : at end of d. TS. has
ae.iin rv,/, .iii>l .ill the others -nvat: ISMS, have x\l'*rtihilmi at end of c, and TS.
409 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK VII. -vii. 32
sushidr^ MS. sustutiy before it; while A<JS.QQS. read instead sustutir vnm iydnd^
evidently corrupt. Ppp. has, for b (putting it in the other verse), p.dia/h ghriasya
guhyd jusHttah, VS. (viii. 24) and MS. (in i. 3. 39)1 finally, have a second half-verse
ne.irly like our c, d, but addressed to Agni, with a wholly different first half : it reads
diime-datne samidham yaksy (MS. ydksy) agne prAti te jihva ghrtAm uc caranyat.
LThc •• inversion '* of the verses in Ppp., taken with the " exchange of p^das 1 b and
2 b/* seems to mean that the Ppp. reading is as follows: agndvisnii mahi dhiiftta priya/h
7v7//> puiam ghrtasya giihydni ndma : dame-dame etc. ; and then, agndvisnil tnahi tad
vdth mahitvam pCitath ghrtasya guhyd jusdnah : dame-dame etc. J
30 (31). For successful anointing.
\^Bhrgvaugiras. — dyavdprthiviyam uta pratipddoktadevatdkam, MrAatam.']
Not found in Paipp. Used by Kau^. (54.6) in the goddfta ceremony, to accompany
the anointing of the youth's eyes. Vait. (10. 5) makes it accompany, in the paqubandha^
the anointing of the sacrificial post.
Translated: Henry, 12,65; Griffith, i. 342.
I. Well anointed for me have heaven-and-earth, well anointed hath
Mitra here made [it] ; well anointed for me may Brahmanaspati, well
anointed may Savitar make [it].
The comm. supplies aksiyugam yiipath vd for svdktam to agree with. The meter
is plainly anustubh.
31(32). To Indra: for aid.
[Bhrgvangiras. — dindram . bh uriktristubh .]
Like the preceding, not found in PSipp. Used by K^lug. (48. 37), with hymns 34
and 108, and with vii. 59 \qx vi. 37. 3 (but see note to vii. 59) J, in a witchcraft ceremony
against enemies, while laying on the fire fuel from a tree struck by lightning.
Translated : Henry, 12, 66 ; Griffith, i. 342.
I. O Indra, with abundant best possible aids, O generous hero,
quicken us today ; whoever hates us, may he fall downward ; and whom
we hate, him let breath quit.
The verse is RV. iii. 53. 21, which has for sole variant ydcchresthAbhis [^which the
meter alone would suggest as an emendationj (p. ydto^re-) in b. The combination sds
padfsta is prescribed by Prat. ii. 58. The comm. treats ydvat and qresfhdbhis as inde-
pendent words.
32 (33). Homage to Sonia(?).
\Brahman, — dyusyam. dnustubham^
Found also (except d) in Paipp. xx. It is, without variant, RV. ix. 67. 29 (which
also lacks d). Used by Kau^. twice (58. 3, 1 1) in rites for length of life (on account of
the concluding pada), with iii. 31, iv. 13, and other passages, in the ceremony of initia-
tion of a Vedic student It is reckoned (54. 1 1, note) to the dynsya gana.
Translated: by RV. translators; and Henry, 12, 66; Griffith, L 342.
vii. 3J HOOK VII. Till-: ATIIARVA-VKDA-SAMIIITA. 4IO
I. Unto the dear, wondcr-workinp, young, ohlation-incrcasing one
have we gone, IxMring homage ; long life-time let him make for mc.
The vcrsc is in UV. arldrvsscfl to Soma. 'I lie coinin. undcrsUncls it here of Agni.
lie explains /if//// miA/m as ^abiitlytimtlnam s/tnitwdHiiM rt}.
33 (34.)- For blessings : to various gods.
round, withdUt variant, in I'.'iipp. \i. : also in a nurnlirr of ntlicr texts; see below.
Till" vrise Ims various usi-s in K.nn;.-. nrxt after liyinii i ;. in a lile for |iros|>rrity (24 S |.
with olfi'iini; a (iisli of niixr<l j;;iain ; in tiie ceremony of rr( cption of a X'rdir stuilrnt,
twire ( 57- 2 2, 25), in th-.* |_f/i,'///i(-i/Mii J, witli sprinklin); lliiire ii-prated ; and (note to
53.4) ill" SI Iu)I. a«M it in ntliiT ritrs, \\\v i;iut,lfiti vU . In \'.iit (2w- 21). the htthmam
priest makes th<r sarrii'Krr repeat it on fieinj; anointed, in ttie iij;nutiytina reremony.
Translated: lleiiiy. 13, f>^: ( ii itVith, i. 342.
I. Let the Manits pniir me tog^'ther, together Pushan, together Hri-
haspati, tc>geth«T let Agni here pour me with ln»th progeny and wealth ;
long life-time let him make for me.
• I'our toyriluT ' ( T,f;//-f/, ). i.e. mingle, rondtine. unite; the expression prrd>ji1<Ii
chosen as ai « ofnpan\in;; an a* tinii nf mixing thiiii^s to'^rthrr l>y |inurin|;. In tlieir ror-
respfimlini^ verses. lA. (ii. I Si), j |l. (i. 3'.2). ApJ.'S. (xiv. iS. i ). and l'<iS. (iii. 12. ir 1
have /f/i/'.M instead of ///i>/ in b: Ap(,'S. has 7-i/» instead of ///•! in a and C ; in d.
TA. I r>.Ap(,"S. have iivtni} foi /;if;,/r»>. and 'I'A.JIJ f'Alftt*i for tihyin/n^i ; e is wantir.c
in I*<;S. ; Ap<,'S has sarvtim and ttitih*iiu,'\'t\. ayti^wantam katoUi f*u\. The variants
cd K. (xxxv. 2) are n<»t .u < esNi!»le.
34(35)* To Agni : against enemies.
Kotnid also in P.'iipp. xx. (I»ut milx the fiist halfveise) fsed hy K.un;. (3^. 33). in
a lite lonicrninv; wnnien. tn prevent ;:<-Mi-rarioii nf a male cliilil : also (4-^-37). ».t'<i
hymn 31 etc., against enemies : see umlei 31. \*;iit. {!*).(*) ap]>lies the verse, with iJie
next. 35. I. in the tti^m\ii\iin,t, while the l<ii(ks ealh-d asiiptttitxi arc laid on the fifth
c«>UTsi* <d tlie t'lir altar.
'liaiislat-d: Henry. 13. Mi; (irilVilh. i. 3.13.
I. () A^ni, thrust f»>itli iiiy rivals that are horn; thrust back. O
l.'itavcij.i^. th»i»;<' tiiihnin ; put un»K*ifoot those that want to fight [me];
m.iv wr !>«• L'uillh'ss f«»r thre \\\\U\ Aditi.
Ihi- lust li.dl xii^e (wiilj a tut dly ditt-'imt s-i miil half) O' 1 iirs aN«i in \'S (x\. m.
'IS \\\ \ I."). I .\ (ii. ; .'). and .MS. (ii. .S. 7). [< f Katlut h\\., p. 7.^ J 1 !'■« \ ^\\
le.ii! w : 1 itixii- III nf /';#■ in a; .iml \".S h.is uuda ( imt /.";i#/.J) l-ifun* it. and nuti^i .•jf.'.t
' tJ.iii .U ■ : d I'l b Ml'" • cii:ini. ( ' a- k' d up 1\ two or slirei* c>f STP's aiitlniritie^) isi <'rr-
slaiiils /.' MiNt.-.iiI nf t€ in d. and M'l*. (unwisely) afh»pts that readin;; in his text T?:e
ru'-ti-r i*. tn> iiit-mil.ir ti» In* pmp.iU » allrd simple f*fi^titl. |^The exiisii>n finm d *'f
r.;if".' .ii:<l tlie wnisr fli.ni n;;; n tiunii*: /#• w«>nld m.ike all ri-;^iilai. lltllrlS^liJ
[ rpp i". A « \i hiM'^rs \\w pl.ic •' (ij %'tf,ii: .nid y.rf^.tftCiln and omits ///^ ,- \,Jks ^rnlht V^r
K'l.:.:: .1 ri l» ■. .1: ! ntniJs C. d J
411 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK VII. -vii. 36
35 (36). Against a rival (woman).
[AfAarvan, — /ream, jdtaxftdasam. dnustubham : ifj.tristuhk.']
The first two verses are found also in Paipp. xx., but not together. K§u^. employs
the hymn in the same rule (36. 33) as hymn 34, to prevent an enemy*s wife from bear-
ing cliildren ; only vss. 2 and 3 are suited to such use. For the use of vs. i by Vait.
(29.6), see under the preceding hymn.
Translated: Ludwig, p. 477 (vss. 2, 3); Henry, 13, 67; Griffith, i. 343, and 475;
Bloomficld, 98, 545.
1. Overpower away with power [our] other rivals; thrust back, O
Jatavedas, those unborn; fill this royalty unto good fortune; let all the
gods revel after him.
Of this verse also the first half, with a wholly diflerent second half, is found in VS.
(xv. 2), TS. (iv. 3. 12'), and MS. (ii. 8. 7) ; all read, for a, sdhasii jdiin prd nudd nah
sapdtndn. Our second half, especially the last pida, is rather wanting in connection
with what precedes; Ppp. improves d by reading /imi^ ivd devds sarvejnsantdm. The
comm. explains rdsfram by asmadlyam janapadam^ and tnam by qatruhananakar-
ma It ah prayoktdram.
2. These hundred veins that are thine, and the thousand tubes — of
them all of thine I have covered the opening with a stone.
Ppp. reads sdkam for aham in c. The comm. regards the verse as addressed to a
vidvesitil strl. To him the hirds are the minute, and the dhamanls the large vessels.
3. The upper part of thy womb I make the lower; let there not be
progeny to thee, nor birth ; I make thee barren {as&), without progeny ;
I make a stone thy cover.
The mss. are divided between sii/ttA and siinuh at end of b (our Bp.D. read siinuh)^
and SPP. adopts siinuh (following half his authorities and the comm.), but wrongly, as
the accent plainly shows.* The comm. reads af7/dM at beginning of c, and supports it
by a ridiculous explanation : it stands for a^vatarim * a she-mule,' and she-mules are
not fruitful ! \\n the Berlin ed., the r of krnofni in c is wanting. J •^Cf. the note to
i. 1 1. I.J
The discordance between vs. i and vss. 2 and 3 is so complete that it is difficult to
believe them all to form one hymn together ; and vs. i evidently belongs with hymn 34 ;
vss. 2 and 3, moreover, are probably combined on account of their resemblance in the
closing padas. But there is no disagreement among the authorities witli regard to the
division.
36 (37). Husband and wife to one another.
[Atharvan. — mantroktdkjidevatyam, dnttsfuSAam.l
Of this verse are found in PSipp. only the first words, a lacuna following. K&u^.
(79. 2) prescribes its use in the marriage ceremonies of the fourth day, as the two
spouses anoint one another*s eyes.
Translated: Weber, /nd. S/ttd, v. 248; Grill, 55, 179; Henr)*, 13, 67; Griffith,
i. 343 ; Bloomficld, 96, 546. — Cf. also Bergaigne, J A. 8. iii. 200, note (1884).
vii. Vi r.OOK VII. Till-: ATIIARVA^Vr.DA-SAMlIITA. 4^2
I. The cyrs of us two [l>c] of honey aspect ; our face [be] ointment :
put (If ) thou ine within thy he;iit ; may our mind verily be lOKCther.
'I'iir <iiiMin. Iir^ins with ttl'u'tu^ and I'pp- nlso rrads (lie s.iinr. '1 hr /<i«/<f-lext dividrt
sti/t,i 'jf/// into xithtl : ihii/i\ ulii« h is plainly wrDii;; (slmuKl he attiti).
37(38). The wife to the husband.
Wantiii;^ in r."»ip]»., hiil pi-ili.ips l»y rrason of the lacuna nntnl iinclcr the prrcetiinc
vrisc. Knipliiycd by K;ni(;. (7v). 7) in llic sanir ii-nmony as the preretling hymn, tiii^i
the diKM tinii t/v ti/>/ni/iih/itvtt/t\ whu \\ may well cnonj^h ini-an. ax plainly ret|uireii l'\ llir
si'nsr of Ihi; vnsr, * slie envelops htm,* Init is c\])l.iincrl l>y the schol. as * one cnvcIo|.«
lliL* two Sp(MISrS.'
Tiansl.ittd : Welnr, /ti<f. Simi. v. 2.|S : (Will, 55, 17*); Henry. 14, ^7 ; Clriffiih.
j. _VJ3 ; lUoomfu-lil, «j'», 5.;'».
I. I briiile (iibhidhii) thee with my Manuborn {garment, that thou
may est be wholly mine, mayest not make mention of other women.
The ('(unni. explains ntttnu- altrrnativi'lv hv "/•/'//> f'/f.r. and take^ kirtiivtls 2S = M«<-ii-
ti'K : and he siipplirs tttlNttitiiii'vam as the Littt'i's dii*it nhjft t, ^ot'erninf; amyJid»fr
** .Mann-1)ni II " is a stiani^c epitlR-t fur a garment: peihaps the woman's embrace ti
Intrndrd. or her hair - if tiiis l)c not too poetic. The second half-verse is nearly iden-
tit al with 3S. 4 c. d.
38(39). To win and fix a inan*s love: with a plant.
'I'iie first t^M) voisi-s of tliis h\mn arc fonnd in iTiijip. x\.. hut in a fr.if;meniarv an!
corinpt londition; the remainin;; threr, in iii. I'sed, accf>rdinj; to K.'in<;. (3/1. 12). mi-i
vi. I^<), 13'). in a lilr « ntx nnin;; wnnien; ll.e plant is fastmed to the head (ti( the
woman |_so the (ninm.J), aiu] .slic entcis the viliai^f. (Ket^ava explains difTcrrntU )
\\\v iruaids a man as i >!•]«■( l of tlie lite (/iff id ^if,ist Afi/i//i; J), as indeed the text tti
Vs. 2 d re«juilrs. J
'1 lansi.it'-d : \Vil»er. //;./. .^/.7./. v. 24«j ; I.ndwi:;, p. 515; <iiill. 5'). 1 70 : llenrv. 14.
(tS ; (liitnili. i \\\: riliMimt'uIil, I 3. 54'!.
I. I (11;^ this iemr<ly. tnc iei;ar(lin;;. greatly wailing;, the returner of
on<' ^'MM'.^ away. ;;rei'ter of une eoiniuL;.
« Mih tl;»* liisi h.ill' VfiNi; is fn'MpI in I'j'P- ^ ''^* I'omm.. alter K.oi^ . understands the
i«"nr'l'. In ]■•• lli.ii n.imi-1 »./.7..;/. ./.".;,• •• Sim hal salt.** J/l/•'ly^.f^ \',tr/t he explain* as e:ther
ffj.'i'-r f- : t f:. !':•'.• /• r Vttt in rif: f,,i ti iti,iii,n yiii\t*itt f'tifvt /^» if. /.;»,. fji// , thrre can
l»iii|i' il;. !«■■ im • .11 - i:i'. •• foil I- i'l /•./, i.f. [ WeU'i s:i"^i:esis t!»at nt*irf:f',i^ytjfn inav l« a
misj.ni.i (nr i,/ ; l-iit iIh- miss, ni .spp. and W. a!l appear to have ///.}-. except Wi lip .
\\lii<h h.is .t . \ 11'* otip r <!:i;ii ;!ll epithet, tif httof utiam^ he makes no ditricultv of
ixplaiTi-:!'.^ .IN il it I n::Mi:j' d l!ii- rciil ;;//// jii^l«ail ni ntti : f^tttynh ttniiimtl^Isamtapf^m
•.••■■'';.'■ .: .1 u*: /''':.:/ ' lli.it luii^lil 1 •• 1 imi\ r;ii' tit. if admissil'ie: the ii//;/ with r^mSt '-.s
413 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK VII. -vii. 38
♦[But Kiiu^., Darila and Ke^ava, and thccomm. seem to intend by sduvarcahx a root
or flower and not a salt decoction (cf. OB. vii. 195) therefrom. See Bloomfiehrs note,
p. 539. He observes that the Sutra does not here inspire us with confidence in its
exactness. — See further my addition to note on vs. 5. J
2. Wherewith the Asuri put down Indra from among the gods, there-
with put I thee down, that I may be very dear [fem. !J to thee.
The comm. explains dstirl alternatively as asurasya mdyd^ and renders /// cakre by
yuddhe s7Hl(ihlnam krtavatl. LWeber, Henry, and Bloomfield understand this vs. as
relating to Indra's seduction by an dsurl : cf. Oertel, JAOS. xix ». 120. J LPpp. corrupt,
as noted above. J ^^^zJg^ A XL^ ^<^>/- U^'^^Jf^ ^^ > '> >
3. Correspondent (/r^//r/) to Soma art thou, correspondent also to the ^^^
sun, correspondent to all the gods ; as such we address [ac/ta-d-vad] thee.
* Correspondent,* perhaps * a match for, as effective as ' ; Henry translates : " looking
in the face." The comm. declares the plant qankhapuspl to be addressed In the verse,
and paraphrases //-tf/frf by va^karandrtham pratyag-aficand. Ppp. inserts osadhe at
end of a, and reads anu for uta in b. The verse admits of being read, artificially, as
7 X4 = 28.
4. I am speaking ; not thou ; in the assembly verily do thou speak ;
mayest thou be mine wholly ; mayest thou not make mention of other
women. »
I*pp. has, in a, vadani rttahattvam^ and vaddni would be a preferable reading, but
it is given by only one of our mss. ( D. ) and three of SPP's, and is not admitted in
cither printed text. All the mss. (except our I.) accent vdda at end of b, which accent
SPP. accordingly properly enough accepts; the accent is no more anomalous than that
of kirtdyds in d : which, however, we might regard as imitated after 37. i d above,
where the same half-verse is found nearly unchanged.
5. If thou art either beyond people, or if beyond streams, may this
herb, having as it were bound [thee], conduct thee in hither to me.
With iirojanAm compare the oftener used atijandm *y the virtual meaning is • in unin-
habited regions.' Ppp. makes better meter in c by reading iyam tvd mahyam osadhih.
The comm. curiously reads tirocanam^ "with concealed going " \Jiras and aca9ta9n\.
The meter of the second half-verse b too irregular to be passed unnoticed. *LSee OB.
vii. 385 and BR. i.94.J
I^Henry, in his note, conjectures that a plant was fastened to the man before his
departure in order to ensure his return to the woman. Later, 1897, J A. 9. ix. 328, he
cites a symbolic practice, reported by Prince Henri d'Orl^ans from the Upper Irawadi:
a young woman fastens a hempen cord on the arm of her husband, who is about to be
separated from her for a time, and he does the like. This seems to him (and to me) to
confirm his view. — OB., under su7tarca[dy reports that some assign to the word the
meaning *♦ hemp." Cf. my addition to note to vs. i.J
With this hymn ends the third anuvdka^ containing 16 hymns and 31 verses; the
Anukr. quotations are, for the hymns, trilydntydn Lcf. anuvdha-noXit following h. 118 J
soda^ay and for the verses astdu tisraq cd *vabadkyds trtlye.
vii. 39- BOOK VII. THK ATHARVA-VKUA-SAttHITA. 414
39(40). In praise of Sarasvant (7).
[ Pntil'tinva. — niiintroktaJn-ttiyam. tt utsfuf'kttm. ]
Fouiwl also in rfiipp. xx. KAik;. (24.9) employs it in a rite for prosperity, with offcr-
iii;; to lii<lr.i of the omentum of a liest liull ; tlic verse is reckoned (note to 19. 1) to the
/i/j//Xm ntiifitras.
1 raiisl.Ui'fl : Henry, 14,69; (JrifTitli, i. 344.
I. [Ilim], the heavenly ca«;Ic, milky, great, embryo of the waters, bull
of the herbs, gratifying with rain from close by (?), in our cow-stall stand-
ing in wealth may [one] establish.
The first three padas aic, with variants, KV. i. 164. 52 a, b, C (also TS. iii. I. IH).
Our very senseless payauim in a is KV. vHyasAm (TS. vay-) ; our ^*rsabkdm (90 TS )
in b is KV. damUAm ; aiul KV. (not TS.) has vrstthhis in C- 1 hen, for d, RV. has
SiUawantttm Avasf johttvfmi (T.S. nearly tlic same), which makes the whole vene one
consistent construction ; our d fits very harlly. I*pp reads samudram for SHparmamt in
a. and has, for C, d. ttbhiptmh fayyH tapttnti saraivantam rahisthyA (i.e. rayiStkSmt^
sthitivf *//«/. 'I he conini. understands Sarasvant to l>e intended throughout the vrne,
and supjdirs iminis as subject for the ronrhidini; vrih; ahhipttUis he explains %*arioii&lv :
sart'ttttih stiffij^ititl iipo'smin or abhipattjua^ilan -•rstikAniAn safViiprAninak, llcBry
remlers ** those who invoke him."
40(41). Prayer and praise to Sarasvant.
[/Vir.r/-.rii:-.». "■ »/r I fi./*//. iAfxi^raLim. tt *\t ftubham : i. b/duri/.]
Found also in iViipp. xx. Kau*;. niakfs no use of the hymn ; hut it is quoted br
Vait. (S. 2). with hymn ^S, as arconipanyinc; otTerings to Sarasvat! and Sarasvant at the
full moon satiitii e.
Translated: Henry, 14, 70; (itillitli. i.345.
1. [lie] whose [established] cour.sc all the cattle go, in whose course
statid the watcis, in whose course the loril of prosperity is entered — him,
Sarasvant, we call to ait! .
'the virse is found in .srv*r.il other texts: TS. (iii.l.li*). MS. (iv. 10. I), A^S.
(iii. S. I), (,'<,'.S. (vi. 11.8): an<I it is a supplement (Aufrerht.' p. ^>7S) to KV. vii. ■/•.
Ail thrsc a«:i(e in roadinj; T/<//if/// in b, ///.(///< ///i (the comm. also has thi») in c ami
////7r/'/i/ at the end. I'pp. has ':nr/t- in a and miixitfi in b, TinAjukHX'ema at the end.
2. We. pnttin*; on abundance of wealth [and] ambition(?), would LhcrcJ
call hilhiT to |us] Sarasvant, a bcslower coming to meet his bcstowcr
(//.i{.'i///.w. loicl (»f piospeiity, standing in wealth, seat of wealths.
1 !»•• ii.iiisl.itiiui implies sulistitiition of the Tpp- reading, ^nt:'itfyam. for -rrwut in C:
till* ( nnsiiiti ti'tn is hard rnoii^h. even with that chan;;e. Tpp n\fn has rayinAm for
'ifi/i//: ;•// in b. ami 7ii\,}f/iini (whicli sri*ms better) at end of c. SIM*, reads in a the
inipM^sii.Ii* fill III (/.ff :i//>tir/// (the coinin. lias -^ulfif-), alli'sing for it the support of most of
his .i-:tli<ii:tic-s : if nny of ours have it. tlio fait was ovrilooker!. |_Iip ■ has dtl^vAmtmm :
415 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK VII. -vii. 42
41 (42). To the heavenly falcon (the sun).
[Prailafwn. — dtyream. ^yenaddivatam. i.jagafi; 2. trisiubh.^
Found also in Paipp. xx. (in inverted verse-order). Used by Kau^. (43. 3) in the
house-building ceremony (to purify the site, Ke^., comm.) : compare Bloomfield in
JAGS. xvi. 1 2 ; further added by the schol. (note to 8. 23) to the vdstu gana; moreover,
the verses are called (40.9) samproksany&u^ and are variously made to accompany
rites involving sprinkling (Bloomfield, ib. p. 13). Verse 2 appears in Vait. (22.23) ^^
the agnisiotna^ with vi. 122 and 123.
Translated: Henry, 15, 71 ; Griffith, i. 345. — Cf. Hillebrandt, Ved, Afythol. i. 285.
1. Across wastes, across waters penetrated the men-beholding falcon,
seeing a resting-place ; passing all the lower spaces, may he come hither,
propitious, with Indra as companion.
Ppp. combines (as often) -ksH *vasdna- in b, and qivd **jagdma in d. Ai'asdna-t
either • his goal * (so Henry) or * the settlements of men.' The meter is pure tristtibh.
2. The men-beholding falcon, heavenly eagle, thousand-footed, hun-
drcd-wombed, vigor-giving — may he confirm to us the good that was
borne away ; let ours be what is rich in svadlid among the Fathers.
That is, probably, ' a pleasant life.' Ppp- makes nrcaksds and suparnas exchange
places in a, and reads vayo dhdt at end of b. P§da c xsjagaii.
42 (43). To Soma and Rudra.
[Praskanva. — dvyream, mantroktadevatyam. trdtstubkam.]
Found also in Paipp. i. Used in Kflu^. (32.3) with hymn 29 etc. : see that hymn.
Translated: Henry, 15, 71 ; Griffith, i. 34O.
1. O Soma-and-Rudra, eject asunder the disease that has entered our
household ; drive far to. a distance perdition ; any committed sin put away
from us.
The first three padas occur in RV. vi. 74. 2 (a, b, c) and MS. iv. 1 1. 2, and the last
two (repeating c) in RV. i. 24. 9 and MS. i. 3. 39 ; TS. i. 8. 22s has the whole verse.
At beginning of c, all (RV.MS. in the former occurrence) have Ari bddhethdmy omitting
durdttt (in the latter occurrence, RV. bAdhasva duri, MS. Ari bddJtasva; both
mumiigtihi in d). Ppp. reads, in c, dveso nirrtim ca^ and in d asfndi. The comm.
explains ^rt;//z//i :is gr/ia//t ^arlrafh vd, LWe had c, d also above at vi. 97. 2 ; see also
TS. i. 4. 45', which has dv^so like Ppp. J
2. O Soma-and-Rudra, do ye put all these remedies in our bodies;
untie, loosen from us what committed sin may be bound in our bodies.
Found also in RV. (vi. 74. 3), TS.MS. (as above) LTS. /«v<fjw, by misprint J ; all y^
read /Tj////jfor the ungrammatical asmdi in a, and the translation follows them ; and ^
they have Jj// for ^jtf/ in c l^^ u>f p-4-o /^' ("p-^r^^
vii. 43- BOOK VII. THi: ATIIARVA-VKDA-SAWHITA. 416
43 (44). Of speech (?;.
[/V/i//i///r-,i. — tJj^t/rXti/yiim. tnlt f/ii/'Aum .]
Nfit fnuiul in r.'iipp., nnr clNc-.vlim*. (.'scfl in Kauc;. (4''>. i), with v. i.;, in a hie
against f.iNe nLcusation ; tlic (kt.iils ( ast nf> li>;ht on the nicining of the veric.
'I i.U)sl.itr(i : llcniy. 15, y2\ (iriOith, i. 346.
I. rropitioiis to ihcc [:irf] some; unpropitioiis to thee [are] some; all
thou bearcst, with well-willinj; mind. Three voices (:«/i ) [:irej deposited
within him(il?); of these, one flew away after sound (j^.'/z'^*')-
A n)\sti<.'il saying, of very diiulttful iiitt-iprvtalion ; tlir romm. ^ivrsi a lonf* arn!
worthlrss rxpnsition. 'I hr 'sonic* and * all ' in a, b arc fi-inininc. like T'fl<-/ the * thou'
is masculine ; the romm. (after K.'iik;.) umlerstands it of a * man causelessly reproaihed.'
lienry imai;inf-s the thiniiler to lie intemh'd, asmtu si^^nifying Taijanya, and rendrrs d
**onc of them has gone to pirces \\iih no otlier result than sound: i.e., without rain."
44(45). Extolling Indra and Vishnu.
[/Vi;j/ir»rrij. — mantroktuinatyiXm, fhunk tuttuhh]
I'uund also in I'.'iipp. xx. Iiirthcr, in KV. (vi.^M).S), TS. (iii. 3. it'et al ). M^.
(ii.4.4), and rn. (XX. 15. 7); Alt. (vi. 15) ^ivc.^ a snrt nf cnmment nn the verse, aiul a
stoiy f.iluirated to explain its mraiiin^. I'sed in KAu^ (42.6) in a rite for cslahhshin^
harmony (on the arrival of a dtstin;;uishcd visitor, Keq ). In V.iit. (25. 2), joined «ilS
h\mns ^S ami 51 in recitation in ihr tifvarnistoma rerenionv.
I raiislatcd: Heniy. \(\ 7J ; (iiitf'ith. i 317. — Discussed, as KV. verse, by Muir.
iv'.S4. It st'fnis tliat W. intended to rewrite this.
I. Ve have botii con«iiiered ; ye are n«»t concjiiered ; neither one of
them hath been conqucn'il ; () Vishnu, Iiulra also, what ye fought, a thou-
sand thai did ye triply disperse'.
'I he i>tiier texts ha\r but asiM;:li** v.iiiaiit. /"//('J for tftiiyox al enil of b; but Tpp. hx%
instead of this fra 't'tni ; and (iiithci, in d. Sii/'.'itsmw uit/ ittf/iirtufAi^w. Some of the
/•i/i/./ M^ss { ini ludinj^ our D.) di\ide if/^«7 spttihfthAm in c. Henry renders d " >e marie
tlii-n tliiee thousand (trrasiiris r ) to :!ppi-.u." I he < oinm. r'-:iihrs 1.1/ in C by i.r^/ ? mttm
f*tti/t\ ainl ni.ikis tft'titu} refer li» tlie three things (/i'/m, rri/i/, 7'.h > stated to lie cor.-
(piered in the Ait. h^'-nd. TS. \ii. 1 it: views t!ie at t as a division of a thousand br
thri*e. *| 'I lie aercnt '•i\u.\ we must suppose, is a misprint (delete the sign under ••! )
for the otiii-r texts h.ive :iy!'\ ai 1 •■utless, as df>es the InJfv I'ffhomm; and so has
Sri'. < >f his fomieen .itjtljoiitifs, seven indeed j^ive 'i\9to, and so df»cs our I. — doubt-
hss wiotii^Jy: if. Haskell, J.\(>S. xi '■'•.J
45(46f47)- '^0 cure jealousy.
\t /^r.f ' ^*r' : .'•^:.1:t.fy.;»*i iiiin-f-i^-': ;-t ■ - .». .-^Z 7. 1 •Till — m.tntr^ktAttnafyam ; i^trdf^m^-
1 !t se iwo veises, notwiilist.iiidini; thi'ir tlose accordance in meter and suhj^cl. are
tn-.it- I I'V l!j»* Anuki. aii-1 l»v pait of tiie ni'^s , hence also by the lomm* ami in SPT's
text, .IN 'All s'-p.uat'' h\m;is: anil tl.e <!ou'>lc ret konin^^ fiorn this |>otnt on invoK-fS a
417 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK VII. -vii. 46
plus of two. Both are found together in Piipp. xx. ; and the quoted Anukr. (see after
hymn 51) counts thirteen and not fourteen hymns in the anuvikka. The first verse
(hymn 46) is used by Kau^. (36.25), in a women's rite, with vi. 18 and vii. 74. 3, for
removal of jealousy ; the second (hymn 47), later in the same rite (36. 27), with fiara^u-
phatita : that is, apparently, giving to drink water into which a heated ax has been
dipped (Japtapara^und kviithiiam udakam^ comm.). •[Cf. p. 389.J
Translated: Weber, Ind, Stud, v. 250; Ludwig, p. 514; Grill, 29, tSo; Henry, 16,
72; Griffith, i. 347; Bloomfield, 107, 547.
1 . From a people belonging to all peoples, away from the river (sftuf/itt)
brought hither, from afar I think thee brought up, a remedy, namely, of
jealousy.
Very probably (b) rather • from the Indus* {sindhu). Ppp. reads -janlnUm viqiim
arulsatlHtlm (= uruksit- ?) ; its second half-verse is corrupt. The comm. explainsyVi/iJ/
hy jauapadiit and its epithet by viqvajanahitdt.
2 (47.1). Of him as of a burning fire, of a conflagration burning
separately, this jealousy of this man do thou appease, as fire with water.
Asya in a is here regarded as anticipatory of the etdsya of c ; it cannot be taken as
adjective unless by emendation we give it an accent. Again (cf. 18. i above) all the
mss. read, in d, untta^ unta^ utna^ or utta instead of the correct udtia^ which the comm.
has, and which is given, by emendation, in both printed texts. PpP- I'^s a very different
text: (at sathvfgasya bhesajam tad asunHmam grbJuVtitam : and then, as second half-
verse, our a, b, with yathd instead of prthak ; in an added verse occurs the phrase
udluid ^guim iva vHraye. L" Do I appease," ^atnayCy would be more natural ; cf.
Ppp's T(\rayc.\
46 (48). To Sinlvftll (goddess of the new moon).
\Athannin. — trcam. mantroktadrt'tityam . dnustuhham : j. trisfudA.]
Found also in Paipp. xx. (in the verse-order 2, i, 3). Used by Kaug. (32.3), with
hymn 29 etc., and again (59. 19) with hymn 17 etc.: see under hymns 29 and 17. In
Vait. (I. 14), in {Uc par van sacrifice, it conciliates Sinivali.
Translated: Henrj', 16,73; Griffith, i. 347.
1. O Sinlvalf, of the broad braids, that art sister of the gods! enjoy
thou the offered oblation; appoint us progeny, O goddess.
Some of the mss. (including our Bp.P.) wrongly leave dsi unaccented in b. Most of
our mss. read dididhdhi in d, but SPP. reports nothing of the kind from his authorities ;
Ppp. gives dididhi. The verse is RV. ii. 32. 6 (also VS. xxxiv. 10 ; TS. iii. 1. 1 1 3 ; MS.
iv. 12.6), without variant * The second half is nearly the same with* 20. 2 c, d ; 68. i c, d.
The comm. gives several discordant interpretations of prthustuke^ and is uncertain
whether to take dididdhi from di^ \Gram, § 218 J or from dih. 'LAnd b is nearly
v. 5. I d and vi. 100. 3 b.J
2. She that is of good arms, of good fingers, bearing well, giving birth
to many — to that Sinivali, mistress of the people, offer ye oblation.
The verse is RV. ii. 32. 7, without variant (also TS.MS., as above, both with supiints
for subd/it'ts). Ppp. reads in a, b sumangalis susumH.
vii. 46- HOOK VII. Tin: ATIIAKVA-VtOA-SAttlin A. 418
3, Who, mistress of the people, art a match for {}frai1ci) Indra, the
thousand-braided goddess coming; on, to thee, O spouse of Vishnu, arc
the oblations <;iven ; stir up thy husband, () goddess, unto bestowal.
I'pp. riMfU 7'f\iui/ttf (for I'i^/tittnf) in a, sahasfttsfuttl in b, and nh/AdiJ in d- llmrjr
anitrly points cmt that this vrrsi: piohattly bclonf;.s to Anum.iti, who is cbe irft unaci-
drt-sscM in this j;roiip of hymns to tiic lunar deities, and that its description applies brtt
to her.
47(49). To Kuhu (goddess of the new moon).
[A/AarujM. -■ ti' yrta m. nut ntt oktaJn^ityam . t . y.rc'»/i ," 2 tn itui^k . J
Koiind also in P.iipp. xx. I'urther, in TS. iii. 3. 1 1 V MS. \\'.\2.f\ K. xiti. 16, A^S.
i. 10. S, (,'(,'S. ix. 2S. 3. This hymn, with tlic prcceilin^ (nr also 4S and 4') ?) and h\mn '•.
makes up (K.'iui;. 5';. itS, n(ite), aecfuilin;^ to the si hoi., a pat9tiv%inU\^ana (nol
acknowleil^rd nor used in thtr K.mr. text). In V a it. (i. 16). it and hymn 4S, paired
rcspcr lively with 71; and So, are usetl on the da\s of new and full moon at the/«fF^«f«
satrihn-s.
'I r.msl.iti d : Heniy, 17,74: (iiittith, i. 34S.
1. The goddess Kulni, \vcll-<l«»ing, working with knowledge, in this
sacrifire I call upon with good call ; may she confirm to us wealth having
all choice things ; let her give a hero of hundred-fold value, worthy of prai«c.
All the othrr texts re.nl ahAm (or <fr:tfN in a, anrl U^t sulp'ttitn A*,"S.(,"<,'S. uivc ihz r
tttftt and TS. srt//itfji^i}»t ( I'pP- ''■*** ii*'tf titm) \ all. in b, have su/iJ": tlw^ whith is better
(so also the c omm). '1 heir .snoml h.ill-vcise is rlitft-rrnt from ours : iif no if*iJ»}tu \f*iia-
itttnt pittiix\m /ifivi'n* tf tievi /itti'iu} •: itihema ; and Tpp. j^ives the same, but with A
(for ji/). (ttlr.tfuiff/^ and A/ (lor A). < >ur Up (livi«Ii s '•tJm^in,} ti/^ttutm ; two of SIL's
mss. ;;i\e ■//./■.^/ . lOr ii//./i/.Mi/. set* Uoth in /'.|)M(i. xli. '(7 • ; the ccmim. s-i\% ^aAji-
tf/utUtiftt hahupt aJyint vCi. '1 lie nu ti.r is nut fuUy//^'.///. • |_'I .S. ////// iiw fJtitls J
2. May Kului, spouse of the gods, [mistress] of the immortal, invo-
cable, enjoy this our lib.ilion ; lei her listen eager to our sacrifice today ;
let her, knowing (lili(nsi), assign abundance of wealth.
y/(|fi. in b. ouL^Iit of (ourse to l>e it\\*i (so TS.MS.), but tliis. so far as nole<i. is read
by twily a single ins. (our 1>.). and both piintrd t«'Xls j»ivc ti\Vit At «*ni| of a. ',•, !^-
has pitttiir {/: ) \ at cm«1 nf b. TS. has *//v///, MS.A(,'S. (f/a'/w, and '.'(.'S. tmrtM
Instead of oui c. all ;^ive tth/r (MS. s,i : misprint?) f/i?f//>^ kifAtit thufi zAmAm ; and
I'pp. h.is ihr sanie, s.ive I'tftUf, ami /«//.? (for 7il///iiw). At the end, f,\"S- ha*
liitx/.itN : just ln'fDie. IS MS.r<,"S. read tili/.'hr and Ai^S. y/tjtirnilnr. The comm.
kIvis S'.vii.il iliviise explanatinns kA ttff:r/,ny,i pattii.
48(50. To KakA (goddess of the full moon).
IniM-l .)Iv.i in I'l'pp XX. luitli-r. as K\". ;i 3:. 4, s an«l in "IS. (iii 3 li'), MS
(iv. i^.'O, .Hid Mil (i. ;. ^. p. As tn usi- in K.tii«;. ami V.'iii . sir umlcr h\mn 47
1 ill" s.'. mi'l h.ilf it\ \ris'' 2 is (tiMluT i«i'md in the titf^Au/a chapter of K.iu^. (106.7) as
p.iil nf .1 s'ti' s nf v. rs' s theri" ;:i\«n iti full.
li.ir.Nl.itiir Ileniy. I ;•. y.\\ (iiifnth. i 31S.
419 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK VII. -vii. 50
1. Rfika I call with good call, with good praise; let the fortunate one
hear us ; let her willingly note ; let her sew the work with a needle that
does not come apart; let her give a hero of hundred-fold value, worthy
of praise.
The other texts agree throughout,* and differ from ours only by reading in a suhdvUm^
which Ppp. also has, and the comm. The latter explains Raka as satnpurnacandrd
pHttniamiXsT, \0\xx d repeats 47. i d.J *LBut MB. has ^atadilyumukhyam. ^
2. The well-adorned favors that are thine, O Raka, wherewith thou
givcst good things to thy worshiper, — with them do thou come to us
today favoring, granting, O fortunate one, thousand-fold prosperity.
The other texts agree throughout and differ from ours only by reading in d sahasra-
ffosd/n, which is given also by the comm., and by three of SPP*s (ten) authorities. The
meter is mixed tristubh ^ViAjagatl.
49(51). To the spouses of the gods.
\Atharvan. — dvyrcam. mantroktadevapatnidevatSkam, i.drfljagati ; M»4-p./^HktiJ]
Not found in Paipp. The verses arc RV. v. 4O. 7, 8, also in TB. iii. 5. 12' and MS.
iv. 13. 10. Not used in Kau^. (unless included in patnlvanta gana : see under hymn
47). Viiit. hns it (4.8 : not ix. 7.6, comm.) in the parvan sacrifice, with one of the
patHfsamyUja offerings.
Translated: Henry, 17, 75; Griffith, i. 349.
1 . Let the spouses of the gods, eager, help us ; let them help us for-
ward unto offspring (.^ ////*/), unto winning of booty {vdja) ; they that are
of earth, they that are in the sphere (vmfd) of the waters — let those
well-invoked goddesses bestow on us protection.
The translation implies the accent devis in d. The other texts read accordantly
rtVt'A// sti/tavah ?iXi^ yachata ; ours substitutes ^tfr^tf«/« and adapts suhdvds to it, but
absurdly leaves devfs vocative. The comm. reads yacchatu at the end ; he explains
tttjAye by iokilyd ^patyilya,
2. And let the women {gnd) partake (v/), whose husbands are gods —
Indranl, Agnayi, AcjvinI the queen; let RddasI, let Varunani listen; let
the goddesses partake, [at] the season that is the wives*.
The other texts offer no variants, save that the RV. pada-itxi unaccountably reads in
c nhitisf {ft\ .IS if the word were the common dual, instead of a proper name. The
vcrsc can be read as of 40 syllables.
50(52). For success with dice.
[AFit^iras (litavabtldhanakdmas*). — navarcam. dindram, dnustubham : j^y. tristubh ;
4.jagatJ ; 6. bkurik tristnbk.']
Most of the verses (viz. excepting 4 and 6) are found in P§ipp., but not together:
5, I, 2 in XX. ; 3 also in xx., but in another part; 7 in xvii. ; 8, 9 in i. The hymn is
plainly made up of heterogeneous parts, pieced together with a little adaptation. Used
vii. 50 IJOOK VII. Till-: ATMARVA-Vr.DA-SAMHITA. 4^0
in K.iih;. (.p. 13) with iv. 38 an*! vii. 100. in a rite f»>r pno^l lurk in gamMin:; : the ihrr.
sti*r|n'il (;'Ji/Af ) in a liriniil [i/*!*//// /////////« J. arc cast i»n .» plarr tlial h.iB \trrn »mnothcni*d
for llir pnijMisr. •|_llic? niss. s«tiii to have I'tttii'ti ,i; tiihtiti*ina-l'%}iiias. llltK>fnfi*-M
siii:L:rsls h.tnJnjti.t \ |)r. Kyilir, lir.ttf'.'i/: it-t/Attiit : liiit, ii*nsi<lciinc the rciatiun of
/'•/r/// with /'•/•//>, W's f'iiJ/iiin.i SL-tiiis ]>c-st in a ronl with /•,ii//ivtlsii»t of I d-J
'Ir-inslalrd : I.iiilwic p. 455; /iiniii-rr, p. 2S5 (5 vnsLs): (iiill, 71, iSo; llciir\. i.S,
75 : (fiifl'ith, i.3.1'); IlK»oinhf!«!, 150. 54S. - Mnii. v. .j:!"», may l>c consulted. — Wlitn-y
scoins ti) have intrmlcil U) rcwiitc tlic m.ittcr c(>:i( i-rnin;; this hymn.
I. As the IhiMulorbolt always strikes the Ircc irresistibly, so may I
today siiiitc {^htu/h, Vi}iih\ the painblers iiresistibly witli the dice.
I*pp. rrails, in b. vi\Vt\htim^ and, fur c. fv*\ */iitm amum kitavam. The comm.
has vatifi\tlsiini in d. Compare vii. io<). 4, hclow. 'I hv Anukr. ovvtliioks the dcficiencv
f ^Ji ^' ^fj -• ^^f ^^^^* quick, of the slow, (»f the people that cannot avoid it (.'), let
Y^ ^ ' the fortune come tojjcther from all sides, my \vinninj;s in hand.
'I' hat is, apparently, so as to lu* won liy mr. '1 lir meaning of AvafjushiAm in b is
I c:xtrcmrly pmblcniatiral ; tlic tianslators: '*wchtIos** etc. Comparison with x-t^Jm
f.^Or*^ I va'.',n ftt.slttilm^ KV. i. I3.j.^», and \\\v i[rc;;ularity i»f the unreduplicatcd foriu^make l?ie
rea»lin^ vrry stispi< ions ; TpP- K'^''*"* in^^lead i/V;vn .i//«; .• tl»c ronim. rxplains it j^altcrna-
tivi'ly J .IS lUuitik't tyCim itpat it\yijtiHthiam^fX\^V\\v^ to the ^amr in spite of ill luck. For
d. IVP- h.is <r/f/fi///<ir/rrr/// ktttt'h nitiriah.
3. I praise A.L;ni, who owns ^ood thinj;s, with acts of homage; here,
attached, may he divide {vi-ci) our winnings; I am borne forward as it
were by boDty-winniii^ chariots; forward to the ri«;ht may I further the
praise of the M.iruts.
The verse is KV. v. ''»o. i, fnund also in Tl?. (ii.7. I2<) and MS. (iv.14. 11). .\I1
these texts ^ive sv \\'x astun in a. of vihif h our P'adiiii; seems an awkward rnrTUptif>n ; in
b tlu-y have piAy^tttA^ (lujt '1 W. ftti\ttf'tA\)\ in C they accent Vtl/tiviUirhis ; in d ih^v
(.dso rpi'. ) ri-,nl /tftiJ,tl\:tt:'f- at tl»e iiid MS. !i.is <if ii/"/. Some of our n»ss. ( Itp K T )
j;ive rrtit'Wi'r/f.'. lite <nni:n. txjl.iiiis it't.iy.if a> .simply - l\itotu |^-i:/i>/m ilsclf fna%-
bi" u*ie«l liM Iniically : < f. I't'ti. Sfrt.f. i. ii'ij. Kfiitm lie undcistands i!irou::hout as tv.e
winning die (lf/tt{it/'f/ti7.}iy,tm ix'ti'tui/ieiutnayaf/t). *I ho verse is brou;;ht in here onlj
(m ai ( omit of t!ic (ompaiisoii in b.
.|. .May we, with th«'e as ally, corifpicr the tnv»p (.'://); do ihtiu help
iipw.iid our si'!«' in every eontlii t ; for us, () India, make thou wide
s|Mce. e.i^y-.';<iin^ ; df> thou break up the virilities of our foes. O
bounteous on«'.
"I 'e v» rse is KV. i. 1 -».'. .j. win-re :■./»;: i/r is read in c instead of r-.if /»•!/. The com?n
p\pl.)liis :// :is ;uit.ii:'H)iNl at I 'lay. i/'/j.! .as \ietoiy {j.ivit/ttls.ifi.i), and thtifa ai iSe
1 t'tit' Nt \\ itii dii I*.
;. I h.w'r \\{\\\ nf thee what is sroicl toi^ether (?) ; I have won also the
che; Ic i^)\ :is .1 w.dl" mi^ht shake a sh(*ep, so I shake thy winnin{;s.
421 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK VII. -vii. 51
Samlikhitam and sathrudh are technical terms, obscure to us. The comm. ingeniously
states that players sometimes stop or check (samrudh) an antagonist by marks (ankd)
wliich they make with slivers of dice and the like, and that such marks and the one
who checks by means of them are intended — a pretty evident fabrication. Ppp. reads
samvrtam instead of samrudham ; the comm. explains the latter word simply by
samrodii/idram.
6. Also, a superior player, he wins the advance (?) ; he divides in time
the winnings like a gambler; he who, a god-lover, obstructs not riches —
him verily he unites with wealth at pleasure (?).
The verse is full of technical gambling expressions, not understood by us. It is RV.
X. 42. 9, with variants : RV. reads a/idUfytJ jay&ti in a ; in b, ydt for iva^ and hence
vicindti ; in c, dhdnd runaddhi ; in d, rAya (which the translation given above follows :
the comm. reads it) and svadhavdn. The comm. also has jaydtt\ as demanded by the
meter, in a. He explains firahdm by aksdih prahantdram pratikitavam^ and 77* cinoti
tills time by virgayate. With nA dhdnam runAddhi compare the gambler's vow, nd
d/iAnd riinad/imi, in RV. x. 34. 12 ; the comm. says dyiltalabdham dhanavt na vyartham
sthdpayati kiih tti devatdrtham viniytinkte. The Anukr. distinctly refuses the contrac-
tion to kr til III ^va in b.
7. By kinc may we pass over ill-conditioned misery, or by barley over
hunger, O much-invoked one, all of us ; may we first among kings,
unharmed, win riches by [our] stratagems.
Or perhaps * unharmed by [others'] stratagems.' The verse has no reason here ; it
is RV.x. 42. 10, with variants: RV. omits the mctcr-disturbing vd in b (the Anukr.
ip;nores tlie irregularity), and reads vlqvdm at the end of the pada ; also rijabhis in c,
and, in d, asmakena vrjAnend. Ppp. has, for c, vayam rdjdnas praihamd dhandndm.
The comm., against the /^///i-lext (-mdh ; \XV, pada the same), understands /r/i//i<}///<l
as neut. pi., qualifying dhandni. \Qi, Geldner, Ved. Stud, i. 150 ; Foy, KZ. xxxiv. 251. J
8. My winnings in my right hand, victory in my left is placed; kine-
winncr may I be, horse-winner, riches-winning, gold-winner.
Ppp. reads, for b, savye me jay d **hitah^ and, in d, kr tarn cay as for dhanapitjayas,
9. O ye dice, give [me] fruitful play, like a milking cow; fasten me
together with a stream (.^) of winnings, as a bow with sinew.
Ppp. reads divam for dyuvam in a, and dhdraya in c. Dhdrd^ in whatever sense
taken, makes a very unacceptable comparison ; the comm. paraphrases it with samtatyd
uparyupnrildbhahctukrtdyapravdhena. LHis interpretation seems to mean * Unite
mc with a succession {samtati or pravdha) of fours' (krta-aya)^ or, as we should say,
* Give me a run {dhdrd ox pravdha) of double sixes,' * Give me a run of luck.' J
51 (53)- For protection by Brihaspati and Indra.
\Angiras. — hdrhaspatyam . trdistubham^
Found also in Paipp. xv. The verse is RV. x. 42. 11 (also in TS. iii. 3. ii»). In
Kfui^. (59. 19) it is used with hymn 17 etc. (see under that hymn) ; and it is reckoned
(note to 25. 36) to the svastyayana gana. In Vait. (25. 2) it goes with hymns 44 and
vii. 51 IU)()K VII. TlIK ATIIARVA- VKDA-SAMMITA. 4-^
5R ; SVC iiivliT 44. Thr romm. quotes it niso from Tanti K. (15) in a sacrifice lo the
planets (i,;.f//<M'<///V), ami fniin Naks. K.|_slioulfl lie (.aiitij (t^). in a w/i/'tl(«lir/f caJlcJ
Tiaiislatufl : llcniy, ii;, 7S : (Ifinuli, i. 351.
I. Lrt Hiih.'isp.iti piotcct iis nMitul ^ihoiit from behind, also from above,
from bi'low, against the mali;^iiant one; let Iiulia fiom in front and from
111 ill way make wide space for us, a companion for companions.
'Mit* fliict tions admit also of lu'iii;; iinflrfstooil a.^ from west, north, south, and east.
KV. (and TS.) n-ads vthi-rii% in d, .lud so <lins I'pp- ("■«"/'«'.' Ofi*f/fi).
'rii<> fourtli ttntiWil'ti fMiils licit*; it li.i<;, arc rtrdin;; to nur division, 13 h\nins and 33
verses; the otlicr division coiinis 14 livtuns; tin* (piotiMl Aniikr is to tliis effect : if : •!«
ftiifiiitrulu stiff'ifth'n/iitt Ktitutthc ; an<l, for tlie li)mns: xAturtht tPtiytuLi^a iukiAh —
thus s.in« tioning out division.
52(54). For harmony.
Not fonn<l ill I'.npp. K.iix;. nt knns it (';■ >) to tlie i f Iitttt:,}nti j^^t/ut^ anil al.so ( I :. ^ ),
witli iii. i."» ftr., to tln" strmmti '.'ii w.if/i nr liaiinoiu livinii^.
'riaiisl.iti-d : I-udwiK, p. 42 • ; <iiiil. 31. \^i ; Mrniy, M>. T*)\ <irin"i!h. i 351 ; I'liv^m-
fuld, I V». >vT.
1. H.irmony fur us with i>ur own mrn, harmony with strangers —
harmony, () At^vins, tlo ye here confirm in ns.
*Ilic vfise is found in Tli. ii.4.4'' an«l MS. ii. 2. '•. arul in a /•////•/ to KV. x. I'M : "I It.
ri'ads s:'ii/\- .ind th,t/fth.t in a. b ; MS. and tin* k'i:l,i h.ive r:r///ri/f ami thttuff'/r\,it, a.-.d
MS. .ils'» ir\///,fi'i/n'iif»t in d. 'Ihi* vrisr is also usnir-'iiff-hi}.
2. May we he harmonious with i^iind, with kn(»wle(l;;e (lili(ti) ; m.iy
we not ri;.^ht(?) with the mind of the ^i»ds ; let not noises arise in case
of much destruction (?) ; ht n«it In<ha's arrow fall, the day beiny; come.
nr (;is t!»c' oihrr tianslat'iis). • li.t not tin? ariow lly, India's <lay Neinj; lomc ' ; the
coinni. undi ist.i.'ids ■ India's aimw,' i.e. tlio tiuiridcrl)i>lt.* The (f)inni., in c, reads x in:-
hrutc i k\iut:!\f' iiimite nr s!tiiiivt},itl*'t:tfi/\ttNin:tttt'). ]n/ut:,iAt in b is doubtful ;
.Sl'l'. MM I"? \!t\fnttftt^ \\\\\\ thi' <iMnin. ( :;i.v/7./ /'inn/.i) and t!-.c niiiiorily of his mss.
(also our 1\.1\]>.); th«' irst have eillirr j «/•"/.?/'/ or \ ttthniiit:! (tlie lattir also our
0 s.tn.D.K s in , wlii' h serins to he ordy an awkwaidne^s of llie .si nhcs for ir//t'/f.f';f ) .
<in t!n' w'li'li". 1 .'//I'v.f.W is In iti r srippnittil, and eitli-r j;ivrs an niuptaMr sri;%r.
SI'!' str.iM'i ly iiM.ls. '.\i!h i!i»' I nmin ami the in.ijiirity of his autli(iiiiif<^. ajkI with part
nf «»!:iN (!' ' o K ). ;/'/ *.'';.•/» inc. .vj.ii-jsi luth m-ijii.il ;;i.irn]n.ii and t!i«' ri.itii;.'ikh\a
1 li. 1^: lis I (•■nun iit.ii) ipio!' s t)iis p.iss.i^^r as an illustration of the lulr). With a
(iiill i'"n\;'iris I\\'. \. \ •. '• c. <.'"/ :.ii:.if,- tn,hi,j\,} \Jtii iilt/rf. I'.i la b is //.*r/ir.*A. if
n"la.il.i [ In thi- S" I "n 1 ../ •; .111 iriti u^inn • j. • |_.\lttin.ui\el\. ami as ,ij.7»i//;i^*i|^.t' j-
/•J. I . ;^- J
423 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK VII. -vii. 53
53 (55) • For some one's health and long life.
[lynihman. — saftarcam. dyusynm uta hdrhnspatyam ; dfvinam. trdistnbham : j. bhurij ;
^. usniggarbhd ** rsl pahkti ; jr-7. anustubh^
Verses 1-4 and 7 are found also in Paipp. : r in xx. ; 2-4 also in xx., but not with 1 ;
7 in V. In Kau^. (besides the separate use of vs. 7, which see), addressed* with i. 9, 30 ;
ill. 8, etc. by the teacher to the pupil in the ceremony of initiation (55. 17). And the
comm. quotes it from Naks. K. [^should be (^'antij (18) with hymn 51 (which sec).
•L According to the comm., p. 402' », only vss. 1-6.J
Translated : Muir, v. 443 ; Grill, 15, 182 ; Henry, 20, 80; Griffith, i. 351 ; Bloomfield,
52, 551-
1. When thou, O Brihaspati, didst release [us] from Yama*s other-
world existence, from malediction, the A^vins bore back death from us,
O Agni, physicians of the gods, mightily.
* Otiier-world existence,* lit. * the being yonder.* The verse is VS. xxvii. 9, and is
found also in TS. iv. r. 74, TA. x. 48 (Appendix), and MS. ii. 12. 5, the four texts nearly
agreeing : they read ddha for Adhi in a (Ppp. appears to do the same) ; for b, bfhaspate
abhf^aster dmuficah; in c, asmit for asmdt (and MS. Hhatdtn). SPP. reads, for b,
brhaspater abhi^aster amuficahj the mss. are greatly at variance; half SPP's authori-
ties read bfhaspate^ which he ought accordingly to have adopted, since bfhaspatcs is
ungrammatical, being neither one thing nor another; the comm., to be sure, has no
scruple about taking it as a vocative: he brhaspateh ! Our Dp. reads brhaspAtth;
1*. has -pate *bhi'^ which we followed in our text, but wrongly, as it is found in no other
authority. For dmuiicas SPP. finds no authority; but it is given by our P.R.T.,
and, considering the necessity of the case, and the support of the other texts, that
is enough. The pada, then, should be made to agree with that of the parallel texts
(changing our *b/ii- to abhl-). Ppp. has a different text, brhaspatir abhi^astyd ^tnuti-
cat; its c, also, is peculiar: prati mrtyum ahatdm afvind te, j^W. usually renders
ab/if^asti by * imprecation. *J
2. Walk (kravi) ye (two) together ; leave not the body ; let thy breath
and expiration be here allies ; live thou increasing a hundred autumns ;
[be] Agni thy best over-ruling shepherd,
Ppp. makes the second halves of this verse and of 4 exchange places, and in place of
c, d reads samrabhya jlva qaradas suvarcd *gnis etc. The change from 2d pers. in a
to third in b is sudden beyond the usual liberal measure. |_In the Berlin ed., an accent-
sign is missing under the f/i of ^afdrn.^
3. Thy life-time that is set over at a distance — [thy] expiration,
breath, let them come again — Agni hath taken that from the lap of
perdition ; that I cause to enter again in thy self.
With a, b compare the similar half-verse xviii. 2. 26 a, b. The comm. explains Atihi-
tarn as from either of the roots hi or dh&, Ppp. begins differently: yat td **yur; in
b it reads prdno yftva te paretah ; and it leaves off te at the end. Prat. ii. 46 notes A
*/idr in c [render it rather « brought hither or back * ?J.
4. Let not breath leave this man ; let not expiration, leaving him low,
go away; I commit him to the seven sages (rsi)\ let them carry him
happily (svnsti) unto old age.
vii. S3- IJOOK VII. Tin: ATIIARVA-Vi:i)A-SAMllITA. 4^4
rpP- t>ll^ n^it tlie meter of a by rcAclin^ tnil /;-il pnlno kAslti yuit U fravitto, ami
lK';;ins its b tluis : //#/? /.-'J *ptiHO *v- ; in C and d (iLs 2 C« d) it has tLidhvahg and uayantu.
r.irt of tiic niss. nt t cut apAutS 'zui- in b. SIM*, reads, with tlie small majority of lii«
mss., stif>ftn.\fhhyii \\\ c (.i^.tinst our saptari ); our \\\s%. vary, as usual. With a. b
compare tlie nrnrly rriuivalmt x\i. 4. 3 a. b. The Anukr. apparently scans the first line
as 7+ 1 1. I>ut tlie //i^/rf-mss. maik the division after apAnai (as 11+7). Henry filU the
meter con jeftur ally by ad<liii^ mo vyAtuy
5. ICntcr yc in. O brc.ilb and expiration, as (two) draft-oxen a stall ;
let tbis treasure of old n;;e increase bere unbainied.
The first h.ilf vers** is also iii. 1 1 . 5 a, b. Inc. perh.-ips rather * let tliis man, a treasury
of old nj^e ' (so Henry).
6. We imptd bitber tby brealb ; I impel away \\\\ ytiksnia: let A|^ni
bere, desirable one, assif;n us life-time from all sides.
A <r)rrcsp(indini; mtsi* is fnund in TS. i 3. i.p and A<,'S. ii. fo. 4. but with Rfa!
dilfcii-nce nf \v\\\ tlius. /M';/.« te 'i^vtSto tiatihati ayAm tij^nir i\\fen\ah : ptinai tf frjnj
i [yii/i ( A<,'S. ti vi't/ti) p*hil yAl'}tfttitfi Ji/;'i?//// tf,
7. l'|) out of darkness bave we, ascent linjt; tbc bi^best firmament,
gone to tbe sun, god among tbe goils, hiL;best light.
This vrise (wilh a dilferenl srcond p.'id.i, ;yi'*/i\ pt^yttttta iittttrtitn, wliii h Tpp. al*.i
pives) is KV. i. 50. 10, and fi»un<l alsn in a ulml" s-iiiS i>f other texts: VS. w zt r!
al. (uilh \:Mi for ;i'fV/v in b). 1 S. iv. I. 7M wit!i pii\y>iuio jyAfir in b), I 1'. ii- 4. 4» • ( a%
TS ). lA. \i. V 2 (.IS IS ), MS. ii. 12. 5 tt al. (willi ;yMih p- in b>. I.1,S. ii. 12. lQ(»ith
jyt^ti/i p. it. .With p. tt. foi b), C'hr. iii. 17. 7 (as MS., l>ut fy*'fi^ / ).t It is usr*l !.»
Kanr. (.'4.32) in the ilt^-fitAtliiifif iricnmny, willi thi* dim ti<in i/y u/lfilntit/i * y^\xh this
he steps iipwaid'; and the s« hnl. adds it (niiti> to 55. 15) in ihi* crn-mony of initiation
of a Vidic srhnl.ir, as one looks at tin* sun an«l nsks his prutft ti»>n fur the !»i^y ; arvl
furthci (nulc to 5S. iS). in tin* w/V/;«/i i/m«/, i>r infant's first (arrNinq nut »^f dcwus. In
W'lit. (24.4) it at ( onipanics thr coinin;; out of the bath in the ti\;ni}tt*»ita. *l.\Dd
ii. 6. 6« : the d of ii. 4. 4 ' has ////•!/ 1////. J f |_ Al.su K. xxxviii. 5. J
54 (5^1 57* I )' Extolling verse and chaat.
1/ : 1 / . 1 J "I ih »/./' 1} "t . dnu • f:i f-'t }m ]
N«it\\ithstanilini; the ( Jus" rdati'Viship of thi* two veisfs ii'tkoncd in our editiim a%
constitiitini; this hymn, and tiirir disinrdance uitli t!te follnwini; versr (our 55). the
Aniiki. ai>il snine oi tlw mss. (and hi-m e th» comm. and SlT's text) Like our vs. I as a
wliulr Ir. inn, and nur vs. 2 atid ItMnn ;; as tii;;rt]ii'r one hwnn ; ami this i« probably lo
be a< I I ptiMl as ti)(' trui* tra-litinn.tl di\i<^ii>n.* I'.'iipp. has our two \'T'«'-s in kx.. l>ut in
dilti-ifnt I'll' es. l\.iii<,'. ((2.i) 11 ), in a ntv* fur the i;ainin^ of ucabh by teachers
{,t.r":\.f/.tL'i':,itfi tif/''i.'ff;.i/i.t: /;,•/'. ;i. ;^. mi;. ;i;,i ;///■;///, comm.. p. 4 j2. end).^ivi-s as/#ii.'i/d
sin«; iv ; .."^' i.;".*./, \\iii> ]i wmild inijly < it'.iur or both \cisrs; I ).irila explains «/: J/ «ii|i«
•with iwn,' whs. !i nri^hl nv .ri • illn 1 hunns tir \rises. I he lomm. |p. 4 lo* ■ J ap{<.ir«
t'> r«i:.iid \N. .' ( ;^. I ) as i:i! n-!- .1 i:i t-:!-- «i. and buih \s. i an<l \< 2 { ^6 ami ;") in
rul" I \ •[ I li" dcf .id -lix isinn <-i:n«-s !■■ tAfi n \s«». I arid 2 • cf. p. 3*»«i J
1 I. insl.it ••' ■ Mi:ir. iii'. |; lb-M\. 21. S| : ilnirlth. i 352.
425 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK VII. -vii. 56
I. To verse (fc), to chant (sdman) we sacrifice, by (both) which men
perforin rites {kdnnan) ; these bear rule at the seat (sddas) ; they hand
{yam) the offering to the gods.
The verse is SV. i. 369, which, however, reads yacdfnahe in a, krut'dU in b, vi U
for eti in c, and vaksatah in d ; GGS. iii.2. 48, giving the pratfka^ has yajdmahe.
Ppp. also has krnvate and vi te^ hui yac/ia/df/t at the end. The comm. explains sadasi
by etantiUmake m and ape,
2 (57. 0- When (ydd) I have asked verse [and J chant [respectivelyj
for oblation [andj force, [and] sacrificial formula (ydjus) for strength, let
not therefore this Veda, asked, injure me, O lord of might (fdci-).
The construction of the six bare accusatives in the first line is made in accordance
with the comm., and appears perhaps the most probable, though not beyond question.
[In c, Ppp. has bhiitir j but whether for esa or for iasmdt is not clear from R*s note. J
55(57.2)- To Indra(?).
[ Bhrgti. — dindra m . virdt farosnih .]
For the true position of this verse, sec the introduction to the preceding hymn. It
is not found in Paipp. This verse (separate from its predecessor) is used in Kflu9.
(50. 1-3) for welfare on setting out upon a road, etc. (so at least the comm. determines :
\\\ft pratlka is doubtful, being identical with that of xii. 1.47).
Translated: Henry, 21, 82; Griffith, i. 353.
I (57' 2). The paths which are thine, downward from the sky, by
which thou didst send the all — by those, O Vasu, do thou set us in what
is pleasant.
The first two padas nearly correspond to SV. i. 172 a, b: yd te pdnthd adhd divd
y^hhir 7'y^^vam dirayah ; with the wholly different close utd ^rosantu no bhuvah.
Ihc comm. (as also the Anukr.) regards the verse as addressed to Indra; *0 Vasu'
may be * O good one.* The construction seems so decidedly to call for a locative in c
that sttmnaya (p. sumnaoyi^ by Prat. iv. 30) is rendered as if it were for -ydUy from
-yu ; the comm. glosses it with sumne sukhe. The irregular verse (8+7: 10=25) i^
but ill dcfmed by the Anukr.
56 (58). Against poison of snakes and insects.
\Athan'an. — astarcam. mantroktavr^cikadevatdkam : 2. vdnaspatyd ; 4. brdkmanasfatyd.^
dnustubham : 4. virdtprastdrafanktiJ]
The first four verses are found in Paipp. xx.f It is used in KiM^. (32. 5) in a remedial
rite against venomous bites, with the direction " do as sUted in the text " ; and vs. 5
accompanies, with vi. 56 etc., an offering in the ceremony of entering on Vcdic study
(139.8). *LThe mss. have -patyam ute^dam : but the statement should refer rather
to the verse than to the hymn. J fLAlso vs. 8 : see below. J
Translated: Ludwig, p. 502; Grill, 5, 183; Henr}', 21,82; Griffith, 1.353; Bloom-
field, 29, 552.
vii. ^h
nooK VII. Tin: atiiakva-vkda-samihtA.
426
fywi
;u^
1. I'*roin the cross-lined [snake], from the black snake, from the n*\'\rr
i/^ii/f'ilii) (what is] j;.ithrre(l — that jxiisun of the heron-jointed <?) one
h:Uh tills |>I:int m:v\r tn <lis:i])|)car.
r|»|i iiM'ls tin\^ttf*ti9 :;ifitis in C ; tlic rmiun. .s.i\s simply e/iinfitltnalAti tftin^akavi^rf.i:
Atniiiliii'; to tliir riiiMm., tli«- |)l.iiit iiit(-nd<Ml is tlio tnatihuka (f>r -/'•)), wliiili » the name
of \.iii<Mis tn-i's .mil lu'ihs.
2. This |)l.int (is) sweet -(///^ii/////; horn, sweet-tlrippinj;, sweetish, sweet ;
it is tlu' icnu-dy of what is dissevered {I'i/tru), also grinder-up of stingin:;
inst'tts.
'1 III" iiiiiini. rc:iils in b ntatihu^^yut. |_IIrnry irmicis vihfitta l»y * la morsure.'J
3. Whi-nce hill en, whence sucked - - thence do we call [it] out for thcc ;
of the i)etty, hastily-hitinj; (?) stin^inf; insect the poisr)n [is] sapless.
'I'lic ^tr.il nuijority of Sl'T's autlioritirx, with some fif rxirii (Itp.O.) rcid xnttriprad-,
and so ;ils() tlic (omn)., >\lio i-xpLiins it as 'stin^in^ with tlirec or>;ans, namely, mouth,
tail, and (ift ' ; the /i/i/i/ division tf /fttt ,/• is a<:ninst this (it wouU! l)e /»/ //•!«/). and
SI*r. also a<'i i-pts ill his ti'xt tff*tti ti . 'I hr dunm. further rrafls nir 7tiyJwiiti in b
llo i*\|il.iins i'i//«M in a as fi>r ri//;i7, *in whatever part tliou art liitteii * eti'. : and tiAi/ifm
hy fittim stitpi\Jini\. I 'pp. rcails i'i/A/t f»ftttttfh at end of a, fitMytifnasi at end of K
anil t9/>nit/titi\mtino in c.
4. Thou who here, crooked, jointless, linihless, niakest crooked twisted
(vrjifid) faces -those [faces] mayest thou, <) Hrahmanasi>ati, bend
to*;ether like a reiMl.
Sttm-Miiff/, lit. • hrml to;»rtlirr,' viitiially • strai;;;1acn out * : i.e., apparently, •leducr the
distortion' {r/iiluf:/, <f)mrn.). Half SIT's authorities read ftttma. I*pp. has a differ-
ent trxl in ]iait: tt\,tfft r«» 7U\in* t'/Xi/A' tv/iiMiJ 11//1/ Mukhilnv esitni ''rj-\ and, in c
tffi-a SitTi/iir (for /!iti/iuiiintt\f*tiit').
5. Of the sapless fi/;/«'A/, crawling; on, on the ground (nic/na) —
its poison, verily, I have taken away, likewise I have ground it up.
The coMifn. reads in c .7<//w' (t.ikinij it from t/.l 'rut') instead of ilt/ijt (p atia
tl\ft/:M'). lie understands tlic i;,ifl;'f.t to he a kind of snake; Henry renders it
"srorpion " [ after drill J.
(). Not in thv (two) arms is there stren;:th, not in ihv head, nor in thy
midclle ; then what petty thin;; hearesl thou in that evil way in thy tail ?
i ir /■//.■; m.iy l»e * whv : ' (•»•» \U** t umtn ) instead of • what ?* In this verse the comm.
tf^.nds a l^/*//. I /V/;i/ J tfiiu^f Tf^i.i.:/': as the thin;; addressed, .tmuyi is an ad\erli o(
disL^Mst <ir timlrmpi ; />.if*,iv,l linr api^ui-nliy intensities it.
ii^ 7. Ants rat ihre ; |>im hrns pick thee ti» jjieces ; verily may yc all say
••the piti-ion of the ^iF/'iVi/ is s.iph'ss."
.MI SIT's /•././; rns«i. rrad /./.V;^-./ (hdI /ij/'m in a. Sri*. understands (one docs mH
MM' wli". J ill'- fiiMitn. I'l t.ikf / '':.i I.: •'•!.!: .i/A,t as one word; he (the lonim.) glosses it
wilh .1.; .•".;/ hull . in a. b he iii.ik'-'* the aildiessic a snake. [^Tischel, Ved. Stud. i. Tr.
il ■'' 11 ".SI- , / ■'■1/.'.; J
427 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK VII. -vii. 58
8. Thou that strikest {pra-hr) with both, with both tail and mouth —
in thy mouth is no poison ; how then may there be in thy tail-receptacle?
Or, again, * what may there * etc. The last two verses lack each a syllable, unheeded
by the Anukr. The comm. this time once more declares a scorpion {vr^cika) intended ;
pucchadhiy according to him, designates a romavSn avayavah, LPpp. has for c iisye
cana te vis am. \
57(59)« Prayer to SarasvatI etc.
[ Vdmaiicva, — dvyream . sdrastfatam . jdgatatn . ]
The two verses are both found in PSipp. xx., but in different places. In K<iu^. (46.6)
it is joined with v. 7. 5 in a rite for success when asking for something (the schol. and
comm. specify both verses as employed).
Translated : Ludwig, p. 446 ; Henry, 22, 84 ; Griffith, i. 354.
1. What has gone wrong (vi-ksubh) on the part of me speaking with
expectation, what of [me] going about among people begging, what in
myself of my body is torn apart — that may SarasvatI fill up with ghee.
Ppp. arranges differently the matter in a, b : yad d^asd me carato jandit anu yad
ydtamdnasya vadato vicuksubhe j and it has a different c: yan me (an7>o rajasi pra-
visiam ; further, it reads prndd in d. Tlie authorities are divided between tdd and
yi\d at beginning of c; our IJp.W.I.O.s.m.T.K. and the comm. have tdd; both edi-
tions give^Jr/. Some of our mss. (Bp.E.D.O.p.m.) have sdrasvatim d, and one (E.)
has correspondingly /r//^i. Both verses are irregular zsjagatt
2. Seven flow for the Marut-accompanied young one (f/fw) ; for the
father the sons have made to understand righteous things ; both indeed
bear rule over this of both kinds; both strive, both prosper (pus) of it.
The verse is RV. x. 13. 5 ; but RV. reads ridm at end of b, and twice (in c, d) ubhd-
yasya for /////// asya. The translation follows the RV. reading in c. " Both,** it is to
be noticed (in c, d), is neuter (or fem.), not masculine. The sense is intended to be
mystic, and is very obscure. SPP. reads in b, with all his authorities (at least, he
reports nothing to the contrary), and with the comm., avlvrtami (the comm. glosses it
with vartayanti anHtisthanti)\ the same is given by our M.W.I. Ppp. has a text
til at is partly different and partly corrupt: sapta sravanti ^iqavo marutvate pitd pitre-
hhyo apy avlvat padvatah : ubhaye piprati ubhaye *sya rdjahi ubhe ubhe ubhaye *sya
pisyakah.
58 (60). Invitation to India and Varuna.
\^Kdurupathi . — dvyrcam. mantroktadevatyam , jdgatam : 2, tristubh^
Found also in Paipp. xx. The two verses are part of a RV. hymn (vi. 68. 10, 11).
They are not used in Kau^. ; but Vait (25.2) introduces them with hymns 51 and 44 :
see under the latter.
Translated: Henry, 23, 85 ; Griffith, i. 355.
I. O Indra-and- Varuna, soma-drinkers, this pressed soma, intoxicating,
drink ye, O ye of firm courses; let your chariot, the sacrifice (iad/tvard)^
for the god-feast, approach toward the stall {svdsara)^ to drink.
vii. 58- BOOK vn. Tin: ATIIARVA-VKOA-SAMHIT/V 4^3
KV. rcifls -vra/i} nt end of b. aiikvatAm (which is tnurh l)«tter) in c, And jrd/i in d.
I'pp. \\.\s 'li/ivattim ill c. wilh nyo Uyr yuru* \y. yuvM \. and /«J/i/ in d. 'Ihe romm
I'Xpl.iiiis <ii//;;'f7/f/i as /ih'iSt}fti/it/tt\^ qualifying tathi^, and j:-ihttttt»t as •^yaj*imJnaitJ
2. () Indraand-Variina, of the bull soma, most lich in sweet, pour in.
yc l)iills ; here is your l)cvcraj;o {titiMtis), [lourcd ahout ; sitting on Ihii
barhix^ <!(» yc icvcl.
K\'. tills out Mm.' mcU-r and sense of c liv atidinr' at llit* i*nd aim/ (ihr Anukr
ij»norfS ihe drlii ii'n<\ ), and I'pp. seems to tr.v\ it/iini filw ii\t»if f't*tsii-lam an.lkA
**stiJ' etc. : it also has '^'9 \rttl at end of b. 'Ilie conim. explains <l vru'thdm by A^nitawz,
cpiotin:^ (,'M. ii. 4. 2. 20 as authoiity.
59(6i). Against cursers.
[/•*.7i/ij/i7i.'//;. til tnii^Animtittt* clt idtVtit^lKtim. thttffu.^M^im ]
r'niind also in I'.iipp. xx. (as part of our hymn vi.37). This verse has the &ame
ptittiKti as vi.37.3; Iiut ih'* r<imiu. |_n:i vi. 37, pai^i.- 70. line 2J. ih»uhllrs» with reason,
ri'i^arils vi.37.3 as intended at Krnn;. .jS. 37 I^IUoonifu'li! there yives lif>thj: this hymn,
tlien. is Irft \\itlir>ut litu.d usr. |_Iii f.it t. tlw 1 onrn on this livinn, at p. 41 K. line 4.
di>es <'ite Vi' n^ih ^ <'/'// for um* in tin* s.ini«* 1 lie for whirli ho (itid it in his comment on
vi.37 J
'I i.uiNl.ittd : Hiniy. ::3, N'» ; CiiHilh, i. 355.
I. Wljnrvrr shall luisi' us not lursin^, and whricvcr siiall curse us
cuisini;, 11 ki: a tree smitten hy a thundeiixtlt, let him <lry up from the
root.
The tiisl li.dl' vnsi' is \i. 37. 3 n. b. ai]d is found in otht-r texts* as lliere refcrrnl t'^
Ppp. lias the wliol" \eise as our \i 37.3. and it < lunliinrs in C, as often, VfkxAi 'r.i
Thr Anukr. seems to latity ihr < Dntrat tinii vfK\f 'ti/. •[^Src also Ktitfui-his. p. 74 J
I lu lillh ff////:f/>(-ir ends 1m ic: it has S liynins and 25 vrrses; the Anukr. quotation
for the vns.s is/i//7..// ':i» "/i/'/;. .//// :///( «i A // /i//)iii ////■. »»■«//, and, for the hymns. /■!'*•
Ifirr ends als') tin* si \t«'rn lli /•/ir/i///;. />!•,/.
601621. To the home: on returning or leaving.
/. /*.;» ,i*ifi '//«.* // i '/;# / -i J
I o»:i:l .;Un iii I'.iiiip iii. (in t'le veisrf»rd«'r I.2.^f. ^. 4. ;) I'srd l»v K.^u<; se*rfal
tipi-^ : t:i'<(. it * is n'.-.ilt' inl ( :..\. 1 i) in hunt of the liousc l>y ime uho has lieen a^rsrr.t
im s .■111* li:!^-, li-- t.iKiri-^ ii;- I i:i his h.in !«! ; m-j (mhI. it a::aMi airompanirs ihe action o<
l.i'^iJi;^ li:«-l, in a til-- fm l' •• 'mjjiu'MV i-f all iinnati-s of the house (42 S); third, in tic
I i-i'-'M»'i\ iif piip.uini^ th:!y t':r h-i'i^e fir-' ("2. ; ). with lh»* dirt'( tion i// /».i/.l./i7r»j//. f.^r
nt.iki"^ til'- iMrsiir.s iiiniiMn«-d i-iit- r t^-* l.'nise: |fMi:t'i. in thr /f/r»/.v./,;,i (-^2.1;^ with
t'le '..in- dir'-l:'»M; t-lili. i;i tin- f':'r r rf':ft\,r:f>.t {^'y I M, at t!ie end. on enlerin^ iVe
lii-':s.-; !■ It'.- 1, thf S' li'»I. .i-M ii n-i" It ■'^ 23) to thr T-.J«//#;'ii»/rf, and (note to lo M
429 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK VII. -vii. 6o
reckon it among the fiusfika mantras. As to the separate uses of vs. 7, see under that
verse. 'LFor the first, fourth, and fifth uses, tlic comm., p. 422, lines 5, 18, prescribes
only vss. 1-6. J
Translated: Ludwig, p. 434; Henry, 23,86; Griflith, 1 356.
1. Bearing sustenance {flrj)^ good-winning, very wise, with mild friendly
eye, I come to the houses, well-willing, greeting ; be quiet, be not afraid
of me.
The first and third padas are found in VS. iii. 41, as a second half-verse, and
also in L(^S. iii. 3. 1, ApQS. vi. 27. 5, QGS. iii. 7. For vasuvdnis in a, all read vah
sumdnds ; in c, their reading is grhin iii* mi (L^S. evtiy Ap^S. d *giim) mdnasH mtUia-
vtHnah (L(^S. ddivettd). Ppp. has a very different Xtxi\ grhdn emi manasd moda-
f/tilNO **rjam bib/trad vasumatis sumedhd *ghorena caksusd ntitriytna grhiindm pa^yaii
paya ut tardmi. LUGS. (i. 29. I a) and Ap. (vi. 27. 3) have a verse whose c is our a
(but Ap. has vah suvanih)^ and whose d is Ppp*s a (but Ap. has di *$ni).\ ycfi^ ^^t^^ ^^' *''"'
2. These houses [are] kindly, rich in sustenance (urfas')^ rich in milk, ^^ '^ _ - ^ ~
standing filled with what is pleasant ; let them recognize us coming.
Ppp. reads in c vdmasya^ and at the tn^jdnatas.
3. On whom the absent one thinks (adhi-i)^ in whom is abundant well-
willing — the houses we call on; let them recognize us coming.
The verse is VS. iii. 42, and also found in Ap(^S. vi. 27.3, ^GS. iii. 7 (both these
agreeing in text with VS.), L(^S. iii. 3. i, HGS. i. 29. i. VS. reads at the end jdnatds
for dyatds (like Ppp. in 2 d ; but Ppp. in this verse has dyatas) ; \J^S. has esu iox yesu
in b, hfiydmahe in c, 'AwAjdna (misprint?) at the end; HGS. has eti iox yesu ^ babhus
for bahus in b, -nix^ jdnatas at the end. LCf. also MGS. i. 14. 5 and p. 155, under
yes7' a.\ The comm. glosses adhyeti with smarati,
4. Called on [are] they of much riches, companions, enjoying sweets
together; be ye hungerless, thirstless; ye houses, be not afraid of us.
Ppp. has svddnsamnaras at end of b, and its second half-verse xsaristds san^apuntd
gr/td nas sanfu sarvadd. Ap. and HGS. (as above) have our a, b, and a c-d like that
of Ppp., save sarvaprinisds for -piirnds (HGS. also bhUrisakhds in a).
5. Called on here [are] the kine, called on the goats and sheep; like-
wise [is] the sweet drink of food called on in our houses.
The majority of authorities read nah at the end (our E.O.R. have n)\ both editions
give ;//?// with the minority, and with the other texts (VS. iii. 43 ; Ap. vi. 27. 3; L(JS.
iii. 3. I ; (;GS. iii. 3, 7 ; HGS. 1.29. i) ; the only variant is in L^S..^^^ rasas for klldlas
in c.
6. Full of pleasantness, well-portioned, full of refreshing drink (/rJ),
merry (Iiasdmiidd), thirstless, hungerless be ye ; O houses, be not afraid
of us.
HGS. makes up a verse thus: a = our 2 b; b = our6b; ^ anaqyd atr^yd ; d = our
6 d. Ppp. reads (in b, c) hasdmuda aksudhyd Ursyd sta.
vii. 60- nOOK VII. THK ATIIARVA-Vr.DA-SAttHITA. 43©
7. He yc just hero; go not after; adorn yourselves with all forms; I
shall come along with what is excellent ; become ye more abundant
throii;;h nu\
'(;«) not ;ift»r': lliat is. • *!o nf»l fnIIf)W nic as I ^o away* (so llic comm). The
vrrsr is iisid in K.'iiii;. {2^.fy) in the ceremony of housc-hiiildinf;, on the breaking* of
piovious siii-nrc: and a^ain (2.\. i<>), in a rite for pros|icrity, by one Ktting out on a
journey, lontcniplatin;; tlie housf and its occupants.
61 (63). For success of peaance.
In r.'iipp. (XX.) is found only tlio second half* of vs. I. The hymn is, accorciin|; to
Kau^. ( 10. 22), to he pronounced at tlji^rahilvanti full-moon, in a medhAjanama rite (for
acfpiisiiion of .s.irrctl knowledge) ; also (57. 23), in the ceremony of reception of a Vedic
student, in tlir \aiiHikCirya \^ next after hymn 33 (l)oth vrrsrs are quoted, each I'v \\\
ftfatiltt)\ and the si hnl. (note to 53.4) introduce f»i)tli veiscs in \\\t j^cJdna ceremon%.
• Lllut K's notes ^ive a variant for i b, as helow !J
'I'ranslati'd: Heniy, 24. S; ; t^riU'ith, i. 357.
1. In that, 0 A,i;ni, |)cnancc with penance, we perform additional {})
penance, may wc be dear to what is heard, lonf;-livedp very wise.
* What is hf-ard ' ((M//if ). the inspired or revealed word. Nearly all the mss. (all
ours sa\e Hp.' M.) rr.id privit instead of PftyAh at beginning of C I'pp- has for b
upa ptfkst'ifftiihf * Vtiyam. Thr < omni. j^ives seveial diverse i^uesses at the Mnsc of
the obsrure first h.ilf-\ersf. |_"| he vs. rr< uis with variants at M(jS. i. I. iS.J •^R. »ujf»
jjests \\\.\i /*» I'Stlf/iiifif (root//i) may be intended J
2. () Aj;ni, we perform prnancr. we perform additional penance — wc,
hearing things heard, lonj^ livrd, very wi.se.
It is (pirstion.ilile wliriher ttf*tit»t/>\ti in botli these verses has not a more prej^nant
meanini; |_as aluive: IiK., .simply, ' Kasteiuiij; leiden ' J : Henry takes it as equivalent
to simple Af/rif.
62(64). To Agni: against enemies.
Found aUo, ahnost witliout variant, in I'.'iipp. xx. K.uk; (^i^). 7) uses it, with lii 3.
in the piepar.itinn nf the house lire, i^ith scatter in r; of holy \v.iter. In ViiL (29. <^) it
ap])i'ars in tiie <7|,-r.'/t irir/'/if.
'Iransl.itrd : Urni y. 24, >iS ; < '.ritVith. i. 3 ;;.
I. This A;;ni, b>id of tlie good, hoiisehoM priest, conquered them of
incieascd viiiIity(?K as a ch.iri«>t warrior [ronrpicrs] ft>otmrn ; set down on
eailh in the navel, brightly sliinin;;, let him jnit under foot them who
du'sire in f\'^]\l lu*^].
n-jr p.i'l.is A. c, d arr b. c. d «»f .1 vrrsi* tli.il is fn-ind in V.S. xv. 51, TS. tv 7. 131,
M.S. ii. I .V 4 will] till' fi'IIiiwir..; lir^l p.i l.i : <j r.Jn- nuiJfiynf: a'uhttJ tuuftinyus ; iher
also ie.i<l <r ■{•:/. if;. IS lur : »i/.//;.r;'» t';.:r. .in-l, at l'r;;irjnin;; of c, //.*M/ ////«: -i J j, and "I S.
431 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK VII. -vii. 64
has krnute in d. Ppp. has in t prthivy&{s)^ which is better. The new version of our
text so decidedly calls for an accus. in a that the translation implies vrddhdvrsnydn^ or
else the understanding of -vrsnas as accus. pi. of -san^ which is perhaps not impossible,
though against usage in composition. The comm. reads -nyas^ "sX^o patnlm in b (hav-
ing to labor hard to make out a sense for the latter). The mss. vary between fiainin
2LVi<\pattin (our Bp.P.M.W.E.l. have the former). The first pada is tristubh.
63 (65) . To Agni : for aid.
\^Ka^yapa Mdrha. — jdtavedasam. jagatt.\
Found also in Paipp. xx. K^u^. (69. 22) uses it in the preparation of the house-fire,
with invocation.
Translated: Henry, 25,88; Griffith, 1.357.
I. The fight-conquering, overpowering Agni do we call with songs
from the highest station ; may he pass us across all difficult things ; may
divine Agni stride {}) across arduous things.
The translation implies emendation of ksimat to kritnat in d, as suggested by BR.
(and adopted also by Henry), since the former seems to give no good sense, and both
form and composition with ati are elsewhere unknown for root ksam : cf. also xii. 2. 28 c.
But the parallel verse TA. x. 1.(68) has ksHmat \jxi both ed*s, text and comm. J
and Ppp. reads ksHmUd devo 'dhi. Our comm. explains ati ksdmat as = atyartham
ksdmilni dagdhdni karotu! TA. further gives ugrdm agnim for agnim uk/kd/s,
rectifies the meter of b by reading huvema^ leaves the combination devd dti in d, and
has durita Uy for -idni. Our c is the same with RV. i. 99. t c. The verse has no
jagatl character at all.
64 (66). Against evil influence of a black bird.
[Vania. — dvyrcam. mantroktadn*atyam uta ndirrtam. /. bhurig anustubh ; 2, nyan-
kusdrifii brhati.\
Found also, with very different text, in Paipp. xx. Used by Kauq. (46.47), in a
rite to avert the evil influence of a bird of ill omen.
Translated: Grill, 41, 186; Henry, 25,88; Griffith, i. 357 ; Bloomfield, 167, 555.
I . What here the black bird, flying out upon [it], has made fall — let
the waters protect me from all that difficulty, from distress.
Ppp. reads thus: yad asmdn krsnaqakunir nispatann dna^e: d, tn, i, enaso d. p.
vi^vatah. The second half occurs also in L^S. ii. 2. 1 1, which (like Ppp.) has vt\va(ah
at the end.* Prat. iv. 77 appears to require as /a <ib-reading in b abhi-nihpdtan ; but all iJ^yt%/^ 1 X O,
tlie pada-mss. pive -nisp-^ and SPP. also adopts that in his pada-XxxW abhinipatan I '^^ ^f O*
would be a decidedly preferable reading. The second half-verse is found again as /f^i p^^ ^
X. 5. 22 c,d. The comm. says that the bird is a crow. *|_And enaso in cj
2. What here the black bird hath stroked down with thy mouth, ^ UiiiV Jh>^
O perdition — let the householder's fire release me from that sin. ' ' ^
Ppp. has instead : yadi vd ^mrksata krsna^akunir mukhena nirrtt tava: agnis fat
sarvath {undhatu havyavdii gkrtasiidanah^ which is the same with ApQS. ix. 17.4
(only this begins yad apd ^tnrksac ckakunir^ rectifying the meter, and has -t^(/in d).
cM^ f, a^t}>^--^ fii^^^ ?
^ l>cH^^ ^t^^^-*^
vii. r>4- HOOK VII. Tin: ATMARVA-VKDA-SAttHITA. 43^
The scrond h.ilf-vcrsc is found without variant in A^*S. ii. 7. 11. The comm. Vkkr%
liwfl.itt/ frniii root ///rf, as tlic translation dors; cf. TS. iii. 2.0*, r«l/ Jtrsna^akatrndk
. . . a-ui»tr^f't . . . ri/r cAi'tl *-i'timf\tU. [Sec the mitc of Mcnry or (Griffith. J Such a
vcrsi? (S f 1 1 : S -»■ S) is else where tailed 1»y the Aiuikr. an urohrhatl.
65(67). To the plant ap&mflrg&: for cleansing.
Not found in r/iipp. I'scd hy Kau^. (4^). 49) in a ceremony of expiation, with a fire
of ti/tilfftthj^ii ; and vss. 1, 2 arc reckoned (note to 39.7) to the krivA j^ama. Ami
the conini. rr;rards vss. 2 and 3 as intended at 76. I in t!ic nuptial ierrnionies« insirad
of xiv. 2. (iCt (liotii viTsrs having tlie same />tatUa) ; in this he is evidently vrrony;.
Translated: Cirill, 3.S, 186; Henry, 25, S«^ ; CirilTilh. i. 35S; Itloomficld, 72, 556.
1. Since thou. C) off-wiper (r//J///«//,v</), hast grown with reverted fruit,
maycst thou icpcl (j//) from me all curses very far from here.
L'l'he vcTse dosely rrscmML'S iv. 19- 7 J All the authorities (rxcrpl one of STI*'*)
read ti/^Amrtrj^a witliout accent at be^inninc; of b; hoth texts make the necessary cor-
lertion to (//-. The roinm. understands the plant {Aihytanthes asfffa: see note to
iv. 17. '») to he used heie as fuel.
2. What [is] ill -done, what pollution, or what we have practised evilly
— by ihce. C) all-waysfacinj; off-wiper, we wipe that off {tifti-pur/).
Or (b) * if we have /^one about evilly.* All tlie authmities have /ifiil instead of tx-JtJ
at bei^innini; of c. but both texts make the obviously necessary correction. The comm.
reads frtivti.
3. If we have been together with one dark-toothedp ilUnailed, mutilated,
by thee, () off-wi|)cr, we wipe off all that.
The comm. reads -'tinJena in b; and he has also tl^ima for Jlshna, which is not a
bad emendation.
66(68). For recovery of sacred knowledge (brahmana).
[/fr.ihmiin. — I'ftlhmtinam. tfiituhhJ\
I'ound also in P.'iipp. .\x. Keikcmed in K.'iut;. (0.2) to hrkaiktlniif^ana, with lome
of the hymns next foHowin^.
Translated: Ilenry, 25, Si; : (fritlith. i. 35().
I. If it wa.s in the atniospheie, if in the wind, if in the trees, or if in
the bushes — what the cattle he.ird utleied let that tni/tmamt come
a^ain to us.
ftt:.ni /^..'i I tf. Nf.irly all the aiithoijtir's ;^ive Asfa^tiu in c: *)ur I), has «f| r-, and.
ai \ •U'lini; ti» Sri*.. tliree of his ;*i/«/.i mss : lie therefore ^ives in his text li^ravan, whkh
is .ds-i ilu* ti»mni's riMdinj; ; ami that is implied in the translation. I'he comm. coo-
nri ts tlie li\mn \vitli thr preset iptions as to tin* time of study or refrainmf; from studr
433 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK VII. -vii. 68
of the sacred texts (referring to Ap^S. xv. 21. 8), and regards it as a spell for recover-
ing what has been lost by being learned under wrong circumstances — in cloudy weather,
in sight of green barley, within hearing of cattle, etc.
67 (69). For recovery of sense, etc.
[BraAman. — dtmadevatyam, purahparosnig brhati.'\
Not found in Paipp. Employed by Kau^. for several purposes: first (45.17, 18),
after the end of the vaqd^amana^ in a rite of due acceptance of sacrificial gifts, after
any ceremony performed ; second, in iht goddna ceremony (54. 2), with vi. 53. 2 ; third,
in tlie Vedic student ceremonies (57.8), when supplying the place of a staff lost or
destroyed; fourth, in the savayajfias (66. 2), with v. 10. 8 and vi. 53, with the direction
/// pratimantrayate ; it is also reckoned (9.2), with 66 etc., to the brhachdtiti gana;
and the schol. add it (note to 6.2) to hymn 106 in a rite of expiation for anything spilt
or forgotten in the parvan sacrifices, and further, in the ufianayana, in the reception of
girdle and staff (notes to 56. i and 3). In Vait. (18.4) it appears in the agnistoma^
following the distribution of tlie fires.
Translated : Henry, 26, 90 ; GrifTith, 1. 359.
I. Again let sense {indriyd) come to me, again soul, property, and
brdlnnana (sacred knowledge) ; let the fires of the sacred hearth again
ofliciate just here in their respective stations.
The verse occurs in CQS. viii. 10. 2, with mdm for md in a, and, in c, d, dhisuydso
yathdsthdnam dhdrayantdm ihdi^vaj and the firatlka fiunar mim ditv indriyAtn is
found in TA. i. 32. i, but might rather be intended to quote the parallel but quite differ-
ent verse found at AGS. iii. 6. 8 : fiunar mdm ditv indriyam punar dyuh fiunar bhagah :
fiunar dravinam ditu mdm fiunar brdhmanam ditu mdm; which MB. (i. 6. 33) also
has, with md in c and d. \Qi. TA. i. 30. i ; also MGS. i. 3. i, and p. 152. J AGS. adds
a second verse, of which the first half corresponds with our c, d : ime ye dhisnydso
agnayo yathdsthdnam iha kalfiatdm Lcf. MGS. i. 3. I J. The Anukr. seems to scan a
and c as 7 syllables each.
68 (70, 71). Praise and prayer to Sarasvatl.
[/-.?. (^amtdti, — dvyrcam. sdrasvatam. i. anustubh ; 2. tristubh. — j. (^amtdti. —
sdrajvaiam, gdyatrt.]
None of the verses arc found in PSipp. Here again the Anukr., the comm., and
some mss. difTcr in division from our first mss., and make our third verse a separate
hymn.* In Kau^. (81.39) *^c ^^^^ ^^^o verses (= hymn 70) come in with other Saras-
vatl verses in the pitrmedha; the third verse (= hymn 71) not with them, in spite of
its kindred character, but in both the brhat and laghu^dnti ganas (9. 2,4). Viit. intro-
duces the hymn (doubtless the two verses) twice (8. 2, 13), once with hymn 40, once
with hymn 9 and other verses, in praise of Sarasvatl. ^^So also SPP*s text. The
dccadnli vision cuts the hymn between vss. 2 and 3 : cf. p. 389. J
Translated: Henry, 26, 90; Griffith, i.359.
I. O Sarasvatl, in thy courses, in thy heavenly domains; O goddess,
enjoy thou the offered oblation ; grant us progeny, O goddess.
The second half-verse is the same with 20. 2 c, d, and nearly so with 46. i c, d.
vii. f»S noOK VII. THE ATIIARVA-VKOA-SAMHITA. 434
2. This [is] thine ohlalioiip rich in ghcCp O SarasvatI ; this the oblation
of the I'athcrs tliat is to ho consumed (?); these thy most wcalful utter-
ances ; by them may we he rich in sweet.
The translation implies the cniemlation of tUntM in c to tl^yain ; the comm. makrs
it fioni till* root ax 'throw/ ami — ksrpaniytiifi. Perhaps (Koth) tlfvam is the tru^
rradin;^ ; Henry understamls ydt as ppic : '*K(>ing to the mouth of the Kathers." The
first p.i«la xsjtii^ati.
3 (71. I). He thou propitious, most wcalful to us, very gracious,
(.) Saras vat i ; let us not be separated from sight of thee.
The verse occurs in TA. iv. 42. I ami A A. i. I. I, with the variant, fnrc. md U x'ti'^ma
Siimth\i ; and l.rS. v. 3. 2 has the same, but with Stintt/a^as (misprint for -Jr^-}) ac
tlic emi. In i. 1.3, TA. has another version, with the same enclinf^. hut with bAaT^a in
A cxpamled to bhavantu tiiiyA Apa ^satihtiyah. |_Cf. also A'<iM<i-Aj/., p. 115; Mf«S.
i. 11. 18 and p. 150 under j<//'^f7.J
69 (72;. Prayer for good fortune.
[^'ifw/ifV/. - iukh,idn\ttt\kxtm. f,Ukydpiinitt.\
Found also in TAipp. xx. Im hided. like tlic jtrt-redini; hymn, in the two {dmti ganar
(K.'iu<;.<). 2, 4), and by the srhol. (note to 9. 7) in yet a third.
Translated: Henry, 26, i^i ; (iiitiith, i. 3^10.
y il- /rrr l^ i>*^^' Weal for us let the winil blow; weal for us let the sun burn ; be
^i.M/fC'' jj^g jj^yj. ^y^^.ji j-,,!- ^jj. . J.JJ.J ^^.^..j| j^.^ ^1^^. ni;;ht be applied; weal for us let
&^^ the tiawn shine forth. '
The \\hole verse orturs in TA. iv.42. 1, \\ilh pavatt'tm ffni/arf^xul for fJ/ar in a. atvl
fti/fi/i in d. MS., in iv. <). 27, lias only four padas. witii 'M/ adiled bffore 7if/« in a
VS. has the same amount, our a. b brini; xxxvi. 10 a, b (with pai'iifiirn for idfu in a).
and our c. d bein^ xxxvi. 1 1 a (with ftt/fi/i instead of our tttttt). All have alike in d the
/^ 1^ 5«^ I Strang!* expression //li// «///M'i//i;"/_. The Anukr. iijiiiirrs tlie drfif.ii-ncy nf two sillat>ir%
Ui^^ ^ « in a. I^I'PP* '''^^ '"^ ^^^ "'*^ ■*'' ^'*^"' times ; also 'bhivtltc for TiI/jv, and titfati for '/*.J
u(\^^ i^^^ 70(73»- Against an enemy's sacrifice.
M.^ '**' /i^'./fi^i./ ,'.is I// ; ^j* Jt tiuustuhh (j. /ur.i'si.iiummati) J
/^
The first two vi-rsrs are ln\iiHl in P.iipp. xix. I'.srd by Kau<;. (4.S. 2;). with *i. 54. in
a c haim to spoil an rnrmy's s.u nd litrs.
'I i.insl.itc I : l.udwi;;. p. 374; <irill. 4''i. 1R7; Hrnry, 2^i, »>l ; (irifilth, i. 3''o; lUoonv
li'lil. «;\ 557.
I. \Vhal»ioi«vcr be yonilrr cffiTS with mind, and what with voice, with
sacinu i-s, with (d)l.ili<)n, with sacred formula ()-ri///i), that let perdition,
in conmrd with death, smite, bis offering, before it comes true.
'lh.it is. l-rfoif its M]»iri ts aie rrali/rij (roinm fii/wfMw/il/ liirn:ttpA»t,\if purrjm}
'1 iiis \eise atid tlie n<.-.\t aie found aUo in I It. ii. 4. 2'-', which reatls here, at end of bL
435 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK VII. -vii. /I
yiijusH havlrbhih (Ppp. has the same) ; in c, mrtyitr nirrtyA satfividdndh^ and, for d,
pur a distad ahutlr asya hantu j Ppp. has, for d, purU drstli rdjyo hantv asya Lintend-
ing drsfdd djyam f J.
2. The sorcerers, perdition, also the demon — let them smite his truth
with untruth ; let the gods, sent by Indra, disturb {mat/i) his sacrificial
butter ; let not that meet with success which he yonder offers.
TH. (as above) omits the meter-disturbing devas in c, and reads, in d, sdmrddhim
(error for sdm ard/iif), and, at the end, kardti. The comm. understands at the begin-
ning jj///r////i// J (as fem. sing.). The verse (ii + 1 1 : 13 + 1 1) is in no proper sense
jagatf.
3. Let the two speedy over-kings, like two falcons flying together,
smite the sacrificial butter of the foeman, whosoever shows malice
against us.
The comm. understands in a, * two messengers of death, thus styled * ; the meaning
is obscure. Almost all the authorities (save our R.?T., and this doubtless by accident)
have at the end -aghdydnti ; the comm., however, reads -ydti^ as do, by emendation,
both the edited texts.
4. Turned away [are] both thine arms ; I fasten up thy mouth ; with
the fury of divine Agni — therewith have I smitten thine oblation.
The comm. understands bdhil in a also as object of nahydmi, and understands the
arms as fastened behind {^prsthabh&gasambaddhdii). ^TB. (ii.4. 2») has our a, b (with
dpa for the dpi of our b) as tlie c, d of a vs. which is immediately followed by our
next vs. J
5. I fasten back thine arms; I fasten up thy mouth; with the fury of
terrible Agni — therewith have I smitten thine oblation.
Sn*. has at the beginning rf/i, his authorities being equally divided between dpi and
dpa. The majority of ours (only D. noted to the contrary) have dpa^ which is decidedly
to be preferred, as corresponding also to 4 a, and as less repetitious. ^TH. (ii. 4. 2 J)
has our vs., with dpa again (see vs. 4) in b, devdsya brdhmand iox ghordsya mattyutid
in c, and sdrvafn for i^fta and krtdm for havis in d.J
71(74). To Agni: for protection.
[A/Aarvafi. — dgueyam. dnustub/tam .]
Found also in Paipp. xix. Used in Kauq. (2. 10), in i\\t parran sacrifices, to accom
pany the carrying of fire thrice about the offering. In Vait, it occurs in the agnistotna
(21. 15), and also in the agnicayana (28. 8), in the same circling with fire.
Translated : Henry, 27, 92 ; Griffith, i. 361.
I. Thee, the devout \^^lpra\, O Agni, powerful one, would we fain put
about us [as] a stronghold, [thee] of daring color, day by day, slayer of
the destructive one.
The verse is RV. x. 87. 22, which has at the end the plural (-vaiUm) ; further found in
\'S. (xi. 26) and MS. (ii. 7. 2), both of which agree with RV., and in TS. (i. 5. 64 ct al.),
vii. 71- IJOOK VII. TIIK ATHARVA-VKDA-SAttHITA. 43*
wliirli has for d b he ((Aram bhauf^urAvatah, KmcnHation in b to vApram ■ raini>art '
called for ; mnrrovcr, tiruUiv- in c would l)C nrceptnMc |_M:e Koth, /I>M(0. xlviii. loAJ.
rpp. lias at tlir end --•ii(ah^ and sahtisva in b.* The verse is also fnaiul in cnir tcit as
viii. 3. 22. LWiulrrnit/., Uoihzfit^fidtell^ p. 57, cites it from H.iuilh. i. 6.J [_\V. inlrr-
lines a mailc of dmiht as to his version of bhafii^- and pves Henry's tromfifmr'in tkr
mai}:in.J *[^l\oth*s Collation says simply "71 cImI. citiert.** That means ■ Found in
iViipp. \ix., ( ite<l * [from its previous occurrence in xvi., where, according; to K'l Colla-
tion for viii. 3. 22, the valiants are sa/idS7'a and b/nt/ij^urJTa/Jw]. K. in hit Notn
sa\s expressly tliat I'pp. too "has vipram for the correct vapram,'* \
72 (75, 76;. With an oblation to Indra.
[/, 3. s4thfi9 :;ifi. — tix'Vftam. ilim/ram. 1. auustithh ; 2. (ftstHbk. — 7. Aikarfam. — Jttnd^^m
t9AtstHbhani.\
Here ai^ain, follow in;; our Iculin^ ms. and the sense, we combined into one uhat the
Anukr etc. treat as two hynnis, our vs. 3, which lie);; ins a new dec ad,* Inrinf; reckoned
as a sepaiate hynm. No one of the three verses is found in Taipp. ; Init they are a
RV. hymn (\. ij'O* K.'iuq. (2.40) uses the hymn in the /<r ^7'<f 11 sacrifices, for Indra (the
S( hoi. adds /// //i;/ir. as if the three veiscs were to he rij;aided as one hymn; there is
no (piot.ition of vs. 3 as a srp.ir.itir h\mn). in \'.'iit., vs. 1 (or vss. I, 2 ?) is repeated
(14.3) liy the /lodtf in summoning the ittfAiutrvrt to milk the cow in the a^is(&mm
ceremony ; and a!;;ain in the .same (21. iS), vs. 3 (~ hymn 76) accompanies the offering
of the tiatihii^hat mahoma. 'L^ f. p. 3-^ 9- J
Transl.ited : Henry, 27,92; (irilfith, 1.361.
uVf J.i). ^» I '• ^^*^"*' y^' "P'» V^oV down at Iiulra's scasdnablc |x>rtion ; if cookcclp
do yc offer [it] : if uncooked, d*) yo wait (mad).
KV. makes the construction in tlie .second h.-ilf- verse more distinct liy readinf; {r^tds
and d^ fit/its^ nominatives; the comm. regards our ^nUtiw ( = pnkvam) And J^rJttam as
made neuter to (pi.ilify a /iti7'is understrMid ; he explains manitUtatta \r{. UK. v. 47 1 J
as — ptUtita or (txptam knruta (referrin;^ to the expression matiandt applied to water),
or, alternatively, as indram s(u(tbhir m a day a (a : those addressed aie the priests {kt
r(vija/i),
2. The ohlatinii [is] cooked ; hither, (} Indra, please come forward ;
the sun hath ^one to the midpoint of his way ; [thy] companions wait
upon (pari ti^) thee with treasures (nid/ii)^ as heads of families on a
chieftain {:tttjiipaii) as he ^oes about.
K\*. 1 1- ads in b 'itnadhyam. foi which our text is only a corruption, and accents
\k{ ihaffr $ 1.V17 a J vtAjAkpatim in d. The comm. explains viinaJhyam as vtkalam
tnaJt'txttm, tuiJunam maiihyabhai^am : he calls the otferin^; referred to the dadki^
^hat ni.t (.IS \'.iit. ).
3 (76. I). C(>oke<l I think [it] in the udder, cooked in the fire; well
cooked I think |it]. that newtrr rite (}rtd)\ of the curds of the midday
lih.it ion (h ink tlxui. ( ) thiuvlerbnlt hearing Indra, much-doing, enjoyinf^ [it].
KV. re. Ills Ku^tatam in b. and pttntktJ (viK'ative) in d. |_Kor a, c(. Aufrccht's
A'.yrr'.i.t* i. p. x\ii. puf.u e.J
^^
437 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK VII. -Vli. 73
73 (77)* With a heated offering to the Agvins.
[AfAarifdn. — el'ddafarcam. gharmasuktam, d^-vinam uta fratyrcammantroktaddivatam,
irdistubham : /, ^, b.jaf^ati ; a. ptUhydl*rhati.'\
Found also, except vss. 7-9, in Paipp. xx. (the first six verses in the order 2, 1,4,
5» 6, 3); the first six verses, further, in AQS. iv.7 and ??S. v. 10 (in both, in the order
2, 1,6, 5, 4, 3); the last five are RV. verses etc.; see under the several verses. The
hymn in general does not appear in Kau^. (the sacrifice which it accompanies not falling
within its sphere) ; but the last verse (so the comin. ; it might be ix. 10.20) is applied
(24. 17) in settling the kine in their pasture by one who is going away from home ; and
again (92. 15), in the viadhuparka ceremony, when the presented cow is released
instead of being sacrificed. Vait. uses several of the verses, all in the agnistoma cere-
mony: vss. 3 and 4 (14. 5) with the offering of iki^ ghartna; vs. 7 (14.4) in summon-
ing \\\G gharma cow; vs. ii (14-9) before the concluding homa.
Translated: Ludwig, p. 429 (vss. 1-6) ; Henry, 28, 93 ; Griffith, i. 361.
1. Kindled, O ye two bulls, is Agni, the charioteer of heaven; heated
is the ghmind; honey is milked for your food (is) \ for we singers {kdrti)^
of many houses, call on you, O A9vins, in joint revelings.
The translation implies in b the accent duhydte^ which is found in no ms. ; the comm.
makes the same construction. Ppp. reads a^vind for vrsand in a ; and also, with both
A(y'S. and (^(^S., puruiamdsas in c; doubtless our word is a corruption of this
LRoth, ZDMG. xlviii. 107 J. But for rathf^ in a, A(^S. has ratis and CQS. rayisy plain
corruptions. The g/iarmd is either the hot drink into which fresh milk is poured, or
the heated vessel containing it The comm. interprets the verses according to their
order and application in AQS. He explains the gharma as the heated sacrificial but-
ter in the vtahdvlra dish.
2. Kindled is Agni, O ye A9vins; heated is your ghannd; come!
now, ye bulls, the milch-kine are milked here, ye wondrous ones {dasrd)\
the pious ones are reveling.
A(^S. and QQS. both read gdvas for ntlndm in c, and (with Ppp.) kdravas for
vedhasas at the end. The first half-verse occurs also in VS. (as xx. 55 a, b), which
omits 7'dm in b, and reads virit sutdh for i gatafn.
3. The bright {(tici) sacrifice to the gods accompanied with "hail,"
the A^vins' bowl that is for the gods to drink of — this all the immortals,
enjoying, lick respectively by the Gandharva*s mouth.
The two Sutras and Ppp. agree in reading gharmas iox yajhas in a; the former
have also f/// for // in c The comm. declares this verse to be used after the gharma
offering; the "bowl" is the one called upayamana; the ** Gandharva " is either the
sun or the fire.
4. The offered ghee, the milk, which is in the ruddy [kine], that is
your portion here, ye A^vins ; come ; ye sweet ones, mainfainers of the
council (yiddtha), lords of the good, drink ye the heated gliarmd in the
shining space of the sky.
'd
vii. 73- liOOK VII. THIC ATHARVA-VLUA-SAMHITA. 438
In b. <,'<,"S. has su for ui ; at tlic cm!, A(,'S. has somyitm mtui/iu (for rfitanr ^iXiMA)
There 0111^ ht to Im.* nv)rc than one accent on the scries of vocatives in c. to ^uidc u« 10
thrir rij;ht comhination. which is (hnibtful. The comm. takes tnth/hrl as MaMavtt^jt J
/v^ h^ ^^ ^HV, -^-^^ #v/V^
/9v*/ ^^^; Let the heated (!;hanud, its own invokcr {Ji6tat% attain to you; let
your olfcrcr {aiihvaryu) move forwaicl, rich in inilk ; of the milked sweet.
C) A<;vins, of the offspring; (?), eat (17) ye, drink ye, of the milk of the
ruddy [row].
Thr l\\*> Sutras irnd Mak}ati in a, and cant/i f^ftiytisvAft at eml of b: the comm alv>
lias //fir-, and i-xplains it as piluiinakAripiiyiyuktah ; pray- is doulitless the m'»re
f*i>niiinc MMdin;;. The ol)S( iite /tifr.iiils in c((wnitt'-d in I,udM-if**s translation)* is made
hy tlie f'oinni. an arljcrtivf ({Malifyin^ tanyilyils^ and si^^nifyin^ payoiit\*1kyAfyafupah^-
vi/ipnuitlfii-ftij yajuiim 'rhtt'intytiftfytl/t. I*jip. has in a sma fu^ttl ; the comm. taLrs
sTi(/io/tJ as j>ossf*isivc, whirh suits the a<rent l>ctti'r. Vcis-^'s 4 am! 5 the comm.
derlaivs to have tlio valuo of ytl/vti vrrscs in the crremony. "Lin fact I.udwi|; dors
rendiT /.i/iitytU (af-(:«-ntl) hy *Mhis." and /lintl and t*hitlya corres)>ondinj;ly. Tammljt^
is tlie I'pp. ii'adin;; here for /«////ni?r.J
6. Run up with milk, () cow-milker, quickly; pour in the milk of the
ruddy [cowj in {hi\!;//ti rfmi ; the desirable Savitar hath irradiated {vi-JbAjti)
the firmament ; after the forerunning of the dawn he shines forth {vi-rdj).
SIMM's text lias t^ni/AttJ^- ( voc. ) in a, hut nearly half his authorities have j^^AuJt, and sn
also neatly all ouis (all those noted save ltp.)t f^r which reason our text |;ives it \ gt^Mnk
is (louhtli-ss the tnn* reading, am! it is foUowcfl in the tianslation. t,\*S. reads after it
(prihaps hy a misprint ?) r»w//// ,• A<,S. (also prohahly hy a misprint?) f^\\'9% payaiA
/^outm (omittin;; «/////<; o). <,*<," S. has tfiinttUttls for vtirenyas m c. and its d is anm
tiyilvtipf thi:'l supranitf^ wlnie A(,'S. an<l I'pp. have nearly the same: *nu dvAx^dprtkix t
supftiuitih, Tiiis seems most liki-ly to he the true ending; of the verse ; in our test has
been somehow substituted a half-verse whi<:h is KV. v. Ki.zc, d. and found also in
seveial other texts : VS. xii. 3, 'IS. iv. 1. io«, MS. ii. 7. ft : al! of them arrent Ann as an
indrpendrnt woid, as our text doubtless ou^lit to do (p. anifprayAnam^'^ one of
Si*I*'s authoiilies, au<l the ronun., do so. The comm. does not reco^ni/e the ad%crh
osAm, but iiMidfis it by tiiptam [^ <,/'i7; w«////, * the heated ^^*^rfr///ir vessel 'J ; he explains
vi ak'hyAt \\\ p* ^tK\}\xi\yiti. 'i'wo, if not three, of llie padas are tristubh.
7. I call upon that easy-milking milch-cow; a skilful-handed milker
also shall milk lur ; may the impeller (savittit) impel us the best impulse;
the hot think is kindled upon --that may he kindly proclaim.
'Iliis .iinl tin* fiillin\iiii; vtrsr are aUi> twi> sun tssivc verses in RV. (i. 164. 26, 27 ;
th'*y an* irpiMtid below as ix. io. 4, 5. wlirre the wlude KV. hymn is giien). RV.
h.is at tin* rml the b-'tti-T riM'lini: *■«'"'"•. Tlie romm. ilrrlares the verse to l»e used in
thr ( .dliii'4 ii|t of ilir row t!iat fvinisjirs the j,' //,;//'/ 17 diink, that slie may Ite milked.
S. I.iiwin:; (//;;/7;), mi^tiess of j^ood thin;;s, seeking; her calf with her
mind, hath she come in; h'l this inviolable one (ay^hnyA) yield [tiuh) milk
for the A^vins ; b-t her iufrcase un?o ^reat i^ood-fortune.
K\'. I IS .ibiivr) rrads ,:'■.*•) .;._.?/ ( [i. ..•*/;/..; : ii^^M'S -^t end of b. The RV. patia-
ti'xt liivi !-s /.wv ltn:\t:i .it t'.ir bi'-imiir:;;, .md SIT. givrs the same reading; but our
439 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK VII. -vii. 74
padamsts. (with the doubtful exception of D.) read here hinkr-^ without division ; at
ix. 10.5 they agree with RV. The verse accompanies, says the comm., the coming
up of the cow for milking.
9. As enjoyable IJus(a) household guest in our home (durofid), do
thou come, knowing, unto this our sacrifice; smiting away, O Agni, all
assaulters (abhiyuj)^ do thou bring in the enjoyments of them thaf play
the foe.
This verse and the following one are found in RV. (v. 4. 5 ; 28. 3), and also occur
together in TH. ii. 4. i » and MS. iv. ii.i. RV.MS. read at end of c vihdtyH^ p.
viohdtya ; there is no other variant. The comm. paraphrases abhiyujas in c by abhi-
yoktrfh parasenah, ^For d, cf. iv. 22. 7 d.J
10. O Agni, be bold unto great good-fortune; let thy brightnesses
{(iyumnd) be highest; put together a well-ordered house-headship; tram-
ple on the greatnesses of them that play the foe.
The verse is (as noted above) RV. v. 28. 3, and found also in TB. and MS., and
further in V.S. xxxiii. 12 and ApC^S. iii. 15. 5 — everywhere without variant. Our comm.
explains {ard/ui ?c& — ardrahrdayo bhava. The Prat iv. 64, 83 prescribes y^^/fl/y/fw as
/^z//</- reading in c, but all the //i//tf -mss. x^^A jdhQpatyAm^ divided, and SPP. accordingly
gives that form in his//?^<3-text. The KV, pada xG7L(\sjil/tpatydm andyrf///<f/M, but,
strangely, yV/Z/o/^//;// (the two latter occurring only once each). LVVinternitz, Hochzeits-
rituell^ p. 57, cites the verse. J
11. Mayest thou [verilyj be well-portioned, feeding in excellent
meadows ; so also may we be well-portioned ; eat thou grass, O inviolable
one, at all times ; drink clear water, moving hither.
The verse is RV. i. 164.40 (hence repeated below, as ix. 10. 20), found also in
Ap(^S. ix. 5.4, and KC^'S. xxv. 1. 19; all these read dtho for ddhd in b, and K^S. has
b/in(^ava(i in a (if it be not a misprint).
The sixth attnvdka^ with 14 (or 16) hymns and 42 verses, finishes here. The
quoted Anukr. says of the verses dvir ekavifi^atih sasthahy and, of the hymns, sasthaq
caiurda^a,
74 (78). Against apacits : against jealousy : to Agni.
[Athari'dftgiras. — caturrcam, mantroktadroatyam uta jdtavedasam, dnusfuMam.]
This hymn and the one following are not found in P&ipp. There is apparently no
real connection between the three parts of the hymn. Used by K2U9. (32. 8 : accord-
ing to Ke^. and the comm., vss. i and 2, which alone are applicable) in a healing cere-
mony, with the aid of various appliances, " used as directed in the text" It is added :
*' with the fourth verse one puts down upon and pierces [them]" (32.9), but the fourth
verse of this hymn suggests no such use, and Ke^. declares 76. 2 to be intended.^
Verse 3 appears (36. 25), with hymn 45 etc., in a rite against jealousy ; and vs. 4 is
made (i. 34) an alternate to v. 3 when entering on a vow; in Vait. (i. 13) it follows
V. 3 in a like use. The comm. here Lp. 457' J quotes apacitdm |_vii.'74j as read at
Kauq. 31. iT), and understands this hymn instead of vi. 83 \apiuitas\ to be there meant ;
but under vi. 83 he quotes apacitas, and understands accordingly 1
vii, 74- noOK VII. TIIK ATIIAKVA-VKDA-SAttinrA. 44O
•[If \vc m.iy trust Ki'<;ava (p. 333»"-J*)» **'C verses are indeed four in number, and
art* \ii. 74. 1 and 2, vii. 7(>. 1, aixl then vii. 7<i. 2. With carh of the first three the prr
fiiiMKM prii ks tile boil witli a (iilnird anow; and with the frmrth \crne (eafuwtJktJ
n.inu-ly vii. 7^. 2) hr {iiiik.s it with a fourth aiiow. ■-- I»ut why sliouh! K.iii^. in 3:.'/ %2\
tti/.'tf//t\,} :* Ate \vv to assurnr a k^P hi the tr.xt of K.un; ?- -Cf KlooinficM's h\poihr«i«,
SIU". xlii. 55S, II. 2, that vii. 74. T -2 and 7^>. 1 2 to;»rther formed a single h}nin for
Kt-qava. 'I hry arc so associated l»y the comm. at p. 457', as Whitney ol»!ier\*es in the
pM ( t'<liiii; p.iiajjraph. J
rfansl.itcd : lilooint'icld, JAOS. xiii. p cr.wiii - I'AOS. Orl. iSS7,an<l AJI*. Ai. 324
(v.ss. I and 2); llcnry, 2«^, i>5 ; (iiiflilh. i. 3')3 ; lUoonificM, SUM. xhi. 18, 557.
1. Of the red apacit's black is the mother, so have wc heard; by the
root of tlie divine anclioret I pierce them all.
The ronun. makes at ^hmI h-n;;th several disrordant attempts to explain who the di%ine
anchnn-t (//;/?///) is. 1 1 is explanation t»f tipacit, fuller than elsewhere Riven, may I«
tepoited : titwava^aJ apak t i\*itftti/ttJ i^ti/ttt/ tifab/tya adhastUt luitsthiisamMtitJkAmeim
pni \f ti} i^tifti/tttnii/it/t : y,n/7'tl '/i/i iti:\infi pitru.\a\j'a lityafn ity apiUit^th, ^At vi. S3. 3.
the apiud is ••dau^diter of the l)la< k one. "J
2. I pierce the first of them ; I pierce also the midmost ; now the
hinder one of them I cut into like a tuft (stuJid).
The r<iiiim. says, at tiic en<l, rii///i> **t nilstul-il '//ihiJr/;/ii thiJyate tathA.
It is stiani^e that the two following verses, whii h com ein dilfeient matirrs. are cnm-
hined witii tiie ai>ovc and with one another. Ihit the hvmn is not diiided hv any one
of the autlioiities.
3. With the spell (rviVr/j) of Tvashtar have I confounded thy jealousy;
also the fury that is thine, C) mastrr ipdti), thai do we appease for thee.
Some of the mss. (incIiHlin;; our W.) romhine many us te in C.
4. Do thou. 0 lord of vows, adorned by the vow, shine here always,
well-willin;; ; thee beiiij; so kindled, (J Jatavedas, may wc all, rich in
pro«;eny, wait upon {iipa-saii).
Nt-aiK all the m^s. (i»ui Up. I! p.m. are exre|>ii«»ris. with four of SIT's authorities)
read twim in a, and so do tlie niss. of tiie K.~iui;ika |_save Ch. Itu.J and Wiit.ina Sutrjs
in tlir ptatikit .- liodi printed t«-\ts ;;ivc f-rAin |_with the comm J 1 1 is full exposilion "f
his uiu i-it.iinty as to the ine.min;: ni j,j/,r:Yiftn may he rpiotefl: yfl/il/ir)//f hkutJtmJm
veiiitiii ;,tfitn 7';i/ii/«/i/;/.f ;n,'t\tifnt'tn,t T'i ;i//.i//«/;>7</yii/i;i//;ii*i*i t'*I. The definition of
lire vcise as ///i/«M is la* kint: in tlu* Annkr.
75 C79)- Praise and prayer to the kine.
I.ikc (})«• prer I'llin;; hymn, not founrl in I'aipp. Not used in K.iuc; (if iv. 21.7 is
intendi-ii in i') I (). Ihit tli<* 10mm. s.iys here that the ritual appliratinn in the rile for
prosper it\ (»f kine has alnMdy hrcn sfatrd. leferrini;. pro|iaf»ly. to liis exjmsitinn under
iv. ::i 7. where he spi»ke of two veis<s. although the liymn had nttne after 7 ; pnuilily
the two \i-iNi-s ni this iunin are wli.it In' h.id in mind.
'1 i.»:isi.jN«! ; I.uiiwi^, p 4''ij : I lenr\. 3 ^. '/'i : (iritlith, i 304.
44* TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK VII. -vii. 76
1. Rich in progeny, shining in good pasture, drinking clear waters at
a good watering-place — let not the thief master you, nor the evil-plotter;
let Rudra's weapon avoid you.
Repeated here from iv. 21.7; for the parallel passages with their variants etc., see
the note to that verse. ' '
2. Track-knowing are ye, staying (rdmati), united, all-named; come
unto me, ye divine ones, with the gods ; to this stall, this seat ; sprinkle
us over with ghee.
Kamati is called by the comm. ^ gonHman ; to "united" he adds "with their calves,
or with other kine." LThe Anukr, seems to scan 8 + 7:10:8 + 8. J
76(80, 81). Against apacits and jftyanya: etc.
^1-4. Atharvan. — caturrcam. apacidbhdisajyadevatyam, dnustubham : i, virdj ; i, farosnih,
J, 6. Athanian. — diyrcam. jdydnydindraddivatam, trdistubham : ^, bhurig afiiistuhh.'\
Once more (and for the last time) we followed our first mss. and the <i«//t/J/*/r-cndings
in reckoning as one hymn what other mss., the Anukr., the comm., etc., and hence SPP.,
regard as two. The verses (except 2) are found scattered in different parts of Paipp. :
I in i. ; 3-5 (as two verses) in xix. ; 6 in xx. This, and not cither our division or .SPP's,
is in accordance with the sense of the verses : 1-2 concern the apacits^ 3-5 \)\t jdydnya ;
and 6 is wholly independent. The hymn (that is, doubtless, the first two verses Lcf. the
comm., p. 456* » J) is used Lwith vi. 83 (apacitas) or else vii. 74 (apacitdm) — sec introd.
to hymn 74 J by Kau^. (31. 16) in a remedial ceremony against apacits; and Ke^. adds
vs. I also to [^the citation apacitdm (which he takes to mean vii. 74. i and 2) made in
Kau<;. J 32. 8 ; for the use, according to Ke^., of vs. 2, see under hymn 74. The third verse
(the comm. says, vss. 3-5) appears also by itself in 32. 11, in a rite against rHjayaksma^
with a lute-string amulet. Of vss. 5-6 (= hymn 81) there is no appearance in Kau^. ;
but verse 6 is used by Vait. (16. 14) at the noon pressure of Soma.
Translated : Ludwig, p. 500 ; Zimmer, p. 377 (vss. 3-5) ; Bloomfield, JAOS. xiii.
p. ccxvii (vss. 1-2), p. ccxv (vss. 3-5) = PAOS. Oct 1887, or AJP. xi. 324, 320;
Henry, 30, 97 ; Griffith, 1.364 ; Bloomficld, SBE. xlii. 17, 559.
I. More deciduous (pi.) than the deciduous one, more non-existent
than the non-existent ones, more sapless than the sihu^ more dissolving
than salt.
Said, of course, of the apacits^ which arc distinctly mentioned in the next verse. The
translation implies the emendation of the second susrdsas to susrdsiards, suggested by
Bloomficld, as helping both sense and meter ; Henry alters instead to asisrasas. The d
at the beginning seems merely to strengthen the ablative force of the first susrdsas; or
wc might conjecture it to be an interjection of contempt or disgust. The comm. under-
stands dsusrasas as one word, the d having an intensive force ; he paraphrases by pnyd-
disravatta^lds^ as if sru were the root of the word. He reads ^ehos in c, and explains
it as vipraklrndvayavo Uyantam nihsdras ttilddirupak paddrthah^ which. seems a mere
guess ; Henry substitutes arasdt. The prefixion of a to s^hos would rectify the meter.
Ppp. gives no help in explaining the verse ; it reads, for a, b, ndmanfi asam svayath
srasaun asatlbhyo vasattard.
vii. 7^ HOOK VII. THK A TMARVA-VKUA-SAttHrrA. 442
2. The apacits thai arc on the ncrk, likewise those that arc alon;; the
sides, the (t/>iiii/s that arc* (m the pcritu'iim (?':'tjtUfMfi)t srlf-<lecidiinu!C.
Ill tiaiislatiiif; tlir ol>s( iirr T7/r/;y/////. tlur (oinin. is folltiucil : lir says 7 t\rsrna •J^,t/r
*/*it/\.tf/i iitff *ti I'ljtiHiA ^uhynpuuif^tih i I.iidwi^ ri.-n(lcis it "knuthel." i'paptxLfyAg
\\M |iar.i)i1ii.is(-s with upit/>iil\t' /*iiluiutffttpit iiptiial'.\f hhaz-ith.
3. lie that tTUshfs up thir brcasl-bone {? JlrUdstis), [that] descends to
the snlr (p)-- the \\\\n\r jth tff/vii have I last out, also whatever one is set
in tl)e top.
'1 hat is, np|>.ii('ntly, h.is InMonif sr.itr»! in [hr hrail (i»r tlic prdniincnir at the \..\\e
of lln* lUM-k ln-himl ?) : I'pP rrails ltr\,/f kutkuMii. 'I lie n^srurc ttilitivtitn is Iirre irir*.
lati'd .11 roidinir ti) lUnoiiilirhrs sii^;;csti<)n in AJl*. xi.3.*<)(ir JAOS. xv. p. xUii. I h«
f iiiMp.i. i-xplaiiis thr woul as f(ilh)\vs: /i///f/ //i* <f////^'i//;i///;if ; antikf bhttvam ta*t*i\i3T-:
. . . ti\t!u\,innpti\^titttni tfiiifisiifti : a woitliitss ^ucss ; I 'pp. rrads tti.'ilhhvtlf/t,^ \\\\\i \\ flitch!
iiuMii • palms' 01 •soil's.' I'oi /;/; ti\f,iui in c was < miirt tun <1 uit-tiMtint in the \\.
liiifi'v- - in)l sii« rcssfiilly. t\\\ ai < 'Mint of tin* ^nick-r t^i jilviiftya (in ). l.udMii; pri>|o«<«
tlir i}\t/t,tni, aii'l lilooinlii-lil lit -J <l'>t's the s.iiiif ; this Si-cins m i ■ ptaMi* (uhalr^rr V\k
rral tiiii;iii of i/r/.i.;/// ). arul tin' tianslation lolhiws it [lor tiir ** fKit fit///.'* Mv n«>tr
to xiii. I •; Ih'Iow.J '1 he t mnin.. howi'WT, riaiis /;/' /ni^ (/<''. fioiii the ritot Itr ■ - nir
/t,tt*itu) /ifii^ wliith SI']', ai < <-pts. tliiiikiuK tliat tiic (niiiiii. "has (hiul'tlrv«i prr«rr\r«l
the i^i-iniine iradini^ " ( ! ), ami In* rvi-ii admits it into his te.xt. 'I he loinni. furilicr reads
f*»,i\f ttilti ii) a. and<// fi>r <.r in d. lie tails kW^ j,iy,tftvtt n fii.uiyit It •//»!, and alMi rrcan'.^
it as identic al witti lUv jii \ t'mti nf 1 S., .md rpioif s tlic 'IS. ])assa;^e (ii. 3. 5') *iiat esplaiiis
t'i«' Miii;iii nf llie latti'i : r.// /.m-./''';j •• ': ;'.■,/.;/, lie st.it«s it thus: j.z 1,1 ji}it}iiii///aitt/Atnj
^fti/'fti'/t, 01 //// 1/// A /; 1//1 fii/w; ////■/'' I •;/".Vi/ ;J\i{fHi)nittti ; tliis nii^ht In* iiiitlcr&tfMNl a.s |HiinlinK
to a venereal disease ; K. ( onji'< luns j;«»ui. • [^ In fa* t, U's (.'oUation ^ives ialtXhkyam : W.
seems tu lake it as a slip foi -hhvi'iin. --- riirther, tliis is followed hy /'/<f-, nr>t tft<f-.J
4. Having win:;s, \\\m jriytinya Hies: it enters into a man; this is the
remedy of both, nf liie tiksita and of the sukstUa,
rpp. has in b ii/ -i^ati (i e. 1,/./ :•-) /fi//-, and larks c, d. The meaiiinf* of the »onU
Akutti and snlui/ti is \eiy donlitful ami nuieh disputed. They seem ini>st likrlv to l«e
two kimls of /,/ri///»'./. as tin- iiitiusinn of any other LinaladyJ here w«iuld l>c veiy harsh.
Yet it is also mm li to lur ipiestioiieil whetlnr the two half-verses Itelnni; ti^g^'ther. Thrir
disc oi<l.iM( (' of form is stt.iii;;i* ; one would ex]>cet an nntitliesis of alyiiii and sttlsiftM,t^
else of itl\.t/.i and su l:\ttttt. In f.i< t. the romm. reads sulsi/ii, anrl explains the two as
rneaniii'^ respertively i^.ithr i ii tii ,'i',i: ii (//tilf/tir ti/it//i \\it and iiti2lt}/a*it itz*ttfAi/dtj,t, or,
altei iiati\ fly, as ii/:/i': fiil;tn.r ^./'/'.r/; i/j.'«i.'r/7/i/^ and ^tirfrtit^ti/tiun : M*//:>}fiim imm/^m
n:/ii-t\tt*'i ^i'\,iy.i/.r/i. I.udwii^'s translation aec(»iils with the former cif these tno explana-
tions, /immer and rdnoniti* lil. on the other hami, would cniriid tn tituUtityti, lilnnm-
tii-M (pii>!iii:^ for iil^.tttt ftoin lioth tin* Kaueika and its Kimmentary and from the later
Hindu mriiit ine ; his lendiiini;, however, 'not caused by cutting* and ■ sharply cut.' is
uiiaM epl.iMe, siin e l^'in does imi mt-.m distiiu tivelv *iut.* but nn»rc nearly 'bruise*
riieie is no vaii.ition of reatlln^ in tlie niss. as rei;aiils the two words: and it sermt
extreintlv nnlik' Iv tl-.it. if tlie\ oik e a<'ie>;d. thev slniuld have become thus dissimilated
5 (81. n. We kn«»w. indeed, f^ ;./ir///iw, thine orij;in {j\1»a), whence.
( > ;</r////r.i. th-m ait bom [ ^/J^f.r|■J; Iiow shouMst thou smite there, in
wlmsi' li<uist' we pciloini Dbl.itinn'
443 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK VII. ~vii. 77
Ppp. has only c, d, as second half-verse to our 4 a, b, and reads tvath hanyHd yatra
kurydti vtahath havih, LWe had our d at vi. 5. 3 a. — The new decad begins here:
cf. p. 389.J
6 (81. 2). Daringly drink the soma in the mug, O Indra, being a
Vritra-slayer, O hero, in the contest for good things; at the midday
libation pour [it] down ; a d^pdt of wealth, assign wealth to us.
The verse is RV. vi. 47. 6 ; RV. has rayisihinas in d. Ppp. offers no variant.
77 (82). To the Haruts.
[Afi^'ras. — trcam. mantroktamaruddevatdkam, i. j-f. gdyatrl ; 2. tristubk ; 3'jogati,'\
The second and third verses are found also in PSiipp. xx. Used by K&U9. (48. 38),
next after hymn 31 etc., with laying on of fuel from an upright dry tree, in a witchcraft
rite. In Vait. (9. 2) it appears in the cdturtnUsya sacrifice, with noon offering to the
Maruts.
Translated: Ludwig, p. 373 ; Henry, 31, 99; Griffith, i. 366.
1. Ye much-heating {sdmtapand) ones, here [is] oblation; enjoy that,
ye Maruts; with favor to us, O foe-destroyers (}ri^ddas).
This verse and the next following are two successive RV. verses (in inverted order,
vii. 59. 9, 8), and are also found together (in the AV. order) in MS. (iv. 10. 5), and, with .
our verse 3 added, in TS. (iv. 3. 133-*). The other texts all h^vt yusmaka for asmika
in c. The warming winds after the cold season are probably intended by the sdthtapana
Maruts.
2. Whatever very inimical mortal, O Maruts, desires to smite us,
O good ones, across [our] intents, let that man put on the fetters of
hate ; smite ye him with the hottest heat.
7/'n/f cjttant\ in b, is an obscure and doubtful expression ; Henry renders ** without
our suspecting it." The RV. text (with which MS. agrees throughout) omits mdrtas
in a, inserting abhl after fnarutas ; in c, it has sd mucfsta for muficatdm sd^ and, in d,
hdnmand for tdpasd, TS. makes marutas and vasavas exchange places in a and b,
reads in b satyani (for citiani) and jighdnsdf, and has in c pi^am prdti sd mucfsta.
I*pp. has, for c, d, (asmiti tdn pd^dn prati mufkcata yilyam tapisthena tapasdm a^xnnd
<^a>n. S P P. reads, in c, d, sds tdp-^ with half his authorities ; we have noted no such reading
in ours, and it appears to be unparalleled elsewhere. The verse (11 + 12:10+11= 44)
is irregular, but sums up as tristubh,
3. The Maruts, of the year, well-singing, wide-dwelling, troop-attended,
humane {mdnusa) — let them release from us the fetters of sin, they the
much-heating, jovial, reveling.
TS., in b, accents uruksdyds and reads minusesu (which is better) ; in c it combines
t} *smdt and reads dithasas (for inasas) ; in d it has madiris (for matsaris), Ppp. gives,
in c, pd^dft prati vtuhcdtitu sarvdn. The comm. explains samvatsarlnds by varscvarse
prddurbhavisyantah. This ^*jagatl^^ is half tristubk.
vii. ;S IU)()K VII. TIIK ATIIAKVA-VICDA-SAMHITA. 444
78(83). To Agni : in favor of some one.
rniiiid nisii ill l*.iip|i. xx. I'snl in K.uk; (J-. 3) with I'l nmi other liymns ol this
Ixttik, ill n rriiirili.il litr : sir tiinlcr z*). Also \s. 2 liy itstlf (2. 41). viith x.6. 35, as
siilistituir fnr \ii. 1. i«) 21, with l.ixin^ on of furl, iti thr pafvan ^.uiifurs; aiu! in the
i'liutf.in/tit (i.^r-.r), with iilliLT vrisi-s. with strcMiiij; (of itnhn)\ \\% srcond p4*!a it
ftiitlif-r tiMMiii as fust p.iit of n vciso };ivrn in full in 3. I. In \'.iit. (4 1 1 ) it accom-
paiiirs. wiih nthrr vrisrs. thr iint\ini; of thr s.irrifirrr's wifr in tin* /ii/;.fw satrihcr.
'I'l.msl.itrd : Ilrniy. 31, 9**; (Iritiith, i. 3'>^t.
1. I loosen off Ihy strap, off tliy haiiicss, off thy halter; be thou just
here, unfailing, O A^ni.
TS. (i. f». 4 -) and MS. (i. 4. 1 ) have a vrise corresjinndint; to the first part of this and
the sirrond half of the nr\t folinwin;; vorsc : the first half reads thus: vi U myMmJmt
nt^itftti (MS. -mlm) 7-/ nt^ittin 7'/ yt'U'/ni ytini /"iinnff/tinJHi {^\S. jrifJt/rJmt ^^r-)
|_('f. M* )S. i. 11.23, and p. i 55. | l*p|^- ^'omhiiirs itjtt^fr ^tihi in c. '1 he comm. i^ives a
(huiMi* rxpl.ination, rr;:ardin;^ the vcrsr as addicsscd cither to Af;ni or to one vrxrd
with <lisraso : ami he ad<ls at the end tliat thr s.k rttircr's wife may also 1>e regarded as
addressed. The eommentary to TS. views the stieks of pafuihi as intended by the
harness etc.
2. Thcc, 0 Agni, maintaininp; dominion.s for this man, I harness (yuj)
with the incantation of the ^ods; shine thou unto us here excellent prop-
erty ; niaye'^t thou proclaim this man as obIation-{;ivcr among the deities.
The srron<l half vcrse is ^ivrn cpiitr tlitferrntly Ky TS. and MS. (as al>nvr) : thus,
if/ittft,hi ttsinti\u (M.S. in//:,f/'iniim) tftii'rhitith yJt ni (MS. tirdittif V/il ) hhadtdm /»J
no (M.S. ///if) htutvid f*/ti'ii;itMian (MS. -tfam) tifVtUt'iiu. I'pi^* makes a and b charge
placrs. The/ii</ii text an.ilw.es in c i//ifr///J .- i/'J, hut pruhalily the original value was
-7'///i2///, and this the ti .msl.ition assuiiies.
79(84). To Amikvdsyfl (night or goddess of new moon).
The first verse is found in I'.'iipp. xx., the second and third in IViipp. i. Used hr
K.hk;. {>.**) in the /^<i/ ;-(/;# saeiihie on the day of new monn ; also {^t). it}) with hrmns
17 vU . (SIX under I 7 ). for x.irinus iicnefits. It has in V.'iit. (I. if*) an otTice similar to
tiiat piisirilied hy K.'iiii;. 5.''.
'I lansl.iti'cl : Meni\, 32, loo: (iiil'tith, i.3'17.
I. W'liat pnition (/'//«/ jj-i^/Z/iY/O the j;o<ls made for thee, O Amavfisy.i,
(1 Willi 111; t«»:;cth('r with mii;lit, ihcrcwiili fill our offering, O thou of all
chniii* thini^s ; assij;n tn ii<. O foitunate one, wealth rich in heroes.
'I ill* vrisr fti • tns in 'I S. (iii ;. I ' ). witli J./itif/mt for tUfftittn in a, and |_rectif)inc
th'' inrt'-r j .; t>ii A .'.; in c. I'p;*. iMruMrii-s </.*:.? 'Iffi7,tfi in a, and has lamraa^JH/at
in b. .i:id v.; /".'.*"; r at I't-^inniii:^ nf c. .Vii/// r-ifr plays U)Hin tlie tc]uivalent umJ-Ttit,
wliii li i:ivi-. n.rnr tii tin- (\.\\ and its i^mMi-ss The verse h.is no yii;'*/// character. J^We
Ij.I'I ihr se. n::<\ ii.df m isr .il'tt\e at 2.?. 4 C. d J
445 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK VII. -vii. 8o
2. I myself am Amavasya ; on me, in me dwell these well-doers ; in me
came together all, of both classes, the gods and the sddhyds, with Indra
as chief {jyi^stha).
The Petersburg Lexicon ♦ suggests the plausible emendation of mAm i to ami. at
beginning of b : if it is not rather a md vasanii intended as a play on amdvUsyh. For the
sddhyas^ see note to vii. 5. 1. The Anukr. overlooks the irregularity of a. '[vi. 832. J
3. The night hath come, assembler of good things, causing sustenance,
prosperity, [and] good to enter in ; we would worship Amavasya with
oblation ; yielding (duJi) sustenance with milk is she come to us.
TS. has (iii. 5. i ») a verse quite accordant with this in general meaning, but too differ-
ent in detail to be called the same ; it reads nM<^anl samgdmanJ vAsunUm vf^vil nlpaiii
vAsuny dTc^dyatitl : sahasraposdm subhAgd rArdnil si na i *gan vArcasd samvidHna,
Ppp. reads, in b, vt\vam for irjatn ; and, in d, vasAnd (for duhdttd) and nd **gadt.
The comm., and some of the mss., end the hymn here, carrying over our vs. 4 to the
following hymn ; our division agrees with the sense, the Anukr., and other of the mss. ;
and Srr. accepts the same. |_The decad ends here : cf. p. 389. J
4. O Amavasya, no other than thou, encompassing, gave birth to all
these forms ; what desiring we make libation to thee, be that ours ; may
we be lords of wealth.
This is, with alteration of the first word only, a repetition in advance of 80.3. For
the parallels etc., see under that verse.
80(85). To the night or goddess of full moon (paurnamasi).
\^Atharvati, — caturrcam. fdurtuimasam : ^. prdjdpatyd. trdistubham : 2. anustubh^
The first and fourth verses are found also in Pciipp. i. The hymn is used in the same
manner as the preceding one (Kau^. 5. 5; V&it i. 16), but on full-moon day; it also
appears (Kau^. 59. 19) with hymn 17 etc. For the separate use of vs. 3, see under that
verse.
Translated : Henry, 32, loi ; Griffith, 1. 367. See also Zimmer, p. 365 (vss. 1-2).
1. Full behind, also full in front, up from the middle hath she of the
full moon been victorious ; in her, dwelling together with the gods,
with greatness, may we revel together with food (//) on the back of the
firmament.
The first half- verse is met with in TS. (iii. 5. 1 *) and TB. (iii. 1. 1 «*), without variant ;
tlie second half- verse reads thus : tdsydm devi AdJti samvAsania nttami nika ihA tudda-
yantdm, Ppp., in b, ^Mis pdurnamdsi before madhyatas [_and ends b with ttj jigdya\,
2. We sacrifice to the vigorous bull of the full moon ; let him give us
unexhausted unfailing wealth.
The first half-verse occurs in TB. (iii. 7. 5*^) and ApQS. (ii. 20. 5), both of which
read rsabhAm and ptlrtiAmdsam ; their second half-verse reads thus: sd no doha/dm
stnnryam rdyAspAsam sahasri$ta$n. The comm. reads dadhdtu in c.
vii. 80- nooK VII. TIM-: ATHAKVA-VKUA-SAMHIT/V 44<'
3. () rrajapati, no other th«in thou, encompassing^, gave birth to all
these forms; what desiring \vc make libation to thee, be that ours; may
wc be Inids <»f wealtii.
LCf. vii. 7'). I J '1 liis verse is l<\'. x. 121. 10, anil is n-pratci! in various nthrr collec-
tions : \S. (X. 2ortaI ). IS. (is. 14* ct al.), TH. (ii.S. i' ti al.). MS. (ii. 6. 12; iv. 14 n.
MM. (ii. 5.0). L< f. Ml*, ii. 22. igj KV. rc.nls. fiir b, rt^r*} j*Hiini f^ihi ti hahJkikza .
and TS.'Ih.MM. a.nrrc wilij it tlii(Mi;;1i(iut ; VS. cliffris hy Rixiii'.:. ^*itl» «>iir Ipxl, rAf^mt :
MS. is inoic indcpeiHlciit. having; in the set ond ornirrrnf r ntihi tvAt tAni (for irJ tz-dj
tfitni) in a. and in lititli ex i tirrcnccs Vth/ftth' I'thh {Un Vtf/Jttlffttis U) in C. *Ihr Trrw it
v.iiioiisly rinpliiycd liy the stttftis : in K.'mk; , in thr f'xifi'xtu satriruc (5.9)1 l>y adflitioa
to iv.3<); and hy .spi-f i:il nu-iitinn, lu-sidc vs. I. with li. 17 rtc. (59. 19: ftcc under IJt;
while it is ad<lerl Ny a S(hiO. to the rerenmny of .k irptanre (5'*. 3, note) t*{ a fttaff I-5
tlie \'eilif student: in \'.'iit (1.3) as an intro(!iii inry forniuLi jiresirilfrd hy Vutan
K.'iiirik.i |_( f. n«ite to K.itu;. l.^'J; also (2.12). in the /rz/r-ii/i sacritier, with an offrnnK
of fat to I'r.ij.'ipati : ami it is to lu* had in niiii<l (7. 12) as accompanying an otferinj^ in
the « It,'// /7/i >//</. 'i'ht* I omm. ipioti-s it fuitiier lium the Naksaira Kalpa (iB). as us«d in
a nitt/iJi^ilftfi < .dieil matutt^tinl.
4. She of the full moon \v:is the first worshipful one in the depths <.')
of days, of nij;hts. They who, () worshipful one, {^ratify {ardhtiya-) thcc
with offriin<;s, thf>se well-docis are entered into thy t'limament.
'the tiansl.ition ini]ilirs in d tin* ic.uhn:; /r*. i^ivcn in our eriition on the authority of
pait of our niss. ( Pip T.M.'i.K.') .uwl .is dcriilrdiv l>«'tt r snitin;; the reipiircments of the
srnsr llh.m //J (a tondiinatinn of #///;/ // is h.iii!l\ pussitile) ; .SPl'. reatls //'. viilh the
l^n-.U niajoiity of liis authoijtii's. i'pP '''''^ ''^'' (•"««/''.*" f*>r 1///)- in b. and, in d, nAk^m
stikftJ) pxxwttih. 'I he louini. ;^ivrs tt'ttivitfifi in C. lie expl.iins a/:^itf rtfftlnt to mean
eitin*! tti.*t ttit iit!t\*i :*nfti:t:.'i':i'yu i, '/::it>rt/;>t: /* -h i*i iNr ///;»iii./.--,///ii^i .>^/;ft haziiiu
tiius ;ikin in nir.min;.; w illw//;/ •///.; . and tiiis is pediaps ii:;ht. *|_I fintl no note of I* .M J
81 (86). To the sun and moon.
[^I'aitly prose — 4 and 5. J Wanting in Pa i pp. '1 he veises of this hymn are hv iXloom-
fieh) leL^.iided as intended hy tlie name r/i/'^/Z/ri v. and so fiirei.ted by Kau^. (24. I ft) to lie
used [to acninipany tiie \i of ship of the «/.//{<? (sr-e \s. 3 and note) J; Ke^. al»o sa%s that
sninr lUTitt'T thr hynui at nrw nionn on t'ltst si^lit of tlir tniM>n. fur the sake of pros|)eriti .
and this serins to |ir the tim- x.duf of the hymn ; I ait the (innin. d^ies not at knowledce it
'! hi' ('i;ii:n. |<-L:.ircls \ss. 1 .iiitt 2 :is inti'ndcd to If rpmted at Kau<;. 7v'*. in the nuptial
( (■[(•m't'.i'-s, wiiii \iv. 1.1. iMit tlif \eisi- intendiMl must In* rather xiv I. 23. as marked in
t'lc (-•litiit'i. t ill* (omm. furtliff i|Ui)ti-s a us(> of vs<:. 3 (1 from the Naks.itra Kalpa (lO.
ill .1 pl.ri- I s.j« lirii •■, witii an oMrimv; to Mrn ury ('■/#./•*../>
1 laMsi.iii- 1 ; Ilrniv. U. i"i : <iiiinl!j. i. V'**- — * f. Ililhluandl. />./. .I/r//itf/., i 102-3.
I. Ihc^^e two in<»ve on one* aft«T the other by nia^ic {ma\ii\ \ two play-
in:; vo'.iiil; «»ii'-^ r(.''. ;/). thry ^o alnnit lh<* s<m ; the one liM)ks abroad u|K)n
.ill belli L;>i ; th'»u, the othei. disptivsin;; tli*' seasons ait born new.
447 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK VII. -vii. 8l
Said of the sun and mooq. This and the next following verse are RV. x. 85. 18, 19,
and are also found in MS. iv. 12. 2; this one, further, in TB. ii. 7.12* (repeated in
ii. 8. 93) : all read adhvardm (for *rnavdm) at end of b ; they have, for c, vi^t'dny anyd
bhuvand *bhi- (but MS. vi-) cdste^ and, at end of A^jdyaU (the comm. also hzs j'dyaU)
fihtah ; and TH. combines riiin an-. Repeated below as xiv. 1. 23 and (a, b, c) xiii. 2. 1 1
|_on the latter verse Henry has an elaborate comment, L£s Hymnes Rohitas^ p. 38-40 J.
|_As for the thrice occurring haplography, vi^vUnyd for vi^vdnyanyd^ cf. iv. 5. 5, note. J
Too irregular (11 + 12:9+12 = 44) to be passed simply as trisfubh. \T\\t other texts
suggest the true rectification of the meter of cj
2. Ever new art thou, being born ; sign (kctii) of the clays, thou goest
to the apex {dgra) of the dawns ; thou disposcst their share to the gods
as thou comest ; thou stretchest out, O moon, a long life-time.
In RV. and MS. (as above), and TS. ii. 4. 14', the four verbs are in the third per-
son, and we have candrdmds nom. in d. Further, TS. reads dgre at end of b, and
tirati in d. The application of b to the moon is obscure. The absence of any allusion
to the asterisms is not without significance. LOver " stretchest " W. interlines ** extend-
cst."J LVss. 1-2 are repeated below as xiv. i. 23-24. J
3. O stem of soma, lord of fighters! not-deficient verily art thou by
name ; make me, O first-sight (dar^d), not-deficient, both by progeny and
by riches.
The dar(id is the slender crescent of the new moon when first visible, and here com-
pared with one of the stems or sprouts from which the soma is pressed, and which
swell up when wetted, as the crescent grows. The identification of the moon and soma
underlies the comparison. The comm. first understands the planet Mercury (called,
among other names, somaputra * son of the moon *) to be addressed, and explains the
verse on that basis, and then gives a second full explanation on the supposition that the
address is to the moon itself.
4. First sight art thou, worth seeing art thou ; complete at point art
thou, complete at end ; complete at point, complete at end may I be, by
kine, by horses, by progeny, by cattle, by houses, by riches.
L Prose. J Some mss. (including our O.) combine dar^atd 'si. The //i/^-di vision
sdmoantah is prescribed by Prat. iv. 38.
5. He who hateth us, whom we hate — with his breath do thou fill
thyself up ; may we fill ourselves up with kine, with horses, with progeny,
with cattle, with houses, with riches.
L Prose. J The mss. read in c Pyd^islmahi^ which SPP. accordingly adopts in his
text, although it is an obvious and palpable misreading for PydsisUtiahi (which the
comm. gives); pydsislmahi is found in many texts (VS.TA.Q(^\S.Q'(J.S.II(J.S.), hut also
pydyisJtnahi (as /j-aorist from the secondary root-form Py&y) in Ap(JS. (iii.4. C). It
is by an error that our printed text has Pydyis- Linstead oi Pydsis- : see Gram. § 914 bj.
These two prose ** verses " arc very ill described by the Anukr.
•
6. The stem which the gods fill up, which, unexhausted,' they feed
upon unexhausted — therewith let Indra, Varuna, Brihaspati, shepherds
of existence, fill us up.
vii. 8l- HOOK VII. Tin: ATnARVA-Vi:i>A-SAMniTA. 44$
'llic vcisc is foiiiitl also in 'IS. (ii. 4. 14'). MS. (iv. 9. 27: 12. 2), <,'<,*S. (v. R 4 V in «.
all rc.ul ih/Uvtis, thus rcitifyiiiK the meter, ami MS. has ^rlZ/M }>eforc it, and aivs >•
bi'l^iiinin^ oi b, with a corrrl.itivc nuf at l>rKinninK cif c: in b, all rn«l with Jltif.ttak
pihtiHtiy and MS.<^'(,"S. havr Ak\ttim hvUnr it; in c. 'IS.rrS. give fr«» fAjd for atmAn
intittih, '1 lie late idea of (lie suhsistrncc of tlic K(mIs ti|Kin the moon is to be srrn in
the vcisr. The Anukr. seems to halance deficient a with redundant C-
With this hymn ends the seventh anttvtyka^ of 8 (or <;) hymns and 31 venrs : the
rpioted Anukr. s:iys of the verses t^'in^ad ektk at saptanuth ; and, nf the h)innt. i*tptA-
///#}?' |_is this to he joined with the colophon of the fifth anuvtlJtii^p. 428 } thus, /<f Aid jw^-
JrZ/ /i/ fftil J • J <7 s/d U .
82 (87). Praise and prayer to AgnL
[ ( \1m ftti ta ( Tif nif,ttkJm ,th). — / '/^i '' '" • <'.C " It'' "^ ■ '' *tt*tubham : j. lai ummati fr kaii ;
j/'.O'" 1
Of this liymn« verses 2 and 6 arc found in rfiipp. xx., and verse 3 in iii. It is used m
Kau<;. (><;.!$). witii ii.6, in a lite for sik cess ; and also (59. 19), with hymn I 7 etc. .
sec under 17; fuitliei, vss. 2 tt, in tlic upauayana ceremony (57.21). accompany the
l.iyiiii; (if tivr pieces of fuel in lenewiiij; a Inst liic*; aii<l tlie comm. ciuotes it from the
Naksatr.i Kalpa (17-t')) in various fnahA^^nti rrrrnionies. Vait. (2919) einpl>«%s
it (or vs. I ?) in the ttt^itunytinn, afti r la\inK on fuel with vii. 15; further ($ !'>>
vs. J. in tlie tti^nythi/tiya teremoiiy, while Mowing; the tire with one's lirralh : and \et
a^.iin (2. 7) vs. o, in tiie pttrvan sac li lire, while ladling; out the saLiilicial butter. *|,Kc^ .
P- 35')'* ; <-omni., p. 4.S4 end. J
'I'lansl.ited: I.udwif^, p. 42S ; Henry. 34, 102 ; Ciiifnth, i. 3^11^.
1. Sinjj {arc) yc jjood j>r.iisc unto the cnnlcsl for kinc ; put yc in us
excellent pcsscssion.s ; lead ye this sacrifice of ours unto the gods; let
streams of f;hee purify themselves sweetly.
The verse is foinid also as KV. iv. 5S. 10 and V.S. xvii. c^S. Iloth read in a arsaU
(whirli is Iiettei), and at the en«l /ii 7'*i'///'. 'Ilie comm. understands devaUU in c lie
regards the waters or the kine as addressed, and explains a in several different W4\s.
2. I seize in mc Af;ni at first, together with dominion, splendor*
stren|;th ; in me I put proj;eny, in me lifetime, — hail! — in me Agni.
*I he first and tliiid pfidas are rear! in T.S. v 7.9', and the first three in MS. i 6 I.
with sundry vaiiniits: hoih put ^thu^'iw.i in A In'fore <f^*'i', and MS. rertific4 the meter
hy iiiseitinij iihAm between the two; fur b. MS. hns salul prajAyA ^'ilrntjj dMJnen^
( I S. entirely dilfi-reiit, f,}\,h /.'i 7:,r etf ) ; in c, MS. puts tuitrAttt in place of ffajlm.
and. fcii i/i ;#i. MS. ;^ives f.1y,ts niid T.S. ruin it f (d is differ ent in rath text). I'pp rcafU
at the eiul i/j,"'/'- H»<^ meter (S nf. 1 1 ; 1 1 .f 6 = 3^1) is imperfectly descrilied by the
Anukr.
V Just here, () A^ni. do thou maintain wealth; let not the down-
putters, with previous intents, put thee down; by dominion, O Agni, be
it of r.isy coiitioj fi)r thee; Kt thine attendant increase, not laid low.
The Vf ise i)(( urs also in \'.S. (xxvii.4), TS. (iv. I. 7*). MS. (ii. 12. >)i "'' ha»e the
better re.idini^' k^iitthn at l»r'.^innii'.:j nf c: anil, for the ditTirult ami proliably rrroiieo**
puf:\i.i//,U uf b. \S.'1S. re.id pUtvttJtas, and MS. purrxUittAn (the editor noCinf
449 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK VII. -vil 83
that K. and Kap. S. read with VS.). The word, in whatever form, probably refers to
other worshipers who get the start of us and outdo our Agni by their own; the comm.
says : asmattah ptlrvath tvadvisayamanaskSh or tvadvisayaydgakaranamanasah.
All the pada-m^^. read at the end dnih-strtah^ and this is required by Prat. ii. 86 ; but
SPP. alters to Ani-strtah — which, to be sure, better suits the sense. The KW^pada-
text also has (viii. 33. 9) dnih-strtah ; TS. (and by inference MS., as the editor reports
nothing), dnistrtahy unchanged. The verse in Ppp. stands in the middle of our hymn
ii.6 (between vss.3 ^^^ 4)) [.^nd it is important to remember that its position in the
Yajus texts, VS.TS.MS., is similar: see note to ii. 6. 3J. Ppp. reads dabhan for ni
kran in b, and ksatram Land sftyamam \ in c. 'Y\\\% jagatl has one tristubh pada.
4. Agni hath looked after the apex of the dawns, after the days, [he]
first, Jatavedas, a sun, after the dawns, after the rays, after hcaven-and-
earth he entered.
Aftu ' after * seems here to have a distributive force : Agni is ever present to meet
the first dawn etc. with his brightness ; or it is the opposite of prati in vs. 5 : anu
*from behind,' as praii * from in front* The verse is found as VS. xi. 17, and in TS.
iv. i. 2', TB. 1.2. I >3, and MS. i. 8. 9. All these have in c dnu siryasya puruirA ca
ra^min (an easier and better reading), and, at the end, VS. MS. give a taiantha^ and
TS.TB. a tatilna. This verse and the next are repeated as xviii. 1. 27, 28.
5. Agni hath looked forth to meet the apex of the dawns, to meet the
(lays, [he] first, Jatavedas, and to meet the rays of the sun in many
places ; to meet heaven-and-carth he stretched out.
A variation of the preceding verse, perhaps suggested by RV\ iv. 13. i a, which is
identical with its first pada ; its second half agrees much more closely with the version
of the other texts than does 4 c, d. The comm. is still more faithful to that version, by
giving the (preferable) reading ///rw/r J in c
6. Ghee for thee, Agni, in the heavenly station ; with ghee Manu
kindleth thee today ; let the goddesses thy kin (;wr///) bring thee ghee ;
ghee to thee let the kine milk, O Agni.
Ppp. reads dnhrate in d. The comm. gives naptryas in c, and declares it to mean
the waters ; it is more probably the daughters of tlie sky in general.
83 (88). For release from Varuna's fetters.
\QHttah^epa. — catnrrcam. vdrunam. dttustubham : 2, pathydpahkti ; j^ 4, tristubh
(4. brAa/tgarbkd).]
The first two verses are found in Paipp. xx. The hymn (the whole, says the comm.)
is, according to Kauq. (32. 14), to be repeated in a remedial rite for dropsy, in a hut
amid flowing waters ; also (127. 4) all the verses in a sacrifice to Varuna, after iv. 16.3,
in case of the portent of obscuration of the seven rsis. Vait (10. 22) has vs. i ♦ at the
end of the pa(^ubaitdha^ when the victim's heart has been set upon a spit ; and vs. 3 in the
m^tncaytina (28. 17), on loosening the cords by which the fire^ish has been carried.
The comm. quotes the hymn from Naksatra Kalpa (14), with an offeriog to Varuna in
a vta/nl^tlnii for portents. ♦[_ According to Garbc, tlie whole hymn. J
Translated: Henry, 35, 104; Griffith, i. 370; Bloomfield, 12,562.
vii. 83- IJOOK VII. Tin: ATHARVA-VKDA-SAMHITA. 45©
1. Ill the waters, () kinp: Varuna, is built for tlicc a f;nlclcn house;
thence Id the kinj; ol firm courses release all bonds (tMntitM).
All tlir :ititlifiritirs Ikivi* w://i,ix at cud nf b. ami SIT. .I'lmits iliis in liii trtt.
nltlion^li it is a p.iIiuMc inisi railing f<ir mitAs \j{. Rfith, /I)M(t. xlviii. 107 J. whKh it
j»ivi'n |jy I'pp. and hy A(,'S. in ihi* < nirrspDiKliiij; vrrsc (iii.^i. 24) ; mir lixl lia& h\ emen-
dation rri/,h ; thoronim. makes for //i////rrr tlu* forrrd intrrpiftation iinttft\tMsAtfiiJranwsk
ftttti'utm tiu,if>ht);titnyo '.•*}. Our trxl also m:ikL's llic clr.irly call'd I»»r cmciidjtiun ol
dhAtKilui to iiamt^ni [^KotYi, I.e., p. loSJ in d (tlic translation is made accuidini;!) ).
anrl of tf/hifi/ftn t//itlmfttis in 2 a to tiii \ yet not ctnly all W. author iticii, hut alwj
rpp. and A<,'.S., air opposed ti> it in Imtli vcrsis anrl a wlinlr .srrirs of tt-xls in \* r .
it is not widioiit siiiiii imt uason, tlifn, tli.it STP. ictains 1///1I-, altliou{*ti me can onlv
wondtT at tlir wide spnad ruriiiplion of the text. '1 he (onini. rxpljins dktkmAnt
miilitatu hy sthiiiititty ti^nttitfivinti t\ii/,ihi. '1 lie .A^.'S. version i>f tlic ver»e reaiit .
tivipf ;#?//>!» ''tifufta^yii \^t lio mtto hit,itiya\tih : ui no dhrtavrato ft}j\} ti/!tlftiH**tiAdmma
ifui muiinitH. PpP* ^'*^^ '^^ ^ ''^^* A(,'S. : in d it ic.ids tilu\mA vi no tua.
2. I'Vom every bond, O kin;;, here, () Variina, release us ; if "O waters,
inviolable ones!" if "() Vaiiina!" we have saiil, from that, O Varuna,
release us.
'Ihe wluile verse is foiMi-l in many oilu-r texts: VS. vi. 22 b, C: T.S. i. 3 ||«: MS.
i. 2. iS: Ars. iii.<.. 2.j: rc;s. \iii. 12.11 ; I.rS. \.\.U\ '\\\. ii.r,. r,i ami VS. XV 1^
have p.'id.is c-e : |_and MdS., ii. 1 . 1 1, has the puitika : »f. p. I ;i. undt-r dhs\tnuo^ A!!.
iM< liidini^ also Ppp-, as noted altiivr. he;;in with dhfimnodfulmnah (so SIT. : the coirm.
explains l»y s*ttitis9ftt}if n\i^ii\//ti}/i,i/ : our text emends to «/«/-: |_M:e note to \% ' J) i
V.S.l,'<,"S.I.rS. have (in A b) ti'i/oftt ttUo : all, as also I'pp., have //•» fnntlra in Loth b
and e; \'S. un.ir< (»unialily ;^ives J/i/tt instead of <r/#if in c (ImiI it has tf/iii in x%. 18);
'IS. MS. 'in .irrent tirhnxtls and. with L<'.S., omit the /// after it: for !•/</ tkttmd in
d, VS.TS.TIJ.A(,S.(;rS.!-rS. rea.l ^.f/J/z/./Zi^' (printed r.n-.I , I.(,S ). while MS. ha*
(ii/i;wi///ii/. The arrent tti^hny^x (as num.) and tlie readint; vAfun.i {\w: ) are incon-
sistent, and ifi^'/ntytis of 'IS. etc seems to he preferable ; but all the AV. fada ri«4
(except a single one of SIT's) re.id 7'if/////f//r, though all the samAt/ilmssi. without
exrej>tion (ondiinc :'if////// Vi. Our translatirm implies Jj^Anyds (or if ^*Airr<ii ) ; the
romm. s.i\s /;/* o:;httut/i. I'.idas c. d aie rejicated Ixdow as xix. 44.9 A. b: they relate
doubtless to adjuratitms made in snppoit of what is false. |_The Anukr. seems to sanc-
tion our pron<}unt in^ tiie f}w/r//rA/ as six syllaliles.J
3. Loosen iiji the uppermost fetter from us, O Vaiuna, [loosen] down
the lowest, off the midmost; then may we, O Atiitya, in thy sphere
{rnt/ti), be guiltless unto Aiiili.
'I he MTsi* is UV. i. 24. 15, ami foun<l also as VS. xii. 12, and in T.S. (i. 5. 1 1 1 cl al ).
MS (i. 2. iS ft al ). SV.i. 5S'> (.N.ii;;ey.i appcmlix 1.4), anil MM. (i 7. loV AH
.i^rei' in it .I'Iiiil; ti,*':.} at lH';;inninL; of c instead i>f our iff///. I (the cnmm. has atAit), and
S\'. and MI*, finilier put :ity,ifft a!t« r -9*1// in c. while .SV. artenls attifji^ihitt in 4.
[Knaui'i, Imli X to .M<i.S., p. 14S. < ites many ociuiicnces of the verse. J |_Kepeated
l>elow as x\ ill. 4. fii) J
.J. KeK'aso from us, (> Vaiiiin, all fetters, that arc uppermost, lowes^t.
tiuil are Vanin;rs ; remove from us evil-tlreaming [and] difTicuIty ; then
m.iv we ijo to I lie world (»f the weIl'!«M)e.
45' TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK VII. -vii. 84
Tiic last three padas are identical with those of vi. 121. i, al)ove. Our text ought
to read in c, as there, nift S7f-. LPronounce, as there, nis suvdsmdt.\ There is no
brhail element in the verse.
84 (89). To Agni: and to Indra.
\^Bhrgit. — trcatn. dindram: i.dgtieyi. trdistubham : M.jagatt.'\
Only tlie first verse is found in Paipp., in iii. For the use by Kau^. and V5it. (not
of vs. I), see under vss. 2, 3.
Translated : Henry, 35, 105 ; Griffith, i. 371.
1. O Agni, shine thou here unassailable, Jatavedas, immortal, wide-
ruling (yinij), bearing dominion ; releasing all diseases by humane, pro-
pitious [aids], do thou protect round about today our household.
The comm. supplies iitibhis in c, d, and the translation given follows his lead. The
verse is found also as VS. xxvii. 7, and in TS. iv. i . 73 and MS. ii. 1 2. 5 ; MS. makes c easy
by reading manusdndm (it also has vl for vffvds)^ and VS.TS. by reading tnanusfr
bhiydh. MS.VS. give after this ^vibhis ; and VS.TS. have A^ds for dmlvds in c
All read dnistrtas (Ppp. anistatas) for dmartyas in a, and vrdhi for gdyam at the
end (Ppp. gfiydUi). Ppp. has, in c, d, manusyebhyah ^ivebhir. All the texts thus
relieve in various ways the difficulties and awkwardnesses of the second half-verse.
We should expect here a separation of the hymn into two, as the remaining verses are
addressed to Indra; but no ms. or other authority so divides.
2. O Indra, unto dominion, [unto] pleasant force, wast thou born, thou
bull of men (carsanl) ; thou didst push away the inimical people ; thou
didst make wide room for the gods.
This verse and the next are two verses, connected (but in inverted order), in RV.
(x. I So. 3, 2), found also in TS. i. 6. 1 24. Both these read in c amitraydntam^ their only
variant in this verse. In d carsanlnam is most naturally made dependent on vrsabha^
although, as such, it ought to be without accent; Henry takes it as governed by the
nouns in a. The verse (doubtless with vs. 3) is used by Kiiu^. (17.31) in the consecra-
tion of a king LWeber, Rdjasfiyay p. I42j,^and (140. 17) in the indratnahotsava^ with
libation to Indra, and service of Brahmans. [^RV.TS. accent carsanlnam and all of
W's and SPP's mss. seem to do so. Perhaps, in spite of W's version, we have no right
to correct our text by deleting the accent ; but the accent can hardly be aught else than
an old blundcr.J
3. Like a fearful wild beast, wandering, mountain-staying, from dis-
tant distance may he come hither; sharpening, O Indra, [thy] missile
(}srkd)y [thy] keen rim, smite away the foes, push away the scorncrs.
The first half-verse was read above as 26. 2 b, c The verse is RV. x. 180. 2, TS.
i. 6. 124 (as noted under the preceding verse), and also SV. ii. 1223, MS. iv. 12.3, VS.
xviii. 71 ; their only variant is Vi\ jagamydt in b, for which TS. has jagdmd^ and all the
rest jaganthd. The comm. takes srka as an adj., = sarana^Ua. \Qi, Knaucr's Index
to M(;s., p. 1 53. J LFor use by Kau^., sec under vs. 2.J VSit (29.5) uses the verse
in the agnicayana^ in the covering of the first layers.
vii. «S5- HOOK VII. Till-: ATIIAKVA -VKDA-SAMIIITA. 45*
85(90;. Invocation of T&rkshya.
Not foiiinl in r.iij)]!. I'si-il in Kam;. ( 5^ 14). with S^i an<! 117, in a rite for urnrril
welfare, and liy tlu: st liol. (note to 137.4) in making a saLiiticial hearth fi>r the J/ta-
titntni ; it is also letkiHK'fl (noti* ti> 2v 3'i) to tiu* .tTtt.i/y*tyitnii i^ttna.
'I'ranslatnl : llrnry, 3^1, 105; (iiillitli, i. 372. — Sec also K«)V, K/. xxxiv. 2OS.
I. \Vc wt)iiKl fain call lulhcr for ['>iir] welfare Tarkshya, this vigorous.
(;u(I-(]uickciu'(!, powciful ovctcoiirt of chariots, [^'1 arkshya.J having uii-
injiircil tiics, fi^ht-coiuiuciin^, swift.
The vrrse is KV. x.i;S. i ami SV.i.332. For nur .f#f//i»;vf«#jw/. in b, RV. rtaui%
Siihtizulfiiiffi and S\'. Sit/iorii/i,7f/i ; lN)th have ///<i//ff/<f//i (undiviried in RV, fatia-trW)
ill c instead of -t'lj/w (p. tly/w); an*\, in d, tlie I\V.//i//4r-t(*xt undrrstands iAd ai »im|»lT
i7fi/, onis as t/iii.ii. The counn. also leads pttanAjtim^ but explains it as conUunir.g
either tlie nM)t aj ux ji.
86(91). Invocation of Indra.
Wantin;; in raipp. rullows in its applications ilosely ti* a: of 85 (Kau^. 59. 14, aiid
notes to 137.4 an<l 25.3'!); but ap])t;ais fuither (140.(1) ' . the tntifamahoisava^ with
li\nin Ml and v. 3. 1 1, ai t oinpan) in;^ an ollerin;; of butter
Tiansl.ited: lleniy, 3'i, lod; ( iiiflith. i. 372.
I. The savior Iiulra, the lul|»er Iiuira, the hero Indra. of easy call at
every call --- I call now on the nii|;hty {^aktii), much-called Indra; let the
bounteous (tfiiij^/iaiitn) India make well-beinj; fur us.
The vtise is KV. vi.47. 1 1. also SV. i. 333, \'S. x\. 50. TS. i. 6. I2«. MS. i*-. o- 27 et aL
III a, TS. arrents Az'tttntitn ; in c, U\' VS. I)ri;in /iT.iviVfti (for /luiJ nu\\ for d. liiey
all r<'ad s-.'itsff fti* (but SV, iti^ifh /lavO) fUti^fttii't} ti/it}tv (SV. ly/i-) Ouirah. [^Cf. also
MtiS. i. II. ih, and [>. 150. J
87 (92). Homage to Rudra.
Found alsn in r.'iipi>. xv. I<)U!id in K.nn;. (5'j. J«i) in a fit** f-T wrlfarr, with wor-
slii[> of t!j** Kudi.is; .uid ii'« knn«-d (rwili* In 5 ">. 13; t» lln- /J;i./fii j^ in,t. \'svt\ repeate«.Sly
by V.iit. : in tlie /*iif rti/t saciifuf ( ). lu), when the cleansin;; tuft is thrown in the firr.
ar.d aL:ain. in tlx' n//;/^ /.'.'i/u./ s.u iiti(«> (<) |S), with a r.ike ti> I ryambak.i : also (24. 17)
at ill'* end of t'lc ij;;';:*/! »//;,/. wiim thr pii'-sts <piit t'w place of sai rititr.
I r.msl.ited 1 Muii. iv'.3^', ; Ibniy, y\, I'Vi; (iiitrith. i. 372.
I. The Ritdra tb.it is in tiu* fiie i>r,i^'ii), tii.it is within the waters, that
iiileictl the bfib^, liie plants, ibat sb.iped (///) all these beings — to that
Kii'iia, li> A;;ni, W- !ionMi;i'.
"I 1^ . at V. ;.'*'. h.is a ni-.irly f «»iri ^poiirjin*; arMre*is. but mikini; no pretence |o a
MnUi' .1! I ii.ii.i' It I : il I- .1 !n J,' ///.;'/4» tt:^rr,i:i (sn f.ir, I'pp. apiees)_ii^ itfuivJ thmJJklsv
453 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK VII. -vii. 89
yd rudrd vi^vd bhuvand **vivi^a tdsmdi rudrdya ndmo asiu ; thus omitting the per-
plexing agnaye at the end, for which Ppp. also has the better reading adya. The
conim. explains cdklpe by {srastum) samartho bhavati, Pada b is trisiubh ; ^but a is
not to be made good by pronouncing rudrd as a trisyllable J.
88(93). Against poison.
[ Carutman. — taksakadevatyam . j-av, brhatiJ]
L Prose. J Found in Paipp. xx., but so defaced as not to be comparable in detail.
Used by Kau^. (29. 6) in a healing rite against snake-poison, rubbing the bite with
grass and flinging this out in the direction of the snake.
Translated: Ludwig, p. 511 ; Henry, 36, 106; Griffith, 1.373.
I. Go away ! enemy {dri) art thou ; enemy verily art thou ; in poison f^ClV^ i^J '9
hast thou mixed poison ; poison verily hast thou mixed ; go away straight
to the snake; smite that!
It can be seen in Ppp. that the combination arir vd 'si is made. Addressed to the
poison (comm.), or to the wisp of grass that wipes it off (Henry) — or otherwise. The
»' verse " (12 : 14 : 10 = 36) is brhatl only in number of syllables. LThe comm. reads
abhyupehi. He takes the *• that " to mean the snake. With regard to the autotoxic
action of snake-venoms, see note to v. 13. 4. J
^9 (94)- '^0 Agni and the waters.
\Sindhudvlpa. — caturrcam. dgneyam. dnuthtbham : 4. j-p. nicrtparosttik.^
L Partly prose — " verse " 4. J The first three verses arc found also in P^ipp. i. Various
use is made of the hymn and of its several verses in the siitras. In Kau^. it is addressed
to the holy water (42. 13) on occasion of the Vedic student^s return home, and (42. 14)
vss. I, 2, 4 accompany his laying of fuel on the fire after sunset; with vs. 3 (57. 24) his
hands arc washed in the upanayana ceremony, and with vs. 4 (57.27) he partakes of
hot food ; two phrases occurring in the latter (edho 'st\ Ujo^si) appear (6. 12, 13) in the
par van sacrifice, but are hardly to be regarded as quotations from it (the comm., how-
ever, considers tijem such) ; and the schol. (note to 46. 1 7) and comm. reckon the hymn
as intended by the sndnlyds, or verses to be recited at the ba)h taken after the death of
one's teacher. In Vait (3. 18), vss. 1-3 accompany in the pantan sacrifice the priests'
cleansing; vs. I (or more?) in the agnistoma (24.6) is repeated on approach to the
ahavanfya fire ; with vs. 3, the sacrificer's wife is decked in the cdturmdsya sacrifice
(8. 20) ; with vs. 4, fuel is laid on the fire in the /<z/'7'^/i sacrifice (4. i).
Translated: Henry, 36, 106; Griffith, i. 373.
( tt/^^
f
I. The heavenly waters have I honored (cdy) ; with sap have we been
mingled ; with milk, O Agni, have I come ; me here unite with splendor.
The verse is, with differences, RV. i. 23.23, and is found also in VS. (xx. 22),
TS. (1.4. 45^), MS. (i.3.39), Ji^- (ii.68), LQS. (ii. 12. 13). RV. has, for «. apo adyi
^inf acdrisam ; the others nearly the same Lscc also note to >•». 4, bclowj, only all give y aJjf^
the more regular grammatical form apAsy and TS. omits adyd^ while JB. reads acdrsam; ^
in b, RV. has at end agast/taht\ LQS. agaftmahi\ VS.TS.MS. asrkfmahi ; in c, TS. fi'^^t^f VSJ • '
comhinca pdyasvd/i ag-^ and RV. reads ^/i//i for agafnam ; VS. adds a fifth pada. The (^
vii. 89 IU)()K VII. TMi: AIMAKVA-VKDA-SAMlCrrA. 454
WTsv is ri'})r;itril as x. 5. .\^*, nnd its srcom! Ii.ilf is the lasl pari of ix. I. 14. Ppp. a^rrrs
ill a ^^itli K\'.. aiul has tii^tt/if/iit/tt in b. I In.* r«»niin. f*!^*^!^^** anU'ittttfi ^ilU fuj.ty»if»i.
2. I'nilc mo, O Aj;ni, with splendor, with i)ioj;ony, with life-time ; may
the ;;oiIs kiinw mc as such ; in:iy Iiuha know, tojr(.iln;i- ^ilh the seers ihi}.
I In: \ti<ic is r> prjiril lulnw as i\. I. 15 ami x. 5 47. It is RV. 1. 23. 24 : RV. rcatl«,
in C. i7\\ t iiM.ii t rnti'd, as tin* riitnin. also <Iclii)i's nur word to l>e ; aiul one* nr («n of i^ur
IMS'*. (I>ii.l\.K.s Ml.) so *;ivc it. The ci>inin. explains ;//#• i/ij*/ l»y rtitint fitikm (suppK in;;
f*nt.tui)^ ni. aitnii.itivi'ly, r/iiiff^*iMti me (supplying tihhimiitijphaUitii jiliM.i»//»frr).
rpp. ifMiIs, for b. //<r;fM-<} m bahttm lrti/tt\ ami cninliiiifs in d saftwi-. |^rrrliap« ibe
Aniiki. s« .ins c. d as 7 \ f).J
3. () waters, do yc carry forth holh this reproach an*! what is foul
(ifiti/n), auil what uiUrutii I have uttcicd in hate, and what I have sworn
fearlessly ( ? ).
'1 lie in.iJMiity of (ivir rnss. (all Init I^.T. ) ai (t*nt ff/<rr in a, aiwl SPIV reports that Ihr^e
of his nis*i. also do tlif s.iine : Ixilli ti*\ls mit-nd to <7/i/f. Tpp- 'nnils a!*\i in C ar^l
I'oinl'ints ill d \*'/*t' V'///-. 1 lu* \*\sr is f«iiind. with peivadin;; tlitfrrrrn rs »»f rca«lin:;. ai
K\'. i.."'^. J.\ and aKo. Ir.ss discoid. mt. iri VS. vi. 17, Ap^.S. vii. ;i.'', I.t,S. \\ 2 11.
\'S. dild rs fioni nur tf\t onlv l»v a< 1 i-ntiii'* tti hifitn,tin ; An. has :-tI fi»r . •! in c antl d:
I.(,S. ai;ir( s llM«»ni;hi)ut. '1 lir K\*. t»\t is this: itf.hti Apah f*fA :ii/i,i/.i yAf kii't %.t
u:tfif.htt f/:,f\i:r.h/ :ti '/lihn tif ttitittihi'titt yAii I'ii (*"/•/ «/•! 'nft^tm. 'I Iir *rtisr of (»ur
af'hnuntim .it tin* end is rxtirnii'lv inu'stionalik* ; vciv possiMv it niav rnniain *i' hi an<l
havi' nnthin;; to <!o uitli th«' root hht ; it (KTcnrs only in thi« vrrsc. Tin* nmini. r\ plaint
it as iihhi and 9 it n it for f na • del»t.'
4. Fire-woorl (I'ti/tns) art thou, may I he prosperous (nih) ; fuel
{stiwiii/i) art thou, iiiay I allo«;ether prosper (samcti/t) ; brightness art
thou, put thou brightness in me.
|_riosi'.J 'Ihis aildress to the pirres of kindling; \v<nm1 or fuol pilci! on the sarrrd
firt*. pniinii)'^ on thi.* similarity of the roots t\fh ' imrn ' and etih *pMis{»er/ i^ found aI%o in
VS. xwviii. 2;. K. ix. 7, xxwiii. 5. .A^.'S. iii. (>, z^u l.<,"S. ii. 12. 12, t,T,S. ii. 10. VS. an'l
(■(IS. ha VI' all three p.iits, oidv omiitMi" uim t',/Af.\fyii in the setiind*; l.(*S. has mdv the
first two .iiMii'ssis, and reads in earh ti/f':i}fWitAt ; A(,S. reads as I-(,"S., but has aI*o
our tliiid aildn-ss prefixed as its liist. with the variant f/if tifhi. 'I he Anukr. S4 .ir.«
S ♦ 1;: 10 27. [MdS. has the Mist two .idilresses at i. 1. 16 (if. p, 140. i ;^) ; then
follows i//^i' tiduinv titiln'ut//: : and /r/\*'si is at ii. 2. Ii (cf. p. I 50). J •[^Ant! reading
etitinffuA/ii in the fiist. J
90(05). To destroy some one's virile power.
[./f;;;».;r. /»,ff»;. n.'.rnff i'/.f.i.if7 .ifyi:vi. i /^.ly,it* i : 3 Xift}tftt»ai(,hi}rh,ifi;
I'ltund ajsii in I'liip \x. I'siil \\\ K.in<;. {\(^. 35) in a women's rite, Iteing directed
aij.iitisi ilii* jov r of i»!ir\ wiji-
Transjit' >l ■ Ib'nry. 3-. 107; tiiiirlth, i. ^-.j ami 47c.
I. ibw on, alter ancirnl lashiou, as it weie the knot of a creejKT ;
h.iini \\v l«'irct»f the h.iib.ii i.m itiasti).
455 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK VII. -vii. 91
This verse and the first half of the next arc the first five psidas (a refrain being added
as sixth) of KV. viii. 40. 6, with no variant in this verse. The two parts of the hymn,
as divided after 2 b, do not appear to belong together. The tradition makes the hymn
directed against one's wife's paramour ; and the comm. regards this first verse as an
appeal lo Agni. Ppp. reads at end jambhaya,
2. We, by Indra's aid, will share among us this collected good of his ;
I relax the vigor (}qibhrdm) of thy member (.^) by Varuna's vow (imiid).
In the first half-verse (see above), RV. reads bhajemahi. The translation of c is
tentative only ; ^ibhrdm (our W. ^Ibhraui) is possibly a corruption of ^Ibhatn ; for bhra-
jAs (understood here as gen. of bhrdj) compare iv. 4. i. The comm. reads ^ubhram^
and (doubtless merely on account of its apparent connection with root b/tnlj) explains
blirajas by dtptam (supplying rctas), Ppp. reads (corruptly) fftinpayilid bhrati ^tikra.
The intrusion of vaydtn or of vdsu in a turns the anustubh into a bad brhail ; but RV.
has both.
3. That the member may go off, and may be impotent (^dtidvayas)
toward women, of the depending, inciting (.?), peg-like, in-thrusting one,
what is stretched, that do thou unstretch ; what is stretched up, that do
thou stretch down.
The epithets in this verse are very obscure, and are rendered for the most part only
at a venture. The comm. explains anHvayas as either *not arriving' (from root vf =
gnm) or * not enjoying * (from d-vl = ad^ i.e. bhaks * enjoy ') ; knadivant (our text reads
incorrectly klad-^ with only one ms., Bp.*, and the Petersburg Lexicon conjectures ** per-
haps * wet,' " from a reminiscence of klid) he regards as from root krad^ with substitu-
tion of ;/ for r, and renders 'inviting* {dhvdnavant) ; ^dnkurd he derives from {anku ;
avastha is to him simply = {strlsamipe) avatisthamdnay or (as for avah-stha) striyd
adhahpradci^e sambhogdya tisthatah. \\Ti a, b, Ppp. is quite defaced.J
Here ends the eighth anuvdka^ of 9 hymns and 24 verses. The quoted Anukr. says
asfamdu nava, and caturvih^a, YffS^ See p. 1045. J
91 (96). To Indra: for aid.
\Atharvan. — cdndramasam ( .' ). trdis/ubkam.']
This and the two following hymns are wanting in P&ipp. This one (the comm.
says, with 92 and 93 also) is used by Kau^. (59. 7), with vi. 5 and 6, by one desiring a
village ; also (140. 6), with v. 3. 11 and vii. 86, to accompany an ofTcring of butter in the
indramahotsava ; and it is reckoned to the abhaya gana (note to 16.8), and to the
svastyayana gana (note to 25.36).
Translated: Henry, 37, 108; Griffith, i.374.
I. Let Indra be well-saving, well-aiding with aids, very gracious, all-
possessing ; let him put down (bdtUi) hatred, let him make for us fearless-
ness ; may we be lords of wealth in heroes.
This hymn and the following are two successive verses in RV. (x. 131.6, 7, or
vi.47.12, 13), and are also found together in VS. (xx. 51, 52), TS. (i. 7. i3*-0» ^"^d
MS. (iv. 12. 5). All these agree in leaving out the nas which disturbs the meter of c.
Our pada-Xtxi agrees with that of RV. in both verses in falsely dividing svd^vdn^ and
the comm. explains the word correspondingly witli dhanavdn hiidimd vd.
i<fi
vii. ()2- HOOK VII. Tin: ATIIARVA-VKnA-SAMHITA. 456
92 (97). To Indra: for aid.
[.7Miff7viii {fU. as hymn 9/).]
Wanting in l\'ii]>p. Rrrkoncfl to the JT'iif/viMfi/M j^f'^'i (note to Kau^. 25. 3^>). ami
liy t!ic tiMMin, joitH'd with «;l : s«'>* uikUt <)\.
'I'l.inshitcil : llirnry, 3S, loS; <iriffith, i. 374.
I. Let this Indra, wcll-s.iviiif;, wcll-aiclinp^, keep far away apart from
us any h.itrcd ; may wo be in the favor of him the worshipful, also in his
excellent well -willing;.
'1 hr (ilhcr texts (srr under tho prorvdin;:; hymn) invert tlic nrdcr fi( the liio half-
viMSfs and all hut MS. read /rrw/.it end of (uur) a. The jfiwA/AI rrading lamuiJr if
pirsrrihcd by I'lat. ii. 48. The comin. explains the uoid as = tnoitiidn w guJAdn.
93 (98). For Indra's aid.
Wanting in Paipp. Not rmplo)!'*! hy K.iu<; , except as hy the comm. declared lo be
joiiii'tl witli ')i and (j2 in 5^- 7 (S'-<' iindiT ')i ).
'1 raiislati-d : Meiuy, 3S, loS; (liiirith, i 374.
I. With Iiulra, with fuiy may wc overcome them that play ihc foe,
smitin<; N'ritras irresistibly.
Tlic vetsc is founrl also in TS. iii- >■ 3' and MS. i 3. 12. TS. rcadN ta^ujaM lor
fft,ittythfJ, :\iu\ .\iif,i/nit///it fi»r #//■// m <>/;/.:,■ MS , \ njd I'T Tityii'ft, <f;»i hhihe i^M ahki
syitma^ ami j^ttntittt fur i;/j//thi/,tt. Most of tht.* i ii w /// /i} ■ twss. f*\vc Utima (our W.O .
and two tiltlis (if STP's authniitii's, sy), and iMith piiiiio<l texts read it; but the I*ril.
(ii. 107 ) rxpr<*ssly riMpiiies .\y*ii/.',!, and that accordin;;ly shuuhl be llie accepted text
|_lii c. lather, 'smilin;; aflvers.iries ' ?J
94 (^99). For Indra's help to unanimity.
[.•//'i.i»r .j»;. — Silum\,tm. tUiti*tu!>hjm ]
round alx) in Paipp. xix. Nnt used hy K.iu^v In \'.iit. (13. 12) it accompanies^ in
t)ie <;(,■/;.' A /.'/A'f/, tlie (<nidu( tin;; of kin^ Soma to his throne; and a{*alii. later (23. 7), Ihc
brin^in^ of tlic ti/n tii'ttj^mfiti of soma into the tup.
'Iiauslated: Ileniy. 3S. ic;; (fiitiith. i 375- - C f . Ol<Ieiibcr|*. Ktj^i etia i. p. 249.
I. I'ixtHl^Ti///; ;/;■*// with a fixed (»bl.ili<»n, dt) we lead down Soma, that
Indi:L iii.iv inaCe The cl.ins fr/V) like-minded, wholly ours.
i he viTsi* is KV. x. 173 '• and \*S. \ii 25 r, and the fir>t half \s found in MS
i 3 1; : al>'» in TS. iii 2 S-, fullowei! at tlie intfrval of two pad is l»y the second half
l\\' has. t-ii ./.--./ . . . n.t\i'ft:.n:. ti'/if . . . ;/;r(il//;<r.r/ ( Ppp. tt^/ii St-*mtt f*Ar(JmaAt} :
fur ».7/.'../ // M in c it reads i».'/'» //■ ( Ppl^- #///<> /*')•; and in d httit:ff*tt (al»«> Tpp >
fi»i i.j '.•••;./.■;./ •!/». TS. ha**, ti-i c. d. I'./V/'i? «.* iu.fm id vktih ki'wtlih tJf'JJk iJ».'«.
fit^.t': k hr.t. M.S. reads : if/- ( ' ) f<>i ' : •? in b: \'S. is tpiite dilfcrent . <//V. tik. mJkm^tA
T .;. / -ii '.'/./•'•• .i.ii t:ti\,in:t : ,if*';.i n.i indftt ui \\t^ *5tt/*ttt9t,ih Stiftniuauis t%hat. *[^Aiid
heni '' Lir.jf lor Lif,it in d- — Ihc \>. is aI>o noted a.s oLCuriing at K. xxxv. 7 J
457 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK VII. -vii. 96
95 (100). A spell against some one.
[/Capifijala. — /ream, mantroktagrdhradevatyam . dnustubham : 2^ J. bhurij.l
Not found in Paipp. Used by K2IU9. (48. 40) in a witchcraft rite against enemies,
with tying up a striped frog with two blue and red strings under the forelegs, putting it
in hot water, and poking and squeezing it at each offering {pratyHhuii).
Translated: Ludwig, p. 517; Henry, 38, 109; Griffith, i. 375.
1. Up have flown his two dark-brown {fydvd) quiverers (ivit/tard),
as two vultures to the sky — up-heatcr-and-forth-heater, up-heaters of his
heart.
The comm. renders vithurdti by samtatam calana^flHu (also vyathana^llliu bhaya-
vantciu), and understands by them (through the hymn) either the two lips or the breath
and expiration of the enemy who is represented by tlie frog (jnandUkdtmanH bMvi-
tasya) — which is very unsatisfactory. To the vultures he applies the epithet tdrksydu.
Roth suggests, as intended in the second half- verse, the heat and passion of love, which
are to be expelled from some woman^s heart.
2. I have made them (dual) rise up, like (two) weary-sitting kine, like
(two) growling dogs, like (two) lurking {hid-av) wolves.
The comm. explains udavantdu by goytlihamadhye vatsdn udgrhya gacchantdu ;
Henry renders " that watch one another." \\\t. would reject ud in a. J
3. The (two) on-thrusters, down-thrustcrs, also together-thrusters : I shut
up his urinator who bore [away] from here — [whether] woman [or] man.
Strim in d would be a welcome emendation : ** of the man who bore away the woman
from here " ; but the analogy of i. 8. i c favors the text as given by the mss. The
comm. supplies astnlikUtam dhanam as object of jabhdra; or, alternatively, he takes
the latter as = prahrtaviin asmSn biidhitavdn ; medhra {tnih + trd) he paraphrases
witli marmasthdnopalaksattam. His ignorance of the sense of the hymn is as great as
that of Kauij. — or as ours. SPP. retains the h of itdh before striva d, against his
usual practice elsewhere, and with only a small minority of his mss.
96(101). For quiet kidneys (?).
[/Cnpinjala. — prdkrtam L?J*; vdyasam. dnnstubham.'\
Found in Piiipp. xx. Occurs in Kau^. (48. 41) just after the preceding hymn, but in
a different rite against an approaching enemy, who is made to drink a preparation.
*|_ Berlin ms. //vf^ uk/am.j
Translated: Henry, 39, iii ; Griffith, i. 376.
I. The kine have sat in their seat ; the bird has' flown to its nest; the
mountains have stood in their site ; I have made the (two) kidneys stand
in their station.
Instead of the unsatisfactory and questionable * TT-^^^^iiir, the comm. reads vrkdM, and
understands it to mean "the he-wolf and the she-wolf"; they are to be made to stay
in an enemy's house. He also reads in c J sthUne^ regarding d as prefix to asthuh.
SPP. combines again (cf. 95.3 d) in his text, with the minority of his authorities,
vii. (/)- nooK VII. TJIK ATIIAKVA-VKDA-SAMIIITA. 45^
a\tinth st/i , Ati\thipnn nt tlic end in our U-xl is a mi«>]irint fnr -pam. Ppp. apprjfi
ti) \\'m\ tX'tramam insu-.ul. 'Mir smm*! halfvcrsc is nraily iflrnli^ .il with vi 77 I C- d
Mlj>. !i.is v9ki'tlu : <).. t'/Ztw;*.- I^. and Sl'l''s I)., vrk*i'': this last is, to be »ur«. n'if
V9 kati • w I lives.* I»i>t I1.1S not tin* piir.isfoloj^y nf vs. z of tlic picrcding hymn {a/ii:^t-
Ptifii v9'kCiu'\ s»>incllun'; l(i ilo witli llic pl.irin;; «>f this one hiTcrJ
97 (102). Accompanying an offering.
^. ?/. i?»«i ^A«//C.O'.»'''" .' ^ ?/. /»fl/if/*i/r*f Ar^rt/i ; 7,7/ tdmmi hhurtg
J'^X'tii ; S. ufAH'tdJ hrhtitt ]
|_raitiy pit)sc. 5 '^'J Found alsn in I'Aipp. xx. Arromjianies in KAii^. (6 3). in the
pa9van sacriti<c, the olfiMini; of the no-called sn9iisthifttft09naf ; vs. 8 is then <6. 4) •peci-
t'lL-d. with the diiettion ify tt/ftrff:ii9fi nittt9t^rhiif9iA. Verse 2 is further found in the »/«
9tti\a9ui rereinony \y>. Z'^)^ willi vi. 53. 3, at conipanwn;^ tlie release uf a cow (the comn.
says, with ditfcimt iLMdiii;; and di\isioii, ar<.onipan\ini^ a lunteinplalion of the watrr-p«4|
In Vait. (4. 13). vss. 3 S ^o witli tin.i! olfciiii^^s in the /.r>;vrii sacrifice. [^The dcrad
flivisinii ruts the iiynui In'twrrn vss z and 3: cf. p. 3'^').J *[_The text reads ««/*««
\ajuii\timpU9 9iektifHO yajiie ptifitn is/: a *pfi}9//iityti/ .' j
Tiaiislatr<l : Ludwi;^. p. 4?'); Urnry, 39, ill ; Oriftith. i. 37^.
1. Sincr today, as this s.icrifico j^ocs ff»rwanl, wc chose thcc here, O
kiiowinij hota9\ maycst ihoii j;o fixcilly, and, O mightiest one, do thou,
foroknowin;^, f;o unto the fixrd sacrifice, the soma.
The translation follows our t'-xt. hut this is, as the parallel text.% plainly show, much
corrupted in c. The ver.se is K\'. iii. 2'). \(\ found also in VS. (viil. 20), TS. <i.4. 44Mt
MS. (i. 33'*^)- In a. V.S. lu'ijlns rtt\*iih hi /;•/!/ in b, KV. rc.uls akiivt* 'ffw-. white
llie olhrr texts h.ive rf;-//^ Iwtxiram ti:-9ii-. Inc. KV. reads fridr and uftl '^atnti/Adi .
\'S. has the same, ami also ii/j/i/k hoih times Uyx tfii9 u:ti9n : 'I S.MS, have r^Mtfif. hu\
tuulf 1 )t t w e e n . a n f 1 M .S . - nt i\/,t, w h i 1 ■_■ 'IS. has - ;/;/ .1 f/ttJ %. In d. K V . I icj; iri» / / ajJnJn
I'it/i'iii) up^ V.S.r.S. l»L'.i;iu prajiiuAn v.;;. and have xuUxin (for 10999*1991) at the end.
and .M.S. n-ads. for d. yitiwin p9,t;ii9iAntt iipa yx'thi yaj!iAm. The comm. apparentlv
has <rr,/i in c. I'Ut he explains it as - iivtlkfh ~ ydjtt (rpiotinf; the IS. version of the
p. ill. I), as if it wrn" «/r«M ; ctrtainiy. when it is rrdured to /ri.jf. all recnf*niti<in of its
conni-i tion with 1.// must lie Inst. The lonun. also re.vls utt} \a/9t/jf/:t}i» with tlie other
tfxts. rpp. has iHiM in c. hut nlheiwiso a;;nvs with KV.
2. ].r:\'\ lis tnj^cthiM, O Iiulra, with miiui, with kinc, together with
p.itrons, thoii ol the h;iy li«>ises, t(\[;elher with well-being, together
with what t>f ihc jTaviMS (/•/, ?/;;//,?;/) is jdoasin;; (/tiiti) to the gods,
t'v^olluT with the favor of the worshipful ^ods.
Ill" M'i»i«- is |\V V. .J?. .J. ajid .d*.o ni I iirsin V.S ( viii. I ;), TS. (i 4. 44'). TD. (li. 9 2*).
.ui-l MS. (i. 3. ^*<). .\ll s.ivi' MS. HMrl /.'.' aft'-r inxhti in a (.t1v> the i onim , and one of
sri's mss ). .Mill ;dl (.dsi> Ppp.) /.vt/ fi»r W'-f.i . in b. KV.MS. (aUo the comm ) ha%^e
/. M/; ..'i. !'ii« diIhms f!i.iyt:,i:;:t: in-t'-.u!. and K\'. at rn«l JT-.n//.- in C. all (with Ppp)
/■'./'' ■■/;.f/;.i. .iiid .ill sa\r K\'. if,:,ik9/,tu: (su Ppp. also) aftrr it: in d. KV.TS.TII. (abo
Ppp) li.iNt.* th'.- inme piopti (.vr/.',f/i ,f (A/;/ involves an anarolulhon which is dift-
ie::.iii!i-d in the ti.insl.iiidii). .Spp. f'nlliiws the conini. and a sin|*le one of his msa. is
I e. id in:: (wit!» llie nther ti'xt-*) if Attm.it.'t'i in c.
459 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK VII. -vii. 97
3. The eager gods, O god, that thou didst bring — them, O Agni,
send forward in [thine] own station {saclhdst/ta)\ having eaten, having
drunk sweet things, assign to this man good things, ye good ones
(vdsu).
This and the following verse are given together in VS. (viii. 18, 19), TS. (i. 4. 44**3),
MS. (i. 3. 38), but in diflcrent order and combination : namely, in VS., our 4 before 3,*
and in the others uur 4 a, b and 3 c, d as one verse, and our 3 a, b and 4 c, d as a fol-
lowinij one. In our 3 a, VS. begins vi'\i\\yin av-^ and TS. ends with devdn (/-) ; in c, all
end with -sa^ ca v/f?'^, and after it VS. has asmi^ and TS.MS. *sme. Ppp. reads, in b,
preraya punar a^ne sve sadhasthe. The fourth pada is deficient. •[_ More precisely,
our 4 a-c with 3 d before our 3 a-c with 4 d.J
4. We have made for you easily accessible seats, O gods, ye that have
come enjoying me at the libation ; carrying, bearing [your] own good
things, ascend ye to heaven after the good hot drink {}).
TS. (as above) reads at the beginning svagi^ and later in a sddanam^ MS. sddan&
krnomi; in b, VS. MS. have -gwi^ddm sdvanam jus-^ TS. sdvane *ddfn y- ; Ppp. also
has krnomt\ followed by the unintelligible /<! caste *iiam savane jusdndh ; tlie AV. text
(p. sdvane : ma) is apparently a corruption of sdvane *mi^ which the comm. reads. In
c, VS. inverts the order of the two participles, and all read havinsi for svi vdsiini ; in
d, VS. MS. have dsnm for vdsum^ and VS. svdr for divam^ and all tisthata for rohaia.
Ppp. gives, for c, d, V. bh. dudhd^s tvaih gharmam tarn u tisihatd *nu. All the AV.
pada-xwss. (except a single one of SPP*s) read vdhamdnd : bhdramSnd, without final
visargaj and all the sam/ii/d-mss. (except our P.p.m.) have -nd svi; both printed texts
make the necessary emendation in samhiid to -ndh svi (which the comm. also reads),
and SPP. adds the visarga to both p*ples in his /tf</<i- text. The pada reading in a is
sAdand : akarma (our Bp. -ndh s. m.), and the irregular hiatus must be regarded as
falling under Prat. iii. 34, although the passage is not quoted by the commentary to that
rule; SPP. takes no notice of the anomaly. The comm. explains gharmdm in d by
ddityam. The Anukr. passes without notice the redundancy of c, due to the apparently
intruded svd.
5. O sacrifice, go to the sacrifice; go to the lord of sacrifice; go to
[thine] own source (ydni) : hail !
I^Prose.J The same formula is found, witliout variant, as VS. viii. 22 a, and in
TS. i. 4. 443 ♦ and MS. i. 3. 38. The samhitd-mss, add a stroke of punctuation before
svdm which is wanting in the other texts, and which our edition also omits; SPP.
retains it. The comm. explains Vishnu as intended hy yajftam, •LAlso vi. 6. 2».J
6. This [is] thy sacrifice, O lord of sacrifice, accompanied with song-
utterance, of excellent heroism : hail !
LProsc.J Again the AV. mss. add a punctuation-mark before suviryah* omxiXQd in
our text, but given by SPP. ; the other texts (VS. viii. 22 b; TS.MS. as above) do not
have it. TS. differs only by reading snvirc-h; MS. does the same and omits svihd (add-
ing instc.id t^na sdm bhava bhrajam gacha)\ VS. tndsvfiih sdrvavfra/ /dj j'ffsasva
svd/id. Ppp. has a yet more different version : esa te yajilo yajamdnas svdhd siiktana-
movdkas suvfnls svdhd. '[^To avoid taking the word as an adjective, BR., s.v., would
read with TS. suvh'ah.\
vii. 97 HOOK VII. TIIK ATMAKVA VKUA-SAMMITA. 460
7. l'{is//(t( lo those offered lo ; rds/nit to those not ofTcrcd to; yc way.
(.^/////'Ofinrliii^ j;o(ls, h:iviii;; found the way, j;o ye on the way.
[l'r<iM>.J Tiir si'i ond pait of tlic formulA is fitiiml wit)inii( .1 variant in VS viii 31
ft ;il.. "IS. i. 4 .J.J' rt a1., MS. i. V 3R. Ppp. fr;u!s ir-i?/////r-/'An» taiiuihutehhyak.
S. () Iniil of mind! [put] lliis offcrinj; of ours in heaven amonj; the
gods; hail! in heaven hail! on eaith -hail! in atmosphere — hail'
in wind may I put [it]; hail!
|_pMisr.J In WS.T.S.MS. (as alMive) a rorrrsp(indiii{* fitrinula immrdiattly fo!lo««
oil! 7 b: Imt it is hficfcr: thus. \'S. //itf/iittttx ptita tuuUh lititi yajiidm ix^AkA \ite
iihtih : TS. m. f*. /'. 1:0 tie-'ti tU'W\u yajfuim r:-if/-ii ;*?. / j;i///i2 \*ite tiht\k ; MS. /4f /
siuiiutti' imtuii yit/i>J/f/ tfirf i/vi't^u I'titf tihah sia/i,}. Ppp . .i};;.iin, tn. f*. itftJfN Urz j
yii/iiitf/t s:t}/tti: liUf x:;i/iii 7i/niyr t//ttit M'ti/hi. The Anukr. apparently scam \\\i%
hit of prose as S -f 7 : y) \ \ z 3^.
98(103). With an oblation to Indra.
I'dund also in P.'iipp. xx. In K.mh;. ('». 7). thr vrrsr a< < funp.mirs, at \\\r ftir^ jn
s.i( I iti< (\ tlir distiibtilion of lathis (o racli dixinity: and a^.iin (SS. ri), in tlie /^fi^.i-
Z^/fT' i/f///i;. llw.' spiinklin*^ of iii< ^i.iins jnincd witli if,tfih*i In \'.iit. (4 ^), it gOfH mrih
llic lasiin;; of lln* /r«/t/i//i/ into llu* Iiii" in llu- /i// 7«/'i saciifirc
'I i.invl.itfd : llinix, 40, \\i\ (111111111,1.377.
I. The bavins is all (sAm) anoinlrd with oblation, with j;her, all by
the ;;ood Indra, all l>y llu' Maiuls; [it \^\ a\\ anointed by the j;ods, by
the all-^ods ; let tiie ohlalinn ;;o to Indra: hail!
■
A Kurrspondini; imt tpiite dinViirit vnsr is fouml as VS. ii. 2^ (ininiediatrl\ (ot-
lowinu a irpi'titi<»n of iln* \'.S. vcisinn i»f onr 07 7, S); it leads auktAm instratl d
aktJfit in a and c. Ii.is iit/:/\,)n ^iii.ur/nt fot intinuit :Aitntt} in b. ina'ttts for 4/rz\}ti inc
and. fur d. ii::\v>hi: tii\h!i^> yaxhtitit Vti/ s7,t/;,i. Ppp also has (l»i-tti-r» ^a\utkn lor
I'tiMtftii in b. and tit'''thhi\ in c. h- lituni: its nir tt-r. 'I he c onun. reads taf/tis fur haiis
in d. I ill' veT?«e lai ks thii-r >\ll.ilih-s in its srcond half.
90(104). When bestrewing the vddi.
W.iiitin'^' ill P-iipp. Is in K.ni.;. { 1. ?■ ) the pi rest's flirettion for strewing the bar Ait ,
and tin* s.inie in \'.iit (2.7)- l'«iih in thi- /,/» .ii/i s.i'. iiiitr.
I ia:isl.it- d . i.iiiKvii:. p. J^\\\ \\v\\\\, 4.1, 113; (iiitritli. i. 377 — Mrnry gives an
il.r'u i! ■ iiiMJtU'Ht < Mlcri'i t-. /':,/.': rr f/.\i/ti\: /{f /\^rs,/::tr;;ffi» An:ftj^er^ iii. 3. rclcrs
l'» H;'.! l-r .11. 1:. .\",;/ ///.•./ I \'.'i't.:.'n. /,,>/' f, ■> . Im. '-.J.
I. .siirw thou around, nirloso ih«* sarrituial hearth f:"/</i); do not rob
till- sis.?«'r iyiii;^ down voridcr ; \hr /'.'A/r'r seat [is] yellow, ;;oIdcn ; tho*e
[iii'j j«-\V!-U {ftjy'.ti) ill tin* sauiturr\ world.
1 1-,'' I iMJun. riL^.mls t!w 'fi'ii li nf ,.'*/• '/,/ 1^1 ass as address-cl. I.udwii* conjectures i^e
•>■•»' t" ti» ]■'• tl.r- :*//,:».!: t'iii . .»:.■! Mi.iiiv .d^ti ir;i!ffs!.inds tlif »ani«* ; it i% |)ef}*.jp«
46 1 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK VII. -vii. 102
rather the grass that lies about; the comm. gives several diverse guesses. A corre-
sponding verse is found in TB. iii. 7. 5*3 and Ap. iii. 13. 5 : they read abhl iox pdri at
beginning of a ; jdmim ma hinsfr amnyi fdydnd for b ; -dand hdritdh suvdrndh in c,
and, in d, imi for eti and bradhni for loki,
100 (105). Against bad dreams.
[Varna. — du/tsvapnandfanadfvaiyam . dnustubham .]
Found also in Paipp. xx. Used by Kauq. (46. 11) in a rite against bad dreaming,
and reckoned (note to 46.9) to the duhsvapnand^ana gana.
Translated: Ludwig, p. 498 ; Henry, 40, 115 ; Griffith, i.378.
I. I turn away from evil-dreaming, from bad dreaming, from ill-
success {dbhnti) ; I make brdhman my inner [defense] ; [I put] away the
pains having the aspect of dreams.
The comm. (also l*pp.) reads svapndt in b. A corresponding verse is found in KQS.
XXV. 1 1. 20 : for b it has/J/<j^ svapndd abhutydi ; it reads karave for krtn'e in c, and,
for ^^ parah svapnamukhd krdhi. Ppp. ends with -mukhd suva. Near half of SPP's
authorities have/rfrJ/t in d. The comm. explains svapnamtikhds by svapnadvdrikdh, . ^
LGriffith says: ^^ I turn away : and lie on my other side" — to prevent the recurrence ^ -AU/i'^^^
of nightmare. As to c, cf. i. 19. 4 and v. 8. 6. J
loi (106). As to food enjoyed in a dream.
[ Yama. — duhsvapnand^anadevatyam. dnusUtbham.^
Found also in Paipp. xx. Used by Kau^. (46. 12) in a rite against ill effect from
food eaten in dreams, and reckoned (note to 46. 9) to the duhsvapnatid^ana gana.
Translated : Ludwig, p. 444 ; Henry, 40, 115; Griffith, i. 378. — Given by Bergaigne-
Henry, Mattuely p. 157, without other comment than is implied in the title.
I. What food I eat in dream, [and that] is not found in the morning
— be all that propitious to me, for that is not seen by day.
The comm. appears to regard nahl in c as two independent words. A corresponding
verse is found in Ap(^S. x. 13. 1 1 and HGS. i. 17.4; reading thus: yad annam adyate
naktam (H. sdyam) na tat prdtah ksudho *vati (H. at', ks.): sarvam tad asmdn md
hinsfr (H. -sUi) nahi tad dadr^e divd (H. divd dadr^e divah), Ppp. has nas instead of
me in c. L^^* ^^ P- *o45j
102 (107). Accompanying self-relief.
[ Prajiipati. — mantroktandnddivatyam. virdt purastddbrhati^
Wantinpj in Paipp. Kau^. (52. 1 5) prescribes it in a rite for welfare, ** with action as
given in the verse " (1// mantroktam).
Translated: Henry, 41, 115; Griffith, i.378.
I. Having paid homage to heaven and earth, to the atmosphere, to
Death, I will urinate standing erect ; let not the lords (ffv^nf ) liarm me.
All the authorities read meksAmi in c, and SPP. retains it in his text, although it is a
wholly impossible form, and the misreading of / for sy is an easy and familiar one ; even
vii. I02- HOOK VII. TlIK ATIIARVA VKDA-SAMMITA. 462
tlic mvivT (Icmnndiv nif ksi- [rithrr ftrdhuAs 'J The romm. h.ns instead wJi *M\.^mi,
cxpiaiinM*: it as -■ //M f^timisyiimi ! Viitually all the authmilics ton, leave tiithan
uii.ici riitvd 0^^*> <*^it **f fourteen ot Sl'T's ami our K.s.m. ti)than) ; this both editions
cmi'iu!. |_l lu' Anuki. senns li> sr.iti as 1 1 + .S : 7 ♦ S . 34 J
L'lhi' si|u.itlini: {insuirf in in:ikiii;^ w.ihT is, I iM-li-xr, yriii i.il witli the natives of Ir.<!ia
to ihis <l.iy. Sn llrsind, WofJts antf /hij'S, 727: /iiyd* tlvr j/tXimo rtTfnfAfL*ra% of^^ai
o/ii^(7i' . . . c^o/icifK ktA. C'f. xiii. I. 5^ and my m)t('.J
Mrii> t-nds tlu* ninth anu'iika, of 12 hvmns and 21 verses: tlie ohl Anukr. %a\%
fttii'itmo tfrttt/tt^it ami fX'tt7'/fi{it.
103(108). For betterment.
[/•'/.i^wiiM. — JfMiiif.irrttf.im. trtiif/u/'Attm.]
Found also in IMipp. xx. I'scd I»y K.nii;. ( 5«). i*)) uiili hjnin 17 etc. (see under 17)
'I ianslatr<l: I.udwip, p. 2U)\ Henry, 41,11^*; (Iriftilh, i. 37R. — Cf. IJIoonifirW.
Ajr. xvii.^oS t).
I. \Vh:it Ksh.itriya, sockin;; betterment, shall lead lis up out of
this reproachful h.ile- who that desires saciifiee, or who that desires
bestowal? who wins loni; life-time amoii;; llie [;ods ?
This is apparently thr appeal of a Mraiinian scekini; employment (sn LudwiK aUo).
Tlie (-on)ni. (also Tpp) reads I'ttnti/t' \\\ d : he );i\is ald'i native <onjr(tura1 explana-
tions, and ttii.'s. of roiiisr. on amount of thr repeated l\t, to hriiig the \rrse into rnnnec-
tion with Tiaj-ipati (Ka). I'pP- ^^I'^hcr has $tii 'svtl in a. and kas fur, kc* }itj. in C
104(109). Concerning Atharvan*s cow.
round also in I'.iipp. xx. I'srd Ny K.~iu<;. {(\f^. 17) in a ui''ii\tijfiti^ liavinf^ as sax'a a
cultivat!*d fn'M ( /!» :'iI/iK/my rr-i/j.i/Ar, toinin.).
Transl.ilcil : llcnry, 41, ii'»; <iril!"it!j. i. 37«;. — C*f. alwne, v. 11. inlrodurtinn.
I. Wlio, riijoyin:; eonipaiiionship with Hiihaspati, shall shape [its]
body at his will - the spotted milch-cow, well-milking, with constant
calf, ^iveii by V.iMui.i !•> Atharvan?
Tlir ti.insl.ititm iniphi-s in d tit n: tint as rea<l !»y I'pp. : rompare RV. x. 15. 14 d (AV.
xviii 3. 5<) leads M//:'.iv, b-ii with nui» h hi-n.-r re.isnn th.in hrre), also iii. 4S. 4 b and
vii. irM. 3 b. llie iiitnni rcfi-rs to v. 1 1 as rxplaininr; the cow referred In. Some of the
mss. ( ill) l-.iilini^ our I*p I'.O K.) act t-nt Stikfi\,\nt in C. ami STI*. adnpts it in his teit ;
o'.iis li.is tlir (itiicc t s.il/iVihf:. IVi^- l'<^^ii)s with Itttft, and has in b, for m/hdra/sdm,
tf'iiftufft f/,i f.\ and in c /•/".' ///.■./•/'1//1 .? Stili'iiJ.
105(1101. An exhortation to holy life.
[ .-If': ?• :.;»! rn.twf* .'l/.itfr: .ifv.tm. thin ^tu^Kam ]
I'liuJid .d*.!* in I'l'j'!' ''^^ '?n»»trd |iv K.'mq. (55. \(A in the iifttxnayana ceremony, as
til'* t« :i' if I t.ik«-s thi- pupil liv till- arm and s<'ts him faring; eastward; anti the second
li.df vir*^- l.il« I in \\\v «..nne ( ;»•. i^). .is hi- riiakrs tlie pupil turn so as tn face him.
Ti.insl.iii f! : IIiiii V. 41. I I 7 ; < m I::illi. i. ^71).
463 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK VII. -vii. 108
I . Striding away from what is of men, choosing the words {vdcas) of
the gods, turn thou unto guidances, together with all [thy] companions.
Ppp. reads sa/ia for vacas in b, and, for d, dcvo dev^tidm sakhyH jusilttah. The
conim. paraphrases pranUls by prakrstanayanddivedabrahmacaryaniyatfh.
106(111). Deprecation for offenses.
\^Athnrvan. — mantroktaddivatam uta jdtavedasam (c, d, vdntnam). hrhatlgarbhd tristubh^
Found also in Paipp. xx. Applied by Kciuq. (6. 2), in the parvan sacrifice, with
offerings in expiation of any thing spilt or overlooked in the ceremony ; and later
(46. 24), when a direction at the sacrifice has not been fully executed. Used also for a
similar purpose in Vait. in the agftistoma (12.5), and again later (16.8).
Translated : Henr}', 41,117; Grififith, i. 379.
I. If {ydt) in forgetfulness wc have done aught, O Agni, have offended,
O Jatavedas, in our behavior (cdrana), from that do thou protect us, O fore-
thoughtful one ; unto beauty be there immortality for us [thy] com-
panions.
The sense of the last pSda is obscure and doubtful. The comm. takes ^ubhi as
loc, = ^obhane sdnge kannani. Ppp. reads iasmUt for tatas in c, and ^ukhe in d. The
second half-verse is more irregular than the Anukr. admits.
107(112). To relieve a stinging pain.
\Bhrgii, — sduryam utd ' bddivatam . dm/sfubAam.]
Wanting in Paipp. Used by Kau^. (31.27) with vi. 105, in a remedial rite against
cold and catarrh.
Translated: Henry, 42, 117; Griffith, i.379.
I. Down from the sky the seven rays of the sun make pass the waters,
streams of ocean ; these have made fall thy sting (fa/yd).
The comm. regards fa/ya as used figuratively of a stinging disease : ^alyavat pidd-
kdrinatii kdsa^Usmddirogam, The seven rays are to him the seven forms of the sun,
as given in TA. i. 7. i.
108 (113). Against enemies: to Agni.
[Bhrgu. — dvyrcam, dgneyam, trdistubham : /. brhaiigarbhdJ]
Wanting in Paipp. Used by K3U9. (48.37) in a witchcraft rite with hymns 31, 34,
and 59 (sec under 31) ; and both verses separately are reckoned to the duhsvapnand-
{atta gaua (note to 46. 9).
Translated : Ludwig, p. 517 ; Henry, 42, 1 18 ; Griffith, i. 380.
I. Whoever seeks to harm us in secret, whoever us openly — us,
O Agni, one of our people, knowingly, or a stranger — to mefet them let
the toothed dmni go ; let there be of them no abode (vdstti), O Agni,
nor offspring.
vii. K)S- J'.OOK VJI. Tin: AMIAKVA-VKlJA-SAMHrrA. 4f^
'I'lii: ( (limn. irxpLiiiis iinin/ as ilf/il'tln/tf nil-stjif * a ii.iin-caiisini; she-demon * ; t>\ i'.%
fniin it sIiouM III* a fi'iu. to ii/.///i/ 'sti.in;{c.' A;;.iin (.i.s at iv. 16. i) SIT. unacco-jn!-
nitly tr.XiU (witli the oimin., who rx|il.iins it :is an tintiif hitttmlniam) in A Mat /.li.f/
(i[i>t<.iil (if ;/</ .(/iMif/ ), aiwl ill /i/i/i/ text t>i\titt nltimii:;!) trvcry kiumn /«Ji/4/ ins. I ■^;: 'ft
till* Wdiil \\'\\\\ s- and J xttJvAt alcmc lias rtynirtlo^it al justitit ati'ni. Some of tlir umstztf r
in>is. ( ini luiliii'^ mil W'.I.) umiI tlrf st- in a b. I he niss. als«» vary lietuccii fAm anJ
/.///; (11111 r>|i. aii'l all <iiir tttiiihi/.i inss. Iiavir tin* latt'i : Uith rditiuns f*ive ttic fiirn^rr »
|_i )nc (I<Ms nut tMNily sci* how tltc Aniikr. justitU-s its (It-riuitioiiJ
2. Whoi'vcr shall assail iis asleep or wakin;;, staticlin^ or movin;:,
C) |.~ilavi'<l.is, ill accord with V.iii^v.liiara as ally, il«j tliuu meet and burn
tliciii out, () J.ilavcilas.
All SPT's /./i/f:-mss . ami one of (uirs (I) ). r\-.v\ ^upttim in a. hy .1 ffc»|ucnt cir^-r
Lwilwi'^ siiL:L;csts t't'iii'iiiwitetiii for ''tki^'.'Ctuatftia in c; it woulil certainly l.*c an
iinprovi-mcnt to tlic sense.
109(114;. [For success with the dice. J
/« »iij/f ;./'"■» /|,;/i ; ^. 7, f, 6. fts/u/'A 1
Vimi\(\ also in iMipp. iv. (in thr vrisr-(in!«T r», i, 2, 5. 3. 7. 4). I'srd hy Kau^
(.J I. 13). with hymn 50 ftc, in a ril«' for surrrss in LMnildini; : mm; under 50. ir. ! ly
\'.iit. (<>. to), in tlic tit^fiVt'tti/i^Mt • ctfrnony. wlu*n tii** sariiticrr hands the atihiaryu the
anointed <h« c. ftir winning; at play the st^mttkia\Minl trow. ['I he dccad divi«i«^n tu?^
llu* hvmn In't\\ren vss. 3 and .\\ » f. p. 3*^'). J '[.Niitc lh.it iv. 3S i* f<ir lurk in gam-
hiiii;; anil is asiiiln*,! to the sann* lishi. ill. iutrod. to iv. 3S and .p J
Translated: Mnii, v. 4.:«> (vss. I-4); Ludwif:, p 45^' ; Henry, 42,118; (Griffith,
i. 3S0. — (.'f. /iniiniT, p. 2S5, 2S4.
1. 'I'll is hoiiKiLCc to the forinidaMc lirown (»ne, who anionj; the dice is
sclf-coiilroller ; with jjheo do I aiil (?) Kali ; may he be (gracious to \xs in
such plight.
[In a. Heniy wojild suppress eith«'r itiAm or els*» fuimo.\ I'lT* <<^'"l*'n<'S J*' '-t""'"
in b. ami lea^ls I'.tfyttoi m c. 'l"he C(Mnm. explains htf-hfArr a.s htf'hfif, a^ntU^t
'/.i/^it'/.':'i.t'i'ii.i tfvu!ii:ii\\il-.'!nuf tU:ut\ti : of Kali he ^.xys pii'tl;*7}tt/trfyA faf^.Jtam-
JIr/iit'n f/l/t* 'luirix.tv.i 'y.r/i kti/i*- ifv u.wite, and rpiotes TH. i. 5. II* ; \tkstlmi is cither
/.J./.; J ./•//;" 01 s. tin. If tha m k\it tu m i\ t AtJ mi.
2. Do thou. 0 A«;ni, carry ^h^-'e for the Apsarascs, dust for the dice,
gravel and waters; eiijoyin;; in their respective shares the oblation-giving,
the ;^o!s revel in both kinds of oblations.
i'pp. p*:'s .;.»;/- aft« r i,*''' /./"/ in a [a i:rrat imprnvrmcnt of tlie meter J. rear!s nakkt-
f:\\,7\ i» b. Mj jk's c T''f'M to .Aijni hv j:ivinj; vi r M«? <*/•-? j."'^ '^"'1 /«»'>"♦»'. and has m^tiamt^
ill d. Smni- i>f tin* inss. (in« ludini; mir P.K) also read Wtitftitt/u, ami it ^ivcs the |*ref-
I ia''l«' MMis.- ; liiit l»itth eiliti'tiN have -//. as l»'*ini; hrttiT supported. Half SIT's mvk ,
and at le.i'.t cne ( P. ) nl ours, «jiM* f*.}K^u*t in b. 'I he r(»mm. Iioldly i1e« larr» atsrhkr^t
in b !<i nn-.in /* ii^////.r:r */*»./ f / tliev are t'l have d\ist etr. tlunj; at them, that thev mav
lie hf.itvn.
465 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK VII. -vii. 109
3. The Apsarases revel a joint reveling, between the oblation-holdor
(JiavirdJuina) and the sun ; let them unite my hands with ghee ; let them
make the rival gambler subject to me.
Ppp. begins /J '/j-, puts atttanl first in b, reads in c ttl mlu Lintending //<7?J has f am
krtena (this is a great improvement) sam sr-, and has ftas kit- in d. The comm. under-
stands havirdhUfia in b to signify the earth. The first half-verse is identical with
xiv. 2. 34 a, b.
4. Ill luck (}) to the opposing player; do thou shed upon us with
ghee ; smite thou him who plays against us as a tree with a thunderbolt.
Compare above, 50. i . The obscure word at the beginning is divided Adhnavdm by
the pada-Vi\^^, ; SPP., however, alters his/rt^/^fz-text to HdinavAin^ simply to agree with
the comm's grammatical explanation ! as if tliat were of the smallest authority or value ;
and licre it is even worse than usual ; the comm. makes the word a verb-form from root
dl7'-\-(l, and glosses it with ddlvydmy aksilir Adlvanam^ karomil Ppp. treats the
verse as a cited one ; but it has not been found elsewhere in its text. •Lin the Correc-
tions to vol. ii., p. 5355, SPP. suggests d.devanam.\
5. He who made this riches for our playing, who the taking Q) and
leaving of the dice — that god, enjoying this libation of ours — may we
revel a joint reveling with the Gandharvas.
The Ppp. version is quite different : ^<? no devo dhattam idam dide^a fo 'ksdmlm
gra/iaitafit ^asatiam ca : sa no 'vattt havir etc. ; also gandharvdis sad/i- in d. The
comm. explains j^/(ff//rt/f/z//i Sindf /sanam respectively by grA/tanaw s^takfytMr aksHir jitvA
svlkaraitaffty and svlydndm aksdndm jay&hvasthiine (one ms. -ydnhva-) 'va^esanam.
6. Having good things in common {}sdmvasu) — that is your appella-
tion ; for stern-looking, realm-bearing [are] the dice ; you as such, O drops,
would we worship with oblation ; may we be lords of wealth.
Ppp. begins c with tasmdi ta indro hav-. Emendation in b to aksdh (voc.) would be
a welcome improvement ; Henry so translates. The minor Pet Lex. conjectures that inda-
vas in c means * the marks or pips on the dice * : perhaps rather applied figuratively to the
dice themselves* ; the comm. renders by somavaniah somopalaksitahaviryuktdh^\ as adj.
qualifying vayam. The comm. is uncertain whether the Gandharvas or the dice are
addressed in a ; in b he understands the two epithets to be gen. sing., ugranifia^uJ being
for 'Q'dyds / and he refers to and quotes TA. ii. 4. i, where they arc found as singular,
instead of our own text vi. 1 18. 2. The third pada is jagatl ^only by count J. •LThe
major Lex. takes it as *dice.* — W. put a sign opposite indavo as if he meant to make a
text-critical remark about it His Collation-book notes no variant ms. reading ; but SPP.
reports iddm vah and indavdh; none give indavah,\ tL^' ^^ it were indavah — indu-
inautah.\
7. If {ydt) a suppliant I call on the gods, if we have dwelt in Vedic
studentship, if I take up the brown dice — let them be gracious to us in
such plight.
Ppp. begins with yad devdn^ and reads ilvima in b. One would like to emend to
dlcbh^ in c.
vii. no- HOOK VII. Till-: ATHAKVA-VEDA-SAMHITA. 466
110(115). To Indra and Agni: for help.
Koiinil also ill I'aipp. xx., vs. 3 not with vss. I, 2. Kaiiq. (15. 11) cmplays the >!}n.n
(the coiiiin. says, vss. i aiul 2), with vii. 3 ctr.. in battle iiicantatiunft : sec under 3.
further (59. 20), for tlie satisfai tion of various desires, with worship of the deities mcii-
tioiu'il ill the vtTsrs. Vait. {i^.<*) has it (vss. I, 2?) with an olilation to India and
Amii, in tho ili;t,tyi7i:,t i.\ft ; ami vs. 3(3 1 7), in the /*xtrvtitt sacrifice, as the priests
receive an<l paitake «)f their /#/# J portion.
Translated: Henry, 43, 121 ; (iritlith, i. 3S1.
1. () Af^ni, torrcthcr with India, yc slay the Vritras irresistibly for
your worshiper {t/tl^vtihs) ; for ye are both best X'ritraslaycrs.
The translation implies emendation of Aitttis in b to Aiif/itit, which the construction
clearly dem.inds. and whirh is re ail l»y the mmm , as also, in a corresponding vrf*e,
by Tl(. (ii. 4. 5": this has also ///<'f////i? dw t/tl\tiy in a. and ytivthtt for mf'hS in c)
Koth editions ;;ive //i/A/r, with all the mss. I'|>l^' '^ def.'iced, but semis to rrad atMc for
//ii/«», and f<»r c //i-'.Jj'ir vrtrahantamt'im \ Kender ratiier. Me slay the adversaries .
adversary-sl.iyi-rs * .^ cf. iv. 32.7. n»>tc.J |_MS. has if(,-«J ittdfti^ at tit}\tiso just after \\%
version of our vs. 2. J
2. \\y whom in the very beginning they won the heaven (Jiifr), who
stood unto all existences, the two men-helpers (.'), bulls, thunderbolt-
armed — Agni, Indra, Vritra-slayers, do I invoke.
Found also in TH. (ii. 4. 5*) and MS. (iv. 12. ^) : '\'\\. puts in a stivar liefore «f;jfi.jir.
much improvini; the meter; MS. does t!»c same, but corrupts to tijiinan ; in b, TK has
h/tnvtttittwtt mAtihye : in c, hoth a«rrnt//<f ittrsir/rl, an(i TIi. 77 wrwil (as voc.)*; in d.
MS. ends with JuUtatit /ttfrrf/nif while TIi. has /7j,'«/ fnt/nl vrtrahiint} httve vJm. Vpp
has at tlie lK'!;inninfl[_ii/Mr<7/// /:iir idiyittv nt^ff (iT'iI wantin;;), and Muvtftna at the end.
The ' they ' of a. arcordini; to the comm.. are the pods. Vov frAiarsani is J^iven a con-
jectural renderini:. though the word is dnul>tlrss a corruption ; the TeL Lea. had
conjee tured an emendation to /'if itttsittti [^comparing KV. i. 109. 5 J ; the comm. %\\t%
it an altei native explanation: either f*tttltjf srna t/fitt/.lrAu^ tyr f^fakrstl mamtis^d rat<^
ytj}ffti't'na uttiti. [^As to -rtra-^SK^i note to vs. I. J "LAnd M.S. reads xAjra^kum.^
3. Divine nrihas])ati hath served 0- ufa-f;rixh) thee with a bowl ; O Indra,
enter into ns with son;;s — for the sacrificer, the soma-prcsser.
In a. ttf',1 i^r,2fi is rrndereil as if e'piivalent to uf*,i/it : the comm lakes it thus : «firr*i
//.; Yttt/i,i /.M i;.i,,f:tt\i tAtiu} m 'itHnn.im krta'rt'in. The comm. regards Indra as
addressed in a. b, liut it is ratlin the dtink itself, as rercivetl in the l>owl: so in Vihit
iii. 17. t »ne miuht ronjerUire /'/./.» for fnJ'ii in C ('^ur IVO. iHifrarn), but indra is
cil«'d in \'.iit. (il>. ): [(i.irlie overlooked the fart that the second half of this \-s was
intend'-il |. I'i'P ^'I'l-*^ to the somewhat meanin;;iess d a fifth pada : larram iam
^:^,l./f:.t^l /•.;/i .- compare the I'pP- ver.siim of vi. 54.3. (.I^PP- reads in A a/Ji *mam
467 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK VII. -vH. II3
III (116). To a soma-vessel.
[Bra^maM. — vdrsabham. parabrhati trisiubh."]
Found also in Paipp. xx. For uses, see below.
Translated: Henry, 44, 122; Griffith, i.382.
I. Indra's paunch art thou, soma-holding, soul of gods and of human
beings ; here do thou generate offspring that [are] thine in them (f.) ;
let those that [arc] elsewhere rest here for thee.
Ppp. combines -d/idttd *VwJ, and reads in b (after deitHnHfn) asya vi^varftfinh, and
at the end (as te svadhito grnantu. The comni. regards the verse as addressed cither
to a bull let loose (as quoted in Kau9. 24. 1 9) or to the pntabhrt soma-vessel (as quoted
in Vait. 1 7. 9). In c, (isu is obscure, and is perhaps to be emended to Asus j the comm.
explains it as cither = fittrai'artinfsu gosu or yajamdnAdirUpdsu viksu. The verse is
further reckoned |_note to Kau9. 19. i J to the pustika vtantras. It is a pure trisiubh^
without brhatl element ; but the /><zr/<2-mss. make the third pada end with^^. |_With a,
cf . RV. iii. 36. 8 a. J
112 (117). For release from guilt and distress.
[f'artifia. — dvyrcam, mantroktdbddivatam, dnustubham : i, bhurij.'\
Wanting in Piiipp. Used in Kau9. (32.3) in a remedial rite, with vii. 29 etc. : see
under 29 ; it is also reckoned to the ahhoHHga gatta (note to 32. 27). The comm.
regards it as quoted by Kau^. (78. 10) ; but doubtless the verse there intended is the
equivalent xiv. 2.45.
Translated: Henry, 44, 122; Griffith, i. 382.
1 . Beautiful {fiimbham) [are] heaven and earth, pleasant near by, of great
vows ; seven divine waters have flowed ; let them free us from distress.
The epithets in the first half-verse arc found only here,* and arc obscure ; for dnti-
suftine the comm. substitutes <i////z^ji/<z/>/f^y ^umbhanl\ he renders hy ^obhdkdrinydu^
and mahivrate by mahat karma yayoh. Henry would rectify the meter of c by reading
a for ipas. The verse is repeated below as xiv. 2. 45. ^\A{dhivrata occurs elsewhere. J
tLBR. conjecture qundhanl: cf. note to vi. 115. 3. J
2. Let them free me from that which comes from a curse, then also
from that which is of Varuna, then from Yama's fetter, from all offense
against the gods.
This verse is a repetition of vi. 96. 2.
113(118). Against a (woman) rival: with a plant.
\^Bhdrgava. — dvyrcam. trstikddiWftyam, /. virdd anustubh ; M, fanhimaii ^-/. bhurig usnik.']
Found also in Taipp. xx. Used by K^u9. (36. 38), in one of the rites concerning
women, against a wife's lover, with a plant called bdndparnl * arrow-feather * (Darila,
\jirapnrik/ia: for which BL conjectures J ^arapunkhd^ which is Thtphrosia purpurea
|_RothJ, though Zl spinosa is the spinous species).
Translated : Weber, Ind. Stud, v. 250 ; Henry, 44, 122; Griffith, i.382.
vii. 113- UOOK VM. Tin: ATnAI<V.\-Vi:i)A-SAMHITA. 46S
1. O ioiil;!) nuc\ tlum of lou^h cu't'pris! cut up yon wnman, O rou^h
<»nc I lli.it llmu inaycsl be li.itcful (?) li» ynn in.ui vl virilf |wnvcr.
I'lip. ir.uls ///i/ rxrivwlnic, aiiil /; ;.«///;i;//./i//;*f ; ami its srinndhalf iirsc \s . it.t.'..}
1 ■ ■ ■ • ■
l^/i// »/./ri/i/r<////,;i /.//// ti\tfhii ^f/*n)7ii/,i/i. 'I he « ointti. givrs, as «)nc of Iiis supgr^tr*!
syiinn\ins (or //;/;/#/, t/ih'iit/ttfi/l^t nr /'t}fh}/*t2r mt}l/i\t}u\,ti/Ai ,• vttfuiafittt I r f . tirlow.
I I 5. 2 J .III-, acKiiilin;; to him, Itittindih it kuinilm tO */*ttft pftifuJiiAi iaMya^^^khJkvt
tl:'^sfiiwtititt ^•/^/ttfititi/*itffni/it/it:'t^t\\ii/i. A'//iJ</: /</•? in C is Htrrally 'ha\in;; flimc mlijt
is ha It'll * {i/rt\ttl\}f hti, t omni.). 'i he strx oml half vcim* is pi a inly .i(Mrrs««<l tn thr ri\ Jl
'i'hrit* is I (iiisidrialtli' (list inilanrc ninnn:; the iiiss. in rr^anl to the rone li|(lin|* wnn!,
(rrrJ . {('ri''?-. ^tt}\t}- lu-ini; tlir vaii.ints, but rvitlcntly only in.if ctiiaiii'S of ropyisis : the
ronitn. expl.iins the \vi>r(l as - ptajiituiiuiiikmntthya'tiif. 1 he verse is a f^cKvl afra-
stubh^ not '.'in}/.
2. Kou^li art thou, a lou^;!) ono ; poisonous, a poisonous one art thou,
— that thou inayost he av»)i«lf(l, as a barren low (?i'(ifff) of a bull.
'Ihe litsi pait in I'pP- rrails: f*t\f*} *\i tmftil'tl *si '* }*1 :rsi}/tilr tixi The cnnim.
tiii'S tit tntd tnnt /if/7r f </ in : t\.'if,7ii ( r/>i/"/ ti/^itli.ii.i/: ) : 7>t^t} he p.ir.iphrjses «:th
7'ir//f///Vii j^'i/////. lilt' xrisc is lalhi-i L\ikn*inn»iti ih.xu \ii /tin mil ii. [^It Id'comcs a p-r-
fertly rc^iilai .n;.v a ////// if \vr adil at the cml of a (wilh I'pp ) an #n/ J
114 1 1 10). Against enemies.
'Ihc liist verse is finiml also in iViipp x\. I'snl Iiy K.'iii*;. (36.3'): (lotil>t!''S!i only
\s. I ) in < ounce tioii with tin* pinrrlin^ h\inn. at the end of tin* womm's ritrs : vs. 2. nn
the othtT hafut. ap]i<ais in a healin;; lite (31..I) .ij^ainst t!eninns, with vi 31
TiansLitrd: Wilur. ///</. Sfui/ v. 2'>5 ; Henry. .15. 123 : (Irili'ith. i }^}.
1. I take from thy entrails {rn/.stiftt}), I take from thy hcait, from the
aspect of thy face. I take all thy spleiuloi.
I'pp. has. fi)r b. n xi^itif /it i/iiy.'ttf tuf/ii. ami. f»>r tli** set onM half-verse, rl // fnntA.m,t
Yiiti :it/iii tliit/ff tnii it/'/iyti/f />\,t\t. 'I he cf»nini savs lifustirhi/htr VtitHi*jnit tfr ar. i.r.V.
or, altetnativelv. the :iil-^,iih}t aie lijtnil-ttfyurufi)iit)/i. 'I his verse ap|>eais lo l>eW>t5
pioperly with h\nin 113. as vs. 2 with I I 5.
2. b'oith from heie let anxieties [;t\ fiirth regrets (htfiHif/iut), and
forth imprecations; let A;;ni .smile tiie she-demoniacs; lot Soma smite
the abnsris (f ).
Mn tlM" •■•lition, th«' lin.il / siL;ii ni /,r/ii/? ;■//;;» has slipped to the left from its place
n\ti tin- s\ll.ililf /',;-. I hi' vs seems in iK'ltiny; to h. I I 5 : see note t" the precetlinjj v* J
115(120). Against ill luck.
I .7.' 1. .•'•/»:;■/».; I. i./.';i»f n'l ..:.■;/'■/"/, ■•.//.i:<'i/.i;if»»i Mi'tu tuhham I, j friifii.'^l ]
I'lu- tifsi two \«'isis aie fiiuiid .lisn in p.iipp w. It is nsrd by K.iu^; (iS. |f»- |*>
in titis .i-.ii:isi titff!: ( • p- tdilion '>. with tlir diuini; off of a rmw ti> wliose lejj certain
tliiip^s I \\r 1 1 rn f.istiH' •!. .iii-l wit'i « .istini; into tlir wai»"r rrrt.iin wraps nr |*aiTnrntA.
"I 1.1- I ":!'.-n 'j: »t«'s it .lisit fnun tiw ', aniLk.il:-a ('» i'«t in expiatory rites.
4^9 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK VII. -vii. Il6
Translated: Muir, v.348; Ludwig, p. 499 ; Grill, 41,187; Henry, 45,124; Grifiitli,
i. 383 ; lUoomficld, 168, 564.
1. Fly forth from here, O evil sign (iaksffti) ; disappear from here ; fly
forth from yonder; with a hook of metal {ayasmdya) we attach thee to him
that hates [us].
Ppp. reads in bl fulpa- iox papi^ and, for d,^rt dvismas tasmin tvd sajjAmah. The
coniin. has at the end sacamasi. He paraphrases//?//* laksfiii by pUparfipiity alaksmi ;
it might be rendered also by Muck' or * fortune ' ; the expression is found also in MH.
i.4. 1,5.
2. The unenjoyable flying sign that hath mounted me, as a creeper a
tree — that, O Savitar, mayest thou put hence elsewhere than on us,
being golden-handed, granting good to us.
l*pp. offers no variants. SPP. reports his pada-vcis&, as reading in a paiaya : lu or
pataya : lit/i^ which is very strange, as ours have the true reading, pa /ay d/ti A. All the
p(it/<i-mss. give in b vdndana/toivOy and Vxhi. ii. 56 expressly recognizes this and pre-
scribes the irregular combination to vdmiatte *va; but SPP., on the sole authority of
the commentator, alters his /rf/y/i- text to vdndandoiva / The comm. explains vandand
simply :ifi ldfdvt\esay and refers back to 113. 1 as another instance of the use of the
word ; pataydlus he paraphrases with pdtayitrf ddurgatyakdrinL
3. A hundred and one [are] the signs of a mortal, born from his birth
together with his body ; the worst of these we send forth out from here ;
to us, O Jatavedas, confirm propitious ones.
The Anukr. appears to allow the contraction ^ivd *sm- in d. |_As to " 101,'' see
iii. 11.5 note. J
4. These same have I separated, like kine scattered on a barren (khild) ;
let the good {punyd) signs stay ; those that are evil have I made disappear.
The ///////-mss. read in a endh j probably it is rather end * thus.' The comm. reads
blunderingly at the end anfna^an^ and understands tds as its subject, as if the form were
not causative.* He glosses khiia by vraja. The /^^<2-reading visihUd/i^iva in b is
according to Prat. iv. 77. \\v\ a good pasture, the cows would keep close together; on
a barren, they would naturally scatter. Quite otherwise Pischel, Vcd, S/ud, ii. 205. J
LAp(,\S. iv. 15. 4 may be compared. J LThe Anukr. docs not note that c is catalectic.J
•LAltcrnatively, however, he docs take it as a causative. J
116(121). Against intermittent fever.
[Af/idnuirt/^/ras. — diyrcnm. cdndramasam, t, purosnih ; 2. i-av. i-f. drey amtftithh.']
This and the two following hymns are not found in Paipp. This appears in Kau^.
(32. 17 : Kcc;. adds, with hymn 1 17) in a remedial rite against fever, with aid of a frog
as in hymn 95 ; and it is reckoned (note to 26. i) to the takmand^ana gana.
Translated: Grohmann, Ind, Stud. ix. 386, 414; Zimmer, p. 381 ; Henry, 45, 124;
(irifTith, i. 384 ; IMoomfield, 4, 565. — Cf. also Hloomfield, JAOS. xvii. 175.
I . Homage to the hot, stirring, pushing, bold one ; homage to the cold,
fonncr-desire-performing one.
vii. Il6 IJOOK VII. TIIK ATnARVA-Vi;i>A-SA.MlllTA. 47©
'I lur last cpitlu^t is cxtrenirly obscure ami probahly corrupt ; the cntnm. makes krg'.an
from tlic root irtt, and explains it as "cutting up nr defrrrinK tlie fruition of pre\io*j«
wislu-s"; llrnry says ** iloitiK its will of ol«l." A^aiii SI'T. chanf;es the i<^i/ifir.li«r ti
fivf-sixtlis of liis autlioritics aiul alt of ouis to m^Jttntivtt, because the romm. has the
lattrr. The vrise (g ♦■7:12 — 2.S) is no u^uth exrrpt in ihr sum of syllables.
2. lie that attacks (abhii) fvcry «>tlKT day, on both [intermediate]
days, lot him, hafllcd (avrata), attack this fro^.
The «'i>n)ni. leads ubhiivt'Jyui. The \erse, th(ju;;h really metfical (If -f 12) is treatetl
by the Anukr. as prose (24 sUIables).
117(122). Invitation to Indra.
Wanting; in P.iipp. l/scil by K.'itu;. {y*i. 14). with liynuts .S5 and 86. in a rii^ i^r
welfare: and it is, with 1 |X, rerkoned (noto to 25. 3'») to the STits/v^iyitmt gana , w'r.d-r
a schoi. (note to 137.4) adils it and 118 in the introduction to the tf;yagantra, that
another uses it with 1 1^> was note<l unr!i.-r that hymn. And Viiit. (23.9) repeats it in
the a Iritis flint it witli the o! ferine of tlie /t,}r/v**/ttHftx''*'^*^
Translated: llrnry, 4^1. 125: (iritVith, {.3^4.
I. Como, O Indra, with pleasant peacock-haired bays; let not any hold
thee away, as snarers a bird ; f;o over them as [over] a waste.
The verse is KV. iii. 45. i, found also as .SV. i. 246 el al.. VS. xx. 53, TA. i 12 r
Our (an<i STT's) reading v<7/:/ in b at^rees with all these, but is acainst our mss an! all
but two of SI'T's: thry jc.ive thr word unaccented. KV.VS. in c liavc n/. mhi- h is
plainly the bfttiT trad in;;, inste.nl of ;/.* .S\'. has the coirujitiiin /;/ iywm/ /ji nJ. and
TA., yet worse, ny/z/ifir //; /i,i. L'l'A. h.is at tiie end, coiru]>tIy, titiifitt9ti'n.d /Ji tmi J
118(123). When arming a warrior.
Wanting in iTiipp. I'scd in K.iuc;. fi'V7) in one of the battle ritrs, for lerrifyinc a
hostile army, with armini; a king or kshatriya : for its connection with hymn 1 1 •. lee
under that hymn : and some mss. read it in y). 2^, in a rite against witchcraft tprnbaM\
wriuii^ly. as the ronim. knows no surh use). Vait. has it (34. 12) in the jtif/ra sacrifice.
with arming a king.
Translattd : Henry. 4^'». 125: drilTith, i. 3.^4.
I. I cover thy vitals with armor; let king Soma dress thee over with
the immortal (r/;;///*/) ; let \'aruna make for thee [room] wider than wide;
after thee con«|iiei inj; let the j;nds revel.
The vrrs«' is aU'i KV. vi. 75. |S, found further a«i SV. ii. \22\ VS. xvii. 49. all these
witlwiut v.iii.ition ftmn 'hii text: but TS. (iniv. ^•. 4*) has 7;if rn*i''Ats in a. 4fM/tf«ir
if//;/) in b. :.i//;'.;f fr iitfrt for :;if/ti/,tt te kruttu Limproxing tlic mel»'rj in C. and. (or
d, •. /■ f'v ^n:t m.ui.iutu i/Vr,//;. The tliird pad a has a redundant s\ liable.
'I ill* List nr tfiitli it'nt:,il*t. of r(i h\mns and 32 vfr^es. ends here: and the quoted
.Aiiiikt s.ns [^/f/.'i.ij *t:*y,'tu .\. /,i^,g [^j f . p. 413 rridj. and /.//<» i/:-i)/M'/f<i^<f Mttjfr.
'1 Mil f>f our mss. sum n:i t^r )><ii>k as nf i |S lixmns, others note '■:.!; the numl^er of
I • •
7.i»i;./» i»T d»"' .i'!»i ; niM'.e s.i'. I - ^.
I III I- • ti !•* .i!s(i tin* s«.venl'.'i."nr':i /» ;/ }/':.:Lt
-ACME
100 C A '.V'
^» «'
CHAiVl P^i", • •' "^
^
r_-*
The borrower must return this item on or before
the last date stamped below. If another user
places a recall for this item, the borrower will
be notified of the need for an earlier return.
Non-receipt of overdue notices does not exempt
the borrower from overdue fines.
Harvard College WIdener Library
Cambridge, MA 02138 617-495-2413
Please handle with care.
Thank you for helping to preserve
library collections at Harvard.
\
Live Music Archive
Librivox Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland Museum of Art
Internet Arcade
Console Living Room
Books to Borrow
Open Library
TV News
Understanding 9/11